initial commit of ebook 37728HEADmain

75 files changed, 39340 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/37728-8.txt b/37728-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa72bb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11769 @@
+Project Gutenberg's South and South Central Africa, by H. Frances Davidson
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: South and South Central Africa
+       A record of fifteen years' missionary labors among primitive peoples
+
+Author: H. Frances Davidson
+
+Release Date: October 11, 2011 [EBook #37728]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle.]
+
+
+
+
+    SOUTH AND SOUTH
+    CENTRAL AFRICA
+
+    A RECORD OF FIFTEEN YEARS'
+    MISSIONARY LABORS AMONG
+    PRIMITIVE PEOPLES
+
+
+    BY
+    H. FRANCES DAVIDSON
+
+
+    (WITH PHOTOGRAPHS BY THE MISSIONARIES)
+
+
+    PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR BY
+    BRETHREN PUBLISHING HOUSE
+    ELGIN, ILL.
+    1915
+
+
+    Copyrighted by
+    H. FRANCES DAVIDSON
+    1915
+
+           *       *       *       *       *
+
+    Books may be obtained through
+
+    H. R. DAVIDSON
+    AUBURN, IND.
+    Route 3
+
+    or
+
+    M. L. HOFFMAN
+    ABILENE, KANS.
+
+
+    DEDICATED
+    TO
+    MY FATHER'S LIFELONG FRIEND
+    DR. W. O. BAKER
+    And to All Others, Who, Like Him, Are Deeply
+    Interested in the Evangelization of the
+    Dark Continent
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+With utmost confidence and pleasure, I give an introductory expression
+for this intelligible, authentic, and most valuable little volume, the
+product of great sacrifice and long experience, by one who was favored
+and honored with lucrative educational positions, being a classic.
+
+I have been acquainted with the authoress for many years, and am a
+member of the Foreign Missionary Board under whose auspices she has most
+effectually labored during an unbroken period of one and one-half
+decades; therefore I speak with great assurance of the merits and hope
+of her book, destined to be prolific and incentive to active missionary
+operations in foreign lands.
+
+The photo-engravings have special interest, having been taken from real
+life and nature as she found them in dark Africa--places, people,
+environments, customs, habits, and religion, which she saw with her own
+eyes and mind. Having thoroughly mastered various dialects of tribes
+among whom she has labored so many years, having gathered many
+historical facts relative to uncivilized races, and also having special
+tact, instinct and God-given ability through the gift of the Spirit,
+making her very efficient in her call to these dusky tribes, she is
+qualified in a very proficient sense to compile the story of this
+strange people.
+
+On meeting Sister H. Frances Davidson, one is quickly impressed with her
+modest and unassuming disposition, the rare gift that characterizes all
+the truly noble and great.
+
+Her heroism and unfaltering faith in Jehovah is most remarkably
+demonstrated in her adventure--accompanied by Sister Adda Engle (Taylor)
+and a native boy--into the wilds of Central Africa, unfrequented by the
+tread or touch of any Gospel missioner, among a class of raw natives
+that were very shy, rather hostile, and of another tongue, and a country
+infested with wild, vicious animals.
+
+When the planning of this adventurous trip was heard by the Foreign
+Missionary Board, steps were taken to discourage it, on the ground that
+no white man was available to accompany them to the new prospective
+mission field; but before the Board's protest could be made effective,
+the dangerous journey was heroically and successfully executed and a new
+mission station planted north of the great Zambezi, which is the
+northern boundary of South Africa.
+
+Such an adventure would almost challenge the courage of the bravest man.
+It must have been the leadings of the Lord--the inspiration of the Holy
+Spirit.
+
+We all love to read the truthful words that drop from the pen of such
+fearless, devoted, and consecrated souls.
+
+The book is written in a clear, graphic, and condensed manner, just the
+thing for this busy, rushing generation.
+
+We bespeak for it a precious harvest of lasting fruitage.
+
+Yours in the hope of the Gospel,
+
+                                                J. R. ZOOK,
+
+                            Chairman of the Missionary Board
+                         of the Brethren in Christ's Church.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+
+Africa holds a unique place in the world today. In no other continent is
+there such a world-wide interest and such a variety of interests
+centered; the religious, the political, and the commercial world are
+alike concerned in its development and progress. It has been a sealed
+book for so many centuries that the majority of people have excused
+themselves on that score for their ignorance of its conditions and their
+indifference as to its welfare; but the day of pardonable ignorance is
+past.
+
+While kings and emperors have been eagerly seeking to obtain as large a
+slice of its territory as possible, and moneyed men have been unearthing
+some of its vast wealth, missionaries, too, have been having a share in
+it. In the development of Africa they may, without boasting, claim to be
+making the most permanent contribution to its welfare, but even their
+work is only begun. The various interests, which for a long time were
+concerned with only the countries along the coast, have now penetrated
+and opened up that vast interior to civilization and missionary
+enterprise; and it remains for the Christians to say whether it shall be
+left to the influences of a corrupt civilization or whether they will
+shoulder their responsibilities and rise to their privileges in taking
+the country for God.
+
+Many missionary bodies are already at work, and much is being
+accomplished; but the continent is so gigantic, the distances to be
+traversed so immense that it will require the united efforts of all
+God's children to pay the debt humanity owes to this long-neglected
+continent and those downtrodden pagans.
+
+It has been my aim in these pages to give, without embellishment, some
+idea of the nature of the Africans, their character, customs, religion,
+and surroundings, as well as some of the difficulties, methods,
+encouragements, and discouragements of missionary work among them.
+Missionaries are often censured for being too optimistic, for giving
+only the bright side of their work, therefore I have studiously sought
+to avoid this attitude and to give an unvarnished account of missionary
+enterprise. Judging from my own convictions and beliefs in reference to
+the work, it seems to me that if I have erred in this respect, it has
+been by understating rather than overstating the value and encouraging
+results arising from such labors.
+
+This book does not claim to be a complete history of the Brethren in
+Christ's Missions in Africa, but rather some of the experiences of one
+member of that mission body. Since, however, it has been my privilege to
+be with the work from its inception, the enclosed narrative will have
+the added value of giving at least something of the beginning and early
+history of the mission. My only apology for recounting so much of my
+personal experience and impressions in the work is that I am unable to
+give, properly, the experience and viewpoint of anyone else.
+
+We desire to express our thanks to Mrs. Myron Taylor, formerly Miss Adda
+Engle, for the majority of the photographs with which this work is
+illustrated; also to Elder Steigerwald and the other missionaries who
+have furnished a number of them. We had hoped to have some later ones
+from Matopo and Mtshabezi Missions, but have failed in securing good
+ones.
+
+If this little volume in some small degree arouses a greater interest
+among Christians in the evangelization of the Dark Continent, and is a
+means in God's hands of getting the light to a few more of the vast
+millions of pagan Africans, I shall feel more than repaid for sending it
+on its mission.
+
+                                               H. FRANCES DAVIDSON.
+
+    Auburn, Ind.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+    PART I
+
+    Matopo Mission
+
+    CHAPTER I.
+
+    Early Missionary Labors--Origin of Foreign Missionary
+    Work, 1894--After Two Years--An Appeal--My
+    Call--First Missionaries--Preparing to Sail,
+    1897,                                                     19
+
+    CHAPTER II.
+
+    On the Deep--England--Bound for Cape Town--Matabeleland
+    Chosen--Landing at Cape Town,                             29
+
+    CHAPTER III.
+
+    Cape Town--Elder Engle's Interview with Mr. Rhodes--Zulu
+    Language--Mrs. Lewis' Kindness--Journey
+    to Bulawayo,                                              38
+
+    CHAPTER IV.
+
+    Matabeleland--Wars with the Natives--Hide in the
+    Matopo Hills--Bulawayo--Selection of a Mission
+    Site,                                                     45
+
+    CHAPTER V.
+
+    Trekking to the Hills, 1898--Chief and His People--First
+    View of the Mission Site--Building Huts--Misunderstandings
+    with the Natives--Missionaries
+    Working,                                                  53
+
+    CHAPTER VI.
+
+    Opening of School--Its Equipments and Work--Sunday
+    Services--Learning the
+    Language--Kraal-visiting--Matshuba--Sunday-school,        66
+
+    CHAPTER VII.
+
+    Reinforcements and Supplies--Mr. and Mrs. Cress, Mr.
+    I. O. Lehman, 1899--Clothing for the People--Building--
+    Old Queen--First Baptisms--Boer War,                      83
+
+    CHAPTER VIII.
+
+    The Cresses Open Mission Station--Sickness and Death
+    of Sister Cress and Elder Engle, 1900--Sickness
+    and Seventh Day Adventist Doctor--Wedding--Brother
+    Cress and Sister Engle Return to America,
+    1900,                                                     96
+
+    CHAPTER IX.
+
+    Resuming the Work--Boys' Confession--Hluganisa and
+    School--Kraal-visiting--Locusts--Ndhlalambi--Sickness
+    of the Lehmans--Trouble in Reference to
+    Mission Farm,                                            107
+
+    CHAPTER X.
+
+    Mr. L. Doner and Miss Emma Long Arrive, 1901--The
+    Lehmans Go to Cape Town--Industrial Work--Elder
+    and Mrs. Steigerwald Arrive, 1901--Building
+    House on a Mission Station--Training Natives--School
+    Work,                                                    126
+
+    CHAPTER XI.
+
+    Death of Mr. Rhodes, 1903--Of Fusi--Furlough and
+    South Africa--The Compound's Missions--Native
+    Bee--Appearance of Congregation,                         140
+
+    CHAPTER XII.
+
+    First View of Mapani Land--Medical Work--Reminded
+    of Call to Interior--Return to America, 1904--Miss
+    Sallie Kreider, 1904--Opening of Mapani Mission
+    and Sister Doner's Death, 1904--Return to
+    Africa with Mr. and Mrs. Frey and Misses Adda
+    Engle and Abbie Bert, 1905--Mtshabezi Mission,
+    1906,                                                    155
+
+    CHAPTER XIII.
+
+    Religion of Matabele--Ideas of God--Umlimo Oracle--
+    Rainmaker--Witchcraft--Transmigration
+    of Souls--Spiritualism,                                  173
+
+    CHAPTER XIV.
+
+    Customs--Putting Children to Death--Betrothal and
+    Marriage--Native Kraal--Polygamy--Food and
+    Beer--King Khama--Visits--Generosity and Politeness--
+    Death and Burial--Grave of King Mzilikazi,               191
+
+    CHAPTER XV.
+
+    Visit to Matopo, 1910--Improvements--Brother and
+    Sister Doner--Mapani--Mtshabezi--Visit in 1913--
+    Bulawayo and Vicinity--Changes at Matopo--Aiding
+    the People--Love Feast at Mtshabezi--What Hath God
+    Wrought?                                                  212
+
+
+    PART II
+
+    Macha Mission
+
+    CHAPTER I.
+
+    Early Missionary Labors--Railroad Building--Starting
+    for the Zambezi, 1906--Victoria Falls--David
+    Livingstone--Barotseland and Other Missions,             237
+
+    CHAPTER II.
+
+    Preparing to Advance--Broken Wagon--Journey to
+    Kalomo--Interviewing Officials--Difficulties in the
+    Way--Permission to Proceed--Macha,                       252
+
+    CHAPTER III.
+
+    Why Selected--Living on the Veldt--First Huts--Spiritual
+    Duties--Learning an Unwritten Language--First
+    Christmas,                                               263
+
+    CHAPTER IV.
+
+    Trying to Begin School--Chief Brings His Son--Industrial
+    Work--School Books--Wild Animals--Threatened
+    Uprising--Mr. M. Taylor Arrives, 1907--White
+    Ants--Visit to Nanzela,                                  277
+
+    CHAPTER V.
+
+    Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger Arrive, 1908--Need of
+    Good Houses--Making Brick--Tsetse Fly--Brother
+    Taylor's Encounter with Lions,                            295
+
+    CHAPTER VI.
+
+    School Work--English--Evangelistic Work--Brother
+    Taylor Among the Baila--Building a House--Elder
+    Steigerwald and Brother Doner Go North--Visit
+    of Elders J. N. Engle and J. Sheets--Marriage--First
+    Baptism,                                                 306
+
+    CHAPTER VII.
+
+    Furlough--Encounter with Elephant--Misses E. Engle
+    and Mary Heisey Visit Macha--Preparing the New
+    Testament--Out-schools--Murder of Chief--Taylors
+    or Furlough--Death of Semani,                            323
+
+    CHAPTER VIII.
+
+    Baby Ruth--Building Church--Training Natives--The
+    Year's Work--Brother Taylor Itinerating--Elder
+    Steigerwald's Visit,                                     343
+
+    CHAPTER IX.
+
+    New Books--Native Problems--Studying the Native
+    Character--Child Life--Natives Resourceful--Dark
+    Side of Native Character,                                355
+
+    CHAPTER X.
+
+    Are They Lazy?--Three Natives--Home Training--Charlie--
+    Are They Provident?--Naturalists--Attitude Toward
+    Whites--Generosity of Some--Kraal-visiting,              372
+
+    CHAPTER XI.
+
+    Ideas of God--Native Prophetesses--Rainmakers--Death
+    and Burial--Digging a Grave--Sacrifice of
+    Animals--Beer-wailings--Evil Spirits,                    387
+
+    CHAPTER XII.
+
+    Tribal Mark--Decorating the Body--Kinship--Betrothal
+    and Marriage--The Bride--Hindrances to Mission
+    Work--Compared to the Matabele--Salutations,             402
+
+    CHAPTER XIII.
+
+    Ruth's Sickness--Medical Work--A Visit Among the
+    People--Remember the Aged--David Goes to School--Taylors
+    Go to America, 1913--Wenger's Return--Outpouring
+    of the Spirit--Miss E. Engle and Mr.
+    L. B. Steckley Come to Macha--First Women Baptized,      418
+
+    CHAPTER XIV.
+
+    Two Objects Paramount--Need of Native Evangelists--Visit
+    to Out-schools--Mianda--Impongo--Kabanzi--Kabwe--Myeki--
+    Chilumbwe,                                               440
+
+    CHAPTER XV.
+
+    Lehmans' Work--Eysters' Work--Doners Open New
+    Station--Present Status--Are the People Eager to
+    Hear?--What It Means to Be a Missionary--Qualifications--
+    Difficulties--God Is Able,                               466
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+    H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle,          Frontispiece
+
+    Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise at
+      Matopo,                                                 58
+
+    Matopo Mission, March, 1899,                              63
+
+    Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse
+      Engle,                                                  87
+
+    Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness,                91
+
+    Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission,            99
+
+    Matopo Cemetery,                                         103
+
+    Matopo Mission House. Front View,                        131
+
+    "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes,"             149
+
+    Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder Steigerwald in
+      1905,                                                  159
+
+    Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill
+      Beyond,                                                161
+
+    In the Matopo Hills,                                     163
+
+    Mapani Mission, 1907,                                    168
+
+    Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church. Matopo M. Hospital,   170
+
+    Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo,                 171
+
+    Matabele Kraal, Near Matopo Mission,                     196
+
+    Matabele Women Stamping Grain,                           201
+
+    Matabele Women Digging,                                  207
+
+    Building the Boys' House at Matopo, M. S.,               215
+
+    Boys' Brick House at Matopo Mission,                     215
+
+    A Native Christian's Home. Matshuba's,                   217
+
+    Mtshabezi Church and School,                             221
+
+    Mtshabezi Mission in 1910,                               221
+
+    Mtshabezi. Baptismal Scene,                              224
+
+    Girls at Mtshabezi Mission,                              230
+
+    Victoria Falls Bridge,                                   241
+
+    Main View of Victoria Falls, 1-1/4 Miles Wide,           246
+
+    Macha Mission Huts, 1907,                                281
+
+    Macha Boys and Schoolhouse,                              287
+
+    The Last Invitation,                                     291
+
+    Making Brick at Macha,                                   302
+
+    Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers,                302
+
+    Macha Mission Dwelling House,                            307
+
+    Elder Steigerwald and Mr. Doner on Their Trip North
+      of Macha,                                              313
+
+    Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout,             315
+
+    Batonga Chiefs and Headmen,                              317
+
+    First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native Congregation
+      Not Visible,                                           319
+
+    Wedding Dinner at Macha,                                 320
+
+    The Elephant That Derailed the Train,                    325
+
+    Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910,                    327
+
+    Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill,                   330
+
+    Simeoba's Village, Viewing the Strangers,                334
+
+    Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the
+      Matopo Hills,                                          337
+
+    The Battle Palm,                                         340
+
+    Macha Mission Church and Boys' House,                    347
+
+    Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the
+      Midst,                                                 351
+
+    Little Nurses. Mianda Village,                           359
+
+    Batonga Fisher Women,                                    364
+
+    Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground,  404
+
+    Cattle Pen of the Batonga,                               406
+
+    A Batonga Family Traveling,                              408
+
+    Native Women--Widows,                                    410
+
+    Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife,                       412
+
+    Giving the Gospel in Macha Village,                      414
+
+    Macha Mission, 1913,                                     419
+
+    Ruth Taylor,                                             423
+
+    First Christian Marriages at Macha,                      426
+
+    David Moyo and His Wife and Child,                       429
+
+    Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit
+      to Macha,                                              431
+
+    Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission,                      435
+
+    School at Kabanzi Village,                               446
+
+    Sikaluwa,                                                456
+
+    Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg,   469
+
+    Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family,                 474
+
+    Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster,      479
+
+
+
+    PART ONE
+
+    MATOPO MISSION
+
+    "Go ye therefore and teach all nations"
+
+                         --Matt. 28: 19
+
+
+
+
+SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE
+
+The Beginning of Missionary Effort
+
+
+It was at the General Conference held in May, 1894, that the Foreign
+Missionary Work of the Church of the Brethren in Christ originated.
+
+Previous to that time the old fathers of the church had made many
+missionary journeys through the United States and Canada for the
+advancement of Christ's Kingdom and in the interests of the faith they
+so dearly loved. These journeys were made without remuneration and often
+with great discomfort and sacrifice of time and money. The precept that
+the Gospel was free, "without money and without price," seemed so
+instilled into their hearts that some of them, no doubt, would have felt
+pained for people to think that they expected money for their services.
+So while the laity were busy with their own temporal duties, these
+heralds of the Cross would often leave their little farms in care of
+their wives and of help, hired at their own expense, and devote weeks
+and months to evangelistic work, expecting what? Nothing but their food
+and sometimes sufficient to pay their car fare, if they went by train.
+But it often happened in those early days that the entire expense of
+whatever sort was borne by themselves. They looked for no reward on
+earth save the consciousness that they were about their Master's
+business and seeking to extend His Kingdom on earth.
+
+Much honor is due those old soldiers for their self-sacrificing labors.
+In that Great Day when the books are opened, perhaps the record of their
+labors may astonish some of us who sometimes criticise them for their
+slowness in launching the foreign missionary work of the Church.
+
+Among them were some who were greatly burdened for the heathen. Some
+felt this lack of Church activity so keenly that they almost severed
+their connections with it on this account. Others saw the need, but,
+realizing the smallness of membership and the limited resources, thought
+the Church was too weak to launch out into foreign missionary
+enterprise.
+
+In the meantime individual members were agitating the question, and some
+were planning to go independently to India and to Central America, while
+others were contemplating going under other Mission Boards.
+
+While this agitation was going on, the question of foreign mission work
+was brought forward at the General Conference in May, 1894, held in the
+Bethel Church, Kansas. On Friday, the last day of the Conference, a
+paper on the subject was read by Mrs. Rhoda Lee, but no active steps
+were taken and the question was tabled indefinitely, to the great
+disappointment of some present. Later, on the same day, Elder J. E.
+Stauffer arose, and, placing a five-dollar bill on the table, stated
+that it was for foreign mission work, then sat down. This action
+brought matters to a crisis. Here was missionary money and something
+must be done with it.
+
+After consultation it was decided that the donor be appointed Foreign
+Missionary Treasurer, and any desiring to donate should give their
+offerings to him; and that, as soon as sufficient money was in the
+treasury to justify the measure, active steps would be taken toward
+sending out missionaries. By the close of the day thirty-five dollars
+had been placed in the hands of the Treasurer. The funds increased
+slowly but steadily.
+
+At the Conference of 1895 held in Ontario, "A Foreign Mission Board,
+consisting of Brethren Peter Steckly, B. T. Hoover, and J. E. Stauffer,
+was appointed to hold office for five years, subject, however, to the
+advice and control of General Council." At the next meeting of
+Conference in 1896 in Pennsylvania, "The Treasurer of the Foreign
+Mission Fund, J. E. Stauffer, submitted his report, and he was
+congratulated for his successful effort. The amount in the treasury is
+$419.60." This amount had been donated in two years. These data have
+been given that it may be seen how the work has grown.
+
+At this meeting it was decided that the funds had increased sufficiently
+to take an advanced step. The Board was increased to twelve members with
+an operating board of three. Of this Elder Samuel Zook was appointed
+treasurer, Elder Henry Davidson, chairman, and Elder Jesse Engle,
+secretary. The Board was empowered to secure volunteers for starting a
+work among the heathen in some foreign country, no particular country
+being designated.
+
+Of the General Board of twelve members, Brethren Peter Steckley, J. R.
+Zook, and Peter Climenhage are still on the Board after a lapse of
+eighteen years.
+
+Just what was done in the interim I cannot say, but on January 15, 1897,
+there appeared in the _Evangelical Visitor_ the following:
+
+     AN APPEAL
+
+     We would call attention to the fact that the committee appointed at
+     last Conference is ready to act on the foreign mission work, but up
+     to this time they have received no applications. Why is it? Does
+     the Lord not speak to some hearts? Or is it because the Church is
+     not praying the Lord of the harvest to send laborers into His
+     harvest?
+
+     The field is white. The harvest is ready. Who will go forth in the
+     name of the Master, filled with the Holy Ghost, ready to lay his or
+     her life down for the cause of Christ's salvation to the heathen?
+     It means something to be a foreign missionary. It means a full
+     sacrifice of home, friends and self--a perfect cutting loose. But,
+     praise the Lord! when it is done for Christ's sake and the
+     Gospel's, we shall receive an hundredfold in this life and eternal
+     life in the world to come.
+
+     The Lord has provided money--somebody was willing to give it, but
+     who will give himself? I believe the Lord has spoken to your heart.
+     Just say, "Lord, speak, thy servant heareth." And if the Lord tells
+     you to go, don't do as Jonah--try to get away from the Lord---for
+     as Jonah did not fare well, neither will you. But if you obey God,
+     He will go with you into the ship. We are ready and waiting to
+     receive applications, but somebody must be willing to obey God or
+     the work will be delayed while souls are perishing.
+
+     If the Lord lays it upon your heart to give because you can not go
+     yourself, please send your donations to Elder
+     Jesse Engle, Donegal, Kansas, as he is the committee's secretary
+     and will keep a correct account of all money received and hand it
+     over to the treasurer. The committee has not decided yet where the
+     field shall be, but will decide when such workers present
+     themselves as are believed to be called of God. South Africa has
+     been spoken of; also South or Central America. No doubt God will
+     direct when the time comes that somebody is willing to go. Who
+     shall it be?
+
+                                                       SAMUEL ZOOK.
+
+At that time I was teaching in McPherson College, Kansas, and was
+greatly enjoying the work. It was my seventh year at that place, and
+just the day before the article had appeared I had entered into a verbal
+agreement with the other members of the faculty to remain for some
+years, the Lord willing. No thought of the foreign field had entered my
+mind previous to this, except a readiness for whatever the Lord had for
+me to do. Up to that time I verily thought I was doing His will by being
+in the classroom.
+
+The day that "The Appeal" appeared in the _Visitor_, it was read like
+the other matter and nothing further was thought of it; but the day
+following the Lord came to me, as it were, in the midst of the class
+work, in the midst of other plans for the future, and swept away my
+books, reserving only the Bible. In reality He showed me Christ lifted
+up for a lost world. He filled me with an unutterable love for every
+soul who had not heard of Him, and with a passionate longing to go to
+worst parts of the earth, away from civilization, away from other
+mission bodies, and spend the rest of my life in telling the story of
+the Cross.
+
+We prefer not to dwell too minutely on the feelings of that sacred hour.
+Sufficient to say that there and then He anointed me for service among
+the heathen. Not that I have measured up to all that He placed before me
+on that day. On the contrary I have fallen far short; but the
+consciousness of that call has ever been with me, and has strengthened
+and kept me, in the thickest of the fight in heathen lands. Even when
+the battle was sore and defeat stared me in the face, the conviction
+that it was His appointment and His work for me kept me fast.
+
+My first step was to go to my colleagues and ask to be released from the
+agreement into which I had entered with them. They were as much
+surprised at the turn affairs had taken as I had been, but readily
+agreed not to stand in the way of the Lord's call. A letter was then
+sent to the Mission Board, informing them of the call to service and my
+readiness to go and at once if they deemed it advisable to send me.
+
+Much had been said about missionary work and many had seemed eager to
+go, so that I somewhat tremblingly awaited the result, feeling that they
+might not consider me fitted. At the same time a private letter was
+dispatched to my father, who was Chairman of the Board, telling him of
+my convictions and call. A letter came first from dear father. He had
+been quite unprepared for the news contained in my letter, and his
+answer can best be summed up in two of his sentences: "How can I say
+yes? and how dare I say no?" He closed the letter by advising me to wait
+a year or two until others were ready to go. The official letter from
+the Board through the Secretary, Elder Jesse Engle, stated that I was
+the only applicant so far and had been accepted, but that there would be
+time to finish the year's teaching. It was quite a surprise and
+disappointment to me to learn that there were still no other applicants,
+but not long afterwards word came that Elder Jesse Engle and wife were
+likewise seriously considering the question.
+
+He, as many of my readers know, had realized a call to give the Gospel
+to the heathen while he was still a young man, but probably from lack of
+encouragement and from other seemingly insurmountable obstacles had not
+obeyed. Now, at the advanced age of fifty-nine years, he still felt that
+his work was not done; and he was ready to enter the field, if his way
+opened, even though it might appear to be at the eleventh hour. And she,
+who had nobly stood by his side for so many years, could still say, "My
+place is beside my husband. Where he goes I too will follow."
+
+In the meantime the question as to the location of this first missionary
+venture was beginning to agitate the minds of some of us. The Board felt
+that the missionaries should be consulted in the matter. The conditions
+then existing in South America were attracting the attention of the
+Christian world. Some countries, notably Equador, were for the first
+time being opened to missionaries. The sore need there appealed to me
+and led to correspondence with others in reference to that field; but no
+one was ready to go there. Later I learned from Brother Engle that he
+was led to Africa, the country of his early call. The location was
+immaterial to me, for my call was to the neediest field, and I soon
+realized that Africa, with its unexplored depths, its superstition and
+degradation, its midnight darkness, was surely in need of the Light of
+Life.
+
+The cheering news soon came that Miss Alice Heise also had applied and
+been accepted as a foreign missionary. That increased the number to
+four.
+
+At the General Conference in May, 1897, at Valley Chapel, Ohio, the
+following report was given and adopted:
+
+     Report of the amount of money in the hands of the Treasurer of
+     Foreign Mission to date, $693.46.
+
+     Four candidates presented themselves for the foreign mission field
+     and have been accepted as follows: Elder Jesse Engle and Sister
+     Elizabeth Engle, his wife, of Donegal, Kansas; Sister H. Frances
+     Davidson, Abilene, Kansas; and Sister Alice Heise, Hamlin, Kansas,
+     and if approved by Conference, it is recommended that they should
+     be ready to start for their field of labor as early as September or
+     October, provided that sufficient means are at hand to pay their
+     passage to their place of destination, which means are to be raised
+     by voluntary contributions as the Lord may direct, and to be sent
+     directly to the address of each of the missionaries.
+
+     The Board recommends that to complete the number of workers there
+     should be one more added to the number in the person of a brother
+     as an assistant to Brother Jesse Engle.
+
+     The Board further recommends that the Conference now in session
+     select some well qualified brother to fill the vacancy occasioned
+     by Brother Jesse Engle on the Foreign Mission Board. Brother W. O.
+     Baker was appointed
+     to fill the vacancy (provided Brother Engle should go); all of
+     which is respectfully submitted.
+
+                                      HENRY DAVIDSON, Chairman.
+                                      SAMUEL ZOOK, Treasurer.
+
+The summer of 1897 passed slowly for some of us who were eager to be on
+the way; but even the days of waiting and visiting were a part of our
+preparation. They were solemn and momentous days also to others besides
+those who were going. Some of the friends felt that we should not go;
+others with tears bade us Godspeed, feeling that we might probably never
+look one another in the face on earth again. In October a little
+farewell meeting was held at Dayton, Ohio, where God's blessing was
+invoked on the work, and here I said good-bye to dear old father,
+realizing that it would likely be for the last time. At Harrisburg,
+Pennsylvania, we were pleased to receive into our number Miss Barbara
+Hershey, of Kansas, who also was called to the work.
+
+The actual moving out of the missionaries was also a great impetus to
+the financial part of the undertaking. During the few months previous to
+sailing $1,500 was given by voluntary contributions into the hands of
+the missionaries themselves, more than half of which was handed to
+Brother and Sister Engle in their extended tour of the Brotherhood. In
+addition to this, $639.70 was during the same time handed to the
+Treasurer, making $1,211.64 in his hands.
+
+On November 21 a general farewell and ordination meeting for all was
+held in the Messiah Home Chapel, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, where the
+five prospective missionaries were set apart for the work of the Lord.
+No brother had volunteered to go along as a helper to Elder Engle. This
+was a solemn time to those going, for a new and untried field was before
+them and a voyage and country of which they as yet knew nothing. And yet
+there was no fear, no anxiety. On the contrary, to some of us the joy of
+having the privilege of being His messengers to those sitting in
+darkness transcended all other emotions, and our journal of that time is
+full of expressions of longing to be in darkest Africa. At that meeting
+Elder Engle delivered a farewell address with power and unction from on
+High, and the rest told of their call. After the ordination of all had
+taken place, we commemorated the death and sufferings of our Savior.
+
+If we may judge from expressions made at the time and since, there were
+others in that large audience that evening to whom the occasion was an
+important and impressive one. The Church was rising to a sense of her
+opportunity and privilege--yes, and duty of carrying out the Great
+Commission. As we went forth, we felt that the prayers of the entire
+Church were bearing us up, and that gave renewed strength and courage
+all along the way. Those prayers buoyed us up as we went forth even into
+the blackness of heathendom; they opened doors that otherwise would have
+been closed; yes, and best of all, they opened dark hearts that the
+light of the glorious Gospel of Christ might penetrate. Those prayers
+yet today are rising as sweet incense in behalf of the Dark Continent.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO
+
+The Voyage and Landing
+
+Now the Lord had said unto Abraham, Get thee out of thy country and from
+thy kindred and from thy father's house, unto a land that I will shew
+thee.--Gen. 12: 1.
+
+
+Seventeen years ago a voyage to Africa was not the common occurrence to
+us plain country folk that it is today. The majority of us had never
+seen the sea, we knew no one who had made the trip, and we knew less
+about the continent of Africa.
+
+It had been decided that we should sail November 24, 1897. While Elder
+and Mrs. Engle were making their tour of the churches, some of us had
+finished visiting and were waiting the time of sailing. So he suggested
+that we secure the tickets. We did so to England, and through an agent,
+Mr. Mills, of England, arranged in advance for tickets from England to
+Cape Town. The tickets were bought, the good-byes were over, and the
+date of sailing found us all at New York Harbor, a little anxious, it is
+true, but eager to launch.
+
+Being inexperienced, we had a little difficulty in having some money
+matters attended to. Sister Hershey and myself had each a draft which we
+desired to have exchanged for one on an English bank, and were told by
+one of the men to take them to the bank on which they were drawn and
+have it attended to there. So we were obliged to go up into the city
+the morning of the date of sailing, when the steamer was to leave at 12
+M. We were gone all morning, only to find on reaching the bank that
+there was no one to identify us, and nothing could be done. Hurrying
+back to the hotel, we secured our hand baggage and hastened to the
+wharf. The rest of the company had already embarked, and only a few
+minutes remained until time of sailing, but we appealed to our agent to
+exchange the drafts for some on an English bank. Although one of the
+other men objected on account of the shortness of time, he promptly
+attended to them, Elders Jacob Engle and John Niesly, who were brothers
+of Brother and Sister Engle and had come to see them off, going
+security. The gangway for passengers had already been removed from the
+steamer and we hurried along that on which baggage was carried. As soon
+as we were aboard, the steamer _Majestic_ began to move; and ere we
+found the rest of our company on board, a narrow stretch of water lay
+between us and our native land.
+
+This, our first voyage across the Atlantic, was a delightful one. The
+sea was unusually calm for that season of the year, so that none of our
+number became sick, except one, as we neared the coast of Ireland. The
+passengers on board were on the whole congenial. As we paced up and down
+the deck, many thoughts crowded in upon us too deep for utterance. What
+did the future have in store for us? What awaited us on the other side?
+The Lord alone, whose messengers we were, could foresee. The great,
+wide, boundless space of water was an ever-increasing source of
+interest and delight, and greatly enlarged our conception of the power
+and majesty of Him "who hath measured the waters in the hollow of His
+hand." We felt in truth that we had let go the shore lines and had
+launched out into the ocean of His love.
+
+The second day out was Thanksgiving Day, and in company with another
+missionary on board we had a very enjoyable service which was attended
+by most of the second-class passengers. Sunday morning there were the
+regulation Church of England services, and later our genial table
+steward asked Elder Engle to preach in the evening. He did so to a
+large, intelligent, and interested congregation. As there had been much
+conjecture among the passengers as to who we were, and what our belief
+was, he embraced the opportunity, while speaking, of setting forth some
+of the tenets of our faith, much to the satisfaction of those present.
+
+On November 31 the steamer reached Liverpool, England, and the first
+part of the voyage was at an end. As we stood on deck gazing at the
+strange scenes around us and at the sea of unfamiliar faces looking up
+into ours, and awaiting our turn to disembark, we realized in truth that
+we were strangers in a strange land. How was our agent to be found on
+that crowded wharf?--but this question was quickly settled. No sooner
+had we stepped off the gangway, than a gentleman approached, and, naming
+us, introduced himself as Mr. Mills, our agent. What a relief it was to
+all of us in our ignorance of foreign travel! We were thus forcibly
+reminded that He was going before and preparing the way so that we need
+have no anxious fear. This thought was further impressed upon our minds
+as we entered our room in the little hotel in Liverpool, for there, on
+the opposite wall, as we opened the door were the words, "The Lord shall
+be thy confidence." Mr. Mills then and there took charge of us and our
+baggage and did not relax his vigilance until we had safely embarked for
+South Africa.
+
+Fortunate it was that our baggage was in such good hands, for part of it
+had been miscarried and reached the steamer at Southampton only about an
+hour before we left that port for South Africa. English travel has many
+things to recommend it, some of which Americans would do well to profit
+by; but one learns to appreciate the excellent system of handling
+baggage in America only after he has had a little experience of the
+slipshod manner in vogue abroad. This fact was again brought to my
+attention on my first furlough to America nearly seven years later. When
+I disembarked at New York, an English lady from the same steamer bought
+a railroad ticket from New York to San Francisco and checked her
+baggage.
+
+I said to her, "Now you need not trouble yourself about your baggage
+until you reach your destination."
+
+"So they tell me," she replied. "It will seem so strange to travel
+without having to look after one's luggage."
+
+One is pleased to note, however, that the increased amount of foreign
+travel of late years has brought about some improvement along this line,
+even in conservative England.
+
+The ride from Liverpool to London was most enjoyable, and would have
+been still more so had there been some one to point out the places of
+interest. The fields, still green at that late date, were well kept; but
+the methods employed in farming seemed somewhat antiquated to people
+fresh from the farms of western America. As the train glided along we
+were favored with a glimpse of a hunting party in their brilliant
+colored costumes in pursuit of the poor little animals on one of the
+game reserves. The small private compartments on the train were a
+pleasing novelty, but there was no one to call off the names of the
+cities through which the train was passing, and the surroundings were
+too new for us to know where to look for the names. Once when the guard
+came to examine our tickets, I inquired the name of the place.
+Concluding from his silence that he had not understood, I ventured to
+repeat the question. The stare he gave made me realize that I had been
+guilty of a breach of something, but what it was is not exactly clear to
+me to this day. We also had a glimpse of London, that great metropolis,
+with its narrow, crowded streets, its rush of business, and its
+perfectly-controlled business traffic. Here our company was met by
+another agent, who conveyed us to Black Wall and placed us on the
+steamer _Pembroke Castle_, of the Union Castle Line, for a three weeks'
+voyage to Cape Town.
+
+The associations on the _Majestic_ had been pleasant and we expected a
+similar experience on this second steamer; but the long voyage to Cape
+Town leaves much to be desired. One may always find some congenial
+spirits, but even under the best circumstances the voyage finally
+becomes tiresome. Only too often the more turbulent element gains the
+upperhand, so that drinking, gambling, dancing, and even grosser evils
+prevail.
+
+After sailing from Southampton one soon leaves behind the cold, chilly
+winds of the temperate climate and begins to enjoy the soft, balmy
+breezes of the subtropical climate. However, as the heat becomes more
+intense, this enjoyment gradually gives place to discomfort. The only
+stop on the way to Cape Town was at Las Palmas, on Canary Island. As we
+approached the place, the low-lying mountain peaks could have been
+mistaken for clouds, but soon the entire island lay before us in all its
+beauty. What appeared at first sight to be bare cliffs were soon seen to
+be clothed with verdure; and while we were feasting our eyes on the
+scene, on one side of the steamer, our attention was called to the
+opposite side where the city of Las Palmas lay. It was indeed a
+magnificent scene and beggars description. The city, which is almost
+entirely white, rises tier after tier up the mountain side, and the
+whole had a dark background of mountain peaks. We were in the bay with
+the island nearly surrounding us. In a short time our steamer was
+encompassed by a number of small boats full of natives, some of whom
+came to sell their wares of fruit or fancywork. Other boats were full of
+diving boys, ready to plunge into the sea for money thrown from the
+steamer into the water.
+
+In a short time the steamer was again on its way; but where was it
+taking the little band of missionaries? and what was to be their final
+destination? Their tickets called for Cape Town, but beyond that the way
+seemed like a sealed book. Africa, with its barbarism, its unknown
+depths, its gross darkness, lay before them; and they were keenly
+conscious of their ignorance of the continent. They had implicit
+confidence, however, in their Great Leader, and believed that they were
+going to a place which the Lord said He would show them. Many prayers
+ascended that they might understand His voice when He spoke to them.
+
+Personally their ideas about the location of the work differed. At first
+Elder Engle felt drawn for various reasons towards the Transvaal (not
+Johannesburg), because that was not so far inland. To one of the party
+the call had been distinctly into the interior and most needy regions
+where Christ had not been named. All, however, were ready to let the
+Lord lead.
+
+A number of the passengers on the steamer were familiar with some parts
+of Africa and gave valuable information. One of the officers, the chief
+engineer, was especially helpful. He brought out his maps and went
+carefully over the ground, showing where missionaries were located and
+where there was need. Ere the party left the steamer, the consensus of
+opinion seemed to be that Rhodesia, or the part of it known as
+Matabeleland, was the Lord's place for them to begin aggressive
+missionary work. This was further confirmed when it was learned that the
+Cape to Cairo Railroad had just been completed as far as Bulawayo, the
+chief town of Matabeleland.
+
+This having been decided upon, the next question was as to how long they
+were to remain at Cape Town before proceeding into the interior. The
+amount of money at their disposal was not large, and as it was the
+Lord's money it was necessary to know His will as to its disposal. They
+soon learned that He was continuing to go before and prepare the way.
+Those were precious days of waiting on Him; for never does His will and
+guidance seem so precious as when He is showing only one step at a time,
+and as one becomes willing to take that, lo! another is revealed just
+beyond. Why then do we so often halt, fearing to walk alone with Him,
+knowing that we cannot stumble as long as we keep hold of His dear hand?
+
+On December 26 the steamer entered beautiful Table Bay, and the long
+voyage was over. Praises ascended to Him Who had given such a prosperous
+journey. It was Sunday when land was reached and the passengers were
+allowed to remain on board the steamer until Monday if they so desired.
+All of us attended divine services on land Sunday morning, and in the
+afternoon Brother and Sister Engle went to the Y. W. C. A. Building
+where the Secretary, Miss Reed, offered to help them look for rooms.
+
+They accordingly went on Monday morning, the rest of us remaining with
+the boxes and in prayer. They at first were unsuccessful in securing
+rooms, but after again looking to the Lord for guidance, Miss Reed was
+impressed to take them to a Mrs. Lewis (nee Shriner), a prominent
+temperance and reform worker of Cape Town, and a most devoted
+Christian. This lady was a friend in need to many of God's children. She
+had lately rented a large building in connection with her work; but the
+venture had not been as successful as she had hoped, and she was in
+prayer about the matter, pleading that the place might be made a
+blessing to some one. Even as she prayed, three persons stood at her
+door desiring to speak with her. These were Miss Reed and Elder and Mrs.
+Engle, whom the Lord had directed thither. As soon as she heard their
+errand, she felt that here was an answer to her prayer. Arrangements
+were immediately made by which they were to receive three
+plainly-furnished rooms for a sum which was very moderate indeed for
+Cape Town. She said she would prefer to give the rooms gratis if she
+were in a position financially to do so. Together they fell on their
+knees and thanked the Lord for answered prayer which meant so much to
+all concerned. When Elder Engle returned to the waiting ones their
+hearts, too, leaped for joy at the good news. They thought it was almost
+too good to be true, that so soon rooms had been secured, and that they
+were to have a little home of their own without the expenses of a hotel.
+Truly, "He is able to do exceeding abundantly all that we ask or think."
+Boxes were soon transferred to the new home and our feet planted firmly
+on African soil.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE
+
+Preparation and Progress
+
+
+We were here on the threshold of Africa, eager to move out. We realized,
+however, how meager was our knowledge of this vast continent and its
+needs, so it was necessary to go slow and gain all possible information
+from this vantage ground.
+
+Cape Town is the oldest of South African cities and is the largest
+seaport town, having a population of about 80,000 inhabitants. The long,
+tiresome sea voyage being over, the sight of this picturesque city,
+nestling so cozily at the foot of Table Mountain, is one long to be
+remembered. The mountain rises abruptly 3,850 feet in the background of
+the city. Its majestic flat top is two miles long, and when the weather
+is clear, it stands sharply outlined against the blue sky. Frequently,
+however, a white cloud, known as the "Table Cloth," comes up from the
+sea from the back of the mountain and rolls down over the face, a sign
+that a change of weather is imminent. It has been said, "The glory of
+Table Bay is Table Mountain," and "The glory of Table Mountain is the
+Table Cloth." Bay, town, and mountain combine to make the picture
+beautiful and unique of its kind.
+
+Cape Town was laid out by the Dutch, and the substantial,
+antiquated-looking houses in the older parts of the city bear ample
+testimony to this fact. There are also many fine, modernly-built houses.
+The place is supplied with all the latest improvements, which are a
+necessary part of a modern city. The population is most varied. Dutch,
+English, Hottentots, Malays, and Kafirs abound. The scenes on some of
+the streets at that time, especially in the evenings and on holidays,
+were most varied and picturesque. There were to be seen Europeans in
+civilian dress, others in soldier's uniform, Malays in their turbans and
+bright, flowing robes, well-dressed blacks, and the raw native African
+with only a gunny sack to cover him, for clothed he must be before he
+can enter the city.
+
+Mr. and Mrs. Lewis, together with other Christian people whom we met at
+Cape Town, thought Matabeleland, the chosen field, was a good one,
+especially the Matopo Hills, as there were no missionaries in that
+locality. The late Cecil Rhodes, who was still powerful in Rhodesia, was
+at that time living on his estate, Groot Schuur, near Cape Town, and
+Bishop Engle was advised to go to him and endeavor to obtain from him a
+tract of land for a mission site. This was another special season of
+looking to the Lord on the part of the little company, that He might
+overrule it to His glory and to the advancement of His Kingdom. Brother
+Engle was received kindly by the gentleman, and his request was
+favorably considered, especially the suggestion of going to the Matopo
+Hills. He at once gave Brother Engle a letter to the British Charter
+Company, of Rhodesia, with the recommendation that we be given 3,000
+acres of land in the Matopo Hills for a mission station. He added that
+"missionaries are better than policemen and cheaper."
+
+Every forward step only served to confirm us in the decision on the
+steamer that Matabeleland, which is a part of Rhodesia, was the Lord's
+place for opening up His work in Africa. The fact that the railroad had
+just shortly before been completed that far, thus making it easier of
+access; the advice of those on the steamer who were familiar with the
+country; the advice of the spiritually-minded friends met at Cape Town,
+and the encouragement given by him, the "Empire Builder," who perhaps
+more than anyone else had the welfare of the country at heart and whose
+name, Rhodesia, the country bore, together with the conviction of the
+missionaries themselves, all served to set at rest any further question
+as to location that might arise.
+
+Sister Hershey, it is true, was somewhat burdened as to whether Rhodesia
+was the Lord's place for her. While she was seeking to know His will in
+the matter, she received a letter from Mr. and Mrs. Worcester, of
+Johannesburg, inviting her to come and assist in the missionary work at
+the Compounds. She felt at once that this was the Lord's place for her,
+and accepted it as from Him. We were truly sorry to lose so valuable and
+consecrated a colaborer in the work, but felt to bow in submission to
+Him Who knoweth best.
+
+While we were waiting at Cape Town, we learned that the Tebele language
+spoken by the natives in Matopo Hills and vicinity was a dialect of the
+Zulu language. The Bible had been translated into the Zulu, and there
+were grammars and dictionaries to be had, and we at once endeavored to
+procure these so that we might do some studying. Efforts were also made
+to secure a teacher, but the Zulu teacher recommended did not have
+sufficient English to be of any real service to us except in the
+pronunciation of Zulu words, so we were obliged to study on alone and
+consequently made very little progress.
+
+We had arrived at Cape Town in the midst of the summer and dry season.
+Like California, Cape Town and vicinity have rains chiefly in the
+winter, and a most healthful climate the year round. Other parts of
+South Africa, however, have their rainy season in the summer, and in
+some localities, notably Rhodesia and farther inland, the deadly
+malarial fever is especially severe during the rainy season. So we were
+advised to remain at Cape Town until the rains were over in Rhodesia.
+Mr. Lewis was contemplating going north with us to assist Brother Engle
+in opening the work; but before this could be accomplished, both he and
+Mrs. Lewis were summoned north to Bulawayo by a telegram to minister to
+one of their friends there who was very sick.
+
+After reaching Bulawayo they immediately sent a telegram south telling
+us to remain at Cape Town, and under no consideration to venture into
+the interior until the rains were over. As if to emphasize the message,
+both of them, while attending to the sick, were stricken with fever, and
+all were obliged to hasten south as soon as possible. We also came into
+contact with some of the Seventh Day Adventists in Cape Town, and
+through them learned that two of their missionaries in Rhodesia had
+just succumbed to the fever.
+
+From the illness brought on at this time Mr. Lewis never fully
+recovered, and shortly after our departure from Cape Town, we learned,
+much to our sorrow, that he had been carried away by the disease. We
+were often made to feel, as Mrs. Lewis expressed it, that the Lord had
+sent them before us to preserve life. Otherwise we would undoubtedly
+have gone to Bulawayo at an earlier date than we did and would probably
+have had to suffer in consequence. We shall never forget the great
+kindness of these friends during the entire four months of our stay at
+Cape Town. The wise counsel, the spiritual and financial aid which they
+gave, will ever be a green spot in our memory. And not only then, but in
+later years, Mrs. Lewis' home, "The Highlands," and her large heart were
+ever open to our missionaries. As each recruit stepped foot on Africa's
+shores she was the first to welcome him. When any needed rest, her house
+was wide open for any who might choose to come and rest there. When a
+few years ago word came that she had gone to meet her Savior Whom she so
+much loved, we all felt that we had indeed lost a friend that could not
+be replaced.
+
+At last the time came when it was considered safe to move out, Sister
+Hershey to Johannesburg and the rest to Bulawayo. Mrs. Lewis had given
+us a nice large tent, 16 x 16 feet, which could be used as a dwelling
+place while huts were being built, and she had also on her trip north
+met some of the white people of Bulawayo who were ready to assist us.
+Other friends at Cape Town also kindly helped us on the way.
+
+On April 28, 1898, we took the train at Cape Town, bound for Bulawayo,
+1,362 miles inland. We traveled four days and four nights in a
+comfortable coach and reached the place May 2. The same journey formerly
+required six months and longer with an ox team. We passed through only a
+few towns worthy the name; Kimberley, the center of the diamond mines,
+being the principal one. Some of the country through which we passed
+looked like a desert; not a blade of grass to be seen, but the red sand
+is covered with bushes. This is known as the Karroo, and, as rain seldom
+falls on much of this land, one is surprised to see flocks of sheep and
+here and there an ostrich farm. There are many flat-topped mountains and
+hills, at the foot of which one occasionally catches sight of a
+farmhouse with its accompanying sheep pen. A letter sent to America at
+the time adds:
+
+     Parts greatly resemble Kansas prairies, while the last four or five
+     hundred miles of the journey the country looks like old, deserted
+     orchards. We were also introduced to African life in its primitive
+     state, and during the latter part of the journey no white people
+     were visible save the few connected with the railway service, but
+     many native huts were to be seen. Some were made of mud, others
+     formed of poles covered with various-colored cloth, forming a
+     veritable patchwork, while the natives in semi-nude condition came
+     crowding about the car windows, begging for money and food. How my
+     heart bled for these poor souls! Although the railroad was built,
+     ostensibly, for the purpose of developing the commercial and mining
+     interests of the country; yet, as I looked upon those poor natives,
+     I wondered whether the real
+     purpose of it under the Providence of God was not to bring the
+     Gospel to them. Other missionaries are here before us, but I
+     believe we are the first to make use of the new railroad for this
+     purpose.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR
+
+Matabeleland
+
+
+Before proceeding with my story let me introduce to my readers the
+people and the country to which we had come. The Matabele are a branch
+of the Zulu tribe of Southeast Africa. During the reign of the great and
+despotic Zulu King, Tyaka, they revolted under the leadership of
+Mzilikazi, or Moselikatse, and started north through Africa, proving a
+terror to the various tribes along the way and meeting with numerous
+hardships and varying degrees of success. About the year 1836 found them
+in this country, to which they gave the name Matabeleland. This land,
+together with Mashonaland, constitutes what is now known as Southern
+Rhodesia.
+
+Here they established themselves by ruthlessly slaughtering all who
+opposed them, and enslaving the natives already in the country. After
+the death of Mzilikazi, his son, Lobengula, became King. He was more or
+less tyrannical, like his father, and he lived with his sixty wives
+about two miles from what is now known as Bulawayo--the killing
+place--or, as the natives often say, "o Bulawayo," meaning murderer. A
+rock near this place is still pointed out as the place where a number of
+his wives met a violent death.
+
+This King Lobengula ruled his people with a rod of iron. The young men
+were all enlisted in his army and the women and children left to carry
+on the work in the gardens and kraals. Rev. Helm, one of the first
+missionaries in the country, said it was impossible to get hold of the
+young men; and even if the boys did start to school, the King would take
+them for his own use as soon as they were old enough. He, however, never
+molested the missionaries themselves, and probably considered it an
+honor to have a white teacher in the country; but, as Mrs. Helm
+remarked, they were careful not to offend him.
+
+The British Charter Company had obtained some concessions from the King
+in 1889, and, in the next year, Europeans entered the country to
+prospect and mine the gold. It was a foreseen conclusion that there
+would eventually be a conflict between a savage despot, to whom many of
+the white people were obliged to cringe, and a civilized people. The
+inevitable reached a climax in 1893, when war broke out between the King
+and the white people of the country. There were only a few white men in
+the country at that time, but assegais and other native weapons were no
+match for Maxim guns and European tactics. The King's house being burnt,
+he himself fled and eventually died in January, 1894, thus causing the
+war suddenly to come to an end, as there remained no one to keep the
+forces together. The British South African Company took possession and
+began to occupy and build up the country.
+
+The Matabele, however, did not consider themselves conquered, and many
+circumstances conspired to bring about a second conflict. Perhaps the
+chief among these was the fact that all the cattle were regarded as the
+property of the King, although being distributed among the people and
+used by them as their own. However, since the cattle belonged to the
+King, the British Company looked upon them as theirs by right of
+conquest, and proceeded to appropriate some of them. This greatly
+angered the natives, as also the rinderpest, which came later and swept
+off many of the remaining cattle. Then 400 of the subject tribes were
+armed and enlisted as native police; and this was most galling to the
+proud Matabele warriors, that they should be exulted over by their
+former slaves. The disease among their cattle, the locust, which
+devoured their crops, and numerous other troubles were all, by their
+witch doctors, laid at the door of the white man. Umlimo (their god)
+also affirmed that their King was still alive and was ready to assist
+them in gaining their liberty.
+
+This second conflict, known as the Matabele Rebellion of 1896, came very
+suddenly upon the 4,000 white people, scattered in various parts of the
+country. No one seemed to expect danger, although there were several who
+had had a little warning, and many natives who were working in Bulawayo
+were called home by their parents. One boy in speaking of the time said:
+
+"I was working in Bulawayo when my father sent word that I was to come
+home. I did not want to but I was afraid to disobey. I was afraid to
+look at my father, he looked like a mad man. He said, 'We cannot live
+and be oppressed like this. We would rather die than be treated as we
+are!'
+
+"The rest of the people, too, looked just that way!"
+
+The natives rose against the Europeans and suddenly murdered 200 in the
+outlying districts, including a number of women and children. Some of
+these were murdered by their own servants. The rest of the white people
+hastily gathered into the new town of Bulawayo, while soldiers scoured
+the country in search of native troops. A large number of the native
+police had gone over to the enemy, carrying their rifles with them, and
+a number of the natives, both in Matabeleland and Mashonaland, had in
+some way secured several thousand firearms; so that in this war the
+natives were much better prepared.
+
+This rebellion lasted eight months, and the natives were finally driven
+into the Matopo Hills. In these, nature's vast strongholds and caves,
+all efforts of the European soldiers to dislodge them proved unavailing.
+Here finally came Mr. Rhodes, unarmed, into the midst of the enemy's
+camp and made peace with them. The tree under which this famous council
+was held is still pointed out not many miles from where Matopo Mission
+now is. We entered the country a little over a year after the close of
+the rebellion, while all the causes and events were still fresh in the
+minds of the natives. What is still more significant, we were located in
+the very heart of these hills where no missionary had yet penetrated,
+and being surrounded by many of the rebels themselves, we were able to
+glean much of the above history at first hand. When we went among them
+they were still seething with discontent from the same cause which led
+to the Rebellion.
+
+Mr. Rhodes, who had made peace with these natives, was always respected
+and trusted by them, and while he was no religious man himself, he
+thoroughly believed in missionary work among the people. His desire that
+we come to these hills and his statement, that "missionaries are better
+than policemen, and cheaper," was actuated by no mercenary motive. It
+was his conviction, borne out by experience and by long years of contact
+with the Africans, that missionary work and the Christianization of the
+natives was the only solution of the native problems.
+
+But to return to our story, we arrived at Bulawayo late in the evening
+and were taken to the Royal Hotel. This was a good, up-to-date hotel,
+with an up-to-date African price. In the morning, as we looked out of
+the window, the first sight which greeted our eyes was a large African
+wagon drawn by eighteen oxen. Except for this and similar sights we
+could easily have imagined that we were in an American town, for this
+place, with broad streets and thriving business, is said to have been
+patterned somewhat after American cities. My impressions of the town and
+vicinity written at the time were as follows:
+
+     Bulawayo is a modern wonder, an oasis of civilization in the midst
+     of a desert of barbarism and heathendom. It has nearly 3,000
+     inhabitants, and has been built since 1894. Before that time
+     Lobengula, the great Matabele King, held sway about two miles from
+     here at the place where the Government House now stands. This place
+     reminds one of the booming Kansas towns of a few
+     years ago, but it is hundreds of miles from any other civilized
+     place, and is well built of brick and iron, has good stores of all
+     kinds, five churches, public library, electric lights and
+     telephone, not only in town, but also extending to various police
+     forts in the surrounding country, but no public schools. There are
+     comfortable riding cabs, or traps, drawn by horses or mules, but
+     the traffic is carried on by heavy carts or still heavier wagons
+     drawn by a large number of oxen or donkeys. The manual labor is
+     done chiefly by the native boys, the white people considering it
+     beneath their dignity to do anything a native can do.
+
+     The surrounding country is very pretty and level, and one can see an
+     abundance of the "golden sands" mentioned by the poet, and even gold
+     sands are not wanting, but I am sorry to say that the "sunny
+     fountains" rolling down them are very few, especially at this season
+     of the year when there are seven months of drought!
+
+This for Bulawayo in 1898 and first impressions.
+
+We remained at the hotel only two days. Our tent and the other goods had
+not yet arrived, but a gentleman, to whom we had a letter of
+introduction through Mrs. Lewis, most kindly offered the use of his
+house and furniture for two weeks, which offer was gratefully accepted.
+Before the end of that time our tent had arrived, and this being placed
+on a vacant lot furnished ample protection for that season of the year.
+
+Bulawayo, being of such recent growth and being surrounded by pagan
+tribes, would have afforded abundant opportunity for missionary work.
+Daily these raw natives would come to our tent door to sell wood or
+other articles; and we longed to tell them something of a Savior's love,
+had we been able to speak to them. One morning thirteen native women,
+each with a great load of wood on her head, arranged themselves, smiling
+and expectant, before the door of our tent. We could only smile in
+return, that one touch of nature's language which is akin the world
+over. We were thankful that we could do so much, but back of the smile
+was a heavy heart that we could do so little.
+
+During the two months we remained at Bulawayo efforts were made to
+secure a suitable location among the Matopo Hills. Mr. Rhodes' letter
+had been delivered to the government officials, and they generously
+undertook to assist in locating the work. The first place to which they
+took Brother Engle--the one recommended by Mr. Rhodes--was found to have
+been surveyed by a private individual. They then made another selection,
+about thirty miles southeast of Bulawayo, the place now known as Matopo
+Mission, and they agreed to give us here a Mission Reservation of 3,000
+acres. The officials, as well as other Europeans in Bulawayo, rendered
+us much assistance. In addition to these the Seventh Day Adventist
+missionaries also greatly helped us on the way. These had a mission
+station about thirty miles west of Bulawayo, and about fifty miles from
+the place selected for us; and while we were waiting in Bulawayo, they
+kindly took out, at different times, Brother and Sister Engle and Sister
+Heise, for a visit to their station.
+
+The time came for us to move out to our location among the hills, and
+the question of how we should get ourselves and our goods to the place
+was becoming a serious one. Transportation, like everything else in the
+interior of Africa, was exceedingly expensive. In this emergency Mr.
+Anderson, of the Seventh Day Adventist Mission, offered to come that
+long way with his donkey wagon and move us for half the sum required by
+a regular transport driver.
+
+It is difficult for the reader to form any conception of what these
+various expressions of kindness along the way, coming so unexpectedly
+from entire strangers, meant to that little band of missionaries out in
+the heart of Africa. Even as I write these things, after a lapse of
+sixteen years, and live over the events of that time, tears of joy
+unbidden come and my heart wells up in gratitude as I again recall these
+evidences of the wonderful "faithfulness of a faithful God."
+
+We had been ignorant of our destination when we left the American shore,
+and even more ignorant of the cost of living in the interior of Africa;
+so that, by the time supplies had been purchased to take along to the
+hills, the money on hand was about exhausted. We knew not how long a
+time would elapse before a fresh supply could reach us. Knowing, too,
+that the Church had very little experience in foreign missionary work,
+one could not fail at times to be a little anxious. Thanks, however, to
+the wisdom, ability, and promptness displayed by the old fathers who
+formed the Mission Board, and to their support, backed up by the Church;
+as soon as conditions were understood at home means were forthcoming and
+we were never allowed to be in want.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE
+
+The Opening of the Work
+
+We must remember that it was not by interceding for the world in glory
+that Jesus saved it. He gave Himself. Our prayers for the evangelization
+of the world are but a bitter irony so long as we only give of our
+superfluity and draw back before the sacrifice of ourselves.--M.
+Francois Coillard.
+
+
+We heartily echo the words of this sainted missionary to the Barotse,
+but we believe that the thought uppermost in the heart of each of the
+four waiting ones at Bulawayo was not sacrifice but privilege, on that
+July morning, so long ago, when the command to go forward was given. We
+were soon to reach our destination, the place to which we had started
+from New York over seven months previously. An account of this trip
+written at the time reads somewhat as follows:
+
+     We left Bulawayo on the evening of July 4 and traveled three nights
+     and two days before the mission valley was reached. The nights were
+     cool and a bright moon lighted up the way, so that traveling went
+     better at night than during the heat of the day. The wagon was
+     about eighteen feet long, very strong and heavy, and was drawn by
+     eighteen donkeys. These were led by one native boy, while another
+     with a long whip was doing the driving. The load of about three
+     tons was very heavy--too heavy, in fact, for a part of the way.
+     Donkeys can travel only two miles an hour on good roads and on poor
+     roads it sometimes requires two hours to go one mile. Occasionally
+     we stopped from two to four hours to let the donkeys rest and
+     graze.
+
+     During such times we would build fire on the veldt, and cook and eat
+     our food; or, if it were night, we would wrap our blankets about us,
+     take our pillows, and lie down in the shelter of some friendly bush
+     and sleep. Mother Engle usually preferred the shelter of the tent on
+     the back of the wagon, although the place was too much crowded for her
+     to rest comfortably. Since the load was so heavy we spent a great deal
+     of the time walking. We would walk ahead of the wagon for a distance,
+     then sit down and rest until the wagon reached us. Only two of three
+     settlers' houses were visible, and no native kraals, and we were
+     informed that as soon as the white man makes a road, the natives move
+     away from it.
+
+     After twenty miles of travel we came to Fort Usher. At this place
+     there reside an English magistrate and a number of white police. Here
+     we were kindly received and given a native guide for the rest of the
+     journey. We now left the government road and plunged into the hills.
+     The wagon went along another five miles with very little difficulty.
+     Then it mired on going through a swampy place, one side sinking nearly
+     to the hubs of the wheels, and further progress was impossible. All
+     put forth every effort to extricate it but to no avail. What was to be
+     done?
+
+     While we were in this dilemma, the Chief of the natives in this part
+     of the country, Hluganisa by name, with some natives came to meet us
+     and bid us welcome. They gave us a very friendly reception, and then
+     joined in to assist in extricating the wagon, but without success. Mr.
+     Anderson, who could speak the native language, explained to the chief
+     who we were and our object in coming, and he promised to meet us at
+     the mission site the next day, as it was now evening.
+
+     Mr. Anderson then took our party forward a little distance to a dry
+     spot, where we rested during the night. He and his native boys
+     returned to the wagon, and, removing the greater part of the load,
+     carried it beyond the marshy place. The donkeys were then able to pull
+     out the wagon. It is needless to add that Mr. Anderson and his boys
+     were extremely tired after this laborious task and were glad to
+     snatch a little rest. Even under such circumstances they did not
+     indulge long in the much-needed rest, but at an early hour were
+     again ready for the journey. Those of us who had enjoyed a good
+     night's rest were also aroused, and we started on our last trek
+     into the hills. We reached the valley, which is to be our home, on
+     the morning of July 7.
+
+     This valley is surrounded by immense granite hills and boulders, some
+     of which cover hundreds of acres, so that at first sight the rocks
+     seem to constitute the chief part of the country, but a closer
+     inspection showed us to what a beautiful place God had led us for His
+     work. There, spread out before our eyes, was a beautiful rolling
+     valley of rich, dark earth, well supplied with an abundance of fresh
+     water. It was stated that the "sunny fountains" are rare in this part
+     of Africa, and that is true. Here, however, in this beautiful valley,
+     in the heart of Matopo Hills, are sparkling fountains of beautiful
+     water, crystal clear, oozing from under the surface of the rocks, and
+     flowing down the valley. Some contain delicate mosses and pretty water
+     lilies, and surpass the Michigan lakes in transparency.
+
+     In the meantime the Chief had sent word to the headmen of the various
+     kraals to meet us. So, in the morning, obedient to the call of their
+     superior, they came and sat in a semi-circle while their chief
+     addressed them (Mr. Anderson interpreting for our benefit):
+
+     "These are not like other white people."
+
+     The deep-toned voices of the headmen responded in unison, "Yes, my
+     lord."
+
+     He continued, "They have come to teach you and your children and to do
+     you good."
+
+     Again came the response, "Yes, my lord."
+
+     "Now do what you can for them and help them."
+
+     And again the same response was repeated.
+
+     One may imagine how that impressed us. Here we are, far from other
+     white people, among a class of natives who have never been subdued by
+     the English soldiers. They are kept in subjection only by forts of
+     police stationed among the hills, the nearest being ten miles distant.
+     Yet these people recognized us at once as their friends and received
+     us with kindness far above what we dared expect. Our hearts overflow
+     with thankfulness to Him who rules the hearts of men.
+
+The Chief and one or two other natives went with us to look up a
+location on which to pitch the tent and build huts. The tent was finally
+pitched under the shade of a large umkuni tree, Mr. Anderson returned to
+his station, and we were left without an interpreter, and with no
+practical knowledge of mission work. We had, however, a Great Teacher,
+and we were willing to be taught.
+
+Both Matabele and their subject races, known as Amahole, live in the
+Matopo Hills. The majority of them are not black, but a chocolate brown,
+and some have features resembling white people. They are generally
+large, well-formed, and intelligent-looking. They are more or less rude
+in manner, uncouth in appearance, and wear little or no clothing except
+the loin cloth. This in the men usually consists of the skin of small
+animals, and among the women a short skirt of cloth or skins. Over the
+upper part of the body is sometimes thrown a larger piece of cloth.
+
+Among those that gathered about us that first day were some who had been
+quite active in the late rebellion. As we gained their confidence, they
+often pointed out to us the caves where they stored their grain, and
+where they themselves hid during that terrible time. A year of famine
+had followed the war, and some had starved to death. At the time we
+entered upon the work there was a great deal of destitution all about
+us; for some had not yet been able to grow grain, and they had no flocks
+to fall back upon as they usually had in time of grain famine.
+
+Many of the white people in the country and in Bulawayo were continually
+talking about and expecting another uprising. They looked for it to come
+from these Matopo Hill natives, and some sought to warn us not to
+venture into this, the enemy's stronghold. We, however, living among
+them from day to day, saw no cause for fear.
+
+The natives came to see us in large numbers. Sometimes fifty would
+appear in one day and crowd around the door of our tent, desiring to
+have a good view of the newcomers and their belongings. Many of them,
+especially the women and children, had never seen a white person before,
+or at most a white woman. Some three or four families had heard a little
+of Jesus, but the great majority knew absolutely nothing of the Gospel.
+
+Our ignorance, both of the language and the people, led to many
+blunders, both ludicrous and otherwise. The desire to help them and to
+show them that we were their friends caused them often to take advantage
+of our kindness. We soon learned that the African is not so much
+interested in the things that are for the good of his soul as in that
+which ministers to his body and appetite. It was so difficult to know
+just what to do at all times, for they were destitute of nearly
+everything which we considered necessary for comfort. They were
+confirmed beggars, and the more they received the more they wanted. The
+missionary opens his Bible, and reads, "He that hath two coats, let him
+impart to him that hath none; and he that hath meat let him do
+likewise"; he then gets down on his knees and prays that the Lord might
+help the poor souls about him, but he often feels that his prayers do
+not ascend very high. What he needs to do is to get up and answer his
+own prayers.
+
+[Illustration: Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise at
+Matopo.]
+
+When we made a contract with them for work, and told them what pay they
+would receive, they always wanted more than the contract called for when
+the time came to settle. This is characteristic of the native in dealing
+with the white man. He sees that the other has clothing and many
+comforts of which he is deprived, hence concludes that the pockets of
+the white man are full of money. Socialist that he naturally is, he
+thinks that the property should be equally distributed. It never occurs
+to him that his laziness and shiftlessness have much to do with his
+destitution. In fact, that thought does not generally occur to the
+missionary when he goes among the heathen for the first time, unless he
+is with some one who understands the situation.
+
+It is necessary to make the natives understand at times that the
+kindness of even the missionary has a limit. One day I was in the little
+straw shed which served as a kitchen, and was endeavoring to bake bread.
+As usual a number of people were about the door, and one man, taking
+advantage of my kindness, came in and sat down by the stove in front of
+the bake-oven door. He made no effort in the least to move away when I
+tried to look into the oven door. I bore it for some time, not wishing
+to be rude to him, and not knowing how to ask him in a polite way to
+move. Suddenly it dawned upon me that the proper native word was _suka_.
+So I made use of the word and told him to _suka_. He looked up in
+surprise and repeated the word to know if he had correctly understood,
+but he moved. Afterwards, in looking for the word in my dictionary, I
+found that it was a word often in the mouth of the white man when
+addressing a native. It really meant a rough "Get out of this." So the
+look of mild reproach in the eyes of the native was accounted for. Some
+of the softness in the missionary, too, soon wears off as he is obliged
+to deal with the native from day to day. He finds that it is necessary
+to make the native understand their relation one to another as teacher
+and pupil.
+
+Living in a tent during the dry and healthy season is not unpleasant in
+such a climate, except that one suffers from the heat by day and the
+cold by night.
+
+Matopo Mission is located about 20-1/2° south latitude and 29° east
+longitude. It is 5,000 feet above sea level, so that, although it is
+within the tropics, it has a delightful and salubrious climate the
+entire year. From the middle of November to the middle of April is what
+is known as the rainy season. The rest of the year rain seldom falls.
+One cannot live in a tent all the year, but must provide better shelter
+for the rainy season. So hut building occupied the first few months. We
+had no wagon and no oxen, nothing but two little donkeys, which had been
+brought out with us from Bulawayo, and we did not know how to make the
+best use of native help. The poles used in the construction of the huts
+were cut and carried to the place of building by natives.
+
+As the manner of building was quite foreign to an American, Brother
+Engle took occasion to examine other huts, built by Europeans, so that
+he was enabled to build very good ones for the mission. He was alone
+and, to make the work lighter, we women assisted, and used hammer, saw,
+and trowel, brought stones for building chimneys, raked grass, and
+assisted in thatching. The huts are built somewhat as follows:
+
+A trench about fifteen inches deep is dug the size and shape of the
+desired hut. In this are placed, near together, poles from the forest,
+space being allowed for doors and windows and sometimes for fireplace.
+The poles are cut out so as to extend about eight feet above ground.
+Large ones are sawed lengthwise for door posts and window frames. Some
+flexible poles are nailed around the top and about halfway up the side,
+so that the walls of the hut are firmly fastened together. Longer poles
+are then used as rafters, these being firmly fastened to the walls and
+nailed together at the top. Small, flexible ones are also used as lath
+to fasten the rafters together and upon which to tie the grass in
+thatching. The grass used for this purpose grows in abundance among
+these rocks, and sometimes reaches the height of eight feet. The women
+cut this and bring it in bundles, glad to exchange it for a little salt.
+It is first combed by means of spikes driven through a board. It is then
+divided into small bundles; the lower ends being placed evenly together,
+and the bundles tied closely together on the lath with tarred rope. The
+next layer is placed over this like shingles, so as to cover the place
+of tying. When completed the thickness of grass on the eaves of the roof
+is from four to ten inches. Then follows the plastering. The mud or
+plaster is made from earth which had been worked over by white ants.
+This, pounded fine and mixed with water, makes an excellent plaster, and
+when placed on the walls it soon dries and becomes very hard. The native
+women put this on the outside with their hands, as the walls are too
+uneven to allow the use of a trowel. Similar earth, mixed with sand, is
+used as mortar in building with brick and stone. The floors also are of
+this earth pounded hard and polished.
+
+The windows have either small panes of glass or muslin stretched on a
+frame, and the doors boast of imported timber brought from Bulawayo.
+Each hut is about as large as an average-sized room. It is difficult to
+make them larger on account of the scarcity of suitable material in this
+part of the country. The walls are whitewashed on the inside, and some
+have a white muslin ceiling. Much of the furniture is of our own
+manufacture and is made of boxes or of native poles draped with calico.
+
+When completed the rooms looked quite cozy and comfortable, so that we
+felt thankful for such pleasant homes in connection with our work. The
+first year there were four of such huts built, kitchen, dining-hut, and
+two sleeping-rooms.
+
+Dealing with the natives while building these was not always easy.
+Sometimes difficulties arose through not being able to make the natives
+understand, so that we could not always place the blame on them. When
+grass was wanted for the thatching a contract was entered into with one
+of the headmen to furnish one hundred bundles for five shillings
+($1.20). The grass was brought until there was about half the specified
+amount, then the pay was demanded. This was of course refused. The man
+brought a little more and then he stoutly affirmed that he had fulfilled
+his part of the contract. After considerable delay and, being harassed
+by the headman, we finally paid him. After all, he may have been honest
+in the affair and a mistake may have been made in the beginning; for the
+word for _one hundred_ and that for _much_ were similar except in the
+prefix. He may have understood that he was to bring much grass, and he
+certainly did that.
+
+Again, when the first hut was to be plastered, arrangements were made
+with certain women to plaster it for a stated amount. They brought a
+number of others along to help them plaster; and when pay day came, the
+total amount of pay demanded was about double the original agreement.
+There was such a noisy, unpleasant demonstration that day, that we
+learned our lesson, and we were very careful so to arrange matters that
+the difficulty would not occur again.
+
+[Illustration: Matopo Mission--March, 1899.]
+
+Our living at the time was of the simplest. Nearly all kinds of eatables
+could be procured in Bulawayo; but they were very expensive, and there
+was no way of bringing them out except by native carriers, or by
+trusting to the friendly assistance of the white traders at Fort Usher.
+Sometimes it fell to the Elder's lot to walk the thirty miles to
+Bulawayo in order to purchase supplies. There was no need, however, for
+us to do, like many a missionary in the wilds of Africa has done,
+deprive ourselves of wheat bread and ordinary groceries. These we always
+had, but we were more economical in their use than we would have been at
+home. We had no milk, except tinned milk, no butter, and very little
+meat, and no gun to procure game. But we had chicken and could
+occasionally procure meat from the natives. Of course at first there
+were no vegetables to be had, except such as we could at times procure
+from the natives--corn, sweet potatoes, pumpkins, and peanuts, but these
+were scarce.
+
+Elder Engle, alive to the value of the soil and the need of wholesome
+food, at once secured fruit trees and set them out, including a number
+of orange trees. He also bought a small plow and with the two donkeys
+broke land and planted vegetables. One native, who continually stood by
+us during those early days, was Mapipa, our nearest neighbor. He was a
+powerfully-built Matabele and reminded one of the giant of Gath; for he
+had six fingers on each hand and six toes on each foot. He had been
+quite active in the Rebellion and was wounded in one of the battles. He
+could always be depended upon in work, and Brother Engle greatly
+appreciated his assistance.
+
+Perhaps some one who reads these lines may wonder whether building,
+farming, and such manual labor is missionary work. Did not the Great
+Missionary, according to all accounts--I say it in all reverence--take
+an apprenticeship in the carpenter's shop where He "increased in wisdom
+and stature and in favor with God and man"? Did not the Apostle Paul,
+undoubtedly the greatest of His followers, unite tent-making with his
+missionary work? Should then we, such feeble imitations, belittle manual
+labor, even though it falls to our lot as missionaries? Any one going to
+the mission field should not, if he is to be successful, decide in his
+own mind that he is going to do certain things, he should be willing to
+do whatever the Lord gives him to do, of spiritual, intellectual, or
+physical labors.
+
+There are so many sides to missionary work, and who can tell which will
+result in the greatest good? To preach Christ and lift Him up that
+others may see and accept Him is undoubtedly the central thought of the
+Great Commission. The ways of exalting Him, however, are so many and so
+various. Christ must be lived among the people before He can in truth be
+preached to them. The heathen of Africa cannot read the Bible, but they
+can and do continually read the lives of those sent among them. If these
+do not correspond to the Word read and preached among them, they are
+keen to discern and judge accordingly. If the Christ-life is lived
+before their eyes, day by day, many will eventually yield their hearts
+to Him, even though, they may for a time resist.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX
+
+Educational and Evangelistic Work
+
+
+The natives were eager to see inside the new huts. When they had an
+opportunity to look at the whitewashed walls and the homemade furniture,
+they stood spellbound, and the first word that broke from their lips was
+"_Muehle_" (pretty).
+
+They had another and more personal interest in seeing the huts
+completed. They had been told that, as soon as the goods were moved out
+of the tent, school would be opened. Both large and small were
+exceedingly eager to learn, or at least they thought so. They had never
+seen books, and writing was like magic to them. To put down some
+characters on paper and from those to spell out their names when they
+next visited the mission was little less than witchcraft. Both old and
+young like to be known. They are pleased if their missionary pronounces
+their name and seems to know them when they come a second time.
+
+School opened October 11. The first boy to come bright and early was
+Matshuba, together with two of Mapita's girls. This little boy, then
+about thirteen years old, had been a very interested spectator of all
+that occurred from the time the mission opened. Day after day he would
+be on hand, and his bright eyes and active mind took knowledge of
+everything that was said or done. His father, Mpisa, then dead, had
+been one of the most trusted witch doctors of the King, and had been
+held in great respect by all of the natives in that part of the country.
+This boy was very eager for school, and the first morning he and
+Mapita's girls begged us to allow only the Matabele to attend school,
+and not the Amahole, or subject races. This furnished an excellent
+opportunity of teaching them that God is no Respecter of persons.
+
+The first morning of school twelve bright-looking boys and girls entered
+the tent and sat down on the floor, curious to know what school was
+like. It was a momentous time. It was the beginning of a work the result
+of which human eye could not foresee. How the teacher, who had often
+stood before a far larger and more inspiring-looking school in a
+civilized land, trembled as she stood there before those twelve little
+savages in the heart of Africa! She knew that those bright eyes were
+reading her thoughts, and realized that she came so far short of the
+"measure of the stature of the fullness of Christ." The special burden
+of the prayer that morning was that, as these dear souls learned to read
+the Word, the Light might enter their hearts and they yield themselves
+to God.
+
+The second day eight more were enrolled, and the third day fourteen, and
+by the end of the month there were forty in all. Sister Heise and I were
+kept busy during school hours as the pupils were taught to sew as well
+as to read and write. Cleanliness is a rare virtue with them, so they
+were told to wash before coming to school. As new ones entered the
+school the admonition was repeated, with the statement that we wash
+every morning. Mapita's little daughter, Sibongamanzi, with shining
+black face, which showed that she had been heeding the command, looked
+up brightly and said, "Yes, but you are white and we are black." She
+evidently had thought that, if she washed every morning, she too would
+become white, but she had concluded it to be a hopeless task. Mr.
+Anderson said that some of their children thought that if they ate the
+food of white people, they too would become white.
+
+This, our first schoolroom, was very primitive. It consisted of a tent
+16 x 16 feet. In front there was a box which served as a teachers' desk
+and as a receptacle for slates, pencils, paper, books, and sewing. Other
+boxes served for teachers' chairs. There were two easels made of poles;
+one supported the blackboard and the other the charts. The blackboard
+consisted of a few small boards nailed together and painted black, and
+the charts were of cardboard, 18 x 24 inches in size. There were ten of
+them printed on both sides with syllables, and Tebele words and
+sentences. These had been printed by homemade stencils and pen, and had
+occupied our leisure time while we were hut-building. The floor of the
+tent was covered with straw, and the pupils sat on this without seats or
+desks. They knew nothing of the comforts of the schoolroom in civilized
+lands and thought they were well supplied.
+
+Since we had no primer at the time, the Gospel of St. John was given to
+them as a textbook when they had finished the charts. To enable them to
+read and understand the Word of God was the aim of the school work and
+the Bible the Textbook throughout. After they had learned to write the
+letters of the alphabet, their copy usually was a verse from the
+Scriptures. They were also taught to memorize certain portions in
+connection with the daily worship, and hymn singing.
+
+The pupils compare very favorably with white children in their ability
+to learn, but few of them come regularly to school. To most of them
+school is just a side issue, some place to go when there is nothing else
+to be done. Some have an idea that they can learn to read in about a
+month, and when they find that it requires months of weary, patient
+effort at meaningless characters, they give up in despair. Others are
+ridiculed by the older people for throwing away their time at such
+useless work; "There is no money, no beer, no food in it and they are
+dunces to go."
+
+Again, some are grown, and being past the age when mental effort is
+easy, they soon become discouraged. One big fellow stumbled along until
+he had mastered the chart after a fashion. Then, to his delight, he was
+given the Gospel of St. John to read. Day after day he struggled along
+over the, to him, meaningless syllables and words. Still he persevered
+until it gradually dawned upon him that the printed page meant
+something. He looked up one day with a most delighted expression on his
+face and exclaimed, "This book is talking to me!"
+
+The native cannot be said to be very persevering, owing to the fact that
+all his life, in his untaught state, he goes on the principle that the
+world owes him a living. His needs are few and often they are supplied
+by nature. When he comes up against a difficult problem of any sort,
+his usual answer is, "It will not consent." For this reason arithmetic
+is always difficult for him and his progress in it is very slow. One day
+I was endeavoring to show a girl how to make the letter _b_. After a
+vain effort to make it properly, she exclaimed, "My pencil will not
+consent to slide that way."
+
+The sewing hour probably was the most interesting time to all. They
+expected to receive the garments after they had finished sewing them and
+had worked for the cloth with which they were made. The dearest wish of
+their hearts was to have a garment to put on. And that is not strange,
+for in the cool morning air they come shivering, and at noon the hot sun
+burns their bodies. We might have made the garments and donated them;
+but that would not teach them to work and would have done them more harm
+than good. A native always appreciates most that upon which he has
+bestowed labor or money; so both boys and girls learned to sew. It was
+rather amusing to see them, in the absence of other garments to which
+they might pin their sewing, place it between their toes. It was also
+interesting to watch the different expressions when at last the garments
+were finished and they could clothe themselves.
+
+Matshuba put on his suit; then, folding his hands, said in a quiet and
+contented manner, "Now I am not cold any more." Amuzeze, when he had
+finished his garments, put them on, and taking a good look at himself
+stepped off as proudly as if he owned a large estate. Sibongamanzi kept
+her dress for Sunday. At home she would carefully fold it, and putting
+it in an earthen jar cover it up for safe keeping.
+
+In the meantime services on Sunday had not been neglected. At the
+opening of the work none of the missionaries could speak the language,
+but they could read it after a fashion. So, from the very first Sunday
+after the work opened, endeavors were made to instill into the minds of
+the natives that one day out of seven was a day of rest and worship. To
+them all days were alike--workdays, rest days, or carousal days, as they
+chose to spend them. Sad to say that even the few that went to work for
+the white man saw little or no difference between the days of the week.
+It falls to the lot of the missionary to teach the significance of the
+fourth commandment as well as the rest of the decalogue. On Sunday the
+people were invited to assemble under the shade of a friendly tree, and
+a portion of the Scriptures was read to them and hymns sung. They are
+great lovers of music, so that in itself was an attraction. The first
+congregation was very small. Sometimes there would be only Mapita and
+his family, five or six in number. As the nature of the meetings began
+to dawn on the native mind, others would assemble with us, but in the
+first few months, or until the opening of school in October, not more
+than twenty-five congregated at one time.
+
+Acquiring the language is always a tedious, though important, part of
+foreign missionary work. The missionary sees the natives about him, day
+by day, and longs to tell them something of Jesus and His love, but is
+unable to do so, especially if he be a pioneer in the work and without
+an interpreter as we were. We had been endeavoring to study the
+language from the Zulu books on hand, but on coming face to face with
+the natives it was discovered that the set phrases we had acquired
+seemed as unintelligible to them as their words were to us. There were
+several reasons for this. One was that we had not learned the proper
+pronunciation and accent, and another was that their dialect differed
+somewhat from the Zulu, which we had been endeavoring to learn. Another,
+and far weightier reason, and one which, to our sorrow, we did not
+discover until some time afterwards, was that some natives did not speak
+the correct language to us. Those who had been accustomed to speaking to
+the Europeans had invented a jargon of their own, which they seemed to
+think especially adapted to the mental capacity of white people. This
+medium of communication is known as "kitchen Kafir."
+
+It consists of a small vocabulary, chiefly of Zulu words, simplified and
+divested of all inflections--and grammar, it might be said. This
+dialect, which is especially distasteful to linguists, is invariably
+used by many natives in addressing white people for the first time. It
+is the common language of the kitchen and the shops, between master or
+mistress and their native servants. It has also of later years spread
+much among the natives themselves where various tribes meet and
+converse. Its use has become so general over South Africa, and even in
+parts of South Central Africa, that it has, not inaptly, been termed the
+"Esperanto of South Africa." Undoubtedly it lacks much of the elegance
+of the real Esperanto, but is in daily use by more people. Not only is
+"kitchen Kafir" spoken between whites and blacks and between blacks
+themselves, but sometimes, when a common language fails, something akin
+to this is used between even the white people.
+
+Not so many of the natives in the hills had come into contact with
+Europeans before our coming among them, yet there was sufficient
+"kitchen Kafir" among them to confuse the newcomers and make it
+necessary in after years to unlearn many of the things they first
+acquired.
+
+Learning the language is trying, especially without a teacher, and many
+blunders and misunderstands occur; but it is not the least useful of
+missionary experiences. People on first coming into contact with raw
+heathendom are seldom capable of doing much preaching to them in such a
+manner that the native can understand and appreciate.
+
+While one is learning the language, he is also learning to know the
+native himself, his surroundings, and modes of thought. By the time one
+is able to converse with the native, he also knows better what to say to
+him. One thing, however, it is always safe to do from the time the
+missionary enters the field of labor; he may always read the Word, if he
+has it in the language. The unadorned Word is always safe and suits all
+conditions of men.
+
+Gradually we learned to speak the language, sentence by sentence. How
+our hearts burned within us those days to be able to tell the story of
+Christ and His love! Usually the dull, darkened look on the faces of the
+few present would cause the speaker to feel that he had not been
+understood, or that there had been no answering response. Then
+occasionally a dusky face would light up, as if a ray of light had
+penetrated a darkened corner, and the speaker would be encouraged to
+renewed efforts to make the subject plain. Thus, Sunday after Sunday,
+the effort would be renewed.
+
+It was not only on that day, however, that some of the older ones heard
+the Word read and an attempt at explanation given. Morning and evening
+worship was held in the native language, and often a larger number, in
+those early days, gathered about us on workdays than on Sunday. The door
+was always open and everyone was invited to enter at time of prayer.
+After school opened, and it became better known which day was Sunday,
+and that the services were held in the tent, the attendance gradually
+increased.
+
+Our feelings, as written at the time, were somewhat as follows:
+
+     We realize more fully every day that much wisdom and grace is
+     needed in dealing with this people. If we did not have such
+     confidence in our Great Leader, we might at times be discouraged,
+     for the enemy of souls is strong here in Africa and human nature is
+     alike the world over. When the truth is driven home to their
+     hearts, they are quite ready to excuse themselves. Thus we find it
+     necessary to get down lower and lower at the feet of Jesus and let
+     Him fill us continually with all the fulness of His love and
+     Spirit, that there may be no lack in us.
+
+In his own eyes the pagan African is always a good, innocent sort of
+person. He has done no wrong, has committed no sin, hence has no need of
+forgiveness. One of the first requisites seems to be instilling into his
+mind a knowledge of God and His attributes. This must be "precept upon
+precept," "line upon line," "here a little and there a little." Time
+after time this thought of God must be reiterated until it is burned
+into the consciousness of the hearers. We are told of one missionary
+who, for the first two years, took as his text, Sabbath after Sabbath,
+"God is." And it would seem to be a wise course to pursue. The
+conception of a Supreme Being Who is holy, omnipotent, omniscient, and
+omnipresent, and cannot look upon sin with any degree of allowance, to
+Whom all must render an account, needs to be indelibly impressed on the
+native mind. Until they realize that "all have sinned and come short of
+the glory of God," it seems useless to preach Christ as a Savior to
+them.
+
+Missionaries soon realize that they cannot sit down and wait for the
+people to come to them. They must go out into the streets and lanes of
+their villages and "into the highways and hedges and compel them to come
+in." Kraal-visiting forms a very important part of the Gospel work.
+Sister Heise and myself went among them as much as possible. We went
+chiefly on foot, and many miles were traveled in all kinds of weather,
+so that the people might be instructed in the things of God. At first
+these visits could be little more than a friendly call and the speaking
+of a few broken sentences. These wild children of nature were quick to
+respond to the interest that prompted the visits, and would always
+welcome the visitors. As soon as we were within sight the children would
+come to meet us and pilot us to their parents. When we left they would
+again accompany us a little distance, perhaps to the next kraal. Who
+shall say but that these early journeys, in which little of the Gospel
+was given, was not as fruitful of results for God as later ones? Back of
+those black exteriors are human hearts waiting to be touched by the
+finger of love and human sympathy, ready to imbibe the milk of human
+kindness. They know something of the natural love of parent to child,
+and _vice versa_; but they need to realize that there is such a thing as
+disinterested love in their welfare, and by this means be led to realize
+in some little measure the _wonderful love of God_. In this, thank God,
+we had no need to simulate love. A spark of the Divine love for them had
+entered our hearts before we even set foot on Africa's shores.
+
+It is difficult to understand the expression of a missionary who visited
+Matopo some time after the work was started, and who in his own field of
+labor seemed to have been used of the Lord. He said one day: "I cannot
+say that I love these people. I do not love that child," pointing to a
+little girl at some distance in front of him, "but I realize that Christ
+loves them and desires them to be saved, hence my work among them." This
+seemingly cold sense of duty may answer. If, however, the pagan African
+once realizes that disinterested love prompts our treatment of him, he
+is generally most pliable and teachable. Without something of the Divine
+love work among them must be hard indeed, for there are so many trying
+things to be met with day by day.
+
+After a time it was discovered that the donkeys might be made use of in
+kraal visiting. I well remember our first experience at this mode of
+travel. We had no saddles, so we placed blankets on the backs of the
+donkeys and fastened them with surcingles of our own manufacture. Sister
+Heise was an expert rider, while I was quite the reverse. Our first trip
+was to a kraal about five miles distant, the home of the chief,
+Hluganisa. Two boys, Matshuba and Sihlaba, accompanied us as guides. All
+went well on the trip over. We were very kindly received by the people
+and afforded an opportunity to give them the Gospel. The village was up
+among the rocks, and as donkeys are expert climbers they had no
+difficulty in making the ascent, or descent, either, but on the return
+journey I could not keep my place, and was sent over the donkey's head
+on to the ground. My companion, when she saw that no harm was done,
+rather considered the accident as a good joke, and I joined in the laugh
+at my own expense. The boys failed to see any fun in it, and seemed
+greatly to resent the laughter.
+
+Some time after this we made another journey of about the same distance
+in the opposite direction. The reason for this second visit was as
+follows: Among our pupils was a nice, modest-looking girl about twelve
+years of age. She belonged to Mapita's family, and seemed to be an
+affectionate and well-behaved child. She was absent from school for a
+few days, and on inquiring we learned that she had gone to the home of
+her intended husband. Greatly shocked, we made further inquiry, and were
+told that Mapita had sold her to a man who had already one wife, and
+that he lived about five miles away. It was our first experience with
+heathen marriage, and we determined to hunt her up and if possible
+release her. We looked upon this child as a slave or prisoner.
+
+Taking the donkeys and our two boys, we again started out one morning.
+The path was not familiar, even to our guides. It wound around among the
+rocks and we were in great danger of being lost. Immense boulders were
+piled up in all sorts of fantastic shapes, and a white person could
+easily be lost among the hills and perhaps never find his way out, but
+the native will always find his way. Once we found ourselves on the top
+of a nearly perpendicular rock, and dismounting reached the bottom only
+with great difficulty. The boys inquired the way of a native in his
+garden, but he regarded us with suspicion and remained silent. Since the
+close of the rebellion, when the natives hid themselves among these
+rocks, they have been very suspicious of white people, for fear some one
+may desire to capture them. It was only after repeated assurances by the
+boys that we were missionaries, and their friends, that he consented to
+direct us.
+
+Finally we reached the home of Buka, the man who had taken little
+Lomanzwana. His kraal was situated up among the rocks in one of nature's
+fortresses. Here, in this desolate place, in the midst of densest
+heathendom, was the girl. Her husband was a cripple and very pagan
+looking. But what could we do amid such rock-bound customs as held these
+people? Nothing. With hearts lifted to the Lord in prayer we tried to
+point them to the Lamb of God. The man regarded us with wild-looking
+eyes, and listened with seemingly dull, uncomprehending ears to our
+stammering tongues. When he was asked a question, he looked at those
+about him and wanted to know what sort of an answer the missionary
+desired; then he would answer accordingly. In another hut was a very old
+woman, the mother of Buka, who was an imbecile and was fed like an
+animal. We retraced our steps with heavy hearts, but for many a day the
+memory of that visit haunted us.
+
+As for the girl, the man did not pay sufficiently promptly to satisfy
+Mapita, so he finally took her home. Later she was sold to a man who
+paid a large sum. Here they quarreled and the girl returned home, and
+the pay had to be given back. It is needless to say that the girl was
+thoroughly demoralized by this time. She was finally disposed of to
+another man.
+
+In February, 1899, Matshuba came to stay at the mission and attend
+school. Ever since the mission had opened he had been a great help to us
+in acquiring the language, and as he could understand us more readily,
+he often explained our meaning to others. He knew too just how many Zulu
+words were in our vocabulary, and in speaking to us he adapted himself
+to our limited understanding. He also gradually acquired the English. He
+made rapid progress in school; and as the Light came to him he accepted
+it. He did not do this all at one bound, but, as it were, according to
+his capacity to understand the meaning of the Atonement and kindred
+themes. The day came when he saw himself a great sinner, and he repented
+in truth. He was the only boy staying at the mission for a time, so that
+many and various duties fell to his lot. These he performed faithfully,
+except that he was somewhat careless in herding the donkeys, and lost
+them.
+
+One evening he came to the door of our hut in great perplexity and said
+that he would like to have a talk. He came and sat down on the
+hearthstone, then said, "I prayed this morning, but the donkeys were
+lost at any rate." By his language he evidently thought that if he
+prayed the Lord would do the watching. This gave us an opportunity of
+telling of David, the faithful shepherd boy, and of the "Great
+Shepherd," who told us to both "watch and pray." The boy then told
+something of his early life. Among other things he said:
+
+"Father used to tell me to go and watch the gardens so that the animals
+would not come and take our food. I did not watch well and the animals
+destroyed the crops and father was grieved."
+
+"Are you sorry now that you did not obey?"
+
+"Oh! yes, indeed," was the reply. "If I might live that time over again,
+I would be a better boy."
+
+He continued, "When father was sick they said he was bewitched. So they
+tried to find out who had bewitched him. Once, before he died, he said
+that he would like to see a missionary. _Umfundisi_ [Missionary] Engle
+should have come sooner, before father died."
+
+"Matshuba, did you ever hear of Jesus before we came?"
+
+"Yes, Missus," he replied, "I heard His Name once, and I wanted my
+mother to go where there was a missionary; then the Lord sent you."
+
+Here was this dear soul, groping in the night and reaching out for
+something better than he had known, he knew not what. When the Light
+comes to him he is ready to accept it. There are many other such boys,
+and girls too, all over Africa, who are waiting for some one to bring
+them the Light. Is it you? There are many other old men to whom the
+message will come too late unless some one makes haste and brings it.
+
+Matshuba had many hard battles to fight, and often have we heard him out
+among the rocks praying for help and victory. I well remember the first
+day on which he prayed openly before the school. Almost the hush of
+death fell upon all, for it was a new era to them. One of their number
+had learned to pray like the missionaries. There was no hut at first for
+him to sleep in, so he lay in the tent. One morning he came out, his
+face all aglow. He said, "I saw Jesus last night. He came and stood
+before me. He was tall and bright looking."
+
+Some months after he came, another boy, Tebengo, came to stay at the
+mission. He, too, had been attending school and desired to be a
+Christian. Bright, impulsive, but easily misled, in his instability he
+was just the opposite of the more steadfast Matshuba. There were also
+others of the schoolboys who were stepping out into the light, and among
+these were Kelenki and Siyaya, who were Mashona people. Their home
+seemed more heathenish than some of the others, but these boys, with
+others from their kraal, appeared earnest in the service of the Master.
+
+A Sunday-school was also opened this first year and proved quite
+interesting to the younger ones. On the first Christmas Day the natives
+were invited for services and about ninety came--the largest number up
+to that time. After the services they were invited to a large,
+unfinished hut, and all were treated to bread and tea and some salt.
+Father and Mother Engle sat down among them and partook of bread and tea
+with them. This greatly delighted all, and it was just as much of a
+pleasure to our elder and wife, who always enjoyed mingling with the
+people. The rest of us saw that all were served. The people were very
+thankful for the treat, and all expressed their gratitude in a forcible
+manner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN
+
+Reinforcements, and Progress of the Work
+
+
+The various departments of the mission were gradually enlarging, and as
+the work increased the burden fell more and more heavily upon Elder
+Engle. It will be remembered that efforts were made to secure an
+assistant for him before we left America, but without success. In April,
+1899, however, we gladly welcomed into our midst three new missionaries
+from America. These were Mr. and Mrs. Clifford Cress and Mr. Isaac
+Lehman. They were able and consecrated messengers, and a valuable
+addition to the work. With them came also several large boxes of
+clothing, cloth for the sewing school, and other goods which had been
+donated for the mission. About this time also the Board sent out some
+farm implements, a large Studebaker wagon, a two-seated spring wagon,
+and a bell for calling the people to services. More donkeys had already
+been purchased by Elder Engle, so that the question of traveling, and of
+bringing out supplies from Bulawayo, was most satisfactorily settled.
+
+Shortly after this we also had the pleasure of welcoming Mr. and Mrs.
+Van Blunk, of the Christian Holiness Association. These had come to make
+their headquarters near us and engage in evangelistic work. We had now
+quite a little company of Christian workers--nine in number--and had
+very inspiring and encouraging English services, as well as those in the
+native tongue. Although Brother Van Blunks were under a different Board
+and their work was in a measure separate from the rest, yet they were
+spiritual and consecrated missionaries and of great assistance in
+exalting Christ among the people.
+
+On account of the large increase in the number of workers, it was
+necessary also to enlarge our dwelling place. During this season five
+new huts were erected, including those for the natives, making the
+mission premises look like a little village. A building for church
+services and school was also greatly needed. During the entire rainy
+season these had been held in the tent, which was proving inadequate for
+the growing congregation. So Brethren Engle and Lehman, with the
+assistance of the natives, erected a very respectable looking church
+building of poles and mud, 16 x 30 feet. It was furnished with plank
+seats and good tables, and Brother Van Blunk donated glass for windows.
+Long poles of native timber were then secured and a framework was made
+for the bell. This being hoisted and fastened in place could be heard at
+many of the kraals. It also assisted in informing the people of the
+Sabbath.
+
+At sunset on Saturday evening it was rung a long time to inform the
+people that the morrow was the Sabbath, and that they should lay aside
+their work and prepare for rest and service. Later in the work some of
+us agreed to take that time for secret prayer in behalf of the people,
+that the Lord might incline their hearts to come to the house of the
+Lord. After there were a number of native Christians, they too joined us
+in prayer, each going to his private place. One evening we were greatly
+impressed to see Mazwi, the boy who was ringing slowly, down on his
+knees, as if, while he was calling the people to prepare for worship on
+the morrow, he was also calling upon God to persuade them to come. We
+were often made to feel too that the Lord especially honored some of
+those prayers.
+
+The sight of so many people about us being destitute of clothing had
+greatly touched Brother Engle's heart, and he had written to America
+about it. The result was a large box of clothing generously donated. He
+gave each of the headmen and the chief a shirt and a pair of trousers,
+and told them to come to services. They seemed to be, and no doubt were,
+very grateful for the favor bestowed, and a very few made good use of
+the garments. Others came once or twice clothed, and then nothing more
+was seen of them or their clothing. In less than a year these latter
+ones came again and asked for clothes, stating that they had nothing to
+wear to church. It is needless to say that by this time the missionaries
+had learned their lesson, and those desiring to be clothed had to work
+for it. A number did come and work for clothing and were well paid, but
+what they did with the clothing was often a mystery. Shirts they
+generally liked and appreciated, and sometimes the other garments would
+be sewed up in a wonderful manner and do duty for a shirt or coat, or
+they would answer for a grain bag.
+
+Day by day we were learning the nature of the people about us, and were
+obliged to adjust ourselves to our changed understanding. They are all
+children and must be dealt with accordingly. The missionary soon finds
+that he not only needs much of the love that "never faileth," but also a
+large supply of patience continually in his work. He must also be firm
+in his dealings with the natives and make them know their place. They
+will respect him all the more if he does this in the proper spirit. Old
+children are more difficult to handle than young ones, as they are more
+unreasonable and more set in their ways. They generally do not feel
+under any obligations to keep their promises to you, but they fully
+expect you to keep yours to them, otherwise they will lose confidence in
+you.
+
+When one first goes to the heathen and sees them in their ignorance and
+superstition, seemingly lacking everything to make them comfortable, he
+is led to speak much of Christ and His love, thus seeking to win them.
+They begin to say within themselves, "Well, if He loves us, He will do
+us no harm, so we need not trouble ourselves about Him," and they
+continue, as vigorously as ever, to seek to appease the malevolent
+spirits, who they think are seeking to harm them. Then the missionary
+thinks he should pursue another course. He soon becomes somewhat
+discouraged and disgusted with their indifference and hypocrisy, and is
+often led to the opposite extreme, and dwells much on hell and
+condemnation, which tends to harden his hearers. Finally he reaches a
+golden mean. He realizes that these poor souls about him have had no
+opportunity of rising above their degrading surroundings, and he must
+take them as they are, and seek by the ability which God giveth to live
+the Christ life among them and lift them to a higher plane of living.
+
+[Illustration: Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse
+Engle.]
+
+The Sunday-school had been chiefly for the younger ones, but we
+concluded to add a class for the older people. This was greatly
+appreciated by some of them, especially Mapita. It began with few in
+number; but as time passed it gradually increased in attendance and
+interest. Mapita seemed so eager to learn in those days, and would often
+look with longing eyes into the Kingdom, and the very joy of the Lord
+would seem to be reflected in his face, but he was afraid to step over.
+He gained a great deal of knowledge of the Scriptures too, and he was
+not slow to tell other people.
+
+All the services were more or less informal, and any one was free to ask
+questions; yet in the Sabbath-school class many felt more at home and
+often expressed themselves freely in regard to the difficulties in the
+way of their becoming Christians. One day, after we had explained the
+lesson, Nyuka, a witch doctor, said:
+
+"I believe all you say, and that Christ is able to save us, but what can
+I do? My hands are tied. I have five wives."
+
+Nothing had been said about a plurality of wives, but intuitively he
+realized that it was a formidable obstacle in his way. We could only
+tell him that if he really reached the place where he desired to be
+saved, the Lord would open the way for him.
+
+As question after question arose in the class, the answer often given
+would be to open the Bible and read a portion suitable for the question.
+One day, after this had been done several times, one of the men
+exclaimed, "It is no use to argue any more; that Book knows everything."
+The difficulty generally was that, although they believed the Word, they
+were not willing to take the Way. The darkness seemed too dense, the
+effort required was too great, the transformation was too absolute for
+these old people, rocked in the cradle of paganism for generations. It
+is the younger generation that are chiefly benefited by the mission
+work. Sometimes some of the others, seeing this, will say, "I am too
+old; you should have come sooner."
+
+Then again the missionary sometimes meets with a Caleb or a Joshua. He
+receives some encouragement, from even the old. Allow me to give an
+account of a visit made at this time:
+
+We are going to visit an old queen. It is not our first visit to her,
+but we are informed that she is ill at present and her friends are
+fearful that she might die, as she is very, very old. Sisters Heise,
+Cress, and myself are going. We carry a little bread, cocoa, and a New
+Testament. She is living at the kraal of Mapita, our faithful helper. He
+also has been sick with fever, but he is somewhat better today, and is
+sitting out of doors by the fire, where his wife and children are
+preparing their evening meal. This consists of peanut gravy, kafir-corn
+porridge, and pumpkin. After greeting these, we pass on to the hut where
+the queen lies. We sit down on the ground, so that we may look into the
+little opening which serves as doorway. The woman in charge invites us
+to enter, and we crawl into the hut. In the center of the hut is a fire
+with four large stones around it; the smoke finding its way into our
+eyes or out through the straw roof, for there is no chimney and no
+window. Near this fireplace lies the poor old queen. Her bed consists of
+a large hide spread on the hard, polished earthen floor, and a block of
+wood serves for a pillow. A blanket is thrown over her body. We offer
+the cocoa, which the sick one gratefully accepts, but the bread is
+refused. We then go to her side and try to point her to the Lamb of God,
+which taketh away the sin of the world, and tell her of the home
+prepared for all those who love God. She tries to listen, and sometimes
+responds to the question asked. Of course our knowledge of the language
+is still imperfect, and it is more difficult for the old to understand
+than for the young. When the sick one does not fully comprehend, the
+nurse, who is Matshuba's mother, explains. Sitting here by this old
+woman, and seeing her stretch out her thin hands to the warm stones at
+the fire, we forget that vermin surrounds us or that our clothes might
+become soiled; our hearts only overflow with a desire to let a flood of
+light into the soul of the poor one before us. As the talk continues she
+does seem to grasp some of the spiritual truths, and she gives a more
+ready assent to the questions asked:
+
+"Do you desire us to pray for you?"
+
+"Oh! yes," she exclaimed with feeling. "I always love to have you pray
+to Jesus for me."
+
+Kneeling there we offer prayers that the Lord would speak to this dear
+soul and prepare her to meet Him. Her farewell word and clinging clasp
+of the hand on our departure cause us to feel that light is breaking,
+and that she, in her feeble way, is, by faith, taking hold of Christ.
+Once before, when we visited her, she too offered up her feeble
+petition.
+
+We emerge from the hut and stop a few minutes to speak with Mapita and
+his family, and offer up a word of prayer. The sun has already set, so
+we hastily bid them adieu and start for home, but not before they have
+sent their respects to Father and Mother Engle.
+
+Thus ends one of the many visits we are called upon to make. But who is
+this old queen, amid such unqueenly surroundings? She was one of the
+numerous wives of Mzilikazi, the founder and first king of the Matabele
+tribe. He had a large number of wives, not fewer than forty or fifty,
+and this was one of them. The natives here claim that she was his chief
+wife and the mother of Lobengula, the king. We think that, however, is
+very doubtful, although the husband of the woman where she stays was one
+of Lobengula's most trusted men.
+
+[Illustration: Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness.]
+
+This poor queen in her younger days had no doubt plenty, with slaves to
+wait upon her and do her bidding. Now, in her old age, she tries to work
+for a living by cultivating the soil, and growing her own food. If her
+change of fortune is instrumental in leading her to Christ, she is
+richer than she knows. She will not have all her good things in life. We
+have been trying to help her also in temporal affairs.
+
+She arose from this sick bed and afterwards visited us. One day, when we
+were again speaking of Christ, her face lighted up and she exclaimed, "I
+am happy because Jesus lives in here," putting her hand on her breast.
+We feel, as Sister Heise expressed it, "One would look upon her as one
+of the first fruits of our mission work in Africa."
+
+Although the work among most of the older people thus far appeared to
+make little progress, if we may judge by their lives, yet a number of
+the pupils were steadfast. As far as could be ascertained they had
+accepted Christ as their Savior and were walking out in all the light
+they had. Since they were eager to follow the Lord in all things it was
+considered advisable to baptize some. Accordingly, after the little
+church was completed, they were examined as to their faith. In August,
+1899, nine boys and one girl were by Elder Engle led into one of those
+sparkling streams and dipped three times into the name of the Trinity,
+and thus put on the Lord by baptism. It was a time of great rejoicing
+and encouragement to the missionaries when this was done, and they could
+gather around the table of the Lord, with some dark-skinned brethren,
+who had so lately come out of pagan darkness. Although these were but
+babes, yet the missionaries felt that the Lord had set His seal upon the
+work.
+
+It might seem that we were somewhat hasty in thus so soon receiving into
+church fellowship. The mission had been opened only a little over a
+year, and our imperfect knowledge of the language, as well as of the
+native character, made it scarcely possible for them to be well
+instructed in the things of the Lord. There was no cause to think,
+however, that they were not honest and sincere so far as they knew.
+There was a radical change in their lives, and some were steadfast, but
+others had not fully counted the cost and soon fell back, if indeed they
+were really saved. One of the oldest, who was over twenty years of age,
+stood well until he went to work for a European, who made sport of him,
+and the boy gradually fell back into his former habits. Great pains were
+taken to lead them on to know the Lord.
+
+During this year the war known as the Boer War began in South Africa. It
+was a conflict which seemed inevitable between the wealthy English mine
+owners and their Dutch rulers. We are perhaps safe in saying that heavy
+taxation without sufficient representation was the chief cause of the
+war. The first event of importance in connection with it was the siege
+of Kimberley, the great diamond field, and the headquarters of Mr.
+Rhodes at the time. This occurred October 14. The war then spread
+through other parts of South Africa and to the border of Rhodesia, but
+did not extend into it. English troops were, however, stationed there to
+repel an invasion should one be attempted.
+
+The war did not directly affect us, but indirectly it did. By the siege
+of Kimberley, and later that of Mafeking, and the destruction of the
+railroad our line of supplies from Cape Town was cut off, consequently
+prices in Rhodesia rose very rapidly. Sugar was soon two shillings (48c)
+per pound, flour about three guineas ($15) per one hundred pounds, and
+other groceries in proportion. With little money on hand, and the
+prospects of receiving more under such conditions uncertain, famine
+might have stared us in the face. There was no need to be uneasy,
+however; the Lord and the forethought of Father and Mother Engle
+prepared us for such an emergency. Shortly before this the Charter
+Company had placed some cattle on the mission farm, and we had the use
+of milk. Butter, eggs, and vegetables for a time brought a very high
+price in Bulawayo market, and with all these the mission was supplied.
+The little spring wagon, drawn by four donkeys, went to Bulawayo nearly
+every week for a time, taking in produce which brought a high price, and
+we were in turn able to pay a high price for groceries and food for the
+table; so that, during the darkest days of the war, all our needs were
+supplied.
+
+Occasionally disquieting rumors would reach us that the Boers were about
+to force their way through and come into Rhodesia. The natives
+themselves were not a little interested in the outcome of the war. They
+had no newspapers or system of telegraphy like the white people, but
+they had a means of gaining news which to them was much more effective.
+This was by means of communication among themselves. How they so quickly
+secured news of the various engagements in the south and the result of
+each engagement was a mystery. We on our part, situated among them as we
+were, and conscious that there were many who were still seething under
+British rule, could not avoid wondering what might be the outcome were
+the British defeated. On the other hand, many of the natives seemed to
+prefer British rule to that of the Dutch. They chose to remain as they
+were rather than change masters.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT
+
+Extension of the Work Followed by Dark Days
+
+Verily, verily, I say unto you, Except a corn of wheat fall into the
+ground and die, it abideth alone; but if it die, it bringeth forth much
+fruit.--St. John 12: 24.
+
+
+Matopo Mission was only one little light in the surrounding darkness,
+and it was hoped that other stations might be opened in time. So after
+Brother and Sister Cress came, or as soon as they had some little
+knowledge of the language and of the work, they desired to open another
+station. After looking the country over, they felt led to a place up
+among the hills near the kraal of Buka, of whom mention was made earlier
+in these pages. There were a number of kraals in the immediate vicinity,
+and the location seemed a good one, except that it was somewhat near
+Matopo Mission. They decided to move out in November, and at that time
+they, together with the tent and supplies, were taken to their new
+station. Unfortunately a heavy rain came on while they were on the way
+and the ground was thoroughly soaked before they had an opportunity to
+pitch their tent. They concluded, however, to remain at their place and
+build. It was named Entabeni Mission.
+
+The building progressed satisfactorily, and they held services on each
+Sunday for about two months or a little over. They felt encouraged in
+their work and the natives interested. At the Christmas holidays they
+came to spend the time with us, and we had a very enjoyable time with
+the natives. The third week in January, 1900, a messenger arrived to
+inform us that Sister Cress had been stricken with fever. A conveyance
+was immediately sent to the place to bring her to Matopo Mission, and by
+the time that reached their mission Brother Cress also was sick. Both
+were brought to the mission and made as comfortable as possible. At
+first no one considered their illness serious, for our party had thus
+far been enjoying good health since the work opened. Other complications
+set in in connection with Sister Cress' illness, and she gradually grew
+worse. For twenty-four hours she lay unconscious and then rallied and
+seemed quite bright. We were all present--Engles, Van Blunks, Sister
+Heise, Brother Lehman, and myself--when she rallied. She requested that
+prayer be offered for her recovery. This was done and we felt that she
+would gain strength, but it was not to be. In half an hour that sweet
+young life passed to be with God. This was February 8, 1900. All through
+her sickness she felt perfectly resigned to the Lord's will, whether for
+life or death.
+
+We felt that we could not spare this saintly woman, so well fitted both
+by nature and by grace to shine for God. She had laid her all upon the
+altar for Africa, and often expressed herself that she wanted to spend
+her life in behalf of this people. She had been in Africa only nine and
+one-half months, yet she had entered heart and soul into the work of the
+Lord, and was rapidly acquiring the language, so that she could
+converse with the people. She had formed some of the women into a sewing
+class, uniting this work with religious instructions, and endearing
+herself to all with whom she came into contact. She loved the people and
+was willing and ready to undertake any kind of work that came to her.
+She was especially gifted in prayer, and it was always an inspiration to
+the rest of us to listen to her heartfelt petition. Why the Lord thus
+early in her missionary career took her to Himself, we know not; but
+when the things of earth shall be revealed, when we shall know as we are
+known, then all will be clear.
+
+Brethren Engle and Lehman made a coffin; we covered it within with white
+muslin and without with black cloth, and thus laid the body away. Mr.
+Eyles, of Bulawayo, was interested in the mission and occasionally
+visited us and spoke to the natives, since he had good command of the
+Zulu language. On this occasion he consented to come out and preach the
+funeral sermon. The chief men of the people carried her to her last
+resting place beneath the Umkuni tree, and they mingled their tears with
+ours. The occasion was made more sad by the fact that the husband was
+still ill and unable to view the corpse or attend the funeral.
+
+During the sickness of these two people we greatly appreciated the
+presence and help of Brother and Sister Van Blunk, who still lived near
+the mission. Both were very kind in assisting to care for the sick and
+also in the last sad rites. Shortly afterwards they moved to Bulawayo
+and made that the headquarters of their evangelistic work.
+
+[Illustration: Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission.]
+
+Brother Cress recovered from his illness, but concluded that it was best
+for him to return to America, and wrote the Board accordingly. He felt
+his loss keenly. The work in general resumed its normal condition until
+the last week in March, when our bishop and overseer, Elder Engle,
+became sick. He had been very busy with the work, and in his frequent
+trips to Bulawayo, sometimes in the rain, he may have exposed himself.
+His condition did not seem serious, and he was not obliged to keep his
+bed continually. On April 2 he walked to a garden near by, and when he
+returned he again lay down. He ate heartily of the dinner prepared for
+him, after which his wife came to the dining-room and ate with us. At
+the close of our 3 P. M. dinner she went to her room, but returned at
+once and asked me to fill the hot water bottle and come over. I did so
+and found Brother Engle having a heavy chill and speaking the Zulu
+language rapidly, seemingly unconscious of our presence. We endeavored
+in every way to help him, but soon found that he was rapidly becoming
+paralyzed. Sister Heise and Brother Lehman were called and a
+consultation held. It was decided to send a messenger to the fort, ten
+miles away, and from there telephone to Bulawayo for a doctor. Brother
+Cress had left that day to go as far as the fort on his way to Bulawayo,
+and he was also to be informed.
+
+All night we watched by the Elder's bedside, but there was nothing that
+could be done. Brother Cress arrived near noon the next day, but the
+doctor did not arrive in time. That was a dark time as he lay paralyzed
+and unconscious in the little mud hut he called home, far from his
+children, far from the comforts of civilization, with none of his family
+or relatives, save his devoted wife, by his side. As it became evident
+that the end was near, that heroic mother, who had been such a worthy
+companion in all his labors, stooped over and imprinted on his face a
+kiss for each of their seven sons in far-away America. At 5 P. M., April
+3, he breathed his last. Thus, in less than two months from the date of
+Sister Cress' death, Elder Engle also was called home. The loss of our
+sister was great, but this seemed to be a still greater blow on the
+mission.
+
+He was so absorbed in the work, and no sacrifice was too great, no labor
+too hard, for him to endure. Perhaps, if he had spared himself a little
+more, he might have been able to continue longer in the work. Who knows?
+The language was difficult for one at his age, yet he was making heroic
+efforts to acquire it, and could make himself pretty well understood. We
+have seen him, after reading the Word, stand before the people, with the
+tears running down his face in his great love for them and in his desire
+to help them to Christ. And the natives knew that he loved them and they
+in turn loved him and greatly lamented his departure. The language of
+many of them might be summed up in that of one woman. As she stood by
+his coffin, weeping, she said:
+
+"He was good to me. He gave me salt, he gave me calico. What shall we do
+without him?"
+
+It seemed that his life work was finished. He had had the desire of his
+heart, in that he had been permitted to reach Africa and see a work
+started in the wilds. He had been privileged to see something of the
+travail of soul by beholding some step into the Kingdom. Now he had gone
+to hear the welcome message, "Well done, good and faithful servant ...
+enter thou into the joy of thy Lord."
+
+This time it was Brethren Cress and Lehman who made the coffin. There
+was no lumber on hand, but they removed some from the hut doors for the
+purpose. Again we covered it to contain the form of our elder. Mr. Eyles
+could not meet with us at this time, and the Van Blunks were away; but
+two of the officials from Fort Usher were present, and a number of
+natives, not so many, however, as at the previous time. No doubt they
+were becoming suspicious of this oft-repeated death. The white men
+present, together with some of the natives, carried the body to its last
+resting place beside Sister Cress. Brother Cress spoke in English to the
+white people present, while the natives were addressed by the writer
+from 2 Tim. 4: 7-8.
+
+The devoted wife had been wonderfully sustained by a Higher Power
+through all this sad scene. She had been called here, far from her home
+and family, to lay away her husband, but she realized that she was not
+alone. When, however, the funeral was over, the effects of the shock and
+of the strain through which she had been passing were manifest. She too
+took her bed with the dread African fever.
+
+[Illustration: MATOPO CEMETERY. Elder Jesse Engle. Mrs. Cress. Mrs. E.
+Doner. Elder Jacob Engle at his father's grave and Elder John Sheets.]
+
+The Seventh Day Adventist missionaries, who had been so kind to us when
+we first came to Bulawayo, sent letters of condolence as soon as they
+heard of our bereavement, and offered the services of their physician,
+should we need him. In this emergency we sent for him to come and see
+Mother Engle. He rode the fifty miles on horseback to come to minister
+to her and to give us instructions as to how to treat the disease. This
+was something which we greatly needed and appreciated, and it has been
+of great service to us in later years. He would accept no compensation
+for his long and tiresome journey. Such are the big hearts one finds in
+the interior of Africa. They are enlarged to take in more of the Spirit
+of the Master. All was done that could possibly be done for Mother
+Engle, so that she might gain her health sufficiently to return to
+America with Brother Cress. She continued to have relapses of the fever
+for three months, and it was not until July 19 that she was able to make
+the journey.
+
+Brother Cress' stay of sixteen months in Africa had brought great loss
+to him, but the Lord had sustained him. We were sorry to lose him as
+well as Mother Engle in the work. She never felt called of herself to go
+as a missionary, but only to be with her husband. When he was led of the
+Lord to go forth, she most cheerfully bade farewell to her family and
+all that was dear to a mother's heart and went with her husband, neither
+of them knowing whether they would be permitted to see their family
+again. She was not merely a companion to him, but a most devoted
+helpmate, not only in all that can possibly mean in civilized lands; but
+larger still, in the heartaches, the weariness, the loneliness, and the
+discouragements that come to a missionary. How often the names of their
+loved ones would be spoken by these two! How they would linger over the
+letters that came, and yet never a word of complaining or regret that
+they had left all for this. When Elder Engle died we felt that we had
+lost a father; so, when she left for America, we realized that the
+mother and homemaker was gone.
+
+Before their departure a most important event transpired. I refer to the
+marriage, on May 1, of Mr. Isaac Lehman and Miss Alice Heise, by Rev.
+Van Blunk. This was to have taken place earlier, but was delayed by the
+sorrowful events through which we were passing. Even the day of the
+wedding was saddened by a most serious relapse of Mother Engle, and we
+felt quite anxious on her account. This was the first opportunity for
+the natives to see something of a Christian wedding, and we believe they
+were impressed with the difference between a Christian and a pagan
+marriage. Brother Lehman was a consecrated young man and had from the
+first taken hold of the work along all lines with zeal and readiness. He
+had also made rapid strides in the language. Sister Heise, too, ever
+since the opening of the mission, had been a most able and efficient
+worker, so that both were well equipped to do effectual service for the
+Master.
+
+All of us accompanied Mother Engle and Brother Cress to Bulawayo, where
+they rested for a day and then took the train for Cape Town, while we
+returned to continue the work. For a time nine white workers had been at
+Matopo Mission, and in less than six months the number had been reduced
+to three. Those left, however, were not discouraged. May 23 of the same
+year one of them wrote to the _Evangelical Visitor_:
+
+     "He that keepeth thee will not slumber." This is the Father's
+     promise to all His dear children, not only to you who are sheltered
+     in Christian homes, but also to us who are in the wilds of Africa.
+     We have just as much faith in the promise today as when to outward
+     appearances everything was more secure. Your hearts with ours have
+     no doubt been torn by the sad messages which have crossed the
+     waters during the few months just past, and some one may be even
+     tempted to doubt whether it was the Lord's will for us to come to
+     Africa. Beloved, does England doubt the outcome of the deadly
+     conflict raging in South Africa because she has already lost
+     thousands of men? Is her courage failing? No; far from it. Money
+     and men are continually pouring into the country and soon the
+     independence of two states will be a thing of the past. Shall we as
+     Christian soldiers have less faith in the King of kings? Shall we
+     give up the conflict because two have fallen by our side? No; not
+     if all men forsake us, for with God we still have a majority. While
+     our hearts feel bereft by the departure of our beloved colaborers,
+     we still have confidence in our Great Captain, and we know that He
+     never lost a battle.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE
+
+The Battle Is not Yours, but God's
+
+Wherefore take unto you the whole armour of God, that ye may be able to
+withstand in the evil day, and having done all, to stand.--Eph. 6: 13.
+
+
+The missionary going among the heathen must realize that he is about to
+engage in a warfare, and that the conflict will be fierce and long. He
+is assailing the great enemy of souls in his stronghold. The fight is on
+continually and one must keep armed for battle. More important yet than
+this the missionary should remember that he is under orders and that the
+work is not his but the Lord's.
+
+The loss of our fellow-soldiers was most keenly felt, and there were
+some severe tests to face. The work had become disorganized by the
+continued illness and the deaths, when all our energies had been needed
+in caring for those about us. Encouraging letters, however, came from
+the homeland and the Mission Board, so that we realized that prayers
+were being offered in our behalf and in behalf of the work. We also
+expected that reinforcements would be forthcoming in the Lord's own
+time. So, under the leadership of our Great Captain, the army was again
+set in array and the conflict continued.
+
+We were pleased to note that the people stood by us nobly in this
+extremity, even though Satan had put forth every effort to defeat the
+work. Some who had started to follow the Lord saw that they had become
+indifferent and renewed their covenant. There were four boys who were
+staying at the mission at this time, and they came one evening and said
+they would like to have a talk. This was not so strange, as we often had
+little confidential chats with them. On this particular evening they
+came in and sat down. Then, without any preliminary remarks, Matshuba
+arose and made a complete confession of his past life. He then sat down
+and Kelenki arose and began to do the same. I said,
+
+"Boys, if you desire we will call Brother and Sister Lehman, that they
+may hear likewise."
+
+They replied, "Yes, Miss, do so, for we desire to confess everything and
+have all wiped away, and we do not want to repeat our wrongdoings, for
+we want to be ready when Jesus comes."
+
+So one of them called the Lehmans, and beginning again they arose, one
+by one, and told of their past life. When each one had finished he would
+turn around and inquire of the rest if he had told everything. Three of
+them were baptized members, and they evidently had been having a meeting
+in their hut and became concerned about their condition. They had not
+been guilty of any new sins, but were in doubt as to their standing
+before God, and wanted pardon and cleansing. They had taken 1 John 1: 9
+very literally. When the confessions were finished we all knelt in
+prayer; and after we had prayed, they too most earnestly besought the
+Lord that they might be set completely free from their past life. When
+they arose to their feet their faces were shining and they said "God
+had heard and answered."
+
+Then, as they sat there, they told of their old lives and of the lives
+of the people about us, until we felt that we were just beginning to
+know the people among whom we were situated. Conditions which, up to
+that time, they had been timid of telling, for fear of their people,
+they now boldly and fearlessly exposed, and they seemed to be done once
+and forever with their heathen past. Our hearts went up in gratitude to
+the Father, and our eyes were opened more and more to see the real need
+of this people and the obstacles in their way of becoming Christians.
+
+People reared in Christian homes, with an entire Bible which they can
+read from childhood, with the privileges of church and Sunday-school,
+with good literature and hymns and many other advantages which might be
+mentioned, cannot possibly, by any stretch of imagination, put
+themselves in the place of those who are deprived of all these; and not
+only that, but who, from infancy, have been in an atmosphere of
+ignorance and superstition, reeking with influences the most foul and
+loathsome imaginable. Then, too, is it to be wondered at that when
+people, who have been brought up amid surroundings the most helpful
+possible, spiritually, and the most conducive to growth in grace, grow
+lean in soul and backslide--I say is it to be wondered at that the
+Christians in heathen lands, in their desperate struggle against such
+adverse and degrading surroundings, sometimes relapse into heathendom?
+Not only is it not to be wondered at, but it is positively surprising
+and a great cause for rejoicing among missionaries, that so many
+grasping hold of the Everlasting Arm do once and forever shake off the
+bog and filth of the bottomless pit and stand as monuments of His power
+to save to the uttermost.
+
+During the dry season of 1900 an aggressive campaign against Satan and
+his followers among the rocks and strongholds was begun, for we felt
+that the Lord would have us press the battle to the gates. During the
+rainy seasons, when people are busy in their gardens, and when there is
+a great deal of sickness, both school and evangelistic work suffer, so
+that it is necessary to make the best use of the dry season. As soon as
+the crops were gathered the school at the mission increased in numbers
+and interest, and Brother and Sister Lehman opened a school at the
+village of Chief Hluganisa. They rode back and forth day by day, and
+when they were unable to go two of the boys were sent to teach. The
+attendance and interest there were encouraging.
+
+What of this chief, who had so kindly received the missionaries two
+years before? It would be a pleasure to be able to report that he had
+opened his heart to accept Christ as his Savior, but such was not the
+case. He was very ready to receive the gifts of the white man, whether
+from officials, missionaries, or any one else. He was also quite willing
+that the school should be started in his village; for would not this
+make his people wiser and more able to secure the good things of the
+earth? But the white man's religion, he would none of it for himself. He
+was a most troublesome beggar from first to last. Elder Engle, had made
+him a present of a very good blanket, with which he was greatly pleased,
+but he seldom came to services. When he came to the mission it was
+always with the expectation of asking and receiving something.
+
+One day he came to pay us sort of a state visit, and a little later his
+three wives followed in order of their rank. We were desirous of
+treating them all kindly after their long walk to pay us this visit, so
+Mother Engle concluded to give them bread and tea. A plate of bread,
+together with a quantity of tea and sugar, was placed before them. We
+expected, of course, that all would receive some. The chief appropriated
+everything; emptied all the sugar into the tea, drank all, and ate all
+the bread. When they started home the wives went first, the lowest in
+rank preceding, to prepare everything for their lord and master, who
+followed at his leisure. One day one of the missionaries, tried by his
+cupidity and avarice, gave him a straight talk. He did not return for
+some months after this, not until the funeral of Sister Cress. Until
+this day he continues to be a rank heathen, greedy, and superstitious,
+and a lover of wives and beer.
+
+All three of us by this time were fairly well prepared in the language,
+and some of the boys were beginning to be helpful in evangelistic work.
+Early in the season the Lehmans, with one of the men as guide, made a
+tour to the southeast of us in a section not yet visited. They reported
+an interesting and profitable trip and met the people from six different
+kraals. As it was a section of raw heathendom, they were surprised to
+find, at one of the kraals, a woman who joined heartily in the hymn
+sung and was familiar with the words. On inquiry they found that when a
+girl she had lived at the house of Rev. Thomas, one of the first
+missionaries of Matabeleland. He had a station at some distance north of
+Bulawayo, and his memory is much revered by those natives who knew him.
+The brother and sister had the fortune, or misfortune, to be present at
+a beer drink. This is their way of getting a lot of work done: They make
+a quantity of beer; then call in their neighbors to help work, paying
+them with beer. It is surprising how much beer they can consume at such
+times. They often become quite boisterous and even intoxicated, and
+frequently quarrel and fight as a result of their debauch. On this
+occasion the men were friendly, but scarcely in a condition to receive
+the Gospel. The travelers returned tired, but rejoicing in the Lord
+because of another opportunity of sowing seed.
+
+The life of a missionary is not full of exciting adventures and
+encouraging incidents. It is very ordinary at times and very crushing at
+others. The ups and downs would soon wear him out did he not take fast
+hold of God and, looking up by faith, keep saying to Him, "Lord, this is
+Thy work. Do Thou bear the burdens, the joys, and the sorrows that keep
+crowding thick and fast upon me, and let me be only Thy instrument and
+Thy weapon of warfare." I remember, during the first year, I at times
+felt I was not burdened enough for the souls about me, and once spent
+long hours of prayer, asking that the burden might rest more heavily. I
+retired to rest. The next day the Lord answered the prayer of His
+messenger. I thought it would crush me to the earth, but the lesson had
+been learned. He knows how much we can bear, and we should always say,
+"As Thou wilt."
+
+In our visits among the people one day is much like another, but they
+must be made in order to keep in touch with them. August 17 I wrote as
+follows:
+
+    "One more day's work for Jesus,
+      One less of life for me,
+    But heaven is nearer and Christ is dearer,
+      Than yesterday to me.
+    His life and light fill all my soul tonight."
+
+     This being Saturday, I arose early to go out among the people.
+     After taking some food, I started a little after sunrise with
+     Sihlaba as guide. We went to visit the kraal of Siponka, about two
+     miles distant. These people have been on my mind for some time.
+     They are good-hearted but veritable heathen, and care only for the
+     good things of this life. They are entirely too indifferent to come
+     either to school or church, although two, who were members, live
+     here. The downward influence is too strong for even them, and
+     seemingly they have done according to the proverb.
+
+     Early as it was in the morning, the people were nearly all away,
+     but we found at home two men, some women, and boys and girls. There
+     was an opportunity for giving the Gospel to them, and the Lord
+     greatly helped in the presentation of His Word. They gradually
+     became interested and seemed at least to have greater light. May
+     the Lord send home the truth into their hearts!
+
+     Siyaya (one of the backslidden boys) went along with us to the home
+     of Amuzeze (another member). Here there were a number of women, one
+     man, and some young people. They were more willing than usual to
+     listen, also more able to understand, and Amuzeze took part in
+     prayer.
+
+     From there Siyaya also went along to Umvunzi's home. Poor boy! he
+     followed us around, seemingly hungry for the Word, but helplessly
+     overcome by the gross darkness surrounding him. At this last place
+     there were only a few present. The men from all these kraals had
+     gone a long distance to buy goats. Here the powers of darkness were
+     so great that I could not shake off the feeling and have victory in
+     speaking. I wonder what my spiritual status would be at the end of
+     the year, if I were obliged to live long amid such surroundings;
+     and yet I have Christ and His Spirit in my soul and much of His
+     Word written in my heart, while these poor ones have only
+     generations of paganism back of them.
+
+     We then turned our faces homeward, moving in something of a circle
+     and coming first to Seba's village. This is not far from the
+     mission, and yet it is our first visit to this place. The people
+     seemed very glad to see us, and some here had the privilege for the
+     first time of hearing the Gospel, and were eager to catch every
+     word. While we were speaking, a native, carrying poles, was
+     passing, and he put his poles down and entered to listen. He was a
+     stranger to me. A tall fine-looking fellow he was. He informed us
+     that he had moved near and was building a hut. Mapita and his wife
+     also had entered during the services. Seba invited us to remain for
+     dinner and eat of their _inkobe_ (boiled corn), but it was not yet
+     ready, so thanking him for his hospitality we continued our
+     journey.
+
+     First, the stranger invited us to go over and see his wife and the
+     hut he was building, which was only a short distance away. We did
+     so and here we met two women from our nearest kraal. We then
+     proceeded on our homeward way, and had gone only a short distance
+     when we met John (a Christian) and his brothers, who followed us
+     home.
+
+     On the way we stopped a few minutes at Mapita's home to see the
+     children, and then reached the mission at midday. The boys remained
+     a short time to talk. I then tidied my hut, made a dress and gave
+     it to a little girl,
+     and entertained a number of native women. After our three o'clock
+     dinner and worship I read and studied the language, and here it is
+     evening and the close of a very enjoyable day.
+
+This account has been given, not because there was anything unusual
+about it, but because it is typical of many Saturdays on the mission
+field, and some of them have been days of the most exquisite enjoyment
+we have ever known. Such days never seem to become monotonous. One
+forgets the long and tiresome walk if he finds eager and interested
+listeners at the end. Even if some steel their hearts against the Word,
+there is still the consciousness to the messenger that he has done what
+he could. Then again much of one's time on the mission station is spent
+talking to the natives who come. They may not be anxious for the Gospel,
+but one always hopes some word or message may sink into their hearts.
+
+The first few years of the mission, the country was occasionally visited
+by locusts, sometimes in such large swarms as almost to darken the face
+of the sky. These were not the seventeen-year cicadas, which some people
+are pleased to term locusts, but large grasshoppers, various kinds of
+which made their appearance to the great destruction of crops and
+vegetation. Sometimes the corn and the kafir corn would be stripped.
+Again, an immense swarm would come suddenly and alight--so that in a
+very short time the whole face of nature would be transformed from a
+bright green to a reddish brown, the color of the locusts--and would
+then as suddenly fly off without doing much harm. Wherever the locusts
+settled for the night, the natives would be there early in the morning
+with their nets and catch them for food.
+
+The year 1900 was especially one of these locust years. During the dry
+season, the adult locusts selected suitable places, remained to feed for
+a time, then deposited their eggs in the earth and died. As at this time
+the insects cannot fly, the natives catch them in large numbers and
+carry them home for food. One such swarm settled about two miles from
+the mission, and thither day after day went the women and girls to catch
+them. They would put them in bags or large baskets and carry them home.
+One could often see ten or twelve women walking through our premises,
+each one carrying on her head a bushel or more of locusts. They would
+cook them in large earthen pots, then spread them on the rocks to dry,
+after which they would go for a fresh supply. When the locusts were dry
+they would be stored away for food. In eating them the natives would
+remove head, wings, and legs and eat them somewhat after the manner of
+dried herring, and considered them a great delicacy, saying, "They are
+our meat." We have partaken of them in this manner and found them not
+unpalatable, and they are certainly a cleaner food than many things
+eaten in civilized lands. The natives' favorite way of preparing the
+locusts, however, was to stamp them in a stamping block, then cook them,
+together with ground peanuts, into a gravy to be eaten with their
+porridge.
+
+Although many of the locusts had been safely stowed away in the native
+storehouses, during this year, yet numbers remained in various parts of
+the country to lay their eggs in the ground. When the rains came and
+softened the ground these eggs hatched. After a colony hatched, the
+little wingless larvæ, or hoppers, started forth as an army, all going
+in one direction. These armies were generally about a rod or two in
+width and much greater in length, and woe to the young garden that came
+in their way! They would spread over it, devour the tender shoots, and
+then proceed in the same general direction in which they had been
+traveling. The natural grass and herbage of the country was too tough
+for them to eat. Not only one but several such armies coming from
+different directions passed through our gardens that season, and some of
+the cornfields had to be planted two or three times. One was finally
+left unplanted, while our potatoes and many of the garden vegetables
+were destroyed. At first we endeavored to fight them with fires when
+they were seen to be approaching a garden, but this was soon found to be
+useless. The missionaries felt the loss of their crops and vegetables,
+but their loss could not be compared with that of the poor natives, many
+of whom could not procure grain for a second planting, and they had
+nothing else to depend upon.
+
+During this year we were seriously contemplating an advanced step in the
+work, by opening the way for more boys and girls to come as boarders.
+They would thus be given a Christian home and be trained to work and to
+habits of cleanliness. Up to this time the largest number staying at one
+time was four boys; and one girl had come lately. The day was not far
+distant when it would be necessary to erect better and more permanent
+dwellings, as the huts were already showing signs of decay; and if more
+boys could be received and these trained to make brick and assist in
+building, it would be an advantage both to the boys and to the mission.
+As the year drew near to a close there began to be a desire on the part
+of some of the older boys to attend school and perhaps come to stay with
+us. We knew enough of the native character to believe that it was best
+not to throw out any special inducement, as it is always best for them
+to desire a thing for themselves and to be fully persuaded in their own
+minds so that they might not be wavering.
+
+On New Year's Day, 1901, after the close of the services, a boy,
+probably nineteen years of age, stood at the open door of my hut with
+rather a wistful look on his face. He was well dressed and had been
+working for white people, but had shown no interest in school or in the
+Gospel up to this time. Something in his face that day prompted me to
+say,
+
+"Ndhlalambi, when are you coming to stay at the mission and give your
+heart to the Lord?"
+
+He promptly replied, "I am coming one week from tomorrow."
+
+Afterwards, in giving his experience, he said, "While I was working at
+the mines I became convicted of my wrongdoing and made up my mind that I
+would come to the missionaries and go to school and give my heart to
+Jesus. When I came I was afraid to ask and the Lord told Miss to ask
+me."
+
+He did come and did yield his heart to the Lord, and seemed to settle
+it in his mind, if one may judge by subsequent actions. "I care not what
+course others may take, but as for me I will serve the Lord." He made a
+good confession and was always ready to step out into the light as it
+shone on his pathway. His way, however, was not an easy one. He met with
+violent opposition at times from an irascible pagan father, and
+persecution in various ways, but he stood firm. A special test came to
+him a year or two after he started to school. One day he came in great
+distress and said,
+
+"Father is very angry with me. My mother's brother died and left me a
+lot of cattle and other property, and my parents wish me to go and claim
+the property. But if I go, they will have a big dance and claim to call
+back the spirit of my uncle and ask him his will about the property, and
+they will want me to take part in their worship. I desire to follow the
+Lord."
+
+I said, "If you do not go perhaps you will not receive the property."
+
+"That makes no difference," he replied. "I love the Lord more than I
+love the cattle. Only pray that father will not be angry with me for
+refusing to go."
+
+Later he came with his face all aglow and said, "The Lord has heard our
+prayers. Father is not angry with me any more."
+
+In school he was slow but persevering, and in work likewise. He had his
+faults, and seemed at times to be lacking in humility, yet he never
+seemed to waver in his determination to follow the Lord.
+
+Several other young men also applied for admission, among whom was
+Gomo, a brother of Tebengo and Muza and Emyonleni; also two younger boys
+who were already Christians, Masikwa and Madhliwa. There were now nine
+boys, and several months afterward three girls came. These girls were
+trained by Sister Lehman to do housework. The work was looking quite
+encouraging, for all showed an interest in desiring to become
+Christians.
+
+As this rainy season came on, it could not fail to remind us of the loss
+and of the trying times of the previous year. Some of our number thought
+it best to go to a more healthy place until the rains were over. This,
+however, would almost necessitate closing the work, which was not to be
+thought of.
+
+In the midst of the rains, in March, Sister Lehman took down with the
+fever one day and on the following day her husband was also laid low.
+The buildings at Matopo are in a healthy place, yet during the rainy
+season one is always more or less exposed to fever, either by traveling
+and sleeping out, or even by going down to the gardens in the valley in
+the evening. At that time we did not understand so well how to check or
+combat the fever as in later years. So the sick ones grew worse and
+required my constant attention day and night for about ten or more days.
+Fortunately the boys were good helpers, as there were no girls at the
+time. Matshuba was able to take charge of the school; Ndhlalambi and one
+of the little boys could help me in the kitchen and sickroom; Gomo did
+the washing outside of the window where I could see and direct; and the
+other boys attended to the gardens.
+
+As the sick ones grew worse we sent a boy for a doctor, but on account
+of the damp, rainy weather, he delayed several days before coming, so
+that the fever was broken by the time he reached the mission. It was a
+trying time and one of looking to the Lord on the part of the sick and
+the well ones. To make matters worse some of the boys became quite ill,
+and we were unable to give them the attention they needed. One day
+Kelenki, who was very low, managed to crawl to the kitchen and begged to
+be allowed to lie there by the stove. Mrs. Eyles kindly came out from
+Bulawayo when at last the doctor was able to reach us. She remained for
+a week during their convalescence and cared for the sick. This gave me a
+much-needed rest and an opportunity to turn my attention to the boy, who
+was still quite ill and needed help. It was a day of rejoicing when our
+brother and sister and all were restored to health, and we were thankful
+that the Lord had mercy upon us, lest we should have sorrow upon sorrow.
+
+During the time we were passing through these afflictions, another
+difficulty was staring us in the face, which threatened, if possible, to
+be more serious than any which we had yet been called upon to meet. This
+was the land question. Mention was made that we were looking toward the
+erection of more permanent buildings. We had sent to the Board for money
+for this purpose; also for money to survey the land. Up to this time the
+3,000 acres upon which the mission had been located by the government,
+had not been surveyed. It had been given only as a reservation for
+mission purpose, and permission had also been granted that the
+missionaries could stake off a plot of 3,000 acres and make a diagram
+without going to the expense of employing a government surveyor, as that
+kind of work is costly in Africa. For this purpose, the year previous,
+four of us, Brethren Engle and Cress, together with Sister Heise and
+myself, started out to stake out the land, supposing, as we had been
+informed by the official who located the mission, that the two beacons
+north of us were the limit of the surveyed territory. We climbed hills,
+went over precipices, and waded swamps under a hot August sun and made a
+diagram of the desired farm, only to find at the close that the result
+was not satisfactory to the government. It was necessary for a
+government survey to be made, and this had not been done; but we had
+sent for money for the purpose, and the money had just arrived.
+
+The day on which Sister Lehman took sick, two Europeans brought some
+cattle and put them in our pen, from which the company's cattle had been
+removed the previous year. They did not ask for permission to place
+these cattle on the mission farm, and to us it seemed rather a bold
+step. They informed us, however, that they thought a mistake had been
+made in locating the mission, and that we were on surveyed land. They
+stated that they were not certain in reference to the matter, as the
+owners did not know the exact boundary of their farm.
+
+The Charter Company, of Rhodesia had, especially at the close of the
+war, made large concessions of land to companies, syndicates, and
+individuals. These grants often comprised many thousands of acres, and
+in many instances the owners, in the early days, did not know the
+location of their land. They simply sent out a surveyor to measure and
+stake off the requisite amount and erect beacons; then the land was left
+entirely unimproved. If they were fortunate enough afterwards to know
+the boundaries of the farms, they often sent out an agent to collect tax
+of the natives living on it. The best of the land being disposed of,
+very little remained for farmers, who would have improved the land, or
+for missionaries, who would both improve it and instruct the natives. No
+doubt the government, when too late, realized their lack of wisdom in
+making some of these grants, as it greatly retarded the work of building
+up and developing the country.
+
+This was the condition of affairs when Matopo Mission was located. We
+had, however, no intimation that a mistake might have been made in the
+location, until informed by the two Europeans previously mentioned. One
+of them desired to collect hut tax for the company owning the land, but
+this he could not do, as he was not certain of the boundaries, and the
+company, at the time, was not willing to bear the expense of having a
+surveyor come out to locate the land. It is needless to say that it was
+a dark and trying time for the missionaries. If we were on surveyed
+land, we might have to change the mission site and much of the work
+already accomplished would be lost. Again, how were we to find out where
+we were? If a wealthy company did not care to bear the expense of
+locating their land, how much less able were missionaries, whose
+purses, at the best, are never too full! Should we go to the expense of
+sending for a surveyor to locate us, we might be forced to move the
+mission, and the outlay incurred would benefit the company alone. We
+were in these wilds; could we succeed in locating ourselves?
+
+As usual, when difficulties thus confronted us, we looked to Him who
+never fails. Any one in the mission field has often reasons to be
+thankful for the varied training and experiences of the home land; for
+no knowledge or previous experience of whatever sort comes amiss when he
+is out where there is little outside help. We had studied, hence had a
+little knowledge of surveying. Would that knowledge help us here in
+these fastnesses?
+
+Mr. Jackson, the magistrate at Fort Usher, who had always been a friend
+in need, was appealed to. He did not know the boundaries of the farms in
+the immediate vicinity, but he knew the location of one important beacon
+several miles north, for he had had occasion to settle a difficulty in
+reference to it some time previous. So, with this knowledge to begin
+with, we went to the government surveyor and secured a diagram of all
+the farms in the vicinity of the mission. Thus equipped, and securing a
+compass, we started for home. Brother Lehman made a temporary chain, and
+together with some of the boys we went to the beacon pointed out by Mr.
+Jackson. From this a survey was made south, and it was discovered that
+the mission was on a tract of land known as "Matopo Block," owned by the
+Bulawayo Syndicate. This was a farm of 25,000 acres, and it was about
+twelve miles long. As there were no beacons for a distance of seven
+miles on the south of the mission, it was not difficult to understand
+how the mistake was made in the location. By further survey we
+discovered that we were on the extreme east end of this farm, and a line
+drawn nearly southeast from the beacon north of us would give the
+mission the required 3,000 acres. Another surveyed farm lay adjoining
+this on the east.
+
+We had located the mission, but it remained to induce the government to
+arrange with the syndicate and give them land elsewhere in exchange for
+the amount promised to the mission. It is needless to enter into the
+details of the slow process necessary for settling the difficulty, for
+any one dealing with the affairs of government knows something of the
+tediousness and red tape required. Letters were addressed to both the
+government and to Mr. Rhodes, who was then on his estate near Bulawayo.
+The government officials met the question in a spirit of conciliation
+and fairness, promising to do all in their power to bring it to a
+satisfactory settlement. We were asked later to make further survey, to
+be certain that we had given the correct location. At one time it
+appeared that the exchange could not be made, and we were requested to
+look up another location. Looking to the Lord, we made another appeal,
+which resulted, in September of the same year, in the mission being
+allowed to retain its location. At first this was to have been only a
+reservation, but the final papers, which were not made out until late in
+1902, resulted in giving a ninety-nine-year lease, which was much more
+satisfactory.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN
+
+Reinforcements and Industrial Work
+
+It is not the mere preacher that is wanted here. The bishops of Great
+Britain, collected with all the classic youth of Oxford and Cambridge,
+would effect nothing by mere talking with the intelligent people of
+Uganda. It is the practical Christian tutor, who can teach people how to
+become Christians, cure their diseases, construct dwellings, understand
+and exemplify agriculture, turn his hand to anything, like a
+sailor--this is the man who is wanted. Such an one, if he can be found,
+would become the savior of Africa.--Henry M. Stanley.
+
+
+During the progress of the land question and the negotiations with the
+government, important changes were taking place in the personæ of the
+mission. In June of 1901 we were pleased to receive much-needed
+reinforcements in the persons of Mr. Levi Doner and Miss Emma Long.
+Accompanying them were Mr. and Mrs. Jacob Lehman, who were on their way
+to engage in mission work at the Compounds in Johannesburg. On account
+of the war they were not yet permitted to enter Johannesburg, so they
+came to Matopo for a time.
+
+At the same time Brother Isaac Lehman and wife thought it best to go to
+Cape Town for a rest, as she had not fully recovered from her attack of
+the fever. We were very sorry to lose so valuable colaborers at this
+time, for they had the language and experience in mission work, and it
+always requires time for new missionaries to take hold of the various
+duties. I especially felt the loss of Brother Lehman, as I was the only
+one left who could speak to the natives. Brother Doner, however, made
+rapid strides in the language, and soon acquired a working knowledge of
+it, and was also a willing and efficient messenger along all lines. Very
+early in the work he was laid low with fever, but he recovered. Then
+Sister Long was quite sick for a time. These experiences, coming so
+early in their missionary career, were somewhat discouraging.
+
+The mission family was steadily increasing. A number of other boys had
+come to stay at the mission and become pupils and industrial workers.
+From the very first in receiving boys at the mission station, it was our
+plan to have them in school three and one-half hours and the rest of the
+time, which was five or six hours, they were engaged in some industrial
+work. As the natural inclination of the native is toward laziness and
+filthiness in personal habits, we were opening the door and taking all
+who desired to come and giving them a home, our aim being to take them
+out of their degraded home surroundings and give them the threefold
+training, spiritual, intellectual, and industrial, all of which seemed
+necessary to help them become strong, established Christians.
+
+These natives, for sanitary and other reasons, are always given their
+own separate huts, away from the Europeans; they have their own native
+food and live their own life. Some of them are appointed to grind and
+cook their food and do the work of their kitchen. It could not be
+otherwise in such a country. Even the most civilized natives as a rule
+prefer to eat by themselves. The missionaries sometimes accept the
+hospitality of the natives in their homes and eat of the food set before
+them, but even there the natives will wait until the missionaries have
+finished eating, or else they will eat in a separate place.
+
+Since the pupils have time to do considerable work, they receive, in
+addition to food and schooling, a small sum of money sufficient to
+clothe themselves; and on Saturday afternoon, after washing their
+clothing, they have the time for recreation and mending their clothing.
+
+Up to this time the industrial work of the boys had been chiefly on the
+farm and in the gardens; but now a new line of work was being
+introduced, that of brickmaking. Brother Doner desired to start in this
+work at least. It was at this time somewhat of an experiment, as the
+various kinds of soil had to be tested so that he might know which was
+best suited for this purpose. It was also too late in the season to
+spend much time in this work. A few thousand of brick were made; and as
+rains threatened to come early, they were hastily built into a kiln and
+burnt. A beginning had been made, however, and some knowledge of
+brickmaking gained.
+
+During November of this year an event occurred which was second to none
+in the history of the work. I refer to the arrival of Elder and Mrs.
+Steigerwald, sent out to have charge of the mission.
+
+We had been looking forward and hoping that some one might come in this
+capacity. In the meantime we were carrying on the work as well as we
+were able during the nineteen months since the death of Elder Engle. The
+brother and sister took hold of the work courageously from the first. It
+is not an easy task to begin mission work in heathen lands, among a
+strange people, strange tongue, strange surroundings and ways of living.
+It is no less easy to step into a work already begun amidst such
+different surroundings and new ways of doing things, and find the work
+pressing in on all sides. Such were the conditions that met Elder
+Steigerwald from the first, but it soon became evident that he was equal
+to the task.
+
+Constant changes in the mission field are trying, both to the people and
+to the missionaries themselves. Here two had been called away by death,
+four had returned home (including Brother and Sister Van Blunk), and the
+two Lehmans and their wives had gone to Cape Town. The people could not
+help feeling these changes and scarcely knew what to expect. The changes
+seem to have been unavoidable, yet it makes the people suspicious of
+those who remain. The natives, like all those in heathen countries, love
+to think that their missionaries have come to stay and be one with them.
+The true missionary bears much the same relation to his people as the
+parent does to the child; for they are his spiritual children. Then too
+the language is not mastered in one, two, three years, or even in a
+longer period of time. In fact, many do not master it in a lifetime, so
+that all these changes could not fail to have their effect on the work
+and the natives, and render the position of Brother Steigerwald a
+difficult one.
+
+His first important work was to unite in marriage, on Christmas Day,
+Brother Doner and Sister Long. There were many more natives present on
+this occasion than at the previous marriage to witness the ceremony and
+to congratulate their missionaries.
+
+Money had been forthcoming for permanent buildings which were greatly
+needed. The huts were not only showing signs of decay, but some were
+damp and unhealthful during the rainy season, and even became mouldy at
+times. It was evident that, however convenient and useful they had been
+in their time, their day was fast passing away, and for the comfort and
+health of the missionaries something more permanent must be erected. The
+rains had started before Elder Steigerwald's arrival, so no more bricks
+could be made until the rains were over. Brother Doner was busy with the
+farming, and this left Brother Steigerwald free to make preparations for
+building.
+
+There is an abundance of fine granite stones and slabs in the vicinity;
+and as the new year of 1902 opened, he had these hauled together for a
+foundation. During the rainy season, whenever the rains stopped for a
+time, he built at the foundation of the house. Although he had natives
+to assist, yet he found the work to be very heavy and taxing to his
+strength, but by the end of the rainy season he had a most excellent
+foundation for a house laid. Then he and Brother Doner, with the help of
+the schoolboys and some other natives, made and burnt a large kiln of
+bricks and were ready to begin the house.
+
+[Illustration: Matopo Mission House. Front View.]
+
+The brethren in Africa can tell you that building on a mission station
+in the wilds of Africa is quite a different affair from what it is in
+civilized countries, or even in the cities of Africa. In these latter
+places, a man, desiring to build, buys his timber, his ready-made brick,
+and other material. Then the stone masons come and lay the foundation.
+The bricklayers, carpenters, plumbers, plasterers, and painters all
+follow in their order, together with their helpers, and the work is
+completed in an incredibly short space of time. On the mission field all
+this usually falls to the lot of one man, from the blasting out of the
+stone for the foundation and the brickmaking until the building is
+completed. He is mason, bricklayer, carpenter, plumber, plasterer, all
+in one. That one often is not a trained mechanic, or even a practical
+one, but many times he comes direct from the farm, schoolroom, or
+pulpit. With the many duties of a missionary pressing in upon him,
+sufficient to occupy all his attention, he must in addition undertake
+the laborious task of building a house, and even make most of the
+furniture with which it is fitted up.
+
+Some one may inquire, is it not possible to secure skilled workmen to do
+the building? Yes, in some instances this can be done; but the high cost
+of living in Africa raises the wages of skilled mechanics to such an
+extreme height as to make it practically impossible for the missionary
+to employ them. Again, he has around him raw natives, who need to be
+taught to work, and his ambition is to do mission work in connection
+with his building.
+
+Elder Steigerwald was equal to the emergency, and together with the help
+of Brother Doner and the natives, he completed the house in a little
+over a year from the time he began to haul the stone. The house is
+large, having nine good-sized rooms, with a fireplace in each one. There
+is a broad veranda nearly all around it and an iron roof over the whole,
+and it is a building that would be a credit to any one. The building is
+high and dry and has good board floors in four of the rooms, which add
+much to the healthfulness of it. Brother Steigerwald could no doubt tell
+you, if he would, of many days of arduous toil, which threatened to
+undermine his health; of many difficult and perplexing questions which
+confronted him in the process of construction; of lying awake at night,
+planning how everything was to be accomplished; especially how he was to
+build three fireplaces opening into one chimney and all have a good
+draft--a feat which he most successfully accomplished.
+
+There were natives who lightened some of the heavier parts of the work,
+but to train these to perform their work properly is often a greater
+task than to do it one's self. This training must be done, however, if
+the missionary is faithful to his trust of developing the native
+character along useful lines as well as in giving him the Gospel. One of
+the officials, in making a report of the work, stated, "Here, at least,
+are missionaries who believe in teaching the natives the dignity of
+labor." This is the course pursued at all our stations. To train them
+properly is no easy task. It requires much wisdom, patience, firmness,
+and love. One meets with many discouraging results and often with great
+ingratitude on the part of those instructed; yet in the end it pays, if
+natives are ever to be brought to a more civilized plane of living.
+
+There is one thing which operates strongly against the natives
+respecting labor. The average European, on coming to Africa, even though
+he may have been a day laborer and hard-working man in the country from
+which he came, soon sees that the more menial tasks fall to the natives;
+and when he takes the hoe or pick or shovel, he is told, "We do not do
+that here. Let the nigger do it and you oversee." The majority do not
+need a second invitation, and so such work is relegated to his black
+neighbor. The native soon sees, or thinks that he sees, that the white
+man regards manual labor as beneath him. This training is exactly what
+the African finds in his own home. He leaves the distasteful and hard
+tasks to his wife and the younger members of his family, while he sits
+down and enjoys himself. He is thus confirmed in his belief that labor
+is degrading.
+
+Not so with the missionary. He works continually along many lines, and
+seeks to teach the native by his example, as well as by precept, the
+dignity of labor, and that only indolence, dirt, vice, and kindred evils
+are degrading. It is true that on account of climatic conditions and the
+many duties falling continually to men and women on the mission field,
+they are obliged, as their field of labor widens, to leave many lines of
+work to the natives they have in training. If they did not do this the
+spiritual part of the work and their own health would greatly suffer in
+consequence.
+
+Perhaps some one might ask, Do those ignorant blacks ever learn to be
+cleanly and do their work properly? Yes, some of them respond in a
+surprisingly short period of time to faithful, energetic, yet patient
+training, and become real helpers to the missionary, both in the house
+and outside. Some, in addition to handling the oxen on the farm, also
+learn to use hammer, saw, chisel, and plane, and work side by side with
+white mechanics in certain lines of work.
+
+While the house was being built at the Matopo Mission, Matshuba, still
+quite a young lad, was an interested spectator of everything that was
+done, and he himself did carefully whatever he was able to perform.
+When he found a small piece of lumber which was not likely to be used,
+he would say, "Mufundisi [Missionary], may I have this?" If permission
+was granted he carefully put it away, but said nothing. After several
+pieces had been obtained, he asked permission to use tools and work-shop
+on Saturday afternoon, when other work was stopped. He worked away in
+the shop, asking questions of no one. After a few weeks had passed he
+finally surprised us by showing a neatly-made chair, patterned after one
+that had been purchased in town. He gradually learned to do all kinds of
+work, as well as to build himself a good dwelling house.
+
+There are almost insurmountable difficulties, however, in the way of
+teaching the trades to the natives as a means of earning money. The cry
+of the country is for industrial schools and for native skilled labor,
+but almost in the same breath the European will tell you that he will
+not work side by side with the native in the same line of work. A
+gentleman in Bulawayo had a contract for a fine, large building. His
+mechanics were white, while the blacks were the attendants. Being in
+need of more skilled labor, he sent south to the more civilized portion
+of the country for a native mechanic, and of course paid his way to
+Bulawayo. The white mechanics absolutely refused to work with this
+native and threatened to strike. The only course left for the contractor
+was to pay the native some wages and his fare home. This was no heathen
+native, but one who had grown up amid civilized surroundings, and no
+doubt his parents also were civilized.
+
+We do not wish to criticise such mechanics, for here, in a land where
+the blacks so far outnumber the white population, there are many things
+to be considered. But with these facts staring the missionary in the
+face, there is little inducement for him to spend a great deal of time
+in training natives. The only course left which will give the native any
+chance at all in some sections of the country is for a contractor to
+have all native mechanics. He might then be employed by the more
+broad-minded Europeans, but be boycotted by others. Notwithstanding
+these difficulties, industrial training in its broadest sense is very
+important on the mission field, and it is encouraged by the governments.
+It enables the natives to improve their condition and way of living and
+to earn more money.
+
+While these changes and the industrial training were in progress, the
+intellectual and spiritual part of the work was not neglected. New boys
+were continually coming, and some who came during these years were
+destined to be of help in after years. First was Nyamzana, who began to
+follow the Lord before coming as a boarder. Although not so quick in
+books as some, yet he was a faithful and devoted Christian, never giving
+his missionaries any uneasiness as to his spiritual standing. There were
+also Nkwidini, Mlobeka, and Mahlenkle. The last named was a nephew of
+the late king, and he had begun to attend school when the Lehmans were
+teaching at the kraal of the chief. He was an exceptional native, most
+steady and unassuming, ready and willing for any task assigned him. I
+have mentioned these names because they with others already referred to
+were among our future evangelists and teachers. Nor do I wish to forget
+Kolisa, a son of Buka, whom we visited up in the hills.
+
+Not all, however, continued to remain at the mission. Some left, never
+to return. Others went away to work for a time, that they might obtain
+more money and then return again to enter school. The new boys as they
+came generally showed a desire to leave their old heathen lives and
+become Christians. Others were a cause of great anxiety to us. There
+were times of heart-searching and crying out to God, which showed that
+His Spirit was still at work in their hearts. One after another would
+come and confess their temptations and failures, and ask for prayer and
+help that they might be more victorious over evil. Some would receive
+definite help and blessing, while others seemed, for some reason, unable
+to take hold of the Lord by faith. Often we would feel greatly
+encouraged over the progress some were making, and look forward to their
+becoming able helpers and soul-winners for Him, only to have our hopes
+and expectations suddenly dashed to the ground. This was all a part of
+our training as missionaries. The Lord was teaching us by these
+experiences to take our eyes off individuals and fix them upon Him. He
+was also giving us sufficient encouragement, day by day, through some
+who were steadfast, to enable us to realize that our labor was not in
+vain for the Lord. There were a number in the inquirers' class, and in
+July, 1902, three more were baptized by Brother Steigerwald. Of this
+number were Ndhlalambi and Nyamazana.
+
+The attendance at school was not as satisfactory as could be desired.
+The authority of the parents being paramount in the home, if there was
+anything to be done, such as digging in the gardens, herding, keeping
+the animals from the gardens, or running errands, the children must stay
+at home and attend to it. An early morning school was also started for
+those who could not attend at midday, and this enabled some of the
+herdboys to attend.
+
+The parents were especially opposed to their daughters attending school,
+because they became unwilling to marry the old men to whom they were
+betrothed. As we mentioned previously, several girls did come to stay at
+the mission. One of them was Ganukisa, a daughter of the king. She was a
+very nice, modest girl and proved a great help in many ways. She also
+became a Christian and member of the Church. Another girl, Zwadini, ran
+off from home twice and came to us, imploring us to save her from the
+man her parents were forcing her to marry. We tried to buy her freedom,
+but to no avail, and she finally was forced to return home and marry the
+choice of her parents. At this time we had no right by law to interfere
+in these matters, however much we longed to free some of these dear
+girls from their lives of slavery. It required time and prayer and much
+looking to God before a certain amount of freedom of choice was granted
+the daughters, and then it came through an action of the government.
+
+In the school some were making good progress. English and some other
+branches had been added to the curriculum, but the Bible continued to be
+the chief Textbook, and some were acquiring a fair understanding of it.
+Natives have generally a keenness of discernment and a clear grasp of
+the subject, so that it is necessary for the teacher to be well prepared
+for any question that may arise. The one who was first at the mission
+was a philosopher and a keen thinker. Nothing seemed to escape him. I
+have heard him deliver most excellent sermons and bring far more out of
+a Sunday-school lesson than the ordinary teacher. One day in reading the
+book of Isaiah, he came to the eighteenth chapter. He knows nothing
+about Ethiopia, but after he had finished reading, I inquired what
+people the prophet referred to. He thought for a moment and then
+exclaimed, "I believe he means us, the black people."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN
+
+Continuation of the Work
+
+Furlough
+
+
+The missionary, however robust he may be, cannot keep at his work all
+the time; for he generally works seven days in a week and fifty-two
+weeks in a year. After a few years of such labor it is necessary to call
+a halt, if one does not wish to break down altogether. New missionaries
+can take much of the burden, yet those who have something of the
+language and can speak to the people must be ready in season and out of
+season, to talk, interpret, explain, as well as to have heart-to-heart
+talks with the people.
+
+I had now been actively engaged on the mission station for four
+strenuous years and was greatly in need of a rest and change. The Board
+at home, as well as the missionaries on the field, had been urging me to
+go south for a few months. The only difficulty in the way was the need
+of some one to take the school, and so we had been looking forward to
+the return of Brother and Sister Lehman from Cape Town to take charge of
+it. They, however, had been looking on the fields for mission work at
+the Compounds on Johannesburg, and had decided to go there. As a last
+resort we decided to ask Matshuba to do the teaching. He was capable of
+doing it, and he was also becoming able to do some interpreting from
+English into the vernacular.
+
+Before this happened an event occurred which more or less concerned all
+South Africa, and especially Rhodesia. I refer to the death, on March
+26, 1902, of Cecil Rhodes at his home, Groot Schuur, near Cape Town, the
+place where he had so kindly received Brother Engle on our first coming
+to Africa. It had been his request to be buried in Rhodesia, the country
+that bore his name. In the Matopo Hills was a beautiful spot which he
+had discovered and to which he gave the name, "View of the World." This
+is about fifteen miles from Matopo Mission, as the crow flies, but over
+twenty-five miles by wagon road. Here, on the summit of a large granite
+hill, in the heart of Matopo, is the spot he selected to be his last
+resting place.
+
+When the body was brought to Bulawayo, thousands of people, both white
+and black, vied with each other in paying a last tribute of respect to
+him who had done so much for the development of the country. The natives
+realized that they had lost a friend that could not be replaced; and the
+white people believed that no one could carry out so successfully many
+of the public affairs with which he was associated. When the funeral
+procession reached the burial place, the heavy casket was raised to the
+top of the granite hill. Into the solid rock a grave had been cut, and
+into this the casket was lowered. The grave was then covered by an
+immense granite slab, on which was fastened a large brass plate with
+this inscription: "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes."
+
+A part of his property was left for the improvement of the country to
+which he had devoted his time and talents. His two large estates in
+Rhodesia, together with an annuity, were bequeathed to this country; and
+his fine and well-built estate near Cape Town was given over for the use
+of the government of Cape Colony, but the grounds are continually opened
+to the public. The Rhodes scholarships for various countries, including
+two for each State in the United States, were given with a hope of
+cementing nations together. He wished no monument to be erected over his
+grave, but near the place is the Shangani Monument to the memory of
+those who fell in the Matabele War. The grounds have been beautifully
+laid out and a well-built road extends from Bulawayo to the grave. On
+his estate at Cape Town is a granite monument seventy feet long, built
+near the seat overlooking both the Atlantic and the Indian Oceans, where
+he used to sit and lay his world-wide plans. There is a sad feature
+connected with his life, like that of many other men whom the world
+calls great. While he made so much provision for earthly things, there
+seems to be no evidence that he made provision for eternity.
+
+During this year there also died near us a native who had been more or
+less interested in the work, by the name of Fusi. He had been a
+prominent soldier under King Lobengula, and also remembered the first
+king, Mzilikazi. He loved to talk about the good old days, and could
+tell of a visit that Rev. Moffat, the father-in-law of Livingstone, once
+made to this country. He said, "I remember Chete [Rev. Moffat] quite
+well. I was just a young man at the time and King Mzilikazi treated
+Chete nicely. He said to me, 'Go and milk a cow and bring some milk for
+the missionary.'"
+
+This old warrior, however, never showed any desire to become a
+Christian; but he was always glad to have his people attend school, and
+his youngest son was one of the first communicants. The native finally
+became sick with dropsy, and when we visited him during his sickness, he
+said an enemy had bewitched him, adding:
+
+"Before the white man came into the country we put all the witches to
+death and we were well. Now we are not allowed to kill them and we must
+suffer."
+
+Later we again visited him. When asked if we should sing for him, he
+replied, "Yes, sing one of the old hymns you used to sing when
+Missionary Engle was alive." We did so, and he too joined his quavering
+voice in the chorus. He also listened most attentively to the Scripture
+reading and comments that day, and joined us in prayer. What thoughts
+these things stirred in his heart we know not, for that was the last
+time we saw him.
+
+In July of this year the time finally came for our furlough. I took a
+ticket from Bulawayo south to Port Elizabeth. This was shortly after the
+close of the Boer War, and all along the railway in the south were to be
+seen the blockhouses erected to guard the railway from destruction. Here
+and there were the demolished farmhouses and the orchards and beautiful
+groves that had been leveled to the ground. Worst of all were the many
+graves--mute testimony to that saddest of all human employment, human
+butchery. Kimberley already was recovering from this terrible siege.
+This was still a small town, its chief attraction being the great masses
+of blue earth surrounding it. This diamondiferous blue rock is mined far
+down in the earth, where it had been formed under great pressure; and
+when brought to the surface, the combined action of rain and sun slakes
+it somewhat like quicklime. It is then washed, which removes the lighter
+earth, leaving the diamonds and other precious stones.
+
+From this place I went to Port Elizabeth, which is 1,200 miles south of
+Bulawayo. It is the principal seaport of Cape Colony, as it furnishes a
+shorter and more direct route into the interior than Cape Town does.
+This is a town of about 35,000 inhabitants, but there is nothing
+especially inviting about the place except its thriving business. It has
+been said of it: "Out of sand-hills and scrub, Anglo-Saxon energy has
+created a town that, for cleanliness and health, and for the
+handsomeness of its business buildings, is second to none in South
+Africa." After a stay of a few days at this place I took the steamer
+_Norman Castle_ for Durban, where the greater part of my vacation was to
+be spent.
+
+Durban is the seaport and largest town of Natal, and has nearly 70,000
+inhabitants. The business part is low and often quite hot, but the part
+known as the Berea is high and cool, and has many fine dwelling houses.
+Natal is more thickly populated than other parts of South Africa. It has
+a most luxuriant vegetation and varied and picturesque scenery, and well
+deserves the appellation, "Garden of South Africa." In this warm, moist,
+subtropical climate of the coast many delicious and tropical fruits are
+grown. This is the home of the Zulu tribe of Africans, of which the
+Matabele are a branch.
+
+My special purpose in coming to this section of the country to rest was
+to make my furlough as profitable as possible, and to gain information
+helpful for mission work. Missionaries had been in this section of the
+country the greater part of the nineteenth century. The American Board
+had started their work some time in the '30s, and this formed an
+excellent opportunity of seeing some of the fruits of missionary labors.
+
+I spent some time at an English Mission under Mr. Eyles at Imbezana, at
+a Free Methodist Mission and girls' school, Fairview, and at four
+missions of the American Board--a boys' school at Adams, a large girls'
+school at Inanda, and one at Umzumbi, and also visited their work at
+Durban, in charge of Rev. Bridgeman. At all these places I was most
+hospitably entertained and given every opportunity for studying the
+work. It was an inspiration to see what God had wrought among these
+erstwhile heathen. Here were large boarding-schools, and natives living
+like white people in neat brick houses, built by themselves. Here were
+missionaries, like Mrs. Edwards and Mrs. Bridgeman, grown old in this
+soul-saving work, and yet so attached to the natives and the work that
+they could not think of leaving the country.
+
+Natal, like Cape Colony and the Transvaal, can no longer be called
+heathen Africa, as so many of the natives are civilized. The large
+cities of white people are built in modern style, with all the latest
+improvements, electric lights, street cars, telephones, and the like,
+and since then automobiles. There are also many white farmers, as well
+as small towns of white people, throughout the country. Missionaries of
+many societies are here in this densely-populated and easily-accessible
+district of Natal. This is considered one of the greatest fields for the
+overlapping of missionaries, perhaps, to be found anywhere, yet all seem
+to have plenty to do.
+
+With all the advantages for improvement which the Africans here possess,
+I was surprised to meet, within a mile or two of one of the oldest
+mission stations, natives with paint and grease, and when the
+evangelists go to the homes of the people they still find some raw
+heathen. Some not only do not and will not accept Christ, but they also
+prefer their dirty, indolent, ignorant way of living to that introduced
+by civilization.
+
+At Durban I took the train to go north to Johannesburg, a distance of
+480 miles. The war had been over for some time, yet it was still
+necessary to procure a pass to enter Johannesburg. This I procured
+through Brother Lehman, who was then at Johannesburg. People were
+flocking thither as fast as they could procure passes and trains to
+carry them. The trains were crowded every day, and one was obliged to
+book ahead in order to secure a seat. This ride to Johannesburg is a
+delightful one, so far as the scenery is concerned, but the winding
+railroad is exceedingly rough and uncomfortable. One passes through a
+landscape most beautiful and varied, from the green, grassy hills of the
+coast, through mountains and valleys, to the high, rolling veldt of the
+Rand, where the famous gold reefs of South Africa are to be found. In
+this journey one leaves the sea level at Durban and gradually rises to
+the height of 6,000 feet at Johannesburg. It is said of this place: "In
+1886 the site was nothing but a bleak, bare plain, that could have been
+bought for one hundred pounds. Then came the discovery of gold reefs
+east and west for sixty miles, and stores, public buildings, and
+churches sprang up with marvelous rapidity." This is now the largest,
+richest, and most modern city of South Africa, and the Rand is this
+sixty miles of gold-reef mines.
+
+At these mines are many thousands of natives from all parts of South
+Africa, and when they are not at work they are confined in large
+enclosures known as "Compounds." This furnishes the missionary an
+excellent opportunity of doing mission work among this conglomerate mass
+of natives. The great variety of languages is one hindrance in the way,
+but if the missionary is able to speak one of the chief divisions of the
+Bantu family of languages, such as the Zulu, he can generally find some
+native to interpret for him into other languages.
+
+In this mission field we found our beloved colaborers, Brother and
+Sister Isaac Lehman, who had just come from Cape Town and were becoming
+settled in their new home. A dear little girl, Faith, had come to bless
+their home and cheer their hearts. Brother Jacob Lehmans also were
+engaged in mission work here, as well as our dear Sister Swanson (nee
+Hershey), who had left us at Cape Town to come to this place. As our
+Board had no mission station here at that time, these were all laboring
+in connection with an undenominational mission in charge of Mr. A. W.
+Baker. All were actively engaged in mission work. It is a broad field
+and is a great opportunity for giving the Gospel to the heathen.
+However, one has the same obstacles to encounter as in the native
+village, _i. e._, the indifference of the people. While we would be
+having a service in one part of the Compound, other natives would be
+dancing within sight in another part, and often be making such a noise
+as to disturb the meeting. One difficulty with the work is that the
+natives often remain at the mines only six months or a year, not
+sufficiently long to get them established. Much good is, however, being
+done; schools are established to teach the natives when they are not at
+work, and services are held regularly at various places. Natives,
+accepting the Light, carry it to other parts of Africa, and sometimes
+become teachers of their people.
+
+After spending a most enjoyable month at this place I again returned to
+Matopo Mission, after an absence of three and one-half months. It was a
+pleasure to get back to the old battle ground, for it was still the most
+beautiful spot on earth and its people the dearest. Great changes had
+taken place during our absence. Then the foundation of the house had
+been laid and the brick burnt, but now an imposing structure met the eye
+and the house was rapidly being completed. It looked as if the
+missionaries had come to stay and were to have a comfortable place to
+live in.
+
+The school was progressing favorably under Matshuba's management, and
+all parts of the work seemed encouraging. As there was continually some
+difficulty about the stability of some of the industrial pupils, it was
+decided to divide the school year into two terms of five months each,
+with a month's vacation intervening in which the pupils could return
+home if they so desired. This worked well and seemed more satisfactory
+to all. The one who had been teaching was retained as pupil teacher and
+was also permitted to take advanced work.
+
+[Illustration: "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes."]
+
+There was again opportunity for me to visit in their homes. So,
+accompanied by some of the boys or girls, we made long excursions on
+foot among the people, sometimes walking from eight to twelve miles and
+meeting many people. Because so many missionaries had left them and did
+not return, they were not a little pleased to see me back, and,
+native-like, were inclined to make flattering speeches. One day we
+visited nine kraals, and everywhere had attentive listeners, and the
+people seemed to be hungry for the Word. At another time we went to
+Sibula's village for the first time, where we met and gave the Gospel to
+over one hundred people. They had never been visited before and seemed
+anxious for a school. Later they built a schoolhouse, and Nyamzana was
+given to them as a teacher.
+
+One day when we were out to the kraals we happened to come to a beer
+drink, where they were having a digging-bee.
+
+They said, "Why does not Missionary Steigerwald invite the people to
+come and dig his large gardens? He is so busy with building."
+
+"Will you come if he invites you?" we asked.
+
+"Certainly we will," they replied.
+
+When we reached home we told Brother Steigerwald what they said, and he
+at once thought it a splendid opportunity for getting his corn planted.
+So he appointed a day and sent out invitations to the people. One
+hundred and sixty-four adults with their hoes came and digged and
+planted an eight or ten-acre lot. It was an interesting sight to see
+that many people digging in one place. They would usually sing a native
+song, and with their hoes keep time to the music. They performed this
+piece of work without pay, and of course received no beer, but a
+generous supply of bread and tea was furnished them, which they greatly
+enjoyed. These Matabele are always very ready to come out to work when
+invited, and in this respect they were a contrast to some natives. When
+hired to do work, however, it was necessary to make them keep their
+promise and come at the time appointed, and also finish their work.
+
+Sister Steigerwald was much amused at Sibongamanzi shortly after she
+came to the mission. My hut needed replastering, and Sibongamanzi was
+engaged to do the work. The appointed day arrived, but the girl did not
+come according to her promise, and as the work was urgent I employed
+another girl to do it. The next day Sibongamanzi came to do the work and
+was quite disappointed to find some one else had accomplished it.
+
+I said, "Why did you not come yesterday according to your promise?"
+
+"I am sure a person has a right to change her mind," she replied.
+
+"Yes, I think so, too, so I employed some one else."
+
+In school one is obliged to use the English word for such articles as
+slate, pencil, and paper, since there is no word in the language for
+these things. When Steigerwalds came, there were also a number of boxes
+of goods sent out; and in unpacking these a pencil fell out. Sister
+Steigerwald picked it up, and handing it to Masikwa, said, "Here is a
+pencil." He was most delighted, and came and said, "The Inkosikazi
+[Mrs.] can speak our language already. She said 'Pencil.'" Sister
+Steigerwald, together with the other sisters, had their own experiences
+in teaching natives in the kitchen and housework, as well as in sewing.
+She proved most capable and patient in training various ones to be
+cleanly and to do their work properly.
+
+The services at the mission were well attended at this time, and
+sometimes we were obliged to have an overflow meeting. Natives would
+come fifteen miles to be present at the Sunday services. "Our little
+church is too small," said some. "We need a new one."
+
+Our congregations were gradually emerging from barbarism, and their
+appearance on Sunday was often quite striking. Some of the boys and
+young men would come, clean and neatly dressed in European clothes,
+including hat and shoes, and exhibit good taste in the selection of
+their clothing. Some again came well dressed but without shoes; others
+would appear partly dressed, but anxious to display all the clothing
+they had. Perhaps on a sweltering, hot day some would don a heavy winter
+overcoat reaching below the knees, or a heavy suit of bright red
+flannel. Another would have on a coat turned wrong side out to show all
+the colors, and a vest outside of this, while a number continued to wear
+the purely native garb of skins. A few of the girls were neatly clothed
+in dresses; others in short skirts with or without a cloth thrown over
+their shoulders. Some of the women's clothing was very modest and
+picturesque.
+
+Natives, especially at this stage of their advancement, do not as a rule
+dress according to the weather, for to them clothing is more or less a
+matter of ornamentation and they don it accordingly. One must be very
+careful about placing special emphasis upon clothing, as the native is
+naturally vain, and when he is able to be better clothed his vanity
+often increases. He soon thinks that if he is clothed he is a Christian,
+or if he goes to school and learns he is a Christian. He is quite ready
+to put on these outward semblances of civilization without yielding
+himself to God. If the missionary is willing to accept the outward form
+of Christianity, whether of clothing or ceremonials, he may soon have a
+large membership. He must continually guard against these things, and
+seek to know the inner life of those about him, and their daily walk;
+nor is it always easy to ascertain what is beneath the surface.
+Hypocrisy is not at all unusual.
+
+Early in our work there was a native who came occasionally to our
+services. He had worked in Bulawayo and attended one of the native
+churches sufficiently long to gain a smattering and lingo of
+Christianity. He came clothed in black broadcloth and carrying a book
+under his arm, and withal seemed a person of some consequence. He was a
+brother of one of our boys, and we were informed that he could read. One
+day in church, at the close of the services, he asked permission to say
+something, and not knowing what was coming we gave him permission. He
+arose and began to read out of his book and then talked. Again he read
+and talked in a preaching way until he was finally requested to sit
+down. As we were suspicious from his manner in regard to his ability to
+read, we took occasion to test him and found that he knew absolutely
+nothing about reading. What he gave had been memorized, and we learned
+that his life too was decidedly corrupt. This taught us how necessary it
+was to be careful of the stranger who came and claimed to be a
+Christian.
+
+December 26, 1902, there was a most welcome addition to the mission
+family in the person of a little son to Brother and Sister Doner. This
+was the first white child at the mission, and it was quite a curiosity
+to the natives. Of course every one must have a look at it, and happy
+was the one who might touch or hold this wonderful white baby.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE
+
+Looking on the Fields
+
+Say not ye, There are yet four months, and then cometh harvest? behold,
+I say unto you, Lift up your eyes, and look on the fields; for they are
+white already to harvest.--St. John 4: 35.
+
+
+We moved into the new house early in 1903. This left the huts empty, for
+our increasing family of boys. As soon as the rains were over for this
+year, Brother and Sister Steigerwald and myself felt led to make a tour
+of exploration in the interests of the work. Matopo Hills or Mountains
+extend northeast and southwest for a distance of about sixty miles.
+Between the hills and Bulawayo there is a mission station and work had
+been carried on for some years, although there were at this time many
+raw natives to be seen. Through the hills and south for a long distance
+there were as yet no missionaries except our own, and as our mission was
+on the north side of the hills, we desired to go through them and
+explore some of the south side.
+
+In June we arranged to make the trip, taking our large wagon on which
+was a canvas top, which was drawn by donkeys, consequently progress was
+slow. Three of our boys accompanied us. We were obliged to go west about
+nine miles before a road could be found leading through the hills. This
+wagon road was exceedingly rough and stony and very little traveled, and
+the donkeys slowly wended their way in and out among the hills which
+continually surrounded us and seemed to close us in. Frequently as the
+immense piles of rock seemed to stretch across our path in front and bar
+further progress, we would be led to exclaim, "Truly, there is no way
+out of this," but on we went and the way continued to open.
+
+The tediousness of the journey was relieved by the exceeding beauty of
+the scenery as it gradually unfolded before our eyes. In the first of
+the trip are to be seen the immense bald hills of solid granite, similar
+to some in the vicinity of the mission. Soon the scene changes and the
+eye is greeted on every side by lofty ridges, consisting of immense
+boulders piled up in all sorts of fantastic shapes, by the Great
+Architect, and from out of every possible crevice grow trees and
+shrubbery of all sorts. The dark green of the foliage, interspersed with
+the varying shades of grey, yellow, red, and green of the rock, forms a
+picture of surpassing loveliness. Baboons, large and small, would make
+their appearance on the jutting rocks, as we passed along, and bark at
+these intruders into their peaceful domain.
+
+As the hills abounded in game, and Elder Steigerwald was a good shot, we
+did not want for meat on the journey. So, while the donkeys were
+grazing, fires would be built and pot roasts and many sorts of
+delectable dishes would be prepared and eaten with relish. Natives are
+generally happy if they have plenty of meat to eat; so on this journey
+Tebengo declared that they would be longing for the fleshpots of Egypt
+when they returned to the mission. Next to meat, their favorite dish was
+Graham flour made into a loaf by means of water and a little salt, then
+baked in the hot ashes.
+
+South of the hills we left the beaten track, which proceeds east to
+Gwanda, and started south to the open country, which is known as Mapani
+Land, named from the large amount of excellent hardwood Mapani trees
+which grow here. Very few natives were seen on the journey through the
+hills, but in this rich, open plain of the south there were numerous
+kraals. The natives received us gladly and readily consented to have
+services; and as there were no missionaries in this part of the country,
+many of the people had the privilege of hearing for the first time the
+Story of the Cross. On this trip we came to the home of Holi, a rich and
+prominent native. His wife is a daughter of King Lobengula and a sister
+of Ganukisa, who lived at the mission. Here we were very kindly received
+and Holi presented Elder Steigerwald with a fine fat sheep.
+
+From this point we turned west and north through the hills by a
+different route. Along the way we visited some places of interest,
+especially the "View of the World," where Mr. Rhodes was buried. Thence
+we proceeded east and south to the mission. We had been absent about two
+weeks, had traveled over one hundred miles, and had had a most pleasant
+and profitable trip. It had also been a change from the labor and
+routine of the station.
+
+Brother and Sister Doner had for some time been contemplating opening
+another station, and they concluded during this dry season also to make
+a tour and explore the country, as well as do evangelistic work. They
+made preparations to spend a month in this way, taking the wagon and
+several boys. Little Oliver, who was then only seven months old, also
+went along, thus early in his life learning what trekking in Africa
+meant.
+
+They went south over the same route we had taken, and it was on this
+trip, if I mistake not, that the present site of Mapani Mission was
+selected. They spent a very delightful month and came home quite
+enthusiastic over the prospects of opening a new work and eager to
+launch out at once. Permission did not come from the Board, however, in
+time to open that dry season, and the work had to be postponed another
+year.
+
+During this year word came that one member of the Executive Board had
+passed "over the river." Dear father died the latter part of March. It
+was a double loss to some of us; for we should now miss not only his
+fatherly letters, but the wise counsel that he gave in his capacity as a
+member of the Mission Board. He always seemed to have such a keen
+insight into the work, and wrote about it as if he had been on the field
+and knew exactly our surroundings.
+
+[Illustration: Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder Steigerwald in
+1905.]
+
+The work at the mission continued to go along as usual, and two more
+united with the Church, and everyone found plenty of profitable
+employment. One feature of the work, not yet mentioned, but which always
+requires much of the missionaries' time, is medical work and the care
+of the sick. The natives accept the miracles of healing, mentioned in
+the Scriptures, without question, and the sick frequently asked the
+prayers of the missionaries. There were several instances of remarkable
+cases of healing without the application of medicine, when the native
+could be led to take hold of the Lord by faith. On one occasion a native
+came for Elder Engle, from a kraal about five miles distant, where a
+woman was very sick and had eaten nothing for several days. She was very
+low indeed and seemingly unconscious of what was going on about her and
+her friends were weeping. Brother Engle felt led to anoint her and pray
+for her. The next day they came to say that the woman was much better
+and was eating, and they declared that the missionary had raised her
+from the dead.
+
+At another time one of our Christian girls was sick with such a disease
+that we knew we could not help her, and she desired prayer. We granted
+her request and she was healed immediately, even to our surprise. Some
+time after Brother Doner had come, an elderly native was quite ill with
+lung trouble, and his people had been trying in every way to heal him.
+They appealed to us, so we made the case a special subject of prayer and
+he was healed immediately, and told everyone that Jesus had healed him.
+A mother also wished us to pray for her child, who was very ill and
+seemed ready to die at any minute; it too was healed at once. Other
+instances of help might be cited; but we give these, because we see that
+He is the same Christ yet today and often shows His power, saying unto
+the sick, "According to your faith be it unto you."
+
+[Illustration: Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill
+Beyond.]
+
+Why He does not always choose to manifest His power in this way I know
+not. I am giving things as I found them. At first we were more or less
+loth to use medicine, and some of the early losses may have been owing
+to this fact. We believe also that He receives honor in helping the
+missionary make use of remedies to relieve the suffering of the sick.
+With the natives sickness is always the result of witchcraft or the
+influence of their ancestral spirits. If one can by means of remedies,
+under the blessing of God, show them that this is not true, he is doing
+much to overthrow some of their superstitious beliefs. So the sick are
+visited in their homes and ministered to, and many come to the mission
+for treatment. Sometimes the disease may be such as will not yield to
+treatment, but the gentle sympathy and the delicacy for the appetite
+are always much appreciated, even from some sources least expected. The
+missionary necessarily becomes physician and nurse to his people, and it
+brings him into contact with them and relieves their sufferings and thus
+paves the way for ministering to their spiritual needs. He who neglects
+this part of the work makes a grave mistake. Many missionaries, who had
+done little medical work at home, have by a willingness and desire to
+learn, become quite proficient in healing on the mission field.
+
+Elder Steigerwald has been much used in this line of work. Many and
+various cases have been treated by him most successfully. In addition to
+the sick who come for medicine, there are generally some who remain for
+a time at the mission to be treated.
+
+During this dry season, as usual, kraal visiting occupied much of my
+time outside of school hours, and many long and enjoyable trips were
+made to all the villages surrounding us. During these journeys the Lord
+was also reminding His messenger of some things that had been almost
+forgotten. He was showing the large fields yet beyond where the people
+were in pagan darkness and the Light of Life had not yet penetrated, and
+where missionaries and teachers were greatly needed.
+
+[Illustration: In the Matopo Hills.]
+
+The reader of these pages will remember that our call had been to the
+far interior of Africa, where Christ had not been named. When Matopo
+Mission was started it was felt that here was my place to begin work,
+but that the time would come when the Lord wanted me to press on farther
+in the interior. This thought kept following me, and in the second
+year of our work at Matopo, on my speaking to a friend of the call to
+press on farther, the question was asked, "You do not intend to go
+alone, do you?" My reply was, "No, I do not think that will be
+necessary. Perhaps the Lord will raise up others who desire to go beyond
+the Zambezi." Also, while Brother and Sister Van Blunk were at Matopo,
+the question of going north was often mentioned, for their eyes were
+likewise looking in that direction.
+
+As time went on, however, and the work at Matopo increased, I entered
+more and more deeply into it and became absorbed in my surroundings. The
+children and also the older people occupied a large place in my heart
+and crowded out for the time being all thought of anything else. The
+Lord had to take His own way of cutting me loose and again lifting up my
+eyes to the fields beyond, and I could not doubt but that His time was
+near at hand. On the other hand, what a struggle it was to be willing to
+leave these! He, however, showed me most strikingly one day that when I
+was willing to lose these children there were others waiting to be
+found; and when the work was given into His hands, He accomplished that
+which to me was impossible.
+
+First, the pushing out of the work must be presented to the Board and
+the home Church and their consent and aid solicited. Permission was
+given to return to America, and as Conference drew near, it seemed as if
+the Lord's time had come for me to do this. Together with my colaborers,
+we made it a special subject of prayer, and felt that I was to start at
+once. So, on March 25, 1904, I left the mission for America. Sister
+Emma Doner, as she bade me good-bye, said weeping, "If I did not know of
+a truth that it was the Lord's will for you to go at this time I could
+not say good-bye." That was the last time I was permitted to look into
+her dear face. Brother and Sister Steigerwald, together with several of
+the boys, accompanied me to Bulawayo, where I took the train for Cape
+Town.
+
+I shall not dwell on the events of that journey to America, for many
+things connected with it are too sacred to find way into public print.
+It is sufficient to say that it was a time of severe sifting and
+testing, but of such sweet fellowship with the Father, that I would not
+blot it out of my life, if I could. I learned, in truth, what that
+meant, "With God all things are possible." After it was over one of
+God's children greatly desired to hear of the trip home, and when told,
+he was quiet for a time; then he said, "I believe it was God's
+preparation for going farther into the interior. I believe the way will
+open."
+
+America was reached just in time for Conference in Ontario. We were
+sorry to learn that Elder S. Zook, the Treasurer of the Foreign Mission
+Board, had in the meantime passed away in February. We greatly missed
+him who had always been such an able pillar in the Church and missionary
+work, for his farsightedness and wise counsel had smoothed the way in
+many a difficulty. The old fathers were thus passing away and the work
+was devolving upon younger shoulders, but they were equal to the task.
+The Executive Board now consisted of Brethren J. R. Zook, Chairman; Eli
+M. Engle, Secretary; and Peter Climenhage, Treasurer, two of whom had
+been connected with the foreign missionary work from its inception.
+
+A report of the work from the field met with an enthusiastic reception,
+and it was requested that the churches all be visited and an account of
+the mission work be given. Permission was also granted for an appeal to
+be made for pressing the work on into the interior, both for workers and
+funds.
+
+In the meantime Miss Sallie Kreider had gone to Africa to engage in
+mission work, and Elder and Mrs. John Meyers and Miss Lydia Heise had
+also gone there on a visit. Brother and Sister Doner, with some of the
+mission boys, had gone to Mapani to open a mission station in August,
+1904. At first Brother Doner was troubled with fever, and much of the
+hut building fell to Ndhlalambi; then Sister Doner became quite ill, and
+Sister Kreider hastened down to assist in caring for her, but she passed
+away. Thus three precious lives had been sacrificed for the people and
+the work. Brother Doner was desirous of taking the body and laying it by
+the side of the others at Matopo. This was unusual in a hot climate like
+this, where interment is usually attended to at once, and the natives
+too object to carrying a dead body, so there was much parleying before
+they would consent to take hold of the bier and carry it. The way over
+the hills was much shorter, but it was also much more difficult. It was
+an exceedingly trying journey for all of them, and only the grace of God
+could have sustained them through it; but Brother Doner had the comfort
+and satisfaction of seeing his loved one resting in the little cemetery
+beside Sister Cress and Brother Engle.
+
+Sister Doner's stay of over three years in Africa was almost a continual
+struggle, one might say, against disease, and heroically she bore up
+under it. Her constitution was naturally not very rugged, and this
+malarial climate aggravated her disease, as it is sure to do with any
+one who is not strong. She was afraid to write home and inform her
+friends of the condition of her health, lest they should insist upon her
+return to America, and that she did not desire. She loved the work among
+the heathen, and we believe she had her desire in laying down her life
+in their behalf, rather than return to America where she might have
+lived for a longer time. Little Oliver continued to thrive, but as
+Brother Doner's health was great impaired, it was deemed advisable that
+he return to America on furlough and, after placing Oliver with friends,
+regain his own health. So in the spring of 1905 he left for America, and
+Ndhlalambi was left to care for the work just started at Mapani.
+
+In America the work was progressing; a number had volunteered for the
+foreign field, and four were ready to go to Africa at once; these being
+Mr. and Mrs. Harvey Frey and Misses Adda Engle and Abbie Bert. Over
+$2,000 had been donated toward pushing the work on into the interior.
+This was offered to the Mission Board, but they concluded that it was
+best to leave it in our hands toward the opening of the work. Of the
+four new missionaries who were going to Africa, none were pledged to
+the interior work except Sister Engle, but we still hoped others would
+be ready to go.
+
+We reached Matopo Mission August 1, 1905, and rejoiced that the Lord
+permitted us again to return. Some very noticeable changes had taken
+place during our absence: Brother Steigerwald had been busy making
+improvements, and a fine, large brick church, with an iron roof, had
+been erected. This was much needed and it added greatly to the
+appearance of the mission premises. The women, about eighty in number,
+gladly offered their services free to put in a fine polished earthen
+floor. A number of the class members had been baptized, and Matshuba was
+doing well in the schoolroom, where Sister Kreider was also doing some
+teaching.
+
+[Illustration: Mapani Mission, 1907.]
+
+Ndhlalambi had been holding on faithfully at Mapani Mission. A number
+there had accepted Christ and he had formed them into a class for
+instruction. It was thought advisable for Sister Engle and myself to
+spend the remainder of the dry season at Mapani and help in the work
+there, so we turned our faces in that direction. We were there two
+months and helped in the various lines of work and visited some of the
+people in the surrounding neighborhood. Some of the converts were very
+encouraging at that place. At the time in which the rains usually open
+we returned to Matopo. On the way down we had gone by wagon road, but on
+our return four donkeys had been sent down, two for pack saddles and the
+other two for Sister Engle and me to ride, and two boys came along to
+assist in the homeward journey.
+
+[Illustration: Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church. Matopo M. Hospital.]
+
+We left Mapani Mission at sunrise and took the shorter journey across
+the hills, the same path along which they had carried the body of Sister
+Doner the year previous. It was a most difficult trip for us and we had
+to marvel how they could have possibly made the journey. We were obliged
+to stop on the way and let the donkeys graze and eat, and did not reach
+the hills proper until afternoon. As the climbing was difficult and
+there were many trees and shrubs growing out from between the rocks, it
+was difficult for us to keep our seats, so we dismounted and walked. The
+pack saddles would frequently be nearly brushed off the other donkeys.
+Once one of the donkeys in attempting to go up a steep rock fell back
+and became fast in the rocks. The boys removed the load and carried it
+up; they then extricated the donkey and after much persuasion got it on
+the rock and again placed on the load. By the time we reached the
+summit, darkness had overtaken us and we were obliged to make the
+descent in the dark. We knew not where we were going, and were
+frequently in danger of broken limbs or becoming fast in the rocks. We
+were very thankful when at last at eleven o'clock we reached the mission
+without any serious accident. This was one of Sister Engle's first
+experiences in Africa, but from her composure through it all one would
+judge that she expected such things.
+
+[Illustration: Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo.]
+
+Ndhlalambi remained on at the work in Mapani most of the time for one
+and one-half years, and when Brother Doner at last returned there were
+some nearly ready for baptism. Not long afterwards thirteen were
+baptized there and proved faithful Christians.
+
+Brother and Sister Steigerwald had now had four very strenuous years of
+work at Matopo and were in need of a change. So, while the new workers
+were at Matopo, the way was opened for them to go to Cape Town over the
+rainy season. Here they had a good rest and returned in April, 1906,
+quite refreshed, ready to take up their duties at their station. Brother
+Doner also returned from America at the same time and was ready to
+resume work at Mapani.
+
+There had been some pupils attending school at Matopo Mission, from
+Mtshabezi Valley, south of the hills, but about fifteen miles east of
+Brother Doner's station. These had strongly urged that a mission be
+planted in their midst. Brother Steigerwald promised them to consider
+the matter, and at the opening of the dry season Brother Frey went to
+see that part of the country. He was much pleased with the outlook and
+felt led to open work there. This is the origin of Mtshabezi Mission
+which was started in July, 1906. The phenomenal success attending that
+work since helps to confirm the belief that it was a work of the Lord's
+own planting.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN
+
+The Religion of the Matabele and Subject Tribes
+
+
+In order to understand a people properly one must know something of
+their religious beliefs; for all the important actions of their lives
+rest upon their religion. Find out what a person believes and you have a
+pretty good idea of his character. A native is loth to talk about his
+religion, and will, unless he fully understands and trusts the
+questioner, often evade answering directly questions asked upon this
+subject. It is somewhat difficult to dissociate the religious beliefs of
+the Matabele from those of the first inhabitants of the country, as the
+two are so closely interwoven.
+
+It would seem that all the natives, with whom we have come into contact,
+have some conception of a God, however vague that conception may be.
+They do not as a rule discuss Him and His attributes among themselves,
+and so differ greatly in the attributes ascribed to Him. They often
+prefer to deal with and worship the lesser spirits, especially the
+shades of their ancestors with whom they are somewhat familiar, than a
+great God Whom they do not know and Whom they fear, for the shades they
+think can intercede for them. The native is really very religious, but
+prefers to take that religion found ready to hand rather than to make an
+attempt to fathom that which he does not understand.
+
+The Matabele when asked who their god is will readily respond that it is
+the King Umzilikazi. They say, "He gave us the country and everything we
+have, and our customs and laws, and him we worship." This can be easily
+understood from the belief of the Zulu tribe, of which this is a branch.
+The Zulu will say that Umkulukulu (the oldest or first one) is the one
+to be worshiped, as he gave all the rest their religion and customs. As
+their ideas of worship were very elastic, there was no difficulty in
+including other departed spirits in the list of those worshiped. All who
+left them could intercede for them in the spirit world; hence, when the
+old queen was buried, the woman who washed her face just before burial
+said, "Go in peace and speak a good word for us to the king, and to
+those who have gone before, so that we too may find a place and not be
+found fault with."
+
+This very fact, that their religious beliefs are so elastic, makes
+missionary work often the more difficult and discouraging among them.
+They will quite readily accept the God one preaches, and Christ as the
+Savior of men, but to their way of thinking this does not interfere with
+their worship. This fact was forcibly thrust upon me one day in coming
+to a kraal near the mission that had been frequently visited. The people
+here had much light and often came to the services, and their son
+Masikwa was a baptized member. On this occasion we found the older
+people worshiping the spirits, and said to the woman,
+
+"How is this? We thought that you worshiped the Lord Jesus."
+
+"Oh! yes, we do," she replied, "He is the Big Spirit and we worship Him
+too."
+
+It was not at all difficult for her to include Him among the number of
+spirits to be worshiped. She was willing to accept all who might be able
+to help them, and even give Him a large place alongside of the others.
+The fact that He had been on earth and died only added to the conception
+that He was like the rest. The force of the resurrection idea she had
+not grasped. It will be readily seen how difficult it is to inculcate
+the idea of one Supreme Being Who alone should be worshiped, and Who is
+a jealous God and will brook no rivals.
+
+On the other hand, the belief in an intercessor has its useful side in
+giving them the Gospel, for we endeavor to impress upon their minds that
+Christ is the Great Intercessor, Who "ever liveth to make intercession
+for them," a risen Savior, not a dead One. The great question here is,
+"Intercede for what?" Sins they do not claim to have. To them religion
+has nothing to do with morals, for neither if they live pure moral lives
+are they the better, nor if they are base and licentious are they worse
+when they come to die. The spirits whom they worship are of their own
+conception and have the same loves and hates. As Mr. J. W. Jack says:
+"Down all the ages to the present time so frightful have been the
+abysses of depravity, the intolerable cruelty, the extravagances of
+nameless lust associated with religion, that if the veil were lifted,
+Christianity could not bear the story." The raw native will tell you
+that lying, stealing, murder, and adultery are bad, but they do not
+look upon these as having anything to do with their religion.
+
+Again, the very fact that they are so tolerant in their religious views,
+and so ready to include all, led the Matabele early in their history to
+adopt the religion of the conquered tribes. The oldest and, to them, the
+most powerful and most widely-worshiped of these heathen deities was
+Umlimo. This was the name of one worshiped by the Makalanga. He was
+supposed to have his abode in the Matopo Hills, several of which places
+are still pointed out. If one may judge from the information received
+from the natives, the worship greatly resembled that of the ancient
+Greek oracles. When any important question of the tribe was in need of
+solution, or even when individual questions arose, they would go to the
+hill or cave in which the Umlimo was supposed to have his dwelling
+place, carry a present, perhaps of beer, meat, or other food, and,
+placing it on the rock, remove to a respectful distance and then make
+known their wants. They said the answer would come from the very depths
+of the earth.
+
+It is said: "The answer was given by means of ventriloquism and, as the
+speaker was inside the cave and invisible, the voice appeared to the
+inquirer to issue from the very bowels of the earth. The extreme
+ingenuity of the device will be better appreciated when it is known that
+the spirits of the departed are universally believed by the natives to
+dwell in an under world. For a ventriloquist to practice his calling as
+a diviner in the foregoing manner is probably not unworthy of that
+oracle which Socrates himself felt it necessary to consult at Delphi."
+
+In this way they would inquire as to the cause of drought, rinderpest
+among the cattle, locusts, and the like, and they were told that these
+came through the white man. In speaking of their worship some would
+acknowledge that a priest dwelt in the cave and received their
+offerings, and that he would consult Umlimo and give forth the answer in
+sepulchral tones to the worshipers. This god was also worshiped at the
+opening of every year by a great dance, so that he would send an
+abundance of rain. One special place of worship was in a large cave in
+the midst of the Makalanga country. As this was said to be only about
+five or six miles from Mapani Mission, I had a desire to visit the spot
+and see what it was like. Setyokupi, one of the first Christian girls at
+Mapani, offered to accompany Ndhlamlabi and myself to the cave, as she
+lived near the place but had never visited it. We started early one
+morning to the home of Setyokupi, which was several miles from the
+mission, and from there continued our journey to the cave. It was much
+farther than we had anticipated, and we walked quite a distance before
+reaching the immense kopje, or hill of stone, in which the cave was.
+Then our way wound round and round among the rocks for a long distance.
+Setyokupi saw that the task was greater than she had anticipated, and
+fearful of losing ourselves, we asked a young lad, whom we met in the
+neighborhood, to guide us. After reaching the cave we were obliged to
+climb forty or fifty feet up the side of the rock before we could
+enter.
+
+It was a large cave, extending back into the rocks, and would have
+formed several good-sized rooms. We had understood that the worshipers
+generally took a present and left it in the cave. This was frequently a
+branch or twig of a tree; consequently there were to be seen in it many
+dried leaves and branches of trees, the thought in their mind in this
+connection being no doubt similar to that of the olive branch of peace.
+There were also a few old ornaments and cloth, but nothing of value.
+Here it was said the people came to have their yearly dance and pray for
+rain. Everything on the inside was quite old, and it looked as if the
+place had not been visited lately, but we were informed that there was
+another and more important place of worship in the vicinity in which
+there was a pool of water. This we did not see, nor did we learn of its
+location. The day was fast passing and we were obliged to hasten back to
+the mission.
+
+At this time, 1905, Europeans had already been fifteen years in some
+parts of the country and the natives about Matopo Mission were always
+quite willing for anyone to be present at their religious festivals.
+Many were beginning to throw off some of their old superstitious ideas,
+and some were accepting Christ; so there was no thought of impropriety
+in our making this tour of investigation. The account of it no doubt
+came out through the little boy who accompanied us, and although these
+natives in Mapaniland were more raw than those about Matopo Mission,
+perhaps nothing further would have been thought of the visit, had the
+rains come on that year at the usual time. Unfortunately they were
+exceptionally late, not really coming until the first of January, and
+the people were becoming desperate. It is always necessary for the
+heathen to let the blame rest somewhere, and as the witch doctors and
+diviners generally hate the missionaries because of their loss of custom
+and prestige, so they naturally put the blame upon our visit to the
+cave. I never learned that they placed the blame upon myself, but they
+did upon those who accompanied me. Ndhlalambi's life was really in
+danger that year and his people were much concerned for his safety. He,
+however, did not seem concerned about himself and continued to go back
+and forth and see about the work at Mapani. Several years later
+Setyokupi, who is a most devoted Christian, had to bear the blame from
+the older people for a similar drought, the years of plenty intervening
+being overlooked. We as missionaries, however, always try to be careful
+not to stir up unecessarily the opposition of the natives.
+
+According to some of the older natives Umlimo is worshiped under various
+names; in fact, there is a trinity. In the hills to the south is the
+father, Shologulu. He is stern and unbending and is to be greatly
+feared. In the east is the son, Lunzi, who is kind and easy to be
+entreated. The mother, Banyanchaba, is in the north. Just how much
+tradition, handed down from Christianity, is embodied in this idea
+cannot be ascertained, but the belief is quite ancient.
+
+Again, some of the natives say that certain of the people at times
+claimed to be Umlimo and to have the power ascribed to him. One of these
+was a woman whom the king, in order to test her power, put in a hut
+near him. He convinced himself of her false pretenses and punished her
+accordingly.
+
+In a general way natives do not concern themselves about a Supreme God.
+Some, of course, will readily say that He made everything. Again we have
+inquired of others,
+
+"Who made the trees, the rocks, the grass?"
+
+They will answer, "We came here and found them already created, so we
+did not concern ourselves to inquire who made them."
+
+This indifference or spiritual laziness had much to do with their
+religion. On another occasion we were speaking with a native living near
+Mapani Mission, and were telling him that he ought to repent and accept
+Christ as his Savior. To excuse himself he said:
+
+"He made me. He brought me into the world and it is His business to boss
+me up."
+
+He really meant to say, "I am here by no choice of my own. He made me. I
+am His and He has a right to do as He pleases with me."
+
+This idea of fate runs through all their beliefs. They have no volition
+of their own. Everything that comes to them, whether of accident,
+sickness, ill luck, or whatever it may be, is the result of malevolent
+spirits which are in league against them. In fact, all their worship is
+one of the propitiation of the malevolent spirits. Good spirits will not
+harm them.
+
+One day in the Sabbath-school class, where questions were freely asked,
+one of the older men said, "Since I hear you tell who God is and what
+He likes, and who Satan is and what he does, I see that our god, whom
+we have been worshiping, is Satan himself."
+
+The _amadhlozi_ (spirits of the departed) are constantly besetting their
+path, causing sickness or misfortune, or else helping them to do what
+they desire. Their expression, for ill luck is _Angi ladhlozi_ (I do not
+have any spirit). When sick they send for the witch doctor to tell where
+the trouble is. He may say that one of the spirits thinks he had not
+been properly treated and wishes a goat. The goat is brought and killed,
+and a small portion of meat is used with medicine for the sick, but by
+far the greater part of the meat is generally appropriated by the witch
+doctor himself, who was no doubt more desirous of it than the shades.
+
+If health is not forthcoming for the sick, he is certainly bewitched.
+This is generally the belief when one dies or is suffering from an
+incurable disease. The witch doctor then takes his "bones" and "smells
+out" the supposed witch, and he is very careful to select as his victim
+one who is not very popular in the community by reason of his wealth or
+other circumstances. This one is accused of bewitching, and is
+ignominiously put to death, and all his property confiscated.
+
+Since the occupation of the country by the English much of this killing
+of supposed witches is done away with, but there are still violent
+deaths, which looks suspicious. Since our stay at Matopo there was an
+instance of an old woman being drowned, which was traced directly to the
+witch doctor and he was punished. There were also several instances of
+supposed suicide by hanging, which looked as if there might have been
+foul play, but which could not be ferreted. It is not unusual for the
+old or infirm to be gotten rid of in this way, especially by the ordeal
+of drinking poison.
+
+It would be unjust to say that their doctors never use remedies; in
+fact, they have many herbs which they use and some of these are very
+efficacious. In fever we have seen them administer a greenish-looking
+powder of a native herb, which tasted much like quinine, and we were
+surprised once to see a native physician pass through the mission
+premises with a wallet full of various kinds of herbs. He had a pass
+from the magistrate to practice among the natives, and he proudly opened
+his wallet and displayed his drugs. Notwithstanding that they have these
+remedies, yet, in practice, this is often so mixed with charms and other
+superstitious ideas, that it is difficult to tell wherein the real
+remedy lies. A witch doctor, who lived near us and who had much light,
+exclaimed one day, "I can give medicine, and if the Lord says the sick
+will recover, he will recover; if He says the sick one will die, he will
+die; my medicine cannot save him."
+
+When one treats a native in his home for any disease, it is always
+difficult to induce his people to follow the prescribed treatment; for
+they desire often to use their arts as well. A case of scurvy was at one
+of the villages, and they came to the mission for help. We went over.
+The boy had been losing blood for several days and was very weak,
+seemingly in the last stages of the disease. They had been using their
+arts, but to no avail, and had come to the mission as a last resort.
+Elder Steigerwald reproved them for waiting so long, and took hold of
+the case, hoping still to save him. After looking to the Lord for
+guidance, he managed to get the bleeding stopped, but to see that
+everything was properly carried out one of us remained for a time at the
+kraal. When he was thought to be out of danger he was left with his
+people, with strict injunctions to do just as they were told. When the
+patient was next visited it was found that the people had again brought
+out their charms and put them about his head, and it was necessary to
+frighten them thoroughly before they would follow instructions.
+
+Parents are always very anxious to have their children at home if they
+become sick. This may partly be owing to natural solicitation on the
+part of the parents, for they love their children as well as white
+parents do, but it is also due to the fact that they cannot use their
+divinations properly except at home. Then, too, if they die, they are
+always anxious that their people die at home. In this way we often had
+great difficulty in keeping at the mission some who were sick and needed
+care.
+
+One of our boys was very sick and we had been unable to help him, and
+both he and ourselves were looking to the Lord in his behalf. He was a
+good Christian and perfectly conscious all the time, and quite ready and
+willing to die if such was the Lord's will. His parents lived near and
+had been trying to take him home, but he did not wish to go; and we too
+thought it best for him to remain under our care. When he became very
+low, it was necessary to inform his parents. The father, who was a very
+violent and wrathy man, was determined to take the boy home, but we
+felt sure that a move at that time would be fatal, and told the father
+so.
+
+He replied, "I'll take him home if he dies on the way. I'll not have it
+said that my child died and was buried away from home." And it was with
+great difficulty that he could be prevailed upon to let the boy remain.
+The Lord heard our prayer in his behalf and he recovered.
+
+From what has been written it may readily be seen that the African
+believes in the immortality of the soul; that the souls of the departed
+take cognizance of what is done on the earth by the survivors; and that
+they have power over those who dwell on the earth to help, harm, or
+intercede in their behalf. They also believe in transmigration of souls,
+that the spirit of the departed often enters a snake, bird, lion,
+rhinoceros, or other animals, each of these tribes having its own
+especial animal. This does not necessarily imply that the soul remains
+in these forms. Frequently they speak of the animals as only a medium
+through which the spirit appears to its friends.
+
+The Matabele revere the snake and will not kill it. The first year of
+the mission a long snake entered one of the huts, that was in process of
+erection, and climbed up near the roof. I told one of the boys to knock
+it down and kill it. He recoiled from the idea and refused. Thinking he
+was afraid I took a hoe, knocked it down and killed it. When other
+natives came to the mission the incident was related to them by the boys
+and they expressed great surprise. I rather supposed that they were
+surprised at my prowess, until one woman who knew me better than the
+others exclaimed, "Were you not afraid to kill it? Perhaps it was one of
+your friends." I then found out that the snake was an object of
+reverence.
+
+Matshuba said that when his father was ill a snake entered his hut and
+he exclaimed, "That looks like a child of mine, it is so pretty. It is
+your brother, Matshuba."
+
+"Is that the reason," we inquired, "why so many people are afraid to
+kill snakes?"
+
+"Yes," he replied, "they think their friends come to visit them in this
+form."
+
+Again, once while out kraal-visiting we were speaking to some people who
+were working in their garden. Some one came from their kraal with a
+message of some kind, and soon all was commotion and hurry.
+
+I inquired, "What is the matter? Where are you going?"
+
+They answered, "Two snakes have entered our hut and we must go and see
+them."
+
+"Will you kill them?"
+
+"No, they are probably some of our friends, who have come to visit us,"
+was the reply.
+
+The people were also accustomed to use a goat in their worship and then
+drive it away on the veldt. I know very little of this ceremony, except
+that when it was told to me, I was forcibly reminded of the "scapegoat"
+of the Israelites. Each family also has a sacred ox or cow among the
+herd. They do not worship images, and are surprised to find that there
+are people on earth who do. Two of the boys in reading their Bibles one
+day learned for the first time that some people worship images made by
+men's hand, and they were as much surprised as any white child could
+have been.
+
+"Do they answer their prayers?" inquired they. "Can they talk, or do
+they know anything? Is it something like we make cattle out of mud to
+play with?"
+
+We are accustomed to despise people who worship animals, and it is
+certainly not very elevating; but they are God's handiwork, and are they
+not superior to many of the hideous images of idolatrous nations? When
+these people do worship, the object of their reverence is not the
+animal, but the souls of their people who they think enter the animals.
+
+Spiritualism is a legitimate product of their beliefs. I can best
+illustrate this feature of their worship by giving an instance which
+came to our notice in the year 1900. It was a religious dance. The chief
+actors had come from a distance and the worship was in honor of one of
+their dead relatives, the aim being to bring back the soul and hold
+conference with it through one who acted as medium.
+
+We felt to avail ourselves of this opportunity of seeing something of
+their worship, that we might have a better understanding of the same.
+The mother of Kelenki, one of our converts, participated and she,
+heathenlike, was anxious to have her boy take part, but he of course
+refused, as he had always done when urged to join with them. It was only
+about two miles from the mission, so Brother and Sister Lehman and
+myself went over for a short time. We entered the village at about 3 P.
+M. and found about one hundred people assembled. They had just been
+drinking beer and were feeling quite good. As many of them knew us, they
+greeted us quite pleasantly, nothing loath to see us on this occasion,
+provided we did not interfere in their worship.
+
+One of the most noticeable features at first was the evident attempt at
+ornamentation on the part of the women, especially the older women who
+were to take active part in the proceedings. We might add that only the
+older people took part in this dance, and that the ornamentation of the
+body is always a noticeable feature of their worship. Their dress, or
+rather undress, consisted of a short skirt of dirty, greasy leather,
+covered with a heavy embroidery of bright-colored beads. The rest of the
+body was ornamented with beads and heavy brass rings, neck, waist, arms,
+and ankles being heavily laden. The headdress consisted of a broad band
+of beads artistically put together.
+
+Our attention was soon drawn to three women seated on the ground before
+one of the huts, each with a large drum made from a hollowed log, over
+one end of which was a skin tightly drawn. On this drum they were
+beating with their hands and accompanying the sound with low, plaintive
+singing. Presently a man, who proved to be the leader, or medium,
+stepped out, beating at the same time on a drum made of a broad wooden
+hoop, over which was stretched a piece of skin. He was a tall,
+athletic-looking fellow, clothed in a short skirt similar to that worn
+by the women. He had many yards of blue cloth wrapped about his body and
+a yellow scarf thrown over one shoulder. The drum which was beaten with
+a stick produced a sharp ringing sound, and he danced with a peculiar
+backward step, keeping time to the beating of his drum, and sang,
+calling upon the shades. To this the women, beating the drums or
+tomtoms, would respond. A number of other men with similar drums joined
+him in the dance, and the air was filled with their melody.
+
+This was continued for some time, when all suddenly ceased and
+disappeared within a hut and continued their dance within. We were
+invited to enter, and after creeping through the low doorway we found
+ourselves in a hut about eighteen feet in diameter, with a somewhat
+higher roof than is to be found in many native huts. The performance was
+similar to that on the outside, except that others joined in the dance,
+but all danced alone. The actions and contortions of the body became
+more and more rapid and violent, and there was also leaping and jumping,
+the heat and violent exertion of the body causing the perspiration to
+flow freely.
+
+The medium finally worked himself up into sort of a frenzy and announced
+that a spirit had entered the door. With this he pretended to enter into
+conversation, but as he spoke in the Shuna language we did not
+understand him. The dancers all finally rushed out on the rocks and the
+leader fell down exhausted. After their return the same motions were
+continued, but a new feature was added by women entering, having
+native-made bells tied to their ankles, and these added to the general
+din. The motions of all were more or less similar, and even when the
+actions and contortions of the body were the most violent, they were
+somewhat rhythmical. The noise was deafening in the extreme, and would
+have surely waked the dead were such a thing possible. In addition to a
+dozen drums and the bells, there were yelling, whistling, and singing. A
+huge battle-axe was handed around from one to another, and part of the
+time was dangling on the neck of the leader. Sad as one felt at the
+delusion under which they labored, he could not but be impressed by
+their evident earnestness, and only wished it might be expended in a
+better cause.
+
+They did not forget our presence, and no doubt we did interfere with the
+freedom of their actions. The medium came toward us several times,
+beating his drum. Thinking he might be annoyed at our presence we spoke
+to the headman, but he hastened to assure us that we were welcome to
+remain. In fact, he as well as many others in the kraal, seemed to be
+spectators rather than participants in the worship.
+
+They finally became quiet and the medium again claimed to converse with
+the departed, and this time one of our boys interpreted. Of course both
+questions and answers were given by the medium. Among other things he
+said: "I see a spirit enter the door. It says, 'Who are these white
+people? Are they the people who killed the Matabele?' No, they are
+missionaries and like the black people." It seemed evident that not only
+the spirit but some of the strangers present were somewhat afraid and
+needed assurance that we were harmless.
+
+We returned home sad at heart for their heathendom. We were informed
+that this worship continued until late in the night and two days
+following. There was much beer drinking and immorality, so that even
+some of the heathen in the kraal were thoroughly disgusted.
+
+The Matabele do not use drums in their religious dance like the Mashona.
+Once when we were out kraal visiting we happened to come upon some of
+these worshiping at Fusi's kraal. We stopped only a few minutes to see
+what they were doing, and were greatly shocked by the hideousness of
+their looks and actions. The very stamp of the bottomless pit seemed
+impressed upon their features.
+
+Heathen worship, heathen dances, and hideous rites are becoming less and
+less in the vicinity of the mission, for the natives are fast losing
+faith in their old religion. The missionaries need a great deal of
+patience, forbearance, and firmness in dealing with the perplexing
+problems in reference to the natives' beliefs, but in the end God's
+cause is sure to win.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOURTEEN
+
+Some of the Customs
+
+
+Custom is so interwoven with and dependent upon religion that it is
+almost impossible to dissociate the two, so there is a difference of
+opinion as to what constitutes custom and what religion. Whatever the
+natives believe or practice has in their estimation been given them by
+their god, even to the ornaments of their bodies. As Rev. W. Chapman
+says, "The most satisfactory way of changing native customs is by
+changing his religion." On the other hand, take away the native's
+religion and the restraints which often accompany it, and place him in a
+modern city, with its so-called modern civilization, without the
+restraining influences of the Christian religion, and a monstrosity of
+evil is often the result.
+
+From infancy this inexorable law, custom, assails him. He must not step
+aside from the laws of his ancestors or he will suffer the consequences.
+If twins are born, they must be put to death. If a child cuts his upper
+front teeth first instead of the lower, again death is the penalty. Not
+because the mother does not love her child. It is just as dear to her as
+the child of Christian parents is to them, and generally no amount of
+money will induce her to part with it, but this infant is departing from
+the customs followed by its ancestors, and if its precocity leads it
+thus early to change the customs, what will it not do as it becomes
+older? It is a monstrosity and must be dealt with accordingly.
+
+If the child is a girl, it may at any time after birth be betrothed or
+sold to a man for his wife, and a part or all of the pay be given to the
+parents to bind the contract. This intended husband may be already
+middle-aged or old, with several wives. That is to his credit, because
+it frequently means that he is rich or a man of importance in the
+community. An old, gray-haired man living near the mission had nine
+wives when we arrived on the scene, some of whom were just young girls.
+However, one frequently meets with heathen natives who have only one
+wife.
+
+The would-be bridegroom sends some one to the father or guardian of the
+girl to ask for her hand in marriage. He consults his relatives in
+reference to the matter, but even if they disagree, he may give his
+consent, for he alone receives the pay. This may be in the form of
+cattle, sheep, or goats, or even money in later years, and the amount of
+pay the man can or is willing to give had much to do with the father's
+consent. Of course the girl has no say in the affair, and may not, until
+she is older, know who her intended husband is. If she is small, he
+waits until she is about grown before the actual marriage takes place,
+but in the meantime she is looked upon as his prospective wife and is
+often thoroughly demoralized before marriage.
+
+Before the missionaries or Europeans came to the country, it is doubtful
+whether the girl rebelled much as to what disposition was made of her,
+for one choice was about the same as another, only so that she might
+become a married woman. In their eyes it was almost a disgrace to be
+unmarried after they had reached the proper age.
+
+It is said that when the time came for her to be married she would say,
+"I am grown and want to marry." At first her people refuse, but finally
+they give her a hoe and showing her a piece of raw veldt say, "Show how
+you can dig, so that we may see whether you have strength to perform the
+work of a wife." She takes the hoe and shows her strength by vigorous
+work; for is she not to take the place of oxen or donkeys for her
+husband and plow and sow his gardens? This is no exaggeration, for more
+than one native has been heard to exclaim, "These are my oxen," pointing
+to his wives, the chief difference being that whereas the oxen get some
+time to rest and eat, the wife gets little, as she must grind and
+prepare the food in the interim of digging.
+
+When the day set for the wedding arrives, a number of girls of about her
+own age are called and they have a feast, often of goat, after which
+they accompany the bride to the home of the bridegroom, an old woman,
+carrying a knife, leading the way. Here they are assigned their places
+and various ceremonies. The wedding lasts several days and ends in a
+feast, and very often much immorality is connected with it. During a
+certain stage of the ceremony the bride runs and hides, not again making
+her appearance until she is found by the others.
+
+So-called marriages sometimes take place without any pay being given for
+the wife, but in such instances the children do not belong to or are
+not under the control of their parents; they belong to the father or
+guardian of the wife, as she has not been paid for. It may thus be seen
+that the giving of pay is not an unmitigated evil, as it leaves the
+children in the hands of their natural guardians, the parents. With the
+wife the pay is merely changing her from the ownership of her father to
+that of her husband, and if she should leave her husband, the pay or
+part of it must be returned to him.
+
+It frequently happens that a man takes a wife according to native
+marriage without paying for her, and afterwards, if he desires to retain
+her or her children, he pays the father for her. A native in the
+vicinity of Matopo had, in this manner, taken five wives, at various
+times, without paying for any of them. When some of his children became
+of an age that his wives' parents desired to take them, he took steps to
+secure them by paying for his wives. One, however, whom he did not like,
+he drove away without paying for her. These things show that the
+marriage vow is exceedingly loose and leads to much immorality. Several
+years after we came to Matopo Hills a law was passed by the British
+Government, allowing the girls some freedom of choice in regard to the
+marriage question, and it is now possible for Christian girls to choose
+Christian husbands.
+
+A man will have a hut for himself and one for each of his wives, and the
+more wives he has, the greater his importance in the community. I think
+that it is safe to say that an old heathen's ambition is to have many
+wives, each with her hut, about him, many sons, who too, with their
+wives, add to the number of huts, and many daughters, that he may sell
+them for cattle or sheep and thus increase his flocks and herds. He also
+likes to have nephews, younger brothers, and other relatives with their
+wives come to him and swell the number of huts. This makes a large
+number of huts, large herds, and he becomes an important headman; or if
+his followers increase sufficiently he may become a chief. These huts,
+built near together and often enclosed with a fence, are what constitute
+a kraal. This is a Dutch word and applies only to native villages, but
+there may be only three or four huts and it still be called a kraal.
+
+Their huts are built of poles and mud, much as described in the making
+of our own, except that the huts of the raw natives are much lower,
+without windows and with a doorway only about three feet in height.
+Sometimes no poles are used in the construction of the walls, but they
+are moulded of earth from the bottom up and are well made. The floor is
+made of ant-hill earth, well pounded. This is then covered with a thin
+coat of black earth and polished with stones until it looks not unlike a
+nicely-polished wooden floor. The Matabele build much better huts than
+some of the subject tribes; these latter are good farmers, but often
+have most miserable-looking huts.
+
+[Illustration: Matabele Kraal near Matopo Mission.]
+
+There is no furniture proper in the huts. The bed consists of a mat or
+hide spread on the floor at night. During the day this, together with
+the blankets, is rolled up and tied to the roof of the hut. The pillow
+is made from a block of wood, and there are no chairs, a small mat
+answering for this purpose. They have earthen pots for cooking and
+brewing beer and for various purposes. They have many kinds of
+nicely-woven baskets, and gourds for carrying and dipping water as well
+as for drinking vessels. There are also the necessary stamping block and
+a large flat stone on which the grain is ground. The wash basin is the
+mouth. The mouth is filled with water, which is allowed to run in a thin
+stream on the hands until they are washed, and then the hands are filled
+in the same way to wash the face. I was greatly interested once in the
+operation of bathing twins. This mother had sufficient light to keep her
+from killing her babies because there were two of them. She spread a
+blanket on a large rock in the sun. Then she took a gourd of water and
+filled her mouth. (It is surprising how much water they can hold in the
+mouth; practice aids greatly in this, no doubt.) She kept the water in
+her mouth a short time to take off the chill, then picked up one child,
+held it out and, with a thin stream of water pouring from her mouth,
+washed the entire body of the child thoroughly. After this ablution she
+laid it on the blanket in the sun to dry. She again filled her mouth and
+taking the other baby repeated the process and also placed it on the
+blanket. The children were evidently accustomed to such baths; for they
+took it all quietly, and perhaps enjoyed it as much as a white child in
+a bath tub of warm water.
+
+Polygamy is not necessarily opposed among some of the heathen women.
+They will frequently tell you, "I like my husband to have more than one
+wife; then I do not need to work so hard." It is, however, a source of
+much dissension and rivalry among them and a cause of much favoritism
+among the children. One day Gomo was reading the story of Joseph and
+Benjamin. He exclaimed, "That is just like our people. The children of
+the favorite wife are loved more by the father." Of course polygamy is
+one great drawback to the introduction of christianity, but we believe
+that it has had its day and that in many places it is becoming less in
+practice. Each wife cooks of her own food for the husband and places it
+before him. He, with older boys, eats what he desires and leaves the
+balance, if there be any, for the wife and her children. If he has many
+wives a number of dishes are often placed before him during the day, and
+he can eat that which he prefers. Or, if there are several men in the
+kraal, they often all eat from one dish, and from each dish as it is
+brought to them by the various wives, while the mother and daughters eat
+from a separate dish.
+
+Their chief occupation is farming, and they grow corn, kafir corn,
+millet, sweet potatoes, peanuts, ground peas, melons, citrons, and
+pumpkins. They generally hull the grain and then stamp or grind it into
+a very fine meal or flour. This they put into boiling water and make a
+very stiff porridge, or mush. Their favorite food seems to be this
+porridge, eaten with meat into the broth of which ground peanuts have
+been cooked. They generally have chickens, sheep, goats, or cattle, and
+often hunt or trap game. Their usual way of eating is to allow the food
+to cool a little and then dip the two front fingers into the porridge,
+take a little and dip it into the gravy and then put it into their
+mouth. They also greatly relish green corn, eaten from the cob or cut
+off and ground on the millstones. This milky meal is then made into a
+loaf and placed into a kettle and thoroughly steamed. This is their best
+substitute for bread, and in its season it is considered their most
+dainty dish, and with a little salt it is quite palatable, especially if
+not much grit has combined with it in the process of preparation.
+
+The African is fond of his beer, which also is made by the wives. For
+this purpose they use any of the grains grown by them, but they prefer
+kafir corn or millet. This is moistened and put in a warm place until it
+sprouts. It is then ground or stamped and the meal is cooked into a thin
+porridge and put into large earthen pots, where more water is added,
+also the yeast or dregs of a previous brewing. It is then allowed to
+stand in a warm place and ferment, and before drinking it is usually
+strained through a loose bag of their own weaving. The native will tell
+you that their god showed them how to make the beer, and I have no doubt
+but that he did.
+
+It is needless to say that it intoxicates and is the cause of frequent
+brawls and fights among them, and it is not unusual for the missionaries
+to be called upon to help settle some of these disturbances. It is less
+difficult to convince the Africans of the evil effects of its use than
+it is some Europeans. The latter will often tell you that the native
+thrives and works better if allowed his beer. Missionaries are not
+wanting who think it is best not to interfere with their native
+Christians having their beer. Our missionaries, however, have no
+difficulty in inducing the Christians to discard the use of it, and we
+believe the sentiment against it is increasing among the missionaries in
+general. In a native Conference held at Matopo Mission in February,
+1914, the question of native beer came up. Of course all were opposed to
+members drinking it, but the question was in regard to the Christian
+girls, who were minors, assisting in the making of it, since they are
+under the jurisdiction of their heathen parents. The older native
+Christians were in favor of more stringent measures than even the
+missionaries.
+
+In order to show what an enlightened Christian native can and will do if
+he has the power we need only refer to the work of King Khama. He is the
+King of Bechuanaland, the country just west of Southern Rhodesia. His
+father was a heathen king and a sorcerer, but Khama embraced
+Christianity in his youth, and in the midst of most bitter persecutions
+from his own father and others, he stood true. The people finally
+recognizing his ability chose him king in place of his father in 1872.
+Then his difficulties began in another line. If he was to be the chief
+of the country, it must be founded on the principles of the Gospel. All
+imported liquor was prohibited from crossing the border, nor was native
+beer allowed to be made.
+
+[Illustration: Matabele Women Stamping Grain.]
+
+It was a fierce battle with some of the natives themselves, for they
+were not all Christians and did not readily yield. This domestic
+trouble, however, was nothing compared with the battle he had to wage
+with unprincipled white traders and even with government officials, for
+the country was under the protection of England, and they had some voice
+in the management of affairs. But Khama won the day in such a struggle
+as would have dismayed many a stouter heart. According to Mr. J. H.
+Hepburn, Khama wrote to the British Administration as follows: "I dread
+the white man's drink more than the assegais of the Matabele which kill
+men's bodies and is quickly over; but drink puts devils into men and
+destroys their souls and bodies forever. Its wounds never heal. I pray
+your Honor never to ask me to open even a little door to drink." Words
+worthy of a native Christian hero, indeed; a hero that could not be
+bought, that could not be bribed or frightened by the liquor men.
+
+The Government of Rhodesia is rather favorable toward native beer, yet
+we owe it much for prohibiting imported liquor sold to natives within
+its territory. Perhaps (who knows?) Khama's firm stand in his own
+territory may have been an influence in keeping Rhodesian natives from
+securing imported liquor.
+
+Mention was made before that the native way of getting work done is to
+make a quantity of beer and invite their neighbors. They do this in
+digging and preparing the ground for sowing, in weeding, in cultivating,
+and in threshing. While a little beer is given during the work, the
+greater part is kept back until the work is completed, perhaps as an
+inducement for them to persevere unto the end. If then one, in
+evangelistic work, comes upon such a company early in the day, they are
+not much the worse for drink and will often listen attentively.
+
+Once Sister Steigerwald and I came to a place where a large company were
+busy weeding. They had a large garden to weed and did not greatly
+desire to stop for service, but we promised not to keep them long, so
+they gathered under the shade of a tree. On opening our Bible our eye
+fell on the "Parable of the Tares," which seemed quite suitable for the
+occasion. They listened most attentively to the short talk, and as
+illustrations taken from their gardens and work always seemed better
+understood and appreciated, we made use of such entirely in the
+application. After singing and prayer we told them they might return to
+their work. We sat still and watched them awhile, and as they worked and
+pulled out the weeds, we could hear them talking to one another and
+saying, "Yes, the bad things Satan sows in our hearts are just like
+these weeds, and they need to be rooted out or they will destroy us."
+
+On another occasion, one Sunday morning, there were no natives from one
+of the large kraals present at the services, and we felt to pay them a
+visit. Ganukisa and some of the boys accompanying, we went to the place
+in the afternoon to hold service. We always tried to impress upon the
+people that they should not work on Sunday, and many were heeding, so on
+this occasion we were surprised to find about seventy-five of them
+having a digging. As we drew near, they had just finished the work and
+were about to surround the huge beer pots for a "good time." We knew by
+the time they had consumed all that beer they would scarcely be in a
+condition to receive the Gospel. What should we do? We never like to ask
+the natives to do anything unless there is some probability of its
+being carried out, for one is likely to lose influence over them. Could
+they be persuaded to leave their beer pots and let us talk to them
+first? We could not make them do it, but God could, so looking to Him we
+said,
+
+"Leave the beer and come out under the shade of the trees while we talk
+to you."
+
+"Oh, no," they replied, "let us drink the beer first and then we will
+come."
+
+We knew that if they did their drinking first some of them would not
+stay for the service, so again, with somewhat more authority, I repeated
+the request, and at the same time, together with the Christian natives
+who accompanied, moved toward the shade. It was almost more than we
+expected, but the Lord moved upon their hearts to leave the beer
+untouched, and come to listen. The Lord especially anointed some of our
+native Christians for the service and they gave forth the Word with
+power. One of them referred very strongly to their desecration of the
+Sabbath. At first they sought to justify themselves, but as the truth
+was pressed home to them they said they would never do it again. At the
+close a number of the older men for the first time in their lives prayed
+and pleaded for pardon. The old women who had invited them to work
+seemed especially concerned and promised not to repeat it on Sunday.
+
+When they thresh they also invite a lot of their neighbors. They place
+the grain on a large flat rock and then strike it with a straight stick.
+Once I was present when a large number of the Amahole, or subject
+tribes, were threshing. They were decked out with all their ornaments,
+and being divided into two sides were placed opposite to one another,
+like two opposing forces in battle array. Each being armed with his
+threshing stick, they performed a mimic battle with the grain lying on
+the rock between the two lines of battle, each one alternately driving
+the other before it and at the same time beating the grain with their
+sticks. They also sang their war song, of how the Matabele overcame them
+and impaled them alive, and of the dire vengeance they would inflict in
+return. The interlude would be occupied by a sort of ballet dancer among
+them. The whole was exceedingly heathenish, but not uninteresting; and
+as for the grain, a large amount of it was threshed.
+
+While much of the work falls to the women, some of the native men are
+quite diligent in digging in their gardens; but they generally wish to
+sell their grain and secure money to pay taxes for themselves and their
+wives. The women, in addition to growing most of the food that is eaten,
+often help to furnish the tax money. Of course to the raw native dress
+is a negligible quantity.
+
+The people are always generous, and the food in the kraals is shared
+with the strangers. No one needs to go through the country hungry unless
+there is famine, and even then they will often divide the last morsel.
+When the stranger comes among them, they always bid him welcome, and it
+is etiquette to let him remain for at least one day without asking him
+any questions as to his business among them.
+
+Even in respect to continually begging, which is so obnoxious to
+Europeans, the native is not so rude as it would appear. They are not
+slow to ask one another, and they have often surprised me by saying that
+they felt flattered to be asked for articles, as it showed that they had
+something which the other did not have and they had an opportunity to
+help. A native likes to have plenty, but he does not want to have his
+gardens surpass too much those of his neighbors, in productiveness;
+neither does he want his herds to surpass others too much, for fear he
+may be an object of envy to those around him and a victim of malice, or
+be accused of witchcraft.
+
+There always seems to be a great attachment between the mother and her
+children all through life. This does not hinder the big, stout boy,
+however, from lying around and living on the bounty of his hard-working
+mother, and on the other hand the heathen boy will often exert himself
+to aid his mother and pay her hut tax, and she often lives with her son
+when she becomes old.
+
+The native women generally shave their heads with a piece of sharp
+glass. It is a laborious and painful process and needs to be done by an
+expert, but in the end it is well done. The married woman always leaves
+a small tuft of hair on the crown of her head. This is her sign of
+wifehood. The raw native has no means of keeping record of his age, so
+we must always guess at it.
+
+[Illustration: Matabele Women Digging.]
+
+The government is patriarchal and the younger are generally respectful
+to the elders, and all are more or less polite to one another. Their
+very name implies this. The surname is handed down from father to child,
+even the wife retaining that of her father unless she is married by
+Christian marriage. The surname is also the _isibongo_, or thank word.
+By that I mean that it is what they say if they wish to thank for any
+favor. Among themselves they do not say "I thank you" for any favor
+received. Suppose Muza Sibanda would give another one something. The
+recipient on receiving it would say "Sibanda" instead of "I thank you."
+Again, in addressing another, if one wishes to be polite or respectful
+he will use the last, not the first name, or he may say "Father,"
+"Mother," or the like. I at first thought them somewhat rude in not
+thanking properly, but soon found that it was often the result of not
+knowing what to say. One day I gave a piece of bread to a little fellow
+about five years of age. He hesitated, then looking up into my face,
+said, "_Isibongo sako sipi?_" ("What is your thank name?") If a native
+is given anything, all the others present will join in thanking, for a
+favor to one is a favor to all. The mother will often use the thank
+name, or surname, as a term of endearment to her child. After she has a
+child she is no longer known by her name, but if the child is Luju she
+is known as the "mother of Luju."
+
+If one falls or meets with an accident, however slight, all the rest
+will say "_Pepa_" ("Beg pardon"). If one enters the kraal of another, he
+enters the hut and sits down near the door without saying anything.
+Presently he says "_Eh! kuhle_" ("Peace"), about equivalent to saying,
+"Peace be to this house." It is not a salutation, but a polite way of
+announcing his presence. The occupant of the hut then responds by
+saying, "_Eh! sa ku bona_" ("We see you"). In reality, however, it is
+equivalent to saying "How do you do?" to which the other responds.
+
+It is a real treat to hear two old natives conversing together,
+especially if they are unconscious of one's presence. Their gossip may
+not be very elevating, but it is always carried on in a polite and
+interesting manner. The Tebele language is most beautiful and
+expressive, as its liquid syllables roll off the native tongue, and it
+is always most correctly spoken--no errors in grammar among them.
+
+This would not be complete without mention being made of death and
+burial. In burial the various tribes differ somewhat among themselves.
+Among the Matabele, when one dies the friends come and prepare the body
+for burial by placing it in a sitting posture with the knees brought up
+near the face. They clothe it in the garments which it owned, and wrap
+the blanket about it, tying the body firmly in this position with the
+face exposed. It is then left sitting in the hut, together with some of
+the women mourners, while the men go and select a place for burial,
+generally at a little distance from the kraal, unless the deceased
+should be headman. They make the grave more or less circular in form,
+and near the bottom a slight excavation is made in the side for the
+reception of the body.
+
+The body is then placed on a blanket or large hide and carried out to
+the grave, the friends following and mourning. A gourd filled with fresh
+water is brought, and with this a near friend or relative washes the
+face of the dead, at the same time giving it a message to kindly
+remember them to the king and to speak a good word for them. The two men
+standing in the grave receive the body and place it in the excavation
+with the face toward the east. They fasten it in position with stones
+and then fill in the grave with earth. On top of the grave are placed
+stones and the property of the deceased, together with branches of
+trees, perhaps to protect it from the wild beasts, for the grave is
+somewhat shallow.
+
+As children do not have any garments which they can call their own, they
+are often buried without anything being wrapped about the body. Once,
+when a little son of Mapita died, Sister Doner and I went over to the
+burial. The little body was lowered into the grave quite bare and they
+were about to put in the earth. Sister Doner could not stand that, so
+she hastily removed a large apron which she had on and told them to
+wrap that around the little body before throwing in the earth. They did
+so, but no doubt would have preferred keeping it for themselves before
+it had been defiled by coming into contact with the dead body. When
+Kelenki, one of our Christian boys, died in his home, they wanted to
+know what to do with his books, and one of the other Christian boys said
+he thought they had better leave them for the living.
+
+After burial they all go to the river and wash, for death means
+defilement. The women are the chief mourners, and they assemble early in
+the morning, fill the air with their wailing and then return home until
+the following morning. This is often done for four consecutive mornings.
+In the interim the relatives sit about the kraal, quiet and with little
+talking, except to answer the condolences of their friends, who come
+from time to time to sympathize with them. There is no feast, as among
+some natives. In fact, for a time little food is cooked or eaten except
+that brought by neighbors.
+
+Some of the other tribes lay the body down in burial, and often place it
+in the crevices of the rocks. If the deceased is headman of the kraal,
+he is generally buried in the enclosure and often inside his own hut,
+and the people usually remain there for a year and then, after a period
+of worship, the kraal is abandoned. The wives go to be the wives of the
+brother of the deceased, unless they be old, when they usually live with
+a son or daughter.
+
+About fifteen miles from the mission, in the direction of Bulawayo, is
+the grave of the first king, Umzilikazi. It is in a large kopje, between
+some immense boulders. On the top of the grave, or in the immediate
+vicinity--since one cannot point out the exact spot of the body--are
+many wagon loads of rock thrown in to fill up the cavity between the
+boulders. There are also wheels and the remains of broken wagons and
+other property once owned by the king, and probably bought from the
+white men in his emigration from Zululand to this country. I cannot give
+the exact date of this king's death, but it was at least more than fifty
+years ago. As he was considered the god of the Matabele, this grave was
+often no doubt a place of worship by the tribe, but we have no knowledge
+that it has been worshiped in late years. Perhaps it somewhat fell into
+disuse after Umlimo, the god of the Makalanga, was considered so
+powerful.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTEEN
+
+Later Visits
+
+The missionary stands to the native for religion and education, for all
+the help he may get to make his life cleaner, more moral, and more in
+keeping with ideals of the white man at his best.--M. S. Evans.
+
+
+In the year 1910 it was my privilege, on returning from a furlough to
+Natal, to again visit Matopo, after an absence of nearly four years.
+Bishop and Mrs. Steigerwald were at that time in America on furlough,
+and Brother Doner and his wife, who was formerly Sister Sallie Kreider,
+and Sister Mary Heise were in charge of Matopo Mission. When I reached
+Bulawayo I found Brother Doner waiting to convey me to the mission. It
+was indeed a pleasure again to visit the place and to look into the
+faces of those natives who had grown very dear by reason of my long stay
+among them. Here it was my privilege to come into contact, for the first
+time, with raw heathendom, and to have the joy of seeing light enter
+darkened minds and souls born into the Kingdom. So it occupies a tender
+spot which later experiences cannot touch.
+
+There had been improvements made since I had left. Prominent among these
+were two substantial brick buildings, a house for the boys and one for
+the girls, and there were thirty-three boys occupying the one and three
+girls the other. There is a nice little band of believers at this
+place, some of whom I wish especially to mention. First is poor old
+blind Ngiga. Shortly after Elder Engle's death we found him at a kraal,
+destitute and afflicted, with no one seemingly to care for him and give
+him food. We carried or sent food to him for a time, and gave him a
+blanket, and he gradually gained strength. Thinking that exercise would
+do him good, Brother Lehman encouraged him to come to the mission for
+his food, as he was only a short distance away. He had lain for so long
+without exercising his body that at first it was with great difficulty
+that he reached the mission, but being supplied with food, he grew
+stronger and was enabled to walk the distance easily and to help himself
+a little. Some time after Elder Steigerwald came he treated him for his
+disease and built a hut and brought him to the mission to stay, as the
+loathsome disease with which he was afflicted had left him about blind.
+He, however, was converted and has been received into the Church. It is
+a pleasure to hear him now testify to Christ's saving power, and to
+praise the Lord for bringing the missionaries. Truly, the Lord is no
+Respecter of persons.
+
+Again, let us go to Buka's house. My readers will remember Buka, whom
+Sister Heise and I found upon the rocks eleven years before when we went
+in search of little Lomazwana. Yes, it is really he whose life and home
+looked so black to us that day. He moved to within about three miles of
+the mission, and his son Kolisa came to stay at the mission and go to
+school. The father became sick and Brother and Sister Doner visited him
+and ministered unto him. Then they built him a hut and made him more
+comfortable. He finally became a paralytic and unable to help himself,
+so Brother Steigerwald assisted them to get a home on the mission
+premises, and gave them gardens, so that they are now quite comfortable.
+The oldest daughter also accepted Christ, then the mother followed, and
+these two with the son are now members of the Church.
+
+My first Sunday at Matopo, in company with Brother and Sister Doner, I
+visited this home. A smile of recognition at once lighted up the face of
+the invalid father; and though he could not speak, the family
+interpreted the sounds he made. After he had expressed his welcome he
+said that though his body and speech were paralyzed, yet his heart was
+all right. During another visit he tried to explain how Jesus was
+dwelling within, and how glad he was that when he got "over there" he
+would not be sick. One could not help feeling that he had learned to
+know the Lord. Truly, affliction had proved a blessing to him.
+
+[Illustration: Building the Boys' House at Matopo, M. S.]
+
+[Illustration: Boys' Brick House at Matopo Mission.]
+
+There was a good school at Matopo, with Sister Heise and Matshuba as
+teachers. Brother Doners were very busy overseeing this work, as well as
+their own station at Mapani Mission, and they kindly took me to that
+place to see something of the work there. Nyamazana had had charge of
+the mission at Mapani for about six months and was doing good work,
+especially spiritually. He is Spirit-filled and alive to the
+responsibility resting upon him. He had charge of the Inquirers' Class
+and Sunday services, and the natives say that he preaches powerful
+sermons. He has a nice Christian wife, who is a help to him. There is a
+company of earnest believers at this place. Brother Doner erected a
+large brick church and a brick dwelling-house, which added greatly to
+the appearance and comfort of the work, and he deserves much credit for
+the work accomplished alone and single-handed in building.
+
+The first Friday in each month has been set apart by the missionaries in
+Africa as a day of prayer and fasting. On the Prayer Day in May of that
+year we were permitted to meet with the believers at Mapani Mission.
+Over seventy were assembled. They included the members of the Church
+here and those of the Inquirers' Class. We had a most precious waiting
+on the Lord and heard many soul-stirring prayers and testimonies. Many
+seemed to be reaching out for a greater fulness of the Spirit, while
+others were overflowing with the joy of the Lord. The work was most
+encouraging and the members steadfast, and the Lord had been pouring out
+His Spirit upon some of them in a marvelous manner, and our hearts were
+made to rejoice with them.
+
+We also spent a few days visiting some of the people and the schools
+taught by Brethren Nkwidini, Mlobeka, and Nyamazana. All three of these
+teachers were our former pupils and had been converted at Matopo.
+
+Brother and Sister Doner then took me to Mtyabezi Mission, after which
+they returned to Matopo. Mtyabezi is the mission station of Brother and
+Sister Frey, and a little over a year after it was opened Miss
+Elizabeth Engle also came to help in it. This was my first visit at the
+station, and I was made to rejoice at what the Lord was doing at this
+place. The buildings are pleasantly located at the foot of an immense
+kopje, which towers high above them in the background. A neat-looking
+brick church had been erected by Brother Frey, and well-built huts in
+which they were living at the time.
+
+[Illustration: A Native Christian's Home. Matshuba's.]
+
+Sister Frey had been doing the teaching, but at the time of my visit,
+Bunu, one of their pupils and converts, was teaching and doing excellent
+work. On Thursday Sisters Frey and Engle and myself went in the wagon to
+visit some members about eight miles distant, where we met with a warm
+reception among those who were Christians. At one place there was a
+Christian woman about sixty years of age, who seemed so happy in the
+Lord and so eager to make us welcome and comfortable during our stay.
+We were surprised to find in one of the kraals a native dressmaker who
+owned a sewing machine and had all the sewing she could do for her
+dark-skinned neighbors. The sisters have been teaching their girls and
+women to sew.
+
+In the evening about thirty natives, most of whom were believers,
+gathered around our campfire to hold service. We spoke for a time, and
+then a number gave a clear testimony to the saving power of Christ. We
+had to contrast this little company with some other gatherings which we
+have seen and heard in the hours of night in darkest Africa, where beer,
+the dance, licentiousness, and all forms of devil worship made night
+hideous. One can best understand what the Gospel message is doing for
+the people, if he first sees something of paganism.
+
+On Sunday at the mission there was a very impressive time, and when the
+altar call was given a number came forward. There were truly penitent
+hearts, among whom were a number of young men seeking to get right with
+God; also some girls and married people. Here was a woman whose husband
+had two wives, and she was much persecuted at home, but she wanted to
+follow the Lord, and piteously, in the midst of her sobs, she inquired
+what she should do. Then a Magdalene confessed that she had fallen into
+grievous sin, and like the one of old came with bitter tears to the feet
+of Jesus. Another's way was made hard on account of the unfaithfulness
+of her husband, and so on. But the one whose experience seemed the most
+touching was a woman of nearly sixty years. Her married daughter, who
+is a Christian, had been much in prayer for her mother, and so the woman
+came and with utter abandonment, seemingly, threw herself at the feet of
+Jesus, weeping and confessing her sins and saying, "I am a dog. Pick me
+up, Lord."
+
+At the opening of 1913 we were permitted to make another visit to the
+missions in this vicinity. This vacation was to be only a month, and as
+I had in the meantime been cut off from association with white people,
+except those at the mission, I concluded to spend the first few days in
+Bulawayo. The place had grown since we reached it, nearly fifteen years
+before, and although the growth had not been so rapid it was of an
+enduring, steady kind. The place is laid out on broad lines, with broad
+streets and roomy dwellings--no need for skyscrapers here. There are
+many fine, substantial-looking business blocks, and as one goes into the
+suburbs he sees many elegant, well-built dwelling-houses. There are fine
+churches, a good hospital, museum, and library, and two large government
+school buildings, each with a good dormitory attached. One of these is
+for boys and the other, which is on the opposite side of the town, is
+for girls. Here, as in all parts of South Africa, there is some
+industrial work in connection with the schools. Bulawayo has also many
+excellent stores and shops, so that one may purchase almost anything
+required, not only in the line of provisions, household goods, and
+clothing, but all lines of farming implements and many kinds of
+machinery. The heavy wagons, drawn by great rows of oxen, donkeys, and
+mules, are still to be seen, but there are also many dainty one-horse
+traps, as well as two-horse conveyances, and a large number of
+automobiles and motorcycles.
+
+There is attached to the town a large native location, for the heavy
+part of the work as well as the housework is about all done by native
+boys. They are all called "boys." In the eyes of their white employers
+the native seldom becomes a man. He may be an old boy or a young boy, a
+little boy or a big boy, but he is always a boy. On the other hand, in
+the eyes of many Europeans it is almost an insult to speak of their
+children as boys. In the early days one of the missionaries, in speaking
+to an old European lady, said something about her boy. She straightened
+herself proudly and with emphasis said, "My son." At the mission one day
+a native woman was begging very hard for a piece of cloth, and to
+strengthen her request she said, "I am your boy," evidently meaning that
+she belonged to me.
+
+[Illustration: Mtshabezi Church and School.]
+
+[Illustration: Mtshabezi Mission in 1910.]
+
+Although Bulawayo is the largest town in Southern Rhodesia, there are
+others, such as Salisbury, Gwelo, Victoria, and Gwanda, which deserve
+mention. Farmers are scattered throughout the country, especially along
+the high, rolling plain between Bulawayo and Salisbury. There are many
+valuable gold mines and many old gold workings to be found in various
+places. The most noted is Great Zimbabwe, near Victoria. It is said:
+"The ruins cover a large area, and on an eminence are the remains of a
+fortress, the walls of which are thirty feet high and ten feet thick,
+and built of cut stones put together without mortar, so closely-fitting
+that a knife can hardly be inserted between them. Smelting crucibles,
+with gold in them, ingot moulds, and spears have been found." Some think
+that the Sabeans from Arabia worked these about 3,000 years ago. This is
+thought by some to be the "gold of Ophir." Ruins on a smaller scale are
+to be found in various places. Not far from Mapani Mission we saw a
+circular wall made of wedge-shaped stones, nicely fitted together. The
+country is also rich in iron ore, and at Wankie is the great coal-mining
+district. All these places furnish abundant work for all the natives of
+Rhodesia, and are also centers for mission work.
+
+January 1, I was again taken to Motopo Mission, not with the slow,
+patient donkeys of fifteen years ago, but with the swifter mules. Many
+changes have taken place among the natives surrounding the mission since
+1898. On our first entering this valley the natives had just fled and
+hid themselves away in these rocks at the close of the Rebellion. They
+were then very poor, without flocks and herds, and had few gardens, and
+very little of the land had ever been brought under cultivation. Since
+then the natives have gradually come out of their hiding-places and
+settled down to their work. Under the influence of peace and better
+teaching their surroundings have greatly changed. There are more natives
+near the mission than at first, and they have sheep, goats, and cattle,
+and some of them have plows and oxen to draw them, so that they can plow
+their large gardens. Every available place near the mission has been
+brought under cultivation, but not in the old, laborious way with human
+oxen, so that the wives are not the slaves they once were. Of course,
+in the absence of the men at work the women often hold the plow, but
+they have more time to keep house. One of the officials affirms that the
+best way of doing away with polygamy is by introducing civilized ways of
+farming.
+
+The people began by bringing their oxen to Brother Steigerwald to be
+trained, and then he helped them to procure plows, and they still come
+to him for help in trouble. The 3,000-acre farm is far too small for all
+who desire to live near the mission. If he had twice the amount of land
+it would soon become filled with natives, who would thus be near the
+mission and under the influence of the Gospel.
+
+Let us visit some of the houses and see what changes have taken place.
+Here first is the home of Matshuba. As he was first in the fold, he is
+worthy of first notice. He lives in a small, neatly-built brick house,
+with a well-swept yard inclosed by a fence. Inside the house are
+homemade bedsteads, chairs and tables, and here is Matshuba the same as
+of yore. He is older and has fought many battles since that first day
+when, as a little boy, he came and watched the newcomers. He has found
+the conflict severe and almost overpowering at times. It has left some
+scars, but, praise God! he has come off victorious at last, and in a
+more humble spirit he is following the meek and lowly Savior. He is
+Elder Steigerwald's right-hand man and is capable of turning his hand to
+almost any kind of work. He can take the blacksmith tools and mend the
+large three-disc plow; he can make use of the small engine and grind the
+meal for the native food, or do any other kind of work about the place.
+Best of all, he can go out and tell the people about Jesus. He had hoped
+that the elder's many-sided ability might be his, and he seems to have
+had his wish. He could secure much larger pay as an engineer in the
+mines, but he feels that his place is in the Lord's work. May he have
+our prayers that he may always find God's grace sufficient.
+
+[Illustration: Mtshabezi--Baptismal Scene.]
+
+Here too is his wife, Makiwa. She was also educated at Matopo Mission,
+where she learned not only in school, but also in the kitchen and
+sewing-room, that she might know how to take care of her home and
+family. A faithful helpmate she has been to her husband and a blessing
+in the Church. Here are their little boy and girl, whom they are
+bringing up in the fear of the Lord. This old woman, also neatly
+dressed, is Matshuba's mother, long a slave to her old religion, her
+superstitious ideas, her beer and her tobacco. Now she has accepted
+Christ as her Savior and He has cleansed her and she is in the Church.
+And this bright-looking girl is her daughter, Sixpence. She was only
+about four or five years old when we came to Matopo. Now she is a tall,
+fine-looking Christian woman and well taught. She has on a neat-looking
+black dress which, Sister Steigerwald tells me, she cut and sewed
+without any help from the missionaries. Yes, this is a Christian home,
+from which we hope and pray that the evils of heathendom have flown
+forever.
+
+There are others. First is Anyana, long a faithful helper of the
+mission, and his wife, Citiwa, also one of our girls. Then comes Siyaya,
+who had some falls, but he has at last got his feet on the Rock and is
+helping to tell others of Christ. Mahlenhle is also here. He is the same
+faithful boy as of old, one of those who never give their missionary any
+uneasiness. He is always ready and willing to do what he can, which is
+not a little. He teaches, he preaches, and interprets for others, or he
+can go out and handle the oxen and see to the farming. There are also
+many new ones in church and school, several of whom are assisting in
+teaching. There are forty-two boys staying at the mission for school,
+and a number coming to day-school. Sister Heise has plenty to do, for
+she teaches both early morning and midday, and is doing excellent work.
+There are about 150 regular attendants at the Sunday services. The
+majority of them are young men and women and children. Almost all are
+respectably clothed and are seeking to know the Lord. The girls who
+desire to stay at the missionaries' and be trained are now sent to the
+Girls' School at Mtyabezi Mission. There is a large sewing class at this
+place for those who wish to learn. Two new missionaries, Brother Levi
+Steckly and Sister Cora Alvis, are also assisting in the work at Matopo.
+
+I went out among the people, eager to secure a snapshot of a kraal, as
+they formerly were, but I failed. They are all better built and more
+cleanly than formerly. In every village there are some who wear European
+clothing, for even if they have not accepted Christ as their Savior,
+some have put on the garments of civilization. There are, of course,
+many among the older ones who have not changed much, and who have always
+hardened their hearts and stiffened their necks against the truth. This
+has been the condition of the world ever since the Fall, and it will no
+doubt continue until all sin and wickedness shall be put under foot and
+He shall reign in righteousness. If the command had been "Go into all
+the world and make disciples of every creature," missionaries would have
+given up long ago in despair. Miss Carmichael, in her work, "Things as
+They Are in Missionary Work in Southern India," says, "It is required in
+a steward that a man be found faithful. Praise God! it does not say
+'successful.'" The same will apply to missionary work in Africa.
+
+During the year of our visit the rains were unusually late, and, as the
+harvest had been quite light the previous year, some of the people were
+in great need of grain. Brother Steigerwald was doing all in his power
+to get grain out from Bulawayo for them. The six mules were hauling out
+every week to the extent of their strength, for farmers are not allowed
+to take their oxen on the road, for fear disease may spread among the
+cattle. As the wagon returned from Bulawayo with fifteen 200-pound bags
+of grain on it, the people, who had been watching for its return,
+hastened to come to the mission to purchase. Grain was expensive, about
+seven or eight dollars a bag; but as soon as it was unloaded it was
+sold. Their people must have food, and many of the able-bodied natives
+had been away to work and thus procured money, and perhaps a month's
+wages would buy one bag of grain. Others were trying to sell some of the
+cattle and sheep for grain. Although many of these old people who were
+buying had not accepted Christ as their Savior, yet they have absolute
+confidence in His messenger, Elder Steigerwald, and they come to him in
+their difficulties, knowing that he has a kind heart. He is their
+father, as Sister Steigerwald is their mother.
+
+A love feast had been announced for Mtyabezi Mission the middle of
+January, and arrangements had been made for all the white workers and as
+many of the native converts as possible to attend. Mr. Steckly and Mr.
+Hemming went across the hills, twenty-five miles, on foot, and the rest
+of us went by wagon around on the road--a distance of about forty-five
+miles. This road was down through the hills in the direction of Mapani
+Mission. We started on Thursday morning, sleeping out on the veldt
+during the night, and reached Mtyabezi on Friday afternoon.
+
+Brother Freys were at that time in America on furlough, but the work was
+ably carried on by Brother Walter Winger and his wife, formerly Abbie
+Bert, and Sister Elizabeth Engle. This is now known as our Girls'
+School. Twenty-five girls were then staying at the mission, and they are
+being trained in housework and sewing, in addition to school and outside
+work. They are also supplying some of our Christian boys with Christian
+wives, and Christian marriage is taking the place of heathen rites. In
+addition to these there was a good-sized day-school, which was under the
+excellent management of Miss Sadie Book. There were also several large
+out-schools in connection with this mission. A large brick house was
+nearly completed and they were at the same time living in it. This part
+of the country south of the hills was especially suffering from drought
+at this time. Although this was in the middle of what should have been
+the rainy season, yet no rains had fallen, and the entire country was
+bare, not a blade of grass was to be seen, and the grain sown had not
+yet sprouted. Brother Winger was busy with his wagon, getting grain out
+from the station ten miles away to help the people.
+
+This was the first love feast in Southern Rhodesia that I had been
+permitted to attend for nearly seven years, and I had looked eagerly
+forward to this gathering. The joy of seeing the natives assemble for
+the occasion was too deep for words. First to come were some of the
+communicants from Matopo Mission on Friday evening. The sisters were
+walking in front, Indian file, with their blankets and Sunday clothing
+tied up in a bundle and carried on their heads, and Sixpence leading the
+way. Following these were the brethren, with Matshuba bringing up the
+rear. It was now sundown and they had walked twenty-five miles and were
+tired, so they were shown their places for the night, and after eating
+their supper, and prayer, they retired. The next morning early a similar
+crowd came from Mapani Station, fifteen miles distant. A number also
+gathered from the vicinity of Mtyabezi and out-schools on Saturday
+morning. The little church could not hold all and an overflow meeting
+was held on the outside. There were also a number of members who could
+not be present.
+
+Saturday morning was devoted to a short discourse and self-examination
+meeting, followed by testimonies. It was an inspiration to look over the
+crowded house and listen to the earnest testimonies following one after
+another in rapid succession. Often four or five would be on their feet
+at once, and yet there was no confusion or disorder, as each one quietly
+waited for his time to speak. We had to say to ourselves, again and
+again, "What hath God wrought!" We could not avoid contrasting the early
+days of nakedness and midnight heathendom with this enlightened,
+well-dressed company before us. In fact, the contrast was so marked that
+one could scarcely bridge the chasm even in imagination.
+
+[Illustration: Girls at Mtshabezi Mission.]
+
+In the afternoon seventeen from Mtyabezi Mission and its out-schools
+were received into the Church by the right hand of fellowship. On
+account of the drought and lack of water in the streams, the baptism was
+deferred until a later date. There were several others who made
+application, but after examination it was thought that some were not
+ready. On Saturday evening the natives had a meeting of their own and
+were addressed by Myamazana, while the missionaries had an English
+service and were addressed by Bishop Steigerwald.
+
+On Sunday morning we again gathered to observe the ordinance of
+feet-washing and to commemorate the sufferings and death of our Savior.
+There were over 300 natives gathered together, nearly all of whom were
+either members or inquirers. The native communicants were 129 and the
+white ones eleven, making 140 in all, and these assembled in the Church
+while the rest were addressed by Mahlenhle and others on the outside. We
+had now a better opportunity of looking into the faces of those who had
+been received into Church fellowship. As our missionaries are in close
+touch with their people and know pretty well their private lives, we
+knew something of the company before us.
+
+It was indeed an intelligent and respectable-looking company of men and
+women, one to be proud of, if I might use the term. Its respectability
+did not depend so much on the fact that they had thrown off the undress
+of paganism and had donned the garments of civilization. That is not
+necessarily an adjunct of Christianity, nor is it all due to Christian
+influence. While the missionaries have been laboring these years to win
+souls to Christ, many civilizing influences have been at work throughout
+the country, some of which have been previously mentioned. Stores with
+European clothing are to be found everywhere, and many natives discard
+their heathen garb for civilized clothing and yet know absolutely
+nothing of Christ and His power to save. Some of these well-dressed
+natives about the towns have learned far more of the evils of
+civilization than of its virtues, and hide under their new dress an even
+blacker heart than they did under their old pagan exterior. Then too we
+are sorry to say that intelligence in the sense of having been at a
+mission station and learning to read does not necessarily make them
+Christians. Some of these also, to the great sorrow of their teachers,
+have made poor use of their knowledge.
+
+It is because the missionary sees this, and knows only too well the many
+pitfalls before their unwary feet; it is because he realizes, as
+probably no one else does, what it means to these poor souls to be so
+suddenly brought from the dense darkness of heathendom into the glaring
+lights of modern civilization, and how unprepared they are for it all,
+how little they know to shun the evil and choose the good; it is because
+he knows how helpless these are who have suddenly broken loose from
+their old tribal laws and customs--some of which were beneficial--and
+have been cast on the untried sea of strange and bewildering
+surroundings, without any anchor to hold or compass and chart to guide
+them--I say it is because the missionary knows all this and much more
+that he can rejoice over such a crowd of fine-looking, stalwart men and
+women as were gathered there that day to commemorate the sufferings and
+death of our Lord.
+
+He sees in the company before him Christian homes, free from ignorance
+and superstition, free from witchcraft and pagan worship, free from the
+beer, the filth, and degradation of their neighbors. He sees in this
+company, homes free from the licentiousness and vice so common not only
+among their heathen neighbors, but, sad to say, also among some of their
+white ones. The missionary can rejoice that here are men and women who
+have the Anchor in their souls and are standing as beacon lights to
+their heathen neighbors and friends. It means much to them on the one
+hand to break off from their old heathen lives; it means much on the
+other not to be allured by the evils of the white man's civilization and
+the inducements so often thrown out to lead lives of sin. To come out
+from all these and accept Christ as Savior and be true to Him would seem
+to be an almost Herculean task, and much greater than those in Christian
+lands are called upon to perform. But we know that it has been and is
+being accomplished. While one feels to rejoice over these sheep, at the
+same time he bears a heavy heart for those other ones which have been
+devoured by the grievous wolves.
+
+The missionary is about the only force that makes for righteousness
+among the natives, and he would often feel that his task was an
+impossible one did he not continually realize that he is only under
+orders of Him Who is sure in the end to win. Lest some may think that I
+am overestimating some of these things, let me again quote Mr. Evans,
+who is an authority on native affairs from a governmental standpoint. He
+says:
+
+"What is effecting the most profound change in the native is his contact
+with the white man at all points, and this change is proceeding with
+ever-accelerating speed. The fundamental difference between these
+changes and those wrought by the missionaries is that, in the former
+there is little building up of any salutary influence to take the place
+of the old wholesome restraints, whilst in the latter religion and
+morality are inculcated and replace the checks weakened or destroyed."
+
+The work in Southern Rhodesia is by no means completed; it is only
+fairly begun. The natives are just beginning to see the advantages of
+Christian teaching, and are calling more and more loudly for schools,
+and they are eagerly availing themselves of the opportunities afforded.
+There is a large field to work and the time is opportune. Let every one
+of God's children ask himself what his duty and privileges are in taking
+possession of the country for God. Our people should have at least one
+more station of white missionaries here as well as others for native
+workers. Shall we leave to themselves these people, who are emerging
+from centuries of darkness, to the influence of a corrupt civilization?
+Our missionaries are laboring to the extent of their ability and the
+means at their disposal. The work can advance only as it is backed up by
+the people of the homeland, together with their prayers and money.
+Something depends upon you, my reader, whoever you may be. What part
+have you had in the winning of these souls? What part are you going to
+have in those yet unborn into the Kingdom?
+
+
+
+
+PART TWO
+
+
+
+
+MACHA MISSION
+
+"Lo, I am with you always, even unto the end of the world"
+
+                                     --Matt. 28: 20
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE
+
+Bound for the Zambezi
+
+
+Africa is a gigantic and dark continent. In fact, it is several
+continents in one. Although nearly every one seems to know something of
+its immensity, yet very few persons realize it unless they have resided
+for a time in some portion of its vast interior; even then their
+knowledge of it is likely to be quite vague. For centuries travelers of
+various nationalities sought to penetrate it, many of whom perished in
+the effort, while others brought back wonderful stories of peril and
+adventure.
+
+It remained for David Livingstone, however, to unearth the secrets of
+Central Africa and to expose to the gaze of Christendom something of its
+condition and needs. He inspired missionaries to press into the narrow
+opening thus made, and to carry the light of the Gospel to the millions
+bound in chains of darkness and blackest midnight. Messengers have been
+heeding the call and have been kindling fires, one here and another
+there, in the darkness.
+
+In dealing with missionary work in Africa we must continually keep in
+mind the fact that the natives are much scattered. The population cannot
+definitely be ascertained, but it is variously estimated at from 130 to
+150 millions of people. These are scattered over a territory equal in
+area to the United States of America, Europe, India, and China
+combined. In certain portions, such as the Sahara and Kalahari Deserts,
+there are very few natives, while the lower plains and river valleys
+support a large population. These alluvial plains, where nature affords
+an abundance of food with a minimum of labor, offer great inducements to
+the easy-going Africans. Here they settle in large numbers, not greatly
+inconvenienced by the unhealthfulness of the locality. Pampered by the
+amazing prodigality of nature on all sides, so that they need not exert
+themselves much for food, and requiring little clothing in this mild
+temperature, they settle themselves to the enjoyment of their animal
+natures.
+
+The missionary, as he enters these swamps, which are reeking with
+malaria and other death-breeding diseases, takes his life in his hand;
+for Africa has the unenviable reputation of being the "white man's
+graveyard." It is true the medical fraternity are fast solving some of
+the problems which confront everyone entering the country, yet many
+difficulties still lie in the path of the missionaries who desire to
+settle in the more densely populated regions.
+
+In the old days of Dr. Livingstone and his immediate successors, it
+required almost a small fortune to penetrate Central Africa. In addition
+to this the way by wagon or by native carriers was long and tiresome,
+and the traveler was subject to delays by swollen rivers, dying oxen,
+and many other things. He was often in danger of his life by wild
+animals or still wilder men, so that some never reached their desired
+goal. Even after missionaries had succeeded in establishing mission
+stations, they suffered much in health from exposure and lack of
+comfortable homes, and they were obliged to live on the coarse native
+food much of the time, on account of the difficulty in procuring
+supplies, even though they might have had sufficient money to procure
+better food.
+
+At the present day the railroads are eliminating much of this
+difficulty. Their advance is accomplishing more than any other agency in
+opening up the continent to the Gospel. They are extending right into
+the heart of the country, making use of the plateaus on which to build,
+and bringing the necessities of life and even many of its luxuries
+within reach of the white inhabitants.
+
+In the year 1904 the Cape to Cairo Railroad was completed as far as the
+Victoria Falls on the Zambezi River, a distance by rail of 1,642 miles
+from Cape Town. This part of Africa as far as the Zambezi is generally
+known as South Africa. If one examines a map, it is easy to be seen that
+in size it is a very inconspicuous part of the African Continent; but in
+point of modern civilization and twentieth-century methods of doing
+things it compares very favorably with any other country. Especially can
+this be said of the towns and vicinity, but there are yet many natives
+who are without the Gospel. On my return to Africa, in 1905, the
+railroad was being extended north of the Zambezi, the objective point at
+that time being Broken Hill, making a total distance of 2,016 miles from
+Cape Town.
+
+The facts just mentioned had nothing to do with our call to interior
+Africa, for that came before we knew what the actual conditions were and
+before the railroad north of Bulawayo was built. The opening made by
+the railroad, however, had much to do in making the advance practicable
+at this time.
+
+After our return from America we engaged in the work at Matopo and
+Mapani for nearly a year, and continued looking to the Lord to ascertain
+His will as to the time of opening the new work, for we were hoping that
+there would be other missionaries ready to move out. Money was on hand
+for the purpose. This meant something. While I was in America, as the
+needs of pagan Africa were set forth, one after another would slip a
+bill into my hand, saying, "I too want a share in pushing on that work
+into the interior of Africa." What did it all mean--the lack of workers,
+the ready money and the intense longing in my own soul to carry the
+Light to those people? We had now waited a year with no prospects of
+others being ready to go.
+
+[Illustration: Victoria Falls Bridge.]
+
+Brother Steigerwald was sending to America for a large Studebaker wagon,
+and he advised that one also be ordered for the forward move, that both
+might be sent out together. These arrived in May, 1906. Ndhlalambi had
+felt called some time before to carry the Gospel beyond the Zambezi.
+Although he was quite young, he was proving to be a very steadfast and
+useful helper, both at Matopo and at Mapani Mission. When they were
+opening the latter station, Sister Emma Doner wrote to me--as I was in
+America at the time--and said, "Ndhlalambi is such a good helper in
+erecting our buildings, as Levi has been quite sick. Perhaps the Lord is
+preparing him so that he can build for you in Interior Africa." At that
+time, however, I little thought that it would be necessary to rely
+upon him for that work.
+
+The time drew near when a decision must be made, either to move out or
+to postpone the opening of the work for another year, and much time was
+spent out among the rocks alone with Him. From a human standpoint it
+appeared to be a hazardous undertaking to enter such a new country, and
+many obstacles were in the way. I had been invited to spend the year at
+Mapani Mission, and was quite ready to do so, providing that was the
+Lord's will for me. On the other hand, if He desired that the work
+beyond the Zambezi be opened this year, all power is in His hands; it
+would be a small affair for Him to go before and prepare the way. The
+more we looked to Him to ascertain His will the stronger the conviction
+became that the time was at hand. Sister Adda Engle also expressed
+herself as being ready for the work. The rest of the missionaries were
+requested to make the matter a special subject of prayer. They did so,
+and a few felt that an onward move was to be made; but the majority said
+they did not have a clear understanding of the Lord's will in reference
+to it.
+
+It was hoped that Brother Steigerwald might be able to accompany us to
+open up the work; but there were so many lines of work engaging his
+attention at the time that it was impossible for him to leave. He,
+however, fitted out the new wagon with a strong body and a fine large
+tent, 6 x 13 feet over the whole, and as far as possible put everything
+in readiness for the journey.
+
+Our company included, besides Sister Engle and myself, the two native
+Christian boys, Ndhlalambi Moyo and Gomo Sibanda. The latter was going
+chiefly for the manual labor. They were both trustworthy and we knew
+they could be depended upon. It was again the 4th of July when we
+started on this northern journey, just eight years from the day on which
+we had left Bulawayo for Matopo. Brother and Sister Steigerwald and
+Sister Frey accompanied us as far as Bulawayo, expecting to aid us in
+purchasing supplies and to assist us in getting started north. Mr.
+Jackson, the English magistrate at Fort Usher, gave us letters of
+introduction to the Civil Commissioner and the Administrator of Northern
+Rhodesia, as the country north of the Zambezi is called.
+
+Unfortunately it was found, on reaching Bulawayo, that much of the
+business could not be attended to that week on account of holidays, so
+that our friends were obliged to return to their station. The Monday
+following was a busy and trying day on account of the many things to be
+attended to and the long distances to be traversed. We wished to
+purchase supplies for the greater part of the year, for we knew not what
+awaited us and where the next would come from; and it was also necessary
+that all the goods be sent on the same train on which we went.
+Everything was finally accomplished, and July 10, 1906, found all our
+supplies, about 2,800 pounds in weight, and the wagon, on the train
+bound for Victoria Falls.
+
+As Sister Engle and I entered our compartment on the train and began to
+move northward, many conflicting emotions stirred within us, and it was
+with much trembling and looking to the Lord that we went forward. We
+knew not what opposition confronted us; for we had been informed by
+those who knew something of the country that the officials might not
+allow us to proceed farther than the Zambezi River. Only the
+consciousness that we were under Divine orders gave courage to proceed.
+We had the promise, "Commit thy way unto the Lord; trust also in Him and
+He shall bring it to pass," and we were resting in it.
+
+The journey of 280 miles to Victoria Falls is through new territory.
+There were no towns--nothing but small station houses--and the country
+is wild and in some places quite jungly-looking and infested by numerous
+wild animals. At Wankie we passed through the region of the coal-mining
+district, where there is a large vein of coal which is a most valuable
+adjunct of the railroad. Victoria Falls was at that time the terminus of
+the government-owned railroads, and the limit to which regular trains
+ran; and we could not avoid wondering what was awaiting us beyond that.
+
+As we stepped off the train at Victoria Falls a gentleman approached us,
+and introducing himself as a forwarding agent, inquired if he could be
+of any assistance to us. He inquired if we were not from Matopo Mission,
+and at the same time stated that he had met Mr. Steigerwald in Bulawayo.
+What a surprise and relief it was to us, for he seemed to be God's
+especial messenger, sent to help us on the way. When he learned of the
+situation he at once set our minds at rest by the assurance that he
+would attend to everything and see that the goods and wagon, as well as
+ourselves, were safely taken across the Zambezi River to the town of
+Livingstone, seven miles on the other side. The railroad at this time
+was completed to Broken Hill, 374 miles farther north, but trains were
+run only occasionally. We were obliged to wait at this place two days
+before an engine could be procured to take us over to Livingstone.
+
+[Illustration: Main View of Victoria Falls, 1-1/4 Miles wide.]
+
+An opportunity was thus afforded of viewing that magnificent sight,
+Victoria Falls, which was discovered by David Livingstone in 1855, but
+of which little was known until comparatively late years. This
+surpassingly grand bit of scenery is considered by some people to
+outrival that pride of all Americans, Niagara Falls. In dimensions, at
+least, it certainly does surpass the American wonder. The Zambezi is
+1,936 yards wide where it takes its mighty plunge of 400 feet into a
+vast chasm below, only to be turned into clouds of spray again and rise
+perhaps a thousand feet into the air. Rainbows play about it, forming a
+scene of wonderful beauty and grandeur. The rock over which the river
+flows has a gigantic V-shaped crack about 300 feet wide, into which
+chasm the water plunges. The opposite wall is unbroken, save at one
+place where it forms a gorge 300 feet wide, through which narrow channel
+all the water of the falls, over a mile wide, escapes. Along this
+opposite wall of rock is "Rain Forest," so called because it is always
+dripping and, needless to say, the vegetation here is most luxuriant.
+Six hundred and sixty feet below the gorge is a railroad bridge, 650
+feet long and 420 feet above the water, the central span being 500 feet.
+The view of these falls greatly changes at different seasons of the
+year. To see them at the height of their magnificence, one should visit
+them at the close of the rainy season in April, as at that time the
+volume of water is much greater. At the close of the dry season, in
+October or November, when the water is shallow, the Falls are often much
+broken in some places. As this is one of the greatest of the sights of
+South Africa, thousands of tourists visit the scene, and a hotel had
+been erected near the railroad at this place.
+
+Our agent informed us that on July 13 an engine would come and transfer
+ourselves, together with the goods and wagon, to the Livingstone station
+on the north side. For this purpose the wagon and goods were loaded on
+an open truck, and as there was no passenger car, we too climbed up into
+the wagon, on the truck, and in this manner crossed the Zambezi on that
+railroad bridge, 420 feet high. At Livingstone the car was met by
+another agent who, with his boys, assisted by ours, unloaded the car and
+placed the wagon under the shade of a tree. Here it was fitted up as a
+dwelling-place for Sister Engle and myself for the remainder of the
+journey. It was a home on wheels. We praised the Lord that He had cared
+for us this far on our journey and permitted our feet to be planted on
+the north side of the river. Oxen could not be taken beyond the Zambezi
+for fear of carrying disease, so it was necessary that some be purchased
+before we proceeded farther.
+
+This part of the country, like Southern Rhodesia, is under control of
+the British Charter Company, but with a separate government. Unlike
+that, it does not belong to the English by right of conquest, but
+through concessions granted by Lewanika, the King of Barotseland, and
+paramount chief of the country, for the purpose of exploration and
+development. The country is occupied by three main tribes--the Barotse,
+living along the Upper Zambezi and west of Victoria Falls; the Baila, or
+Mashukulumbwe, as they are often called, living along the Kafue River
+and north, and the Batonga, on the plateau between the Kafue and Zambezi
+Rivers and east.
+
+Those familiar with his life will remember that this is part of the
+country explored by Dr. Livingstone during his first and second great
+missionary journeys through Central Africa, from 1853 to about 1860. The
+Barotse at that time were subject to the Makololo, who had emigrated
+from Basutoland and settled along the Upper Zambezi. The Makololo
+warriors were also responsible for the death of the first party of
+missionaries to this part of the country. I refer to the expedition
+under Price and Helmore, sent out in 1859 in response to Dr.
+Livingstone's urgent call. Nearly all of this party of missionaries died
+from poison administered by these natives, to the great sorrow of the
+African explorer. His memorable prophecy, "God will require the blood of
+His servants at the hands of you Makololo," was soon fulfilled. It is
+said that just four years afterwards the Barotse arose against their
+rulers, the Makololo, and slew them and asserted their independence.
+
+It was in this part of Africa too that Livingstone first saw some of the
+evils of the slave trade, and in 1873 he wrote to Mr. Gordon Bennett:
+"When I dropped among the Makololo and others in this central region, I
+saw a fair prospect for the regeneration of Africa. More could have been
+done in the Makololo country [which is today known as Barotseland] than
+was done by St. Patrick in Ireland, but I did not know that I was
+surrounded by the Portuguese slave trade; a barrier to all
+improvement.... All I can say in my loneliness is, may Heaven's richest
+blessing come down on every one, American, Englishman, Turk, who will
+help to heal this open sore of the world." A very remarkable
+circumstance connected with this utterance is that he evidently did not
+imagine at that time that the healing was to come first from yet another
+country, France. Just six years (in 1879) after those memorable words
+were uttered, Rev. F. Coillard settled in Barotseland. He and his heroic
+wife deserve of all people in this part of the country to be called
+Livingstone's successors.
+
+These natives could speak the Suto language, and as the Scriptures had
+been translated into that language for years, those books could be used
+here among the Barotse, just as Zulu could be used in Matabeleland. In
+the opening up of that work, Christian natives from Basutoland, a
+thousand miles farther south, volunteered to accompany Coillard. It is
+said, "Just on the border of Barotseland one of these native
+evangelists, Eleazer, died. 'God be blessed,' he exclaimed, when he knew
+that he must give up his heart's desire of preaching Christ to the
+Barotse, 'God be blessed! the door is open. My grave will be a finger
+post of the mission,'" as quoted by James Steward. So that it may be
+seen that consecrated Africans also did their part in helping to heal
+this sore. Coillard and his successors have ever since carried on a most
+far-reaching work in Barotseland. About twenty years after the work was
+opened, Brother Engle had the great pleasure of accidentally meeting
+this venerable messenger of the Cross, Mr. Coillard, in a store in
+Bulawayo. His hair then was white, but he was as intensely interested as
+ever in his work, and was in a hurry to be back to his field of labor.
+As, at that time, there was no railroad farther than Bulawayo, he had to
+travel about 300 miles by ox-wagon and then by boat on the river. The
+labors of the missionaries and the advantages of good government have
+accomplished marvelous results in bringing peace and safety to this
+valley, yet even at this late date there are not wanting those who, if
+they dared, would rejoice to resurrect the old slave trade.
+
+Among the Baila tribe the Primitive Methodists of England, after
+encountering many difficulties along the way, had begun a work in 1893
+at Nkala, and a few years later at Nanzela. In 1905 they also opened one
+at Nambala, about seventy-five miles north of the Kafue. Although they
+were doing excellent work, they had as yet been able to reach only a
+small portion of the Baila tribe when we appeared on the scene. There
+were no missionaries among the Batonga tribe living on the plateau
+between the Zambezi and Kafue Rivers, until 1915, when a mission was
+opened about 175 miles northeast of Livingstone by Mr. Anderson, of the
+Seventh Day Adventist Mission. This was just one year before we reached
+the country. Livingstone in his journey had passed through much of this
+country, including Kalomo, Monze Tete, and the Kafue River.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO
+
+From the Zambezi River to Macha
+
+
+The town, Livingstone, was, in 1906, quite small, and consisted chiefly
+of government buildings, postoffice, native stores, railway station, and
+shops. Some of these buildings, especially those owned by the
+government, were well made and ant-proof. The town was at a short
+distance from the railway station and seemed to have been built on a
+hill of yellow sand, which sand was so deep that walking seemed almost
+impossible, and riding was very little improvement over walking.
+
+Our first step was to call on the Commissioner, Mr. Sykes, and present
+the letter of introduction. He met us in a friendly and accommodating
+spirit, but gave no encouragement to proceed on into the interior, owing
+to the newness of the country and the unsettled condition of the natives
+in some places. His version of the work accomplished by missionaries was
+not very flattering, but that did not deter us in the least, as one
+generally becomes accustomed to hearing such things. He, however, did
+not offer to throw any obstacles in the way of our progress, but stated
+that it would be necessary for us to have an interview with the
+Administrator (governor) at Kalomo, the capital of North Rhodesia. He
+expressed his willingness to do whatever lay in his power to aid us in
+the undertaking, and advised that the purchasing of trained oxen for
+drawing the wagon be left in his hands, and he would see to it that good
+ones at a fair price were secured. This generous offer was most
+gratefully accepted. We were also invited to his home, and were most
+hospitably entertained by his estimable wife and his sister, and were
+made to feel that as yet we were not beyond the reach of civilization.
+They were living in a well-built mosquito-proof dwelling, which had been
+made in England and sent out ready to be put together.
+
+The next day a European brought to our tent ten trained oxen, with a
+note from Mr. Sykes, that he had proved these and found them
+satisfactory. The price too was below what had been expected. Thus
+equipped we were prepared to proceed to Kalomo, a distance by wagon road
+of nearly one hundred miles. A boy was employed to lead the oxen and a
+native government messenger was also sent along as guide. Gomo was to do
+the driving, but the man of whom the oxen had been purchased said he did
+not think the boy knew much about driving oxen, and so it proved later.
+There were occasional passenger trains running north through Kalomo, and
+some of the people at Livingstone had advised us to take the train that
+far and let the boys bring the wagon. Others, however, thought it best
+for us to stay by the wagon and supplies, as there was no suitable hotel
+at Kalomo, and it would be over a week before the wagon could reach that
+place, so we decided to remain with our supplies.
+
+The wagon was heavily laden, the roads were rough, and rivers
+bridgeless. About ten miles out from Livingstone, in going over a piece
+of rocky road, the reach of the wagon broke and further progress was
+impossible. Had the drivers been accustomed to this wild country, and
+the accidents incidental to it, they might soon have made another reach
+with timber from the forest surrounding us, as they often did in later
+years. At that time, however, we were helpless. What was to be done?
+There was only one course open, and that was to take the wagon back to
+Livingstone and have it mended. Some of the party remained with the
+wagon and supplies and the rest of us walked back to Livingstone to see
+what could be done. The question wanted to force itself upon us, Were we
+after all mistaken as to the Lord's leadings?
+
+Mr. Sykes was again the Good Samaritan, when he heard our story. The
+next morning he sent out conveyances to bring all back to Livingstone,
+and he and Mrs. Sykes insisted on our occupying the guest house until
+our wagon was repaired. There were no hotels in the place, and we were
+informed that prospectors and others often made use of the government
+house for an indefinite length of time. They said they were glad the
+accident had not occurred forty or fifty miles out, beyond the reach of
+help. We too felt deeply thankful that it had been no worse, and in a
+short time we were made to rejoice that there had been an accident; for
+it was soon evident that it was a blessing in disguise, and God had
+permitted it for a purpose. There were two roads to Kalomo, and neither
+was much traveled at the time. We learned that the one on which our
+guide was taking us was not well supplied with water, was infested with
+many savage beasts and the tsetse fly, which kills oxen, so that it was
+altogether unsafe for the journey.
+
+While we were waiting at Livingstone this second time, a great deal of
+information was gleaned in reference to the people and country north of
+Kalomo, called the Mapanza Sub-district. We learned that the people
+there were quiet and peaceable and that there were no missionaries in
+that section of the country. We also met a gentleman from Kalomo, who
+proved of assistance when we at last reached that place. Again
+information was received that a number of wagons under Mr. King were
+proceeding north to within a short distance of Kalomo, and if we could
+travel in their company, all difficulties in regard to the route, the
+finding of water for the oxen, and dangers along the way would be at an
+end. A driver accustomed to the country was also secured to take the
+wagon as far as Kalomo. Thus equipped we again started. As we left
+Livingstone, Mr. Sykes exclaimed, "I feel more in favor now of your
+going on than I did the first time."
+
+On the first day out our wagon came up with Mr. King's company, which
+consisted of five large wagons, all heavily laden with goods and each
+drawn by eighteen oxen. They were traveling north to within twenty-five
+miles of Kalomo, and thence west and north to Tanganyika. We might have
+delayed a year and not have found so good an opportunity of traveling by
+wagon to Kalomo. We followed this train of wagons and had no anxious
+thought in reference to the journey. Traveling by ox-wagons is done
+chiefly at night, or from very early morning until 9 A. M. Then the oxen
+are outspanned and allowed to graze and rest during the heat of the day,
+while the travelers cook, eat, and rest. Late in the afternoon the oxen
+are again inspanned and they travel until about 9 or 10 P. M., when they
+stop for the night. One or two large fires of logs are built at each
+wagon and kept burning through the night to ward off wild beasts from
+the oxen. Animals are afraid of the fire; especially do lions love
+darkness rather than light, their favorite nights for prowling being the
+dark, rainy ones. This king of beasts, although the strongest, is by no
+means the bravest. He does his loudest roaring in the midst of his
+native haunts, far away from harm, and when near his prey, human or
+otherwise, his tread is most stealthy and catlike.
+
+Before retiring for the night the natives, especially, cook and eat.
+They often do with a small portion of food during the day, but before
+retiring they like an abundance of good porridge and meat. They then
+retire to rest, their favorite place being around the huge campfires.
+Sister Engle and I were very comfortably situated in the tent of the
+wagon. Two other difficulties likely to meet travelers in this part of
+the country are scarcity of water and the tsetse fly. If the latter is
+met with it is necessary to make the journey through the infested
+district entirely by night. Since the uninitiated are not familiar with
+the location of these districts, the oxen are often bitten without their
+knowledge, and death is certain, for as yet no remedy for the bite has
+been discovered. As for water, that is one of the great difficulties on
+these African plateaus, and at one time we were obliged to travel
+seventeen miles without seeing any. Since oxen, with heavily-laden
+wagons, travel slowly, this required the oxen to be inspanned three
+times before water was reached. Mr. King rode a horse and went in
+advance to look for water and camping places, and also for game, which
+generally furnishes a large proportion of the food, both for white
+people and black ones on such trips. We ourselves would be favored with
+a piece of delicious venison after such excursions. Water in casks was
+carried along from one watering place to another for cooking and
+drinking purposes, but it is never drunk without being boiled or made
+into tea, and even then it is often very muddy-looking.
+
+Mr. King was familiar with the country, and had formerly traded with the
+people in the vicinity of Macha, north of Kalomo, so that he could
+furnish all necessary information about the Mapanza district, to which
+we desired to go. This was the first time we heard the name of the place
+which was destined to be the future mission station. The information
+received from him proved invaluable later on, when the question of
+location was being considered. As the way thus opened, step by step, we
+were continually made to feel that the Lord was guiding and causing all
+things to work together for good toward the opening of the work, and our
+hearts were filled with gratitude for His many favors.
+
+The last forty miles of the journey were made alone, as we did not care
+to travel on Sunday, and the other wagons were soon to leave and
+proceed westward. We reached Kalomo August 1, after a journey of nine
+days. This place, although the chief seat of government, could not be
+designated a town. It was rather a scattered camp, containing two small
+stores, a postoffice, and the dwellings and offices of the government
+officials. The railway station was about three miles distant. Here the
+fate of the undertaking was to be decided, as to whether we should be
+permitted to proceed or be turned back. That morning in worship the Lord
+gave us Isaiah 41: 10 for a promise, which greatly encouraged our
+trembling hearts. We had now been absent from Bulawayo four weeks and
+had received no mail, as it had been ordered sent to this place; so the
+first journey was to the postoffice. I went for the mail alone, and
+inquired first for myself. The clerk exclaimed, "And Miss Engle, too?"
+and handed out a bundle of letters, all carefully laid together in a
+place by themselves. Evidently we were expected, and visitors were not
+common, especially women.
+
+It was necessary first to meet the secretary of the Lands' Department,
+so in the afternoon Sister Engle and I proceeded to his office. He had
+heard of our coming and absolutely refused a place in Mapanza district
+on which we might locate. His reasons were more or less plausible, and
+we were not wholly unprepared for his answer. We learned afterwards that
+we were not the only persons who had failed to receive encouragement
+from this gentleman. He added, however, that they could not hinder our
+proceeding farther if we felt so inclined. He suggested our going to
+Broken Hill, the terminus of the railroad, 280 miles northeast, as
+there were some white inhabitants there. That no doubt would have been a
+good opening for a mission station, as there were no missionaries there
+at this time, and only one between Kalomo and that place. It did not,
+however, seem to be the Lord's will for us to proceed that far, and
+since there would be a new set of officials there to deal with, our
+reception might not be any better. After sending our letter of
+introduction to the Administrator, we turned toward the wagon to
+consider and pray over the affair, realizing that a more perplexing
+problem than a broken wagon was facing us.
+
+We had not proceeded far when a gentleman came to inform us that the
+Administrator, who is the highest official in the country, requested an
+interview. We were kindly received by the honorable gentleman and given
+an opportunity of explaining in what part of the country we desired to
+open a mission station, and the condition of the natives in that
+section. He said that he saw no serious difficulty in the way, and that
+he was in favor of allowing us to proceed and select a mission site. He
+affirmed, however, that the unhealthfulness of the climate was the most
+serious obstacle; and, since it was late in the season for us to put up
+a mosquito-proof dwelling before the rainy and unhealthy season came, he
+thought it best for us to select a place and then go south until the
+rains were over. Otherwise we might be stricken with fever, a deadly
+type of which, known as black water fever, is common in this section of
+the country. We promised to consider seriously his advice, if a proper
+dwelling could not be secured before the rains came. He then directed
+us to the civil commissioner of that district, who especially encouraged
+the undertaking, expressing his belief that we would encounter no
+difficulty among the natives, since he was familiar with and had
+jurisdiction of Mapanza district. He said, "The field is before you, and
+as there are no other missionaries there, it is yours to occupy." He
+also gave a letter to the magistrate at Mapanza and a native messenger
+to show us the way.
+
+It was with thankfulness too deep for words that we returned to the
+wagon. God was again verifying His wonderful promises. Praise His Holy
+Name! Part of our freight had been sent to Kalomo by train, so after
+procuring that from the station, we proceeded north about sixty miles
+through Macha and other places to the camp of the official at Mapanza.
+When about half the distance was traversed we unexpectedly came upon a
+Dutch family living there all alone in the wilds. They had not been
+there long and were not permanent settlers, but we managed to purchase
+from them some fine imported chickens and some banana sprouts, all of
+which have proved to be a most useful addition to our mission property.
+
+The natives were much scattered in a portion of the country through
+which we passed until we approached the vicinity of Macha. Here they
+were much more thickly settled, and also from this on to the camp at
+Mapanza. At the latter place the official was not at home. While waiting
+for him we concluded to visit some of the natives and went to the
+village of one of the most prominent chiefs of this district, Mapanza
+by name. There were thirty-five huts in the village. In the center of
+this was a large cattle pen, and around it and the outside of the
+palisade the huts were built in a circle, all opening toward the center.
+As we entered this enclosure we were greeted with clapping of hands on
+all sides. This is the native way of saluting their king and government
+officials and sometimes other white people. In this instance the
+uniformed government messenger accompanied us, and no doubt gave
+prestige to our visit. The people of the village received us in a
+friendly manner, but since their language was unintelligible to us we
+soon returned to the wagon.
+
+The time of the official's return was uncertain and we preferred not to
+locate in the immediate vicinity of the camp, so it was thought
+advisable to return a short distance and select a mission site. Some of
+the rivers through which we had safely come proved more difficult on the
+return journey. Gomo had been driving since we left Kalomo and did
+excellent work; but he found the Myeki River here at the camp very
+difficult to cross. There are long, steep hills on either side of the
+river, and in addition to this the bed of the bridgeless stream is quite
+deep. Our oxen had done splendid work on the long journey from
+Livingstone, but in recrossing this river they seemed unequal to the
+effort. After struggling awhile one finally lay down and refused to
+move. This was a new experience for us, but perhaps not for the boys.
+Gomo used every inducement to make it rise, but to no avail. To our
+amusement he finally, as a last resort, bit its tail. It was up in an
+instant and the wagon moved on. We have since learned that oxen are
+often more stubborn than that one, especially new ones. They sometimes
+lie down and nothing will induce them to move. They will endure fire and
+even death itself.
+
+We drove back and carefully looked over the various locations, and after
+asking the Lord for direction, we finally decided upon our present site
+on the bank of the Macha River, or rather on the hill above it. The tent
+was removed from the wagon and placed on poles and prepared for
+occupancy. This place is about fourteen miles from the camp at Mapanza,
+and was reached August 17, a little over six weeks from the time we left
+Matopo Mission. We had traveled in all about 485 miles, about 170 of
+which was by ox-wagon. Our journal of the time records:
+
+"In all the Lord has wonderfully given us health and strength, and no
+harm of wild beasts or wilder men has befallen us. The journey had been
+far more successful in every way than we had anticipated, and we praise
+the Lord that at last we are settled."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE
+
+The Opening of the Work at Macha
+
+
+In selecting a location for the mission, the desire was to secure a
+place sufficiently high so as to be at a distance from the low swamps,
+breeding malaria and other deadly diseases, and yet near enough to the
+river so as to have access to water. We desired also to have land in the
+vicinity suitable for agriculture and industrial purposes in general,
+and for the growing of fruit and vegetables. Then again, in addition to
+the above requirements, the object of our coming to the country was not
+to be lost sight of; _i. e._, the natives themselves. We desired to have
+easy access to them so that they might receive the Gospel. All of these
+requirements were prayerfully considered and we believe met in the
+location of Macha. As eight years have passed since then, our
+convictions have only been strengthened that it was the Lord's choice
+for the work.
+
+As near as can be estimated the location is about 16-1/2° south latitude
+and 27° east longitude, and is about 4,500 feet above sea level, so
+that, although it is within the tropics, the altitude causes the climate
+to be pleasant the greater portion of the year and as healthful a site
+as can be secured in that section of the country. Along one side of the
+3,000-acre mission farm is a small river, which gives name to the
+locality, and the tent was pitched over half a mile from this river.
+The place afforded excellent facilities for agriculture and fruit
+growing. Especially can bananas and citrus trees be grown without
+irrigation. The country is rolling and there are numerous rich valleys
+capable of supporting many natives. There are wagon roads which have
+been made by traders who go through the country and buy grain of the
+natives in exchange for cloth, ornaments, blankets, and clothing. There
+were no surveyed farms in this vicinity, and the only farmers near lived
+over twenty miles from Macha, but numerous villages of natives are
+within walking distance and wagon road.
+
+At the opening of Macha Mission there was a station of Primitive
+Methodists northwest at a distance of at least sixty miles, and the one
+of the Seventh Day Adventist Mission at about the same distance
+northeast. With the exception of these two places one might go a hundred
+miles in any other direction and not find a mission station, so that we
+could certainly feel that we were not intruding into the territory of
+any other missionaries. The natives in this part of the country had
+heard absolutely nothing of Christ, and they knew not what missionaries
+were or how they differed from other people.
+
+Our little tent, 6 x 13 feet, was sufficiently commodious for eating and
+sleeping, but all the work had to be performed on the outside in the
+shade of a large tree, near which the tent had been placed. Beneath this
+tree also our supplies were piled off the ground and away from the
+destructive white ants, of which the ground was everywhere full. We had
+no cookstove then, and all our cooking was done over an open fire,
+while bread was baked in a large, flat-bottomed iron pot with long legs.
+This was placed over a bed of live coals, while coals were also placed
+on the iron cover. Some very good yeast bread came from that iron pot,
+novel perhaps to Americans, but familiar to Africanders. Many people
+traveling through the country made use of the ant hills as bake-ovens.
+
+The Christian boys who accompanied us, as well as some younger ones who
+came for work, camped at a short distance from the tent, and at night
+slept around the fire until huts could be built for them. Before the
+mission site had been agreed upon two young boys came and asked for
+work. We took them, and one of these has been one of our most faithful
+helpers. As grain was plentiful in the neighborhood there was no
+difficulty in securing food for the natives. Many of the older people,
+men and women, came to see and welcome us. Every effort was put forth
+toward erecting buildings before the rains came on, but as fires had
+swept over the country and destroyed most of the grass, it was evident
+that our chief difficulty would be in procuring thatching grass. This
+difficulty was obviated by a man at Mapanza, who was erecting a house
+for the commissioner, offering us for a small sum a lot of grass that he
+had on hand. Some time later our journal is as follows:
+
+     These have been busy days; much work has been crowded into them.
+     Building and making furniture have occupied the attention of all of
+     us, and everything has had to be done with native material and few
+     tools, which have increased the amount of labor. The poles had to
+     be hauled
+     five or six miles and some of the grass for thatching was brought
+     fourteen miles. Ndhlalambi has been a faithful and excellent
+     workman. He is not as quick as some, but few natives would have
+     succeeded in making better buildings, as he is careful and
+     painstaking in all he does. Gomo is just the opposite; he is just
+     as willing, but is no builder. He has, however, been very useful in
+     hauling poles and grass, and mud for plastering, and he performed a
+     splendid service in venturing among the Baila (a warlike tribe
+     north of us) and purchasing for us two cows. Sister Engle and I
+     have been bending all our energies toward helping with the building
+     in the more technical parts, so that the work might be accomplished
+     as soon as possible, and we have been spending some of our time in
+     making furniture. There has been no difficulty in securing natives
+     to work for us, and they have all worked faithfully under
+     Ndhlalambi's supervision.
+
+     There seems to be nothing to mar the work and location thus far,
+     except the savage beasts, which prowl around at night, a terror to the
+     domestic animals and to ourselves. When we pray, "Keep us from harm
+     and danger," it is a more genuine prayer than formerly. Many nights
+     the howls of the wolves and hyenas are to be heard, and one night some
+     of the boys awoke to see in the firelight the eyes of a hyena glaring
+     at them. Some of the natives built a high, strong pen for our cattle,
+     and the first night they were enclosed in it a lion tried to force its
+     way in, as indicated by the spoors the next morning. Leopards have
+     also been seen. These evidences, as well as the stories told by
+     others, convince us that there are wild beasts in the neighborhood,
+     yet the Lord is able to keep and has thus far kept us from harm.
+
+The 91st Psalm was very precious in those days.
+
+These first buildings were constructed in a manner very similar to those
+at Matopo Mission, except that it was thought advisable to build the
+main part of the house all in one, so as to obviate the necessity of
+going outside in passing from one room to another--a very important
+consideration in such a wild country. The scarcity of grass limited the
+size of the house to a certain extent. It was 26 x 14 feet, with a
+veranda around three sides to protect from the sun and rain, and was
+divided into three small compartments opening into one another, the
+small doorways being closed by curtains. As there was no seasoned lumber
+to be had, there was only one outside door, and this was made from one
+of the boxes in which the goods had been packed. A table was
+manufactured from another box, and the bedsteads, as well as nearly all
+the rest of the furniture, were manufactured from native unseasoned
+timber and draped with calico. A muslin ceiling was a necessity to
+prevent the sawdust from falling from the rafters.
+
+On the inside of the house the walls were carefully plastered up against
+the thatched roof, and the openings for windows were closed by fine wire
+gauze netting to exclude mosquitoes. An important question was how to
+make a screen door for the only outside door of the building, as
+unseasoned timber would not answer the purpose. The pole of the wagon
+had been broken soon after our arrival at Macha, and one from the forest
+put in its place; and since this broken piece of timber was of hardwood
+and sufficiently long for a door frame, we decided to make use of it for
+that purpose. It was sawed and with considerable labor made into a frame
+and proved quite satisfactory. Sister Engle, who was always patient and
+painstaking in her work and full of resources, deserves much credit for
+this and many other things with which the house was equipped. That
+screen door is still doing excellent service after a lapse of eight
+years. After it was finished it was found that to fit it into the door
+frame so as to make it mosquito proof was no small task. The door frame
+had been manufactured from unseasoned native timber and was greatly
+warped. After much chiseling and shaping even this feat was
+accomplished, and the result was a mosquito-proof house, for that season
+at least. Mosquito nets for the beds had also been brought along.
+
+A small kitchen was also built and a hut for the native brethren before
+the rains came. The grass, stumps, and underbrush were cleared off all
+around the buildings and at some distance from them. This is customary
+in this part of the country, and it is done for the purpose of removing
+the hiding places of mosquitoes, snakes, and the like. Although more
+natives were employed the first few months at Macha than at Matopo, we
+experienced no difficulty in dealing with them; perhaps because we were
+more familiar with their character, and our native Christians too were
+quite capable of understanding them.
+
+During the progress of the work, the advice of the Administrator had not
+been forgotten, as it was our earnest desire to do that which was best,
+and we looked to the Lord for guidance. It seemed advisable to remain.
+Contrary to his expectations, a mosquito-proof dwelling-house had been
+constructed, and the work which was started would certainly have
+suffered if we had gone away. The boys who had accompanied us were in
+every respect proving themselves capable and reliant; the natives were
+quiet and respectful; and not the least difficulty in the way of our
+return was the long, dangerous trip to Kalomo to reach the railroad. We
+had safely come that way once, yet we dreaded the long trip back,
+perhaps because we did not believe that it was the Lord's will for us to
+make it. The post was brought to our door by the government messenger as
+he passed on his way to Mapanza, and a trader near offered to bring out
+from Kalomo any needed supplies.
+
+All our needs thus far were abundantly supplied by a loving Father. All
+praise to Him Who "is able to do exceeding abundantly above all that we
+ask or think." Even in our most sanguine expectations before coming to
+the country we had not thought to be so well provided for. He in His
+infinite wisdom and forethought had gone before and prepared every step
+of the way; He had opened every door and enabled the mission to be thus
+planted in raw heathendom where Christ had not been named. The location
+proven by years of trial could not have been improved, for He makes no
+mistakes. The call and the desire for the extension of His Kingdom,
+which He had put into our hearts before ever Africa was reached, was
+thus being fulfilled. He had done and was doing His part; what more
+could we ask? Yea, we were weighted down and humbled by the multitude of
+favors which He was showering upon us. The only thing to mar our peace
+at this time was the consciousness that our friends and some of the
+government officials were uneasy on our account. We saw no cause for
+fear, and were conscious that the continued prayers ascending in behalf
+of ourselves and the work were availing before God, and that we were at
+the place where He desired us to be.
+
+After the buildings were completed and the rains came the boys put forth
+every effort to dig some of the ground and plant grain and vegetables.
+This had to be done by hand, as the plow had not yet arrived.
+
+In the many duties incident to starting a new station, the spiritual
+part of the work was not neglected. A little visiting among the people
+was done both by Sister Engle and myself and by the native brethren. An
+attempt was also made each Sunday to instill into the minds of the
+people something of the sacredness of the day. Since a number of natives
+came daily to work at the mission, they were informed that we did not
+work on Sunday, but worshiped God instead. It was thus not difficult to
+assemble twenty-five or thirty on Sunday for services. These were always
+married people, with the exception of the few boys who were staying at
+the mission to work. The younger people, and especially the girls and
+children, were conspicuous only by their absence. It was the same at the
+village; none except men and women were to be seen, so that at first we
+all concluded that there were no children in the neighborhood. Later it
+was learned that these and all the unmarried girls ran and hid when we
+approached a village.
+
+We could invite the people on Sunday, or we could go to see them in
+their homes, but to speak to them was a more difficult affair. There was
+the same difficulty in the language as at Matopo, but with a
+difference. There we had a translation of the Bible, dictionaries and
+grammars, and could at least read the Word to them. Here we were among
+the Batonga, and their language, although belonging to the same great
+Bantu family of languages, was quite distinct from that of Southern
+Rhodesia. There were no translations, no dictionaries, at the time the
+mission opened, so that the task of acquiring it was no small one. We
+soon realized that we had not sufficiently appreciated our blessings in
+Southern Rhodesia. Here it was necessary to have notebook and pencil
+continually on hand and write down the words as they fell from the lips
+of the natives; nor was it an easy task to decide upon the spelling of
+the words; especially was there difficulty in distinguishing the letters
+_l_ and _r_. The same word as it fell from the lips of one native would
+seem to have an _l_, and as spoken by another it would be _r_. Of course
+there were many similar difficulties.
+
+One of our first aims was to secure the expression for "What is that?"
+"_Chi nzi echo?_" and with that as a basis the names at least of many
+things could be learned. Then too it is not so difficult to learn to use
+expressions common in everyday duties and the material things about one;
+but to secure a suitable vocabulary for instruction in the Gospel is
+generally a difficult task, and missionaries differ widely in reference
+to terms for spiritual things.
+
+The native vocabulary is by no means meager, and one is often surprised
+that people living such seemingly narrow lives as they do have in
+constant use such a copious vocabulary. Their thoughts as a rule can be
+expressed in fewer words than in English. For instance, they will say
+bona, to see; _bonwa_, to be seen; _bwene_, to have seen; _bonana_, to
+see each other; _boneka_, to be visible; _bonela_, to see for; and
+_bonesha_, to see clearly, and some verbs have additional forms. Again,
+in the use of verbs, such as _go_, they will have different words to
+express various phases of it: _Ya_, to go; _benda_, to go stooping, as
+after game; _fwamba_, to go quickly; _endenda_, to go for a walk;
+_ambuka_, to go aside, or astray; and so on for eighteen different
+words.
+
+The especial difficulty of the missionary is to secure the proper words
+to convey spiritual conceptions not generally met with in their
+comprehension; such as, _faith_, _holy_, _save_, _cross_, _heaven_, and
+even in the word for God there is often a difference of opinion among
+missionaries as to the word to be used. Among all tribes there seems to
+be a word for God, but the conception upon which it is based is so
+degrading that one often hesitates to make use of it in referring to the
+Holy and Omnipotent One Whom we have learned to revere. Two opinions are
+prevalent among missionaries in reference to some of the words. One is
+to make use of the words already found in a language and to seek to
+build up upon those words a new conception altogether foreign to the
+native line of thought. Others think that it is better to introduce a
+new word and attach the desired meaning to it. I think it is safe to say
+that the former is the method generally employed among translators, but
+whether it is in all instances the best method is open to question.
+
+Natives very quickly learn the language of other tribes, and so it was
+in this instance. Our native Christians soon acquired this language. A
+few of those working for us could after a manner speak that "Esperanto
+of South Africa," "Kitchen Kafir," and this enabled them from the first
+to understand one another, in a slight degree at least, and gave them a
+common basis from which to pass to the Tonga language proper, spoken by
+the people about us. As Ndhlalambi, who took the name of David, had felt
+the call definitely to give the Gospel to these people, and had had
+experience in evangelistic work, both at Mapani and at Matopo Mission,
+he was able in a comparatively short time to give the Gospel
+intelligently to the people, and also to assist us in acquiring the
+language. Of course this was by no means accomplished in a few months,
+or even in a year, for it was often difficult for even him to secure the
+proper words in spiritual language. These helpers too had their
+difficulties in the work, and had their misunderstandings with the
+natives. One day one of them was quite discouraged in an attempt to make
+some natives understand properly, and he exclaimed, "I have a great deal
+more sympathy with the white man now in his endeavors to make the people
+understand, and to teach them how to work. These people seem so dull to
+me, and I know why our masters became so out of patience with us."
+
+There was at first no attempt at opening school; but stencils and
+cardboard had been brought along, and with these charts were printed in
+the syllables and sentences of the language as nearly as we understood
+it. Sister Engle made use of these charts in teaching, by the light of
+the campfire in the evenings, the young boys who had come to work for
+us. Our two native helpers also continued their studies and were
+instructed whenever there was time for it after the buildings were
+completed.
+
+As the first Christmas drew near, a query arose as to how it should be
+observed, and whether services should be held, since no one could yet
+speak very well the language. David and Gomo were eager for services,
+saying that they would put forth every effort to speak to the people
+about Christ. We longed to give the people something on that day as an
+expression of our good will, but could not see the way open to do so. At
+Matopo Mission salt was always given, but in this part of the country
+salt was very expensive and there was only a little on hand, and we were
+not prepared to give them meat, as we had little opportunity of
+procuring game for ourselves. Services, however, were announced for the
+day, and early in the morning some natives began to arrive, curious to
+know what the day was like.
+
+In the morning Sister Engle and I were sitting at the table on the
+veranda, eating our breakfast, speaking of the plans for the day, and
+expressing a wish that there was some food to set before the people.
+While speaking, we heard a goat bleat, and presently two natives, one of
+whom was carrying a goat on his shoulders, came toward us. They put the
+goat down on the ground before us, saying as they did so, "The Chief,
+Macha, sent you this as a present." Here was the answer to our wish and
+unuttered prayer. Another native headman a short time previously had
+also presented a goat, and we had bought one, and these three would be
+sufficient for the dinner. Our praises ascended simultaneously, and we
+realized that the promise was again verified, "Before they call, I will
+answer; and while they are yet speaking I will hear."
+
+The native brethren entered heartily into the preparations, and with the
+assistance of the others, they soon had the animals killed and dressed,
+and in the cooking kettles. Fortunately there was cornmeal on hand which
+also furnished sufficient porridge. We rejoiced as we saw the people
+coming that there was food to set before them, even though the Gospel
+messenger could not be given satisfactorily; but there was still a
+greater and more blessed surprise in store.
+
+There were ninety-six grown people assembled, chiefly fathers and
+mothers, heads of families, and these were all seated along the veranda
+and in the shade of the tent. David took up the subject of Christmas and
+its origin by first reading it from the Zulu Testament, which, of
+course, they did not understand. Before he had read much the Lord sent a
+first-class interpreter, in the person of a Mutonga native who had
+worked for some time in Bulawayo, and there learned to read and speak
+the Zulu language and to understand the Gospel. He was not, however, a
+Christian, as we learned, but he proved a most ready and excellent
+interpreter for the day; and as the message was given in Zulu, he as
+readily interpreted it into the vernacular of the people.
+
+The Lord especially anointed our brother David for the message that day,
+and he most ably and feelingly presented the wonderful story of the
+birth and life of our Savior and His great mission in the redemption of
+the world. Perhaps the unique opportunity had some effect upon my
+feelings, but it seemed to me that I never at any other time heard the
+subject so well handled before a congregation of natives as it was on
+that day. The native men, especially, listened most attentively
+throughout that long discourse. Tears came into my eyes as I looked upon
+those seamed faces before me, those middle-aged and elderly men who, for
+the first time in their lives, had an opportunity of hearing of Him Who
+had come to earth nineteen hundred years before to redeem them. How much
+of the _makani mabotu_ (glad tidings) they grasped at the time it is
+difficult to ascertain.
+
+At the close of the discourse some of the rest of us spoke for a short
+time on the same theme, and also explained the cause of our being among
+them. Then after a hymn and prayer they were given their food. A
+bountiful dinner had also been prepared for ourselves, a portion of
+which we handed over to the two helpers who had so faithfully labored to
+make the day a success. It is needless to say that they too thoroughly
+enjoyed their dinner. In every way this first Christmas was one long to
+be remembered, with nothing to mar the perfect harmony of the occasion.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR
+
+School Work. Reinforcements
+
+
+Up to this time nothing had been said about school, except that a few
+boys had been taught in the evenings. There was no word for it in their
+language, and learning had no meaning or attraction for them. They only
+desired to work and earn money.
+
+The first herdboy came before the mission was located, and to him we
+gave the name "Jim," as we did not fancy his native name. He remained
+with us three months and then returned home and his cousin Tom came to
+herd. Both of these boys manifested a great interest in what they heard,
+and Tom was the first one to express a desire to be a Christian. Another
+little boy ran off from home one day and begged permission to remain at
+the mission. His mother immediately followed him and told him to go
+home. He refused, and sitting down by a tree he put his arms around it
+and clung to it; but the mother tore the poor little fellow from the
+tree and dragged him away. Aside from these, very few children made
+their appearance during the first five or six months of the mission, and
+no girls came for a much longer period of time. The older people were
+friendly from the first, but we often felt that some of them inspired
+their children with a certain amount of fear of the newcomers.
+
+January 1, 1907, the people were informed that we wished to open a
+school and that they should come to learn. By this we had in mind a
+day-school, where the pupils would come in the morning and return home
+at the close of the session. It had been impossible to build a
+schoolhouse, since nearly all the grass had been burnt off before our
+appearance on the scene. We, however, set up the little tent and built a
+straw shed at one end of it for a temporary schoolhouse.
+
+As school and its advantages had no meaning to the people, no one came.
+Then too it was the busiest season of the year. One, two, three weeks
+passed, and still no one desired to learn. January passed and half of
+February; still no scholars. This was a new experience. At Matopo the
+children could scarcely wait until school opened, and they were the
+pioneers there and gradually drew the older people to take an interest.
+Here it was quite the reverse; the children were afraid of us, and would
+run away, screaming, to hide in the tall grass when we approached their
+villages. What was to be done? As usual we began to look to the Source
+that never fails.
+
+The middle of February it was thought advisable to have a week of
+prayer. All work was laid aside and the time was spent by the Christians
+in interceding at a Throne of Grace, for we felt that perhaps we had
+been too much occupied in temporal affairs. In the midst of this week of
+prayer, on February 19, Macha, the chief, came, bringing his little boy,
+about twelve years of age, and said, "Here is my son. I should like to
+have him stay with the missionaries and learn to read and to work."
+Here then was a direct answer to prayer. The chief of the district had
+set an example to his people by thus bringing his child. This was a
+signal for others, Apuleni, another boy of about the same age, came the
+next week, and Mafulo and Kajiga followed; also others. Jim and Tom came
+to remain and attend school, and by the end of the year there were
+seventeen boys in all staying at the mission.
+
+These were nearly all boys from ten to sixteen years of age; a few were
+older. None who applied were refused if they were willing to abide by
+the regulations; and industrial work was at once inaugurated in
+connection with the school. They were to be taught in school three and
+one-half hours, and work early morning and afternoon, receiving, in
+addition to their food and instruction, some clothing, and blankets for
+the night. They were to remain at least a year before they could take
+the clothing home with them. This stipulation was made to teach them
+stability and prevent them from coming sufficiently long to secure
+clothing and then leaving before they had properly earned it. The
+arrangement proved very satisfactory. The few taxpayers who entered the
+industrial school were given a small sum of money, provided they
+completed the time agreed upon. They always had Saturday afternoon as a
+half holiday, when they were to wash and mend their clothing and have
+the remainder of the time for recreation.
+
+It was always our aim to make them understand that they were expected to
+earn what they received by giving labor in return. We had no sympathy
+with pupils who desired to learn and lie about and be idle the rest of
+the time. Several who desired to bring their food and remain at the
+mission without working were not allowed to do so, as we thought it
+would prove detrimental, both to themselves and to the rest. We
+preferred a dozen industrious and stable boys to many times that number
+who were lazy and indifferent. It is true some of the smallest could
+scarcely be said to earn their way at first, but they were at least
+taught habits of industry. In their homes many of them spent their time
+in an indolent fashion, their muscles being flabby and unused to
+exercise; and often, when they came to us, they were too lazy even to
+play at recess. Gradually they brightened up and took hold of the tasks
+assigned them. One day one of the mothers came and inquired about her
+son, a boy about thirteen years of age, and she was told that he was
+digging in the garden.
+
+"Kanyama digging?" she asked, in great surprise. "Why, he does not know
+how to work."
+
+The first rainy season was quite pleasant, and it passed with very
+little sickness among our workers. It gave us an opportunity also of
+learning something of the fertility of the soil on the mission farm.
+Much of the land, and especially that in the valleys, was unusually
+productive, and the grass grew to the height of ten feet. Our aim was to
+make use of the rainy season to instruct the boys in agriculture and
+horticulture and to raise sufficient grain and other food at least for
+their consumption; and more than that, if possible, so that the expense
+of keeping a number of boys would not rest so heavily on the mission.
+This first season very little food was grown, because there had been no
+land ready for sowing, but the plow came in January, and Gomo was
+enabled to break two large gardens ready for sowing the following year.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission Huts, 1907.]
+
+As soon as the rainy season was at an end, building was again undertaken
+by David and Gomo, together with the assistance of the native men and
+schoolboys. Thatch grass had to be cut and poles hauled and seasoned.
+The Matabele women were always eager to work for cloth, salt, or money,
+but the Batonga women were not. It was impossible to make satisfactory
+arrangements with them, either to cut grass or plaster, so that the men
+and boys were obliged to do this also in connection with the rest of the
+building, and they performed the work very satisfactorily.
+
+As there was only one small hut for the schoolboys, the first building
+this second year was a hut, 13 x 16 feet, for their occupancy. Then a
+building answering for church and school purposes was erected. This was
+16 x 30 feet, with a large veranda in front, and was an excellent
+building of the kind. The seats were made of bricks, built up in rows
+and plastered over, and the floor was made of earth, pounded hard and
+plastered. Another building, 14 x 20 feet, of poles and mud was also
+built, and was divided into two rooms. It had a veranda all around it.
+We were expecting missionaries out from America, and this last hut was
+for their accommodation. These three buildings were all
+respectable-looking ones and required a great deal of time and labor, so
+that David and Gomo were very busy and deserved much credit for their
+efficiency and perseverance. In addition to the outside work the
+schoolboys were instructed in sewing, and two of them in housework.
+
+The school at first was very poorly equipped, as we had nothing but the
+homemade charts and a few slates, and knew not where our books were to
+come from, since we did not know the language sufficiently to make any.
+Some of our needs in this respect were also supplied later. In the
+latter part of 1907 Rev. E. W. Smith, a missionary at Nanzela, published
+an excellent "Handbook of the Ila Language." This was a grammar and
+dictionary combined, and the language was closely allied to that of the
+Tonga. We secured this book about a year after we had reached Macha and
+found it very helpful in acquiring the language, since the grammar and
+many of the words of the two languages were similar. He also published
+in that language an excellent first reader and a book of over one
+hundred pages of Bible stories. This latter book is a very faithful
+account of Genesis and Exodus, and contains some of the more interesting
+parts of later Old Testament history. Not long after, there was also
+published a book of questions containing the essentials of Christian
+belief, and also many quotations from the Scriptures. With the exception
+of the mode of baptism this was so essentially like our own faith that
+it could be used to excellent advantage in Inquirers' Classes.
+
+All of these books proved of inestimable value to us in school and
+church work. The pupils in the school proved bright and studious, and
+before the end of this year some had started in the service of the Lord.
+
+It was almost impossible for us to spend much time out among the natives
+during the rainy season, since the rivers were often swollen and
+difficult to cross, and the grass was high, rendering walking difficult
+and even dangerous on account of savage beasts lurking about. It is true
+we seldom saw any of these animals, but that they were in the vicinity
+we had no reason to doubt. Once when David was on top of the church,
+putting on the rafters, a native from a neighboring kraal called to say
+that three leopards were after his sheep. Our boys all ran to hunt with
+spears and clubs, and some of them had a glimpse of the animals as they
+disappeared in the tall grass. Another morning some of the men on coming
+to work reported that they saw four lions crossing one of our plowed
+fields. Occasionally we would hear a lion roaring on the opposite side
+of the river, so that there was no reason to doubt the presence of
+danger.
+
+Northwestern Rhodesia, where we found ourselves, is essentially the home
+of wild and savage beasts and game of all kinds. In addition to smaller
+animals there are the duiker, reedbuck, hartebeest, sable antelope,
+eland, kudu, and many other varieties of game. The forests are full of
+apes and baboons, and the gnu, the zebra, and the buffalo are to be
+found. The mammoth elephant roams at will in herds or singly, the rivers
+are full of crocodiles, and the larger ones abound in the ungainly
+hippopotamuses. It is the paradise of hunters, and many avail themselves
+of the opportunity for sport thus afforded; others for the gain to be
+had from ivory and hides.
+
+The fact that there was not only game, but that there were also
+dangerous animals lurking about, may have been the chief reason why we
+never succeeded in starting a day-school at Macha. It was scarcely safe
+for children to go alone back and forth to school. Even men seldom
+traveled far alone, and they always went armed. A native would carry
+three or four assegais, and many were supplied with guns. It is
+surprising how much game they managed to kill with those old
+blunderbusses.
+
+As stated previously, the presence of animals had much to do with the
+amount of kraal visiting carried on. Sister Engle and I went, however,
+quite frequently after the grass was burnt off in June, accompanied by
+some of the schoolboys. As we neared a village, our approach was always
+heralded by the barking of dogs and the screaming of children as they
+ran away to be out of reach of the _mukua_ (white person). Every village
+is supplied with its quota of dogs. One day I counted twenty-four in one
+small village. Nor is their presence unnecessary in this animal-ridden
+country, as they often succeed in driving off ferocious animals from the
+herds, and they help supply their master with game. They are, however,
+generally so lean and starved looking that one would like to see a
+"Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals" among the natives.
+
+It was a long time before we could get a sight of the girls in the
+kraals around us. Once, in company with Apuleni, we went to his home,
+and here as everywhere we were warmly welcomed by the older people and
+given an opportunity of telling them of the Savior, as well as our
+limited vocabulary would allow. While we were sitting there talking to
+some of the older people, Sister Engle said she thought there were some
+girls in a hut near by. I arose to investigate. The older people saw the
+move and laughingly told the girls of my approach; but it was too late
+for them to escape. As I reached the door I saw five girls in the hut,
+some of whom were nearly grown. Some began to scream and hide their
+faces, and others sat trembling, not daring to look up. They appeared as
+if they were afraid of being torn from their home by violence. Two of
+these were sisters of the boy who accompanied us. It required much tact
+and patience to finally gain the confidence of these wild children
+surrounding us, and to help them realize that we would do them no harm,
+but we at last won the day.
+
+During this dry season of 1907 word was also received of a threatened
+native uprising. Our first information of this condition of affairs was
+received from some officers who had come from the Transvaal and were
+passing through on their way north on a hunting expedition. They said
+that they did not know how serious the difficulty was, except that some
+of the Europeans northeast had been ordered into the government camp.
+The natives around us were quiet and law-abiding and gave no indication
+that they were dissatisfied. They themselves were not of a warlike
+nature, and they had in the past been harrowed and many of them
+ruthlessly killed by the Matabele, the Barotse, and the Baila, each in
+their turn, and they were now enjoying peace and quiet under the
+beneficent rule of the English. They knew that they would gain nothing
+by rebelling against the English, and the only condition that would
+cause them to rise would be fear of their powerful neighbors. For this
+reason we could see no cause for fear. They were, however, not ignorant
+of the trouble in the country, and confided to David that Lewanika
+wanted to fight. The powerful tribe north of us, the Baila, were
+probably as dissatisfied as any. David at first did not tell us what he
+had heard, for fear of alarming us, and we too said nothing to him at
+once. Later, however, he told us and we gave him our information. The
+danger at that time seemed past, and we would have allowed the affair to
+rest; but it was learned that our fellow missionaries were uneasy on
+our account. So we wrote to an official at Kalomo to inquire if they
+anticipated a native uprising. He wrote, assuring us that whatever
+danger there might have been, there was no more serious cause for alarm.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Boys and Schoolhouse.]
+
+In September of this year a young man from Cape Town came to assist in
+the work. He was a nephew of our friend and benefactress, Mrs. Lewis,
+and had been impressed with the importance of pressing on the work into
+the interior; hence his presence at Macha. He suffered so much with
+fever, however, that he concluded it was best to return south after a
+stay of only a few weeks at the mission.
+
+On November 10 our long-looked-for colaborer, Mr. Myron Taylor, reached
+Macha. This was a welcome and much-needed addition to our number. The
+new building was ready for occupancy, and Brother Taylor entered
+enthusiastically into the work before him. He came just at the opening
+of the rainy season, and perhaps entered on the work with too much
+vigor; for in the latter part of December he was laid low with the dread
+African fever, and for a time his life was despaired of; but the Lord
+raised him up. During that, his first rainy season, he had frequent
+relapses of the fever and saw very few well days until the season was at
+an end. He was not, however, discouraged, but continued at the work
+whenever his health permitted.
+
+The boys who came to attend school remained, and others also applied for
+admission, so that by the end of this second year there were thirty-two
+staying with us, and they were becoming quite useful in the work, and
+best of all were going on to know the Lord, and were formed into an
+Inquirers' Class.
+
+This second rainy season was in some respects a repetition of the first,
+except that there was more land under cultivation, and we ourselves were
+better supplied with fresh vegetables and more nourishing food, and
+Brother Taylor with his rifle could furnish us with game. We were at
+this time becoming more familiar with the pests with which we had to
+contend in this tropical Africa. We thought we had learned something of
+the ravages of the white ants, or termites, while at Matopo, but the
+experience there was nothing compared to that at Macha. This is not in
+any sense intended as a scientific treatise; yet even from a missionary
+point of view one needs to know something of the difficulties in the
+way. One cannot be long in America without realizing that the ordinary
+reader is woefully ignorant of some of the most common experiences of
+the Africander, and in nothing is this more noticeable than in the
+ravages produced by the white ants. The species to be found in Africa is
+unlike that found elsewhere and is much more destructive. A knowledge of
+the presence of these pests also seems to help solve some of the
+characteristics of the natives in this section of the country.
+
+These white ants are of various kinds and sizes, but they are similar,
+in that they build great nests of clay which extend above the ground
+from one or two to twenty or more feet. These nests are known as ant
+hills, and in this part of the country some of them are not unlike
+hillocks. They are all honeycombed within and down deep into the earth,
+and are the homes of the various members of the community, consisting of
+the large, bulky, wormlike white queen, an inch or two in length, the
+savage, warlike soldiers, and the small, inoffensive-looking workers.
+There are also winged ones which leave the earth in great numbers at the
+opening of the season after the ground has been softened by the rain.
+These soon lose their wings and again enter the ground at various places
+to form new colonies.
+
+The white ants can work only under cover, and exposure to light and the
+sun is generally fatal to them, so they build small clay tunnels
+underneath the ground or on top where they desire to work, and through
+these they pass to and fro, carrying particles of food to store it away.
+They prefer dry food, such as wood, leather, paper, clothing, straw, and
+vegetation as it is becoming dry, although if these articles are not to
+be had they have no objections to attacking growing trees or plants.
+Many trees in our young orchard have been destroyed by their ravages.
+These ants are to be found all over South Africa, but as one approaches
+the equator they are more numerous and destructive and the hills are
+larger.
+
+At Macha, boxes, shoes, clothing, everything had to be kept off the
+ground floor. If this precaution was not observed, perhaps in a single
+night a clay coating would be formed around the sole of a shoe and it
+would be greatly damaged. Sometimes they would find their way up the leg
+of a box and begin destroying the clothing or articles within. As I came
+out of my room one morning, the noise of the sentinels of the ants gave
+signal to the workers of the approach of danger. This led to an
+examination of some bookshelves which were supposed to be safe out of
+the reach of the pests. Wet clay was found to be all along the end of
+the bookcase, and the end books on each shelf were partly eaten, all the
+work of one night. Our bedposts had to be put on zinc or into old tin
+cans to keep the ants from making their way to the top and soiling the
+bedclothes. Several times they started to build an ant hill on the floor
+of the hut, and one morning a small hill of wet clay nearly a foot in
+height was to be seen, the result of one night's labors.
+
+Nor did they confine their ravages to the floor and the articles placed
+on the floor; walls and grass roof were full of them. No article could
+be hung on the wall with safety. There was a ceiling of muslin in the
+house, yet one day Sister Engle, on going into her room, found an army
+of white ants marching around on the counterpane of her bed, having
+fallen from a broken clay tunnel in the roof. In addition to these
+pests, we were greatly annoyed by insects boring into the soft wood
+which formed the rafters. During this season the sound made in the quiet
+hours of the night by these insects sawing caused one to think the
+entire hut was alive. The ants would carry their clay tunnels into the
+opening made by the borers and complete the work of destruction. For a
+time the ceiling became so heavy with falling sawdust and clay, that it
+was necessary to open it about every two weeks and remove the dust,
+which almost filled a small tub each time. Many more incidents might be
+cited. We were forced to admit that, at least during the rainy season, a
+large portion of our time was occupied in protecting our huts and goods
+from the ravages of the ants.
+
+[Illustration: The Last Invitation.]
+
+Their work did not stop with the house. We would think that the grain
+and meal were placed high and secure out of their reach, only to find
+that they had formed a channel and destroyed a lot of grain. At first
+when some boys came for school there was no suitable place prepared for
+their accommodation, and they were obliged to lie on the floor. They
+would occasionally come and show where the cuticle had been removed from
+some portion of the body during the night. In the garden there was also
+difficulty in protecting the growing crops. The cornstalk would be eaten
+off and fall to the ground, where the ants would complete the work of
+destruction; so that from the time corn began to be filled until it was
+ripe, it was generally necessary to keep several boys most of the time
+gathering the fallen corn. Continual vigilance was needful, or in an
+unguarded moment something about the place would be destroyed.
+
+The varieties of ants in the country are many and diverse, but we will
+mention only one other kind, to which we were introduced during the
+early days of the mission. One night some of the boys said they could
+not sleep on account of ants coming into their hut. We supposed they
+referred to large black ants, which often came in armies and made a raid
+on white ants to carry them off for food. These black ones are very
+troublesome when disturbed, and the boys were told to occupy another hut
+for the remainder of the night. Again the boys spoke of being disturbed
+and showed some small, reddish ants with vicious-looking heads, which
+were marching in a straight line through the yard. But these looked
+innocent and little attention was paid to the matter. Then one morning a
+hen and two young guinea fowls, confined in a pen, were found to be
+dead and covered with these insects. We concluded that they had died and
+the ants were eating the carcass, but the boys assured us that the ants
+had killed them. The pen was immediately burnt, together with as many of
+the ants as possible. Another night the sheep began to bleat most
+piteously. The lantern was lighted and the boys called to see what was
+the difficulty, and while waiting for the boys I approached the pen.
+Almost instantly needles seemed to penetrate my body in various places.
+I gave the lantern to the boys to let out the sheep, while Sister Engle
+and I hastened to the house, where she helped to remove the vicious
+little insects. After that experience there was no further question in
+my mind as to whether those ants could kill fowls or other animals.
+
+These are called the army ants. Once it required two days for an army of
+them continually on the march to pass through our yard. Fortunately we
+have not been troubled much with this variety since that time, but in
+some parts of Africa they are very numerous. Human bodies are sometimes
+thrown to them, and even live ones, as a punishment in supposed
+witchcraft.
+
+We had been in correspondence with some of the Primitive Methodist
+missionaries at Nanzela, from whom we had purchased books for the school
+and ourselves; and we were eager to visit them and learn something of
+their work. About the 1st of May we arranged to make the journey of
+sixty miles and pay them a visit. Brother Taylor was here to take charge
+of the journey, so we took the wagon with the ten oxen and a number of
+schoolboys, as well as David, leaving Gomo in charge of the mission
+during our absence. This was a new and untried road in a northwesternly
+direction, and required four day of hard traveling to make it. On the
+way we occasionally had an opportunity of preaching Christ to the
+natives.
+
+The kindly welcome received from Rev. and Mrs. Price, who were then at
+Nanzela, more than repaid us for the tediousness of the journey. We
+spent a most delightful four days at their mission and learned to know
+something of our neighbors and of the work being accomplished at this
+oldest station in this part of the country. They were working among the
+Baila, and also some Barotse who were living in that section of the
+country. The trip, however, proved a most unfortunate one for us, as we
+were informed that we had passed through a small district of the tsetse
+fly on the way. The result of this will be given in another chapter.
+
+On account of the presence of these pests, as well as for other reasons,
+a very common method of travel and transportation in this part of the
+country is by native carriers. A native will carry fifty pounds of
+goods, so that it requires forty persons to transport a ton of goods.
+This means is employed by officials, and it is somewhat more expeditious
+than by wagon. It is often not very satisfactory, however, and it is
+difficult to secure natives who are willing to carry, unless they are
+almost forced into service. The wages too, eight cents a day, is small,
+but where the tsetse fly abounds this is the only safe method of
+transportation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE
+
+Additional Reinforcements. Preparing to Build
+
+
+In June, 1908, we were pleased to receive additional reinforcements in
+the persons of Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger, who had lately arrived from
+America and felt called to the work at Macha. Accompanying them were
+Elder and Mrs. Steigerwald, who came to pay us a visit and to see about
+the work.
+
+There was now a strong force of missionaries at the place, and it was
+thought that better and more permanent buildings should be erected. The
+mission had been in progress nearly two years, and David and Gomo had
+been active both dry seasons in erecting buildings--and they were good
+buildings of their kind. From what has already been given, however, of
+the ravages of the white ants, it can easily be seen that such buildings
+were very unsatisfactory and of short duration. To make others of the
+same kind would require the missionaries to be continually building.
+
+My opinion in reference to missionaries' houses and surroundings had
+gradually and materially undergone a change since I first entered the
+mission field. My firm conviction on entering had been that missionaries
+should be as approachable as possible, and that they should endeavor to
+get on a level with their people; not in their dirt and filth, not in
+their ignorance and degradation, but, leaving out these essentially
+objectionable features, they should seek to imitate as much as possible
+Him Who had no certain dwelling-place and went about doing good. He
+became one with the people wherever He went, "Made Himself of no
+reputation, and took upon Him the form of a servant." He of course is
+the Great Exemplar, after Whom the missionaries, His messengers, are to
+pattern. The true missionary should and does esteem it a privilege to
+endure any necessary privation and hardship in the cause of the Master
+Whom he loves and seeks to imitate. Otherwise it would be impossible to
+carry the Gospel to the heathen. But our God is a wise God, and has
+promised wisdom to His children and to His messengers, which He expects
+them to use on the mission field as well as elsewhere; so that they may
+adapt themselves to their surroundings and do that which will best
+advance His Kingdom.
+
+The missionary goes to his field of labor. He builds himself huts of
+poles, mud, and grass. He does this carefully, that he may protect
+himself from the weather, the wild animals, and from the mosquitoes
+which bring fever. He provides his hut with furniture, manufactured by
+his own hand, so that it looks quite cozy and comfortable, and the poor
+natives as they look inside may conclude that if heaven is no better
+than this, it is at least worth striving for. The missionary himself for
+the time feels quite satisfied and happy in his surroundings and
+concludes that the place is good enough for anyone.
+
+He opens his door and invites his dear dark friends to enter and sit and
+talk with him--a privilege which they greatly appreciate and the
+missionary also enjoys. Are not these the people for whom Christ died?
+Are not these the poor people to whom he is bringing the privileges of
+the Gospel? He loves to embrace every opportunity of getting into their
+hearts, and he feels keenly everything which separates and tends to form
+a barrier between them.
+
+Time passes, and the rainy season comes. Perhaps the huts become damp
+and even mouldy in places, and gradually, as the ants continue their
+ravages, the walls crack and other difficulties arise. He is forced to
+be continually on his guard to protect himself. Mosquitoes enter, and he
+is incapacitated for work, by fever and other sickness. His health
+becomes undermined and his appetite gives way. The coarse food of the
+natives, if he has been using it, becomes distasteful and hurtful.
+Perhaps, if there is no way out of the difficulty, his life pays the
+penalty and his work on earth for God and the natives is stopped. This
+is no fancy picture. It has been repeated over and over again in this
+great "White Man's Graveyard."
+
+Suppose, however, that by taking plenty of quinine and having
+considerable vitality to start with, he survives and continues
+successfully to combat disease; he soon finds that he must build a
+separate hut in which to meet the natives, or his house will be overrun
+with vermin and he cannot live in it. His hut, too, soon becomes a
+hiding place for snakes, rats, and lizards. He may pick up a piece of
+furniture and find a cobra lying beneath it, or go into the little
+kitchen and find a deadly puff adder beneath the cooking kettle. Even if
+he has in building kept as near to the natives as possible, they are in
+no haste to get rid of their filth and improve their manner of living.
+They have not yet seen the advantages of exerting themselves to that
+extent, unless they are members of the mission family and compelled to
+wash. Even then they may have conscientious scruples in reference to the
+matter, as one of our best boys at Matopo did. He was frequently
+remonstrated with for not keeping his clothing clean. He said that clean
+clothing made him feel proud.
+
+Again, the missionary soon sees that his hut is going to pieces, and he
+must go over the laborious task every two or three years of building
+another, and at the same time constantly fight the ants, so that his
+life is one of long struggle with disease, pests, and building. When and
+how is he to give the Gospel? He concludes that he must make brick,
+build a house, and put on an iron roof, that it may be better protected
+from the mosquitoes and furnish good rain water. He makes a tank, so
+that he may have good drinking water instead of the muddy, disease-laden
+stuff which comes from the river. It will make more work for a time, but
+when completed he sees some result of his labor.
+
+These reasons, any or all of them, are sufficient in the eyes of the
+missionary for building a good, substantial house, but there are other
+reasons, quite as patent to him, but they may not be to one who has
+never been in his place. The natives like to see their missionary build
+good dwellings, for then they think he has come to stay, and because he
+has come to stay and is willing to work and to train the natives, he
+sometimes has a better house than some of his white neighbors. And we
+are loath to think, as some affirm, that it is a reproach to be better
+housed, if he himself builds it.
+
+There is another and more subtle reason for a good house, and one which
+the writer could not enter into until the last few years. If one has
+access to a town he has an opportunity to see other civilized places and
+has a change of scenery and companionship, which is both interesting and
+beneficial. Especially is this so to one who is continually surrounded
+with uncouth barbarism in its many forms. When, however, one is far
+removed from all civilized associations and sees nothing that is
+beautiful and uplifting, week after week, month after month, year after
+year; when all this time only dirt and squalor meet the eye as he steps
+off his own premises, his range of vision becomes so narrowed, his brain
+so benumbed by the monotony, that he feels he can endure it no longer.
+He is not tired of his services for the Master; he is not tired of the
+dark faces surrounding him; but his spiritual vision has become so
+befogged that, as he rises before the people to give them the message,
+he feels that he cannot give what he longs to. He cannot even take hold
+of God by faith in prayer as he did, and he must get away for a change.
+
+But what has this to do with a good house? Just this: If one has a good
+home and pleasant surroundings, good and helpful literature and a few of
+the things which minister to the æsthetic as well as to the spiritual
+part of his nature, he has a change, at least, in his own home, and when
+he can snatch time, from the many duties which continually confront him,
+for a little quiet, the surroundings are pleasing and restful. He is
+then just that much better fitted to cope with the opposite conditions,
+and he can cope with them for a longer time and do better work for the
+Master. On the other hand, missionaries are human and make many
+mistakes, and we in the mission field need also to guard against the
+other extreme of spending too much time in beautifying our surroundings
+and making ourselves comfortable, to the neglect of that God-given
+message.
+
+Even under the best of surroundings, physically, the missionary has
+enough to contend with. Circumstances over which he has no control,
+difficulties which far outweigh any already mentioned, meet him on every
+hand. As Rev. Stewart, of China, says, "'Agonia,' that word so often on
+St. Paul's lips--what did it mean? Did it not just mean the thousand
+wearinesses, and deeper, the stirrings, the travailings, the bitter
+disappointments, the deaths oft of a missionary's life?"
+
+The natives often are so indifferent, so disinclined to exert
+themselves, that, after months and years of weary, persistent labor
+among them, the missionary often feels that little is accomplished. He
+dare build hopes on none but God, and must accept seeming success or
+defeat as alike from Him. This continual drain on his system is quite
+sufficient, without having to combat with poor dwellings, poor food, and
+unhealthful surroundings.
+
+After the Brethren came, they concluded to start at once to make the
+preparations for building. Elder Steigerwald had had experience in this
+line of work, so he generously offered to start the rest in brickmaking.
+After a few weeks' visit he and Sister Steigerwald returned home and
+Sister Engle decided to accompany them for a change. David and Gomo also
+had been absent from their people for two years and wished to return,
+the former for a visit and the latter, perhaps permanently. We were very
+sorry to see all these leave at once, even for a few months, and
+especially David, whose assistance in the language and in interpretation
+was greatly needed.
+
+[Illustration: Making Brick at Macha.]
+
+[Illustration: Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers.]
+
+The Brethren Taylor and Wenger, with the assistance of the schoolboys
+and some other natives, moulded and burnt a large kiln of brick. Brother
+Taylor attended to the moulding and Brother Wenger to building the kiln.
+This gave the boys training in another line of industrial work, and at
+the end of about six weeks a lot of excellent brick were ready for
+building. Unfortunately there was no money on hand to build a house, for
+the Board had not been informed of our needs in this respect, since
+brickmaking had been undertaken rather suddenly. It was therefore
+necessary to postpone building a house until the next dry season.
+Brother Wenger, however, erected two small brick buildings, with
+thatched roofs. One was for grinding and storing grain, and the other a
+two-roomed cottage. In the latter a room was fitted up for the
+occupancy of himself and wife, so that we were prepared for another
+rainy season.
+
+One thing which was a serious handicap in the building and work that
+season was the condition of the oxen. After our return from Nanzela, in
+May, the oxen gave no indication of being bitten by the tsetse fly.
+Nearly a month later they were driven to Kalomo, a distance of about
+forty-five miles, and brought out a heavy load of goods on the arrival
+of our colaborers. They were also made use of in hauling sand for
+brickmaking; and in July, when Brother Steigerwalds returned home, they
+were again driven to the station. This time they made use of a new road
+and went east to Choma Station, a distance of only about thirty-six
+miles. By this time the oxen were showing signs of being bitten, and as
+there was no cure for them, they gradually became weaker and died, one
+by one, until we had lost nine, the last ones not dying until about six
+months after they were bitten. The fly injects a parasite into the
+blood, which gradually absorbs the red corpuscles, hence the lingering
+death.
+
+It was a serious loss to the mission at the time, as they had been in
+use almost constantly in farming, hauling, and bringing out supplies. In
+the Syracuse plow it was necessary to use all ten of the oxen in this
+heavy clay soil, and also in hauling the wagon.
+
+We still had a few, but there was not sufficient money on hand to
+purchase others at once. With eight ill-matched oxen, Brother Taylor
+undertook to go to Choma in November for the purpose of bringing out a
+six months' supply of goods and provisions, which had been sent up from
+Bulawayo. He took along five of the largest schoolboys to assist in
+carrying the goods across the bridgeless rivers. To add to the
+difficulty of the trip, grass was scarce at that season of the year, so
+that there was little food for the oxen. A little rain also fell while
+he was away and made the road muddy.
+
+On returning with the load he was able to get within twelve miles of
+home when the oxen could go no farther. He sent four of the boys each
+with a load of goods to the mission, and a call for help. Several native
+men and about twenty schoolboys were sent to his assistance, and after
+they reached the wagon, Brother Taylor concluded to endeavor to come a
+little nearer home before resting for the night. Each of the natives
+carried a load, and he himself carried one hundred pounds of flour and
+drove the oxen. They came about two and one-half miles farther and then
+camped for the night. A fire was kindled, but as the night was dark and
+misty the fire burned low. The boys lay around this and Brother Taylor
+on the open wagon. He was aroused several times during the night by a
+disturbance among the oxen. Thinking it was caused by one of the new
+oxen which had given him some trouble, he arose at three different times
+during the latter part of the night to quiet them, but the darkness was
+too great for him to see what was the trouble. The last time it was
+dawning a little in the east, and he thought he discerned the form of an
+animal moving toward an ant hill in the vicinity. The boys were aroused
+and soon had a fire; and as the morning came they discovered by the
+spoors that two lions had passed along within a few feet of where the
+boys lay and had gored one of the oxen during the night. These were what
+Brother Taylor had been trying to chase. The reader can imagine the
+thankfulness of all of them, as well as of ourselves, when it was
+discovered how wonderfully the Lord had preserved them all from harm. We
+rejoiced when the goods as well as Brother Taylor and the boys were all
+safely at home, but the heavy wagon had to remain for a time on the
+veldt before it could be brought to the mission.
+
+When the news of the misfortune to the oxen reached America the Lord
+inspired some of His children to send special donations for the purchase
+of others, and even before an account of the trouble had reached there
+some had heard of the need by way of the Throne and had sent money.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX
+
+Evangelistic and Other Labors
+
+
+During this dry season the spiritual part of the work, together with
+school and kraal-visiting, was not neglected, even though most of those
+who could speak the language were away.
+
+There were thirty-two boys in school, and they were doing good work. A
+translation of the Gospel of St. Mark had been printed by Rev. Smith,
+and an Ila hymn book by Rev. Chapman, of the same mission, and these
+were both very useful in our work. After our boys had finished the Ila
+books, we concluded to allow them to continue the Scriptures in the Zulu
+Testament, as it is always easier for the natives to pass from one
+native language into another than from English into their language. We
+found later that this use of the Zulu Testament proved very
+satisfactory, both to ourselves and the boys. Since we were familiar
+with that language, and they readily acquired it, their knowledge was of
+great assistance to us in translating portions of the Scripture into
+their tongue, and they were soon capable of interpreting for Elder
+Steigerwald and others who came to us from Southern Rhodesia. Here, as
+at Matopo, every day and all the day were the Scriptures studied and
+Christ held up, and morning, noon, and night we met in worship and
+explanation of the Bible. The great aim, both in school and out, was to
+produce sincere and ripe Christians, who should become teachers and
+evangelists of their people.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission Dwelling House.]
+
+Other studies were gradually introduced. Arithmetic seems to be always a
+difficult study for most of them, but some of them compared very
+favorably in that branch with others whom we had instructed. They had
+their own peculiar way at first of announcing whether their problems
+were correct or not. If they were correct the pupils would answer "_Wa
+pona_" (it is alive), and if incorrect they would say "_Wa fwa_" (it is
+dead). Although they sat side by side in the schoolroom and could easily
+look on the slates of their neighbors, they were generally very honest
+and independent in their work and did not attempt to copy.
+
+English also was introduced after they could read understandingly their
+own language. The opportunity of learning English is a privilege which
+all natives covet, as it seems to be more important in their eyes and
+more European. In some respects this _importance_ is one of the
+objectionable features about teaching it. Then too the native often is
+dull in learning it, but we need interpreters, and the value
+intellectually of this and arithmetic and kindred studies is not to be
+despised. English often aids the native in securing better positions
+with better pay when he goes to work among the Europeans; for go, at
+least for a while, he will. Some Europeans prefer natives who can speak
+and understand a little English. On the other hand, some white men, who
+have themselves a little knowledge of the native tongue, prefer, for
+their own purpose, that natives do not understand English. They want the
+native to understand only enough to go at their bidding and "keep his
+place," which is somewhat similar in their eyes with the lower order of
+animals. This class is forever a foe to the missionary and to the
+education and christianization of the natives. If one who has to some
+extent been educated, goes out into the centers of civilization and
+there, swallowed in the maelstrom of vice which surrounds him, imitates
+his new white teachers, they will point to him and say, "Yes, there is
+one of your mission boys. That is what missionary work does." Many a
+well-meaning native, who was making a fair progress toward Christian
+life, can trace his downfall to such teachers. If that class of
+Europeans would remain at the centers of civilization, it would still
+be more tolerable for the missionary, but often the towns are too moral
+for them, and they seek to go into the region of raw natives. As one
+glibly remarked, "When it becomes too civilized for me here, I'll go
+farther inland."
+
+Mr. Naylor, who has had an opportunity of studying at first hand the
+work all over Africa, says, "In Africa conscienceless trade, social
+vice, race hatred, and religious intolerance have freer scope because so
+far removed from the restraining influence of Christian public
+sentiment."
+
+This seeming digression from the subject can be excused only on the
+ground that it is one of the most difficult and perplexing problems the
+missionary has to face, and every one coming into the country in such a
+capacity is certain to meet it in one form or another. We are pleased to
+add, however, that the missionary also finds Europeans who are generous
+and helpful and favorable to the work; and the number of this class is
+increasing, as the aim of the missionary and the results of his efforts
+are more clearly understood.
+
+The attendance at church services was constantly increasing, and those
+present on Sunday sometimes reached 140 in number. Kraal-visiting also
+was carried on as opportunity afforded. Before Sister Engle left we had
+made a visit to Mianda, the home of Tom and Jim and of several other of
+our boys. This was about seven miles from Macha and too far for some of
+the older people to walk to services. As the boys were still with us,
+those in the kraal had not yet received any light. They appeared to be
+much pleased to see us, but when we attempted to point them to the
+Savior they seemed so dark and so unable to grasp spiritual things. This
+was especially true of Tom's mother, who sat in a little dark hut and
+was afflicted with a very sore eye. She had such a hopeless expression
+on her face, that the picture haunted us for many days afterwards.
+
+When Tom, who had accepted the Light as far as he knew, had been at the
+mission fifteen months, he desired to return home, and did so. A few
+months after he had returned to his home, one day, in company with two
+of the schoolboys, I went about four miles from the mission to visit
+some of the people. Quite unexpectedly we came upon Tom's mother in one
+of the huts. She was there visiting some of her friends. As usual, I
+began telling her of Jesus, and her face brightened immediately as she
+exclaimed:
+
+"Oh, yes! Siwesi [Tom] told me that. He said we should not worship the
+spirits any more; we should only worship God above [pointing upward]. He
+reads from his Book and sings and prays. I enjoy hearing of those
+things." This woman had never been at the mission, and this was the
+first indication, apart from the boys staying with us, that we had of
+Light entering the home. Her eagerness and evident sincerity showed
+plainly that she believed and was accepting the truth, and that the
+Light was coming through one of the schoolboys. The contrast between
+this picture and the first sight of this woman was so marked, and the
+joy of realizing that a ray of Light was entering one home at least,
+was so great, that as I retraced my steps homeward I kept saying to
+myself, "It pays, it pays."
+
+Brother Taylor felt especially called to spend his time in evangelistic
+work among the villages, and whenever he could snatch time from other
+duties pressing upon him he went out among the people, and in this
+manner a number of villages were visited.
+
+Many of the people at this time were destitute of food, as the previous
+season had not produced good crops. Many of them were living on fruits,
+roots, and plants, and much sickness was the result. With our large
+family, and only a moderate supply of grain, we were unable to give them
+much assistance, but we did what we could. Had they been willing to
+bring their small children to us we would have cared for them until
+other food was grown. One mother did bring her little boy, Halikumba,
+who was four or five years of age and nearly starved. He enjoyed his new
+home so much, and the abundance of food it supplied, that he would run
+and hide if he saw his mother come for fear she would take him away. He
+was such a little mite of humanity that we were afraid of placing him in
+the huts with the other boys, and for a time cared for him in the house.
+
+David returned to Macha in January, 1909, ready to enter again with
+enthusiasm into the work, and Brother Taylor concluded that the way was
+now opened for him to spend additional time in evangelistic labor, so he
+decided to take several boys and spend some time among the Baila north
+of us. This is a bold and warlike tribe, living in large villages, and
+much addicted to drink, dancing, and carousals. Rows, and even murders,
+are not infrequent among them, and it required some courage to venture
+into their territory. The Lord gave the Brother open doors, however, and
+some attentive listeners, and we believe seed was sown that will bear
+fruit in eternity.
+
+He had some difficulties to encounter, which were not so pleasant. It is
+a low, flat country; and as he was there in the midst of the rainy
+season, heavy rains flooded the country on all sides, so that he was
+frequently obliged to wade the water in going from one village to
+another. After two months of arduous labor, his health gave way and he
+was carried back sick to the mission. It required some time before he
+fully recovered from the exposure and hardships of the trip.
+
+These experiences are not pleasant, but they are incidental to the
+country, and every missionary feels that he should be ready at all times
+to endure for Christ's sake and the salvation of souls what men are
+going through every day for money or a home.
+
+Brother Wenger also had been suffering greatly in health while at the
+mission, both from nervous disorders and from fever. Notwithstanding
+this, he decided to begin building a house, since the rains were about
+over and funds had been received for this purpose. David also was ready
+to help in the work. With the assistance of the boys they brought
+together stones and began the foundation. Near the mission there were
+very few building stones, but this need had been supplied in a rather
+unexpected manner. The brethren had undertaken to dig a well the
+previous season, but on coming into contact with a great deal of stone,
+which necessitated blasting, they went down only forty-five feet and
+finally concluded the task was useless. The only beneficial result of
+their labors was the stones which had been taken out of the well, and
+which furnished a large part of the material for the foundation of the
+house.
+
+[Illustration: Eld. Steigerwald and Mr. Doner with Carriers on Their
+Trip North of Macha.]
+
+Brother Wenger laid the foundation of a house 41 x 16 feet, with a wing
+18 x 10 feet, and began work on the brick. Unfortunately, while this was
+in progress, his health gave way repeatedly, and he and Sister Wenger
+concluded that it was advisable for them to leave for Bulawayo and
+finally for America, and David continued to work at the house. Brother
+Taylor had sufficiently recovered from his illness by this time to be
+able to take the Wengers to the station. He then waited there a few
+days for the train from the south, and brought back with him Elder
+Steigerwald, Mr. Doner, Miss Engle, and Gomo, all of whom we were
+expecting.
+
+He was absent from the mission eight days, and during that time I had an
+attack of fever and was obliged to be in bed for a week. This was my
+first attack, and as it was quite severe, it enabled me to sympathize
+better with those who had been sick so much. We were very glad to
+welcome Sister Engle and the rest back to work. The two brethren from
+Bulawayo were on a tour of exploration north, but they generously
+decided to stay and assist Brother Taylor to finish the brick work of
+the new house. This timely assistance was greatly appreciated by us all,
+and that part of the building was completed in two weeks, after which
+they proceeded north.
+
+The special object of their trip was to look at a location north of the
+Kafue River, where a missionary had died not long before. This
+missionary had started a work in this unhealthy region, and his life had
+paid the penalty. Some friends of his, notably Mrs. Lewis, of Cape Town,
+had desired our people to examine the place, and, if thought advisable,
+to continue the work, and Brother Doner was willing to do this if they
+concluded that the opening was a good one.
+
+They made the journey on foot, accompanied by Matshuba and native
+carriers from the vicinity of Macha. They passed through the very heart
+of the territory occupied by the wild Baila, and visited the new station
+at Kasenga, which had just been opened by Rev. Smith. He and his heroic
+wife had started this station in the heart of the Baila country and in
+an unhealthful locality, not considering their lives dear unto
+themselves, only that they might take the Gospel to these people and
+continue the translation of the New Testament, which Mr. Smith had
+already begun.
+
+[Illustration: Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout.]
+
+Near this place the brethren crossed the broad Kafue River and proceeded
+in a northwesternly direction toward the railroad. They found the
+mission station and the place where the missionary had died, and heard
+some of the children sing a hymn which the missionary had taught them.
+They were not very well satisfied, however, with the location, and
+returned to Macha by a different route. They traveled on foot a distance
+of perhaps 250 miles, and were absent from Macha a month. They could not
+understand the language and had some trying experiences from wild
+animals and wilder men, but the Lord graciously preserved them from all
+harm. They then returned to Bulawayo to continue their labors.
+
+In the meantime Brother Taylor, with the aid of the native brethren, was
+progressing very satisfactorily with the house. It contained four
+fair-sized rooms and a pantry, and had a broad veranda on three sides to
+protect the walls from deterioration by sun and rain. These walls were
+twelve feet high, with a drop-ceiling of muslin two feet below the
+eaves, to serve as a protection from the fierce rays of the sun and to
+furnish an air chamber. On top of the foundation and underneath the
+brick walls were placed strips of zinc, soldered together, to prevent
+the white ants from forcing their way through into the walls and thence
+onto the timbers of the roof. The floors were of earth, pounded hard and
+well tarred to keep out the ants. The large glass windows were quite a
+relief from the small holes in the old house. Later the windows and the
+greater part of the veranda were screened. The house was in every way
+most satisfactory, except that it was not quite proof against the white
+ants. Cement floors and steel ceilings would have been preferable, but
+the cost was prohibitive.
+
+[Illustration: Batonga Chiefs and Headmen.]
+
+Sister Engle's return gave us an opportunity of continuing the
+kraal-visiting, and we made use of it in gaining an entrance into other
+homes. At Kabanzi village, about nine miles away, services had been held
+more or less regularly ever since the establishment of the mission, and
+Sister Engle and I decided to take the tent and spend a week at this
+place and hold some Gospel services. Gomo and a number of the boys
+accompanied us and built a hut for the use of those coming here to
+conduct services. This week spent among the people was a most delightful
+one, and beneficial physically, especially to myself, since I was
+feeling the effects of my three years' stay in this climate. The people
+attended the services well, and seemed greatly interested as they sat
+around the campfire and listened to the Message.
+
+In other homes too there was beginning to be a change, for the girls
+were coming out of their seclusion and listening to the old, old Story,
+and some were even venturing to the mission on Sunday. Some of the older
+people also appeared interested, and made a show at least of desiring to
+be Christians.
+
+This does not imply that the kraals around us were fast accepting the
+Gospel as a result of the three years' labor among them. No, the devil
+was plying his trade at our very doors. Almost nightly one could hear
+the tomtoms beaten in connection with their worship, or as an
+accompaniment in their immoral dances; for none of their worship was
+omitted by the older ones, at least in their homes. The missionary work
+was just begun, and perhaps none of the present workers would live to
+see the day when these things would cease in the villages. The false
+religions and customs which have been so deeply imbedded for centuries
+would require patient, consecrated labor for years, and even
+generations, to uproot. One must be willing to go on, day by day,
+although he may see little or no fruit of his labors, knowing that the
+Great Husbandman will care for the seed sown.
+
+[Illustration: First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native Congregation Not
+Visible.]
+
+The work thus far, however, had not been without its visible fruits, as
+the stability of some of our boys gave ample testimony. The number
+staying at the mission had now grown to forty. These were some of the
+called-out ones from the various kraals about us. Each had sent its
+quota, and although some had come and gone, the great majority stayed on
+from year to year. As the Light came to them they came and confessed
+their sins, forsook their old life and accepted Christ as their Savior,
+showing by their lives that they were His. Some of these were about
+grown; others were still quite young, but we hoped to see the day when
+some of them would become teachers and evangelists of their people.
+
+[Illustration: Wedding Dinner at Macha.]
+
+Word had been received that Elders J. N. Engle and J. Sheets were to be
+sent out by the Mission Board to visit the various stations and report
+on the progress of the work. In November, 1909, just after we had moved
+into the new house, they, together with Elder Steigerwald, came to pay
+us the long-looked-for visit. Their visit was greatly enjoyed and we
+believe was a blessing to the work of the Lord. To Brother Sheets the
+boys gave the name "Happy," no doubt because he frequently used the word
+and also showed it in his manner. Two important events occurred during
+their stay, which deserve special mention.
+
+The first was the marriage, on November 4, of Mr. Taylor and Miss Adda
+Engle. The natives were invited to this ceremony, and about 350 accepted
+the invitation. Several chiefs came with their people and arranged
+themselves in groups, eager to see what a Christian wedding was like.
+The marriage ceremony was performed by Bishop Engle, who was a son of
+the first bishop to Matopo Mission, and also a cousin of the bride.
+Bishop Steigerwald delivered an excellent and instructive discourse to
+the natives on the importance of the occasion and the tenets of
+Christian marriage. This was interpreted into the vernacular by David
+and was listened to most attentively by the natives present. It was
+their first opportunity of learning this phase of Christianity, and it
+was an important event from a missionary standpoint. Christian marriage
+and the principles it stands for generally require a long time for
+inculcation into the hearts and lives of at least the older natives, but
+many of the younger ones very readily accept it, as the many Christian
+marriages performed at our older stations testify.
+
+At the close of the ceremony, and after the missionaries and boys had
+offered their congratulations, the rest of the natives congratulated in
+their own way, which was by the clapping of hands. Some also began
+cheering with the mouth, but this demonstration was checked. Brother
+Taylor had arranged to give them a feast of beef and porridge, and this
+they greatly enjoyed, as it is to some the great aim of life; namely, to
+have plenty to eat.
+
+The second important event was the occasion of the first baptism at
+Macha, in which ten of our boys were baptized by Brother Steigerwald in
+the Macha River, and received into Church fellowship, thus showing to
+their heathen neighbors that they had forsaken their old lives. A
+beautiful feature of this was that some of the parents and older ones
+met them as they came out of the water and seemed to rejoice with them
+in their new life. There were others who were eager to take the step,
+but it was thought they had not yet sufficiently counted the cost.
+
+We then had the privilege of surrounding the table of the Lord together
+with these who had been so lately snatched from heathen darkness. These
+were the first fruits of Macha and reminded one of Professor Drummond's
+experience in Nyassaland. He says: "I cherish no more sacred memory of
+my life than that of a communion service in the little Bandawe Church,
+when the sacramental cup was handed to me by the bare black arm of a
+native communicant--a communicant whose life, tested afterwards in many
+an hour of trial with me on the Tanganyika Plateau, gave him perhaps a
+better right to be there than any of us."
+
+The missionary too is often made to feel, as he sees some of these
+humble, black followers of the Lord, and thinks how far they have come,
+and how steadfast the lives of many of them prove to be, that He Who
+sees and tests all hearts may, with Mr. Drummond, conclude that they
+have a better right to sit around the table of the Lord than any of us.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN
+
+Other Missionary Experiences
+
+
+The experiences of a missionary are so many and so diverse that nothing
+should surprise him. To give these experiences, with too distinct a line
+of demarcation, would not place the work in its proper setting, for they
+often come piling one upon the other and cannot be separated.
+
+I had now been north of the Zambezi nearly three and one-half years, and
+was in need of a change, so when the delegation from America left I also
+went along to the station. Brother and Sister Taylor accompanied us to
+Choma Station on a little wedding trip, and then returned to carry on
+the work at Macha, while David took charge of the school. Elders Engle
+and Steigerwald went north on an exploring trip as far as Broken Hill.
+Brother Sheets went to Bulawayo and I to Natal.
+
+On the way south an accident occurred which was quite unusual, even for
+this animal-ridden country. After the train had passed the Zambezi River
+and Wankie Coal Fields, in the evening about eight o'clock there was a
+lunge in the train and a lady in the same compartment with myself
+exclaimed, "There must be an accident of some kind." The train soon came
+to a sudden stop, and it was evident that something had happened. People
+began running about in the darkness, a large bonfire was soon built
+near the front of the train, a bulky form was visible, and word came
+back that we had struck an elephant. Great excitement prevailed. Gomo
+also was on the train, returning to his home, and he came back to our
+compartment and said, "Come and see the elephant. I'll take care of
+you."
+
+I went forward with him and found a huge elephant lying beside the
+train. Its two hind feet were crushed, as the engine, tender, and
+service car had passed over them; otherwise it was unhurt, and at times
+made violent efforts to stand upon its front feet. At such times the
+crowd of people would suddenly take flight, to be out of harm's way, and
+a box-car near by was in danger of being demolished. No one on the train
+was supplied with a large rifle, suitable for elephant hunting, but
+small ones kept up a lively fire, until perhaps three dozen were emptied
+into the huge bulk before it succumbed.
+
+The engine had been derailed by the violence of the shock, and it would
+require some time before we could proceed. Judging from the spoor it was
+evident that the elephant was one of those large ones that roam the
+forests alone, and it had run quite a distance on the track before the
+engine struck it. It was an immense animal, and the large ears resembled
+a cape lying back over the shoulders.
+
+There were a number of natives on the train, who were going down to work
+in the mines about Bulawayo, and they wished to begin at once on the
+feast of meat before them, but the authorities thought it best to put
+them at working the large jacks used in moving the engine back on the
+rails. All night long bright fires of logs were kept burning to light
+up the scene and work. The engine finally was in place, and the natives
+eagerly hastened to cut out large pieces of elephant meat and to roast
+it over the great beds of coal left from the campfires of the night.
+Soon, however, the train began to move, just twelve hours from the time
+of stopping, and the natives, with their raw or half-cooked meat,
+hastened to enter their car, and we moved on, having had a share in one
+of the most exciting railroad trips of the season. The tusks of this
+elephant finally found their way into the Bulawayo Museum.
+
+[Illustration: The Elephant That Derailed the Train.]
+
+The tusks of the African elephant often are quite large and heavy. I
+once saw in a European home three pairs of tusks from elephants lately
+killed by a young farmer. Of one pair of tusks each was five feet long,
+eighteen inches in diameter; one weighed one hundred pounds and the
+other five pounds less. We are informed, however, that some have tusks
+still much larger than these.
+
+It is unnecessary to give the details of this, our second trip south to
+Natal and Johannesburg, and my visit to our mission stations in the
+Matopos have already been mentioned. I was absent six months and felt
+thoroughly rested and ready for the work again. On my return to
+Bulawayo, however, I learned the sad news that the native who had come
+south on the train at the same time as myself had, since he was at home,
+fallen into sin. We were all deeply grieved over this, and he confessed
+and wept over his condition, but appeared discouraged and unable to take
+hold of the Lord by faith for pardon and cleansing. There were several
+others in his home who had once confessed Christ and had backslidden,
+and they no doubt had their influence over him. The Lord is still able
+to redeem him, and may he have our prayers. Such are some of the heavy
+burdens the missionaries have to bear.
+
+On my return in June, 1910, Misses Mary Heisey and Elizabeth Engle
+accompanied me to Macha to pay a visit to that place. Brother Taylor met
+us at the station and conveyed us to the mission, where we were greeted
+by a crowd of boys and five girls, who had joined the mission family,
+with the clapping of hands and the firing of a rifle. We rejoiced that
+we could again return to our field of labor.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910.]
+
+In the new house and improved surroundings every one had been well and
+the work had been moving forward in all its departments under the
+efficient management of Brother and Sister Taylor. Not only had these
+girls come to stay at the mission, but David had prevailed upon a number
+to attend day-school, at least part of the time. Sister Taylor, in
+addition to her many other duties, had formed all these girls into a
+sewing-class and was endeavoring to teach them to make garments for
+themselves. This was the first opportunity that had been given of
+instructing girls in sewing, and she had made remarkable progress also
+in instructing them in their work about the house.
+
+Naturally they do not know what cleanliness is, either about their
+person or in their homes. They seldom wash, they go half-clad, and smear
+their bodies with paint and grease, and often let the dogs lick clean
+the few dishes or pots which they possess. If their hands are wet or
+dirty, the posts of the veranda, blocks of wood, or floors are used as
+towels to wipe on. They see no reason for continually washing a lot of
+dishes, sweeping floors, and keeping the house in order; and they open
+their eyes in astonishment to see white sheets and tablecloths put into
+the water to be washed. The few articles of clothing to be seen in their
+homes are generally so thickly coated with grease and dirt as often to
+render it impossible to distinguish the color. Many times they do not
+have any soap, and even if they do have, they object to washing their
+clothing for fear it will wear out. And yet these young girls, reared in
+such homes had, in these few months, made rapid progress and were
+becoming quite proficient in assisting with some of the work of the
+kitchen. Sister Taylor's great patience in teaching them was bearing
+fruit.
+
+Brother Taylor had, in connection with his other duties, made a large
+galvanized iron tank to hold rain water. This was large enough for 1,700
+gallons of water, and was greatly needed, as the river water which we
+were obliged to use was very muddy part of the year. He had always
+maintained that he was no mechanic, but another missionary, Rev.
+Kerswell, who had had experience in mechanical work, said on seeing this
+tank, "Mr. Taylor, you say that you are no mechanic; but if you made
+this, you are one; for no one but a mechanic could perform such a piece
+of work."
+
+[Illustration: Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill.]
+
+While the sisters were with us Brother Taylor and wife arranged to take
+them on a trip north, so that they might have an opportunity of seeing
+something of the country and the natives. For this purpose the wagon was
+again fitted up with the tent and camping outfit and the ten oxen
+inspanned. A number of the schoolboys were permitted to accompany them
+for a holiday, but the regular driver for the wagon did not go along.
+They spent some time at the two large villages of Kabanzi and Simeoba,
+holding services and conversing with the natives, and then proceeded
+toward a village farther north. The grass was long, the road new, and
+darkness was coming on when they approached the village. As frequently
+happens near a village, there was a large opening in the ground from
+which clay had been taken to plaster the huts. This was partly hidden by
+the long grass, and had not been noticed in the gathering darkness.
+Brother Taylor had gone in advance to look out a place for camping,
+and some of the boys were driving. The wheels of one side of the wagon
+went down suddenly into the excavation and the wagon was overturned, the
+tent being under the heavy wagon. The accident might have been very
+serious for the women, but fortunately there were two large boxes in the
+wagon and these prevented the weight of the wagon from resting on them
+and they escaped without any serious injury, but the tent was of course
+ruined. Brother Taylor said that, as he hastened to the wagon, he heard
+a boy on the rear end of the wagon yelling lustily; so he felt satisfied
+that that one was not dead, and he turned his first attention to those
+who were making no noise.
+
+When the sisters returned to their fields of labor, David again returned
+home, this time to be married and bring back a wife from Mapani Station.
+
+The spiritual condition of the pupils continued excellent. There was a
+spirit of inquiry among them and a searching after God at times, as the
+Spirit was poured out upon them. Some prayed through to victory and a
+definite knowledge of sins forgiven. Those who had been with us longer
+were instrumental in bringing the newer ones to seek pardon. The spirit
+among them was such that any one who did not care to be a Christian
+generally did not remain long at the mission. At this time also we were
+favored with special donations and enabled to equip the school better
+and give more attention toward the training of teachers.
+
+It will be remembered that one of the special needs was a translation of
+the Scriptures into the language of the people. The books already in
+use, prepared by Rev. Smith, were in the Ila language. This was
+sufficiently allied to the Tonga for use at Macha; and it is always an
+advantage in the mission field to unify the languages as much as
+possible, so as to reduce rather than increase the number of languages.
+
+St. Mark was already in print, and Mr. Smith, together with some of his
+colleagues, was putting forth great efforts to translate the entire New
+Testament into Ila. At their urgent request I consented to be on the
+revision committee, for they desired to make the translation as
+intelligible as possible to the Batonga, so that it could be used all
+over Northwestern Rhodesia, with the exception of among the Barotse,
+where the Suto language was in use. Matthew was soon in print, and the
+entire New Testament is at present in the hands of the publishers. The
+translators deserve much praise for their laborious task and the
+creditable manner in which they have performed the much-needed
+translation. The Word cannot be properly disseminated among the people
+unless the pupils have it in their own language as they go out among the
+villages to teach.
+
+Placing native teachers in their homes seems to be the best method of
+reaching the majority of the people, and especially the girls; and some
+of the pupils were sufficiently advanced to begin teaching, yet they
+were somewhat young to go out into their dark, dark homes and stand
+alone for God. Notwithstanding this, before the end of 1910 several
+schools were opened in the nearest villages, and the teachers boarded
+at the mission and went back and forth to teach.
+
+On Christmas week of this year a sad and unfortunate affair occurred,
+which threw a gloom over the community. My readers will remember the
+Chief Macha, who sent a goat the first Christmas, and who was the first
+to bring his little boy as a pupil in school. To all appearances he was
+a friend of the work from the beginning, and he was nearly always to be
+found in his place at the services on Sunday. He had even expressed a
+desire several times to be a Christian. We knew his life had not
+changed, but he had evidently lost faith in some of the old pagan
+beliefs, and his influence was worth much. He was a man of importance in
+the neighborhood and the owner of a herd of cattle, which was quite
+large from a native standpoint.
+
+[Illustration: Simeboa's Village, Viewing the Strangers, Misses E. Engle
+and Mary Helsey.]
+
+On the day before Christmas word came that he had gone to the hills and
+could not be found; again that he was found dead, killed by a lion. His
+son at once went home, and I, together with some of the girls, soon
+followed. On the way to the village we met a native woman, who informed
+us that he was already buried, and on our arrival at the place we found
+that those who buried him had gone to the river to wash. While we were
+sitting there several of the people came to speak to us, and we noticed
+that some of the men spoke together in a low tone. Their answers to some
+of our questions were somewhat vague; but as there was no suspicion of
+foul play, we thought no more of the matter and asked no further
+questions.
+
+After the people returned from the river, the wailing began by about
+thirty or thirty-five men walking back and forth; brandishing their
+assegais and guns and crying "_Mawe!_" At the same time the women stood
+about the grave, wailing and calling upon the dead. The sight was
+somewhat fearful and might have alarmed a stranger, but since the
+majority of these were from the adjacent kraals and were acquainted with
+us we feared no violence. In the evening Brother Taylor and the boys
+went over to show their sympathy, and the next day services were held
+there. All this time nothing further was learned except that the chief
+was killed by a lion. The English official from Kalomo, who, with his
+messengers, happened to be in the neighborhood at the time, received the
+same version of the cause of the death as we did. According to native
+custom, the brother of the deceased assumed his title and appropriated
+his cattle, and the affair, as far as it concerned ourselves, was
+dropped.
+
+About three weeks later Lupata, another chief, who lived near, together
+with one of his men, and Kaiba, a nephew of the deceased, came to inform
+us that Macha had been murdered. They said that he had been murdered
+while out on the veldt, and an attempt made to hide the body. A number
+of natives went to search for him, Lupata among the number, and when
+they discovered the body they saw at once that a murder had been
+committed. The brother of the murdered man enjoined the rest to secrecy
+and promised to give Lupata some cattle if he would not tell the
+missionaries or officials of the crime. Lupata, although very fond of
+cattle, of which he had only a few, did not jump at the bribe. He said
+that he and Kaiba desired to inform me on the day of the funeral that
+the chief had been murdered, but the brother said, "Do not talk about it
+to the white people," and they had been silent for fear of offending
+him; as natives never like to gain the ill will of their fellows.
+
+We might have heard nothing further about it, at least for a time; but
+the brother was afraid the crime might leak out, and he still hoped to
+silence the affair by giving the other chief some cattle. To do this he
+was not willing to take of his own cattle, which he had taken from the
+murdered man, but tried to take those of Kaiba, who was a good,
+unassuming native. Kaiba greatly resented this disposition of his
+property, and wanted to take the matter to the magistrate at Kalomo. He
+and Lupata came to inform us of the murder and wished us to inform the
+magistrate by letter. Lupata said, "I do not want his cattle and I think
+you should write and tell the _Mwami_ [magistrate] of the murder." Both
+refused to state who they thought was the murderer.
+
+Brother Taylor wrote an explanation of the affair and Kaiba carried the
+letter to the magistrate, the brother and two other natives
+accompanying. This was the first intimation the magistrate had of foul
+play, and when he put the question to them they readily acknowledged
+that the man had been murdered. The brother, however, who had always
+been opposed to everything good, and had a very evil countenance, showed
+the cunning of his master; and he and one of the men accompanying put
+the blame on the third. This one acknowledged his guilt, saying that he
+and the other had killed the chief and the brother had sent them. We
+were informed later that the brother sent them three times before they
+became willing to perform the deed. Of course all three were put behind
+the bars.
+
+It was a case of alleged witchcraft. Several children had died in the
+kraal under peculiar circumstances, and the blame had been laid by the
+brother, who was a witch doctor, on the chief. We prefer to think, from
+what we know of the two, that the brother was the guilty one in each
+instance, and was desirous of the chief's property and position.
+
+[Illustration: Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the Matopo
+Hills.]
+
+During this rainy season it was thought advisable for Brother and Sister
+Taylor to go to Bulawayo and Matopo Mission for a much-needed rest. She
+went in November and he followed in January, 1911. At the same time
+David returned with his wife, Mankunku. Mankunku is one of the converts
+from Mapani Mission. She is a sincere Christian girl, and has proved a
+great help and blessing among the women and girls at Macha ever since
+she came. These two, with myself, prosecuted the work at Macha for the
+next five months alone.
+
+There were at this time forty-six boys and four girls staying at the
+mission, and it was necessary, not only to teach them in school, but to
+keep them profitably employed during work hours and out on the farm.
+Quite a fair amount of land was under cultivation, and Brother Taylor
+had planted grain, fruit, and vegetables before he left, the care of
+which gave the boys plenty of work to do during the rainy season. As
+soon as that was over David made use of them in getting grass and poles
+together for building, and as permanent buildings were to be erected
+they tried to secure hardwood rafters.
+
+Although there were so many boys together, yet all manifested a nice
+Christian spirit. They were not quarrelsome, and they were obedient and
+faithful in their work. The chief difficulty with natives is that they
+are inclined to keep their eyes fixed on the missionary too constantly
+and do not learn to depend on God for their own spiritual needs. The
+missionary, as he realizes the responsibility resting upon him, often
+feels like exclaiming, "Who is sufficient for these things?" to lead all
+in the right way. He may rejoice, however, that he can continually say,
+"My sufficiency is of God." He must also by every means in his power get
+their eyes off of himself and fix them on God. Otherwise they will do
+what is right at the mission and fall when those props are removed.
+
+June 16 I wrote somewhat as follows:
+
+     Last Monday the wagon went to the Myeki River (about five miles
+     distant) to get some thatching grass which the boys had cut there
+     the week before. I thought it an excellent opportunity to visit
+     Semani, who has been sick for some time and not likely to recover.
+     I took along three girls and the two six-year-old boys and
+     thoroughly dismissed from my mind home cares. We had a delightful
+     ride over and a nice walk back, but best of all was the visit with
+     Semani. He had accepted Christ while here at the mission and had
+     often accompanied David in his kraal-visiting. He became sick,
+     however, and we seemed unable to help him, so he desired to return
+     home until he was well. He was always hoping he would recover and
+     return to us.
+
+     He has pleurisy and is continually growing worse, and it is evident
+     that the end is not far off. He greeted me with a smile as I
+     entered, and while we were speaking, I inquired "Is Jesus here?"
+     The reply, with a bright smile was, "Yes, He is here." We continued
+     to speak of the things of the other world and what the Lord has in
+     store for His children, and through it all he seemed so ready both
+     to talk and to listen. His old heathen mother sat there in sort of
+     a dazed wonder to hear us speaking thus familiarly and without fear
+     of death and transition. For her sake I then asked him if he were
+     afraid to die. He quickly replied, "Oh, no, I am not at all afraid
+     to die; I am ready."
+
+     Later, when we bowed in prayer, he prayed, "I thank Thee, God, for
+     Thy help and blessing. I have come through some hard places, but
+     Thou hast given me victory. And, Jesus, if my time has come and You
+     want to take me, it is all right. I'll gladly go with You."
+
+     How we could rejoice that here was one who, only two or three years
+     ago, was a raw heathen boy, now so happy in the Lord, and so ready
+     to meet Him. If one soul is worth more than the whole world then
+     our coming to Macha has not been in vain. His people had been
+     wanting to "throw bones" and "smell out" the one who, according to
+     their ideas, had bewitched him, but he steadfastly refused, for he
+     has no faith in those things.
+
+[Illustration: The Bottle Palm.]
+
+Later it was my privilege to again visit him, together with Mankunku. We
+had made a trip to a village beyond, where we remained for the night,
+and stopped with Semani, both going and returning. He was much weaker at
+this time and it was evident the end was near, and his friends had
+gathered and were ready for the wailing. We found him, although in great
+pain and with great difficulty in breathing, yet rejoicing and happy in
+the thought that he was soon going home. He could not lie down, but was
+supported in the arms of his mother, who was doing all in her power to
+help him bear his suffering. He was, however, able to take a little of
+the nourishment which we brought him. On our return the day following,
+he was still weaker. In the night his friends thought he was dying, when
+he suddenly roused and sang "_Jesu udi tu fwine_" ("Jesus loves me").
+These heathen friends in speaking to one another the next day said, "His
+heart is white toward God, and that is the reason he can sing when
+dying."
+
+Before we departed he requested Christian burial, so we left word for
+them to inform us at once of his death. Word came that same evening.
+Brother Taylor was at home by this time, and he and David, together with
+a number of the schoolboys, went at once to the burial, although it was
+night. They found the body prepared for burial and the people digging
+the grave. Brother Taylor said everything was carried on most quietly
+until services were over and the body had been buried; then the heathen
+part of the wailing began in earnest. His brother, while wailing,
+continued to cry out, "Semani, where has he gone? He has gone to the
+light. Oh! where has he gone?" It was the wail of gross darkness seeing
+a faint glimmer of light, but knowing not how to reach it.
+
+The deathbed of our friends, surrounded with all the comforts this life
+can afford--soft beds, willing, low-voiced nurses, dainty food, helpful
+and spiritual ministrations--is often trying enough; here, however, was
+one deprived of all these comforts, with the exception of the occasional
+visits of his missionaries, lying or sitting on the hard floor, with
+only a mat for a bed, without even the ordinary decencies of life, much
+less its comforts, in a village and home wholly pagan; and yet he goes,
+rejoicing in his Savior's love, carried out of this dark hovel to behold
+things "Eye hath not seen, nor ear heard, neither have entered into the
+heart of man the things which God hath prepared," but He had already
+revealed them unto him by His Spirit.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT
+
+Further Improvements and Industrial Work
+
+
+Industrial work had from the first progressed very favorably at the
+mission. The majority of boys, as they came, stayed on from year to year
+and exhibited more tenacity of purpose than is generally to be found
+among the natives. Some of them had assisted in making brick for the
+house and in the building; others had learned to handle the oxen in the
+wagon and on the farm in plowing, harrowing, and cultivating, while a
+number were engaged in gardening, hoeing, and the general work of the
+farm. Even the youngest were not idle, although their labors did not
+equal the expense of their keeping. We were, however, growing sufficient
+grain and food to supply our large family so that they could be kept
+from year to year under Christian training without their proving a heavy
+burden on the mission financially.
+
+In June we were pleased to receive Brother and Sister Taylor back from
+Bulawayo, and with them a blessing to the mission in the person of a
+little baby, Ruth Taylor. I use the term _blessing_ advisedly, for this
+dainty little Ruth was indeed such to all connected with the work. These
+people had not seen a white child, and this one was an ever-increasing
+source of wonder and interest to the black faces around us. They would
+stand near her noting every move and commenting on everything they saw.
+Her soft white skin and spotless garments soon gave her a name. "U
+swezhiwa" ("she is clean or pure") the girls called her, and thus she
+undoubtedly looked by contrast. Her presence often attracted to the
+services people, especially the women, who otherwise would have remained
+at home; for in the eyes of some, all other interests paled besides this
+mite of humanity, and it warmed their hearts toward the entire work.
+When we went to the village she was again a center of attraction, and
+when we went alone the natives would always inquire about U swezhiwa and
+her mother. When prayer was offered by the boys for the missionaries,
+the child was never forgotten.
+
+After Brother Taylor's return the preparation for building went forward
+with accelerated speed. This dry season of 1911 was an unusually busy
+one at Macha. A church was greatly needed, for the one which David had
+erected four years previously, and which appeared to be so well-built,
+was rapidly showing signs of decay. It was still standing, but the ants
+had riddled the roof to such an extent that some of the timbers were
+falling, piece by piece, sometimes to the danger and great annoyance of
+those within. On this account we decided that it was best to vacate it
+even before the new one was finished. The boys' huts also were decaying,
+and we found it difficult to house the large number of boys staying at
+the mission. These thatched roofs are very heavy, and if some part of
+the wall becomes weak the huts may become dangerous to life.
+
+One evening the boys of one of the huts came to say that the roof of
+their hut was breaking. We told them to take their blankets and clothing
+and go into another hut. They did so, and in the morning their own
+building was found leveled to the ground. As we viewed the sudden ruin
+we breathed a prayer of thanksgiving that no one was hurt. There had
+been about fifteen boys sleeping in that hut, and had they been inside
+some would have been killed or seriously injured. This enabled us to
+realize how dangerous huts were when partly eaten, and the need of
+better buildings.
+
+On account of building it was fortunate that there was such a large
+number of boys staying at the mission, and that the majority were large
+enough to be of service, so that there was no need of employing outside
+labor. Brother Taylor was excellent in training boys along industrial
+lines, a quality which is especially useful and helpful on the mission
+field, both in the interests of the work and of the natives themselves.
+Some people are glad to use native helpers when they are trained ready
+to order, but they soon become discouraged when time and patience are
+required.
+
+The native learns by doing, and often learns by his many mistakes.
+Again, he may be careless and consider accuracy unnecessary. He is
+nature's child, and everything he does for himself is in curves. His hut
+is round, his baskets are round, his paths are meandering, like the
+stream, for he, like it, goes in the path of least resistance. Straight
+lines and right angles are unintelligible to him, and he does not
+readily grasp such things, nor does he easily learn to make them.
+Patience, which is always a virtue, is, in industrial work among the
+natives, an absolute necessity. One who will not take time and teach
+them will accomplish nothing praiseworthy in this respect.
+
+We said the native learns by doing; so he does, but it is generally by
+doing not once or twice but repeatedly. One of my first lessons along
+this line was when visiting in the home of an official. The lady had
+always lived in South Africa and had been accustomed to deal with the
+natives all her life. Noticing a basket of snowy-white clothes I
+inquired, "Who does your washing?"
+
+She replied, "The boys; I send them to the river to wash."
+
+"But how can you teach them to do their work so well?"
+
+"If they do not do it properly," she replied, "I send them back to
+repeat it until it suits me."
+
+This is the keynote of the situation. In addition to showing them how to
+perform a task, one must insist on their doing it just as they have been
+told. If they become careless or learn with difficulty, one should not
+become discouraged and go and finish the work--for this frequently is
+easier than to teach the natives--but should insist on their repeating
+the task until it is properly done. Some natives with very little
+instruction become experts at certain kinds of work. And sometimes even
+raw ones readily adapt themselves to housework with very little
+training. A lady in Bulawayo, who was a very careful housekeeper, had a
+native boy as servant, who was giving excellent satisfaction, yet she
+supposed that on her own exertions depended the work of keeping the
+rooms in order. Finally he concluded to leave her service, and she said
+she did not know until after he left how much work he had really done.
+He had been in the habit, early in the morning, before his master and
+mistress arose, of going over the house, cleaning and polishing mirrors
+and furniture.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission Church and Boys' House Built by Mr. Myron
+Taylor.]
+
+Another native, whose name has been frequently mentioned in these pages,
+was exceedingly cleanly and careful in his personal appearance. His
+clothes were always well washed and mended, and he went on the principle
+that a stitch in time saves nine. He learned to do things by seeing
+others perform them and was able to do them well. Although coming from a
+raw heathen home he was called an exceptional native, even by those who
+had had long experience with civilized natives.
+
+As a rule those who are careful and painstaking are generally slow, and
+many who are quick often do not perform their work properly. Some never
+seem to respond to careful teaching, and with others, many both trying
+and ludicrous blunders often occur. In the early days of Macha Mission
+we had a half-grown boy, by the name of Hamambile, helping in the
+kitchen. He was a good boy and seemed to be performing his work
+properly. One day several of the boys, who had been working on the farm
+and had soiled their hands, came into the kitchen. Hamambile was washing
+the dishes, so he generously stepped aside and invited the boys to wash
+their hands in the water where the dishes were being washed, and this
+they were vigorously doing when Sister Engle stepped in at the door. Nor
+did her presence in the least abash the boys, for they saw no
+impropriety in the act.
+
+Again, during the last year some new girls had joined the mission family
+and were being initiated into the mysteries of housekeeping. They seemed
+to learn well and were doing their work properly, but one day Sister
+Doner, on looking out of the window, was shocked to see a girl out in
+the yard with the dishpan, washing her feet. She too failed to see
+anything out of place in her act when she was first spoken to. She said
+she was just making use of some of the nice soapsuds on the water, for
+she thought it was too nice to throw away. It can easily be seen that
+one needs to be continually watchful while teaching some of them. On the
+other hand, there is no doubt that the raw native considers the white
+man or woman very cranky and extreme when he insists on cleanliness and
+order about the work.
+
+On account of the great need it was necessary to build both a church and
+boys' house in the one dry season. There was erected a substantial
+church, 42 x 21 feet, with a wide veranda in front, which was also
+partly walled up, and a boys' house, 55 x 16 feet, of five rooms, with a
+veranda all along the front. These were both of burnt brick with
+thatched roofs. All the hardwood timber for rafters and plates, and also
+the large amount of thatching grass, were procured by the boys the same
+season, beginning in March and April. The bricks too were made and both
+buildings were under cover by the 1st of December. This was all done
+with the aid of the school boys under the supervision of Brother Taylor,
+assisted by David. Part of the time the work was in progress during
+school hours, the boys who assisted at such times receiving full wages,
+as they are all eager to earn a little extra money. During the month of
+brickmaking, the boys donated their time as an offering to the Church.
+
+After they had made the bricks, Brother Taylor started on the foundation
+of the church, and then trained several of the Batonga boys in
+bricklaying. Together with himself and David they laid the walls of the
+church, all the larger boys having a share in some part of the work. The
+walls of the building are high, are fourteen inches in thickness and
+well laid. When this was completed Brother Taylor left David, assisted
+by some of the boys, to put on the thatched roof, which too is an
+excellent piece of work, while he turned his attention to the boys'
+house. Nearly all the brick work of this building was done by the boys
+under his supervision, and at the same time he was directing some in
+sawing by hand and making door and window frames out of the native
+hardwood timber. Later some of the boys were instructed in thatching it.
+
+When this boys' house, fifty-five feet long, was completed in January,
+the only thing in its construction that had been bought for the purpose
+was the zinc under the walls to exclude the ants. The doors were made of
+the boards of packing cases in which a wagon had been sent from America;
+the thatching was tied on with strips of animal hides procured from the
+natives. The bedsteads were made of poles procured in the forests and
+reeds from the river. These were tied with bark string, and over the top
+were placed animal hides also bought from the natives. Later the rooms
+were whitewashed and they, with the long veranda in front, made an
+excellent and clean-looking home for the boys. The church had imported
+doors and windows, as well as zinc and thatching twine. Otherwise the
+material was almost native.
+
+[Illustration: Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the Midst.]
+
+It was a creditable year's work and Brother Taylor deserved much praise
+for the ability with which it was all managed and the boys trained. No
+doubt some, on reading these lines, might say, "I could never be a
+missionary if I had to build like that!" "Where there is a will there is
+a way," is just as applicable on the mission field as elsewhere. It is
+surprising what one can accomplish if he is willing to be used. Every
+one of the men on the mission field has done excellent work along these
+lines, as the well-built brick houses and churches on the six mission
+stations at the present day testify. Some at first declared that they
+could not build, but, doubtless, today they look with surprise and
+satisfaction on the work of their own hands. In addition to this they
+have every reason to be thankful for the great amount of missionary work
+they were able to accomplish in the building by training and fitting the
+boys to a higher plane of living.
+
+After the buildings were under roof, Brother Taylor, who had always
+desired to devote more time to evangelistic work among the villages,
+felt that his way was opened to attend almost exclusively to that line
+of work. Previous to this he had held services at many of the villages,
+such as Mapanza, Simeoba, Kabanzi, Kabwe, and at almost all the
+important villages near as well as north among the Baila; but during the
+year following he went out with his tent and sometimes spent two, three,
+and even four weeks at one place, so that he might have an opportunity
+of giving the people a fair conception of the Gospel. He spent a month
+at Chungu, near a large village, over twenty miles from the mission.
+
+He had visited the place before, but the people were not eager to
+listen. At this time he pitched his tent a short distance from the
+village and informed the people that he had come to teach them, and that
+those desiring to hear should come to the tent at such a time as best
+suited them. About 8 A. M. every day a fair-sized congregation gathered
+at the tent and heard the Gospel expounded to them. He had some very
+good meetings at that place, and the people became interested
+sufficiently to request a school.
+
+During the year he found many open doors and gave the Gospel to a large
+number of people who had never heard of a Savior, and there were urgent
+calls to start new stations in the needy places. How one longs to see
+some one step in at the opportune time and plant lights in the midst of
+the darkness!
+
+While this work was progressing David devoted his time to finishing the
+new buildings and overseeing the boys at work. A dear Christian lady had
+sent out money for seats in the new church, and he began to make them,
+and accomplished this task well, and the building was furnished with
+good, comfortable seats. Some of the boys, in writing to their friends
+who were away at work, said, "We have nice seats in the church and we do
+not become tired when we sit on them a long time." A good solid floor
+was also put in, and this was tarred and sanded.
+
+In November, 1911, we again had the privilege of welcoming Elder
+Steigerwald to Macha. He had lately returned from a furlough to America,
+and his visit was like getting a glimpse of the outside world. The
+Mission Board had sent out with him for Macha a large two-seated spring
+wagon with canvas top, something just suited for this country and
+climate. It was a most welcome and useful addition to our outfit.
+Especially since there are roads all over the country to the principal
+villages, this was helpful in evangelistic work and in visiting the
+out-schools, which were on the increase. The old days of laborious
+tramp were more or less in the past, and a new era seemed ushered in.
+Brother Steigerwald put the wagon together and added a long, useful box
+in front. Four oxen were then inspanned and we tested it. It is indeed a
+most satisfactory and comfortable conveyance and adds much to the
+enjoyment of the work.
+
+While the bishop was with us eleven more boys were baptized and received
+into church fellowship. The first ten were all standing true, so that
+our number had now increased to twenty-one. There were as yet no girls
+or women ready for baptism, but some were beginning to accept Christ as
+their Savior.
+
+As the new church was nearly completed at the time of his visit, it was
+thought advisable to dedicate this also before his return. He gave a
+most excellent sermon on the occasion, and we were all strengthened by
+his visit among us.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE
+
+The Native
+
+The most interesting thing in Africa is the native himself; the more I
+see him and study him the more I respect him.--Bishop J. C. Hartzell.
+
+
+I most heartily voice the sentiment expressed above. The study of the
+native is a most interesting one and worthy of the best minds of the
+age. The latent power and ability lying back of some of those crude
+exteriors is often marvelous, and the transformation often wrought by a
+few years of careful, sympathetic training far more than repays for all
+the labor expended.
+
+From what has already been given in the preceding pages, some idea of
+the native character may be gleaned, and yet it is impossible to give in
+such a book an adequate conception of the nature of the natives. In
+fact, the only way to know them is to live among them, and then one can
+not be sure that he has the correct idea. The subject is so many-sided,
+so elusive, and above all so changing that it is doubtful if any one can
+tell all there might be given.
+
+This twentieth century has produced three large volumes on the African
+native, which, in the estimation of the general public, seem to occupy a
+preeminent position among the many books continually written. I refer to
+"Thinking Black," by Daniel Crawford; "White and Black in South Africa,"
+by M. S. Evans; and "The Essential Kaffir," by Dudley Kidd. The first
+is the work of a missionary who has spent twenty-two unbroken years in
+the heart of the African Continent. The second is the work of a
+politician who has studied the native problem deeply and sympathetically
+from a governmental standpoint and has given his opinions and
+conclusions in a clear and convincing manner. The third work might be
+said to have been written from an independent standpoint, and is by many
+Europeans in South Africa considered the best thing written on the
+native. One who has lived long in Africa might be inclined to differ
+with any one or all of these writers in some points, but they are all
+excellent and well worthy of careful study.
+
+I was once speaking with an official who had had long experience in
+dealing with native problems, and whose opinions along these lines were
+sought after by others. I asked him, "Wherein do you think lies the
+chief difficulty in dealing with the native?" He replied somewhat as
+follows:
+
+"I think it lies in this: that the native so readily responds to
+civilization and improvement, that he comes up to our highest
+expectation along some lines; and then we, forgetting the generations of
+barbarism back of him, think he should measure up to our expectations
+along all lines. When he fails us at some particular point we become
+disgusted and do not give him credit for the advancement he has made."
+
+There seems to be much truth in the above statement and it has often
+been a help to me in dealing with natives. There is something else also
+which must not be lost sight of, and that is that as much as possible
+they should be dealt with as individuals. Too often the white man thinks
+the natives are all made over the same mould, and that the
+characteristics of one are the characteristics of all. He will often not
+take the trouble to study their individuality, and perhaps he thinks
+they do not have any. This is not surprising. Europeans often visit New
+York, remain a short time and then return home, thinking they know
+Americans, and can be found prating of how Americans do. If people come
+to such superficial conclusions about such a heterogeneous mass of
+humanity as exists in the United States of America, it is not surprising
+that one or two natives in the eyes of many white people stand as a type
+of all Africans.
+
+The writer has had an opportunity of studying the natives of four or
+five tribes and has come into contact in various ways with several other
+tribes, yet she feels that her knowledge of the native character is in
+many respects superficial and unsatisfactory. It has this to recommend
+it, however, that it is gleaned at first hand from many years' residence
+among the raw and semi-civilized Africans.
+
+We have tried to show that the natives differ greatly in their ability
+to learn in school and out of it, in their habits of cleanliness, and in
+their readiness to receive the Gospel. As there was a large number of
+boys about us day by day, we found that they also greatly differed in
+disposition, as much so as white people, and it was necessary to study
+the characteristic of each in dealing with them. They soon understand if
+the missionary respects and trusts them; and they readily respond to
+such treatment and show by their conduct that such confidence is not
+misplaced. On the other hand, if they are censured for a fault,
+especially if they think the censure is unjust, they soon become
+careless and discouraged. On account of their secluded and simple life
+they, even the grown ones, are much like children when they first come
+into contact with white people, and they fail to understand why two
+persons should treat them differently--why two missionaries or two
+masters should not have the same way of doing things, the same
+generosity and the same dispositions.
+
+Child-life of these dark-skinned Africans is in some respects not so
+different from that of their white neighbors, unless it is in its
+greater freedom. Until it learns to walk, the child spends much of its
+time on its mother's or older sister's back, tied by a skin with its
+face toward the mother. In the early days at Matopo, Matshuba once
+inquired how our mother carried us when we were children. We said she
+carried us on her arms. He nodded his head sagely and exclaimed, "That
+explains it. That is why your noses are long and straight and ours are
+flat."
+
+[Illustration: Little Nurses. Mianda Village.]
+
+On the mother's back the child sleeps and coos and observes what goes on
+about it. Here it bobs up and down as the mother handles the hoe, stamps
+or grinds the meal, or goes about her cooking. Here it takes rides as
+the mother goes after wood or water, or on long journeys to visit her
+friends. Occasionally she removes it from her back, straightens out its
+cramped limbs, feeds it, and then places it on the ground to play. It
+has no garments to impede its progress, and so it soon learns to help
+itself, crawls about and picks up earth or whatever comes in its way and
+eats it, no one objecting.
+
+As it becomes older the freedom is still greater, especially if it is a
+boy. There is no school to confine him, no hard lessons, no table
+manners, no daily washings, oftentimes. He runs, he hunts, he fishes, he
+plays often the long day through, together with the other little ones of
+the village. He has no clock to tell him the time of the day, except the
+great orb above him, and this he learns to read with surprising
+accuracy. As it sinks in the west, he comes with his assegais and
+faithful dogs, and with a rabbit or some birds, carried on a stick
+across his shoulders, proudly displaying his prowess in hunting. He
+makes bows and arrows, popguns, plays hockey and other games, makes clay
+animals, wagons, and many other things. In fact, some native boys are
+genuine artists, and it is a pleasure to watch them deftly mould animals
+of various kinds.
+
+His sister will have her doll, made from a stick of wood, a corncob, or
+the like, and tie it on her back, like her mamma does. She plays at
+housekeeping, grinding, cooking, and imitating her elders, the same as
+her white sisters do. She is also expected to help take care of the baby
+and younger members of the family, as her brother is often expected to
+herd the cattle or sheep, for there are no fences to confine them. All
+of these children, however, often suffer from hunger, cold, and
+nakedness, and worst of all they generally indulge in many evils which
+cling to them and greatly retard their progress when light comes to
+them. They also become quite cruel and unfeeling about giving pain to
+animals and birds. Every accessible bird's nest is robbed and the young
+birds, partly plucked, are thrown, often while still alive, on the live
+coals to roast and furnish them a dainty morsel. When a bird is secured
+there is not the least compunction about plucking off all the feathers
+without killing the bird. Once, when I was lying sick in bed, the four
+girls staying at the mission came in laughing and carrying the fledgling
+of a secretary bird. It was about the size of a half-grown chicken, and
+had all the feathers plucked from it while it was alive, and in this
+condition it was still blinking with its big, solemn-looking eyes. The
+brother of one had brought it in this condition, and to them it was a
+good joke to see it thus.
+
+As one enters the raw African's village and sees the native in the midst
+of his filthy and uncouth surroundings, lacking seemingly the very
+necessities of life, he readily concludes that the African is lazy,
+shiftless, lacking in resources, and exceedingly dull or he would have
+advanced further in civilization even before the advent of the white
+man. To a certain extent this is true, for even the native, after he is
+somewhat civilized and looks back to where he came from, has been heard
+to exclaim, "We must be the dullest people on earth. Others could read
+and write and knew something of civilization, but we Africans knew
+nothing." We need, however, but to look back to our own Celtic and
+Teutonic ancestry to see barbarism and illiteracy.
+
+The African pagan cannot be said to be lacking in resources, however.
+He wishes fire and he goes and selects two suitable twigs of wood. Into
+one he cuts a notch and the other he points. Placing the first on the
+ground, he inserts the point of the other into the notch and twirls it
+rapidly between his hands until it strikes fire. At the same time he has
+on hand some inflammable substance upon which he places the fire and
+soon has a blaze. He can thus roast his fish or meat. He wishes cooking
+vessels; and the woman goes to the river and procures the proper kind of
+clay, which she mixes with water and works until it is the required
+consistency. She then takes a piece, and with deft fingers moulds it
+into a circle, and places it on a stone or piece of broken crockery. She
+adds more and more clay, carefully shaping it with her hands as she
+proceeds upward until the top is finished. Then she puts it aside for a
+while until the clay sets and becomes slightly dried, after which she
+carefully removes and turns it and moulds the bottom, and when dried she
+burns it. In this way she makes earthen pots of many kinds and sizes,
+from the dainty small ones, which are often nicely glazed and
+artistically marked, to the large, heavy beer pots, holding ten or
+twelve gallons.
+
+Weapons for war, hunting, and domestic purposes are needed. The man goes
+to the hills and digs until he finds the iron ore. He smelts it and with
+the iron thus obtained makes axes, assegais, hoes, and other useful
+implements. He burns wood and makes charcoal for his forge. His bellows
+are made from the skins of animals and the pipes are clay tile; and the
+anvil and hammers are also pieces of the iron he has obtained. He
+moulds, welds, shapes, and performs all the work of the ordinary
+blacksmith. If his hoe wears out he will take the iron that is left and
+shape it into an assegai bristling with points. With three or four of
+these and a shield made of hide, he will go out to fight his neighbor,
+or perhaps he will have bow and steel-tipped arrows, which he dips in a
+poisonous substance to ensure their deadly work.
+
+Or, if it is in time of peace, he makes use of his assegais and his
+faithful dog and supplies his household with meat. If he has been
+fortunate enough to secure an old blunderbuss of a gun, he tinkers at it
+till it works. He may not be able by law to buy any ammunition from the
+white man, or even lead to make bullets; but he will manage in some way
+to obtain some ammunition. Perhaps the chance possession of a nail, or
+solder melted from a tin can, will, by a laborious process, be turned
+into bullets, for time is no object to him when working for himself. In
+the same way he will secure some gunpowder or the ingredients for it,
+either by barter with his neighbors, who have been to town, or
+elsewhere.
+
+He wishes fish, and he will spear or catch them with hooks, or his wife
+will, with willowlike twigs and bark strings, make a long troughlike
+net, and as the water subsides she will supply her household with fish.
+Both fish and meat are dried and preserved for future consumption.
+
+[Illustration: Batonga Fisher Women.]
+
+The native wishes a hut to live in. He goes to the forest and with the
+axe cuts down poles and carries them home, and with his hoe digs a
+trench into which he places them. With some forked sticks he makes a
+neat doorframe. Thin, willowy poles are also brought and split through
+the center, and one piece is placed on the outside and one inside of the
+poles of the hut, and with bark strings he firmly ties these together
+and thus secures the poles in their places. They are also fastened at
+the top in a similar manner, so that the walls of the hut are firmly
+fastened together, for of course his hut is round. With his method of
+building he is wise in making it round, as it is more easily done and
+stronger when completed. The slender, straight poles for the roof are
+fastened together in the same way. These are often extended beyond the
+walls so as to form a veranda, which may or may not be enclosed. The
+wife takes her hoe or assegai and cuts grass to thatch the hut. She also
+takes some of the beautiful long grass, and with bark string makes a
+large mat to form a partition to separate the bed-room from the
+living-room. They need a bed and the man will procure forked sticks and
+fasten them firmly in the ground as bedposts, and on this with poles,
+reeds, bark string, and animal hides he makes a bed. Skins may also be
+used for blankets, and if they should be lacking in these they build a
+fire or place a pan of coals underneath or near the bed. Some Africans
+weave blankets and some make them out of the inner bark of the trees;
+others purchase from traders.
+
+The native needs a chair, so he goes to the forest and, selecting a
+certain kind of tree, he cuts a suitable block of wood. With his little
+axe he hews and cuts until from a solid block of wood he makes a very
+respectable-looking chair, or stool, varying in height from six to
+fourteen inches. In the same way he makes spoons, stamping blocks,
+dishes, and other household articles. These he carefully oils to prevent
+cracking, and often colors and ornaments them. The natives along the
+large rivers make their own dugout canoes. A large gourd or earthen jar
+answers for a water bucket, one with a long handle for a dipper, a very
+large one with woven top is used for a churn, a long one as a butter
+receptacle, and a very small one for a snuffbox. A small piece of iron,
+nicely shaped and beaten thin, is snuff spoon and handkerchief.
+
+A large flat stone, built in a clay receptacle with an earthen jar at
+the end, is the mill, and on this another stone is used to grind. The
+wife needs baskets. She procures palm leaves, bark string, reeds, and
+willows and makes baskets of various kinds: a flat one for a sieve,
+dainty little ones for plates for their stiff porridge, larger ones for
+grain, and still larger ones for reaping. She also makes mats of various
+kinds. Skins of animals do for clothing. They are so confident that this
+is the native invention, that one of the boys, in reading of the
+garments of our first parents, declared they must have been black
+because they wore skins. The girls' loincloth is made of bark string.
+Their clay pipes are often quite artistically made, and so hard that it
+is difficult to distinguish them from metal.
+
+In all of these things just mentioned the native is in no way dependent
+upon the European; they are of his own invention and manufacture, except
+the rifle. It is not to be supposed that any one native makes all the
+various articles. There are blacksmiths, potters, basketmakers, and
+workers in wood, and the rest barter for or buy the things they need.
+
+Given various colored beads, some fine and some heavy wire, a few
+buttons, shells, and ivory rings, and they are adept at adorning the
+body, at least according to the native's idea of beauty. In some
+respects the barbarous African's idea of ornamentation does not differ
+materially from that of her white sisters, the difference being one of
+degree rather than of kind. The American beauty thinks one or two
+strings of beads around her neck are quite the proper thing, and add to
+her charm. The African beauty will tell you that if one or two are nice,
+four or five are nicer. It is the same with the bracelets; the American
+belle is pleased with one or two on her wrists. The African is likewise,
+but she is better pleased with a dozen, only she adds utility to beauty
+and thinks that a lot of heavy rings around her wrists or ankles add to
+their strength and give her corresponding value in the eyes of the
+opposite sex. Then too she will tell you that her god told her to adorn
+herself thus, which is doubtless true.
+
+What has been said of inventive ability applies more or less to all
+pagan Africans, although in different sections of the country they
+differ somewhat in their work. The Batonga, by whom we are surrounded,
+do not at present remove the iron from the ore, but there are many
+blacksmiths among them, and according to some of the old natives they
+were accustomed to smelt the ore. There are certainly evidences of iron
+workings in this part of the country. Brother Taylor made inquiry of an
+old native in reference to these workings. He said that many years ago
+the Batonga used to work them and thus obtain their own iron. Then their
+Barotse conquerors came and killed all the iron workers and told them to
+come to the Barotse and purchase their iron. No doubt this was done to
+weaken them in battle. (See 1 Samuel 13: 19-22.) In this instance the
+smiths remained, but they go to the Barotse to purchase hoes and pig
+iron. Since the old ones were killed, the younger generation were afraid
+to smelt the ore.
+
+All the Africans brew their own beer. They also grow tobacco, which they
+both smoke and snuff, and they grow a kind of hemp which they smoke. Of
+course they raise their own food, and before the arrival of the white
+man some even procured their own salt.
+
+As to the general character of the raw natives--for it is of them we are
+writing--we hesitate sometimes to tell what we do know. But the
+missionary, however much he may think of the Africans and enjoy his work
+among them, cannot, dare not, be blind to their faults. It has been said
+of them that they are naturally liars, thieves, and harlots; a hard
+saying, truly, but there is a measure of truth in it. As a people there
+is little or no reliance to be placed on their word, especially when
+they desire to shield themselves, their relatives, or even their tribes.
+Possibly a native may tell an untruth for the mere pleasure of it. This
+habit is so inbred that it is difficult to overcome it; and yet by
+careful religious training, and the power of the Holy Spirit, one is
+frequently surprised at the progress they make in speaking the truth
+under very trying conditions--that is, when they are led to see the
+evil of the opposite course.
+
+Thieving is probably not so prominent, but it exists, not only, as some
+affirm, among the half-civilized, but also among the raw heathen. Every
+missionary, who has seen heathen accepting the Light and confessing
+their past, can testify to the truthfulness of this statement. Many
+instances of stealing among them can be cited. I was told by a farmer,
+who was living in the midst of pagan Africans, untouched by civilization
+or the Gospel, that one year he employed about 100 women to gather his
+corn. He suspected them of stealing, but said nothing until one evening,
+just as they were starting for home, he suddenly rode in among them and
+frightened them. The corn which they had carefully concealed about them
+was scattered in all directions.
+
+Stealing, however, is not as common as lying; for while there does not
+seem to be a strong public sentiment against the latter, there is
+against the former, for the protection of their property. Those who
+flagrantly disregard this are branded as thieves and are sometimes
+punished. I know one native who was required by his heathen neighbors to
+pay ten hoes for visiting their grain bins. Generally, however, grain,
+either in the gardens or in the granaries, is not disturbed by others,
+and one may allow property to remain exposed year after year and it not
+be disturbed. The white man's law against thieving greatly assists the
+native in the enforcement of his law. We have found some very
+trustworthy natives, and none who have been with us any length of time
+have proven dishonest, and they are frequently sent to carry sums of
+money without in any way tampering with it.
+
+As to other forms of vice what shall one say? One European has been
+heard to exclaim that "their morals are as black as their faces." That
+they are dark no one can deny, for from childhood up vice in many forms
+is common. It could scarcely be otherwise when one considers the filth
+and degradation of their surroundings, where a number are crowded like
+so many animals into a filthy hut, overrun with vermin and parasites of
+all kinds. Some will tell you that there are none pure. It is true that
+the lives they lead give little opportunity for anything elevating. Then
+too their lives are open to the general gaze; nothing is hid.
+
+But take the modern city; dig it up from the foundation; open all its
+cesspools of infamy, crime, and debauchery, and such a stench will
+ascend to heaven that everyone beholding will cry out, "Babylon, the
+mother of harlots and abominations of the earth!" And yet this is the
+boasted twentieth-century civilization. Shall we, then, say that there
+are no Christians in that city, or that there are none living good moral
+lives who do not profess Christ? God forbid! All honor to the noble band
+of men and women in our cities who, in the midst of fearful odds, are
+living upright lives and helping their fellow-men.
+
+I believe I can safely say, from what I have seen and learned of the
+inner life of the native, that in dark, heathen Africa, even before the
+light of the Gospel penetrates, there are those who are moral and pure,
+although the number is small. Then take the Christian natives; the life
+of many a one is a living rebuke to some who decry mission work, and it
+is too often because they are a living rebuke, that they are so fiercely
+hated by some Europeans. People usually find what they are looking for,
+and in Africa is no exception.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN
+
+The Native--Continued
+
+
+Beggars the Africans naturally are, and when the white man comes among
+them they are always eager to obtain all they can for nothing. They beg
+of one another; then why should they not beg of the white man, whose
+pockets are supposed to be full of money? Then too some of them think
+the white man does not need money to buy food, clothing, and other goods
+from the store. They will say, "You do not need money to buy things. You
+just write something on a piece of paper and send it to Bulawayo and the
+goods come." Experience has taught us that the greatest good one can do
+the native is to make him work or pay for everything he receives, unless
+it should be during a case of sickness or helplessness.
+
+It is a common expression that the African is lazy; and yet even this
+must be accepted with a reserve and an understanding of his
+surroundings. Aside from the effect of the climate, much of their
+indolence and indifference is due to their smoking of hemp, a narcotic
+drug, similar to the _hashish_ of eastern countries. This they grow, and
+it is a common practice for the older, and for even young boys, to smoke
+it. It seems to sap their very life and take away all the ambition to
+better their condition. Yet the native can and does work even in his
+home, when occasion demands. During the digging and growing season they
+are found out in their gardens, which are generally at a distance from
+the villages, from early morning until late at night, hoeing and
+watching their crops to protect them from the ravages of the animals and
+birds. During the hottest part of the day they generally stop for a time
+to rest and cook. It is useless to attempt much evangelistic work during
+this season of the year, except at night, for the villages are about
+deserted during the day.
+
+They may, during the dry season, work for Europeans, but with some a
+short time of such work suffices, as their wants are few. As one fellow
+expressed it: "I have now sufficient money to pay my taxes. I only want
+to work long enough to earn money to buy a blanket and then my needs are
+all supplied." If they have food on hand, that is the extent of the
+ambition of some natives. They feel that then, during the dry season, or
+winter, they are entitled to rest, hunt, smoke, drink beer and palaver.
+
+Frequently, however, they must build in the dry season, for one of their
+huts in this ant-ridden country lasts only a short time--perhaps two or
+three years--and then another must be built. This is no small task, but
+it is usually postponed until near the rainy season. In order to build,
+the native is obliged to make frequent trips to the forest to procure
+suitable poles and bark strings, all of which he must carry on his
+shoulders. His wife too is inclined to postpone cutting the thatch grass
+until it is nearly all burnt, and then it requires much more labor to
+find enough thatch than if she had done the work at the proper time.
+The rain usually is threatening, or even the first has fallen before the
+man begins the actual building, and then he and his neighbors hurry and
+put up the huts after a fashion. When asked why he does not build
+earlier in the season he naively exclaims, "Oh! I leave it until the
+rains come, so I must hurry and build it." In other words, he puts it
+off until he is forced to do it, willy-nilly.
+
+As a rule the native is never in a hurry; he always performs his work
+deliberately. That is characteristic of the country, or climate, rather
+than of the individual, because no one in Africa seems to be in a hurry.
+We had our first lesson in this on the threshold of the continent. Just
+after we had reached Cape Town and had rented rooms, some groceries were
+bought and ordered to be sent to the house. They were very slow in
+coming, and we mentioned the fact to an American lady who had resided at
+Cape Town five years. She replied, "We are all slow in Africa, and in a
+few years you will become slow too." I cannot say that this has become
+true of all our missionaries, but this is the general effect of the
+country. The atmosphere, the heat, and the diseases, all have much
+influence on a person. To hurry and violently exert the body in order to
+complete a piece of work often brings on an attack of fever. Horses,
+mules, oxen, and donkeys are not as hardy as in temperate climates, and
+it requires several times the number to do the same amount of work, so
+that it need not surprise one that the natives, who, as far back as they
+know, have lived amid such surroundings, should be slow and indolent.
+
+There are three natives in our nearest village, all able-bodied men of
+about 40 or 45 years of age. Two of them have four wives and one has
+three. Since the hut tax is ten shillings a hut, that means that one
+must pay thirty shillings (nearly $7.50) tax per year, and the other two
+forty shillings (nearly $10). They are all intelligent-looking natives.
+Two of them have been government messengers and know something of
+European life. Now they are at home year after year, for they seldom go
+away to work, because they are too lazy. How they secure their hut tax
+is often a query, and about the only solution that seems possible is
+that they beg some here and some there of natives who go away to work,
+and they may occasionally have a little grain to sell. Often they are
+short of food for themselves and their families. One of them at least
+has had his family out on the veldt, living on fruit and roots and what
+game he could procure, for two months at a time. These are extreme
+cases, and one must feel sorry for the women and children when crops
+fail, for they at least cannot go among the Europeans for work.
+
+The natives differ greatly among themselves in diligence and training as
+well as in character and morality. While there are always some
+improvident ones, who live on the charity of their neighbors, yet some
+are exceedingly industrious the entire year. After their grain has been
+cared for they go to the towns to work and earn money, buy cattle and
+sheep, and in general enrich themselves. Workers in wood are always busy
+making articles to sell to their neighbors, and other artizans do
+likewise. The women also show the same difference of character. Some
+are always busy and forehanded with their gardens, their grass cutting,
+and cutting and carrying firewood to stow it away before the rains come.
+The same difference is to be found in the training of families.
+
+In some of the homes the children are well trained along industrial
+lines, according to the native idea of training. The parents require
+them to work and bear a certain amount of responsibility in providing
+for the family and in caring for the herds. For instance, a number of
+our best boys came from a village called Mianda. They proved very
+helpful and skillful in work and became some of our best builders and
+teachers. Their parents were generally considerate when we had dealings
+with them. Sometimes we had as many as ten boys at once from that one
+small village, and the father of some would even help to see about his
+herds so that his children might attend school. If a boy was needed at
+home to help build or herd, the father would tell for just how long he
+was needed, and we might be sure that he would send the boy back at the
+expiration of that time. The children of this village were required to
+be obedient and work while at home, otherwise they were denied food.
+There were other similar homes. In the villages, even before
+Christianity enters, the natives look upon some of the customs of their
+tribes in various ways. Where there are large villages and many people,
+dances and carousals are frequent occurrences and much immorality
+results. Some of the parents forbid their children frequenting these
+places of amusement on account of the immorality.
+
+Again, from some villages boys would come to the mission, stay only a
+few days and then leave, because they were obliged to perform a certain
+amount of work daily. We did not try to coax them to remain, for we
+preferred to keep only those who were willing to work--the others seldom
+amount to anything. Go into the houses of some such boys, and one would
+see them lying about, not willing to herd, much less dig. Perhaps the
+father will say, "Go and see about those sheep." The boy pays no
+attention to the command. The mother comes and scolds him and seeks to
+make him work, but with no better result; yet when food is prepared he
+is the first one to be around the pot and no one forbids him. From these
+instances it can be readily seen that African family training does not
+differ materially from European or American.
+
+In many of the villages there are always some who desire to improve
+themselves and better their conditions. They have their gardens, but,
+work as they may with their primitive little hoes, they cannot make much
+headway; or there may be a drought and famine is the result. They go
+away and work for a time, and come home with a supply of clothing and
+some money. They come to their dirty homes and filthy surroundings, and
+their friends and relatives try to get as much of their clothing and
+money as possible. They gradually become more and more sordid in
+appearance, their clothing disappears, and we become disgusted with them
+for so soon leaving behind the outward marks of civilization. But how
+many months could we live their home life and be presentable in
+appearance?
+
+Let us take Charlie as an example. He, with a number of other boys, went
+to Southern Rhodesia to work on a farm. He remained a year and received
+fifteen shillings ($3.60) per month, and he had to pay his way down and
+back on the train. He came home at the end of the year with a nice
+supply of new clothing and some money, and he looked as clean and
+well-dressed as a European when he came to Church on Sunday. He is a
+Christian boy and is trying to do what is right. Soon after his return
+home, his father, who is one of the three lazy men I mentioned, and
+extremely filthy in appearance, began wearing Charlie's clothes. First
+it was a shirt and a piece of calico; then another garment; then his
+nice grey coat. Charlie gave his little naked brother one of his shirts.
+He wished to marry, and this took all of his money. In a few months he
+presented quite a different appearance from what he did on his return
+home from Bulawayo, and we began to blame him, at least in our minds,
+and say that he should not allow himself to degenerate in this way. But
+most of his clothing is gone and his money is gone; he does not even
+have sufficient with which to purchase soap, so that he may wash the
+remaining clothing.
+
+Says one, "He should keep at work and not come and sit down in his
+home." The work takes him away from home, and his wages are low, so that
+he must keep at it continually in order to maintain appearances. May he
+not have any home life at all? It is a perplexing problem, and were we
+forced to take his place we would no doubt conclude that the boy does
+remarkably well under the circumstances. While at home he works in his
+gardens and does what he can find to do for the white men near his home;
+then, as his needs increase, he again goes to Bulawayo to begin again.
+This is an actual occurrence and typical of many others. He may conclude
+to have no home life, but keep up the semblance of civilization, hang
+about the towns, and imitate many evils surrounding him, and in the end
+prove a greater menace to society and to the country than if he would,
+at least part of the time, live in his own home in a more primitive
+manner. Again, if he depends too much on the stores of the traders, he
+ceases to manufacture articles for himself, so that if he does finally
+settle down for himself, tired of the struggle, he is often more
+helpless than at first, because he cannot make the articles which his
+father made.
+
+Is the native provident? or does he live from hand to mouth? Yes and no.
+I heard a man who traded with the natives say that in one year he bought
+about 1,000 bags of grain from them, giving in exchange goods from his
+store. Before the next crop was harvested, he had sold about all the
+grain back to them, at of course quite an advance in price. I have seen,
+near our own doors, natives sell to European traders grain, either for
+money or goods, from $1.25 to $2.50 for a two-hundred-pound bag and buy
+it back later in the same season for from $6 to $7 per bag. But these
+are extreme cases. In the latter instance a year of plenty was followed
+by a year of drought, and the natives were far from markets and at the
+mercy of local traders. Many of the natives had put in their granaries
+what would have tided them over an ordinary season, but the prolonged
+drought led them to want. Others had a comparatively poor crop the
+previous year and this caused a scarcity. Some did not need to buy at
+all, as they always look in advance for such emergencies and do not sell
+their surplus until certain of a new crop. Such natives, when they do
+sell, often sell to their native neighbors or exchange their grain for
+cattle. Such are generally very thrifty, while there are always some who
+are in want. In this too it may be seen that they are not unlike other
+people.
+
+In fact, the Batonga taught their missionaries some lessons in caring
+for grain. We found that they store their corn in the grain bins without
+removing all the husks, and they shell it as they need it or near the
+end of the season. With the Kafir corn they do the same way, cutting off
+the heads and putting it away without threshing it. This was so
+different from the thrifty Matabele, who carefully shelled and threshed
+their grain, that the first time we visited one of the villages and saw
+their method we thought, "How lazy! We must teach them how to do their
+work properly." We soon discovered that in this hot climate the shelled
+corn was soon weevil-eaten, and that the shelled Kafir corn was almost
+ground to meal before the year ended. Now we are inclined to imitate the
+natives in this respect rather than they us. It shows too that the
+native adapts himself to the country and climatic conditions.
+
+The African is a genuine lover of nature. He enjoys being out in the
+open air; he loves the bright rays of the sun. Everything around him is
+pregnant with meaning. Nature is his school, and he knows the habits of
+every beast, bird, or insect. In a measure he appreciates and loves the
+beautiful, even though at first he may smile at the white man's love for
+flowers. One day I inquired of an old heathen woman, who never came to
+Church, why they moved their kraal from the rock-bound place in which it
+had been, to the open plain. Her withered face brightened up, as with a
+sweep of her arm she took in the magnificent scene before her and
+exclaimed, "Is not that beautiful?" The native too shows good taste in
+the selection of clothing after he has become accustomed to civilized
+ways. We are inclined to think of them as being especially partial to
+bright colors. A few are, but my experience is that the majority are
+not. Many of the boys especially soon discard the native stores, where
+cheap apparel is sold, and frequent the stores for Europeans.
+
+They love music and have several crude musical instruments. Their songs
+are generally of war, love, marriage, and the chase. They also have some
+songs suitable to their work. They of course have good voices for
+singing, and can be easily trained to sing well. They have their
+legends, their poetry, proverbs, and animal stories.
+
+Natives, although very generous among themselves, are not inclined to be
+so to white people; perhaps because white people have not as a rule
+treated them so generously. If the native wishes to sell anything and is
+greatly in need of the money or clothing, he will often consent to sell
+for almost any price. It is the same with work; he will work very
+cheaply if he is eager to work.
+
+On the other hand, if the need is on the part of the buyer, he will ask
+a very high price for grain or other articles and absolutely refuse to
+give for less, especially if the buyer is an European. With work it is
+the same. Even boys, after they have received a certain amount of
+education and religious training, are very slow to accept the idea that
+they should do anything for the white man from a sense of duty. There
+are doubtless some very good reasons for this. They, however, respect a
+master who is kind but firm, and it is best not to coax them. If they
+find that we are not dependent upon them, and can get along without
+them, they are more likely to conclude that they cannot get along
+without us.
+
+The native is said to be lacking in gratitude to his benefactor, and
+there is some truth in this. One often spends much time and labor to
+train him along certain lines, with the hope that he will be of genuine
+service in the future. Perhaps about the time he is able to take the
+place for which he is fitted, he will often turn and, rejecting his
+benefactor, give the benefit of his training to some one who can
+remunerate him better. Naturally the missionary, or master, whichever it
+may be, feels grieved at this lack of gratitude. Too often, perhaps, the
+fault is on both sides, and we do not give him credit for the help he
+has been to us. Then too it is difficult to put ourselves in his place
+and see matters from his point of view. He has no idea of the value of
+our time or training and we sometimes spoil him in the beginning. Would
+not the best and safest way for the good of the native be to require
+him to earn his way as he goes? Let him always work sufficiently, if
+possible, to pay for the trouble it takes to teach him, whether in
+school or in industrial work, or in work pay him small wages at first
+and increase as he becomes more and more proficient. It may require a
+little of his time, but it has not spoiled him, and if he should
+conclude to go at any time, he has altogether or nearly paid his way in
+kind and one is none the loser.
+
+The native, however, can, and many of them do, improve greatly along
+this line after they have become Christians. While naturally they are
+not inclined to be disinterested and generous to the white people, yet
+many of them become so and display a remarkable spirit of self-sacrifice
+in the Lord's service. Many teach year after year at a far lower salary
+than they could obtain elsewhere; and, not only in teaching but in other
+lines of labor requiring skill, they will work for the Lord for a much
+lower wage than they could procure elsewhere, as all of our missionaries
+can testify. Then too many of them often give largely of their penury
+for the advancement of the cause of Christ.
+
+I was one day touched by the spirit manifested by a big fellow. He had
+come to the missionaries destitute of clothing, but anxious for an
+education. He was a hard-headed chap, both in school and out, and ran up
+against many hard places before he became pliable. He received, like the
+rest, a little money at the end of each term, but since he was in school
+three and one-half hours each day, his time for work was limited and his
+pay necessarily small. He, however, stayed at the mission and gradually
+obtained some clothing and money to pay his taxes. He also began to
+accept Christ as his Savior and from being a proud, obstinate fellow, he
+became more and more docile. At one time the amount coming to him was
+ten shillings ($2.40). His wardrobe was still scanty, but he took out
+for himself one shilling of the money received and brought the remaining
+nine shillings and said, "Here, I want to give this to the Lord."
+
+Giving the Gospel to the natives in their villages, while it is
+generally a pleasure to the missionary, is not always an easy task. They
+soon learn to be very quiet and respectful in the church, enter quietly,
+take their places and go through all the outward forms of service, and
+also leave without being noisy or talking, perhaps because they are
+requested to do so. But when one goes out into their villages, even to
+the best of them, there are many side issues. The chief, if he is
+present and worthy the name, will aid in keeping order, and even if he
+is not present, the majority may sit quietly and seem to be listening;
+but perhaps the cattle get at the granaries and must be driven away, or
+the chickens go into the huts and eat the meal and must be watched;
+perhaps new ones are continually coming and must be noticed and greeted,
+if they are allowed to do so. Then the babies are so interesting to
+their mothers or those near them, or perhaps there is a mother with an
+older child at her side, and she does not wish to lose any time; so,
+during her enforced leisure, she is sedulously examining the child's
+head or ornaments for parasites. Perhaps over there, outside the hut
+door, is a man who has not had time to make his morning toilet, so he
+concludes to spend the time in dressing the long locks of hair around
+the top of his head.
+
+One does not like to stop and reprove them, because the rest seem
+attentive and perhaps those are also listening, for the work they are
+engaged in is such a common one! Again, all may seem attentive and the
+missionary rejoices that the seed is falling into well-prepared soil,
+and he continues eager to drive the truth home to their hearts. He
+pauses to let it sink in--when lo! some one will make a remark wholly
+irrelevant to the subject he seeks to impress upon their minds; it may
+be in reference to some article of clothing he is wearing, or some of
+their own needs. His enthusiasm cools, for he perceives that some, and
+perhaps many, have paid little attention to the message.
+
+Again, one may be speaking, and the chief or headman repeats what has
+been said, or he may ask a pertinent question, the answer to which
+brings out other questions, which serve to elucidate the subject. The
+other natives are led to listen; and while the discourse turns to be
+almost a conversation between the speaker and this one, yet the
+missionary goes away feeling that they have at least understood and
+perhaps have received some light. Sometimes, again, one may have only a
+few listeners and go away thinking nothing has been accomplished, but
+God has taken care of the seed sown.
+
+I remember being out once with one of the Christian boys. We came to a
+garden where a woman and her daughter were working, and we sat and
+talked with them about Christ our Savior. This was the first time they
+had had an opportunity to hear. Years passed and the incident was about
+forgotten by both the Christian native and myself. That girl later, out
+of much tribulation found her way into the Kingdom. Her father was a
+hardened old heathen, and had sold her to an old man. He was going to
+force her to marry the old man, but she escaped and fled to Matopo
+Mission where, with Elder Steigerwald's help, she was set free. She
+returned home, and later an European offered oxen and wagon to her
+father for her. She steadfastly refused and kept herself pure. Today she
+is the wife of a native evangelist and one of our most valued helpers.
+She says her first knowledge of Christ was at that little meeting in the
+garden, where she and her mother were working, and her present husband
+and I stopped to speak with them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN
+
+Some of Their Religious Ideas
+
+Nevertheless He left not Himself without witness, in that He did good,
+and gave us rain from heaven, and fruitful seasons, filling our hearts
+with food and gladness.--Acts 14: 17.
+
+
+The above quotation may apply to the African's idea of God in general,
+but it seems especially applicable to the Batonga and kindred tribes.
+Among these the word for God and rain are one and the same, _Leza_. This
+does not necessarily imply that they have no conception of God apart
+from the Rainmaker, but that conception is closely allied to rain and
+kindred elements in nature. They understand the name _Mubumbi_ (Moulder
+or Creator) and _Chilenga_ (Originator of Customs), but when speaking of
+the earth and vegetation, they will say, "Leza [God] made these things,
+because when leza [rain] comes, grass and vegetation spring up and grow,
+so Leza made them."
+
+Of course their conception of Him, like that of all Africans, is very
+remote. He is their Creator, but to approach unto Him is like reaching
+out in the dark, in a vague sort of way, after something more powerful
+than themselves, something or some one they know not what. In times of
+great trouble, as in famine, fear, or when there is an earthquake or an
+eclipse, they will worship God, not necessarily by word of mouth, but by
+clapping their hands in reverence. They generally, however, like the
+Matabele, feel that they cannot approach God. He is too great and
+terrible, so they approach Him through mediators, such as departed
+spirits, prophets, and prophetesses.
+
+Mr. Eddy, in "India Awakening," says: "Joined with these is the worship
+of dead parents, where spirits are dependent on their survivors for
+comforts, and who will avenge neglect or any deviation from custom. This
+belief is (1) a religion of fear, since most spirits are malicious; (2)
+a religion divorced from ethics, since spirits have no regard for moral
+ideas; (3) a religion of custom, since the worship rests on tradition
+and the spirits are apt to punish all departure from custom." This
+statement in reference to India can be as truthfully said of the pagan
+African.
+
+The Batonga, many of them, build roofs or small huts over the graves of
+their dead. In them they will place skulls of animals and some of the
+property of the deceased. Their descendants come to this place, bringing
+beer and even water, and pour it out upon the grave in worship. If one
+has been considered powerful while alive, has been a great rainmaker,
+many people will gather around his grave in time of drought and pray for
+rain.
+
+They have also their living prophetesses and prophets, to whom they turn
+in times of need. These claim that the soul of some powerful deceased
+one has entered them and bequeathed to them its power. In times of
+drought these prophetesses--for they are generally women--multiply
+rapidly. In a village of about thirty-five huts, near us, there were
+said to be ten prophetesses during the drought two years ago. The
+prophetic term of some of them is often very short, much depending on
+their seeming success as rainmakers. Sometimes the prophetess will make
+no claim for herself, but her friends will make it for her. The
+prophetesses are very often immoral characters.
+
+Day after day people will come to the prophetess, as the time for
+planting draws near, bringing their presents of grain or money and their
+seed, that she may bless it and insure good crops. They come, sit down,
+reverentially clapping their hands and beseeching her aid. The hunter
+brings his gun, to receive medicine which will insure him prowess in
+hunting; a man comes asking for medicine for his sick wife, who is
+bewitched, and this medicine is to ward off the witchery. There comes
+from afar an old woman, who claims to have the power of making their
+grain last a long time by putting a certain medicine into it when
+cooking. She is believed and the medicine is bought and put into the
+food, and she rejoices in her pay. These heathens are always very
+gullible and readily purchase anything which appears conducive to their
+own interests.
+
+One day I saw a number of natives going to a village to worship a
+rainmaker, so I concluded to go also and see what they did, for it was a
+village near the mission where the Gospel had often been proclaimed. As
+I reached the place the prophetess was in her hut, but a number of women
+and girls were outside, clapping their hands in worship. Their faces
+were familiar to me, and I could not avoid feeling sad to see how little
+influence the Gospel had thus far had on their lives. Finally the
+prophetess came out of her hut and was received with more clapping of
+the hands. She was a large, powerful-looking woman and gave orders like
+a queen, nor was she unqueenly in appearance. The worshipers were seated
+around a large hole or excavation in the earth, and had several dishes
+of grain which they had brought. They were told to sort the grain,
+selecting only the best and whitest; and I am informed that some of the
+grain, together with incantations, is dropped into the opening in the
+earth, but this I did not see. She came and greeted me and spoke a few
+words and then entered her hut. A man came to her for medicine for his
+sick wife, who was bewitched, and others went to consult with her.
+Finally I went to the door of her hut and spoke with her, inquiring why
+these people were worshiping. She said:
+
+"They want rain. The spirit of a rainmaker who died a long, long time
+ago entered into me and they come for me to make it rain."
+
+Knowing them so well, and being jealous for Him Whose ambassador I was,
+I asked, "Do you really mean to say that you can cause rain?"
+
+Regarding me quite earnestly for a time she finally said, "No, I cannot
+cause rain."
+
+"Why then are you deceiving the people and pretending that you can? God
+only can produce rain."
+
+"Yes," she replied, "He alone can make it rain."
+
+"Then come and tell the people that He only can cause it to rain and
+that they should worship Him."
+
+She willingly complied, and coming out of her hut, she spoke to them
+very earnestly, telling them to worship God, as He alone could cause
+rain. As she claimed to be only an intercessor, and no doubt did this to
+please me, it did not necessarily interfere with her role as rainmaker.
+Even the most pagan among them acknowledge Leza (God) as the Rainmaker,
+and these only as His messengers. Since the people so readily transfer
+their worship from one to another, they also freely come to the
+missionaries to have them pray for rain. They have done this at Macha,
+and the Lord has graciously answered the prayers of His servants. This,
+however, does not seem to bring the native any nearer to repentance and
+God, and one feels loath to heed their request, except in the case of
+Christian natives.
+
+With the Batonga, wailing for the dead seems to be essentially a
+religious requirement, and it is most religiously observed, so we
+venture to include it as a part of their religion. When the news of a
+death reaches a village, the people begin to wail at once, especially if
+they be relatives, and continue to do so while they are moving about,
+putting away their grain, baskets, and the few utensils they own, for a
+stay of several days. They may be heard wailing as they pass on their
+way out of their village to go to that of the dead. In a short time
+perhaps the entire village is deserted. We were once camping near a
+village of fifty huts, and news came that a relative had died at a mine
+near Bulawayo. In a few minutes nearly all the inhabitants were on their
+way to the house of mourning; for, although the body was buried about
+four hundred miles distant, they firmly believed that his spirit
+returned to his home and took cognizance of all they did. If a native is
+traveling along a path, and word comes to him of the death of a
+relative, he will begin wailing at once, and turning around proceed to
+the place of mourning.
+
+Perhaps the reader will more fully understand what an African funeral is
+if he in mind accompanies us to one. Apuleni's father had been working
+in a mine in Southern Rhodesia. He became quite sick there and was
+brought home to die. We visited his home, and found that they had taken
+him to a temporary hut at some distance from the village. It is a very
+common practice for them to do this, especially if one is near death's
+door. His wife and daughters are near him, doing all they can to relieve
+his sufferings. His lungs are diseased and it is likely to prove fatal.
+
+One evening word comes to the boy that his father has died. He
+immediately goes home, while Sister Engle and I conclude to go and see
+him buried. We have seen the wailings, but not the interment. It is
+already dark when the word comes, so we take the lantern and together
+with several schoolboys start for the village. We all go single file
+along the path for nearly three-fourths of a mile, down the hill, across
+the river, which is dry at this season. The night is quite dark and only
+lighted up by the flame of the lantern. Up the hill we go, on the
+opposite side, for over a fourth of a mile to the village. All along the
+path the sound of wailing comes to our ears. Sometimes it subsides and
+then becomes more violent than ever. Before death the deceased has been
+brought back to his hut, and as we enter the village the men are sitting
+around in groups outside and are quiet. We proceed to the hut of
+mourning, which is crowded with women and is dark, save for the light of
+the fire in the center, the flickering flames of which ever and anon
+light up the weird scene.
+
+We stoop down and enter the low door. It is so crowded and hot that
+farther progress seems impossible, and yet we manage to work our way
+among the crowd, seated or standing and keeping up their doleful wail.
+Our object is twofold: We wish to see, and also to show our sympathy for
+the boy who has been with us so long and is a Christian, and we desire
+to see the sorrowing wife and daughters, for we know them well and
+believe that they will appreciate our presence and words of condolence.
+We finally reach the partition which extends over halfway across the
+hut. Near this lies a bundle about four or five feet long. It is a
+somewhat shapeless mass, wrapped with a number of layers of blankets and
+carefully tied. In the fitful light one might easily mistake it for a
+bundle of clothes, but we know without asking that this is the body of
+the deceased; for around it are seated the wife and daughters weeping
+bitterly, and lovingly patting the wrapping of the body. The rest of the
+women are mingling their tears with those of the relatives. We stoop and
+speak a few words of comfort to the wife, but it is little we can give;
+he had frequently heard of Christ, but refused to accept Him. As the
+fire flames up we can see Apuleni standing in the shadow, and he too is
+weeping bitterly, but more quietly. The boys who came with us make their
+way through the throng and going to him mingle their tears with his, and
+our own eyes overflow at the sight.
+
+But this crowded hut, without windows or means of ventilation and with a
+hot fire, is unbearable, so we go outside, the boys following. Everyone
+on the outside is quiet or speaking in low tones. Sister Engle and I are
+given blocks of wood for chairs. From one of the groups of men the
+chief, Lupata, rises and takes his little hoe, and after he has made
+some measurements, he marks off the grave a few feet from the door of
+the hut of mourning. In the meantime wood and logs have been brought and
+several fires kindled, as night is nearly always cool. Around these
+fires the men sit in groups, but the fires do not make sufficient light,
+and some grass is brought from the roof of the hut and burnt near the
+grave for light, so the chief may see to do his work in digging out the
+first part of the grave. He then hands the hoe to another, who continues
+the work. The ground is very hard and the work proceeds slowly, and
+since they have difficulty in seeing, we place our lantern on a stamping
+block near them. This is gratefully acknowledged by the little group,
+and the digging continues.
+
+It is an uncanny scene: The steady, dull thud of the hoe as it digs into
+the hard earth; the various campfires lighting up the dusky, grave faces
+of the men in their heathen garb; the steady wail of mourning in the hut
+near by--all leave an impression not soon obliterated. Thus perhaps an
+hour passes and several men have taken part in digging, the loose earth
+being removed by means of a basket; but the picking of the hoe has taken
+on a metallic ring, for the earth is stony. The chief asks for kafir
+corn, and a daughter comes and shells some and places a pan of it near
+the open grave. Frequently some of this grain is dropped into the
+opening, "to soften and appease the earth," they say, and the digging
+continues, though but little progress is made. Then the chief calls to
+the mourners, "Be quiet and do not make so much noise. Don't you know
+that the ground is hard and stony?" The noise subsides and the digging
+goes on. Soon the friends again begin their loud wailing, and since the
+ground is still hard and stony, the chief finally goes to the door of
+the hut and berates them soundly. "Be quiet! Do you not know that you
+are making our work difficult by your lamentations? The earth refuses to
+receive the dead" (because you are loath to give it). They become quiet
+and the work continues. They think the very elements are arrayed against
+them, and the friends must propitiate the earth by a willing surrender
+of their loved one to its cold embrace.
+
+It is now midnight, and from the progress made we conclude that it will
+take all night to finish the stony grave. We speak to the chief and he
+says, "Yes, the interment will not likely be before early dawn." We
+conclude to return home and have some rest. At an early hour we are
+awakened and reach the village just at dawn. The grave has been dug so
+that those inside can stand to their armpits. Then near the bottom a
+further excavation is made in the side of the grave, sufficiently large
+to receive the body. Two men remain standing in the grave while the body
+is carried out amid the lamentations of the mourners. It is gently
+lowered into the open grave and placed in the excavation in the side.
+Earth is handed down in baskets, and this is carefully packed around the
+body. Then comes the filling of the main part of the opening. As the
+ground is lowered the two men stamp it down with their feet, for of
+course they are not standing on the body. When it is nearly full, the
+men emerge and several with sticks carefully pound the earth as it is
+put in until the grave is full.
+
+All this time the friends have been standing around weeping. When the
+grave is filled and all the rest of the earth removed, the head one
+calls loudly, "Water!" This is brought in a gourd and all the relatives
+and those taking part in the burial rush together; and as the water is
+poured out on the grave, they wash their hands in the falling water. The
+surface of the grave is by this time quite wet. The friends throw
+themselves on the muddy grave with their entire force, so that one would
+think bones might be broken. Some throw themselves repeatedly, and by
+the time they have finished, their bodies are quite muddy, but the top
+of the grave is pounded down as smooth as the surrounding earth, and by
+the time it is dry the uninitiated could not tell the place of burial.
+
+Those participating then go to the river to wash, and the chief mourners
+paint part of their bodies with an ash-colored soil. Word has been sent
+to the friends and neighbors and the wailing proper begins. Men with
+assegais, axes, or guns walk back and forth crying "Mawe"; the women
+surround the grave, wailing and uttering various lamentations, such as
+"My friend." "The father of Apuleni." A wife will have on her head the
+deceased's hat; another will be carrying his assegai with the point
+bent; another his stool. All this time the son remained quietly weeping,
+taking no part in the heathen demonstrations.
+
+An important part of the Batonga funeral is the sacrifice of animals,
+cattle, sheep, and goats. They think these have souls and accompany the
+deceased. The number killed depends upon the rank and the wealth of the
+one who died, although not all the animals sacrificed are his property.
+Relatives often bring of their own herds for the purpose. Some of the
+poorer class may have only one animal and small children none. At the
+grave of the murdered chief they sacrificed eight head of cattle; at
+that of another chief, a little farther away, there were twenty-two
+killed. The meat of these animals is eaten by the mourners. At the
+funeral which we have just described the man was poor. One of the
+relatives slew a goat, and an ox of the deceased also was killed. Later
+in the day, as the people began to assemble for the general mourning,
+several young men came leading an ox for sacrifice. They were decked out
+in a most fantastic manner, with pieces of bright-colored cloth and
+various colored paper cut in ribbons. As they arrived near the scene
+they made a rush for the grave, brandishing their weapons fiercely and
+seeming to fight the very powers of darkness.
+
+One day Sister Taylor and I were present at the funeral of the daughter
+of a chief. She was already buried when we reached the place and two
+oxen had been killed. We had no sooner spoken to her parents and sat
+down than a number of cattle were driven into the enclosure, between the
+huts. An old native raised his spear and aimed at one of the cattle. The
+rest were at once driven out while that one staggered and fell. A woman
+stepped to the grave and loudly called to the dead that the animal was
+slain and its spirit was coming. It was a sickening sight. The wailing
+continued, and some of the people would run around the huts in a wild,
+scared manner, as if they were fighting something. The air is to them
+peopled with malevolent spirits, seeking to do them harm, and they must
+ward them off. If one is dying they often beat their tomtoms in a
+furious manner to ward off danger. Heathen death and burial is a sad
+thing. It must be seen to know how terrible it really is. The warlike
+Baila were accustomed formerly to sacrifice any one of another tribe who
+happened to be in the neighborhood at the death of a chief, for all
+strangers were enemies, and Gomo said he saw four or five human skulls
+on a tree as he approached one of their huts. The wailing is kept up for
+several days, especially at night, for it would seem that darkness adds
+to their terror of the evil spirits.
+
+We have often endeavored to show them the folly of some of their
+beliefs, and of course the Christians take no part with them. Even many
+of the older people are losing faith in some of these things, but are
+continuing to keep up appearances for fear of the rest. The chief near
+us says he is not going to sacrifice any more cattle; he will keep them
+and train them for oxen.
+
+Some are very eager to have white cloth in connection with burial, and
+one old man at some distance north of us, who has a son in Bulawayo,
+desired us to write to the son, telling him to bring him a white shroud
+for burial. Whether this idea has come in through the white man I am
+unable to say, but it has probably come through some natives who have
+been to the towns to work and there learned something of Christian
+burial. Among some half-civilized natives in some parts of Africa, the
+idea prevails that if one is put in a coffin, and has a Christian
+burial, he will go to heaven.
+
+There is also a second and sometimes a third wailing, consisting of a
+beer drink and a dance. This too is generally held at night. The friends
+and relatives come together and the half-intoxicated mourners engage in
+singing and dancing. The actions are most lewd and disgusting, for these
+are often genuine carousals of the basest sort; but they are most
+religiously engaged in, and people who believe that the departed spirits
+have such power over the living, are loath to ignore any established
+worship of such spirits.
+
+_Shikazwa_ is the messenger of witches and is supposed to bring harm,
+sickness, or death to its enemies. This class of spirits they say never
+dwells in a human body. They are always disembodied spirits and mediums.
+The belief in witchcraft and transmigration of souls is similar to that
+of the Matabele and need not be repeated. The native, too, has firm
+belief in the efficacy of charms to ward off sickness or accidents and
+to bring good fortune, and the dispensers of these articles do a
+thriving business.
+
+There are various other beliefs in the possession of spirits, which are
+not very well understood, and some of them seem to be comparatively new,
+even among the natives themselves. While I was in Natal, in 1910, a
+missionary was telling me of a difficulty they were encountering among
+the native girls. They became possessed with an affliction not unlike
+hysterics, and when it was started in a neighborhood it spread rapidly
+even among half-civilized natives. I say hysterics, because this lady
+was enabled to check its advance by punishing the first one who was
+afflicted in that way in her school. I had never witnessed anything of
+the sort among natives until my return to Macha in that same year. One
+day, while out kraal-visiting, I was surprised to see something of the
+same nature. They tried to keep the actions of the young woman, who was
+afflicted, from my notice, and hurriedly attempted to quiet her by silly
+remedies. When I inquired what was the matter, they quickly replied,
+"Nothing." The boy accompanying me said it was demon possession. This
+has spread over the country among the girls and young women. The natives
+called it _Masabi_. The older people do not care to mention it or, if
+they do, it is in sort of an apologetic manner. They claim that the
+spirit of some bird or other animal enters the person and causes her to
+act so strangely. The usual remedy resorted to is to beat the tomtoms to
+drive away the spirit. They claim that the so-called possession is
+comparatively new in the country, and that it came from a tribe
+northeast of Macha.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE
+
+A Few of Their Customs
+
+
+The Batonga are very dark in color, although not always black. Their
+features are regular and well formed, and the people are intelligent
+looking. Some of them are large, but as a tribe they are not as
+powerfully built as the Matabele. Their tribal mark amounts to almost a
+deformity. When a boy (or girl) is about fourteen years of age, he is
+taken to the native dentist. The head is put on the ground and held in
+place while the dentist with a blunt instrument knocks out the front
+upper teeth, usually four, sometimes six in number. The gums and lips
+become much swollen and inflamed by this barbarous procedure; but in
+time they heal, and the child is a Mutonga or Mwila, and this deformity
+proclaims his tribe wherever he goes.
+
+The natives never care to have the process repeated. Other natives often
+go to their missionaries to have teeth extracted, but the Batonga seldom
+or never do. They prefer the suffering which comes from neuralgia or
+toothache. This barbarous custom, like many others, has nearly had its
+day, and many of the boys have already rebelled since they have come
+into contact with other natives or Europeans. It will require more time
+for the girls to break away from it, as they live more secluded lives,
+and have developed less independence of character than their brothers.
+A mother will tell her daughter that it is a shame for a woman to have
+upper front teeth. She should be like the cow.
+
+They are all very fond of grease for their bodies, either animal fat or
+butter; and in this hot, dry climate this is not so objectionable, if
+they use it in moderation, by simply oiling the body to prevent the skin
+from cracking. Many of the women, however, use the grease to excess.
+They grind red ochre and, mixing it with the grease, paint their bodies,
+including their hair, red, which is their idea of beauty. In this
+perhaps they are more excusable than some others. Clay often is used in
+dressing their hair, and buttons, beads, and shell are sewed to their
+hair, as ornaments.
+
+The men too take great pride in dressing their hair, and in this respect
+generally surpass the women. They shave part of the head and let the
+hair about the crown and back of the head grow long. This they
+straighten out, and it looks not unlike strings hanging from the back of
+the head. This is carried to extremes among the Baila. There the dude
+lets his hair grow and then goes to the hair-dresser who, with grease,
+hair, and other materials, builds it up into a chignon on the top of his
+head. With some, this chignon is only five or six inches long, but in
+the interior of the tribe it is said to be sometimes three feet in
+length. Brother Steigerwald on his trip north saw some of these long
+ones. Of course the head cannot help lying uneasy with such a weight.
+
+[Illustration: Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground.]
+
+Among these people the clan, or perhaps I should say the kinsfolk, forms
+the unit. They all are closely bound together and each one more or
+less responsible for the others of his relatives. In marriage, death,
+sickness, or trouble, all are concerned in the affair. When difficulty
+arises the heads of each clan listen to the affair and settle the
+dispute. Perhaps the persons most interested may have no opportunity of
+expressing an opinion, especially if they be younger and unimportant
+members of the families.
+
+An unfortunate accident occurred among some boys and one lost an eye.
+The one who caused the loss was not more to blame than the one who
+suffered the loss. It was purely accidental and without malice, and all
+who were spectators so regarded it. The one who suffered the loss
+desired that no attention be paid to the affair, but the father and
+elder relatives thought differently. They called a meeting of the heads
+of the two clans and discussed the affair with great deliberation, and
+in a most dignified and respectful manner. The boys were not consulted
+and there was nothing said in reference to its being an accident. An eye
+was lost and it must be paid for, and their custom is to require the one
+causing the loss to give all his property. In this instance the boy
+considered at fault was young and his father was dead, and all his
+property was three head of cattle and a sheep. His relatives said these
+animals would be given; but the other boy's father said, "No, that is
+not sufficient. I will accept them, but the affair will not be settled.
+When he acquires more property, I will take that also." This was what
+the deliberations hinged on. The faulty one would be unable to secure
+any more property; it would all be taken away from him, so his elders
+were willing to give what the boy had, only on condition that that would
+end the matter. It could not be settled that day, but later the other
+party agreed to take that and consider the affair settled.
+
+[Illustration: Cattle Pen of the Batonga.]
+
+A little fire often kindles a great conflagration among them. Once a
+murderer was taken through our premises on his way to the magistrate. He
+had come from a distance and the difficulty was something like this: A
+native had a needle, and his neighbor borrowed it and lost it. The owner
+of the needle demanded and received an ox in pay. Some time afterward
+the borrower found the needle, and bringing it back to the owner wanted
+his ox back, but the ox was dead. The trouble finally resulted in
+murder.
+
+In marriage the question of kinship also is prominent. Marriage is not
+merely the union of two people, or even two immediate families, but of
+two clans, and the prominent members of both must be consulted. If a man
+sees a girl whom he wishes to make his wife, he first consults his
+parents, and if there is any objection among his relatives the matter is
+dropped. If, however, they are satisfied, his mother goes to the mother
+of the girl and asks for her daughter. If the immediate relatives of the
+girl object a negative answer is given. If they look with favor on the
+proposed alliance, they consult the other prominent relatives, which may
+require considerable time. Some one may object because a relative of the
+proposed groom quarreled a great deal with his wife, or some one may
+affirm that he is lazy. Trouble that has arisen between the clans in the
+past, such as that relating to the boy's eye, may be a formidable
+obstacle, although the parties concerned may have had nothing to do with
+the accident or the settlement of it. If all are agreed, well and good.
+All this time the bride has had no voice in the affair and generally
+does not know what is transpiring.
+
+[Illustration: A Batonga Family Traveling.]
+
+Betrothal among these people may take place when the girl is quite
+young, but generally not until the girl is from 14 to 18 years of age,
+and then it is of short duration, as marriage follows soon after it is
+found that all the relatives agree. The old people, especially the
+mothers, take the affair in hand, the interested parties merely
+following their instructions. The groom is told to be ready. Perhaps he
+has been looking forward and gathering together the _kukwa_ (pay or
+dowry) for the occasion. He has been buying hoes, from ten to twenty of
+them, for these are always a necessary part of the pay, probably because
+they are all farmers and the native-made hoes always command a good
+price. In addition to these, he procures a lot of cloth, beads, money,
+and some assegais. He freely calls on his relatives and friends to
+assist him in procuring the needed pay, for they have had some choice in
+the affair. The day is appointed for the wedding, but before this
+arrives the girl is informed who is to be her husband. She may or may
+not be pleased; her choice in the matter is wholly ignored. She has
+been trained all her life to obey, to keep herself hid, and has very
+little freedom until after marriage. Should she even be pleased with the
+choice, she is expected for modesty's sake to protest and cry out and
+struggle and declare she will not submit.
+
+The mother of the bridegroom takes the pay and goes to the house of the
+bride, the groom and his best man following. They put up a booth near
+the kraal of the bride for the groom to occupy. We enter the village and
+find the relatives of the bride, from far and near, assembled for the
+wedding, for all these expect to receive some of the pay. The women and
+the girls gather and begin to sing the marriage song, the tune of which
+is always the same, but the words are improvised for the occasion. One
+of the older ones will lead off and say, "This girl is going to be
+married," and the rest will assent by singing in unison, again, "We
+shall receive some hoes, so that we may dig our gardens," and again the
+response. All this is done in a monotonous but not altogether unmusical
+manner. Another will take up the lead, and a day or two will be consumed
+in this way until everything that can be thought of in reference to
+marriage, good, bad, and indifferent, is repeated in song. The bride,
+however, is not among the singers. We pass through the village and a
+young woman beckons us to enter a hut. The other women greet us, but our
+guide with a smile mysteriously leads us into an inner chamber. Here is
+a young woman, greased from head to foot, so much so that the grease
+drips from her body. A blanket is thrown around her and over her head,
+and she keeps her eyes down in a miserable-looking fashion, as if she
+were crying or pouting, and never by the least sign acknowledges our
+presence. We are new to the situation, but it suddenly dawns upon us
+that this is the bride. We inquire, "What is the trouble? Does she not
+wish to be married?" "Oh, yes," is the answer, "but she must be sad
+because she is a bride."
+
+[Illustration: Native Women--Widows.]
+
+In the afternoon the relatives gather around the hut of the groom to
+receive their presents, and each makes a choice. Of course they are
+expected to be reasonable in their demands, because sometimes there are
+forty persons to receive presents. The father or men nearly related to
+the bride may take more liberty; one or two sometimes demand ten
+shillings. While the best man is trying to satisfy all these demands,
+the groom is often berated soundly by some, and even at times suffers
+bodily violence. If his supply of goods is reasonable in amount, so
+that nearly all are satisfied, the bride is given to him at once. If
+very few presents are on hand the proceedings may stop and he or his
+best man be obliged to go among his relatives and secure more money or
+goods. If he is slow in this, difficulties may arise between him and the
+girl's relatives until it come to blows. Not long ago a groom, about
+four miles from Macha, was so violently attacked that he died from the
+blows given. This is unusual at the present day, but it may have been
+more common formerly. Even if the wedding has passed off all right the
+girl does not at once go to cook for her husband; it may be several
+months or a year before they fit her out with earthen pots, baskets, and
+the like and she goes to housekeeping. In the meantime she is supposed
+to be so modest that she will not speak to her husband or lift her eyes
+in his presence. The modesty of the Batonga girls is in striking
+contrast with the behavior of many other African girls, and immorality
+does not seem as prevalent among the unmarried as in some other places.
+Even the Baila girls are much bolder, both in looks and actions. If a
+girl is bold, and goes about alone, she may generally be conceded to be
+of an immoral character. When the bride is finally taken to the house of
+her husband, the father may demand a cow or two as additional pay. If
+the girl refuses to go, she often is carried by force. Sometimes the
+mother may refuse to have the girl leave home, and then the husband is
+obliged to live at the kraal of his parents-in-law. If he has two wives
+he often thus has two homes.
+
+The groom must always show great respect for the wife's parents, and
+especially for her mother. When she appears on the scene, he must leave,
+if escape is possible; otherwise he must sit quietly, not lifting his
+eyes in the august presence of her who gave birth to his wife, so that
+the life of the native who lives in the same kraal with his
+mother-in-law is not a very pleasant one. When he meets his
+father-in-law he salutes him by clapping his hands, and the salutation
+is returned by the father-in-law tapping his chest with his right hand.
+The husband may never call his wife by her maiden name, but he gives her
+a new one of his own.
+
+[Illustration: Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife.]
+
+The fact that the marriage is the concern of so many, and is so rigidly
+controlled by the elders, places many obstacles in the way of the
+missionaries. It is difficult for Christian boys many times to gain the
+hand of Christian girls, and for Christian girls to be given to
+Christian boys, as many of the older people object to their daughters
+entering the Christian clan. At present the missionary is not allowed to
+interfere in these native customs, and the girl has no recourse. Custom
+says she must obey her parents and relatives, and the law upholds
+custom. Being under such close supervision all her life, she has no
+opportunity of developing independence of thought and action like her
+brother. The missionaries are looking for better times, however, and ask
+that all who read these lines pray that the day may speedily come when
+the girls and boys may have more right of choice. We have reason to
+think that the day is dawning when this form of slavery will also be in
+the past.
+
+[Illustration: Giving the Gospel in Macha Village.]
+
+Again, the fact that kinship has such a hold upon the people, and each
+one is in a measure responsible for or dependent upon the rest, renders
+freedom of thought and action difficult among all. It tends to retard
+development of character and makes evangelization difficult among them.
+It does not interfere to the extent that caste does in India, but it is
+by no means a negligible quantity. This and blind custom form pretty
+strong bands, for the native does not like to stand alone or be odd from
+his fellows. When the Gospel is given to the people they may appear to
+listen attentively and outwardly accept what is said, but try to press
+home the question to individual hearts and the leader will answer for
+all, "Yes, we are all Christians. We accept what you say. Our hearts are
+white toward God." One who understands the native character cannot
+avoid being skeptical when he hears of entire tribes turning to the
+Lord. They may in outward form, for what is popular with the leaders is
+popular with the crowd. It is easy for them to put on the form of
+Christianity and go through all the ceremonies of it, but with how many
+there is a change of heart remains to be seen by the lives they lead.
+
+The Batonga do not build as good huts as the Matabele, nor do they put
+in a polished floor; perhaps, because the ants are so numerous in this
+part of the country, the hut soon falls to pieces and must be rebuilt,
+even though they may have built it carefully at first. Their presence
+also may account for the Batonga making bedsteads and chairs, whereas
+the Matabele do not. Their huts too are not only the home of the people,
+but at night, goats, a calf or two, dogs, and sometimes chickens are
+housed in the same hut, so that it would not be easy to keep a
+respectable-looking place. As their flocks increase they build separate
+huts for them, as everything must be well housed on account of wild
+animals.
+
+In many other ways they differ from the Matabele. They do not have
+digging-bees like the Matabele; in fact, they do not call their
+neighbors together for any kind of work, except that the men assist one
+another in building. If they have a beer-drink it is a sociable
+gathering or a wailing. The beer is brought and always tasted first by
+the giver, to show that there is no poison in the cup. Each woman digs
+her own little garden alone, or with her children. When we entered the
+country the Matabele would not touch fish, the dislike being so great
+that it almost amounted to a taboo. Among these people fish is the
+staple article of diet. The only reason that seems plausible is that
+here there are many large rivers and fish are abundant, while in the
+other country there are none. These people do not kill twins, but they
+do the children that cut the upper teeth first. Eggs are tabooed to
+unmarried boys and girls, and a superstitious reason is given and
+strongly believed in by them; but back of it the object of the elders in
+enforcing the taboo seems to have been to prevent young Africans from
+robbing the nests and lessening the supply of chicks. There are many
+other taboos among the tribes which are strictly adhered to, the origin
+of which could easily be traced to expediency.
+
+The Batonga will tell you that the assegai is the weapon of the man and
+the hoe of the woman. As one sees the men always armed with assegais, so
+the women generally carry a hoe; nor is it always just an ordinary hoe
+for digging. Her husband sometimes procures for her a dainty little hoe,
+having the handle beautifully ornamented with fine woven wire. This has
+no other use than to be carried with her as she goes on a journey or to
+a wailing, and she is very proud of it and nothing will induce her to
+part with it.
+
+They have many forms of salutation, more than any other tribe of natives
+that I have met, some general and others special, for morning, noon, or
+night, and they are very punctilious about saluting, but never in a
+hurry. They greet not only the one they meet, but also inquire about his
+wife and children, especially the baby, and about what he eats, as well
+as other questions in general. If a number of persons are sitting down
+and another group approach, they too will be seated and perhaps a few
+general remarks may be made; then the salutation begins. Every one in
+the first group must individually greet everyone in the second group and
+ask about his health and receive an answer to the same. There is no
+confusion, no hurry. The native does not shake hands except as he has
+learned it from the white man; he greets only by word of mouth, or on
+special occasion by embracing.
+
+A very pleasing incident in reference to one of the salutations,
+_lumela_ (rejoice), is given by Rev. Chapman, one of the pioneers of the
+Primitive Methodist Mission, and I give it in detail:
+
+"One of these old men could still remember Dr. Livingstone's visit to
+Sekeletu, about 1855. The doctor was known among the Makololo as Monare.
+When I showed the old man a photo of Dr. Livingstone he was greatly
+excited.
+
+"'Yes,' said he, 'really and truly that is Monare's likeness. He wore a
+moustache just like that; it is indeed Monare.'
+
+"'Can you really remember Monare?' I asked.
+
+"'Of course I can,' said he. 'Why, it was Monare who brought us the
+salutation we generally use. Before Monare came we used to say, when we
+met a friend on the path, "_Utshohile_" ["You have got up"]. But when
+Monare came he said, "_Lumela_" ["Rejoice"], and we replied, "_E Lumela
+ntate_" ["Yes, rejoice, my father"]. Why, it was he who told the
+Makololo to live in peace, and rule their people well. See how white my
+beard is? Of course I can remember Monare.'"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN
+
+Later Years
+
+
+The work at Macha continued to develop slowly but steadily. There are
+many daily duties which always fall to the lot of the missionary and
+which might be classed under the head of drudgery, which do not seem to
+count, and yet they are as necessary for the advancement of the work as
+the more noticeable ones, and the year 1912 was no exception to this
+rule.
+
+During the rainy season there was also a very anxious time, as Baby Ruth
+became very sick with infantile remittent fever. For over a month she
+was very ill and we were afraid that we might lose her. Day after day
+she lay with her face almost as white as the pillow, except for a bright
+spot on either cheek. The nearest doctor was one hundred and fifty miles
+away, and the station through which two trains weekly ran was thirty-six
+miles distant, so that medical aid seemed impossible, save that given by
+her parents, who anxiously and tenderly ministered unto her; but many
+prayers ascended in her behalf and the Lord had compassion on us and
+restored her to health. This climate is treacherous for grown people,
+but especially so for children.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission, 1913.]
+
+We have as yet mentioned nothing in reference to the medical part of the
+work. This was not a prominent feature, yet from the first all who came
+for help received attention and many were cured or permanently helped.
+All kinds of diseases are to be met with in this climate, in addition to
+fever. Skin diseases seem especially prevalent in many forms, some of
+them the most loathsome imaginable; and nearly every village also has
+its quota of from two to four lepers. These lepers freely mingle with
+the rest of the people, no effort whatever being made to segregate them.
+The native will affirm that leprosy is not contagious, it is hereditary,
+and there is reason for this view of the case. It makes the heart ache
+to see women without toes and sometimes without fingers, and full of
+sores, nursing beautiful, innocent babies, when we think what a life is
+before these little ones.
+
+These people also have their own remedies. When one is suffering with
+pain in any part of the body, a very common remedy is to resort to
+cupping. For this purpose they use the horns of animals, usually of
+goats. I once watched one woman cupping another. With a knife or piece
+of sharp tin, she made two incisions in the flesh where the pain was.
+She then placed the large end of the horn on this, and with her mouth on
+the small end she removed all the air from the horn, which soon became
+filled, or nearly so, with blood. Leaving this horn on the place, she in
+a similar manner applied another horn, until three or four had been
+applied at various places. She then carefully removed them, one at a
+time. Since the object had been to extract the blood, it had certainly
+been successful, and in some respects the natives are only half a
+century behind--that is all.
+
+In some diseases they very readily come to us, and sometimes fifteen or
+twenty are present at once, awaiting their turn. At other times we are
+called to the villages to minister to them. Once some natives came from
+the nearest village to say that a woman was dying. Her husband at the
+time was one of the carriers for the brethren on their trip north. We
+hastened over and found her in a little dark hut, where we could see
+nothing, so they were told to carry her out into the light, that we
+might see her. The livid spots, spongy gums, and extreme debility all
+helped to indicate a bad case of scurvy. She was seemingly in the last
+stages, and we were fearful that the call for help had come too late. It
+was a year of great scarcity of food among the natives, and from the
+report she must have been living chiefly on a sort of greens, with no
+salt even to season it. It was now about dark, and they said that if
+something was not done at once she could scarcely live until morning. We
+looked to the Lord for direction and then hastened home to procure the
+needed food, which in this instance was quite simple, salt water, and
+boiled-down grape juice, with a little vinegar. These were used
+carefully during the night, and in the morning she had improved
+sufficiently to eat other food. In a few days she was able to be up, and
+her husband, on the way home, was informed that she had been raised from
+the dead.
+
+As the work advanced, we arranged to use one of the huts for a hospital,
+where those who desired might remain and be treated, and a number
+availed themselves of the opportunity. Both Mr. and Mrs. Taylor were
+quite successful in medical work, and some difficult cases came for
+treatment. In this year Brother Taylor treated some very severe wounds,
+ulcers, cancer, a boy with his hands blown to pieces by gunpowder, a
+native badly lacerated by a leopard, and an European who had
+accidentally shot himself, in addition to other cases. We have also had
+opportunity at other times of ministering to white people.
+
+Whether or not the missionaries have had training in such work in
+civilized countries, the exigencies of their surroundings, far from
+doctors and medical help, necessitate their devoting time and study to
+the cases continually brought before them. Many of them become quite
+proficient in treating diseases; and perhaps some, in time, become by
+practice more skilled in treating diseases of tropical climates than
+some physicians of temperate zones would be, who were unused to tropical
+diseases, even though they might display their sheep-skin to show a
+theoretical knowledge of the science. The safest and best course,
+however, would be to acquire some of the theoretical knowledge before
+coming to Africa, and then be ready for the practice.
+
+It is needless to state that the missionary's practice among the natives
+is not a lucrative one. Medicines are very expensive, and a physician
+must have a diploma from an English medical college before he may charge
+for his professional services in an English colony. Even then his
+heathen patients are not prepared to pay much should he feel to
+charge--which he generally does not. The missionary's labor is one of
+love, and he rejoices that he has the privilege, in a small degree, of
+being a follower of the Great Physician. Aid for the body of the natives
+is one of the best ways of reaching their hearts and souls.
+
+[Illustration: Ruth Taylor.]
+
+During the two weeks' vacation in July some of us concluded to spend the
+time in evangelistic work among the villages. We knew the change to
+outdoor life also would be beneficial to ourselves. There was one
+village, Kabwe, composed chiefly of Baila people, where an interest was
+being manifested, and several there had been attending school. This was
+distant about fourteen miles by wagon road, and we decided to go there,
+David and his wife and the dear little baby, who had come to bless their
+home, accompanying. Word was sent ahead that the people should erect a
+temporary straw hut for them, while I occupied the tent wagon. When we
+reached the place we found everything prepared and in readiness for us,
+and the people also. We received a royal welcome from all and were soon
+comfortably situated. There were fifty huts in this village, and every
+evening after the people had finished their day's work and had eaten
+their suppers, about fifty or sixty of them would come to us, sit around
+our bright log fire, and listen most attentively, while the Word was
+being expounded, and then quietly kneel in prayer, and mingle their
+voices with ours in song. In the morning again, before they went to
+their gardens to dig, they would assemble for services. On Sunday we
+gathered on the side of an ant hill, in the shade of some trees, and
+here a much larger number came for services. Generally during the day
+David would go to the surrounding villages and proclaim Christ.
+
+There were several in this village who occasionally came to Macha on
+Saturday and stayed for Sunday services. One Saturday evening at Macha,
+after the rest of the natives had passed out of the evening worship, two
+women from this place remained for inquiry and prayer. They very humbly
+confessed their past life and said they wished to be Christians. We
+knelt in prayer, and I think I never before heard raw natives pour out
+their hearts in such intelligent and heartfelt petitions as they did,
+and their prayers for pardon were heard. We were pleased to learn, while
+we were at Kabwe, that these women were standing true and being a light
+to the rest.
+
+[Illustration: First Christian Marriages at Macha.]
+
+One evening during the meetings at this place an unusual number of
+natives were gathered around the fire, and the Word was preached by our
+native evangelist with unusual power. A hymn had been sung and prayer
+offered, and the people were told that they could go home. Still they
+sat there without a word being spoken, and they were evidently in deep
+thought. Finally a girl arose, and coming forward weeping said, "I want
+to be a Christian. Will you pray for me?" Before we knelt, a general
+invitation was given to others who desired to accept Christ to come
+forward. This evidently was what they wanted, and at once men, women,
+and girls began to press forward and kneel, and we had a most blessed
+season with them as one after another began to open their hearts to the
+Lord in prayer. It was a melting and breaking-up time. Among the number
+who came was the chief of the village and several other elderly men and
+women. The next morning they again came together. David had gone to
+other villages for the day, but his wife and I held the service. This
+time, as soon as opportunity offered the people began to confess their
+sins and say that they wished to leave their past lives and follow
+Christ. Nor do we have any reason to doubt their sincerity. The world
+about them, peopled with malevolent spirits, seeking to do them harm,
+and their own accusing conscience would naturally drive them to a Savior
+Who can give them rest and peace. Praise God! He can give even these
+older ones freedom from the chains of darkness.
+
+Since we find the younger ones more easily persuaded, I believe we too
+soon become discouraged with the older ones and expect too much of them,
+or too sudden a transformation in their lives. I was pleased by a few
+sentences in Brother Frey's letter under date of April 4, 1914. He says:
+
+"Last Sunday there was a goodly number of the old men present. We have
+sent out word that Brother Steigerwald will have a special message for
+the old on next Sunday, and we are giving a special invitation to all
+the old men to come.... A number of these old men have been coming more
+or less regularly for some time. Will you not join with us that they
+might be saved?"
+
+That is the right spirit, and what Brother Frey is seeking to do at
+Mtyabezi we can all do. The old want to feel that we have a special
+interest in their salvation, and that we are not going to leave them to
+themselves in the struggle; but let us help them to know that there is
+One Who can and will set them free if they will only come. In this
+little meeting at Kabwe even some of the older ones who started are
+still striving to get on the Rock. One middle-aged man and his wife, who
+came forward that night, have finally moved near the mission and built
+them a hut there, so that they might learn more about Jesus. The chief
+very strongly urged our starting a school at that place, which we did
+not long afterwards.
+
+[Illustration: David Moyo and His Wife and Child.]
+
+We remained at this place nine days and then moved to Simeoba's village.
+Although some of the other missionaries had visited this village, I had
+never had the privilege previous to this. It is larger than the rest and
+is made up of three different tribes of people, Batonga, Barotse, and
+Baila, but the language of all is more or less similar. They were
+stranger and more shy than those at Kabwe, and as soon as we reached the
+place, Mankunku and I went through the village to meet and learn to know
+the people. Everywhere we were kindly received. They were greatly
+surprised to see a white woman who could speak their language; and as
+the word was passed along, one after another would come and join the
+number who were conversing. About all were in ordinary native garb, but
+there were two or three who evidently had been down to Bulawayo to work,
+and they prided themselves on their European clothes; especially did one
+of these step about as if lord of the place. Some of the sick asked for
+help and were ministered unto, and we were pleased to learn that some
+were helped. All were invited to assemble around our fire in the evening
+for services, and as soon as their suppers were over they began to
+gather, about one hundred in number, around the bright, blazing fire,
+the shy ones keeping in the background where they could not be seen.
+Many of them no doubt had never been at a service before, while a few
+who had been at school at Macha could help sing. One or two of those
+more pretentiously dressed than the rest evidently had attended meeting
+elsewhere, and were at this meeting self-appointed law-and-order men.
+With such a raw crowd as most of these were, we always try to sing easy
+hymns in which there is a great deal of repetition; we also line the
+hymns before singing and have them repeat after us, so that it was not
+long before nearly all joined in the singing. Kneeling in prayer is so
+new an experience that some of the uninitiated sometimes consider it
+amusing and begin to laugh. In this instance two or three girls caused
+some disturbance while we were in prayer; and we were scarcely on our
+feet when one of the self-constituted policemen jumped over some of the
+others and soundly berated the offenders. Order was then restored and
+the service proceeded without any further interruption, after which the
+meeting closed.
+
+The next morning I was awakened by a woman outside my tent clapping her
+hands and thanking me, saying, "You are my healer." She had been
+afflicted with neuralgia the day before; and on asking for medicine, she
+had been given a cup of very strong hot lemonade, which had cured her.
+
+This day was Sunday, and as the people were again invited to assemble,
+about one hundred and twenty came, and we had an interesting service, to
+an attentive congregation. We then turned our faces homeward, stopping
+on the way at Kabanzi, one of our regular preaching places, and holding
+a service. We reached home that night, ready for school, which was to
+open the next day, and feeling greatly benefited by our outing.
+
+[Illustration: Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit to
+Macha.]
+
+We were all at this time well housed, but there still was need of a good
+store building, as the old ones which had been used for this purpose
+were about all tumbling down. David had already made some brick, so
+after our return he began on the building, with the assistance of some
+of the boys. He erected a very good building 33 x 16 feet, containing
+two small rooms and one large one, with a veranda around it. It was a
+good piece of work and was finished in about two months. The large room
+was for his wife and child.
+
+David had never been satisfied with his education and was still anxious
+to attend school, especially an English school. He had some opportunity
+for private instruction at Macha, and also taught part of the time, but
+generally there were so many duties and responsibilities, both temporal
+and spiritual, resting upon him that he had very little time for study,
+and he felt that he must get away where school work would be his first
+work. We greatly preferred that he remain and continue his labors at
+Macha, but he no doubt realized that the pupils too were progressing,
+and he needed more knowledge if he was to continue as teacher. The
+latter part of September he started for Natal to attend school. We
+receive a good report of him from his teachers. He is said to exert a
+good influence over the other boys in the school, and he is also
+frequently called upon to do evangelistic work among them. Will you not
+join with us that he may be kept humble and not get away from his call
+to give the Gospel beyond the Zambezi?
+
+His wife remains with us to help in the capacity of Bible woman. Their
+little girl is a dear, bright, intelligent child as she grows up amid
+civilized surroundings, and is a good example of what a better
+environment will do for these people.
+
+Sister Taylor had now been away from America nearly eight years and had
+not been to the seashore for a change of climate since coming to
+Interior Africa. She had enjoyed good health nearly all that time and
+had been diligent in season and out of season in the Master's business.
+She was a most useful and resourceful missionary always, but the time
+had come when she was in sore need of a furlough to the homeland.
+Brother Taylor too had not been to the seashore, and it was necessary
+for both of them to leave. They were greatly needed in the work at
+Macha, and we could not see how we could get along without them, but too
+many missionaries on the field have, under the pressure of work and the
+needs about them, remained longer than was expedient, and paid the
+penalty with their lives. In February, 1913, they left Macha for their
+homeward journey.
+
+About two months previous to this Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger had returned
+to Africa, and came to Macha to take the place of the Taylors.
+Unfortunately, however, both of them were stricken down with fever about
+two weeks after reaching the mission station. They remained seven
+months, and during that time there was almost one continual combat with
+fever, especially on the part of Brother Wenger. United with this was
+great nervous disorder and prostration, so that it seemed impossible for
+him to stand the climate. They greatly desired to remain and continue
+the work, but since it seemed impossible for him to endure the climate,
+he wrote to Elder Steigerwald, who finally arranged for them to try
+Johannesburg. We felt sorry, both on Brother Wenger's account and for
+the sake of the work, that they were unable to remain on the field.
+
+During the time of these seemingly necessary changes among the
+missionaries at Macha, the work continued to grow and develop. There was
+no increase in the number of boys, but some of those who had been with
+us were proving helpful as teachers and evangelists among the people.
+The work had been branching out and six schools were started; in some of
+which men, women, boys, and girls were attending. In the early years the
+converts were of those staying at the mission; but since the opening of
+the out-schools the work was spreading much more rapidly, and some of
+the married people, as well as the girls, had accepted Christ and were
+living exemplary lives in their homes. These also attended the
+Inquirers' Class and church services at Macha on Sunday.
+
+[Illustration: Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission.]
+
+There are several services held each week at the mission. Besides the
+daily worship, there is on Sunday morning an Inquirers' Class and a
+Members' Class, both held at the same hour but in different rooms. These
+are held on this day because so many have far to come. Then comes the
+general church service, followed by Sunday-school, for which all remain.
+In the evening there is a song and Scripture service for those staying
+at the mission. Thursday morning early is a midweek service and
+testimony meeting; and on Friday night the Christian natives have their
+prayer meeting, presided over by one of their number, while the
+missionaries have a prayer meeting in English. In addition to these
+there is a monthly prayer day, the first Friday of each month, on
+which day all our out-schools are closed and teachers and many of the
+pupils meet with us.
+
+These were often times of great blessing to all of us, one of which
+especially might be mentioned, the first Friday in May, 1913. On this
+day there were nearly one hundred natives present, consisting of members
+and class members; and eight of our boys who had been south to work for
+a year had just returned home and were present. On such days many of the
+Christians were accustomed to spend the early morning hours out alone in
+secret prayer, before the opening of the meeting. On the above date, as
+we stepped into the church in the morning, we realized that there was
+unusual manifestation of the Spirit's presence among us. Several of the
+boys took part in the opening seasons of prayer in a very impressive
+manner. We read a Scripture lesson and for a short time spoke on
+cleansing and consecration and the infilling of the Spirit, and they
+were unusually attentive, which always helps the speaker. Expectation of
+some kind seemed in the air. The testimony meeting opened with heartfelt
+testimonies. Then one's testimony became a prayer for greater outpouring
+of the Spirit. Again we knelt and he continued in prayer. Suddenly the
+very house seemed shaken, and with one accord all were prostrate before
+the Lord. Some were smitten with a spirit of conviction; others began a
+service of praise, and still others lay low, letting the Lord talk to
+them and fill them with His own Holy Spirit. The united prayers
+continued for two or more hours, and while there was noise of prayer
+and praise there could not be said to be any disorder, as all but one or
+two remained at their places. Many received a deeper understanding and
+experience of Divine things that day. Once Brother and Sister Wenger and
+myself began to sing, but they continued in prayer and we stopped
+singing. There were some present who probably received no benefit. In
+Africa, as in America, there are some at such times who follow the rest
+outwardly at least, but do not seem to be benefited in heart.
+
+The latter part of June Elder Steigerwald came to see about the work at
+Macha. It had been one and one-half years since his last visit, and we
+were glad for the privilege of again welcoming him. With him was Miss
+Elizabeth Engle, who had for six years been a most valued worker at
+Mtyabezi Mission; also Mr. L. B. Steckley, who had two years ago come
+out from Canada as a missionary and was helping in the work at Matopo.
+These two were to take up the work at Macha, while Mr. and Mrs. Wenger
+proceeded to the Transvaal, to occupy the station at Boxburg, thus
+enabling Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Eyster to return home on furlough.
+
+While Elder Steigerwald was with us at this time, eighteen native
+Christians were baptized and received into the Church. Among them were
+several married men, three women, and four girls. Some of these were the
+first fruits of the out-schools. We rejoiced that at last we enjoyed the
+privilege of partaking of the Lord's supper with some dark-skinned
+sisters of the Batonga tribe. It was now nearly seven years since the
+mission had opened in this place, and these were the first native women
+to join with us. The women had also been slow to desire civilized
+clothing, for our desire had been to impress upon them more the inner
+than the outer adornment. They were, however, becoming anxious to be
+clothed, and as many of the boys who had now grown to manhood had
+adopted European clothing, our congregations were quite different in
+appearance from the old days. At this time also two couples were united
+in Christian marriage. These were the first native Christian marriages
+at Macha. Since natives are so often inclined to extremes on the dress
+question, in marriage, we made it a special point to say nothing about
+new clothing for the occasion.
+
+A number of others made application for baptism, but it was thought best
+for some to wait awhile, so six months later Elder Steigerwald came to
+Macha again. This time he was accompanied by his wife and Sister Doner.
+Ten more natives were baptized and there were several candidates who
+could not meet with us at this time. There were also three more couples
+united in Christian marriage. There have been fifty-nine baptized at
+this place, but three or four were not as true as we could have desired.
+One of those who had backslidden was the first boy brought to the
+mission, the son of Macha. He had never been very zealous in the
+Master's service, and yet his life had seemed consistent. The Lord may
+find a way into his heart again.
+
+It frequently happens on the mission field that young boys will come to
+the station, learn, and then leave without any special manifestation
+that the Gospel has entered their hearts, yet an impression has been
+made on their plastic minds, and it often follows and convicts them
+later in life. So the missionary need not be discouraged if the first or
+second invitation fails to bring the native to the foot of the Cross.
+
+We greatly enjoyed the visit of Brother and Sister Steigerwald, and were
+eager for them to see some of the out-schools. We started out for this
+purpose, but were all taken with fever, one after another, and the
+visits had to be abandoned. Sister Doner had come to assist in the work
+at Macha and take charge of the school. She and Brother Freys had just
+returned from a furlough to America, and as I had now been in the work
+nearly nine years and needed a change, she, together, with Sister Engle
+and Brother Steckley, was to take charge here during my furlough. The
+latter two had been at the place some months and were beginning to know
+and understand the people and surroundings. Sister Engle in her capacity
+as nurse was having ample opportunity to care for the sick, who were
+always glad for help. She is always a most capable and willing worker
+wherever needed. Brother Steckley too is a consecrated soldier of the
+Cross and ready for whatever comes to him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOURTEEN
+
+The Out-Stations
+
+Every place that the sole of your foot shall tread upon, that I have
+given unto you.--Joshua 1: 3.
+
+
+Just as the Lord told Joshua to rise up and take possession of the land
+of Canaan for God and His people, so we believe He is saying to all
+missionaries whom He sends out into the midst of the enemy's country,
+that He has given the people unto them and they should rise and take
+possession in God's name. We often live beneath our privileges in this,
+and our faith so soon becomes weak and wavering. God also says to us,
+"Be strong and of good courage."
+
+There are two objects which seem paramount on the mission field, and
+about which everything else revolves. These are, (1) the salvation of
+souls, and (2) the preparation of natives to become teachers and
+evangelists of their people. Dispense with these fundamental objects and
+one might as well remain at home. Missionaries may differ in regard to
+the best methods of carrying out these purposes, and some may even
+object to the statement just made. With some missionaries, education and
+civilization hold a very prominent place, and with a few missionary work
+spells education and civilization, and we are sorry to say that the
+number who take this view is increasing. The great body of
+missionaries, however, of whatever name, are such from love of souls.
+The aim should be to get the native really saved and on the Rock, Christ
+Jesus, so that he may become a light in his home. At the same time we
+should seek to train him to become a soul-winner among his people, so
+that a knowledge of God may be spread over the country. In this way only
+can the Great Commission be successfully carried out.
+
+In Africa, especially, are teachers needed on the mission field, for
+before the missionary comes there is no written language, much less any
+who can read. To teach the people to read the Word is not only
+desirable, but it is an absolute necessity if it is to be a Light unto
+their feet in that dark land. We do not claim that a native cannot be a
+Christian unless he can read, for some of the older ones live exemplary
+Christian lives, although unable to read the Word; but among the younger
+generation they very seldom become established Christians if they are
+not willing to apply themselves sufficiently to study so that they are
+at least able to read the Word of God understandingly. Then too the
+spread of the Gospel cannot continue unless some are able to read.
+
+I call to mind two able and Spirit-filled missionaries who spent two
+years in self-sacrificing labors among the natives of Africa. They went
+about from place to place, giving the Gospel to the people, and they
+were liked by the people and frequently had many attentive listeners.
+Several years after they returned home one of them wrote, "We spent two
+years in giving the Gospel to the Africans, and yet we cannot point to
+one soul whom we definitely helped." We believe they underestimated the
+value of their work, for they always aimed to labor in harmony with
+other missionaries on the field and would advise natives to go to the
+nearest mission station. Yet the fact remains that unless the younger
+Christian natives attend school and learn to read the Word, and have it
+instilled into their minds from day to day, they are apt to forget and
+wander away.
+
+I have dwelt thus at length on the educational feature of the work,
+because there are many good Christians who fail to understand why so
+much of a missionary's time is occupied in teaching the natives. It is
+simply for the reason that that is the only means they have of learning
+to read the Word of God. Among the natives of Africa there are no
+schools but the mission schools, and the chief purpose of these is to
+teach the natives to read the Word understandingly, so that they may "be
+able to teach others also." On the other hand, since schools are such an
+essential part of the work, there are not wanting those who confuse the
+education thus obtained with religion itself, and think all who become
+able to read are Christians. That is a consummation devoutly to be
+wished by every missionary, but it is no more true in Africa than it is
+in England or America. The fact that it is not true in those civilized
+countries may have much to do with the fact that it is not true in
+Africa.
+
+Since the day-school at Macha never assumed large proportions, and there
+were many children all around us, especially girls, who were not in
+school, it had been the aim from the beginning to train teachers who
+might be placed in the various villages to teach and give the Gospel to
+the people in their homes, and thus multiply the work done by the
+missionaries manyfold. A number of schools had been started in this way.
+In this work it is always necessary to use great care in the selection
+of teachers, that they may be teachers of righteousness as well as
+teachers of books. A boy may be quite apt as a scholar, and so far as is
+known be a moral person, but if he has not yielded himself to Christ as
+his Savior and has not a love for souls in his heart, he often does more
+harm than good as a teacher. In other words, he must be a missionary as
+well as a teacher, and lift up Christ among them. We often send a boy,
+who is prepared, back to his own village as teacher, if we have such a
+one. Mr. Worthington, Secretary for Native Affairs, when informed of
+this said, "I greatly approve of your custom of sending natives back to
+their own home to teach their people. I think it will obviate many
+difficulties in the way of native teachers."
+
+The out-schools are superintended by the missionaries, who if possible
+visit them once a month and advise the teachers in reference to the
+work. If the schools are too far away for the pupils to attend church
+services at the mission, arrangements are made for services to be held
+more or less frequently at the schools. The native teachers also hold
+daily worship and Scripture reading with their schools, and all others
+who desire to attend.
+
+In order that my readers may gain some information in reference to the
+out-schools connected with Macha Mission, you are invited to accompany
+me on a visit to them, such as I made shortly before returning to
+America. Miss E. Engle will accompany me, as she has charge of them
+during my absence. Two of the boys are also going as leader and driver.
+While we are absent on this trip, Apuleni will have charge of the school
+at Macha. He was the second boy to come to the mission, nearly seven
+years before, and has been with us ever since, except for nearly
+eighteen months, when he, with other boys, went away to Salisbury to
+work. He has made good in school, and has accepted Christ as his Savior.
+He says his chief desire is to know the will of God and do it. He is
+well versed in the Scriptures, is a good teacher and helper in
+Sunday-school, and reads, not only his own Tonga language, but also Zulu
+quite readily, and English, and acts as an interpreter from these two
+languages into his own. He is also prepared in the other branches
+taught. As he is our assistant teacher all the time, we know the school
+will not suffer in his hands.
+
+We are going in the large two-seated spring wagon with a white canvas
+top, sent out by the Board two years ago. One of the seats is removed,
+and in the back part of the wagon is placed a box containing food,
+dishes, and the like equipments for our meals. There is also put in a
+large five-gallon can of good drinking water, two folding canvas
+bedsteads, a bundle containing bedding, and a mosquito net, and
+underneath the wagon in a framework is a tent which we have lately
+acquired. There is also a small bag of cornmeal, a tin of ground
+peanuts, some dried greens for the boys, and some whole peanuts for all
+of us. Where the dashboard was originally is now a long box in which are
+placed kettles and cooking utensils. And we do not forget to stow away
+in the box of the seat a quantity of bananas and lemons, of which the
+mission has an abundance; also some fresh vegetables. A small canvas
+bag, in which the drinking water is cooled, hangs on the side of the
+wagon. Four oxen are inspanned and one boy takes hold of the strap in
+front to lead the oxen, and another, with a long, slender pole, to which
+is tied a long, slender leathern lash, drives. He sometimes sits on the
+box in front and sometimes runs along the side.
+
+We remember the times, not so very long ago, when we were not so
+comfortably equipped for traveling as we are at present. We walked many
+weary miles to see the people, and thoroughly enjoyed it too, even
+though the hard earth at times was our bed and the open canopy of heaven
+our tent, and native food in part supplied our needs. Then it was not
+possible to visit as many places in a day as now, and frequently when we
+arrived we were too tired to do justice to the Word. Then also we failed
+to reach many villages, because of the distance. Now it seems almost too
+good to be true that we are so well supplied, for the Lord has again
+wonderfully verified His precious promise, "to do exceeding abundantly
+above all that we ask or think." Praise His Holy Name! Yet we would not,
+if we could, do away with those early days and the blessings attending
+them, and we are better able to appreciate present favors by contrast.
+
+[Illustration: School at Kabanzi Village.]
+
+Usually we endeavor to start not later than sunrise, so that we may
+travel in the cool of the morning; for the sun becomes quite hot in the
+middle of the day, and it is advisable then to be under shelter. At this
+time, November, however, the morning is cloudy, so that we may have
+rain; but the clouds make traveling pleasant and we start. We go north
+and a little east. Where the roads are good the oxen trot off briskly;
+but in many places there are deep ruts, caused by the heavy rains of
+previous years, which make progress slow. In some places the ruts are a
+foot or two in depth, and it is necessary to make a new road along the
+side, for there are no government-built roads in the country.
+
+The grass of the previous year's growth was burnt off in June or July;
+and ever since, as far as the eye could reach, nothing could be seen
+except the great stretch of undulating reddish-brown earth, destitute of
+everything, save here and there little patches of dried grass, which had
+escaped the scorching fires, and scattered trees, almost destitute of
+leaves. There has been no rain for six or seven months; yet spring is
+approaching, and already in the rich valleys may be seen tender blades
+of grass springing up. On the bare brown hills here and there are
+flowers of various kinds, which gladden the eye and relieve the monotony
+of the scene. Where the moisture comes from at this season of the year
+to produce such delicate blossoms is a cause of conjecture. Then too,
+already many of the trees and shrubs are putting forth their tender,
+beautiful green leaves, some of which look as delicate and shining as
+wax; and occasionally one sees a tree or shrub with white, yellow, or
+red blossoms preparatory to putting forth leaves. All these changes we
+note with pleasure as we ride along in the cool, bracing air of the
+early morning.
+
+At one place is to be seen Chikuni stump, which seems almost like a
+stone, and has been a landmark within the memory of the oldest
+inhabitant. The majority of trees which are to be seen on this road are
+hardwood, but very crooked and scrubby looking, no doubt owing to the
+yearly fierce onslaught of fire and also the nature of the soil. Along
+the road is one solitary mahogany; a large, spreading tree this is, but
+not a very good sample of its kind. There is also a large tree known as
+the sausage tree; its immense bean pods, one to two feet in length and a
+foot and over in circumference, reminding one of a great piece of
+sausage. Numerous acacia are to be seen, and as we approach the river,
+five miles from home, we see six large, fine-looking fig trees, their
+rich, dark-green foliage furnishing beautiful shade. Although this is
+the Myeki River, there is no water where we cross, yet the deep,
+bridgeless ravine makes crossing for heavily-laden wagons difficult at
+all seasons, and almost impassable during the rainy seasons. Here is a
+large village, but we proceed two miles further and come to Mianda
+School, where Charlie Sichamba teaches.
+
+This is not a large village, but it is the home of a number of some of
+our best boys; those who have been of greatest assistance in teaching
+and in industrial work. The village has been lately moved, and huts are
+not yet all completed, nor is the schoolhouse finished. We drive near
+and are met by a number of the pupils, for we are always certain of a
+welcome at this place. The rain, which has been threatening, begins to
+come down, and one of the new huts is given to us. Wood is brought and a
+fire is kindled in the center, that we may have breakfast. A mat is
+placed on the nicely-swept floor, and on this the tablecloth is spread
+and the breakfast placed after it is cooked. This consists of corn
+porridge, with milk, bread, butter, eggs, fruit, and coffee if we desire
+it. Muguwe sends us milk, for he always sees that we are furnished with
+fresh milk when we come here. The boys are given another hut in which to
+cook their food. The meal being over, we hand the dishes to one of the
+boys to be washed, while we turn our attention to the school and work
+for which we came.
+
+By this time the rain is beginning to abate, and the pupils, about
+twenty in number, assemble in another hut for school. Today there are
+not quite as many as usual, because there is a wedding in progress. Here
+is Muguwe, a tall, odd-looking native, over thirty years of age, and a
+Christian, and so far as we can learn he is consistent in his life.
+Learning is difficult for him, but he is making progress and is quite
+persevering. His wife for a long time was opposed to his serving the
+Lord, but she is changing, and we trust that she too may accept Christ
+as her Savior. The stepdaughter is also in school and is making progress
+in Divine life. There are several other women and some girls and boys.
+Some of them seem very slow in accepting Christ, but there has
+manifestly been a change in the lives of some, and a number of the old
+women are believers. During the last year of drought, when the people
+of nearly every village were so zealous in their heathen worship for
+rain, this was one of the two who stood true. After school is over, the
+older ones are summoned to join with us in worship, and we take the
+occasion once more to give them a Gospel message, to which they listen
+attentively. Here are Tom's mother, Jim's mother, and Chikaile's mother,
+all of whom seem to believe as far as they have grasped the Truth.
+
+We are especially grieved today, however, because of the wedding which
+is progressing, for we knew nothing about it until we were on the
+journey. The bride is a Christian girl and has had a good experience,
+although she is not yet baptized. She is only about fifteen years old,
+or perhaps a little older, and has been given to an unsaved boy, who,
+however, has no other wife. We inquired of one of the boys if she wished
+to marry him. He looked at us in sort of a pitying manner, as if to say,
+"You should know better than to ask such a question," and replied, "They
+did not ask her." After the service we go up to the hut of the bride,
+and find her not feigning to cry, as some of the brides do, but in
+reality weeping most bitterly. At the sight of us her sobs break forth
+afresh. We try to comfort her, but what can or what dare we say? We
+speak to the mother, who also has confessed Christ, but she is the first
+wife in a line of five. She frankly acknowledges that she preferred to
+give her daughter to a Christian, but was overruled. The brothers too,
+who are Christians, could do nothing, the older relatives having
+arranged the affair. Her father is chief of the village and an
+influential man. He has always been a friend of the mission, but he
+feels that he can manage his own affairs best, and his children are
+taught implicit obedience. We know that remonstrance is useless, and
+from his conversation it is evident that he thinks he has provided
+wisely for his child, because the groom is son of the chief at Kabanzi,
+where one of our schools is located, and the young fellow had even
+attended school for a few days. The affair might be more serious, and we
+hope and pray that in time both may be Christians.
+
+The next school is four miles farther on this road, at Impongo, and the
+teacher there is Singuzu, whose home is at Mianda. He is not so far
+advanced in learning, so he recites to Charlie. He is, however, a
+conscientious and Spirit-filled Christian. He accompanies us to his
+place of teaching. This is a new school, has been in session only about
+three months, and is held out in the open air in the shade of a tree;
+but they are gathering poles to build a hut. The people had asked
+several times for a school, and we finally concluded to give them one.
+The teacher is doing his work faithfully, and progress is being made by
+the pupils in learning to read; but there are some things in connection
+with this school which are making the work very unsatisfactory, and both
+the teacher and ourselves think best to discontinue it. After the
+recitations are finished a service is held with them and they seem
+interested. When the late dinner is over it is decided to go about six
+miles west, to Kabanzi, the next school.
+
+By this time it is somewhat late in the day, but it is hoped that our
+destination may be reached before dark. Singuzu, who is a better driver
+than the one accompanying us, is asked to go along and drive. This road
+is very little traveled and a white man might not be able to find it;
+but the natives accustomed to these trackless wilds do not soon become
+lost. Nearly the entire distance is through the brush, consisting of
+both large trees and short underbrush, so that the journey is more or
+less impeded. We travel along at a fair speed for oxen, as the driver is
+accustomed to dodging trees and shrubs; but darkness overtakes us before
+the village is reached. Progress is now slow, since the veldt from this
+to the village is full of the stumps of trees cut off, native fashion,
+two or three feet above ground, and we are fearful of running into these
+and breaking the wagon. Finally the wagon does become fast and the oxen
+must be unhitched until it is extricated. We again enter the wagon and
+move on. The welcome sight of the village fires shining out amid the
+darkness indicates that the end of the journey is near at hand. As we
+approach, a pack of dogs greet us with their loud barking, and light
+after light shines out through the open doors of the huts, or from the
+courtyard where the men, in the shelter of a semicircle of reeds, sit
+and palaver. There is no more pleasing sight to travelers through
+African wilds than the bright and cheerful blaze of the indispensable
+campfire, which answers for light and heat, for preparing the evening
+meal and warding off the wild animals.
+
+As we reach the village, a number of natives emerge from their huts in
+order to ascertain who these intruders are, coming along the back of
+the village. On seeing their missionaries they gladly offer their
+services to conduct the wagon through the trees and stumps to the
+schoolhouse and teacher's hut. Sister Engle and I conclude not to have
+the tent pitched for the night, but to have our beds placed in the
+large, roomy schoolhouse, which boasts of a good plank door. We have had
+a busy day, for we have visited two schools, held two services, prepared
+our food, and traveled seventeen miles, so we are soon resting on our
+comfortable stretchers.
+
+In the morning breakfast is prepared early, for the school is to begin
+earlier than usual so that we may continue our journey. We, however,
+take time to go over to the village and have a chat with some of the
+older people. This is Kabanzi village, and it has our oldest and best
+school. Before the opening of school services were held here frequently,
+and some were interested, but no one gave indications of wanting to
+follow the Lord until after school opened. Several boys from this place
+were converted while attending school at Macha. The teacher is Jamu, a
+careful, painstaking and faithful Christian. He is greatly interested in
+the spiritual as well as the intellectual advancement of his pupils. He
+carefully reads and explains the Word to them day by day, and he is a
+good evangelist. While in school at Macha he was always one of our best
+workmen in laying brick, sawing and thatching. There are generally about
+fifty pupils enrolled in this school and about thirty-five in daily
+attendance. Twelve have been baptized and nearly all the rest are in the
+Inquirers' Class.
+
+We enter the schoolroom and the pupils march around the building, then
+enter and take their places on the logs extending across the room. All
+kneel and repeat the Lord's prayer, and then teaching begins. A few are
+reading the charts, some are in the first book, a number in the "Bible
+Stories," while a few are reading the Gospels of St. Mark and St.
+Matthew. A number of pupils are married men and women. The women bring
+their babies, and yet with the interruption caused by these, they have
+learned to read well and are in the "Bible Stories." They exhibit
+remarkable perseverance, for they not only attend school, but dig in
+their gardens, carry wood and water, grind their meal, and prepare their
+food. On Sunday they walk nine miles to Macha to church, for they,
+together with their husbands, are Christians, or seeking to be such. The
+teacher says that they started to school first; then their husbands
+followed. The husbands also work in the gardens, build huts, hunt game
+for food, and part of the time work for the white man in order to obtain
+money for taxes and clothes. They have also lately been buying cloth to
+make dresses for their wives, and one day I came upon one of the men
+carefully washing his wife's dress. The Gospel is making them better
+husbands and more careful and considerate of their wives. The heathen
+worship, with its attendant evils, together with vice, beer, tobacco,
+and kindred habits, is being banished from these few homes at least.
+When other villages were worshiping their rainmakers, these too were
+daily worshiping, but it was the Lord of lords Whom they worshiped. When
+the older ones desired to resort to their heathen worship, the
+Christians said, "No; if you do we shall build a kraal of our own." This
+means that there are many in the village who are not Christians, and
+some of them stoutly oppose the school; but the chief is favorable, as
+some of his children are Christians. There are also several old women in
+addition to the pupils who are breaking away from their old worship and
+accepting Christ. There is one _old_ woman here who has come out very
+bright in her Christian experience. She meets with much opposition, but
+she does not waver.
+
+[Illustration: Sikaluwa.]
+
+After we have remained one session of school, some of the older people
+are called and we have a service for very interested listeners. The boys
+then inspan the oxen and we proceed west to Kabwe School, about five or
+six miles distant. These are the people with whom we held a week's
+service over a year before. At this place our tent is pitched and we
+prepare to spend the night. This is a Baila village, and at first
+Sikaluwa had charge of the school, as he was brought up among that tribe
+and is a good Christian boy. He did good work for nearly a year, but he
+did not wish to continue. We were in doubt as to whom we should send to
+teach them; and after praying over the matter we concluded to consult
+the Christians in Members' Meeting, and inquire if anyone felt led of
+the Lord to take up the work there. At the close of the meeting we were
+surprised to have Chikaile come and say that he was willing to undertake
+the work, the Lord helping. He had been at the mission for some years
+and was quite capable of teaching. He is also one of the most cheerful
+and willing workers, but he is so young, perhaps only seventeen years
+of age. Because he is such an earnest and conscientious Christian,
+however, he was given the privilege, and has succeeded beyond our
+highest expectations. The kraal had just been moved and divided, so that
+he was obliged to build a new hut for himself. This he speedily did, and
+then began a schoolhouse which, with a little assistance from the
+villagers, was soon under roof. There is nothing lazy about the boy, and
+the school, as well as the work of the Lord, is progressing in his
+hands. He soon learned to know the people and the kind of lives they are
+leading, and is fearless in exposing sin, although he is always mild and
+humble in his demeanor. With him, as well as with other teachers who do
+not teach in their homes, a boy is sent, so that he need not be alone.
+
+In this school we find twenty-four pupils in attendance, among them two
+elderly women. One of these, the mother of another Christian woman, has
+made a good confession. She entered school and we smiled somewhat
+incredulously, thinking that she was too old to learn; but our next
+visit to the school revealed the fact that she was making decided
+progress, and it seemed evident that she would soon be able to read the
+Gospel. After school was over, services were held and the people invited
+back for night meeting. We then prepared our food. During these visits
+to the villages the people sometimes bring a present of a chicken, a
+dish of peanuts, some milk, or whatever they think we might relish.
+Occasionally, on a hot day, it is a cup of ibwantu. This is a gruel made
+of the meal of native grain into which has been placed crushed root with
+an acid flavor. It is usually made in the evening and consumed the next
+day. It is not alcoholic, and has a very cooling and refreshing taste.
+It will be brought in a large cup, and as is their custom, the donor
+usually takes a sip first to show there is no poison in it.
+
+When this village was moved and divided into three parts, we about gave
+up the thought of opening school again, but the chief was not satisfied,
+and promised that if school was reopened he would see that the children
+came together to learn; so we agreed to send a teacher. Six very nice
+young girls came from Kabwe to stay at Macha and attend school; but
+others entered to fill up the ranks and the work continues.
+
+Early the next morning we start on our homeward way. The road takes us
+back past Kabanzi, and there we turn south toward Macha. On the way we
+come to a place which at first sight might be taken for an old deserted
+native village; but a closer inspection reveals the fact that the huts
+were never finished. Here is the framework of twelve large, nice-looking
+huts. Some have just been rightly started; of some the walls are
+finished, and on others the builders had begun to put on the roof. Poles
+are scattered all around, and some poles are at a distance from the
+huts, but near the road, and look as if those who were carrying them had
+dropped them hastily. The whole has the appearance as if a number of
+people were busily engaged in building a village and were surprised by
+an enemy in the midst of their labors and slain, their work unfinished.
+What does it mean? This question we asked ourselves on first seeing it.
+The answer was this: They were indeed surprised by an enemy, but that
+enemy was death. The headman sickened and died; his son followed.
+Concluding that the place was bewitched, the rest at once abandoned it
+and went elsewhere, leaving all those fine, straight poles to rot.
+
+On the journey homeward we again come to Myeki River, for this is a very
+winding stream, and this crossing is several miles farther west. At this
+place there is another school. We stop near the village, where Mafuta
+the teacher lives, and he, with some of the rest, comes out to meet us.
+We have driven about ten miles this morning and now hastily prepare
+breakfast and eat. Some tall, beautiful bottle palms grow in this
+vicinity, and while we are eating, the teacher brings us the fruit of
+one, a part of which is eaten with relish. We then start off on foot for
+the school, which is about two miles distant, near another village. We
+leave the lead boy to herd the oxen, while the little herdboys of this
+village drive their cattle ahead, so that they may learn in school and
+at the same time watch the cattle.
+
+As we walk along the path, through this somewhat dense forest, let me
+tell you something of this teacher, Mafuta. He is older than the most of
+our boys and was already grown when we reached Macha, seven years ago.
+He at that time worked for us a few months. For over three years,
+however, he showed no inclination to want to learn or be a Christian,
+and seldom came to Church. He was just like the other natives in the
+village and indulged in their sinful and lazy ways. Finally he informed
+one of the boys that he was coming to school until he had sufficient
+money to take a wife. We were quite skeptical when we heard it; for we
+did not expect that he would remain long, and then too school was not a
+money-making place. He came and applied himself to school work. He was
+slow and dull, but he was diligent and made progress.
+
+He entered the Inquirers' Class and the Lord found a way into his heart.
+One day in the class, when a number came forward for special prayer, he
+became in earnest and found what he sought--pardon for his dark past,
+and peace in his soul. As he took his seat his face wore a look of
+new-found joy, and he arose and testified as to what the Lord had done
+for him. In work also he was faithful, and he soon learned to handle the
+oxen in plowing and in the wagon, and thus he received higher wages. By
+close economy he gradually was able to get a little money ahead. In time
+he was baptized. He gained one of the nicest girls in the neighborhood
+as his wife, is married by Christian marriage, and is now teaching this
+school. He is not as quick at learning as some, but he is faithful and
+painstaking and is a living Christian among them. When we look at him
+and think how little faith we had in the early days, we are reminded of
+the words, "The Lord seeth not as man seeth; for man looketh on the
+outward appearance, but God looketh on the heart."
+
+We visit the school and find twenty-four scholars assembled, the
+teacher's wife among the number. It is a new school, but the pupils are
+making advancement. After services we retrace our steps to the waiting
+wagon, and then return to the mission, which is only about four and
+one-half miles distant. We have spent three days out, have visited five
+schools and have traveled thirty-six miles in somewhat of a circle. We
+have enjoyed the trip and the change from the routine of the mission
+station, but a person is glad to reach home, after a few days spent on
+the veldt.
+
+Again we desire to visit Chilumbwe School, which is about seven miles
+northeast. Here the natives were asking for some time for a school. We
+had come to the conclusion, however, that no more schools would be
+opened until the people of the village erect some sort of a schoolhouse.
+They are always ready to promise that they will build, but if a teacher
+is provided before the house is built they generally are slow in
+carrying out their promise. Then too it is not best to make the work too
+easy for them. They appreciate most that which has cost them something.
+The work among them is new, and as the schools are especially for
+children, and money is always scarce, we dare not expect too much at
+present. If they are eager for a teacher they can at least build a
+schoolhut, feed their teacher, buy their own books, and these they are
+expected to do. Even the poorest buy their books, and if they cannot
+bring money they often bring a chicken or grain in pay. The people at
+Chilumbwe finally managed to build their hut and school began a month
+ago.
+
+We again take the wagon and go north as before, but soon turn off toward
+the east. We pass through Chikuni, where formerly there was a large
+village, and over under that large, spreading fig tree Sikaluwa taught
+school. But sickness entered the village; the chiefs wife died, a child
+followed, and then a young man, all in the same village. All these died
+in a similar manner which, from the description given afterwards, must
+have been _spinal meningitis_. They thought it was witchcraft and became
+afraid of one another. So they separated, some going one way, some the
+other. We pass several kraals on the way and finally reach Chilumbwe.
+
+The chief of this village is rich in cattle and is an unusually
+intelligent and well-bred native. Jim is the teacher. Yes, he is that
+short, well-dressed native with the colored glasses on. He is the one
+who lost his eye and is very sensitive on account of the defect; but he
+is a splendid fellow, faithful, humble, and an excellent workman. He is
+moreover a sincere Christian, anxious to know and do the will of his
+Heavenly Father.
+
+As the wagon approaches the schoolhouse we are greeted by the chief and
+a number of the pupils, for they are expecting the visit. It is decided
+to have services first so that the older ones need not remain. The
+pupils, together with some men and women from the village, gather around
+a large shade tree, the chief taking a prominent position. All the
+pupils join lustily in the singing, seemingly anxious to impress upon
+their missionaries that they are progressing in that at least. A service
+is then held, after which the pupils gather in the little schoolhouse
+for school. There are about fifty pupils already enrolled in this
+school, some being from neighboring kraals, and there are over thirty in
+attendance today. They are starting out well, but how many will continue
+remains to be seen. The pupils are all young men and boys, and the
+teacher informs us that they will not allow the women and girls to
+attend school. We cannot force them to let the girls come, nor is it
+wise to attempt it, so we just look to the Lord and wait until He can
+find a way into their hearts. At all the other out-schools the girls
+generally outnumber the boys. This being a new school, nearly all read
+on the charts; only two or three have passed that stage, but we have two
+beginning books along and they are bought. There are no Christians at
+this place, and the one that seems most interested in the Gospel is the
+chief's son. He was badly mauled by a leopard a few months ago, and the
+chief brought him to the mission to be treated. Sister Engle very
+successfully treated his wounds; and while he was with us he came under
+the influence of the Gospel, and we believe he is reaching out for more
+knowledge of his Savior.
+
+All the schools have now been visited. There is a call for a school
+southwest about six miles, and there is a teacher for it; but the people
+have not yet erected a schoolhouse. The villages near have asked for
+schools and have had them; but many have opposed the Gospel and the work
+has not proved a success among them. There are a few in each village who
+are Christians, and some of them are with us and others coming to
+day-school. We are not yet discouraged with these at our doors who have
+been hardening their hearts against the truth. God has yet among them
+some who will come out strong for Him, for we know that His Spirit is
+striving with them and with some it will not strive in vain. It can be
+seen that a knowledge of God is slowly spreading over the country and
+real miracles are being performed in the hearts of some of these
+erstwhile heathen; miracles greater than the raising of Lazarus from the
+dead. Souls are being raised to walk in newness of life and are living
+witnesses to those around them of Christ's power to save to the
+uttermost. _God's love_ has bridged the immense chasm in the lives of
+some between the densest, darkest paganism and the glorious Light of the
+children of men. But we must be patient with the slow ones, for it is
+not always those who are the most ready to accept who are the most
+stable. Some delay long years and finally come out strong and vigorous
+for Christ. Where only rude, coarse heathen songs were heard, anthems of
+praise to God now arise, and daily prayer ascends.
+
+It may be seen that the natives are governed by a number of petty
+chiefs, and that they frequently change the location of their villages.
+This makes the work among the out-schools more difficult; but others are
+calling for schools, and already the past year over 200 children were
+enrolled in the out-schools, in addition to those at Macha; and this
+where only a few years ago the names _school_ and _God_ were not known.
+We are touching only a small spot thus far and see a great wall of
+darkness just beyond; a darkness which we occasionally seek to
+penetrate. Other bodies of missionaries also are laboring in some
+sections of the country, but there is much land ahead yet to be
+possessed, and many natives still in darkness who can say, "No man
+careth for my soul."
+
+The salvation of Africa rests largely upon the native converts, and we
+rejoice for the manner in which some are coming to the help of the
+Lord's cause, and we trust they may ever have the prayers of all who are
+interested in the evangelization of this vast continent. Natives,
+however, cannot do the work alone. There always is need of white workers
+to oversee and direct the work, or it will not advance satisfactorily.
+We believe the Lord desires us to ask largely these latter days, but in
+this instance we shall be modest in our request, and that is, that the
+way be open to start at least one more station of white workers in
+Northern Rhodesia. We believe the Lord is speaking to some hearts to
+open such a work. Is He not speaking to others to give of their prayers
+and money for the work? Many of God's children could pay $200 or $300 a
+year toward the support of a white worker, and others $40 to $50 for a
+native evangelist, and not need to deny themselves any of the comforts
+of life in the doing of it. May God help us to see and appreciate our
+privileges in Christ Jesus.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTEEN
+
+Conclusion
+
+I desire to protest against the unholy thirst for statistics; it is
+perfectly impossible to put into statistics the results of mission
+work.--Lord Selborne, Late High Commissioner for South Africa.
+
+
+In the preceding pages it has been the aim to present some of the work
+done, as it has been our privilege to see it. Much more might be written
+about the progress of the work at Matopo, Mapani, and Mtyabezi Stations,
+for they have a number of excellent out-stations, manned by experienced
+and Spirit-filled natives, and are doing encouraging work; but that
+would be beyond the scope of this little volume. We must leave that for
+the able and efficient missionaries at those places and content
+ourselves with a summary of the work.
+
+But first we desire to refer to the work at Johannesburg, for during the
+last few years some of our missionaries there have been laboring in
+connection with our Mission Board. Over four years ago Mr. and Mrs.
+Isaac Lehman severed their connection with the other missionary bodies
+and began building up a separate work, and a little later began laboring
+under the auspices of the Church. They began the new work under
+difficulties, but they are persevering and hard workers, both in
+temporal and spiritual lines, and the work shows excellent results from
+their consecrated labors. Brother Lehman has worked hard to put up
+suitable buildings, and their station is now equipped with a good house
+and church. As I have not had the privilege of visiting that place since
+the opening of their new work, they were asked to give a statement of
+what is being done. This they did under date of August, 1914, as
+follows:
+
+     Our main or central station is at the City Deep Mine, where we
+     reside. The Compound only a short distance from the mission at this
+     place has over 4,000 native laborers in it at one time. This is a
+     very promising mine, and has just lately been opened, and has an
+     apparently long life before it under normal conditions. It will in
+     time employ many more men as it keeps enlarging. We have open doors
+     to this vast multitude of men coming from all parts of South
+     Africa. There are many tribes represented and we can preach the
+     Gospel to them; and we praise the Lord that some have been saved
+     and are seeking to know more of the Lord Jesus Christ.
+
+     We have four other mission stations besides this central station.
+     One is Florida Mission, where there is a nice number of baptized
+     members and we believe a good work is being done. At the Goch
+     Station the Lord has given some blessings and some souls have been
+     added to the Church. At that place the mine has given us permission
+     to apply to the government for a mission site, and the native
+     brethren have already contributed a nice sum of money to put up a
+     suitable church building. Praise the Lord! At the consolidated
+     Langlaagte there is a good work going on; a number have been saved
+     and united with the Church. We have had some blessed seasons at
+     this place owned of God. The Bantjes has had its share of tests,
+     but we praise God that souls have also, at this place, been added
+     to the Church, and the work is progressing.
+
+     From all the stations, one main and four out-stations, fifty-seven
+     souls have been baptized. We praise God for
+     all these, and for a number who have heard God's call to them to
+     give themselves to Jesus to work for Him and labor for the
+     salvation of their own people through Jesus' precious blood. Thank
+     God there is power in the blood to save any and all who will come.
+     There are a goodly number who are soon ready for baptism, and we
+     are trying to do all we can to get them fully established in the
+     deep truth of the Bible, a full and complete salvation, pardon
+     cleansing, and the filling of the Holy Ghost. Some have taken a
+     very bold stand for God, and are now preparing themselves for the
+     Lord's work. Our desire and prayer is that we get a band of really
+     consecrated, sanctified, Spirit-filled ones, who are willing to
+     suffer the loss of all things for Jesus, and be made a living power
+     to go out among their own people and help win them for Jesus.
+
+     Dear reader, will you pray with us for all these who are yet without
+     the True Light, that they will soon have the privilege of hearing the
+     glad news which is to all and for all? We have very good meetings in
+     the large hospitals, where are many afflicted and dying. This is a
+     good opportunity to give them the Word of God.
+
+                                               Isaac and Alice Lehman.
+
+[Illustration: Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg.]
+
+Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Eyster have also been laboring in Johannesburg and
+have been valiant and consecrated messengers of the Cross. For several
+years they had charge of the Training School for Native Evangelists near
+Johannesburg, in connection with the Compound's Mission under Mr. A. W.
+Baker. They have always been members of the Brethren's Church and
+several years ago concluded to sever their connection with the other
+mission and also labor in connection with our Mission Board. They
+secured a good opening at Boxburg, and with much self-sacrificing labor
+built house and church and opened an encouraging work. Souls were saved
+and some added to the Church. Then the labor troubles in Johannesburg
+caused the mines in the vicinity to close down and the work was checked.
+We trust, however, that it is only a temporary check and that the work
+may move on under the blessing of God.
+
+Nothing has yet been written about the last station opened, and this
+would be incomplete without reference being made to it. I refer to the
+one at Mandamabge, near Selukwe, Southern Rhodesia. Mr. and Mrs. Levi
+Doner had been stationed for several years at Mapani Mission and had
+done most excellent work there in the Master's cause. They, however,
+thought that that station was near enough to Matopo and Mtyabezi
+Missions and it could be left in charge of the native teacher,
+Nyamazana, so that they might be free to open another work in new
+territory. For this purpose Brother Doner, accompanied by Brother Frey,
+made an extensive tour among the natives, and he finally decided to
+locate at the above-named place, over 200 miles by wagon road from
+Matopo Mission.
+
+In the latter part of August, 1911, Brother and Sister Doner, together
+with Brother Steckley and Sister Book, started for this place, and
+opened a work with every prospect of success. There were many natives
+surrounding them, who at once showed an interest in the work. They were
+there only about two months, however, before Brother Doner became sick
+and was called to lay down his life in the undertaking. From the time he
+had set foot on African soil, over ten years before, he had entered
+heart and soul into the work of the Lord and had labored continually
+with the exception of over a year's furlough in America. No labor was
+too arduous, no distance too great, no hardship feared, if thereby he
+might carry the Gospel to the people. Many long journeys he made by
+foot, by bicycle, by wagon, in exploring the country and in preaching
+the Gospel. Perhaps he was overzealous in the work at times, and if he
+had spared his strength more he might be still with us. Who knows? He
+gave the Gospel to many natives and helped many into the light. He
+certainly laid down his life in behalf of the Africans. While his body
+rests out in the wilds, far from other white people, we believe he is
+already enjoying some of the fruit of his labors.
+
+Sister Sallie Doner, his wife, was obliged at that time to return to
+America on furlough. On account of some difficulty arising in reference
+to the location of the mission, it was finally decided to abandon the
+place. Sister Doner and Brother Steckley are now ably laboring in the
+interests of the work at Macha, and Sister Book at Mtyabezi.
+
+There are now in connection with the African work twenty-one white
+missionaries, including those who are home on furlough, and thirty
+native teachers and evangelists. There have been over 300 natives
+baptized, and there are more than that number in the Inquirers' Classes.
+As the various out-schools are just being properly launched, the work
+may be expected to bear fruitage in geometrical ratio. Take for instance
+last year, 1913; there were 109 additions to the Church at the various
+missions. These figures are not large, and they indicate only a small
+proportion of the work really accomplished by the missionaries. As
+Brother Steigerwald says: "Now that the leaven has been put into the
+meal no one can stop it from expanding." Praise God for that!
+
+We desire to express our appreciation of the English Government in
+aiding mission work and in making it possible for missionaries to labor
+unmolested in their colonies; also in suppressing many customs harmful
+to the natives, and which hinder the progress of the work. We rejoice
+also to know that the government, as well as the better class of the
+general public, as they become more familiar with the work and aims of
+the missionary are realizing the benefit to the country and are showing
+their appreciation of the same.
+
+The Church has come up nobly to the help of the Lord's work, both by
+their prayers and means, so that all have been generously supported and
+all the stations of white workers have good, substantial brick houses
+and churches, and the workers have been well cared for. May the Lord
+abundantly reward the donors and the Foreign Mission Board, who have
+given the work their undivided support.
+
+We rejoice that a beginning has been made, but it is only a beginning.
+Only a very small portion of the great continent of Africa is covered by
+these pages, and that only imperfectly covered. The Lord has
+condescended to bless the work ever since its inception. It has never
+gone by leaps and bounds, but what was done has been solid and we hope
+lasting. We rejoice that we have been permitted to see natives emerge
+from the dense darkness of heathendom--how dark that is none but those
+who have lived among them can realize--and become beacon lights in
+their neighborhood, living witnesses of the truth that the Gospel of
+Christ "is the power of God unto salvation to every one that believeth,"
+to the pagan African as well as to the enlightened European or American.
+
+Many a time people have said to me, "The people in Africa are more eager
+to become Christians than those in America, are they not?" It seems to
+me that there is little difference in the people; if there is any
+difference in the results it is because of the difference in the methods
+employed. The missionary, as he goes to his field of labor, is after
+souls. That is his business; it is not a side issue. It is his business
+and he makes a business of it and uses business methods. He must begin
+at the bottom and learn to know his people and enter as far as he is
+able into their surroundings and their lives. He makes a study of them.
+He knows from experience that the salvation of these precious ones has
+meant much travail of soul and deaths oft. He knows that some one has
+"filled up that which is behind of the afflictions of Christ," in behalf
+of this part of the body of Christ. He knows they have been followed
+with anxious, solicitous eyes from the very first when they were infants
+in Christ, puny perhaps, and his heart was made glad, but with exceeding
+trembling lest the many pitfalls should entrap them before their eyes
+were really open to see or understand the danger. He knows some one has
+shed many bitter tears over the stumbling of some of these babies. He
+may now rejoice to see some grown to manhood, as it were, in Christ and
+being divinely used of Him in saving others.
+
+[Illustration: Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family and Some of Our
+Workers, Members and Enquirers. Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 Are
+Satisfactorily Engaged in Work and in Preparation for the Work as
+Evangelists.]
+
+The true missionary keeps at it. It is his central thought day after day
+as he teaches these dirty, careless ones about him to become cleanly and
+do their work properly, how he can lead them on to desire a clean life
+and seek for it. His last thought and prayer at night, as he lays his
+head on the pillow, is for guidance as to how to win these precious
+souls, and sometimes he is led, like his Master, to spend much of the
+night in prayer.
+
+Some people, looking on from a distance, think there is a great deal of
+romance connected with mission work; that it is full of striking
+incidents and delightful adventures, and that it is a grand opportunity
+to see something of the world. On my first furlough home, ten years ago,
+a little niece gave a glowing account of a friend of her mother, and of
+the countries that friend had visited. In conclusion the child naively
+added, "She has traveled almost as much as a missionary." This child
+unwittingly voiced the opinion of many a grownup; for to some would-be
+missionaries the prospect of foreign travel occupies a large space in
+their field of vision, but to the genuine missionary foreign travel is
+but incidental to mission life; it is the bridge over which he passes to
+some obscure corner of the earth where he is hid away from the world's
+gaze and surrounded by an entirely different class of people, of strange
+language and uncouth ways, often repulsive to the natural eye and to
+refined tastes. For months he may never see a white face, save those of
+his colleagues. He does not go with the expectation of finding a house
+already made to order and everything else he needs, but he is ready to
+go into the wilds, if needs be, and make a home for himself. He does
+not go just because he is willing to do certain things in the mission
+field; but he is willing and ready to do whatever he finds to do, and to
+go wherever the Lord tells him to go, and to stay as long as the Lord
+bids him stay.
+
+There is, however, a fascination about mission work, as every one who is
+in the field will testify. Furloughs are taken because it is an absolute
+necessity for the missionary to go away for a time from the unhealthy
+climate and from the absorbing labors which sap the very vitality. But,
+when he is in his native land, the missionary feels that he is out of
+his element. He is out of touch with the business and interests which
+seem to engross the heart and soul of every one about him; and he is
+homesick to be back again to his field of labor and to see those dear
+dark faces. He feels that there is only one thing worth living for, and
+that is to lift up Christ among the heathen so that He may draw all men
+unto Himself. He feels that the time is short and that the "King's
+business requires haste," and that our Lord's return is imminent.
+
+Again, as long as a person thinks he is making a _great sacrifice_ in
+leaving home, friends, and his business, and going as the Lord's
+messenger among the benighted of earth, he would better remain at home.
+If he is really God-called, the day will come when he will realize
+something of the inestimable privilege of being His ambassador to
+nations in darkness without any knowledge of the Light of Life. All
+earthly things will be lost sight of and his heart will burn within him
+to lift up Christ among the heathen. He will gladly go through
+anything, that the blessed Gospel may be proclaimed to the ends of the
+earth.
+
+Some one may inquire, "What should I study to prepare me for the mission
+field?" A careful study of these pages will, we think, answer that
+question. But to sum it up we would say, anything, everything you can,
+both in school and out; one never knows until he reaches the field what
+he may meet with. The Bible of course, first, last, and always, and all
+the knowledge with it one can acquire; then too temporal work of various
+kinds, medicine, nursing, hygiene, farming, building, teaching,
+housekeeping, and mission methods. If one has acquired a fair knowledge
+of these and thinks he is well prepared, then let him be humble enough
+to acknowledge that he knows only the A B C's of mission work; and that
+when he has reached his field of labor, the Lord, and perhaps some of
+His messengers already in the field, will help him to put together into
+words the letters he has learned, and he may add to it day by day as the
+occasion may require. If one has this humility and willingness to adapt
+himself to the work, after reaching the field, it will supply much of
+his lack of knowledge along some lines.
+
+My object in writing thus plainly is not to frighten any one of God's
+children from the work of the Lord; but rather to help each one
+carefully to count the cost, and to disabuse anyone's mind of false
+notions of mission work. Judging from the stability and perseverance of
+those already connected with the work, we have reasons to believe that
+all did count the cost; but the work is only begun, and we trust many
+more will come to swell the ranks and push on the work into the darker
+regions.
+
+It has been a little over a century since the first missionaries began
+their work along the coast of South Africa; but it is only within the
+last half century that there has been much visible fruit of the work
+done. Even then the missionary labors have been chiefly along the coast
+of the continent and along the navigable rivers which are the natural
+highways into the interior. Much of Central Africa is still unpossessed.
+In the report of the last Great Missionary Conference it was estimated
+that there are ninety millions of the population of Africa as yet
+untouched by the Gospel. Stupendous figures, indeed, to say nothing of
+the many millions whose knowledge of the Gospel is as yet very
+superficial!
+
+We have already mentioned some of the difficulties in the way of
+reaching the people; the great expanse of country to be traversed, the
+deadliness of the climate, and the high cost of living, which in Africa
+exceeds that of any other country. Again, the many languages and
+dialects, 823 in number, together with the illiteracy of the people, are
+a serious handicap; but with God "all things are possible."
+
+The present generation is beholding wonderful strides in opening the
+vast continent to commerce and civilization, and above all to
+Christianity. Railroads are rapidly being built all over the country,
+uniting the interior with the coast. At the present rate it probably
+will be a matter of only a very few years until Cape Town will be
+connected to Cairo by steam through the center of the continent. This
+central railway is soon to be linked with Benguella, on the west coast,
+which will form a more direct route into the interior. Twenty years ago
+Rhodesia had no railroads; in fact, it can scarcely be said there was a
+Rhodesia; for it was only in its formative period. Now it has 1,466
+miles of railway owned and operated by the government, with an
+additional 204 miles extending to the seaport, Beira, on the east coast.
+These are only a portion of what has been built in the country. North,
+south, east, and west other lines have been built.
+
+[Illustration: Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster.]
+
+When one considers the vast amount of labor required, and the all-but
+insurmountable difficulties to be overcome in railroad building in
+Africa, the work already accomplished is little less than miraculous.
+The Lord raised up men of large hearts as well as large means, to
+finance much of this. All the building material has to be carried long
+distances, and many of the ties and telegraph poles are of iron on
+account of the destructive white ants. The traveler can now take the
+train at Cape Town and travel to the border of Congo State, a distance
+by rail of 2,140 miles, for $75, second class. He can have a comfortable
+compartment, furnished with all modern conveniences, and obtain his
+meals on the train at a very moderate cost. Freight rates are still high
+on account of the immense distance to be traversed and the small amount
+of goods required to supply Central Africa.
+
+The railroads are fast changing conditions, helping to solve the
+question of gaining access to the people, and providing good homes and
+wholesome food for the missionaries. There are, however, many millions
+yet outside the railroad belt who are in need of the Gospel; but even
+these can be reached with much less difficulty than formerly.
+
+The language question too is rapidly being solved, and great praise is
+due the noble army of men and women who have labored long and hard to
+reduce to writing the seemingly meaningless jargon which first greets
+their ears in going among the natives. Many languages have been reduced
+to writing by the missionaries, and the Scriptures have been translated
+into them. Grammars, dictionaries, and textbooks of various kinds have
+been written. This work, together with the various schools and the
+united labors of the missionaries, is aiding in reducing the number of
+languages. There are, however, many tribes which are yet without
+missionaries and without the Gospel in their language, and they are
+waiting for some one to say, "Here am I, send me." This is a task worthy
+of the greatest minds of the age; to reduce to writing an African
+language and to translate into it the Gospel which tells of GOD'S LOVE
+THROUGH JESUS CHRIST, to those downtrodden, hag-ridden, demon-worshiping
+souls.
+
+The time is opportune for spreading the Gospel in Africa; and if every
+child of God were willing to do his part or her part in the work, the
+present generation could see it carried to all tribes.
+
+None of the difficulties in the way are insurmountable. When, the "Great
+Commission" was given it was backed up by the indisputable assertion,
+"ALL POWER IS GIVEN UNTO ME IN HEAVEN AND IN EARTH. GO YE THEREFORE, ...
+LO, I AM WITH YOU ALWAY, EVEN UNTO THE END OF THE WORLD. AMEN."
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+Transcriber's Notes: Punctuation has been normalized. Obvious printer
+errors have been corrected. Both spellings of gray/grey appear.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of South and South Central Africa, by 
+H. Frances Davidson
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37728-8.txt or 37728-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/7/2/37728/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/37728-8.zip b/37728-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f498218
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-8.zip
diff --git a/37728-h.zip b/37728-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9783e8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h.zip
diff --git a/37728-h/37728-h.htm b/37728-h/37728-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68eabca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/37728-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,15786 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of South and South Central Africa, by H. Frances Davidson.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+
+body {
+    margin-left: 10%;
+    margin-right: 10%;
+}
+
+    h1,h2,h3,h4 {
+    text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+    clear: both;
+}
+
+p {
+    margin-top: .75em;
+    text-align: justify;
+    margin-bottom: .75em;
+}
+
+hr {
+    margin: 3em auto 3em auto;
+    height: 0px;
+    border-width: 1px 0 0 0;
+    border-style: solid;
+    border-color: #dcdcdc;
+    width: 500px;
+    clear: both;
+}
+
+hr.hr2 {
+    width: 250px;
+    margin: 3em auto 3em auto;
+}
+
+table {
+    margin-left: auto;
+    margin-right: auto;
+}
+   .toc {
+    margin: 0 25% auto 25%;
+    padding: 0;
+}
+
+   p.toc {
+    font-size: 60%;
+    margin-bottom: 0;
+    padding-bottom: 0;
+}
+   .toc li {
+    list-style-type: none;
+}
+   .toc li p {
+    margin-top: 0;
+    padding-top: 0;
+    text-indent: -1em;
+    text-align: justify; padding-right: 2em;
+}
+   .toc .num {
+    position: absolute;
+    right: 25%;
+    top: auto;
+    text-indent: 0;
+}
+  .tocdesc {
+    padding-right: 2.2em;
+}
+
+    .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+        /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+        position: absolute;
+        left: 92%;
+        font-size: smaller;
+        text-align: right;
+        color: #999;
+} /* page numbers */
+
+    .blockquot {
+        margin-left: 5%;
+        margin-right: 10%;
+}
+    .chapdesc p {
+        margin: auto 20%;
+        text-align: center;
+}
+
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold;}
+
+    .gap { margin-top: 1em; }
+
+/* Images */
+    .figcenter {
+        margin: auto;
+        text-align: center;
+}
+
+    .bord img {
+        padding: 1px;
+        border: 2px solid black;
+}
+
+p.caption {
+    margin-top: 0;
+    font-size: 70%;
+    text-align: left;
+}
+
+p.caption2 {
+    margin-top: 0;
+    font-size: 70%;
+    text-align: center;
+}
+
+/* Transcriber Notes */
+div.tn {
+    background-color: #EEE;
+    border: dashed 1px;
+    color: #000;
+    margin-left: 20%;
+    margin-right: 20%;
+    margin-top: 5em;
+    margin-bottom: 5em;
+    padding: 1em;
+}
+
+
+/* Poetry */
+    .poem {
+        margin-left: 10%;
+        margin-right: 10%;
+        text-align: left;
+}
+
+    .poem br { display: none; }
+
+    .poem .stanza { margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em; }
+
+    .poem span.i0 {
+        display: block;
+        margin-left: 0em;
+        padding-left: 3em;
+        text-indent: -3em;
+}
+
+    .poem span.i2 {
+        display: block;
+        margin-left: 2em;
+        padding-left: 3em;
+        text-indent: -3em;
+}
+
+    .poem span.i4 {
+        display: block;
+        margin-left: 4em;
+        padding-left: 3em;
+        text-indent: -3em;
+}
+
+    .signature {
+        text-align: right;
+        margin-right: 5%;
+}
+
+    .signature2 {
+        text-align: right;
+        margin-right: 15%;
+}
+
+   .hanging {
+        margin-left: 2em;
+        text-indent: -2em;
+}
+
+li.pad { padding-top: 2.0%; }
+
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+Project Gutenberg's South and South Central Africa, by H. Frances Davidson
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: South and South Central Africa
+       A record of fifteen years' missionary labors among primitive peoples
+
+Author: H. Frances Davidson
+
+Release Date: October 11, 2011 [EBook #37728]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+<p>
+<a name="Frontispiece" id="Frontispiece"></a>
+<span class="pagenum"></span></p>
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 352px;">
+<img src="images/frontis.png" width="352" height="600" alt="H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle." title="H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle." />
+<span class="caption">H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle.</span>
+</div><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h1>SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA</h1>
+
+<div class='center'>A RECORD OF FIFTEEN YEARS'<br />
+MISSIONARY LABORS AMONG<br />
+PRIMITIVE PEOPLES</div>
+
+
+<h3>BY</h3>
+<h2>H. FRANCES DAVIDSON</h2>
+
+
+<div class='center'>(WITH PHOTOGRAPHS BY THE MISSIONARIES)<br />
+<br />
+<br />
+<small>PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR BY</small><br />
+BRETHREN PUBLISHING HOUSE<br />
+ELGIN, ILL.<br />
+1915</div>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class='center'>
+Copyrighted by<br />
+H. FRANCES DAVIDSON<br />
+1915<br />
+<br />
+<hr style="width: 45%;" /><br />
+<br />
+Books may be obtained through<br />
+<br />
+H. R. DAVIDSON<br />
+<span class="smcap">Auburn, Ind.</span><br />
+Route 3<br />
+<br />
+or<br />
+<br />
+M. L. HOFFMAN<br />
+<span class="smcap">Abilene, Kans.</span><br /></div>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<div class='center'><br /><br />
+DEDICATED<br />
+TO<br />
+MY FATHER'S LIFELONG FRIEND<br />
+DR. W. O. BAKER<br />
+And to All Others, Who, Like Him, Are Deeply<br />
+Interested in the Evangelization of the<br />
+Dark Continent<br /></div>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span></p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h2>INTRODUCTION</h2>
+
+
+<p>With utmost confidence and pleasure, I give an
+introductory expression for this intelligible, authentic,
+and most valuable little volume, the product of
+great sacrifice and long experience, by one who was
+favored and honored with lucrative educational positions,
+being a classic.</p>
+
+<p>I have been acquainted with the authoress for
+many years, and am a member of the Foreign Missionary
+Board under whose auspices she has most
+effectually labored during an unbroken period of
+one and one-half decades; therefore I speak with
+great assurance of the merits and hope of her book,
+destined to be prolific and incentive to active missionary
+operations in foreign lands.</p>
+
+<p>The photo-engravings have special interest, having
+been taken from real life and nature as she
+found them in dark Africa&mdash;places, people, environments,
+customs, habits, and religion, which she saw
+with her own eyes and mind. Having thoroughly
+mastered various dialects of tribes among whom
+she has labored so many years, having gathered
+many historical facts relative to uncivilized races,
+and also having special tact, instinct and God-given
+ability through the gift of the Spirit, making her
+very efficient in her call to these dusky tribes, she is
+qualified in a very proficient sense to compile the
+story of this strange people.</p>
+
+<p>On meeting Sister H. Frances Davidson, one is
+quickly impressed with her modest and unassuming
+disposition, the rare gift that characterizes all
+the truly noble and great.</p>
+
+<p>Her heroism and unfaltering faith in Jehovah is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span>
+most remarkably demonstrated in her adventure&mdash;accompanied
+by Sister Adda Engle (Taylor) and a
+native boy&mdash;into the wilds of Central Africa, unfrequented
+by the tread or touch of any Gospel missioner,
+among a class of raw natives that were very
+shy, rather hostile, and of another tongue, and a
+country infested with wild, vicious animals.</p>
+
+<p>When the planning of this adventurous trip was
+heard by the Foreign Missionary Board, steps were
+taken to discourage it, on the ground that no white
+man was available to accompany them to the new
+prospective mission field; but before the Board's
+protest could be made effective, the dangerous journey
+was heroically and successfully executed and a
+new mission station planted north of the great Zambezi,
+which is the northern boundary of South
+Africa.</p>
+
+<p>Such an adventure would almost challenge the
+courage of the bravest man. It must have been the
+leadings of the Lord&mdash;the inspiration of the Holy
+Spirit.</p>
+
+<p>We all love to read the truthful words that drop
+from the pen of such fearless, devoted, and consecrated
+souls.</p>
+
+<p>The book is written in a clear, graphic, and condensed
+manner, just the thing for this busy, rushing
+generation.</p>
+
+<p>We bespeak for it a precious harvest of lasting
+fruitage.</p>
+
+<p>Yours in the hope of the Gospel,</p>
+
+<div class="signature2">J. R. ZOOK,<br />
+<br />
+Chairman of the Missionary Board<br />
+of the Brethren in Christ's Church.<br />
+</div>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>PREFACE</h2>
+
+
+<p>Africa holds a unique place in the world today.
+In no other continent is there such a world-wide
+interest and such a variety of interests centered;
+the religious, the political, and the commercial
+world are alike concerned in its development and
+progress. It has been a sealed book for so many
+centuries that the majority of people have excused
+themselves on that score for their ignorance of its
+conditions and their indifference as to its welfare;
+but the day of pardonable ignorance is past.</p>
+
+<p>While kings and emperors have been eagerly
+seeking to obtain as large a slice of its territory as
+possible, and moneyed men have been unearthing
+some of its vast wealth, missionaries, too, have been
+having a share in it. In the development of Africa
+they may, without boasting, claim to be making the
+most permanent contribution to its welfare, but
+even their work is only begun. The various interests,
+which for a long time were concerned with
+only the countries along the coast, have now penetrated
+and opened up that vast interior to civilization
+and missionary enterprise; and it remains for
+the Christians to say whether it shall be left to the
+influences of a corrupt civilization or whether they
+will shoulder their responsibilities and rise to their
+privileges in taking the country for God.</p>
+
+<p>Many missionary bodies are already at work, and
+much is being accomplished; but the continent is
+so gigantic, the distances to be traversed so immense
+that it will require the united efforts of all God's
+children to pay the debt humanity owes to this
+long-neglected continent and those downtrodden
+pagans.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It has been my aim in these pages to give, without
+embellishment, some idea of the nature of the
+Africans, their character, customs, religion, and surroundings,
+as well as some of the difficulties, methods,
+encouragements, and discouragements of missionary
+work among them. Missionaries are often
+censured for being too optimistic, for giving only
+the bright side of their work, therefore I have studiously
+sought to avoid this attitude and to give
+an unvarnished account of missionary enterprise.
+Judging from my own convictions and beliefs in
+reference to the work, it seems to me that if I have
+erred in this respect, it has been by understating
+rather than overstating the value and encouraging
+results arising from such labors.</p>
+
+<p>This book does not claim to be a complete history
+of the Brethren in Christ's Missions in Africa,
+but rather some of the experiences of one member
+of that mission body. Since, however, it has been
+my privilege to be with the work from its inception,
+the enclosed narrative will have the added value of
+giving at least something of the beginning and early
+history of the mission. My only apology for recounting
+so much of my personal experience and
+impressions in the work is that I am unable to
+give, properly, the experience and viewpoint of
+anyone else.</p>
+
+<p>We desire to express our thanks to Mrs. Myron
+Taylor, formerly Miss Adda Engle, for the majority
+of the photographs with which this work is illustrated;
+also to Elder Steigerwald and the other missionaries
+who have furnished a number of them.
+We had hoped to have some later ones from Matopo<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span>
+and Mtshabezi Missions, but have failed in securing
+good ones.</p>
+
+<p>If this little volume in some small degree arouses
+a greater interest among Christians in the evangelization
+of the Dark Continent, and is a means in
+God's hands of getting the light to a few more of
+the vast millions of pagan Africans, I shall feel
+more than repaid for sending it on its mission.</p>
+
+<div class="signature">H. FRANCES DAVIDSON.</div>
+
+<p>Auburn, Ind.<br /></p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span></p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>CONTENTS</h2>
+
+
+<h3>PART I</h3>
+<h4>Matopo Mission</h4>
+
+<div class="nomarg">
+<p class="toc"></p>
+<ol class="toc">
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Early Missionary Labors&mdash;Origin of Foreign Missionary
+Work, 1894&mdash;After Two Years&mdash;An Appeal&mdash;My
+Call&mdash;First Missionaries&mdash;Preparing to Sail,<br />
+1897,      19
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+On the Deep&mdash;England&mdash;Bound for Cape Town&mdash;Matabeleland
+Chosen&mdash;Landing at Cape Town,      29
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Cape Town&mdash;Elder Engle's Interview with Mr. Rhodes&mdash;Zulu
+Language&mdash;Mrs. Lewis' Kindness&mdash;Journey
+to Bulawayo,    38
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Matabeleland&mdash;Wars with the Natives&mdash;Hide in the
+Matopo Hills&mdash;Bulawayo&mdash;Selection of a Mission
+Site,      45
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Trekking to the Hills, 1898&mdash;Chief and His People&mdash;First
+View of the Mission Site&mdash;Building Huts&mdash;Misunderstandings
+with the Natives&mdash;Missionaries
+Working,      53
+</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Opening of School&mdash;Its Equipments and Work&mdash;Sunday
+Services&mdash;Learning the Language&mdash;Kraal-visiting&mdash;
+Matshuba&mdash;Sunday-school,      66
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Reinforcements and Supplies&mdash;Mr. and Mrs. Cress, Mr.<br />
+I. O. Lehman, 1899&mdash;Clothing for the People&mdash;Building&mdash;Old
+Queen&mdash;First Baptisms&mdash;Boer War,      83
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+The Cresses Open Mission Station&mdash;Sickness and Death
+of Sister Cress and Elder Engle, 1900&mdash;Sickness
+and Seventh Day Adventist Doctor&mdash;Wedding&mdash;Brother
+Cress and Sister Engle Return to America, 1900,      96
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Resuming the Work&mdash;Boys' Confession&mdash;Hluganisa and
+School&mdash;Kraal-visiting&mdash;Locusts&mdash;Ndhlalambi&mdash;Sickness
+of the Lehmans&mdash;Trouble in Reference to
+Mission Farm,      107
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Mr. L. Doner and Miss Emma Long Arrive, 1901&mdash;The
+Lehmans Go to Cape Town&mdash;Industrial Work&mdash;Elder
+and Mrs. Steigerwald Arrive, 1901&mdash;Building
+House on a Mission Station&mdash;Training Natives&mdash;School
+Work,      126
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Death of Mr. Rhodes, 1903&mdash;Of Fusi&mdash;Furlough and
+South Africa&mdash;The Compound's Missions&mdash;Native
+Bee&mdash;Appearance of Congregation,      140
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+First View of Mapani Land&mdash;Medical Work&mdash;Reminded
+of Call to Interior&mdash;Return to America, 1904&mdash;Miss
+Sallie Kreider, 1904&mdash;Opening of Mapani Mission
+and Sister Doner's Death, 1904&mdash;Return to
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span>
+Africa with Mr. and Mrs. Frey and Misses Adda
+Engle and Abbie Bert, 1905&mdash;Mtshabezi Mission,
+1906,      155
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Religion of Matabele&mdash;Ideas of God&mdash;Umlimo Oracle&mdash;Rainmaker&mdash;Witchcraft&mdash;Transmigration
+of Souls&mdash;Spiritualism,      173
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Customs&mdash;Putting Children to Death&mdash;Betrothal and
+Marriage&mdash;Native Kraal&mdash;Polygamy&mdash;Food and
+Beer&mdash;King Khama&mdash;Visits&mdash;Generosity and Politeness&mdash;
+Death and Burial&mdash;Grave of King Mzilikazi,      191
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Visit to Matopo, 1910&mdash;Improvements&mdash;Brother and
+Sister Doner&mdash;Mapani&mdash;Mtshabezi&mdash;Visit in 1913&mdash;
+Bulawayo and Vicinity&mdash;Changes at Matopo&mdash;Aiding
+the People&mdash;Love Feast at Mtshabezi&mdash;What
+Hath God Wrought?      212
+</span></p></li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+
+<h3>PART II</h3>
+<h4>Macha Mission</h4>
+
+
+<div class="nomarg">
+<p class="toc"></p>
+<ol class="toc">
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IPART2">CHAPTER I.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Early Missionary Labors&mdash;Railroad Building&mdash;Starting
+for the Zambezi, 1906&mdash;Victoria Falls&mdash;David
+Livingstone&mdash;Barotseland and Other Missions,      237
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IIPART2">CHAPTER II.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Preparing to Advance&mdash;Broken Wagon&mdash;Journey to
+Kalomo&mdash;Interviewing Officials&mdash;Difficulties in the
+Way&mdash;Permission to Proceed&mdash;Macha,      252
+</span></p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IIIPART2">CHAPTER III.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Why Selected&mdash;Living on the Veldt&mdash;First Huts&mdash;Spiritual
+Duties&mdash;Learning an Unwritten Language&mdash;First
+Christmas,      263
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IVPART2">CHAPTER IV.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Trying to Begin School&mdash;Chief Brings His Son&mdash;Industrial
+Work&mdash;School Books&mdash;Wild Animals&mdash;Threatened
+Uprising&mdash;Mr. M. Taylor Arrives, 1907&mdash;White
+Ants&mdash;Visit to Nanzela,      277
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VPART2">CHAPTER V.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger Arrive, 1908&mdash;Need of
+Good Houses&mdash;Making Brick&mdash;Tsetse Fly&mdash;Brother
+Taylor's Encounter with Lions,      295
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VIPART2">CHAPTER VI.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+School Work&mdash;English&mdash;Evangelistic Work&mdash;Brother
+Taylor Among the Baila&mdash;Building a House&mdash;Elder
+Steigerwald and Brother Doner Go North&mdash;Visit
+of Elders J. N. Engle and J. Sheets&mdash;Marriage&mdash;First
+Baptism,      306
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VIIPART2">CHAPTER VII.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Furlough&mdash;Encounter with Elephant&mdash;Misses E. Engle
+and Mary Heisey Visit Macha&mdash;Preparing the New
+Testament&mdash;Out-schools&mdash;Murder of Chief&mdash;Taylors
+or Furlough&mdash;Death of Semani,      323
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_VIIIPART2">CHAPTER VIII.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Baby Ruth&mdash;Building Church&mdash;Training Natives&mdash;The
+Year's Work&mdash;Brother Taylor Itinerating&mdash;Elder
+Steigerwald's Visit,      343
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_IXPART2">CHAPTER IX.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+New Books&mdash;Native Problems&mdash;Studying the Native
+Character&mdash;Child Life&mdash;Natives Resourceful&mdash;Dark
+Side of Native Character,      355
+</span></p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XPART2">CHAPTER X.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Are They Lazy?&mdash;Three Natives&mdash;Home Training&mdash;Charlie&mdash;Are
+They Provident?&mdash;Naturalists&mdash;Attitude
+Toward Whites&mdash;Generosity of Some&mdash;Kraal-visiting,      372
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIPART2">CHAPTER XI.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Ideas of God&mdash;Native Prophetesses&mdash;Rainmakers&mdash;Death
+and Burial&mdash;Digging a Grave&mdash;Sacrifice of
+Animals&mdash;Beer-wailings&mdash;Evil Spirits,      387
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIIPART2">CHAPTER XII.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Tribal Mark&mdash;Decorating the Body&mdash;Kinship&mdash;Betrothal
+and Marriage&mdash;The Bride&mdash;Hindrances to Mission
+Work&mdash;Compared to the Matabele&mdash;Salutations,      402
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIIIPART2">CHAPTER XIII.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Ruth's Sickness&mdash;Medical Work&mdash;A Visit Among the
+People&mdash;Remember the Aged&mdash;David Goes to School&mdash;
+Taylors Go to America, 1913&mdash;Wenger's Return&mdash;
+Outpouring of the Spirit&mdash;Miss E. Engle and Mr.
+L. B. Steckley Come to Macha&mdash;First Women Baptized,      418
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XIVPART2">CHAPTER XIV.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Two Objects Paramount&mdash;Need of Native Evangelists&mdash;Visit
+to Out-schools&mdash;Mianda&mdash;Impongo&mdash;Kabanzi&mdash;Kabwe&mdash;Myeki&mdash;Chilumbwe,      440
+</span></p></li>
+
+<li><h3><a href="#CHAPTER_XVPART2">CHAPTER XV.</a></h3>
+<p><span class="tocdesc">
+Lehmans' Work&mdash;Eysters' Work&mdash;Doners Open New
+Station&mdash;Present Status&mdash;Are the People Eager to
+Hear?&mdash;What It Means to Be a Missionary&mdash;Qualifications&mdash;
+Difficulties&mdash; God Is Able,      466
+</span></p></li>
+</ol>
+</div>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+
+<h2>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h2>
+
+
+
+<div class="center">
+<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tr><td align="left">H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle,</td><td align='left' colspan='2'><a href="#Frontispiece">Frontispiece</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise at Matopo,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_57">58</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Matopo Mission, March, 1899,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse Engle,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_87">87</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_91">91</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_99">99</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Matopo Cemetery,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_103">103</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Matopo Mission House. Front View,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_131">131</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">"Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes,"</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_149">149</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder Steigerwald in 1905,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_159">159</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill Beyond,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_161">161</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">In the Matopo Hills,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_163">163</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Mapani Mission, 1907,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_168">168</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church. Matopo M. Hospital,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_170">170</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_171">171</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Matabele Kraal, Near Matopo Mission,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_196">196</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Matabele Women Stamping Grain,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_201">201</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Matabele Women Digging,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_207">207</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Building the Boys' House at Matopo, M. S.,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_215">215</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Boys' Brick House at Matopo Mission,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_215">215</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">A Native Christian's Home. Matshuba's,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_217">217</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Mtshabezi Church and School,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_221">221</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Mtshabezi Mission in 1910,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_221">221</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Mtshabezi. Baptismal Scene,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_224">224</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Girls at Mtshabezi Mission,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_230">230</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Victoria Falls Bridge,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_241">241</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Main View of Victoria Falls, 1&frac14; Miles Wide,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_246">246</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Macha Mission Huts, 1907,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_281">281</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Macha Boys and Schoolhouse,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_287">287</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">The Last Invitation,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_291">291</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Making Brick at Macha,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_302">302</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_302">302</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Macha Mission Dwelling House,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_307">307</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Elder Steigerwald and Mr. Doner on Their Trip North of Macha,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_313">313</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_315">315</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Batonga Chiefs and Headmen,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_317">317</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native Congregation Not Visible,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_319">319</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Wedding Dinner at Macha,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_320">320</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">The Elephant That Derailed the Train,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_325">325</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_327">327</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_330">330</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Simeoba's Village, Viewing the Strangers,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_334">334</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the Matopo Hills,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_337">337</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">The Bottle Palm,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_340">340</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Macha Mission Church and Boys' House,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_347">347</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the Midst,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_351">351</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Little Nurses. Mianda Village,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_359">359</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Batonga Fisher Women,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_364">364</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_404">404</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Cattle Pen of the Batonga,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_406">406</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">A Batonga Family Traveling,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_408">408</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Native Women&mdash;Widows,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_410">410</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_412">412</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Giving the Gospel in Macha Village,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_414">414</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Macha Mission, 1913,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_419">419</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Ruth Taylor,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_423">423</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">First Christian Marriages at Macha,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_426">426</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">David Moyo and His Wife and Child,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_429">429</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit to Macha,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_431">431</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_435">435</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">School at Kabanzi Village,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_446">446</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Sikaluwa,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_456">456</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_469">469</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_474">474</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align="left">Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster,</td><td align="right"><a href="#Page_479">479</a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>PART ONE</h2>
+
+<h3>MATOPO MISSION</h3>
+<div class='center'>"Go ye therefore and teach all nations"</div>
+
+<div class="signature2">&mdash;Matt. 28: 19</div>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span></p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2>SOUTH AND SOUTH<br />
+CENTRAL AFRICA</h2>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER ONE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>The Beginning of Missionary Effort</h3>
+
+
+<p>It was at the General Conference held in May,
+1894, that the Foreign Missionary Work of the
+Church of the Brethren in Christ originated.</p>
+
+<p>Previous to that time the old fathers of the church
+had made many missionary journeys through the
+United States and Canada for the advancement of
+Christ's Kingdom and in the interests of the faith
+they so dearly loved. These journeys were made
+without remuneration and often with great discomfort
+and sacrifice of time and money. The
+precept that the Gospel was free, "without money
+and without price," seemed so instilled into their
+hearts that some of them, no doubt, would have felt
+pained for people to think that they expected money
+for their services. So while the laity were busy
+with their own temporal duties, these heralds of the
+Cross would often leave their little farms in care
+of their wives and of help, hired at their own expense,
+and devote weeks and months to evangelistic
+work, expecting what? Nothing but their food and
+sometimes sufficient to pay their car fare, if they
+went by train. But it often happened in those
+early days that the entire expense of whatever sort<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span>
+was borne by themselves. They looked for no
+reward on earth save the consciousness that they
+were about their Master's business and seeking to
+extend His Kingdom on earth.</p>
+
+<p>Much honor is due those old soldiers for their
+self-sacrificing labors. In that Great Day when the
+books are opened, perhaps the record of their labors
+may astonish some of us who sometimes criticise
+them for their slowness in launching the foreign
+missionary work of the Church.</p>
+
+<p>Among them were some who were greatly burdened
+for the heathen. Some felt this lack of
+Church activity so keenly that they almost severed
+their connections with it on this account. Others
+saw the need, but, realizing the smallness of membership
+and the limited resources, thought the
+Church was too weak to launch out into foreign
+missionary enterprise.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime individual members were agitating
+the question, and some were planning to go
+independently to India and to Central America,
+while others were contemplating going under other
+Mission Boards.</p>
+
+<p>While this agitation was going on, the question
+of foreign mission work was brought forward at the
+General Conference in May, 1894, held in the Bethel
+Church, Kansas. On Friday, the last day of the
+Conference, a paper on the subject was read by
+Mrs. Rhoda Lee, but no active steps were taken
+and the question was tabled indefinitely, to the
+great disappointment of some present. Later, on
+the same day, Elder J. E. Stauffer arose, and, placing
+a five-dollar bill on the table, stated that it was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span>
+for foreign mission work, then sat down. This
+action brought matters to a crisis. Here was missionary
+money and something must be done with it.</p>
+
+<p>After consultation it was decided that the donor
+be appointed Foreign Missionary Treasurer, and any
+desiring to donate should give their offerings to
+him; and that, as soon as sufficient money was in
+the treasury to justify the measure, active steps
+would be taken toward sending out missionaries.
+By the close of the day thirty-five dollars had been
+placed in the hands of the Treasurer. The funds increased
+slowly but steadily.</p>
+
+<p>At the Conference of 1895 held in Ontario, "A
+Foreign Mission Board, consisting of Brethren Peter
+Steckly, B. T. Hoover, and J. E. Stauffer, was
+appointed to hold office for five years, subject, however,
+to the advice and control of General Council."
+At the next meeting of Conference in 1896 in Pennsylvania,
+"The Treasurer of the Foreign Mission
+Fund, J. E. Stauffer, submitted his report, and he
+was congratulated for his successful effort. The
+amount in the treasury is $419.60." This amount
+had been donated in two years. These data have
+been given that it may be seen how the work has
+grown.</p>
+
+<p>At this meeting it was decided that the funds
+had increased sufficiently to take an advanced step.
+The Board was increased to twelve members with
+an operating board of three. Of this Elder Samuel
+Zook was appointed treasurer, Elder Henry Davidson,
+chairman, and Elder Jesse Engle, secretary.
+The Board was empowered to secure volunteers for
+starting a work among the heathen in some foreign<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span>
+country, no particular country being designated.</p>
+
+<p>Of the General Board of twelve members, Brethren
+Peter Steckley, J. R. Zook, and Peter Climenhage
+are still on the Board after a lapse of eighteen
+years.</p>
+
+<p>Just what was done in the interim I cannot say,
+but on January 15, 1897, there appeared in the
+<i>Evangelical Visitor</i> the following:</p>
+
+<h4>AN APPEAL</h4>
+<blockquote>
+<p>We would call attention to the fact that the committee
+appointed at last Conference is ready to act on the foreign
+mission work, but up to this time they have received
+no applications. Why is it? Does the Lord not speak to
+some hearts? Or is it because the Church is not praying
+the Lord of the harvest to send laborers into His harvest?</p>
+
+<p>The field is white. The harvest is ready. Who will go
+forth in the name of the Master, filled with the Holy
+Ghost, ready to lay his or her life down for the cause of
+Christ's salvation to the heathen? It means something
+to be a foreign missionary. It means a full sacrifice of
+home, friends and self&mdash;a perfect cutting loose. But,
+praise the Lord! when it is done for Christ's sake and the
+Gospel's, we shall receive an hundredfold in this life and
+eternal life in the world to come.</p>
+
+<p>The Lord has provided money&mdash;somebody was willing
+to give it, but who will give himself? I believe the Lord
+has spoken to your heart. Just say, "Lord, speak, thy
+servant heareth." And if the Lord tells you to go, don't
+do as Jonah&mdash;try to get away from the Lord&mdash;for as
+Jonah did not fare well, neither will you. But if you obey
+God, He will go with you into the ship. We are ready
+and waiting to receive applications, but somebody must
+be willing to obey God or the work will be delayed
+while souls are perishing.</p>
+
+<p>If the Lord lays it upon your heart to give because you
+can not go yourself, please send your donations to Elder<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span>
+Jesse Engle, Donegal, Kansas, as he is the committee's
+secretary and will keep a correct account of all money
+received and hand it over to the treasurer. The committee
+has not decided yet where the field shall be, but will
+decide when such workers present themselves as are believed
+to be called of God. South Africa has been spoken
+of; also South or Central America. No doubt God
+will direct when the time comes that somebody is willing
+to go. Who shall it be?</p>
+
+<div class="signature">SAMUEL ZOOK.</div></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>At that time I was teaching in McPherson College,
+Kansas, and was greatly enjoying the work.
+It was my seventh year at that place, and just the
+day before the article had appeared I had entered
+into a verbal agreement with the other members of
+the faculty to remain for some years, the Lord willing.
+No thought of the foreign field had entered
+my mind previous to this, except a readiness for
+whatever the Lord had for me to do. Up to that
+time I verily thought I was doing His will by being
+in the classroom.</p>
+
+<p>The day that "The Appeal" appeared in the
+<i>Visitor</i>, it was read like the other matter and nothing
+further was thought of it; but the day following
+the Lord came to me, as it were, in the midst of
+the class work, in the midst of other plans for the
+future, and swept away my books, reserving only
+the Bible. In reality He showed me Christ lifted
+up for a lost world. He filled me with an unutterable
+love for every soul who had not heard of Him,
+and with a passionate longing to go to worst parts
+of the earth, away from civilization, away from
+other mission bodies, and spend the rest of my life
+in telling the story of the Cross.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>We prefer not to dwell too minutely on the feelings
+of that sacred hour. Sufficient to say that there
+and then He anointed me for service among the
+heathen. Not that I have measured up to all that
+He placed before me on that day. On the contrary
+I have fallen far short; but the consciousness
+of that call has ever been with me, and has strengthened
+and kept me, in the thickest of the fight in
+heathen lands. Even when the battle was sore and
+defeat stared me in the face, the conviction that it
+was His appointment and His work for me kept me
+fast.</p>
+
+<p>My first step was to go to my colleagues and ask
+to be released from the agreement into which I
+had entered with them. They were as much surprised
+at the turn affairs had taken as I had been,
+but readily agreed not to stand in the way of the
+Lord's call. A letter was then sent to the Mission
+Board, informing them of the call to service and my
+readiness to go and at once if they deemed it advisable
+to send me.</p>
+
+<p>Much had been said about missionary work and
+many had seemed eager to go, so that I somewhat
+tremblingly awaited the result, feeling that they
+might not consider me fitted. At the same time a
+private letter was dispatched to my father, who was
+Chairman of the Board, telling him of my convictions
+and call. A letter came first from dear father.
+He had been quite unprepared for the news contained
+in my letter, and his answer can best be
+summed up in two of his sentences: "How can I
+say yes? and how dare I say no?" He closed the
+letter by advising me to wait a year or two until<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span>
+others were ready to go. The official letter from the
+Board through the Secretary, Elder Jesse Engle,
+stated that I was the only applicant so far and had
+been accepted, but that there would be time to
+finish the year's teaching. It was quite a surprise
+and disappointment to me to learn that there were
+still no other applicants, but not long afterwards
+word came that Elder Jesse Engle and wife were
+likewise seriously considering the question.</p>
+
+<p>He, as many of my readers know, had realized a
+call to give the Gospel to the heathen while he was
+still a young man, but probably from lack of encouragement
+and from other seemingly insurmountable
+obstacles had not obeyed. Now, at the advanced
+age of fifty-nine years, he still felt that his
+work was not done; and he was ready to enter the
+field, if his way opened, even though it might appear
+to be at the eleventh hour. And she, who had nobly
+stood by his side for so many years, could still say,
+"My place is beside my husband. Where he goes I
+too will follow."</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime the question as to the location
+of this first missionary venture was beginning to
+agitate the minds of some of us. The Board felt
+that the missionaries should be consulted in the
+matter. The conditions then existing in South
+America were attracting the attention of the Christian
+world. Some countries, notably Equador, were
+for the first time being opened to missionaries. The
+sore need there appealed to me and led to correspondence
+with others in reference to that field;
+but no one was ready to go there. Later I learned
+from Brother Engle that he was led to Africa, the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span>
+country of his early call. The location was immaterial
+to me, for my call was to the neediest field,
+and I soon realized that Africa, with its unexplored
+depths, its superstition and degradation, its midnight
+darkness, was surely in need of the Light of
+Life.</p>
+
+<p>The cheering news soon came that Miss Alice
+Heise also had applied and been accepted as a foreign
+missionary. That increased the number to
+four.</p>
+
+<p>At the General Conference in May, 1897, at Valley
+Chapel, Ohio, the following report was given and
+adopted:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>Report of the amount of money in the hands of the
+Treasurer of Foreign Mission to date, $693.46.</p>
+
+<p>Four candidates presented themselves for the foreign
+mission field and have been accepted as follows: Elder
+Jesse Engle and Sister Elizabeth Engle, his wife, of Donegal,
+Kansas; Sister H. Frances Davidson, Abilene, Kansas;
+and Sister Alice Heise, Hamlin, Kansas, and if approved
+by Conference, it is recommended that they should
+be ready to start for their field of labor as early as September
+or October, provided that sufficient means are at
+hand to pay their passage to their place of destination,
+which means are to be raised by voluntary contributions
+as the Lord may direct, and to be sent directly to the address
+of each of the missionaries.</p>
+
+<p>The Board recommends that to complete the number
+of workers there should be one more added to the number
+in the person of a brother as an assistant to Brother
+Jesse Engle.</p>
+
+<p>The Board further recommends that the Conference
+now in session select some well qualified brother to fill
+the vacancy occasioned by Brother Jesse Engle on the
+Foreign Mission Board. Brother W. O. Baker was appointed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span>
+to fill the vacancy (provided Brother Engle should
+go); all of which is respectfully submitted.</p></blockquote>
+
+<div class="signature">HENRY DAVIDSON, Chairman.<br />
+SAMUEL ZOOK, Treasurer.<br /></div>
+
+<p>The summer of 1897 passed slowly for some of
+us who were eager to be on the way; but even the
+days of waiting and visiting were a part of our
+preparation. They were solemn and momentous
+days also to others besides those who were going.
+Some of the friends felt that we should not go;
+others with tears bade us Godspeed, feeling that we
+might probably never look one another in the face
+on earth again. In October a little farewell meeting
+was held at Dayton, Ohio, where God's blessing
+was invoked on the work, and here I said good-bye
+to dear old father, realizing that it would likely be
+for the last time. At Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, we
+were pleased to receive into our number Miss Barbara
+Hershey, of Kansas, who also was called to
+the work.</p>
+
+<p>The actual moving out of the missionaries was also
+a great impetus to the financial part of the undertaking.
+During the few months previous to sailing
+$1,500 was given by voluntary contributions into the
+hands of the missionaries themselves, more than
+half of which was handed to Brother and Sister
+Engle in their extended tour of the Brotherhood.
+In addition to this, $639.70 was during the same
+time handed to the Treasurer, making $1,211.64 in
+his hands.</p>
+
+<p>On November 21 a general farewell and ordination
+meeting for all was held in the Messiah Home
+Chapel, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, where the five<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span>
+prospective missionaries were set apart for the work
+of the Lord. No brother had volunteered to go
+along as a helper to Elder Engle. This was a
+solemn time to those going, for a new and untried
+field was before them and a voyage and country of
+which they as yet knew nothing. And yet there
+was no fear, no anxiety. On the contrary, to some
+of us the joy of having the privilege of being His
+messengers to those sitting in darkness transcended
+all other emotions, and our journal of that time is
+full of expressions of longing to be in darkest Africa.
+At that meeting Elder Engle delivered a farewell
+address with power and unction from on High, and
+the rest told of their call. After the ordination of
+all had taken place, we commemorated the death
+and sufferings of our Savior.</p>
+
+<p>If we may judge from expressions made at the
+time and since, there were others in that large audience
+that evening to whom the occasion was an important
+and impressive one. The Church was rising
+to a sense of her opportunity and privilege&mdash;yes,
+and duty of carrying out the Great Commission.
+As we went forth, we felt that the prayers of the
+entire Church were bearing us up, and that gave
+renewed strength and courage all along the way.
+Those prayers buoyed us up as we went forth even
+into the blackness of heathendom; they opened
+doors that otherwise would have been closed; yes,
+and best of all, they opened dark hearts that the
+light of the glorious Gospel of Christ might penetrate.
+Those prayers yet today are rising as sweet
+incense in behalf of the Dark Continent.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span></p>
+
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER TWO</a></h2>
+<h3>The Voyage and Landing</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>Now the Lord had said unto Abraham, Get thee out
+of thy country and from thy kindred and from thy father's
+house, unto a land that I will shew thee.&mdash;Gen.
+12: 1.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>Seventeen years ago a voyage to Africa was
+not the common occurrence to us plain country
+folk that it is today. The majority of us
+had never seen the sea, we knew no one who had
+made the trip, and we knew less about the continent
+of Africa.</p>
+
+<p>It had been decided that we should sail November
+24, 1897. While Elder and Mrs. Engle were making
+their tour of the churches, some of us had finished
+visiting and were waiting the time of sailing. So
+he suggested that we secure the tickets. We did so
+to England, and through an agent, Mr. Mills, of
+England, arranged in advance for tickets from England
+to Cape Town. The tickets were bought, the
+good-byes were over, and the date of sailing found
+us all at New York Harbor, a little anxious, it is
+true, but eager to launch.</p>
+
+<p>Being inexperienced, we had a little difficulty in
+having some money matters attended to. Sister
+Hershey and myself had each a draft which we
+desired to have exchanged for one on an English
+bank, and were told by one of the men to take them
+to the bank on which they were drawn and have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span>
+it attended to there. So we were obliged to go up
+into the city the morning of the date of sailing,
+when the steamer was to leave at 12 M. We were
+gone all morning, only to find on reaching the bank
+that there was no one to identify us, and nothing
+could be done. Hurrying back to the hotel, we
+secured our hand baggage and hastened to the
+wharf. The rest of the company had already embarked,
+and only a few minutes remained until
+time of sailing, but we appealed to our agent to
+exchange the drafts for some on an English bank.
+Although one of the other men objected on account
+of the shortness of time, he promptly attended to
+them, Elders Jacob Engle and John Niesly, who were
+brothers of Brother and Sister Engle and had come
+to see them off, going security. The gangway for
+passengers had already been removed from the
+steamer and we hurried along that on which baggage
+was carried. As soon as we were aboard, the
+steamer <i>Majestic</i> began to move; and ere we found
+the rest of our company on board, a narrow stretch
+of water lay between us and our native land.</p>
+
+<p>This, our first voyage across the Atlantic, was a
+delightful one. The sea was unusually calm for
+that season of the year, so that none of our number
+became sick, except one, as we neared the coast of
+Ireland. The passengers on board were on the
+whole congenial. As we paced up and down the
+deck, many thoughts crowded in upon us too deep
+for utterance. What did the future have in store for
+us? What awaited us on the other side? The Lord
+alone, whose messengers we were, could foresee.
+The great, wide, boundless space of water was an<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span>
+ever-increasing source of interest and delight, and
+greatly enlarged our conception of the power and
+majesty of Him "who hath measured the waters in
+the hollow of His hand." We felt in truth that we
+had let go the shore lines and had launched out into
+the ocean of His love.</p>
+
+<p>The second day out was Thanksgiving Day, and
+in company with another missionary on board we
+had a very enjoyable service which was attended
+by most of the second-class passengers. Sunday
+morning there were the regulation Church of England
+services, and later our genial table steward
+asked Elder Engle to preach in the evening. He
+did so to a large, intelligent, and interested congregation.
+As there had been much conjecture
+among the passengers as to who we were, and what
+our belief was, he embraced the opportunity, while
+speaking, of setting forth some of the tenets of our
+faith, much to the satisfaction of those present.</p>
+
+<p>On November 31 the steamer reached Liverpool,
+England, and the first part of the voyage was at an
+end. As we stood on deck gazing at the strange
+scenes around us and at the sea of unfamiliar faces
+looking up into ours, and awaiting our turn to disembark,
+we realized in truth that we were strangers
+in a strange land. How was our agent to be found
+on that crowded wharf?&mdash;but this question was
+quickly settled. No sooner had we stepped off the
+gangway, than a gentleman approached, and, naming
+us, introduced himself as Mr. Mills, our agent.
+What a relief it was to all of us in our ignorance of
+foreign travel! We were thus forcibly reminded
+that He was going before and preparing the way<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span>
+so that we need have no anxious fear. This thought
+was further impressed upon our minds as we entered
+our room in the little hotel in Liverpool, for
+there, on the opposite wall, as we opened the door
+were the words, "The Lord shall be thy confidence."
+Mr. Mills then and there took charge of us and our
+baggage and did not relax his vigilance until we had
+safely embarked for South Africa.</p>
+
+<p>Fortunate it was that our baggage was in such
+good hands, for part of it had been miscarried and
+reached the steamer at Southampton only about an
+hour before we left that port for South Africa. English
+travel has many things to recommend it, some
+of which Americans would do well to profit by; but
+one learns to appreciate the excellent system of
+handling baggage in America only after he has had
+a little experience of the slipshod manner in vogue
+abroad. This fact was again brought to my attention
+on my first furlough to America nearly seven
+years later. When I disembarked at New York, an
+English lady from the same steamer bought a railroad
+ticket from New York to San Francisco and
+checked her baggage.</p>
+
+<p>I said to her, "Now you need not trouble yourself
+about your baggage until you reach your destination."</p>
+
+<p>"So they tell me," she replied. "It will seem so
+strange to travel without having to look after one's
+luggage."</p>
+
+<p>One is pleased to note, however, that the increased
+amount of foreign travel of late years has
+brought about some improvement along this line,
+even in conservative England.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span></p>
+<p>The ride from Liverpool to London was most
+enjoyable, and would have been still more so had
+there been some one to point out the places of
+interest. The fields, still green at that late date,
+were well kept; but the methods employed in farming
+seemed somewhat antiquated to people fresh
+from the farms of western America. As the train
+glided along we were favored with a glimpse of a
+hunting party in their brilliant colored costumes in
+pursuit of the poor little animals on one of the game
+reserves. The small private compartments on the
+train were a pleasing novelty, but there was no one
+to call off the names of the cities through which the
+train was passing, and the surroundings were too
+new for us to know where to look for the names.
+Once when the guard came to examine our tickets,
+I inquired the name of the place. Concluding from
+his silence that he had not understood, I ventured
+to repeat the question. The stare he gave made me
+realize that I had been guilty of a breach of something,
+but what it was is not exactly clear to me to
+this day. We also had a glimpse of London, that
+great metropolis, with its narrow, crowded streets,
+its rush of business, and its perfectly-controlled business
+traffic. Here our company was met by another
+agent, who conveyed us to Black Wall and placed
+us on the steamer <i>Pembroke Castle</i>, of the Union
+Castle Line, for a three weeks' voyage to Cape
+Town.</p>
+
+<p>The associations on the <i>Majestic</i> had been pleasant
+and we expected a similar experience on this
+second steamer; but the long voyage to Cape Town
+leaves much to be desired. One may always find<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span>
+some congenial spirits, but even under the best circumstances
+the voyage finally becomes tiresome.
+Only too often the more turbulent element gains
+the upperhand, so that drinking, gambling, dancing,
+and even grosser evils prevail.</p>
+
+<p>After sailing from Southampton one soon leaves
+behind the cold, chilly winds of the temperate climate
+and begins to enjoy the soft, balmy breezes of
+the subtropical climate. However, as the heat becomes
+more intense, this enjoyment gradually gives
+place to discomfort. The only stop on the way to
+Cape Town was at Las Palmas, on Canary Island.
+As we approached the place, the low-lying mountain
+peaks could have been mistaken for clouds, but
+soon the entire island lay before us in all its beauty.
+What appeared at first sight to be bare cliffs were
+soon seen to be clothed with verdure; and while we
+were feasting our eyes on the scene, on one side of
+the steamer, our attention was called to the opposite
+side where the city of Las Palmas lay. It was indeed
+a magnificent scene and beggars description.
+The city, which is almost entirely white, rises tier
+after tier up the mountain side, and the whole had a
+dark background of mountain peaks. We were in
+the bay with the island nearly surrounding us. In
+a short time our steamer was encompassed by a
+number of small boats full of natives, some of whom
+came to sell their wares of fruit or fancywork. Other
+boats were full of diving boys, ready to plunge
+into the sea for money thrown from the steamer
+into the water.</p>
+
+<p>In a short time the steamer was again on its way;
+but where was it taking the little band of missionaries?<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span>
+and what was to be their final destination?
+Their tickets called for Cape Town, but beyond that
+the way seemed like a sealed book. Africa, with its
+barbarism, its unknown depths, its gross darkness,
+lay before them; and they were keenly conscious of
+their ignorance of the continent. They had implicit
+confidence, however, in their Great Leader, and believed
+that they were going to a place which the
+Lord said He would show them. Many prayers
+ascended that they might understand His voice
+when He spoke to them.</p>
+
+<p>Personally their ideas about the location of the
+work differed. At first Elder Engle felt drawn for
+various reasons towards the Transvaal (not Johannesburg),
+because that was not so far inland.
+To one of the party the call had been distinctly into
+the interior and most needy regions where Christ
+had not been named. All, however, were ready to
+let the Lord lead.</p>
+
+<p>A number of the passengers on the steamer were
+familiar with some parts of Africa and gave valuable
+information. One of the officers, the chief
+engineer, was especially helpful. He brought out
+his maps and went carefully over the ground, showing
+where missionaries were located and where
+there was need. Ere the party left the steamer, the
+consensus of opinion seemed to be that Rhodesia, or
+the part of it known as Matabeleland, was the
+Lord's place for them to begin aggressive missionary
+work. This was further confirmed when it was
+learned that the Cape to Cairo Railroad had just
+been completed as far as Bulawayo, the chief town
+of Matabeleland.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span></p>
+<p>This having been decided upon, the next question
+was as to how long they were to remain at Cape
+Town before proceeding into the interior. The
+amount of money at their disposal was not large,
+and as it was the Lord's money it was necessary to
+know His will as to its disposal. They soon learned
+that He was continuing to go before and prepare
+the way. Those were precious days of waiting on
+Him; for never does His will and guidance seem so
+precious as when He is showing only one step at a
+time, and as one becomes willing to take that, lo!
+another is revealed just beyond. Why then do we
+so often halt, fearing to walk alone with Him, knowing
+that we cannot stumble as long as we keep hold
+of His dear hand?</p>
+
+<p>On December 26 the steamer entered beautiful
+Table Bay, and the long voyage was over. Praises
+ascended to Him Who had given such a prosperous
+journey. It was Sunday when land was reached
+and the passengers were allowed to remain on board
+the steamer until Monday if they so desired. All
+of us attended divine services on land Sunday morning,
+and in the afternoon Brother and Sister Engle
+went to the Y. W. C. A. Building where the Secretary,
+Miss Reed, offered to help them look for
+rooms.</p>
+
+<p>They accordingly went on Monday morning, the
+rest of us remaining with the boxes and in prayer.
+They at first were unsuccessful in securing rooms,
+but after again looking to the Lord for guidance,
+Miss Reed was impressed to take them to a Mrs.
+Lewis (nee Shriner), a prominent temperance and
+reform worker of Cape Town, and a most devoted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span>
+Christian. This lady was a friend in need to many
+of God's children. She had lately rented a large
+building in connection with her work; but the venture
+had not been as successful as she had hoped,
+and she was in prayer about the matter, pleading
+that the place might be made a blessing to some
+one. Even as she prayed, three persons stood at
+her door desiring to speak with her. These were
+Miss Reed and Elder and Mrs. Engle, whom the
+Lord had directed thither. As soon as she heard
+their errand, she felt that here was an answer to
+her prayer. Arrangements were immediately made
+by which they were to receive three plainly-furnished
+rooms for a sum which was very moderate
+indeed for Cape Town. She said she would prefer
+to give the rooms gratis if she were in a position
+financially to do so. Together they fell on their
+knees and thanked the Lord for answered prayer
+which meant so much to all concerned. When Elder
+Engle returned to the waiting ones their hearts,
+too, leaped for joy at the good news. They thought
+it was almost too good to be true, that so soon
+rooms had been secured, and that they were to
+have a little home of their own without the expenses
+of a hotel. Truly, "He is able to do exceeding
+abundantly all that we ask or think." Boxes were
+soon transferred to the new home and our feet
+planted firmly on African soil</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p>.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER THREE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Preparation and Progress</h3>
+
+
+<p>We were here on the threshold of Africa,
+eager to move out. We realized, however,
+how meager was our knowledge of
+this vast continent and its needs, so it was necessary
+to go slow and gain all possible information from
+this vantage ground.</p>
+
+<p>Cape Town is the oldest of South African cities
+and is the largest seaport town, having a population
+of about 80,000 inhabitants. The long, tiresome sea
+voyage being over, the sight of this picturesque city,
+nestling so cozily at the foot of Table Mountain, is
+one long to be remembered. The mountain rises
+abruptly 3,850 feet in the background of the city.
+Its majestic flat top is two miles long, and when the
+weather is clear, it stands sharply outlined against
+the blue sky. Frequently, however, a white cloud,
+known as the "Table Cloth," comes up from the
+sea from the back of the mountain and rolls down
+over the face, a sign that a change of weather is
+imminent. It has been said, "The glory of Table
+Bay is Table Mountain," and "The glory of Table
+Mountain is the Table Cloth." Bay, town, and
+mountain combine to make the picture beautiful and
+unique of its kind.</p>
+
+<p>Cape Town was laid out by the Dutch, and the
+substantial, antiquated-looking houses in the older<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span>
+parts of the city bear ample testimony to this fact.
+There are also many fine, modernly-built houses.
+The place is supplied with all the latest improvements,
+which are a necessary part of a modern city.
+The population is most varied. Dutch, English,
+Hottentots, Malays, and Kafirs abound. The scenes
+on some of the streets at that time, especially in the
+evenings and on holidays, were most varied and picturesque.
+There were to be seen Europeans in civilian
+dress, others in soldier's uniform, Malays in
+their turbans and bright, flowing robes, well-dressed
+blacks, and the raw native African with only a
+gunny sack to cover him, for clothed he must be
+before he can enter the city.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. and Mrs. Lewis, together with other Christian
+people whom we met at Cape Town, thought
+Matabeleland, the chosen field, was a good one,
+especially the Matopo Hills, as there were no missionaries
+in that locality. The late Cecil Rhodes,
+who was still powerful in Rhodesia, was at that
+time living on his estate, Groot Schuur, near Cape
+Town, and Bishop Engle was advised to go to
+him and endeavor to obtain from him a tract of
+land for a mission site. This was another special
+season of looking to the Lord on the part of the
+little company, that He might overrule it to His
+glory and to the advancement of His Kingdom.
+Brother Engle was received kindly by the gentleman,
+and his request was favorably considered,
+especially the suggestion of going to the Matopo
+Hills. He at once gave Brother Engle a letter to
+the British Charter Company, of Rhodesia, with
+the recommendation that we be given 3,000 acres<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span>
+of land in the Matopo Hills for a mission station.
+He added that "missionaries are better than policemen
+and cheaper."</p>
+
+<p>Every forward step only served to confirm us in
+the decision on the steamer that Matabeleland,
+which is a part of Rhodesia, was the Lord's place
+for opening up His work in Africa. The fact that
+the railroad had just shortly before been completed
+that far, thus making it easier of access; the advice
+of those on the steamer who were familiar with the
+country; the advice of the spiritually-minded
+friends met at Cape Town, and the encouragement
+given by him, the "Empire Builder," who perhaps
+more than anyone else had the welfare of the country
+at heart and whose name, Rhodesia, the country
+bore, together with the conviction of the missionaries
+themselves, all served to set at rest any further
+question as to location that might arise.</p>
+
+<p>Sister Hershey, it is true, was somewhat burdened
+as to whether Rhodesia was the Lord's place for
+her. While she was seeking to know His will in
+the matter, she received a letter from Mr. and Mrs.
+Worcester, of Johannesburg, inviting her to come
+and assist in the missionary work at the Compounds.
+She felt at once that this was the Lord's
+place for her, and accepted it as from Him. We
+were truly sorry to lose so valuable and consecrated
+a colaborer in the work, but felt to bow in submission
+to Him Who knoweth best.</p>
+
+<p>While we were waiting at Cape Town, we learned
+that the Tebele language spoken by the natives in
+Matopo Hills and vicinity was a dialect of the Zulu
+language. The Bible had been translated into the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span>
+Zulu, and there were grammars and dictionaries to
+be had, and we at once endeavored to procure these
+so that we might do some studying. Efforts were
+also made to secure a teacher, but the Zulu teacher
+recommended did not have sufficient English to be
+of any real service to us except in the pronunciation
+of Zulu words, so we were obliged to study on alone
+and consequently made very little progress.</p>
+
+<p>We had arrived at Cape Town in the midst of the
+summer and dry season. Like California, Cape
+Town and vicinity have rains chiefly in the winter,
+and a most healthful climate the year round. Other
+parts of South Africa, however, have their rainy season
+in the summer, and in some localities, notably
+Rhodesia and farther inland, the deadly malarial fever
+is especially severe during the rainy season. So
+we were advised to remain at Cape Town until the
+rains were over in Rhodesia. Mr. Lewis was contemplating
+going north with us to assist Brother
+Engle in opening the work; but before this could be
+accomplished, both he and Mrs. Lewis were summoned
+north to Bulawayo by a telegram to minister
+to one of their friends there who was very sick.</p>
+
+<p>After reaching Bulawayo they immediately sent
+a telegram south telling us to remain at Cape Town,
+and under no consideration to venture into the interior
+until the rains were over. As if to emphasize
+the message, both of them, while attending to the
+sick, were stricken with fever, and all were obliged
+to hasten south as soon as possible. We also came
+into contact with some of the Seventh Day Adventists
+in Cape Town, and through them learned that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span>
+two of their missionaries in Rhodesia had just succumbed
+to the fever.</p>
+
+<p>From the illness brought on at this time Mr.
+Lewis never fully recovered, and shortly after our
+departure from Cape Town, we learned, much to
+our sorrow, that he had been carried away by the
+disease. We were often made to feel, as Mrs. Lewis
+expressed it, that the Lord had sent them before us
+to preserve life. Otherwise we would undoubtedly
+have gone to Bulawayo at an earlier date than we
+did and would probably have had to suffer in consequence.
+We shall never forget the great kindness
+of these friends during the entire four months of
+our stay at Cape Town. The wise counsel, the spiritual
+and financial aid which they gave, will ever be
+a green spot in our memory. And not only then,
+but in later years, Mrs. Lewis' home, "The Highlands,"
+and her large heart were ever open to our
+missionaries. As each recruit stepped foot on Africa's
+shores she was the first to welcome him. When
+any needed rest, her house was wide open for any
+who might choose to come and rest there. When a
+few years ago word came that she had gone to meet
+her Savior Whom she so much loved, we all felt
+that we had indeed lost a friend that could not be
+replaced.</p>
+
+<p>At last the time came when it was considered safe
+to move out, Sister Hershey to Johannesburg and
+the rest to Bulawayo. Mrs. Lewis had given us a
+nice large tent, 16 x 16 feet, which could be used as
+a dwelling place while huts were being built, and
+she had also on her trip north met some of the
+white people of Bulawayo who were ready to assist<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span>
+us. Other friends at Cape Town also kindly helped
+us on the way.</p>
+
+<p>On April 28, 1898, we took the train at Cape
+Town, bound for Bulawayo, 1,362 miles inland. We
+traveled four days and four nights in a comfortable
+coach and reached the place May 2. The same journey
+formerly required six months and longer with
+an ox team. We passed through only a few towns
+worthy the name; Kimberley, the center of the diamond
+mines, being the principal one. Some of the
+country through which we passed looked like a
+desert; not a blade of grass to be seen, but the red
+sand is covered with bushes. This is known as the
+Karroo, and, as rain seldom falls on much of this
+land, one is surprised to see flocks of sheep and here
+and there an ostrich farm. There are many flat-topped
+mountains and hills, at the foot of which one
+occasionally catches sight of a farmhouse with its
+accompanying sheep pen. A letter sent to America
+at the time adds:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>Parts greatly resemble Kansas prairies, while the last
+four or five hundred miles of the journey the country
+looks like old, deserted orchards. We were also introduced
+to African life in its primitive state, and during
+the latter part of the journey no white people were visible
+save the few connected with the railway service, but
+many native huts were to be seen. Some were made of
+mud, others formed of poles covered with various-colored
+cloth, forming a veritable patchwork, while the natives in
+semi-nude condition came crowding about the car windows,
+begging for money and food. How my heart bled
+for these poor souls! Although the railroad was built,
+ostensibly, for the purpose of developing the commercial
+and mining interests of the country; yet, as I looked
+upon those poor natives, I wondered whether the real<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span>
+purpose of it under the Providence of God was not to
+bring the Gospel to them. Other missionaries are here
+before us, but I believe we are the first to make use of
+the new railroad for this purpose.</p></blockquote>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER FOUR</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Matabeleland</h3>
+
+
+<p>Before proceeding with my story let me introduce
+to my readers the people and the
+country to which we had come. The Matabele
+are a branch of the Zulu tribe of Southeast
+Africa. During the reign of the great and despotic
+Zulu King, Tyaka, they revolted under the leadership
+of Mzilikazi, or Moselikatse, and started north
+through Africa, proving a terror to the various
+tribes along the way and meeting with numerous
+hardships and varying degrees of success. About
+the year 1836 found them in this country, to which
+they gave the name Matabeleland. This land, together
+with Mashonaland, constitutes what is now
+known as Southern Rhodesia.</p>
+
+<p>Here they established themselves by ruthlessly
+slaughtering all who opposed them, and enslaving
+the natives already in the country. After the death
+of Mzilikazi, his son, Lobengula, became King. He
+was more or less tyrannical, like his father, and he
+lived with his sixty wives about two miles from
+what is now known as Bulawayo&mdash;the killing place&mdash;or,
+as the natives often say, "o Bulawayo," meaning
+murderer. A rock near this place is still pointed
+out as the place where a number of his wives met
+a violent death.</p>
+
+<p>This King Lobengula ruled his people with a rod
+of iron. The young men were all enlisted in his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span>
+army and the women and children left to carry on
+the work in the gardens and kraals. Rev. Helm, one
+of the first missionaries in the country, said it was
+impossible to get hold of the young men; and even
+if the boys did start to school, the King would take
+them for his own use as soon as they were old
+enough. He, however, never molested the missionaries
+themselves, and probably considered it an
+honor to have a white teacher in the country; but,
+as Mrs. Helm remarked, they were careful not to
+offend him.</p>
+
+<p>The British Charter Company had obtained some
+concessions from the King in 1889, and, in the next
+year, Europeans entered the country to prospect and
+mine the gold. It was a foreseen conclusion that
+there would eventually be a conflict between a savage
+despot, to whom many of the white people were
+obliged to cringe, and a civilized people. The inevitable
+reached a climax in 1893, when war broke
+out between the King and the white people of the
+country. There were only a few white men in the
+country at that time, but assegais and other native
+weapons were no match for Maxim guns and European
+tactics. The King's house being burnt, he
+himself fled and eventually died in January, 1894,
+thus causing the war suddenly to come to an end,
+as there remained no one to keep the forces together.
+The British South African Company took possession
+and began to occupy and build up the country.</p>
+
+<p>The Matabele, however, did not consider themselves
+conquered, and many circumstances conspired
+to bring about a second conflict. Perhaps
+the chief among these was the fact that all the cattle<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span>
+were regarded as the property of the King, although
+being distributed among the people and used by
+them as their own. However, since the cattle belonged
+to the King, the British Company looked upon
+them as theirs by right of conquest, and proceeded
+to appropriate some of them. This greatly angered
+the natives, as also the rinderpest, which
+came later and swept off many of the remaining
+cattle. Then 400 of the subject tribes were armed
+and enlisted as native police; and this was most
+galling to the proud Matabele warriors, that they
+should be exulted over by their former slaves. The
+disease among their cattle, the locust, which devoured
+their crops, and numerous other troubles
+were all, by their witch doctors, laid at the door of
+the white man. Umlimo (their god) also affirmed
+that their King was still alive and was ready to
+assist them in gaining their liberty.</p>
+
+<p>This second conflict, known as the Matabele Rebellion
+of 1896, came very suddenly upon the 4,000
+white people, scattered in various parts of the country.
+No one seemed to expect danger, although
+there were several who had had a little warning,
+and many natives who were working in Bulawayo
+were called home by their parents. One boy in
+speaking of the time said:</p>
+
+<p>"I was working in Bulawayo when my father
+sent word that I was to come home. I did not
+want to but I was afraid to disobey. I was afraid
+to look at my father, he looked like a mad man.
+He said, 'We cannot live and be oppressed like this.
+We would rather die than be treated as we are!'<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"The rest of the people, too, looked just that
+way!"</p>
+
+<p>The natives rose against the Europeans and suddenly
+murdered 200 in the outlying districts, including
+a number of women and children. Some of
+these were murdered by their own servants. The
+rest of the white people hastily gathered into the
+new town of Bulawayo, while soldiers scoured the
+country in search of native troops. A large number
+of the native police had gone over to the enemy,
+carrying their rifles with them, and a number of the
+natives, both in Matabeleland and Mashonaland,
+had in some way secured several thousand firearms;
+so that in this war the natives were much better
+prepared.</p>
+
+<p>This rebellion lasted eight months, and the natives
+were finally driven into the Matopo Hills. In
+these, nature's vast strongholds and caves, all efforts
+of the European soldiers to dislodge them
+proved unavailing. Here finally came Mr. Rhodes,
+unarmed, into the midst of the enemy's camp and
+made peace with them. The tree under which this
+famous council was held is still pointed out not
+many miles from where Matopo Mission now is.
+We entered the country a little over a year after
+the close of the rebellion, while all the causes and
+events were still fresh in the minds of the natives.
+What is still more significant, we were located in
+the very heart of these hills where no missionary
+had yet penetrated, and being surrounded by many
+of the rebels themselves, we were able to glean
+much of the above history at first hand. When we
+went among them they were still seething with discontent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span>
+from the same cause which led to the Rebellion.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Rhodes, who had made peace with these natives,
+was always respected and trusted by them,
+and while he was no religious man himself, he thoroughly
+believed in missionary work among the people.
+His desire that we come to these hills and his
+statement, that "missionaries are better than policemen,
+and cheaper," was actuated by no mercenary
+motive. It was his conviction, borne out by experience
+and by long years of contact with the Africans,
+that missionary work and the Christianization of
+the natives was the only solution of the native problems.</p>
+
+<p>But to return to our story, we arrived at Bulawayo
+late in the evening and were taken to the
+Royal Hotel. This was a good, up-to-date hotel,
+with an up-to-date African price. In the morning,
+as we looked out of the window, the first sight which
+greeted our eyes was a large African wagon drawn
+by eighteen oxen. Except for this and similar
+sights we could easily have imagined that we were
+in an American town, for this place, with broad
+streets and thriving business, is said to have been
+patterned somewhat after American cities. My
+impressions of the town and vicinity written at the
+time were as follows:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>Bulawayo is a modern wonder, an oasis of civilization
+in the midst of a desert of barbarism and heathendom.
+It has nearly 3,000 inhabitants, and has been built
+since 1894. Before that time Lobengula, the great Matabele
+King, held sway about two miles from here at the
+place where the Government House now stands. This
+place reminds one of the booming Kansas towns of a few<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span>
+years ago, but it is hundreds of miles from any other
+civilized place, and is well built of brick and iron, has
+good stores of all kinds, five churches, public library,
+electric lights and telephone, not only in town, but also
+extending to various police forts in the surrounding country,
+but no public schools. There are comfortable riding
+cabs, or traps, drawn by horses or mules, but the traffic
+is carried on by heavy carts or still heavier wagons drawn
+by a large number of oxen or donkeys. The manual labor
+is done chiefly by the native boys, the white people considering
+it beneath their dignity to do anything a native
+can do.</p>
+
+<p>The surrounding country is very pretty and level, and
+one can see an abundance of the "golden sands" mentioned
+by the poet, and even gold sands are not wanting,
+but I am sorry to say that the "sunny fountains" rolling
+down them are very few, especially at this season of the
+year when there are seven months of drought!</p></blockquote>
+
+<p>This for Bulawayo in 1898 and first impressions.</p>
+
+<p>We remained at the hotel only two days. Our
+tent and the other goods had not yet arrived, but a
+gentleman, to whom we had a letter of introduction
+through Mrs. Lewis, most kindly offered the use of
+his house and furniture for two weeks, which offer
+was gratefully accepted. Before the end of that
+time our tent had arrived, and this being placed on
+a vacant lot furnished ample protection for that
+season of the year.</p>
+
+<p>Bulawayo, being of such recent growth and being
+surrounded by pagan tribes, would have afforded
+abundant opportunity for missionary work. Daily
+these raw natives would come to our tent door to
+sell wood or other articles; and we longed to tell
+them something of a Savior's love, had we been
+able to speak to them. One morning thirteen native<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span>
+women, each with a great load of wood on her
+head, arranged themselves, smiling and expectant,
+before the door of our tent. We could only smile
+in return, that one touch of nature's language which
+is akin the world over. We were thankful that we
+could do so much, but back of the smile was a heavy
+heart that we could do so little.</p>
+
+<p>During the two months we remained at Bulawayo
+efforts were made to secure a suitable location
+among the Matopo Hills. Mr. Rhodes' letter had
+been delivered to the government officials, and they
+generously undertook to assist in locating the work.
+The first place to which they took Brother Engle&mdash;the
+one recommended by Mr. Rhodes&mdash;was found
+to have been surveyed by a private individual. They
+then made another selection, about thirty miles
+southeast of Bulawayo, the place now known as
+Matopo Mission, and they agreed to give us here a
+Mission Reservation of 3,000 acres. The officials,
+as well as other Europeans in Bulawayo, rendered
+us much assistance. In addition to these the Seventh
+Day Adventist missionaries also greatly
+helped us on the way. These had a mission station
+about thirty miles west of Bulawayo, and about
+fifty miles from the place selected for us; and while
+we were waiting in Bulawayo, they kindly took out,
+at different times, Brother and Sister Engle and
+Sister Heise, for a visit to their station.</p>
+
+<p>The time came for us to move out to our
+location among the hills, and the question of how
+we should get ourselves and our goods to the place
+was becoming a serious one. Transportation, like
+everything else in the interior of Africa, was exceedingly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span>
+expensive. In this emergency Mr. Anderson,
+of the Seventh Day Adventist Mission, offered to
+come that long way with his donkey wagon and
+move us for half the sum required by a regular
+transport driver.</p>
+
+<p>It is difficult for the reader to form any conception
+of what these various expressions of kindness
+along the way, coming so unexpectedly from entire
+strangers, meant to that little band of missionaries
+out in the heart of Africa. Even as I write these
+things, after a lapse of sixteen years, and live over
+the events of that time, tears of joy unbidden come
+and my heart wells up in gratitude as I again recall
+these evidences of the wonderful "faithfulness of a
+faithful God."</p>
+
+<p>We had been ignorant of our destination when
+we left the American shore, and even more ignorant
+of the cost of living in the interior of Africa; so
+that, by the time supplies had been purchased to
+take along to the hills, the money on hand was
+about exhausted. We knew not how long a time
+would elapse before a fresh supply could reach us.
+Knowing, too, that the Church had very little experience
+in foreign missionary work, one could not
+fail at times to be a little anxious. Thanks, however,
+to the wisdom, ability, and promptness displayed
+by the old fathers who formed the Mission Board,
+and to their support, backed up by the Church;
+as soon as conditions were understood at home
+means were forthcoming and we were never allowed
+to be in want.</p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER FIVE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>The Opening of the Work</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>We must remember that it was not by interceding for
+the world in glory that Jesus saved it. He gave Himself.
+Our prayers for the evangelization of the world are but
+a bitter irony so long as we only give of our superfluity
+and draw back before the sacrifice of ourselves.&mdash;M.
+Francois Coillard.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>We heartily echo the words of this sainted
+missionary to the Barotse, but we believe
+that the thought uppermost in the heart
+of each of the four waiting ones at Bulawayo was
+not sacrifice but privilege, on that July morning, so
+long ago, when the command to go forward was
+given. We were soon to reach our destination, the
+place to which we had started from New York over
+seven months previously. An account of this trip
+written at the time reads somewhat as follows:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>We left Bulawayo on the evening of July 4 and traveled
+three nights and two days before the mission valley was
+reached. The nights were cool and a bright moon lighted
+up the way, so that traveling went better at night than
+during the heat of the day. The wagon was about eighteen
+feet long, very strong and heavy, and was drawn by
+eighteen donkeys. These were led by one native boy,
+while another with a long whip was doing the driving.
+The load of about three tons was very heavy&mdash;too heavy,
+in fact, for a part of the way. Donkeys can travel only
+two miles an hour on good roads and on poor roads it
+sometimes requires two hours to go one mile. Occasionally<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span>
+we stopped from two to four hours to let the donkeys
+rest and graze.</p>
+
+<p>During such times we would build fire on the veldt, and
+cook and eat our food; or, if it were night, we would
+wrap our blankets about us, take our pillows, and lie down
+in the shelter of some friendly bush and sleep. Mother
+Engle usually preferred the shelter of the tent on the
+back of the wagon, although the place was too much
+crowded for her to rest comfortably. Since the load was
+so heavy we spent a great deal of the time walking.
+We would walk ahead of the wagon for a distance, then
+sit down and rest until the wagon reached us. Only two
+of three settlers' houses were visible, and no native kraals,
+and we were informed that as soon as the white man
+makes a road, the natives move away from it.</p>
+
+<p>After twenty miles of travel we came to Fort Usher.
+At this place there reside an English magistrate and a
+number of white police. Here we were kindly received
+and given a native guide for the rest of the journey. We
+now left the government road and plunged into the hills.
+The wagon went along another five miles with very little
+difficulty. Then it mired on going through a swampy
+place, one side sinking nearly to the hubs of the wheels,
+and further progress was impossible. All put forth every
+effort to extricate it but to no avail. What was to be done?</p>
+
+<p>While we were in this dilemma, the Chief of the natives
+in this part of the country, Hluganisa by name, with some
+natives came to meet us and bid us welcome. They gave
+us a very friendly reception, and then joined in to assist in
+extricating the wagon, but without success. Mr. Anderson,
+who could speak the native language, explained to
+the chief who we were and our object in coming, and he
+promised to meet us at the mission site the next day, as
+it was now evening.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Anderson then took our party forward a little distance
+to a dry spot, where we rested during the night.
+He and his native boys returned to the wagon, and, removing
+the greater part of the load, carried it beyond the
+marshy place. The donkeys were then able to pull out<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span>
+the wagon. It is needless to add that Mr. Anderson and
+his boys were extremely tired after this laborious task
+and were glad to snatch a little rest. Even under such
+circumstances they did not indulge long in the much-needed
+rest, but at an early hour were again ready for the
+journey. Those of us who had enjoyed a good night's
+rest were also aroused, and we started on our last trek
+into the hills. We reached the valley, which is to be our
+home, on the morning of July 7.</p>
+
+<p>This valley is surrounded by immense granite hills and
+boulders, some of which cover hundreds of acres, so that
+at first sight the rocks seem to constitute the chief part of
+the country, but a closer inspection showed us to what
+a beautiful place God had led us for His work. There,
+spread out before our eyes, was a beautiful rolling valley
+of rich, dark earth, well supplied with an abundance of
+fresh water. It was stated that the "sunny fountains"
+are rare in this part of Africa, and that is true. Here,
+however, in this beautiful valley, in the heart of Matopo
+Hills, are sparkling fountains of beautiful water, crystal
+clear, oozing from under the surface of the rocks, and
+flowing down the valley. Some contain delicate mosses
+and pretty water lilies, and surpass the Michigan lakes in
+transparency.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime the Chief had sent word to the headmen
+of the various kraals to meet us. So, in the morning,
+obedient to the call of their superior, they came and sat in
+a semi-circle while their chief addressed them (Mr. Anderson
+interpreting for our benefit):</p>
+
+<p>"These are not like other white people."</p>
+
+<p>The deep-toned voices of the headmen responded in
+unison, "Yes, my lord."</p>
+
+<p>He continued, "They have come to teach you and your
+children and to do you good."</p>
+
+<p>Again came the response, "Yes, my lord."</p>
+
+<p>"Now do what you can for them and help them."</p>
+
+<p>And again the same response was repeated.</p>
+
+<p>One may imagine how that impressed us. Here we
+are, far from other white people, among a class of natives<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span>
+who have never been subdued by the English soldiers.
+They are kept in subjection only by forts of police
+stationed among the hills, the nearest being ten miles
+distant. Yet these people recognized us at once as their
+friends and received us with kindness far above what we
+dared expect. Our hearts overflow with thankfulness to
+Him who rules the hearts of men.</p></blockquote>
+
+<p>The Chief and one or two other natives went with
+us to look up a location on which to pitch the tent
+and build huts. The tent was finally pitched under
+the shade of a large umkuni tree, Mr. Anderson
+returned to his station, and we were left without an
+interpreter, and with no practical knowledge of mission
+work. We had, however, a Great Teacher, and
+we were willing to be taught.</p>
+
+<p>Both Matabele and their subject races, known as
+Amahole, live in the Matopo Hills. The majority
+of them are not black, but a chocolate brown, and
+some have features resembling white people. They
+are generally large, well-formed, and intelligent-looking.
+They are more or less rude in manner,
+uncouth in appearance, and wear little or no clothing
+except the loin cloth. This in the men usually consists
+of the skin of small animals, and among the
+women a short skirt of cloth or skins. Over the
+upper part of the body is sometimes thrown a larger
+piece of cloth.</p>
+
+<p>Among those that gathered about us that first day
+were some who had been quite active in the late
+rebellion. As we gained their confidence, they often
+pointed out to us the caves where they stored their
+grain, and where they themselves hid during that
+terrible time. A year of famine had followed the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span>
+war, and some had starved to death. At the time
+we entered upon the work there was a great deal of
+destitution all about us; for some had not yet been
+able to grow grain, and they had no flocks to fall
+back upon as they usually had in time of grain
+famine.</p>
+
+<p>Many of the white people in the country and in
+Bulawayo were continually talking about and expecting
+another uprising. They looked for it to
+come from these Matopo Hill natives, and some
+sought to warn us not to venture into this, the
+enemy's stronghold. We, however, living among
+them from day to day, saw no cause for fear.</p>
+
+<p>The natives came to see us in large numbers.
+Sometimes fifty would appear in one day and crowd
+around the door of our tent, desiring to have a good
+view of the newcomers and their belongings. Many
+of them, especially the women and children, had
+never seen a white person before, or at most a white
+woman. Some three or four families had heard a
+little of Jesus, but the great majority knew absolutely
+nothing of the Gospel.</p>
+
+<p>Our ignorance, both of the language and the people,
+led to many blunders, both ludicrous and otherwise.
+The desire to help them and to show them
+that we were their friends caused them often to
+take advantage of our kindness. We soon learned
+that the African is not so much interested in the
+things that are for the good of his soul as in that
+which ministers to his body and appetite. It was
+so difficult to know just what to do at all times, for
+they were destitute of nearly everything which we
+considered necessary for comfort. They were confirmed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span>
+beggars, and the more they received the
+more they wanted. The missionary opens his Bible,
+and reads, "He that hath two coats, let him impart
+to him that hath none; and he that hath meat let
+him do likewise"; he then gets down on his knees
+and prays that the Lord might help the poor souls
+about him, but he often feels that his prayers do
+not ascend very high. What he needs to do is to
+get up and answer his own prayers.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus059.png" width="600" height="393" alt="Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise
+at Matopo." title="Hut built by Frances  and Alice." />
+<span class="caption">Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise
+at Matopo.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>When we made a contract with them for work,
+and told them what pay they would receive, they
+always wanted more than the contract called for
+when the time came to settle. This is characteristic
+of the native in dealing with the white man. He
+sees that the other has clothing and many comforts
+of which he is deprived, hence concludes that the
+pockets of the white man are full of money. Socialist<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span>
+that he naturally is, he thinks that the property
+should be equally distributed. It never occurs to
+him that his laziness and shiftlessness have much to
+do with his destitution. In fact, that thought does
+not generally occur to the missionary when he goes
+among the heathen for the first time, unless he is
+with some one who understands the situation.</p>
+
+<p>It is necessary to make the natives understand at
+times that the kindness of even the missionary has
+a limit. One day I was in the little straw shed
+which served as a kitchen, and was endeavoring to
+bake bread. As usual a number of people were
+about the door, and one man, taking advantage of
+my kindness, came in and sat down by the stove in
+front of the bake-oven door. He made no effort in
+the least to move away when I tried to look into the
+oven door. I bore it for some time, not wishing to
+be rude to him, and not knowing how to ask him in
+a polite way to move. Suddenly it dawned upon
+me that the proper native word was <i>suka</i>. So I
+made use of the word and told him to <i>suka</i>. He
+looked up in surprise and repeated the word to
+know if he had correctly understood, but he moved.
+Afterwards, in looking for the word in my dictionary,
+I found that it was a word often in the
+mouth of the white man when addressing a native.
+It really meant a rough "Get out of this." So the
+look of mild reproach in the eyes of the native was
+accounted for. Some of the softness in the missionary,
+too, soon wears off as he is obliged to deal with
+the native from day to day. He finds that it is necessary
+to make the native understand their relation
+one to another as teacher and pupil.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Living in a tent during the dry and healthy season
+is not unpleasant in such a climate, except that
+one suffers from the heat by day and the cold by
+night.</p>
+
+<p>Matopo Mission is located about 20&frac12;° south latitude
+and 29° east longitude. It is 5,000 feet above
+sea level, so that, although it is within the tropics,
+it has a delightful and salubrious climate the entire
+year. From the middle of November to the middle
+of April is what is known as the rainy season. The
+rest of the year rain seldom falls. One cannot live
+in a tent all the year, but must provide better shelter
+for the rainy season. So hut building occupied the
+first few months. We had no wagon and no oxen,
+nothing but two little donkeys, which had been
+brought out with us from Bulawayo, and we did
+not know how to make the best use of native help.
+The poles used in the construction of the huts were
+cut and carried to the place of building by natives.</p>
+
+<p>As the manner of building was quite foreign to
+an American, Brother Engle took occasion to examine
+other huts, built by Europeans, so that he was
+enabled to build very good ones for the mission. He
+was alone and, to make the work lighter, we women
+assisted, and used hammer, saw, and trowel, brought
+stones for building chimneys, raked grass, and assisted
+in thatching. The huts are built somewhat as
+follows:</p>
+
+<p>A trench about fifteen inches deep is dug the size
+and shape of the desired hut. In this are placed,
+near together, poles from the forest, space being
+allowed for doors and windows and sometimes for
+fireplace. The poles are cut out so as to extend<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span>
+about eight feet above ground. Large ones are
+sawed lengthwise for door posts and window frames.
+Some flexible poles are nailed around the top and
+about halfway up the side, so that the walls of the
+hut are firmly fastened together. Longer poles are
+then used as rafters, these being firmly fastened to
+the walls and nailed together at the top. Small,
+flexible ones are also used as lath to fasten the
+rafters together and upon which to tie the grass in
+thatching. The grass used for this purpose grows
+in abundance among these rocks, and sometimes
+reaches the height of eight feet. The women cut
+this and bring it in bundles, glad to exchange it for
+a little salt. It is first combed by means of spikes
+driven through a board. It is then divided into
+small bundles; the lower ends being placed evenly
+together, and the bundles tied closely together on
+the lath with tarred rope. The next layer is placed
+over this like shingles, so as to cover the place of
+tying. When completed the thickness of grass on
+the eaves of the roof is from four to ten inches.
+Then follows the plastering. The mud or plaster is
+made from earth which had been worked over by
+white ants. This, pounded fine and mixed with
+water, makes an excellent plaster, and when placed
+on the walls it soon dries and becomes very hard.
+The native women put this on the outside with their
+hands, as the walls are too uneven to allow the use
+of a trowel. Similar earth, mixed with sand, is used
+as mortar in building with brick and stone. The
+floors also are of this earth pounded hard and polished.</p>
+
+<p>The windows have either small panes of glass<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span>
+or muslin stretched on a frame, and the doors
+boast of imported timber brought from Bulawayo.
+Each hut is about as large as an average-sized room.
+It is difficult to make them larger on account of the
+scarcity of suitable material in this part of the
+country. The walls are whitewashed on the inside,
+and some have a white muslin ceiling. Much of the
+furniture is of our own manufacture and is made of
+boxes or of native poles draped with calico.</p>
+
+<p>When completed the rooms looked quite cozy
+and comfortable, so that we felt thankful for such
+pleasant homes in connection with our work. The
+first year there were four of such huts built, kitchen,
+dining-hut, and two sleeping-rooms.</p>
+
+<p>Dealing with the natives while building these was
+not always easy. Sometimes difficulties arose
+through not being able to make the natives understand,
+so that we could not always place the blame
+on them. When grass was wanted for the thatching
+a contract was entered into with one of the headmen
+to furnish one hundred bundles for five shillings
+($1.20). The grass was brought until there was
+about half the specified amount, then the pay was
+demanded. This was of course refused. The man
+brought a little more and then he stoutly affirmed
+that he had fulfilled his part of the contract. After
+considerable delay and, being harassed by the headman,
+we finally paid him. After all, he may have
+been honest in the affair and a mistake may have
+been made in the beginning; for the word for <i>one
+hundred</i> and that for <i>much</i> were similar except in
+the prefix. He may have understood that he was
+to bring much grass, and he certainly did that.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Again, when the first hut was to be plastered,
+arrangements were made with certain women to
+plaster it for a stated amount. They brought a
+number of others along to help them plaster; and
+when pay day came, the total amount of pay demanded
+was about double the original agreement.
+There was such a noisy, unpleasant demonstration
+that day, that we learned our lesson, and we were
+very careful so to arrange matters that the difficulty
+would not occur again.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus064.png" width="600" height="473" alt="Matopo Mission&mdash;March, 1899." title="Matopo Mission 1899" />
+<span class="caption">Matopo Mission&mdash;March, 1899.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Our living at the time was of the simplest. Nearly
+all kinds of eatables could be procured in Bulawayo;
+but they were very expensive, and there was
+no way of bringing them out except by native carriers,
+or by trusting to the friendly assistance of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span>
+white traders at Fort Usher. Sometimes it fell to
+the Elder's lot to walk the thirty miles to Bulawayo
+in order to purchase supplies. There was no need,
+however, for us to do, like many a missionary in
+the wilds of Africa has done, deprive ourselves of
+wheat bread and ordinary groceries. These we always
+had, but we were more economical in their
+use than we would have been at home. We had no
+milk, except tinned milk, no butter, and very little
+meat, and no gun to procure game. But we had
+chicken and could occasionally procure meat from
+the natives. Of course at first there were no vegetables
+to be had, except such as we could at times
+procure from the natives&mdash;corn, sweet potatoes,
+pumpkins, and peanuts, but these were scarce.</p>
+
+<p>Elder Engle, alive to the value of the soil and the
+need of wholesome food, at once secured fruit trees
+and set them out, including a number of orange
+trees. He also bought a small plow and with the
+two donkeys broke land and planted vegetables.
+One native, who continually stood by us during
+those early days, was Mapipa, our nearest neighbor.
+He was a powerfully-built Matabele and reminded
+one of the giant of Gath; for he had six fingers on
+each hand and six toes on each foot. He had been
+quite active in the Rebellion and was wounded in
+one of the battles. He could always be depended
+upon in work, and Brother Engle greatly appreciated
+his assistance.</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps some one who reads these lines may
+wonder whether building, farming, and such manual
+labor is missionary work. Did not the Great
+Missionary, according to all accounts&mdash;I say it in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span>
+all reverence&mdash;take an apprenticeship in the carpenter's
+shop where He "increased in wisdom and
+stature and in favor with God and man"? Did not
+the Apostle Paul, undoubtedly the greatest of His
+followers, unite tent-making with his missionary
+work? Should then we, such feeble imitations, belittle
+manual labor, even though it falls to our lot
+as missionaries? Any one going to the mission field
+should not, if he is to be successful, decide in his
+own mind that he is going to do certain things, he
+should be willing to do whatever the Lord gives him
+to do, of spiritual, intellectual, or physical labors.</p>
+
+<p>There are so many sides to missionary work, and
+who can tell which will result in the greatest good?
+To preach Christ and lift Him up that others may
+see and accept Him is undoubtedly the central
+thought of the Great Commission. The ways of
+exalting Him, however, are so many and so various.
+Christ must be lived among the people before He
+can in truth be preached to them. The heathen of
+Africa cannot read the Bible, but they can and do
+continually read the lives of those sent among them.
+If these do not correspond to the Word read and
+preached among them, they are keen to discern and
+judge accordingly. If the Christ-life is lived before
+their eyes, day by day, many will eventually yield
+their hearts to Him, even though, they may for a
+time resist.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER SIX</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Educational and Evangelistic Work</h3>
+
+
+<p>The natives were eager to see inside the new
+huts. When they had an opportunity to look
+at the whitewashed walls and the homemade
+furniture, they stood spellbound, and the first word
+that broke from their lips was "<i>Muehle</i>" (pretty).</p>
+
+<p>They had another and more personal interest in
+seeing the huts completed. They had been told
+that, as soon as the goods were moved out of the
+tent, school would be opened. Both large and small
+were exceedingly eager to learn, or at least they
+thought so. They had never seen books, and writing
+was like magic to them. To put down some
+characters on paper and from those to spell out their
+names when they next visited the mission was little
+less than witchcraft. Both old and young like to
+be known. They are pleased if their missionary
+pronounces their name and seems to know them
+when they come a second time.</p>
+
+<p>School opened October 11. The first boy to
+come bright and early was Matshuba, together with
+two of Mapita's girls. This little boy, then about
+thirteen years old, had been a very interested spectator
+of all that occurred from the time the mission
+opened. Day after day he would be on hand, and
+his bright eyes and active mind took knowledge of
+everything that was said or done. His father,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span>
+Mpisa, then dead, had been one of the most trusted
+witch doctors of the King, and had been held in
+great respect by all of the natives in that part of the
+country. This boy was very eager for school, and
+the first morning he and Mapita's girls begged us
+to allow only the Matabele to attend school, and
+not the Amahole, or subject races. This furnished
+an excellent opportunity of teaching them that God
+is no Respecter of persons.</p>
+
+<p>The first morning of school twelve bright-looking
+boys and girls entered the tent and sat down on the
+floor, curious to know what school was like. It
+was a momentous time. It was the beginning of a
+work the result of which human eye could not foresee.
+How the teacher, who had often stood before
+a far larger and more inspiring-looking school in a
+civilized land, trembled as she stood there before
+those twelve little savages in the heart of Africa!
+She knew that those bright eyes were reading her
+thoughts, and realized that she came so far short
+of the "measure of the stature of the fullness of
+Christ." The special burden of the prayer that
+morning was that, as these dear souls learned to
+read the Word, the Light might enter their hearts
+and they yield themselves to God.</p>
+
+<p>The second day eight more were enrolled, and the
+third day fourteen, and by the end of the month
+there were forty in all. Sister Heise and I were
+kept busy during school hours as the pupils were
+taught to sew as well as to read and write. Cleanliness
+is a rare virtue with them, so they were told to
+wash before coming to school. As new ones entered
+the school the admonition was repeated, with the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span>
+statement that we wash every morning. Mapita's
+little daughter, Sibongamanzi, with shining black
+face, which showed that she had been heeding the
+command, looked up brightly and said, "Yes, but
+you are white and we are black." She evidently had
+thought that, if she washed every morning, she too
+would become white, but she had concluded it to be
+a hopeless task. Mr. Anderson said that some of
+their children thought that if they ate the food of
+white people, they too would become white.</p>
+
+<p>This, our first schoolroom, was very primitive. It
+consisted of a tent 16 x 16 feet. In front there was
+a box which served as a teachers' desk and as a receptacle
+for slates, pencils, paper, books, and sewing.
+Other boxes served for teachers' chairs. There
+were two easels made of poles; one supported the
+blackboard and the other the charts. The blackboard
+consisted of a few small boards nailed together
+and painted black, and the charts were of
+cardboard, 18 x 24 inches in size. There were ten
+of them printed on both sides with syllables, and
+Tebele words and sentences. These had been printed
+by homemade stencils and pen, and had occupied
+our leisure time while we were hut-building. The
+floor of the tent was covered with straw, and the
+pupils sat on this without seats or desks. They
+knew nothing of the comforts of the schoolroom in
+civilized lands and thought they were well supplied.</p>
+
+<p>Since we had no primer at the time, the Gospel of
+St. John was given to them as a textbook when they
+had finished the charts. To enable them to read
+and understand the Word of God was the aim of
+the school work and the Bible the Textbook<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span>
+throughout. After they had learned to write the
+letters of the alphabet, their copy usually was a
+verse from the Scriptures. They were also taught
+to memorize certain portions in connection with the
+daily worship, and hymn singing.</p>
+
+<p>The pupils compare very favorably with white
+children in their ability to learn, but few of them
+come regularly to school. To most of them school
+is just a side issue, some place to go when there is
+nothing else to be done. Some have an idea that
+they can learn to read in about a month, and when
+they find that it requires months of weary, patient
+effort at meaningless characters, they give up in
+despair. Others are ridiculed by the older people
+for throwing away their time at such useless work;
+"There is no money, no beer, no food in it and they
+are dunces to go."</p>
+
+<p>Again, some are grown, and being past the age
+when mental effort is easy, they soon become discouraged.
+One big fellow stumbled along until he
+had mastered the chart after a fashion. Then, to
+his delight, he was given the Gospel of St. John to
+read. Day after day he struggled along over the, to
+him, meaningless syllables and words. Still he
+persevered until it gradually dawned upon him that
+the printed page meant something. He looked up
+one day with a most delighted expression on his
+face and exclaimed, "This book is talking to me!"</p>
+
+<p>The native cannot be said to be very persevering,
+owing to the fact that all his life, in his untaught
+state, he goes on the principle that the world owes
+him a living. His needs are few and often they are
+supplied by nature. When he comes up against a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span>
+difficult problem of any sort, his usual answer is,
+"It will not consent." For this reason arithmetic is
+always difficult for him and his progress in it is
+very slow. One day I was endeavoring to show a
+girl how to make the letter <i>b</i>. After a vain effort to
+make it properly, she exclaimed, "My pencil will
+not consent to slide that way."</p>
+
+<p>The sewing hour probably was the most interesting
+time to all. They expected to receive the garments
+after they had finished sewing them and had worked
+for the cloth with which they were made. The
+dearest wish of their hearts was to have a garment
+to put on. And that is not strange, for in the cool
+morning air they come shivering, and at noon the
+hot sun burns their bodies. We might have made the
+garments and donated them; but that would not
+teach them to work and would have done them more
+harm than good. A native always appreciates most
+that upon which he has bestowed labor or money;
+so both boys and girls learned to sew. It was rather
+amusing to see them, in the absence of other garments
+to which they might pin their sewing, place it
+between their toes. It was also interesting to watch
+the different expressions when at last the garments
+were finished and they could clothe themselves.</p>
+
+<p>Matshuba put on his suit; then, folding his hands,
+said in a quiet and contented manner, "Now I am
+not cold any more." Amuzeze, when he had finished
+his garments, put them on, and taking a good
+look at himself stepped off as proudly as if he
+owned a large estate. Sibongamanzi kept her dress
+for Sunday. At home she would carefully fold it,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span>
+and putting it in an earthen jar cover it up for safe
+keeping.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime services on Sunday had not been
+neglected. At the opening of the work none of the
+missionaries could speak the language, but they
+could read it after a fashion. So, from the very first
+Sunday after the work opened, endeavors were made
+to instill into the minds of the natives that one day
+out of seven was a day of rest and worship. To
+them all days were alike&mdash;workdays, rest days, or
+carousal days, as they chose to spend them. Sad to
+say that even the few that went to work for the
+white man saw little or no difference between the
+days of the week. It falls to the lot of the missionary
+to teach the significance of the fourth commandment
+as well as the rest of the decalogue. On Sunday
+the people were invited to assemble under the
+shade of a friendly tree, and a portion of the Scriptures
+was read to them and hymns sung. They are
+great lovers of music, so that in itself was an attraction.
+The first congregation was very small.
+Sometimes there would be only Mapita and his family,
+five or six in number. As the nature of the
+meetings began to dawn on the native mind, others
+would assemble with us, but in the first few months,
+or until the opening of school in October, not more
+than twenty-five congregated at one time.</p>
+
+<p>Acquiring the language is always a tedious,
+though important, part of foreign missionary work.
+The missionary sees the natives about him, day by
+day, and longs to tell them something of Jesus and
+His love, but is unable to do so, especially if he be a
+pioneer in the work and without an interpreter as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span>
+we were. We had been endeavoring to study the
+language from the Zulu books on hand, but on coming
+face to face with the natives it was discovered
+that the set phrases we had acquired seemed as unintelligible
+to them as their words were to us. There
+were several reasons for this. One was that we had
+not learned the proper pronunciation and accent,
+and another was that their dialect differed somewhat
+from the Zulu, which we had been endeavoring
+to learn. Another, and far weightier reason, and one
+which, to our sorrow, we did not discover until
+some time afterwards, was that some natives did
+not speak the correct language to us. Those who
+had been accustomed to speaking to the Europeans
+had invented a jargon of their own, which they
+seemed to think especially adapted to the mental
+capacity of white people. This medium of communication
+is known as "kitchen Kafir."</p>
+
+<p>It consists of a small vocabulary, chiefly of Zulu
+words, simplified and divested of all inflections&mdash;and
+grammar, it might be said. This dialect, which
+is especially distasteful to linguists, is invariably
+used by many natives in addressing white people
+for the first time. It is the common language of
+the kitchen and the shops, between master or mistress
+and their native servants. It has also of later
+years spread much among the natives themselves
+where various tribes meet and converse. Its use
+has become so general over South Africa, and even
+in parts of South Central Africa, that it has, not
+inaptly, been termed the "Esperanto of South Africa."
+Undoubtedly it lacks much of the elegance
+of the real Esperanto, but is in daily use by more<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span>
+people. Not only is "kitchen Kafir" spoken between
+whites and blacks and between blacks themselves,
+but sometimes, when a common language
+fails, something akin to this is used between even
+the white people.</p>
+
+<p>Not so many of the natives in the hills had come
+into contact with Europeans before our coming
+among them, yet there was sufficient "kitchen Kafir"
+among them to confuse the newcomers and
+make it necessary in after years to unlearn many of
+the things they first acquired.</p>
+
+<p>Learning the language is trying, especially without
+a teacher, and many blunders and misunderstands
+occur; but it is not the least useful of missionary
+experiences. People on first coming into
+contact with raw heathendom are seldom capable of
+doing much preaching to them in such a manner
+that the native can understand and appreciate.</p>
+
+<p>While one is learning the language, he is also
+learning to know the native himself, his surroundings,
+and modes of thought. By the time one is able
+to converse with the native, he also knows better
+what to say to him. One thing, however, it is always
+safe to do from the time the missionary enters
+the field of labor; he may always read the Word, if
+he has it in the language. The unadorned Word is
+always safe and suits all conditions of men.</p>
+
+<p>Gradually we learned to speak the language, sentence
+by sentence. How our hearts burned within
+us those days to be able to tell the story of Christ
+and His love! Usually the dull, darkened look on
+the faces of the few present would cause the speaker
+to feel that he had not been understood, or that there<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span>
+had been no answering response. Then occasionally
+a dusky face would light up, as if a ray of light had
+penetrated a darkened corner, and the speaker
+would be encouraged to renewed efforts to make the
+subject plain. Thus, Sunday after Sunday, the
+effort would be renewed.</p>
+
+<p>It was not only on that day, however, that some
+of the older ones heard the Word read and an attempt
+at explanation given. Morning and evening
+worship was held in the native language, and often
+a larger number, in those early days, gathered about
+us on workdays than on Sunday. The door was
+always open and everyone was invited to enter at
+time of prayer. After school opened, and it became
+better known which day was Sunday, and that the
+services were held in the tent, the attendance gradually
+increased.</p>
+
+<p>Our feelings, as written at the time, were somewhat
+as follows:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>We realize more fully every day that much wisdom
+and grace is needed in dealing with this people. If we
+did not have such confidence in our Great Leader, we
+might at times be discouraged, for the enemy of souls is
+strong here in Africa and human nature is alike the world
+over. When the truth is driven home to their hearts, they
+are quite ready to excuse themselves. Thus we find it
+necessary to get down lower and lower at the feet of
+Jesus and let Him fill us continually with all the fulness
+of His love and Spirit, that there may be no lack in us.</p></blockquote>
+
+<p>In his own eyes the pagan African is always a
+good, innocent sort of person. He has done no
+wrong, has committed no sin, hence has no need of
+forgiveness. One of the first requisites seems to be
+instilling into his mind a knowledge of God and His<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span>
+attributes. This must be "precept upon precept,"
+"line upon line," "here a little and there a little."
+Time after time this thought of God must be reiterated
+until it is burned into the consciousness of
+the hearers. We are told of one missionary who,
+for the first two years, took as his text, Sabbath
+after Sabbath, "God is." And it would seem to be a
+wise course to pursue. The conception of a Supreme
+Being Who is holy, omnipotent, omniscient,
+and omnipresent, and cannot look upon sin with
+any degree of allowance, to Whom all must render
+an account, needs to be indelibly impressed on the
+native mind. Until they realize that "all have
+sinned and come short of the glory of God," it
+seems useless to preach Christ as a Savior to them.</p>
+
+<p>Missionaries soon realize that they cannot sit
+down and wait for the people to come to them.
+They must go out into the streets and lanes of their
+villages and "into the highways and hedges and
+compel them to come in." Kraal-visiting forms a
+very important part of the Gospel work. Sister
+Heise and myself went among them as much as
+possible. We went chiefly on foot, and many miles
+were traveled in all kinds of weather, so that the
+people might be instructed in the things of God. At
+first these visits could be little more than a friendly
+call and the speaking of a few broken sentences.
+These wild children of nature were quick to respond
+to the interest that prompted the visits, and would
+always welcome the visitors. As soon as we were
+within sight the children would come to meet us
+and pilot us to their parents. When we left they
+would again accompany us a little distance, perhaps<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span>
+to the next kraal. Who shall say but that
+these early journeys, in which little of the Gospel
+was given, was not as fruitful of results for God as
+later ones? Back of those black exteriors are human
+hearts waiting to be touched by the finger of
+love and human sympathy, ready to imbibe the milk
+of human kindness. They know something of the
+natural love of parent to child, and <i>vice versa</i>; but
+they need to realize that there is such a thing as
+disinterested love in their welfare, and by this
+means be led to realize in some little measure the
+<i>wonderful love of God</i>. In this, thank God, we had
+no need to simulate love. A spark of the Divine
+love for them had entered our hearts before we even
+set foot on Africa's shores.</p>
+
+<p>It is difficult to understand the expression of a
+missionary who visited Matopo some time after the
+work was started, and who in his own field of labor
+seemed to have been used of the Lord. He said
+one day: "I cannot say that I love these people.
+I do not love that child," pointing to a little girl at
+some distance in front of him, "but I realize that
+Christ loves them and desires them to be saved,
+hence my work among them." This seemingly cold
+sense of duty may answer. If, however, the pagan
+African once realizes that disinterested love prompts
+our treatment of him, he is generally most pliable
+and teachable. Without something of the Divine
+love work among them must be hard indeed, for
+there are so many trying things to be met with day
+by day.</p>
+
+<p>After a time it was discovered that the donkeys
+might be made use of in kraal visiting. I well remember<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span>
+our first experience at this mode of travel.
+We had no saddles, so we placed blankets on the
+backs of the donkeys and fastened them with surcingles
+of our own manufacture. Sister Heise was
+an expert rider, while I was quite the reverse. Our
+first trip was to a kraal about five miles distant, the
+home of the chief, Hluganisa. Two boys, Matshuba
+and Sihlaba, accompanied us as guides. All went
+well on the trip over. We were very kindly received
+by the people and afforded an opportunity to give
+them the Gospel. The village was up among the
+rocks, and as donkeys are expert climbers they
+had no difficulty in making the ascent, or descent,
+either, but on the return journey I could not keep
+my place, and was sent over the donkey's head on to
+the ground. My companion, when she saw that no
+harm was done, rather considered the accident as a
+good joke, and I joined in the laugh at my own expense.
+The boys failed to see any fun in it, and
+seemed greatly to resent the laughter.</p>
+
+<p>Some time after this we made another journey of
+about the same distance in the opposite direction.
+The reason for this second visit was as follows:
+Among our pupils was a nice, modest-looking girl
+about twelve years of age. She belonged to Mapita's
+family, and seemed to be an affectionate and well-behaved
+child. She was absent from school for a
+few days, and on inquiring we learned that she had
+gone to the home of her intended husband. Greatly
+shocked, we made further inquiry, and were told
+that Mapita had sold her to a man who had already
+one wife, and that he lived about five miles away.
+It was our first experience with heathen marriage,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span>
+and we determined to hunt her up and if possible
+release her. We looked upon this child as a slave
+or prisoner.</p>
+
+<p>Taking the donkeys and our two boys, we again
+started out one morning. The path was not familiar,
+even to our guides. It wound around among
+the rocks and we were in great danger of being lost.
+Immense boulders were piled up in all sorts of fantastic
+shapes, and a white person could easily be lost
+among the hills and perhaps never find his way
+out, but the native will always find his way. Once
+we found ourselves on the top of a nearly perpendicular
+rock, and dismounting reached the bottom
+only with great difficulty. The boys inquired the
+way of a native in his garden, but he regarded us
+with suspicion and remained silent. Since the close
+of the rebellion, when the natives hid themselves
+among these rocks, they have been very suspicious
+of white people, for fear some one may desire to capture
+them. It was only after repeated assurances
+by the boys that we were missionaries, and their
+friends, that he consented to direct us.</p>
+
+<p>Finally we reached the home of Buka, the man
+who had taken little Lomanzwana. His kraal was
+situated up among the rocks in one of nature's fortresses.
+Here, in this desolate place, in the midst
+of densest heathendom, was the girl. Her husband
+was a cripple and very pagan looking. But what
+could we do amid such rock-bound customs as held
+these people? Nothing. With hearts lifted to the
+Lord in prayer we tried to point them to the Lamb
+of God. The man regarded us with wild-looking
+eyes, and listened with seemingly dull, uncomprehending<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span>
+ears to our stammering tongues. When he
+was asked a question, he looked at those about him
+and wanted to know what sort of an answer the
+missionary desired; then he would answer accordingly.
+In another hut was a very old woman, the
+mother of Buka, who was an imbecile and was fed
+like an animal. We retraced our steps with heavy
+hearts, but for many a day the memory of that visit
+haunted us.</p>
+
+<p>As for the girl, the man did not pay sufficiently
+promptly to satisfy Mapita, so he finally took her
+home. Later she was sold to a man who paid a
+large sum. Here they quarreled and the girl returned
+home, and the pay had to be given back. It
+is needless to say that the girl was thoroughly demoralized
+by this time. She was finally disposed of
+to another man.</p>
+
+<p>In February, 1899, Matshuba came to stay at the
+mission and attend school. Ever since the mission
+had opened he had been a great help to us in acquiring
+the language, and as he could understand
+us more readily, he often explained our meaning to
+others. He knew too just how many Zulu words
+were in our vocabulary, and in speaking to us he
+adapted himself to our limited understanding. He
+also gradually acquired the English. He made rapid
+progress in school; and as the Light came to him he
+accepted it. He did not do this all at one bound,
+but, as it were, according to his capacity to understand
+the meaning of the Atonement and kindred
+themes. The day came when he saw himself a great
+sinner, and he repented in truth. He was the only
+boy staying at the mission for a time, so that many<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span>
+and various duties fell to his lot. These he performed
+faithfully, except that he was somewhat
+careless in herding the donkeys, and lost them.</p>
+
+<p>One evening he came to the door of our hut in
+great perplexity and said that he would like to have
+a talk. He came and sat down on the hearthstone,
+then said, "I prayed this morning, but the donkeys
+were lost at any rate." By his language he evidently
+thought that if he prayed the Lord would do the
+watching. This gave us an opportunity of telling
+of David, the faithful shepherd boy, and of the
+"Great Shepherd," who told us to both "watch and
+pray." The boy then told something of his early
+life. Among other things he said:</p>
+
+<p>"Father used to tell me to go and watch the gardens
+so that the animals would not come and take
+our food. I did not watch well and the animals destroyed
+the crops and father was grieved."</p>
+
+<p>"Are you sorry now that you did not obey?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh! yes, indeed," was the reply. "If I might
+live that time over again, I would be a better boy."</p>
+
+<p>He continued, "When father was sick they said
+he was bewitched. So they tried to find out who
+had bewitched him. Once, before he died, he said
+that he would like to see a missionary. <i>Umfundisi</i>
+[Missionary] Engle should have come sooner, before
+father died."</p>
+
+<p>"Matshuba, did you ever hear of Jesus before we
+came?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, Missus," he replied, "I heard His Name
+once, and I wanted my mother to go where there
+was a missionary; then the Lord sent you."</p>
+
+<p>Here was this dear soul, groping in the night and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span>
+reaching out for something better than he had
+known, he knew not what. When the Light comes
+to him he is ready to accept it. There are many
+other such boys, and girls too, all over Africa, who
+are waiting for some one to bring them the Light.
+Is it you? There are many other old men to whom
+the message will come too late unless some one
+makes haste and brings it.</p>
+
+<p>Matshuba had many hard battles to fight, and
+often have we heard him out among the rocks praying
+for help and victory. I well remember the first
+day on which he prayed openly before the school.
+Almost the hush of death fell upon all, for it was a
+new era to them. One of their number had learned
+to pray like the missionaries. There was no hut at
+first for him to sleep in, so he lay in the tent. One
+morning he came out, his face all aglow. He said,
+"I saw Jesus last night. He came and stood before
+me. He was tall and bright looking."</p>
+
+<p>Some months after he came, another boy, Tebengo,
+came to stay at the mission. He, too, had
+been attending school and desired to be a Christian.
+Bright, impulsive, but easily misled, in his instability
+he was just the opposite of the more steadfast
+Matshuba. There were also others of the schoolboys
+who were stepping out into the light, and
+among these were Kelenki and Siyaya, who were
+Mashona people. Their home seemed more heathenish
+than some of the others, but these boys, with
+others from their kraal, appeared earnest in the
+service of the Master.</p>
+
+<p>A Sunday-school was also opened this first year
+and proved quite interesting to the younger ones.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span>
+On the first Christmas Day the natives were invited
+for services and about ninety came&mdash;the largest
+number up to that time. After the services they
+were invited to a large, unfinished hut, and all were
+treated to bread and tea and some salt. Father and
+Mother Engle sat down among them and partook
+of bread and tea with them. This greatly delighted
+all, and it was just as much of a pleasure to our
+elder and wife, who always enjoyed mingling with
+the people. The rest of us saw that all were served.
+The people were very thankful for the treat, and
+all expressed their gratitude in a forcible manner.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER SEVEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Reinforcements, and Progress of the Work</h3>
+
+
+<p>The various departments of the mission were
+gradually enlarging, and as the work increased
+the burden fell more and more heavily
+upon Elder Engle. It will be remembered that
+efforts were made to secure an assistant for him
+before we left America, but without success. In
+April, 1899, however, we gladly welcomed into our
+midst three new missionaries from America. These
+were Mr. and Mrs. Clifford Cress and Mr. Isaac
+Lehman. They were able and consecrated messengers,
+and a valuable addition to the work. With
+them came also several large boxes of clothing,
+cloth for the sewing school, and other goods which
+had been donated for the mission. About this time
+also the Board sent out some farm implements, a
+large Studebaker wagon, a two-seated spring wagon,
+and a bell for calling the people to services.
+More donkeys had already been purchased by Elder
+Engle, so that the question of traveling, and of
+bringing out supplies from Bulawayo, was most
+satisfactorily settled.</p>
+
+<p>Shortly after this we also had the pleasure of welcoming
+Mr. and Mrs. Van Blunk, of the Christian
+Holiness Association. These had come to make
+their headquarters near us and engage in evangelistic
+work. We had now quite a little company of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span>
+Christian workers&mdash;nine in number&mdash;and had very
+inspiring and encouraging English services, as well
+as those in the native tongue. Although Brother
+Van Blunks were under a different Board and their
+work was in a measure separate from the rest, yet
+they were spiritual and consecrated missionaries
+and of great assistance in exalting Christ among the
+people.</p>
+
+<p>On account of the large increase in the number of
+workers, it was necessary also to enlarge our dwelling
+place. During this season five new huts were
+erected, including those for the natives, making the
+mission premises look like a little village. A building
+for church services and school was also greatly
+needed. During the entire rainy season these had
+been held in the tent, which was proving inadequate
+for the growing congregation. So Brethren Engle
+and Lehman, with the assistance of the natives,
+erected a very respectable looking church building
+of poles and mud, 16 x 30 feet. It was furnished
+with plank seats and good tables, and Brother Van
+Blunk donated glass for windows. Long poles of
+native timber were then secured and a framework
+was made for the bell. This being hoisted and
+fastened in place could be heard at many of the
+kraals. It also assisted in informing the people of
+the Sabbath.</p>
+
+<p>At sunset on Saturday evening it was rung a long
+time to inform the people that the morrow was the
+Sabbath, and that they should lay aside their work
+and prepare for rest and service. Later in the work
+some of us agreed to take that time for secret prayer
+in behalf of the people, that the Lord might incline<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span>
+their hearts to come to the house of the Lord.
+After there were a number of native Christians,
+they too joined us in prayer, each going to his
+private place. One evening we were greatly impressed
+to see Mazwi, the boy who was ringing
+slowly, down on his knees, as if, while he was
+calling the people to prepare for worship on the
+morrow, he was also calling upon God to persuade
+them to come. We were often made to feel too
+that the Lord especially honored some of those
+prayers.</p>
+
+<p>The sight of so many people about us being destitute
+of clothing had greatly touched Brother Engle's
+heart, and he had written to America about it.
+The result was a large box of clothing generously
+donated. He gave each of the headmen and the
+chief a shirt and a pair of trousers, and told them to
+come to services. They seemed to be, and no doubt
+were, very grateful for the favor bestowed, and a
+very few made good use of the garments. Others
+came once or twice clothed, and then nothing more
+was seen of them or their clothing. In less than a
+year these latter ones came again and asked for
+clothes, stating that they had nothing to wear to
+church. It is needless to say that by this time the
+missionaries had learned their lesson, and those desiring
+to be clothed had to work for it. A number
+did come and work for clothing and were well paid,
+but what they did with the clothing was often a
+mystery. Shirts they generally liked and appreciated,
+and sometimes the other garments would be
+sewed up in a wonderful manner and do duty for a
+shirt or coat, or they would answer for a grain bag.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Day by day we were learning the nature of the
+people about us, and were obliged to adjust ourselves
+to our changed understanding. They are all
+children and must be dealt with accordingly. The
+missionary soon finds that he not only needs
+much of the love that "never faileth," but also a
+large supply of patience continually in his work.
+He must also be firm in his dealings with the natives
+and make them know their place. They will respect
+him all the more if he does this in the proper spirit.
+Old children are more difficult to handle than young
+ones, as they are more unreasonable and more set
+in their ways. They generally do not feel under any
+obligations to keep their promises to you, but they
+fully expect you to keep yours to them, otherwise
+they will lose confidence in you.</p>
+
+<p>When one first goes to the heathen and sees them
+in their ignorance and superstition, seemingly lacking
+everything to make them comfortable, he is led
+to speak much of Christ and His love, thus seeking
+to win them. They begin to say within themselves,
+"Well, if He loves us, He will do us no harm, so we
+need not trouble ourselves about Him," and they
+continue, as vigorously as ever, to seek to appease
+the malevolent spirits, who they think are seeking
+to harm them. Then the missionary thinks he
+should pursue another course. He soon becomes
+somewhat discouraged and disgusted with their indifference
+and hypocrisy, and is often led to the
+opposite extreme, and dwells much on hell and condemnation,
+which tends to harden his hearers. Finally
+he reaches a golden mean. He realizes that
+these poor souls about him have had no opportunity<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span>
+of rising above their degrading surroundings, and
+he must take them as they are, and seek by the
+ability which God giveth to live the Christ life
+among them and lift them to a higher plane of living.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus088.png" width="600" height="471" alt="Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse Engle." title="Matopo Mission Church in 1899. " />
+<span class="caption">Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse Engle.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The Sunday-school had been chiefly for the
+younger ones, but we concluded to add a class for
+the older people. This was greatly appreciated by
+some of them, especially Mapita. It began with few
+in number; but as time passed it gradually increased
+in attendance and interest. Mapita seemed
+so eager to learn in those days, and would often look
+with longing eyes into the Kingdom, and the very
+joy of the Lord would seem to be reflected in his
+face, but he was afraid to step over. He gained a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span>
+great deal of knowledge of the Scriptures too, and
+he was not slow to tell other people.</p>
+
+<p>All the services were more or less informal, and
+any one was free to ask questions; yet in the Sabbath-school
+class many felt more at home and often
+expressed themselves freely in regard to the difficulties
+in the way of their becoming Christians. One
+day, after we had explained the lesson, Nyuka, a
+witch doctor, said:</p>
+
+<p>"I believe all you say, and that Christ is able to
+save us, but what can I do? My hands are tied. I
+have five wives."</p>
+
+<p>Nothing had been said about a plurality of wives,
+but intuitively he realized that it was a formidable
+obstacle in his way. We could only tell him that if
+he really reached the place where he desired to be
+saved, the Lord would open the way for him.</p>
+
+<p>As question after question arose in the class, the
+answer often given would be to open the Bible and
+read a portion suitable for the question. One day,
+after this had been done several times, one of the
+men exclaimed, "It is no use to argue any more; that
+Book knows everything." The difficulty generally
+was that, although they believed the Word, they
+were not willing to take the Way. The darkness
+seemed too dense, the effort required was too great,
+the transformation was too absolute for these old
+people, rocked in the cradle of paganism for generations.
+It is the younger generation that are chiefly
+benefited by the mission work. Sometimes some of
+the others, seeing this, will say, "I am too old; you
+should have come sooner."</p>
+
+<p>Then again the missionary sometimes meets with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span>
+a Caleb or a Joshua. He receives some encouragement,
+from even the old. Allow me to give an account
+of a visit made at this time:</p>
+
+<p>We are going to visit an old queen. It is not our
+first visit to her, but we are informed that she is ill
+at present and her friends are fearful that she might
+die, as she is very, very old. Sisters Heise, Cress,
+and myself are going. We carry a little bread,
+cocoa, and a New Testament. She is living at the
+kraal of Mapita, our faithful helper. He also has
+been sick with fever, but he is somewhat better today,
+and is sitting out of doors by the fire, where his
+wife and children are preparing their evening meal.
+This consists of peanut gravy, kafir-corn porridge,
+and pumpkin. After greeting these, we pass on to
+the hut where the queen lies. We sit down on the
+ground, so that we may look into the little opening
+which serves as doorway. The woman in charge
+invites us to enter, and we crawl into the hut. In
+the center of the hut is a fire with four large stones
+around it; the smoke finding its way into our eyes
+or out through the straw roof, for there is no chimney
+and no window. Near this fireplace lies the
+poor old queen. Her bed consists of a large hide
+spread on the hard, polished earthen floor, and a
+block of wood serves for a pillow. A blanket is
+thrown over her body. We offer the cocoa, which
+the sick one gratefully accepts, but the bread is refused.
+We then go to her side and try to point her
+to the Lamb of God, which taketh away the sin of
+the world, and tell her of the home prepared for all
+those who love God. She tries to listen, and sometimes
+responds to the question asked. Of course<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span>
+our knowledge of the language is still imperfect, and
+it is more difficult for the old to understand than
+for the young. When the sick one does not fully
+comprehend, the nurse, who is Matshuba's mother,
+explains. Sitting here by this old woman, and seeing
+her stretch out her thin hands to the warm
+stones at the fire, we forget that vermin surrounds
+us or that our clothes might become soiled; our
+hearts only overflow with a desire to let a flood of
+light into the soul of the poor one before us. As
+the talk continues she does seem to grasp some of
+the spiritual truths, and she gives a more ready
+assent to the questions asked:</p>
+
+<p>"Do you desire us to pray for you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Oh! yes," she exclaimed with feeling. "I always
+love to have you pray to Jesus for me."</p>
+
+<p>Kneeling there we offer prayers that the Lord
+would speak to this dear soul and prepare her to
+meet Him. Her farewell word and clinging clasp
+of the hand on our departure cause us to feel that
+light is breaking, and that she, in her feeble way, is,
+by faith, taking hold of Christ. Once before, when
+we visited her, she too offered up her feeble petition.</p>
+
+<p>We emerge from the hut and stop a few minutes
+to speak with Mapita and his family, and offer up a
+word of prayer. The sun has already set, so we
+hastily bid them adieu and start for home, but not
+before they have sent their respects to Father and
+Mother Engle.</p>
+
+<p>Thus ends one of the many visits we are called
+upon to make. But who is this old queen, amid
+such unqueenly surroundings? She was one of the
+numerous wives of Mzilikazi, the founder and first<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span>
+king of the Matabele tribe. He had a large number
+of wives, not fewer than forty or fifty, and this was
+one of them. The natives here claim that she was
+his chief wife and the mother of Lobengula, the
+king. We think that, however, is very doubtful,
+although the husband of the woman where she stays
+was one of Lobengula's most trusted men.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 450px;">
+<img src="images/illus092.png" width="450" height="346" alt="Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness." title="Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness." />
+<span class="caption">Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>This poor queen in her younger days had no doubt
+plenty, with slaves to wait upon her and do her bidding.
+Now, in her old age, she tries to work
+for a living by cultivating the soil, and growing
+her own food. If her change of fortune is instrumental
+in leading her to Christ, she is richer than
+she knows. She will not have all her good things in
+life. We have been trying to help her also in temporal
+affairs.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>She arose from this sick bed and afterwards visited
+us. One day, when we were again speaking of
+Christ, her face lighted up and she exclaimed, "I
+am happy because Jesus lives in here," putting her
+hand on her breast. We feel, as Sister Heise expressed
+it, "One would look upon her as one of
+the first fruits of our mission work in Africa."</p>
+
+<p>Although the work among most of the older people
+thus far appeared to make little progress, if we
+may judge by their lives, yet a number of the
+pupils were steadfast. As far as could be ascertained
+they had accepted Christ as their Savior and
+were walking out in all the light they had. Since
+they were eager to follow the Lord in all things it
+was considered advisable to baptize some. Accordingly,
+after the little church was completed, they
+were examined as to their faith. In August, 1899,
+nine boys and one girl were by Elder Engle led into
+one of those sparkling streams and dipped three
+times into the name of the Trinity, and thus put on
+the Lord by baptism. It was a time of great rejoicing
+and encouragement to the missionaries when
+this was done, and they could gather around the
+table of the Lord, with some dark-skinned brethren,
+who had so lately come out of pagan darkness. Although
+these were but babes, yet the missionaries
+felt that the Lord had set His seal upon the work.</p>
+
+<p>It might seem that we were somewhat hasty in thus
+so soon receiving into church fellowship. The mission
+had been opened only a little over a year, and
+our imperfect knowledge of the language, as well as
+of the native character, made it scarcely possible
+for them to be well instructed in the things of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span>
+Lord. There was no cause to think, however, that
+they were not honest and sincere so far as they
+knew. There was a radical change in their lives,
+and some were steadfast, but others had not fully
+counted the cost and soon fell back, if indeed they
+were really saved. One of the oldest, who was over
+twenty years of age, stood well until he went to
+work for a European, who made sport of him, and
+the boy gradually fell back into his former habits.
+Great pains were taken to lead them on to know the
+Lord.</p>
+
+<p>During this year the war known as the Boer War
+began in South Africa. It was a conflict which
+seemed inevitable between the wealthy English
+mine owners and their Dutch rulers. We are perhaps
+safe in saying that heavy taxation without
+sufficient representation was the chief cause of the
+war. The first event of importance in connection
+with it was the siege of Kimberley, the great diamond
+field, and the headquarters of Mr. Rhodes at
+the time. This occurred October 14. The war then
+spread through other parts of South Africa and to
+the border of Rhodesia, but did not extend into it.
+English troops were, however, stationed there to
+repel an invasion should one be attempted.</p>
+
+<p>The war did not directly affect us, but indirectly
+it did. By the siege of Kimberley, and later that of
+Mafeking, and the destruction of the railroad our
+line of supplies from Cape Town was cut off, consequently
+prices in Rhodesia rose very rapidly.
+Sugar was soon two shillings (48c) per pound, flour
+about three guineas ($15) per one hundred pounds,
+and other groceries in proportion. With little<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span>
+money on hand, and the prospects of receiving more
+under such conditions uncertain, famine might have
+stared us in the face. There was no need to be
+uneasy, however; the Lord and the forethought of
+Father and Mother Engle prepared us for such an
+emergency. Shortly before this the Charter Company
+had placed some cattle on the mission farm,
+and we had the use of milk. Butter, eggs, and vegetables
+for a time brought a very high price in Bulawayo
+market, and with all these the mission was
+supplied. The little spring wagon, drawn by four
+donkeys, went to Bulawayo nearly every week for
+a time, taking in produce which brought a high
+price, and we were in turn able to pay a high price
+for groceries and food for the table; so that, during
+the darkest days of the war, all our needs were supplied.</p>
+
+<p>Occasionally disquieting rumors would reach us
+that the Boers were about to force their way
+through and come into Rhodesia. The natives
+themselves were not a little interested in the outcome
+of the war. They had no newspapers or
+system of telegraphy like the white people, but they
+had a means of gaining news which to them was
+much more effective. This was by means of communication
+among themselves. How they so
+quickly secured news of the various engagements in
+the south and the result of each engagement was a
+mystery. We on our part, situated among them as
+we were, and conscious that there were many who
+were still seething under British rule, could not
+avoid wondering what might be the outcome were
+the British defeated. On the other hand, many of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span>
+the natives seemed to prefer British rule to that of
+the Dutch. They chose to remain as they were
+rather than change masters.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER EIGHT</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Extension of the Work Followed by Dark
+Days</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>Verily, verily, I say unto you, Except a corn of wheat
+fall into the ground and die, it abideth alone; but if it
+die, it bringeth forth much fruit.&mdash;St. John 12: 24.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>Matopo Mission was only one little light
+in the surrounding darkness, and it was
+hoped that other stations might be opened
+in time. So after Brother and Sister Cress came,
+or as soon as they had some little knowledge of the
+language and of the work, they desired to open
+another station. After looking the country over,
+they felt led to a place up among the hills near the
+kraal of Buka, of whom mention was made earlier
+in these pages. There were a number of kraals in
+the immediate vicinity, and the location seemed a
+good one, except that it was somewhat near Matopo
+Mission. They decided to move out in November,
+and at that time they, together with the tent and
+supplies, were taken to their new station. Unfortunately
+a heavy rain came on while they were on
+the way and the ground was thoroughly soaked
+before they had an opportunity to pitch their tent.
+They concluded, however, to remain at their place
+and build. It was named Entabeni Mission.</p>
+
+<p>The building progressed satisfactorily, and they
+held services on each Sunday for about two months
+or a little over. They felt encouraged in their work<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span>
+and the natives interested. At the Christmas holidays
+they came to spend the time with us, and we
+had a very enjoyable time with the natives. The
+third week in January, 1900, a messenger arrived to
+inform us that Sister Cress had been stricken with
+fever. A conveyance was immediately sent to
+the place to bring her to Matopo Mission, and by
+the time that reached their mission Brother Cress
+also was sick. Both were brought to the mission
+and made as comfortable as possible. At first no
+one considered their illness serious, for our party
+had thus far been enjoying good health since the
+work opened. Other complications set in in connection
+with Sister Cress' illness, and she gradually
+grew worse. For twenty-four hours she lay unconscious
+and then rallied and seemed quite bright.
+We were all present&mdash;Engles, Van Blunks, Sister
+Heise, Brother Lehman, and myself&mdash;when she rallied.
+She requested that prayer be offered for her
+recovery. This was done and we felt that she would
+gain strength, but it was not to be. In half an
+hour that sweet young life passed to be with God.
+This was February 8, 1900. All through her sickness
+she felt perfectly resigned to the Lord's will,
+whether for life or death.</p>
+
+<p>We felt that we could not spare this saintly woman,
+so well fitted both by nature and by grace to
+shine for God. She had laid her all upon the altar
+for Africa, and often expressed herself that she
+wanted to spend her life in behalf of this people.
+She had been in Africa only nine and one-half
+months, yet she had entered heart and soul into the
+work of the Lord, and was rapidly acquiring the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span>
+language, so that she could converse with the people.
+She had formed some of the women into a sewing
+class, uniting this work with religious instructions,
+and endearing herself to all with whom she came
+into contact. She loved the people and was willing
+and ready to undertake any kind of work that came
+to her. She was especially gifted in prayer, and it
+was always an inspiration to the rest of us to listen
+to her heartfelt petition. Why the Lord thus early
+in her missionary career took her to Himself, we
+know not; but when the things of earth shall be
+revealed, when we shall know as we are known,
+then all will be clear.</p>
+
+<p>Brethren Engle and Lehman made a coffin; we
+covered it within with white muslin and without
+with black cloth, and thus laid the body away. Mr.
+Eyles, of Bulawayo, was interested in the mission
+and occasionally visited us and spoke to the natives,
+since he had good command of the Zulu language.
+On this occasion he consented to come out and
+preach the funeral sermon. The chief men of the people
+carried her to her last resting place beneath the
+Umkuni tree, and they mingled their tears with
+ours. The occasion was made more sad by the fact
+that the husband was still ill and unable to view the
+corpse or attend the funeral.</p>
+
+<p>During the sickness of these two people we greatly
+appreciated the presence and help of Brother and
+Sister Van Blunk, who still lived near the mission.
+Both were very kind in assisting to care for the
+sick and also in the last sad rites. Shortly afterwards
+they moved to Bulawayo and made that the
+headquarters of their evangelistic work.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus100.png" width="600" height="348" alt="Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission." title="Elder Engle and Donkey Team" />
+<span class="caption">Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission.</span>
+</div>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span></p>
+<p>Brother Cress recovered from his illness, but concluded
+that it was best for him to return to America,
+and wrote the Board accordingly. He felt his loss
+keenly. The work in general resumed its normal
+condition until the last week in March, when our
+bishop and overseer, Elder Engle, became sick. He
+had been very busy with the work, and in his frequent
+trips to Bulawayo, sometimes in the rain,
+he may have exposed himself. His condition did
+not seem serious, and he was not obliged to keep his
+bed continually. On April 2 he walked to a garden
+near by, and when he returned he again lay down.
+He ate heartily of the dinner prepared for him, after
+which his wife came to the dining-room and ate
+with us. At the close of our 3 P. M. dinner she
+went to her room, but returned at once and asked
+me to fill the hot water bottle and come over. I
+did so and found Brother Engle having a heavy chill
+and speaking the Zulu language rapidly, seemingly
+unconscious of our presence. We endeavored in
+every way to help him, but soon found that he was
+rapidly becoming paralyzed. Sister Heise and
+Brother Lehman were called and a consultation
+held. It was decided to send a messenger to the fort,
+ten miles away, and from there telephone to Bulawayo
+for a doctor. Brother Cress had left that day
+to go as far as the fort on his way to Bulawayo, and
+he was also to be informed.</p>
+
+<p>All night we watched by the Elder's bedside, but
+there was nothing that could be done. Brother
+Cress arrived near noon the next day, but the doctor
+did not arrive in time. That was a dark time as
+he lay paralyzed and unconscious in the little mud<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span>
+hut he called home, far from his children, far from
+the comforts of civilization, with none of his family
+or relatives, save his devoted wife, by his side. As
+it became evident that the end was near, that heroic
+mother, who had been such a worthy companion in
+all his labors, stooped over and imprinted on his
+face a kiss for each of their seven sons in far-away
+America. At 5 P. M., April 3, he breathed his last.
+Thus, in less than two months from the date of
+Sister Cress' death, Elder Engle also was called
+home. The loss of our sister was great, but this
+seemed to be a still greater blow on the mission.</p>
+
+<p>He was so absorbed in the work, and no sacrifice
+was too great, no labor too hard, for him to endure.
+Perhaps, if he had spared himself a little more, he
+might have been able to continue longer in the
+work. Who knows? The language was difficult
+for one at his age, yet he was making heroic efforts
+to acquire it, and could make himself pretty well
+understood. We have seen him, after reading the
+Word, stand before the people, with the tears running
+down his face in his great love for them and
+in his desire to help them to Christ. And the natives
+knew that he loved them and they in turn
+loved him and greatly lamented his departure. The
+language of many of them might be summed up in
+that of one woman. As she stood by his coffin,
+weeping, she said:</p>
+
+<p>"He was good to me. He gave me salt, he gave
+me calico. What shall we do without him?"</p>
+
+<p>It seemed that his life work was finished. He
+had had the desire of his heart, in that he had been
+permitted to reach Africa and see a work started in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span>
+the wilds. He had been privileged to see something
+of the travail of soul by beholding some step into
+the Kingdom. Now he had gone to hear the welcome
+message, "Well done, good and faithful
+servant ... enter thou into the joy of thy Lord."</p>
+
+<p>This time it was Brethren Cress and Lehman who
+made the coffin. There was no lumber on hand,
+but they removed some from the hut doors for the
+purpose. Again we covered it to contain the form
+of our elder. Mr. Eyles could not meet with us at
+this time, and the Van Blunks were away; but two
+of the officials from Fort Usher were present, and
+a number of natives, not so many, however, as at
+the previous time. No doubt they were becoming
+suspicious of this oft-repeated death. The white
+men present, together with some of the natives, carried
+the body to its last resting place beside Sister
+Cress. Brother Cress spoke in English to the white
+people present, while the natives were addressed
+by the writer from 2 Tim. 4: 7-8.</p>
+
+<p>The devoted wife had been wonderfully sustained
+by a Higher Power through all this sad scene. She
+had been called here, far from her home and family,
+to lay away her husband, but she realized that she
+was not alone. When, however, the funeral was
+over, the effects of the shock and of the strain
+through which she had been passing were manifest.
+She too took her bed with the dread African fever.</p>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus104.png" width="600" height="346" alt="MATOPO CEMETERY.
+Elder Jesse Engle. Mrs. Cress.   Mrs. E. Doner.
+Elder Jacob Engle at his father&#39;s grave and Elder John Sheets." title="Cemetery" />
+<span class="caption">MATOPO CEMETERY.
+Elder Jesse Engle. Mrs. Cress.   Mrs. E. Doner.
+Elder Jacob Engle at his father&#39;s grave and Elder John Sheets.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The Seventh Day Adventist missionaries, who
+had been so kind to us when we first came to Bulawayo,
+sent letters of condolence as soon as they
+heard of our bereavement, and offered the services
+of their physician, should we need him. In this<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span>
+emergency we sent for him to come and see Mother
+Engle. He rode the fifty miles on horseback to
+come to minister to her and to give us instructions
+as to how to treat the disease. This was something
+which we greatly needed and appreciated, and it has
+been of great service to us in later years. He would
+accept no compensation for his long and tiresome
+journey. Such are the big hearts one finds in the
+interior of Africa. They are enlarged to take in
+more of the Spirit of the Master. All was done that
+could possibly be done for Mother Engle, so that
+she might gain her health sufficiently to return to
+America with Brother Cress. She continued to
+have relapses of the fever for three months, and it
+was not until July 19 that she was able to make the
+journey.</p>
+
+<p>Brother Cress' stay of sixteen months in Africa
+had brought great loss to him, but the Lord had
+sustained him. We were sorry to lose him as well
+as Mother Engle in the work. She never felt called
+of herself to go as a missionary, but only to be with
+her husband. When he was led of the Lord to go
+forth, she most cheerfully bade farewell to her family
+and all that was dear to a mother's heart and
+went with her husband, neither of them knowing
+whether they would be permitted to see their family
+again. She was not merely a companion to him,
+but a most devoted helpmate, not only in all that
+can possibly mean in civilized lands; but larger still,
+in the heartaches, the weariness, the loneliness, and
+the discouragements that come to a missionary.
+How often the names of their loved ones would be
+spoken by these two! How they would linger over<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span>
+the letters that came, and yet never a word of complaining
+or regret that they had left all for this.
+When Elder Engle died we felt that we had lost a
+father; so, when she left for America, we realized
+that the mother and homemaker was gone.</p>
+
+<p>Before their departure a most important event
+transpired. I refer to the marriage, on May 1, of
+Mr. Isaac Lehman and Miss Alice Heise, by Rev.
+Van Blunk. This was to have taken place earlier,
+but was delayed by the sorrowful events through
+which we were passing. Even the day of the wedding
+was saddened by a most serious relapse of
+Mother Engle, and we felt quite anxious on her
+account. This was the first opportunity for the natives
+to see something of a Christian wedding, and
+we believe they were impressed with the difference
+between a Christian and a pagan marriage. Brother
+Lehman was a consecrated young man and had
+from the first taken hold of the work along all lines
+with zeal and readiness. He had also made rapid
+strides in the language. Sister Heise, too, ever since
+the opening of the mission, had been a most able
+and efficient worker, so that both were well
+equipped to do effectual service for the Master.</p>
+
+<p>All of us accompanied Mother Engle and Brother
+Cress to Bulawayo, where they rested for a day and
+then took the train for Cape Town, while we returned
+to continue the work. For a time nine white
+workers had been at Matopo Mission, and in less
+than six months the number had been reduced to
+three. Those left, however, were not discouraged.
+May 23 of the same year one of them wrote to the
+<i>Evangelical Visitor</i>:<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span></p>
+
+<blockquote><p>"He that keepeth thee will not slumber." This is the
+Father's promise to all His dear children, not only to
+you who are sheltered in Christian homes, but also to
+us who are in the wilds of Africa. We have just as much
+faith in the promise today as when to outward appearances
+everything was more secure. Your hearts with
+ours have no doubt been torn by the sad messages which
+have crossed the waters during the few months just past,
+and some one may be even tempted to doubt whether it
+was the Lord's will for us to come to Africa. Beloved,
+does England doubt the outcome of the deadly conflict
+raging in South Africa because she has already lost thousands
+of men? Is her courage failing? No; far from
+it. Money and men are continually pouring into the
+country and soon the independence of two states will be
+a thing of the past. Shall we as Christian soldiers have
+less faith in the King of kings? Shall we give up the
+conflict because two have fallen by our side? No; not if
+all men forsake us, for with God we still have a majority.
+While our hearts feel bereft by the departure of our beloved
+colaborers, we still have confidence in our Great
+Captain, and we know that He never lost a battle.</p></blockquote>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER NINE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>The Battle Is not Yours, but God's</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>Wherefore take unto you the whole armour of God,
+that ye may be able to withstand in the evil day, and
+having done all, to stand.&mdash;Eph. 6: 13.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>The missionary going among the heathen
+must realize that he is about to engage in a
+warfare, and that the conflict will be fierce
+and long. He is assailing the great enemy of souls
+in his stronghold. The fight is on continually and
+one must keep armed for battle. More important
+yet than this the missionary should remember that
+he is under orders and that the work is not his but
+the Lord's.</p>
+
+<p>The loss of our fellow-soldiers was most keenly
+felt, and there were some severe tests to face. The
+work had become disorganized by the continued illness
+and the deaths, when all our energies had been
+needed in caring for those about us. Encouraging
+letters, however, came from the homeland and the
+Mission Board, so that we realized that prayers
+were being offered in our behalf and in behalf of
+the work. We also expected that reinforcements
+would be forthcoming in the Lord's own time. So,
+under the leadership of our Great Captain, the army
+was again set in array and the conflict continued.</p>
+
+<p>We were pleased to note that the people stood by
+us nobly in this extremity, even though Satan had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span>
+put forth every effort to defeat the work. Some
+who had started to follow the Lord saw that they
+had become indifferent and renewed their covenant.
+There were four boys who were staying at the mission
+at this time, and they came one evening and
+said they would like to have a talk. This was not
+so strange, as we often had little confidential chats
+with them. On this particular evening they came
+in and sat down. Then, without any preliminary
+remarks, Matshuba arose and made a complete confession
+of his past life. He then sat down and
+Kelenki arose and began to do the same. I said,</p>
+
+<p>"Boys, if you desire we will call Brother and
+Sister Lehman, that they may hear likewise."</p>
+
+<p>They replied, "Yes, Miss, do so, for we desire to
+confess everything and have all wiped away, and we
+do not want to repeat our wrongdoings, for we
+want to be ready when Jesus comes."</p>
+
+<p>So one of them called the Lehmans, and beginning
+again they arose, one by one, and told of their
+past life. When each one had finished he would
+turn around and inquire of the rest if he had told
+everything. Three of them were baptized members,
+and they evidently had been having a meeting in
+their hut and became concerned about their condition.
+They had not been guilty of any new sins,
+but were in doubt as to their standing before God,
+and wanted pardon and cleansing. They had taken
+1 John 1: 9 very literally. When the confessions
+were finished we all knelt in prayer; and after we
+had prayed, they too most earnestly besought the
+Lord that they might be set completely free from
+their past life. When they arose to their feet their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span>
+faces were shining and they said "God had heard
+and answered."</p>
+
+<p>Then, as they sat there, they told of their old lives
+and of the lives of the people about us, until we
+felt that we were just beginning to know the people
+among whom we were situated. Conditions which,
+up to that time, they had been timid of telling, for
+fear of their people, they now boldly and fearlessly
+exposed, and they seemed to be done once and forever
+with their heathen past. Our hearts went up in
+gratitude to the Father, and our eyes were opened
+more and more to see the real need of this people
+and the obstacles in their way of becoming Christians.</p>
+
+<p>People reared in Christian homes, with an entire
+Bible which they can read from childhood, with the
+privileges of church and Sunday-school, with good
+literature and hymns and many other advantages
+which might be mentioned, cannot possibly, by any
+stretch of imagination, put themselves in the place
+of those who are deprived of all these; and not only
+that, but who, from infancy, have been in an atmosphere
+of ignorance and superstition, reeking with
+influences the most foul and loathsome imaginable.
+Then, too, is it to be wondered at that when people,
+who have been brought up amid surroundings the
+most helpful possible, spiritually, and the most conducive
+to growth in grace, grow lean in soul and
+backslide&mdash;I say is it to be wondered at that the
+Christians in heathen lands, in their desperate struggle
+against such adverse and degrading surroundings,
+sometimes relapse into heathendom? Not only
+is it not to be wondered at, but it is positively surprising<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span>
+and a great cause for rejoicing among missionaries,
+that so many grasping hold of the Everlasting
+Arm do once and forever shake off the bog
+and filth of the bottomless pit and stand as monuments
+of His power to save to the uttermost.</p>
+
+<p>During the dry season of 1900 an aggressive campaign
+against Satan and his followers among the
+rocks and strongholds was begun, for we felt that
+the Lord would have us press the battle to the
+gates. During the rainy seasons, when people are
+busy in their gardens, and when there is a great
+deal of sickness, both school and evangelistic work
+suffer, so that it is necessary to make the best use
+of the dry season. As soon as the crops were gathered
+the school at the mission increased in numbers
+and interest, and Brother and Sister Lehman opened
+a school at the village of Chief Hluganisa. They
+rode back and forth day by day, and when they
+were unable to go two of the boys were sent to
+teach. The attendance and interest there were encouraging.</p>
+
+<p>What of this chief, who had so kindly received
+the missionaries two years before? It would be a
+pleasure to be able to report that he had opened his
+heart to accept Christ as his Savior, but such was
+not the case. He was very ready to receive the
+gifts of the white man, whether from officials, missionaries,
+or any one else. He was also quite willing
+that the school should be started in his village;
+for would not this make his people wiser and more
+able to secure the good things of the earth? But
+the white man's religion, he would none of it for
+himself. He was a most troublesome beggar from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span>
+first to last. Elder Engle, had made him a present
+of a very good blanket, with which he was greatly
+pleased, but he seldom came to services. When
+he came to the mission it was always with the expectation
+of asking and receiving something.</p>
+
+<p>One day he came to pay us sort of a state visit,
+and a little later his three wives followed in order
+of their rank. We were desirous of treating them
+all kindly after their long walk to pay us this visit,
+so Mother Engle concluded to give them bread and
+tea. A plate of bread, together with a quantity of
+tea and sugar, was placed before them. We expected,
+of course, that all would receive some. The
+chief appropriated everything; emptied all the sugar
+into the tea, drank all, and ate all the bread. When
+they started home the wives went first, the lowest in
+rank preceding, to prepare everything for their lord
+and master, who followed at his leisure. One day
+one of the missionaries, tried by his cupidity and
+avarice, gave him a straight talk. He did not return
+for some months after this, not until the funeral of
+Sister Cress. Until this day he continues to be a
+rank heathen, greedy, and superstitious, and a lover
+of wives and beer.</p>
+
+<p>All three of us by this time were fairly well prepared
+in the language, and some of the boys were
+beginning to be helpful in evangelistic work. Early
+in the season the Lehmans, with one of the men as
+guide, made a tour to the southeast of us in a
+section not yet visited. They reported an interesting
+and profitable trip and met the people from six
+different kraals. As it was a section of raw heathendom,
+they were surprised to find, at one of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span>
+kraals, a woman who joined heartily in the hymn
+sung and was familiar with the words. On inquiry
+they found that when a girl she had lived at the
+house of Rev. Thomas, one of the first missionaries
+of Matabeleland. He had a station at some distance
+north of Bulawayo, and his memory is much
+revered by those natives who knew him. The brother
+and sister had the fortune, or misfortune, to be
+present at a beer drink. This is their way of getting
+a lot of work done: They make a quantity of beer;
+then call in their neighbors to help work, paying
+them with beer. It is surprising how much beer
+they can consume at such times. They often become
+quite boisterous and even intoxicated, and
+frequently quarrel and fight as a result of their debauch.
+On this occasion the men were friendly,
+but scarcely in a condition to receive the Gospel.
+The travelers returned tired, but rejoicing in the
+Lord because of another opportunity of sowing seed.</p>
+
+<p>The life of a missionary is not full of exciting
+adventures and encouraging incidents. It is very
+ordinary at times and very crushing at others. The
+ups and downs would soon wear him out did he not
+take fast hold of God and, looking up by faith, keep
+saying to Him, "Lord, this is Thy work. Do Thou
+bear the burdens, the joys, and the sorrows that
+keep crowding thick and fast upon me, and let me
+be only Thy instrument and Thy weapon of warfare."
+I remember, during the first year, I at times
+felt I was not burdened enough for the souls about
+me, and once spent long hours of prayer, asking that
+the burden might rest more heavily. I retired to
+rest. The next day the Lord answered the prayer<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span>
+of His messenger. I thought it would crush me to
+the earth, but the lesson had been learned. He knows
+how much we can bear, and we should always say,
+"As Thou wilt."</p>
+
+<p>In our visits among the people one day is much
+like another, but they must be made in order to
+keep in touch with them. August 17 I wrote as
+follows:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>
+"One more day's work for Jesus,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">One less of life for me,</span><br />
+But heaven is nearer and Christ is dearer,<br />
+<span style="margin-left: 1em;">Than yesterday to me.</span><br />
+His life and light fill all my soul tonight."<br />
+</p>
+
+<p>This being Saturday, I arose early to go out among
+the people. After taking some food, I started a little
+after sunrise with Sihlaba as guide. We went to visit
+the kraal of Siponka, about two miles distant. These people
+have been on my mind for some time. They are
+good-hearted but veritable heathen, and care only for
+the good things of this life. They are entirely too indifferent
+to come either to school or church, although two,
+who were members, live here. The downward influence
+is too strong for even them, and seemingly they have
+done according to the proverb.</p>
+
+<p>Early as it was in the morning, the people were nearly
+all away, but we found at home two men, some women,
+and boys and girls. There was an opportunity for giving
+the Gospel to them, and the Lord greatly helped in the
+presentation of His Word. They gradually became interested
+and seemed at least to have greater light. May
+the Lord send home the truth into their hearts!</p>
+
+<p>Siyaya (one of the backslidden boys) went along with
+us to the home of Amuzeze (another member). Here
+there were a number of women, one man, and some young
+people. They were more willing than usual to listen,
+also more able to understand, and Amuzeze took part in
+prayer.</p></blockquote><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span></p>
+
+<blockquote><p>From there Siyaya also went along to Umvunzi's home.
+Poor boy! he followed us around, seemingly hungry for
+the Word, but helplessly overcome by the gross darkness
+surrounding him. At this last place there were only a
+few present. The men from all these kraals had gone a
+long distance to buy goats. Here the powers of darkness
+were so great that I could not shake off the feeling
+and have victory in speaking. I wonder what my spiritual
+status would be at the end of the year, if I were obliged
+to live long amid such surroundings; and yet I have
+Christ and His Spirit in my soul and much of His Word
+written in my heart, while these poor ones have only
+generations of paganism back of them.</p>
+
+<p>We then turned our faces homeward, moving in something
+of a circle and coming first to Seba's village. This
+is not far from the mission, and yet it is our first visit
+to this place. The people seemed very glad to see us, and
+some here had the privilege for the first time of hearing
+the Gospel, and were eager to catch every word. While
+we were speaking, a native, carrying poles, was passing,
+and he put his poles down and entered to listen. He was
+a stranger to me. A tall fine-looking fellow he was. He
+informed us that he had moved near and was building a
+hut. Mapita and his wife also had entered during the
+services. Seba invited us to remain for dinner and eat
+of their <i>inkobe</i> (boiled corn), but it was not yet ready,
+so thanking him for his hospitality we continued our
+journey.</p>
+
+<p>First, the stranger invited us to go over and see his
+wife and the hut he was building, which was only a short
+distance away. We did so and here we met two women
+from our nearest kraal. We then proceeded on our homeward
+way, and had gone only a short distance when we
+met John (a Christian) and his brothers, who followed
+us home.</p>
+
+<p>On the way we stopped a few minutes at Mapita's home
+to see the children, and then reached the mission at midday.
+The boys remained a short time to talk. I then
+tidied my hut, made a dress and gave it to a little girl,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span>
+and entertained a number of native women. After our
+three o'clock dinner and worship I read and studied the
+language, and here it is evening and the close of a very
+enjoyable day.</p></blockquote>
+
+<p>This account has been given, not because there
+was anything unusual about it, but because it is
+typical of many Saturdays on the mission field, and
+some of them have been days of the most exquisite
+enjoyment we have ever known. Such days never
+seem to become monotonous. One forgets the
+long and tiresome walk if he finds eager and interested
+listeners at the end. Even if some steel their
+hearts against the Word, there is still the consciousness
+to the messenger that he has done what he
+could. Then again much of one's time on the mission
+station is spent talking to the natives who
+come. They may not be anxious for the Gospel,
+but one always hopes some word or message may
+sink into their hearts.</p>
+
+<p>The first few years of the mission, the country
+was occasionally visited by locusts, sometimes in
+such large swarms as almost to darken the face of
+the sky. These were not the seventeen-year cicadas,
+which some people are pleased to term locusts, but
+large grasshoppers, various kinds of which made
+their appearance to the great destruction of crops
+and vegetation. Sometimes the corn and the kafir
+corn would be stripped. Again, an immense swarm
+would come suddenly and alight&mdash;so that in a very
+short time the whole face of nature would be transformed
+from a bright green to a reddish brown, the
+color of the locusts&mdash;and would then as suddenly fly
+off without doing much harm. Wherever the locusts<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span>
+settled for the night, the natives would be
+there early in the morning with their nets and
+catch them for food.</p>
+
+<p>The year 1900 was especially one of these locust
+years. During the dry season, the adult locusts
+selected suitable places, remained to feed for a
+time, then deposited their eggs in the earth and
+died. As at this time the insects cannot fly, the
+natives catch them in large numbers and carry them
+home for food. One such swarm settled about two
+miles from the mission, and thither day after day
+went the women and girls to catch them. They
+would put them in bags or large baskets and carry
+them home. One could often see ten or twelve
+women walking through our premises, each one
+carrying on her head a bushel or more of locusts.
+They would cook them in large earthen pots, then
+spread them on the rocks to dry, after which they
+would go for a fresh supply. When the locusts
+were dry they would be stored away for food. In
+eating them the natives would remove head, wings,
+and legs and eat them somewhat after the manner
+of dried herring, and considered them a great delicacy,
+saying, "They are our meat." We have partaken
+of them in this manner and found them not
+unpalatable, and they are certainly a cleaner food
+than many things eaten in civilized lands. The
+natives' favorite way of preparing the locusts, however,
+was to stamp them in a stamping block, then
+cook them, together with ground peanuts, into a
+gravy to be eaten with their porridge.</p>
+
+<p>Although many of the locusts had been safely
+stowed away in the native storehouses, during this<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span>
+year, yet numbers remained in various parts of the
+country to lay their eggs in the ground. When the
+rains came and softened the ground these eggs
+hatched. After a colony hatched, the little wingless
+larvæ, or hoppers, started forth as an army, all
+going in one direction. These armies were generally
+about a rod or two in width and much greater in
+length, and woe to the young garden that came in
+their way! They would spread over it, devour the
+tender shoots, and then proceed in the same general
+direction in which they had been traveling. The
+natural grass and herbage of the country was too
+tough for them to eat. Not only one but several
+such armies coming from different directions passed
+through our gardens that season, and some of the
+cornfields had to be planted two or three times.
+One was finally left unplanted, while our potatoes
+and many of the garden vegetables were destroyed.
+At first we endeavored to fight them with fires when
+they were seen to be approaching a garden, but this
+was soon found to be useless. The missionaries felt
+the loss of their crops and vegetables, but their
+loss could not be compared with that of the poor
+natives, many of whom could not procure grain for
+a second planting, and they had nothing else to depend
+upon.</p>
+
+<p>During this year we were seriously contemplating
+an advanced step in the work, by opening the way
+for more boys and girls to come as boarders. They
+would thus be given a Christian home and be
+trained to work and to habits of cleanliness. Up to
+this time the largest number staying at one time
+was four boys; and one girl had come lately. The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span>
+day was not far distant when it would be necessary
+to erect better and more permanent dwellings, as
+the huts were already showing signs of decay; and
+if more boys could be received and these trained to
+make brick and assist in building, it would be an
+advantage both to the boys and to the mission. As
+the year drew near to a close there began to be a
+desire on the part of some of the older boys to attend
+school and perhaps come to stay with us. We
+knew enough of the native character to believe that
+it was best not to throw out any special inducement,
+as it is always best for them to desire a thing for
+themselves and to be fully persuaded in their own
+minds so that they might not be wavering.</p>
+
+<p>On New Year's Day, 1901, after the close of the
+services, a boy, probably nineteen years of age,
+stood at the open door of my hut with rather a wistful
+look on his face. He was well dressed and had
+been working for white people, but had shown no
+interest in school or in the Gospel up to this time.
+Something in his face that day prompted me to say,</p>
+
+<p>"Ndhlalambi, when are you coming to stay at the
+mission and give your heart to the Lord?"</p>
+
+<p>He promptly replied, "I am coming one week
+from tomorrow."</p>
+
+<p>Afterwards, in giving his experience, he said,
+"While I was working at the mines I became convicted
+of my wrongdoing and made up my mind
+that I would come to the missionaries and go to
+school and give my heart to Jesus. When I came
+I was afraid to ask and the Lord told Miss to ask
+me."</p>
+
+<p>He did come and did yield his heart to the Lord,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span>
+and seemed to settle it in his mind, if one may judge
+by subsequent actions. "I care not what course
+others may take, but as for me I will serve the
+Lord." He made a good confession and was always
+ready to step out into the light as it shone on his
+pathway. His way, however, was not an easy one.
+He met with violent opposition at times from an
+irascible pagan father, and persecution in various
+ways, but he stood firm. A special test came to
+him a year or two after he started to school. One
+day he came in great distress and said,</p>
+
+<p>"Father is very angry with me. My mother's
+brother died and left me a lot of cattle and other
+property, and my parents wish me to go and claim
+the property. But if I go, they will have a big
+dance and claim to call back the spirit of my uncle
+and ask him his will about the property, and they
+will want me to take part in their worship. I desire
+to follow the Lord."</p>
+
+<p>I said, "If you do not go perhaps you will not receive
+the property."</p>
+
+<p>"That makes no difference," he replied. "I love
+the Lord more than I love the cattle. Only pray
+that father will not be angry with me for refusing
+to go."</p>
+
+<p>Later he came with his face all aglow and said,
+"The Lord has heard our prayers. Father is not
+angry with me any more."</p>
+
+<p>In school he was slow but persevering, and in
+work likewise. He had his faults, and seemed at
+times to be lacking in humility, yet he never seemed
+to waver in his determination to follow the Lord.</p>
+
+<p>Several other young men also applied for admission,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span>
+among whom was Gomo, a brother of Tebengo
+and Muza and Emyonleni; also two younger boys
+who were already Christians, Masikwa and Madhliwa.
+There were now nine boys, and several months
+afterward three girls came. These girls were trained
+by Sister Lehman to do housework. The work was
+looking quite encouraging, for all showed an interest
+in desiring to become Christians.</p>
+
+<p>As this rainy season came on, it could not fail to
+remind us of the loss and of the trying times of
+the previous year. Some of our number thought it
+best to go to a more healthy place until the rains
+were over. This, however, would almost necessitate
+closing the work, which was not to be thought
+of.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of the rains, in March, Sister Lehman
+took down with the fever one day and on the
+following day her husband was also laid low. The
+buildings at Matopo are in a healthy place, yet
+during the rainy season one is always more or less
+exposed to fever, either by traveling and sleeping
+out, or even by going down to the gardens in the
+valley in the evening. At that time we did not
+understand so well how to check or combat the
+fever as in later years. So the sick ones grew worse
+and required my constant attention day and night
+for about ten or more days. Fortunately the boys
+were good helpers, as there were no girls at the
+time. Matshuba was able to take charge of the
+school; Ndhlalambi and one of the little boys could
+help me in the kitchen and sickroom; Gomo did the
+washing outside of the window where I could see<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span>
+and direct; and the other boys attended to the
+gardens.</p>
+
+<p>As the sick ones grew worse we sent a boy for a
+doctor, but on account of the damp, rainy weather,
+he delayed several days before coming, so that the
+fever was broken by the time he reached the mission.
+It was a trying time and one of looking to
+the Lord on the part of the sick and the well ones.
+To make matters worse some of the boys became
+quite ill, and we were unable to give them the attention
+they needed. One day Kelenki, who was
+very low, managed to crawl to the kitchen and
+begged to be allowed to lie there by the stove. Mrs.
+Eyles kindly came out from Bulawayo when at last
+the doctor was able to reach us. She remained for
+a week during their convalescence and cared for the
+sick. This gave me a much-needed rest and an opportunity
+to turn my attention to the boy, who was
+still quite ill and needed help. It was a day of
+rejoicing when our brother and sister and all were
+restored to health, and we were thankful that the
+Lord had mercy upon us, lest we should have sorrow
+upon sorrow.</p>
+
+<p>During the time we were passing through these
+afflictions, another difficulty was staring us in the
+face, which threatened, if possible, to be more serious
+than any which we had yet been called upon
+to meet. This was the land question. Mention
+was made that we were looking toward the erection
+of more permanent buildings. We had sent to the
+Board for money for this purpose; also for money
+to survey the land. Up to this time the 3,000 acres
+upon which the mission had been located by the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span>
+government, had not been surveyed. It had been
+given only as a reservation for mission purpose,
+and permission had also been granted that the missionaries
+could stake off a plot of 3,000 acres and
+make a diagram without going to the expense of
+employing a government surveyor, as that kind of
+work is costly in Africa. For this purpose, the year
+previous, four of us, Brethren Engle and Cress, together
+with Sister Heise and myself, started out to
+stake out the land, supposing, as we had been informed
+by the official who located the mission, that
+the two beacons north of us were the limit of the
+surveyed territory. We climbed hills, went over
+precipices, and waded swamps under a hot August
+sun and made a diagram of the desired farm, only to
+find at the close that the result was not satisfactory
+to the government. It was necessary for a government
+survey to be made, and this had not been
+done; but we had sent for money for the purpose,
+and the money had just arrived.</p>
+
+<p>The day on which Sister Lehman took sick, two
+Europeans brought some cattle and put them in our
+pen, from which the company's cattle had been removed
+the previous year. They did not ask for
+permission to place these cattle on the mission farm,
+and to us it seemed rather a bold step. They informed
+us, however, that they thought a mistake
+had been made in locating the mission, and that we
+were on surveyed land. They stated that they were
+not certain in reference to the matter, as the owners
+did not know the exact boundary of their farm.</p>
+
+<p>The Charter Company, of Rhodesia had, especially
+at the close of the war, made large concessions of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span>
+land to companies, syndicates, and individuals.
+These grants often comprised many thousands of
+acres, and in many instances the owners, in the
+early days, did not know the location of their land.
+They simply sent out a surveyor to measure and
+stake off the requisite amount and erect beacons;
+then the land was left entirely unimproved. If they
+were fortunate enough afterwards to know the
+boundaries of the farms, they often sent out an agent
+to collect tax of the natives living on it. The best
+of the land being disposed of, very little remained
+for farmers, who would have improved the land, or
+for missionaries, who would both improve it and instruct
+the natives. No doubt the government, when
+too late, realized their lack of wisdom in making
+some of these grants, as it greatly retarded the work
+of building up and developing the country.</p>
+
+<p>This was the condition of affairs when Matopo
+Mission was located. We had, however, no intimation
+that a mistake might have been made in the
+location, until informed by the two Europeans previously
+mentioned. One of them desired to collect
+hut tax for the company owning the land, but this
+he could not do, as he was not certain of the boundaries,
+and the company, at the time, was not willing
+to bear the expense of having a surveyor come out
+to locate the land. It is needless to say that it was
+a dark and trying time for the missionaries. If we
+were on surveyed land, we might have to change
+the mission site and much of the work already accomplished
+would be lost. Again, how were we to
+find out where we were? If a wealthy company did
+not care to bear the expense of locating their land,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span>
+how much less able were missionaries, whose purses,
+at the best, are never too full! Should we go to
+the expense of sending for a surveyor to locate us,
+we might be forced to move the mission, and the
+outlay incurred would benefit the company alone.
+We were in these wilds; could we succeed in locating
+ourselves?</p>
+
+<p>As usual, when difficulties thus confronted us, we
+looked to Him who never fails. Any one in the
+mission field has often reasons to be thankful for
+the varied training and experiences of the home
+land; for no knowledge or previous experience of
+whatever sort comes amiss when he is out where
+there is little outside help. We had studied, hence
+had a little knowledge of surveying. Would that
+knowledge help us here in these fastnesses?</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Jackson, the magistrate at Fort Usher, who
+had always been a friend in need, was appealed to.
+He did not know the boundaries of the farms in the
+immediate vicinity, but he knew the location of
+one important beacon several miles north, for he
+had had occasion to settle a difficulty in reference
+to it some time previous. So, with this knowledge
+to begin with, we went to the government surveyor
+and secured a diagram of all the farms in the vicinity
+of the mission. Thus equipped, and securing a compass,
+we started for home. Brother Lehman made
+a temporary chain, and together with some of the
+boys we went to the beacon pointed out by Mr.
+Jackson. From this a survey was made south, and
+it was discovered that the mission was on a tract of
+land known as "Matopo Block," owned by the
+Bulawayo Syndicate. This was a farm of 25,000<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span>
+acres, and it was about twelve miles long. As there
+were no beacons for a distance of seven miles on the
+south of the mission, it was not difficult to understand
+how the mistake was made in the location.
+By further survey we discovered that we were on
+the extreme east end of this farm, and a line drawn
+nearly southeast from the beacon north of us would
+give the mission the required 3,000 acres. Another
+surveyed farm lay adjoining this on the east.</p>
+
+<p>We had located the mission, but it remained to
+induce the government to arrange with the syndicate
+and give them land elsewhere in exchange for
+the amount promised to the mission. It is needless
+to enter into the details of the slow process necessary
+for settling the difficulty, for any one dealing
+with the affairs of government knows something
+of the tediousness and red tape required. Letters
+were addressed to both the government and to Mr.
+Rhodes, who was then on his estate near Bulawayo.
+The government officials met the question in a spirit
+of conciliation and fairness, promising to do all in
+their power to bring it to a satisfactory settlement.
+We were asked later to make further survey, to be
+certain that we had given the correct location. At
+one time it appeared that the exchange could not be
+made, and we were requested to look up another
+location. Looking to the Lord, we made another
+appeal, which resulted, in September of the same
+year, in the mission being allowed to retain its location.
+At first this was to have been only a reservation,
+but the final papers, which were not made
+out until late in 1902, resulted in giving a ninety-nine-year
+lease, which was much more satisfactory.</p>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER TEN</a></h2>
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span></p>
+<h3>Reinforcements and Industrial Work</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>It is not the mere preacher that is wanted here. The
+bishops of Great Britain, collected with all the classic
+youth of Oxford and Cambridge, would effect nothing by
+mere talking with the intelligent people of Uganda. It is
+the practical Christian tutor, who can teach people how to
+become Christians, cure their diseases, construct dwellings,
+understand and exemplify agriculture, turn his hand
+to anything, like a sailor&mdash;this is the man who is wanted.
+Such an one, if he can be found, would become the savior
+of Africa.&mdash;Henry M. Stanley.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>During the progress of the land question
+and the negotiations with the government,
+important changes were taking place in the
+personæ of the mission. In June of 1901 we were
+pleased to receive much-needed reinforcements in
+the persons of Mr. Levi Doner and Miss Emma
+Long. Accompanying them were Mr. and Mrs.
+Jacob Lehman, who were on their way to engage
+in mission work at the Compounds in Johannesburg.
+On account of the war they were not yet permitted
+to enter Johannesburg, so they came to Matopo for a
+time.</p>
+
+<p>At the same time Brother Isaac Lehman and wife
+thought it best to go to Cape Town for a rest, as
+she had not fully recovered from her attack of the
+fever. We were very sorry to lose so valuable colaborers
+at this time, for they had the language and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span>
+experience in mission work, and it always requires
+time for new missionaries to take hold of the various
+duties. I especially felt the loss of Brother Lehman,
+as I was the only one left who could speak
+to the natives. Brother Doner, however, made rapid
+strides in the language, and soon acquired a working
+knowledge of it, and was also a willing and efficient
+messenger along all lines. Very early in the
+work he was laid low with fever, but he recovered.
+Then Sister Long was quite sick for a time. These
+experiences, coming so early in their missionary career,
+were somewhat discouraging.</p>
+
+<p>The mission family was steadily increasing. A
+number of other boys had come to stay at the mission
+and become pupils and industrial workers.
+From the very first in receiving boys at the mission
+station, it was our plan to have them in school
+three and one-half hours and the rest of the time,
+which was five or six hours, they were engaged in
+some industrial work. As the natural inclination of
+the native is toward laziness and filthiness in personal
+habits, we were opening the door and taking
+all who desired to come and giving them a home,
+our aim being to take them out of their degraded
+home surroundings and give them the threefold
+training, spiritual, intellectual, and industrial, all of
+which seemed necessary to help them become
+strong, established Christians.</p>
+
+<p>These natives, for sanitary and other reasons, are
+always given their own separate huts, away from
+the Europeans; they have their own native food
+and live their own life. Some of them are appointed
+to grind and cook their food and do the work of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span>
+their kitchen. It could not be otherwise in such a
+country. Even the most civilized natives as a rule
+prefer to eat by themselves. The missionaries
+sometimes accept the hospitality of the natives in
+their homes and eat of the food set before them,
+but even there the natives will wait until the missionaries
+have finished eating, or else they will eat
+in a separate place.</p>
+
+<p>Since the pupils have time to do considerable
+work, they receive, in addition to food and schooling,
+a small sum of money sufficient to clothe themselves;
+and on Saturday afternoon, after washing
+their clothing, they have the time for recreation and
+mending their clothing.</p>
+
+<p>Up to this time the industrial work of the boys
+had been chiefly on the farm and in the gardens;
+but now a new line of work was being introduced,
+that of brickmaking. Brother Doner desired to
+start in this work at least. It was at this time somewhat
+of an experiment, as the various kinds of soil
+had to be tested so that he might know which was
+best suited for this purpose. It was also too late in
+the season to spend much time in this work. A
+few thousand of brick were made; and as rains
+threatened to come early, they were hastily built into
+a kiln and burnt. A beginning had been made,
+however, and some knowledge of brickmaking
+gained.</p>
+
+<p>During November of this year an event occurred
+which was second to none in the history of the work.
+I refer to the arrival of Elder and Mrs. Steigerwald,
+sent out to have charge of the mission.</p>
+
+<p>We had been looking forward and hoping that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span>
+some one might come in this capacity. In the meantime
+we were carrying on the work as well as we
+were able during the nineteen months since the
+death of Elder Engle. The brother and sister took
+hold of the work courageously from the first. It is
+not an easy task to begin mission work in heathen
+lands, among a strange people, strange tongue,
+strange surroundings and ways of living. It is no
+less easy to step into a work already begun amidst
+such different surroundings and new ways of doing
+things, and find the work pressing in on all sides.
+Such were the conditions that met Elder Steigerwald
+from the first, but it soon became evident that
+he was equal to the task.</p>
+
+<p>Constant changes in the mission field are trying,
+both to the people and to the missionaries themselves.
+Here two had been called away by death,
+four had returned home (including Brother and Sister
+Van Blunk), and the two Lehmans and their
+wives had gone to Cape Town. The people could
+not help feeling these changes and scarcely knew
+what to expect. The changes seem to have been
+unavoidable, yet it makes the people suspicious of
+those who remain. The natives, like all those in
+heathen countries, love to think that their missionaries
+have come to stay and be one with them. The
+true missionary bears much the same relation to
+his people as the parent does to the child; for they
+are his spiritual children. Then too the language is
+not mastered in one, two, three years, or even in a
+longer period of time. In fact, many do not master
+it in a lifetime, so that all these changes could not
+fail to have their effect on the work and the natives,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span>
+and render the position of Brother Steigerwald a
+difficult one.</p>
+
+<p>His first important work was to unite in marriage,
+on Christmas Day, Brother Doner and Sister
+Long. There were many more natives present on
+this occasion than at the previous marriage to witness
+the ceremony and to congratulate their missionaries.</p>
+
+<p>Money had been forthcoming for permanent
+buildings which were greatly needed. The huts
+were not only showing signs of decay, but some
+were damp and unhealthful during the rainy season,
+and even became mouldy at times. It was evident
+that, however convenient and useful they had been
+in their time, their day was fast passing away, and
+for the comfort and health of the missionaries something
+more permanent must be erected. The rains
+had started before Elder Steigerwald's arrival, so
+no more bricks could be made until the rains were
+over. Brother Doner was busy with the farming,
+and this left Brother Steigerwald free to make
+preparations for building.</p>
+
+<p>There is an abundance of fine granite stones and
+slabs in the vicinity; and as the new year of 1902
+opened, he had these hauled together for a foundation.
+During the rainy season, whenever the rains
+stopped for a time, he built at the foundation of the
+house. Although he had natives to assist, yet he
+found the work to be very heavy and taxing to his
+strength, but by the end of the rainy season he had a
+most excellent foundation for a house laid. Then
+he and Brother Doner, with the help of the schoolboys
+and some other natives, made and burnt a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span>
+large kiln of bricks and were ready to begin the
+house.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 450px;">
+<img src="images/illus132.png" width="450" height="347" alt="Matopo Mission House. Front View." title="Matopo Mission House. Front View." />
+<span class="caption">Matopo Mission House. Front View.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The brethren in Africa can tell you that building
+on a mission station in the wilds of Africa is quite a
+different affair from what it is in civilized countries,
+or even in the cities of Africa. In these latter
+places, a man, desiring to build, buys his timber, his
+ready-made brick, and other material. Then the
+stone masons come and lay the foundation. The
+bricklayers, carpenters, plumbers, plasterers, and
+painters all follow in their order, together with their
+helpers, and the work is completed in an incredibly
+short space of time. On the mission field all this usually
+falls to the lot of one man, from the blasting out
+of the stone for the foundation and the brickmaking<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span>
+until the building is completed. He is mason, bricklayer,
+carpenter, plumber, plasterer, all in one. That
+one often is not a trained mechanic, or even a practical
+one, but many times he comes direct from the
+farm, schoolroom, or pulpit. With the many duties
+of a missionary pressing in upon him, sufficient
+to occupy all his attention, he must in addition undertake
+the laborious task of building a house, and
+even make most of the furniture with which it is
+fitted up.</p>
+
+<p>Some one may inquire, is it not possible to secure
+skilled workmen to do the building? Yes, in some
+instances this can be done; but the high cost of living
+in Africa raises the wages of skilled mechanics
+to such an extreme height as to make it practically
+impossible for the missionary to employ them.
+Again, he has around him raw natives, who need to
+be taught to work, and his ambition is to do mission
+work in connection with his building.</p>
+
+<p>Elder Steigerwald was equal to the emergency,
+and together with the help of Brother Doner and
+the natives, he completed the house in a little over
+a year from the time he began to haul the stone.
+The house is large, having nine good-sized rooms,
+with a fireplace in each one. There is a broad
+veranda nearly all around it and an iron roof over
+the whole, and it is a building that would be a
+credit to any one. The building is high and dry
+and has good board floors in four of the rooms,
+which add much to the healthfulness of it. Brother
+Steigerwald could no doubt tell you, if he would, of
+many days of arduous toil, which threatened to
+undermine his health; of many difficult and perplexing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span>
+questions which confronted him in the
+process of construction; of lying awake at night,
+planning how everything was to be accomplished;
+especially how he was to build three fireplaces opening
+into one chimney and all have a good draft&mdash;a
+feat which he most successfully accomplished.</p>
+
+<p>There were natives who lightened some of the
+heavier parts of the work, but to train these to perform
+their work properly is often a greater task
+than to do it one's self. This training must be done,
+however, if the missionary is faithful to his trust
+of developing the native character along useful
+lines as well as in giving him the Gospel. One of
+the officials, in making a report of the work, stated,
+"Here, at least, are missionaries who believe in
+teaching the natives the dignity of labor." This
+is the course pursued at all our stations. To train
+them properly is no easy task. It requires much
+wisdom, patience, firmness, and love. One meets
+with many discouraging results and often with
+great ingratitude on the part of those instructed;
+yet in the end it pays, if natives are ever to be
+brought to a more civilized plane of living.</p>
+
+<p>There is one thing which operates strongly
+against the natives respecting labor. The average
+European, on coming to Africa, even though he
+may have been a day laborer and hard-working man
+in the country from which he came, soon sees that
+the more menial tasks fall to the natives; and when
+he takes the hoe or pick or shovel, he is told, "We
+do not do that here. Let the nigger do it and you
+oversee." The majority do not need a second invitation,
+and so such work is relegated to his black<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span>
+neighbor. The native soon sees, or thinks that he
+sees, that the white man regards manual labor as
+beneath him. This training is exactly what the
+African finds in his own home. He leaves the distasteful
+and hard tasks to his wife and the younger
+members of his family, while he sits down and enjoys
+himself. He is thus confirmed in his belief that
+labor is degrading.</p>
+
+<p>Not so with the missionary. He works continually
+along many lines, and seeks to teach the native
+by his example, as well as by precept, the dignity of
+labor, and that only indolence, dirt, vice, and kindred
+evils are degrading. It is true that on account
+of climatic conditions and the many duties falling
+continually to men and women on the mission field,
+they are obliged, as their field of labor widens, to
+leave many lines of work to the natives they have
+in training. If they did not do this the spiritual
+part of the work and their own health would greatly
+suffer in consequence.</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps some one might ask, Do those ignorant
+blacks ever learn to be cleanly and do their work
+properly? Yes, some of them respond in a surprisingly
+short period of time to faithful, energetic, yet
+patient training, and become real helpers to the missionary,
+both in the house and outside. Some, in
+addition to handling the oxen on the farm, also learn
+to use hammer, saw, chisel, and plane, and work
+side by side with white mechanics in certain lines of
+work.</p>
+
+<p>While the house was being built at the Matopo
+Mission, Matshuba, still quite a young lad, was an
+interested spectator of everything that was done,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span>
+and he himself did carefully whatever he was able
+to perform. When he found a small piece of lumber
+which was not likely to be used, he would say,
+"Mufundisi [Missionary], may I have this?" If
+permission was granted he carefully put it away,
+but said nothing. After several pieces had been obtained,
+he asked permission to use tools and work-shop
+on Saturday afternoon, when other work was
+stopped. He worked away in the shop, asking questions
+of no one. After a few weeks had passed he
+finally surprised us by showing a neatly-made chair,
+patterned after one that had been purchased in town.
+He gradually learned to do all kinds of work, as
+well as to build himself a good dwelling house.</p>
+
+<p>There are almost insurmountable difficulties, however,
+in the way of teaching the trades to the natives
+as a means of earning money. The cry of the
+country is for industrial schools and for native
+skilled labor, but almost in the same breath the
+European will tell you that he will not work side
+by side with the native in the same line of work.
+A gentleman in Bulawayo had a contract for a fine,
+large building. His mechanics were white, while the
+blacks were the attendants. Being in need of more
+skilled labor, he sent south to the more civilized
+portion of the country for a native mechanic, and
+of course paid his way to Bulawayo. The white
+mechanics absolutely refused to work with this native and
+threatened to strike. The only course left
+for the contractor was to pay the native some wages
+and his fare home. This was no heathen native,
+but one who had grown up amid civilized surroundings,
+and no doubt his parents also were civilized.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>We do not wish to criticise such mechanics, for
+here, in a land where the blacks so far outnumber
+the white population, there are many things to be
+considered. But with these facts staring the missionary
+in the face, there is little inducement for
+him to spend a great deal of time in training natives.
+The only course left which will give the native
+any chance at all in some sections of the country
+is for a contractor to have all native mechanics. He
+might then be employed by the more broad-minded
+Europeans, but be boycotted by others. Notwithstanding
+these difficulties, industrial training in its
+broadest sense is very important on the mission
+field, and it is encouraged by the governments. It
+enables the natives to improve their condition and
+way of living and to earn more money.</p>
+
+<p>While these changes and the industrial training
+were in progress, the intellectual and spiritual part
+of the work was not neglected. New boys were
+continually coming, and some who came during
+these years were destined to be of help in after years.
+First was Nyamzana, who began to follow the
+Lord before coming as a boarder. Although not so
+quick in books as some, yet he was a faithful and
+devoted Christian, never giving his missionaries
+any uneasiness as to his spiritual standing. There
+were also Nkwidini, Mlobeka, and Mahlenkle. The
+last named was a nephew of the late king, and he
+had begun to attend school when the Lehmans were
+teaching at the kraal of the chief. He was an exceptional
+native, most steady and unassuming,
+ready and willing for any task assigned him. I
+have mentioned these names because they with others<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span>
+already referred to were among our future evangelists
+and teachers. Nor do I wish to forget Kolisa,
+a son of Buka, whom we visited up in the hills.</p>
+
+<p>Not all, however, continued to remain at the mission.
+Some left, never to return. Others went away to
+work for a time, that they might obtain more money
+and then return again to enter school. The new
+boys as they came generally showed a desire to
+leave their old heathen lives and become Christians.
+Others were a cause of great anxiety to us. There
+were times of heart-searching and crying out to
+God, which showed that His Spirit was still at
+work in their hearts. One after another would
+come and confess their temptations and failures, and
+ask for prayer and help that they might be more
+victorious over evil. Some would receive definite
+help and blessing, while others seemed, for some
+reason, unable to take hold of the Lord by faith.
+Often we would feel greatly encouraged over the
+progress some were making, and look forward to
+their becoming able helpers and soul-winners for
+Him, only to have our hopes and expectations suddenly
+dashed to the ground. This was all a part
+of our training as missionaries. The Lord was teaching
+us by these experiences to take our eyes off individuals
+and fix them upon Him. He was also
+giving us sufficient encouragement, day by day,
+through some who were steadfast, to enable us to
+realize that our labor was not in vain for the Lord.
+There were a number in the inquirers' class, and in
+July, 1902, three more were baptized by Brother
+Steigerwald. Of this number were Ndhlalambi and
+Nyamazana.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The attendance at school was not as satisfactory
+as could be desired. The authority of the parents
+being paramount in the home, if there was anything
+to be done, such as digging in the gardens,
+herding, keeping the animals from the gardens, or
+running errands, the children must stay at home and
+attend to it. An early morning school was also
+started for those who could not attend at midday,
+and this enabled some of the herdboys to attend.</p>
+
+<p>The parents were especially opposed to their
+daughters attending school, because they became
+unwilling to marry the old men to whom they were
+betrothed. As we mentioned previously, several
+girls did come to stay at the mission. One of them
+was Ganukisa, a daughter of the king. She was a
+very nice, modest girl and proved a great help in
+many ways. She also became a Christian and
+member of the Church. Another girl, Zwadini, ran
+off from home twice and came to us, imploring us
+to save her from the man her parents were forcing
+her to marry. We tried to buy her freedom, but to
+no avail, and she finally was forced to return home
+and marry the choice of her parents. At this time
+we had no right by law to interfere in these matters,
+however much we longed to free some of
+these dear girls from their lives of slavery. It
+required time and prayer and much looking to God
+before a certain amount of freedom of choice was
+granted the daughters, and then it came through an
+action of the government.</p>
+
+<p>In the school some were making good progress.
+English and some other branches had been added to
+the curriculum, but the Bible continued to be the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span>
+chief Textbook, and some were acquiring a fair understanding
+of it. Natives have generally a keenness
+of discernment and a clear grasp of the subject,
+so that it is necessary for the teacher to be well
+prepared for any question that may arise. The one
+who was first at the mission was a philosopher and
+a keen thinker. Nothing seemed to escape him. I
+have heard him deliver most excellent sermons and
+bring far more out of a Sunday-school lesson than
+the ordinary teacher. One day in reading the book
+of Isaiah, he came to the eighteenth chapter. He
+knows nothing about Ethiopia, but after he had
+finished reading, I inquired what people the prophet
+referred to. He thought for a moment and then exclaimed,
+"I believe he means us, the black people."</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER ELEVEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Continuation of the Work</h3>
+
+<h4>Furlough</h4>
+
+
+<p>The missionary, however robust he may be,
+cannot keep at his work all the time; for he
+generally works seven days in a week and
+fifty-two weeks in a year. After a few years of such
+labor it is necessary to call a halt, if one does not
+wish to break down altogether. New missionaries
+can take much of the burden, yet those who have
+something of the language and can speak to the
+people must be ready in season and out of season, to
+talk, interpret, explain, as well as to have heart-to-heart
+talks with the people.</p>
+
+<p>I had now been actively engaged on the mission
+station for four strenuous years and was greatly in
+need of a rest and change. The Board at home, as
+well as the missionaries on the field, had been urging
+me to go south for a few months. The only
+difficulty in the way was the need of some one to
+take the school, and so we had been looking forward
+to the return of Brother and Sister Lehman from
+Cape Town to take charge of it. They, however,
+had been looking on the fields for mission work at
+the Compounds on Johannesburg, and had decided
+to go there. As a last resort we decided to ask
+Matshuba to do the teaching. He was capable of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span>
+doing it, and he was also becoming able to do some
+interpreting from English into the vernacular.</p>
+
+<p>Before this happened an event occurred which
+more or less concerned all South Africa, and especially
+Rhodesia. I refer to the death, on March 26,
+1902, of Cecil Rhodes at his home, Groot Schuur,
+near Cape Town, the place where he had so kindly
+received Brother Engle on our first coming to
+Africa. It had been his request to be buried in
+Rhodesia, the country that bore his name. In the
+Matopo Hills was a beautiful spot which he had
+discovered and to which he gave the name, "View
+of the World." This is about fifteen miles from
+Matopo Mission, as the crow flies, but over twenty-five
+miles by wagon road. Here, on the summit of
+a large granite hill, in the heart of Matopo, is the
+spot he selected to be his last resting place.</p>
+
+<p>When the body was brought to Bulawayo, thousands
+of people, both white and black, vied with
+each other in paying a last tribute of respect to him
+who had done so much for the development of the
+country. The natives realized that they had lost a
+friend that could not be replaced; and the white
+people believed that no one could carry out so successfully
+many of the public affairs with which he
+was associated. When the funeral procession
+reached the burial place, the heavy casket was
+raised to the top of the granite hill. Into the solid
+rock a grave had been cut, and into this the casket
+was lowered. The grave was then covered by an
+immense granite slab, on which was fastened a large
+brass plate with this inscription: "Here lie the remains
+of Cecil John Rhodes."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>A part of his property was left for the improvement
+of the country to which he had devoted his
+time and talents. His two large estates in Rhodesia,
+together with an annuity, were bequeathed to this
+country; and his fine and well-built estate near
+Cape Town was given over for the use of the government
+of Cape Colony, but the grounds are continually
+opened to the public. The Rhodes scholarships
+for various countries, including two for each
+State in the United States, were given with a hope
+of cementing nations together. He wished no monument
+to be erected over his grave, but near the
+place is the Shangani Monument to the memory of
+those who fell in the Matabele War. The grounds
+have been beautifully laid out and a well-built road
+extends from Bulawayo to the grave. On his estate
+at Cape Town is a granite monument seventy feet
+long, built near the seat overlooking both the Atlantic
+and the Indian Oceans, where he used to sit
+and lay his world-wide plans. There is a sad feature
+connected with his life, like that of many other
+men whom the world calls great. While he made
+so much provision for earthly things, there seems to
+be no evidence that he made provision for eternity.</p>
+
+<p>During this year there also died near us a native
+who had been more or less interested in the work,
+by the name of Fusi. He had been a prominent
+soldier under King Lobengula, and also remembered
+the first king, Mzilikazi. He loved to talk about the
+good old days, and could tell of a visit that Rev.
+Moffat, the father-in-law of Livingstone, once made
+to this country. He said, "I remember Chete [Rev.
+Moffat] quite well. I was just a young man at the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span>
+time and King Mzilikazi treated Chete nicely. He
+said to me, 'Go and milk a cow and bring some
+milk for the missionary.'"</p>
+
+<p>This old warrior, however, never showed any desire
+to become a Christian; but he was always glad
+to have his people attend school, and his youngest
+son was one of the first communicants. The native
+finally became sick with dropsy, and when we visited
+him during his sickness, he said an enemy had
+bewitched him, adding:</p>
+
+<p>"Before the white man came into the country we
+put all the witches to death and we were well. Now
+we are not allowed to kill them and we must suffer."</p>
+
+<p>Later we again visited him. When asked if we
+should sing for him, he replied, "Yes, sing one of
+the old hymns you used to sing when Missionary
+Engle was alive." We did so, and he too joined his
+quavering voice in the chorus. He also listened
+most attentively to the Scripture reading and comments
+that day, and joined us in prayer. What
+thoughts these things stirred in his heart we know
+not, for that was the last time we saw him.</p>
+
+<p>In July of this year the time finally came for our
+furlough. I took a ticket from Bulawayo south to
+Port Elizabeth. This was shortly after the close
+of the Boer War, and all along the railway in the
+south were to be seen the blockhouses erected to
+guard the railway from destruction. Here and there
+were the demolished farmhouses and the orchards
+and beautiful groves that had been leveled to the
+ground. Worst of all were the many graves&mdash;mute
+testimony to that saddest of all human employment,
+human butchery. Kimberley already was recovering<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span>
+from this terrible siege. This was still a small
+town, its chief attraction being the great masses of
+blue earth surrounding it. This diamondiferous
+blue rock is mined far down in the earth, where it
+had been formed under great pressure; and when
+brought to the surface, the combined action of rain
+and sun slakes it somewhat like quicklime. It is
+then washed, which removes the lighter earth, leaving
+the diamonds and other precious stones.</p>
+
+<p>From this place I went to Port Elizabeth, which
+is 1,200 miles south of Bulawayo. It is the principal
+seaport of Cape Colony, as it furnishes a shorter
+and more direct route into the interior than Cape
+Town does. This is a town of about 35,000 inhabitants,
+but there is nothing especially inviting about
+the place except its thriving business. It has been
+said of it: "Out of sand-hills and scrub, Anglo-Saxon
+energy has created a town that, for cleanliness
+and health, and for the handsomeness of its
+business buildings, is second to none in South Africa."
+After a stay of a few days at this place I took
+the steamer <i>Norman Castle</i> for Durban, where the
+greater part of my vacation was to be spent.</p>
+
+<p>Durban is the seaport and largest town of Natal,
+and has nearly 70,000 inhabitants. The business
+part is low and often quite hot, but the part known
+as the Berea is high and cool, and has many fine
+dwelling houses. Natal is more thickly populated
+than other parts of South Africa. It has a most
+luxuriant vegetation and varied and picturesque
+scenery, and well deserves the appellation, "Garden
+of South Africa." In this warm, moist, subtropical
+climate of the coast many delicious and tropical<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span>
+fruits are grown. This is the home of the Zulu
+tribe of Africans, of which the Matabele are a
+branch.</p>
+
+<p>My special purpose in coming to this section of
+the country to rest was to make my furlough as profitable
+as possible, and to gain information helpful for
+mission work. Missionaries had been in this section
+of the country the greater part of the nineteenth
+century. The American Board had started their
+work some time in the '30s, and this formed an
+excellent opportunity of seeing some of the fruits
+of missionary labors.</p>
+
+<p>I spent some time at an English Mission under
+Mr. Eyles at Imbezana, at a Free Methodist Mission
+and girls' school, Fairview, and at four missions
+of the American Board&mdash;a boys' school at Adams,
+a large girls' school at Inanda, and one at Umzumbi,
+and also visited their work at Durban, in charge of
+Rev. Bridgeman. At all these places I was most
+hospitably entertained and given every opportunity
+for studying the work. It was an inspiration to see
+what God had wrought among these erstwhile
+heathen. Here were large boarding-schools, and natives
+living like white people in neat brick houses,
+built by themselves. Here were missionaries, like
+Mrs. Edwards and Mrs. Bridgeman, grown old in
+this soul-saving work, and yet so attached to the
+natives and the work that they could not think of
+leaving the country.</p>
+
+<p>Natal, like Cape Colony and the Transvaal, can no
+longer be called heathen Africa, as so many of the
+natives are civilized. The large cities of white people
+are built in modern style, with all the latest improvements,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span>
+electric lights, street cars, telephones,
+and the like, and since then automobiles. There are
+also many white farmers, as well as small towns of
+white people, throughout the country. Missionaries
+of many societies are here in this densely-populated
+and easily-accessible district of Natal. This is considered
+one of the greatest fields for the overlapping
+of missionaries, perhaps, to be found anywhere, yet
+all seem to have plenty to do.</p>
+
+<p>With all the advantages for improvement which
+the Africans here possess, I was surprised to meet,
+within a mile or two of one of the oldest mission
+stations, natives with paint and grease, and when
+the evangelists go to the homes of the people they
+still find some raw heathen. Some not only do not
+and will not accept Christ, but they also prefer their
+dirty, indolent, ignorant way of living to that introduced
+by civilization.</p>
+
+<p>At Durban I took the train to go north to Johannesburg,
+a distance of 480 miles. The war had been
+over for some time, yet it was still necessary to procure
+a pass to enter Johannesburg. This I procured
+through Brother Lehman, who was then at Johannesburg.
+People were flocking thither as fast as
+they could procure passes and trains to carry them.
+The trains were crowded every day, and one was
+obliged to book ahead in order to secure a seat.
+This ride to Johannesburg is a delightful one, so far
+as the scenery is concerned, but the winding railroad
+is exceedingly rough and uncomfortable. One
+passes through a landscape most beautiful and varied,
+from the green, grassy hills of the coast,
+through mountains and valleys, to the high, rolling<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span>
+veldt of the Rand, where the famous gold reefs of
+South Africa are to be found. In this journey one
+leaves the sea level at Durban and gradually rises
+to the height of 6,000 feet at Johannesburg. It is
+said of this place: "In 1886 the site was nothing
+but a bleak, bare plain, that could have been bought
+for one hundred pounds. Then came the discovery
+of gold reefs east and west for sixty miles, and
+stores, public buildings, and churches sprang up
+with marvelous rapidity." This is now the largest,
+richest, and most modern city of South Africa, and
+the Rand is this sixty miles of gold-reef mines.</p>
+
+<p>At these mines are many thousands of natives
+from all parts of South Africa, and when they are
+not at work they are confined in large enclosures
+known as "Compounds." This furnishes the missionary
+an excellent opportunity of doing mission
+work among this conglomerate mass of natives. The
+great variety of languages is one hindrance in the
+way, but if the missionary is able to speak one of
+the chief divisions of the Bantu family of languages,
+such as the Zulu, he can generally find some native
+to interpret for him into other languages.</p>
+
+<p>In this mission field we found our beloved colaborers,
+Brother and Sister Isaac Lehman, who had
+just come from Cape Town and were becoming settled
+in their new home. A dear little girl, Faith, had
+come to bless their home and cheer their hearts.
+Brother Jacob Lehmans also were engaged in mission
+work here, as well as our dear Sister Swanson
+(nee Hershey), who had left us at Cape Town to
+come to this place. As our Board had no mission
+station here at that time, these were all laboring in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span>
+connection with an undenominational mission in
+charge of Mr. A. W. Baker. All were actively engaged
+in mission work. It is a broad field and is a
+great opportunity for giving the Gospel to the
+heathen. However, one has the same obstacles to
+encounter as in the native village, <i>i. e.</i>, the indifference
+of the people. While we would be having a
+service in one part of the Compound, other natives
+would be dancing within sight in another part, and
+often be making such a noise as to disturb the meeting.
+One difficulty with the work is that the natives
+often remain at the mines only six months or
+a year, not sufficiently long to get them established.
+Much good is, however, being done; schools are established
+to teach the natives when they are not
+at work, and services are held regularly at various
+places. Natives, accepting the Light, carry it to
+other parts of Africa, and sometimes become teachers
+of their people.</p>
+
+<p>After spending a most enjoyable month at this
+place I again returned to Matopo Mission, after an
+absence of three and one-half months. It was a
+pleasure to get back to the old battle ground, for
+it was still the most beautiful spot on earth and its
+people the dearest. Great changes had taken place
+during our absence. Then the foundation of the
+house had been laid and the brick burnt, but now
+an imposing structure met the eye and the house
+was rapidly being completed. It looked as if the
+missionaries had come to stay and were to have a
+comfortable place to live in.</p>
+
+<p>The school was progressing favorably under Matshuba's
+management, and all parts of the work<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span>
+seemed encouraging. As there was continually
+some difficulty about the stability of some of the
+industrial pupils, it was decided to divide the school
+year into two terms of five months each, with a
+month's vacation intervening in which the pupils
+could return home if they so desired. This worked
+well and seemed more satisfactory to all. The one
+who had been teaching was retained as pupil teacher
+and was also permitted to take advanced work.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 450px;">
+<img src="images/illus150.png" width="450" height="271" alt="&quot;Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes.&quot;" title="&quot;Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes.&quot;" />
+<span class="caption">&quot;Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes.&quot;</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>There was again opportunity for me to visit in
+their homes. So, accompanied by some of the boys
+or girls, we made long excursions on foot among
+the people, sometimes walking from eight to twelve
+miles and meeting many people. Because so many
+missionaries had left them and did not return, they
+were not a little pleased to see me back, and, native-like,
+were inclined to make flattering speeches. One
+day we visited nine kraals, and everywhere had attentive<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span>
+listeners, and the people seemed to be hungry
+for the Word. At another time we went to
+Sibula's village for the first time, where we met and
+gave the Gospel to over one hundred people. They
+had never been visited before and seemed anxious
+for a school. Later they built a schoolhouse, and
+Nyamzana was given to them as a teacher.</p>
+
+<p>One day when we were out to the kraals we happened
+to come to a beer drink, where they were
+having a digging-bee.</p>
+
+<p>They said, "Why does not Missionary Steigerwald
+invite the people to come and dig his large
+gardens? He is so busy with building."</p>
+
+<p>"Will you come if he invites you?" we asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly we will," they replied.</p>
+
+<p>When we reached home we told Brother Steigerwald
+what they said, and he at once thought it a
+splendid opportunity for getting his corn planted.
+So he appointed a day and sent out invitations to
+the people. One hundred and sixty-four adults
+with their hoes came and digged and planted an
+eight or ten-acre lot. It was an interesting sight to
+see that many people digging in one place. They
+would usually sing a native song, and with their
+hoes keep time to the music. They performed this
+piece of work without pay, and of course received
+no beer, but a generous supply of bread and tea was
+furnished them, which they greatly enjoyed. These
+Matabele are always very ready to come out to
+work when invited, and in this respect they were a
+contrast to some natives. When hired to do work,
+however, it was necessary to make them keep their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span>
+promise and come at the time appointed, and also
+finish their work.</p>
+
+<p>Sister Steigerwald was much amused at Sibongamanzi
+shortly after she came to the mission. My
+hut needed replastering, and Sibongamanzi was engaged
+to do the work. The appointed day arrived,
+but the girl did not come according to her promise,
+and as the work was urgent I employed another girl
+to do it. The next day Sibongamanzi came to do
+the work and was quite disappointed to find some
+one else had accomplished it.</p>
+
+<p>I said, "Why did you not come yesterday according
+to your promise?"</p>
+
+<p>"I am sure a person has a right to change her
+mind," she replied.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, I think so, too, so I employed some one
+else."</p>
+
+<p>In school one is obliged to use the English word
+for such articles as slate, pencil, and paper, since
+there is no word in the language for these things.
+When Steigerwalds came, there were also a number
+of boxes of goods sent out; and in unpacking these
+a pencil fell out. Sister Steigerwald picked it up,
+and handing it to Masikwa, said, "Here is a pencil."
+He was most delighted, and came and said, "The
+Inkosikazi [Mrs.] can speak our language already.
+She said 'Pencil.'" Sister Steigerwald, together
+with the other sisters, had their own experiences in
+teaching natives in the kitchen and housework, as
+well as in sewing. She proved most capable and
+patient in training various ones to be cleanly and to
+do their work properly.</p>
+
+<p>The services at the mission were well attended at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span>
+this time, and sometimes we were obliged to have
+an overflow meeting. Natives would come fifteen
+miles to be present at the Sunday services. "Our
+little church is too small," said some. "We need a
+new one."</p>
+
+<p>Our congregations were gradually emerging from
+barbarism, and their appearance on Sunday was
+often quite striking. Some of the boys and young
+men would come, clean and neatly dressed in European
+clothes, including hat and shoes, and exhibit
+good taste in the selection of their clothing. Some
+again came well dressed but without shoes; others
+would appear partly dressed, but anxious to display
+all the clothing they had. Perhaps on a sweltering,
+hot day some would don a heavy winter overcoat
+reaching below the knees, or a heavy suit of bright
+red flannel. Another would have on a coat turned
+wrong side out to show all the colors, and a vest
+outside of this, while a number continued to wear
+the purely native garb of skins. A few of the
+girls were neatly clothed in dresses; others in short
+skirts with or without a cloth thrown over their
+shoulders. Some of the women's clothing was very
+modest and picturesque.</p>
+
+<p>Natives, especially at this stage of their advancement,
+do not as a rule dress according to the weather,
+for to them clothing is more or less a matter of
+ornamentation and they don it accordingly. One
+must be very careful about placing special emphasis
+upon clothing, as the native is naturally vain, and
+when he is able to be better clothed his vanity often
+increases. He soon thinks that if he is clothed he is
+a Christian, or if he goes to school and learns he is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span>
+a Christian. He is quite ready to put on these outward
+semblances of civilization without yielding
+himself to God. If the missionary is willing to accept
+the outward form of Christianity, whether of
+clothing or ceremonials, he may soon have a large
+membership. He must continually guard against
+these things, and seek to know the inner life of
+those about him, and their daily walk; nor is it always
+easy to ascertain what is beneath the surface.
+Hypocrisy is not at all unusual.</p>
+
+<p>Early in our work there was a native who came
+occasionally to our services. He had worked in
+Bulawayo and attended one of the native churches
+sufficiently long to gain a smattering and lingo of
+Christianity. He came clothed in black broadcloth
+and carrying a book under his arm, and withal
+seemed a person of some consequence. He was a
+brother of one of our boys, and we were informed
+that he could read. One day in church, at the close
+of the services, he asked permission to say something,
+and not knowing what was coming we gave
+him permission. He arose and began to read out
+of his book and then talked. Again he read and
+talked in a preaching way until he was finally requested
+to sit down. As we were suspicious from
+his manner in regard to his ability to read, we took
+occasion to test him and found that he knew absolutely
+nothing about reading. What he gave had
+been memorized, and we learned that his life too
+was decidedly corrupt. This taught us how necessary
+it was to be careful of the stranger who came
+and claimed to be a Christian.</p>
+
+<p>December 26, 1902, there was a most welcome addition<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span>
+to the mission family in the person of a little
+son to Brother and Sister Doner. This was the first
+white child at the mission, and it was quite a curiosity
+to the natives. Of course every one must have
+a look at it, and happy was the one who might touch
+or hold this wonderful white baby.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER TWELVE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Looking on the Fields</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>Say not ye, There are yet four months, and then cometh
+harvest? behold, I say unto you, Lift up your eyes,
+and look on the fields; for they are white already to
+harvest.&mdash;St. John 4: 35.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>We moved into the new house early in 1903.
+This left the huts empty, for our increasing
+family of boys. As soon as the rains
+were over for this year, Brother and Sister Steigerwald
+and myself felt led to make a tour of exploration
+in the interests of the work. Matopo Hills or
+Mountains extend northeast and southwest for a
+distance of about sixty miles. Between the hills
+and Bulawayo there is a mission station and work
+had been carried on for some years, although there
+were at this time many raw natives to be seen.
+Through the hills and south for a long distance
+there were as yet no missionaries except our own,
+and as our mission was on the north side of the
+hills, we desired to go through them and explore
+some of the south side.</p>
+
+<p>In June we arranged to make the trip, taking our
+large wagon on which was a canvas top, which was
+drawn by donkeys, consequently progress was slow.
+Three of our boys accompanied us. We were
+obliged to go west about nine miles before a road
+could be found leading through the hills. This<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span>
+wagon road was exceedingly rough and stony and
+very little traveled, and the donkeys slowly wended
+their way in and out among the hills which continually
+surrounded us and seemed to close us in.
+Frequently as the immense piles of rock seemed to
+stretch across our path in front and bar further
+progress, we would be led to exclaim, "Truly, there
+is no way out of this," but on we went and the way
+continued to open.</p>
+
+<p>The tediousness of the journey was relieved by
+the exceeding beauty of the scenery as it gradually
+unfolded before our eyes. In the first of the trip
+are to be seen the immense bald hills of solid granite,
+similar to some in the vicinity of the mission.
+Soon the scene changes and the eye is greeted on
+every side by lofty ridges, consisting of immense
+boulders piled up in all sorts of fantastic shapes, by
+the Great Architect, and from out of every possible
+crevice grow trees and shrubbery of all sorts. The
+dark green of the foliage, interspersed with the
+varying shades of grey, yellow, red, and green of
+the rock, forms a picture of surpassing loveliness.
+Baboons, large and small, would make their appearance
+on the jutting rocks, as we passed along,
+and bark at these intruders into their peaceful domain.</p>
+
+<p>As the hills abounded in game, and Elder Steigerwald
+was a good shot, we did not want for meat on
+the journey. So, while the donkeys were grazing,
+fires would be built and pot roasts and many sorts
+of delectable dishes would be prepared and eaten
+with relish. Natives are generally happy if they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span>
+have plenty of meat to eat; so on this journey Tebengo
+declared that they would be longing for the
+fleshpots of Egypt when they returned to the mission.
+Next to meat, their favorite dish was Graham
+flour made into a loaf by means of water and a little
+salt, then baked in the hot ashes.</p>
+
+<p>South of the hills we left the beaten track, which
+proceeds east to Gwanda, and started south to the
+open country, which is known as Mapani Land,
+named from the large amount of excellent hardwood
+Mapani trees which grow here. Very few natives
+were seen on the journey through the hills,
+but in this rich, open plain of the south there were
+numerous kraals. The natives received us gladly
+and readily consented to have services; and as there
+were no missionaries in this part of the country,
+many of the people had the privilege of hearing for
+the first time the Story of the Cross. On this trip
+we came to the home of Holi, a rich and prominent
+native. His wife is a daughter of King Lobengula
+and a sister of Ganukisa, who lived at the mission.
+Here we were very kindly received and Holi presented
+Elder Steigerwald with a fine fat sheep.</p>
+
+<p>From this point we turned west and north through
+the hills by a different route. Along the way we
+visited some places of interest, especially the "View
+of the World," where Mr. Rhodes was buried.
+Thence we proceeded east and south to the mission.
+We had been absent about two weeks, had traveled
+over one hundred miles, and had had a most pleasant
+and profitable trip. It had also been a change
+from the labor and routine of the station.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Brother and Sister Doner had for some time
+been contemplating opening another station, and
+they concluded during this dry season also to make
+a tour and explore the country, as well as do evangelistic
+work. They made preparations to spend
+a month in this way, taking the wagon and several
+boys. Little Oliver, who was then only seven
+months old, also went along, thus early in his life
+learning what trekking in Africa meant.</p>
+
+<p>They went south over the same route we had
+taken, and it was on this trip, if I mistake not, that
+the present site of Mapani Mission was selected.
+They spent a very delightful month and came home
+quite enthusiastic over the prospects of opening a
+new work and eager to launch out at once. Permission
+did not come from the Board, however, in time
+to open that dry season, and the work had to be
+postponed another year.</p>
+
+<p>During this year word came that one member of
+the Executive Board had passed "over the river."
+Dear father died the latter part of March. It was
+a double loss to some of us; for we should now miss
+not only his fatherly letters, but the wise counsel
+that he gave in his capacity as a member of the
+Mission Board. He always seemed to have such a
+keen insight into the work, and wrote about it as if
+he had been on the field and knew exactly our surroundings.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus160.png" width="600" height="373" alt="Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder
+Steigerwald in 1905." title="Matopo Mission Church 1905." />
+<span class="caption">Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder
+Steigerwald in 1905.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The work at the mission continued to go along as
+usual, and two more united with the Church, and
+everyone found plenty of profitable employment.
+One feature of the work, not yet mentioned, but
+which always requires much of the missionaries'<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span>
+time, is medical work and the care of the sick. The
+natives accept the miracles of healing, mentioned
+in the Scriptures, without question, and the sick
+frequently asked the prayers of the missionaries.
+There were several instances of remarkable cases
+of healing without the application of medicine, when
+the native could be led to take hold of the Lord by
+faith. On one occasion a native came for Elder
+Engle, from a kraal about five miles distant, where a
+woman was very sick and had eaten nothing for several
+days. She was very low indeed and seemingly
+unconscious of what was going on about her and
+her friends were weeping. Brother Engle felt led
+to anoint her and pray for her. The next day they
+came to say that the woman was much better and
+was eating, and they declared that the missionary
+had raised her from the dead.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>At another time one of our Christian girls was
+sick with such a disease that we knew we could not
+help her, and she desired prayer. We granted her
+request and she was healed immediately, even to
+our surprise. Some time after Brother Doner had
+come, an elderly native was quite ill with lung
+trouble, and his people had been trying in every way
+to heal him. They appealed to us, so we made the
+case a special subject of prayer and he was healed
+immediately, and told everyone that Jesus had
+healed him. A mother also wished us to pray for
+her child, who was very ill and seemed ready to die
+at any minute; it too was healed at once. Other
+instances of help might be cited; but we give these,
+because we see that He is the same Christ yet today
+and often shows His power, saying unto the
+sick, "According to your faith be it unto you."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161"></a>
+<img src="images/illus162.png" width="600" height="350" alt="Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill Beyond." title="Back View of Matopo Mission House, " />
+<span class="caption">Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill Beyond.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Why He does not always choose to manifest His
+power in this way I know not. I am giving things
+as I found them. At first we were more or less loth
+to use medicine, and some of the early losses may
+have been owing to this fact. We believe also that
+He receives honor in helping the missionary make
+use of remedies to relieve the suffering of the sick.
+With the natives sickness is always the result of
+witchcraft or the influence of their ancestral spirits.
+If one can by means of remedies, under the blessing
+of God, show them that this is not true, he is doing
+much to overthrow some of their superstitious beliefs.
+So the sick are visited in their homes and
+ministered to, and many come to the mission for
+treatment. Sometimes the disease may be such as
+will not yield to treatment, but the gentle sympathy
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span>
+and the delicacy for the appetite are always much
+appreciated, even from some sources least expected.
+The missionary necessarily becomes physician and
+nurse to his people, and it brings him into contact
+with them and relieves their sufferings and thus
+paves the way for ministering to their spiritual
+needs. He who neglects this part of the work makes
+a grave mistake. Many missionaries, who had done
+little medical work at home, have by a willingness
+and desire to learn, become quite proficient in healing
+on the mission field.</p>
+
+<p>Elder Steigerwald has been much used in this
+line of work. Many and various cases have been
+treated by him most successfully. In addition to
+the sick who come for medicine, there are generally
+some who remain for a time at the mission to be
+treated.</p>
+
+<p>During this dry season, as usual, kraal visiting
+occupied much of my time outside of school hours,
+and many long and enjoyable trips were made to all
+the villages surrounding us. During these journeys
+the Lord was also reminding His messenger of some
+things that had been almost forgotten. He was
+showing the large fields yet beyond where the people
+were in pagan darkness and the Light of Life
+had not yet penetrated, and where missionaries and
+teachers were greatly needed.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163"></a>
+<img src="images/illus164.png" width="600" height="351" alt="In the Matopo Hills." title="In the Matopo Hills." />
+<span class="caption">In the Matopo Hills.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The reader of these pages will remember that our
+call had been to the far interior of Africa, where
+Christ had not been named. When Matopo Mission
+was started it was felt that here was my place to
+begin work, but that the time would come when the
+Lord wanted me to press on farther in the interior.
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span>This thought kept following me, and in the second
+year of our work at Matopo, on my speaking to a
+friend of the call to press on farther, the question
+was asked, "You do not intend to go alone, do
+you?" My reply was, "No, I do not think that will
+be necessary. Perhaps the Lord will raise up others
+who desire to go beyond the Zambezi." Also, while
+Brother and Sister Van Blunk were at Matopo, the
+question of going north was often mentioned, for
+their eyes were likewise looking in that direction.</p>
+
+<p>As time went on, however, and the work at Matopo
+increased, I entered more and more deeply into
+it and became absorbed in my surroundings. The
+children and also the older people occupied a large
+place in my heart and crowded out for the time
+being all thought of anything else. The Lord had
+to take His own way of cutting me loose and again
+lifting up my eyes to the fields beyond, and I could
+not doubt but that His time was near at hand. On
+the other hand, what a struggle it was to be willing
+to leave these! He, however, showed me most
+strikingly one day that when I was willing to lose
+these children there were others waiting to be
+found; and when the work was given into His hands,
+He accomplished that which to me was impossible.</p>
+
+<p>First, the pushing out of the work must be presented
+to the Board and the home Church and their
+consent and aid solicited. Permission was given to
+return to America, and as Conference drew near,
+it seemed as if the Lord's time had come for me to
+do this. Together with my colaborers, we made it
+a special subject of prayer, and felt that I was to
+start at once. So, on March 25, 1904, I left the mission<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span>
+for America. Sister Emma Doner, as she bade
+me good-bye, said weeping, "If I did not know of
+a truth that it was the Lord's will for you to go at
+this time I could not say good-bye." That was the
+last time I was permitted to look into her dear face.
+Brother and Sister Steigerwald, together with several
+of the boys, accompanied me to Bulawayo,
+where I took the train for Cape Town.</p>
+
+<p>I shall not dwell on the events of that journey to
+America, for many things connected with it are too
+sacred to find way into public print. It is sufficient
+to say that it was a time of severe sifting and testing,
+but of such sweet fellowship with the Father,
+that I would not blot it out of my life, if I could. I
+learned, in truth, what that meant, "With God all
+things are possible." After it was over one of God's
+children greatly desired to hear of the trip home, and
+when told, he was quiet for a time; then he said,
+"I believe it was God's preparation for going farther
+into the interior. I believe the way will open."</p>
+
+<p>America was reached just in time for Conference
+in Ontario. We were sorry to learn that Elder S.
+Zook, the Treasurer of the Foreign Mission Board,
+had in the meantime passed away in February. We
+greatly missed him who had always been such an
+able pillar in the Church and missionary work, for
+his farsightedness and wise counsel had smoothed
+the way in many a difficulty. The old fathers were
+thus passing away and the work was devolving upon
+younger shoulders, but they were equal to the task.
+The Executive Board now consisted of Brethren
+J. R. Zook, Chairman; Eli M. Engle, Secretary; and
+Peter Climenhage, Treasurer, two of whom had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span>
+been connected with the foreign missionary work
+from its inception.</p>
+
+<p>A report of the work from the field met with an
+enthusiastic reception, and it was requested that
+the churches all be visited and an account of the
+mission work be given. Permission was also granted
+for an appeal to be made for pressing the work
+on into the interior, both for workers and funds.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Miss Sallie Kreider had gone to
+Africa to engage in mission work, and Elder and
+Mrs. John Meyers and Miss Lydia Heise had also
+gone there on a visit. Brother and Sister Doner,
+with some of the mission boys, had gone to Mapani
+to open a mission station in August, 1904. At first
+Brother Doner was troubled with fever, and much
+of the hut building fell to Ndhlalambi; then Sister
+Doner became quite ill, and Sister Kreider hastened
+down to assist in caring for her, but she passed
+away. Thus three precious lives had been sacrificed
+for the people and the work. Brother Doner was
+desirous of taking the body and laying it by the
+side of the others at Matopo. This was unusual in
+a hot climate like this, where interment is usually
+attended to at once, and the natives too object to
+carrying a dead body, so there was much parleying
+before they would consent to take hold of the bier
+and carry it. The way over the hills was much
+shorter, but it was also much more difficult. It was
+an exceedingly trying journey for all of them, and
+only the grace of God could have sustained them
+through it; but Brother Doner had the comfort and
+satisfaction of seeing his loved one resting in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span>
+little cemetery beside Sister Cress and Brother
+Engle.</p>
+
+<p>Sister Doner's stay of over three years in Africa
+was almost a continual struggle, one might say,
+against disease, and heroically she bore up under it.
+Her constitution was naturally not very rugged, and
+this malarial climate aggravated her disease, as it
+is sure to do with any one who is not strong. She
+was afraid to write home and inform her friends of
+the condition of her health, lest they should insist
+upon her return to America, and that she did not
+desire. She loved the work among the heathen, and
+we believe she had her desire in laying down her
+life in their behalf, rather than return to America
+where she might have lived for a longer time. Little
+Oliver continued to thrive, but as Brother Doner's
+health was great impaired, it was deemed advisable
+that he return to America on furlough and,
+after placing Oliver with friends, regain his own
+health. So in the spring of 1905 he left for America,
+and Ndhlalambi was left to care for the work just
+started at Mapani.</p>
+
+<p>In America the work was progressing; a number
+had volunteered for the foreign field, and four were
+ready to go to Africa at once; these being Mr. and
+Mrs. Harvey Frey and Misses Adda Engle and
+Abbie Bert. Over $2,000 had been donated toward
+pushing the work on into the interior. This was
+offered to the Mission Board, but they concluded
+that it was best to leave it in our hands toward the
+opening of the work. Of the four new missionaries
+who were going to Africa, none were pledged to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span>
+interior work except Sister Engle, but we still hoped
+others would be ready to go.</p>
+
+<p>We reached Matopo Mission August 1, 1905, and
+rejoiced that the Lord permitted us again to return.
+Some very noticeable changes had taken place during
+our absence: Brother Steigerwald had been
+busy making improvements, and a fine, large brick
+church, with an iron roof, had been erected. This
+was much needed and it added greatly to the appearance
+of the mission premises. The women,
+about eighty in number, gladly offered their services
+free to put in a fine polished earthen floor. A number
+of the class members had been baptized, and
+Matshuba was doing well in the schoolroom, where
+Sister Kreider was also doing some teaching.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus169.png" width="600" height="313" alt="Mapani Mission, 1907." title="Mapani Mission, 1907." />
+<span class="caption">Mapani Mission, 1907.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Ndhlalambi had been holding on faithfully at
+Mapani Mission. A number there had accepted
+Christ and he had formed them into a class for instruction.
+It was thought advisable for Sister Engle
+and myself to spend the remainder of the dry season<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span>
+at Mapani and help in the work there, so we
+turned our faces in that direction. We were there
+two months and helped in the various lines of work
+and visited some of the people in the surrounding
+neighborhood. Some of the converts were very encouraging
+at that place. At the time in which the
+rains usually open we returned to Matopo. On the
+way down we had gone by wagon road, but on our
+return four donkeys had been sent down, two for
+pack saddles and the other two for Sister Engle and
+me to ride, and two boys came along to assist in the
+homeward journey.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 368px;"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170"></a>
+<img src="images/illus171.png" width="368" height="600" alt="Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church.
+Matopo M. Hospital." title="Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church." />
+<span class="caption">Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church.
+Matopo M. Hospital.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>We left Mapani Mission at sunrise and took the
+shorter journey across the hills, the same path along
+which they had carried the body of Sister Doner
+the year previous. It was a most difficult trip for
+us and we had to marvel how they could have possibly
+made the journey. We were obliged to stop
+on the way and let the donkeys graze and eat, and
+did not reach the hills proper until afternoon. As
+the climbing was difficult and there were many trees
+and shrubs growing out from between the rocks,
+it was difficult for us to keep our seats, so we dismounted
+and walked. The pack saddles would frequently
+be nearly brushed off the other donkeys.
+Once one of the donkeys in attempting to go up a
+steep rock fell back and became fast in the rocks.
+The boys removed the load and carried it up; they
+then extricated the donkey and after much persuasion
+got it on the rock and again placed on the
+load. By the time we reached the summit, darkness
+had overtaken us and we were obliged to make the
+descent in the dark. We knew not where we were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span>
+going, and were frequently in danger of broken
+limbs or becoming fast in the rocks. We were
+very thankful when at last at eleven o'clock we
+reached the mission without any serious accident.
+This was one of Sister Engle's first experiences in
+Africa, but from her composure through it all one
+would judge that she expected such things.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus172.png" width="600" height="467" alt="Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo." title="Christian Wedding Reception" />
+<span class="caption">Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Ndhlalambi remained on at the work in Mapani
+most of the time for one and one-half years, and
+when Brother Doner at last returned there were
+some nearly ready for baptism. Not long afterwards
+thirteen were baptized there and proved
+faithful Christians.</p>
+
+<p>Brother and Sister Steigerwald had now had four
+very strenuous years of work at Matopo and were in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span>
+need of a change. So, while the new workers were
+at Matopo, the way was opened for them to go to
+Cape Town over the rainy season. Here they had a
+good rest and returned in April, 1906, quite refreshed,
+ready to take up their duties at their station.
+Brother Doner also returned from America at the
+same time and was ready to resume work at Mapani.</p>
+
+<p>There had been some pupils attending school at
+Matopo Mission, from Mtshabezi Valley, south of
+the hills, but about fifteen miles east of Brother
+Doner's station. These had strongly urged that a
+mission be planted in their midst. Brother Steigerwald
+promised them to consider the matter, and at
+the opening of the dry season Brother Frey went to
+see that part of the country. He was much pleased
+with the outlook and felt led to open work there.
+This is the origin of Mtshabezi Mission which was
+started in July, 1906. The phenomenal success attending
+that work since helps to confirm the belief
+that it was a work of the Lord's own planting.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER THIRTEEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>The Religion of the Matabele and Subject
+Tribes</h3>
+
+
+<p>In order to understand a people properly one
+must know something of their religious beliefs;
+for all the important actions of their lives rest
+upon their religion. Find out what a person believes
+and you have a pretty good idea of his character.
+A native is loth to talk about his religion,
+and will, unless he fully understands and trusts the
+questioner, often evade answering directly questions
+asked upon this subject. It is somewhat difficult to
+dissociate the religious beliefs of the Matabele from
+those of the first inhabitants of the country, as the
+two are so closely interwoven.</p>
+
+<p>It would seem that all the natives, with whom we
+have come into contact, have some conception of a
+God, however vague that conception may be. They
+do not as a rule discuss Him and His attributes
+among themselves, and so differ greatly in the attributes
+ascribed to Him. They often prefer to deal
+with and worship the lesser spirits, especially the
+shades of their ancestors with whom they are somewhat
+familiar, than a great God Whom they do not
+know and Whom they fear, for the shades they think
+can intercede for them. The native is really very
+religious, but prefers to take that religion found
+ready to hand rather than to make an attempt to
+fathom that which he does not understand.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Matabele when asked who their god is will
+readily respond that it is the King Umzilikazi. They
+say, "He gave us the country and everything we
+have, and our customs and laws, and him we worship."
+This can be easily understood from the belief
+of the Zulu tribe, of which this is a branch. The
+Zulu will say that Umkulukulu (the oldest or first
+one) is the one to be worshiped, as he gave all the
+rest their religion and customs. As their ideas of
+worship were very elastic, there was no difficulty in
+including other departed spirits in the list of those
+worshiped. All who left them could intercede for
+them in the spirit world; hence, when the old queen
+was buried, the woman who washed her face just
+before burial said, "Go in peace and speak a good
+word for us to the king, and to those who have gone
+before, so that we too may find a place and not be
+found fault with."</p>
+
+<p>This very fact, that their religious beliefs are so
+elastic, makes missionary work often the more difficult
+and discouraging among them. They will quite
+readily accept the God one preaches, and Christ as
+the Savior of men, but to their way of thinking this
+does not interfere with their worship. This fact
+was forcibly thrust upon me one day in coming to a
+kraal near the mission that had been frequently
+visited. The people here had much light and often
+came to the services, and their son Masikwa was a
+baptized member. On this occasion we found the
+older people worshiping the spirits, and said to the
+woman,</p>
+
+<p>"How is this? We thought that you worshiped
+the Lord Jesus."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Oh! yes, we do," she replied, "He is the Big
+Spirit and we worship Him too."</p>
+
+<p>It was not at all difficult for her to include Him
+among the number of spirits to be worshiped. She
+was willing to accept all who might be able to help
+them, and even give Him a large place alongside of
+the others. The fact that He had been on earth and
+died only added to the conception that He was like
+the rest. The force of the resurrection idea she had
+not grasped. It will be readily seen how difficult it
+is to inculcate the idea of one Supreme Being Who
+alone should be worshiped, and Who is a jealous
+God and will brook no rivals.</p>
+
+<p>On the other hand, the belief in an intercessor
+has its useful side in giving them the Gospel, for
+we endeavor to impress upon their minds that Christ
+is the Great Intercessor, Who "ever liveth to make
+intercession for them," a risen Savior, not a dead
+One. The great question here is, "Intercede for
+what?" Sins they do not claim to have. To them
+religion has nothing to do with morals, for neither
+if they live pure moral lives are they the better, nor
+if they are base and licentious are they worse when
+they come to die. The spirits whom they worship
+are of their own conception and have the same
+loves and hates. As Mr. J. W. Jack says: "Down
+all the ages to the present time so frightful have
+been the abysses of depravity, the intolerable cruelty,
+the extravagances of nameless lust associated
+with religion, that if the veil were lifted, Christianity
+could not bear the story." The raw native will
+tell you that lying, stealing, murder, and adultery<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span>
+are bad, but they do not look upon these as having
+anything to do with their religion.</p>
+
+<p>Again, the very fact that they are so tolerant in
+their religious views, and so ready to include all,
+led the Matabele early in their history to adopt the
+religion of the conquered tribes. The oldest and,
+to them, the most powerful and most widely-worshiped
+of these heathen deities was Umlimo. This
+was the name of one worshiped by the Makalanga.
+He was supposed to have his abode in the Matopo
+Hills, several of which places are still pointed out.
+If one may judge from the information received
+from the natives, the worship greatly resembled
+that of the ancient Greek oracles. When any
+important question of the tribe was in need of
+solution, or even when individual questions arose,
+they would go to the hill or cave in which the
+Umlimo was supposed to have his dwelling
+place, carry a present, perhaps of beer, meat, or
+other food, and, placing it on the rock, remove to a
+respectful distance and then make known their
+wants. They said the answer would come from the
+very depths of the earth.</p>
+
+<p>It is said: "The answer was given by means of
+ventriloquism and, as the speaker was inside the
+cave and invisible, the voice appeared to the inquirer
+to issue from the very bowels of the earth.
+The extreme ingenuity of the device will be better
+appreciated when it is known that the spirits of the
+departed are universally believed by the natives to
+dwell in an under world. For a ventriloquist to
+practice his calling as a diviner in the foregoing
+manner is probably not unworthy of that oracle<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span>
+which Socrates himself felt it necessary to consult at
+Delphi."</p>
+
+<p>In this way they would inquire as to the cause of
+drought, rinderpest among the cattle, locusts, and
+the like, and they were told that these came through
+the white man. In speaking of their worship some
+would acknowledge that a priest dwelt in the cave
+and received their offerings, and that he would consult
+Umlimo and give forth the answer in sepulchral
+tones to the worshipers. This god was also worshiped
+at the opening of every year by a great dance,
+so that he would send an abundance of rain. One
+special place of worship was in a large cave in the
+midst of the Makalanga country. As this was said
+to be only about five or six miles from Mapani Mission,
+I had a desire to visit the spot and see what it
+was like. Setyokupi, one of the first Christian girls
+at Mapani, offered to accompany Ndhlamlabi and
+myself to the cave, as she lived near the place but
+had never visited it. We started early one morning
+to the home of Setyokupi, which was several
+miles from the mission, and from there continued
+our journey to the cave. It was much farther than
+we had anticipated, and we walked quite a distance
+before reaching the immense kopje, or hill of
+stone, in which the cave was. Then our way wound
+round and round among the rocks for a long distance.
+Setyokupi saw that the task was greater
+than she had anticipated, and fearful of losing ourselves,
+we asked a young lad, whom we met in the
+neighborhood, to guide us. After reaching the cave
+we were obliged to climb forty or fifty feet up the
+side of the rock before we could enter.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It was a large cave, extending back into the rocks,
+and would have formed several good-sized rooms.
+We had understood that the worshipers generally
+took a present and left it in the cave. This was
+frequently a branch or twig of a tree; consequently
+there were to be seen in it many dried leaves and
+branches of trees, the thought in their mind in this
+connection being no doubt similar to that of the
+olive branch of peace. There were also a few old
+ornaments and cloth, but nothing of value. Here
+it was said the people came to have their yearly
+dance and pray for rain. Everything on the inside
+was quite old, and it looked as if the place had not
+been visited lately, but we were informed that there
+was another and more important place of worship in
+the vicinity in which there was a pool of water.
+This we did not see, nor did we learn of its location.
+The day was fast passing and we were obliged to
+hasten back to the mission.</p>
+
+<p>At this time, 1905, Europeans had already been
+fifteen years in some parts of the country and the
+natives about Matopo Mission were always quite
+willing for anyone to be present at their religious
+festivals. Many were beginning to throw off some
+of their old superstitious ideas, and some were accepting
+Christ; so there was no thought of impropriety
+in our making this tour of investigation. The
+account of it no doubt came out through the little
+boy who accompanied us, and although these natives
+in Mapaniland were more raw than those
+about Matopo Mission, perhaps nothing further
+would have been thought of the visit, had the rains
+come on that year at the usual time. Unfortunately<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span>
+they were exceptionally late, not really coming until
+the first of January, and the people were becoming
+desperate. It is always necessary for the heathen
+to let the blame rest somewhere, and as the
+witch doctors and diviners generally hate the missionaries
+because of their loss of custom and prestige,
+so they naturally put the blame upon our visit
+to the cave. I never learned that they placed the
+blame upon myself, but they did upon those who
+accompanied me. Ndhlalambi's life was really in
+danger that year and his people were much concerned
+for his safety. He, however, did not seem
+concerned about himself and continued to go back
+and forth and see about the work at Mapani. Several
+years later Setyokupi, who is a most devoted
+Christian, had to bear the blame from the older
+people for a similar drought, the years of plenty
+intervening being overlooked. We as missionaries,
+however, always try to be careful not to stir up
+unecessarily the opposition of the natives.</p>
+
+<p>According to some of the older natives Umlimo
+is worshiped under various names; in fact, there is
+a trinity. In the hills to the south is the father,
+Shologulu. He is stern and unbending and is to
+be greatly feared. In the east is the son, Lunzi, who
+is kind and easy to be entreated. The mother,
+Banyanchaba, is in the north. Just how much tradition,
+handed down from Christianity, is embodied
+in this idea cannot be ascertained, but the belief is
+quite ancient.</p>
+
+<p>Again, some of the natives say that certain of the
+people at times claimed to be Umlimo and to have
+the power ascribed to him. One of these was a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span>
+woman whom the king, in order to test her power,
+put in a hut near him. He convinced himself of her
+false pretenses and punished her accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>In a general way natives do not concern themselves
+about a Supreme God. Some, of course, will
+readily say that He made everything. Again we
+have inquired of others,</p>
+
+<p>"Who made the trees, the rocks, the grass?"</p>
+
+<p>They will answer, "We came here and found
+them already created, so we did not concern ourselves
+to inquire who made them."</p>
+
+<p>This indifference or spiritual laziness had much to
+do with their religion. On another occasion we
+were speaking with a native living near Mapani
+Mission, and were telling him that he ought to
+repent and accept Christ as his Savior. To excuse
+himself he said:</p>
+
+<p>"He made me. He brought me into the world
+and it is His business to boss me up."</p>
+
+<p>He really meant to say, "I am here by no choice
+of my own. He made me. I am His and He has a
+right to do as He pleases with me."</p>
+
+<p>This idea of fate runs through all their beliefs.
+They have no volition of their own. Everything
+that comes to them, whether of accident, sickness,
+ill luck, or whatever it may be, is the result of
+malevolent spirits which are in league against them.
+In fact, all their worship is one of the propitiation
+of the malevolent spirits. Good spirits will not
+harm them.</p>
+
+<p>One day in the Sabbath-school class, where questions
+were freely asked, one of the older men said,
+"Since I hear you tell who God is and what He<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span>
+likes, and who Satan is and what he does, I see that
+our god, whom we have been worshiping, is Satan
+himself."</p>
+
+<p>The <i>amadhlozi</i> (spirits of the departed) are constantly
+besetting their path, causing sickness or misfortune,
+or else helping them to do what they desire.
+Their expression, for ill luck is <i>Angi ladhlozi</i>
+(I do not have any spirit). When sick they send
+for the witch doctor to tell where the trouble is. He
+may say that one of the spirits thinks he had not
+been properly treated and wishes a goat. The goat
+is brought and killed, and a small portion of meat
+is used with medicine for the sick, but by far the
+greater part of the meat is generally appropriated
+by the witch doctor himself, who was no doubt more
+desirous of it than the shades.</p>
+
+<p>If health is not forthcoming for the sick, he is
+certainly bewitched. This is generally the belief
+when one dies or is suffering from an incurable
+disease. The witch doctor then takes his "bones"
+and "smells out" the supposed witch, and he is
+very careful to select as his victim one who is not
+very popular in the community by reason of his
+wealth or other circumstances. This one is accused
+of bewitching, and is ignominiously put to death,
+and all his property confiscated.</p>
+
+<p>Since the occupation of the country by the English
+much of this killing of supposed witches is
+done away with, but there are still violent deaths,
+which looks suspicious. Since our stay at Matopo
+there was an instance of an old woman being
+drowned, which was traced directly to the witch
+doctor and he was punished. There were also several<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span>
+instances of supposed suicide by hanging, which
+looked as if there might have been foul play, but
+which could not be ferreted. It is not unusual for
+the old or infirm to be gotten rid of in this way,
+especially by the ordeal of drinking poison.</p>
+
+<p>It would be unjust to say that their doctors never
+use remedies; in fact, they have many herbs which
+they use and some of these are very efficacious. In
+fever we have seen them administer a greenish-looking
+powder of a native herb, which tasted much like
+quinine, and we were surprised once to see a native
+physician pass through the mission premises
+with a wallet full of various kinds of herbs. He had
+a pass from the magistrate to practice among the
+natives, and he proudly opened his wallet and displayed
+his drugs. Notwithstanding that they have
+these remedies, yet, in practice, this is often so
+mixed with charms and other superstitious ideas,
+that it is difficult to tell wherein the real remedy lies.
+A witch doctor, who lived near us and who had
+much light, exclaimed one day, "I can give medicine,
+and if the Lord says the sick will recover, he
+will recover; if He says the sick one will die, he will
+die; my medicine cannot save him."</p>
+
+<p>When one treats a native in his home for any disease,
+it is always difficult to induce his people to
+follow the prescribed treatment; for they desire often
+to use their arts as well. A case of scurvy was
+at one of the villages, and they came to the mission
+for help. We went over. The boy had been losing
+blood for several days and was very weak, seemingly
+in the last stages of the disease. They had been
+using their arts, but to no avail, and had come to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span>
+the mission as a last resort. Elder Steigerwald reproved
+them for waiting so long, and took hold of
+the case, hoping still to save him. After looking to
+the Lord for guidance, he managed to get the bleeding
+stopped, but to see that everything was properly
+carried out one of us remained for a time at the
+kraal. When he was thought to be out of danger he
+was left with his people, with strict injunctions to
+do just as they were told. When the patient was
+next visited it was found that the people had again
+brought out their charms and put them about his
+head, and it was necessary to frighten them thoroughly
+before they would follow instructions.</p>
+
+<p>Parents are always very anxious to have their
+children at home if they become sick. This may
+partly be owing to natural solicitation on the part
+of the parents, for they love their children as well as
+white parents do, but it is also due to the fact that
+they cannot use their divinations properly except
+at home. Then, too, if they die, they are always
+anxious that their people die at home. In this way
+we often had great difficulty in keeping at the mission
+some who were sick and needed care.</p>
+
+<p>One of our boys was very sick and we had been
+unable to help him, and both he and ourselves were
+looking to the Lord in his behalf. He was a good
+Christian and perfectly conscious all the time, and
+quite ready and willing to die if such was the Lord's
+will. His parents lived near and had been trying to
+take him home, but he did not wish to go; and we
+too thought it best for him to remain under our care.
+When he became very low, it was necessary to inform
+his parents. The father, who was a very violent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span>
+and wrathy man, was determined to take the
+boy home, but we felt sure that a move at that
+time would be fatal, and told the father so.</p>
+
+<p>He replied, "I'll take him home if he dies on the
+way. I'll not have it said that my child died and
+was buried away from home." And it was with
+great difficulty that he could be prevailed upon to
+let the boy remain. The Lord heard our prayer in
+his behalf and he recovered.</p>
+
+<p>From what has been written it may readily be
+seen that the African believes in the immortality of
+the soul; that the souls of the departed take cognizance
+of what is done on the earth by the survivors;
+and that they have power over those who dwell on
+the earth to help, harm, or intercede in their behalf.
+They also believe in transmigration of souls, that
+the spirit of the departed often enters a snake, bird,
+lion, rhinoceros, or other animals, each of these
+tribes having its own especial animal. This does
+not necessarily imply that the soul remains in these
+forms. Frequently they speak of the animals as
+only a medium through which the spirit appears to
+its friends.</p>
+
+<p>The Matabele revere the snake and will not kill it.
+The first year of the mission a long snake entered
+one of the huts, that was in process of erection, and
+climbed up near the roof. I told one of the boys to
+knock it down and kill it. He recoiled from the idea
+and refused. Thinking he was afraid I took a hoe,
+knocked it down and killed it. When other natives
+came to the mission the incident was related to
+them by the boys and they expressed great surprise.
+I rather supposed that they were surprised<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span>
+at my prowess, until one woman who knew me
+better than the others exclaimed, "Were you not
+afraid to kill it? Perhaps it was one of your friends."
+I then found out that the snake was an object of
+reverence.</p>
+
+<p>Matshuba said that when his father was ill a
+snake entered his hut and he exclaimed, "That looks
+like a child of mine, it is so pretty. It is your
+brother, Matshuba."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that the reason," we inquired, "why so many
+people are afraid to kill snakes?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," he replied, "they think their friends come
+to visit them in this form."</p>
+
+<p>Again, once while out kraal-visiting we were
+speaking to some people who were working in their
+garden. Some one came from their kraal with a
+message of some kind, and soon all was commotion
+and hurry.</p>
+
+<p>I inquired, "What is the matter? Where are you
+going?"</p>
+
+<p>They answered, "Two snakes have entered our
+hut and we must go and see them."</p>
+
+<p>"Will you kill them?"</p>
+
+<p>"No, they are probably some of our friends, who
+have come to visit us," was the reply.</p>
+
+<p>The people were also accustomed to use a goat
+in their worship and then drive it away on the veldt.
+I know very little of this ceremony, except that
+when it was told to me, I was forcibly reminded of
+the "scapegoat" of the Israelites. Each family also
+has a sacred ox or cow among the herd. They do not
+worship images, and are surprised to find that there
+are people on earth who do. Two of the boys in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span>
+reading their Bibles one day learned for the first
+time that some people worship images made by
+men's hand, and they were as much surprised as
+any white child could have been.</p>
+
+<p>"Do they answer their prayers?" inquired they.
+"Can they talk, or do they know anything? Is it
+something like we make cattle out of mud to play
+with?"</p>
+
+<p>We are accustomed to despise people who worship
+animals, and it is certainly not very elevating;
+but they are God's handiwork, and are they not
+superior to many of the hideous images of idolatrous
+nations? When these people do worship, the object
+of their reverence is not the animal, but the souls of
+their people who they think enter the animals.</p>
+
+<p>Spiritualism is a legitimate product of their beliefs.
+I can best illustrate this feature of their worship
+by giving an instance which came to our notice
+in the year 1900. It was a religious dance. The
+chief actors had come from a distance and the worship
+was in honor of one of their dead relatives, the
+aim being to bring back the soul and hold conference
+with it through one who acted as medium.</p>
+
+<p>We felt to avail ourselves of this opportunity of
+seeing something of their worship, that we might
+have a better understanding of the same. The mother
+of Kelenki, one of our converts, participated and
+she, heathenlike, was anxious to have her boy take
+part, but he of course refused, as he had always done
+when urged to join with them. It was only about
+two miles from the mission, so Brother and Sister
+Lehman and myself went over for a short time.
+We entered the village at about 3 P. M. and found<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span>
+about one hundred people assembled. They had
+just been drinking beer and were feeling quite good.
+As many of them knew us, they greeted us quite
+pleasantly, nothing loath to see us on this occasion,
+provided we did not interfere in their worship.</p>
+
+<p>One of the most noticeable features at first was
+the evident attempt at ornamentation on the part of
+the women, especially the older women who were
+to take active part in the proceedings. We might
+add that only the older people took part in this
+dance, and that the ornamentation of the body is
+always a noticeable feature of their worship. Their
+dress, or rather undress, consisted of a short skirt
+of dirty, greasy leather, covered with a heavy embroidery
+of bright-colored beads. The rest of the
+body was ornamented with beads and heavy brass
+rings, neck, waist, arms, and ankles being heavily
+laden. The headdress consisted of a broad band of
+beads artistically put together.</p>
+
+<p>Our attention was soon drawn to three women
+seated on the ground before one of the huts, each
+with a large drum made from a hollowed log, over
+one end of which was a skin tightly drawn. On this
+drum they were beating with their hands and accompanying
+the sound with low, plaintive singing.
+Presently a man, who proved to be the leader, or
+medium, stepped out, beating at the same time on a
+drum made of a broad wooden hoop, over which
+was stretched a piece of skin. He was a tall, athletic-looking
+fellow, clothed in a short skirt similar
+to that worn by the women. He had many yards
+of blue cloth wrapped about his body and a yellow
+scarf thrown over one shoulder. The drum which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span>
+was beaten with a stick produced a sharp ringing
+sound, and he danced with a peculiar backward
+step, keeping time to the beating of his drum, and
+sang, calling upon the shades. To this the women,
+beating the drums or tomtoms, would respond. A
+number of other men with similar drums joined him
+in the dance, and the air was filled with their melody.</p>
+
+<p>This was continued for some time, when all suddenly
+ceased and disappeared within a hut and continued
+their dance within. We were invited to
+enter, and after creeping through the low doorway
+we found ourselves in a hut about eighteen feet in
+diameter, with a somewhat higher roof than is to
+be found in many native huts. The performance
+was similar to that on the outside, except that others
+joined in the dance, but all danced alone. The
+actions and contortions of the body became more
+and more rapid and violent, and there was also
+leaping and jumping, the heat and violent exertion
+of the body causing the perspiration to flow freely.</p>
+
+<p>The medium finally worked himself up into sort
+of a frenzy and announced that a spirit had entered
+the door. With this he pretended to enter into conversation,
+but as he spoke in the Shuna language we
+did not understand him. The dancers all finally
+rushed out on the rocks and the leader fell down exhausted.
+After their return the same motions were
+continued, but a new feature was added by women
+entering, having native-made bells tied to their
+ankles, and these added to the general din. The
+motions of all were more or less similar, and even
+when the actions and contortions of the body were
+the most violent, they were somewhat rhythmical.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span>
+The noise was deafening in the extreme, and would
+have surely waked the dead were such a thing possible.
+In addition to a dozen drums and the bells,
+there were yelling, whistling, and singing. A huge
+battle-axe was handed around from one to another,
+and part of the time was dangling on the neck of
+the leader. Sad as one felt at the delusion under
+which they labored, he could not but be impressed
+by their evident earnestness, and only wished it
+might be expended in a better cause.</p>
+
+<p>They did not forget our presence, and no doubt
+we did interfere with the freedom of their actions.
+The medium came toward us several times, beating
+his drum. Thinking he might be annoyed at our
+presence we spoke to the headman, but he hastened
+to assure us that we were welcome to remain. In
+fact, he as well as many others in the kraal, seemed
+to be spectators rather than participants in the worship.</p>
+
+<p>They finally became quiet and the medium again
+claimed to converse with the departed, and this time
+one of our boys interpreted. Of course both questions
+and answers were given by the medium.
+Among other things he said: "I see a spirit enter
+the door. It says, 'Who are these white people?
+Are they the people who killed the Matabele?' No,
+they are missionaries and like the black people." It
+seemed evident that not only the spirit but some of
+the strangers present were somewhat afraid and
+needed assurance that we were harmless.</p>
+
+<p>We returned home sad at heart for their heathendom.
+We were informed that this worship continued
+until late in the night and two days following.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span>
+There was much beer drinking and immorality,
+so that even some of the heathen in the kraal
+were thoroughly disgusted.</p>
+
+<p>The Matabele do not use drums in their religious
+dance like the Mashona. Once when we were out
+kraal visiting we happened to come upon some of
+these worshiping at Fusi's kraal. We stopped only
+a few minutes to see what they were doing, and were
+greatly shocked by the hideousness of their looks
+and actions. The very stamp of the bottomless pit
+seemed impressed upon their features.</p>
+
+<p>Heathen worship, heathen dances, and hideous
+rites are becoming less and less in the vicinity of
+the mission, for the natives are fast losing faith in
+their old religion. The missionaries need a great
+deal of patience, forbearance, and firmness in dealing
+with the perplexing problems in reference to the
+natives' beliefs, but in the end God's cause is sure
+to win.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER FOURTEEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Some of the Customs</h3>
+
+
+<p>Custom is so interwoven with and dependent
+upon religion that it is almost impossible to
+dissociate the two, so there is a difference of
+opinion as to what constitutes custom and what religion.
+Whatever the natives believe or practice
+has in their estimation been given them by their
+god, even to the ornaments of their bodies. As Rev.
+W. Chapman says, "The most satisfactory way of
+changing native customs is by changing his religion."
+On the other hand, take away the native's
+religion and the restraints which often accompany it,
+and place him in a modern city, with its so-called
+modern civilization, without the restraining influences
+of the Christian religion, and a monstrosity
+of evil is often the result.</p>
+
+<p>From infancy this inexorable law, custom, assails
+him. He must not step aside from the laws of his
+ancestors or he will suffer the consequences. If
+twins are born, they must be put to death. If a
+child cuts his upper front teeth first instead of the
+lower, again death is the penalty. Not because the
+mother does not love her child. It is just as dear
+to her as the child of Christian parents is to them,
+and generally no amount of money will induce her
+to part with it, but this infant is departing from the
+customs followed by its ancestors, and if its precocity<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span>
+leads it thus early to change the customs,
+what will it not do as it becomes older? It is a
+monstrosity and must be dealt with accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>If the child is a girl, it may at any time after
+birth be betrothed or sold to a man for his wife, and
+a part or all of the pay be given to the parents to
+bind the contract. This intended husband may be
+already middle-aged or old, with several wives.
+That is to his credit, because it frequently means
+that he is rich or a man of importance in the community.
+An old, gray-haired man living near the
+mission had nine wives when we arrived on the
+scene, some of whom were just young girls. However,
+one frequently meets with heathen natives
+who have only one wife.</p>
+
+<p>The would-be bridegroom sends some one to the
+father or guardian of the girl to ask for her hand in
+marriage. He consults his relatives in reference to
+the matter, but even if they disagree, he may give
+his consent, for he alone receives the pay. This
+may be in the form of cattle, sheep, or goats, or even
+money in later years, and the amount of pay the
+man can or is willing to give had much to do with
+the father's consent. Of course the girl has no say
+in the affair, and may not, until she is older, know
+who her intended husband is. If she is small, he
+waits until she is about grown before the actual
+marriage takes place, but in the meantime she is
+looked upon as his prospective wife and is often
+thoroughly demoralized before marriage.</p>
+
+<p>Before the missionaries or Europeans came to the
+country, it is doubtful whether the girl rebelled
+much as to what disposition was made of her, for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span>
+one choice was about the same as another, only so
+that she might become a married woman. In their
+eyes it was almost a disgrace to be unmarried after
+they had reached the proper age.</p>
+
+<p>It is said that when the time came for her to be
+married she would say, "I am grown and want to
+marry." At first her people refuse, but finally they
+give her a hoe and showing her a piece of raw veldt
+say, "Show how you can dig, so that we may see
+whether you have strength to perform the work of a
+wife." She takes the hoe and shows her strength
+by vigorous work; for is she not to take the place
+of oxen or donkeys for her husband and plow and
+sow his gardens? This is no exaggeration, for more
+than one native has been heard to exclaim, "These
+are my oxen," pointing to his wives, the chief difference
+being that whereas the oxen get some time
+to rest and eat, the wife gets little, as she must
+grind and prepare the food in the interim of digging.</p>
+
+<p>When the day set for the wedding arrives, a number
+of girls of about her own age are called and they
+have a feast, often of goat, after which they accompany
+the bride to the home of the bridegroom, an
+old woman, carrying a knife, leading the way. Here
+they are assigned their places and various ceremonies.
+The wedding lasts several days and ends
+in a feast, and very often much immorality is connected
+with it. During a certain stage of the ceremony
+the bride runs and hides, not again making
+her appearance until she is found by the others.</p>
+
+<p>So-called marriages sometimes take place without
+any pay being given for the wife, but in such instances
+the children do not belong to or are not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span>
+under the control of their parents; they belong to
+the father or guardian of the wife, as she has not
+been paid for. It may thus be seen that the giving
+of pay is not an unmitigated evil, as it leaves the
+children in the hands of their natural guardians, the
+parents. With the wife the pay is merely changing
+her from the ownership of her father to that of her
+husband, and if she should leave her husband, the
+pay or part of it must be returned to him.</p>
+
+<p>It frequently happens that a man takes a wife
+according to native marriage without paying for
+her, and afterwards, if he desires to retain her or
+her children, he pays the father for her. A native in
+the vicinity of Matopo had, in this manner, taken
+five wives, at various times, without paying for any
+of them. When some of his children became of an
+age that his wives' parents desired to take them, he
+took steps to secure them by paying for his wives.
+One, however, whom he did not like, he drove away
+without paying for her. These things show that
+the marriage vow is exceedingly loose and leads to
+much immorality. Several years after we came to
+Matopo Hills a law was passed by the British Government,
+allowing the girls some freedom of choice
+in regard to the marriage question, and it is now
+possible for Christian girls to choose Christian husbands.</p>
+
+<p>A man will have a hut for himself and one for
+each of his wives, and the more wives he has, the
+greater his importance in the community. I think
+that it is safe to say that an old heathen's ambition
+is to have many wives, each with her hut, about him,
+many sons, who too, with their wives, add to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span>
+number of huts, and many daughters, that he may
+sell them for cattle or sheep and thus increase his
+flocks and herds. He also likes to have nephews,
+younger brothers, and other relatives with their
+wives come to him and swell the number of huts.
+This makes a large number of huts, large herds, and
+he becomes an important headman; or if his followers
+increase sufficiently he may become a chief.
+These huts, built near together and often enclosed
+with a fence, are what constitute a kraal. This is a
+Dutch word and applies only to native villages, but
+there may be only three or four huts and it still be
+called a kraal.</p>
+
+<p>Their huts are built of poles and mud, much as
+described in the making of our own, except that the
+huts of the raw natives are much lower, without
+windows and with a doorway only about three feet
+in height. Sometimes no poles are used in the construction
+of the walls, but they are moulded of earth
+from the bottom up and are well made. The floor
+is made of ant-hill earth, well pounded. This is
+then covered with a thin coat of black earth and
+polished with stones until it looks not unlike a
+nicely-polished wooden floor. The Matabele build
+much better huts than some of the subject tribes;
+these latter are good farmers, but often have most
+miserable-looking huts.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196"></a>
+<img src="images/illus197.png" width="600" height="351" alt="Matabele Kraal near Matopo Mission." title="Matabele Kraal." />
+<span class="caption">Matabele Kraal near Matopo Mission.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>There is no furniture proper in the huts. The bed
+consists of a mat or hide spread on the floor at
+night. During the day this, together with the
+blankets, is rolled up and tied to the roof of the hut.
+The pillow is made from a block of wood, and there
+are no chairs, a small mat answering for this purpose.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span>
+They have earthen pots for cooking and
+brewing beer and for various purposes. They have
+many kinds of nicely-woven baskets, and gourds
+for carrying and dipping water as well as for drinking
+vessels. There are also the necessary stamping
+block and a large flat stone on which the grain is
+ground. The wash basin is the mouth. The mouth
+is filled with water, which is allowed to run in a
+thin stream on the hands until they are washed,
+and then the hands are filled in the same way to
+wash the face. I was greatly interested once in
+the operation of bathing twins. This mother had
+sufficient light to keep her from killing her babies
+because there were two of them. She spread a
+blanket on a large rock in the sun. Then she took
+a gourd of water and filled her mouth. (It is surprising
+how much water they can hold in the mouth;
+practice aids greatly in this, no doubt.) She kept
+the water in her mouth a short time to take off the
+chill, then picked up one child, held it out and, with
+a thin stream of water pouring from her mouth,
+washed the entire body of the child thoroughly.
+After this ablution she laid it on the blanket in the
+sun to dry. She again filled her mouth and taking
+the other baby repeated the process and also placed
+it on the blanket. The children were evidently accustomed
+to such baths; for they took it all quietly,
+and perhaps enjoyed it as much as a white child in
+a bath tub of warm water.</p>
+
+<p>Polygamy is not necessarily opposed among some
+of the heathen women. They will frequently tell
+you, "I like my husband to have more than one
+wife; then I do not need to work so hard." It is,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span>
+however, a source of much dissension and rivalry
+among them and a cause of much favoritism among
+the children. One day Gomo was reading the story
+of Joseph and Benjamin. He exclaimed, "That is
+just like our people. The children of the favorite
+wife are loved more by the father." Of course polygamy
+is one great drawback to the introduction
+of christianity, but we believe that it has had its
+day and that in many places it is becoming less in
+practice. Each wife cooks of her own food for the
+husband and places it before him. He, with older
+boys, eats what he desires and leaves the balance,
+if there be any, for the wife and her children. If he
+has many wives a number of dishes are often placed
+before him during the day, and he can eat that
+which he prefers. Or, if there are several men in
+the kraal, they often all eat from one dish, and from
+each dish as it is brought to them by the various
+wives, while the mother and daughters eat from a
+separate dish.</p>
+
+<p>Their chief occupation is farming, and they grow
+corn, kafir corn, millet, sweet potatoes, peanuts,
+ground peas, melons, citrons, and pumpkins. They
+generally hull the grain and then stamp or grind it
+into a very fine meal or flour. This they put into
+boiling water and make a very stiff porridge, or
+mush. Their favorite food seems to be this porridge,
+eaten with meat into the broth of which
+ground peanuts have been cooked. They generally
+have chickens, sheep, goats, or cattle, and often
+hunt or trap game. Their usual way of eating is to
+allow the food to cool a little and then dip the two
+front fingers into the porridge, take a little and dip<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span>
+it into the gravy and then put it into their mouth.
+They also greatly relish green corn, eaten from the
+cob or cut off and ground on the millstones. This
+milky meal is then made into a loaf and placed into
+a kettle and thoroughly steamed. This is their best
+substitute for bread, and in its season it is considered
+their most dainty dish, and with a little salt it
+is quite palatable, especially if not much grit has
+combined with it in the process of preparation.</p>
+
+<p>The African is fond of his beer, which also is
+made by the wives. For this purpose they use any
+of the grains grown by them, but they prefer kafir
+corn or millet. This is moistened and put in a warm
+place until it sprouts. It is then ground or stamped
+and the meal is cooked into a thin porridge and put
+into large earthen pots, where more water is added,
+also the yeast or dregs of a previous brewing. It
+is then allowed to stand in a warm place and ferment,
+and before drinking it is usually strained
+through a loose bag of their own weaving. The native
+will tell you that their god showed them how to
+make the beer, and I have no doubt but that he did.</p>
+
+<p>It is needless to say that it intoxicates and is the
+cause of frequent brawls and fights among them,
+and it is not unusual for the missionaries to be
+called upon to help settle some of these disturbances.
+It is less difficult to convince the Africans
+of the evil effects of its use than it is some Europeans.
+The latter will often tell you that the native
+thrives and works better if allowed his beer. Missionaries
+are not wanting who think it is best not to
+interfere with their native Christians having their
+beer. Our missionaries, however, have no difficulty<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span>
+in inducing the Christians to discard the use of it,
+and we believe the sentiment against it is increasing
+among the missionaries in general. In a native
+Conference held at Matopo Mission in February,
+1914, the question of native beer came up. Of course
+all were opposed to members drinking it, but the
+question was in regard to the Christian girls, who
+were minors, assisting in the making of it, since
+they are under the jurisdiction of their heathen parents.
+The older native Christians were in favor of
+more stringent measures than even the missionaries.</p>
+
+<p>In order to show what an enlightened Christian
+native can and will do if he has the power we need
+only refer to the work of King Khama. He is the
+King of Bechuanaland, the country just west of
+Southern Rhodesia. His father was a heathen king
+and a sorcerer, but Khama embraced Christianity in
+his youth, and in the midst of most bitter persecutions
+from his own father and others, he stood
+true. The people finally recognizing his ability
+chose him king in place of his father in 1872. Then
+his difficulties began in another line. If he was to
+be the chief of the country, it must be founded on
+the principles of the Gospel. All imported liquor
+was prohibited from crossing the border, nor was
+native beer allowed to be made.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 308px;"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201"></a>
+<img src="images/illus202.png" width="308" height="600" alt="Matabele Women Stamping Grain." title="Matabele Women Stamping Grain." />
+<span class="caption">Matabele Women Stamping Grain.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>It was a fierce battle with some of the natives
+themselves, for they were not all Christians and did
+not readily yield. This domestic trouble, however,
+was nothing compared with the battle he had to
+wage with unprincipled white traders and even with
+government officials, for the country was under the
+protection of England, and they had some voice in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span>
+the management of affairs. But Khama won the
+day in such a struggle as would have dismayed
+many a stouter heart. According to Mr. J. H. Hepburn,
+Khama wrote to the British Administration
+as follows: "I dread the white man's drink more
+than the assegais of the Matabele which kill men's
+bodies and is quickly over; but drink puts devils into
+men and destroys their souls and bodies forever.
+Its wounds never heal. I pray your Honor never
+to ask me to open even a little door to drink."
+Words worthy of a native Christian hero, indeed; a
+hero that could not be bought, that could not be
+bribed or frightened by the liquor men.</p>
+
+<p>The Government of Rhodesia is rather favorable
+toward native beer, yet we owe it much for prohibiting
+imported liquor sold to natives within its
+territory. Perhaps (who knows?) Khama's firm
+stand in his own territory may have been an influence
+in keeping Rhodesian natives from securing
+imported liquor.</p>
+
+<p>Mention was made before that the native way of
+getting work done is to make a quantity of beer and
+invite their neighbors. They do this in digging
+and preparing the ground for sowing, in weeding,
+in cultivating, and in threshing. While a little beer
+is given during the work, the greater part is kept
+back until the work is completed, perhaps as an
+inducement for them to persevere unto the end. If
+then one, in evangelistic work, comes upon such a
+company early in the day, they are not much the
+worse for drink and will often listen attentively.</p>
+
+<p>Once Sister Steigerwald and I came to a place
+where a large company were busy weeding. They<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span>
+had a large garden to weed and did not greatly
+desire to stop for service, but we promised not to
+keep them long, so they gathered under the shade
+of a tree. On opening our Bible our eye fell on the
+"Parable of the Tares," which seemed quite suitable
+for the occasion. They listened most attentively to
+the short talk, and as illustrations taken from their
+gardens and work always seemed better understood
+and appreciated, we made use of such entirely in
+the application. After singing and prayer we told
+them they might return to their work. We sat
+still and watched them awhile, and as they worked
+and pulled out the weeds, we could hear them talking
+to one another and saying, "Yes, the bad things
+Satan sows in our hearts are just like these weeds,
+and they need to be rooted out or they will destroy
+us."</p>
+
+<p>On another occasion, one Sunday morning, there
+were no natives from one of the large kraals present
+at the services, and we felt to pay them a visit.
+Ganukisa and some of the boys accompanying, we
+went to the place in the afternoon to hold service.
+We always tried to impress upon the people that
+they should not work on Sunday, and many were
+heeding, so on this occasion we were surprised to
+find about seventy-five of them having a digging.
+As we drew near, they had just finished the work
+and were about to surround the huge beer pots for
+a "good time." We knew by the time they had
+consumed all that beer they would scarcely be in a
+condition to receive the Gospel. What should we
+do? We never like to ask the natives to do anything
+unless there is some probability of its being<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span>
+carried out, for one is likely to lose influence over
+them. Could they be persuaded to leave their beer
+pots and let us talk to them first? We could not
+make them do it, but God could, so looking to Him
+we said,</p>
+
+<p>"Leave the beer and come out under the shade of
+the trees while we talk to you."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, no," they replied, "let us drink the beer
+first and then we will come."</p>
+
+<p>We knew that if they did their drinking first
+some of them would not stay for the service, so
+again, with somewhat more authority, I repeated
+the request, and at the same time, together with the
+Christian natives who accompanied, moved toward
+the shade. It was almost more than we expected,
+but the Lord moved upon their hearts to leave the
+beer untouched, and come to listen. The Lord especially
+anointed some of our native Christians for
+the service and they gave forth the Word with
+power. One of them referred very strongly to their
+desecration of the Sabbath. At first they sought to
+justify themselves, but as the truth was pressed
+home to them they said they would never do it
+again. At the close a number of the older men for
+the first time in their lives prayed and pleaded for
+pardon. The old women who had invited them to
+work seemed especially concerned and promised
+not to repeat it on Sunday.</p>
+
+<p>When they thresh they also invite a lot of their
+neighbors. They place the grain on a large flat
+rock and then strike it with a straight stick. Once
+I was present when a large number of the Amahole,
+or subject tribes, were threshing. They were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span>
+decked out with all their ornaments, and being divided
+into two sides were placed opposite to one
+another, like two opposing forces in battle array.
+Each being armed with his threshing stick, they
+performed a mimic battle with the grain lying on
+the rock between the two lines of battle, each one
+alternately driving the other before it and at the
+same time beating the grain with their sticks. They
+also sang their war song, of how the Matabele overcame
+them and impaled them alive, and of the dire
+vengeance they would inflict in return. The interlude
+would be occupied by a sort of ballet dancer
+among them. The whole was exceedingly heathenish,
+but not uninteresting; and as for the grain, a
+large amount of it was threshed.</p>
+
+<p>While much of the work falls to the women, some
+of the native men are quite diligent in digging in
+their gardens; but they generally wish to sell their
+grain and secure money to pay taxes for themselves
+and their wives. The women, in addition to growing
+most of the food that is eaten, often help to
+furnish the tax money. Of course to the raw native
+dress is a negligible quantity.</p>
+
+<p>The people are always generous, and the food in
+the kraals is shared with the strangers. No one
+needs to go through the country hungry unless there
+is famine, and even then they will often divide the
+last morsel. When the stranger comes among them,
+they always bid him welcome, and it is etiquette to
+let him remain for at least one day without asking
+him any questions as to his business among them.</p>
+
+<p>Even in respect to continually begging, which is
+so obnoxious to Europeans, the native is not so rude<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span>
+as it would appear. They are not slow to ask one
+another, and they have often surprised me by saying
+that they felt flattered to be asked for articles,
+as it showed that they had something which the
+other did not have and they had an opportunity to
+help. A native likes to have plenty, but he does
+not want to have his gardens surpass too much those
+of his neighbors, in productiveness; neither does he
+want his herds to surpass others too much, for fear
+he may be an object of envy to those around him
+and a victim of malice, or be accused of witchcraft.</p>
+
+<p>There always seems to be a great attachment
+between the mother and her children all through
+life. This does not hinder the big, stout boy, however,
+from lying around and living on the bounty of
+his hard-working mother, and on the other hand
+the heathen boy will often exert himself to aid his
+mother and pay her hut tax, and she often lives
+with her son when she becomes old.</p>
+
+<p>The native women generally shave their heads
+with a piece of sharp glass. It is a laborious and
+painful process and needs to be done by an expert,
+but in the end it is well done. The married woman
+always leaves a small tuft of hair on the crown of
+her head. This is her sign of wifehood. The raw
+native has no means of keeping record of his age,
+so we must always guess at it.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus208.png" width="600" height="427" alt="Matabele Women Digging." title="Matabele Women Digging." />
+<span class="caption">Matabele Women Digging.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The government is patriarchal and the younger
+are generally respectful to the elders, and all are
+more or less polite to one another. Their very name
+implies this. The surname is handed down from
+father to child, even the wife retaining that of her
+father unless she is married by Christian marriage.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span>
+The surname is also the <i>isibongo</i>, or thank word.
+By that I mean that it is what they say if they wish
+to thank for any favor. Among themselves they do
+not say "I thank you" for any favor received. Suppose
+Muza Sibanda would give another one something.
+The recipient on receiving it would say
+"Sibanda" instead of "I thank you." Again, in
+addressing another, if one wishes to be polite or
+respectful he will use the last, not the first name, or
+he may say "Father," "Mother," or the like. I
+at first thought them somewhat rude in not thanking
+properly, but soon found that it was often the
+result of not knowing what to say. One day I gave
+a piece of bread to a little fellow about five years
+of age. He hesitated, then looking up into my face,
+said, "<i>Isibongo sako sipi?</i>" ("What is your thank<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span>
+name?") If a native is given anything, all the
+others present will join in thanking, for a favor to
+one is a favor to all. The mother will often use the
+thank name, or surname, as a term of endearment
+to her child. After she has a child she is no longer
+known by her name, but if the child is Luju she is
+known as the "mother of Luju."</p>
+
+<p>If one falls or meets with an accident, however
+slight, all the rest will say "<i>Pepa</i>" ("Beg pardon").
+If one enters the kraal of another, he enters
+the hut and sits down near the door without saying
+anything. Presently he says "<i>Eh! kuhle</i>"
+("Peace"), about equivalent to saying, "Peace be
+to this house." It is not a salutation, but a polite
+way of announcing his presence. The occupant of
+the hut then responds by saying, "<i>Eh! sa ku bona</i>"
+("We see you"). In reality, however, it is equivalent
+to saying "How do you do?" to which the
+other responds.</p>
+
+<p>It is a real treat to hear two old natives conversing
+together, especially if they are unconscious of
+one's presence. Their gossip may not be very elevating,
+but it is always carried on in a polite and
+interesting manner. The Tebele language is most
+beautiful and expressive, as its liquid syllables roll
+off the native tongue, and it is always most correctly
+spoken&mdash;no errors in grammar among them.</p>
+
+<p>This would not be complete without mention being
+made of death and burial. In burial the various
+tribes differ somewhat among themselves. Among
+the Matabele, when one dies the friends come and
+prepare the body for burial by placing it in a sitting
+posture with the knees brought up near the face.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span>
+They clothe it in the garments which it owned, and
+wrap the blanket about it, tying the body firmly in
+this position with the face exposed. It is then left
+sitting in the hut, together with some of the women
+mourners, while the men go and select a place for
+burial, generally at a little distance from the kraal,
+unless the deceased should be headman. They make
+the grave more or less circular in form, and near the
+bottom a slight excavation is made in the side for
+the reception of the body.</p>
+
+<p>The body is then placed on a blanket or large
+hide and carried out to the grave, the friends following
+and mourning. A gourd filled with fresh water
+is brought, and with this a near friend or relative
+washes the face of the dead, at the same time giving
+it a message to kindly remember them to the king
+and to speak a good word for them. The two men
+standing in the grave receive the body and place it
+in the excavation with the face toward the east.
+They fasten it in position with stones and then fill
+in the grave with earth. On top of the grave are
+placed stones and the property of the deceased, together
+with branches of trees, perhaps to protect it
+from the wild beasts, for the grave is somewhat
+shallow.</p>
+
+<p>As children do not have any garments which they
+can call their own, they are often buried without
+anything being wrapped about the body. Once, when
+a little son of Mapita died, Sister Doner and I went
+over to the burial. The little body was lowered into
+the grave quite bare and they were about to put in
+the earth. Sister Doner could not stand that, so
+she hastily removed a large apron which she had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span>
+on and told them to wrap that around the little body
+before throwing in the earth. They did so, but no
+doubt would have preferred keeping it for themselves
+before it had been defiled by coming into contact
+with the dead body. When Kelenki, one of
+our Christian boys, died in his home, they wanted
+to know what to do with his books, and one of the
+other Christian boys said he thought they had
+better leave them for the living.</p>
+
+<p>After burial they all go to the river and wash,
+for death means defilement. The women are the
+chief mourners, and they assemble early in the
+morning, fill the air with their wailing and then
+return home until the following morning. This is
+often done for four consecutive mornings. In the
+interim the relatives sit about the kraal, quiet and
+with little talking, except to answer the condolences
+of their friends, who come from time to time to
+sympathize with them. There is no feast, as among
+some natives. In fact, for a time little food is
+cooked or eaten except that brought by neighbors.</p>
+
+<p>Some of the other tribes lay the body down in
+burial, and often place it in the crevices of the rocks.
+If the deceased is headman of the kraal, he is generally
+buried in the enclosure and often inside his
+own hut, and the people usually remain there for
+a year and then, after a period of worship, the kraal
+is abandoned. The wives go to be the wives of the
+brother of the deceased, unless they be old, when
+they usually live with a son or daughter.</p>
+
+<p>About fifteen miles from the mission, in the direction
+of Bulawayo, is the grave of the first king,
+Umzilikazi. It is in a large kopje, between some<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span>
+immense boulders. On the top of the grave, or in
+the immediate vicinity&mdash;since one cannot point out
+the exact spot of the body&mdash;are many wagon loads
+of rock thrown in to fill up the cavity between the
+boulders. There are also wheels and the remains of
+broken wagons and other property once owned by
+the king, and probably bought from the white men
+in his emigration from Zululand to this country. I
+cannot give the exact date of this king's death, but
+it was at least more than fifty years ago. As he
+was considered the god of the Matabele, this grave
+was often no doubt a place of worship by the tribe,
+but we have no knowledge that it has been worshiped
+in late years. Perhaps it somewhat fell into
+disuse after Umlimo, the god of the Makalanga,
+was considered so powerful.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV">FIFTEEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Later Visits</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>The missionary stands to the native for religion and
+education, for all the help he may get to make his life
+cleaner, more moral, and more in keeping with ideals of
+the white man at his best.&mdash;M. S. Evans.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>In the year 1910 it was my privilege, on returning
+from a furlough to Natal, to again visit Matopo,
+after an absence of nearly four years. Bishop
+and Mrs. Steigerwald were at that time in America
+on furlough, and Brother Doner and his wife, who
+was formerly Sister Sallie Kreider, and Sister Mary
+Heise were in charge of Matopo Mission. When I
+reached Bulawayo I found Brother Doner waiting
+to convey me to the mission. It was indeed a pleasure
+again to visit the place and to look into the faces
+of those natives who had grown very dear by reason
+of my long stay among them. Here it was
+my privilege to come into contact, for the first time,
+with raw heathendom, and to have the joy of seeing
+light enter darkened minds and souls born into
+the Kingdom. So it occupies a tender spot which
+later experiences cannot touch.</p>
+
+<p>There had been improvements made since I had
+left. Prominent among these were two substantial
+brick buildings, a house for the boys and one for the
+girls, and there were thirty-three boys occupying
+the one and three girls the other. There is a nice<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span>
+little band of believers at this place, some of whom
+I wish especially to mention. First is poor old blind
+Ngiga. Shortly after Elder Engle's death we found
+him at a kraal, destitute and afflicted, with no one
+seemingly to care for him and give him food. We
+carried or sent food to him for a time, and gave him
+a blanket, and he gradually gained strength. Thinking
+that exercise would do him good, Brother Lehman
+encouraged him to come to the mission for his
+food, as he was only a short distance away. He had
+lain for so long without exercising his body that at
+first it was with great difficulty that he reached the
+mission, but being supplied with food, he grew
+stronger and was enabled to walk the distance easily
+and to help himself a little. Some time after Elder
+Steigerwald came he treated him for his disease and
+built a hut and brought him to the mission to stay,
+as the loathsome disease with which he was afflicted
+had left him about blind. He, however, was
+converted and has been received into the Church.
+It is a pleasure to hear him now testify to Christ's
+saving power, and to praise the Lord for bringing
+the missionaries. Truly, the Lord is no Respecter of
+persons.</p>
+
+<p>Again, let us go to Buka's house. My readers
+will remember Buka, whom Sister Heise and I
+found upon the rocks eleven years before when we
+went in search of little Lomazwana. Yes, it is
+really he whose life and home looked so black to us
+that day. He moved to within about three miles
+of the mission, and his son Kolisa came to stay at
+the mission and go to school. The father became
+sick and Brother and Sister Doner visited him and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span>
+ministered unto him. Then they built him a hut
+and made him more comfortable. He finally became
+a paralytic and unable to help himself, so Brother
+Steigerwald assisted them to get a home on the
+mission premises, and gave them gardens, so that
+they are now quite comfortable. The oldest daughter
+also accepted Christ, then the mother followed,
+and these two with the son are now members of the
+Church.</p>
+
+<p>My first Sunday at Matopo, in company with
+Brother and Sister Doner, I visited this home. A
+smile of recognition at once lighted up the face of
+the invalid father; and though he could not speak,
+the family interpreted the sounds he made. After
+he had expressed his welcome he said that though
+his body and speech were paralyzed, yet his heart
+was all right. During another visit he tried to explain
+how Jesus was dwelling within, and how glad
+he was that when he got "over there" he would not
+be sick. One could not help feeling that he had
+learned to know the Lord. Truly, affliction had
+proved a blessing to him.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 599px;"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215"></a>
+<img src="images/illus216a.png" width="599" height="465" alt="Building the Boys&#39; House at Matopo, M. S." title="Building the Boys&#39; House" />
+<span class="caption">Building the Boys&#39; House at Matopo, M. S.</span>
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus216b.png" width="600" height="460" alt="Boys&#39; Brick House at Matopo Mission." title="Boys&#39; Brick House" />
+<span class="caption">Boys&#39; Brick House at Matopo Mission.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>There was a good school at Matopo, with Sister
+Heise and Matshuba as teachers. Brother Doners
+were very busy overseeing this work, as well as
+their own station at Mapani Mission, and they kindly
+took me to that place to see something of the
+work there. Nyamazana had had charge of the
+mission at Mapani for about six months and was
+doing good work, especially spiritually. He is Spirit-filled
+and alive to the responsibility resting upon
+him. He had charge of the Inquirers' Class and
+Sunday services, and the natives say that he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span>
+preaches powerful sermons. He has a nice Christian
+wife, who is a help to him. There is a company
+of earnest believers at this place. Brother Doner
+erected a large brick church and a brick dwelling-house,
+which added greatly to the appearance and
+comfort of the work, and he deserves much credit
+for the work accomplished alone and single-handed
+in building.</p>
+
+<p>The first Friday in each month has been set apart
+by the missionaries in Africa as a day of prayer
+and fasting. On the Prayer Day in May of that
+year we were permitted to meet with the believers
+at Mapani Mission. Over seventy were assembled.
+They included the members of the Church here and
+those of the Inquirers' Class. We had a most precious
+waiting on the Lord and heard many soul-stirring
+prayers and testimonies. Many seemed to
+be reaching out for a greater fulness of the Spirit,
+while others were overflowing with the joy of the
+Lord. The work was most encouraging and the
+members steadfast, and the Lord had been pouring
+out His Spirit upon some of them in a marvelous
+manner, and our hearts were made to rejoice with
+them.</p>
+
+<p>We also spent a few days visiting some of the
+people and the schools taught by Brethren Nkwidini,
+Mlobeka, and Nyamazana. All three of these
+teachers were our former pupils and had been converted
+at Matopo.</p>
+
+<p>Brother and Sister Doner then took me to Mtyabezi
+Mission, after which they returned to Matopo.
+Mtyabezi is the mission station of Brother and Sister
+Frey, and a little over a year after it was opened<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span>
+Miss Elizabeth Engle also came to help in it. This
+was my first visit at the station, and I was made to
+rejoice at what the Lord was doing at this place.
+The buildings are pleasantly located at the foot of
+an immense kopje, which towers high above them in
+the background. A neat-looking brick church had
+been erected by Brother Frey, and well-built huts
+in which they were living at the time.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus218.png" width="600" height="375" alt="A Native Christian&#39;s Home. Matshuba&#39;s." title="A Native Christian&#39;s Home. Matshuba&#39;s." />
+<span class="caption">A Native Christian&#39;s Home. Matshuba&#39;s.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Sister Frey had been doing the teaching, but at
+the time of my visit, Bunu, one of their pupils and
+converts, was teaching and doing excellent work.
+On Thursday Sisters Frey and Engle and myself
+went in the wagon to visit some members about
+eight miles distant, where we met with a warm
+reception among those who were Christians. At one
+place there was a Christian woman about sixty
+years of age, who seemed so happy in the Lord and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span>
+so eager to make us welcome and comfortable during
+our stay. We were surprised to find in one of
+the kraals a native dressmaker who owned a sewing
+machine and had all the sewing she could do for her
+dark-skinned neighbors. The sisters have been
+teaching their girls and women to sew.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening about thirty natives, most of whom
+were believers, gathered around our campfire to
+hold service. We spoke for a time, and then a
+number gave a clear testimony to the saving power
+of Christ. We had to contrast this little company
+with some other gatherings which we have seen and
+heard in the hours of night in darkest Africa, where
+beer, the dance, licentiousness, and all forms of
+devil worship made night hideous. One can best
+understand what the Gospel message is doing for
+the people, if he first sees something of paganism.</p>
+
+<p>On Sunday at the mission there was a very impressive
+time, and when the altar call was given a
+number came forward. There were truly penitent
+hearts, among whom were a number of young men
+seeking to get right with God; also some girls and
+married people. Here was a woman whose husband
+had two wives, and she was much persecuted at
+home, but she wanted to follow the Lord, and piteously,
+in the midst of her sobs, she inquired what
+she should do. Then a Magdalene confessed that
+she had fallen into grievous sin, and like the one of
+old came with bitter tears to the feet of Jesus. Another's
+way was made hard on account of the
+unfaithfulness of her husband, and so on. But the
+one whose experience seemed the most touching
+was a woman of nearly sixty years. Her married<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span>
+daughter, who is a Christian, had been much in
+prayer for her mother, and so the woman came and
+with utter abandonment, seemingly, threw herself
+at the feet of Jesus, weeping and confessing her
+sins and saying, "I am a dog. Pick me up, Lord."</p>
+
+<p>At the opening of 1913 we were permitted to make
+another visit to the missions in this vicinity. This
+vacation was to be only a month, and as I had in
+the meantime been cut off from association with
+white people, except those at the mission, I concluded
+to spend the first few days in Bulawayo. The
+place had grown since we reached it, nearly fifteen
+years before, and although the growth had not been
+so rapid it was of an enduring, steady kind. The
+place is laid out on broad lines, with broad streets
+and roomy dwellings&mdash;no need for skyscrapers here.
+There are many fine, substantial-looking business
+blocks, and as one goes into the suburbs he sees
+many elegant, well-built dwelling-houses. There
+are fine churches, a good hospital, museum, and library,
+and two large government school buildings,
+each with a good dormitory attached. One of these
+is for boys and the other, which is on the opposite
+side of the town, is for girls. Here, as in all parts
+of South Africa, there is some industrial work in
+connection with the schools. Bulawayo has also
+many excellent stores and shops, so that one may
+purchase almost anything required, not only in the
+line of provisions, household goods, and clothing,
+but all lines of farming implements and many kinds
+of machinery. The heavy wagons, drawn by great
+rows of oxen, donkeys, and mules, are still to be
+seen, but there are also many dainty one-horse traps,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span>
+as well as two-horse conveyances, and a large number
+of automobiles and motorcycles.</p>
+
+<p>There is attached to the town a large native location,
+for the heavy part of the work as well as
+the housework is about all done by native boys.
+They are all called "boys." In the eyes of their
+white employers the native seldom becomes a man.
+He may be an old boy or a young boy, a little boy
+or a big boy, but he is always a boy. On the other
+hand, in the eyes of many Europeans it is almost
+an insult to speak of their children as boys. In the
+early days one of the missionaries, in speaking to
+an old European lady, said something about her
+boy. She straightened herself proudly and with
+emphasis said, "My son." At the mission one day
+a native woman was begging very hard for a piece
+of cloth, and to strengthen her request she said,
+"I am your boy," evidently meaning that she belonged
+to me.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221"></a>
+<img src="images/illus222a.png" width="600" height="413" alt="Mtshabezi Church and School." title="Mtshabezi Church and School." />
+<span class="caption">Mtshabezi Church and School.</span>
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus222b.png" width="600" height="453" alt="Mtshabezi Mission in 1910." title="Mtshabezi Mission in 1910." />
+<span class="caption">Mtshabezi Mission in 1910.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Although Bulawayo is the largest town in Southern
+Rhodesia, there are others, such as Salisbury,
+Gwelo, Victoria, and Gwanda, which deserve mention.
+Farmers are scattered throughout the country,
+especially along the high, rolling plain between
+Bulawayo and Salisbury. There are many valuable
+gold mines and many old gold workings to be found
+in various places. The most noted is Great Zimbabwe,
+near Victoria. It is said: "The ruins cover
+a large area, and on an eminence are the remains of
+a fortress, the walls of which are thirty feet high
+and ten feet thick, and built of cut stones put together
+without mortar, so closely-fitting that a
+knife can hardly be inserted between them. Smelting<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span>
+crucibles, with gold in them, ingot moulds, and
+spears have been found." Some think that the
+Sabeans from Arabia worked these about 3,000
+years ago. This is thought by some to be the "gold
+of Ophir." Ruins on a smaller scale are to be found
+in various places. Not far from Mapani Mission we
+saw a circular wall made of wedge-shaped stones,
+nicely fitted together. The country is also rich in
+iron ore, and at Wankie is the great coal-mining
+district. All these places furnish abundant work
+for all the natives of Rhodesia, and are also centers
+for mission work.</p>
+
+<p>January 1, I was again taken to Motopo Mission,
+not with the slow, patient donkeys of fifteen years
+ago, but with the swifter mules. Many changes
+have taken place among the natives surrounding the
+mission since 1898. On our first entering this valley
+the natives had just fled and hid themselves away in
+these rocks at the close of the Rebellion. They
+were then very poor, without flocks and herds, and
+had few gardens, and very little of the land had
+ever been brought under cultivation. Since then
+the natives have gradually come out of their hiding-places
+and settled down to their work. Under the
+influence of peace and better teaching their surroundings
+have greatly changed. There are more
+natives near the mission than at first, and they
+have sheep, goats, and cattle, and some of them
+have plows and oxen to draw them, so that they can
+plow their large gardens. Every available place
+near the mission has been brought under cultivation,
+but not in the old, laborious way with human
+oxen, so that the wives are not the slaves they once<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span>
+were. Of course, in the absence of the men at work
+the women often hold the plow, but they have more
+time to keep house. One of the officials affirms
+that the best way of doing away with polygamy is
+by introducing civilized ways of farming.</p>
+
+<p>The people began by bringing their oxen to
+Brother Steigerwald to be trained, and then he
+helped them to procure plows, and they still come
+to him for help in trouble. The 3,000-acre farm is
+far too small for all who desire to live near the
+mission. If he had twice the amount of land it
+would soon become filled with natives, who would
+thus be near the mission and under the influence of
+the Gospel.</p>
+
+<p>Let us visit some of the houses and see what
+changes have taken place. Here first is the home
+of Matshuba. As he was first in the fold, he is
+worthy of first notice. He lives in a small, neatly-built
+brick house, with a well-swept yard inclosed
+by a fence. Inside the house are homemade bedsteads,
+chairs and tables, and here is Matshuba the
+same as of yore. He is older and has fought many
+battles since that first day when, as a little boy, he
+came and watched the newcomers. He has found
+the conflict severe and almost overpowering at
+times. It has left some scars, but, praise God! he
+has come off victorious at last, and in a more humble
+spirit he is following the meek and lowly Savior.
+He is Elder Steigerwald's right-hand man and is
+capable of turning his hand to almost any kind of
+work. He can take the blacksmith tools and mend
+the large three-disc plow; he can make use of the
+small engine and grind the meal for the native food,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span>
+or do any other kind of work about the place. Best
+of all, he can go out and tell the people about Jesus.
+He had hoped that the elder's many-sided
+ability might be his, and he seems to have had his
+wish. He could secure much larger pay as an
+engineer in the mines, but he feels that his place is
+in the Lord's work. May he have our prayers that
+he may always find God's grace sufficient.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus225.png" width="600" height="479" alt="Mtshabezi&mdash;Baptismal Scene." title="Mtshabezi&mdash;Baptismal Scene." />
+<span class="caption">Mtshabezi&mdash;Baptismal Scene.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Here too is his wife, Makiwa. She was also educated
+at Matopo Mission, where she learned not
+only in school, but also in the kitchen and sewing-room,
+that she might know how to take care of her
+home and family. A faithful helpmate she has
+been to her husband and a blessing in the Church.
+Here are their little boy and girl, whom they are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span>
+bringing up in the fear of the Lord. This old woman,
+also neatly dressed, is Matshuba's mother, long
+a slave to her old religion, her superstitious ideas,
+her beer and her tobacco. Now she has accepted
+Christ as her Savior and He has cleansed her and
+she is in the Church. And this bright-looking girl
+is her daughter, Sixpence. She was only about four
+or five years old when we came to Matopo. Now
+she is a tall, fine-looking Christian woman and well
+taught. She has on a neat-looking black dress
+which, Sister Steigerwald tells me, she cut and
+sewed without any help from the missionaries. Yes,
+this is a Christian home, from which we hope and
+pray that the evils of heathendom have flown forever.</p>
+
+<p>There are others. First is Anyana, long a faithful
+helper of the mission, and his wife, Citiwa, also
+one of our girls. Then comes Siyaya, who had some
+falls, but he has at last got his feet on the Rock and
+is helping to tell others of Christ. Mahlenhle is also
+here. He is the same faithful boy as of old, one of
+those who never give their missionary any uneasiness.
+He is always ready and willing to do what
+he can, which is not a little. He teaches, he preaches,
+and interprets for others, or he can go out and
+handle the oxen and see to the farming. There are
+also many new ones in church and school, several
+of whom are assisting in teaching. There are forty-two
+boys staying at the mission for school, and a
+number coming to day-school. Sister Heise has
+plenty to do, for she teaches both early morning
+and midday, and is doing excellent work. There
+are about 150 regular attendants at the Sunday services.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span>
+The majority of them are young men and
+women and children. Almost all are respectably
+clothed and are seeking to know the Lord. The
+girls who desire to stay at the missionaries' and be
+trained are now sent to the Girls' School at Mtyabezi
+Mission. There is a large sewing class at this
+place for those who wish to learn. Two new missionaries,
+Brother Levi Steckly and Sister Cora Alvis,
+are also assisting in the work at Matopo.</p>
+
+<p>I went out among the people, eager to secure a
+snapshot of a kraal, as they formerly were, but I
+failed. They are all better built and more cleanly
+than formerly. In every village there are some
+who wear European clothing, for even if they have
+not accepted Christ as their Savior, some have put
+on the garments of civilization. There are, of
+course, many among the older ones who have not
+changed much, and who have always hardened their
+hearts and stiffened their necks against the truth.
+This has been the condition of the world ever since
+the Fall, and it will no doubt continue until all sin
+and wickedness shall be put under foot and He
+shall reign in righteousness. If the command had
+been "Go into all the world and make disciples of
+every creature," missionaries would have given up
+long ago in despair. Miss Carmichael, in her work,
+"Things as They Are in Missionary Work in Southern
+India," says, "It is required in a steward that a
+man be found faithful. Praise God! it does not say
+'successful.'" The same will apply to missionary
+work in Africa.</p>
+
+<p>During the year of our visit the rains were unusually
+late, and, as the harvest had been quite light<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span>
+the previous year, some of the people were in great
+need of grain. Brother Steigerwald was doing all
+in his power to get grain out from Bulawayo for
+them. The six mules were hauling out every week
+to the extent of their strength, for farmers are not
+allowed to take their oxen on the road, for fear
+disease may spread among the cattle. As the wagon
+returned from Bulawayo with fifteen 200-pound bags
+of grain on it, the people, who had been watching
+for its return, hastened to come to the mission to
+purchase. Grain was expensive, about seven or
+eight dollars a bag; but as soon as it was unloaded
+it was sold. Their people must have food, and many
+of the able-bodied natives had been away to work
+and thus procured money, and perhaps a month's
+wages would buy one bag of grain. Others were
+trying to sell some of the cattle and sheep for grain.
+Although many of these old people who were buying
+had not accepted Christ as their Savior, yet
+they have absolute confidence in His messenger,
+Elder Steigerwald, and they come to him in their
+difficulties, knowing that he has a kind heart. He
+is their father, as Sister Steigerwald is their mother.</p>
+
+<p>A love feast had been announced for Mtyabezi
+Mission the middle of January, and arrangements
+had been made for all the white workers and as
+many of the native converts as possible to attend.
+Mr. Steckly and Mr. Hemming went across the
+hills, twenty-five miles, on foot, and the rest of us
+went by wagon around on the road&mdash;a distance of
+about forty-five miles. This road was down through
+the hills in the direction of Mapani Mission. We
+started on Thursday morning, sleeping out on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span>
+veldt during the night, and reached Mtyabezi on
+Friday afternoon.</p>
+
+<p>Brother Freys were at that time in America on
+furlough, but the work was ably carried on by
+Brother Walter Winger and his wife, formerly
+Abbie Bert, and Sister Elizabeth Engle. This is
+now known as our Girls' School. Twenty-five girls
+were then staying at the mission, and they are being
+trained in housework and sewing, in addition to
+school and outside work. They are also supplying
+some of our Christian boys with Christian wives,
+and Christian marriage is taking the place of heathen
+rites. In addition to these there was a good-sized
+day-school, which was under the excellent
+management of Miss Sadie Book. There were also
+several large out-schools in connection with this
+mission. A large brick house was nearly completed
+and they were at the same time living in it. This
+part of the country south of the hills was especially
+suffering from drought at this time. Although this
+was in the middle of what should have been the
+rainy season, yet no rains had fallen, and the entire
+country was bare, not a blade of grass was to be
+seen, and the grain sown had not yet sprouted.
+Brother Winger was busy with his wagon, getting
+grain out from the station ten miles away to help
+the people.</p>
+
+<p>This was the first love feast in Southern Rhodesia
+that I had been permitted to attend for nearly seven
+years, and I had looked eagerly forward to this
+gathering. The joy of seeing the natives assemble
+for the occasion was too deep for words. First to
+come were some of the communicants from Matopo<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span>
+Mission on Friday evening. The sisters were walking
+in front, Indian file, with their blankets and
+Sunday clothing tied up in a bundle and carried on
+their heads, and Sixpence leading the way. Following
+these were the brethren, with Matshuba bringing
+up the rear. It was now sundown and they had
+walked twenty-five miles and were tired, so they
+were shown their places for the night, and after eating
+their supper, and prayer, they retired. The next
+morning early a similar crowd came from Mapani
+Station, fifteen miles distant. A number also gathered
+from the vicinity of Mtyabezi and out-schools
+on Saturday morning. The little church could not
+hold all and an overflow meeting was held on the
+outside. There were also a number of members
+who could not be present.</p>
+
+<p>Saturday morning was devoted to a short discourse
+and self-examination meeting, followed by
+testimonies. It was an inspiration to look over the
+crowded house and listen to the earnest testimonies
+following one after another in rapid succession.
+Often four or five would be on their feet at once,
+and yet there was no confusion or disorder, as each
+one quietly waited for his time to speak. We had
+to say to ourselves, again and again, "What hath
+God wrought!" We could not avoid contrasting
+the early days of nakedness and midnight heathendom
+with this enlightened, well-dressed company
+before us. In fact, the contrast was so marked that
+one could scarcely bridge the chasm even in imagination.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 419px;">
+<img src="images/illus231.png" width="419" height="600" alt="Girls at Mtshabezi Mission." title="Girls at Mtshabezi Mission." />
+<span class="caption">Girls at Mtshabezi Mission.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>In the afternoon seventeen from Mtyabezi Mission
+and its out-schools were received into the Church<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span>
+by the right hand of fellowship. On account of the
+drought and lack of water in the streams, the baptism
+was deferred until a later date. There were
+several others who made application, but after examination<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span>
+it was thought that some were not ready.
+On Saturday evening the natives had a meeting of
+their own and were addressed by Myamazana, while
+the missionaries had an English service and were
+addressed by Bishop Steigerwald.</p>
+
+<p>On Sunday morning we again gathered to observe
+the ordinance of feet-washing and to commemorate
+the sufferings and death of our Savior.
+There were over 300 natives gathered together,
+nearly all of whom were either members or inquirers.
+The native communicants were 129 and
+the white ones eleven, making 140 in all, and these
+assembled in the Church while the rest were addressed
+by Mahlenhle and others on the outside.
+We had now a better opportunity of looking into
+the faces of those who had been received into
+Church fellowship. As our missionaries are in close
+touch with their people and know pretty well their
+private lives, we knew something of the company
+before us.</p>
+
+<p>It was indeed an intelligent and respectable-looking
+company of men and women, one to be proud
+of, if I might use the term. Its respectability did
+not depend so much on the fact that they had
+thrown off the undress of paganism and had donned
+the garments of civilization. That is not necessarily
+an adjunct of Christianity, nor is it all due to Christian
+influence. While the missionaries have been
+laboring these years to win souls to Christ, many
+civilizing influences have been at work throughout
+the country, some of which have been previously
+mentioned. Stores with European clothing are to
+be found everywhere, and many natives discard<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span>
+their heathen garb for civilized clothing and yet
+know absolutely nothing of Christ and His power to
+save. Some of these well-dressed natives about the
+towns have learned far more of the evils of civilization
+than of its virtues, and hide under their new
+dress an even blacker heart than they did under
+their old pagan exterior. Then too we are sorry to
+say that intelligence in the sense of having been at
+a mission station and learning to read does not
+necessarily make them Christians. Some of these
+also, to the great sorrow of their teachers, have
+made poor use of their knowledge.</p>
+
+<p>It is because the missionary sees this, and knows
+only too well the many pitfalls before their unwary
+feet; it is because he realizes, as probably no one
+else does, what it means to these poor souls to be
+so suddenly brought from the dense darkness of
+heathendom into the glaring lights of modern civilization,
+and how unprepared they are for it all, how
+little they know to shun the evil and choose the
+good; it is because he knows how helpless these
+are who have suddenly broken loose from their old
+tribal laws and customs&mdash;some of which were beneficial&mdash;and
+have been cast on the untried sea of
+strange and bewildering surroundings, without any
+anchor to hold or compass and chart to guide them&mdash;I
+say it is because the missionary knows all this and
+much more that he can rejoice over such a crowd of
+fine-looking, stalwart men and women as were gathered
+there that day to commemorate the sufferings
+and death of our Lord.</p>
+
+<p>He sees in the company before him Christian
+homes, free from ignorance and superstition, free<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span>
+from witchcraft and pagan worship, free from the
+beer, the filth, and degradation of their neighbors.
+He sees in this company, homes free from the licentiousness
+and vice so common not only among
+their heathen neighbors, but, sad to say, also among
+some of their white ones. The missionary can rejoice
+that here are men and women who have the
+Anchor in their souls and are standing as beacon
+lights to their heathen neighbors and friends. It
+means much to them on the one hand to break off
+from their old heathen lives; it means much on the
+other not to be allured by the evils of the white
+man's civilization and the inducements so often
+thrown out to lead lives of sin. To come out from
+all these and accept Christ as Savior and be true to
+Him would seem to be an almost Herculean task,
+and much greater than those in Christian lands are
+called upon to perform. But we know that it has
+been and is being accomplished. While one feels
+to rejoice over these sheep, at the same time he
+bears a heavy heart for those other ones which have
+been devoured by the grievous wolves.</p>
+
+<p>The missionary is about the only force that makes
+for righteousness among the natives, and he would
+often feel that his task was an impossible one did he
+not continually realize that he is only under orders
+of Him Who is sure in the end to win. Lest some
+may think that I am overestimating some of these
+things, let me again quote Mr. Evans, who is an
+authority on native affairs from a governmental
+standpoint. He says:</p>
+
+<p>"What is effecting the most profound change in
+the native is his contact with the white man at all<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span>
+points, and this change is proceeding with ever-accelerating
+speed. The fundamental difference between
+these changes and those wrought by the
+missionaries is that, in the former there is little
+building up of any salutary influence to take the
+place of the old wholesome restraints, whilst in the
+latter religion and morality are inculcated and replace
+the checks weakened or destroyed."</p>
+
+<p>The work in Southern Rhodesia is by no means
+completed; it is only fairly begun. The natives are
+just beginning to see the advantages of Christian
+teaching, and are calling more and more loudly for
+schools, and they are eagerly availing themselves
+of the opportunities afforded. There is a large field
+to work and the time is opportune. Let every one
+of God's children ask himself what his duty and
+privileges are in taking possession of the country for
+God. Our people should have at least one more
+station of white missionaries here as well as others
+for native workers. Shall we leave to themselves
+these people, who are emerging from centuries of
+darkness, to the influence of a corrupt civilization?
+Our missionaries are laboring to the extent of their
+ability and the means at their disposal. The work
+can advance only as it is backed up by the people of
+the homeland, together with their prayers and
+money. Something depends upon you, my reader,
+whoever you may be. What part have you had in
+the winning of these souls? What part are you
+going to have in those yet unborn into the Kingdom?</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span></p>
+<h2>PART TWO</h2>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2>MACHA MISSION</h2>
+
+<h3>"Lo, I am with you always, even unto the end
+of the world"</h3>
+
+<div class="signature">&mdash;Matt. 28: 20</div>
+
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[236]</a></span></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[237]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IPART2" id="CHAPTER_IPART2">CHAPTER ONE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Bound for the Zambezi</h3>
+
+
+<p>Africa is a gigantic and dark continent. In
+fact, it is several continents in one. Although
+nearly every one seems to know
+something of its immensity, yet very few persons
+realize it unless they have resided for a time in
+some portion of its vast interior; even then their
+knowledge of it is likely to be quite vague. For
+centuries travelers of various nationalities sought
+to penetrate it, many of whom perished in the effort,
+while others brought back wonderful stories of peril
+and adventure.</p>
+
+<p>It remained for David Livingstone, however, to
+unearth the secrets of Central Africa and to expose
+to the gaze of Christendom something of its condition
+and needs. He inspired missionaries to press
+into the narrow opening thus made, and to carry the
+light of the Gospel to the millions bound in chains
+of darkness and blackest midnight. Messengers
+have been heeding the call and have been kindling
+fires, one here and another there, in the darkness.</p>
+
+<p>In dealing with missionary work in Africa we
+must continually keep in mind the fact that the natives
+are much scattered. The population cannot
+definitely be ascertained, but it is variously estimated
+at from 130 to 150 millions of people. These
+are scattered over a territory equal in area to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[238]</a></span>
+United States of America, Europe, India, and China
+combined. In certain portions, such as the Sahara
+and Kalahari Deserts, there are very few natives,
+while the lower plains and river valleys support a
+large population. These alluvial plains, where nature
+affords an abundance of food with a minimum
+of labor, offer great inducements to the easy-going
+Africans. Here they settle in large numbers, not
+greatly inconvenienced by the unhealthfulness of
+the locality. Pampered by the amazing prodigality
+of nature on all sides, so that they need not exert
+themselves much for food, and requiring little clothing
+in this mild temperature, they settle themselves
+to the enjoyment of their animal natures.</p>
+
+<p>The missionary, as he enters these swamps, which
+are reeking with malaria and other death-breeding
+diseases, takes his life in his hand; for Africa has
+the unenviable reputation of being the "white man's
+graveyard." It is true the medical fraternity are
+fast solving some of the problems which confront
+everyone entering the country, yet many difficulties
+still lie in the path of the missionaries who desire to
+settle in the more densely populated regions.</p>
+
+<p>In the old days of Dr. Livingstone and his immediate
+successors, it required almost a small fortune
+to penetrate Central Africa. In addition to
+this the way by wagon or by native carriers was
+long and tiresome, and the traveler was subject to
+delays by swollen rivers, dying oxen, and many
+other things. He was often in danger of his life by
+wild animals or still wilder men, so that some never
+reached their desired goal. Even after missionaries
+had succeeded in establishing mission stations, they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[239]</a></span>
+suffered much in health from exposure and lack of
+comfortable homes, and they were obliged to live
+on the coarse native food much of the time, on account
+of the difficulty in procuring supplies, even
+though they might have had sufficient money to
+procure better food.</p>
+
+<p>At the present day the railroads are eliminating
+much of this difficulty. Their advance is accomplishing
+more than any other agency in opening
+up the continent to the Gospel. They are extending
+right into the heart of the country, making use
+of the plateaus on which to build, and bringing the
+necessities of life and even many of its luxuries
+within reach of the white inhabitants.</p>
+
+<p>In the year 1904 the Cape to Cairo Railroad was
+completed as far as the Victoria Falls on the Zambezi
+River, a distance by rail of 1,642 miles from
+Cape Town. This part of Africa as far as the Zambezi
+is generally known as South Africa. If one
+examines a map, it is easy to be seen that in size it
+is a very inconspicuous part of the African Continent;
+but in point of modern civilization and twentieth-century
+methods of doing things it compares
+very favorably with any other country. Especially
+can this be said of the towns and vicinity, but there
+are yet many natives who are without the Gospel.
+On my return to Africa, in 1905, the railroad was
+being extended north of the Zambezi, the objective
+point at that time being Broken Hill, making a total
+distance of 2,016 miles from Cape Town.</p>
+
+<p>The facts just mentioned had nothing to do with
+our call to interior Africa, for that came before we
+knew what the actual conditions were and before<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[240]</a></span>
+the railroad north of Bulawayo was built. The
+opening made by the railroad, however, had much
+to do in making the advance practicable at this time.</p>
+
+<p>After our return from America we engaged in
+the work at Matopo and Mapani for nearly a year,
+and continued looking to the Lord to ascertain His
+will as to the time of opening the new work, for we
+were hoping that there would be other missionaries
+ready to move out. Money was on hand for the
+purpose. This meant something. While I was in
+America, as the needs of pagan Africa were set
+forth, one after another would slip a bill into my
+hand, saying, "I too want a share in pushing on
+that work into the interior of Africa." What did it
+all mean&mdash;the lack of workers, the ready money and
+the intense longing in my own soul to carry the
+Light to those people? We had now waited a year
+with no prospects of others being ready to go.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 370px;"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241"></a>
+<img src="images/illus242.png" width="370" height="600" alt="Victoria Falls Bridge." title="Victoria Falls Bridge." />
+<span class="caption">Victoria Falls Bridge.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Brother Steigerwald was sending to America for
+a large Studebaker wagon, and he advised that one
+also be ordered for the forward move, that both
+might be sent out together. These arrived in May,
+1906. Ndhlalambi had felt called some time before
+to carry the Gospel beyond the Zambezi. Although
+he was quite young, he was proving to be a very
+steadfast and useful helper, both at Matopo and at
+Mapani Mission. When they were opening the
+latter station, Sister Emma Doner wrote to me&mdash;as
+I was in America at the time&mdash;and said, "Ndhlalambi
+is such a good helper in erecting our buildings,
+as Levi has been quite sick. Perhaps the
+Lord is preparing him so that he can build for you
+in Interior Africa." At that time, however, I little
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[242]</a></span>thought that it would be necessary to rely upon
+him for that work.</p>
+
+<p>The time drew near when a decision must be
+made, either to move out or to postpone the opening
+of the work for another year, and much time
+was spent out among the rocks alone with Him.
+From a human standpoint it appeared to be a hazardous
+undertaking to enter such a new country, and
+many obstacles were in the way. I had been invited
+to spend the year at Mapani Mission, and was
+quite ready to do so, providing that was the Lord's
+will for me. On the other hand, if He desired that
+the work beyond the Zambezi be opened this year,
+all power is in His hands; it would be a small affair
+for Him to go before and prepare the way. The
+more we looked to Him to ascertain His will the
+stronger the conviction became that the time was
+at hand. Sister Adda Engle also expressed herself
+as being ready for the work. The rest of the missionaries
+were requested to make the matter a
+special subject of prayer. They did so, and a few
+felt that an onward move was to be made; but the
+majority said they did not have a clear understanding
+of the Lord's will in reference to it.</p>
+
+<p>It was hoped that Brother Steigerwald might be
+able to accompany us to open up the work; but
+there were so many lines of work engaging his attention
+at the time that it was impossible for him
+to leave. He, however, fitted out the new wagon
+with a strong body and a fine large tent, 6 x 13 feet
+over the whole, and as far as possible put everything
+in readiness for the journey.</p>
+
+<p>Our company included, besides Sister Engle and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[243]</a></span>
+myself, the two native Christian boys, Ndhlalambi
+Moyo and Gomo Sibanda. The latter was going
+chiefly for the manual labor. They were both trustworthy
+and we knew they could be depended upon.
+It was again the 4th of July when we started on this
+northern journey, just eight years from the day on
+which we had left Bulawayo for Matopo. Brother
+and Sister Steigerwald and Sister Frey accompanied
+us as far as Bulawayo, expecting to aid us in purchasing
+supplies and to assist us in getting started
+north. Mr. Jackson, the English magistrate at Fort
+Usher, gave us letters of introduction to the Civil
+Commissioner and the Administrator of Northern
+Rhodesia, as the country north of the Zambezi
+is called.</p>
+
+<p>Unfortunately it was found, on reaching Bulawayo,
+that much of the business could not be attended
+to that week on account of holidays, so that our
+friends were obliged to return to their station. The
+Monday following was a busy and trying day on
+account of the many things to be attended to and
+the long distances to be traversed. We wished to
+purchase supplies for the greater part of the year,
+for we knew not what awaited us and where the
+next would come from; and it was also necessary
+that all the goods be sent on the same train on
+which we went. Everything was finally accomplished,
+and July 10, 1906, found all our supplies,
+about 2,800 pounds in weight, and the wagon, on
+the train bound for Victoria Falls.</p>
+
+<p>As Sister Engle and I entered our compartment
+on the train and began to move northward, many
+conflicting emotions stirred within us, and it was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[244]</a></span>
+with much trembling and looking to the Lord that
+we went forward. We knew not what opposition
+confronted us; for we had been informed by those
+who knew something of the country that the officials
+might not allow us to proceed farther than the
+Zambezi River. Only the consciousness that we were
+under Divine orders gave courage to proceed. We
+had the promise, "Commit thy way unto the Lord;
+trust also in Him and He shall bring it to pass,"
+and we were resting in it.</p>
+
+<p>The journey of 280 miles to Victoria Falls is
+through new territory. There were no towns&mdash;nothing
+but small station houses&mdash;and the country
+is wild and in some places quite jungly-looking and
+infested by numerous wild animals. At Wankie we
+passed through the region of the coal-mining district,
+where there is a large vein of coal which is a
+most valuable adjunct of the railroad. Victoria
+Falls was at that time the terminus of the government-owned
+railroads, and the limit to which regular
+trains ran; and we could not avoid wondering
+what was awaiting us beyond that.</p>
+
+<p>As we stepped off the train at Victoria Falls a
+gentleman approached us, and introducing himself
+as a forwarding agent, inquired if he could be of
+any assistance to us. He inquired if we were not
+from Matopo Mission, and at the same time stated
+that he had met Mr. Steigerwald in Bulawayo.
+What a surprise and relief it was to us, for he
+seemed to be God's especial messenger, sent to help
+us on the way. When he learned of the situation
+he at once set our minds at rest by the assurance
+that he would attend to everything and see that the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[245]</a></span>
+goods and wagon, as well as ourselves, were safely
+taken across the Zambezi River to the town of Livingstone,
+seven miles on the other side. The railroad
+at this time was completed to Broken Hill, 374 miles
+farther north, but trains were run only occasionally.
+We were obliged to wait at this place two days
+before an engine could be procured to take us over
+to Livingstone.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246"></a>
+<img src="images/illus247.png" width="600" height="367" alt="Main View of Victoria Falls, 1&frac14; Miles wide." title="Main View of Victoria Falls, 1&frac14; Miles wide." />
+<span class="caption">Main View of Victoria Falls, 1&frac14; Miles wide.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>An opportunity was thus afforded of viewing that
+magnificent sight, Victoria Falls, which was discovered
+by David Livingstone in 1855, but of which
+little was known until comparatively late years.
+This surpassingly grand bit of scenery is considered
+by some people to outrival that pride of all Americans,
+Niagara Falls. In dimensions, at least, it
+certainly does surpass the American wonder. The
+Zambezi is 1,936 yards wide where it takes its
+mighty plunge of 400 feet into a vast chasm below,
+only to be turned into clouds of spray again and
+rise perhaps a thousand feet into the air. Rainbows
+play about it, forming a scene of wonderful beauty
+and grandeur. The rock over which the river flows
+has a gigantic V-shaped crack about 300 feet wide,
+into which chasm the water plunges. The opposite
+wall is unbroken, save at one place where it forms
+a gorge 300 feet wide, through which narrow channel
+all the water of the falls, over a mile wide,
+escapes. Along this opposite wall of rock is "Rain
+Forest," so called because it is always dripping and,
+needless to say, the vegetation here is most luxuriant.
+Six hundred and sixty feet below the gorge is a railroad
+bridge, 650 feet long and 420 feet above the
+water, the central span being 500 feet. The view<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[247]</a></span>
+of these falls greatly changes at different seasons
+of the year. To see them at the height of their magnificence,
+one should visit them at the close of the
+rainy season in April, as at that time the volume of
+water is much greater. At the close of the dry
+season, in October or November, when the water is
+shallow, the Falls are often much broken in some
+places. As this is one of the greatest of the sights
+of South Africa, thousands of tourists visit the
+scene, and a hotel had been erected near the railroad
+at this place.</p>
+
+<p>Our agent informed us that on July 13 an engine
+would come and transfer ourselves, together with
+the goods and wagon, to the Livingstone station on
+the north side. For this purpose the wagon and
+goods were loaded on an open truck, and as there
+was no passenger car, we too climbed up into the
+wagon, on the truck, and in this manner crossed
+the Zambezi on that railroad bridge, 420 feet high.
+At Livingstone the car was met by another agent
+who, with his boys, assisted by ours, unloaded the
+car and placed the wagon under the shade of a
+tree. Here it was fitted up as a dwelling-place for
+Sister Engle and myself for the remainder of the
+journey. It was a home on wheels. We praised the
+Lord that He had cared for us this far on our journey
+and permitted our feet to be planted on the
+north side of the river. Oxen could not be taken
+beyond the Zambezi for fear of carrying disease,
+so it was necessary that some be purchased before
+we proceeded farther.</p>
+
+<p>This part of the country, like Southern Rhodesia,
+is under control of the British Charter Company,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[248]</a></span>
+but with a separate government. Unlike that, it
+does not belong to the English by right of conquest,
+but through concessions granted by Lewanika, the
+King of Barotseland, and paramount chief of the
+country, for the purpose of exploration and development.
+The country is occupied by three main tribes&mdash;the
+Barotse, living along the Upper Zambezi and
+west of Victoria Falls; the Baila, or Mashukulumbwe,
+as they are often called, living along the Kafue
+River and north, and the Batonga, on the plateau
+between the Kafue and Zambezi Rivers and east.</p>
+
+<p>Those familiar with his life will remember that
+this is part of the country explored by Dr. Livingstone
+during his first and second great missionary
+journeys through Central Africa, from 1853 to about
+1860. The Barotse at that time were subject to the
+Makololo, who had emigrated from Basutoland and
+settled along the Upper Zambezi. The Makololo
+warriors were also responsible for the death of the
+first party of missionaries to this part of the country.
+I refer to the expedition under Price and Helmore,
+sent out in 1859 in response to Dr. Livingstone's
+urgent call. Nearly all of this party of missionaries
+died from poison administered by these natives, to
+the great sorrow of the African explorer. His memorable
+prophecy, "God will require the blood of
+His servants at the hands of you Makololo," was
+soon fulfilled. It is said that just four years afterwards
+the Barotse arose against their rulers, the
+Makololo, and slew them and asserted their independence.</p>
+
+<p>It was in this part of Africa too that Livingstone
+first saw some of the evils of the slave trade, and in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[249]</a></span>
+1873 he wrote to Mr. Gordon Bennett: "When I
+dropped among the Makololo and others in this
+central region, I saw a fair prospect for the regeneration
+of Africa. More could have been done in
+the Makololo country [which is today known as
+Barotseland] than was done by St. Patrick in Ireland,
+but I did not know that I was surrounded by
+the Portuguese slave trade; a barrier to all improvement.... All
+I can say in my loneliness is, may
+Heaven's richest blessing come down on every one,
+American, Englishman, Turk, who will help to heal
+this open sore of the world." A very remarkable
+circumstance connected with this utterance is that
+he evidently did not imagine at that time that the
+healing was to come first from yet another country,
+France. Just six years (in 1879) after those memorable
+words were uttered, Rev. F. Coillard settled in
+Barotseland. He and his heroic wife deserve of all
+people in this part of the country to be called Livingstone's
+successors.</p>
+
+<p>These natives could speak the Suto language, and
+as the Scriptures had been translated into that language
+for years, those books could be used here
+among the Barotse, just as Zulu could be used in
+Matabeleland. In the opening up of that work,
+Christian natives from Basutoland, a thousand miles
+farther south, volunteered to accompany Coillard.
+It is said, "Just on the border of Barotseland one of
+these native evangelists, Eleazer, died. 'God be
+blessed,' he exclaimed, when he knew that he must
+give up his heart's desire of preaching Christ to the
+Barotse, 'God be blessed! the door is open. My
+grave will be a finger post of the mission,'" as quoted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[250]</a></span>
+by James Steward. So that it may be seen that
+consecrated Africans also did their part in helping
+to heal this sore. Coillard and his successors have
+ever since carried on a most far-reaching work in
+Barotseland. About twenty years after the work
+was opened, Brother Engle had the great pleasure
+of accidentally meeting this venerable messenger of
+the Cross, Mr. Coillard, in a store in Bulawayo. His
+hair then was white, but he was as intensely interested
+as ever in his work, and was in a hurry to be
+back to his field of labor. As, at that time, there was
+no railroad farther than Bulawayo, he had to travel
+about 300 miles by ox-wagon and then by boat on
+the river. The labors of the missionaries and the
+advantages of good government have accomplished
+marvelous results in bringing peace and safety to
+this valley, yet even at this late date there are not
+wanting those who, if they dared, would rejoice to
+resurrect the old slave trade.</p>
+
+<p>Among the Baila tribe the Primitive Methodists
+of England, after encountering many difficulties
+along the way, had begun a work in 1893 at Nkala,
+and a few years later at Nanzela. In 1905 they also
+opened one at Nambala, about seventy-five miles
+north of the Kafue. Although they were doing excellent
+work, they had as yet been able to reach only
+a small portion of the Baila tribe when we appeared
+on the scene. There were no missionaries among
+the Batonga tribe living on the plateau between the
+Zambezi and Kafue Rivers, until 1915, when a mission
+was opened about 175 miles northeast of Livingstone
+by Mr. Anderson, of the Seventh Day Adventist
+Mission. This was just one year before we<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[251]</a></span>
+reached the country. Livingstone in his journey
+had passed through much of this country, including
+Kalomo, Monze Tete, and the Kafue River.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[252]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IIPART2" id="CHAPTER_IIPART2">CHAPTER TWO</a></h2>
+
+<h3>From the Zambezi River to Macha</h3>
+
+
+<p>The town, Livingstone, was, in 1906, quite
+small, and consisted chiefly of government
+buildings, postoffice, native stores, railway
+station, and shops. Some of these buildings, especially
+those owned by the government, were well
+made and ant-proof. The town was at a short distance
+from the railway station and seemed to
+have been built on a hill of yellow sand, which sand
+was so deep that walking seemed almost impossible,
+and riding was very little improvement over walking.</p>
+
+<p>Our first step was to call on the Commissioner,
+Mr. Sykes, and present the letter of introduction.
+He met us in a friendly and accommodating spirit,
+but gave no encouragement to proceed on into the
+interior, owing to the newness of the country and
+the unsettled condition of the natives in some places.
+His version of the work accomplished by missionaries
+was not very flattering, but that did not deter
+us in the least, as one generally becomes accustomed
+to hearing such things. He, however, did not
+offer to throw any obstacles in the way of our
+progress, but stated that it would be necessary for us
+to have an interview with the Administrator (governor)
+at Kalomo, the capital of North Rhodesia.
+He expressed his willingness to do whatever lay in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">[253]</a></span>
+his power to aid us in the undertaking, and advised
+that the purchasing of trained oxen for drawing the
+wagon be left in his hands, and he would see to it
+that good ones at a fair price were secured. This
+generous offer was most gratefully accepted. We
+were also invited to his home, and were most hospitably
+entertained by his estimable wife and his
+sister, and were made to feel that as yet we were
+not beyond the reach of civilization. They were
+living in a well-built mosquito-proof dwelling, which
+had been made in England and sent out ready to be
+put together.</p>
+
+<p>The next day a European brought to our tent ten
+trained oxen, with a note from Mr. Sykes, that he
+had proved these and found them satisfactory. The
+price too was below what had been expected. Thus
+equipped we were prepared to proceed to Kalomo,
+a distance by wagon road of nearly one hundred
+miles. A boy was employed to lead the oxen and a
+native government messenger was also sent along
+as guide. Gomo was to do the driving, but the man
+of whom the oxen had been purchased said he did
+not think the boy knew much about driving oxen,
+and so it proved later. There were occasional passenger
+trains running north through Kalomo, and
+some of the people at Livingstone had advised us to
+take the train that far and let the boys bring the
+wagon. Others, however, thought it best for us to
+stay by the wagon and supplies, as there was no
+suitable hotel at Kalomo, and it would be over a
+week before the wagon could reach that place, so
+we decided to remain with our supplies.</p>
+
+<p>The wagon was heavily laden, the roads were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">[254]</a></span>
+rough, and rivers bridgeless. About ten miles
+out from Livingstone, in going over a piece of rocky
+road, the reach of the wagon broke and further
+progress was impossible. Had the drivers been
+accustomed to this wild country, and the accidents
+incidental to it, they might soon have made another
+reach with timber from the forest surrounding us,
+as they often did in later years. At that time, however,
+we were helpless. What was to be done?
+There was only one course open, and that was to
+take the wagon back to Livingstone and have it
+mended. Some of the party remained with the
+wagon and supplies and the rest of us walked back
+to Livingstone to see what could be done. The
+question wanted to force itself upon us, Were we
+after all mistaken as to the Lord's leadings?</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Sykes was again the Good Samaritan, when
+he heard our story. The next morning he sent out
+conveyances to bring all back to Livingstone, and
+he and Mrs. Sykes insisted on our occupying the
+guest house until our wagon was repaired. There
+were no hotels in the place, and we were informed
+that prospectors and others often made use of the
+government house for an indefinite length of time.
+They said they were glad the accident had not occurred
+forty or fifty miles out, beyond the reach of
+help. We too felt deeply thankful that it had been
+no worse, and in a short time we were made to
+rejoice that there had been an accident; for it was
+soon evident that it was a blessing in disguise, and
+God had permitted it for a purpose. There were
+two roads to Kalomo, and neither was much traveled
+at the time. We learned that the one on which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">[255]</a></span>
+our guide was taking us was not well supplied with
+water, was infested with many savage beasts and
+the tsetse fly, which kills oxen, so that it was altogether
+unsafe for the journey.</p>
+
+<p>While we were waiting at Livingstone this second
+time, a great deal of information was gleaned in
+reference to the people and country north of Kalomo,
+called the Mapanza Sub-district. We learned
+that the people there were quiet and peaceable and
+that there were no missionaries in that section of
+the country. We also met a gentleman from Kalomo,
+who proved of assistance when we at last
+reached that place. Again information was received
+that a number of wagons under Mr. King were
+proceeding north to within a short distance of Kalomo,
+and if we could travel in their company, all
+difficulties in regard to the route, the finding of
+water for the oxen, and dangers along the way
+would be at an end. A driver accustomed to the
+country was also secured to take the wagon as far
+as Kalomo. Thus equipped we again started. As
+we left Livingstone, Mr. Sykes exclaimed, "I feel
+more in favor now of your going on than I did the
+first time."</p>
+
+<p>On the first day out our wagon came up with Mr.
+King's company, which consisted of five large wagons,
+all heavily laden with goods and each drawn by
+eighteen oxen. They were traveling north to within
+twenty-five miles of Kalomo, and thence west and
+north to Tanganyika. We might have delayed a
+year and not have found so good an opportunity of
+traveling by wagon to Kalomo. We followed this
+train of wagons and had no anxious thought in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">[256]</a></span>
+reference to the journey. Traveling by ox-wagons
+is done chiefly at night, or from very early morning
+until 9 A. M. Then the oxen are outspanned and
+allowed to graze and rest during the heat of the day,
+while the travelers cook, eat, and rest. Late in the
+afternoon the oxen are again inspanned and they
+travel until about 9 or 10 P. M., when they stop for
+the night. One or two large fires of logs are built
+at each wagon and kept burning through the night
+to ward off wild beasts from the oxen. Animals are
+afraid of the fire; especially do lions love darkness
+rather than light, their favorite nights for prowling
+being the dark, rainy ones. This king of beasts, although
+the strongest, is by no means the bravest.
+He does his loudest roaring in the midst of his native
+haunts, far away from harm, and when near his
+prey, human or otherwise, his tread is most stealthy
+and catlike.</p>
+
+<p>Before retiring for the night the natives, especially,
+cook and eat. They often do with a small portion
+of food during the day, but before retiring they
+like an abundance of good porridge and meat. They
+then retire to rest, their favorite place being around
+the huge campfires. Sister Engle and I were very
+comfortably situated in the tent of the wagon. Two
+other difficulties likely to meet travelers in this
+part of the country are scarcity of water and the
+tsetse fly. If the latter is met with it is necessary to
+make the journey through the infested district entirely
+by night. Since the uninitiated are not familiar
+with the location of these districts, the oxen
+are often bitten without their knowledge, and death
+is certain, for as yet no remedy for the bite has<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_257" id="Page_257">[257]</a></span>
+been discovered. As for water, that is one of the
+great difficulties on these African plateaus, and at
+one time we were obliged to travel seventeen miles
+without seeing any. Since oxen, with heavily-laden
+wagons, travel slowly, this required the oxen to be
+inspanned three times before water was reached.
+Mr. King rode a horse and went in advance to look
+for water and camping places, and also for game,
+which generally furnishes a large proportion of the
+food, both for white people and black ones on such
+trips. We ourselves would be favored with a piece
+of delicious venison after such excursions. Water
+in casks was carried along from one watering place
+to another for cooking and drinking purposes, but
+it is never drunk without being boiled or made into
+tea, and even then it is often very muddy-looking.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. King was familiar with the country, and had
+formerly traded with the people in the vicinity of
+Macha, north of Kalomo, so that he could furnish
+all necessary information about the Mapanza district,
+to which we desired to go. This was the first
+time we heard the name of the place which was
+destined to be the future mission station. The information
+received from him proved invaluable later
+on, when the question of location was being considered.
+As the way thus opened, step by step, we
+were continually made to feel that the Lord was
+guiding and causing all things to work together for
+good toward the opening of the work, and our
+hearts were filled with gratitude for His many favors.</p>
+
+<p>The last forty miles of the journey were made
+alone, as we did not care to travel on Sunday, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258">[258]</a></span>
+the other wagons were soon to leave and proceed
+westward. We reached Kalomo August 1, after a
+journey of nine days. This place, although the chief
+seat of government, could not be designated a town.
+It was rather a scattered camp, containing two small
+stores, a postoffice, and the dwellings and offices of
+the government officials. The railway station was
+about three miles distant. Here the fate of the undertaking
+was to be decided, as to whether we
+should be permitted to proceed or be turned back.
+That morning in worship the Lord gave us Isaiah
+41: 10 for a promise, which greatly encouraged our
+trembling hearts. We had now been absent from
+Bulawayo four weeks and had received no mail, as
+it had been ordered sent to this place; so the first
+journey was to the postoffice. I went for the mail
+alone, and inquired first for myself. The clerk exclaimed,
+"And Miss Engle, too?" and handed out
+a bundle of letters, all carefully laid together in a
+place by themselves. Evidently we were expected,
+and visitors were not common, especially women.</p>
+
+<p>It was necessary first to meet the secretary of
+the Lands' Department, so in the afternoon Sister
+Engle and I proceeded to his office. He had heard
+of our coming and absolutely refused a place in
+Mapanza district on which we might locate. His
+reasons were more or less plausible, and we were
+not wholly unprepared for his answer. We learned
+afterwards that we were not the only persons who
+had failed to receive encouragement from this
+gentleman. He added, however, that they could not
+hinder our proceeding farther if we felt so inclined.
+He suggested our going to Broken Hill, the terminus<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259">[259]</a></span>
+of the railroad, 280 miles northeast, as there
+were some white inhabitants there. That no doubt
+would have been a good opening for a mission station,
+as there were no missionaries there at this
+time, and only one between Kalomo and that place.
+It did not, however, seem to be the Lord's will for
+us to proceed that far, and since there would be a
+new set of officials there to deal with, our reception
+might not be any better. After sending our letter
+of introduction to the Administrator, we turned toward
+the wagon to consider and pray over the affair,
+realizing that a more perplexing problem than a
+broken wagon was facing us.</p>
+
+<p>We had not proceeded far when a gentleman came
+to inform us that the Administrator, who is the
+highest official in the country, requested an interview.
+We were kindly received by the honorable
+gentleman and given an opportunity of explaining
+in what part of the country we desired to open a
+mission station, and the condition of the natives in
+that section. He said that he saw no serious difficulty
+in the way, and that he was in favor of allowing
+us to proceed and select a mission site. He
+affirmed, however, that the unhealthfulness of the
+climate was the most serious obstacle; and, since it
+was late in the season for us to put up a mosquito-proof
+dwelling before the rainy and unhealthy season
+came, he thought it best for us to select a place
+and then go south until the rains were over. Otherwise
+we might be stricken with fever, a deadly type
+of which, known as black water fever, is common
+in this section of the country. We promised to consider
+seriously his advice, if a proper dwelling could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_260" id="Page_260">[260]</a></span>
+not be secured before the rains came. He then directed
+us to the civil commissioner of that district,
+who especially encouraged the undertaking, expressing
+his belief that we would encounter no difficulty
+among the natives, since he was familiar with
+and had jurisdiction of Mapanza district. He said,
+"The field is before you, and as there are no other
+missionaries there, it is yours to occupy." He also
+gave a letter to the magistrate at Mapanza and a
+native messenger to show us the way.</p>
+
+<p>It was with thankfulness too deep for words that
+we returned to the wagon. God was again verifying
+His wonderful promises. Praise His Holy Name!
+Part of our freight had been sent to Kalomo by
+train, so after procuring that from the station, we
+proceeded north about sixty miles through Macha
+and other places to the camp of the official at Mapanza.
+When about half the distance was traversed
+we unexpectedly came upon a Dutch family living
+there all alone in the wilds. They had not been
+there long and were not permanent settlers, but we
+managed to purchase from them some fine imported
+chickens and some banana sprouts, all of which
+have proved to be a most useful addition to our
+mission property.</p>
+
+<p>The natives were much scattered in a portion of
+the country through which we passed until we approached
+the vicinity of Macha. Here they were
+much more thickly settled, and also from this on
+to the camp at Mapanza. At the latter place the
+official was not at home. While waiting for him we
+concluded to visit some of the natives and went to
+the village of one of the most prominent chiefs of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_261" id="Page_261">[261]</a></span>
+this district, Mapanza by name. There were thirty-five
+huts in the village. In the center of this was a
+large cattle pen, and around it and the outside of
+the palisade the huts were built in a circle, all opening
+toward the center. As we entered this enclosure
+we were greeted with clapping of hands on all sides.
+This is the native way of saluting their king and
+government officials and sometimes other white
+people. In this instance the uniformed government
+messenger accompanied us, and no doubt gave
+prestige to our visit. The people of the village received
+us in a friendly manner, but since their language
+was unintelligible to us we soon returned to
+the wagon.</p>
+
+<p>The time of the official's return was uncertain and
+we preferred not to locate in the immediate vicinity
+of the camp, so it was thought advisable to return a
+short distance and select a mission site. Some of
+the rivers through which we had safely come proved
+more difficult on the return journey. Gomo had
+been driving since we left Kalomo and did excellent
+work; but he found the Myeki River here at
+the camp very difficult to cross. There are long,
+steep hills on either side of the river, and in addition
+to this the bed of the bridgeless stream is quite deep.
+Our oxen had done splendid work on the long journey
+from Livingstone, but in recrossing this river
+they seemed unequal to the effort. After struggling
+awhile one finally lay down and refused to move.
+This was a new experience for us, but perhaps not
+for the boys. Gomo used every inducement to make
+it rise, but to no avail. To our amusement he finally,
+as a last resort, bit its tail. It was up in an instant<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_262" id="Page_262">[262]</a></span>
+and the wagon moved on. We have since learned
+that oxen are often more stubborn than that one,
+especially new ones. They sometimes lie down and
+nothing will induce them to move. They will endure
+fire and even death itself.</p>
+
+<p>We drove back and carefully looked over the various
+locations, and after asking the Lord for direction,
+we finally decided upon our present site on the
+bank of the Macha River, or rather on the hill above
+it. The tent was removed from the wagon and
+placed on poles and prepared for occupancy. This
+place is about fourteen miles from the camp at
+Mapanza, and was reached August 17, a little over
+six weeks from the time we left Matopo Mission.
+We had traveled in all about 485 miles, about 170 of
+which was by ox-wagon. Our journal of the time
+records:</p>
+
+<p>"In all the Lord has wonderfully given us health
+and strength, and no harm of wild beasts or wilder
+men has befallen us. The journey had been far
+more successful in every way than we had anticipated,
+and we praise the Lord that at last we are
+settled."</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_263" id="Page_263">[263]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IIIPART2" id="CHAPTER_IIIPART2">CHAPTER THREE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>The Opening of the Work at Macha</h3>
+
+
+<p>In selecting a location for the mission, the desire
+was to secure a place sufficiently high so as to
+be at a distance from the low swamps, breeding
+malaria and other deadly diseases, and yet near
+enough to the river so as to have access to water.
+We desired also to have land in the vicinity suitable
+for agriculture and industrial purposes in general,
+and for the growing of fruit and vegetables. Then
+again, in addition to the above requirements, the
+object of our coming to the country was not to be
+lost sight of; <i>i. e.</i>, the natives themselves. We desired
+to have easy access to them so that they might
+receive the Gospel. All of these requirements were
+prayerfully considered and we believe met in the
+location of Macha. As eight years have passed
+since then, our convictions have only been strengthened
+that it was the Lord's choice for the work.</p>
+
+<p>As near as can be estimated the location is about
+16&frac12;° south latitude and 27° east longitude, and is
+about 4,500 feet above sea level, so that, although it
+is within the tropics, the altitude causes the climate
+to be pleasant the greater portion of the year and
+as healthful a site as can be secured in that section
+of the country. Along one side of the 3,000-acre
+mission farm is a small river, which gives name to
+the locality, and the tent was pitched over half a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_264" id="Page_264">[264]</a></span>
+mile from this river. The place afforded excellent
+facilities for agriculture and fruit growing. Especially
+can bananas and citrus trees be grown without
+irrigation. The country is rolling and there are
+numerous rich valleys capable of supporting many
+natives. There are wagon roads which have been
+made by traders who go through the country and
+buy grain of the natives in exchange for cloth,
+ornaments, blankets, and clothing. There were no
+surveyed farms in this vicinity, and the only farmers
+near lived over twenty miles from Macha, but
+numerous villages of natives are within walking
+distance and wagon road.</p>
+
+<p>At the opening of Macha Mission there was a
+station of Primitive Methodists northwest at a distance
+of at least sixty miles, and the one of the Seventh
+Day Adventist Mission at about the same distance
+northeast. With the exception of these two
+places one might go a hundred miles in any other
+direction and not find a mission station, so that we
+could certainly feel that we were not intruding into
+the territory of any other missionaries. The natives
+in this part of the country had heard absolutely
+nothing of Christ, and they knew not what missionaries
+were or how they differed from other people.</p>
+
+<p>Our little tent, 6 x 13 feet, was sufficiently commodious
+for eating and sleeping, but all the work
+had to be performed on the outside in the shade of
+a large tree, near which the tent had been placed.
+Beneath this tree also our supplies were piled off
+the ground and away from the destructive white
+ants, of which the ground was everywhere full. We
+had no cookstove then, and all our cooking was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_265" id="Page_265">[265]</a></span>
+done over an open fire, while bread was baked in a
+large, flat-bottomed iron pot with long legs. This
+was placed over a bed of live coals, while coals were
+also placed on the iron cover. Some very good
+yeast bread came from that iron pot, novel perhaps
+to Americans, but familiar to Africanders. Many
+people traveling through the country made use of
+the ant hills as bake-ovens.</p>
+
+<p>The Christian boys who accompanied us, as well
+as some younger ones who came for work, camped
+at a short distance from the tent, and at night
+slept around the fire until huts could be built
+for them. Before the mission site had been
+agreed upon two young boys came and asked
+for work. We took them, and one of these
+has been one of our most faithful helpers. As
+grain was plentiful in the neighborhood there was
+no difficulty in securing food for the natives. Many
+of the older people, men and women, came to see
+and welcome us. Every effort was put forth toward
+erecting buildings before the rains came on, but as
+fires had swept over the country and destroyed most
+of the grass, it was evident that our chief difficulty
+would be in procuring thatching grass. This difficulty
+was obviated by a man at Mapanza, who was
+erecting a house for the commissioner, offering us
+for a small sum a lot of grass that he had on hand.
+Some time later our journal is as follows:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>These have been busy days; much work has been crowded
+into them. Building and making furniture have occupied
+the attention of all of us, and everything has had
+to be done with native material and few tools, which have
+increased the amount of labor. The poles had to be hauled<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266">[266]</a></span>
+five or six miles and some of the grass for thatching was
+brought fourteen miles. Ndhlalambi has been a faithful
+and excellent workman. He is not as quick as some, but
+few natives would have succeeded in making better buildings,
+as he is careful and painstaking in all he does.
+Gomo is just the opposite; he is just as willing, but is no
+builder. He has, however, been very useful in hauling
+poles and grass, and mud for plastering, and he performed
+a splendid service in venturing among the Baila (a warlike
+tribe north of us) and purchasing for us two cows. Sister
+Engle and I have been bending all our energies toward
+helping with the building in the more technical parts, so
+that the work might be accomplished as soon as possible,
+and we have been spending some of our time in making
+furniture. There has been no difficulty in securing natives
+to work for us, and they have all worked faithfully
+under Ndhlalambi's supervision.</p>
+
+<p>There seems to be nothing to mar the work and location
+thus far, except the savage beasts, which prowl
+around at night, a terror to the domestic animals and to
+ourselves. When we pray, "Keep us from harm and
+danger," it is a more genuine prayer than formerly. Many
+nights the howls of the wolves and hyenas are to be
+heard, and one night some of the boys awoke to see in
+the firelight the eyes of a hyena glaring at them. Some
+of the natives built a high, strong pen for our cattle, and
+the first night they were enclosed in it a lion tried to force
+its way in, as indicated by the spoors the next morning.
+Leopards have also been seen. These evidences, as well
+as the stories told by others, convince us that there are
+wild beasts in the neighborhood, yet the Lord is able to
+keep and has thus far kept us from harm.</p></blockquote>
+
+<p>The 91st Psalm was very precious in those days.</p>
+
+<p>These first buildings were constructed in a manner
+very similar to those at Matopo Mission, except
+that it was thought advisable to build the main part
+of the house all in one, so as to obviate the necessity
+of going outside in passing from one room to another&mdash;a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_267" id="Page_267">[267]</a></span>
+very important consideration in such a
+wild country. The scarcity of grass limited the size
+of the house to a certain extent. It was 26 x 14 feet,
+with a veranda around three sides to protect from
+the sun and rain, and was divided into three small
+compartments opening into one another, the small
+doorways being closed by curtains. As there was no
+seasoned lumber to be had, there was only one
+outside door, and this was made from one of the
+boxes in which the goods had been packed. A
+table was manufactured from another box, and the
+bedsteads, as well as nearly all the rest of the furniture,
+were manufactured from native unseasoned
+timber and draped with calico. A muslin ceiling
+was a necessity to prevent the sawdust from falling
+from the rafters.</p>
+
+<p>On the inside of the house the walls were carefully
+plastered up against the thatched roof, and the
+openings for windows were closed by fine wire
+gauze netting to exclude mosquitoes. An important
+question was how to make a screen door for the
+only outside door of the building, as unseasoned
+timber would not answer the purpose. The pole
+of the wagon had been broken soon after our arrival
+at Macha, and one from the forest put in its place;
+and since this broken piece of timber was of hardwood
+and sufficiently long for a door frame, we decided
+to make use of it for that purpose. It was
+sawed and with considerable labor made into a
+frame and proved quite satisfactory. Sister Engle,
+who was always patient and painstaking in her
+work and full of resources, deserves much credit for
+this and many other things with which the house<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_268" id="Page_268">[268]</a></span>
+was equipped. That screen door is still doing excellent
+service after a lapse of eight years. After it
+was finished it was found that to fit it into the door
+frame so as to make it mosquito proof was no small
+task. The door frame had been manufactured from
+unseasoned native timber and was greatly warped.
+After much chiseling and shaping even this feat was
+accomplished, and the result was a mosquito-proof
+house, for that season at least. Mosquito nets for
+the beds had also been brought along.</p>
+
+<p>A small kitchen was also built and a hut for the
+native brethren before the rains came. The grass,
+stumps, and underbrush were cleared off all around
+the buildings and at some distance from them. This
+is customary in this part of the country, and it is
+done for the purpose of removing the hiding places
+of mosquitoes, snakes, and the like. Although more
+natives were employed the first few months at
+Macha than at Matopo, we experienced no difficulty
+in dealing with them; perhaps because we were
+more familiar with their character, and our native
+Christians too were quite capable of understanding
+them.</p>
+
+<p>During the progress of the work, the advice of
+the Administrator had not been forgotten, as it was
+our earnest desire to do that which was best, and
+we looked to the Lord for guidance. It seemed advisable
+to remain. Contrary to his expectations, a
+mosquito-proof dwelling-house had been constructed,
+and the work which was started would certainly
+have suffered if we had gone away. The boys who
+had accompanied us were in every respect proving
+themselves capable and reliant; the natives were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269">[269]</a></span>
+quiet and respectful; and not the least difficulty in
+the way of our return was the long, dangerous trip
+to Kalomo to reach the railroad. We had safely
+come that way once, yet we dreaded the long trip
+back, perhaps because we did not believe that it
+was the Lord's will for us to make it. The post was
+brought to our door by the government messenger
+as he passed on his way to Mapanza, and a trader
+near offered to bring out from Kalomo any needed
+supplies.</p>
+
+<p>All our needs thus far were abundantly supplied
+by a loving Father. All praise to Him Who "is able
+to do exceeding abundantly above all that we ask or
+think." Even in our most sanguine expectations
+before coming to the country we had not thought to
+be so well provided for. He in His infinite wisdom
+and forethought had gone before and prepared every
+step of the way; He had opened every door and
+enabled the mission to be thus planted in raw heathendom
+where Christ had not been named. The location
+proven by years of trial could not have been
+improved, for He makes no mistakes. The call and
+the desire for the extension of His Kingdom, which
+He had put into our hearts before ever Africa was
+reached, was thus being fulfilled. He had done and
+was doing His part; what more could we ask? Yea,
+we were weighted down and humbled by the multitude
+of favors which He was showering upon us.
+The only thing to mar our peace at this time was
+the consciousness that our friends and some of the
+government officials were uneasy on our account.
+We saw no cause for fear, and were conscious that
+the continued prayers ascending in behalf of ourselves<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_270" id="Page_270">[270]</a></span>
+and the work were availing before God, and
+that we were at the place where He desired us to
+be.</p>
+
+<p>After the buildings were completed and the rains
+came the boys put forth every effort to dig some of
+the ground and plant grain and vegetables. This
+had to be done by hand, as the plow had not yet
+arrived.</p>
+
+<p>In the many duties incident to starting a new
+station, the spiritual part of the work was not neglected.
+A little visiting among the people was done
+both by Sister Engle and myself and by the native
+brethren. An attempt was also made each Sunday to
+instill into the minds of the people something of
+the sacredness of the day. Since a number of natives
+came daily to work at the mission, they were
+informed that we did not work on Sunday, but worshiped
+God instead. It was thus not difficult to
+assemble twenty-five or thirty on Sunday for services.
+These were always married people, with the
+exception of the few boys who were staying at the
+mission to work. The younger people, and especially
+the girls and children, were conspicuous only by
+their absence. It was the same at the village; none
+except men and women were to be seen, so that at
+first we all concluded that there were no children in
+the neighborhood. Later it was learned that these
+and all the unmarried girls ran and hid when we
+approached a village.</p>
+
+<p>We could invite the people on Sunday, or we
+could go to see them in their homes, but to speak
+to them was a more difficult affair. There was the
+same difficulty in the language as at Matopo, but<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_271" id="Page_271">[271]</a></span>
+with a difference. There we had a translation of
+the Bible, dictionaries and grammars, and could at
+least read the Word to them. Here we were among
+the Batonga, and their language, although belonging
+to the same great Bantu family of languages,
+was quite distinct from that of Southern Rhodesia.
+There were no translations, no dictionaries, at the
+time the mission opened, so that the task of acquiring
+it was no small one. We soon realized that we
+had not sufficiently appreciated our blessings in
+Southern Rhodesia. Here it was necessary to have
+notebook and pencil continually on hand and write
+down the words as they fell from the lips of the
+natives; nor was it an easy task to decide upon the
+spelling of the words; especially was there difficulty
+in distinguishing the letters <i>l</i> and <i>r</i>. The
+same word as it fell from the lips of one native
+would seem to have an <i>l</i>, and as spoken by another
+it would be <i>r</i>. Of course there were many similar
+difficulties.</p>
+
+<p>One of our first aims was to secure the expression
+for "What is that?" "<i>Chi nzi echo?</i>" and with
+that as a basis the names at least of many things
+could be learned. Then too it is not so difficult to
+learn to use expressions common in everyday duties
+and the material things about one; but to secure a
+suitable vocabulary for instruction in the Gospel is
+generally a difficult task, and missionaries differ
+widely in reference to terms for spiritual things.</p>
+
+<p>The native vocabulary is by no means meager,
+and one is often surprised that people living such
+seemingly narrow lives as they do have in constant
+use such a copious vocabulary. Their thoughts as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_272" id="Page_272">[272]</a></span>
+a rule can be expressed in fewer words than in English.
+For instance, they will say bona, to see;
+<i>bonwa</i>, to be seen; <i>bwene</i>, to have seen; <i>bonana</i>, to
+see each other; <i>boneka</i>, to be visible; <i>bonela</i>, to see
+for; and <i>bonesha</i>, to see clearly, and some verbs
+have additional forms. Again, in the use of verbs,
+such as <i>go</i>, they will have different words to express
+various phases of it: <i>Ya</i>, to go; <i>benda</i>, to go stooping,
+as after game; <i>fwamba</i>, to go quickly; <i>endenda</i>,
+to go for a walk; <i>ambuka</i>, to go aside, or astray;
+and so on for eighteen different words.</p>
+
+<p>The especial difficulty of the missionary is to
+secure the proper words to convey spiritual conceptions
+not generally met with in their comprehension;
+such as, <i>faith</i>, <i>holy</i>, <i>save</i>, <i>cross</i>, <i>heaven</i>, and
+even in the word for God there is often a difference
+of opinion among missionaries as to the word to be
+used. Among all tribes there seems to be a word
+for God, but the conception upon which it is based
+is so degrading that one often hesitates to make use
+of it in referring to the Holy and Omnipotent One
+Whom we have learned to revere. Two opinions
+are prevalent among missionaries in reference to
+some of the words. One is to make use of the words
+already found in a language and to seek to build up
+upon those words a new conception altogether foreign
+to the native line of thought. Others think
+that it is better to introduce a new word and attach
+the desired meaning to it. I think it is safe to say
+that the former is the method generally employed
+among translators, but whether it is in all instances
+the best method is open to question.</p>
+
+<p>Natives very quickly learn the language of other<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273">[273]</a></span>
+tribes, and so it was in this instance. Our native
+Christians soon acquired this language. A few of
+those working for us could after a manner speak
+that "Esperanto of South Africa," "Kitchen Kafir,"
+and this enabled them from the first to understand
+one another, in a slight degree at least, and gave
+them a common basis from which to pass to the
+Tonga language proper, spoken by the people about
+us. As Ndhlalambi, who took the name of David,
+had felt the call definitely to give the Gospel to these
+people, and had had experience in evangelistic work,
+both at Mapani and at Matopo Mission, he was
+able in a comparatively short time to give the Gospel
+intelligently to the people, and also to assist us in
+acquiring the language. Of course this was by no
+means accomplished in a few months, or even in a
+year, for it was often difficult for even him to secure
+the proper words in spiritual language. These helpers
+too had their difficulties in the work, and had
+their misunderstandings with the natives. One day
+one of them was quite discouraged in an attempt to
+make some natives understand properly, and he
+exclaimed, "I have a great deal more sympathy with
+the white man now in his endeavors to make the
+people understand, and to teach them how to work.
+These people seem so dull to me, and I know why
+our masters became so out of patience with us."</p>
+
+<p>There was at first no attempt at opening school;
+but stencils and cardboard had been brought along,
+and with these charts were printed in the syllables
+and sentences of the language as nearly as we understood
+it. Sister Engle made use of these charts
+in teaching, by the light of the campfire in the evenings,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_274" id="Page_274">[274]</a></span>
+the young boys who had come to work for
+us. Our two native helpers also continued their
+studies and were instructed whenever there was
+time for it after the buildings were completed.</p>
+
+<p>As the first Christmas drew near, a query arose
+as to how it should be observed, and whether services
+should be held, since no one could yet speak
+very well the language. David and Gomo were
+eager for services, saying that they would put forth
+every effort to speak to the people about Christ.
+We longed to give the people something on that
+day as an expression of our good will, but could not
+see the way open to do so. At Matopo Mission
+salt was always given, but in this part of the country
+salt was very expensive and there was only a
+little on hand, and we were not prepared to give
+them meat, as we had little opportunity of procuring
+game for ourselves. Services, however, were
+announced for the day, and early in the morning
+some natives began to arrive, curious to know what
+the day was like.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning Sister Engle and I were sitting
+at the table on the veranda, eating our breakfast,
+speaking of the plans for the day, and expressing
+a wish that there was some food to set before the
+people. While speaking, we heard a goat bleat,
+and presently two natives, one of whom was carrying
+a goat on his shoulders, came toward us. They
+put the goat down on the ground before us, saying
+as they did so, "The Chief, Macha, sent you this as
+a present." Here was the answer to our wish and
+unuttered prayer. Another native headman a short
+time previously had also presented a goat, and we<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_275" id="Page_275">[275]</a></span>
+had bought one, and these three would be sufficient
+for the dinner. Our praises ascended simultaneously,
+and we realized that the promise was
+again verified, "Before they call, I will answer;
+and while they are yet speaking I will hear."</p>
+
+<p>The native brethren entered heartily into the
+preparations, and with the assistance of the others,
+they soon had the animals killed and dressed, and
+in the cooking kettles. Fortunately there was cornmeal
+on hand which also furnished sufficient porridge.
+We rejoiced as we saw the people coming
+that there was food to set before them, even though
+the Gospel messenger could not be given satisfactorily;
+but there was still a greater and more blessed
+surprise in store.</p>
+
+<p>There were ninety-six grown people assembled,
+chiefly fathers and mothers, heads of families, and
+these were all seated along the veranda and in the
+shade of the tent. David took up the subject of
+Christmas and its origin by first reading it from the
+Zulu Testament, which, of course, they did not
+understand. Before he had read much the Lord
+sent a first-class interpreter, in the person of a
+Mutonga native who had worked for some time in
+Bulawayo, and there learned to read and speak the
+Zulu language and to understand the Gospel. He
+was not, however, a Christian, as we learned, but
+he proved a most ready and excellent interpreter
+for the day; and as the message was given in Zulu,
+he as readily interpreted it into the vernacular of
+the people.</p>
+
+<p>The Lord especially anointed our brother David
+for the message that day, and he most ably and feelingly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_276" id="Page_276">[276]</a></span>
+presented the wonderful story of the birth and
+life of our Savior and His great mission in the redemption
+of the world. Perhaps the unique opportunity
+had some effect upon my feelings, but it
+seemed to me that I never at any other time heard
+the subject so well handled before a congregation
+of natives as it was on that day. The native men,
+especially, listened most attentively throughout that
+long discourse. Tears came into my eyes as I
+looked upon those seamed faces before me, those
+middle-aged and elderly men who, for the first time
+in their lives, had an opportunity of hearing of Him
+Who had come to earth nineteen hundred years
+before to redeem them. How much of the <i>makani
+mabotu</i> (glad tidings) they grasped at the time it is
+difficult to ascertain.</p>
+
+<p>At the close of the discourse some of the rest of
+us spoke for a short time on the same theme, and
+also explained the cause of our being among them.
+Then after a hymn and prayer they were given their
+food. A bountiful dinner had also been prepared
+for ourselves, a portion of which we handed over to
+the two helpers who had so faithfully labored to
+make the day a success. It is needless to say that
+they too thoroughly enjoyed their dinner. In every
+way this first Christmas was one long to be remembered,
+with nothing to mar the perfect harmony of
+the occasion.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277">[277]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IVPART2" id="CHAPTER_IVPART2">CHAPTER FOUR</a></h2>
+
+<h3>School Work. Reinforcements</h3>
+
+
+<p>Up to this time nothing had been said about
+school, except that a few boys had been
+taught in the evenings. There was no word
+for it in their language, and learning had no meaning
+or attraction for them. They only desired to
+work and earn money.</p>
+
+<p>The first herdboy came before the mission was
+located, and to him we gave the name "Jim," as
+we did not fancy his native name. He remained
+with us three months and then returned home and
+his cousin Tom came to herd. Both of these boys
+manifested a great interest in what they heard, and
+Tom was the first one to express a desire to be a
+Christian. Another little boy ran off from home
+one day and begged permission to remain at the
+mission. His mother immediately followed him and
+told him to go home. He refused, and sitting down
+by a tree he put his arms around it and clung to it;
+but the mother tore the poor little fellow from the
+tree and dragged him away. Aside from these, very
+few children made their appearance during the first
+five or six months of the mission, and no girls came
+for a much longer period of time. The older people
+were friendly from the first, but we often felt that
+some of them inspired their children with a certain
+amount of fear of the newcomers.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_278" id="Page_278">[278]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>January 1, 1907, the people were informed that we
+wished to open a school and that they should come
+to learn. By this we had in mind a day-school,
+where the pupils would come in the morning and
+return home at the close of the session. It had been
+impossible to build a schoolhouse, since nearly all
+the grass had been burnt off before our appearance
+on the scene. We, however, set up the little tent
+and built a straw shed at one end of it for a temporary
+schoolhouse.</p>
+
+<p>As school and its advantages had no meaning to
+the people, no one came. Then too it was the busiest
+season of the year. One, two, three weeks
+passed, and still no one desired to learn. January
+passed and half of February; still no scholars. This
+was a new experience. At Matopo the children
+could scarcely wait until school opened, and they
+were the pioneers there and gradually drew the older
+people to take an interest. Here it was quite the
+reverse; the children were afraid of us, and would
+run away, screaming, to hide in the tall grass when
+we approached their villages. What was to be
+done? As usual we began to look to the Source
+that never fails.</p>
+
+<p>The middle of February it was thought advisable
+to have a week of prayer. All work was laid aside
+and the time was spent by the Christians in interceding
+at a Throne of Grace, for we felt that perhaps
+we had been too much occupied in temporal affairs.
+In the midst of this week of prayer, on February
+19, Macha, the chief, came, bringing his little boy,
+about twelve years of age, and said, "Here is my
+son. I should like to have him stay with the missionaries<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_279" id="Page_279">[279]</a></span>
+and learn to read and to work." Here then
+was a direct answer to prayer. The chief of the
+district had set an example to his people by thus
+bringing his child. This was a signal for others,
+Apuleni, another boy of about the same age, came
+the next week, and Mafulo and Kajiga followed;
+also others. Jim and Tom came to remain and
+attend school, and by the end of the year there were
+seventeen boys in all staying at the mission.</p>
+
+<p>These were nearly all boys from ten to sixteen
+years of age; a few were older. None who applied
+were refused if they were willing to abide by the
+regulations; and industrial work was at once inaugurated
+in connection with the school. They
+were to be taught in school three and one-half hours,
+and work early morning and afternoon, receiving,
+in addition to their food and instruction, some
+clothing, and blankets for the night. They were to
+remain at least a year before they could take the
+clothing home with them. This stipulation was
+made to teach them stability and prevent them from
+coming sufficiently long to secure clothing and then
+leaving before they had properly earned it. The
+arrangement proved very satisfactory. The few
+taxpayers who entered the industrial school were
+given a small sum of money, provided they completed
+the time agreed upon. They always had
+Saturday afternoon as a half holiday, when they
+were to wash and mend their clothing and have the
+remainder of the time for recreation.</p>
+
+<p>It was always our aim to make them understand
+that they were expected to earn what they
+received by giving labor in return. We had no<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_280" id="Page_280">[280]</a></span>
+sympathy with pupils who desired to learn and lie
+about and be idle the rest of the time. Several who
+desired to bring their food and remain at the mission
+without working were not allowed to do so, as
+we thought it would prove detrimental, both to
+themselves and to the rest. We preferred a dozen
+industrious and stable boys to many times that
+number who were lazy and indifferent. It is true
+some of the smallest could scarcely be said to earn
+their way at first, but they were at least taught
+habits of industry. In their homes many of them
+spent their time in an indolent fashion, their muscles
+being flabby and unused to exercise; and often,
+when they came to us, they were too lazy even to
+play at recess. Gradually they brightened up and
+took hold of the tasks assigned them. One day one
+of the mothers came and inquired about her son, a
+boy about thirteen years of age, and she was told
+that he was digging in the garden.</p>
+
+<p>"Kanyama digging?" she asked, in great surprise.
+"Why, he does not know how to work."</p>
+
+<p>The first rainy season was quite pleasant, and it
+passed with very little sickness among our workers.
+It gave us an opportunity also of learning something
+of the fertility of the soil on the mission farm.
+Much of the land, and especially that in the valleys,
+was unusually productive, and the grass grew to the
+height of ten feet. Our aim was to make use of the
+rainy season to instruct the boys in agriculture and
+horticulture and to raise sufficient grain and other
+food at least for their consumption; and more than
+that, if possible, so that the expense of keeping a
+number of boys would not rest so heavily on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_281" id="Page_281">[281]</a></span>
+mission. This first season very little food was
+grown, because there had been no land ready for
+sowing, but the plow came in January, and Gomo
+was enabled to break two large gardens ready for
+sowing the following year.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus282.png" width="600" height="315" alt="Macha Mission Huts, 1907." title="Macha Mission Huts, 1907." />
+<span class="caption">Macha Mission Huts, 1907.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>As soon as the rainy season was at an end, building
+was again undertaken by David and Gomo, together
+with the assistance of the native men and
+schoolboys. Thatch grass had to be cut and poles
+hauled and seasoned. The Matabele women were
+always eager to work for cloth, salt, or money, but
+the Batonga women were not. It was impossible
+to make satisfactory arrangements with them, either
+to cut grass or plaster, so that the men and boys
+were obliged to do this also in connection with the
+rest of the building, and they performed the work
+very satisfactorily.</p>
+
+<p>As there was only one small hut for the schoolboys,
+the first building this second year was a hut,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_282" id="Page_282">[282]</a></span>
+13 x 16 feet, for their occupancy. Then a building
+answering for church and school purposes was
+erected. This was 16 x 30 feet, with a large veranda
+in front, and was an excellent building of the kind.
+The seats were made of bricks, built up in rows and
+plastered over, and the floor was made of earth,
+pounded hard and plastered. Another building,
+14 x 20 feet, of poles and mud was also built, and
+was divided into two rooms. It had a veranda all
+around it. We were expecting missionaries out
+from America, and this last hut was for their accommodation.
+These three buildings were all respectable-looking
+ones and required a great deal of time
+and labor, so that David and Gomo were very busy
+and deserved much credit for their efficiency and
+perseverance. In addition to the outside work the
+schoolboys were instructed in sewing, and two of
+them in housework.</p>
+
+<p>The school at first was very poorly equipped, as
+we had nothing but the homemade charts and a
+few slates, and knew not where our books were to
+come from, since we did not know the language sufficiently
+to make any. Some of our needs in this respect
+were also supplied later. In the latter part of
+1907 Rev. E. W. Smith, a missionary at Nanzela,
+published an excellent "Handbook of the Ila Language."
+This was a grammar and dictionary combined,
+and the language was closely allied to that
+of the Tonga. We secured this book about a year
+after we had reached Macha and found it very helpful
+in acquiring the language, since the grammar
+and many of the words of the two languages were
+similar. He also published in that language an excellent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_283" id="Page_283">[283]</a></span>
+first reader and a book of over one hundred
+pages of Bible stories. This latter book is a very
+faithful account of Genesis and Exodus, and contains
+some of the more interesting parts of later Old
+Testament history. Not long after, there was also
+published a book of questions containing the essentials
+of Christian belief, and also many quotations
+from the Scriptures. With the exception of the
+mode of baptism this was so essentially like our own
+faith that it could be used to excellent advantage in
+Inquirers' Classes.</p>
+
+<p>All of these books proved of inestimable value to
+us in school and church work. The pupils in the
+school proved bright and studious, and before the
+end of this year some had started in the service of
+the Lord.</p>
+
+<p>It was almost impossible for us to spend much
+time out among the natives during the rainy season,
+since the rivers were often swollen and difficult to
+cross, and the grass was high, rendering walking
+difficult and even dangerous on account of savage
+beasts lurking about. It is true we seldom saw
+any of these animals, but that they were in the
+vicinity we had no reason to doubt. Once when
+David was on top of the church, putting on the
+rafters, a native from a neighboring kraal called to
+say that three leopards were after his sheep. Our
+boys all ran to hunt with spears and clubs, and some
+of them had a glimpse of the animals as they disappeared
+in the tall grass. Another morning some
+of the men on coming to work reported that they
+saw four lions crossing one of our plowed fields.
+Occasionally we would hear a lion roaring on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_284" id="Page_284">[284]</a></span>
+opposite side of the river, so that there was no
+reason to doubt the presence of danger.</p>
+
+<p>Northwestern Rhodesia, where we found ourselves,
+is essentially the home of wild and savage
+beasts and game of all kinds. In addition to smaller
+animals there are the duiker, reedbuck, hartebeest,
+sable antelope, eland, kudu, and many other varieties
+of game. The forests are full of apes and
+baboons, and the gnu, the zebra, and the buffalo are
+to be found. The mammoth elephant roams at will
+in herds or singly, the rivers are full of crocodiles,
+and the larger ones abound in the ungainly hippopotamuses.
+It is the paradise of hunters, and many
+avail themselves of the opportunity for sport thus
+afforded; others for the gain to be had from ivory
+and hides.</p>
+
+<p>The fact that there was not only game, but that
+there were also dangerous animals lurking about,
+may have been the chief reason why we never succeeded
+in starting a day-school at Macha. It was
+scarcely safe for children to go alone back and
+forth to school. Even men seldom traveled far
+alone, and they always went armed. A native
+would carry three or four assegais, and many were
+supplied with guns. It is surprising how much
+game they managed to kill with those old blunderbusses.</p>
+
+<p>As stated previously, the presence of animals had
+much to do with the amount of kraal visiting carried
+on. Sister Engle and I went, however, quite
+frequently after the grass was burnt off in June,
+accompanied by some of the schoolboys. As we
+neared a village, our approach was always heralded<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_285" id="Page_285">[285]</a></span>
+by the barking of dogs and the screaming of children
+as they ran away to be out of reach of the
+<i>mukua</i> (white person). Every village is supplied
+with its quota of dogs. One day I counted twenty-four
+in one small village. Nor is their presence
+unnecessary in this animal-ridden country, as they
+often succeed in driving off ferocious animals from
+the herds, and they help supply their master with
+game. They are, however, generally so lean and
+starved looking that one would like to see a "Society
+for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals"
+among the natives.</p>
+
+<p>It was a long time before we could get a sight of
+the girls in the kraals around us. Once, in company
+with Apuleni, we went to his home, and here as
+everywhere we were warmly welcomed by the older
+people and given an opportunity of telling them of
+the Savior, as well as our limited vocabulary would
+allow. While we were sitting there talking to some
+of the older people, Sister Engle said she thought
+there were some girls in a hut near by. I arose to
+investigate. The older people saw the move and
+laughingly told the girls of my approach; but it was
+too late for them to escape. As I reached the door
+I saw five girls in the hut, some of whom were
+nearly grown. Some began to scream and hide their
+faces, and others sat trembling, not daring to look
+up. They appeared as if they were afraid of being
+torn from their home by violence. Two of these
+were sisters of the boy who accompanied us. It
+required much tact and patience to finally gain the
+confidence of these wild children surrounding us,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_286" id="Page_286">[286]</a></span>
+and to help them realize that we would do them no
+harm, but we at last won the day.</p>
+
+<p>During this dry season of 1907 word was also received
+of a threatened native uprising. Our first
+information of this condition of affairs was received
+from some officers who had come from the Transvaal
+and were passing through on their way north
+on a hunting expedition. They said that they did
+not know how serious the difficulty was, except that
+some of the Europeans northeast had been ordered
+into the government camp. The natives around us
+were quiet and law-abiding and gave no indication
+that they were dissatisfied. They themselves were
+not of a warlike nature, and they had in the past
+been harrowed and many of them ruthlessly killed
+by the Matabele, the Barotse, and the Baila, each in
+their turn, and they were now enjoying peace and
+quiet under the beneficent rule of the English. They
+knew that they would gain nothing by rebelling
+against the English, and the only condition that
+would cause them to rise would be fear of their
+powerful neighbors. For this reason we could see
+no cause for fear. They were, however, not ignorant
+of the trouble in the country, and confided to
+David that Lewanika wanted to fight. The powerful
+tribe north of us, the Baila, were probably as
+dissatisfied as any. David at first did not tell us
+what he had heard, for fear of alarming us, and we
+too said nothing to him at once. Later, however,
+he told us and we gave him our information. The
+danger at that time seemed past, and we would
+have allowed the affair to rest; but it was learned
+that our fellow missionaries were uneasy on our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_287" id="Page_287">[287]</a></span>
+account. So we wrote to an official at Kalomo to
+inquire if they anticipated a native uprising. He
+wrote, assuring us that whatever danger there
+might have been, there was no more serious cause
+for alarm.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus288.png" width="600" height="295" alt="Macha Boys and Schoolhouse." title="Macha Boys and Schoolhouse." />
+<span class="caption">Macha Boys and Schoolhouse.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>In September of this year a young man from
+Cape Town came to assist in the work. He was a
+nephew of our friend and benefactress, Mrs. Lewis,
+and had been impressed with the importance of
+pressing on the work into the interior; hence his
+presence at Macha. He suffered so much with fever,
+however, that he concluded it was best to return
+south after a stay of only a few weeks at the mission.</p>
+
+<p>On November 10 our long-looked-for colaborer,
+Mr. Myron Taylor, reached Macha. This was a
+welcome and much-needed addition to our number.
+The new building was ready for occupancy, and
+Brother Taylor entered enthusiastically into the
+work before him. He came just at the opening of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_288" id="Page_288">[288]</a></span>
+the rainy season, and perhaps entered on the work
+with too much vigor; for in the latter part of December
+he was laid low with the dread African
+fever, and for a time his life was despaired of; but
+the Lord raised him up. During that, his first rainy
+season, he had frequent relapses of the fever and
+saw very few well days until the season was at an
+end. He was not, however, discouraged, but continued
+at the work whenever his health permitted.</p>
+
+<p>The boys who came to attend school remained,
+and others also applied for admission, so that by the
+end of this second year there were thirty-two staying
+with us, and they were becoming quite useful
+in the work, and best of all were going on to know
+the Lord, and were formed into an Inquirers' Class.</p>
+
+<p>This second rainy season was in some respects a
+repetition of the first, except that there was more
+land under cultivation, and we ourselves were better
+supplied with fresh vegetables and more nourishing
+food, and Brother Taylor with his rifle could
+furnish us with game. We were at this time becoming
+more familiar with the pests with which
+we had to contend in this tropical Africa. We
+thought we had learned something of the ravages of
+the white ants, or termites, while at Matopo, but the
+experience there was nothing compared to that at
+Macha. This is not in any sense intended as a
+scientific treatise; yet even from a missionary point
+of view one needs to know something of the difficulties
+in the way. One cannot be long in America
+without realizing that the ordinary reader is woefully
+ignorant of some of the most common experiences
+of the Africander, and in nothing is this more<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_289" id="Page_289">[289]</a></span>
+noticeable than in the ravages produced by the
+white ants. The species to be found in Africa is
+unlike that found elsewhere and is much more destructive.
+A knowledge of the presence of these
+pests also seems to help solve some of the characteristics
+of the natives in this section of the country.</p>
+
+<p>These white ants are of various kinds and sizes,
+but they are similar, in that they build great nests
+of clay which extend above the ground from one
+or two to twenty or more feet. These nests are
+known as ant hills, and in this part of the country
+some of them are not unlike hillocks. They are all
+honeycombed within and down deep into the earth,
+and are the homes of the various members of the
+community, consisting of the large, bulky, wormlike
+white queen, an inch or two in length, the savage,
+warlike soldiers, and the small, inoffensive-looking
+workers. There are also winged ones which leave
+the earth in great numbers at the opening of the
+season after the ground has been softened by the
+rain. These soon lose their wings and again enter
+the ground at various places to form new colonies.</p>
+
+<p>The white ants can work only under cover, and
+exposure to light and the sun is generally fatal to
+them, so they build small clay tunnels underneath
+the ground or on top where they desire to work, and
+through these they pass to and fro, carrying particles
+of food to store it away. They prefer dry
+food, such as wood, leather, paper, clothing, straw,
+and vegetation as it is becoming dry, although if
+these articles are not to be had they have no objections
+to attacking growing trees or plants. Many
+trees in our young orchard have been destroyed by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_290" id="Page_290">[290]</a></span>
+their ravages. These ants are to be found all over
+South Africa, but as one approaches the equator
+they are more numerous and destructive and the
+hills are larger.</p>
+
+<p>At Macha, boxes, shoes, clothing, everything had
+to be kept off the ground floor. If this precaution
+was not observed, perhaps in a single night a clay
+coating would be formed around the sole of a shoe
+and it would be greatly damaged. Sometimes they
+would find their way up the leg of a box and begin
+destroying the clothing or articles within. As I
+came out of my room one morning, the noise of the
+sentinels of the ants gave signal to the workers of
+the approach of danger. This led to an examination
+of some bookshelves which were supposed to
+be safe out of the reach of the pests. Wet clay was
+found to be all along the end of the bookcase, and
+the end books on each shelf were partly eaten,
+all the work of one night. Our bedposts had to
+be put on zinc or into old tin cans to keep the
+ants from making their way to the top and soiling
+the bedclothes. Several times they started to build
+an ant hill on the floor of the hut, and one morning
+a small hill of wet clay nearly a foot in height was
+to be seen, the result of one night's labors.</p>
+
+<p>Nor did they confine their ravages to the floor
+and the articles placed on the floor; walls and
+grass roof were full of them. No article could be
+hung on the wall with safety. There was a ceiling
+of muslin in the house, yet one day Sister Engle,
+on going into her room, found an army of white
+ants marching around on the counterpane of her
+bed, having fallen from a broken clay tunnel in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_291" id="Page_291">[291]</a></span>
+roof. In addition to these pests, we were greatly
+annoyed by insects boring into the soft wood which
+formed the rafters. During this season the sound
+made in the quiet hours of the night by these insects
+sawing caused one to think the entire hut was
+alive. The ants would carry their clay tunnels into
+the opening made by the borers and complete the
+work of destruction. For a time the ceiling became
+so heavy with falling sawdust and clay, that it was
+necessary to open it about every two weeks and
+remove the dust, which almost filled a small tub
+each time. Many more incidents might be cited.
+We were forced to admit that, at least during the
+rainy season, a large portion of our time was occupied
+in protecting our huts and goods from the
+ravages of the ants.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus292.png" width="500" height="274" alt="The Last Invitation." title="The Last Invitation." />
+<span class="caption">The Last Invitation.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Their work did not stop with the house. We
+would think that the grain and meal were placed
+high and secure out of their reach, only to find that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_292" id="Page_292">[292]</a></span>
+they had formed a channel and destroyed a lot of
+grain. At first when some boys came for school
+there was no suitable place prepared for their accommodation,
+and they were obliged to lie on the
+floor. They would occasionally come and show
+where the cuticle had been removed from some
+portion of the body during the night. In the garden
+there was also difficulty in protecting the growing
+crops. The cornstalk would be eaten off and fall
+to the ground, where the ants would complete the
+work of destruction; so that from the time corn
+began to be filled until it was ripe, it was generally
+necessary to keep several boys most of the time
+gathering the fallen corn. Continual vigilance was
+needful, or in an unguarded moment something
+about the place would be destroyed.</p>
+
+<p>The varieties of ants in the country are many
+and diverse, but we will mention only one other
+kind, to which we were introduced during the early
+days of the mission. One night some of the boys
+said they could not sleep on account of ants coming
+into their hut. We supposed they referred to large
+black ants, which often came in armies and made a
+raid on white ants to carry them off for food. These
+black ones are very troublesome when disturbed,
+and the boys were told to occupy another hut for
+the remainder of the night. Again the boys spoke
+of being disturbed and showed some small, reddish
+ants with vicious-looking heads, which were marching
+in a straight line through the yard. But these
+looked innocent and little attention was paid to
+the matter. Then one morning a hen and two
+young guinea fowls, confined in a pen, were found<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_293" id="Page_293">[293]</a></span>
+to be dead and covered with these insects. We concluded
+that they had died and the ants were eating
+the carcass, but the boys assured us that the ants
+had killed them. The pen was immediately burnt,
+together with as many of the ants as possible. Another
+night the sheep began to bleat most piteously.
+The lantern was lighted and the boys called to see
+what was the difficulty, and while waiting for the
+boys I approached the pen. Almost instantly
+needles seemed to penetrate my body in various
+places. I gave the lantern to the boys to let out the
+sheep, while Sister Engle and I hastened to the
+house, where she helped to remove the vicious little
+insects. After that experience there was no further
+question in my mind as to whether those ants could
+kill fowls or other animals.</p>
+
+<p>These are called the army ants. Once it required
+two days for an army of them continually on the
+march to pass through our yard. Fortunately we
+have not been troubled much with this variety since
+that time, but in some parts of Africa they are very
+numerous. Human bodies are sometimes thrown
+to them, and even live ones, as a punishment in
+supposed witchcraft.</p>
+
+<p>We had been in correspondence with some of the
+Primitive Methodist missionaries at Nanzela, from
+whom we had purchased books for the school and
+ourselves; and we were eager to visit them and learn
+something of their work. About the 1st of May we
+arranged to make the journey of sixty miles and
+pay them a visit. Brother Taylor was here to take
+charge of the journey, so we took the wagon with
+the ten oxen and a number of schoolboys, as well as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_294" id="Page_294">[294]</a></span>
+David, leaving Gomo in charge of the mission during
+our absence. This was a new and untried road
+in a northwesternly direction, and required four
+day of hard traveling to make it. On the way we
+occasionally had an opportunity of preaching Christ
+to the natives.</p>
+
+<p>The kindly welcome received from Rev. and Mrs.
+Price, who were then at Nanzela, more than repaid
+us for the tediousness of the journey. We spent a
+most delightful four days at their mission and
+learned to know something of our neighbors and
+of the work being accomplished at this oldest station
+in this part of the country. They were working
+among the Baila, and also some Barotse who
+were living in that section of the country. The
+trip, however, proved a most unfortunate one for
+us, as we were informed that we had passed through
+a small district of the tsetse fly on the way. The
+result of this will be given in another chapter.</p>
+
+<p>On account of the presence of these pests, as well
+as for other reasons, a very common method of
+travel and transportation in this part of the country
+is by native carriers. A native will carry fifty
+pounds of goods, so that it requires forty persons to
+transport a ton of goods. This means is employed
+by officials, and it is somewhat more expeditious
+than by wagon. It is often not very satisfactory,
+however, and it is difficult to secure natives who
+are willing to carry, unless they are almost forced
+into service. The wages too, eight cents a day, is
+small, but where the tsetse fly abounds this is the
+only safe method of transportation.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_295" id="Page_295">[295]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VPART2" id="CHAPTER_VPART2">CHAPTER FIVE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Additional Reinforcements. Preparing to
+Build</h3>
+
+
+<p>In June, 1908, we were pleased to receive additional
+reinforcements in the persons of Mr.
+and Mrs. Jesse Wenger, who had lately arrived
+from America and felt called to the work at Macha.
+Accompanying them were Elder and Mrs. Steigerwald,
+who came to pay us a visit and to see about
+the work.</p>
+
+<p>There was now a strong force of missionaries at
+the place, and it was thought that better and more
+permanent buildings should be erected. The mission
+had been in progress nearly two years, and
+David and Gomo had been active both dry seasons
+in erecting buildings&mdash;and they were good buildings
+of their kind. From what has already been
+given, however, of the ravages of the white ants, it
+can easily be seen that such buildings were very
+unsatisfactory and of short duration. To make
+others of the same kind would require the missionaries
+to be continually building.</p>
+
+<p>My opinion in reference to missionaries' houses
+and surroundings had gradually and materially
+undergone a change since I first entered the
+mission field. My firm conviction on entering had
+been that missionaries should be as approachable
+as possible, and that they should endeavor to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_296" id="Page_296">[296]</a></span>
+get on a level with their people; not in their
+dirt and filth, not in their ignorance and degradation,
+but, leaving out these essentially objectionable
+features, they should seek to imitate as
+much as possible Him Who had no certain dwelling-place
+and went about doing good. He became
+one with the people wherever He went, "Made
+Himself of no reputation, and took upon Him the
+form of a servant." He of course is the Great
+Exemplar, after Whom the missionaries, His messengers,
+are to pattern. The true missionary should
+and does esteem it a privilege to endure any necessary
+privation and hardship in the cause of the
+Master Whom he loves and seeks to imitate. Otherwise
+it would be impossible to carry the Gospel
+to the heathen. But our God is a wise God, and
+has promised wisdom to His children and to His
+messengers, which He expects them to use on the
+mission field as well as elsewhere; so that they may
+adapt themselves to their surroundings and do that
+which will best advance His Kingdom.</p>
+
+<p>The missionary goes to his field of labor. He
+builds himself huts of poles, mud, and grass. He
+does this carefully, that he may protect himself from
+the weather, the wild animals, and from the mosquitoes
+which bring fever. He provides his hut
+with furniture, manufactured by his own hand, so
+that it looks quite cozy and comfortable, and the
+poor natives as they look inside may conclude that
+if heaven is no better than this, it is at least worth
+striving for. The missionary himself for the time
+feels quite satisfied and happy in his surroundings<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_297" id="Page_297">[297]</a></span>
+and concludes that the place is good enough for
+anyone.</p>
+
+<p>He opens his door and invites his dear dark
+friends to enter and sit and talk with him&mdash;a privilege
+which they greatly appreciate and the missionary
+also enjoys. Are not these the people for whom
+Christ died? Are not these the poor people to
+whom he is bringing the privileges of the Gospel?
+He loves to embrace every opportunity of getting
+into their hearts, and he feels keenly everything
+which separates and tends to form a barrier between
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Time passes, and the rainy season comes. Perhaps
+the huts become damp and even mouldy in
+places, and gradually, as the ants continue their
+ravages, the walls crack and other difficulties arise.
+He is forced to be continually on his guard to protect
+himself. Mosquitoes enter, and he is incapacitated
+for work, by fever and other sickness. His
+health becomes undermined and his appetite gives
+way. The coarse food of the natives, if he has been
+using it, becomes distasteful and hurtful. Perhaps,
+if there is no way out of the difficulty, his life pays
+the penalty and his work on earth for God and the
+natives is stopped. This is no fancy picture. It
+has been repeated over and over again in this
+great "White Man's Graveyard."</p>
+
+<p>Suppose, however, that by taking plenty of quinine
+and having considerable vitality to start with,
+he survives and continues successfully to combat
+disease; he soon finds that he must build a separate
+hut in which to meet the natives, or his house will
+be overrun with vermin and he cannot live in it.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_298" id="Page_298">[298]</a></span>
+His hut, too, soon becomes a hiding place for snakes,
+rats, and lizards. He may pick up a piece of furniture
+and find a cobra lying beneath it, or go into
+the little kitchen and find a deadly puff adder beneath
+the cooking kettle. Even if he has in building
+kept as near to the natives as possible, they are in
+no haste to get rid of their filth and improve their
+manner of living. They have not yet seen the advantages
+of exerting themselves to that extent,
+unless they are members of the mission family and
+compelled to wash. Even then they may have
+conscientious scruples in reference to the matter,
+as one of our best boys at Matopo did. He was
+frequently remonstrated with for not keeping his
+clothing clean. He said that clean clothing made
+him feel proud.</p>
+
+<p>Again, the missionary soon sees that his hut is
+going to pieces, and he must go over the laborious
+task every two or three years of building another,
+and at the same time constantly fight the ants,
+so that his life is one of long struggle with disease,
+pests, and building. When and how is he to give
+the Gospel? He concludes that he must make
+brick, build a house, and put on an iron roof, that it
+may be better protected from the mosquitoes and
+furnish good rain water. He makes a tank, so
+that he may have good drinking water instead of
+the muddy, disease-laden stuff which comes from
+the river. It will make more work for a time, but
+when completed he sees some result of his labor.</p>
+
+<p>These reasons, any or all of them, are sufficient in
+the eyes of the missionary for building a good,
+substantial house, but there are other reasons, quite<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_299" id="Page_299">[299]</a></span>
+as patent to him, but they may not be to one who
+has never been in his place. The natives like to
+see their missionary build good dwellings, for then
+they think he has come to stay, and because he has
+come to stay and is willing to work and to train the
+natives, he sometimes has a better house than some
+of his white neighbors. And we are loath to think,
+as some affirm, that it is a reproach to be better
+housed, if he himself builds it.</p>
+
+<p>There is another and more subtle reason for a
+good house, and one which the writer could not enter
+into until the last few years. If one has access
+to a town he has an opportunity to see other
+civilized places and has a change of scenery and
+companionship, which is both interesting and beneficial.
+Especially is this so to one who is continually
+surrounded with uncouth barbarism in its many
+forms. When, however, one is far removed from
+all civilized associations and sees nothing that is
+beautiful and uplifting, week after week, month
+after month, year after year; when all this time
+only dirt and squalor meet the eye as he steps off
+his own premises, his range of vision becomes so
+narrowed, his brain so benumbed by the monotony,
+that he feels he can endure it no longer. He is not
+tired of his services for the Master; he is not tired
+of the dark faces surrounding him; but his spiritual
+vision has become so befogged that, as he rises before
+the people to give them the message, he feels that
+he cannot give what he longs to. He cannot even
+take hold of God by faith in prayer as he did, and
+he must get away for a change.</p>
+
+<p>But what has this to do with a good house?<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_300" id="Page_300">[300]</a></span>
+Just this: If one has a good home and pleasant
+surroundings, good and helpful literature and a few
+of the things which minister to the æsthetic as well
+as to the spiritual part of his nature, he has a
+change, at least, in his own home, and when he can
+snatch time, from the many duties which continually
+confront him, for a little quiet, the surroundings are
+pleasing and restful. He is then just that much
+better fitted to cope with the opposite conditions,
+and he can cope with them for a longer time and
+do better work for the Master. On the other hand,
+missionaries are human and make many mistakes,
+and we in the mission field need also to guard
+against the other extreme of spending too much
+time in beautifying our surroundings and making
+ourselves comfortable, to the neglect of that God-given
+message.</p>
+
+<p>Even under the best of surroundings, physically,
+the missionary has enough to contend with. Circumstances
+over which he has no control, difficulties
+which far outweigh any already mentioned,
+meet him on every hand. As Rev. Stewart, of
+China, says, "'Agonia,' that word so often on St.
+Paul's lips&mdash;what did it mean? Did it not just
+mean the thousand wearinesses, and deeper, the
+stirrings, the travailings, the bitter disappointments,
+the deaths oft of a missionary's life?"</p>
+
+<p>The natives often are so indifferent, so disinclined
+to exert themselves, that, after months and
+years of weary, persistent labor among them, the
+missionary often feels that little is accomplished.
+He dare build hopes on none but God, and must
+accept seeming success or defeat as alike from Him.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_301" id="Page_301">[301]</a></span>
+This continual drain on his system is quite sufficient,
+without having to combat with poor dwellings,
+poor food, and unhealthful surroundings.</p>
+
+<p>After the Brethren came, they concluded to start
+at once to make the preparations for building.
+Elder Steigerwald had had experience in this line
+of work, so he generously offered to start the rest
+in brickmaking. After a few weeks' visit he and
+Sister Steigerwald returned home and Sister Engle
+decided to accompany them for a change. David
+and Gomo also had been absent from their people
+for two years and wished to return, the former for
+a visit and the latter, perhaps permanently. We
+were very sorry to see all these leave at once, even
+for a few months, and especially David, whose assistance
+in the language and in interpretation was
+greatly needed.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus303a.png" width="600" height="407" alt="Making Brick at Macha." title="Making Brick at Macha." />
+<span class="caption">Making Brick at Macha.</span>
+</div>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_302" id="Page_302"></a>
+<img src="images/illus303b.png" width="600" height="424" alt="Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers." title="Brick Kiln." />
+<span class="caption">Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The Brethren Taylor and Wenger, with the assistance
+of the schoolboys and some other natives,
+moulded and burnt a large kiln of brick. Brother
+Taylor attended to the moulding and Brother
+Wenger to building the kiln. This gave the boys
+training in another line of industrial work, and at
+the end of about six weeks a lot of excellent brick
+were ready for building. Unfortunately there was
+no money on hand to build a house, for the Board
+had not been informed of our needs in this respect,
+since brickmaking had been undertaken rather suddenly.
+It was therefore necessary to postpone
+building a house until the next dry season. Brother
+Wenger, however, erected two small brick buildings,
+with thatched roofs. One was for grinding and storing
+grain, and the other a two-roomed cottage. In
+<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_303" id="Page_303">[303]</a></span>the latter a room was fitted up for the occupancy of
+himself and wife, so that we were prepared for another
+rainy season.</p>
+
+<p>One thing which was a serious handicap in the
+building and work that season was the condition of
+the oxen. After our return from Nanzela, in May,
+the oxen gave no indication of being bitten by the
+tsetse fly. Nearly a month later they were driven
+to Kalomo, a distance of about forty-five miles, and
+brought out a heavy load of goods on the arrival of
+our colaborers. They were also made use of in
+hauling sand for brickmaking; and in July, when
+Brother Steigerwalds returned home, they were
+again driven to the station. This time they made
+use of a new road and went east to Choma Station,
+a distance of only about thirty-six miles. By this
+time the oxen were showing signs of being bitten,
+and as there was no cure for them, they gradually
+became weaker and died, one by one, until we had
+lost nine, the last ones not dying until about six
+months after they were bitten. The fly injects a
+parasite into the blood, which gradually absorbs the
+red corpuscles, hence the lingering death.</p>
+
+<p>It was a serious loss to the mission at the time, as
+they had been in use almost constantly in farming,
+hauling, and bringing out supplies. In the Syracuse
+plow it was necessary to use all ten of the oxen in
+this heavy clay soil, and also in hauling the wagon.</p>
+
+<p>We still had a few, but there was not
+sufficient money on hand to purchase others at
+once. With eight ill-matched oxen, Brother Taylor
+undertook to go to Choma in November for the
+purpose of bringing out a six months' supply of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_304" id="Page_304">[304]</a></span>
+goods and provisions, which had been sent up from
+Bulawayo. He took along five of the largest schoolboys
+to assist in carrying the goods across the
+bridgeless rivers. To add to the difficulty of the
+trip, grass was scarce at that season of the year,
+so that there was little food for the oxen. A little
+rain also fell while he was away and made the road
+muddy.</p>
+
+<p>On returning with the load he was able to get
+within twelve miles of home when the oxen could
+go no farther. He sent four of the boys each with a
+load of goods to the mission, and a call for help.
+Several native men and about twenty schoolboys
+were sent to his assistance, and after they reached
+the wagon, Brother Taylor concluded to endeavor
+to come a little nearer home before resting for the
+night. Each of the natives carried a load, and he
+himself carried one hundred pounds of flour and
+drove the oxen. They came about two and one-half
+miles farther and then camped for the night. A
+fire was kindled, but as the night was dark and
+misty the fire burned low. The boys lay around
+this and Brother Taylor on the open wagon. He
+was aroused several times during the night by a
+disturbance among the oxen. Thinking it was
+caused by one of the new oxen which had given him
+some trouble, he arose at three different times during
+the latter part of the night to quiet them, but
+the darkness was too great for him to see what was
+the trouble. The last time it was dawning a little
+in the east, and he thought he discerned the form
+of an animal moving toward an ant hill in the
+vicinity. The boys were aroused and soon had a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_305" id="Page_305">[305]</a></span>
+fire; and as the morning came they discovered by
+the spoors that two lions had passed along within
+a few feet of where the boys lay and had gored one
+of the oxen during the night. These were what
+Brother Taylor had been trying to chase. The
+reader can imagine the thankfulness of all of them,
+as well as of ourselves, when it was discovered how
+wonderfully the Lord had preserved them all from
+harm. We rejoiced when the goods as well as
+Brother Taylor and the boys were all safely at
+home, but the heavy wagon had to remain for a
+time on the veldt before it could be brought to the
+mission.</p>
+
+<p>When the news of the misfortune to the oxen
+reached America the Lord inspired some of His
+children to send special donations for the purchase
+of others, and even before an account of the trouble
+had reached there some had heard of the need by
+way of the Throne and had sent money.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_306" id="Page_306">[306]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIPART2" id="CHAPTER_VIPART2">CHAPTER SIX</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Evangelistic and Other Labors</h3>
+
+
+<p>During this dry season the spiritual part of
+the work, together with school and kraal-visiting,
+was not neglected, even though
+most of those who could speak the language were
+away.</p>
+
+<p>There were thirty-two boys in school, and they
+were doing good work. A translation of the Gospel
+of St. Mark had been printed by Rev. Smith, and
+an Ila hymn book by Rev. Chapman, of the same
+mission, and these were both very useful in our
+work. After our boys had finished the Ila books,
+we concluded to allow them to continue the Scriptures
+in the Zulu Testament, as it is always easier
+for the natives to pass from one native language
+into another than from English into their language.
+We found later that this use of the Zulu Testament
+proved very satisfactory, both to ourselves and the
+boys. Since we were familiar with that language,
+and they readily acquired it, their knowledge was
+of great assistance to us in translating portions of
+the Scripture into their tongue, and they were soon
+capable of interpreting for Elder Steigerwald and
+others who came to us from Southern Rhodesia.
+Here, as at Matopo, every day and all the day were
+the Scriptures studied and Christ held up, and
+morning, noon, and night we met in worship and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_307" id="Page_307">[307]</a></span>
+explanation of the Bible. The great aim, both in
+school and out, was to produce sincere and ripe
+Christians, who should become teachers and evangelists
+of their people.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus308.png" width="600" height="394" alt="Macha Mission Dwelling House." title="Macha Mission Dwelling House." />
+<span class="caption">Macha Mission Dwelling House.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Other studies were gradually introduced. Arithmetic
+seems to be always a difficult study for most
+of them, but some of them compared very favorably
+in that branch with others whom we had instructed.
+They had their own peculiar way at first of announcing
+whether their problems were correct or
+not. If they were correct the pupils would answer
+"<i>Wa pona</i>" (it is alive), and if incorrect they
+would say "<i>Wa fwa</i>" (it is dead). Although they
+sat side by side in the schoolroom and could easily
+look on the slates of their neighbors, they were
+generally very honest and independent in their work
+and did not attempt to copy.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_308" id="Page_308">[308]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>English also was introduced after they could
+read understandingly their own language. The
+opportunity of learning English is a privilege which
+all natives covet, as it seems to be more important
+in their eyes and more European. In some respects
+this <i>importance</i> is one of the objectionable features
+about teaching it. Then too the native often is dull
+in learning it, but we need interpreters, and the
+value intellectually of this and arithmetic and kindred
+studies is not to be despised. English often
+aids the native in securing better positions with
+better pay when he goes to work among the Europeans;
+for go, at least for a while, he will. Some
+Europeans prefer natives who can speak and understand
+a little English. On the other hand, some
+white men, who have themselves a little knowledge
+of the native tongue, prefer, for their own purpose,
+that natives do not understand English. They
+want the native to understand only enough to go
+at their bidding and "keep his place," which is
+somewhat similar in their eyes with the lower order
+of animals. This class is forever a foe to the missionary
+and to the education and christianization of
+the natives. If one who has to some extent been
+educated, goes out into the centers of civilization
+and there, swallowed in the maelstrom of vice
+which surrounds him, imitates his new white teachers,
+they will point to him and say, "Yes, there is
+one of your mission boys. That is what missionary
+work does." Many a well-meaning native, who
+was making a fair progress toward Christian life,
+can trace his downfall to such teachers. If that
+class of Europeans would remain at the centers of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_309" id="Page_309">[309]</a></span>
+civilization, it would still be more tolerable for the
+missionary, but often the towns are too moral for
+them, and they seek to go into the region of raw
+natives. As one glibly remarked, "When it becomes
+too civilized for me here, I'll go farther inland."</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Naylor, who has had an opportunity of
+studying at first hand the work all over Africa,
+says, "In Africa conscienceless trade, social vice,
+race hatred, and religious intolerance have freer
+scope because so far removed from the restraining
+influence of Christian public sentiment."</p>
+
+<p>This seeming digression from the subject can be
+excused only on the ground that it is one of the
+most difficult and perplexing problems the missionary
+has to face, and every one coming into the
+country in such a capacity is certain to meet it in
+one form or another. We are pleased to add, however,
+that the missionary also finds Europeans who
+are generous and helpful and favorable to the work;
+and the number of this class is increasing, as the
+aim of the missionary and the results of his efforts
+are more clearly understood.</p>
+
+<p>The attendance at church services was constantly
+increasing, and those present on Sunday sometimes
+reached 140 in number. Kraal-visiting also
+was carried on as opportunity afforded. Before
+Sister Engle left we had made a visit to Mianda,
+the home of Tom and Jim and of several other of
+our boys. This was about seven miles from Macha
+and too far for some of the older people to walk to
+services. As the boys were still with us, those in
+the kraal had not yet received any light. They appeared<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_310" id="Page_310">[310]</a></span>
+to be much pleased to see us, but when we
+attempted to point them to the Savior they seemed
+so dark and so unable to grasp spiritual things.
+This was especially true of Tom's mother, who sat
+in a little dark hut and was afflicted with a very
+sore eye. She had such a hopeless expression on
+her face, that the picture haunted us for many days
+afterwards.</p>
+
+<p>When Tom, who had accepted the Light as far as
+he knew, had been at the mission fifteen months,
+he desired to return home, and did so. A few
+months after he had returned to his home, one
+day, in company with two of the schoolboys, I
+went about four miles from the mission to visit
+some of the people. Quite unexpectedly we came
+upon Tom's mother in one of the huts. She was
+there visiting some of her friends. As usual, I
+began telling her of Jesus, and her face brightened
+immediately as she exclaimed:</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, yes! Siwesi [Tom] told me that. He said
+we should not worship the spirits any more; we
+should only worship God above [pointing upward].
+He reads from his Book and sings and prays. I
+enjoy hearing of those things." This woman had
+never been at the mission, and this was the first
+indication, apart from the boys staying with us,
+that we had of Light entering the home. Her eagerness
+and evident sincerity showed plainly that she
+believed and was accepting the truth, and that the
+Light was coming through one of the schoolboys.
+The contrast between this picture and the first sight
+of this woman was so marked, and the joy of realizing
+that a ray of Light was entering one home at<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_311" id="Page_311">[311]</a></span>
+least, was so great, that as I retraced my steps
+homeward I kept saying to myself, "It pays, it
+pays."</p>
+
+<p>Brother Taylor felt especially called to spend his
+time in evangelistic work among the villages, and
+whenever he could snatch time from other duties
+pressing upon him he went out among the people,
+and in this manner a number of villages were visited.</p>
+
+<p>Many of the people at this time were destitute
+of food, as the previous season had not produced
+good crops. Many of them were living on fruits,
+roots, and plants, and much sickness was the result.
+With our large family, and only a moderate
+supply of grain, we were unable to give them much
+assistance, but we did what we could. Had they
+been willing to bring their small children to us we
+would have cared for them until other food was
+grown. One mother did bring her little boy, Halikumba,
+who was four or five years of age and nearly
+starved. He enjoyed his new home so much, and
+the abundance of food it supplied, that he would
+run and hide if he saw his mother come for fear
+she would take him away. He was such a little
+mite of humanity that we were afraid of placing
+him in the huts with the other boys, and for a time
+cared for him in the house.</p>
+
+<p>David returned to Macha in January, 1909, ready
+to enter again with enthusiasm into the work, and
+Brother Taylor concluded that the way was now
+opened for him to spend additional time in evangelistic
+labor, so he decided to take several boys
+and spend some time among the Baila north of us.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_312" id="Page_312">[312]</a></span>
+This is a bold and warlike tribe, living in large
+villages, and much addicted to drink, dancing, and
+carousals. Rows, and even murders, are not infrequent
+among them, and it required some courage
+to venture into their territory. The Lord gave the
+Brother open doors, however, and some attentive
+listeners, and we believe seed was sown that will
+bear fruit in eternity.</p>
+
+<p>He had some difficulties to encounter, which were
+not so pleasant. It is a low, flat country; and as
+he was there in the midst of the rainy season, heavy
+rains flooded the country on all sides, so that he
+was frequently obliged to wade the water in going
+from one village to another. After two months of
+arduous labor, his health gave way and he was
+carried back sick to the mission. It required some
+time before he fully recovered from the exposure
+and hardships of the trip.</p>
+
+<p>These experiences are not pleasant, but they are
+incidental to the country, and every missionary
+feels that he should be ready at all times to endure
+for Christ's sake and the salvation of souls what
+men are going through every day for money or a
+home.</p>
+
+<p>Brother Wenger also had been suffering greatly
+in health while at the mission, both from nervous
+disorders and from fever. Notwithstanding this, he
+decided to begin building a house, since the rains
+were about over and funds had been received for
+this purpose. David also was ready to help in the
+work. With the assistance of the boys they brought
+together stones and began the foundation. Near
+the mission there were very few building stones,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_313" id="Page_313">[313]</a></span>
+but this need had been supplied in a rather unexpected
+manner. The brethren had undertaken to
+dig a well the previous season, but on coming into
+contact with a great deal of stone, which necessitated
+blasting, they went down only forty-five feet
+and finally concluded the task was useless. The
+only beneficial result of their labors was the stones
+which had been taken out of the well, and which
+furnished a large part of the material for the foundation
+of the house.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus314.png" width="500" height="253" alt="Eld. Steigerwald and Mr. Doner with Carriers
+on Their Trip North of Macha." title="With Carriers
+on Their Trip North" />
+<span class="caption">Eld. Steigerwald and Mr. Doner with Carriers
+on Their Trip North of Macha.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Brother Wenger laid the foundation of a house
+41 x 16 feet, with a wing 18 x 10 feet, and began
+work on the brick. Unfortunately, while this was
+in progress, his health gave way repeatedly, and he
+and Sister Wenger concluded that it was advisable
+for them to leave for Bulawayo and finally for
+America, and David continued to work at the house.
+Brother Taylor had sufficiently recovered from his
+illness by this time to be able to take the Wengers<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_314" id="Page_314">[314]</a></span>
+to the station. He then waited there a few days
+for the train from the south, and brought back with
+him Elder Steigerwald, Mr. Doner, Miss Engle, and
+Gomo, all of whom we were expecting.</p>
+
+<p>He was absent from the mission eight days, and
+during that time I had an attack of fever and was
+obliged to be in bed for a week. This was my first
+attack, and as it was quite severe, it enabled me to
+sympathize better with those who had been sick
+so much. We were very glad to welcome Sister
+Engle and the rest back to work. The two brethren
+from Bulawayo were on a tour of exploration north,
+but they generously decided to stay and assist
+Brother Taylor to finish the brick work of the new
+house. This timely assistance was greatly appreciated
+by us all, and that part of the building was
+completed in two weeks, after which they proceeded
+north.</p>
+
+<p>The special object of their trip was to look at a
+location north of the Kafue River, where a missionary
+had died not long before. This missionary had
+started a work in this unhealthy region, and his life
+had paid the penalty. Some friends of his, notably
+Mrs. Lewis, of Cape Town, had desired our people
+to examine the place, and, if thought advisable, to
+continue the work, and Brother Doner was willing
+to do this if they concluded that the opening was a
+good one.</p>
+
+<p>They made the journey on foot, accompanied by
+Matshuba and native carriers from the vicinity of
+Macha. They passed through the very heart of
+the territory occupied by the wild Baila, and visited
+the new station at Kasenga, which had just been<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_315" id="Page_315">[315]</a></span>
+opened by Rev. Smith. He and his heroic wife had
+started this station in the heart of the Baila country
+and in an unhealthful locality, not considering
+their lives dear unto themselves, only that they
+might take the Gospel to these people and continue
+the translation of the New Testament, which
+Mr. Smith had already begun.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 507px;">
+<img src="images/illus316.png" width="507" height="274" alt="Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout." title="Crossing the Kafue River." />
+<span class="caption">Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Near this place the brethren crossed the broad
+Kafue River and proceeded in a northwesternly direction
+toward the railroad. They found the mission
+station and the place where the missionary had
+died, and heard some of the children sing a hymn
+which the missionary had taught them. They were
+not very well satisfied, however, with the location,
+and returned to Macha by a different route. They
+traveled on foot a distance of perhaps 250 miles,
+and were absent from Macha a month. They could
+not understand the language and had some trying
+experiences from wild animals and wilder men, but<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_316" id="Page_316">[316]</a></span>
+the Lord graciously preserved them from all harm.
+They then returned to Bulawayo to continue their
+labors.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime Brother Taylor, with the aid of
+the native brethren, was progressing very satisfactorily
+with the house. It contained four fair-sized
+rooms and a pantry, and had a broad veranda
+on three sides to protect the walls from deterioration
+by sun and rain. These walls were twelve feet
+high, with a drop-ceiling of muslin two feet below
+the eaves, to serve as a protection from the fierce
+rays of the sun and to furnish an air chamber. On
+top of the foundation and underneath the brick walls
+were placed strips of zinc, soldered together, to
+prevent the white ants from forcing their way
+through into the walls and thence onto the timbers
+of the roof. The floors were of earth, pounded hard
+and well tarred to keep out the ants. The large
+glass windows were quite a relief from the small
+holes in the old house. Later the windows and the
+greater part of the veranda were screened. The
+house was in every way most satisfactory, except
+that it was not quite proof against the white ants.
+Cement floors and steel ceilings would have been
+preferable, but the cost was prohibitive.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_317" id="Page_317"></a>
+<img src="images/illus318.png" width="600" height="346" alt="Batonga Chiefs and Headmen." title="Batonga Chiefs and Headmen." />
+<span class="caption">Batonga Chiefs and Headmen.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Sister Engle's return gave us an opportunity of
+continuing the kraal-visiting, and we made use of
+it in gaining an entrance into other homes. At Kabanzi
+village, about nine miles away, services had
+been held more or less regularly ever since the
+establishment of the mission, and Sister Engle and
+I decided to take the tent and spend a week at this
+place and hold some Gospel services. Gomo and a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_318" id="Page_318">[318]</a></span>
+number of the boys accompanied us and built a hut
+for the use of those coming here to conduct services.
+This week spent among the people was a
+most delightful one, and beneficial physically, especially
+to myself, since I was feeling the effects of
+my three years' stay in this climate. The people
+attended the services well, and seemed greatly interested
+as they sat around the campfire and listened
+to the Message.</p>
+
+<p>In other homes too there was beginning to be a
+change, for the girls were coming out of their seclusion
+and listening to the old, old Story, and some
+were even venturing to the mission on Sunday.
+Some of the older people also appeared interested,
+and made a show at least of desiring to be Christians.</p>
+
+<p>This does not imply that the kraals around us
+were fast accepting the Gospel as a result of the
+three years' labor among them. No, the devil was
+plying his trade at our very doors. Almost nightly
+one could hear the tomtoms beaten in connection
+with their worship, or as an accompaniment in their
+immoral dances; for none of their worship was
+omitted by the older ones, at least in their homes.
+The missionary work was just begun, and perhaps
+none of the present workers would live to see the
+day when these things would cease in the villages.
+The false religions and customs which have been
+so deeply imbedded for centuries would require
+patient, consecrated labor for years, and even generations,
+to uproot. One must be willing to go on,
+day by day, although he may see little or no fruit<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_319" id="Page_319">[319]</a></span>
+of his labors, knowing that the Great Husbandman
+will care for the seed sown.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus320.png" width="500" height="394" alt="First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native
+Congregation Not Visible." title="First Baptismal Scene at Macha." />
+<span class="caption">First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native
+Congregation Not Visible.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The work thus far, however, had not been without
+its visible fruits, as the stability of some of our
+boys gave ample testimony. The number staying
+at the mission had now grown to forty. These were
+some of the called-out ones from the various kraals
+about us. Each had sent its quota, and although
+some had come and gone, the great majority stayed
+on from year to year. As the Light came to them
+they came and confessed their sins, forsook their
+old life and accepted Christ as their Savior, showing
+by their lives that they were His. Some of
+these were about grown; others were still quite
+young, but we hoped to see the day when some of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_320" id="Page_320">[320]</a></span>
+them would become teachers and evangelists of
+their people.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus321.png" width="500" height="386" alt="Wedding Dinner at Macha." title="Wedding Dinner at Macha." />
+<span class="caption">Wedding Dinner at Macha.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Word had been received that Elders J. N. Engle
+and J. Sheets were to be sent out by the Mission
+Board to visit the various stations and report on
+the progress of the work. In November, 1909, just
+after we had moved into the new house, they, together
+with Elder Steigerwald, came to pay us the
+long-looked-for visit. Their visit was greatly enjoyed
+and we believe was a blessing to the work of
+the Lord. To Brother Sheets the boys gave the
+name "Happy," no doubt because he frequently
+used the word and also showed it in his manner.
+Two important events occurred during their stay,
+which deserve special mention.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_321" id="Page_321">[321]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The first was the marriage, on November 4, of
+Mr. Taylor and Miss Adda Engle. The natives
+were invited to this ceremony, and about 350 accepted
+the invitation. Several chiefs came with
+their people and arranged themselves in groups,
+eager to see what a Christian wedding was like.
+The marriage ceremony was performed by Bishop
+Engle, who was a son of the first bishop to Matopo
+Mission, and also a cousin of the bride. Bishop
+Steigerwald delivered an excellent and instructive
+discourse to the natives on the importance of the
+occasion and the tenets of Christian marriage. This
+was interpreted into the vernacular by David and
+was listened to most attentively by the natives present.
+It was their first opportunity of learning this
+phase of Christianity, and it was an important event
+from a missionary standpoint. Christian marriage
+and the principles it stands for generally require a
+long time for inculcation into the hearts and lives
+of at least the older natives, but many of the younger
+ones very readily accept it, as the many Christian
+marriages performed at our older stations testify.</p>
+
+<p>At the close of the ceremony, and after the missionaries
+and boys had offered their congratulations,
+the rest of the natives congratulated in their own
+way, which was by the clapping of hands. Some
+also began cheering with the mouth, but this demonstration
+was checked. Brother Taylor had arranged
+to give them a feast of beef and porridge,
+and this they greatly enjoyed, as it is to some the
+great aim of life; namely, to have plenty to eat.</p>
+
+<p>The second important event was the occasion of
+the first baptism at Macha, in which ten of our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_322" id="Page_322">[322]</a></span>
+boys were baptized by Brother Steigerwald in the
+Macha River, and received into Church fellowship,
+thus showing to their heathen neighbors that they
+had forsaken their old lives. A beautiful feature
+of this was that some of the parents and older ones
+met them as they came out of the water and seemed
+to rejoice with them in their new life. There were
+others who were eager to take the step, but it was
+thought they had not yet sufficiently counted the
+cost.</p>
+
+<p>We then had the privilege of surrounding the
+table of the Lord together with these who had been
+so lately snatched from heathen darkness. These
+were the first fruits of Macha and reminded one of
+Professor Drummond's experience in Nyassaland.
+He says: "I cherish no more sacred memory of
+my life than that of a communion service in the
+little Bandawe Church, when the sacramental cup
+was handed to me by the bare black arm of a native
+communicant&mdash;a communicant whose life, tested
+afterwards in many an hour of trial with me on the
+Tanganyika Plateau, gave him perhaps a better
+right to be there than any of us."</p>
+
+<p>The missionary too is often made to feel, as he
+sees some of these humble, black followers of the
+Lord, and thinks how far they have come, and how
+steadfast the lives of many of them prove to be,
+that He Who sees and tests all hearts may, with
+Mr. Drummond, conclude that they have a better
+right to sit around the table of the Lord than any
+of us.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_323" id="Page_323">[323]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIIPART2" id="CHAPTER_VIIPART2">CHAPTER SEVEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Other Missionary Experiences</h3>
+
+
+<p>The experiences of a missionary are so many
+and so diverse that nothing should surprise
+him. To give these experiences, with too
+distinct a line of demarcation, would not place the
+work in its proper setting, for they often come piling
+one upon the other and cannot be separated.</p>
+
+<p>I had now been north of the Zambezi nearly three
+and one-half years, and was in need of a change, so
+when the delegation from America left I also went
+along to the station. Brother and Sister Taylor accompanied
+us to Choma Station on a little wedding
+trip, and then returned to carry on the work at
+Macha, while David took charge of the school.
+Elders Engle and Steigerwald went north on an
+exploring trip as far as Broken Hill. Brother
+Sheets went to Bulawayo and I to Natal.</p>
+
+<p>On the way south an accident occurred which
+was quite unusual, even for this animal-ridden
+country. After the train had passed the Zambezi
+River and Wankie Coal Fields, in the evening about
+eight o'clock there was a lunge in the train and a
+lady in the same compartment with myself exclaimed,
+"There must be an accident of some kind."
+The train soon came to a sudden stop, and it was
+evident that something had happened. People began
+running about in the darkness, a large bonfire<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_324" id="Page_324">[324]</a></span>
+was soon built near the front of the train, a bulky
+form was visible, and word came back that we had
+struck an elephant. Great excitement prevailed.
+Gomo also was on the train, returning to his home,
+and he came back to our compartment and said,
+"Come and see the elephant. I'll take care of you."</p>
+
+<p>I went forward with him and found a huge elephant
+lying beside the train. Its two hind feet were
+crushed, as the engine, tender, and service car had
+passed over them; otherwise it was unhurt, and at
+times made violent efforts to stand upon its front
+feet. At such times the crowd of people would
+suddenly take flight, to be out of harm's way, and a
+box-car near by was in danger of being demolished.
+No one on the train was supplied with a large rifle,
+suitable for elephant hunting, but small ones kept
+up a lively fire, until perhaps three dozen were
+emptied into the huge bulk before it succumbed.</p>
+
+<p>The engine had been derailed by the violence of
+the shock, and it would require some time before
+we could proceed. Judging from the spoor it was
+evident that the elephant was one of those large
+ones that roam the forests alone, and it had run
+quite a distance on the track before the engine
+struck it. It was an immense animal, and the large
+ears resembled a cape lying back over the shoulders.</p>
+
+<p>There were a number of natives on the train, who
+were going down to work in the mines about Bulawayo,
+and they wished to begin at once on the feast
+of meat before them, but the authorities thought it
+best to put them at working the large jacks used in
+moving the engine back on the rails. All night long
+bright fires of logs were kept burning to light up<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_325" id="Page_325">[325]</a></span>
+the scene and work. The engine finally was in
+place, and the natives eagerly hastened to cut out
+large pieces of elephant meat and to roast it over
+the great beds of coal left from the campfires of
+the night. Soon, however, the train began to move,
+just twelve hours from the time of stopping, and
+the natives, with their raw or half-cooked meat, hastened
+to enter their car, and we moved on, having
+had a share in one of the most exciting railroad
+trips of the season. The tusks of this elephant finally
+found their way into the Bulawayo Museum.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus326.png" width="500" height="386" alt="The Elephant That Derailed the Train." title="The Elephant That Derailed the Train." />
+<span class="caption">The Elephant That Derailed the Train.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The tusks of the African elephant often are quite
+large and heavy. I once saw in a European home
+three pairs of tusks from elephants lately killed by
+a young farmer. Of one pair of tusks each was<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_326" id="Page_326">[326]</a></span>
+five feet long, eighteen inches in diameter; one
+weighed one hundred pounds and the other five
+pounds less. We are informed, however, that some
+have tusks still much larger than these.</p>
+
+<p>It is unnecessary to give the details of this, our
+second trip south to Natal and Johannesburg, and
+my visit to our mission stations in the Matopos have
+already been mentioned. I was absent six months
+and felt thoroughly rested and ready for the work
+again. On my return to Bulawayo, however, I
+learned the sad news that the native who had come
+south on the train at the same time as myself had,
+since he was at home, fallen into sin. We were all
+deeply grieved over this, and he confessed and
+wept over his condition, but appeared discouraged
+and unable to take hold of the Lord by faith for
+pardon and cleansing. There were several others in
+his home who had once confessed Christ and had
+backslidden, and they no doubt had their influence
+over him. The Lord is still able to redeem him,
+and may he have our prayers. Such are some of
+the heavy burdens the missionaries have to bear.</p>
+
+<p>On my return in June, 1910, Misses Mary Heisey
+and Elizabeth Engle accompanied me to Macha to
+pay a visit to that place. Brother Taylor met us at
+the station and conveyed us to the mission, where
+we were greeted by a crowd of boys and five girls,
+who had joined the mission family, with the clapping
+of hands and the firing of a rifle. We rejoiced
+that we could again return to our field of labor.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_327" id="Page_327"></a>
+<img src="images/illus328.png" width="600" height="340" alt="Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910." title="Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910." />
+<span class="caption">Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>In the new house and improved surroundings every
+one had been well and the work had been moving
+forward in all its departments under the efficient<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_328" id="Page_328">[328]</a></span>
+management of Brother and Sister Taylor.
+Not only had these girls come to stay at the mission,
+but David had prevailed upon a number to attend
+day-school, at least part of the time. Sister Taylor,
+in addition to her many other duties, had formed all
+these girls into a sewing-class and was endeavoring
+to teach them to make garments for themselves.
+This was the first opportunity that had been given
+of instructing girls in sewing, and she had made
+remarkable progress also in instructing them in
+their work about the house.</p>
+
+<p>Naturally they do not know what cleanliness is,
+either about their person or in their homes. They
+seldom wash, they go half-clad, and smear their
+bodies with paint and grease, and often let the dogs
+lick clean the few dishes or pots which they possess.
+If their hands are wet or dirty, the posts of the
+veranda, blocks of wood, or floors are used as towels
+to wipe on. They see no reason for continually
+washing a lot of dishes, sweeping floors, and keeping
+the house in order; and they open their eyes in
+astonishment to see white sheets and tablecloths
+put into the water to be washed. The few articles
+of clothing to be seen in their homes are generally
+so thickly coated with grease and dirt as often to
+render it impossible to distinguish the color. Many
+times they do not have any soap, and even if they
+do have, they object to washing their clothing for
+fear it will wear out. And yet these young girls,
+reared in such homes had, in these few months,
+made rapid progress and were becoming quite proficient
+in assisting with some of the work of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_329" id="Page_329">[329]</a></span>
+kitchen. Sister Taylor's great patience in teaching
+them was bearing fruit.</p>
+
+<p>Brother Taylor had, in connection with his other
+duties, made a large galvanized iron tank to hold
+rain water. This was large enough for 1,700 gallons
+of water, and was greatly needed, as the river
+water which we were obliged to use was very muddy
+part of the year. He had always maintained that
+he was no mechanic, but another missionary, Rev.
+Kerswell, who had had experience in mechanical
+work, said on seeing this tank, "Mr. Taylor, you
+say that you are no mechanic; but if you made this,
+you are one; for no one but a mechanic could perform
+such a piece of work."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_330" id="Page_330"></a>
+<img src="images/illus331.png" width="600" height="352" alt="Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill." title="Macha Wagon and Oxen" />
+<span class="caption">Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>While the sisters were with us Brother Taylor
+and wife arranged to take them on a trip north, so
+that they might have an opportunity of seeing something
+of the country and the natives. For this purpose
+the wagon was again fitted up with the tent
+and camping outfit and the ten oxen inspanned. A
+number of the schoolboys were permitted to accompany
+them for a holiday, but the regular driver for
+the wagon did not go along. They spent some time
+at the two large villages of Kabanzi and Simeoba,
+holding services and conversing with the natives,
+and then proceeded toward a village farther north.
+The grass was long, the road new, and darkness
+was coming on when they approached the village.
+As frequently happens near a village, there was a
+large opening in the ground from which clay had
+been taken to plaster the huts. This was partly
+hidden by the long grass, and had not been noticed
+in the gathering darkness. Brother Taylor had<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_331" id="Page_331">[331]</a></span>
+gone in advance to look out a place for camping,
+and some of the boys were driving. The wheels of
+one side of the wagon went down suddenly into the
+excavation and the wagon was overturned, the tent
+being under the heavy wagon. The accident might
+have been very serious for the women, but fortunately
+there were two large boxes in the wagon and
+these prevented the weight of the wagon from resting
+on them and they escaped without any serious
+injury, but the tent was of course ruined. Brother
+Taylor said that, as he hastened to the wagon, he
+heard a boy on the rear end of the wagon yelling
+lustily; so he felt satisfied that that one was not
+dead, and he turned his first attention to those who
+were making no noise.</p>
+
+<p>When the sisters returned to their fields of labor,
+David again returned home, this time to be married
+and bring back a wife from Mapani Station.</p>
+
+<p>The spiritual condition of the pupils continued
+excellent. There was a spirit of inquiry among
+them and a searching after God at times, as the Spirit
+was poured out upon them. Some prayed through
+to victory and a definite knowledge of sins forgiven.
+Those who had been with us longer were instrumental
+in bringing the newer ones to seek pardon.
+The spirit among them was such that any one who
+did not care to be a Christian generally did not remain
+long at the mission. At this time also we were
+favored with special donations and enabled to equip
+the school better and give more attention toward
+the training of teachers.</p>
+
+<p>It will be remembered that one of the special
+needs was a translation of the Scriptures into the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_332" id="Page_332">[332]</a></span>
+language of the people. The books already in use,
+prepared by Rev. Smith, were in the Ila language.
+This was sufficiently allied to the Tonga for use at
+Macha; and it is always an advantage in the mission
+field to unify the languages as much as possible, so
+as to reduce rather than increase the number of
+languages.</p>
+
+<p>St. Mark was already in print, and Mr. Smith,
+together with some of his colleagues, was putting
+forth great efforts to translate the entire New Testament
+into Ila. At their urgent request I consented to
+be on the revision committee, for they desired to
+make the translation as intelligible as possible to the
+Batonga, so that it could be used all over Northwestern
+Rhodesia, with the exception of among the
+Barotse, where the Suto language was in use. Matthew
+was soon in print, and the entire New Testament
+is at present in the hands of the publishers.
+The translators deserve much praise for their laborious
+task and the creditable manner in which they
+have performed the much-needed translation. The
+Word cannot be properly disseminated among the
+people unless the pupils have it in their own language
+as they go out among the villages to teach.</p>
+
+<p>Placing native teachers in their homes seems to
+be the best method of reaching the majority of the
+people, and especially the girls; and some of the
+pupils were sufficiently advanced to begin teaching,
+yet they were somewhat young to go out into their
+dark, dark homes and stand alone for God. Notwithstanding
+this, before the end of 1910 several
+schools were opened in the nearest villages, and the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_333" id="Page_333">[333]</a></span>
+teachers boarded at the mission and went back and
+forth to teach.</p>
+
+<p>On Christmas week of this year a sad and unfortunate
+affair occurred, which threw a gloom over
+the community. My readers will remember the
+Chief Macha, who sent a goat the first Christmas,
+and who was the first to bring his little boy as a
+pupil in school. To all appearances he was a friend
+of the work from the beginning, and he was nearly
+always to be found in his place at the services on
+Sunday. He had even expressed a desire several
+times to be a Christian. We knew his life had not
+changed, but he had evidently lost faith in some
+of the old pagan beliefs, and his influence was worth
+much. He was a man of importance in the neighborhood
+and the owner of a herd of cattle, which
+was quite large from a native standpoint.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_334" id="Page_334"></a>
+<img src="images/illus335.png" width="600" height="351" alt="Simeboa&#39;s Village, Viewing the Strangers, Misses E. Engle and Mary Helsey." title="Simeboa&#39;s Village, Viewing the Strangers," />
+<span class="caption">Simeboa&#39;s Village, Viewing the Strangers, Misses E. Engle and Mary Helsey.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>On the day before Christmas word came that he
+had gone to the hills and could not be found; again
+that he was found dead, killed by a lion. His son
+at once went home, and I, together with some of
+the girls, soon followed. On the way to the village
+we met a native woman, who informed us that he
+was already buried, and on our arrival at the place
+we found that those who buried him had gone to
+the river to wash. While we were sitting there
+several of the people came to speak to us, and we noticed
+that some of the men spoke together in a low
+tone. Their answers to some of our questions were
+somewhat vague; but as there was no suspicion of
+foul play, we thought no more of the matter and
+asked no further questions.</p>
+
+<p>After the people returned from the river, the wailing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_335" id="Page_335">[335]</a></span>
+began by about thirty or thirty-five men walking
+back and forth; brandishing their assegais and
+guns and crying "<i>Mawe!</i>" At the same time the
+women stood about the grave, wailing and calling
+upon the dead. The sight was somewhat fearful
+and might have alarmed a stranger, but since the
+majority of these were from the adjacent kraals and
+were acquainted with us we feared no violence. In
+the evening Brother Taylor and the boys went over
+to show their sympathy, and the next day services
+were held there. All this time nothing further was
+learned except that the chief was killed by a lion.
+The English official from Kalomo, who, with his
+messengers, happened to be in the neighborhood at
+the time, received the same version of the cause of
+the death as we did. According to native custom,
+the brother of the deceased assumed his title and
+appropriated his cattle, and the affair, as far as it
+concerned ourselves, was dropped.</p>
+
+<p>About three weeks later Lupata, another chief,
+who lived near, together with one of his men, and
+Kaiba, a nephew of the deceased, came to inform us
+that Macha had been murdered. They said that he
+had been murdered while out on the veldt, and an
+attempt made to hide the body. A number of natives
+went to search for him, Lupata among the
+number, and when they discovered the body they
+saw at once that a murder had been committed. The
+brother of the murdered man enjoined the rest to
+secrecy and promised to give Lupata some cattle if
+he would not tell the missionaries or officials of the
+crime. Lupata, although very fond of cattle, of
+which he had only a few, did not jump at the bribe.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_336" id="Page_336">[336]</a></span>
+He said that he and Kaiba desired to inform me on
+the day of the funeral that the chief had been murdered,
+but the brother said, "Do not talk about it to
+the white people," and they had been silent for fear
+of offending him; as natives never like to gain the
+ill will of their fellows.</p>
+
+<p>We might have heard nothing further about it,
+at least for a time; but the brother was afraid the
+crime might leak out, and he still hoped to silence
+the affair by giving the other chief some cattle. To
+do this he was not willing to take of his own cattle,
+which he had taken from the murdered man, but
+tried to take those of Kaiba, who was a good, unassuming
+native. Kaiba greatly resented this disposition
+of his property, and wanted to take the
+matter to the magistrate at Kalomo. He and Lupata
+came to inform us of the murder and wished
+us to inform the magistrate by letter. Lupata said,
+"I do not want his cattle and I think you should
+write and tell the <i>Mwami</i> [magistrate] of the murder."
+Both refused to state who they thought was
+the murderer.</p>
+
+<p>Brother Taylor wrote an explanation of the affair
+and Kaiba carried the letter to the magistrate, the
+brother and two other natives accompanying. This
+was the first intimation the magistrate had of foul
+play, and when he put the question to them they
+readily acknowledged that the man had been murdered.
+The brother, however, who had always been
+opposed to everything good, and had a very evil
+countenance, showed the cunning of his master;
+and he and one of the men accompanying put the
+blame on the third. This one acknowledged his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_337" id="Page_337">[337]</a></span>
+guilt, saying that he and the other had killed the
+chief and the brother had sent them. We were informed
+later that the brother sent them three times
+before they became willing to perform the deed.
+Of course all three were put behind the bars.</p>
+
+<p>It was a case of alleged witchcraft. Several children
+had died in the kraal under peculiar circumstances,
+and the blame had been laid by the brother,
+who was a witch doctor, on the chief. We prefer to
+think, from what we know of the two, that the
+brother was the guilty one in each instance, and
+was desirous of the chief's property and position.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus338.png" width="600" height="297" alt="Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the Matopo
+Hills." title="Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River." />
+<span class="caption">Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the Matopo
+Hills.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>During this rainy season it was thought advisable
+for Brother and Sister Taylor to go to Bulawayo
+and Matopo Mission for a much-needed rest.
+She went in November and he followed in January,
+1911. At the same time David returned with his
+wife, Mankunku. Mankunku is one of the converts
+from Mapani Mission. She is a sincere Christian<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_338" id="Page_338">[338]</a></span>
+girl, and has proved a great help and blessing among
+the women and girls at Macha ever since she came.
+These two, with myself, prosecuted the work at
+Macha for the next five months alone.</p>
+
+<p>There were at this time forty-six boys and four
+girls staying at the mission, and it was necessary,
+not only to teach them in school, but to keep them
+profitably employed during work hours and out on
+the farm. Quite a fair amount of land was under
+cultivation, and Brother Taylor had planted grain,
+fruit, and vegetables before he left, the care of which
+gave the boys plenty of work to do during the
+rainy season. As soon as that was over David made
+use of them in getting grass and poles together for
+building, and as permanent buildings were to be
+erected they tried to secure hardwood rafters.</p>
+
+<p>Although there were so many boys together, yet
+all manifested a nice Christian spirit. They were
+not quarrelsome, and they were obedient and faithful
+in their work. The chief difficulty with natives
+is that they are inclined to keep their eyes fixed on
+the missionary too constantly and do not learn to
+depend on God for their own spiritual needs. The
+missionary, as he realizes the responsibility resting
+upon him, often feels like exclaiming, "Who is sufficient
+for these things?" to lead all in the right
+way. He may rejoice, however, that he can continually
+say, "My sufficiency is of God." He must
+also by every means in his power get their eyes off
+of himself and fix them on God. Otherwise they
+will do what is right at the mission and fall when
+those props are removed.</p>
+
+<p>June 16 I wrote somewhat as follows:<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_339" id="Page_339">[339]</a></span></p>
+
+<blockquote><p>Last Monday the wagon went to the Myeki River
+(about five miles distant) to get some thatching grass
+which the boys had cut there the week before. I thought
+it an excellent opportunity to visit Semani, who has been
+sick for some time and not likely to recover. I took
+along three girls and the two six-year-old boys and
+thoroughly dismissed from my mind home cares. We
+had a delightful ride over and a nice walk back, but best
+of all was the visit with Semani. He had accepted Christ
+while here at the mission and had often accompanied
+David in his kraal-visiting. He became sick, however,
+and we seemed unable to help him, so he desired to return
+home until he was well. He was always hoping
+he would recover and return to us.</p>
+
+<p>He has pleurisy and is continually growing worse, and
+it is evident that the end is not far off. He greeted me
+with a smile as I entered, and while we were speaking,
+I inquired "Is Jesus here?" The reply, with a bright
+smile was, "Yes, He is here." We continued to speak
+of the things of the other world and what the Lord has
+in store for His children, and through it all he seemed
+so ready both to talk and to listen. His old heathen
+mother sat there in sort of a dazed wonder to hear us
+speaking thus familiarly and without fear of death and
+transition. For her sake I then asked him if he were
+afraid to die. He quickly replied, "Oh, no, I am not at
+all afraid to die; I am ready."</p>
+
+<p>Later, when we bowed in prayer, he prayed, "I thank
+Thee, God, for Thy help and blessing. I have come
+through some hard places, but Thou hast given me victory.
+And, Jesus, if my time has come and You want to
+take me, it is all right. I'll gladly go with You."</p>
+
+<p>How we could rejoice that here was one who, only
+two or three years ago, was a raw heathen boy, now so
+happy in the Lord, and so ready to meet Him. If one
+soul is worth more than the whole world then our coming
+to Macha has not been in vain. His people had been
+wanting to "throw bones" and "smell out" the one who,
+according to their ideas, had bewitched him, but he steadfastly
+refused, for he has no faith in those things.</p></blockquote><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_340" id="Page_340">[340]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 285px;">
+<img src="images/illus341.png" width="285" height="500" alt="The Bottle Palm." title="The Bottle Palm." />
+<span class="caption">The Bottle Palm.</span>
+</div><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_341" id="Page_341">[341]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Later it was my privilege to again visit him, together
+with Mankunku. We had made a trip to a
+village beyond, where we remained for the night,
+and stopped with Semani, both going and returning.
+He was much weaker at this time and it was evident
+the end was near, and his friends had gathered
+and were ready for the wailing. We found him,
+although in great pain and with great difficulty in
+breathing, yet rejoicing and happy in the thought
+that he was soon going home. He could not lie
+down, but was supported in the arms of his mother,
+who was doing all in her power to help him bear
+his suffering. He was, however, able to take a little
+of the nourishment which we brought him. On our
+return the day following, he was still weaker. In
+the night his friends thought he was dying, when
+he suddenly roused and sang "<i>Jesu udi tu fwine</i>"
+("Jesus loves me"). These heathen friends in
+speaking to one another the next day said, "His
+heart is white toward God, and that is the reason he
+can sing when dying."</p>
+
+<p>Before we departed he requested Christian burial,
+so we left word for them to inform us at once of
+his death. Word came that same evening. Brother
+Taylor was at home by this time, and he and
+David, together with a number of the schoolboys,
+went at once to the burial, although it was night.
+They found the body prepared for burial and the
+people digging the grave. Brother Taylor said everything
+was carried on most quietly until services
+were over and the body had been buried; then the
+heathen part of the wailing began in earnest. His
+brother, while wailing, continued to cry out, "Semani,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_342" id="Page_342">[342]</a></span>
+where has he gone? He has gone to the
+light. Oh! where has he gone?" It was the wail
+of gross darkness seeing a faint glimmer of light,
+but knowing not how to reach it.</p>
+
+<p>The deathbed of our friends, surrounded with all
+the comforts this life can afford&mdash;soft beds, willing,
+low-voiced nurses, dainty food, helpful and spiritual
+ministrations&mdash;is often trying enough; here, however,
+was one deprived of all these comforts, with
+the exception of the occasional visits of his missionaries,
+lying or sitting on the hard floor, with only a
+mat for a bed, without even the ordinary decencies
+of life, much less its comforts, in a village and home
+wholly pagan; and yet he goes, rejoicing in his
+Savior's love, carried out of this dark hovel to behold
+things "Eye hath not seen, nor ear heard,
+neither have entered into the heart of man the
+things which God hath prepared," but He had already
+revealed them unto him by His Spirit.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_343" id="Page_343">[343]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIIIPART2" id="CHAPTER_VIIIPART2">CHAPTER EIGHT</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Further Improvements and Industrial Work</h3>
+
+
+<p>Industrial work had from the first progressed
+very favorably at the mission. The
+majority of boys, as they came, stayed on from
+year to year and exhibited more tenacity of purpose
+than is generally to be found among the natives.
+Some of them had assisted in making brick for the
+house and in the building; others had learned to
+handle the oxen in the wagon and on the farm in
+plowing, harrowing, and cultivating, while a number
+were engaged in gardening, hoeing, and the
+general work of the farm. Even the youngest were
+not idle, although their labors did not equal the
+expense of their keeping. We were, however, growing
+sufficient grain and food to supply our large
+family so that they could be kept from year to year
+under Christian training without their proving a
+heavy burden on the mission financially.</p>
+
+<p>In June we were pleased to receive Brother and
+Sister Taylor back from Bulawayo, and with them
+a blessing to the mission in the person of a little
+baby, Ruth Taylor. I use the term <i>blessing</i> advisedly,
+for this dainty little Ruth was indeed such to all
+connected with the work. These people had not
+seen a white child, and this one was an ever-increasing
+source of wonder and interest to the black faces
+around us. They would stand near her noting every<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_344" id="Page_344">[344]</a></span>
+move and commenting on everything they saw. Her
+soft white skin and spotless garments soon gave her
+a name. "U swezhiwa" ("she is clean or pure")
+the girls called her, and thus she undoubtedly
+looked by contrast. Her presence often attracted
+to the services people, especially the women, who
+otherwise would have remained at home; for in the
+eyes of some, all other interests paled besides this
+mite of humanity, and it warmed their hearts toward
+the entire work. When we went to the village she
+was again a center of attraction, and when we went
+alone the natives would always inquire about U
+swezhiwa and her mother. When prayer was offered
+by the boys for the missionaries, the child was
+never forgotten.</p>
+
+<p>After Brother Taylor's return the preparation for
+building went forward with accelerated speed. This
+dry season of 1911 was an unusually busy one at
+Macha. A church was greatly needed, for the one
+which David had erected four years previously, and
+which appeared to be so well-built, was rapidly
+showing signs of decay. It was still standing, but
+the ants had riddled the roof to such an extent that
+some of the timbers were falling, piece by piece,
+sometimes to the danger and great annoyance of
+those within. On this account we decided that it
+was best to vacate it even before the new one was
+finished. The boys' huts also were decaying, and
+we found it difficult to house the large number of
+boys staying at the mission. These thatched roofs
+are very heavy, and if some part of the wall becomes
+weak the huts may become dangerous to life.</p>
+
+<p>One evening the boys of one of the huts came to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_345" id="Page_345">[345]</a></span>
+say that the roof of their hut was breaking. We
+told them to take their blankets and clothing and go
+into another hut. They did so, and in the morning
+their own building was found leveled to the ground.
+As we viewed the sudden ruin we breathed a prayer
+of thanksgiving that no one was hurt. There had
+been about fifteen boys sleeping in that hut, and
+had they been inside some would have been killed
+or seriously injured. This enabled us to realize how
+dangerous huts were when partly eaten, and the
+need of better buildings.</p>
+
+<p>On account of building it was fortunate that there
+was such a large number of boys staying at the
+mission, and that the majority were large enough to
+be of service, so that there was no need of employing
+outside labor. Brother Taylor was excellent in
+training boys along industrial lines, a quality which
+is especially useful and helpful on the mission field,
+both in the interests of the work and of the natives
+themselves. Some people are glad to use native
+helpers when they are trained ready to order, but
+they soon become discouraged when time and patience
+are required.</p>
+
+<p>The native learns by doing, and often learns by
+his many mistakes. Again, he may be careless and
+consider accuracy unnecessary. He is nature's
+child, and everything he does for himself is in
+curves. His hut is round, his baskets are round, his
+paths are meandering, like the stream, for he, like it,
+goes in the path of least resistance. Straight lines
+and right angles are unintelligible to him, and he
+does not readily grasp such things, nor does he easily
+learn to make them. Patience, which is always a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_346" id="Page_346">[346]</a></span>
+virtue, is, in industrial work among the natives, an
+absolute necessity. One who will not take time and
+teach them will accomplish nothing praiseworthy in
+this respect.</p>
+
+<p>We said the native learns by doing; so he does,
+but it is generally by doing not once or twice but
+repeatedly. One of my first lessons along this line
+was when visiting in the home of an official. The
+lady had always lived in South Africa and had been
+accustomed to deal with the natives all her life.
+Noticing a basket of snowy-white clothes I inquired,
+"Who does your washing?"</p>
+
+<p>She replied, "The boys; I send them to the river
+to wash."</p>
+
+<p>"But how can you teach them to do their work so
+well?"</p>
+
+<p>"If they do not do it properly," she replied, "I
+send them back to repeat it until it suits me."</p>
+
+<p>This is the keynote of the situation. In addition
+to showing them how to perform a task, one must
+insist on their doing it just as they have been told.
+If they become careless or learn with difficulty, one
+should not become discouraged and go and finish
+the work&mdash;for this frequently is easier than to teach
+the natives&mdash;but should insist on their repeating the
+task until it is properly done. Some natives with
+very little instruction become experts at certain
+kinds of work. And sometimes even raw ones readily
+adapt themselves to housework with very little
+training. A lady in Bulawayo, who was a very
+careful housekeeper, had a native boy as servant,
+who was giving excellent satisfaction, yet she supposed
+that on her own exertions depended the work<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_347" id="Page_347">[347]</a></span>
+of keeping the rooms in order. Finally he concluded
+to leave her service, and she said she did
+not know until after he left how much work he had
+really done. He had been in the habit, early in the
+morning, before his master and mistress arose, of
+going over the house, cleaning and polishing mirrors
+and furniture.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 500px;">
+<img src="images/illus348.png" width="500" height="365" alt="Macha Mission Church and Boys&#39; House Built
+by Mr. Myron Taylor." title="Macha Mission Church and Boys&#39; House." />
+<span class="caption">Macha Mission Church and Boys&#39; House Built
+by Mr. Myron Taylor.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Another native, whose name has been frequently
+mentioned in these pages, was exceedingly cleanly
+and careful in his personal appearance. His clothes
+were always well washed and mended, and he went
+on the principle that a stitch in time saves nine. He
+learned to do things by seeing others perform them
+and was able to do them well. Although coming
+from a raw heathen home he was called an exceptional<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_348" id="Page_348">[348]</a></span>
+native, even by those who had had long experience
+with civilized natives.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule those who are careful and painstaking
+are generally slow, and many who are quick often
+do not perform their work properly. Some never
+seem to respond to careful teaching, and with others,
+many both trying and ludicrous blunders often
+occur. In the early days of Macha Mission we had
+a half-grown boy, by the name of Hamambile, helping
+in the kitchen. He was a good boy and seemed
+to be performing his work properly. One day several
+of the boys, who had been working on the farm
+and had soiled their hands, came into the kitchen.
+Hamambile was washing the dishes, so he generously
+stepped aside and invited the boys to wash their
+hands in the water where the dishes were being
+washed, and this they were vigorously doing when
+Sister Engle stepped in at the door. Nor did her
+presence in the least abash the boys, for they saw
+no impropriety in the act.</p>
+
+<p>Again, during the last year some new girls had
+joined the mission family and were being initiated
+into the mysteries of housekeeping. They seemed
+to learn well and were doing their work properly,
+but one day Sister Doner, on looking out of the
+window, was shocked to see a girl out in the yard
+with the dishpan, washing her feet. She too failed
+to see anything out of place in her act when she
+was first spoken to. She said she was just making
+use of some of the nice soapsuds on the water, for
+she thought it was too nice to throw away. It can
+easily be seen that one needs to be continually
+watchful while teaching some of them. On the other<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_349" id="Page_349">[349]</a></span>
+hand, there is no doubt that the raw native considers
+the white man or woman very cranky and
+extreme when he insists on cleanliness and order
+about the work.</p>
+
+<p>On account of the great need it was necessary to
+build both a church and boys' house in the one dry
+season. There was erected a substantial church,
+42 x 21 feet, with a wide veranda in front, which
+was also partly walled up, and a boys' house, 55 x 16
+feet, of five rooms, with a veranda all along the
+front. These were both of burnt brick with thatched
+roofs. All the hardwood timber for rafters and
+plates, and also the large amount of thatching grass,
+were procured by the boys the same season, beginning
+in March and April. The bricks too were made
+and both buildings were under cover by the 1st of
+December. This was all done with the aid of the
+school boys under the supervision of Brother Taylor,
+assisted by David. Part of the time the work
+was in progress during school hours, the boys who
+assisted at such times receiving full wages, as they
+are all eager to earn a little extra money. During
+the month of brickmaking, the boys donated their
+time as an offering to the Church.</p>
+
+<p>After they had made the bricks, Brother Taylor
+started on the foundation of the church, and then
+trained several of the Batonga boys in bricklaying.
+Together with himself and David they laid the walls
+of the church, all the larger boys having a share in
+some part of the work. The walls of the building
+are high, are fourteen inches in thickness and well
+laid. When this was completed Brother Taylor left
+David, assisted by some of the boys, to put on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_350" id="Page_350">[350]</a></span>
+thatched roof, which too is an excellent piece of
+work, while he turned his attention to the boys'
+house. Nearly all the brick work of this building
+was done by the boys under his supervision, and at
+the same time he was directing some in sawing by
+hand and making door and window frames out of
+the native hardwood timber. Later some of the
+boys were instructed in thatching it.</p>
+
+<p>When this boys' house, fifty-five feet long, was
+completed in January, the only thing in its construction
+that had been bought for the purpose was the
+zinc under the walls to exclude the ants. The doors
+were made of the boards of packing cases in which
+a wagon had been sent from America; the thatching
+was tied on with strips of animal hides procured
+from the natives. The bedsteads were made of poles
+procured in the forests and reeds from the river.
+These were tied with bark string, and over the top
+were placed animal hides also bought from the natives.
+Later the rooms were whitewashed and they,
+with the long veranda in front, made an excellent
+and clean-looking home for the boys. The church
+had imported doors and windows, as well as zinc
+and thatching twine. Otherwise the material was
+almost native.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_351" id="Page_351"></a>
+<img src="images/illus352.png" width="600" height="337" alt="Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the Midst." title="Ruth Taylor and Her Mother." />
+<span class="caption">Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the Midst.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>It was a creditable year's work and Brother Taylor
+deserved much praise for the ability with which
+it was all managed and the boys trained. No doubt
+some, on reading these lines, might say, "I could
+never be a missionary if I had to build like that!"
+"Where there is a will there is a way," is just as
+applicable on the mission field as elsewhere. It is
+surprising what one can accomplish if he is willing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_352" id="Page_352">[352]</a></span>
+to be used. Every one of the men on the mission
+field has done excellent work along these lines, as
+the well-built brick houses and churches on the six
+mission stations at the present day testify. Some at
+first declared that they could not build, but, doubtless,
+today they look with surprise and satisfaction
+on the work of their own hands. In addition to this
+they have every reason to be thankful for the great
+amount of missionary work they were able to accomplish
+in the building by training and fitting the
+boys to a higher plane of living.</p>
+
+<p>After the buildings were under roof, Brother Taylor,
+who had always desired to devote more time to
+evangelistic work among the villages, felt that his
+way was opened to attend almost exclusively to that
+line of work. Previous to this he had held services
+at many of the villages, such as Mapanza, Simeoba,
+Kabanzi, Kabwe, and at almost all the important
+villages near as well as north among the Baila; but
+during the year following he went out with his tent
+and sometimes spent two, three, and even four
+weeks at one place, so that he might have an opportunity
+of giving the people a fair conception of the
+Gospel. He spent a month at Chungu, near a large
+village, over twenty miles from the mission.</p>
+
+<p>He had visited the place before, but the people
+were not eager to listen. At this time he pitched his
+tent a short distance from the village and informed
+the people that he had come to teach them, and that
+those desiring to hear should come to the tent at
+such a time as best suited them. About 8 A. M.
+every day a fair-sized congregation gathered at the
+tent and heard the Gospel expounded to them. He<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_353" id="Page_353">[353]</a></span>
+had some very good meetings at that place, and the
+people became interested sufficiently to request a
+school.</p>
+
+<p>During the year he found many open doors and
+gave the Gospel to a large number of people who
+had never heard of a Savior, and there were urgent
+calls to start new stations in the needy places. How
+one longs to see some one step in at the opportune
+time and plant lights in the midst of the darkness!</p>
+
+<p>While this work was progressing David devoted
+his time to finishing the new buildings and overseeing
+the boys at work. A dear Christian lady had
+sent out money for seats in the new church, and he
+began to make them, and accomplished this task
+well, and the building was furnished with good,
+comfortable seats. Some of the boys, in writing to
+their friends who were away at work, said, "We
+have nice seats in the church and we do not become
+tired when we sit on them a long time." A good
+solid floor was also put in, and this was tarred and
+sanded.</p>
+
+<p>In November, 1911, we again had the privilege of
+welcoming Elder Steigerwald to Macha. He had
+lately returned from a furlough to America, and his
+visit was like getting a glimpse of the outside world.
+The Mission Board had sent out with him for
+Macha a large two-seated spring wagon with canvas
+top, something just suited for this country and
+climate. It was a most welcome and useful addition
+to our outfit. Especially since there are roads all
+over the country to the principal villages, this was
+helpful in evangelistic work and in visiting the out-schools,
+which were on the increase. The old days<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_354" id="Page_354">[354]</a></span>
+of laborious tramp were more or less in the past, and
+a new era seemed ushered in. Brother Steigerwald
+put the wagon together and added a long, useful
+box in front. Four oxen were then inspanned and
+we tested it. It is indeed a most satisfactory and
+comfortable conveyance and adds much to the enjoyment
+of the work.</p>
+
+<p>While the bishop was with us eleven more boys
+were baptized and received into church fellowship.
+The first ten were all standing true, so that our
+number had now increased to twenty-one. There
+were as yet no girls or women ready for baptism,
+but some were beginning to accept Christ as their
+Savior.</p>
+
+<p>As the new church was nearly completed at the
+time of his visit, it was thought advisable to dedicate
+this also before his return. He gave a most excellent
+sermon on the occasion, and we were all
+strengthened by his visit among us.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_355" id="Page_355">[355]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IXPART2" id="CHAPTER_IXPART2">CHAPTER NINE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>The Native</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>The most interesting thing in Africa is the native himself;
+the more I see him and study him the more I respect
+him.&mdash;Bishop J. C. Hartzell.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>I most heartily voice the sentiment expressed
+above. The study of the native is a most interesting
+one and worthy of the best minds of the
+age. The latent power and ability lying back of
+some of those crude exteriors is often marvelous,
+and the transformation often wrought by a few
+years of careful, sympathetic training far more than
+repays for all the labor expended.</p>
+
+<p>From what has already been given in the preceding
+pages, some idea of the native character may
+be gleaned, and yet it is impossible to give in such a
+book an adequate conception of the nature of the
+natives. In fact, the only way to know them is to
+live among them, and then one can not be sure that
+he has the correct idea. The subject is so many-sided,
+so elusive, and above all so changing that it is
+doubtful if any one can tell all there might be given.</p>
+
+<p>This twentieth century has produced three large
+volumes on the African native, which, in the estimation
+of the general public, seem to occupy a preeminent
+position among the many books continually
+written. I refer to "Thinking Black," by Daniel
+Crawford; "White and Black in South Africa," by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_356" id="Page_356">[356]</a></span>
+M. S. Evans; and "The Essential Kaffir," by Dudley
+Kidd. The first is the work of a missionary who
+has spent twenty-two unbroken years in the heart
+of the African Continent. The second is the work
+of a politician who has studied the native problem
+deeply and sympathetically from a governmental
+standpoint and has given his opinions and conclusions
+in a clear and convincing manner. The third
+work might be said to have been written from an
+independent standpoint, and is by many Europeans
+in South Africa considered the best thing written on
+the native. One who has lived long in Africa might
+be inclined to differ with any one or all of these
+writers in some points, but they are all excellent
+and well worthy of careful study.</p>
+
+<p>I was once speaking with an official who had had
+long experience in dealing with native problems, and
+whose opinions along these lines were sought after
+by others. I asked him, "Wherein do you think lies
+the chief difficulty in dealing with the native?" He
+replied somewhat as follows:</p>
+
+<p>"I think it lies in this: that the native so readily
+responds to civilization and improvement, that he
+comes up to our highest expectation along some
+lines; and then we, forgetting the generations of
+barbarism back of him, think he should measure up
+to our expectations along all lines. When he fails
+us at some particular point we become disgusted
+and do not give him credit for the advancement he
+has made."</p>
+
+<p>There seems to be much truth in the above statement
+and it has often been a help to me in dealing
+with natives. There is something else also which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_357" id="Page_357">[357]</a></span>
+must not be lost sight of, and that is that as much
+as possible they should be dealt with as individuals.
+Too often the white man thinks the natives are all
+made over the same mould, and that the characteristics
+of one are the characteristics of all. He will
+often not take the trouble to study their individuality,
+and perhaps he thinks they do not have any.
+This is not surprising. Europeans often visit New
+York, remain a short time and then return home,
+thinking they know Americans, and can be found
+prating of how Americans do. If people come to
+such superficial conclusions about such a heterogeneous
+mass of humanity as exists in the United
+States of America, it is not surprising that one or
+two natives in the eyes of many white people stand
+as a type of all Africans.</p>
+
+<p>The writer has had an opportunity of studying
+the natives of four or five tribes and has come into
+contact in various ways with several other tribes,
+yet she feels that her knowledge of the native character
+is in many respects superficial and unsatisfactory.
+It has this to recommend it, however, that
+it is gleaned at first hand from many years' residence
+among the raw and semi-civilized Africans.</p>
+
+<p>We have tried to show that the natives differ
+greatly in their ability to learn in school and out of
+it, in their habits of cleanliness, and in their readiness
+to receive the Gospel. As there was a large
+number of boys about us day by day, we found that
+they also greatly differed in disposition, as much so
+as white people, and it was necessary to study the
+characteristic of each in dealing with them. They
+soon understand if the missionary respects and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_358" id="Page_358">[358]</a></span>
+trusts them; and they readily respond to such treatment
+and show by their conduct that such confidence
+is not misplaced. On the other hand, if they
+are censured for a fault, especially if they think the
+censure is unjust, they soon become careless and
+discouraged. On account of their secluded and
+simple life they, even the grown ones, are much
+like children when they first come into contact with
+white people, and they fail to understand why two
+persons should treat them differently&mdash;why two
+missionaries or two masters should not have the
+same way of doing things, the same generosity and
+the same dispositions.</p>
+
+<p>Child-life of these dark-skinned Africans is in
+some respects not so different from that of their
+white neighbors, unless it is in its greater freedom.
+Until it learns to walk, the child spends much of its
+time on its mother's or older sister's back, tied by a
+skin with its face toward the mother. In the early
+days at Matopo, Matshuba once inquired how our
+mother carried us when we were children. We said
+she carried us on her arms. He nodded his head
+sagely and exclaimed, "That explains it. That is
+why your noses are long and straight and ours are
+flat."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_359" id="Page_359"></a>
+<img src="images/illus360.png" width="600" height="346" alt="Little Nurses. Mianda Village." title="Little Nurses." />
+<span class="caption">Little Nurses. Mianda Village.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>On the mother's back the child sleeps and coos
+and observes what goes on about it. Here it bobs
+up and down as the mother handles the hoe, stamps
+or grinds the meal, or goes about her cooking. Here
+it takes rides as the mother goes after wood or water,
+or on long journeys to visit her friends. Occasionally
+she removes it from her back, straightens
+out its cramped limbs, feeds it, and then places it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_360" id="Page_360">[360]</a></span>
+on the ground to play. It has no garments to impede
+its progress, and so it soon learns to help itself,
+crawls about and picks up earth or whatever
+comes in its way and eats it, no one objecting.</p>
+
+<p>As it becomes older the freedom is still greater,
+especially if it is a boy. There is no school to confine
+him, no hard lessons, no table manners, no daily
+washings, oftentimes. He runs, he hunts, he fishes,
+he plays often the long day through, together with
+the other little ones of the village. He has no clock
+to tell him the time of the day, except the great orb
+above him, and this he learns to read with surprising
+accuracy. As it sinks in the west, he comes
+with his assegais and faithful dogs, and with a rabbit
+or some birds, carried on a stick across his shoulders,
+proudly displaying his prowess in hunting. He
+makes bows and arrows, popguns, plays hockey and
+other games, makes clay animals, wagons, and many
+other things. In fact, some native boys are genuine
+artists, and it is a pleasure to watch them deftly
+mould animals of various kinds.</p>
+
+<p>His sister will have her doll, made from a stick
+of wood, a corncob, or the like, and tie it on her
+back, like her mamma does. She plays at housekeeping,
+grinding, cooking, and imitating her elders,
+the same as her white sisters do. She is also expected
+to help take care of the baby and younger members
+of the family, as her brother is often expected
+to herd the cattle or sheep, for there are no fences
+to confine them. All of these children, however,
+often suffer from hunger, cold, and nakedness, and
+worst of all they generally indulge in many evils
+which cling to them and greatly retard their progress<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_361" id="Page_361">[361]</a></span>
+when light comes to them. They also become
+quite cruel and unfeeling about giving pain to animals
+and birds. Every accessible bird's nest is
+robbed and the young birds, partly plucked, are
+thrown, often while still alive, on the live coals to
+roast and furnish them a dainty morsel. When a
+bird is secured there is not the least compunction
+about plucking off all the feathers without killing
+the bird. Once, when I was lying sick in bed, the
+four girls staying at the mission came in laughing
+and carrying the fledgling of a secretary bird. It
+was about the size of a half-grown chicken, and had
+all the feathers plucked from it while it was alive,
+and in this condition it was still blinking with its
+big, solemn-looking eyes. The brother of one had
+brought it in this condition, and to them it was a
+good joke to see it thus.</p>
+
+<p>As one enters the raw African's village and sees
+the native in the midst of his filthy and uncouth
+surroundings, lacking seemingly the very necessities
+of life, he readily concludes that the African is
+lazy, shiftless, lacking in resources, and exceedingly
+dull or he would have advanced further in civilization
+even before the advent of the white man. To
+a certain extent this is true, for even the native,
+after he is somewhat civilized and looks back to
+where he came from, has been heard to exclaim,
+"We must be the dullest people on earth. Others
+could read and write and knew something of civilization,
+but we Africans knew nothing." We need,
+however, but to look back to our own Celtic and
+Teutonic ancestry to see barbarism and illiteracy.</p>
+
+<p>The African pagan cannot be said to be lacking in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_362" id="Page_362">[362]</a></span>
+resources, however. He wishes fire and he goes and
+selects two suitable twigs of wood. Into one he
+cuts a notch and the other he points. Placing the
+first on the ground, he inserts the point of the other
+into the notch and twirls it rapidly between his
+hands until it strikes fire. At the same time he has
+on hand some inflammable substance upon which he
+places the fire and soon has a blaze. He can thus
+roast his fish or meat. He wishes cooking vessels;
+and the woman goes to the river and procures the
+proper kind of clay, which she mixes with water
+and works until it is the required consistency. She
+then takes a piece, and with deft fingers moulds it
+into a circle, and places it on a stone or piece of
+broken crockery. She adds more and more clay,
+carefully shaping it with her hands as she proceeds
+upward until the top is finished. Then she puts it
+aside for a while until the clay sets and becomes
+slightly dried, after which she carefully removes
+and turns it and moulds the bottom, and when dried
+she burns it. In this way she makes earthen pots of
+many kinds and sizes, from the dainty small ones,
+which are often nicely glazed and artistically
+marked, to the large, heavy beer pots, holding ten or
+twelve gallons.</p>
+
+<p>Weapons for war, hunting, and domestic purposes
+are needed. The man goes to the hills and digs until
+he finds the iron ore. He smelts it and with the
+iron thus obtained makes axes, assegais, hoes, and
+other useful implements. He burns wood and makes
+charcoal for his forge. His bellows are made from the
+skins of animals and the pipes are clay tile; and the
+anvil and hammers are also pieces of the iron he has<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_363" id="Page_363">[363]</a></span>
+obtained. He moulds, welds, shapes, and performs
+all the work of the ordinary blacksmith. If his hoe
+wears out he will take the iron that is left and shape
+it into an assegai bristling with points. With three
+or four of these and a shield made of hide, he will
+go out to fight his neighbor, or perhaps he will have
+bow and steel-tipped arrows, which he dips in a
+poisonous substance to ensure their deadly work.</p>
+
+<p>Or, if it is in time of peace, he makes use of his
+assegais and his faithful dog and supplies his household
+with meat. If he has been fortunate enough to
+secure an old blunderbuss of a gun, he tinkers at it
+till it works. He may not be able by law to buy any
+ammunition from the white man, or even lead to
+make bullets; but he will manage in some way to
+obtain some ammunition. Perhaps the chance possession
+of a nail, or solder melted from a tin can,
+will, by a laborious process, be turned into bullets,
+for time is no object to him when working for himself.
+In the same way he will secure some gunpowder
+or the ingredients for it, either by barter
+with his neighbors, who have been to town, or elsewhere.</p>
+
+<p>He wishes fish, and he will spear or catch them
+with hooks, or his wife will, with willowlike twigs
+and bark strings, make a long troughlike net, and
+as the water subsides she will supply her household
+with fish. Both fish and meat are dried and preserved
+for future consumption.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_364" id="Page_364"></a>
+<img src="images/illus365.png" width="600" height="350" alt="Batonga Fisher Women." title="Batonga Fisher Women." />
+<span class="caption">Batonga Fisher Women.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The native wishes a hut to live in. He goes to
+the forest and with the axe cuts down poles and
+carries them home, and with his hoe digs a trench
+into which he places them. With some forked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_365" id="Page_365">[365]</a></span>
+sticks he makes a neat doorframe. Thin, willowy
+poles are also brought and split through the center,
+and one piece is placed on the outside and one inside
+of the poles of the hut, and with bark strings he
+firmly ties these together and thus secures the poles
+in their places. They are also fastened at the top
+in a similar manner, so that the walls of the hut
+are firmly fastened together, for of course his hut is
+round. With his method of building he is wise in
+making it round, as it is more easily done and
+stronger when completed. The slender, straight
+poles for the roof are fastened together in the same
+way. These are often extended beyond the walls so
+as to form a veranda, which may or may not be enclosed.
+The wife takes her hoe or assegai and cuts
+grass to thatch the hut. She also takes some of the
+beautiful long grass, and with bark string makes a
+large mat to form a partition to separate the bed-room
+from the living-room. They need a bed and
+the man will procure forked sticks and fasten them
+firmly in the ground as bedposts, and on this with
+poles, reeds, bark string, and animal hides he makes
+a bed. Skins may also be used for blankets, and if
+they should be lacking in these they build a fire or
+place a pan of coals underneath or near the bed.
+Some Africans weave blankets and some make them
+out of the inner bark of the trees; others purchase
+from traders.</p>
+
+<p>The native needs a chair, so he goes to the forest
+and, selecting a certain kind of tree, he cuts a suitable
+block of wood. With his little axe he hews and
+cuts until from a solid block of wood he makes a
+very respectable-looking chair, or stool, varying in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_366" id="Page_366">[366]</a></span>
+height from six to fourteen inches. In the same
+way he makes spoons, stamping blocks, dishes, and
+other household articles. These he carefully oils to
+prevent cracking, and often colors and ornaments
+them. The natives along the large rivers make their
+own dugout canoes. A large gourd or earthen jar
+answers for a water bucket, one with a long handle
+for a dipper, a very large one with woven top is
+used for a churn, a long one as a butter receptacle,
+and a very small one for a snuffbox. A small piece
+of iron, nicely shaped and beaten thin, is snuff spoon
+and handkerchief.</p>
+
+<p>A large flat stone, built in a clay receptacle with
+an earthen jar at the end, is the mill, and on this
+another stone is used to grind. The wife needs
+baskets. She procures palm leaves, bark string,
+reeds, and willows and makes baskets of various
+kinds: a flat one for a sieve, dainty little ones for
+plates for their stiff porridge, larger ones for grain,
+and still larger ones for reaping. She also makes
+mats of various kinds. Skins of animals do for
+clothing. They are so confident that this is the
+native invention, that one of the boys, in reading of
+the garments of our first parents, declared they
+must have been black because they wore skins. The
+girls' loincloth is made of bark string. Their clay
+pipes are often quite artistically made, and so hard
+that it is difficult to distinguish them from metal.</p>
+
+<p>In all of these things just mentioned the native is
+in no way dependent upon the European; they are
+of his own invention and manufacture, except the
+rifle. It is not to be supposed that any one native
+makes all the various articles. There are blacksmiths,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_367" id="Page_367">[367]</a></span>
+potters, basketmakers, and workers in wood,
+and the rest barter for or buy the things they need.</p>
+
+<p>Given various colored beads, some fine and some
+heavy wire, a few buttons, shells, and ivory rings,
+and they are adept at adorning the body, at least
+according to the native's idea of beauty. In some
+respects the barbarous African's idea of ornamentation
+does not differ materially from that of her white
+sisters, the difference being one of degree rather
+than of kind. The American beauty thinks one or
+two strings of beads around her neck are quite the
+proper thing, and add to her charm. The African
+beauty will tell you that if one or two are nice, four
+or five are nicer. It is the same with the bracelets;
+the American belle is pleased with one or two on
+her wrists. The African is likewise, but she is better
+pleased with a dozen, only she adds utility to
+beauty and thinks that a lot of heavy rings around
+her wrists or ankles add to their strength and give
+her corresponding value in the eyes of the opposite
+sex. Then too she will tell you that her god told
+her to adorn herself thus, which is doubtless true.</p>
+
+<p>What has been said of inventive ability applies
+more or less to all pagan Africans, although in different
+sections of the country they differ somewhat
+in their work. The Batonga, by whom we are surrounded,
+do not at present remove the iron from the
+ore, but there are many blacksmiths among them,
+and according to some of the old natives they were
+accustomed to smelt the ore. There are certainly
+evidences of iron workings in this part of the country.
+Brother Taylor made inquiry of an old native
+in reference to these workings. He said that many<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_368" id="Page_368">[368]</a></span>
+years ago the Batonga used to work them and thus
+obtain their own iron. Then their Barotse conquerors
+came and killed all the iron workers and told
+them to come to the Barotse and purchase their iron.
+No doubt this was done to weaken them in battle.
+(See 1 Samuel 13: 19-22.) In this instance the
+smiths remained, but they go to the Barotse to purchase
+hoes and pig iron. Since the old ones were
+killed, the younger generation were afraid to smelt
+the ore.</p>
+
+<p>All the Africans brew their own beer. They also
+grow tobacco, which they both smoke and snuff,
+and they grow a kind of hemp which they smoke.
+Of course they raise their own food, and before the
+arrival of the white man some even procured their
+own salt.</p>
+
+<p>As to the general character of the raw natives&mdash;for
+it is of them we are writing&mdash;we hesitate sometimes
+to tell what we do know. But the missionary,
+however much he may think of the Africans and
+enjoy his work among them, cannot, dare not, be
+blind to their faults. It has been said of them that
+they are naturally liars, thieves, and harlots; a hard
+saying, truly, but there is a measure of truth in it.
+As a people there is little or no reliance to be placed
+on their word, especially when they desire to shield
+themselves, their relatives, or even their tribes.
+Possibly a native may tell an untruth for the mere
+pleasure of it. This habit is so inbred that it is difficult
+to overcome it; and yet by careful religious
+training, and the power of the Holy Spirit, one is
+frequently surprised at the progress they make in
+speaking the truth under very trying conditions&mdash;that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_369" id="Page_369">[369]</a></span>
+is, when they are led to see the evil of the opposite
+course.</p>
+
+<p>Thieving is probably not so prominent, but it
+exists, not only, as some affirm, among the half-civilized,
+but also among the raw heathen. Every
+missionary, who has seen heathen accepting the
+Light and confessing their past, can testify to the
+truthfulness of this statement. Many instances of
+stealing among them can be cited. I was told by a
+farmer, who was living in the midst of pagan Africans,
+untouched by civilization or the Gospel, that
+one year he employed about 100 women to gather
+his corn. He suspected them of stealing, but said
+nothing until one evening, just as they were starting
+for home, he suddenly rode in among them and
+frightened them. The corn which they had carefully
+concealed about them was scattered in all directions.</p>
+
+<p>Stealing, however, is not as common as lying; for
+while there does not seem to be a strong public
+sentiment against the latter, there is against the former,
+for the protection of their property. Those
+who flagrantly disregard this are branded as thieves
+and are sometimes punished. I know one native
+who was required by his heathen neighbors to pay
+ten hoes for visiting their grain bins. Generally,
+however, grain, either in the gardens or in the granaries,
+is not disturbed by others, and one may allow
+property to remain exposed year after year and it
+not be disturbed. The white man's law against
+thieving greatly assists the native in the enforcement
+of his law. We have found some very trustworthy
+natives, and none who have been with us<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_370" id="Page_370">[370]</a></span>
+any length of time have proven dishonest, and they
+are frequently sent to carry sums of money without
+in any way tampering with it.</p>
+
+<p>As to other forms of vice what shall one say? One
+European has been heard to exclaim that "their
+morals are as black as their faces." That they are
+dark no one can deny, for from childhood up vice
+in many forms is common. It could scarcely be
+otherwise when one considers the filth and degradation
+of their surroundings, where a number are
+crowded like so many animals into a filthy hut, overrun
+with vermin and parasites of all kinds. Some
+will tell you that there are none pure. It is true that
+the lives they lead give little opportunity for anything
+elevating. Then too their lives are open to
+the general gaze; nothing is hid.</p>
+
+<p>But take the modern city; dig it up from the foundation;
+open all its cesspools of infamy, crime, and
+debauchery, and such a stench will ascend to heaven
+that everyone beholding will cry out, "Babylon, the
+mother of harlots and abominations of the earth!"
+And yet this is the boasted twentieth-century civilization.
+Shall we, then, say that there are no Christians
+in that city, or that there are none living good
+moral lives who do not profess Christ? God forbid!
+All honor to the noble band of men and women in
+our cities who, in the midst of fearful odds, are living
+upright lives and helping their fellow-men.</p>
+
+<p>I believe I can safely say, from what I have seen
+and learned of the inner life of the native, that in
+dark, heathen Africa, even before the light of the
+Gospel penetrates, there are those who are moral
+and pure, although the number is small. Then take<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_371" id="Page_371">[371]</a></span>
+the Christian natives; the life of many a one is a
+living rebuke to some who decry mission work, and
+it is too often because they are a living rebuke, that
+they are so fiercely hated by some Europeans. People
+usually find what they are looking for, and in
+Africa is no exception.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_372" id="Page_372">[372]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XPART2" id="CHAPTER_XPART2">CHAPTER TEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>The Native&mdash;Continued</h3>
+
+
+<p>Beggars the Africans naturally are, and
+when the white man comes among them
+they are always eager to obtain all they can
+for nothing. They beg of one another; then why
+should they not beg of the white man, whose pockets
+are supposed to be full of money? Then too
+some of them think the white man does not need
+money to buy food, clothing, and other goods from
+the store. They will say, "You do not need money
+to buy things. You just write something on a piece
+of paper and send it to Bulawayo and the goods
+come." Experience has taught us that the greatest
+good one can do the native is to make him work or
+pay for everything he receives, unless it should be
+during a case of sickness or helplessness.</p>
+
+<p>It is a common expression that the African is
+lazy; and yet even this must be accepted with a reserve
+and an understanding of his surroundings.
+Aside from the effect of the climate, much of their
+indolence and indifference is due to their smoking
+of hemp, a narcotic drug, similar to the <i>hashish</i> of
+eastern countries. This they grow, and it is a common
+practice for the older, and for even young boys,
+to smoke it. It seems to sap their very life and take
+away all the ambition to better their condition. Yet
+the native can and does work even in his home,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_373" id="Page_373">[373]</a></span>
+when occasion demands. During the digging and
+growing season they are found out in their gardens,
+which are generally at a distance from the villages,
+from early morning until late at night, hoeing and
+watching their crops to protect them from the ravages
+of the animals and birds. During the hottest
+part of the day they generally stop for a time to
+rest and cook. It is useless to attempt much evangelistic
+work during this season of the year, except
+at night, for the villages are about deserted during
+the day.</p>
+
+<p>They may, during the dry season, work for Europeans,
+but with some a short time of such work suffices,
+as their wants are few. As one fellow expressed
+it: "I have now sufficient money to pay my
+taxes. I only want to work long enough to earn
+money to buy a blanket and then my needs are all
+supplied." If they have food on hand, that is the
+extent of the ambition of some natives. They feel
+that then, during the dry season, or winter, they are
+entitled to rest, hunt, smoke, drink beer and palaver.</p>
+
+<p>Frequently, however, they must build in the dry
+season, for one of their huts in this ant-ridden country
+lasts only a short time&mdash;perhaps two or three
+years&mdash;and then another must be built. This is no
+small task, but it is usually postponed until near the
+rainy season. In order to build, the native is obliged
+to make frequent trips to the forest to procure suitable
+poles and bark strings, all of which he must carry
+on his shoulders. His wife too is inclined to
+postpone cutting the thatch grass until it is nearly
+all burnt, and then it requires much more labor to
+find enough thatch than if she had done the work<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_374" id="Page_374">[374]</a></span>
+at the proper time. The rain usually is threatening,
+or even the first has fallen before the man begins
+the actual building, and then he and his neighbors
+hurry and put up the huts after a fashion. When
+asked why he does not build earlier in the season he
+naively exclaims, "Oh! I leave it until the rains
+come, so I must hurry and build it." In other words,
+he puts it off until he is forced to do it, willy-nilly.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule the native is never in a hurry; he always
+performs his work deliberately. That is characteristic
+of the country, or climate, rather than of the
+individual, because no one in Africa seems to be in
+a hurry. We had our first lesson in this on the
+threshold of the continent. Just after we had
+reached Cape Town and had rented rooms, some
+groceries were bought and ordered to be sent to
+the house. They were very slow in coming, and we
+mentioned the fact to an American lady who had
+resided at Cape Town five years. She replied, "We
+are all slow in Africa, and in a few years you will
+become slow too." I cannot say that this has become
+true of all our missionaries, but this is the general
+effect of the country. The atmosphere, the heat,
+and the diseases, all have much influence on a person.
+To hurry and violently exert the body in order
+to complete a piece of work often brings on an
+attack of fever. Horses, mules, oxen, and donkeys
+are not as hardy as in temperate climates, and it requires
+several times the number to do the same
+amount of work, so that it need not surprise one
+that the natives, who, as far back as they know,
+have lived amid such surroundings, should be slow
+and indolent.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_375" id="Page_375">[375]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>There are three natives in our nearest village, all
+able-bodied men of about 40 or 45 years of age.
+Two of them have four wives and one has three.
+Since the hut tax is ten shillings a hut, that means
+that one must pay thirty shillings (nearly $7.50) tax
+per year, and the other two forty shillings (nearly
+$10). They are all intelligent-looking natives. Two
+of them have been government messengers and
+know something of European life. Now they are
+at home year after year, for they seldom go away
+to work, because they are too lazy. How they secure
+their hut tax is often a query, and about the
+only solution that seems possible is that they beg
+some here and some there of natives who go away
+to work, and they may occasionally have a little
+grain to sell. Often they are short of food for themselves
+and their families. One of them at least has
+had his family out on the veldt, living on fruit and
+roots and what game he could procure, for two
+months at a time. These are extreme cases, and one
+must feel sorry for the women and children when
+crops fail, for they at least cannot go among the
+Europeans for work.</p>
+
+<p>The natives differ greatly among themselves in
+diligence and training as well as in character and
+morality. While there are always some improvident
+ones, who live on the charity of their neighbors,
+yet some are exceedingly industrious the entire
+year. After their grain has been cared for they go
+to the towns to work and earn money, buy cattle
+and sheep, and in general enrich themselves. Workers
+in wood are always busy making articles to sell
+to their neighbors, and other artizans do likewise.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_376" id="Page_376">[376]</a></span>
+The women also show the same difference of character.
+Some are always busy and forehanded with
+their gardens, their grass cutting, and cutting and
+carrying firewood to stow it away before the rains
+come. The same difference is to be found in the
+training of families.</p>
+
+<p>In some of the homes the children are well trained
+along industrial lines, according to the native idea
+of training. The parents require them to work and
+bear a certain amount of responsibility in providing
+for the family and in caring for the herds. For instance,
+a number of our best boys came from a village
+called Mianda. They proved very helpful and
+skillful in work and became some of our best builders
+and teachers. Their parents were generally considerate
+when we had dealings with them. Sometimes
+we had as many as ten boys at once from that
+one small village, and the father of some would even
+help to see about his herds so that his children
+might attend school. If a boy was needed at home
+to help build or herd, the father would tell for just
+how long he was needed, and we might be sure that
+he would send the boy back at the expiration of that
+time. The children of this village were required
+to be obedient and work while at home, otherwise
+they were denied food. There were other similar
+homes. In the villages, even before Christianity enters,
+the natives look upon some of the customs of
+their tribes in various ways. Where there are large
+villages and many people, dances and carousals are
+frequent occurrences and much immorality results.
+Some of the parents forbid their children frequenting<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_377" id="Page_377">[377]</a></span>
+these places of amusement on account of the
+immorality.</p>
+
+<p>Again, from some villages boys would come to
+the mission, stay only a few days and then leave,
+because they were obliged to perform a certain
+amount of work daily. We did not try to coax them
+to remain, for we preferred to keep only those who
+were willing to work&mdash;the others seldom amount to
+anything. Go into the houses of some such boys,
+and one would see them lying about, not willing to
+herd, much less dig. Perhaps the father will say,
+"Go and see about those sheep." The boy pays no
+attention to the command. The mother comes and
+scolds him and seeks to make him work, but with no
+better result; yet when food is prepared he is the
+first one to be around the pot and no one forbids
+him. From these instances it can be readily seen
+that African family training does not differ materially
+from European or American.</p>
+
+<p>In many of the villages there are always some
+who desire to improve themselves and better their
+conditions. They have their gardens, but, work as
+they may with their primitive little hoes, they cannot
+make much headway; or there may be a drought
+and famine is the result. They go away and work
+for a time, and come home with a supply of clothing
+and some money. They come to their dirty homes
+and filthy surroundings, and their friends and relatives
+try to get as much of their clothing and money
+as possible. They gradually become more and more
+sordid in appearance, their clothing disappears, and
+we become disgusted with them for so soon leaving
+behind the outward marks of civilization. But how<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_378" id="Page_378">[378]</a></span>
+many months could we live their home life and be
+presentable in appearance?</p>
+
+<p>Let us take Charlie as an example. He, with a
+number of other boys, went to Southern Rhodesia
+to work on a farm. He remained a year and received
+fifteen shillings ($3.60) per month, and he
+had to pay his way down and back on the train. He
+came home at the end of the year with a nice supply
+of new clothing and some money, and he looked as
+clean and well-dressed as a European when he came
+to Church on Sunday. He is a Christian boy and is
+trying to do what is right. Soon after his return
+home, his father, who is one of the three lazy men I
+mentioned, and extremely filthy in appearance, began
+wearing Charlie's clothes. First it was a shirt
+and a piece of calico; then another garment; then his
+nice grey coat. Charlie gave his little naked brother
+one of his shirts. He wished to marry, and this took
+all of his money. In a few months he presented
+quite a different appearance from what he did on his
+return home from Bulawayo, and we began to
+blame him, at least in our minds, and say that he
+should not allow himself to degenerate in this way.
+But most of his clothing is gone and his money is
+gone; he does not even have sufficient with which to
+purchase soap, so that he may wash the remaining
+clothing.</p>
+
+<p>Says one, "He should keep at work and not come
+and sit down in his home." The work takes him away
+from home, and his wages are low, so that he must
+keep at it continually in order to maintain appearances.
+May he not have any home life at all? It is
+a perplexing problem, and were we forced to take<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_379" id="Page_379">[379]</a></span>
+his place we would no doubt conclude that the boy
+does remarkably well under the circumstances.
+While at home he works in his gardens and does
+what he can find to do for the white men near his
+home; then, as his needs increase, he again goes to
+Bulawayo to begin again. This is an actual occurrence
+and typical of many others. He may conclude
+to have no home life, but keep up the semblance of
+civilization, hang about the towns, and imitate many
+evils surrounding him, and in the end prove a greater
+menace to society and to the country than if he
+would, at least part of the time, live in his own home
+in a more primitive manner. Again, if he depends
+too much on the stores of the traders, he ceases to
+manufacture articles for himself, so that if he does
+finally settle down for himself, tired of the struggle,
+he is often more helpless than at first, because he
+cannot make the articles which his father made.</p>
+
+<p>Is the native provident? or does he live from hand
+to mouth? Yes and no. I heard a man who traded
+with the natives say that in one year he bought
+about 1,000 bags of grain from them, giving in exchange
+goods from his store. Before the next crop
+was harvested, he had sold about all the grain back
+to them, at of course quite an advance in price. I
+have seen, near our own doors, natives sell to European
+traders grain, either for money or goods, from
+$1.25 to $2.50 for a two-hundred-pound bag and buy
+it back later in the same season for from $6 to $7
+per bag. But these are extreme cases. In the latter
+instance a year of plenty was followed by a year of
+drought, and the natives were far from markets and
+at the mercy of local traders. Many of the natives<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_380" id="Page_380">[380]</a></span>
+had put in their granaries what would have tided
+them over an ordinary season, but the prolonged
+drought led them to want. Others had a comparatively
+poor crop the previous year and this caused a
+scarcity. Some did not need to buy at all, as they
+always look in advance for such emergencies and
+do not sell their surplus until certain of a new crop.
+Such natives, when they do sell, often sell to their
+native neighbors or exchange their grain for cattle.
+Such are generally very thrifty, while there are always
+some who are in want. In this too it may be
+seen that they are not unlike other people.</p>
+
+<p>In fact, the Batonga taught their missionaries
+some lessons in caring for grain. We found that
+they store their corn in the grain bins without removing
+all the husks, and they shell it as they need
+it or near the end of the season. With the Kafir
+corn they do the same way, cutting off the heads
+and putting it away without threshing it. This was
+so different from the thrifty Matabele, who carefully
+shelled and threshed their grain, that the first
+time we visited one of the villages and saw their
+method we thought, "How lazy! We must teach
+them how to do their work properly." We soon
+discovered that in this hot climate the shelled corn
+was soon weevil-eaten, and that the shelled Kafir
+corn was almost ground to meal before the year
+ended. Now we are inclined to imitate the natives
+in this respect rather than they us. It shows too
+that the native adapts himself to the country and
+climatic conditions.</p>
+
+<p>The African is a genuine lover of nature. He enjoys
+being out in the open air; he loves the bright<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_381" id="Page_381">[381]</a></span>
+rays of the sun. Everything around him is pregnant
+with meaning. Nature is his school, and he
+knows the habits of every beast, bird, or insect. In
+a measure he appreciates and loves the beautiful,
+even though at first he may smile at the white man's
+love for flowers. One day I inquired of an old
+heathen woman, who never came to Church, why
+they moved their kraal from the rock-bound place
+in which it had been, to the open plain. Her withered
+face brightened up, as with a sweep of her arm
+she took in the magnificent scene before her and
+exclaimed, "Is not that beautiful?" The native too
+shows good taste in the selection of clothing after
+he has become accustomed to civilized ways. We
+are inclined to think of them as being especially
+partial to bright colors. A few are, but my experience
+is that the majority are not. Many of the
+boys especially soon discard the native stores, where
+cheap apparel is sold, and frequent the stores for
+Europeans.</p>
+
+<p>They love music and have several crude musical
+instruments. Their songs are generally of war, love,
+marriage, and the chase. They also have some
+songs suitable to their work. They of course have
+good voices for singing, and can be easily trained to
+sing well. They have their legends, their poetry,
+proverbs, and animal stories.</p>
+
+<p>Natives, although very generous among themselves,
+are not inclined to be so to white people;
+perhaps because white people have not as a rule
+treated them so generously. If the native wishes to
+sell anything and is greatly in need of the money or
+clothing, he will often consent to sell for almost any<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_382" id="Page_382">[382]</a></span>
+price. It is the same with work; he will work very
+cheaply if he is eager to work.</p>
+
+<p>On the other hand, if the need is on the part of
+the buyer, he will ask a very high price for grain or
+other articles and absolutely refuse to give for less,
+especially if the buyer is an European. With work
+it is the same. Even boys, after they have received
+a certain amount of education and religious training,
+are very slow to accept the idea that they should
+do anything for the white man from a sense of duty.
+There are doubtless some very good reasons for this.
+They, however, respect a master who is kind but
+firm, and it is best not to coax them. If they find
+that we are not dependent upon them, and can get
+along without them, they are more likely to conclude
+that they cannot get along without us.</p>
+
+<p>The native is said to be lacking in gratitude to his
+benefactor, and there is some truth in this. One often
+spends much time and labor to train him along
+certain lines, with the hope that he will be of genuine
+service in the future. Perhaps about the time
+he is able to take the place for which he is fitted, he
+will often turn and, rejecting his benefactor, give
+the benefit of his training to some one who can remunerate
+him better. Naturally the missionary, or
+master, whichever it may be, feels grieved at this
+lack of gratitude. Too often, perhaps, the fault is
+on both sides, and we do not give him credit for the
+help he has been to us. Then too it is difficult to
+put ourselves in his place and see matters from his
+point of view. He has no idea of the value of our
+time or training and we sometimes spoil him in the
+beginning. Would not the best and safest way for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_383" id="Page_383">[383]</a></span>
+the good of the native be to require him to earn his
+way as he goes? Let him always work sufficiently,
+if possible, to pay for the trouble it takes to teach
+him, whether in school or in industrial work, or in
+work pay him small wages at first and increase as
+he becomes more and more proficient. It may require
+a little of his time, but it has not spoiled him,
+and if he should conclude to go at any time, he has
+altogether or nearly paid his way in kind and one is
+none the loser.</p>
+
+<p>The native, however, can, and many of them do,
+improve greatly along this line after they have become
+Christians. While naturally they are not inclined
+to be disinterested and generous to the white
+people, yet many of them become so and display a
+remarkable spirit of self-sacrifice in the Lord's service.
+Many teach year after year at a far lower salary
+than they could obtain elsewhere; and, not only
+in teaching but in other lines of labor requiring
+skill, they will work for the Lord for a much lower
+wage than they could procure elsewhere, as all of
+our missionaries can testify. Then too many of
+them often give largely of their penury for the advancement
+of the cause of Christ.</p>
+
+<p>I was one day touched by the spirit manifested by
+a big fellow. He had come to the missionaries destitute
+of clothing, but anxious for an education. He
+was a hard-headed chap, both in school and out, and
+ran up against many hard places before he became
+pliable. He received, like the rest, a little money at
+the end of each term, but since he was in school
+three and one-half hours each day, his time for work
+was limited and his pay necessarily small. He, however,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_384" id="Page_384">[384]</a></span>
+stayed at the mission and gradually obtained
+some clothing and money to pay his taxes. He also
+began to accept Christ as his Savior and from being
+a proud, obstinate fellow, he became more and more
+docile. At one time the amount coming to him was
+ten shillings ($2.40). His wardrobe was still scanty,
+but he took out for himself one shilling of the money
+received and brought the remaining nine shillings
+and said, "Here, I want to give this to the Lord."</p>
+
+<p>Giving the Gospel to the natives in their villages,
+while it is generally a pleasure to the missionary, is
+not always an easy task. They soon learn to be
+very quiet and respectful in the church, enter quietly,
+take their places and go through all the outward
+forms of service, and also leave without being noisy
+or talking, perhaps because they are requested to
+do so. But when one goes out into their villages,
+even to the best of them, there are many side issues.
+The chief, if he is present and worthy the name,
+will aid in keeping order, and even if he is not present,
+the majority may sit quietly and seem to be
+listening; but perhaps the cattle get at the granaries
+and must be driven away, or the chickens go into
+the huts and eat the meal and must be watched;
+perhaps new ones are continually coming and must
+be noticed and greeted, if they are allowed to do so.
+Then the babies are so interesting to their mothers
+or those near them, or perhaps there is a mother
+with an older child at her side, and she does not
+wish to lose any time; so, during her enforced leisure,
+she is sedulously examining the child's head
+or ornaments for parasites. Perhaps over there,
+outside the hut door, is a man who has not had time<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_385" id="Page_385">[385]</a></span>
+to make his morning toilet, so he concludes to
+spend the time in dressing the long locks of hair
+around the top of his head.</p>
+
+<p>One does not like to stop and reprove them, because
+the rest seem attentive and perhaps those are
+also listening, for the work they are engaged in is
+such a common one! Again, all may seem attentive
+and the missionary rejoices that the seed is
+falling into well-prepared soil, and he continues
+eager to drive the truth home to their hearts. He
+pauses to let it sink in&mdash;when lo! some one will
+make a remark wholly irrelevant to the subject he
+seeks to impress upon their minds; it may be in
+reference to some article of clothing he is wearing,
+or some of their own needs. His enthusiasm cools,
+for he perceives that some, and perhaps many, have
+paid little attention to the message.</p>
+
+<p>Again, one may be speaking, and the chief or
+headman repeats what has been said, or he may ask
+a pertinent question, the answer to which brings
+out other questions, which serve to elucidate the
+subject. The other natives are led to listen; and
+while the discourse turns to be almost a conversation
+between the speaker and this one, yet the missionary
+goes away feeling that they have at least
+understood and perhaps have received some light.
+Sometimes, again, one may have only a few listeners
+and go away thinking nothing has been accomplished,
+but God has taken care of the seed sown.</p>
+
+<p>I remember being out once with one of the Christian
+boys. We came to a garden where a woman
+and her daughter were working, and we sat and
+talked with them about Christ our Savior. This<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_386" id="Page_386">[386]</a></span>
+was the first time they had had an opportunity to
+hear. Years passed and the incident was about forgotten
+by both the Christian native and myself.
+That girl later, out of much tribulation found her
+way into the Kingdom. Her father was a hardened
+old heathen, and had sold her to an old man. He
+was going to force her to marry the old man, but
+she escaped and fled to Matopo Mission where, with
+Elder Steigerwald's help, she was set free. She returned
+home, and later an European offered oxen
+and wagon to her father for her. She steadfastly
+refused and kept herself pure. Today she is the
+wife of a native evangelist and one of our most
+valued helpers. She says her first knowledge of
+Christ was at that little meeting in the garden,
+where she and her mother were working, and her
+present husband and I stopped to speak with them.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_387" id="Page_387">[387]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIPART2" id="CHAPTER_XIPART2">CHAPTER ELEVEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Some of Their Religious Ideas</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>Nevertheless He left not Himself without witness, in
+that He did good, and gave us rain from heaven, and
+fruitful seasons, filling our hearts with food and gladness.&mdash;Acts
+14: 17.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>The above quotation may apply to the African's
+idea of God in general, but it seems
+especially applicable to the Batonga and
+kindred tribes. Among these the word for God and
+rain are one and the same, <i>Leza</i>. This does not
+necessarily imply that they have no conception of
+God apart from the Rainmaker, but that conception
+is closely allied to rain and kindred elements in
+nature. They understand the name <i>Mubumbi</i>
+(Moulder or Creator) and <i>Chilenga</i> (Originator of
+Customs), but when speaking of the earth and vegetation,
+they will say, "Leza [God] made these
+things, because when leza [rain] comes, grass and
+vegetation spring up and grow, so Leza made
+them."</p>
+
+<p>Of course their conception of Him, like that of
+all Africans, is very remote. He is their Creator,
+but to approach unto Him is like reaching out in the
+dark, in a vague sort of way, after something more
+powerful than themselves, something or some one
+they know not what. In times of great trouble, as
+in famine, fear, or when there is an earthquake or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_388" id="Page_388">[388]</a></span>
+an eclipse, they will worship God, not necessarily
+by word of mouth, but by clapping their hands in
+reverence. They generally, however, like the Matabele,
+feel that they cannot approach God. He is too
+great and terrible, so they approach Him through
+mediators, such as departed spirits, prophets, and
+prophetesses.</p>
+
+<p>Mr. Eddy, in "India Awakening," says: "Joined
+with these is the worship of dead parents, where
+spirits are dependent on their survivors for comforts,
+and who will avenge neglect or any deviation
+from custom. This belief is (1) a religion of fear,
+since most spirits are malicious; (2) a religion divorced
+from ethics, since spirits have no regard for
+moral ideas; (3) a religion of custom, since the worship
+rests on tradition and the spirits are apt to
+punish all departure from custom." This statement
+in reference to India can be as truthfully said of the
+pagan African.</p>
+
+<p>The Batonga, many of them, build roofs or small
+huts over the graves of their dead. In them they
+will place skulls of animals and some of the property
+of the deceased. Their descendants come to this
+place, bringing beer and even water, and pour it out
+upon the grave in worship. If one has been considered
+powerful while alive, has been a great rainmaker,
+many people will gather around his grave
+in time of drought and pray for rain.</p>
+
+<p>They have also their living prophetesses and
+prophets, to whom they turn in times of need. These
+claim that the soul of some powerful deceased one
+has entered them and bequeathed to them its power.
+In times of drought these prophetesses&mdash;for they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_389" id="Page_389">[389]</a></span>
+are generally women&mdash;multiply rapidly. In a village
+of about thirty-five huts, near us, there were
+said to be ten prophetesses during the drought two
+years ago. The prophetic term of some of them is
+often very short, much depending on their seeming
+success as rainmakers. Sometimes the prophetess
+will make no claim for herself, but her friends will
+make it for her. The prophetesses are very often
+immoral characters.</p>
+
+<p>Day after day people will come to the prophetess,
+as the time for planting draws near, bringing their
+presents of grain or money and their seed, that she
+may bless it and insure good crops. They come,
+sit down, reverentially clapping their hands and beseeching
+her aid. The hunter brings his gun, to
+receive medicine which will insure him prowess in
+hunting; a man comes asking for medicine for his
+sick wife, who is bewitched, and this medicine is to
+ward off the witchery. There comes from afar an
+old woman, who claims to have the power of making
+their grain last a long time by putting a certain
+medicine into it when cooking. She is believed and
+the medicine is bought and put into the food, and
+she rejoices in her pay. These heathens are always
+very gullible and readily purchase anything which
+appears conducive to their own interests.</p>
+
+<p>One day I saw a number of natives going to a
+village to worship a rainmaker, so I concluded to
+go also and see what they did, for it was a village
+near the mission where the Gospel had often been
+proclaimed. As I reached the place the prophetess
+was in her hut, but a number of women and girls
+were outside, clapping their hands in worship. Their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_390" id="Page_390">[390]</a></span>
+faces were familiar to me, and I could not avoid
+feeling sad to see how little influence the Gospel
+had thus far had on their lives. Finally the prophetess
+came out of her hut and was received with
+more clapping of the hands. She was a large,
+powerful-looking woman and gave orders like a
+queen, nor was she unqueenly in appearance.
+The worshipers were seated around a large hole or
+excavation in the earth, and had several dishes of
+grain which they had brought. They were told to
+sort the grain, selecting only the best and whitest;
+and I am informed that some of the grain, together
+with incantations, is dropped into the opening in
+the earth, but this I did not see. She came and
+greeted me and spoke a few words and then entered
+her hut. A man came to her for medicine for his
+sick wife, who was bewitched, and others went to
+consult with her. Finally I went to the door of her
+hut and spoke with her, inquiring why these people
+were worshiping. She said:</p>
+
+<p>"They want rain. The spirit of a rainmaker who
+died a long, long time ago entered into me and they
+come for me to make it rain."</p>
+
+<p>Knowing them so well, and being jealous for Him
+Whose ambassador I was, I asked, "Do you really
+mean to say that you can cause rain?"</p>
+
+<p>Regarding me quite earnestly for a time she finally
+said, "No, I cannot cause rain."</p>
+
+<p>"Why then are you deceiving the people and pretending
+that you can? God only can produce rain."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," she replied, "He alone can make it rain."</p>
+
+<p>"Then come and tell the people that He only can
+cause it to rain and that they should worship Him."<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_391" id="Page_391">[391]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>She willingly complied, and coming out of her
+hut, she spoke to them very earnestly, telling them
+to worship God, as He alone could cause rain. As
+she claimed to be only an intercessor, and no doubt
+did this to please me, it did not necessarily interfere
+with her role as rainmaker. Even the most
+pagan among them acknowledge Leza (God) as
+the Rainmaker, and these only as His messengers.
+Since the people so readily transfer their worship
+from one to another, they also freely come to the
+missionaries to have them pray for rain. They
+have done this at Macha, and the Lord has graciously
+answered the prayers of His servants. This,
+however, does not seem to bring the native any
+nearer to repentance and God, and one feels loath
+to heed their request, except in the case of Christian
+natives.</p>
+
+<p>With the Batonga, wailing for the dead seems to
+be essentially a religious requirement, and it is most
+religiously observed, so we venture to include it as
+a part of their religion. When the news of a death
+reaches a village, the people begin to wail at once,
+especially if they be relatives, and continue to do so
+while they are moving about, putting away their
+grain, baskets, and the few utensils they own, for
+a stay of several days. They may be heard wailing
+as they pass on their way out of their village to go
+to that of the dead. In a short time perhaps the
+entire village is deserted. We were once camping
+near a village of fifty huts, and news came that a
+relative had died at a mine near Bulawayo. In a
+few minutes nearly all the inhabitants were on their
+way to the house of mourning; for, although the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_392" id="Page_392">[392]</a></span>
+body was buried about four hundred miles distant,
+they firmly believed that his spirit returned to his
+home and took cognizance of all they did. If a native
+is traveling along a path, and word comes to
+him of the death of a relative, he will begin wailing
+at once, and turning around proceed to the place of
+mourning.</p>
+
+<p>Perhaps the reader will more fully understand
+what an African funeral is if he in mind accompanies
+us to one. Apuleni's father had been working
+in a mine in Southern Rhodesia. He became
+quite sick there and was brought home to die. We
+visited his home, and found that they had taken
+him to a temporary hut at some distance from the
+village. It is a very common practice for them to
+do this, especially if one is near death's door. His
+wife and daughters are near him, doing all they can
+to relieve his sufferings. His lungs are diseased and
+it is likely to prove fatal.</p>
+
+<p>One evening word comes to the boy that his father
+has died. He immediately goes home, while
+Sister Engle and I conclude to go and see him
+buried. We have seen the wailings, but not the
+interment. It is already dark when the word comes,
+so we take the lantern and together with several
+schoolboys start for the village. We all go single
+file along the path for nearly three-fourths of a mile,
+down the hill, across the river, which is dry at this
+season. The night is quite dark and only lighted up
+by the flame of the lantern. Up the hill we go, on
+the opposite side, for over a fourth of a mile to the
+village. All along the path the sound of wailing
+comes to our ears. Sometimes it subsides and then<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_393" id="Page_393">[393]</a></span>
+becomes more violent than ever. Before death the
+deceased has been brought back to his hut, and as
+we enter the village the men are sitting around in
+groups outside and are quiet. We proceed to the hut
+of mourning, which is crowded with women and is
+dark, save for the light of the fire in the center, the
+flickering flames of which ever and anon light up
+the weird scene.</p>
+
+<p>We stoop down and enter the low door. It is so
+crowded and hot that farther progress seems impossible,
+and yet we manage to work our way
+among the crowd, seated or standing and keeping
+up their doleful wail. Our object is twofold: We
+wish to see, and also to show our sympathy for the
+boy who has been with us so long and is a Christian,
+and we desire to see the sorrowing wife and
+daughters, for we know them well and believe that
+they will appreciate our presence and words of condolence.
+We finally reach the partition which extends
+over halfway across the hut. Near this lies a
+bundle about four or five feet long. It is a somewhat
+shapeless mass, wrapped with a number of
+layers of blankets and carefully tied. In the fitful
+light one might easily mistake it for a bundle of
+clothes, but we know without asking that this is the
+body of the deceased; for around it are seated the
+wife and daughters weeping bitterly, and lovingly
+patting the wrapping of the body. The rest of the
+women are mingling their tears with those of the
+relatives. We stoop and speak a few words of comfort
+to the wife, but it is little we can give; he had
+frequently heard of Christ, but refused to accept
+Him. As the fire flames up we can see Apuleni<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_394" id="Page_394">[394]</a></span>
+standing in the shadow, and he too is weeping bitterly,
+but more quietly. The boys who came with
+us make their way through the throng and going to
+him mingle their tears with his, and our own eyes
+overflow at the sight.</p>
+
+<p>But this crowded hut, without windows or means
+of ventilation and with a hot fire, is unbearable, so
+we go outside, the boys following. Everyone on
+the outside is quiet or speaking in low tones. Sister
+Engle and I are given blocks of wood for chairs.
+From one of the groups of men the chief, Lupata,
+rises and takes his little hoe, and after he has made
+some measurements, he marks off the grave a few
+feet from the door of the hut of mourning. In the
+meantime wood and logs have been brought and
+several fires kindled, as night is nearly always cool.
+Around these fires the men sit in groups, but the
+fires do not make sufficient light, and some grass
+is brought from the roof of the hut and burnt near
+the grave for light, so the chief may see to do his
+work in digging out the first part of the grave. He
+then hands the hoe to another, who continues the
+work. The ground is very hard and the work proceeds
+slowly, and since they have difficulty in seeing,
+we place our lantern on a stamping block near
+them. This is gratefully acknowledged by the little
+group, and the digging continues.</p>
+
+<p>It is an uncanny scene: The steady, dull thud
+of the hoe as it digs into the hard earth; the various
+campfires lighting up the dusky, grave faces of the
+men in their heathen garb; the steady wail of
+mourning in the hut near by&mdash;all leave an impression
+not soon obliterated. Thus perhaps an hour<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_395" id="Page_395">[395]</a></span>
+passes and several men have taken part in digging,
+the loose earth being removed by means of a basket;
+but the picking of the hoe has taken on a metallic
+ring, for the earth is stony. The chief asks for
+kafir corn, and a daughter comes and shells some
+and places a pan of it near the open grave. Frequently
+some of this grain is dropped into the opening,
+"to soften and appease the earth," they say,
+and the digging continues, though but little progress
+is made. Then the chief calls to the mourners,
+"Be quiet and do not make so much noise. Don't
+you know that the ground is hard and stony?" The
+noise subsides and the digging goes on. Soon the
+friends again begin their loud wailing, and since the
+ground is still hard and stony, the chief finally goes
+to the door of the hut and berates them soundly.
+"Be quiet! Do you not know that you are making
+our work difficult by your lamentations? The earth
+refuses to receive the dead" (because you are loath
+to give it). They become quiet and the work continues.
+They think the very elements are arrayed
+against them, and the friends must propitiate the
+earth by a willing surrender of their loved one to
+its cold embrace.</p>
+
+<p>It is now midnight, and from the progress made
+we conclude that it will take all night to finish the
+stony grave. We speak to the chief and he says,
+"Yes, the interment will not likely be before early
+dawn." We conclude to return home and have
+some rest. At an early hour we are awakened and
+reach the village just at dawn. The grave has been
+dug so that those inside can stand to their armpits.
+Then near the bottom a further excavation is made<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_396" id="Page_396">[396]</a></span>
+in the side of the grave, sufficiently large to receive
+the body. Two men remain standing in the grave
+while the body is carried out amid the lamentations
+of the mourners. It is gently lowered into the open
+grave and placed in the excavation in the side.
+Earth is handed down in baskets, and this is carefully
+packed around the body. Then comes the
+filling of the main part of the opening. As the
+ground is lowered the two men stamp it down with
+their feet, for of course they are not standing on
+the body. When it is nearly full, the men emerge
+and several with sticks carefully pound the earth as
+it is put in until the grave is full.</p>
+
+<p>All this time the friends have been standing
+around weeping. When the grave is filled and all
+the rest of the earth removed, the head one calls
+loudly, "Water!" This is brought in a gourd and
+all the relatives and those taking part in the burial
+rush together; and as the water is poured out on
+the grave, they wash their hands in the falling water.
+The surface of the grave is by this time quite
+wet. The friends throw themselves on the muddy
+grave with their entire force, so that one would
+think bones might be broken. Some throw themselves
+repeatedly, and by the time they have finished,
+their bodies are quite muddy, but the top of
+the grave is pounded down as smooth as the surrounding
+earth, and by the time it is dry the uninitiated
+could not tell the place of burial.</p>
+
+<p>Those participating then go to the river to wash,
+and the chief mourners paint part of their bodies
+with an ash-colored soil. Word has been sent to
+the friends and neighbors and the wailing proper<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_397" id="Page_397">[397]</a></span>
+begins. Men with assegais, axes, or guns walk back
+and forth crying "Mawe"; the women surround
+the grave, wailing and uttering various lamentations,
+such as "My friend." "The father of Apuleni."
+A wife will have on her head the deceased's hat;
+another will be carrying his assegai with the point
+bent; another his stool. All this time the son remained
+quietly weeping, taking no part in the heathen
+demonstrations.</p>
+
+<p>An important part of the Batonga funeral is the
+sacrifice of animals, cattle, sheep, and goats. They
+think these have souls and accompany the deceased.
+The number killed depends upon the rank and
+the wealth of the one who died, although not all
+the animals sacrificed are his property. Relatives
+often bring of their own herds for the purpose.
+Some of the poorer class may have only one animal
+and small children none. At the grave of the murdered
+chief they sacrificed eight head of cattle; at
+that of another chief, a little farther away, there
+were twenty-two killed. The meat of these animals
+is eaten by the mourners. At the funeral which we
+have just described the man was poor. One of the
+relatives slew a goat, and an ox of the deceased also
+was killed. Later in the day, as the people began
+to assemble for the general mourning, several young
+men came leading an ox for sacrifice. They were
+decked out in a most fantastic manner, with pieces
+of bright-colored cloth and various colored paper
+cut in ribbons. As they arrived near the scene they
+made a rush for the grave, brandishing their weapons
+fiercely and seeming to fight the very powers of
+darkness.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_398" id="Page_398">[398]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>One day Sister Taylor and I were present at the
+funeral of the daughter of a chief. She was already
+buried when we reached the place and two oxen
+had been killed. We had no sooner spoken to her
+parents and sat down than a number of cattle were
+driven into the enclosure, between the huts. An
+old native raised his spear and aimed at one of the
+cattle. The rest were at once driven out while that
+one staggered and fell. A woman stepped to the
+grave and loudly called to the dead that the animal
+was slain and its spirit was coming. It was a sickening
+sight. The wailing continued, and some of
+the people would run around the huts in a wild,
+scared manner, as if they were fighting something.
+The air is to them peopled with malevolent spirits,
+seeking to do them harm, and they must ward them
+off. If one is dying they often beat their tomtoms
+in a furious manner to ward off danger. Heathen
+death and burial is a sad thing. It must be seen to
+know how terrible it really is. The warlike Baila
+were accustomed formerly to sacrifice any one
+of another tribe who happened to be in the neighborhood
+at the death of a chief, for all strangers
+were enemies, and Gomo said he saw four or five
+human skulls on a tree as he approached one of
+their huts. The wailing is kept up for several days,
+especially at night, for it would seem that darkness
+adds to their terror of the evil spirits.</p>
+
+<p>We have often endeavored to show them the
+folly of some of their beliefs, and of course the
+Christians take no part with them. Even many of
+the older people are losing faith in some of these
+things, but are continuing to keep up appearances<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_399" id="Page_399">[399]</a></span>
+for fear of the rest. The chief near us says he is
+not going to sacrifice any more cattle; he will keep
+them and train them for oxen.</p>
+
+<p>Some are very eager to have white cloth in connection
+with burial, and one old man at some distance
+north of us, who has a son in Bulawayo, desired
+us to write to the son, telling him to bring
+him a white shroud for burial. Whether this idea
+has come in through the white man I am unable to
+say, but it has probably come through some natives
+who have been to the towns to work and there
+learned something of Christian burial. Among
+some half-civilized natives in some parts of Africa,
+the idea prevails that if one is put in a coffin, and
+has a Christian burial, he will go to heaven.</p>
+
+<p>There is also a second and sometimes a third
+wailing, consisting of a beer drink and a dance.
+This too is generally held at night. The friends
+and relatives come together and the half-intoxicated
+mourners engage in singing and dancing. The actions
+are most lewd and disgusting, for these are
+often genuine carousals of the basest sort; but they
+are most religiously engaged in, and people who
+believe that the departed spirits have such power
+over the living, are loath to ignore any established
+worship of such spirits.</p>
+
+<p><i>Shikazwa</i> is the messenger of witches and is supposed
+to bring harm, sickness, or death to its enemies.
+This class of spirits they say never dwells
+in a human body. They are always disembodied
+spirits and mediums. The belief in witchcraft and
+transmigration of souls is similar to that of the
+Matabele and need not be repeated. The native,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_400" id="Page_400">[400]</a></span>
+too, has firm belief in the efficacy of charms to ward
+off sickness or accidents and to bring good fortune,
+and the dispensers of these articles do a thriving
+business.</p>
+
+<p>There are various other beliefs in the possession
+of spirits, which are not very well understood, and
+some of them seem to be comparatively new, even
+among the natives themselves. While I was in
+Natal, in 1910, a missionary was telling me of a difficulty
+they were encountering among the native
+girls. They became possessed with an affliction not
+unlike hysterics, and when it was started in a neighborhood
+it spread rapidly even among half-civilized
+natives. I say hysterics, because this lady was enabled
+to check its advance by punishing the first
+one who was afflicted in that way in her school. I
+had never witnessed anything of the sort among natives
+until my return to Macha in that same year.
+One day, while out kraal-visiting, I was surprised
+to see something of the same nature. They tried to
+keep the actions of the young woman, who was afflicted,
+from my notice, and hurriedly attempted to
+quiet her by silly remedies. When I inquired what
+was the matter, they quickly replied, "Nothing."
+The boy accompanying me said it was demon possession.
+This has spread over the country among
+the girls and young women. The natives called it
+<i>Masabi</i>. The older people do not care to mention
+it or, if they do, it is in sort of an apologetic manner.
+They claim that the spirit of some bird or other animal
+enters the person and causes her to act so
+strangely. The usual remedy resorted to is to beat
+the tomtoms to drive away the spirit. They claim<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_401" id="Page_401">[401]</a></span>
+that the so-called possession is comparatively new
+in the country, and that it came from a tribe northeast
+of Macha.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_402" id="Page_402">[402]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIIPART2" id="CHAPTER_XIIPART2">CHAPTER TWELVE</a></h2>
+
+<h3>A Few of Their Customs</h3>
+
+
+<p>The Batonga are very dark in color, although
+not always black. Their features are regular
+and well formed, and the people are intelligent
+looking. Some of them are large, but as a tribe
+they are not as powerfully built as the Matabele.
+Their tribal mark amounts to almost a deformity.
+When a boy (or girl) is about fourteen years of
+age, he is taken to the native dentist. The head is
+put on the ground and held in place while the dentist
+with a blunt instrument knocks out the front
+upper teeth, usually four, sometimes six in number.
+The gums and lips become much swollen and inflamed
+by this barbarous procedure; but in time
+they heal, and the child is a Mutonga or Mwila, and
+this deformity proclaims his tribe wherever he goes.</p>
+
+<p>The natives never care to have the process repeated.
+Other natives often go to their missionaries
+to have teeth extracted, but the Batonga seldom or
+never do. They prefer the suffering which comes
+from neuralgia or toothache. This barbarous custom,
+like many others, has nearly had its day, and
+many of the boys have already rebelled since they
+have come into contact with other natives or Europeans.
+It will require more time for the girls to
+break away from it, as they live more secluded lives,
+and have developed less independence of character<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_403" id="Page_403">[403]</a></span>
+than their brothers. A mother will tell her daughter
+that it is a shame for a woman to have upper front
+teeth. She should be like the cow.</p>
+
+<p>They are all very fond of grease for their bodies,
+either animal fat or butter; and in this hot, dry
+climate this is not so objectionable, if they use it in
+moderation, by simply oiling the body to prevent
+the skin from cracking. Many of the women, however,
+use the grease to excess. They grind red ochre
+and, mixing it with the grease, paint their bodies,
+including their hair, red, which is their idea of beauty.
+In this perhaps they are more excusable than
+some others. Clay often is used in dressing their
+hair, and buttons, beads, and shell are sewed to
+their hair, as ornaments.</p>
+
+<p>The men too take great pride in dressing their
+hair, and in this respect generally surpass the women.
+They shave part of the head and let the hair
+about the crown and back of the head grow long.
+This they straighten out, and it looks not unlike
+strings hanging from the back of the head. This is
+carried to extremes among the Baila. There the
+dude lets his hair grow and then goes to the hair-dresser
+who, with grease, hair, and other materials,
+builds it up into a chignon on the top of his head.
+With some, this chignon is only five or six inches
+long, but in the interior of the tribe it is said to be
+sometimes three feet in length. Brother Steigerwald
+on his trip north saw some of these long ones.
+Of course the head cannot help lying uneasy with
+such a weight.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_404" id="Page_404"></a>
+<img src="images/illus405.png" width="600" height="354" alt="Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground." title="Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens." />
+<span class="caption">Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Among these people the clan, or perhaps I should
+say the kinsfolk, forms the unit. They all are closely<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_405" id="Page_405">[405]</a></span>
+bound together and each one more or less responsible
+for the others of his relatives. In marriage,
+death, sickness, or trouble, all are concerned
+in the affair. When difficulty arises the heads of
+each clan listen to the affair and settle the dispute.
+Perhaps the persons most interested may have no
+opportunity of expressing an opinion, especially if
+they be younger and unimportant members of the
+families.</p>
+
+<p>An unfortunate accident occurred among some
+boys and one lost an eye. The one who caused the
+loss was not more to blame than the one who suffered
+the loss. It was purely accidental and without
+malice, and all who were spectators so regarded it.
+The one who suffered the loss desired that no attention
+be paid to the affair, but the father and elder
+relatives thought differently. They called a meeting
+of the heads of the two clans and discussed the
+affair with great deliberation, and in a most dignified
+and respectful manner. The boys were not consulted
+and there was nothing said in reference to its
+being an accident. An eye was lost and it must be
+paid for, and their custom is to require the one
+causing the loss to give all his property. In this
+instance the boy considered at fault was young and
+his father was dead, and all his property was three
+head of cattle and a sheep. His relatives said these
+animals would be given; but the other boy's father
+said, "No, that is not sufficient. I will accept them,
+but the affair will not be settled. When he acquires
+more property, I will take that also." This was
+what the deliberations hinged on. The faulty one
+would be unable to secure any more property; it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_406" id="Page_406">[406]</a></span>
+would all be taken away from him, so his elders were
+willing to give what the boy had, only on condition
+that that would end the matter. It could not be
+settled that day, but later the other party agreed to
+take that and consider the affair settled.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus407.png" width="600" height="466" alt="Cattle Pen of the Batonga." title="Cattle Pen of the Batonga." />
+<span class="caption">Cattle Pen of the Batonga.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>A little fire often kindles a great conflagration
+among them. Once a murderer was taken through
+our premises on his way to the magistrate. He had
+come from a distance and the difficulty was something
+like this: A native had a needle, and his
+neighbor borrowed it and lost it. The owner of the
+needle demanded and received an ox in pay. Some
+time afterward the borrower found the needle, and
+bringing it back to the owner wanted his ox back,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_407" id="Page_407">[407]</a></span>
+but the ox was dead. The trouble finally resulted in
+murder.</p>
+
+<p>In marriage the question of kinship also is prominent.
+Marriage is not merely the union of two
+people, or even two immediate families, but of two
+clans, and the prominent members of both must be
+consulted. If a man sees a girl whom he wishes to
+make his wife, he first consults his parents, and if
+there is any objection among his relatives the matter
+is dropped. If, however, they are satisfied, his
+mother goes to the mother of the girl and asks for
+her daughter. If the immediate relatives of the
+girl object a negative answer is given. If they look
+with favor on the proposed alliance, they consult
+the other prominent relatives, which may require
+considerable time. Some one may object because a
+relative of the proposed groom quarreled a great
+deal with his wife, or some one may affirm that he
+is lazy. Trouble that has arisen between the clans
+in the past, such as that relating to the boy's eye,
+may be a formidable obstacle, although the parties
+concerned may have had nothing to do with the accident
+or the settlement of it. If all are agreed, well
+and good. All this time the bride has had no voice
+in the affair and generally does not know what is
+transpiring.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus409.png" width="600" height="449" alt="A Batonga Family Traveling." title="A Batonga Family Traveling." />
+<span class="caption">A Batonga Family Traveling.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Betrothal among these people may take place
+when the girl is quite young, but generally not until
+the girl is from 14 to 18 years of age, and then it is
+of short duration, as marriage follows soon after it
+is found that all the relatives agree. The old
+people, especially the mothers, take the affair in
+hand, the interested parties merely following their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_408" id="Page_408">[408]</a></span>
+instructions. The groom is told to be ready. Perhaps
+he has been looking forward and gathering together
+the <i>kukwa</i> (pay or dowry) for the occasion.
+He has been buying hoes, from ten to twenty of
+them, for these are always a necessary part of the
+pay, probably because they are all farmers and the
+native-made hoes always command a good price.
+In addition to these, he procures a lot of cloth,
+beads, money, and some assegais. He freely calls
+on his relatives and friends to assist him in procuring
+the needed pay, for they have had some choice
+in the affair. The day is appointed for the wedding,
+but before this arrives the girl is informed who is
+to be her husband. She may or may not be pleased;
+her choice in the matter is wholly ignored. She<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_409" id="Page_409">[409]</a></span>
+has been trained all her life to obey, to keep herself
+hid, and has very little freedom until after marriage.
+Should she even be pleased with the choice, she is
+expected for modesty's sake to protest and cry out
+and struggle and declare she will not submit.</p>
+
+<p>The mother of the bridegroom takes the pay and
+goes to the house of the bride, the groom and his
+best man following. They put up a booth near the
+kraal of the bride for the groom to occupy. We enter
+the village and find the relatives of the bride,
+from far and near, assembled for the wedding, for
+all these expect to receive some of the pay. The
+women and the girls gather and begin to sing the
+marriage song, the tune of which is always the
+same, but the words are improvised for the occasion.
+One of the older ones will lead off and say,
+"This girl is going to be married," and the rest will
+assent by singing in unison, again, "We shall receive
+some hoes, so that we may dig our gardens," and
+again the response. All this is done in a monotonous
+but not altogether unmusical manner. Another
+will take up the lead, and a day or two will be consumed
+in this way until everything that can be
+thought of in reference to marriage, good, bad, and
+indifferent, is repeated in song. The bride, however,
+is not among the singers. We pass through the village
+and a young woman beckons us to enter a hut.
+The other women greet us, but our guide with a
+smile mysteriously leads us into an inner chamber.
+Here is a young woman, greased from head to foot,
+so much so that the grease drips from her body. A
+blanket is thrown around her and over her head, and
+she keeps her eyes down in a miserable-looking<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_410" id="Page_410">[410]</a></span>
+fashion, as if she were crying or pouting, and never
+by the least sign acknowledges our presence. We
+are new to the situation, but it suddenly dawns upon
+us that this is the bride. We inquire, "What is the
+trouble? Does she not wish to be married?" "Oh,
+yes," is the answer, "but she must be sad because
+she is a bride."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus411.png" width="600" height="369" alt="Native Women&mdash;Widows." title="Native Women&mdash;Widows." />
+<span class="caption">Native Women&mdash;Widows.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>In the afternoon the relatives gather around the
+hut of the groom to receive their presents, and each
+makes a choice. Of course they are expected to be
+reasonable in their demands, because sometimes
+there are forty persons to receive presents. The
+father or men nearly related to the bride may take
+more liberty; one or two sometimes demand ten
+shillings. While the best man is trying to satisfy
+all these demands, the groom is often berated soundly
+by some, and even at times suffers bodily violence.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_411" id="Page_411">[411]</a></span>
+If his supply of goods is reasonable in
+amount, so that nearly all are satisfied, the bride is
+given to him at once. If very few presents are on
+hand the proceedings may stop and he or his best
+man be obliged to go among his relatives and secure
+more money or goods. If he is slow in this, difficulties
+may arise between him and the girl's relatives
+until it come to blows. Not long ago a groom, about
+four miles from Macha, was so violently attacked
+that he died from the blows given. This is unusual
+at the present day, but it may have been more common
+formerly. Even if the wedding has passed off
+all right the girl does not at once go to cook for
+her husband; it may be several months or a year
+before they fit her out with earthen pots, baskets,
+and the like and she goes to housekeeping. In the
+meantime she is supposed to be so modest that she
+will not speak to her husband or lift her eyes in his
+presence. The modesty of the Batonga girls is in
+striking contrast with the behavior of many other
+African girls, and immorality does not seem as prevalent
+among the unmarried as in some other places.
+Even the Baila girls are much bolder, both in looks
+and actions. If a girl is bold, and goes about alone,
+she may generally be conceded to be of an immoral
+character. When the bride is finally taken to the
+house of her husband, the father may demand a cow
+or two as additional pay. If the girl refuses to go,
+she often is carried by force. Sometimes the mother
+may refuse to have the girl leave home, and then
+the husband is obliged to live at the kraal of his
+parents-in-law. If he has two wives he often thus
+has two homes.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_412" id="Page_412">[412]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The groom must always show great respect for
+the wife's parents, and especially for her mother.
+When she appears on the scene, he must leave, if
+escape is possible; otherwise he must sit quietly,
+not lifting his eyes in the august presence of her
+who gave birth to his wife, so that the life of the
+native who lives in the same kraal with his mother-in-law
+is not a very pleasant one. When he meets
+his father-in-law he salutes him by clapping his
+hands, and the salutation is returned by the father-in-law
+tapping his chest with his right hand. The
+husband may never call his wife by her maiden
+name, but he gives her a new one of his own.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus413.png" width="600" height="388" alt="Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife." title="Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife." />
+<span class="caption">Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The fact that the marriage is the concern of so
+many, and is so rigidly controlled by the elders,
+places many obstacles in the way of the missionaries.
+It is difficult for Christian boys many times<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_413" id="Page_413">[413]</a></span>
+to gain the hand of Christian girls, and for Christian
+girls to be given to Christian boys, as many of the
+older people object to their daughters entering the
+Christian clan. At present the missionary is not
+allowed to interfere in these native customs, and
+the girl has no recourse. Custom says she must
+obey her parents and relatives, and the law upholds
+custom. Being under such close supervision all
+her life, she has no opportunity of developing independence
+of thought and action like her brother.
+The missionaries are looking for better times, however,
+and ask that all who read these lines pray that
+the day may speedily come when the girls and boys
+may have more right of choice. We have reason to
+think that the day is dawning when this form of
+slavery will also be in the past.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_414" id="Page_414"></a>
+<img src="images/illus415.png" width="600" height="353" alt="Giving the Gospel in Macha Village." title="" />
+<span class="caption">Giving the Gospel in Macha Village.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Again, the fact that kinship has such a hold upon
+the people, and each one is in a measure responsible
+for or dependent upon the rest, renders freedom of
+thought and action difficult among all. It tends to
+retard development of character and makes evangelization
+difficult among them. It does not interfere
+to the extent that caste does in India, but it is
+by no means a negligible quantity. This and blind
+custom form pretty strong bands, for the native
+does not like to stand alone or be odd from his fellows.
+When the Gospel is given to the people they
+may appear to listen attentively and outwardly accept
+what is said, but try to press home the question
+to individual hearts and the leader will answer for
+all, "Yes, we are all Christians. We accept what
+you say. Our hearts are white toward God." One
+who understands the native character cannot avoid<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_415" id="Page_415">[415]</a></span>
+being skeptical when he hears of entire tribes turning
+to the Lord. They may in outward form, for
+what is popular with the leaders is popular with the
+crowd. It is easy for them to put on the form of
+Christianity and go through all the ceremonies of
+it, but with how many there is a change of heart
+remains to be seen by the lives they lead.</p>
+
+<p>The Batonga do not build as good huts as the
+Matabele, nor do they put in a polished floor; perhaps,
+because the ants are so numerous in this part
+of the country, the hut soon falls to pieces and must
+be rebuilt, even though they may have built it carefully
+at first. Their presence also may account for
+the Batonga making bedsteads and chairs, whereas
+the Matabele do not. Their huts too are not only
+the home of the people, but at night, goats, a calf
+or two, dogs, and sometimes chickens are housed
+in the same hut, so that it would not be easy to
+keep a respectable-looking place. As their flocks increase
+they build separate huts for them, as everything
+must be well housed on account of wild animals.</p>
+
+<p>In many other ways they differ from the Matabele.
+They do not have digging-bees like the Matabele;
+in fact, they do not call their neighbors together
+for any kind of work, except that the men
+assist one another in building. If they have a beer-drink
+it is a sociable gathering or a wailing. The
+beer is brought and always tasted first by the giver,
+to show that there is no poison in the cup. Each
+woman digs her own little garden alone, or with
+her children. When we entered the country the
+Matabele would not touch fish, the dislike being so
+great that it almost amounted to a taboo. Among<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_416" id="Page_416">[416]</a></span>
+these people fish is the staple article of diet. The
+only reason that seems plausible is that here there
+are many large rivers and fish are abundant, while
+in the other country there are none. These people
+do not kill twins, but they do the children that cut
+the upper teeth first. Eggs are tabooed to unmarried
+boys and girls, and a superstitious reason is
+given and strongly believed in by them; but back
+of it the object of the elders in enforcing the taboo
+seems to have been to prevent young Africans from
+robbing the nests and lessening the supply of chicks.
+There are many other taboos among the tribes
+which are strictly adhered to, the origin of which
+could easily be traced to expediency.</p>
+
+<p>The Batonga will tell you that the assegai is the
+weapon of the man and the hoe of the woman. As
+one sees the men always armed with assegais, so
+the women generally carry a hoe; nor is it always
+just an ordinary hoe for digging. Her husband
+sometimes procures for her a dainty little hoe, having
+the handle beautifully ornamented with fine
+woven wire. This has no other use than to be carried
+with her as she goes on a journey or to a wailing,
+and she is very proud of it and nothing will induce
+her to part with it.</p>
+
+<p>They have many forms of salutation, more than
+any other tribe of natives that I have met, some
+general and others special, for morning, noon, or
+night, and they are very punctilious about saluting,
+but never in a hurry. They greet not only the one
+they meet, but also inquire about his wife and children,
+especially the baby, and about what he eats,
+as well as other questions in general. If a number<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_417" id="Page_417">[417]</a></span>
+of persons are sitting down and another group approach,
+they too will be seated and perhaps a few
+general remarks may be made; then the salutation
+begins. Every one in the first group must individually
+greet everyone in the second group and ask
+about his health and receive an answer to the same.
+There is no confusion, no hurry. The native does
+not shake hands except as he has learned it from
+the white man; he greets only by word of mouth,
+or on special occasion by embracing.</p>
+
+<p>A very pleasing incident in reference to one of the
+salutations, <i>lumela</i> (rejoice), is given by Rev. Chapman,
+one of the pioneers of the Primitive Methodist
+Mission, and I give it in detail:</p>
+
+<p>"One of these old men could still remember Dr.
+Livingstone's visit to Sekeletu, about 1855. The
+doctor was known among the Makololo as Monare.
+When I showed the old man a photo of Dr. Livingstone
+he was greatly excited.</p>
+
+<p>"'Yes,' said he, 'really and truly that is Monare's
+likeness. He wore a moustache just like that; it is
+indeed Monare.'</p>
+
+<p>"'Can you really remember Monare?' I asked.</p>
+
+<p>"'Of course I can,' said he. 'Why, it was Monare
+who brought us the salutation we generally
+use. Before Monare came we used to say, when we
+met a friend on the path, "<i>Utshohile</i>" ["You have
+got up"]. But when Monare came he said, "<i>Lumela</i>"
+["Rejoice"], and we replied, "<i>E Lumela ntate</i>"
+["Yes, rejoice, my father"]. Why, it was
+he who told the Makololo to live in peace, and rule
+their people well. See how white my beard is? Of
+course I can remember Monare.'"</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_418" id="Page_418">[418]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIIIPART2" id="CHAPTER_XIIIPART2">CHAPTER THIRTEEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Later Years</h3>
+
+
+<p>The work at Macha continued to develop
+slowly but steadily. There are many daily
+duties which always fall to the lot of the
+missionary and which might be classed under the
+head of drudgery, which do not seem to count, and
+yet they are as necessary for the advancement of
+the work as the more noticeable ones, and the year
+1912 was no exception to this rule.</p>
+
+<p>During the rainy season there was also a very
+anxious time, as Baby Ruth became very sick with
+infantile remittent fever. For over a month she was
+very ill and we were afraid that we might lose her.
+Day after day she lay with her face almost as white
+as the pillow, except for a bright spot on either
+cheek. The nearest doctor was one hundred and
+fifty miles away, and the station through which two
+trains weekly ran was thirty-six miles distant, so
+that medical aid seemed impossible, save that given
+by her parents, who anxiously and tenderly ministered
+unto her; but many prayers ascended in her
+behalf and the Lord had compassion on us and restored
+her to health. This climate is treacherous
+for grown people, but especially so for children.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_419" id="Page_419"></a>
+<img src="images/illus420.png" width="600" height="351" alt="Macha Mission, 1913." title="Macha Mission, 1913." />
+<span class="caption">Macha Mission, 1913.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>We have as yet mentioned nothing in reference to
+the medical part of the work. This was not a prominent
+feature, yet from the first all who came for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_420" id="Page_420">[420]</a></span>
+help received attention and many were cured or
+permanently helped. All kinds of diseases are to be
+met with in this climate, in addition to fever. Skin
+diseases seem especially prevalent in many forms,
+some of them the most loathsome imaginable; and
+nearly every village also has its quota of from two
+to four lepers. These lepers freely mingle with the
+rest of the people, no effort whatever being made to
+segregate them. The native will affirm that leprosy
+is not contagious, it is hereditary, and there is reason
+for this view of the case. It makes the heart
+ache to see women without toes and sometimes
+without fingers, and full of sores, nursing beautiful,
+innocent babies, when we think what a life is before
+these little ones.</p>
+
+<p>These people also have their own remedies. When
+one is suffering with pain in any part of the body,
+a very common remedy is to resort to cupping. For
+this purpose they use the horns of animals, usually
+of goats. I once watched one woman cupping another.
+With a knife or piece of sharp tin, she made
+two incisions in the flesh where the pain was. She
+then placed the large end of the horn on this, and
+with her mouth on the small end she removed all
+the air from the horn, which soon became filled, or
+nearly so, with blood. Leaving this horn on the
+place, she in a similar manner applied another horn,
+until three or four had been applied at various
+places. She then carefully removed them, one at a
+time. Since the object had been to extract the
+blood, it had certainly been successful, and in some
+respects the natives are only half a century behind&mdash;that
+is all.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_421" id="Page_421">[421]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In some diseases they very readily come to us,
+and sometimes fifteen or twenty are present at once,
+awaiting their turn. At other times we are called
+to the villages to minister to them. Once some
+natives came from the nearest village to say that a
+woman was dying. Her husband at the time was
+one of the carriers for the brethren on their trip
+north. We hastened over and found her in a little
+dark hut, where we could see nothing, so they were
+told to carry her out into the light, that we might
+see her. The livid spots, spongy gums, and extreme
+debility all helped to indicate a bad case of scurvy.
+She was seemingly in the last stages, and we were
+fearful that the call for help had come too late. It
+was a year of great scarcity of food among the natives,
+and from the report she must have been living
+chiefly on a sort of greens, with no salt even to
+season it. It was now about dark, and they said
+that if something was not done at once she could
+scarcely live until morning. We looked to the Lord
+for direction and then hastened home to procure the
+needed food, which in this instance was quite simple,
+salt water, and boiled-down grape juice, with a little
+vinegar. These were used carefully during the
+night, and in the morning she had improved sufficiently
+to eat other food. In a few days she was
+able to be up, and her husband, on the way home,
+was informed that she had been raised from the
+dead.</p>
+
+<p>As the work advanced, we arranged to use one of
+the huts for a hospital, where those who desired
+might remain and be treated, and a number availed
+themselves of the opportunity. Both Mr. and Mrs.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_422" id="Page_422">[422]</a></span>
+Taylor were quite successful in medical work, and
+some difficult cases came for treatment. In this
+year Brother Taylor treated some very severe
+wounds, ulcers, cancer, a boy with his hands blown
+to pieces by gunpowder, a native badly lacerated by
+a leopard, and an European who had accidentally
+shot himself, in addition to other cases. We have
+also had opportunity at other times of ministering
+to white people.</p>
+
+<p>Whether or not the missionaries have had training
+in such work in civilized countries, the exigencies
+of their surroundings, far from doctors and
+medical help, necessitate their devoting time and
+study to the cases continually brought before them.
+Many of them become quite proficient in treating
+diseases; and perhaps some, in time, become by
+practice more skilled in treating diseases of tropical
+climates than some physicians of temperate
+zones would be, who were unused to tropical diseases,
+even though they might display their sheep-skin
+to show a theoretical knowledge of the science.
+The safest and best course, however, would be to
+acquire some of the theoretical knowledge before
+coming to Africa, and then be ready for the practice.</p>
+
+<p>It is needless to state that the missionary's practice
+among the natives is not a lucrative one. Medicines
+are very expensive, and a physician must have
+a diploma from an English medical college before
+he may charge for his professional services in an
+English colony. Even then his heathen patients are
+not prepared to pay much should he feel to charge&mdash;which
+he generally does not. The missionary's
+labor is one of love, and he rejoices that he has the
+privilege, in a small degree, of being a follower of
+the Great Physician. Aid for the body of the natives
+is one of the best ways of reaching their hearts
+and souls.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_423" id="Page_423">[423]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 379px;">
+<img src="images/illus424.png" width="379" height="450" alt="Ruth Taylor." title="Ruth Taylor." />
+<span class="caption">Ruth Taylor.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>During the two weeks' vacation in July some of
+us concluded to spend the time in evangelistic work
+among the villages. We knew the change to outdoor<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_424" id="Page_424">[424]</a></span>
+life also would be beneficial to ourselves. There
+was one village, Kabwe, composed chiefly of Baila
+people, where an interest was being manifested, and
+several there had been attending school. This was
+distant about fourteen miles by wagon road, and we
+decided to go there, David and his wife and the
+dear little baby, who had come to bless their home,
+accompanying. Word was sent ahead that the people
+should erect a temporary straw hut for them,
+while I occupied the tent wagon. When we reached
+the place we found everything prepared and in
+readiness for us, and the people also. We received
+a royal welcome from all and were soon comfortably
+situated. There were fifty huts in this village, and
+every evening after the people had finished their
+day's work and had eaten their suppers, about fifty
+or sixty of them would come to us, sit around our
+bright log fire, and listen most attentively, while
+the Word was being expounded, and then quietly
+kneel in prayer, and mingle their voices with ours in
+song. In the morning again, before they went to
+their gardens to dig, they would assemble for services.
+On Sunday we gathered on the side of an
+ant hill, in the shade of some trees, and here a
+much larger number came for services. Generally
+during the day David would go to the surrounding
+villages and proclaim Christ.</p>
+
+<p>There were several in this village who occasionally
+came to Macha on Saturday and stayed for
+Sunday services. One Saturday evening at Macha,
+after the rest of the natives had passed out of the
+evening worship, two women from this place remained
+for inquiry and prayer. They very humbly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_425" id="Page_425">[425]</a></span>
+confessed their past life and said they wished to be
+Christians. We knelt in prayer, and I think I never
+before heard raw natives pour out their hearts in
+such intelligent and heartfelt petitions as they did,
+and their prayers for pardon were heard. We were
+pleased to learn, while we were at Kabwe, that these
+women were standing true and being a light to the
+rest.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_426" id="Page_426"></a>
+<img src="images/illus427.png" width="600" height="402" alt="First Christian Marriages at Macha." title="First Christian Marriages at Macha." />
+<span class="caption">First Christian Marriages at Macha.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>One evening during the meetings at this place an
+unusual number of natives were gathered around
+the fire, and the Word was preached by our native
+evangelist with unusual power. A hymn had been
+sung and prayer offered, and the people were told
+that they could go home. Still they sat there without
+a word being spoken, and they were evidently
+in deep thought. Finally a girl arose, and coming
+forward weeping said, "I want to be a Christian.
+Will you pray for me?" Before we knelt, a general
+invitation was given to others who desired to accept
+Christ to come forward. This evidently was
+what they wanted, and at once men, women, and
+girls began to press forward and kneel, and we had
+a most blessed season with them as one after another
+began to open their hearts to the Lord in
+prayer. It was a melting and breaking-up time.
+Among the number who came was the chief of the
+village and several other elderly men and women.
+The next morning they again came together. David
+had gone to other villages for the day, but his wife
+and I held the service. This time, as soon as opportunity
+offered the people began to confess their
+sins and say that they wished to leave their past
+lives and follow Christ. Nor do we have any reason<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_427" id="Page_427">[427]</a></span>
+to doubt their sincerity. The world about them,
+peopled with malevolent spirits, seeking to do them
+harm, and their own accusing conscience would naturally
+drive them to a Savior Who can give them
+rest and peace. Praise God! He can give even
+these older ones freedom from the chains of darkness.</p>
+
+<p>Since we find the younger ones more easily persuaded,
+I believe we too soon become discouraged
+with the older ones and expect too much of them,
+or too sudden a transformation in their lives. I
+was pleased by a few sentences in Brother Frey's
+letter under date of April 4, 1914. He says:</p>
+
+<p>"Last Sunday there was a goodly number of the
+old men present. We have sent out word that
+Brother Steigerwald will have a special message
+for the old on next Sunday, and we are giving a
+special invitation to all the old men to come.... A
+number of these old men have been coming more
+or less regularly for some time. Will you not join
+with us that they might be saved?"</p>
+
+<p>That is the right spirit, and what Brother Frey
+is seeking to do at Mtyabezi we can all do. The old
+want to feel that we have a special interest in their
+salvation, and that we are not going to leave them
+to themselves in the struggle; but let us help them
+to know that there is One Who can and will set
+them free if they will only come. In this little
+meeting at Kabwe even some of the older ones who
+started are still striving to get on the Rock. One
+middle-aged man and his wife, who came forward
+that night, have finally moved near the mission and
+built them a hut there, so that they might learn<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_428" id="Page_428">[428]</a></span>
+more about Jesus. The chief very strongly urged
+our starting a school at that place, which we did
+not long afterwards.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 383px;">
+<img src="images/illus430.png" width="383" height="500" alt="David Moyo and His Wife and Child." title="David Moyo and His Wife and Child." />
+<span class="caption">David Moyo and His Wife and Child.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>We remained at this place nine days and then
+moved to Simeoba's village. Although some of the
+other missionaries had visited this village, I had never
+had the privilege previous to this. It is larger than
+the rest and is made up of three different tribes of
+people, Batonga, Barotse, and Baila, but the language
+of all is more or less similar. They were stranger
+and more shy than those at Kabwe, and as soon
+as we reached the place, Mankunku and I went
+through the village to meet and learn to know the
+people. Everywhere we were kindly received.
+They were greatly surprised to see a white woman
+who could speak their language; and as the word
+was passed along, one after another would come and
+join the number who were conversing. About all
+were in ordinary native garb, but there were two
+or three who evidently had been down to Bulawayo
+to work, and they prided themselves on their European
+clothes; especially did one of these step about
+as if lord of the place. Some of the sick asked for
+help and were ministered unto, and we were pleased
+to learn that some were helped. All were invited
+to assemble around our fire in the evening for services,
+and as soon as their suppers were over they
+began to gather, about one hundred in number,
+around the bright, blazing fire, the shy ones keeping
+in the background where they could not be seen.
+Many of them no doubt had never been at a service
+before, while a few who had been at school at
+Macha could help sing. One or two of those more<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_429" id="Page_429">[429]</a></span>
+pretentiously dressed than the rest evidently had
+attended meeting elsewhere, and were at this meeting
+self-appointed law-and-order men. With such
+a raw crowd as most of these were, we always try
+to sing easy hymns in which there is a great deal of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_430" id="Page_430">[430]</a></span>
+repetition; we also line the hymns before singing
+and have them repeat after us, so that it was not
+long before nearly all joined in the singing. Kneeling
+in prayer is so new an experience that some of
+the uninitiated sometimes consider it amusing and
+begin to laugh. In this instance two or three girls
+caused some disturbance while we were in prayer;
+and we were scarcely on our feet when one of the
+self-constituted policemen jumped over some of the
+others and soundly berated the offenders. Order
+was then restored and the service proceeded without
+any further interruption, after which the meeting
+closed.</p>
+
+<p>The next morning I was awakened by a woman
+outside my tent clapping her hands and thanking
+me, saying, "You are my healer." She had been afflicted
+with neuralgia the day before; and on asking
+for medicine, she had been given a cup of very
+strong hot lemonade, which had cured her.</p>
+
+<p>This day was Sunday, and as the people were
+again invited to assemble, about one hundred and
+twenty came, and we had an interesting service, to
+an attentive congregation. We then turned our
+faces homeward, stopping on the way at Kabanzi,
+one of our regular preaching places, and holding
+a service. We reached home that night, ready for
+school, which was to open the next day, and feeling
+greatly benefited by our outing.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_431" id="Page_431"></a>
+<img src="images/illus432.png" width="600" height="349" alt="Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit to Macha." title="Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers." />
+<span class="caption">Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit to Macha.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>We were all at this time well housed, but there
+still was need of a good store building, as the old
+ones which had been used for this purpose were
+about all tumbling down. David had already made<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_432" id="Page_432">[432]</a></span>
+some brick, so after our return he began on the
+building, with the assistance of some of the boys.
+He erected a very good building 33 x 16 feet, containing
+two small rooms and one large one, with a
+veranda around it. It was a good piece of work
+and was finished in about two months. The large
+room was for his wife and child.</p>
+
+<p>David had never been satisfied with his education
+and was still anxious to attend school, especially
+an English school. He had some opportunity for
+private instruction at Macha, and also taught part
+of the time, but generally there were so many duties
+and responsibilities, both temporal and spiritual,
+resting upon him that he had very little time for
+study, and he felt that he must get away where
+school work would be his first work. We greatly
+preferred that he remain and continue his labors at
+Macha, but he no doubt realized that the pupils too
+were progressing, and he needed more knowledge if
+he was to continue as teacher. The latter part of
+September he started for Natal to attend school. We
+receive a good report of him from his teachers. He
+is said to exert a good influence over the other boys
+in the school, and he is also frequently called upon
+to do evangelistic work among them. Will you not
+join with us that he may be kept humble and not
+get away from his call to give the Gospel beyond
+the Zambezi?</p>
+
+<p>His wife remains with us to help in the capacity
+of Bible woman. Their little girl is a dear, bright,
+intelligent child as she grows up amid civilized surroundings,
+and is a good example of what a better
+environment will do for these people.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_433" id="Page_433">[433]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Sister Taylor had now been away from America
+nearly eight years and had not been to the seashore
+for a change of climate since coming to Interior
+Africa. She had enjoyed good health nearly all that
+time and had been diligent in season and out of season
+in the Master's business. She was a most useful
+and resourceful missionary always, but the time
+had come when she was in sore need of a furlough
+to the homeland. Brother Taylor too had not been
+to the seashore, and it was necessary for both of
+them to leave. They were greatly needed in the
+work at Macha, and we could not see how we could
+get along without them, but too many missionaries
+on the field have, under the pressure of work and
+the needs about them, remained longer than was
+expedient, and paid the penalty with their lives. In
+February, 1913, they left Macha for their homeward
+journey.</p>
+
+<p>About two months previous to this Mr. and Mrs.
+Jesse Wenger had returned to Africa, and came to
+Macha to take the place of the Taylors. Unfortunately,
+however, both of them were stricken down
+with fever about two weeks after reaching the mission
+station. They remained seven months, and
+during that time there was almost one continual
+combat with fever, especially on the part of Brother
+Wenger. United with this was great nervous disorder
+and prostration, so that it seemed impossible
+for him to stand the climate. They greatly desired
+to remain and continue the work, but since it seemed
+impossible for him to endure the climate, he wrote
+to Elder Steigerwald, who finally arranged for them
+to try Johannesburg. We felt sorry, both on Brother<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_434" id="Page_434">[434]</a></span>
+Wenger's account and for the sake of the work,
+that they were unable to remain on the field.</p>
+
+<p>During the time of these seemingly necessary
+changes among the missionaries at Macha, the work
+continued to grow and develop. There was no increase
+in the number of boys, but some of those
+who had been with us were proving helpful as
+teachers and evangelists among the people. The
+work had been branching out and six schools were
+started; in some of which men, women, boys, and
+girls were attending. In the early years the converts
+were of those staying at the mission; but since
+the opening of the out-schools the work was spreading
+much more rapidly, and some of the married
+people, as well as the girls, had accepted Christ and
+were living exemplary lives in their homes. These
+also attended the Inquirers' Class and church services
+at Macha on Sunday.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 366px;"><a name="Page_435" id="Page_435"></a>
+<img src="images/illus436.png" width="366" height="600" alt="Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission." title="Batonga Chiefs." />
+<span class="caption">Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>There are several services held each week at the
+mission. Besides the daily worship, there is on
+Sunday morning an Inquirers' Class and a Members'
+Class, both held at the same hour but in different
+rooms. These are held on this day because so
+many have far to come. Then comes the general
+church service, followed by Sunday-school, for
+which all remain. In the evening there is a song
+and Scripture service for those staying at the mission.
+Thursday morning early is a midweek service
+and testimony meeting; and on Friday night the
+Christian natives have their prayer meeting, presided
+over by one of their number, while the missionaries
+have a prayer meeting in English. In
+addition to these there is a monthly prayer day, the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_436" id="Page_436">[436]</a></span>
+first Friday of each month, on which day all our
+out-schools are closed and teachers and many of the
+pupils meet with us.</p>
+
+<p>These were often times of great blessing to all
+of us, one of which especially might be mentioned,
+the first Friday in May, 1913. On this day there
+were nearly one hundred natives present, consisting
+of members and class members; and eight of our
+boys who had been south to work for a year had
+just returned home and were present. On such
+days many of the Christians were accustomed to
+spend the early morning hours out alone in secret
+prayer, before the opening of the meeting. On the
+above date, as we stepped into the church in the
+morning, we realized that there was unusual manifestation
+of the Spirit's presence among us. Several
+of the boys took part in the opening seasons of
+prayer in a very impressive manner. We read a
+Scripture lesson and for a short time spoke on
+cleansing and consecration and the infilling of the
+Spirit, and they were unusually attentive, which always
+helps the speaker. Expectation of some kind
+seemed in the air. The testimony meeting opened
+with heartfelt testimonies. Then one's testimony
+became a prayer for greater outpouring of the Spirit.
+Again we knelt and he continued in prayer.
+Suddenly the very house seemed shaken, and with
+one accord all were prostrate before the Lord. Some
+were smitten with a spirit of conviction; others began
+a service of praise, and still others lay low, letting
+the Lord talk to them and fill them with His
+own Holy Spirit. The united prayers continued for
+two or more hours, and while there was noise of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_437" id="Page_437">[437]</a></span>
+prayer and praise there could not be said to be any
+disorder, as all but one or two remained at their
+places. Many received a deeper understanding and
+experience of Divine things that day. Once Brother
+and Sister Wenger and myself began to sing, but
+they continued in prayer and we stopped singing.
+There were some present who probably received no
+benefit. In Africa, as in America, there are some
+at such times who follow the rest outwardly at
+least, but do not seem to be benefited in heart.</p>
+
+<p>The latter part of June Elder Steigerwald came
+to see about the work at Macha. It had been one
+and one-half years since his last visit, and we were
+glad for the privilege of again welcoming him.
+With him was Miss Elizabeth Engle, who had for
+six years been a most valued worker at Mtyabezi
+Mission; also Mr. L. B. Steckley, who had two
+years ago come out from Canada as a missionary
+and was helping in the work at Matopo. These two
+were to take up the work at Macha, while Mr. and
+Mrs. Wenger proceeded to the Transvaal, to occupy
+the station at Boxburg, thus enabling Mr. and Mrs.
+Jesse Eyster to return home on furlough.</p>
+
+<p>While Elder Steigerwald was with us at this time,
+eighteen native Christians were baptized and received
+into the Church. Among them were several
+married men, three women, and four girls. Some
+of these were the first fruits of the out-schools. We
+rejoiced that at last we enjoyed the privilege of
+partaking of the Lord's supper with some dark-skinned
+sisters of the Batonga tribe. It was now
+nearly seven years since the mission had opened in this
+place, and these were the first native women to join<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_438" id="Page_438">[438]</a></span>
+with us. The women had also been slow to desire
+civilized clothing, for our desire had been to impress
+upon them more the inner than the outer
+adornment. They were, however, becoming anxious
+to be clothed, and as many of the boys who
+had now grown to manhood had adopted European
+clothing, our congregations were quite different in
+appearance from the old days. At this time also
+two couples were united in Christian marriage.
+These were the first native Christian marriages at
+Macha. Since natives are so often inclined to extremes
+on the dress question, in marriage, we made
+it a special point to say nothing about new clothing
+for the occasion.</p>
+
+<p>A number of others made application for baptism,
+but it was thought best for some to wait awhile, so
+six months later Elder Steigerwald came to Macha
+again. This time he was accompanied by his wife
+and Sister Doner. Ten more natives were baptized
+and there were several candidates who could
+not meet with us at this time. There were also
+three more couples united in Christian marriage.
+There have been fifty-nine baptized at this place,
+but three or four were not as true as we could
+have desired. One of those who had backslidden
+was the first boy brought to the mission, the son of
+Macha. He had never been very zealous in the
+Master's service, and yet his life had seemed consistent.
+The Lord may find a way into his heart
+again.</p>
+
+<p>It frequently happens on the mission field that
+young boys will come to the station, learn, and then<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_439" id="Page_439">[439]</a></span>
+leave without any special manifestation that the
+Gospel has entered their hearts, yet an impression
+has been made on their plastic minds, and it often
+follows and convicts them later in life. So the missionary
+need not be discouraged if the first or second
+invitation fails to bring the native to the foot of
+the Cross.</p>
+
+<p>We greatly enjoyed the visit of Brother and Sister
+Steigerwald, and were eager for them to see
+some of the out-schools. We started out for this
+purpose, but were all taken with fever, one after
+another, and the visits had to be abandoned. Sister
+Doner had come to assist in the work at Macha and
+take charge of the school. She and Brother Freys
+had just returned from a furlough to America, and
+as I had now been in the work nearly nine years
+and needed a change, she, together, with Sister Engle
+and Brother Steckley, was to take charge here
+during my furlough. The latter two had been at
+the place some months and were beginning to know
+and understand the people and surroundings. Sister
+Engle in her capacity as nurse was having ample
+opportunity to care for the sick, who were always
+glad for help. She is always a most capable and
+willing worker wherever needed. Brother Steckley
+too is a consecrated soldier of the Cross and ready
+for whatever comes to him.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_440" id="Page_440">[440]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIVPART2" id="CHAPTER_XIVPART2">CHAPTER FOURTEEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>The Out-Stations</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>Every place that the sole of your foot shall tread upon,
+that I have given unto you.&mdash;Joshua 1: 3.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>Just as the Lord told Joshua to rise up and
+take possession of the land of Canaan for God
+and His people, so we believe He is saying to
+all missionaries whom He sends out into the midst
+of the enemy's country, that He has given the people
+unto them and they should rise and take possession
+in God's name. We often live beneath our
+privileges in this, and our faith so soon becomes
+weak and wavering. God also says to us, "Be
+strong and of good courage."</p>
+
+<p>There are two objects which seem paramount on
+the mission field, and about which everything else
+revolves. These are, (1) the salvation of souls, and
+(2) the preparation of natives to become teachers
+and evangelists of their people. Dispense with
+these fundamental objects and one might as well
+remain at home. Missionaries may differ in regard
+to the best methods of carrying out these purposes,
+and some may even object to the statement just
+made. With some missionaries, education and civilization
+hold a very prominent place, and with a
+few missionary work spells education and civilization,
+and we are sorry to say that the number who
+take this view is increasing. The great body of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_441" id="Page_441">[441]</a></span>
+missionaries, however, of whatever name, are such
+from love of souls. The aim should be to get the
+native really saved and on the Rock, Christ Jesus,
+so that he may become a light in his home. At the
+same time we should seek to train him to become a
+soul-winner among his people, so that a knowledge
+of God may be spread over the country. In this
+way only can the Great Commission be successfully
+carried out.</p>
+
+<p>In Africa, especially, are teachers needed on the
+mission field, for before the missionary comes there
+is no written language, much less any who can
+read. To teach the people to read the Word is not
+only desirable, but it is an absolute necessity if it
+is to be a Light unto their feet in that dark land.
+We do not claim that a native cannot be a Christian
+unless he can read, for some of the older ones live
+exemplary Christian lives, although unable to read
+the Word; but among the younger generation they
+very seldom become established Christians if they
+are not willing to apply themselves sufficiently to
+study so that they are at least able to read the
+Word of God understandingly. Then too the spread
+of the Gospel cannot continue unless some are able
+to read.</p>
+
+<p>I call to mind two able and Spirit-filled missionaries
+who spent two years in self-sacrificing labors
+among the natives of Africa. They went about from
+place to place, giving the Gospel to the people, and
+they were liked by the people and frequently had
+many attentive listeners. Several years after they
+returned home one of them wrote, "We spent two
+years in giving the Gospel to the Africans, and yet<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_442" id="Page_442">[442]</a></span>
+we cannot point to one soul whom we definitely
+helped." We believe they underestimated the value
+of their work, for they always aimed to labor in
+harmony with other missionaries on the field and
+would advise natives to go to the nearest mission
+station. Yet the fact remains that unless the younger
+Christian natives attend school and learn to read
+the Word, and have it instilled into their minds
+from day to day, they are apt to forget and wander
+away.</p>
+
+<p>I have dwelt thus at length on the educational
+feature of the work, because there are many good
+Christians who fail to understand why so much of
+a missionary's time is occupied in teaching the natives.
+It is simply for the reason that that is the
+only means they have of learning to read the Word
+of God. Among the natives of Africa there are no
+schools but the mission schools, and the chief purpose
+of these is to teach the natives to read the
+Word understandingly, so that they may "be able
+to teach others also." On the other hand, since
+schools are such an essential part of the work,
+there are not wanting those who confuse the education
+thus obtained with religion itself, and think
+all who become able to read are Christians. That
+is a consummation devoutly to be wished by every
+missionary, but it is no more true in Africa than it
+is in England or America. The fact that it is not
+true in those civilized countries may have much to
+do with the fact that it is not true in Africa.</p>
+
+<p>Since the day-school at Macha never assumed
+large proportions, and there were many children all
+around us, especially girls, who were not in school,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_443" id="Page_443">[443]</a></span>
+it had been the aim from the beginning to train
+teachers who might be placed in the various villages
+to teach and give the Gospel to the people in their
+homes, and thus multiply the work done by the missionaries
+manyfold. A number of schools had been
+started in this way. In this work it is always necessary
+to use great care in the selection of teachers,
+that they may be teachers of righteousness as well
+as teachers of books. A boy may be quite apt as a
+scholar, and so far as is known be a moral person,
+but if he has not yielded himself to Christ as his
+Savior and has not a love for souls in his heart, he
+often does more harm than good as a teacher. In
+other words, he must be a missionary as well as a
+teacher, and lift up Christ among them. We often
+send a boy, who is prepared, back to his own village
+as teacher, if we have such a one. Mr. Worthington,
+Secretary for Native Affairs, when informed of
+this said, "I greatly approve of your custom of sending
+natives back to their own home to teach their
+people. I think it will obviate many difficulties in
+the way of native teachers."</p>
+
+<p>The out-schools are superintended by the missionaries,
+who if possible visit them once a month
+and advise the teachers in reference to the work. If
+the schools are too far away for the pupils to attend
+church services at the mission, arrangements are
+made for services to be held more or less frequently
+at the schools. The native teachers also hold
+daily worship and Scripture reading with their
+schools, and all others who desire to attend.</p>
+
+<p>In order that my readers may gain some information
+in reference to the out-schools connected with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_444" id="Page_444">[444]</a></span>
+Macha Mission, you are invited to accompany me
+on a visit to them, such as I made shortly before returning
+to America. Miss E. Engle will accompany
+me, as she has charge of them during my absence.
+Two of the boys are also going as leader
+and driver. While we are absent on this trip, Apuleni
+will have charge of the school at Macha. He
+was the second boy to come to the mission, nearly
+seven years before, and has been with us ever since,
+except for nearly eighteen months, when he, with
+other boys, went away to Salisbury to work. He has
+made good in school, and has accepted Christ as his
+Savior. He says his chief desire is to know the will
+of God and do it. He is well versed in the Scriptures,
+is a good teacher and helper in Sunday-school, and
+reads, not only his own Tonga language, but also
+Zulu quite readily, and English, and acts as an interpreter
+from these two languages into his own.
+He is also prepared in the other branches taught.
+As he is our assistant teacher all the time, we know
+the school will not suffer in his hands.</p>
+
+<p>We are going in the large two-seated spring wagon
+with a white canvas top, sent out by the Board
+two years ago. One of the seats is removed, and in
+the back part of the wagon is placed a box containing
+food, dishes, and the like equipments for our
+meals. There is also put in a large five-gallon can
+of good drinking water, two folding canvas bedsteads,
+a bundle containing bedding, and a mosquito
+net, and underneath the wagon in a framework is a
+tent which we have lately acquired. There is also a
+small bag of cornmeal, a tin of ground peanuts, some
+dried greens for the boys, and some whole peanuts<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_445" id="Page_445">[445]</a></span>
+for all of us. Where the dashboard was originally
+is now a long box in which are placed kettles
+and cooking utensils. And we do not forget to stow
+away in the box of the seat a quantity of bananas
+and lemons, of which the mission has an abundance;
+also some fresh vegetables. A small canvas bag, in
+which the drinking water is cooled, hangs on the
+side of the wagon. Four oxen are inspanned and
+one boy takes hold of the strap in front to lead the
+oxen, and another, with a long, slender pole, to
+which is tied a long, slender leathern lash, drives.
+He sometimes sits on the box in front and sometimes
+runs along the side.</p>
+
+<p>We remember the times, not so very long ago,
+when we were not so comfortably equipped for traveling
+as we are at present. We walked many weary
+miles to see the people, and thoroughly enjoyed it
+too, even though the hard earth at times was our
+bed and the open canopy of heaven our tent, and native
+food in part supplied our needs. Then it was
+not possible to visit as many places in a day as now,
+and frequently when we arrived we were too tired
+to do justice to the Word. Then also we failed to
+reach many villages, because of the distance. Now
+it seems almost too good to be true that we are so
+well supplied, for the Lord has again wonderfully
+verified His precious promise, "to do exceeding
+abundantly above all that we ask or think." Praise
+His Holy Name! Yet we would not, if we could,
+do away with those early days and the blessings
+attending them, and we are better able to appreciate
+present favors by contrast.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_446" id="Page_446"></a>
+<img src="images/illus447.png" width="600" height="348" alt="School at Kabanzi Village." title="School at Kabanzi Village." />
+<span class="caption">School at Kabanzi Village.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Usually we endeavor to start not later than sunrise,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_447" id="Page_447">[447]</a></span>
+so that we may travel in the cool of the morning;
+for the sun becomes quite hot in the middle of
+the day, and it is advisable then to be under shelter.
+At this time, November, however, the morning is
+cloudy, so that we may have rain; but the clouds
+make traveling pleasant and we start. We go north
+and a little east. Where the roads are good the
+oxen trot off briskly; but in many places there are
+deep ruts, caused by the heavy rains of previous
+years, which make progress slow. In some places
+the ruts are a foot or two in depth, and it is necessary
+to make a new road along the side, for there
+are no government-built roads in the country.</p>
+
+<p>The grass of the previous year's growth was burnt
+off in June or July; and ever since, as far as the eye
+could reach, nothing could be seen except the great
+stretch of undulating reddish-brown earth, destitute
+of everything, save here and there little patches of
+dried grass, which had escaped the scorching fires,
+and scattered trees, almost destitute of leaves. There
+has been no rain for six or seven months; yet spring
+is approaching, and already in the rich valleys may
+be seen tender blades of grass springing up. On the
+bare brown hills here and there are flowers of various
+kinds, which gladden the eye and relieve the
+monotony of the scene. Where the moisture comes
+from at this season of the year to produce such delicate
+blossoms is a cause of conjecture. Then too,
+already many of the trees and shrubs are putting
+forth their tender, beautiful green leaves, some of
+which look as delicate and shining as wax; and occasionally
+one sees a tree or shrub with white, yellow,
+or red blossoms preparatory to putting forth<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_448" id="Page_448">[448]</a></span>
+leaves. All these changes we note with pleasure as
+we ride along in the cool, bracing air of the early
+morning.</p>
+
+<p>At one place is to be seen Chikuni stump, which
+seems almost like a stone, and has been a landmark
+within the memory of the oldest inhabitant. The
+majority of trees which are to be seen on this road
+are hardwood, but very crooked and scrubby looking,
+no doubt owing to the yearly fierce onslaught
+of fire and also the nature of the soil. Along the
+road is one solitary mahogany; a large, spreading
+tree this is, but not a very good sample of its kind.
+There is also a large tree known as the sausage tree;
+its immense bean pods, one to two feet in length and
+a foot and over in circumference, reminding one of
+a great piece of sausage. Numerous acacia are to
+be seen, and as we approach the river, five miles
+from home, we see six large, fine-looking fig trees,
+their rich, dark-green foliage furnishing beautiful
+shade. Although this is the Myeki River, there is
+no water where we cross, yet the deep, bridgeless
+ravine makes crossing for heavily-laden wagons difficult
+at all seasons, and almost impassable during
+the rainy seasons. Here is a large village, but we
+proceed two miles further and come to Mianda
+School, where Charlie Sichamba teaches.</p>
+
+<p>This is not a large village, but it is the home of a
+number of some of our best boys; those who have
+been of greatest assistance in teaching and in industrial
+work. The village has been lately moved,
+and huts are not yet all completed, nor is the schoolhouse
+finished. We drive near and are met by a
+number of the pupils, for we are always certain of a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_449" id="Page_449">[449]</a></span>
+welcome at this place. The rain, which has been
+threatening, begins to come down, and one of the
+new huts is given to us. Wood is brought and a
+fire is kindled in the center, that we may have
+breakfast. A mat is placed on the nicely-swept
+floor, and on this the tablecloth is spread and the
+breakfast placed after it is cooked. This consists of
+corn porridge, with milk, bread, butter, eggs, fruit,
+and coffee if we desire it. Muguwe sends us milk,
+for he always sees that we are furnished with fresh
+milk when we come here. The boys are given another
+hut in which to cook their food. The meal
+being over, we hand the dishes to one of the boys to
+be washed, while we turn our attention to the school
+and work for which we came.</p>
+
+<p>By this time the rain is beginning to abate, and
+the pupils, about twenty in number, assemble in
+another hut for school. Today there are not quite
+as many as usual, because there is a wedding in
+progress. Here is Muguwe, a tall, odd-looking native,
+over thirty years of age, and a Christian, and
+so far as we can learn he is consistent in his life.
+Learning is difficult for him, but he is making progress
+and is quite persevering. His wife for a long
+time was opposed to his serving the Lord, but she
+is changing, and we trust that she too may accept
+Christ as her Savior. The stepdaughter is also in
+school and is making progress in Divine life. There
+are several other women and some girls and boys.
+Some of them seem very slow in accepting Christ,
+but there has manifestly been a change in the lives
+of some, and a number of the old women are believers.
+During the last year of drought, when the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_450" id="Page_450">[450]</a></span>
+people of nearly every village were so zealous in
+their heathen worship for rain, this was one of the
+two who stood true. After school is over, the older
+ones are summoned to join with us in worship, and
+we take the occasion once more to give them a
+Gospel message, to which they listen attentively.
+Here are Tom's mother, Jim's mother, and Chikaile's
+mother, all of whom seem to believe as far as they
+have grasped the Truth.</p>
+
+<p>We are especially grieved today, however, because
+of the wedding which is progressing, for we
+knew nothing about it until we were on the journey.
+The bride is a Christian girl and has had a good
+experience, although she is not yet baptized. She is
+only about fifteen years old, or perhaps a little older,
+and has been given to an unsaved boy, who, however,
+has no other wife. We inquired of one of the
+boys if she wished to marry him. He looked at us
+in sort of a pitying manner, as if to say, "You
+should know better than to ask such a question,"
+and replied, "They did not ask her." After the
+service we go up to the hut of the bride, and find
+her not feigning to cry, as some of the brides do, but
+in reality weeping most bitterly. At the sight of us
+her sobs break forth afresh. We try to comfort her,
+but what can or what dare we say? We speak to
+the mother, who also has confessed Christ, but she
+is the first wife in a line of five. She frankly acknowledges
+that she preferred to give her daughter
+to a Christian, but was overruled. The brothers too,
+who are Christians, could do nothing, the older relatives
+having arranged the affair. Her father is
+chief of the village and an influential man. He has<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_451" id="Page_451">[451]</a></span>
+always been a friend of the mission, but he feels
+that he can manage his own affairs best, and his
+children are taught implicit obedience. We know
+that remonstrance is useless, and from his conversation
+it is evident that he thinks he has provided
+wisely for his child, because the groom is son of the
+chief at Kabanzi, where one of our schools is located,
+and the young fellow had even attended
+school for a few days. The affair might be more
+serious, and we hope and pray that in time both may
+be Christians.</p>
+
+<p>The next school is four miles farther on this road,
+at Impongo, and the teacher there is Singuzu, whose
+home is at Mianda. He is not so far advanced in
+learning, so he recites to Charlie. He is, however,
+a conscientious and Spirit-filled Christian. He accompanies
+us to his place of teaching. This is a
+new school, has been in session only about three
+months, and is held out in the open air in the shade
+of a tree; but they are gathering poles to build a
+hut. The people had asked several times for a school,
+and we finally concluded to give them one. The
+teacher is doing his work faithfully, and progress is
+being made by the pupils in learning to read; but
+there are some things in connection with this school
+which are making the work very unsatisfactory,
+and both the teacher and ourselves think best to
+discontinue it. After the recitations are finished a
+service is held with them and they seem interested.
+When the late dinner is over it is decided to go
+about six miles west, to Kabanzi, the next school.</p>
+
+<p>By this time it is somewhat late in the day, but it
+is hoped that our destination may be reached before<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_452" id="Page_452">[452]</a></span>
+dark. Singuzu, who is a better driver than the one
+accompanying us, is asked to go along and drive.
+This road is very little traveled and a white man
+might not be able to find it; but the natives accustomed
+to these trackless wilds do not soon become
+lost. Nearly the entire distance is through the
+brush, consisting of both large trees and short underbrush,
+so that the journey is more or less impeded.
+We travel along at a fair speed for oxen, as
+the driver is accustomed to dodging trees and
+shrubs; but darkness overtakes us before the village
+is reached. Progress is now slow, since the veldt
+from this to the village is full of the stumps of trees
+cut off, native fashion, two or three feet above
+ground, and we are fearful of running into these and
+breaking the wagon. Finally the wagon does become
+fast and the oxen must be unhitched until it is
+extricated. We again enter the wagon and move
+on. The welcome sight of the village fires shining
+out amid the darkness indicates that the end of the
+journey is near at hand. As we approach, a pack
+of dogs greet us with their loud barking, and light
+after light shines out through the open doors of the
+huts, or from the courtyard where the men, in the
+shelter of a semicircle of reeds, sit and palaver.
+There is no more pleasing sight to travelers through
+African wilds than the bright and cheerful blaze of
+the indispensable campfire, which answers for light
+and heat, for preparing the evening meal and warding
+off the wild animals.</p>
+
+<p>As we reach the village, a number of natives
+emerge from their huts in order to ascertain who
+these intruders are, coming along the back of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_453" id="Page_453">[453]</a></span>
+village. On seeing their missionaries they gladly offer
+their services to conduct the wagon through the
+trees and stumps to the schoolhouse and teacher's
+hut. Sister Engle and I conclude not to have the
+tent pitched for the night, but to have our beds
+placed in the large, roomy schoolhouse, which
+boasts of a good plank door. We have had a busy
+day, for we have visited two schools, held two services,
+prepared our food, and traveled seventeen
+miles, so we are soon resting on our comfortable
+stretchers.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning breakfast is prepared early, for
+the school is to begin earlier than usual so that we
+may continue our journey. We, however, take time
+to go over to the village and have a chat with some
+of the older people. This is Kabanzi village, and it
+has our oldest and best school. Before the opening
+of school services were held here frequently, and
+some were interested, but no one gave indications
+of wanting to follow the Lord until after school
+opened. Several boys from this place were converted
+while attending school at Macha. The teacher
+is Jamu, a careful, painstaking and faithful
+Christian. He is greatly interested in the spiritual
+as well as the intellectual advancement of his pupils.
+He carefully reads and explains the Word to
+them day by day, and he is a good evangelist. While
+in school at Macha he was always one of our best
+workmen in laying brick, sawing and thatching.
+There are generally about fifty pupils enrolled in
+this school and about thirty-five in daily attendance.
+Twelve have been baptized and nearly all the rest
+are in the Inquirers' Class.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_454" id="Page_454">[454]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>We enter the schoolroom and the pupils march
+around the building, then enter and take their places
+on the logs extending across the room. All kneel
+and repeat the Lord's prayer, and then teaching begins.
+A few are reading the charts, some are in the
+first book, a number in the "Bible Stories," while a
+few are reading the Gospels of St. Mark and St.
+Matthew. A number of pupils are married men and
+women. The women bring their babies, and yet
+with the interruption caused by these, they have
+learned to read well and are in the "Bible Stories."
+They exhibit remarkable perseverance, for they not
+only attend school, but dig in their gardens, carry
+wood and water, grind their meal, and prepare their
+food. On Sunday they walk nine miles to Macha to
+church, for they, together with their husbands, are
+Christians, or seeking to be such. The teacher says
+that they started to school first; then their husbands
+followed. The husbands also work in the gardens,
+build huts, hunt game for food, and part of the time
+work for the white man in order to obtain money
+for taxes and clothes. They have also lately been
+buying cloth to make dresses for their wives, and
+one day I came upon one of the men carefully washing
+his wife's dress. The Gospel is making them
+better husbands and more careful and considerate
+of their wives. The heathen worship, with its attendant
+evils, together with vice, beer, tobacco, and
+kindred habits, is being banished from these few
+homes at least. When other villages were worshiping
+their rainmakers, these too were daily worshiping,
+but it was the Lord of lords Whom they worshiped.
+When the older ones desired to resort to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_455" id="Page_455">[455]</a></span>
+their heathen worship, the Christians said, "No; if
+you do we shall build a kraal of our own." This
+means that there are many in the village who are
+not Christians, and some of them stoutly oppose the
+school; but the chief is favorable, as some of his
+children are Christians. There are also several old
+women in addition to the pupils who are breaking
+away from their old worship and accepting Christ.
+There is one <i>old</i> woman here who has come out very
+bright in her Christian experience. She meets with
+much opposition, but she does not waver.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 450px;">
+<img src="images/illus457.png" width="450" height="347" alt="Sikaluwa." title="Sikaluwa." />
+<span class="caption">Sikaluwa.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>After we have remained one session of school,
+some of the older people are called and we have a
+service for very interested listeners. The boys then
+inspan the oxen and we proceed west to Kabwe
+School, about five or six miles distant. These are
+the people with whom we held a week's service over
+a year before. At this place our tent is pitched and
+we prepare to spend the night. This is a Baila village,
+and at first Sikaluwa had charge of the school,
+as he was brought up among that tribe and is a good
+Christian boy. He did good work for nearly a year,
+but he did not wish to continue. We were in doubt
+as to whom we should send to teach them; and
+after praying over the matter we concluded to consult
+the Christians in Members' Meeting, and inquire
+if anyone felt led of the Lord to take up the
+work there. At the close of the meeting we were
+surprised to have Chikaile come and say that he was
+willing to undertake the work, the Lord helping.
+He had been at the mission for some years and was
+quite capable of teaching. He is also one of the
+most cheerful and willing workers, but he is so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_456" id="Page_456">[456]</a></span>
+young, perhaps only seventeen years of age. Because
+he is such an earnest and conscientious Christian,
+however, he was given the privilege, and has
+succeeded beyond our highest expectations. The
+kraal had just been moved and divided, so that he
+was obliged to build a new hut for himself. This
+he speedily did, and then began a schoolhouse which,
+with a little assistance from the villagers, was soon
+under roof. There is nothing lazy about the boy,
+and the school, as well as the work of the Lord, is
+progressing in his hands. He soon learned to know
+the people and the kind of lives they are leading,
+and is fearless in exposing sin, although he is always
+mild and humble in his demeanor. With him,
+as well as with other teachers who do not teach in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_457" id="Page_457">[457]</a></span>
+their homes, a boy is sent, so that he need not be
+alone.</p>
+
+<p>In this school we find twenty-four pupils in attendance,
+among them two elderly women. One of
+these, the mother of another Christian woman, has
+made a good confession. She entered school and we
+smiled somewhat incredulously, thinking that she
+was too old to learn; but our next visit to the school
+revealed the fact that she was making decided progress,
+and it seemed evident that she would soon be
+able to read the Gospel. After school was over,
+services were held and the people invited back for
+night meeting. We then prepared our food. During
+these visits to the villages the people sometimes
+bring a present of a chicken, a dish of peanuts, some
+milk, or whatever they think we might relish. Occasionally,
+on a hot day, it is a cup of ibwantu. This
+is a gruel made of the meal of native grain into
+which has been placed crushed root with an acid
+flavor. It is usually made in the evening and consumed
+the next day. It is not alcoholic, and has a
+very cooling and refreshing taste. It will be brought
+in a large cup, and as is their custom, the donor
+usually takes a sip first to show there is no poison
+in it.</p>
+
+<p>When this village was moved and divided into
+three parts, we about gave up the thought of opening
+school again, but the chief was not satisfied, and
+promised that if school was reopened he would see
+that the children came together to learn; so we
+agreed to send a teacher. Six very nice young girls
+came from Kabwe to stay at Macha and attend<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_458" id="Page_458">[458]</a></span>
+school; but others entered to fill up the ranks and
+the work continues.</p>
+
+<p>Early the next morning we start on our homeward
+way. The road takes us back past Kabanzi,
+and there we turn south toward Macha. On the
+way we come to a place which at first sight might
+be taken for an old deserted native village; but a
+closer inspection reveals the fact that the huts were
+never finished. Here is the framework of twelve
+large, nice-looking huts. Some have just been rightly
+started; of some the walls are finished, and on
+others the builders had begun to put on the roof.
+Poles are scattered all around, and some poles are
+at a distance from the huts, but near the road, and
+look as if those who were carrying them had
+dropped them hastily. The whole has the appearance
+as if a number of people were busily engaged
+in building a village and were surprised by an enemy
+in the midst of their labors and slain, their work
+unfinished. What does it mean? This question we
+asked ourselves on first seeing it. The answer was
+this: They were indeed surprised by an enemy,
+but that enemy was death. The headman sickened
+and died; his son followed. Concluding that the
+place was bewitched, the rest at once abandoned it
+and went elsewhere, leaving all those fine, straight
+poles to rot.</p>
+
+<p>On the journey homeward we again come to Myeki
+River, for this is a very winding stream, and this
+crossing is several miles farther west. At this place
+there is another school. We stop near the village,
+where Mafuta the teacher lives, and he, with some
+of the rest, comes out to meet us. We have driven<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_459" id="Page_459">[459]</a></span>
+about ten miles this morning and now hastily prepare
+breakfast and eat. Some tall, beautiful bottle
+palms grow in this vicinity, and while we are eating,
+the teacher brings us the fruit of one, a part of which
+is eaten with relish. We then start off on foot for
+the school, which is about two miles distant, near
+another village. We leave the lead boy to herd the
+oxen, while the little herdboys of this village drive
+their cattle ahead, so that they may learn in school
+and at the same time watch the cattle.</p>
+
+<p>As we walk along the path, through this somewhat
+dense forest, let me tell you something of this
+teacher, Mafuta. He is older than the most of our
+boys and was already grown when we reached Macha,
+seven years ago. He at that time worked for us
+a few months. For over three years, however, he
+showed no inclination to want to learn or be a Christian,
+and seldom came to Church. He was just like
+the other natives in the village and indulged in
+their sinful and lazy ways. Finally he informed one
+of the boys that he was coming to school until he
+had sufficient money to take a wife. We were quite
+skeptical when we heard it; for we did not expect
+that he would remain long, and then too school was
+not a money-making place. He came and applied
+himself to school work. He was slow and dull, but
+he was diligent and made progress.</p>
+
+<p>He entered the Inquirers' Class and the Lord
+found a way into his heart. One day in the class,
+when a number came forward for special prayer, he
+became in earnest and found what he sought&mdash;pardon
+for his dark past, and peace in his soul. As he
+took his seat his face wore a look of new-found joy,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_460" id="Page_460">[460]</a></span>
+and he arose and testified as to what the Lord had
+done for him. In work also he was faithful, and he
+soon learned to handle the oxen in plowing and in
+the wagon, and thus he received higher wages. By
+close economy he gradually was able to get a little
+money ahead. In time he was baptized. He gained
+one of the nicest girls in the neighborhood as his
+wife, is married by Christian marriage, and is now
+teaching this school. He is not as quick at learning
+as some, but he is faithful and painstaking and is a
+living Christian among them. When we look at
+him and think how little faith we had in the early
+days, we are reminded of the words, "The Lord
+seeth not as man seeth; for man looketh on the outward
+appearance, but God looketh on the heart."</p>
+
+<p>We visit the school and find twenty-four scholars
+assembled, the teacher's wife among the number.
+It is a new school, but the pupils are making advancement.
+After services we retrace our steps to
+the waiting wagon, and then return to the mission,
+which is only about four and one-half miles distant.
+We have spent three days out, have visited five
+schools and have traveled thirty-six miles in somewhat
+of a circle. We have enjoyed the trip and the
+change from the routine of the mission station, but
+a person is glad to reach home, after a few days
+spent on the veldt.</p>
+
+<p>Again we desire to visit Chilumbwe School, which
+is about seven miles northeast. Here the natives
+were asking for some time for a school. We had
+come to the conclusion, however, that no more
+schools would be opened until the people of the village
+erect some sort of a schoolhouse. They are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_461" id="Page_461">[461]</a></span>
+always ready to promise that they will build, but if
+a teacher is provided before the house is built they
+generally are slow in carrying out their promise.
+Then too it is not best to make the work too easy
+for them. They appreciate most that which has
+cost them something. The work among them is
+new, and as the schools are especially for children,
+and money is always scarce, we dare not expect too
+much at present. If they are eager for a teacher
+they can at least build a schoolhut, feed their teacher,
+buy their own books, and these they are expected
+to do. Even the poorest buy their books, and if they
+cannot bring money they often bring a chicken or
+grain in pay. The people at Chilumbwe finally managed
+to build their hut and school began a month
+ago.</p>
+
+<p>We again take the wagon and go north as before,
+but soon turn off toward the east. We pass through
+Chikuni, where formerly there was a large village,
+and over under that large, spreading fig tree Sikaluwa
+taught school. But sickness entered the village;
+the chiefs wife died, a child followed, and then a
+young man, all in the same village. All these died
+in a similar manner which, from the description given
+afterwards, must have been <i>spinal meningitis</i>.
+They thought it was witchcraft and became afraid
+of one another. So they separated, some going one
+way, some the other. We pass several kraals on the
+way and finally reach Chilumbwe.</p>
+
+<p>The chief of this village is rich in cattle and is an
+unusually intelligent and well-bred native. Jim is
+the teacher. Yes, he is that short, well-dressed native
+with the colored glasses on. He is the one who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_462" id="Page_462">[462]</a></span>
+lost his eye and is very sensitive on account of the
+defect; but he is a splendid fellow, faithful, humble,
+and an excellent workman. He is moreover a sincere
+Christian, anxious to know and do the will of
+his Heavenly Father.</p>
+
+<p>As the wagon approaches the schoolhouse we are
+greeted by the chief and a number of the pupils, for
+they are expecting the visit. It is decided to have
+services first so that the older ones need not remain.
+The pupils, together with some men and women
+from the village, gather around a large shade tree,
+the chief taking a prominent position. All the pupils
+join lustily in the singing, seemingly anxious to
+impress upon their missionaries that they are progressing
+in that at least. A service is then held,
+after which the pupils gather in the little schoolhouse
+for school. There are about fifty pupils already
+enrolled in this school, some being from neighboring
+kraals, and there are over thirty in attendance
+today. They are starting out well, but how
+many will continue remains to be seen. The pupils
+are all young men and boys, and the teacher informs
+us that they will not allow the women and
+girls to attend school. We cannot force them to let
+the girls come, nor is it wise to attempt it, so we
+just look to the Lord and wait until He can find a
+way into their hearts. At all the other out-schools
+the girls generally outnumber the boys. This being
+a new school, nearly all read on the charts; only two
+or three have passed that stage, but we have two
+beginning books along and they are bought. There
+are no Christians at this place, and the one that
+seems most interested in the Gospel is the chief's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_463" id="Page_463">[463]</a></span>
+son. He was badly mauled by a leopard a few
+months ago, and the chief brought him to the mission
+to be treated. Sister Engle very successfully
+treated his wounds; and while he was with us he
+came under the influence of the Gospel, and we believe
+he is reaching out for more knowledge of his
+Savior.</p>
+
+<p>All the schools have now been visited. There is
+a call for a school southwest about six miles, and
+there is a teacher for it; but the people have not yet
+erected a schoolhouse. The villages near have asked
+for schools and have had them; but many have opposed
+the Gospel and the work has not proved a
+success among them. There are a few in each village
+who are Christians, and some of them are with
+us and others coming to day-school. We are not
+yet discouraged with these at our doors who have
+been hardening their hearts against the truth. God
+has yet among them some who will come out strong
+for Him, for we know that His Spirit is striving with
+them and with some it will not strive in vain. It can
+be seen that a knowledge of God is slowly spreading
+over the country and real miracles are being performed
+in the hearts of some of these erstwhile
+heathen; miracles greater than the raising of Lazarus
+from the dead. Souls are being raised to walk in
+newness of life and are living witnesses to those
+around them of Christ's power to save to the uttermost.
+<i>God's love</i> has bridged the immense chasm
+in the lives of some between the densest, darkest
+paganism and the glorious Light of the children of
+men. But we must be patient with the slow ones,
+for it is not always those who are the most ready<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_464" id="Page_464">[464]</a></span>
+to accept who are the most stable. Some delay
+long years and finally come out strong and vigorous
+for Christ. Where only rude, coarse heathen songs
+were heard, anthems of praise to God now arise, and
+daily prayer ascends.</p>
+
+<p>It may be seen that the natives are governed by
+a number of petty chiefs, and that they frequently
+change the location of their villages. This makes
+the work among the out-schools more difficult; but
+others are calling for schools, and already the past
+year over 200 children were enrolled in the out-schools,
+in addition to those at Macha; and this
+where only a few years ago the names <i>school</i> and
+<i>God</i> were not known. We are touching only a
+small spot thus far and see a great wall of darkness
+just beyond; a darkness which we occasionally seek
+to penetrate. Other bodies of missionaries also are
+laboring in some sections of the country, but there
+is much land ahead yet to be possessed, and many
+natives still in darkness who can say, "No man careth
+for my soul."</p>
+
+<p>The salvation of Africa rests largely upon the native
+converts, and we rejoice for the manner in
+which some are coming to the help of the Lord's
+cause, and we trust they may ever have the prayers
+of all who are interested in the evangelization of
+this vast continent. Natives, however, cannot do
+the work alone. There always is need of white
+workers to oversee and direct the work, or it will
+not advance satisfactorily. We believe the Lord desires
+us to ask largely these latter days, but in this
+instance we shall be modest in our request, and that
+is, that the way be open to start at least one more<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_465" id="Page_465">[465]</a></span>
+station of white workers in Northern Rhodesia. We
+believe the Lord is speaking to some hearts to open
+such a work. Is He not speaking to others to give
+of their prayers and money for the work? Many of
+God's children could pay $200 or $300 a year toward
+the support of a white worker, and others $40 to $50
+for a native evangelist, and not need to deny themselves
+any of the comforts of life in the doing of it.
+May God help us to see and appreciate our privileges
+in Christ Jesus.</p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_466" id="Page_466">[466]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVPART2" id="CHAPTER_XVPART2">CHAPTER FIFTEEN</a></h2>
+
+<h3>Conclusion</h3>
+
+<blockquote><p>I desire to protest against the unholy thirst for statistics;
+it is perfectly impossible to put into statistics the results
+of mission work.&mdash;Lord Selborne, Late High Commissioner
+for South Africa.</p></blockquote>
+
+
+<p>In the preceding pages it has been the aim to
+present some of the work done, as it has been
+our privilege to see it. Much more might be
+written about the progress of the work at Matopo,
+Mapani, and Mtyabezi Stations, for they have a
+number of excellent out-stations, manned by experienced
+and Spirit-filled natives, and are doing encouraging
+work; but that would be beyond the
+scope of this little volume. We must leave that for
+the able and efficient missionaries at those places
+and content ourselves with a summary of the work.</p>
+
+<p>But first we desire to refer to the work at Johannesburg,
+for during the last few years some of our
+missionaries there have been laboring in connection
+with our Mission Board. Over four years ago Mr.
+and Mrs. Isaac Lehman severed their connection
+with the other missionary bodies and began building
+up a separate work, and a little later began laboring
+under the auspices of the Church. They began
+the new work under difficulties, but they are
+persevering and hard workers, both in temporal and
+spiritual lines, and the work shows excellent results<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_467" id="Page_467">[467]</a></span>
+from their consecrated labors. Brother Lehman
+has worked hard to put up suitable buildings,
+and their station is now equipped with a good house
+and church. As I have not had the privilege of visiting
+that place since the opening of their new work,
+they were asked to give a statement of what is being
+done. This they did under date of August, 1914, as
+follows:</p>
+
+<blockquote><p>Our main or central station is at the City Deep Mine,
+where we reside. The Compound only a short distance
+from the mission at this place has over 4,000 native laborers
+in it at one time. This is a very promising mine, and
+has just lately been opened, and has an apparently long
+life before it under normal conditions. It will in time
+employ many more men as it keeps enlarging. We have
+open doors to this vast multitude of men coming from
+all parts of South Africa. There are many tribes represented
+and we can preach the Gospel to them; and we
+praise the Lord that some have been saved and are seeking
+to know more of the Lord Jesus Christ.</p>
+
+<p>We have four other mission stations besides this central
+station. One is Florida Mission, where there is a nice number
+of baptized members and we believe a good work is
+being done. At the Goch Station the Lord has given
+some blessings and some souls have been added to the
+Church. At that place the mine has given us permission
+to apply to the government for a mission site, and the
+native brethren have already contributed a nice sum of
+money to put up a suitable church building. Praise the
+Lord! At the consolidated Langlaagte there is a good
+work going on; a number have been saved and united with
+the Church. We have had some blessed seasons at this
+place owned of God. The Bantjes has had its share of
+tests, but we praise God that souls have also, at this place,
+been added to the Church, and the work is progressing.</p>
+
+<p>From all the stations, one main and four out-stations,
+fifty-seven souls have been baptized. We praise God for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_468" id="Page_468">[468]</a></span>
+all these, and for a number who have heard God's call to
+them to give themselves to Jesus to work for Him and
+labor for the salvation of their own people through Jesus'
+precious blood. Thank God there is power in the blood to
+save any and all who will come. There are a goodly number
+who are soon ready for baptism, and we are trying to do
+all we can to get them fully established in the deep truth
+of the Bible, a full and complete salvation, pardon cleansing,
+and the filling of the Holy Ghost. Some have taken
+a very bold stand for God, and are now preparing themselves
+for the Lord's work. Our desire and prayer is
+that we get a band of really consecrated, sanctified,
+Spirit-filled ones, who are willing to suffer the loss of all
+things for Jesus, and be made a living power to go out
+among their own people and help win them for Jesus.</p>
+
+<p>Dear reader, will you pray with us for all these who are
+yet without the True Light, that they will soon have the
+privilege of hearing the glad news which is to all and for
+all? We have very good meetings in the large hospitals,
+where are many afflicted and dying. This is a good opportunity
+to give them the Word of God.</p>
+
+<div class="signature">Isaac and Alice Lehman.</div>
+
+</blockquote>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;"><a name="Page_469" id="Page_469"></a>
+<img src="images/illus470.png" width="600" height="348" alt="Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg." title="Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg." />
+<span class="caption">Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Eyster have also been laboring
+in Johannesburg and have been valiant and consecrated
+messengers of the Cross. For several years
+they had charge of the Training School for Native
+Evangelists near Johannesburg, in connection with
+the Compound's Mission under Mr. A. W. Baker.
+They have always been members of the Brethren's
+Church and several years ago concluded to sever
+their connection with the other mission and also labor
+in connection with our Mission Board. They
+secured a good opening at Boxburg, and with much
+self-sacrificing labor built house and church and
+opened an encouraging work. Souls were saved and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_470" id="Page_470">[470]</a></span>
+some added to the Church. Then the labor troubles
+in Johannesburg caused the mines in the vicinity to
+close down and the work was checked. We trust,
+however, that it is only a temporary check and that
+the work may move on under the blessing of God.</p>
+
+<p>Nothing has yet been written about the last station
+opened, and this would be incomplete without
+reference being made to it. I refer to the one at
+Mandamabge, near Selukwe, Southern Rhodesia.
+Mr. and Mrs. Levi Doner had been stationed for
+several years at Mapani Mission and had done most
+excellent work there in the Master's cause. They,
+however, thought that that station was near enough
+to Matopo and Mtyabezi Missions and it could be
+left in charge of the native teacher, Nyamazana, so
+that they might be free to open another work in new
+territory. For this purpose Brother Doner, accompanied
+by Brother Frey, made an extensive tour
+among the natives, and he finally decided to locate
+at the above-named place, over 200 miles by wagon
+road from Matopo Mission.</p>
+
+<p>In the latter part of August, 1911, Brother and
+Sister Doner, together with Brother Steckley and
+Sister Book, started for this place, and opened a
+work with every prospect of success. There were
+many natives surrounding them, who at once
+showed an interest in the work. They were there
+only about two months, however, before Brother
+Doner became sick and was called to lay down his
+life in the undertaking. From the time he had set
+foot on African soil, over ten years before, he had
+entered heart and soul into the work of the Lord
+and had labored continually with the exception of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_471" id="Page_471">[471]</a></span>
+over a year's furlough in America. No labor was
+too arduous, no distance too great, no hardship
+feared, if thereby he might carry the Gospel to the
+people. Many long journeys he made by foot, by
+bicycle, by wagon, in exploring the country and in
+preaching the Gospel. Perhaps he was overzealous
+in the work at times, and if he had spared his
+strength more he might be still with us. Who
+knows? He gave the Gospel to many natives and
+helped many into the light. He certainly laid down
+his life in behalf of the Africans. While his body
+rests out in the wilds, far from other white people,
+we believe he is already enjoying some of the fruit
+of his labors.</p>
+
+<p>Sister Sallie Doner, his wife, was obliged at that
+time to return to America on furlough. On account
+of some difficulty arising in reference to the location
+of the mission, it was finally decided to abandon
+the place. Sister Doner and Brother Steckley
+are now ably laboring in the interests of the work at
+Macha, and Sister Book at Mtyabezi.</p>
+
+<p>There are now in connection with the African
+work twenty-one white missionaries, including those
+who are home on furlough, and thirty native teachers
+and evangelists. There have been over 300 natives
+baptized, and there are more than that number
+in the Inquirers' Classes. As the various out-schools
+are just being properly launched, the work may be
+expected to bear fruitage in geometrical ratio. Take
+for instance last year, 1913; there were 109 additions
+to the Church at the various missions. These figures
+are not large, and they indicate only a small
+proportion of the work really accomplished by the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_472" id="Page_472">[472]</a></span>
+missionaries. As Brother Steigerwald says: "Now
+that the leaven has been put into the meal no one
+can stop it from expanding." Praise God for that!</p>
+
+<p>We desire to express our appreciation of the English
+Government in aiding mission work and in
+making it possible for missionaries to labor unmolested
+in their colonies; also in suppressing many
+customs harmful to the natives, and which hinder
+the progress of the work. We rejoice also to know
+that the government, as well as the better class of
+the general public, as they become more familiar
+with the work and aims of the missionary are realizing
+the benefit to the country and are showing
+their appreciation of the same.</p>
+
+<p>The Church has come up nobly to the help of the
+Lord's work, both by their prayers and means, so
+that all have been generously supported and all the
+stations of white workers have good, substantial
+brick houses and churches, and the workers have
+been well cared for. May the Lord abundantly reward
+the donors and the Foreign Mission Board,
+who have given the work their undivided support.</p>
+
+<p>We rejoice that a beginning has been made, but it
+is only a beginning. Only a very small portion of
+the great continent of Africa is covered by these
+pages, and that only imperfectly covered. The Lord
+has condescended to bless the work ever since its
+inception. It has never gone by leaps and bounds,
+but what was done has been solid and we hope lasting.
+We rejoice that we have been permitted to see
+natives emerge from the dense darkness of heathendom&mdash;how
+dark that is none but those who have
+lived among them can realize&mdash;and become beacon<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_473" id="Page_473">[473]</a></span>
+lights in their neighborhood, living witnesses of the
+truth that the Gospel of Christ "is the power of
+God unto salvation to every one that believeth," to
+the pagan African as well as to the enlightened European
+or American.</p>
+
+<p>Many a time people have said to me, "The people
+in Africa are more eager to become Christians
+than those in America, are they not?" It seems to
+me that there is little difference in the people; if
+there is any difference in the results it is because of
+the difference in the methods employed. The missionary,
+as he goes to his field of labor, is after
+souls. That is his business; it is not a side issue.
+It is his business and he makes a business of it and
+uses business methods. He must begin at the bottom
+and learn to know his people and enter as far as
+he is able into their surroundings and their lives.
+He makes a study of them. He knows from experience
+that the salvation of these precious ones has
+meant much travail of soul and deaths oft. He
+knows that some one has "filled up that which is
+behind of the afflictions of Christ," in behalf of this
+part of the body of Christ. He knows they have
+been followed with anxious, solicitous eyes from the
+very first when they were infants in Christ, puny
+perhaps, and his heart was made glad, but with exceeding
+trembling lest the many pitfalls should entrap
+them before their eyes were really open to see
+or understand the danger. He knows some one has
+shed many bitter tears over the stumbling of some
+of these babies. He may now rejoice to see some
+grown to manhood, as it were, in Christ and being
+divinely used of Him in saving others.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_474" id="Page_474">[474]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus475.png" width="600" height="438" alt="Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family and Some of Our Workers, Members
+and Enquirers. Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 Are Satisfactorily Engaged in
+Work and in Preparation for the Work as Evangelists." title="Some of Our Workers, Members
+and Enquirer." />
+<span class="caption">Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family and Some of Our Workers, Members
+and Enquirers. Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 Are Satisfactorily Engaged in
+Work and in Preparation for the Work as Evangelists.</span>
+</div><p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_475" id="Page_475">[475]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The true missionary keeps at it. It is his central
+thought day after day as he teaches these dirty, careless
+ones about him to become cleanly and do their
+work properly, how he can lead them on to desire
+a clean life and seek for it. His last thought and
+prayer at night, as he lays his head on the pillow, is
+for guidance as to how to win these precious souls,
+and sometimes he is led, like his Master, to spend
+much of the night in prayer.</p>
+
+<p>Some people, looking on from a distance, think
+there is a great deal of romance connected with
+mission work; that it is full of striking incidents and
+delightful adventures, and that it is a grand opportunity
+to see something of the world. On my first
+furlough home, ten years ago, a little niece gave a
+glowing account of a friend of her mother, and of
+the countries that friend had visited. In conclusion
+the child naively added, "She has traveled almost
+as much as a missionary." This child unwittingly
+voiced the opinion of many a grownup; for to some
+would-be missionaries the prospect of foreign travel
+occupies a large space in their field of vision, but to
+the genuine missionary foreign travel is but incidental
+to mission life; it is the bridge over which he
+passes to some obscure corner of the earth where he
+is hid away from the world's gaze and surrounded
+by an entirely different class of people, of strange
+language and uncouth ways, often repulsive to the
+natural eye and to refined tastes. For months he
+may never see a white face, save those of his colleagues.
+He does not go with the expectation of
+finding a house already made to order and everything
+else he needs, but he is ready to go into the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_476" id="Page_476">[476]</a></span>
+wilds, if needs be, and make a home for himself.
+He does not go just because he is willing to do certain
+things in the mission field; but he is willing
+and ready to do whatever he finds to do, and to go
+wherever the Lord tells him to go, and to stay as
+long as the Lord bids him stay.</p>
+
+<p>There is, however, a fascination about mission
+work, as every one who is in the field will testify.
+Furloughs are taken because it is an absolute necessity
+for the missionary to go away for a time from
+the unhealthy climate and from the absorbing labors
+which sap the very vitality. But, when he is in
+his native land, the missionary feels that he is out
+of his element. He is out of touch with the business
+and interests which seem to engross the heart and
+soul of every one about him; and he is homesick to
+be back again to his field of labor and to see those
+dear dark faces. He feels that there is only one
+thing worth living for, and that is to lift up Christ
+among the heathen so that He may draw all men
+unto Himself. He feels that the time is short and
+that the "King's business requires haste," and that
+our Lord's return is imminent.</p>
+
+<p>Again, as long as a person thinks he is making a
+<i>great sacrifice</i> in leaving home, friends, and his business,
+and going as the Lord's messenger among the
+benighted of earth, he would better remain at home.
+If he is really God-called, the day will come when
+he will realize something of the inestimable privilege
+of being His ambassador to nations in darkness
+without any knowledge of the Light of Life. All
+earthly things will be lost sight of and his heart will
+burn within him to lift up Christ among the heathen.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_477" id="Page_477">[477]</a></span>
+He will gladly go through anything, that the blessed
+Gospel may be proclaimed to the ends of the earth.</p>
+
+<p>Some one may inquire, "What should I study to
+prepare me for the mission field?" A careful study
+of these pages will, we think, answer that question.
+But to sum it up we would say, anything, everything
+you can, both in school and out; one never knows
+until he reaches the field what he may meet with.
+The Bible of course, first, last, and always, and all
+the knowledge with it one can acquire; then too
+temporal work of various kinds, medicine, nursing,
+hygiene, farming, building, teaching, housekeeping,
+and mission methods. If one has acquired a fair
+knowledge of these and thinks he is well prepared,
+then let him be humble enough to acknowledge that
+he knows only the A B C's of mission work; and
+that when he has reached his field of labor, the Lord,
+and perhaps some of His messengers already in the
+field, will help him to put together into words the
+letters he has learned, and he may add to it day by
+day as the occasion may require. If one has this
+humility and willingness to adapt himself to the
+work, after reaching the field, it will supply much
+of his lack of knowledge along some lines.</p>
+
+<p>My object in writing thus plainly is not to frighten
+any one of God's children from the work of the
+Lord; but rather to help each one carefully to count
+the cost, and to disabuse anyone's mind of false
+notions of mission work. Judging from the stability
+and perseverance of those already connected
+with the work, we have reasons to believe that all
+did count the cost; but the work is only begun, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_478" id="Page_478">[478]</a></span>
+we trust many more will come to swell the ranks
+and push on the work into the darker regions.</p>
+
+<p>It has been a little over a century since the first
+missionaries began their work along the coast of
+South Africa; but it is only within the last half
+century that there has been much visible fruit of
+the work done. Even then the missionary labors
+have been chiefly along the coast of the continent
+and along the navigable rivers which are the natural
+highways into the interior. Much of Central Africa
+is still unpossessed. In the report of the last
+Great Missionary Conference it was estimated that
+there are ninety millions of the population of Africa
+as yet untouched by the Gospel. Stupendous figures,
+indeed, to say nothing of the many millions
+whose knowledge of the Gospel is as yet very superficial!</p>
+
+<p>We have already mentioned some of the difficulties
+in the way of reaching the people; the great expanse
+of country to be traversed, the deadliness of
+the climate, and the high cost of living, which in
+Africa exceeds that of any other country. Again,
+the many languages and dialects, 823 in number, together
+with the illiteracy of the people, are a serious
+handicap; but with God "all things are possible."</p>
+
+<p>The present generation is beholding wonderful
+strides in opening the vast continent to commerce
+and civilization, and above all to Christianity. Railroads
+are rapidly being built all over the country,
+uniting the interior with the coast. At the present
+rate it probably will be a matter of only a very few
+years until Cape Town will be connected to Cairo
+by steam through the center of the continent. This<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_479" id="Page_479">[479]</a></span>
+central railway is soon to be linked with Benguella,
+on the west coast, which will form a more direct
+route into the interior. Twenty years ago Rhodesia
+had no railroads; in fact, it can scarcely be said
+there was a Rhodesia; for it was only in its formative
+period. Now it has 1,466 miles of railway owned
+and operated by the government, with an additional
+204 miles extending to the seaport, Beira, on the
+east coast. These are only a portion of what has
+been built in the country. North, south, east, and
+west other lines have been built.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/illus480.png" width="600" height="475" alt="Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster." title="Boxburg Mission Station." />
+<span class="caption">Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>When one considers the vast amount of labor required,
+and the all-but insurmountable difficulties to
+be overcome in railroad building in Africa, the
+work already accomplished is little less than miraculous.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_480" id="Page_480">[480]</a></span>
+The Lord raised up men of large hearts as
+well as large means, to finance much of this. All
+the building material has to be carried long distances,
+and many of the ties and telegraph poles are
+of iron on account of the destructive white ants.
+The traveler can now take the train at Cape Town
+and travel to the border of Congo State, a distance
+by rail of 2,140 miles, for $75, second class. He can
+have a comfortable compartment, furnished with all
+modern conveniences, and obtain his meals on the
+train at a very moderate cost. Freight rates are
+still high on account of the immense distance to be
+traversed and the small amount of goods required to
+supply Central Africa.</p>
+
+<p>The railroads are fast changing conditions, helping
+to solve the question of gaining access to the
+people, and providing good homes and wholesome
+food for the missionaries. There are, however, many
+millions yet outside the railroad belt who are in
+need of the Gospel; but even these can be reached
+with much less difficulty than formerly.</p>
+
+<p>The language question too is rapidly being solved,
+and great praise is due the noble army of men and
+women who have labored long and hard to reduce
+to writing the seemingly meaningless jargon which
+first greets their ears in going among the natives.
+Many languages have been reduced to writing by
+the missionaries, and the Scriptures have been translated
+into them. Grammars, dictionaries, and textbooks
+of various kinds have been written. This
+work, together with the various schools and the
+united labors of the missionaries, is aiding in reducing
+the number of languages. There are, however,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_481" id="Page_481">[481]</a></span>
+many tribes which are yet without missionaries and
+without the Gospel in their language, and they are
+waiting for some one to say, "Here am I, send me."
+This is a task worthy of the greatest minds of the
+age; to reduce to writing an African language and
+to translate into it the Gospel which tells of <span class="smcap">God's
+love through Jesus Christ</span>, to those downtrodden,
+hag-ridden, demon-worshiping souls.</p>
+
+<p>The time is opportune for spreading the Gospel in
+Africa; and if every child of God were willing to do
+his part or her part in the work, the present generation
+could see it carried to all tribes.</p>
+
+<p>None of the difficulties in the way are insurmountable.
+When, the "Great Commission" was given it
+was backed up by the indisputable assertion, "<span class="smcap">All
+power is given unto Me in heaven and in earth.
+Go ye therefore, ... lo, I am with you alway,
+even unto the end of the world. Amen.</span>"</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter bord" style="width: 600px;">
+<img src="images/map020.png" width="600" height="494" alt="Map" title="Map" />
+<span class="caption">Map</span>
+</div>
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+
+<div class='tnote'><h3>Transcriber's Notes:</h3>
+<p>Punctuation has been normalized. Obvious printer errors have been corrected.
+ Both spellings of gray/grey appear.</p> <p>Some illustrations were originally
+ located in the middle of paragraphs. These have been adjusted to not interrupt
+ the flow of reading. In some cases this means that the page number that the
+ illustration was originally on is not visible. </p></div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of South and South Central Africa, by 
+H. Frances Davidson
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37728-h.htm or 37728-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/7/2/37728/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/37728-h/images/frontis.png b/37728-h/images/frontis.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d9e5ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/frontis.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus059.png b/37728-h/images/illus059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72a732c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus059.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus064.png b/37728-h/images/illus064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2da22f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus064.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus088.png b/37728-h/images/illus088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6c02796
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus088.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus092.png b/37728-h/images/illus092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3aeeec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus092.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus100.png b/37728-h/images/illus100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e9f28a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus100.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus104.png b/37728-h/images/illus104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbc6af7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus104.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus132.png b/37728-h/images/illus132.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..84a496f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus132.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus150.png b/37728-h/images/illus150.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2199932
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus150.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus160.png b/37728-h/images/illus160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e30e9ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus160.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus162.png b/37728-h/images/illus162.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9325b85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus162.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus164.png b/37728-h/images/illus164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..017513e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus164.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus169.png b/37728-h/images/illus169.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac5fcd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus169.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus171.png b/37728-h/images/illus171.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..257d442
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus171.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus172.png b/37728-h/images/illus172.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3c56965
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus172.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus197.png b/37728-h/images/illus197.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad5cb27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus197.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus202.png b/37728-h/images/illus202.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d211bbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus202.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus208.png b/37728-h/images/illus208.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad78675
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus208.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus216a.png b/37728-h/images/illus216a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa6b6ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus216a.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus216b.png b/37728-h/images/illus216b.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1cbc498
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus216b.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus218.png b/37728-h/images/illus218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c420d0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus218.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus222a.png b/37728-h/images/illus222a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d75c5d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus222a.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus222b.png b/37728-h/images/illus222b.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aae2857
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus222b.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus225.png b/37728-h/images/illus225.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..46fe7c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus225.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus231.png b/37728-h/images/illus231.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..249ac4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus231.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus242.png b/37728-h/images/illus242.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ab9bd4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus242.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus247.png b/37728-h/images/illus247.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4805095
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus247.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus282.png b/37728-h/images/illus282.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..deaab2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus282.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus288.png b/37728-h/images/illus288.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8567622
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus288.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus292.png b/37728-h/images/illus292.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe31180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus292.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus303a.png b/37728-h/images/illus303a.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32bb6b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus303a.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus303b.png b/37728-h/images/illus303b.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e1ef56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus303b.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus308.png b/37728-h/images/illus308.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96aa680
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus308.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus314.png b/37728-h/images/illus314.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f4a685
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus314.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus316.png b/37728-h/images/illus316.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..488c3b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus316.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus318.png b/37728-h/images/illus318.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b74824
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus318.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus320.png b/37728-h/images/illus320.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..832bd73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus320.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus321.png b/37728-h/images/illus321.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad7eaf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus321.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus326.png b/37728-h/images/illus326.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f858852
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus326.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus328.png b/37728-h/images/illus328.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f046ae2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus328.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus331.png b/37728-h/images/illus331.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..703d1c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus331.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus335.png b/37728-h/images/illus335.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3914b5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus335.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus338.png b/37728-h/images/illus338.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac4a4e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus338.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus341.png b/37728-h/images/illus341.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61fb5ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus341.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus348.png b/37728-h/images/illus348.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12757fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus348.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus352.png b/37728-h/images/illus352.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d9961c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus352.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus360.png b/37728-h/images/illus360.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1e64d4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus360.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus365.png b/37728-h/images/illus365.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5b91b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus365.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus405.png b/37728-h/images/illus405.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d60f5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus405.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus407.png b/37728-h/images/illus407.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99acd2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus407.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus409.png b/37728-h/images/illus409.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a3f81c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus409.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus411.png b/37728-h/images/illus411.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..43962f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus411.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus413.png b/37728-h/images/illus413.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbd3c81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus413.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus415.png b/37728-h/images/illus415.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f9de606
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus415.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus420.png b/37728-h/images/illus420.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d7e182
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus420.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus424.png b/37728-h/images/illus424.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e3e037
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus424.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus427.png b/37728-h/images/illus427.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9c107ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus427.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus430.png b/37728-h/images/illus430.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04bb057
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus430.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus432.png b/37728-h/images/illus432.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a267f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus432.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus436.png b/37728-h/images/illus436.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a797e61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus436.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus447.png b/37728-h/images/illus447.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..40957b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus447.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus457.png b/37728-h/images/illus457.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..921c57f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus457.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus470.png b/37728-h/images/illus470.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a2568ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus470.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus475.png b/37728-h/images/illus475.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5e7abb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus475.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/illus480.png b/37728-h/images/illus480.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..337ff34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/illus480.png
diff --git a/37728-h/images/map020.png b/37728-h/images/map020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c8d2f27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728-h/images/map020.png
diff --git a/37728.txt b/37728.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba3011d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11769 @@
+Project Gutenberg's South and South Central Africa, by H. Frances Davidson
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: South and South Central Africa
+       A record of fifteen years' missionary labors among primitive peoples
+
+Author: H. Frances Davidson
+
+Release Date: October 11, 2011 [EBook #37728]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle.]
+
+
+
+
+    SOUTH AND SOUTH
+    CENTRAL AFRICA
+
+    A RECORD OF FIFTEEN YEARS'
+    MISSIONARY LABORS AMONG
+    PRIMITIVE PEOPLES
+
+
+    BY
+    H. FRANCES DAVIDSON
+
+
+    (WITH PHOTOGRAPHS BY THE MISSIONARIES)
+
+
+    PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR BY
+    BRETHREN PUBLISHING HOUSE
+    ELGIN, ILL.
+    1915
+
+
+    Copyrighted by
+    H. FRANCES DAVIDSON
+    1915
+
+           *       *       *       *       *
+
+    Books may be obtained through
+
+    H. R. DAVIDSON
+    AUBURN, IND.
+    Route 3
+
+    or
+
+    M. L. HOFFMAN
+    ABILENE, KANS.
+
+
+    DEDICATED
+    TO
+    MY FATHER'S LIFELONG FRIEND
+    DR. W. O. BAKER
+    And to All Others, Who, Like Him, Are Deeply
+    Interested in the Evangelization of the
+    Dark Continent
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+With utmost confidence and pleasure, I give an introductory expression
+for this intelligible, authentic, and most valuable little volume, the
+product of great sacrifice and long experience, by one who was favored
+and honored with lucrative educational positions, being a classic.
+
+I have been acquainted with the authoress for many years, and am a
+member of the Foreign Missionary Board under whose auspices she has most
+effectually labored during an unbroken period of one and one-half
+decades; therefore I speak with great assurance of the merits and hope
+of her book, destined to be prolific and incentive to active missionary
+operations in foreign lands.
+
+The photo-engravings have special interest, having been taken from real
+life and nature as she found them in dark Africa--places, people,
+environments, customs, habits, and religion, which she saw with her own
+eyes and mind. Having thoroughly mastered various dialects of tribes
+among whom she has labored so many years, having gathered many
+historical facts relative to uncivilized races, and also having special
+tact, instinct and God-given ability through the gift of the Spirit,
+making her very efficient in her call to these dusky tribes, she is
+qualified in a very proficient sense to compile the story of this
+strange people.
+
+On meeting Sister H. Frances Davidson, one is quickly impressed with her
+modest and unassuming disposition, the rare gift that characterizes all
+the truly noble and great.
+
+Her heroism and unfaltering faith in Jehovah is most remarkably
+demonstrated in her adventure--accompanied by Sister Adda Engle (Taylor)
+and a native boy--into the wilds of Central Africa, unfrequented by the
+tread or touch of any Gospel missioner, among a class of raw natives
+that were very shy, rather hostile, and of another tongue, and a country
+infested with wild, vicious animals.
+
+When the planning of this adventurous trip was heard by the Foreign
+Missionary Board, steps were taken to discourage it, on the ground that
+no white man was available to accompany them to the new prospective
+mission field; but before the Board's protest could be made effective,
+the dangerous journey was heroically and successfully executed and a new
+mission station planted north of the great Zambezi, which is the
+northern boundary of South Africa.
+
+Such an adventure would almost challenge the courage of the bravest man.
+It must have been the leadings of the Lord--the inspiration of the Holy
+Spirit.
+
+We all love to read the truthful words that drop from the pen of such
+fearless, devoted, and consecrated souls.
+
+The book is written in a clear, graphic, and condensed manner, just the
+thing for this busy, rushing generation.
+
+We bespeak for it a precious harvest of lasting fruitage.
+
+Yours in the hope of the Gospel,
+
+                                                J. R. ZOOK,
+
+                            Chairman of the Missionary Board
+                         of the Brethren in Christ's Church.
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+
+Africa holds a unique place in the world today. In no other continent is
+there such a world-wide interest and such a variety of interests
+centered; the religious, the political, and the commercial world are
+alike concerned in its development and progress. It has been a sealed
+book for so many centuries that the majority of people have excused
+themselves on that score for their ignorance of its conditions and their
+indifference as to its welfare; but the day of pardonable ignorance is
+past.
+
+While kings and emperors have been eagerly seeking to obtain as large a
+slice of its territory as possible, and moneyed men have been unearthing
+some of its vast wealth, missionaries, too, have been having a share in
+it. In the development of Africa they may, without boasting, claim to be
+making the most permanent contribution to its welfare, but even their
+work is only begun. The various interests, which for a long time were
+concerned with only the countries along the coast, have now penetrated
+and opened up that vast interior to civilization and missionary
+enterprise; and it remains for the Christians to say whether it shall be
+left to the influences of a corrupt civilization or whether they will
+shoulder their responsibilities and rise to their privileges in taking
+the country for God.
+
+Many missionary bodies are already at work, and much is being
+accomplished; but the continent is so gigantic, the distances to be
+traversed so immense that it will require the united efforts of all
+God's children to pay the debt humanity owes to this long-neglected
+continent and those downtrodden pagans.
+
+It has been my aim in these pages to give, without embellishment, some
+idea of the nature of the Africans, their character, customs, religion,
+and surroundings, as well as some of the difficulties, methods,
+encouragements, and discouragements of missionary work among them.
+Missionaries are often censured for being too optimistic, for giving
+only the bright side of their work, therefore I have studiously sought
+to avoid this attitude and to give an unvarnished account of missionary
+enterprise. Judging from my own convictions and beliefs in reference to
+the work, it seems to me that if I have erred in this respect, it has
+been by understating rather than overstating the value and encouraging
+results arising from such labors.
+
+This book does not claim to be a complete history of the Brethren in
+Christ's Missions in Africa, but rather some of the experiences of one
+member of that mission body. Since, however, it has been my privilege to
+be with the work from its inception, the enclosed narrative will have
+the added value of giving at least something of the beginning and early
+history of the mission. My only apology for recounting so much of my
+personal experience and impressions in the work is that I am unable to
+give, properly, the experience and viewpoint of anyone else.
+
+We desire to express our thanks to Mrs. Myron Taylor, formerly Miss Adda
+Engle, for the majority of the photographs with which this work is
+illustrated; also to Elder Steigerwald and the other missionaries who
+have furnished a number of them. We had hoped to have some later ones
+from Matopo and Mtshabezi Missions, but have failed in securing good
+ones.
+
+If this little volume in some small degree arouses a greater interest
+among Christians in the evangelization of the Dark Continent, and is a
+means in God's hands of getting the light to a few more of the vast
+millions of pagan Africans, I shall feel more than repaid for sending it
+on its mission.
+
+                                               H. FRANCES DAVIDSON.
+
+    Auburn, Ind.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+    PART I
+
+    Matopo Mission
+
+    CHAPTER I.
+
+    Early Missionary Labors--Origin of Foreign Missionary
+    Work, 1894--After Two Years--An Appeal--My
+    Call--First Missionaries--Preparing to Sail,
+    1897,                                                     19
+
+    CHAPTER II.
+
+    On the Deep--England--Bound for Cape Town--Matabeleland
+    Chosen--Landing at Cape Town,                             29
+
+    CHAPTER III.
+
+    Cape Town--Elder Engle's Interview with Mr. Rhodes--Zulu
+    Language--Mrs. Lewis' Kindness--Journey
+    to Bulawayo,                                              38
+
+    CHAPTER IV.
+
+    Matabeleland--Wars with the Natives--Hide in the
+    Matopo Hills--Bulawayo--Selection of a Mission
+    Site,                                                     45
+
+    CHAPTER V.
+
+    Trekking to the Hills, 1898--Chief and His People--First
+    View of the Mission Site--Building Huts--Misunderstandings
+    with the Natives--Missionaries
+    Working,                                                  53
+
+    CHAPTER VI.
+
+    Opening of School--Its Equipments and Work--Sunday
+    Services--Learning the
+    Language--Kraal-visiting--Matshuba--Sunday-school,        66
+
+    CHAPTER VII.
+
+    Reinforcements and Supplies--Mr. and Mrs. Cress, Mr.
+    I. O. Lehman, 1899--Clothing for the People--Building--
+    Old Queen--First Baptisms--Boer War,                      83
+
+    CHAPTER VIII.
+
+    The Cresses Open Mission Station--Sickness and Death
+    of Sister Cress and Elder Engle, 1900--Sickness
+    and Seventh Day Adventist Doctor--Wedding--Brother
+    Cress and Sister Engle Return to America,
+    1900,                                                     96
+
+    CHAPTER IX.
+
+    Resuming the Work--Boys' Confession--Hluganisa and
+    School--Kraal-visiting--Locusts--Ndhlalambi--Sickness
+    of the Lehmans--Trouble in Reference to
+    Mission Farm,                                            107
+
+    CHAPTER X.
+
+    Mr. L. Doner and Miss Emma Long Arrive, 1901--The
+    Lehmans Go to Cape Town--Industrial Work--Elder
+    and Mrs. Steigerwald Arrive, 1901--Building
+    House on a Mission Station--Training Natives--School
+    Work,                                                    126
+
+    CHAPTER XI.
+
+    Death of Mr. Rhodes, 1903--Of Fusi--Furlough and
+    South Africa--The Compound's Missions--Native
+    Bee--Appearance of Congregation,                         140
+
+    CHAPTER XII.
+
+    First View of Mapani Land--Medical Work--Reminded
+    of Call to Interior--Return to America, 1904--Miss
+    Sallie Kreider, 1904--Opening of Mapani Mission
+    and Sister Doner's Death, 1904--Return to
+    Africa with Mr. and Mrs. Frey and Misses Adda
+    Engle and Abbie Bert, 1905--Mtshabezi Mission,
+    1906,                                                    155
+
+    CHAPTER XIII.
+
+    Religion of Matabele--Ideas of God--Umlimo Oracle--
+    Rainmaker--Witchcraft--Transmigration
+    of Souls--Spiritualism,                                  173
+
+    CHAPTER XIV.
+
+    Customs--Putting Children to Death--Betrothal and
+    Marriage--Native Kraal--Polygamy--Food and
+    Beer--King Khama--Visits--Generosity and Politeness--
+    Death and Burial--Grave of King Mzilikazi,               191
+
+    CHAPTER XV.
+
+    Visit to Matopo, 1910--Improvements--Brother and
+    Sister Doner--Mapani--Mtshabezi--Visit in 1913--
+    Bulawayo and Vicinity--Changes at Matopo--Aiding
+    the People--Love Feast at Mtshabezi--What Hath God
+    Wrought?                                                  212
+
+
+    PART II
+
+    Macha Mission
+
+    CHAPTER I.
+
+    Early Missionary Labors--Railroad Building--Starting
+    for the Zambezi, 1906--Victoria Falls--David
+    Livingstone--Barotseland and Other Missions,             237
+
+    CHAPTER II.
+
+    Preparing to Advance--Broken Wagon--Journey to
+    Kalomo--Interviewing Officials--Difficulties in the
+    Way--Permission to Proceed--Macha,                       252
+
+    CHAPTER III.
+
+    Why Selected--Living on the Veldt--First Huts--Spiritual
+    Duties--Learning an Unwritten Language--First
+    Christmas,                                               263
+
+    CHAPTER IV.
+
+    Trying to Begin School--Chief Brings His Son--Industrial
+    Work--School Books--Wild Animals--Threatened
+    Uprising--Mr. M. Taylor Arrives, 1907--White
+    Ants--Visit to Nanzela,                                  277
+
+    CHAPTER V.
+
+    Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger Arrive, 1908--Need of
+    Good Houses--Making Brick--Tsetse Fly--Brother
+    Taylor's Encounter with Lions,                            295
+
+    CHAPTER VI.
+
+    School Work--English--Evangelistic Work--Brother
+    Taylor Among the Baila--Building a House--Elder
+    Steigerwald and Brother Doner Go North--Visit
+    of Elders J. N. Engle and J. Sheets--Marriage--First
+    Baptism,                                                 306
+
+    CHAPTER VII.
+
+    Furlough--Encounter with Elephant--Misses E. Engle
+    and Mary Heisey Visit Macha--Preparing the New
+    Testament--Out-schools--Murder of Chief--Taylors
+    or Furlough--Death of Semani,                            323
+
+    CHAPTER VIII.
+
+    Baby Ruth--Building Church--Training Natives--The
+    Year's Work--Brother Taylor Itinerating--Elder
+    Steigerwald's Visit,                                     343
+
+    CHAPTER IX.
+
+    New Books--Native Problems--Studying the Native
+    Character--Child Life--Natives Resourceful--Dark
+    Side of Native Character,                                355
+
+    CHAPTER X.
+
+    Are They Lazy?--Three Natives--Home Training--Charlie--
+    Are They Provident?--Naturalists--Attitude Toward
+    Whites--Generosity of Some--Kraal-visiting,              372
+
+    CHAPTER XI.
+
+    Ideas of God--Native Prophetesses--Rainmakers--Death
+    and Burial--Digging a Grave--Sacrifice of
+    Animals--Beer-wailings--Evil Spirits,                    387
+
+    CHAPTER XII.
+
+    Tribal Mark--Decorating the Body--Kinship--Betrothal
+    and Marriage--The Bride--Hindrances to Mission
+    Work--Compared to the Matabele--Salutations,             402
+
+    CHAPTER XIII.
+
+    Ruth's Sickness--Medical Work--A Visit Among the
+    People--Remember the Aged--David Goes to School--Taylors
+    Go to America, 1913--Wenger's Return--Outpouring
+    of the Spirit--Miss E. Engle and Mr.
+    L. B. Steckley Come to Macha--First Women Baptized,      418
+
+    CHAPTER XIV.
+
+    Two Objects Paramount--Need of Native Evangelists--Visit
+    to Out-schools--Mianda--Impongo--Kabanzi--Kabwe--Myeki--
+    Chilumbwe,                                               440
+
+    CHAPTER XV.
+
+    Lehmans' Work--Eysters' Work--Doners Open New
+    Station--Present Status--Are the People Eager to
+    Hear?--What It Means to Be a Missionary--Qualifications--
+    Difficulties--God Is Able,                               466
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+    H. Frances Davidson and Adda G. Engle,          Frontispiece
+
+    Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise at
+      Matopo,                                                 58
+
+    Matopo Mission, March, 1899,                              63
+
+    Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse
+      Engle,                                                  87
+
+    Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness,                91
+
+    Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission,            99
+
+    Matopo Cemetery,                                         103
+
+    Matopo Mission House. Front View,                        131
+
+    "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes,"             149
+
+    Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder Steigerwald in
+      1905,                                                  159
+
+    Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill
+      Beyond,                                                161
+
+    In the Matopo Hills,                                     163
+
+    Mapani Mission, 1907,                                    168
+
+    Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church. Matopo M. Hospital,   170
+
+    Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo,                 171
+
+    Matabele Kraal, Near Matopo Mission,                     196
+
+    Matabele Women Stamping Grain,                           201
+
+    Matabele Women Digging,                                  207
+
+    Building the Boys' House at Matopo, M. S.,               215
+
+    Boys' Brick House at Matopo Mission,                     215
+
+    A Native Christian's Home. Matshuba's,                   217
+
+    Mtshabezi Church and School,                             221
+
+    Mtshabezi Mission in 1910,                               221
+
+    Mtshabezi. Baptismal Scene,                              224
+
+    Girls at Mtshabezi Mission,                              230
+
+    Victoria Falls Bridge,                                   241
+
+    Main View of Victoria Falls, 1-1/4 Miles Wide,           246
+
+    Macha Mission Huts, 1907,                                281
+
+    Macha Boys and Schoolhouse,                              287
+
+    The Last Invitation,                                     291
+
+    Making Brick at Macha,                                   302
+
+    Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers,                302
+
+    Macha Mission Dwelling House,                            307
+
+    Elder Steigerwald and Mr. Doner on Their Trip North
+      of Macha,                                              313
+
+    Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout,             315
+
+    Batonga Chiefs and Headmen,                              317
+
+    First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native Congregation
+      Not Visible,                                           319
+
+    Wedding Dinner at Macha,                                 320
+
+    The Elephant That Derailed the Train,                    325
+
+    Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910,                    327
+
+    Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill,                   330
+
+    Simeoba's Village, Viewing the Strangers,                334
+
+    Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the
+      Matopo Hills,                                          337
+
+    The Battle Palm,                                         340
+
+    Macha Mission Church and Boys' House,                    347
+
+    Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the
+      Midst,                                                 351
+
+    Little Nurses. Mianda Village,                           359
+
+    Batonga Fisher Women,                                    364
+
+    Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground,  404
+
+    Cattle Pen of the Batonga,                               406
+
+    A Batonga Family Traveling,                              408
+
+    Native Women--Widows,                                    410
+
+    Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife,                       412
+
+    Giving the Gospel in Macha Village,                      414
+
+    Macha Mission, 1913,                                     419
+
+    Ruth Taylor,                                             423
+
+    First Christian Marriages at Macha,                      426
+
+    David Moyo and His Wife and Child,                       429
+
+    Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit
+      to Macha,                                              431
+
+    Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission,                      435
+
+    School at Kabanzi Village,                               446
+
+    Sikaluwa,                                                456
+
+    Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg,   469
+
+    Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family,                 474
+
+    Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster,      479
+
+
+
+    PART ONE
+
+    MATOPO MISSION
+
+    "Go ye therefore and teach all nations"
+
+                         --Matt. 28: 19
+
+
+
+
+SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE
+
+The Beginning of Missionary Effort
+
+
+It was at the General Conference held in May, 1894, that the Foreign
+Missionary Work of the Church of the Brethren in Christ originated.
+
+Previous to that time the old fathers of the church had made many
+missionary journeys through the United States and Canada for the
+advancement of Christ's Kingdom and in the interests of the faith they
+so dearly loved. These journeys were made without remuneration and often
+with great discomfort and sacrifice of time and money. The precept that
+the Gospel was free, "without money and without price," seemed so
+instilled into their hearts that some of them, no doubt, would have felt
+pained for people to think that they expected money for their services.
+So while the laity were busy with their own temporal duties, these
+heralds of the Cross would often leave their little farms in care of
+their wives and of help, hired at their own expense, and devote weeks
+and months to evangelistic work, expecting what? Nothing but their food
+and sometimes sufficient to pay their car fare, if they went by train.
+But it often happened in those early days that the entire expense of
+whatever sort was borne by themselves. They looked for no reward on
+earth save the consciousness that they were about their Master's
+business and seeking to extend His Kingdom on earth.
+
+Much honor is due those old soldiers for their self-sacrificing labors.
+In that Great Day when the books are opened, perhaps the record of their
+labors may astonish some of us who sometimes criticise them for their
+slowness in launching the foreign missionary work of the Church.
+
+Among them were some who were greatly burdened for the heathen. Some
+felt this lack of Church activity so keenly that they almost severed
+their connections with it on this account. Others saw the need, but,
+realizing the smallness of membership and the limited resources, thought
+the Church was too weak to launch out into foreign missionary
+enterprise.
+
+In the meantime individual members were agitating the question, and some
+were planning to go independently to India and to Central America, while
+others were contemplating going under other Mission Boards.
+
+While this agitation was going on, the question of foreign mission work
+was brought forward at the General Conference in May, 1894, held in the
+Bethel Church, Kansas. On Friday, the last day of the Conference, a
+paper on the subject was read by Mrs. Rhoda Lee, but no active steps
+were taken and the question was tabled indefinitely, to the great
+disappointment of some present. Later, on the same day, Elder J. E.
+Stauffer arose, and, placing a five-dollar bill on the table, stated
+that it was for foreign mission work, then sat down. This action
+brought matters to a crisis. Here was missionary money and something
+must be done with it.
+
+After consultation it was decided that the donor be appointed Foreign
+Missionary Treasurer, and any desiring to donate should give their
+offerings to him; and that, as soon as sufficient money was in the
+treasury to justify the measure, active steps would be taken toward
+sending out missionaries. By the close of the day thirty-five dollars
+had been placed in the hands of the Treasurer. The funds increased
+slowly but steadily.
+
+At the Conference of 1895 held in Ontario, "A Foreign Mission Board,
+consisting of Brethren Peter Steckly, B. T. Hoover, and J. E. Stauffer,
+was appointed to hold office for five years, subject, however, to the
+advice and control of General Council." At the next meeting of
+Conference in 1896 in Pennsylvania, "The Treasurer of the Foreign
+Mission Fund, J. E. Stauffer, submitted his report, and he was
+congratulated for his successful effort. The amount in the treasury is
+$419.60." This amount had been donated in two years. These data have
+been given that it may be seen how the work has grown.
+
+At this meeting it was decided that the funds had increased sufficiently
+to take an advanced step. The Board was increased to twelve members with
+an operating board of three. Of this Elder Samuel Zook was appointed
+treasurer, Elder Henry Davidson, chairman, and Elder Jesse Engle,
+secretary. The Board was empowered to secure volunteers for starting a
+work among the heathen in some foreign country, no particular country
+being designated.
+
+Of the General Board of twelve members, Brethren Peter Steckley, J. R.
+Zook, and Peter Climenhage are still on the Board after a lapse of
+eighteen years.
+
+Just what was done in the interim I cannot say, but on January 15, 1897,
+there appeared in the _Evangelical Visitor_ the following:
+
+     AN APPEAL
+
+     We would call attention to the fact that the committee appointed at
+     last Conference is ready to act on the foreign mission work, but up
+     to this time they have received no applications. Why is it? Does
+     the Lord not speak to some hearts? Or is it because the Church is
+     not praying the Lord of the harvest to send laborers into His
+     harvest?
+
+     The field is white. The harvest is ready. Who will go forth in the
+     name of the Master, filled with the Holy Ghost, ready to lay his or
+     her life down for the cause of Christ's salvation to the heathen?
+     It means something to be a foreign missionary. It means a full
+     sacrifice of home, friends and self--a perfect cutting loose. But,
+     praise the Lord! when it is done for Christ's sake and the
+     Gospel's, we shall receive an hundredfold in this life and eternal
+     life in the world to come.
+
+     The Lord has provided money--somebody was willing to give it, but
+     who will give himself? I believe the Lord has spoken to your heart.
+     Just say, "Lord, speak, thy servant heareth." And if the Lord tells
+     you to go, don't do as Jonah--try to get away from the Lord---for
+     as Jonah did not fare well, neither will you. But if you obey God,
+     He will go with you into the ship. We are ready and waiting to
+     receive applications, but somebody must be willing to obey God or
+     the work will be delayed while souls are perishing.
+
+     If the Lord lays it upon your heart to give because you can not go
+     yourself, please send your donations to Elder
+     Jesse Engle, Donegal, Kansas, as he is the committee's secretary
+     and will keep a correct account of all money received and hand it
+     over to the treasurer. The committee has not decided yet where the
+     field shall be, but will decide when such workers present
+     themselves as are believed to be called of God. South Africa has
+     been spoken of; also South or Central America. No doubt God will
+     direct when the time comes that somebody is willing to go. Who
+     shall it be?
+
+                                                       SAMUEL ZOOK.
+
+At that time I was teaching in McPherson College, Kansas, and was
+greatly enjoying the work. It was my seventh year at that place, and
+just the day before the article had appeared I had entered into a verbal
+agreement with the other members of the faculty to remain for some
+years, the Lord willing. No thought of the foreign field had entered my
+mind previous to this, except a readiness for whatever the Lord had for
+me to do. Up to that time I verily thought I was doing His will by being
+in the classroom.
+
+The day that "The Appeal" appeared in the _Visitor_, it was read like
+the other matter and nothing further was thought of it; but the day
+following the Lord came to me, as it were, in the midst of the class
+work, in the midst of other plans for the future, and swept away my
+books, reserving only the Bible. In reality He showed me Christ lifted
+up for a lost world. He filled me with an unutterable love for every
+soul who had not heard of Him, and with a passionate longing to go to
+worst parts of the earth, away from civilization, away from other
+mission bodies, and spend the rest of my life in telling the story of
+the Cross.
+
+We prefer not to dwell too minutely on the feelings of that sacred hour.
+Sufficient to say that there and then He anointed me for service among
+the heathen. Not that I have measured up to all that He placed before me
+on that day. On the contrary I have fallen far short; but the
+consciousness of that call has ever been with me, and has strengthened
+and kept me, in the thickest of the fight in heathen lands. Even when
+the battle was sore and defeat stared me in the face, the conviction
+that it was His appointment and His work for me kept me fast.
+
+My first step was to go to my colleagues and ask to be released from the
+agreement into which I had entered with them. They were as much
+surprised at the turn affairs had taken as I had been, but readily
+agreed not to stand in the way of the Lord's call. A letter was then
+sent to the Mission Board, informing them of the call to service and my
+readiness to go and at once if they deemed it advisable to send me.
+
+Much had been said about missionary work and many had seemed eager to
+go, so that I somewhat tremblingly awaited the result, feeling that they
+might not consider me fitted. At the same time a private letter was
+dispatched to my father, who was Chairman of the Board, telling him of
+my convictions and call. A letter came first from dear father. He had
+been quite unprepared for the news contained in my letter, and his
+answer can best be summed up in two of his sentences: "How can I say
+yes? and how dare I say no?" He closed the letter by advising me to wait
+a year or two until others were ready to go. The official letter from
+the Board through the Secretary, Elder Jesse Engle, stated that I was
+the only applicant so far and had been accepted, but that there would be
+time to finish the year's teaching. It was quite a surprise and
+disappointment to me to learn that there were still no other applicants,
+but not long afterwards word came that Elder Jesse Engle and wife were
+likewise seriously considering the question.
+
+He, as many of my readers know, had realized a call to give the Gospel
+to the heathen while he was still a young man, but probably from lack of
+encouragement and from other seemingly insurmountable obstacles had not
+obeyed. Now, at the advanced age of fifty-nine years, he still felt that
+his work was not done; and he was ready to enter the field, if his way
+opened, even though it might appear to be at the eleventh hour. And she,
+who had nobly stood by his side for so many years, could still say, "My
+place is beside my husband. Where he goes I too will follow."
+
+In the meantime the question as to the location of this first missionary
+venture was beginning to agitate the minds of some of us. The Board felt
+that the missionaries should be consulted in the matter. The conditions
+then existing in South America were attracting the attention of the
+Christian world. Some countries, notably Equador, were for the first
+time being opened to missionaries. The sore need there appealed to me
+and led to correspondence with others in reference to that field; but no
+one was ready to go there. Later I learned from Brother Engle that he
+was led to Africa, the country of his early call. The location was
+immaterial to me, for my call was to the neediest field, and I soon
+realized that Africa, with its unexplored depths, its superstition and
+degradation, its midnight darkness, was surely in need of the Light of
+Life.
+
+The cheering news soon came that Miss Alice Heise also had applied and
+been accepted as a foreign missionary. That increased the number to
+four.
+
+At the General Conference in May, 1897, at Valley Chapel, Ohio, the
+following report was given and adopted:
+
+     Report of the amount of money in the hands of the Treasurer of
+     Foreign Mission to date, $693.46.
+
+     Four candidates presented themselves for the foreign mission field
+     and have been accepted as follows: Elder Jesse Engle and Sister
+     Elizabeth Engle, his wife, of Donegal, Kansas; Sister H. Frances
+     Davidson, Abilene, Kansas; and Sister Alice Heise, Hamlin, Kansas,
+     and if approved by Conference, it is recommended that they should
+     be ready to start for their field of labor as early as September or
+     October, provided that sufficient means are at hand to pay their
+     passage to their place of destination, which means are to be raised
+     by voluntary contributions as the Lord may direct, and to be sent
+     directly to the address of each of the missionaries.
+
+     The Board recommends that to complete the number of workers there
+     should be one more added to the number in the person of a brother
+     as an assistant to Brother Jesse Engle.
+
+     The Board further recommends that the Conference now in session
+     select some well qualified brother to fill the vacancy occasioned
+     by Brother Jesse Engle on the Foreign Mission Board. Brother W. O.
+     Baker was appointed
+     to fill the vacancy (provided Brother Engle should go); all of
+     which is respectfully submitted.
+
+                                      HENRY DAVIDSON, Chairman.
+                                      SAMUEL ZOOK, Treasurer.
+
+The summer of 1897 passed slowly for some of us who were eager to be on
+the way; but even the days of waiting and visiting were a part of our
+preparation. They were solemn and momentous days also to others besides
+those who were going. Some of the friends felt that we should not go;
+others with tears bade us Godspeed, feeling that we might probably never
+look one another in the face on earth again. In October a little
+farewell meeting was held at Dayton, Ohio, where God's blessing was
+invoked on the work, and here I said good-bye to dear old father,
+realizing that it would likely be for the last time. At Harrisburg,
+Pennsylvania, we were pleased to receive into our number Miss Barbara
+Hershey, of Kansas, who also was called to the work.
+
+The actual moving out of the missionaries was also a great impetus to
+the financial part of the undertaking. During the few months previous to
+sailing $1,500 was given by voluntary contributions into the hands of
+the missionaries themselves, more than half of which was handed to
+Brother and Sister Engle in their extended tour of the Brotherhood. In
+addition to this, $639.70 was during the same time handed to the
+Treasurer, making $1,211.64 in his hands.
+
+On November 21 a general farewell and ordination meeting for all was
+held in the Messiah Home Chapel, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, where the
+five prospective missionaries were set apart for the work of the Lord.
+No brother had volunteered to go along as a helper to Elder Engle. This
+was a solemn time to those going, for a new and untried field was before
+them and a voyage and country of which they as yet knew nothing. And yet
+there was no fear, no anxiety. On the contrary, to some of us the joy of
+having the privilege of being His messengers to those sitting in
+darkness transcended all other emotions, and our journal of that time is
+full of expressions of longing to be in darkest Africa. At that meeting
+Elder Engle delivered a farewell address with power and unction from on
+High, and the rest told of their call. After the ordination of all had
+taken place, we commemorated the death and sufferings of our Savior.
+
+If we may judge from expressions made at the time and since, there were
+others in that large audience that evening to whom the occasion was an
+important and impressive one. The Church was rising to a sense of her
+opportunity and privilege--yes, and duty of carrying out the Great
+Commission. As we went forth, we felt that the prayers of the entire
+Church were bearing us up, and that gave renewed strength and courage
+all along the way. Those prayers buoyed us up as we went forth even into
+the blackness of heathendom; they opened doors that otherwise would have
+been closed; yes, and best of all, they opened dark hearts that the
+light of the glorious Gospel of Christ might penetrate. Those prayers
+yet today are rising as sweet incense in behalf of the Dark Continent.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO
+
+The Voyage and Landing
+
+Now the Lord had said unto Abraham, Get thee out of thy country and from
+thy kindred and from thy father's house, unto a land that I will shew
+thee.--Gen. 12: 1.
+
+
+Seventeen years ago a voyage to Africa was not the common occurrence to
+us plain country folk that it is today. The majority of us had never
+seen the sea, we knew no one who had made the trip, and we knew less
+about the continent of Africa.
+
+It had been decided that we should sail November 24, 1897. While Elder
+and Mrs. Engle were making their tour of the churches, some of us had
+finished visiting and were waiting the time of sailing. So he suggested
+that we secure the tickets. We did so to England, and through an agent,
+Mr. Mills, of England, arranged in advance for tickets from England to
+Cape Town. The tickets were bought, the good-byes were over, and the
+date of sailing found us all at New York Harbor, a little anxious, it is
+true, but eager to launch.
+
+Being inexperienced, we had a little difficulty in having some money
+matters attended to. Sister Hershey and myself had each a draft which we
+desired to have exchanged for one on an English bank, and were told by
+one of the men to take them to the bank on which they were drawn and
+have it attended to there. So we were obliged to go up into the city
+the morning of the date of sailing, when the steamer was to leave at 12
+M. We were gone all morning, only to find on reaching the bank that
+there was no one to identify us, and nothing could be done. Hurrying
+back to the hotel, we secured our hand baggage and hastened to the
+wharf. The rest of the company had already embarked, and only a few
+minutes remained until time of sailing, but we appealed to our agent to
+exchange the drafts for some on an English bank. Although one of the
+other men objected on account of the shortness of time, he promptly
+attended to them, Elders Jacob Engle and John Niesly, who were brothers
+of Brother and Sister Engle and had come to see them off, going
+security. The gangway for passengers had already been removed from the
+steamer and we hurried along that on which baggage was carried. As soon
+as we were aboard, the steamer _Majestic_ began to move; and ere we
+found the rest of our company on board, a narrow stretch of water lay
+between us and our native land.
+
+This, our first voyage across the Atlantic, was a delightful one. The
+sea was unusually calm for that season of the year, so that none of our
+number became sick, except one, as we neared the coast of Ireland. The
+passengers on board were on the whole congenial. As we paced up and down
+the deck, many thoughts crowded in upon us too deep for utterance. What
+did the future have in store for us? What awaited us on the other side?
+The Lord alone, whose messengers we were, could foresee. The great,
+wide, boundless space of water was an ever-increasing source of
+interest and delight, and greatly enlarged our conception of the power
+and majesty of Him "who hath measured the waters in the hollow of His
+hand." We felt in truth that we had let go the shore lines and had
+launched out into the ocean of His love.
+
+The second day out was Thanksgiving Day, and in company with another
+missionary on board we had a very enjoyable service which was attended
+by most of the second-class passengers. Sunday morning there were the
+regulation Church of England services, and later our genial table
+steward asked Elder Engle to preach in the evening. He did so to a
+large, intelligent, and interested congregation. As there had been much
+conjecture among the passengers as to who we were, and what our belief
+was, he embraced the opportunity, while speaking, of setting forth some
+of the tenets of our faith, much to the satisfaction of those present.
+
+On November 31 the steamer reached Liverpool, England, and the first
+part of the voyage was at an end. As we stood on deck gazing at the
+strange scenes around us and at the sea of unfamiliar faces looking up
+into ours, and awaiting our turn to disembark, we realized in truth that
+we were strangers in a strange land. How was our agent to be found on
+that crowded wharf?--but this question was quickly settled. No sooner
+had we stepped off the gangway, than a gentleman approached, and, naming
+us, introduced himself as Mr. Mills, our agent. What a relief it was to
+all of us in our ignorance of foreign travel! We were thus forcibly
+reminded that He was going before and preparing the way so that we need
+have no anxious fear. This thought was further impressed upon our minds
+as we entered our room in the little hotel in Liverpool, for there, on
+the opposite wall, as we opened the door were the words, "The Lord shall
+be thy confidence." Mr. Mills then and there took charge of us and our
+baggage and did not relax his vigilance until we had safely embarked for
+South Africa.
+
+Fortunate it was that our baggage was in such good hands, for part of it
+had been miscarried and reached the steamer at Southampton only about an
+hour before we left that port for South Africa. English travel has many
+things to recommend it, some of which Americans would do well to profit
+by; but one learns to appreciate the excellent system of handling
+baggage in America only after he has had a little experience of the
+slipshod manner in vogue abroad. This fact was again brought to my
+attention on my first furlough to America nearly seven years later. When
+I disembarked at New York, an English lady from the same steamer bought
+a railroad ticket from New York to San Francisco and checked her
+baggage.
+
+I said to her, "Now you need not trouble yourself about your baggage
+until you reach your destination."
+
+"So they tell me," she replied. "It will seem so strange to travel
+without having to look after one's luggage."
+
+One is pleased to note, however, that the increased amount of foreign
+travel of late years has brought about some improvement along this line,
+even in conservative England.
+
+The ride from Liverpool to London was most enjoyable, and would have
+been still more so had there been some one to point out the places of
+interest. The fields, still green at that late date, were well kept; but
+the methods employed in farming seemed somewhat antiquated to people
+fresh from the farms of western America. As the train glided along we
+were favored with a glimpse of a hunting party in their brilliant
+colored costumes in pursuit of the poor little animals on one of the
+game reserves. The small private compartments on the train were a
+pleasing novelty, but there was no one to call off the names of the
+cities through which the train was passing, and the surroundings were
+too new for us to know where to look for the names. Once when the guard
+came to examine our tickets, I inquired the name of the place.
+Concluding from his silence that he had not understood, I ventured to
+repeat the question. The stare he gave made me realize that I had been
+guilty of a breach of something, but what it was is not exactly clear to
+me to this day. We also had a glimpse of London, that great metropolis,
+with its narrow, crowded streets, its rush of business, and its
+perfectly-controlled business traffic. Here our company was met by
+another agent, who conveyed us to Black Wall and placed us on the
+steamer _Pembroke Castle_, of the Union Castle Line, for a three weeks'
+voyage to Cape Town.
+
+The associations on the _Majestic_ had been pleasant and we expected a
+similar experience on this second steamer; but the long voyage to Cape
+Town leaves much to be desired. One may always find some congenial
+spirits, but even under the best circumstances the voyage finally
+becomes tiresome. Only too often the more turbulent element gains the
+upperhand, so that drinking, gambling, dancing, and even grosser evils
+prevail.
+
+After sailing from Southampton one soon leaves behind the cold, chilly
+winds of the temperate climate and begins to enjoy the soft, balmy
+breezes of the subtropical climate. However, as the heat becomes more
+intense, this enjoyment gradually gives place to discomfort. The only
+stop on the way to Cape Town was at Las Palmas, on Canary Island. As we
+approached the place, the low-lying mountain peaks could have been
+mistaken for clouds, but soon the entire island lay before us in all its
+beauty. What appeared at first sight to be bare cliffs were soon seen to
+be clothed with verdure; and while we were feasting our eyes on the
+scene, on one side of the steamer, our attention was called to the
+opposite side where the city of Las Palmas lay. It was indeed a
+magnificent scene and beggars description. The city, which is almost
+entirely white, rises tier after tier up the mountain side, and the
+whole had a dark background of mountain peaks. We were in the bay with
+the island nearly surrounding us. In a short time our steamer was
+encompassed by a number of small boats full of natives, some of whom
+came to sell their wares of fruit or fancywork. Other boats were full of
+diving boys, ready to plunge into the sea for money thrown from the
+steamer into the water.
+
+In a short time the steamer was again on its way; but where was it
+taking the little band of missionaries? and what was to be their final
+destination? Their tickets called for Cape Town, but beyond that the way
+seemed like a sealed book. Africa, with its barbarism, its unknown
+depths, its gross darkness, lay before them; and they were keenly
+conscious of their ignorance of the continent. They had implicit
+confidence, however, in their Great Leader, and believed that they were
+going to a place which the Lord said He would show them. Many prayers
+ascended that they might understand His voice when He spoke to them.
+
+Personally their ideas about the location of the work differed. At first
+Elder Engle felt drawn for various reasons towards the Transvaal (not
+Johannesburg), because that was not so far inland. To one of the party
+the call had been distinctly into the interior and most needy regions
+where Christ had not been named. All, however, were ready to let the
+Lord lead.
+
+A number of the passengers on the steamer were familiar with some parts
+of Africa and gave valuable information. One of the officers, the chief
+engineer, was especially helpful. He brought out his maps and went
+carefully over the ground, showing where missionaries were located and
+where there was need. Ere the party left the steamer, the consensus of
+opinion seemed to be that Rhodesia, or the part of it known as
+Matabeleland, was the Lord's place for them to begin aggressive
+missionary work. This was further confirmed when it was learned that the
+Cape to Cairo Railroad had just been completed as far as Bulawayo, the
+chief town of Matabeleland.
+
+This having been decided upon, the next question was as to how long they
+were to remain at Cape Town before proceeding into the interior. The
+amount of money at their disposal was not large, and as it was the
+Lord's money it was necessary to know His will as to its disposal. They
+soon learned that He was continuing to go before and prepare the way.
+Those were precious days of waiting on Him; for never does His will and
+guidance seem so precious as when He is showing only one step at a time,
+and as one becomes willing to take that, lo! another is revealed just
+beyond. Why then do we so often halt, fearing to walk alone with Him,
+knowing that we cannot stumble as long as we keep hold of His dear hand?
+
+On December 26 the steamer entered beautiful Table Bay, and the long
+voyage was over. Praises ascended to Him Who had given such a prosperous
+journey. It was Sunday when land was reached and the passengers were
+allowed to remain on board the steamer until Monday if they so desired.
+All of us attended divine services on land Sunday morning, and in the
+afternoon Brother and Sister Engle went to the Y. W. C. A. Building
+where the Secretary, Miss Reed, offered to help them look for rooms.
+
+They accordingly went on Monday morning, the rest of us remaining with
+the boxes and in prayer. They at first were unsuccessful in securing
+rooms, but after again looking to the Lord for guidance, Miss Reed was
+impressed to take them to a Mrs. Lewis (nee Shriner), a prominent
+temperance and reform worker of Cape Town, and a most devoted
+Christian. This lady was a friend in need to many of God's children. She
+had lately rented a large building in connection with her work; but the
+venture had not been as successful as she had hoped, and she was in
+prayer about the matter, pleading that the place might be made a
+blessing to some one. Even as she prayed, three persons stood at her
+door desiring to speak with her. These were Miss Reed and Elder and Mrs.
+Engle, whom the Lord had directed thither. As soon as she heard their
+errand, she felt that here was an answer to her prayer. Arrangements
+were immediately made by which they were to receive three
+plainly-furnished rooms for a sum which was very moderate indeed for
+Cape Town. She said she would prefer to give the rooms gratis if she
+were in a position financially to do so. Together they fell on their
+knees and thanked the Lord for answered prayer which meant so much to
+all concerned. When Elder Engle returned to the waiting ones their
+hearts, too, leaped for joy at the good news. They thought it was almost
+too good to be true, that so soon rooms had been secured, and that they
+were to have a little home of their own without the expenses of a hotel.
+Truly, "He is able to do exceeding abundantly all that we ask or think."
+Boxes were soon transferred to the new home and our feet planted firmly
+on African soil.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE
+
+Preparation and Progress
+
+
+We were here on the threshold of Africa, eager to move out. We realized,
+however, how meager was our knowledge of this vast continent and its
+needs, so it was necessary to go slow and gain all possible information
+from this vantage ground.
+
+Cape Town is the oldest of South African cities and is the largest
+seaport town, having a population of about 80,000 inhabitants. The long,
+tiresome sea voyage being over, the sight of this picturesque city,
+nestling so cozily at the foot of Table Mountain, is one long to be
+remembered. The mountain rises abruptly 3,850 feet in the background of
+the city. Its majestic flat top is two miles long, and when the weather
+is clear, it stands sharply outlined against the blue sky. Frequently,
+however, a white cloud, known as the "Table Cloth," comes up from the
+sea from the back of the mountain and rolls down over the face, a sign
+that a change of weather is imminent. It has been said, "The glory of
+Table Bay is Table Mountain," and "The glory of Table Mountain is the
+Table Cloth." Bay, town, and mountain combine to make the picture
+beautiful and unique of its kind.
+
+Cape Town was laid out by the Dutch, and the substantial,
+antiquated-looking houses in the older parts of the city bear ample
+testimony to this fact. There are also many fine, modernly-built houses.
+The place is supplied with all the latest improvements, which are a
+necessary part of a modern city. The population is most varied. Dutch,
+English, Hottentots, Malays, and Kafirs abound. The scenes on some of
+the streets at that time, especially in the evenings and on holidays,
+were most varied and picturesque. There were to be seen Europeans in
+civilian dress, others in soldier's uniform, Malays in their turbans and
+bright, flowing robes, well-dressed blacks, and the raw native African
+with only a gunny sack to cover him, for clothed he must be before he
+can enter the city.
+
+Mr. and Mrs. Lewis, together with other Christian people whom we met at
+Cape Town, thought Matabeleland, the chosen field, was a good one,
+especially the Matopo Hills, as there were no missionaries in that
+locality. The late Cecil Rhodes, who was still powerful in Rhodesia, was
+at that time living on his estate, Groot Schuur, near Cape Town, and
+Bishop Engle was advised to go to him and endeavor to obtain from him a
+tract of land for a mission site. This was another special season of
+looking to the Lord on the part of the little company, that He might
+overrule it to His glory and to the advancement of His Kingdom. Brother
+Engle was received kindly by the gentleman, and his request was
+favorably considered, especially the suggestion of going to the Matopo
+Hills. He at once gave Brother Engle a letter to the British Charter
+Company, of Rhodesia, with the recommendation that we be given 3,000
+acres of land in the Matopo Hills for a mission station. He added that
+"missionaries are better than policemen and cheaper."
+
+Every forward step only served to confirm us in the decision on the
+steamer that Matabeleland, which is a part of Rhodesia, was the Lord's
+place for opening up His work in Africa. The fact that the railroad had
+just shortly before been completed that far, thus making it easier of
+access; the advice of those on the steamer who were familiar with the
+country; the advice of the spiritually-minded friends met at Cape Town,
+and the encouragement given by him, the "Empire Builder," who perhaps
+more than anyone else had the welfare of the country at heart and whose
+name, Rhodesia, the country bore, together with the conviction of the
+missionaries themselves, all served to set at rest any further question
+as to location that might arise.
+
+Sister Hershey, it is true, was somewhat burdened as to whether Rhodesia
+was the Lord's place for her. While she was seeking to know His will in
+the matter, she received a letter from Mr. and Mrs. Worcester, of
+Johannesburg, inviting her to come and assist in the missionary work at
+the Compounds. She felt at once that this was the Lord's place for her,
+and accepted it as from Him. We were truly sorry to lose so valuable and
+consecrated a colaborer in the work, but felt to bow in submission to
+Him Who knoweth best.
+
+While we were waiting at Cape Town, we learned that the Tebele language
+spoken by the natives in Matopo Hills and vicinity was a dialect of the
+Zulu language. The Bible had been translated into the Zulu, and there
+were grammars and dictionaries to be had, and we at once endeavored to
+procure these so that we might do some studying. Efforts were also made
+to secure a teacher, but the Zulu teacher recommended did not have
+sufficient English to be of any real service to us except in the
+pronunciation of Zulu words, so we were obliged to study on alone and
+consequently made very little progress.
+
+We had arrived at Cape Town in the midst of the summer and dry season.
+Like California, Cape Town and vicinity have rains chiefly in the
+winter, and a most healthful climate the year round. Other parts of
+South Africa, however, have their rainy season in the summer, and in
+some localities, notably Rhodesia and farther inland, the deadly
+malarial fever is especially severe during the rainy season. So we were
+advised to remain at Cape Town until the rains were over in Rhodesia.
+Mr. Lewis was contemplating going north with us to assist Brother Engle
+in opening the work; but before this could be accomplished, both he and
+Mrs. Lewis were summoned north to Bulawayo by a telegram to minister to
+one of their friends there who was very sick.
+
+After reaching Bulawayo they immediately sent a telegram south telling
+us to remain at Cape Town, and under no consideration to venture into
+the interior until the rains were over. As if to emphasize the message,
+both of them, while attending to the sick, were stricken with fever, and
+all were obliged to hasten south as soon as possible. We also came into
+contact with some of the Seventh Day Adventists in Cape Town, and
+through them learned that two of their missionaries in Rhodesia had
+just succumbed to the fever.
+
+From the illness brought on at this time Mr. Lewis never fully
+recovered, and shortly after our departure from Cape Town, we learned,
+much to our sorrow, that he had been carried away by the disease. We
+were often made to feel, as Mrs. Lewis expressed it, that the Lord had
+sent them before us to preserve life. Otherwise we would undoubtedly
+have gone to Bulawayo at an earlier date than we did and would probably
+have had to suffer in consequence. We shall never forget the great
+kindness of these friends during the entire four months of our stay at
+Cape Town. The wise counsel, the spiritual and financial aid which they
+gave, will ever be a green spot in our memory. And not only then, but in
+later years, Mrs. Lewis' home, "The Highlands," and her large heart were
+ever open to our missionaries. As each recruit stepped foot on Africa's
+shores she was the first to welcome him. When any needed rest, her house
+was wide open for any who might choose to come and rest there. When a
+few years ago word came that she had gone to meet her Savior Whom she so
+much loved, we all felt that we had indeed lost a friend that could not
+be replaced.
+
+At last the time came when it was considered safe to move out, Sister
+Hershey to Johannesburg and the rest to Bulawayo. Mrs. Lewis had given
+us a nice large tent, 16 x 16 feet, which could be used as a dwelling
+place while huts were being built, and she had also on her trip north
+met some of the white people of Bulawayo who were ready to assist us.
+Other friends at Cape Town also kindly helped us on the way.
+
+On April 28, 1898, we took the train at Cape Town, bound for Bulawayo,
+1,362 miles inland. We traveled four days and four nights in a
+comfortable coach and reached the place May 2. The same journey formerly
+required six months and longer with an ox team. We passed through only a
+few towns worthy the name; Kimberley, the center of the diamond mines,
+being the principal one. Some of the country through which we passed
+looked like a desert; not a blade of grass to be seen, but the red sand
+is covered with bushes. This is known as the Karroo, and, as rain seldom
+falls on much of this land, one is surprised to see flocks of sheep and
+here and there an ostrich farm. There are many flat-topped mountains and
+hills, at the foot of which one occasionally catches sight of a
+farmhouse with its accompanying sheep pen. A letter sent to America at
+the time adds:
+
+     Parts greatly resemble Kansas prairies, while the last four or five
+     hundred miles of the journey the country looks like old, deserted
+     orchards. We were also introduced to African life in its primitive
+     state, and during the latter part of the journey no white people
+     were visible save the few connected with the railway service, but
+     many native huts were to be seen. Some were made of mud, others
+     formed of poles covered with various-colored cloth, forming a
+     veritable patchwork, while the natives in semi-nude condition came
+     crowding about the car windows, begging for money and food. How my
+     heart bled for these poor souls! Although the railroad was built,
+     ostensibly, for the purpose of developing the commercial and mining
+     interests of the country; yet, as I looked upon those poor natives,
+     I wondered whether the real
+     purpose of it under the Providence of God was not to bring the
+     Gospel to them. Other missionaries are here before us, but I
+     believe we are the first to make use of the new railroad for this
+     purpose.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR
+
+Matabeleland
+
+
+Before proceeding with my story let me introduce to my readers the
+people and the country to which we had come. The Matabele are a branch
+of the Zulu tribe of Southeast Africa. During the reign of the great and
+despotic Zulu King, Tyaka, they revolted under the leadership of
+Mzilikazi, or Moselikatse, and started north through Africa, proving a
+terror to the various tribes along the way and meeting with numerous
+hardships and varying degrees of success. About the year 1836 found them
+in this country, to which they gave the name Matabeleland. This land,
+together with Mashonaland, constitutes what is now known as Southern
+Rhodesia.
+
+Here they established themselves by ruthlessly slaughtering all who
+opposed them, and enslaving the natives already in the country. After
+the death of Mzilikazi, his son, Lobengula, became King. He was more or
+less tyrannical, like his father, and he lived with his sixty wives
+about two miles from what is now known as Bulawayo--the killing
+place--or, as the natives often say, "o Bulawayo," meaning murderer. A
+rock near this place is still pointed out as the place where a number of
+his wives met a violent death.
+
+This King Lobengula ruled his people with a rod of iron. The young men
+were all enlisted in his army and the women and children left to carry
+on the work in the gardens and kraals. Rev. Helm, one of the first
+missionaries in the country, said it was impossible to get hold of the
+young men; and even if the boys did start to school, the King would take
+them for his own use as soon as they were old enough. He, however, never
+molested the missionaries themselves, and probably considered it an
+honor to have a white teacher in the country; but, as Mrs. Helm
+remarked, they were careful not to offend him.
+
+The British Charter Company had obtained some concessions from the King
+in 1889, and, in the next year, Europeans entered the country to
+prospect and mine the gold. It was a foreseen conclusion that there
+would eventually be a conflict between a savage despot, to whom many of
+the white people were obliged to cringe, and a civilized people. The
+inevitable reached a climax in 1893, when war broke out between the King
+and the white people of the country. There were only a few white men in
+the country at that time, but assegais and other native weapons were no
+match for Maxim guns and European tactics. The King's house being burnt,
+he himself fled and eventually died in January, 1894, thus causing the
+war suddenly to come to an end, as there remained no one to keep the
+forces together. The British South African Company took possession and
+began to occupy and build up the country.
+
+The Matabele, however, did not consider themselves conquered, and many
+circumstances conspired to bring about a second conflict. Perhaps the
+chief among these was the fact that all the cattle were regarded as the
+property of the King, although being distributed among the people and
+used by them as their own. However, since the cattle belonged to the
+King, the British Company looked upon them as theirs by right of
+conquest, and proceeded to appropriate some of them. This greatly
+angered the natives, as also the rinderpest, which came later and swept
+off many of the remaining cattle. Then 400 of the subject tribes were
+armed and enlisted as native police; and this was most galling to the
+proud Matabele warriors, that they should be exulted over by their
+former slaves. The disease among their cattle, the locust, which
+devoured their crops, and numerous other troubles were all, by their
+witch doctors, laid at the door of the white man. Umlimo (their god)
+also affirmed that their King was still alive and was ready to assist
+them in gaining their liberty.
+
+This second conflict, known as the Matabele Rebellion of 1896, came very
+suddenly upon the 4,000 white people, scattered in various parts of the
+country. No one seemed to expect danger, although there were several who
+had had a little warning, and many natives who were working in Bulawayo
+were called home by their parents. One boy in speaking of the time said:
+
+"I was working in Bulawayo when my father sent word that I was to come
+home. I did not want to but I was afraid to disobey. I was afraid to
+look at my father, he looked like a mad man. He said, 'We cannot live
+and be oppressed like this. We would rather die than be treated as we
+are!'
+
+"The rest of the people, too, looked just that way!"
+
+The natives rose against the Europeans and suddenly murdered 200 in the
+outlying districts, including a number of women and children. Some of
+these were murdered by their own servants. The rest of the white people
+hastily gathered into the new town of Bulawayo, while soldiers scoured
+the country in search of native troops. A large number of the native
+police had gone over to the enemy, carrying their rifles with them, and
+a number of the natives, both in Matabeleland and Mashonaland, had in
+some way secured several thousand firearms; so that in this war the
+natives were much better prepared.
+
+This rebellion lasted eight months, and the natives were finally driven
+into the Matopo Hills. In these, nature's vast strongholds and caves,
+all efforts of the European soldiers to dislodge them proved unavailing.
+Here finally came Mr. Rhodes, unarmed, into the midst of the enemy's
+camp and made peace with them. The tree under which this famous council
+was held is still pointed out not many miles from where Matopo Mission
+now is. We entered the country a little over a year after the close of
+the rebellion, while all the causes and events were still fresh in the
+minds of the natives. What is still more significant, we were located in
+the very heart of these hills where no missionary had yet penetrated,
+and being surrounded by many of the rebels themselves, we were able to
+glean much of the above history at first hand. When we went among them
+they were still seething with discontent from the same cause which led
+to the Rebellion.
+
+Mr. Rhodes, who had made peace with these natives, was always respected
+and trusted by them, and while he was no religious man himself, he
+thoroughly believed in missionary work among the people. His desire that
+we come to these hills and his statement, that "missionaries are better
+than policemen, and cheaper," was actuated by no mercenary motive. It
+was his conviction, borne out by experience and by long years of contact
+with the Africans, that missionary work and the Christianization of the
+natives was the only solution of the native problems.
+
+But to return to our story, we arrived at Bulawayo late in the evening
+and were taken to the Royal Hotel. This was a good, up-to-date hotel,
+with an up-to-date African price. In the morning, as we looked out of
+the window, the first sight which greeted our eyes was a large African
+wagon drawn by eighteen oxen. Except for this and similar sights we
+could easily have imagined that we were in an American town, for this
+place, with broad streets and thriving business, is said to have been
+patterned somewhat after American cities. My impressions of the town and
+vicinity written at the time were as follows:
+
+     Bulawayo is a modern wonder, an oasis of civilization in the midst
+     of a desert of barbarism and heathendom. It has nearly 3,000
+     inhabitants, and has been built since 1894. Before that time
+     Lobengula, the great Matabele King, held sway about two miles from
+     here at the place where the Government House now stands. This place
+     reminds one of the booming Kansas towns of a few
+     years ago, but it is hundreds of miles from any other civilized
+     place, and is well built of brick and iron, has good stores of all
+     kinds, five churches, public library, electric lights and
+     telephone, not only in town, but also extending to various police
+     forts in the surrounding country, but no public schools. There are
+     comfortable riding cabs, or traps, drawn by horses or mules, but
+     the traffic is carried on by heavy carts or still heavier wagons
+     drawn by a large number of oxen or donkeys. The manual labor is
+     done chiefly by the native boys, the white people considering it
+     beneath their dignity to do anything a native can do.
+
+     The surrounding country is very pretty and level, and one can see an
+     abundance of the "golden sands" mentioned by the poet, and even gold
+     sands are not wanting, but I am sorry to say that the "sunny
+     fountains" rolling down them are very few, especially at this season
+     of the year when there are seven months of drought!
+
+This for Bulawayo in 1898 and first impressions.
+
+We remained at the hotel only two days. Our tent and the other goods had
+not yet arrived, but a gentleman, to whom we had a letter of
+introduction through Mrs. Lewis, most kindly offered the use of his
+house and furniture for two weeks, which offer was gratefully accepted.
+Before the end of that time our tent had arrived, and this being placed
+on a vacant lot furnished ample protection for that season of the year.
+
+Bulawayo, being of such recent growth and being surrounded by pagan
+tribes, would have afforded abundant opportunity for missionary work.
+Daily these raw natives would come to our tent door to sell wood or
+other articles; and we longed to tell them something of a Savior's love,
+had we been able to speak to them. One morning thirteen native women,
+each with a great load of wood on her head, arranged themselves, smiling
+and expectant, before the door of our tent. We could only smile in
+return, that one touch of nature's language which is akin the world
+over. We were thankful that we could do so much, but back of the smile
+was a heavy heart that we could do so little.
+
+During the two months we remained at Bulawayo efforts were made to
+secure a suitable location among the Matopo Hills. Mr. Rhodes' letter
+had been delivered to the government officials, and they generously
+undertook to assist in locating the work. The first place to which they
+took Brother Engle--the one recommended by Mr. Rhodes--was found to have
+been surveyed by a private individual. They then made another selection,
+about thirty miles southeast of Bulawayo, the place now known as Matopo
+Mission, and they agreed to give us here a Mission Reservation of 3,000
+acres. The officials, as well as other Europeans in Bulawayo, rendered
+us much assistance. In addition to these the Seventh Day Adventist
+missionaries also greatly helped us on the way. These had a mission
+station about thirty miles west of Bulawayo, and about fifty miles from
+the place selected for us; and while we were waiting in Bulawayo, they
+kindly took out, at different times, Brother and Sister Engle and Sister
+Heise, for a visit to their station.
+
+The time came for us to move out to our location among the hills, and
+the question of how we should get ourselves and our goods to the place
+was becoming a serious one. Transportation, like everything else in the
+interior of Africa, was exceedingly expensive. In this emergency Mr.
+Anderson, of the Seventh Day Adventist Mission, offered to come that
+long way with his donkey wagon and move us for half the sum required by
+a regular transport driver.
+
+It is difficult for the reader to form any conception of what these
+various expressions of kindness along the way, coming so unexpectedly
+from entire strangers, meant to that little band of missionaries out in
+the heart of Africa. Even as I write these things, after a lapse of
+sixteen years, and live over the events of that time, tears of joy
+unbidden come and my heart wells up in gratitude as I again recall these
+evidences of the wonderful "faithfulness of a faithful God."
+
+We had been ignorant of our destination when we left the American shore,
+and even more ignorant of the cost of living in the interior of Africa;
+so that, by the time supplies had been purchased to take along to the
+hills, the money on hand was about exhausted. We knew not how long a
+time would elapse before a fresh supply could reach us. Knowing, too,
+that the Church had very little experience in foreign missionary work,
+one could not fail at times to be a little anxious. Thanks, however, to
+the wisdom, ability, and promptness displayed by the old fathers who
+formed the Mission Board, and to their support, backed up by the Church;
+as soon as conditions were understood at home means were forthcoming and
+we were never allowed to be in want.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE
+
+The Opening of the Work
+
+We must remember that it was not by interceding for the world in glory
+that Jesus saved it. He gave Himself. Our prayers for the evangelization
+of the world are but a bitter irony so long as we only give of our
+superfluity and draw back before the sacrifice of ourselves.--M.
+Francois Coillard.
+
+
+We heartily echo the words of this sainted missionary to the Barotse,
+but we believe that the thought uppermost in the heart of each of the
+four waiting ones at Bulawayo was not sacrifice but privilege, on that
+July morning, so long ago, when the command to go forward was given. We
+were soon to reach our destination, the place to which we had started
+from New York over seven months previously. An account of this trip
+written at the time reads somewhat as follows:
+
+     We left Bulawayo on the evening of July 4 and traveled three nights
+     and two days before the mission valley was reached. The nights were
+     cool and a bright moon lighted up the way, so that traveling went
+     better at night than during the heat of the day. The wagon was
+     about eighteen feet long, very strong and heavy, and was drawn by
+     eighteen donkeys. These were led by one native boy, while another
+     with a long whip was doing the driving. The load of about three
+     tons was very heavy--too heavy, in fact, for a part of the way.
+     Donkeys can travel only two miles an hour on good roads and on poor
+     roads it sometimes requires two hours to go one mile. Occasionally
+     we stopped from two to four hours to let the donkeys rest and
+     graze.
+
+     During such times we would build fire on the veldt, and cook and eat
+     our food; or, if it were night, we would wrap our blankets about us,
+     take our pillows, and lie down in the shelter of some friendly bush
+     and sleep. Mother Engle usually preferred the shelter of the tent on
+     the back of the wagon, although the place was too much crowded for her
+     to rest comfortably. Since the load was so heavy we spent a great deal
+     of the time walking. We would walk ahead of the wagon for a distance,
+     then sit down and rest until the wagon reached us. Only two of three
+     settlers' houses were visible, and no native kraals, and we were
+     informed that as soon as the white man makes a road, the natives move
+     away from it.
+
+     After twenty miles of travel we came to Fort Usher. At this place
+     there reside an English magistrate and a number of white police. Here
+     we were kindly received and given a native guide for the rest of the
+     journey. We now left the government road and plunged into the hills.
+     The wagon went along another five miles with very little difficulty.
+     Then it mired on going through a swampy place, one side sinking nearly
+     to the hubs of the wheels, and further progress was impossible. All
+     put forth every effort to extricate it but to no avail. What was to be
+     done?
+
+     While we were in this dilemma, the Chief of the natives in this part
+     of the country, Hluganisa by name, with some natives came to meet us
+     and bid us welcome. They gave us a very friendly reception, and then
+     joined in to assist in extricating the wagon, but without success. Mr.
+     Anderson, who could speak the native language, explained to the chief
+     who we were and our object in coming, and he promised to meet us at
+     the mission site the next day, as it was now evening.
+
+     Mr. Anderson then took our party forward a little distance to a dry
+     spot, where we rested during the night. He and his native boys
+     returned to the wagon, and, removing the greater part of the load,
+     carried it beyond the marshy place. The donkeys were then able to pull
+     out the wagon. It is needless to add that Mr. Anderson and his boys
+     were extremely tired after this laborious task and were glad to
+     snatch a little rest. Even under such circumstances they did not
+     indulge long in the much-needed rest, but at an early hour were
+     again ready for the journey. Those of us who had enjoyed a good
+     night's rest were also aroused, and we started on our last trek
+     into the hills. We reached the valley, which is to be our home, on
+     the morning of July 7.
+
+     This valley is surrounded by immense granite hills and boulders, some
+     of which cover hundreds of acres, so that at first sight the rocks
+     seem to constitute the chief part of the country, but a closer
+     inspection showed us to what a beautiful place God had led us for His
+     work. There, spread out before our eyes, was a beautiful rolling
+     valley of rich, dark earth, well supplied with an abundance of fresh
+     water. It was stated that the "sunny fountains" are rare in this part
+     of Africa, and that is true. Here, however, in this beautiful valley,
+     in the heart of Matopo Hills, are sparkling fountains of beautiful
+     water, crystal clear, oozing from under the surface of the rocks, and
+     flowing down the valley. Some contain delicate mosses and pretty water
+     lilies, and surpass the Michigan lakes in transparency.
+
+     In the meantime the Chief had sent word to the headmen of the various
+     kraals to meet us. So, in the morning, obedient to the call of their
+     superior, they came and sat in a semi-circle while their chief
+     addressed them (Mr. Anderson interpreting for our benefit):
+
+     "These are not like other white people."
+
+     The deep-toned voices of the headmen responded in unison, "Yes, my
+     lord."
+
+     He continued, "They have come to teach you and your children and to do
+     you good."
+
+     Again came the response, "Yes, my lord."
+
+     "Now do what you can for them and help them."
+
+     And again the same response was repeated.
+
+     One may imagine how that impressed us. Here we are, far from other
+     white people, among a class of natives who have never been subdued by
+     the English soldiers. They are kept in subjection only by forts of
+     police stationed among the hills, the nearest being ten miles distant.
+     Yet these people recognized us at once as their friends and received
+     us with kindness far above what we dared expect. Our hearts overflow
+     with thankfulness to Him who rules the hearts of men.
+
+The Chief and one or two other natives went with us to look up a
+location on which to pitch the tent and build huts. The tent was finally
+pitched under the shade of a large umkuni tree, Mr. Anderson returned to
+his station, and we were left without an interpreter, and with no
+practical knowledge of mission work. We had, however, a Great Teacher,
+and we were willing to be taught.
+
+Both Matabele and their subject races, known as Amahole, live in the
+Matopo Hills. The majority of them are not black, but a chocolate brown,
+and some have features resembling white people. They are generally
+large, well-formed, and intelligent-looking. They are more or less rude
+in manner, uncouth in appearance, and wear little or no clothing except
+the loin cloth. This in the men usually consists of the skin of small
+animals, and among the women a short skirt of cloth or skins. Over the
+upper part of the body is sometimes thrown a larger piece of cloth.
+
+Among those that gathered about us that first day were some who had been
+quite active in the late rebellion. As we gained their confidence, they
+often pointed out to us the caves where they stored their grain, and
+where they themselves hid during that terrible time. A year of famine
+had followed the war, and some had starved to death. At the time we
+entered upon the work there was a great deal of destitution all about
+us; for some had not yet been able to grow grain, and they had no flocks
+to fall back upon as they usually had in time of grain famine.
+
+Many of the white people in the country and in Bulawayo were continually
+talking about and expecting another uprising. They looked for it to come
+from these Matopo Hill natives, and some sought to warn us not to
+venture into this, the enemy's stronghold. We, however, living among
+them from day to day, saw no cause for fear.
+
+The natives came to see us in large numbers. Sometimes fifty would
+appear in one day and crowd around the door of our tent, desiring to
+have a good view of the newcomers and their belongings. Many of them,
+especially the women and children, had never seen a white person before,
+or at most a white woman. Some three or four families had heard a little
+of Jesus, but the great majority knew absolutely nothing of the Gospel.
+
+Our ignorance, both of the language and the people, led to many
+blunders, both ludicrous and otherwise. The desire to help them and to
+show them that we were their friends caused them often to take advantage
+of our kindness. We soon learned that the African is not so much
+interested in the things that are for the good of his soul as in that
+which ministers to his body and appetite. It was so difficult to know
+just what to do at all times, for they were destitute of nearly
+everything which we considered necessary for comfort. They were
+confirmed beggars, and the more they received the more they wanted. The
+missionary opens his Bible, and reads, "He that hath two coats, let him
+impart to him that hath none; and he that hath meat let him do
+likewise"; he then gets down on his knees and prays that the Lord might
+help the poor souls about him, but he often feels that his prayers do
+not ascend very high. What he needs to do is to get up and answer his
+own prayers.
+
+[Illustration: Hut Built by H. Frances Davidson and Alice Heise at
+Matopo.]
+
+When we made a contract with them for work, and told them what pay they
+would receive, they always wanted more than the contract called for when
+the time came to settle. This is characteristic of the native in dealing
+with the white man. He sees that the other has clothing and many
+comforts of which he is deprived, hence concludes that the pockets of
+the white man are full of money. Socialist that he naturally is, he
+thinks that the property should be equally distributed. It never occurs
+to him that his laziness and shiftlessness have much to do with his
+destitution. In fact, that thought does not generally occur to the
+missionary when he goes among the heathen for the first time, unless he
+is with some one who understands the situation.
+
+It is necessary to make the natives understand at times that the
+kindness of even the missionary has a limit. One day I was in the little
+straw shed which served as a kitchen, and was endeavoring to bake bread.
+As usual a number of people were about the door, and one man, taking
+advantage of my kindness, came in and sat down by the stove in front of
+the bake-oven door. He made no effort in the least to move away when I
+tried to look into the oven door. I bore it for some time, not wishing
+to be rude to him, and not knowing how to ask him in a polite way to
+move. Suddenly it dawned upon me that the proper native word was _suka_.
+So I made use of the word and told him to _suka_. He looked up in
+surprise and repeated the word to know if he had correctly understood,
+but he moved. Afterwards, in looking for the word in my dictionary, I
+found that it was a word often in the mouth of the white man when
+addressing a native. It really meant a rough "Get out of this." So the
+look of mild reproach in the eyes of the native was accounted for. Some
+of the softness in the missionary, too, soon wears off as he is obliged
+to deal with the native from day to day. He finds that it is necessary
+to make the native understand their relation one to another as teacher
+and pupil.
+
+Living in a tent during the dry and healthy season is not unpleasant in
+such a climate, except that one suffers from the heat by day and the
+cold by night.
+
+Matopo Mission is located about 20-1/2 deg. south latitude and 29 deg. east
+longitude. It is 5,000 feet above sea level, so that, although it is
+within the tropics, it has a delightful and salubrious climate the
+entire year. From the middle of November to the middle of April is what
+is known as the rainy season. The rest of the year rain seldom falls.
+One cannot live in a tent all the year, but must provide better shelter
+for the rainy season. So hut building occupied the first few months. We
+had no wagon and no oxen, nothing but two little donkeys, which had been
+brought out with us from Bulawayo, and we did not know how to make the
+best use of native help. The poles used in the construction of the huts
+were cut and carried to the place of building by natives.
+
+As the manner of building was quite foreign to an American, Brother
+Engle took occasion to examine other huts, built by Europeans, so that
+he was enabled to build very good ones for the mission. He was alone
+and, to make the work lighter, we women assisted, and used hammer, saw,
+and trowel, brought stones for building chimneys, raked grass, and
+assisted in thatching. The huts are built somewhat as follows:
+
+A trench about fifteen inches deep is dug the size and shape of the
+desired hut. In this are placed, near together, poles from the forest,
+space being allowed for doors and windows and sometimes for fireplace.
+The poles are cut out so as to extend about eight feet above ground.
+Large ones are sawed lengthwise for door posts and window frames. Some
+flexible poles are nailed around the top and about halfway up the side,
+so that the walls of the hut are firmly fastened together. Longer poles
+are then used as rafters, these being firmly fastened to the walls and
+nailed together at the top. Small, flexible ones are also used as lath
+to fasten the rafters together and upon which to tie the grass in
+thatching. The grass used for this purpose grows in abundance among
+these rocks, and sometimes reaches the height of eight feet. The women
+cut this and bring it in bundles, glad to exchange it for a little salt.
+It is first combed by means of spikes driven through a board. It is then
+divided into small bundles; the lower ends being placed evenly together,
+and the bundles tied closely together on the lath with tarred rope. The
+next layer is placed over this like shingles, so as to cover the place
+of tying. When completed the thickness of grass on the eaves of the roof
+is from four to ten inches. Then follows the plastering. The mud or
+plaster is made from earth which had been worked over by white ants.
+This, pounded fine and mixed with water, makes an excellent plaster, and
+when placed on the walls it soon dries and becomes very hard. The native
+women put this on the outside with their hands, as the walls are too
+uneven to allow the use of a trowel. Similar earth, mixed with sand, is
+used as mortar in building with brick and stone. The floors also are of
+this earth pounded hard and polished.
+
+The windows have either small panes of glass or muslin stretched on a
+frame, and the doors boast of imported timber brought from Bulawayo.
+Each hut is about as large as an average-sized room. It is difficult to
+make them larger on account of the scarcity of suitable material in this
+part of the country. The walls are whitewashed on the inside, and some
+have a white muslin ceiling. Much of the furniture is of our own
+manufacture and is made of boxes or of native poles draped with calico.
+
+When completed the rooms looked quite cozy and comfortable, so that we
+felt thankful for such pleasant homes in connection with our work. The
+first year there were four of such huts built, kitchen, dining-hut, and
+two sleeping-rooms.
+
+Dealing with the natives while building these was not always easy.
+Sometimes difficulties arose through not being able to make the natives
+understand, so that we could not always place the blame on them. When
+grass was wanted for the thatching a contract was entered into with one
+of the headmen to furnish one hundred bundles for five shillings
+($1.20). The grass was brought until there was about half the specified
+amount, then the pay was demanded. This was of course refused. The man
+brought a little more and then he stoutly affirmed that he had fulfilled
+his part of the contract. After considerable delay and, being harassed
+by the headman, we finally paid him. After all, he may have been honest
+in the affair and a mistake may have been made in the beginning; for the
+word for _one hundred_ and that for _much_ were similar except in the
+prefix. He may have understood that he was to bring much grass, and he
+certainly did that.
+
+Again, when the first hut was to be plastered, arrangements were made
+with certain women to plaster it for a stated amount. They brought a
+number of others along to help them plaster; and when pay day came, the
+total amount of pay demanded was about double the original agreement.
+There was such a noisy, unpleasant demonstration that day, that we
+learned our lesson, and we were very careful so to arrange matters that
+the difficulty would not occur again.
+
+[Illustration: Matopo Mission--March, 1899.]
+
+Our living at the time was of the simplest. Nearly all kinds of eatables
+could be procured in Bulawayo; but they were very expensive, and there
+was no way of bringing them out except by native carriers, or by
+trusting to the friendly assistance of the white traders at Fort Usher.
+Sometimes it fell to the Elder's lot to walk the thirty miles to
+Bulawayo in order to purchase supplies. There was no need, however, for
+us to do, like many a missionary in the wilds of Africa has done,
+deprive ourselves of wheat bread and ordinary groceries. These we always
+had, but we were more economical in their use than we would have been at
+home. We had no milk, except tinned milk, no butter, and very little
+meat, and no gun to procure game. But we had chicken and could
+occasionally procure meat from the natives. Of course at first there
+were no vegetables to be had, except such as we could at times procure
+from the natives--corn, sweet potatoes, pumpkins, and peanuts, but these
+were scarce.
+
+Elder Engle, alive to the value of the soil and the need of wholesome
+food, at once secured fruit trees and set them out, including a number
+of orange trees. He also bought a small plow and with the two donkeys
+broke land and planted vegetables. One native, who continually stood by
+us during those early days, was Mapipa, our nearest neighbor. He was a
+powerfully-built Matabele and reminded one of the giant of Gath; for he
+had six fingers on each hand and six toes on each foot. He had been
+quite active in the Rebellion and was wounded in one of the battles. He
+could always be depended upon in work, and Brother Engle greatly
+appreciated his assistance.
+
+Perhaps some one who reads these lines may wonder whether building,
+farming, and such manual labor is missionary work. Did not the Great
+Missionary, according to all accounts--I say it in all reverence--take
+an apprenticeship in the carpenter's shop where He "increased in wisdom
+and stature and in favor with God and man"? Did not the Apostle Paul,
+undoubtedly the greatest of His followers, unite tent-making with his
+missionary work? Should then we, such feeble imitations, belittle manual
+labor, even though it falls to our lot as missionaries? Any one going to
+the mission field should not, if he is to be successful, decide in his
+own mind that he is going to do certain things, he should be willing to
+do whatever the Lord gives him to do, of spiritual, intellectual, or
+physical labors.
+
+There are so many sides to missionary work, and who can tell which will
+result in the greatest good? To preach Christ and lift Him up that
+others may see and accept Him is undoubtedly the central thought of the
+Great Commission. The ways of exalting Him, however, are so many and so
+various. Christ must be lived among the people before He can in truth be
+preached to them. The heathen of Africa cannot read the Bible, but they
+can and do continually read the lives of those sent among them. If these
+do not correspond to the Word read and preached among them, they are
+keen to discern and judge accordingly. If the Christ-life is lived
+before their eyes, day by day, many will eventually yield their hearts
+to Him, even though, they may for a time resist.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX
+
+Educational and Evangelistic Work
+
+
+The natives were eager to see inside the new huts. When they had an
+opportunity to look at the whitewashed walls and the homemade furniture,
+they stood spellbound, and the first word that broke from their lips was
+"_Muehle_" (pretty).
+
+They had another and more personal interest in seeing the huts
+completed. They had been told that, as soon as the goods were moved out
+of the tent, school would be opened. Both large and small were
+exceedingly eager to learn, or at least they thought so. They had never
+seen books, and writing was like magic to them. To put down some
+characters on paper and from those to spell out their names when they
+next visited the mission was little less than witchcraft. Both old and
+young like to be known. They are pleased if their missionary pronounces
+their name and seems to know them when they come a second time.
+
+School opened October 11. The first boy to come bright and early was
+Matshuba, together with two of Mapita's girls. This little boy, then
+about thirteen years old, had been a very interested spectator of all
+that occurred from the time the mission opened. Day after day he would
+be on hand, and his bright eyes and active mind took knowledge of
+everything that was said or done. His father, Mpisa, then dead, had
+been one of the most trusted witch doctors of the King, and had been
+held in great respect by all of the natives in that part of the country.
+This boy was very eager for school, and the first morning he and
+Mapita's girls begged us to allow only the Matabele to attend school,
+and not the Amahole, or subject races. This furnished an excellent
+opportunity of teaching them that God is no Respecter of persons.
+
+The first morning of school twelve bright-looking boys and girls entered
+the tent and sat down on the floor, curious to know what school was
+like. It was a momentous time. It was the beginning of a work the result
+of which human eye could not foresee. How the teacher, who had often
+stood before a far larger and more inspiring-looking school in a
+civilized land, trembled as she stood there before those twelve little
+savages in the heart of Africa! She knew that those bright eyes were
+reading her thoughts, and realized that she came so far short of the
+"measure of the stature of the fullness of Christ." The special burden
+of the prayer that morning was that, as these dear souls learned to read
+the Word, the Light might enter their hearts and they yield themselves
+to God.
+
+The second day eight more were enrolled, and the third day fourteen, and
+by the end of the month there were forty in all. Sister Heise and I were
+kept busy during school hours as the pupils were taught to sew as well
+as to read and write. Cleanliness is a rare virtue with them, so they
+were told to wash before coming to school. As new ones entered the
+school the admonition was repeated, with the statement that we wash
+every morning. Mapita's little daughter, Sibongamanzi, with shining
+black face, which showed that she had been heeding the command, looked
+up brightly and said, "Yes, but you are white and we are black." She
+evidently had thought that, if she washed every morning, she too would
+become white, but she had concluded it to be a hopeless task. Mr.
+Anderson said that some of their children thought that if they ate the
+food of white people, they too would become white.
+
+This, our first schoolroom, was very primitive. It consisted of a tent
+16 x 16 feet. In front there was a box which served as a teachers' desk
+and as a receptacle for slates, pencils, paper, books, and sewing. Other
+boxes served for teachers' chairs. There were two easels made of poles;
+one supported the blackboard and the other the charts. The blackboard
+consisted of a few small boards nailed together and painted black, and
+the charts were of cardboard, 18 x 24 inches in size. There were ten of
+them printed on both sides with syllables, and Tebele words and
+sentences. These had been printed by homemade stencils and pen, and had
+occupied our leisure time while we were hut-building. The floor of the
+tent was covered with straw, and the pupils sat on this without seats or
+desks. They knew nothing of the comforts of the schoolroom in civilized
+lands and thought they were well supplied.
+
+Since we had no primer at the time, the Gospel of St. John was given to
+them as a textbook when they had finished the charts. To enable them to
+read and understand the Word of God was the aim of the school work and
+the Bible the Textbook throughout. After they had learned to write the
+letters of the alphabet, their copy usually was a verse from the
+Scriptures. They were also taught to memorize certain portions in
+connection with the daily worship, and hymn singing.
+
+The pupils compare very favorably with white children in their ability
+to learn, but few of them come regularly to school. To most of them
+school is just a side issue, some place to go when there is nothing else
+to be done. Some have an idea that they can learn to read in about a
+month, and when they find that it requires months of weary, patient
+effort at meaningless characters, they give up in despair. Others are
+ridiculed by the older people for throwing away their time at such
+useless work; "There is no money, no beer, no food in it and they are
+dunces to go."
+
+Again, some are grown, and being past the age when mental effort is
+easy, they soon become discouraged. One big fellow stumbled along until
+he had mastered the chart after a fashion. Then, to his delight, he was
+given the Gospel of St. John to read. Day after day he struggled along
+over the, to him, meaningless syllables and words. Still he persevered
+until it gradually dawned upon him that the printed page meant
+something. He looked up one day with a most delighted expression on his
+face and exclaimed, "This book is talking to me!"
+
+The native cannot be said to be very persevering, owing to the fact that
+all his life, in his untaught state, he goes on the principle that the
+world owes him a living. His needs are few and often they are supplied
+by nature. When he comes up against a difficult problem of any sort,
+his usual answer is, "It will not consent." For this reason arithmetic
+is always difficult for him and his progress in it is very slow. One day
+I was endeavoring to show a girl how to make the letter _b_. After a
+vain effort to make it properly, she exclaimed, "My pencil will not
+consent to slide that way."
+
+The sewing hour probably was the most interesting time to all. They
+expected to receive the garments after they had finished sewing them and
+had worked for the cloth with which they were made. The dearest wish of
+their hearts was to have a garment to put on. And that is not strange,
+for in the cool morning air they come shivering, and at noon the hot sun
+burns their bodies. We might have made the garments and donated them;
+but that would not teach them to work and would have done them more harm
+than good. A native always appreciates most that upon which he has
+bestowed labor or money; so both boys and girls learned to sew. It was
+rather amusing to see them, in the absence of other garments to which
+they might pin their sewing, place it between their toes. It was also
+interesting to watch the different expressions when at last the garments
+were finished and they could clothe themselves.
+
+Matshuba put on his suit; then, folding his hands, said in a quiet and
+contented manner, "Now I am not cold any more." Amuzeze, when he had
+finished his garments, put them on, and taking a good look at himself
+stepped off as proudly as if he owned a large estate. Sibongamanzi kept
+her dress for Sunday. At home she would carefully fold it, and putting
+it in an earthen jar cover it up for safe keeping.
+
+In the meantime services on Sunday had not been neglected. At the
+opening of the work none of the missionaries could speak the language,
+but they could read it after a fashion. So, from the very first Sunday
+after the work opened, endeavors were made to instill into the minds of
+the natives that one day out of seven was a day of rest and worship. To
+them all days were alike--workdays, rest days, or carousal days, as they
+chose to spend them. Sad to say that even the few that went to work for
+the white man saw little or no difference between the days of the week.
+It falls to the lot of the missionary to teach the significance of the
+fourth commandment as well as the rest of the decalogue. On Sunday the
+people were invited to assemble under the shade of a friendly tree, and
+a portion of the Scriptures was read to them and hymns sung. They are
+great lovers of music, so that in itself was an attraction. The first
+congregation was very small. Sometimes there would be only Mapita and
+his family, five or six in number. As the nature of the meetings began
+to dawn on the native mind, others would assemble with us, but in the
+first few months, or until the opening of school in October, not more
+than twenty-five congregated at one time.
+
+Acquiring the language is always a tedious, though important, part of
+foreign missionary work. The missionary sees the natives about him, day
+by day, and longs to tell them something of Jesus and His love, but is
+unable to do so, especially if he be a pioneer in the work and without
+an interpreter as we were. We had been endeavoring to study the
+language from the Zulu books on hand, but on coming face to face with
+the natives it was discovered that the set phrases we had acquired
+seemed as unintelligible to them as their words were to us. There were
+several reasons for this. One was that we had not learned the proper
+pronunciation and accent, and another was that their dialect differed
+somewhat from the Zulu, which we had been endeavoring to learn. Another,
+and far weightier reason, and one which, to our sorrow, we did not
+discover until some time afterwards, was that some natives did not speak
+the correct language to us. Those who had been accustomed to speaking to
+the Europeans had invented a jargon of their own, which they seemed to
+think especially adapted to the mental capacity of white people. This
+medium of communication is known as "kitchen Kafir."
+
+It consists of a small vocabulary, chiefly of Zulu words, simplified and
+divested of all inflections--and grammar, it might be said. This
+dialect, which is especially distasteful to linguists, is invariably
+used by many natives in addressing white people for the first time. It
+is the common language of the kitchen and the shops, between master or
+mistress and their native servants. It has also of later years spread
+much among the natives themselves where various tribes meet and
+converse. Its use has become so general over South Africa, and even in
+parts of South Central Africa, that it has, not inaptly, been termed the
+"Esperanto of South Africa." Undoubtedly it lacks much of the elegance
+of the real Esperanto, but is in daily use by more people. Not only is
+"kitchen Kafir" spoken between whites and blacks and between blacks
+themselves, but sometimes, when a common language fails, something akin
+to this is used between even the white people.
+
+Not so many of the natives in the hills had come into contact with
+Europeans before our coming among them, yet there was sufficient
+"kitchen Kafir" among them to confuse the newcomers and make it
+necessary in after years to unlearn many of the things they first
+acquired.
+
+Learning the language is trying, especially without a teacher, and many
+blunders and misunderstands occur; but it is not the least useful of
+missionary experiences. People on first coming into contact with raw
+heathendom are seldom capable of doing much preaching to them in such a
+manner that the native can understand and appreciate.
+
+While one is learning the language, he is also learning to know the
+native himself, his surroundings, and modes of thought. By the time one
+is able to converse with the native, he also knows better what to say to
+him. One thing, however, it is always safe to do from the time the
+missionary enters the field of labor; he may always read the Word, if he
+has it in the language. The unadorned Word is always safe and suits all
+conditions of men.
+
+Gradually we learned to speak the language, sentence by sentence. How
+our hearts burned within us those days to be able to tell the story of
+Christ and His love! Usually the dull, darkened look on the faces of the
+few present would cause the speaker to feel that he had not been
+understood, or that there had been no answering response. Then
+occasionally a dusky face would light up, as if a ray of light had
+penetrated a darkened corner, and the speaker would be encouraged to
+renewed efforts to make the subject plain. Thus, Sunday after Sunday,
+the effort would be renewed.
+
+It was not only on that day, however, that some of the older ones heard
+the Word read and an attempt at explanation given. Morning and evening
+worship was held in the native language, and often a larger number, in
+those early days, gathered about us on workdays than on Sunday. The door
+was always open and everyone was invited to enter at time of prayer.
+After school opened, and it became better known which day was Sunday,
+and that the services were held in the tent, the attendance gradually
+increased.
+
+Our feelings, as written at the time, were somewhat as follows:
+
+     We realize more fully every day that much wisdom and grace is
+     needed in dealing with this people. If we did not have such
+     confidence in our Great Leader, we might at times be discouraged,
+     for the enemy of souls is strong here in Africa and human nature is
+     alike the world over. When the truth is driven home to their
+     hearts, they are quite ready to excuse themselves. Thus we find it
+     necessary to get down lower and lower at the feet of Jesus and let
+     Him fill us continually with all the fulness of His love and
+     Spirit, that there may be no lack in us.
+
+In his own eyes the pagan African is always a good, innocent sort of
+person. He has done no wrong, has committed no sin, hence has no need of
+forgiveness. One of the first requisites seems to be instilling into his
+mind a knowledge of God and His attributes. This must be "precept upon
+precept," "line upon line," "here a little and there a little." Time
+after time this thought of God must be reiterated until it is burned
+into the consciousness of the hearers. We are told of one missionary
+who, for the first two years, took as his text, Sabbath after Sabbath,
+"God is." And it would seem to be a wise course to pursue. The
+conception of a Supreme Being Who is holy, omnipotent, omniscient, and
+omnipresent, and cannot look upon sin with any degree of allowance, to
+Whom all must render an account, needs to be indelibly impressed on the
+native mind. Until they realize that "all have sinned and come short of
+the glory of God," it seems useless to preach Christ as a Savior to
+them.
+
+Missionaries soon realize that they cannot sit down and wait for the
+people to come to them. They must go out into the streets and lanes of
+their villages and "into the highways and hedges and compel them to come
+in." Kraal-visiting forms a very important part of the Gospel work.
+Sister Heise and myself went among them as much as possible. We went
+chiefly on foot, and many miles were traveled in all kinds of weather,
+so that the people might be instructed in the things of God. At first
+these visits could be little more than a friendly call and the speaking
+of a few broken sentences. These wild children of nature were quick to
+respond to the interest that prompted the visits, and would always
+welcome the visitors. As soon as we were within sight the children would
+come to meet us and pilot us to their parents. When we left they would
+again accompany us a little distance, perhaps to the next kraal. Who
+shall say but that these early journeys, in which little of the Gospel
+was given, was not as fruitful of results for God as later ones? Back of
+those black exteriors are human hearts waiting to be touched by the
+finger of love and human sympathy, ready to imbibe the milk of human
+kindness. They know something of the natural love of parent to child,
+and _vice versa_; but they need to realize that there is such a thing as
+disinterested love in their welfare, and by this means be led to realize
+in some little measure the _wonderful love of God_. In this, thank God,
+we had no need to simulate love. A spark of the Divine love for them had
+entered our hearts before we even set foot on Africa's shores.
+
+It is difficult to understand the expression of a missionary who visited
+Matopo some time after the work was started, and who in his own field of
+labor seemed to have been used of the Lord. He said one day: "I cannot
+say that I love these people. I do not love that child," pointing to a
+little girl at some distance in front of him, "but I realize that Christ
+loves them and desires them to be saved, hence my work among them." This
+seemingly cold sense of duty may answer. If, however, the pagan African
+once realizes that disinterested love prompts our treatment of him, he
+is generally most pliable and teachable. Without something of the Divine
+love work among them must be hard indeed, for there are so many trying
+things to be met with day by day.
+
+After a time it was discovered that the donkeys might be made use of in
+kraal visiting. I well remember our first experience at this mode of
+travel. We had no saddles, so we placed blankets on the backs of the
+donkeys and fastened them with surcingles of our own manufacture. Sister
+Heise was an expert rider, while I was quite the reverse. Our first trip
+was to a kraal about five miles distant, the home of the chief,
+Hluganisa. Two boys, Matshuba and Sihlaba, accompanied us as guides. All
+went well on the trip over. We were very kindly received by the people
+and afforded an opportunity to give them the Gospel. The village was up
+among the rocks, and as donkeys are expert climbers they had no
+difficulty in making the ascent, or descent, either, but on the return
+journey I could not keep my place, and was sent over the donkey's head
+on to the ground. My companion, when she saw that no harm was done,
+rather considered the accident as a good joke, and I joined in the laugh
+at my own expense. The boys failed to see any fun in it, and seemed
+greatly to resent the laughter.
+
+Some time after this we made another journey of about the same distance
+in the opposite direction. The reason for this second visit was as
+follows: Among our pupils was a nice, modest-looking girl about twelve
+years of age. She belonged to Mapita's family, and seemed to be an
+affectionate and well-behaved child. She was absent from school for a
+few days, and on inquiring we learned that she had gone to the home of
+her intended husband. Greatly shocked, we made further inquiry, and were
+told that Mapita had sold her to a man who had already one wife, and
+that he lived about five miles away. It was our first experience with
+heathen marriage, and we determined to hunt her up and if possible
+release her. We looked upon this child as a slave or prisoner.
+
+Taking the donkeys and our two boys, we again started out one morning.
+The path was not familiar, even to our guides. It wound around among the
+rocks and we were in great danger of being lost. Immense boulders were
+piled up in all sorts of fantastic shapes, and a white person could
+easily be lost among the hills and perhaps never find his way out, but
+the native will always find his way. Once we found ourselves on the top
+of a nearly perpendicular rock, and dismounting reached the bottom only
+with great difficulty. The boys inquired the way of a native in his
+garden, but he regarded us with suspicion and remained silent. Since the
+close of the rebellion, when the natives hid themselves among these
+rocks, they have been very suspicious of white people, for fear some one
+may desire to capture them. It was only after repeated assurances by the
+boys that we were missionaries, and their friends, that he consented to
+direct us.
+
+Finally we reached the home of Buka, the man who had taken little
+Lomanzwana. His kraal was situated up among the rocks in one of nature's
+fortresses. Here, in this desolate place, in the midst of densest
+heathendom, was the girl. Her husband was a cripple and very pagan
+looking. But what could we do amid such rock-bound customs as held these
+people? Nothing. With hearts lifted to the Lord in prayer we tried to
+point them to the Lamb of God. The man regarded us with wild-looking
+eyes, and listened with seemingly dull, uncomprehending ears to our
+stammering tongues. When he was asked a question, he looked at those
+about him and wanted to know what sort of an answer the missionary
+desired; then he would answer accordingly. In another hut was a very old
+woman, the mother of Buka, who was an imbecile and was fed like an
+animal. We retraced our steps with heavy hearts, but for many a day the
+memory of that visit haunted us.
+
+As for the girl, the man did not pay sufficiently promptly to satisfy
+Mapita, so he finally took her home. Later she was sold to a man who
+paid a large sum. Here they quarreled and the girl returned home, and
+the pay had to be given back. It is needless to say that the girl was
+thoroughly demoralized by this time. She was finally disposed of to
+another man.
+
+In February, 1899, Matshuba came to stay at the mission and attend
+school. Ever since the mission had opened he had been a great help to us
+in acquiring the language, and as he could understand us more readily,
+he often explained our meaning to others. He knew too just how many Zulu
+words were in our vocabulary, and in speaking to us he adapted himself
+to our limited understanding. He also gradually acquired the English. He
+made rapid progress in school; and as the Light came to him he accepted
+it. He did not do this all at one bound, but, as it were, according to
+his capacity to understand the meaning of the Atonement and kindred
+themes. The day came when he saw himself a great sinner, and he repented
+in truth. He was the only boy staying at the mission for a time, so that
+many and various duties fell to his lot. These he performed faithfully,
+except that he was somewhat careless in herding the donkeys, and lost
+them.
+
+One evening he came to the door of our hut in great perplexity and said
+that he would like to have a talk. He came and sat down on the
+hearthstone, then said, "I prayed this morning, but the donkeys were
+lost at any rate." By his language he evidently thought that if he
+prayed the Lord would do the watching. This gave us an opportunity of
+telling of David, the faithful shepherd boy, and of the "Great
+Shepherd," who told us to both "watch and pray." The boy then told
+something of his early life. Among other things he said:
+
+"Father used to tell me to go and watch the gardens so that the animals
+would not come and take our food. I did not watch well and the animals
+destroyed the crops and father was grieved."
+
+"Are you sorry now that you did not obey?"
+
+"Oh! yes, indeed," was the reply. "If I might live that time over again,
+I would be a better boy."
+
+He continued, "When father was sick they said he was bewitched. So they
+tried to find out who had bewitched him. Once, before he died, he said
+that he would like to see a missionary. _Umfundisi_ [Missionary] Engle
+should have come sooner, before father died."
+
+"Matshuba, did you ever hear of Jesus before we came?"
+
+"Yes, Missus," he replied, "I heard His Name once, and I wanted my
+mother to go where there was a missionary; then the Lord sent you."
+
+Here was this dear soul, groping in the night and reaching out for
+something better than he had known, he knew not what. When the Light
+comes to him he is ready to accept it. There are many other such boys,
+and girls too, all over Africa, who are waiting for some one to bring
+them the Light. Is it you? There are many other old men to whom the
+message will come too late unless some one makes haste and brings it.
+
+Matshuba had many hard battles to fight, and often have we heard him out
+among the rocks praying for help and victory. I well remember the first
+day on which he prayed openly before the school. Almost the hush of
+death fell upon all, for it was a new era to them. One of their number
+had learned to pray like the missionaries. There was no hut at first for
+him to sleep in, so he lay in the tent. One morning he came out, his
+face all aglow. He said, "I saw Jesus last night. He came and stood
+before me. He was tall and bright looking."
+
+Some months after he came, another boy, Tebengo, came to stay at the
+mission. He, too, had been attending school and desired to be a
+Christian. Bright, impulsive, but easily misled, in his instability he
+was just the opposite of the more steadfast Matshuba. There were also
+others of the schoolboys who were stepping out into the light, and among
+these were Kelenki and Siyaya, who were Mashona people. Their home
+seemed more heathenish than some of the others, but these boys, with
+others from their kraal, appeared earnest in the service of the Master.
+
+A Sunday-school was also opened this first year and proved quite
+interesting to the younger ones. On the first Christmas Day the natives
+were invited for services and about ninety came--the largest number up
+to that time. After the services they were invited to a large,
+unfinished hut, and all were treated to bread and tea and some salt.
+Father and Mother Engle sat down among them and partook of bread and tea
+with them. This greatly delighted all, and it was just as much of a
+pleasure to our elder and wife, who always enjoyed mingling with the
+people. The rest of us saw that all were served. The people were very
+thankful for the treat, and all expressed their gratitude in a forcible
+manner.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN
+
+Reinforcements, and Progress of the Work
+
+
+The various departments of the mission were gradually enlarging, and as
+the work increased the burden fell more and more heavily upon Elder
+Engle. It will be remembered that efforts were made to secure an
+assistant for him before we left America, but without success. In April,
+1899, however, we gladly welcomed into our midst three new missionaries
+from America. These were Mr. and Mrs. Clifford Cress and Mr. Isaac
+Lehman. They were able and consecrated messengers, and a valuable
+addition to the work. With them came also several large boxes of
+clothing, cloth for the sewing school, and other goods which had been
+donated for the mission. About this time also the Board sent out some
+farm implements, a large Studebaker wagon, a two-seated spring wagon,
+and a bell for calling the people to services. More donkeys had already
+been purchased by Elder Engle, so that the question of traveling, and of
+bringing out supplies from Bulawayo, was most satisfactorily settled.
+
+Shortly after this we also had the pleasure of welcoming Mr. and Mrs.
+Van Blunk, of the Christian Holiness Association. These had come to make
+their headquarters near us and engage in evangelistic work. We had now
+quite a little company of Christian workers--nine in number--and had
+very inspiring and encouraging English services, as well as those in the
+native tongue. Although Brother Van Blunks were under a different Board
+and their work was in a measure separate from the rest, yet they were
+spiritual and consecrated missionaries and of great assistance in
+exalting Christ among the people.
+
+On account of the large increase in the number of workers, it was
+necessary also to enlarge our dwelling place. During this season five
+new huts were erected, including those for the natives, making the
+mission premises look like a little village. A building for church
+services and school was also greatly needed. During the entire rainy
+season these had been held in the tent, which was proving inadequate for
+the growing congregation. So Brethren Engle and Lehman, with the
+assistance of the natives, erected a very respectable looking church
+building of poles and mud, 16 x 30 feet. It was furnished with plank
+seats and good tables, and Brother Van Blunk donated glass for windows.
+Long poles of native timber were then secured and a framework was made
+for the bell. This being hoisted and fastened in place could be heard at
+many of the kraals. It also assisted in informing the people of the
+Sabbath.
+
+At sunset on Saturday evening it was rung a long time to inform the
+people that the morrow was the Sabbath, and that they should lay aside
+their work and prepare for rest and service. Later in the work some of
+us agreed to take that time for secret prayer in behalf of the people,
+that the Lord might incline their hearts to come to the house of the
+Lord. After there were a number of native Christians, they too joined us
+in prayer, each going to his private place. One evening we were greatly
+impressed to see Mazwi, the boy who was ringing slowly, down on his
+knees, as if, while he was calling the people to prepare for worship on
+the morrow, he was also calling upon God to persuade them to come. We
+were often made to feel too that the Lord especially honored some of
+those prayers.
+
+The sight of so many people about us being destitute of clothing had
+greatly touched Brother Engle's heart, and he had written to America
+about it. The result was a large box of clothing generously donated. He
+gave each of the headmen and the chief a shirt and a pair of trousers,
+and told them to come to services. They seemed to be, and no doubt were,
+very grateful for the favor bestowed, and a very few made good use of
+the garments. Others came once or twice clothed, and then nothing more
+was seen of them or their clothing. In less than a year these latter
+ones came again and asked for clothes, stating that they had nothing to
+wear to church. It is needless to say that by this time the missionaries
+had learned their lesson, and those desiring to be clothed had to work
+for it. A number did come and work for clothing and were well paid, but
+what they did with the clothing was often a mystery. Shirts they
+generally liked and appreciated, and sometimes the other garments would
+be sewed up in a wonderful manner and do duty for a shirt or coat, or
+they would answer for a grain bag.
+
+Day by day we were learning the nature of the people about us, and were
+obliged to adjust ourselves to our changed understanding. They are all
+children and must be dealt with accordingly. The missionary soon finds
+that he not only needs much of the love that "never faileth," but also a
+large supply of patience continually in his work. He must also be firm
+in his dealings with the natives and make them know their place. They
+will respect him all the more if he does this in the proper spirit. Old
+children are more difficult to handle than young ones, as they are more
+unreasonable and more set in their ways. They generally do not feel
+under any obligations to keep their promises to you, but they fully
+expect you to keep yours to them, otherwise they will lose confidence in
+you.
+
+When one first goes to the heathen and sees them in their ignorance and
+superstition, seemingly lacking everything to make them comfortable, he
+is led to speak much of Christ and His love, thus seeking to win them.
+They begin to say within themselves, "Well, if He loves us, He will do
+us no harm, so we need not trouble ourselves about Him," and they
+continue, as vigorously as ever, to seek to appease the malevolent
+spirits, who they think are seeking to harm them. Then the missionary
+thinks he should pursue another course. He soon becomes somewhat
+discouraged and disgusted with their indifference and hypocrisy, and is
+often led to the opposite extreme, and dwells much on hell and
+condemnation, which tends to harden his hearers. Finally he reaches a
+golden mean. He realizes that these poor souls about him have had no
+opportunity of rising above their degrading surroundings, and he must
+take them as they are, and seek by the ability which God giveth to live
+the Christ life among them and lift them to a higher plane of living.
+
+[Illustration: Matopo Mission Church in 1899. Built by Elder Jesse
+Engle.]
+
+The Sunday-school had been chiefly for the younger ones, but we
+concluded to add a class for the older people. This was greatly
+appreciated by some of them, especially Mapita. It began with few in
+number; but as time passed it gradually increased in attendance and
+interest. Mapita seemed so eager to learn in those days, and would often
+look with longing eyes into the Kingdom, and the very joy of the Lord
+would seem to be reflected in his face, but he was afraid to step over.
+He gained a great deal of knowledge of the Scriptures too, and he was
+not slow to tell other people.
+
+All the services were more or less informal, and any one was free to ask
+questions; yet in the Sabbath-school class many felt more at home and
+often expressed themselves freely in regard to the difficulties in the
+way of their becoming Christians. One day, after we had explained the
+lesson, Nyuka, a witch doctor, said:
+
+"I believe all you say, and that Christ is able to save us, but what can
+I do? My hands are tied. I have five wives."
+
+Nothing had been said about a plurality of wives, but intuitively he
+realized that it was a formidable obstacle in his way. We could only
+tell him that if he really reached the place where he desired to be
+saved, the Lord would open the way for him.
+
+As question after question arose in the class, the answer often given
+would be to open the Bible and read a portion suitable for the question.
+One day, after this had been done several times, one of the men
+exclaimed, "It is no use to argue any more; that Book knows everything."
+The difficulty generally was that, although they believed the Word, they
+were not willing to take the Way. The darkness seemed too dense, the
+effort required was too great, the transformation was too absolute for
+these old people, rocked in the cradle of paganism for generations. It
+is the younger generation that are chiefly benefited by the mission
+work. Sometimes some of the others, seeing this, will say, "I am too
+old; you should have come sooner."
+
+Then again the missionary sometimes meets with a Caleb or a Joshua. He
+receives some encouragement, from even the old. Allow me to give an
+account of a visit made at this time:
+
+We are going to visit an old queen. It is not our first visit to her,
+but we are informed that she is ill at present and her friends are
+fearful that she might die, as she is very, very old. Sisters Heise,
+Cress, and myself are going. We carry a little bread, cocoa, and a New
+Testament. She is living at the kraal of Mapita, our faithful helper. He
+also has been sick with fever, but he is somewhat better today, and is
+sitting out of doors by the fire, where his wife and children are
+preparing their evening meal. This consists of peanut gravy, kafir-corn
+porridge, and pumpkin. After greeting these, we pass on to the hut where
+the queen lies. We sit down on the ground, so that we may look into the
+little opening which serves as doorway. The woman in charge invites us
+to enter, and we crawl into the hut. In the center of the hut is a fire
+with four large stones around it; the smoke finding its way into our
+eyes or out through the straw roof, for there is no chimney and no
+window. Near this fireplace lies the poor old queen. Her bed consists of
+a large hide spread on the hard, polished earthen floor, and a block of
+wood serves for a pillow. A blanket is thrown over her body. We offer
+the cocoa, which the sick one gratefully accepts, but the bread is
+refused. We then go to her side and try to point her to the Lamb of God,
+which taketh away the sin of the world, and tell her of the home
+prepared for all those who love God. She tries to listen, and sometimes
+responds to the question asked. Of course our knowledge of the language
+is still imperfect, and it is more difficult for the old to understand
+than for the young. When the sick one does not fully comprehend, the
+nurse, who is Matshuba's mother, explains. Sitting here by this old
+woman, and seeing her stretch out her thin hands to the warm stones at
+the fire, we forget that vermin surrounds us or that our clothes might
+become soiled; our hearts only overflow with a desire to let a flood of
+light into the soul of the poor one before us. As the talk continues she
+does seem to grasp some of the spiritual truths, and she gives a more
+ready assent to the questions asked:
+
+"Do you desire us to pray for you?"
+
+"Oh! yes," she exclaimed with feeling. "I always love to have you pray
+to Jesus for me."
+
+Kneeling there we offer prayers that the Lord would speak to this dear
+soul and prepare her to meet Him. Her farewell word and clinging clasp
+of the hand on our departure cause us to feel that light is breaking,
+and that she, in her feeble way, is, by faith, taking hold of Christ.
+Once before, when we visited her, she too offered up her feeble
+petition.
+
+We emerge from the hut and stop a few minutes to speak with Mapita and
+his family, and offer up a word of prayer. The sun has already set, so
+we hastily bid them adieu and start for home, but not before they have
+sent their respects to Father and Mother Engle.
+
+Thus ends one of the many visits we are called upon to make. But who is
+this old queen, amid such unqueenly surroundings? She was one of the
+numerous wives of Mzilikazi, the founder and first king of the Matabele
+tribe. He had a large number of wives, not fewer than forty or fifty,
+and this was one of them. The natives here claim that she was his chief
+wife and the mother of Lobengula, the king. We think that, however, is
+very doubtful, although the husband of the woman where she stays was one
+of Lobengula's most trusted men.
+
+[Illustration: Mrs. Cress Giving a Lesson in Cleanliness.]
+
+This poor queen in her younger days had no doubt plenty, with slaves to
+wait upon her and do her bidding. Now, in her old age, she tries to work
+for a living by cultivating the soil, and growing her own food. If her
+change of fortune is instrumental in leading her to Christ, she is
+richer than she knows. She will not have all her good things in life. We
+have been trying to help her also in temporal affairs.
+
+She arose from this sick bed and afterwards visited us. One day, when we
+were again speaking of Christ, her face lighted up and she exclaimed, "I
+am happy because Jesus lives in here," putting her hand on her breast.
+We feel, as Sister Heise expressed it, "One would look upon her as one
+of the first fruits of our mission work in Africa."
+
+Although the work among most of the older people thus far appeared to
+make little progress, if we may judge by their lives, yet a number of
+the pupils were steadfast. As far as could be ascertained they had
+accepted Christ as their Savior and were walking out in all the light
+they had. Since they were eager to follow the Lord in all things it was
+considered advisable to baptize some. Accordingly, after the little
+church was completed, they were examined as to their faith. In August,
+1899, nine boys and one girl were by Elder Engle led into one of those
+sparkling streams and dipped three times into the name of the Trinity,
+and thus put on the Lord by baptism. It was a time of great rejoicing
+and encouragement to the missionaries when this was done, and they could
+gather around the table of the Lord, with some dark-skinned brethren,
+who had so lately come out of pagan darkness. Although these were but
+babes, yet the missionaries felt that the Lord had set His seal upon the
+work.
+
+It might seem that we were somewhat hasty in thus so soon receiving into
+church fellowship. The mission had been opened only a little over a
+year, and our imperfect knowledge of the language, as well as of the
+native character, made it scarcely possible for them to be well
+instructed in the things of the Lord. There was no cause to think,
+however, that they were not honest and sincere so far as they knew.
+There was a radical change in their lives, and some were steadfast, but
+others had not fully counted the cost and soon fell back, if indeed they
+were really saved. One of the oldest, who was over twenty years of age,
+stood well until he went to work for a European, who made sport of him,
+and the boy gradually fell back into his former habits. Great pains were
+taken to lead them on to know the Lord.
+
+During this year the war known as the Boer War began in South Africa. It
+was a conflict which seemed inevitable between the wealthy English mine
+owners and their Dutch rulers. We are perhaps safe in saying that heavy
+taxation without sufficient representation was the chief cause of the
+war. The first event of importance in connection with it was the siege
+of Kimberley, the great diamond field, and the headquarters of Mr.
+Rhodes at the time. This occurred October 14. The war then spread
+through other parts of South Africa and to the border of Rhodesia, but
+did not extend into it. English troops were, however, stationed there to
+repel an invasion should one be attempted.
+
+The war did not directly affect us, but indirectly it did. By the siege
+of Kimberley, and later that of Mafeking, and the destruction of the
+railroad our line of supplies from Cape Town was cut off, consequently
+prices in Rhodesia rose very rapidly. Sugar was soon two shillings (48c)
+per pound, flour about three guineas ($15) per one hundred pounds, and
+other groceries in proportion. With little money on hand, and the
+prospects of receiving more under such conditions uncertain, famine
+might have stared us in the face. There was no need to be uneasy,
+however; the Lord and the forethought of Father and Mother Engle
+prepared us for such an emergency. Shortly before this the Charter
+Company had placed some cattle on the mission farm, and we had the use
+of milk. Butter, eggs, and vegetables for a time brought a very high
+price in Bulawayo market, and with all these the mission was supplied.
+The little spring wagon, drawn by four donkeys, went to Bulawayo nearly
+every week for a time, taking in produce which brought a high price, and
+we were in turn able to pay a high price for groceries and food for the
+table; so that, during the darkest days of the war, all our needs were
+supplied.
+
+Occasionally disquieting rumors would reach us that the Boers were about
+to force their way through and come into Rhodesia. The natives
+themselves were not a little interested in the outcome of the war. They
+had no newspapers or system of telegraphy like the white people, but
+they had a means of gaining news which to them was much more effective.
+This was by means of communication among themselves. How they so quickly
+secured news of the various engagements in the south and the result of
+each engagement was a mystery. We on our part, situated among them as we
+were, and conscious that there were many who were still seething under
+British rule, could not avoid wondering what might be the outcome were
+the British defeated. On the other hand, many of the natives seemed to
+prefer British rule to that of the Dutch. They chose to remain as they
+were rather than change masters.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT
+
+Extension of the Work Followed by Dark Days
+
+Verily, verily, I say unto you, Except a corn of wheat fall into the
+ground and die, it abideth alone; but if it die, it bringeth forth much
+fruit.--St. John 12: 24.
+
+
+Matopo Mission was only one little light in the surrounding darkness,
+and it was hoped that other stations might be opened in time. So after
+Brother and Sister Cress came, or as soon as they had some little
+knowledge of the language and of the work, they desired to open another
+station. After looking the country over, they felt led to a place up
+among the hills near the kraal of Buka, of whom mention was made earlier
+in these pages. There were a number of kraals in the immediate vicinity,
+and the location seemed a good one, except that it was somewhat near
+Matopo Mission. They decided to move out in November, and at that time
+they, together with the tent and supplies, were taken to their new
+station. Unfortunately a heavy rain came on while they were on the way
+and the ground was thoroughly soaked before they had an opportunity to
+pitch their tent. They concluded, however, to remain at their place and
+build. It was named Entabeni Mission.
+
+The building progressed satisfactorily, and they held services on each
+Sunday for about two months or a little over. They felt encouraged in
+their work and the natives interested. At the Christmas holidays they
+came to spend the time with us, and we had a very enjoyable time with
+the natives. The third week in January, 1900, a messenger arrived to
+inform us that Sister Cress had been stricken with fever. A conveyance
+was immediately sent to the place to bring her to Matopo Mission, and by
+the time that reached their mission Brother Cress also was sick. Both
+were brought to the mission and made as comfortable as possible. At
+first no one considered their illness serious, for our party had thus
+far been enjoying good health since the work opened. Other complications
+set in in connection with Sister Cress' illness, and she gradually grew
+worse. For twenty-four hours she lay unconscious and then rallied and
+seemed quite bright. We were all present--Engles, Van Blunks, Sister
+Heise, Brother Lehman, and myself--when she rallied. She requested that
+prayer be offered for her recovery. This was done and we felt that she
+would gain strength, but it was not to be. In half an hour that sweet
+young life passed to be with God. This was February 8, 1900. All through
+her sickness she felt perfectly resigned to the Lord's will, whether for
+life or death.
+
+We felt that we could not spare this saintly woman, so well fitted both
+by nature and by grace to shine for God. She had laid her all upon the
+altar for Africa, and often expressed herself that she wanted to spend
+her life in behalf of this people. She had been in Africa only nine and
+one-half months, yet she had entered heart and soul into the work of the
+Lord, and was rapidly acquiring the language, so that she could
+converse with the people. She had formed some of the women into a sewing
+class, uniting this work with religious instructions, and endearing
+herself to all with whom she came into contact. She loved the people and
+was willing and ready to undertake any kind of work that came to her.
+She was especially gifted in prayer, and it was always an inspiration to
+the rest of us to listen to her heartfelt petition. Why the Lord thus
+early in her missionary career took her to Himself, we know not; but
+when the things of earth shall be revealed, when we shall know as we are
+known, then all will be clear.
+
+Brethren Engle and Lehman made a coffin; we covered it within with white
+muslin and without with black cloth, and thus laid the body away. Mr.
+Eyles, of Bulawayo, was interested in the mission and occasionally
+visited us and spoke to the natives, since he had good command of the
+Zulu language. On this occasion he consented to come out and preach the
+funeral sermon. The chief men of the people carried her to her last
+resting place beneath the Umkuni tree, and they mingled their tears with
+ours. The occasion was made more sad by the fact that the husband was
+still ill and unable to view the corpse or attend the funeral.
+
+During the sickness of these two people we greatly appreciated the
+presence and help of Brother and Sister Van Blunk, who still lived near
+the mission. Both were very kind in assisting to care for the sick and
+also in the last sad rites. Shortly afterwards they moved to Bulawayo
+and made that the headquarters of their evangelistic work.
+
+[Illustration: Elder Engle and Donkey Team at Matopo Mission.]
+
+Brother Cress recovered from his illness, but concluded that it was best
+for him to return to America, and wrote the Board accordingly. He felt
+his loss keenly. The work in general resumed its normal condition until
+the last week in March, when our bishop and overseer, Elder Engle,
+became sick. He had been very busy with the work, and in his frequent
+trips to Bulawayo, sometimes in the rain, he may have exposed himself.
+His condition did not seem serious, and he was not obliged to keep his
+bed continually. On April 2 he walked to a garden near by, and when he
+returned he again lay down. He ate heartily of the dinner prepared for
+him, after which his wife came to the dining-room and ate with us. At
+the close of our 3 P. M. dinner she went to her room, but returned at
+once and asked me to fill the hot water bottle and come over. I did so
+and found Brother Engle having a heavy chill and speaking the Zulu
+language rapidly, seemingly unconscious of our presence. We endeavored
+in every way to help him, but soon found that he was rapidly becoming
+paralyzed. Sister Heise and Brother Lehman were called and a
+consultation held. It was decided to send a messenger to the fort, ten
+miles away, and from there telephone to Bulawayo for a doctor. Brother
+Cress had left that day to go as far as the fort on his way to Bulawayo,
+and he was also to be informed.
+
+All night we watched by the Elder's bedside, but there was nothing that
+could be done. Brother Cress arrived near noon the next day, but the
+doctor did not arrive in time. That was a dark time as he lay paralyzed
+and unconscious in the little mud hut he called home, far from his
+children, far from the comforts of civilization, with none of his family
+or relatives, save his devoted wife, by his side. As it became evident
+that the end was near, that heroic mother, who had been such a worthy
+companion in all his labors, stooped over and imprinted on his face a
+kiss for each of their seven sons in far-away America. At 5 P. M., April
+3, he breathed his last. Thus, in less than two months from the date of
+Sister Cress' death, Elder Engle also was called home. The loss of our
+sister was great, but this seemed to be a still greater blow on the
+mission.
+
+He was so absorbed in the work, and no sacrifice was too great, no labor
+too hard, for him to endure. Perhaps, if he had spared himself a little
+more, he might have been able to continue longer in the work. Who knows?
+The language was difficult for one at his age, yet he was making heroic
+efforts to acquire it, and could make himself pretty well understood. We
+have seen him, after reading the Word, stand before the people, with the
+tears running down his face in his great love for them and in his desire
+to help them to Christ. And the natives knew that he loved them and they
+in turn loved him and greatly lamented his departure. The language of
+many of them might be summed up in that of one woman. As she stood by
+his coffin, weeping, she said:
+
+"He was good to me. He gave me salt, he gave me calico. What shall we do
+without him?"
+
+It seemed that his life work was finished. He had had the desire of his
+heart, in that he had been permitted to reach Africa and see a work
+started in the wilds. He had been privileged to see something of the
+travail of soul by beholding some step into the Kingdom. Now he had gone
+to hear the welcome message, "Well done, good and faithful servant ...
+enter thou into the joy of thy Lord."
+
+This time it was Brethren Cress and Lehman who made the coffin. There
+was no lumber on hand, but they removed some from the hut doors for the
+purpose. Again we covered it to contain the form of our elder. Mr. Eyles
+could not meet with us at this time, and the Van Blunks were away; but
+two of the officials from Fort Usher were present, and a number of
+natives, not so many, however, as at the previous time. No doubt they
+were becoming suspicious of this oft-repeated death. The white men
+present, together with some of the natives, carried the body to its last
+resting place beside Sister Cress. Brother Cress spoke in English to the
+white people present, while the natives were addressed by the writer
+from 2 Tim. 4: 7-8.
+
+The devoted wife had been wonderfully sustained by a Higher Power
+through all this sad scene. She had been called here, far from her home
+and family, to lay away her husband, but she realized that she was not
+alone. When, however, the funeral was over, the effects of the shock and
+of the strain through which she had been passing were manifest. She too
+took her bed with the dread African fever.
+
+[Illustration: MATOPO CEMETERY. Elder Jesse Engle. Mrs. Cress. Mrs. E.
+Doner. Elder Jacob Engle at his father's grave and Elder John Sheets.]
+
+The Seventh Day Adventist missionaries, who had been so kind to us when
+we first came to Bulawayo, sent letters of condolence as soon as they
+heard of our bereavement, and offered the services of their physician,
+should we need him. In this emergency we sent for him to come and see
+Mother Engle. He rode the fifty miles on horseback to come to minister
+to her and to give us instructions as to how to treat the disease. This
+was something which we greatly needed and appreciated, and it has been
+of great service to us in later years. He would accept no compensation
+for his long and tiresome journey. Such are the big hearts one finds in
+the interior of Africa. They are enlarged to take in more of the Spirit
+of the Master. All was done that could possibly be done for Mother
+Engle, so that she might gain her health sufficiently to return to
+America with Brother Cress. She continued to have relapses of the fever
+for three months, and it was not until July 19 that she was able to make
+the journey.
+
+Brother Cress' stay of sixteen months in Africa had brought great loss
+to him, but the Lord had sustained him. We were sorry to lose him as
+well as Mother Engle in the work. She never felt called of herself to go
+as a missionary, but only to be with her husband. When he was led of the
+Lord to go forth, she most cheerfully bade farewell to her family and
+all that was dear to a mother's heart and went with her husband, neither
+of them knowing whether they would be permitted to see their family
+again. She was not merely a companion to him, but a most devoted
+helpmate, not only in all that can possibly mean in civilized lands; but
+larger still, in the heartaches, the weariness, the loneliness, and the
+discouragements that come to a missionary. How often the names of their
+loved ones would be spoken by these two! How they would linger over the
+letters that came, and yet never a word of complaining or regret that
+they had left all for this. When Elder Engle died we felt that we had
+lost a father; so, when she left for America, we realized that the
+mother and homemaker was gone.
+
+Before their departure a most important event transpired. I refer to the
+marriage, on May 1, of Mr. Isaac Lehman and Miss Alice Heise, by Rev.
+Van Blunk. This was to have taken place earlier, but was delayed by the
+sorrowful events through which we were passing. Even the day of the
+wedding was saddened by a most serious relapse of Mother Engle, and we
+felt quite anxious on her account. This was the first opportunity for
+the natives to see something of a Christian wedding, and we believe they
+were impressed with the difference between a Christian and a pagan
+marriage. Brother Lehman was a consecrated young man and had from the
+first taken hold of the work along all lines with zeal and readiness. He
+had also made rapid strides in the language. Sister Heise, too, ever
+since the opening of the mission, had been a most able and efficient
+worker, so that both were well equipped to do effectual service for the
+Master.
+
+All of us accompanied Mother Engle and Brother Cress to Bulawayo, where
+they rested for a day and then took the train for Cape Town, while we
+returned to continue the work. For a time nine white workers had been at
+Matopo Mission, and in less than six months the number had been reduced
+to three. Those left, however, were not discouraged. May 23 of the same
+year one of them wrote to the _Evangelical Visitor_:
+
+     "He that keepeth thee will not slumber." This is the Father's
+     promise to all His dear children, not only to you who are sheltered
+     in Christian homes, but also to us who are in the wilds of Africa.
+     We have just as much faith in the promise today as when to outward
+     appearances everything was more secure. Your hearts with ours have
+     no doubt been torn by the sad messages which have crossed the
+     waters during the few months just past, and some one may be even
+     tempted to doubt whether it was the Lord's will for us to come to
+     Africa. Beloved, does England doubt the outcome of the deadly
+     conflict raging in South Africa because she has already lost
+     thousands of men? Is her courage failing? No; far from it. Money
+     and men are continually pouring into the country and soon the
+     independence of two states will be a thing of the past. Shall we as
+     Christian soldiers have less faith in the King of kings? Shall we
+     give up the conflict because two have fallen by our side? No; not
+     if all men forsake us, for with God we still have a majority. While
+     our hearts feel bereft by the departure of our beloved colaborers,
+     we still have confidence in our Great Captain, and we know that He
+     never lost a battle.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE
+
+The Battle Is not Yours, but God's
+
+Wherefore take unto you the whole armour of God, that ye may be able to
+withstand in the evil day, and having done all, to stand.--Eph. 6: 13.
+
+
+The missionary going among the heathen must realize that he is about to
+engage in a warfare, and that the conflict will be fierce and long. He
+is assailing the great enemy of souls in his stronghold. The fight is on
+continually and one must keep armed for battle. More important yet than
+this the missionary should remember that he is under orders and that the
+work is not his but the Lord's.
+
+The loss of our fellow-soldiers was most keenly felt, and there were
+some severe tests to face. The work had become disorganized by the
+continued illness and the deaths, when all our energies had been needed
+in caring for those about us. Encouraging letters, however, came from
+the homeland and the Mission Board, so that we realized that prayers
+were being offered in our behalf and in behalf of the work. We also
+expected that reinforcements would be forthcoming in the Lord's own
+time. So, under the leadership of our Great Captain, the army was again
+set in array and the conflict continued.
+
+We were pleased to note that the people stood by us nobly in this
+extremity, even though Satan had put forth every effort to defeat the
+work. Some who had started to follow the Lord saw that they had become
+indifferent and renewed their covenant. There were four boys who were
+staying at the mission at this time, and they came one evening and said
+they would like to have a talk. This was not so strange, as we often had
+little confidential chats with them. On this particular evening they
+came in and sat down. Then, without any preliminary remarks, Matshuba
+arose and made a complete confession of his past life. He then sat down
+and Kelenki arose and began to do the same. I said,
+
+"Boys, if you desire we will call Brother and Sister Lehman, that they
+may hear likewise."
+
+They replied, "Yes, Miss, do so, for we desire to confess everything and
+have all wiped away, and we do not want to repeat our wrongdoings, for
+we want to be ready when Jesus comes."
+
+So one of them called the Lehmans, and beginning again they arose, one
+by one, and told of their past life. When each one had finished he would
+turn around and inquire of the rest if he had told everything. Three of
+them were baptized members, and they evidently had been having a meeting
+in their hut and became concerned about their condition. They had not
+been guilty of any new sins, but were in doubt as to their standing
+before God, and wanted pardon and cleansing. They had taken 1 John 1: 9
+very literally. When the confessions were finished we all knelt in
+prayer; and after we had prayed, they too most earnestly besought the
+Lord that they might be set completely free from their past life. When
+they arose to their feet their faces were shining and they said "God
+had heard and answered."
+
+Then, as they sat there, they told of their old lives and of the lives
+of the people about us, until we felt that we were just beginning to
+know the people among whom we were situated. Conditions which, up to
+that time, they had been timid of telling, for fear of their people,
+they now boldly and fearlessly exposed, and they seemed to be done once
+and forever with their heathen past. Our hearts went up in gratitude to
+the Father, and our eyes were opened more and more to see the real need
+of this people and the obstacles in their way of becoming Christians.
+
+People reared in Christian homes, with an entire Bible which they can
+read from childhood, with the privileges of church and Sunday-school,
+with good literature and hymns and many other advantages which might be
+mentioned, cannot possibly, by any stretch of imagination, put
+themselves in the place of those who are deprived of all these; and not
+only that, but who, from infancy, have been in an atmosphere of
+ignorance and superstition, reeking with influences the most foul and
+loathsome imaginable. Then, too, is it to be wondered at that when
+people, who have been brought up amid surroundings the most helpful
+possible, spiritually, and the most conducive to growth in grace, grow
+lean in soul and backslide--I say is it to be wondered at that the
+Christians in heathen lands, in their desperate struggle against such
+adverse and degrading surroundings, sometimes relapse into heathendom?
+Not only is it not to be wondered at, but it is positively surprising
+and a great cause for rejoicing among missionaries, that so many
+grasping hold of the Everlasting Arm do once and forever shake off the
+bog and filth of the bottomless pit and stand as monuments of His power
+to save to the uttermost.
+
+During the dry season of 1900 an aggressive campaign against Satan and
+his followers among the rocks and strongholds was begun, for we felt
+that the Lord would have us press the battle to the gates. During the
+rainy seasons, when people are busy in their gardens, and when there is
+a great deal of sickness, both school and evangelistic work suffer, so
+that it is necessary to make the best use of the dry season. As soon as
+the crops were gathered the school at the mission increased in numbers
+and interest, and Brother and Sister Lehman opened a school at the
+village of Chief Hluganisa. They rode back and forth day by day, and
+when they were unable to go two of the boys were sent to teach. The
+attendance and interest there were encouraging.
+
+What of this chief, who had so kindly received the missionaries two
+years before? It would be a pleasure to be able to report that he had
+opened his heart to accept Christ as his Savior, but such was not the
+case. He was very ready to receive the gifts of the white man, whether
+from officials, missionaries, or any one else. He was also quite willing
+that the school should be started in his village; for would not this
+make his people wiser and more able to secure the good things of the
+earth? But the white man's religion, he would none of it for himself. He
+was a most troublesome beggar from first to last. Elder Engle, had made
+him a present of a very good blanket, with which he was greatly pleased,
+but he seldom came to services. When he came to the mission it was
+always with the expectation of asking and receiving something.
+
+One day he came to pay us sort of a state visit, and a little later his
+three wives followed in order of their rank. We were desirous of
+treating them all kindly after their long walk to pay us this visit, so
+Mother Engle concluded to give them bread and tea. A plate of bread,
+together with a quantity of tea and sugar, was placed before them. We
+expected, of course, that all would receive some. The chief appropriated
+everything; emptied all the sugar into the tea, drank all, and ate all
+the bread. When they started home the wives went first, the lowest in
+rank preceding, to prepare everything for their lord and master, who
+followed at his leisure. One day one of the missionaries, tried by his
+cupidity and avarice, gave him a straight talk. He did not return for
+some months after this, not until the funeral of Sister Cress. Until
+this day he continues to be a rank heathen, greedy, and superstitious,
+and a lover of wives and beer.
+
+All three of us by this time were fairly well prepared in the language,
+and some of the boys were beginning to be helpful in evangelistic work.
+Early in the season the Lehmans, with one of the men as guide, made a
+tour to the southeast of us in a section not yet visited. They reported
+an interesting and profitable trip and met the people from six different
+kraals. As it was a section of raw heathendom, they were surprised to
+find, at one of the kraals, a woman who joined heartily in the hymn
+sung and was familiar with the words. On inquiry they found that when a
+girl she had lived at the house of Rev. Thomas, one of the first
+missionaries of Matabeleland. He had a station at some distance north of
+Bulawayo, and his memory is much revered by those natives who knew him.
+The brother and sister had the fortune, or misfortune, to be present at
+a beer drink. This is their way of getting a lot of work done: They make
+a quantity of beer; then call in their neighbors to help work, paying
+them with beer. It is surprising how much beer they can consume at such
+times. They often become quite boisterous and even intoxicated, and
+frequently quarrel and fight as a result of their debauch. On this
+occasion the men were friendly, but scarcely in a condition to receive
+the Gospel. The travelers returned tired, but rejoicing in the Lord
+because of another opportunity of sowing seed.
+
+The life of a missionary is not full of exciting adventures and
+encouraging incidents. It is very ordinary at times and very crushing at
+others. The ups and downs would soon wear him out did he not take fast
+hold of God and, looking up by faith, keep saying to Him, "Lord, this is
+Thy work. Do Thou bear the burdens, the joys, and the sorrows that keep
+crowding thick and fast upon me, and let me be only Thy instrument and
+Thy weapon of warfare." I remember, during the first year, I at times
+felt I was not burdened enough for the souls about me, and once spent
+long hours of prayer, asking that the burden might rest more heavily. I
+retired to rest. The next day the Lord answered the prayer of His
+messenger. I thought it would crush me to the earth, but the lesson had
+been learned. He knows how much we can bear, and we should always say,
+"As Thou wilt."
+
+In our visits among the people one day is much like another, but they
+must be made in order to keep in touch with them. August 17 I wrote as
+follows:
+
+    "One more day's work for Jesus,
+      One less of life for me,
+    But heaven is nearer and Christ is dearer,
+      Than yesterday to me.
+    His life and light fill all my soul tonight."
+
+     This being Saturday, I arose early to go out among the people.
+     After taking some food, I started a little after sunrise with
+     Sihlaba as guide. We went to visit the kraal of Siponka, about two
+     miles distant. These people have been on my mind for some time.
+     They are good-hearted but veritable heathen, and care only for the
+     good things of this life. They are entirely too indifferent to come
+     either to school or church, although two, who were members, live
+     here. The downward influence is too strong for even them, and
+     seemingly they have done according to the proverb.
+
+     Early as it was in the morning, the people were nearly all away,
+     but we found at home two men, some women, and boys and girls. There
+     was an opportunity for giving the Gospel to them, and the Lord
+     greatly helped in the presentation of His Word. They gradually
+     became interested and seemed at least to have greater light. May
+     the Lord send home the truth into their hearts!
+
+     Siyaya (one of the backslidden boys) went along with us to the home
+     of Amuzeze (another member). Here there were a number of women, one
+     man, and some young people. They were more willing than usual to
+     listen, also more able to understand, and Amuzeze took part in
+     prayer.
+
+     From there Siyaya also went along to Umvunzi's home. Poor boy! he
+     followed us around, seemingly hungry for the Word, but helplessly
+     overcome by the gross darkness surrounding him. At this last place
+     there were only a few present. The men from all these kraals had
+     gone a long distance to buy goats. Here the powers of darkness were
+     so great that I could not shake off the feeling and have victory in
+     speaking. I wonder what my spiritual status would be at the end of
+     the year, if I were obliged to live long amid such surroundings;
+     and yet I have Christ and His Spirit in my soul and much of His
+     Word written in my heart, while these poor ones have only
+     generations of paganism back of them.
+
+     We then turned our faces homeward, moving in something of a circle
+     and coming first to Seba's village. This is not far from the
+     mission, and yet it is our first visit to this place. The people
+     seemed very glad to see us, and some here had the privilege for the
+     first time of hearing the Gospel, and were eager to catch every
+     word. While we were speaking, a native, carrying poles, was
+     passing, and he put his poles down and entered to listen. He was a
+     stranger to me. A tall fine-looking fellow he was. He informed us
+     that he had moved near and was building a hut. Mapita and his wife
+     also had entered during the services. Seba invited us to remain for
+     dinner and eat of their _inkobe_ (boiled corn), but it was not yet
+     ready, so thanking him for his hospitality we continued our
+     journey.
+
+     First, the stranger invited us to go over and see his wife and the
+     hut he was building, which was only a short distance away. We did
+     so and here we met two women from our nearest kraal. We then
+     proceeded on our homeward way, and had gone only a short distance
+     when we met John (a Christian) and his brothers, who followed us
+     home.
+
+     On the way we stopped a few minutes at Mapita's home to see the
+     children, and then reached the mission at midday. The boys remained
+     a short time to talk. I then tidied my hut, made a dress and gave
+     it to a little girl,
+     and entertained a number of native women. After our three o'clock
+     dinner and worship I read and studied the language, and here it is
+     evening and the close of a very enjoyable day.
+
+This account has been given, not because there was anything unusual
+about it, but because it is typical of many Saturdays on the mission
+field, and some of them have been days of the most exquisite enjoyment
+we have ever known. Such days never seem to become monotonous. One
+forgets the long and tiresome walk if he finds eager and interested
+listeners at the end. Even if some steel their hearts against the Word,
+there is still the consciousness to the messenger that he has done what
+he could. Then again much of one's time on the mission station is spent
+talking to the natives who come. They may not be anxious for the Gospel,
+but one always hopes some word or message may sink into their hearts.
+
+The first few years of the mission, the country was occasionally visited
+by locusts, sometimes in such large swarms as almost to darken the face
+of the sky. These were not the seventeen-year cicadas, which some people
+are pleased to term locusts, but large grasshoppers, various kinds of
+which made their appearance to the great destruction of crops and
+vegetation. Sometimes the corn and the kafir corn would be stripped.
+Again, an immense swarm would come suddenly and alight--so that in a
+very short time the whole face of nature would be transformed from a
+bright green to a reddish brown, the color of the locusts--and would
+then as suddenly fly off without doing much harm. Wherever the locusts
+settled for the night, the natives would be there early in the morning
+with their nets and catch them for food.
+
+The year 1900 was especially one of these locust years. During the dry
+season, the adult locusts selected suitable places, remained to feed for
+a time, then deposited their eggs in the earth and died. As at this time
+the insects cannot fly, the natives catch them in large numbers and
+carry them home for food. One such swarm settled about two miles from
+the mission, and thither day after day went the women and girls to catch
+them. They would put them in bags or large baskets and carry them home.
+One could often see ten or twelve women walking through our premises,
+each one carrying on her head a bushel or more of locusts. They would
+cook them in large earthen pots, then spread them on the rocks to dry,
+after which they would go for a fresh supply. When the locusts were dry
+they would be stored away for food. In eating them the natives would
+remove head, wings, and legs and eat them somewhat after the manner of
+dried herring, and considered them a great delicacy, saying, "They are
+our meat." We have partaken of them in this manner and found them not
+unpalatable, and they are certainly a cleaner food than many things
+eaten in civilized lands. The natives' favorite way of preparing the
+locusts, however, was to stamp them in a stamping block, then cook them,
+together with ground peanuts, into a gravy to be eaten with their
+porridge.
+
+Although many of the locusts had been safely stowed away in the native
+storehouses, during this year, yet numbers remained in various parts of
+the country to lay their eggs in the ground. When the rains came and
+softened the ground these eggs hatched. After a colony hatched, the
+little wingless larvae, or hoppers, started forth as an army, all going
+in one direction. These armies were generally about a rod or two in
+width and much greater in length, and woe to the young garden that came
+in their way! They would spread over it, devour the tender shoots, and
+then proceed in the same general direction in which they had been
+traveling. The natural grass and herbage of the country was too tough
+for them to eat. Not only one but several such armies coming from
+different directions passed through our gardens that season, and some of
+the cornfields had to be planted two or three times. One was finally
+left unplanted, while our potatoes and many of the garden vegetables
+were destroyed. At first we endeavored to fight them with fires when
+they were seen to be approaching a garden, but this was soon found to be
+useless. The missionaries felt the loss of their crops and vegetables,
+but their loss could not be compared with that of the poor natives, many
+of whom could not procure grain for a second planting, and they had
+nothing else to depend upon.
+
+During this year we were seriously contemplating an advanced step in the
+work, by opening the way for more boys and girls to come as boarders.
+They would thus be given a Christian home and be trained to work and to
+habits of cleanliness. Up to this time the largest number staying at one
+time was four boys; and one girl had come lately. The day was not far
+distant when it would be necessary to erect better and more permanent
+dwellings, as the huts were already showing signs of decay; and if more
+boys could be received and these trained to make brick and assist in
+building, it would be an advantage both to the boys and to the mission.
+As the year drew near to a close there began to be a desire on the part
+of some of the older boys to attend school and perhaps come to stay with
+us. We knew enough of the native character to believe that it was best
+not to throw out any special inducement, as it is always best for them
+to desire a thing for themselves and to be fully persuaded in their own
+minds so that they might not be wavering.
+
+On New Year's Day, 1901, after the close of the services, a boy,
+probably nineteen years of age, stood at the open door of my hut with
+rather a wistful look on his face. He was well dressed and had been
+working for white people, but had shown no interest in school or in the
+Gospel up to this time. Something in his face that day prompted me to
+say,
+
+"Ndhlalambi, when are you coming to stay at the mission and give your
+heart to the Lord?"
+
+He promptly replied, "I am coming one week from tomorrow."
+
+Afterwards, in giving his experience, he said, "While I was working at
+the mines I became convicted of my wrongdoing and made up my mind that I
+would come to the missionaries and go to school and give my heart to
+Jesus. When I came I was afraid to ask and the Lord told Miss to ask
+me."
+
+He did come and did yield his heart to the Lord, and seemed to settle
+it in his mind, if one may judge by subsequent actions. "I care not what
+course others may take, but as for me I will serve the Lord." He made a
+good confession and was always ready to step out into the light as it
+shone on his pathway. His way, however, was not an easy one. He met with
+violent opposition at times from an irascible pagan father, and
+persecution in various ways, but he stood firm. A special test came to
+him a year or two after he started to school. One day he came in great
+distress and said,
+
+"Father is very angry with me. My mother's brother died and left me a
+lot of cattle and other property, and my parents wish me to go and claim
+the property. But if I go, they will have a big dance and claim to call
+back the spirit of my uncle and ask him his will about the property, and
+they will want me to take part in their worship. I desire to follow the
+Lord."
+
+I said, "If you do not go perhaps you will not receive the property."
+
+"That makes no difference," he replied. "I love the Lord more than I
+love the cattle. Only pray that father will not be angry with me for
+refusing to go."
+
+Later he came with his face all aglow and said, "The Lord has heard our
+prayers. Father is not angry with me any more."
+
+In school he was slow but persevering, and in work likewise. He had his
+faults, and seemed at times to be lacking in humility, yet he never
+seemed to waver in his determination to follow the Lord.
+
+Several other young men also applied for admission, among whom was
+Gomo, a brother of Tebengo and Muza and Emyonleni; also two younger boys
+who were already Christians, Masikwa and Madhliwa. There were now nine
+boys, and several months afterward three girls came. These girls were
+trained by Sister Lehman to do housework. The work was looking quite
+encouraging, for all showed an interest in desiring to become
+Christians.
+
+As this rainy season came on, it could not fail to remind us of the loss
+and of the trying times of the previous year. Some of our number thought
+it best to go to a more healthy place until the rains were over. This,
+however, would almost necessitate closing the work, which was not to be
+thought of.
+
+In the midst of the rains, in March, Sister Lehman took down with the
+fever one day and on the following day her husband was also laid low.
+The buildings at Matopo are in a healthy place, yet during the rainy
+season one is always more or less exposed to fever, either by traveling
+and sleeping out, or even by going down to the gardens in the valley in
+the evening. At that time we did not understand so well how to check or
+combat the fever as in later years. So the sick ones grew worse and
+required my constant attention day and night for about ten or more days.
+Fortunately the boys were good helpers, as there were no girls at the
+time. Matshuba was able to take charge of the school; Ndhlalambi and one
+of the little boys could help me in the kitchen and sickroom; Gomo did
+the washing outside of the window where I could see and direct; and the
+other boys attended to the gardens.
+
+As the sick ones grew worse we sent a boy for a doctor, but on account
+of the damp, rainy weather, he delayed several days before coming, so
+that the fever was broken by the time he reached the mission. It was a
+trying time and one of looking to the Lord on the part of the sick and
+the well ones. To make matters worse some of the boys became quite ill,
+and we were unable to give them the attention they needed. One day
+Kelenki, who was very low, managed to crawl to the kitchen and begged to
+be allowed to lie there by the stove. Mrs. Eyles kindly came out from
+Bulawayo when at last the doctor was able to reach us. She remained for
+a week during their convalescence and cared for the sick. This gave me a
+much-needed rest and an opportunity to turn my attention to the boy, who
+was still quite ill and needed help. It was a day of rejoicing when our
+brother and sister and all were restored to health, and we were thankful
+that the Lord had mercy upon us, lest we should have sorrow upon sorrow.
+
+During the time we were passing through these afflictions, another
+difficulty was staring us in the face, which threatened, if possible, to
+be more serious than any which we had yet been called upon to meet. This
+was the land question. Mention was made that we were looking toward the
+erection of more permanent buildings. We had sent to the Board for money
+for this purpose; also for money to survey the land. Up to this time the
+3,000 acres upon which the mission had been located by the government,
+had not been surveyed. It had been given only as a reservation for
+mission purpose, and permission had also been granted that the
+missionaries could stake off a plot of 3,000 acres and make a diagram
+without going to the expense of employing a government surveyor, as that
+kind of work is costly in Africa. For this purpose, the year previous,
+four of us, Brethren Engle and Cress, together with Sister Heise and
+myself, started out to stake out the land, supposing, as we had been
+informed by the official who located the mission, that the two beacons
+north of us were the limit of the surveyed territory. We climbed hills,
+went over precipices, and waded swamps under a hot August sun and made a
+diagram of the desired farm, only to find at the close that the result
+was not satisfactory to the government. It was necessary for a
+government survey to be made, and this had not been done; but we had
+sent for money for the purpose, and the money had just arrived.
+
+The day on which Sister Lehman took sick, two Europeans brought some
+cattle and put them in our pen, from which the company's cattle had been
+removed the previous year. They did not ask for permission to place
+these cattle on the mission farm, and to us it seemed rather a bold
+step. They informed us, however, that they thought a mistake had been
+made in locating the mission, and that we were on surveyed land. They
+stated that they were not certain in reference to the matter, as the
+owners did not know the exact boundary of their farm.
+
+The Charter Company, of Rhodesia had, especially at the close of the
+war, made large concessions of land to companies, syndicates, and
+individuals. These grants often comprised many thousands of acres, and
+in many instances the owners, in the early days, did not know the
+location of their land. They simply sent out a surveyor to measure and
+stake off the requisite amount and erect beacons; then the land was left
+entirely unimproved. If they were fortunate enough afterwards to know
+the boundaries of the farms, they often sent out an agent to collect tax
+of the natives living on it. The best of the land being disposed of,
+very little remained for farmers, who would have improved the land, or
+for missionaries, who would both improve it and instruct the natives. No
+doubt the government, when too late, realized their lack of wisdom in
+making some of these grants, as it greatly retarded the work of building
+up and developing the country.
+
+This was the condition of affairs when Matopo Mission was located. We
+had, however, no intimation that a mistake might have been made in the
+location, until informed by the two Europeans previously mentioned. One
+of them desired to collect hut tax for the company owning the land, but
+this he could not do, as he was not certain of the boundaries, and the
+company, at the time, was not willing to bear the expense of having a
+surveyor come out to locate the land. It is needless to say that it was
+a dark and trying time for the missionaries. If we were on surveyed
+land, we might have to change the mission site and much of the work
+already accomplished would be lost. Again, how were we to find out where
+we were? If a wealthy company did not care to bear the expense of
+locating their land, how much less able were missionaries, whose
+purses, at the best, are never too full! Should we go to the expense of
+sending for a surveyor to locate us, we might be forced to move the
+mission, and the outlay incurred would benefit the company alone. We
+were in these wilds; could we succeed in locating ourselves?
+
+As usual, when difficulties thus confronted us, we looked to Him who
+never fails. Any one in the mission field has often reasons to be
+thankful for the varied training and experiences of the home land; for
+no knowledge or previous experience of whatever sort comes amiss when he
+is out where there is little outside help. We had studied, hence had a
+little knowledge of surveying. Would that knowledge help us here in
+these fastnesses?
+
+Mr. Jackson, the magistrate at Fort Usher, who had always been a friend
+in need, was appealed to. He did not know the boundaries of the farms in
+the immediate vicinity, but he knew the location of one important beacon
+several miles north, for he had had occasion to settle a difficulty in
+reference to it some time previous. So, with this knowledge to begin
+with, we went to the government surveyor and secured a diagram of all
+the farms in the vicinity of the mission. Thus equipped, and securing a
+compass, we started for home. Brother Lehman made a temporary chain, and
+together with some of the boys we went to the beacon pointed out by Mr.
+Jackson. From this a survey was made south, and it was discovered that
+the mission was on a tract of land known as "Matopo Block," owned by the
+Bulawayo Syndicate. This was a farm of 25,000 acres, and it was about
+twelve miles long. As there were no beacons for a distance of seven
+miles on the south of the mission, it was not difficult to understand
+how the mistake was made in the location. By further survey we
+discovered that we were on the extreme east end of this farm, and a line
+drawn nearly southeast from the beacon north of us would give the
+mission the required 3,000 acres. Another surveyed farm lay adjoining
+this on the east.
+
+We had located the mission, but it remained to induce the government to
+arrange with the syndicate and give them land elsewhere in exchange for
+the amount promised to the mission. It is needless to enter into the
+details of the slow process necessary for settling the difficulty, for
+any one dealing with the affairs of government knows something of the
+tediousness and red tape required. Letters were addressed to both the
+government and to Mr. Rhodes, who was then on his estate near Bulawayo.
+The government officials met the question in a spirit of conciliation
+and fairness, promising to do all in their power to bring it to a
+satisfactory settlement. We were asked later to make further survey, to
+be certain that we had given the correct location. At one time it
+appeared that the exchange could not be made, and we were requested to
+look up another location. Looking to the Lord, we made another appeal,
+which resulted, in September of the same year, in the mission being
+allowed to retain its location. At first this was to have been only a
+reservation, but the final papers, which were not made out until late in
+1902, resulted in giving a ninety-nine-year lease, which was much more
+satisfactory.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN
+
+Reinforcements and Industrial Work
+
+It is not the mere preacher that is wanted here. The bishops of Great
+Britain, collected with all the classic youth of Oxford and Cambridge,
+would effect nothing by mere talking with the intelligent people of
+Uganda. It is the practical Christian tutor, who can teach people how to
+become Christians, cure their diseases, construct dwellings, understand
+and exemplify agriculture, turn his hand to anything, like a
+sailor--this is the man who is wanted. Such an one, if he can be found,
+would become the savior of Africa.--Henry M. Stanley.
+
+
+During the progress of the land question and the negotiations with the
+government, important changes were taking place in the personae of the
+mission. In June of 1901 we were pleased to receive much-needed
+reinforcements in the persons of Mr. Levi Doner and Miss Emma Long.
+Accompanying them were Mr. and Mrs. Jacob Lehman, who were on their way
+to engage in mission work at the Compounds in Johannesburg. On account
+of the war they were not yet permitted to enter Johannesburg, so they
+came to Matopo for a time.
+
+At the same time Brother Isaac Lehman and wife thought it best to go to
+Cape Town for a rest, as she had not fully recovered from her attack of
+the fever. We were very sorry to lose so valuable colaborers at this
+time, for they had the language and experience in mission work, and it
+always requires time for new missionaries to take hold of the various
+duties. I especially felt the loss of Brother Lehman, as I was the only
+one left who could speak to the natives. Brother Doner, however, made
+rapid strides in the language, and soon acquired a working knowledge of
+it, and was also a willing and efficient messenger along all lines. Very
+early in the work he was laid low with fever, but he recovered. Then
+Sister Long was quite sick for a time. These experiences, coming so
+early in their missionary career, were somewhat discouraging.
+
+The mission family was steadily increasing. A number of other boys had
+come to stay at the mission and become pupils and industrial workers.
+From the very first in receiving boys at the mission station, it was our
+plan to have them in school three and one-half hours and the rest of the
+time, which was five or six hours, they were engaged in some industrial
+work. As the natural inclination of the native is toward laziness and
+filthiness in personal habits, we were opening the door and taking all
+who desired to come and giving them a home, our aim being to take them
+out of their degraded home surroundings and give them the threefold
+training, spiritual, intellectual, and industrial, all of which seemed
+necessary to help them become strong, established Christians.
+
+These natives, for sanitary and other reasons, are always given their
+own separate huts, away from the Europeans; they have their own native
+food and live their own life. Some of them are appointed to grind and
+cook their food and do the work of their kitchen. It could not be
+otherwise in such a country. Even the most civilized natives as a rule
+prefer to eat by themselves. The missionaries sometimes accept the
+hospitality of the natives in their homes and eat of the food set before
+them, but even there the natives will wait until the missionaries have
+finished eating, or else they will eat in a separate place.
+
+Since the pupils have time to do considerable work, they receive, in
+addition to food and schooling, a small sum of money sufficient to
+clothe themselves; and on Saturday afternoon, after washing their
+clothing, they have the time for recreation and mending their clothing.
+
+Up to this time the industrial work of the boys had been chiefly on the
+farm and in the gardens; but now a new line of work was being
+introduced, that of brickmaking. Brother Doner desired to start in this
+work at least. It was at this time somewhat of an experiment, as the
+various kinds of soil had to be tested so that he might know which was
+best suited for this purpose. It was also too late in the season to
+spend much time in this work. A few thousand of brick were made; and as
+rains threatened to come early, they were hastily built into a kiln and
+burnt. A beginning had been made, however, and some knowledge of
+brickmaking gained.
+
+During November of this year an event occurred which was second to none
+in the history of the work. I refer to the arrival of Elder and Mrs.
+Steigerwald, sent out to have charge of the mission.
+
+We had been looking forward and hoping that some one might come in this
+capacity. In the meantime we were carrying on the work as well as we
+were able during the nineteen months since the death of Elder Engle. The
+brother and sister took hold of the work courageously from the first. It
+is not an easy task to begin mission work in heathen lands, among a
+strange people, strange tongue, strange surroundings and ways of living.
+It is no less easy to step into a work already begun amidst such
+different surroundings and new ways of doing things, and find the work
+pressing in on all sides. Such were the conditions that met Elder
+Steigerwald from the first, but it soon became evident that he was equal
+to the task.
+
+Constant changes in the mission field are trying, both to the people and
+to the missionaries themselves. Here two had been called away by death,
+four had returned home (including Brother and Sister Van Blunk), and the
+two Lehmans and their wives had gone to Cape Town. The people could not
+help feeling these changes and scarcely knew what to expect. The changes
+seem to have been unavoidable, yet it makes the people suspicious of
+those who remain. The natives, like all those in heathen countries, love
+to think that their missionaries have come to stay and be one with them.
+The true missionary bears much the same relation to his people as the
+parent does to the child; for they are his spiritual children. Then too
+the language is not mastered in one, two, three years, or even in a
+longer period of time. In fact, many do not master it in a lifetime, so
+that all these changes could not fail to have their effect on the work
+and the natives, and render the position of Brother Steigerwald a
+difficult one.
+
+His first important work was to unite in marriage, on Christmas Day,
+Brother Doner and Sister Long. There were many more natives present on
+this occasion than at the previous marriage to witness the ceremony and
+to congratulate their missionaries.
+
+Money had been forthcoming for permanent buildings which were greatly
+needed. The huts were not only showing signs of decay, but some were
+damp and unhealthful during the rainy season, and even became mouldy at
+times. It was evident that, however convenient and useful they had been
+in their time, their day was fast passing away, and for the comfort and
+health of the missionaries something more permanent must be erected. The
+rains had started before Elder Steigerwald's arrival, so no more bricks
+could be made until the rains were over. Brother Doner was busy with the
+farming, and this left Brother Steigerwald free to make preparations for
+building.
+
+There is an abundance of fine granite stones and slabs in the vicinity;
+and as the new year of 1902 opened, he had these hauled together for a
+foundation. During the rainy season, whenever the rains stopped for a
+time, he built at the foundation of the house. Although he had natives
+to assist, yet he found the work to be very heavy and taxing to his
+strength, but by the end of the rainy season he had a most excellent
+foundation for a house laid. Then he and Brother Doner, with the help of
+the schoolboys and some other natives, made and burnt a large kiln of
+bricks and were ready to begin the house.
+
+[Illustration: Matopo Mission House. Front View.]
+
+The brethren in Africa can tell you that building on a mission station
+in the wilds of Africa is quite a different affair from what it is in
+civilized countries, or even in the cities of Africa. In these latter
+places, a man, desiring to build, buys his timber, his ready-made brick,
+and other material. Then the stone masons come and lay the foundation.
+The bricklayers, carpenters, plumbers, plasterers, and painters all
+follow in their order, together with their helpers, and the work is
+completed in an incredibly short space of time. On the mission field all
+this usually falls to the lot of one man, from the blasting out of the
+stone for the foundation and the brickmaking until the building is
+completed. He is mason, bricklayer, carpenter, plumber, plasterer, all
+in one. That one often is not a trained mechanic, or even a practical
+one, but many times he comes direct from the farm, schoolroom, or
+pulpit. With the many duties of a missionary pressing in upon him,
+sufficient to occupy all his attention, he must in addition undertake
+the laborious task of building a house, and even make most of the
+furniture with which it is fitted up.
+
+Some one may inquire, is it not possible to secure skilled workmen to do
+the building? Yes, in some instances this can be done; but the high cost
+of living in Africa raises the wages of skilled mechanics to such an
+extreme height as to make it practically impossible for the missionary
+to employ them. Again, he has around him raw natives, who need to be
+taught to work, and his ambition is to do mission work in connection
+with his building.
+
+Elder Steigerwald was equal to the emergency, and together with the help
+of Brother Doner and the natives, he completed the house in a little
+over a year from the time he began to haul the stone. The house is
+large, having nine good-sized rooms, with a fireplace in each one. There
+is a broad veranda nearly all around it and an iron roof over the whole,
+and it is a building that would be a credit to any one. The building is
+high and dry and has good board floors in four of the rooms, which add
+much to the healthfulness of it. Brother Steigerwald could no doubt tell
+you, if he would, of many days of arduous toil, which threatened to
+undermine his health; of many difficult and perplexing questions which
+confronted him in the process of construction; of lying awake at night,
+planning how everything was to be accomplished; especially how he was to
+build three fireplaces opening into one chimney and all have a good
+draft--a feat which he most successfully accomplished.
+
+There were natives who lightened some of the heavier parts of the work,
+but to train these to perform their work properly is often a greater
+task than to do it one's self. This training must be done, however, if
+the missionary is faithful to his trust of developing the native
+character along useful lines as well as in giving him the Gospel. One of
+the officials, in making a report of the work, stated, "Here, at least,
+are missionaries who believe in teaching the natives the dignity of
+labor." This is the course pursued at all our stations. To train them
+properly is no easy task. It requires much wisdom, patience, firmness,
+and love. One meets with many discouraging results and often with great
+ingratitude on the part of those instructed; yet in the end it pays, if
+natives are ever to be brought to a more civilized plane of living.
+
+There is one thing which operates strongly against the natives
+respecting labor. The average European, on coming to Africa, even though
+he may have been a day laborer and hard-working man in the country from
+which he came, soon sees that the more menial tasks fall to the natives;
+and when he takes the hoe or pick or shovel, he is told, "We do not do
+that here. Let the nigger do it and you oversee." The majority do not
+need a second invitation, and so such work is relegated to his black
+neighbor. The native soon sees, or thinks that he sees, that the white
+man regards manual labor as beneath him. This training is exactly what
+the African finds in his own home. He leaves the distasteful and hard
+tasks to his wife and the younger members of his family, while he sits
+down and enjoys himself. He is thus confirmed in his belief that labor
+is degrading.
+
+Not so with the missionary. He works continually along many lines, and
+seeks to teach the native by his example, as well as by precept, the
+dignity of labor, and that only indolence, dirt, vice, and kindred evils
+are degrading. It is true that on account of climatic conditions and the
+many duties falling continually to men and women on the mission field,
+they are obliged, as their field of labor widens, to leave many lines of
+work to the natives they have in training. If they did not do this the
+spiritual part of the work and their own health would greatly suffer in
+consequence.
+
+Perhaps some one might ask, Do those ignorant blacks ever learn to be
+cleanly and do their work properly? Yes, some of them respond in a
+surprisingly short period of time to faithful, energetic, yet patient
+training, and become real helpers to the missionary, both in the house
+and outside. Some, in addition to handling the oxen on the farm, also
+learn to use hammer, saw, chisel, and plane, and work side by side with
+white mechanics in certain lines of work.
+
+While the house was being built at the Matopo Mission, Matshuba, still
+quite a young lad, was an interested spectator of everything that was
+done, and he himself did carefully whatever he was able to perform.
+When he found a small piece of lumber which was not likely to be used,
+he would say, "Mufundisi [Missionary], may I have this?" If permission
+was granted he carefully put it away, but said nothing. After several
+pieces had been obtained, he asked permission to use tools and work-shop
+on Saturday afternoon, when other work was stopped. He worked away in
+the shop, asking questions of no one. After a few weeks had passed he
+finally surprised us by showing a neatly-made chair, patterned after one
+that had been purchased in town. He gradually learned to do all kinds of
+work, as well as to build himself a good dwelling house.
+
+There are almost insurmountable difficulties, however, in the way of
+teaching the trades to the natives as a means of earning money. The cry
+of the country is for industrial schools and for native skilled labor,
+but almost in the same breath the European will tell you that he will
+not work side by side with the native in the same line of work. A
+gentleman in Bulawayo had a contract for a fine, large building. His
+mechanics were white, while the blacks were the attendants. Being in
+need of more skilled labor, he sent south to the more civilized portion
+of the country for a native mechanic, and of course paid his way to
+Bulawayo. The white mechanics absolutely refused to work with this
+native and threatened to strike. The only course left for the contractor
+was to pay the native some wages and his fare home. This was no heathen
+native, but one who had grown up amid civilized surroundings, and no
+doubt his parents also were civilized.
+
+We do not wish to criticise such mechanics, for here, in a land where
+the blacks so far outnumber the white population, there are many things
+to be considered. But with these facts staring the missionary in the
+face, there is little inducement for him to spend a great deal of time
+in training natives. The only course left which will give the native any
+chance at all in some sections of the country is for a contractor to
+have all native mechanics. He might then be employed by the more
+broad-minded Europeans, but be boycotted by others. Notwithstanding
+these difficulties, industrial training in its broadest sense is very
+important on the mission field, and it is encouraged by the governments.
+It enables the natives to improve their condition and way of living and
+to earn more money.
+
+While these changes and the industrial training were in progress, the
+intellectual and spiritual part of the work was not neglected. New boys
+were continually coming, and some who came during these years were
+destined to be of help in after years. First was Nyamzana, who began to
+follow the Lord before coming as a boarder. Although not so quick in
+books as some, yet he was a faithful and devoted Christian, never giving
+his missionaries any uneasiness as to his spiritual standing. There were
+also Nkwidini, Mlobeka, and Mahlenkle. The last named was a nephew of
+the late king, and he had begun to attend school when the Lehmans were
+teaching at the kraal of the chief. He was an exceptional native, most
+steady and unassuming, ready and willing for any task assigned him. I
+have mentioned these names because they with others already referred to
+were among our future evangelists and teachers. Nor do I wish to forget
+Kolisa, a son of Buka, whom we visited up in the hills.
+
+Not all, however, continued to remain at the mission. Some left, never
+to return. Others went away to work for a time, that they might obtain
+more money and then return again to enter school. The new boys as they
+came generally showed a desire to leave their old heathen lives and
+become Christians. Others were a cause of great anxiety to us. There
+were times of heart-searching and crying out to God, which showed that
+His Spirit was still at work in their hearts. One after another would
+come and confess their temptations and failures, and ask for prayer and
+help that they might be more victorious over evil. Some would receive
+definite help and blessing, while others seemed, for some reason, unable
+to take hold of the Lord by faith. Often we would feel greatly
+encouraged over the progress some were making, and look forward to their
+becoming able helpers and soul-winners for Him, only to have our hopes
+and expectations suddenly dashed to the ground. This was all a part of
+our training as missionaries. The Lord was teaching us by these
+experiences to take our eyes off individuals and fix them upon Him. He
+was also giving us sufficient encouragement, day by day, through some
+who were steadfast, to enable us to realize that our labor was not in
+vain for the Lord. There were a number in the inquirers' class, and in
+July, 1902, three more were baptized by Brother Steigerwald. Of this
+number were Ndhlalambi and Nyamazana.
+
+The attendance at school was not as satisfactory as could be desired.
+The authority of the parents being paramount in the home, if there was
+anything to be done, such as digging in the gardens, herding, keeping
+the animals from the gardens, or running errands, the children must stay
+at home and attend to it. An early morning school was also started for
+those who could not attend at midday, and this enabled some of the
+herdboys to attend.
+
+The parents were especially opposed to their daughters attending school,
+because they became unwilling to marry the old men to whom they were
+betrothed. As we mentioned previously, several girls did come to stay at
+the mission. One of them was Ganukisa, a daughter of the king. She was a
+very nice, modest girl and proved a great help in many ways. She also
+became a Christian and member of the Church. Another girl, Zwadini, ran
+off from home twice and came to us, imploring us to save her from the
+man her parents were forcing her to marry. We tried to buy her freedom,
+but to no avail, and she finally was forced to return home and marry the
+choice of her parents. At this time we had no right by law to interfere
+in these matters, however much we longed to free some of these dear
+girls from their lives of slavery. It required time and prayer and much
+looking to God before a certain amount of freedom of choice was granted
+the daughters, and then it came through an action of the government.
+
+In the school some were making good progress. English and some other
+branches had been added to the curriculum, but the Bible continued to be
+the chief Textbook, and some were acquiring a fair understanding of it.
+Natives have generally a keenness of discernment and a clear grasp of
+the subject, so that it is necessary for the teacher to be well prepared
+for any question that may arise. The one who was first at the mission
+was a philosopher and a keen thinker. Nothing seemed to escape him. I
+have heard him deliver most excellent sermons and bring far more out of
+a Sunday-school lesson than the ordinary teacher. One day in reading the
+book of Isaiah, he came to the eighteenth chapter. He knows nothing
+about Ethiopia, but after he had finished reading, I inquired what
+people the prophet referred to. He thought for a moment and then
+exclaimed, "I believe he means us, the black people."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN
+
+Continuation of the Work
+
+Furlough
+
+
+The missionary, however robust he may be, cannot keep at his work all
+the time; for he generally works seven days in a week and fifty-two
+weeks in a year. After a few years of such labor it is necessary to call
+a halt, if one does not wish to break down altogether. New missionaries
+can take much of the burden, yet those who have something of the
+language and can speak to the people must be ready in season and out of
+season, to talk, interpret, explain, as well as to have heart-to-heart
+talks with the people.
+
+I had now been actively engaged on the mission station for four
+strenuous years and was greatly in need of a rest and change. The Board
+at home, as well as the missionaries on the field, had been urging me to
+go south for a few months. The only difficulty in the way was the need
+of some one to take the school, and so we had been looking forward to
+the return of Brother and Sister Lehman from Cape Town to take charge of
+it. They, however, had been looking on the fields for mission work at
+the Compounds on Johannesburg, and had decided to go there. As a last
+resort we decided to ask Matshuba to do the teaching. He was capable of
+doing it, and he was also becoming able to do some interpreting from
+English into the vernacular.
+
+Before this happened an event occurred which more or less concerned all
+South Africa, and especially Rhodesia. I refer to the death, on March
+26, 1902, of Cecil Rhodes at his home, Groot Schuur, near Cape Town, the
+place where he had so kindly received Brother Engle on our first coming
+to Africa. It had been his request to be buried in Rhodesia, the country
+that bore his name. In the Matopo Hills was a beautiful spot which he
+had discovered and to which he gave the name, "View of the World." This
+is about fifteen miles from Matopo Mission, as the crow flies, but over
+twenty-five miles by wagon road. Here, on the summit of a large granite
+hill, in the heart of Matopo, is the spot he selected to be his last
+resting place.
+
+When the body was brought to Bulawayo, thousands of people, both white
+and black, vied with each other in paying a last tribute of respect to
+him who had done so much for the development of the country. The natives
+realized that they had lost a friend that could not be replaced; and the
+white people believed that no one could carry out so successfully many
+of the public affairs with which he was associated. When the funeral
+procession reached the burial place, the heavy casket was raised to the
+top of the granite hill. Into the solid rock a grave had been cut, and
+into this the casket was lowered. The grave was then covered by an
+immense granite slab, on which was fastened a large brass plate with
+this inscription: "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes."
+
+A part of his property was left for the improvement of the country to
+which he had devoted his time and talents. His two large estates in
+Rhodesia, together with an annuity, were bequeathed to this country; and
+his fine and well-built estate near Cape Town was given over for the use
+of the government of Cape Colony, but the grounds are continually opened
+to the public. The Rhodes scholarships for various countries, including
+two for each State in the United States, were given with a hope of
+cementing nations together. He wished no monument to be erected over his
+grave, but near the place is the Shangani Monument to the memory of
+those who fell in the Matabele War. The grounds have been beautifully
+laid out and a well-built road extends from Bulawayo to the grave. On
+his estate at Cape Town is a granite monument seventy feet long, built
+near the seat overlooking both the Atlantic and the Indian Oceans, where
+he used to sit and lay his world-wide plans. There is a sad feature
+connected with his life, like that of many other men whom the world
+calls great. While he made so much provision for earthly things, there
+seems to be no evidence that he made provision for eternity.
+
+During this year there also died near us a native who had been more or
+less interested in the work, by the name of Fusi. He had been a
+prominent soldier under King Lobengula, and also remembered the first
+king, Mzilikazi. He loved to talk about the good old days, and could
+tell of a visit that Rev. Moffat, the father-in-law of Livingstone, once
+made to this country. He said, "I remember Chete [Rev. Moffat] quite
+well. I was just a young man at the time and King Mzilikazi treated
+Chete nicely. He said to me, 'Go and milk a cow and bring some milk for
+the missionary.'"
+
+This old warrior, however, never showed any desire to become a
+Christian; but he was always glad to have his people attend school, and
+his youngest son was one of the first communicants. The native finally
+became sick with dropsy, and when we visited him during his sickness, he
+said an enemy had bewitched him, adding:
+
+"Before the white man came into the country we put all the witches to
+death and we were well. Now we are not allowed to kill them and we must
+suffer."
+
+Later we again visited him. When asked if we should sing for him, he
+replied, "Yes, sing one of the old hymns you used to sing when
+Missionary Engle was alive." We did so, and he too joined his quavering
+voice in the chorus. He also listened most attentively to the Scripture
+reading and comments that day, and joined us in prayer. What thoughts
+these things stirred in his heart we know not, for that was the last
+time we saw him.
+
+In July of this year the time finally came for our furlough. I took a
+ticket from Bulawayo south to Port Elizabeth. This was shortly after the
+close of the Boer War, and all along the railway in the south were to be
+seen the blockhouses erected to guard the railway from destruction. Here
+and there were the demolished farmhouses and the orchards and beautiful
+groves that had been leveled to the ground. Worst of all were the many
+graves--mute testimony to that saddest of all human employment, human
+butchery. Kimberley already was recovering from this terrible siege.
+This was still a small town, its chief attraction being the great masses
+of blue earth surrounding it. This diamondiferous blue rock is mined far
+down in the earth, where it had been formed under great pressure; and
+when brought to the surface, the combined action of rain and sun slakes
+it somewhat like quicklime. It is then washed, which removes the lighter
+earth, leaving the diamonds and other precious stones.
+
+From this place I went to Port Elizabeth, which is 1,200 miles south of
+Bulawayo. It is the principal seaport of Cape Colony, as it furnishes a
+shorter and more direct route into the interior than Cape Town does.
+This is a town of about 35,000 inhabitants, but there is nothing
+especially inviting about the place except its thriving business. It has
+been said of it: "Out of sand-hills and scrub, Anglo-Saxon energy has
+created a town that, for cleanliness and health, and for the
+handsomeness of its business buildings, is second to none in South
+Africa." After a stay of a few days at this place I took the steamer
+_Norman Castle_ for Durban, where the greater part of my vacation was to
+be spent.
+
+Durban is the seaport and largest town of Natal, and has nearly 70,000
+inhabitants. The business part is low and often quite hot, but the part
+known as the Berea is high and cool, and has many fine dwelling houses.
+Natal is more thickly populated than other parts of South Africa. It has
+a most luxuriant vegetation and varied and picturesque scenery, and well
+deserves the appellation, "Garden of South Africa." In this warm, moist,
+subtropical climate of the coast many delicious and tropical fruits are
+grown. This is the home of the Zulu tribe of Africans, of which the
+Matabele are a branch.
+
+My special purpose in coming to this section of the country to rest was
+to make my furlough as profitable as possible, and to gain information
+helpful for mission work. Missionaries had been in this section of the
+country the greater part of the nineteenth century. The American Board
+had started their work some time in the '30s, and this formed an
+excellent opportunity of seeing some of the fruits of missionary labors.
+
+I spent some time at an English Mission under Mr. Eyles at Imbezana, at
+a Free Methodist Mission and girls' school, Fairview, and at four
+missions of the American Board--a boys' school at Adams, a large girls'
+school at Inanda, and one at Umzumbi, and also visited their work at
+Durban, in charge of Rev. Bridgeman. At all these places I was most
+hospitably entertained and given every opportunity for studying the
+work. It was an inspiration to see what God had wrought among these
+erstwhile heathen. Here were large boarding-schools, and natives living
+like white people in neat brick houses, built by themselves. Here were
+missionaries, like Mrs. Edwards and Mrs. Bridgeman, grown old in this
+soul-saving work, and yet so attached to the natives and the work that
+they could not think of leaving the country.
+
+Natal, like Cape Colony and the Transvaal, can no longer be called
+heathen Africa, as so many of the natives are civilized. The large
+cities of white people are built in modern style, with all the latest
+improvements, electric lights, street cars, telephones, and the like,
+and since then automobiles. There are also many white farmers, as well
+as small towns of white people, throughout the country. Missionaries of
+many societies are here in this densely-populated and easily-accessible
+district of Natal. This is considered one of the greatest fields for the
+overlapping of missionaries, perhaps, to be found anywhere, yet all seem
+to have plenty to do.
+
+With all the advantages for improvement which the Africans here possess,
+I was surprised to meet, within a mile or two of one of the oldest
+mission stations, natives with paint and grease, and when the
+evangelists go to the homes of the people they still find some raw
+heathen. Some not only do not and will not accept Christ, but they also
+prefer their dirty, indolent, ignorant way of living to that introduced
+by civilization.
+
+At Durban I took the train to go north to Johannesburg, a distance of
+480 miles. The war had been over for some time, yet it was still
+necessary to procure a pass to enter Johannesburg. This I procured
+through Brother Lehman, who was then at Johannesburg. People were
+flocking thither as fast as they could procure passes and trains to
+carry them. The trains were crowded every day, and one was obliged to
+book ahead in order to secure a seat. This ride to Johannesburg is a
+delightful one, so far as the scenery is concerned, but the winding
+railroad is exceedingly rough and uncomfortable. One passes through a
+landscape most beautiful and varied, from the green, grassy hills of the
+coast, through mountains and valleys, to the high, rolling veldt of the
+Rand, where the famous gold reefs of South Africa are to be found. In
+this journey one leaves the sea level at Durban and gradually rises to
+the height of 6,000 feet at Johannesburg. It is said of this place: "In
+1886 the site was nothing but a bleak, bare plain, that could have been
+bought for one hundred pounds. Then came the discovery of gold reefs
+east and west for sixty miles, and stores, public buildings, and
+churches sprang up with marvelous rapidity." This is now the largest,
+richest, and most modern city of South Africa, and the Rand is this
+sixty miles of gold-reef mines.
+
+At these mines are many thousands of natives from all parts of South
+Africa, and when they are not at work they are confined in large
+enclosures known as "Compounds." This furnishes the missionary an
+excellent opportunity of doing mission work among this conglomerate mass
+of natives. The great variety of languages is one hindrance in the way,
+but if the missionary is able to speak one of the chief divisions of the
+Bantu family of languages, such as the Zulu, he can generally find some
+native to interpret for him into other languages.
+
+In this mission field we found our beloved colaborers, Brother and
+Sister Isaac Lehman, who had just come from Cape Town and were becoming
+settled in their new home. A dear little girl, Faith, had come to bless
+their home and cheer their hearts. Brother Jacob Lehmans also were
+engaged in mission work here, as well as our dear Sister Swanson (nee
+Hershey), who had left us at Cape Town to come to this place. As our
+Board had no mission station here at that time, these were all laboring
+in connection with an undenominational mission in charge of Mr. A. W.
+Baker. All were actively engaged in mission work. It is a broad field
+and is a great opportunity for giving the Gospel to the heathen.
+However, one has the same obstacles to encounter as in the native
+village, _i. e._, the indifference of the people. While we would be
+having a service in one part of the Compound, other natives would be
+dancing within sight in another part, and often be making such a noise
+as to disturb the meeting. One difficulty with the work is that the
+natives often remain at the mines only six months or a year, not
+sufficiently long to get them established. Much good is, however, being
+done; schools are established to teach the natives when they are not at
+work, and services are held regularly at various places. Natives,
+accepting the Light, carry it to other parts of Africa, and sometimes
+become teachers of their people.
+
+After spending a most enjoyable month at this place I again returned to
+Matopo Mission, after an absence of three and one-half months. It was a
+pleasure to get back to the old battle ground, for it was still the most
+beautiful spot on earth and its people the dearest. Great changes had
+taken place during our absence. Then the foundation of the house had
+been laid and the brick burnt, but now an imposing structure met the eye
+and the house was rapidly being completed. It looked as if the
+missionaries had come to stay and were to have a comfortable place to
+live in.
+
+The school was progressing favorably under Matshuba's management, and
+all parts of the work seemed encouraging. As there was continually some
+difficulty about the stability of some of the industrial pupils, it was
+decided to divide the school year into two terms of five months each,
+with a month's vacation intervening in which the pupils could return
+home if they so desired. This worked well and seemed more satisfactory
+to all. The one who had been teaching was retained as pupil teacher and
+was also permitted to take advanced work.
+
+[Illustration: "Here lie the remains of Cecil John Rhodes."]
+
+There was again opportunity for me to visit in their homes. So,
+accompanied by some of the boys or girls, we made long excursions on
+foot among the people, sometimes walking from eight to twelve miles and
+meeting many people. Because so many missionaries had left them and did
+not return, they were not a little pleased to see me back, and,
+native-like, were inclined to make flattering speeches. One day we
+visited nine kraals, and everywhere had attentive listeners, and the
+people seemed to be hungry for the Word. At another time we went to
+Sibula's village for the first time, where we met and gave the Gospel to
+over one hundred people. They had never been visited before and seemed
+anxious for a school. Later they built a schoolhouse, and Nyamzana was
+given to them as a teacher.
+
+One day when we were out to the kraals we happened to come to a beer
+drink, where they were having a digging-bee.
+
+They said, "Why does not Missionary Steigerwald invite the people to
+come and dig his large gardens? He is so busy with building."
+
+"Will you come if he invites you?" we asked.
+
+"Certainly we will," they replied.
+
+When we reached home we told Brother Steigerwald what they said, and he
+at once thought it a splendid opportunity for getting his corn planted.
+So he appointed a day and sent out invitations to the people. One
+hundred and sixty-four adults with their hoes came and digged and
+planted an eight or ten-acre lot. It was an interesting sight to see
+that many people digging in one place. They would usually sing a native
+song, and with their hoes keep time to the music. They performed this
+piece of work without pay, and of course received no beer, but a
+generous supply of bread and tea was furnished them, which they greatly
+enjoyed. These Matabele are always very ready to come out to work when
+invited, and in this respect they were a contrast to some natives. When
+hired to do work, however, it was necessary to make them keep their
+promise and come at the time appointed, and also finish their work.
+
+Sister Steigerwald was much amused at Sibongamanzi shortly after she
+came to the mission. My hut needed replastering, and Sibongamanzi was
+engaged to do the work. The appointed day arrived, but the girl did not
+come according to her promise, and as the work was urgent I employed
+another girl to do it. The next day Sibongamanzi came to do the work and
+was quite disappointed to find some one else had accomplished it.
+
+I said, "Why did you not come yesterday according to your promise?"
+
+"I am sure a person has a right to change her mind," she replied.
+
+"Yes, I think so, too, so I employed some one else."
+
+In school one is obliged to use the English word for such articles as
+slate, pencil, and paper, since there is no word in the language for
+these things. When Steigerwalds came, there were also a number of boxes
+of goods sent out; and in unpacking these a pencil fell out. Sister
+Steigerwald picked it up, and handing it to Masikwa, said, "Here is a
+pencil." He was most delighted, and came and said, "The Inkosikazi
+[Mrs.] can speak our language already. She said 'Pencil.'" Sister
+Steigerwald, together with the other sisters, had their own experiences
+in teaching natives in the kitchen and housework, as well as in sewing.
+She proved most capable and patient in training various ones to be
+cleanly and to do their work properly.
+
+The services at the mission were well attended at this time, and
+sometimes we were obliged to have an overflow meeting. Natives would
+come fifteen miles to be present at the Sunday services. "Our little
+church is too small," said some. "We need a new one."
+
+Our congregations were gradually emerging from barbarism, and their
+appearance on Sunday was often quite striking. Some of the boys and
+young men would come, clean and neatly dressed in European clothes,
+including hat and shoes, and exhibit good taste in the selection of
+their clothing. Some again came well dressed but without shoes; others
+would appear partly dressed, but anxious to display all the clothing
+they had. Perhaps on a sweltering, hot day some would don a heavy winter
+overcoat reaching below the knees, or a heavy suit of bright red
+flannel. Another would have on a coat turned wrong side out to show all
+the colors, and a vest outside of this, while a number continued to wear
+the purely native garb of skins. A few of the girls were neatly clothed
+in dresses; others in short skirts with or without a cloth thrown over
+their shoulders. Some of the women's clothing was very modest and
+picturesque.
+
+Natives, especially at this stage of their advancement, do not as a rule
+dress according to the weather, for to them clothing is more or less a
+matter of ornamentation and they don it accordingly. One must be very
+careful about placing special emphasis upon clothing, as the native is
+naturally vain, and when he is able to be better clothed his vanity
+often increases. He soon thinks that if he is clothed he is a Christian,
+or if he goes to school and learns he is a Christian. He is quite ready
+to put on these outward semblances of civilization without yielding
+himself to God. If the missionary is willing to accept the outward form
+of Christianity, whether of clothing or ceremonials, he may soon have a
+large membership. He must continually guard against these things, and
+seek to know the inner life of those about him, and their daily walk;
+nor is it always easy to ascertain what is beneath the surface.
+Hypocrisy is not at all unusual.
+
+Early in our work there was a native who came occasionally to our
+services. He had worked in Bulawayo and attended one of the native
+churches sufficiently long to gain a smattering and lingo of
+Christianity. He came clothed in black broadcloth and carrying a book
+under his arm, and withal seemed a person of some consequence. He was a
+brother of one of our boys, and we were informed that he could read. One
+day in church, at the close of the services, he asked permission to say
+something, and not knowing what was coming we gave him permission. He
+arose and began to read out of his book and then talked. Again he read
+and talked in a preaching way until he was finally requested to sit
+down. As we were suspicious from his manner in regard to his ability to
+read, we took occasion to test him and found that he knew absolutely
+nothing about reading. What he gave had been memorized, and we learned
+that his life too was decidedly corrupt. This taught us how necessary it
+was to be careful of the stranger who came and claimed to be a
+Christian.
+
+December 26, 1902, there was a most welcome addition to the mission
+family in the person of a little son to Brother and Sister Doner. This
+was the first white child at the mission, and it was quite a curiosity
+to the natives. Of course every one must have a look at it, and happy
+was the one who might touch or hold this wonderful white baby.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE
+
+Looking on the Fields
+
+Say not ye, There are yet four months, and then cometh harvest? behold,
+I say unto you, Lift up your eyes, and look on the fields; for they are
+white already to harvest.--St. John 4: 35.
+
+
+We moved into the new house early in 1903. This left the huts empty, for
+our increasing family of boys. As soon as the rains were over for this
+year, Brother and Sister Steigerwald and myself felt led to make a tour
+of exploration in the interests of the work. Matopo Hills or Mountains
+extend northeast and southwest for a distance of about sixty miles.
+Between the hills and Bulawayo there is a mission station and work had
+been carried on for some years, although there were at this time many
+raw natives to be seen. Through the hills and south for a long distance
+there were as yet no missionaries except our own, and as our mission was
+on the north side of the hills, we desired to go through them and
+explore some of the south side.
+
+In June we arranged to make the trip, taking our large wagon on which
+was a canvas top, which was drawn by donkeys, consequently progress was
+slow. Three of our boys accompanied us. We were obliged to go west about
+nine miles before a road could be found leading through the hills. This
+wagon road was exceedingly rough and stony and very little traveled, and
+the donkeys slowly wended their way in and out among the hills which
+continually surrounded us and seemed to close us in. Frequently as the
+immense piles of rock seemed to stretch across our path in front and bar
+further progress, we would be led to exclaim, "Truly, there is no way
+out of this," but on we went and the way continued to open.
+
+The tediousness of the journey was relieved by the exceeding beauty of
+the scenery as it gradually unfolded before our eyes. In the first of
+the trip are to be seen the immense bald hills of solid granite, similar
+to some in the vicinity of the mission. Soon the scene changes and the
+eye is greeted on every side by lofty ridges, consisting of immense
+boulders piled up in all sorts of fantastic shapes, by the Great
+Architect, and from out of every possible crevice grow trees and
+shrubbery of all sorts. The dark green of the foliage, interspersed with
+the varying shades of grey, yellow, red, and green of the rock, forms a
+picture of surpassing loveliness. Baboons, large and small, would make
+their appearance on the jutting rocks, as we passed along, and bark at
+these intruders into their peaceful domain.
+
+As the hills abounded in game, and Elder Steigerwald was a good shot, we
+did not want for meat on the journey. So, while the donkeys were
+grazing, fires would be built and pot roasts and many sorts of
+delectable dishes would be prepared and eaten with relish. Natives are
+generally happy if they have plenty of meat to eat; so on this journey
+Tebengo declared that they would be longing for the fleshpots of Egypt
+when they returned to the mission. Next to meat, their favorite dish was
+Graham flour made into a loaf by means of water and a little salt, then
+baked in the hot ashes.
+
+South of the hills we left the beaten track, which proceeds east to
+Gwanda, and started south to the open country, which is known as Mapani
+Land, named from the large amount of excellent hardwood Mapani trees
+which grow here. Very few natives were seen on the journey through the
+hills, but in this rich, open plain of the south there were numerous
+kraals. The natives received us gladly and readily consented to have
+services; and as there were no missionaries in this part of the country,
+many of the people had the privilege of hearing for the first time the
+Story of the Cross. On this trip we came to the home of Holi, a rich and
+prominent native. His wife is a daughter of King Lobengula and a sister
+of Ganukisa, who lived at the mission. Here we were very kindly received
+and Holi presented Elder Steigerwald with a fine fat sheep.
+
+From this point we turned west and north through the hills by a
+different route. Along the way we visited some places of interest,
+especially the "View of the World," where Mr. Rhodes was buried. Thence
+we proceeded east and south to the mission. We had been absent about two
+weeks, had traveled over one hundred miles, and had had a most pleasant
+and profitable trip. It had also been a change from the labor and
+routine of the station.
+
+Brother and Sister Doner had for some time been contemplating opening
+another station, and they concluded during this dry season also to make
+a tour and explore the country, as well as do evangelistic work. They
+made preparations to spend a month in this way, taking the wagon and
+several boys. Little Oliver, who was then only seven months old, also
+went along, thus early in his life learning what trekking in Africa
+meant.
+
+They went south over the same route we had taken, and it was on this
+trip, if I mistake not, that the present site of Mapani Mission was
+selected. They spent a very delightful month and came home quite
+enthusiastic over the prospects of opening a new work and eager to
+launch out at once. Permission did not come from the Board, however, in
+time to open that dry season, and the work had to be postponed another
+year.
+
+During this year word came that one member of the Executive Board had
+passed "over the river." Dear father died the latter part of March. It
+was a double loss to some of us; for we should now miss not only his
+fatherly letters, but the wise counsel that he gave in his capacity as a
+member of the Mission Board. He always seemed to have such a keen
+insight into the work, and wrote about it as if he had been on the field
+and knew exactly our surroundings.
+
+[Illustration: Matopo Mission Church. Built by Elder Steigerwald in
+1905.]
+
+The work at the mission continued to go along as usual, and two more
+united with the Church, and everyone found plenty of profitable
+employment. One feature of the work, not yet mentioned, but which always
+requires much of the missionaries' time, is medical work and the care
+of the sick. The natives accept the miracles of healing, mentioned in
+the Scriptures, without question, and the sick frequently asked the
+prayers of the missionaries. There were several instances of remarkable
+cases of healing without the application of medicine, when the native
+could be led to take hold of the Lord by faith. On one occasion a native
+came for Elder Engle, from a kraal about five miles distant, where a
+woman was very sick and had eaten nothing for several days. She was very
+low indeed and seemingly unconscious of what was going on about her and
+her friends were weeping. Brother Engle felt led to anoint her and pray
+for her. The next day they came to say that the woman was much better
+and was eating, and they declared that the missionary had raised her
+from the dead.
+
+At another time one of our Christian girls was sick with such a disease
+that we knew we could not help her, and she desired prayer. We granted
+her request and she was healed immediately, even to our surprise. Some
+time after Brother Doner had come, an elderly native was quite ill with
+lung trouble, and his people had been trying in every way to heal him.
+They appealed to us, so we made the case a special subject of prayer and
+he was healed immediately, and told everyone that Jesus had healed him.
+A mother also wished us to pray for her child, who was very ill and
+seemed ready to die at any minute; it too was healed at once. Other
+instances of help might be cited; but we give these, because we see that
+He is the same Christ yet today and often shows His power, saying unto
+the sick, "According to your faith be it unto you."
+
+[Illustration: Back View of Matopo Mission House, Showing Granite Hill
+Beyond.]
+
+Why He does not always choose to manifest His power in this way I know
+not. I am giving things as I found them. At first we were more or less
+loth to use medicine, and some of the early losses may have been owing
+to this fact. We believe also that He receives honor in helping the
+missionary make use of remedies to relieve the suffering of the sick.
+With the natives sickness is always the result of witchcraft or the
+influence of their ancestral spirits. If one can by means of remedies,
+under the blessing of God, show them that this is not true, he is doing
+much to overthrow some of their superstitious beliefs. So the sick are
+visited in their homes and ministered to, and many come to the mission
+for treatment. Sometimes the disease may be such as will not yield to
+treatment, but the gentle sympathy and the delicacy for the appetite
+are always much appreciated, even from some sources least expected. The
+missionary necessarily becomes physician and nurse to his people, and it
+brings him into contact with them and relieves their sufferings and thus
+paves the way for ministering to their spiritual needs. He who neglects
+this part of the work makes a grave mistake. Many missionaries, who had
+done little medical work at home, have by a willingness and desire to
+learn, become quite proficient in healing on the mission field.
+
+Elder Steigerwald has been much used in this line of work. Many and
+various cases have been treated by him most successfully. In addition to
+the sick who come for medicine, there are generally some who remain for
+a time at the mission to be treated.
+
+During this dry season, as usual, kraal visiting occupied much of my
+time outside of school hours, and many long and enjoyable trips were
+made to all the villages surrounding us. During these journeys the Lord
+was also reminding His messenger of some things that had been almost
+forgotten. He was showing the large fields yet beyond where the people
+were in pagan darkness and the Light of Life had not yet penetrated, and
+where missionaries and teachers were greatly needed.
+
+[Illustration: In the Matopo Hills.]
+
+The reader of these pages will remember that our call had been to the
+far interior of Africa, where Christ had not been named. When Matopo
+Mission was started it was felt that here was my place to begin work,
+but that the time would come when the Lord wanted me to press on farther
+in the interior. This thought kept following me, and in the second
+year of our work at Matopo, on my speaking to a friend of the call to
+press on farther, the question was asked, "You do not intend to go
+alone, do you?" My reply was, "No, I do not think that will be
+necessary. Perhaps the Lord will raise up others who desire to go beyond
+the Zambezi." Also, while Brother and Sister Van Blunk were at Matopo,
+the question of going north was often mentioned, for their eyes were
+likewise looking in that direction.
+
+As time went on, however, and the work at Matopo increased, I entered
+more and more deeply into it and became absorbed in my surroundings. The
+children and also the older people occupied a large place in my heart
+and crowded out for the time being all thought of anything else. The
+Lord had to take His own way of cutting me loose and again lifting up my
+eyes to the fields beyond, and I could not doubt but that His time was
+near at hand. On the other hand, what a struggle it was to be willing to
+leave these! He, however, showed me most strikingly one day that when I
+was willing to lose these children there were others waiting to be
+found; and when the work was given into His hands, He accomplished that
+which to me was impossible.
+
+First, the pushing out of the work must be presented to the Board and
+the home Church and their consent and aid solicited. Permission was
+given to return to America, and as Conference drew near, it seemed as if
+the Lord's time had come for me to do this. Together with my colaborers,
+we made it a special subject of prayer, and felt that I was to start at
+once. So, on March 25, 1904, I left the mission for America. Sister
+Emma Doner, as she bade me good-bye, said weeping, "If I did not know of
+a truth that it was the Lord's will for you to go at this time I could
+not say good-bye." That was the last time I was permitted to look into
+her dear face. Brother and Sister Steigerwald, together with several of
+the boys, accompanied me to Bulawayo, where I took the train for Cape
+Town.
+
+I shall not dwell on the events of that journey to America, for many
+things connected with it are too sacred to find way into public print.
+It is sufficient to say that it was a time of severe sifting and
+testing, but of such sweet fellowship with the Father, that I would not
+blot it out of my life, if I could. I learned, in truth, what that
+meant, "With God all things are possible." After it was over one of
+God's children greatly desired to hear of the trip home, and when told,
+he was quiet for a time; then he said, "I believe it was God's
+preparation for going farther into the interior. I believe the way will
+open."
+
+America was reached just in time for Conference in Ontario. We were
+sorry to learn that Elder S. Zook, the Treasurer of the Foreign Mission
+Board, had in the meantime passed away in February. We greatly missed
+him who had always been such an able pillar in the Church and missionary
+work, for his farsightedness and wise counsel had smoothed the way in
+many a difficulty. The old fathers were thus passing away and the work
+was devolving upon younger shoulders, but they were equal to the task.
+The Executive Board now consisted of Brethren J. R. Zook, Chairman; Eli
+M. Engle, Secretary; and Peter Climenhage, Treasurer, two of whom had
+been connected with the foreign missionary work from its inception.
+
+A report of the work from the field met with an enthusiastic reception,
+and it was requested that the churches all be visited and an account of
+the mission work be given. Permission was also granted for an appeal to
+be made for pressing the work on into the interior, both for workers and
+funds.
+
+In the meantime Miss Sallie Kreider had gone to Africa to engage in
+mission work, and Elder and Mrs. John Meyers and Miss Lydia Heise had
+also gone there on a visit. Brother and Sister Doner, with some of the
+mission boys, had gone to Mapani to open a mission station in August,
+1904. At first Brother Doner was troubled with fever, and much of the
+hut building fell to Ndhlalambi; then Sister Doner became quite ill, and
+Sister Kreider hastened down to assist in caring for her, but she passed
+away. Thus three precious lives had been sacrificed for the people and
+the work. Brother Doner was desirous of taking the body and laying it by
+the side of the others at Matopo. This was unusual in a hot climate like
+this, where interment is usually attended to at once, and the natives
+too object to carrying a dead body, so there was much parleying before
+they would consent to take hold of the bier and carry it. The way over
+the hills was much shorter, but it was also much more difficult. It was
+an exceedingly trying journey for all of them, and only the grace of God
+could have sustained them through it; but Brother Doner had the comfort
+and satisfaction of seeing his loved one resting in the little cemetery
+beside Sister Cress and Brother Engle.
+
+Sister Doner's stay of over three years in Africa was almost a continual
+struggle, one might say, against disease, and heroically she bore up
+under it. Her constitution was naturally not very rugged, and this
+malarial climate aggravated her disease, as it is sure to do with any
+one who is not strong. She was afraid to write home and inform her
+friends of the condition of her health, lest they should insist upon her
+return to America, and that she did not desire. She loved the work among
+the heathen, and we believe she had her desire in laying down her life
+in their behalf, rather than return to America where she might have
+lived for a longer time. Little Oliver continued to thrive, but as
+Brother Doner's health was great impaired, it was deemed advisable that
+he return to America on furlough and, after placing Oliver with friends,
+regain his own health. So in the spring of 1905 he left for America, and
+Ndhlalambi was left to care for the work just started at Mapani.
+
+In America the work was progressing; a number had volunteered for the
+foreign field, and four were ready to go to Africa at once; these being
+Mr. and Mrs. Harvey Frey and Misses Adda Engle and Abbie Bert. Over
+$2,000 had been donated toward pushing the work on into the interior.
+This was offered to the Mission Board, but they concluded that it was
+best to leave it in our hands toward the opening of the work. Of the
+four new missionaries who were going to Africa, none were pledged to
+the interior work except Sister Engle, but we still hoped others would
+be ready to go.
+
+We reached Matopo Mission August 1, 1905, and rejoiced that the Lord
+permitted us again to return. Some very noticeable changes had taken
+place during our absence: Brother Steigerwald had been busy making
+improvements, and a fine, large brick church, with an iron roof, had
+been erected. This was much needed and it added greatly to the
+appearance of the mission premises. The women, about eighty in number,
+gladly offered their services free to put in a fine polished earthen
+floor. A number of the class members had been baptized, and Matshuba was
+doing well in the schoolroom, where Sister Kreider was also doing some
+teaching.
+
+[Illustration: Mapani Mission, 1907.]
+
+Ndhlalambi had been holding on faithfully at Mapani Mission. A number
+there had accepted Christ and he had formed them into a class for
+instruction. It was thought advisable for Sister Engle and myself to
+spend the remainder of the dry season at Mapani and help in the work
+there, so we turned our faces in that direction. We were there two
+months and helped in the various lines of work and visited some of the
+people in the surrounding neighborhood. Some of the converts were very
+encouraging at that place. At the time in which the rains usually open
+we returned to Matopo. On the way down we had gone by wagon road, but on
+our return four donkeys had been sent down, two for pack saddles and the
+other two for Sister Engle and me to ride, and two boys came along to
+assist in the homeward journey.
+
+[Illustration: Kwidine Taking His Aunt to Church. Matopo M. Hospital.]
+
+We left Mapani Mission at sunrise and took the shorter journey across
+the hills, the same path along which they had carried the body of Sister
+Doner the year previous. It was a most difficult trip for us and we had
+to marvel how they could have possibly made the journey. We were obliged
+to stop on the way and let the donkeys graze and eat, and did not reach
+the hills proper until afternoon. As the climbing was difficult and
+there were many trees and shrubs growing out from between the rocks, it
+was difficult for us to keep our seats, so we dismounted and walked. The
+pack saddles would frequently be nearly brushed off the other donkeys.
+Once one of the donkeys in attempting to go up a steep rock fell back
+and became fast in the rocks. The boys removed the load and carried it
+up; they then extricated the donkey and after much persuasion got it on
+the rock and again placed on the load. By the time we reached the
+summit, darkness had overtaken us and we were obliged to make the
+descent in the dark. We knew not where we were going, and were
+frequently in danger of broken limbs or becoming fast in the rocks. We
+were very thankful when at last at eleven o'clock we reached the mission
+without any serious accident. This was one of Sister Engle's first
+experiences in Africa, but from her composure through it all one would
+judge that she expected such things.
+
+[Illustration: Christian Wedding Reception Near Matopo.]
+
+Ndhlalambi remained on at the work in Mapani most of the time for one
+and one-half years, and when Brother Doner at last returned there were
+some nearly ready for baptism. Not long afterwards thirteen were
+baptized there and proved faithful Christians.
+
+Brother and Sister Steigerwald had now had four very strenuous years of
+work at Matopo and were in need of a change. So, while the new workers
+were at Matopo, the way was opened for them to go to Cape Town over the
+rainy season. Here they had a good rest and returned in April, 1906,
+quite refreshed, ready to take up their duties at their station. Brother
+Doner also returned from America at the same time and was ready to
+resume work at Mapani.
+
+There had been some pupils attending school at Matopo Mission, from
+Mtshabezi Valley, south of the hills, but about fifteen miles east of
+Brother Doner's station. These had strongly urged that a mission be
+planted in their midst. Brother Steigerwald promised them to consider
+the matter, and at the opening of the dry season Brother Frey went to
+see that part of the country. He was much pleased with the outlook and
+felt led to open work there. This is the origin of Mtshabezi Mission
+which was started in July, 1906. The phenomenal success attending that
+work since helps to confirm the belief that it was a work of the Lord's
+own planting.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN
+
+The Religion of the Matabele and Subject Tribes
+
+
+In order to understand a people properly one must know something of
+their religious beliefs; for all the important actions of their lives
+rest upon their religion. Find out what a person believes and you have a
+pretty good idea of his character. A native is loth to talk about his
+religion, and will, unless he fully understands and trusts the
+questioner, often evade answering directly questions asked upon this
+subject. It is somewhat difficult to dissociate the religious beliefs of
+the Matabele from those of the first inhabitants of the country, as the
+two are so closely interwoven.
+
+It would seem that all the natives, with whom we have come into contact,
+have some conception of a God, however vague that conception may be.
+They do not as a rule discuss Him and His attributes among themselves,
+and so differ greatly in the attributes ascribed to Him. They often
+prefer to deal with and worship the lesser spirits, especially the
+shades of their ancestors with whom they are somewhat familiar, than a
+great God Whom they do not know and Whom they fear, for the shades they
+think can intercede for them. The native is really very religious, but
+prefers to take that religion found ready to hand rather than to make an
+attempt to fathom that which he does not understand.
+
+The Matabele when asked who their god is will readily respond that it is
+the King Umzilikazi. They say, "He gave us the country and everything we
+have, and our customs and laws, and him we worship." This can be easily
+understood from the belief of the Zulu tribe, of which this is a branch.
+The Zulu will say that Umkulukulu (the oldest or first one) is the one
+to be worshiped, as he gave all the rest their religion and customs. As
+their ideas of worship were very elastic, there was no difficulty in
+including other departed spirits in the list of those worshiped. All who
+left them could intercede for them in the spirit world; hence, when the
+old queen was buried, the woman who washed her face just before burial
+said, "Go in peace and speak a good word for us to the king, and to
+those who have gone before, so that we too may find a place and not be
+found fault with."
+
+This very fact, that their religious beliefs are so elastic, makes
+missionary work often the more difficult and discouraging among them.
+They will quite readily accept the God one preaches, and Christ as the
+Savior of men, but to their way of thinking this does not interfere with
+their worship. This fact was forcibly thrust upon me one day in coming
+to a kraal near the mission that had been frequently visited. The people
+here had much light and often came to the services, and their son
+Masikwa was a baptized member. On this occasion we found the older
+people worshiping the spirits, and said to the woman,
+
+"How is this? We thought that you worshiped the Lord Jesus."
+
+"Oh! yes, we do," she replied, "He is the Big Spirit and we worship Him
+too."
+
+It was not at all difficult for her to include Him among the number of
+spirits to be worshiped. She was willing to accept all who might be able
+to help them, and even give Him a large place alongside of the others.
+The fact that He had been on earth and died only added to the conception
+that He was like the rest. The force of the resurrection idea she had
+not grasped. It will be readily seen how difficult it is to inculcate
+the idea of one Supreme Being Who alone should be worshiped, and Who is
+a jealous God and will brook no rivals.
+
+On the other hand, the belief in an intercessor has its useful side in
+giving them the Gospel, for we endeavor to impress upon their minds that
+Christ is the Great Intercessor, Who "ever liveth to make intercession
+for them," a risen Savior, not a dead One. The great question here is,
+"Intercede for what?" Sins they do not claim to have. To them religion
+has nothing to do with morals, for neither if they live pure moral lives
+are they the better, nor if they are base and licentious are they worse
+when they come to die. The spirits whom they worship are of their own
+conception and have the same loves and hates. As Mr. J. W. Jack says:
+"Down all the ages to the present time so frightful have been the
+abysses of depravity, the intolerable cruelty, the extravagances of
+nameless lust associated with religion, that if the veil were lifted,
+Christianity could not bear the story." The raw native will tell you
+that lying, stealing, murder, and adultery are bad, but they do not
+look upon these as having anything to do with their religion.
+
+Again, the very fact that they are so tolerant in their religious views,
+and so ready to include all, led the Matabele early in their history to
+adopt the religion of the conquered tribes. The oldest and, to them, the
+most powerful and most widely-worshiped of these heathen deities was
+Umlimo. This was the name of one worshiped by the Makalanga. He was
+supposed to have his abode in the Matopo Hills, several of which places
+are still pointed out. If one may judge from the information received
+from the natives, the worship greatly resembled that of the ancient
+Greek oracles. When any important question of the tribe was in need of
+solution, or even when individual questions arose, they would go to the
+hill or cave in which the Umlimo was supposed to have his dwelling
+place, carry a present, perhaps of beer, meat, or other food, and,
+placing it on the rock, remove to a respectful distance and then make
+known their wants. They said the answer would come from the very depths
+of the earth.
+
+It is said: "The answer was given by means of ventriloquism and, as the
+speaker was inside the cave and invisible, the voice appeared to the
+inquirer to issue from the very bowels of the earth. The extreme
+ingenuity of the device will be better appreciated when it is known that
+the spirits of the departed are universally believed by the natives to
+dwell in an under world. For a ventriloquist to practice his calling as
+a diviner in the foregoing manner is probably not unworthy of that
+oracle which Socrates himself felt it necessary to consult at Delphi."
+
+In this way they would inquire as to the cause of drought, rinderpest
+among the cattle, locusts, and the like, and they were told that these
+came through the white man. In speaking of their worship some would
+acknowledge that a priest dwelt in the cave and received their
+offerings, and that he would consult Umlimo and give forth the answer in
+sepulchral tones to the worshipers. This god was also worshiped at the
+opening of every year by a great dance, so that he would send an
+abundance of rain. One special place of worship was in a large cave in
+the midst of the Makalanga country. As this was said to be only about
+five or six miles from Mapani Mission, I had a desire to visit the spot
+and see what it was like. Setyokupi, one of the first Christian girls at
+Mapani, offered to accompany Ndhlamlabi and myself to the cave, as she
+lived near the place but had never visited it. We started early one
+morning to the home of Setyokupi, which was several miles from the
+mission, and from there continued our journey to the cave. It was much
+farther than we had anticipated, and we walked quite a distance before
+reaching the immense kopje, or hill of stone, in which the cave was.
+Then our way wound round and round among the rocks for a long distance.
+Setyokupi saw that the task was greater than she had anticipated, and
+fearful of losing ourselves, we asked a young lad, whom we met in the
+neighborhood, to guide us. After reaching the cave we were obliged to
+climb forty or fifty feet up the side of the rock before we could
+enter.
+
+It was a large cave, extending back into the rocks, and would have
+formed several good-sized rooms. We had understood that the worshipers
+generally took a present and left it in the cave. This was frequently a
+branch or twig of a tree; consequently there were to be seen in it many
+dried leaves and branches of trees, the thought in their mind in this
+connection being no doubt similar to that of the olive branch of peace.
+There were also a few old ornaments and cloth, but nothing of value.
+Here it was said the people came to have their yearly dance and pray for
+rain. Everything on the inside was quite old, and it looked as if the
+place had not been visited lately, but we were informed that there was
+another and more important place of worship in the vicinity in which
+there was a pool of water. This we did not see, nor did we learn of its
+location. The day was fast passing and we were obliged to hasten back to
+the mission.
+
+At this time, 1905, Europeans had already been fifteen years in some
+parts of the country and the natives about Matopo Mission were always
+quite willing for anyone to be present at their religious festivals.
+Many were beginning to throw off some of their old superstitious ideas,
+and some were accepting Christ; so there was no thought of impropriety
+in our making this tour of investigation. The account of it no doubt
+came out through the little boy who accompanied us, and although these
+natives in Mapaniland were more raw than those about Matopo Mission,
+perhaps nothing further would have been thought of the visit, had the
+rains come on that year at the usual time. Unfortunately they were
+exceptionally late, not really coming until the first of January, and
+the people were becoming desperate. It is always necessary for the
+heathen to let the blame rest somewhere, and as the witch doctors and
+diviners generally hate the missionaries because of their loss of custom
+and prestige, so they naturally put the blame upon our visit to the
+cave. I never learned that they placed the blame upon myself, but they
+did upon those who accompanied me. Ndhlalambi's life was really in
+danger that year and his people were much concerned for his safety. He,
+however, did not seem concerned about himself and continued to go back
+and forth and see about the work at Mapani. Several years later
+Setyokupi, who is a most devoted Christian, had to bear the blame from
+the older people for a similar drought, the years of plenty intervening
+being overlooked. We as missionaries, however, always try to be careful
+not to stir up unecessarily the opposition of the natives.
+
+According to some of the older natives Umlimo is worshiped under various
+names; in fact, there is a trinity. In the hills to the south is the
+father, Shologulu. He is stern and unbending and is to be greatly
+feared. In the east is the son, Lunzi, who is kind and easy to be
+entreated. The mother, Banyanchaba, is in the north. Just how much
+tradition, handed down from Christianity, is embodied in this idea
+cannot be ascertained, but the belief is quite ancient.
+
+Again, some of the natives say that certain of the people at times
+claimed to be Umlimo and to have the power ascribed to him. One of these
+was a woman whom the king, in order to test her power, put in a hut
+near him. He convinced himself of her false pretenses and punished her
+accordingly.
+
+In a general way natives do not concern themselves about a Supreme God.
+Some, of course, will readily say that He made everything. Again we have
+inquired of others,
+
+"Who made the trees, the rocks, the grass?"
+
+They will answer, "We came here and found them already created, so we
+did not concern ourselves to inquire who made them."
+
+This indifference or spiritual laziness had much to do with their
+religion. On another occasion we were speaking with a native living near
+Mapani Mission, and were telling him that he ought to repent and accept
+Christ as his Savior. To excuse himself he said:
+
+"He made me. He brought me into the world and it is His business to boss
+me up."
+
+He really meant to say, "I am here by no choice of my own. He made me. I
+am His and He has a right to do as He pleases with me."
+
+This idea of fate runs through all their beliefs. They have no volition
+of their own. Everything that comes to them, whether of accident,
+sickness, ill luck, or whatever it may be, is the result of malevolent
+spirits which are in league against them. In fact, all their worship is
+one of the propitiation of the malevolent spirits. Good spirits will not
+harm them.
+
+One day in the Sabbath-school class, where questions were freely asked,
+one of the older men said, "Since I hear you tell who God is and what
+He likes, and who Satan is and what he does, I see that our god, whom
+we have been worshiping, is Satan himself."
+
+The _amadhlozi_ (spirits of the departed) are constantly besetting their
+path, causing sickness or misfortune, or else helping them to do what
+they desire. Their expression, for ill luck is _Angi ladhlozi_ (I do not
+have any spirit). When sick they send for the witch doctor to tell where
+the trouble is. He may say that one of the spirits thinks he had not
+been properly treated and wishes a goat. The goat is brought and killed,
+and a small portion of meat is used with medicine for the sick, but by
+far the greater part of the meat is generally appropriated by the witch
+doctor himself, who was no doubt more desirous of it than the shades.
+
+If health is not forthcoming for the sick, he is certainly bewitched.
+This is generally the belief when one dies or is suffering from an
+incurable disease. The witch doctor then takes his "bones" and "smells
+out" the supposed witch, and he is very careful to select as his victim
+one who is not very popular in the community by reason of his wealth or
+other circumstances. This one is accused of bewitching, and is
+ignominiously put to death, and all his property confiscated.
+
+Since the occupation of the country by the English much of this killing
+of supposed witches is done away with, but there are still violent
+deaths, which looks suspicious. Since our stay at Matopo there was an
+instance of an old woman being drowned, which was traced directly to the
+witch doctor and he was punished. There were also several instances of
+supposed suicide by hanging, which looked as if there might have been
+foul play, but which could not be ferreted. It is not unusual for the
+old or infirm to be gotten rid of in this way, especially by the ordeal
+of drinking poison.
+
+It would be unjust to say that their doctors never use remedies; in
+fact, they have many herbs which they use and some of these are very
+efficacious. In fever we have seen them administer a greenish-looking
+powder of a native herb, which tasted much like quinine, and we were
+surprised once to see a native physician pass through the mission
+premises with a wallet full of various kinds of herbs. He had a pass
+from the magistrate to practice among the natives, and he proudly opened
+his wallet and displayed his drugs. Notwithstanding that they have these
+remedies, yet, in practice, this is often so mixed with charms and other
+superstitious ideas, that it is difficult to tell wherein the real
+remedy lies. A witch doctor, who lived near us and who had much light,
+exclaimed one day, "I can give medicine, and if the Lord says the sick
+will recover, he will recover; if He says the sick one will die, he will
+die; my medicine cannot save him."
+
+When one treats a native in his home for any disease, it is always
+difficult to induce his people to follow the prescribed treatment; for
+they desire often to use their arts as well. A case of scurvy was at one
+of the villages, and they came to the mission for help. We went over.
+The boy had been losing blood for several days and was very weak,
+seemingly in the last stages of the disease. They had been using their
+arts, but to no avail, and had come to the mission as a last resort.
+Elder Steigerwald reproved them for waiting so long, and took hold of
+the case, hoping still to save him. After looking to the Lord for
+guidance, he managed to get the bleeding stopped, but to see that
+everything was properly carried out one of us remained for a time at the
+kraal. When he was thought to be out of danger he was left with his
+people, with strict injunctions to do just as they were told. When the
+patient was next visited it was found that the people had again brought
+out their charms and put them about his head, and it was necessary to
+frighten them thoroughly before they would follow instructions.
+
+Parents are always very anxious to have their children at home if they
+become sick. This may partly be owing to natural solicitation on the
+part of the parents, for they love their children as well as white
+parents do, but it is also due to the fact that they cannot use their
+divinations properly except at home. Then, too, if they die, they are
+always anxious that their people die at home. In this way we often had
+great difficulty in keeping at the mission some who were sick and needed
+care.
+
+One of our boys was very sick and we had been unable to help him, and
+both he and ourselves were looking to the Lord in his behalf. He was a
+good Christian and perfectly conscious all the time, and quite ready and
+willing to die if such was the Lord's will. His parents lived near and
+had been trying to take him home, but he did not wish to go; and we too
+thought it best for him to remain under our care. When he became very
+low, it was necessary to inform his parents. The father, who was a very
+violent and wrathy man, was determined to take the boy home, but we
+felt sure that a move at that time would be fatal, and told the father
+so.
+
+He replied, "I'll take him home if he dies on the way. I'll not have it
+said that my child died and was buried away from home." And it was with
+great difficulty that he could be prevailed upon to let the boy remain.
+The Lord heard our prayer in his behalf and he recovered.
+
+From what has been written it may readily be seen that the African
+believes in the immortality of the soul; that the souls of the departed
+take cognizance of what is done on the earth by the survivors; and that
+they have power over those who dwell on the earth to help, harm, or
+intercede in their behalf. They also believe in transmigration of souls,
+that the spirit of the departed often enters a snake, bird, lion,
+rhinoceros, or other animals, each of these tribes having its own
+especial animal. This does not necessarily imply that the soul remains
+in these forms. Frequently they speak of the animals as only a medium
+through which the spirit appears to its friends.
+
+The Matabele revere the snake and will not kill it. The first year of
+the mission a long snake entered one of the huts, that was in process of
+erection, and climbed up near the roof. I told one of the boys to knock
+it down and kill it. He recoiled from the idea and refused. Thinking he
+was afraid I took a hoe, knocked it down and killed it. When other
+natives came to the mission the incident was related to them by the boys
+and they expressed great surprise. I rather supposed that they were
+surprised at my prowess, until one woman who knew me better than the
+others exclaimed, "Were you not afraid to kill it? Perhaps it was one of
+your friends." I then found out that the snake was an object of
+reverence.
+
+Matshuba said that when his father was ill a snake entered his hut and
+he exclaimed, "That looks like a child of mine, it is so pretty. It is
+your brother, Matshuba."
+
+"Is that the reason," we inquired, "why so many people are afraid to
+kill snakes?"
+
+"Yes," he replied, "they think their friends come to visit them in this
+form."
+
+Again, once while out kraal-visiting we were speaking to some people who
+were working in their garden. Some one came from their kraal with a
+message of some kind, and soon all was commotion and hurry.
+
+I inquired, "What is the matter? Where are you going?"
+
+They answered, "Two snakes have entered our hut and we must go and see
+them."
+
+"Will you kill them?"
+
+"No, they are probably some of our friends, who have come to visit us,"
+was the reply.
+
+The people were also accustomed to use a goat in their worship and then
+drive it away on the veldt. I know very little of this ceremony, except
+that when it was told to me, I was forcibly reminded of the "scapegoat"
+of the Israelites. Each family also has a sacred ox or cow among the
+herd. They do not worship images, and are surprised to find that there
+are people on earth who do. Two of the boys in reading their Bibles one
+day learned for the first time that some people worship images made by
+men's hand, and they were as much surprised as any white child could
+have been.
+
+"Do they answer their prayers?" inquired they. "Can they talk, or do
+they know anything? Is it something like we make cattle out of mud to
+play with?"
+
+We are accustomed to despise people who worship animals, and it is
+certainly not very elevating; but they are God's handiwork, and are they
+not superior to many of the hideous images of idolatrous nations? When
+these people do worship, the object of their reverence is not the
+animal, but the souls of their people who they think enter the animals.
+
+Spiritualism is a legitimate product of their beliefs. I can best
+illustrate this feature of their worship by giving an instance which
+came to our notice in the year 1900. It was a religious dance. The chief
+actors had come from a distance and the worship was in honor of one of
+their dead relatives, the aim being to bring back the soul and hold
+conference with it through one who acted as medium.
+
+We felt to avail ourselves of this opportunity of seeing something of
+their worship, that we might have a better understanding of the same.
+The mother of Kelenki, one of our converts, participated and she,
+heathenlike, was anxious to have her boy take part, but he of course
+refused, as he had always done when urged to join with them. It was only
+about two miles from the mission, so Brother and Sister Lehman and
+myself went over for a short time. We entered the village at about 3 P.
+M. and found about one hundred people assembled. They had just been
+drinking beer and were feeling quite good. As many of them knew us, they
+greeted us quite pleasantly, nothing loath to see us on this occasion,
+provided we did not interfere in their worship.
+
+One of the most noticeable features at first was the evident attempt at
+ornamentation on the part of the women, especially the older women who
+were to take active part in the proceedings. We might add that only the
+older people took part in this dance, and that the ornamentation of the
+body is always a noticeable feature of their worship. Their dress, or
+rather undress, consisted of a short skirt of dirty, greasy leather,
+covered with a heavy embroidery of bright-colored beads. The rest of the
+body was ornamented with beads and heavy brass rings, neck, waist, arms,
+and ankles being heavily laden. The headdress consisted of a broad band
+of beads artistically put together.
+
+Our attention was soon drawn to three women seated on the ground before
+one of the huts, each with a large drum made from a hollowed log, over
+one end of which was a skin tightly drawn. On this drum they were
+beating with their hands and accompanying the sound with low, plaintive
+singing. Presently a man, who proved to be the leader, or medium,
+stepped out, beating at the same time on a drum made of a broad wooden
+hoop, over which was stretched a piece of skin. He was a tall,
+athletic-looking fellow, clothed in a short skirt similar to that worn
+by the women. He had many yards of blue cloth wrapped about his body and
+a yellow scarf thrown over one shoulder. The drum which was beaten with
+a stick produced a sharp ringing sound, and he danced with a peculiar
+backward step, keeping time to the beating of his drum, and sang,
+calling upon the shades. To this the women, beating the drums or
+tomtoms, would respond. A number of other men with similar drums joined
+him in the dance, and the air was filled with their melody.
+
+This was continued for some time, when all suddenly ceased and
+disappeared within a hut and continued their dance within. We were
+invited to enter, and after creeping through the low doorway we found
+ourselves in a hut about eighteen feet in diameter, with a somewhat
+higher roof than is to be found in many native huts. The performance was
+similar to that on the outside, except that others joined in the dance,
+but all danced alone. The actions and contortions of the body became
+more and more rapid and violent, and there was also leaping and jumping,
+the heat and violent exertion of the body causing the perspiration to
+flow freely.
+
+The medium finally worked himself up into sort of a frenzy and announced
+that a spirit had entered the door. With this he pretended to enter into
+conversation, but as he spoke in the Shuna language we did not
+understand him. The dancers all finally rushed out on the rocks and the
+leader fell down exhausted. After their return the same motions were
+continued, but a new feature was added by women entering, having
+native-made bells tied to their ankles, and these added to the general
+din. The motions of all were more or less similar, and even when the
+actions and contortions of the body were the most violent, they were
+somewhat rhythmical. The noise was deafening in the extreme, and would
+have surely waked the dead were such a thing possible. In addition to a
+dozen drums and the bells, there were yelling, whistling, and singing. A
+huge battle-axe was handed around from one to another, and part of the
+time was dangling on the neck of the leader. Sad as one felt at the
+delusion under which they labored, he could not but be impressed by
+their evident earnestness, and only wished it might be expended in a
+better cause.
+
+They did not forget our presence, and no doubt we did interfere with the
+freedom of their actions. The medium came toward us several times,
+beating his drum. Thinking he might be annoyed at our presence we spoke
+to the headman, but he hastened to assure us that we were welcome to
+remain. In fact, he as well as many others in the kraal, seemed to be
+spectators rather than participants in the worship.
+
+They finally became quiet and the medium again claimed to converse with
+the departed, and this time one of our boys interpreted. Of course both
+questions and answers were given by the medium. Among other things he
+said: "I see a spirit enter the door. It says, 'Who are these white
+people? Are they the people who killed the Matabele?' No, they are
+missionaries and like the black people." It seemed evident that not only
+the spirit but some of the strangers present were somewhat afraid and
+needed assurance that we were harmless.
+
+We returned home sad at heart for their heathendom. We were informed
+that this worship continued until late in the night and two days
+following. There was much beer drinking and immorality, so that even
+some of the heathen in the kraal were thoroughly disgusted.
+
+The Matabele do not use drums in their religious dance like the Mashona.
+Once when we were out kraal visiting we happened to come upon some of
+these worshiping at Fusi's kraal. We stopped only a few minutes to see
+what they were doing, and were greatly shocked by the hideousness of
+their looks and actions. The very stamp of the bottomless pit seemed
+impressed upon their features.
+
+Heathen worship, heathen dances, and hideous rites are becoming less and
+less in the vicinity of the mission, for the natives are fast losing
+faith in their old religion. The missionaries need a great deal of
+patience, forbearance, and firmness in dealing with the perplexing
+problems in reference to the natives' beliefs, but in the end God's
+cause is sure to win.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOURTEEN
+
+Some of the Customs
+
+
+Custom is so interwoven with and dependent upon religion that it is
+almost impossible to dissociate the two, so there is a difference of
+opinion as to what constitutes custom and what religion. Whatever the
+natives believe or practice has in their estimation been given them by
+their god, even to the ornaments of their bodies. As Rev. W. Chapman
+says, "The most satisfactory way of changing native customs is by
+changing his religion." On the other hand, take away the native's
+religion and the restraints which often accompany it, and place him in a
+modern city, with its so-called modern civilization, without the
+restraining influences of the Christian religion, and a monstrosity of
+evil is often the result.
+
+From infancy this inexorable law, custom, assails him. He must not step
+aside from the laws of his ancestors or he will suffer the consequences.
+If twins are born, they must be put to death. If a child cuts his upper
+front teeth first instead of the lower, again death is the penalty. Not
+because the mother does not love her child. It is just as dear to her as
+the child of Christian parents is to them, and generally no amount of
+money will induce her to part with it, but this infant is departing from
+the customs followed by its ancestors, and if its precocity leads it
+thus early to change the customs, what will it not do as it becomes
+older? It is a monstrosity and must be dealt with accordingly.
+
+If the child is a girl, it may at any time after birth be betrothed or
+sold to a man for his wife, and a part or all of the pay be given to the
+parents to bind the contract. This intended husband may be already
+middle-aged or old, with several wives. That is to his credit, because
+it frequently means that he is rich or a man of importance in the
+community. An old, gray-haired man living near the mission had nine
+wives when we arrived on the scene, some of whom were just young girls.
+However, one frequently meets with heathen natives who have only one
+wife.
+
+The would-be bridegroom sends some one to the father or guardian of the
+girl to ask for her hand in marriage. He consults his relatives in
+reference to the matter, but even if they disagree, he may give his
+consent, for he alone receives the pay. This may be in the form of
+cattle, sheep, or goats, or even money in later years, and the amount of
+pay the man can or is willing to give had much to do with the father's
+consent. Of course the girl has no say in the affair, and may not, until
+she is older, know who her intended husband is. If she is small, he
+waits until she is about grown before the actual marriage takes place,
+but in the meantime she is looked upon as his prospective wife and is
+often thoroughly demoralized before marriage.
+
+Before the missionaries or Europeans came to the country, it is doubtful
+whether the girl rebelled much as to what disposition was made of her,
+for one choice was about the same as another, only so that she might
+become a married woman. In their eyes it was almost a disgrace to be
+unmarried after they had reached the proper age.
+
+It is said that when the time came for her to be married she would say,
+"I am grown and want to marry." At first her people refuse, but finally
+they give her a hoe and showing her a piece of raw veldt say, "Show how
+you can dig, so that we may see whether you have strength to perform the
+work of a wife." She takes the hoe and shows her strength by vigorous
+work; for is she not to take the place of oxen or donkeys for her
+husband and plow and sow his gardens? This is no exaggeration, for more
+than one native has been heard to exclaim, "These are my oxen," pointing
+to his wives, the chief difference being that whereas the oxen get some
+time to rest and eat, the wife gets little, as she must grind and
+prepare the food in the interim of digging.
+
+When the day set for the wedding arrives, a number of girls of about her
+own age are called and they have a feast, often of goat, after which
+they accompany the bride to the home of the bridegroom, an old woman,
+carrying a knife, leading the way. Here they are assigned their places
+and various ceremonies. The wedding lasts several days and ends in a
+feast, and very often much immorality is connected with it. During a
+certain stage of the ceremony the bride runs and hides, not again making
+her appearance until she is found by the others.
+
+So-called marriages sometimes take place without any pay being given for
+the wife, but in such instances the children do not belong to or are
+not under the control of their parents; they belong to the father or
+guardian of the wife, as she has not been paid for. It may thus be seen
+that the giving of pay is not an unmitigated evil, as it leaves the
+children in the hands of their natural guardians, the parents. With the
+wife the pay is merely changing her from the ownership of her father to
+that of her husband, and if she should leave her husband, the pay or
+part of it must be returned to him.
+
+It frequently happens that a man takes a wife according to native
+marriage without paying for her, and afterwards, if he desires to retain
+her or her children, he pays the father for her. A native in the
+vicinity of Matopo had, in this manner, taken five wives, at various
+times, without paying for any of them. When some of his children became
+of an age that his wives' parents desired to take them, he took steps to
+secure them by paying for his wives. One, however, whom he did not like,
+he drove away without paying for her. These things show that the
+marriage vow is exceedingly loose and leads to much immorality. Several
+years after we came to Matopo Hills a law was passed by the British
+Government, allowing the girls some freedom of choice in regard to the
+marriage question, and it is now possible for Christian girls to choose
+Christian husbands.
+
+A man will have a hut for himself and one for each of his wives, and the
+more wives he has, the greater his importance in the community. I think
+that it is safe to say that an old heathen's ambition is to have many
+wives, each with her hut, about him, many sons, who too, with their
+wives, add to the number of huts, and many daughters, that he may sell
+them for cattle or sheep and thus increase his flocks and herds. He also
+likes to have nephews, younger brothers, and other relatives with their
+wives come to him and swell the number of huts. This makes a large
+number of huts, large herds, and he becomes an important headman; or if
+his followers increase sufficiently he may become a chief. These huts,
+built near together and often enclosed with a fence, are what constitute
+a kraal. This is a Dutch word and applies only to native villages, but
+there may be only three or four huts and it still be called a kraal.
+
+Their huts are built of poles and mud, much as described in the making
+of our own, except that the huts of the raw natives are much lower,
+without windows and with a doorway only about three feet in height.
+Sometimes no poles are used in the construction of the walls, but they
+are moulded of earth from the bottom up and are well made. The floor is
+made of ant-hill earth, well pounded. This is then covered with a thin
+coat of black earth and polished with stones until it looks not unlike a
+nicely-polished wooden floor. The Matabele build much better huts than
+some of the subject tribes; these latter are good farmers, but often
+have most miserable-looking huts.
+
+[Illustration: Matabele Kraal near Matopo Mission.]
+
+There is no furniture proper in the huts. The bed consists of a mat or
+hide spread on the floor at night. During the day this, together with
+the blankets, is rolled up and tied to the roof of the hut. The pillow
+is made from a block of wood, and there are no chairs, a small mat
+answering for this purpose. They have earthen pots for cooking and
+brewing beer and for various purposes. They have many kinds of
+nicely-woven baskets, and gourds for carrying and dipping water as well
+as for drinking vessels. There are also the necessary stamping block and
+a large flat stone on which the grain is ground. The wash basin is the
+mouth. The mouth is filled with water, which is allowed to run in a thin
+stream on the hands until they are washed, and then the hands are filled
+in the same way to wash the face. I was greatly interested once in the
+operation of bathing twins. This mother had sufficient light to keep her
+from killing her babies because there were two of them. She spread a
+blanket on a large rock in the sun. Then she took a gourd of water and
+filled her mouth. (It is surprising how much water they can hold in the
+mouth; practice aids greatly in this, no doubt.) She kept the water in
+her mouth a short time to take off the chill, then picked up one child,
+held it out and, with a thin stream of water pouring from her mouth,
+washed the entire body of the child thoroughly. After this ablution she
+laid it on the blanket in the sun to dry. She again filled her mouth and
+taking the other baby repeated the process and also placed it on the
+blanket. The children were evidently accustomed to such baths; for they
+took it all quietly, and perhaps enjoyed it as much as a white child in
+a bath tub of warm water.
+
+Polygamy is not necessarily opposed among some of the heathen women.
+They will frequently tell you, "I like my husband to have more than one
+wife; then I do not need to work so hard." It is, however, a source of
+much dissension and rivalry among them and a cause of much favoritism
+among the children. One day Gomo was reading the story of Joseph and
+Benjamin. He exclaimed, "That is just like our people. The children of
+the favorite wife are loved more by the father." Of course polygamy is
+one great drawback to the introduction of christianity, but we believe
+that it has had its day and that in many places it is becoming less in
+practice. Each wife cooks of her own food for the husband and places it
+before him. He, with older boys, eats what he desires and leaves the
+balance, if there be any, for the wife and her children. If he has many
+wives a number of dishes are often placed before him during the day, and
+he can eat that which he prefers. Or, if there are several men in the
+kraal, they often all eat from one dish, and from each dish as it is
+brought to them by the various wives, while the mother and daughters eat
+from a separate dish.
+
+Their chief occupation is farming, and they grow corn, kafir corn,
+millet, sweet potatoes, peanuts, ground peas, melons, citrons, and
+pumpkins. They generally hull the grain and then stamp or grind it into
+a very fine meal or flour. This they put into boiling water and make a
+very stiff porridge, or mush. Their favorite food seems to be this
+porridge, eaten with meat into the broth of which ground peanuts have
+been cooked. They generally have chickens, sheep, goats, or cattle, and
+often hunt or trap game. Their usual way of eating is to allow the food
+to cool a little and then dip the two front fingers into the porridge,
+take a little and dip it into the gravy and then put it into their
+mouth. They also greatly relish green corn, eaten from the cob or cut
+off and ground on the millstones. This milky meal is then made into a
+loaf and placed into a kettle and thoroughly steamed. This is their best
+substitute for bread, and in its season it is considered their most
+dainty dish, and with a little salt it is quite palatable, especially if
+not much grit has combined with it in the process of preparation.
+
+The African is fond of his beer, which also is made by the wives. For
+this purpose they use any of the grains grown by them, but they prefer
+kafir corn or millet. This is moistened and put in a warm place until it
+sprouts. It is then ground or stamped and the meal is cooked into a thin
+porridge and put into large earthen pots, where more water is added,
+also the yeast or dregs of a previous brewing. It is then allowed to
+stand in a warm place and ferment, and before drinking it is usually
+strained through a loose bag of their own weaving. The native will tell
+you that their god showed them how to make the beer, and I have no doubt
+but that he did.
+
+It is needless to say that it intoxicates and is the cause of frequent
+brawls and fights among them, and it is not unusual for the missionaries
+to be called upon to help settle some of these disturbances. It is less
+difficult to convince the Africans of the evil effects of its use than
+it is some Europeans. The latter will often tell you that the native
+thrives and works better if allowed his beer. Missionaries are not
+wanting who think it is best not to interfere with their native
+Christians having their beer. Our missionaries, however, have no
+difficulty in inducing the Christians to discard the use of it, and we
+believe the sentiment against it is increasing among the missionaries in
+general. In a native Conference held at Matopo Mission in February,
+1914, the question of native beer came up. Of course all were opposed to
+members drinking it, but the question was in regard to the Christian
+girls, who were minors, assisting in the making of it, since they are
+under the jurisdiction of their heathen parents. The older native
+Christians were in favor of more stringent measures than even the
+missionaries.
+
+In order to show what an enlightened Christian native can and will do if
+he has the power we need only refer to the work of King Khama. He is the
+King of Bechuanaland, the country just west of Southern Rhodesia. His
+father was a heathen king and a sorcerer, but Khama embraced
+Christianity in his youth, and in the midst of most bitter persecutions
+from his own father and others, he stood true. The people finally
+recognizing his ability chose him king in place of his father in 1872.
+Then his difficulties began in another line. If he was to be the chief
+of the country, it must be founded on the principles of the Gospel. All
+imported liquor was prohibited from crossing the border, nor was native
+beer allowed to be made.
+
+[Illustration: Matabele Women Stamping Grain.]
+
+It was a fierce battle with some of the natives themselves, for they
+were not all Christians and did not readily yield. This domestic
+trouble, however, was nothing compared with the battle he had to wage
+with unprincipled white traders and even with government officials, for
+the country was under the protection of England, and they had some voice
+in the management of affairs. But Khama won the day in such a struggle
+as would have dismayed many a stouter heart. According to Mr. J. H.
+Hepburn, Khama wrote to the British Administration as follows: "I dread
+the white man's drink more than the assegais of the Matabele which kill
+men's bodies and is quickly over; but drink puts devils into men and
+destroys their souls and bodies forever. Its wounds never heal. I pray
+your Honor never to ask me to open even a little door to drink." Words
+worthy of a native Christian hero, indeed; a hero that could not be
+bought, that could not be bribed or frightened by the liquor men.
+
+The Government of Rhodesia is rather favorable toward native beer, yet
+we owe it much for prohibiting imported liquor sold to natives within
+its territory. Perhaps (who knows?) Khama's firm stand in his own
+territory may have been an influence in keeping Rhodesian natives from
+securing imported liquor.
+
+Mention was made before that the native way of getting work done is to
+make a quantity of beer and invite their neighbors. They do this in
+digging and preparing the ground for sowing, in weeding, in cultivating,
+and in threshing. While a little beer is given during the work, the
+greater part is kept back until the work is completed, perhaps as an
+inducement for them to persevere unto the end. If then one, in
+evangelistic work, comes upon such a company early in the day, they are
+not much the worse for drink and will often listen attentively.
+
+Once Sister Steigerwald and I came to a place where a large company were
+busy weeding. They had a large garden to weed and did not greatly
+desire to stop for service, but we promised not to keep them long, so
+they gathered under the shade of a tree. On opening our Bible our eye
+fell on the "Parable of the Tares," which seemed quite suitable for the
+occasion. They listened most attentively to the short talk, and as
+illustrations taken from their gardens and work always seemed better
+understood and appreciated, we made use of such entirely in the
+application. After singing and prayer we told them they might return to
+their work. We sat still and watched them awhile, and as they worked and
+pulled out the weeds, we could hear them talking to one another and
+saying, "Yes, the bad things Satan sows in our hearts are just like
+these weeds, and they need to be rooted out or they will destroy us."
+
+On another occasion, one Sunday morning, there were no natives from one
+of the large kraals present at the services, and we felt to pay them a
+visit. Ganukisa and some of the boys accompanying, we went to the place
+in the afternoon to hold service. We always tried to impress upon the
+people that they should not work on Sunday, and many were heeding, so on
+this occasion we were surprised to find about seventy-five of them
+having a digging. As we drew near, they had just finished the work and
+were about to surround the huge beer pots for a "good time." We knew by
+the time they had consumed all that beer they would scarcely be in a
+condition to receive the Gospel. What should we do? We never like to ask
+the natives to do anything unless there is some probability of its
+being carried out, for one is likely to lose influence over them. Could
+they be persuaded to leave their beer pots and let us talk to them
+first? We could not make them do it, but God could, so looking to Him we
+said,
+
+"Leave the beer and come out under the shade of the trees while we talk
+to you."
+
+"Oh, no," they replied, "let us drink the beer first and then we will
+come."
+
+We knew that if they did their drinking first some of them would not
+stay for the service, so again, with somewhat more authority, I repeated
+the request, and at the same time, together with the Christian natives
+who accompanied, moved toward the shade. It was almost more than we
+expected, but the Lord moved upon their hearts to leave the beer
+untouched, and come to listen. The Lord especially anointed some of our
+native Christians for the service and they gave forth the Word with
+power. One of them referred very strongly to their desecration of the
+Sabbath. At first they sought to justify themselves, but as the truth
+was pressed home to them they said they would never do it again. At the
+close a number of the older men for the first time in their lives prayed
+and pleaded for pardon. The old women who had invited them to work
+seemed especially concerned and promised not to repeat it on Sunday.
+
+When they thresh they also invite a lot of their neighbors. They place
+the grain on a large flat rock and then strike it with a straight stick.
+Once I was present when a large number of the Amahole, or subject
+tribes, were threshing. They were decked out with all their ornaments,
+and being divided into two sides were placed opposite to one another,
+like two opposing forces in battle array. Each being armed with his
+threshing stick, they performed a mimic battle with the grain lying on
+the rock between the two lines of battle, each one alternately driving
+the other before it and at the same time beating the grain with their
+sticks. They also sang their war song, of how the Matabele overcame them
+and impaled them alive, and of the dire vengeance they would inflict in
+return. The interlude would be occupied by a sort of ballet dancer among
+them. The whole was exceedingly heathenish, but not uninteresting; and
+as for the grain, a large amount of it was threshed.
+
+While much of the work falls to the women, some of the native men are
+quite diligent in digging in their gardens; but they generally wish to
+sell their grain and secure money to pay taxes for themselves and their
+wives. The women, in addition to growing most of the food that is eaten,
+often help to furnish the tax money. Of course to the raw native dress
+is a negligible quantity.
+
+The people are always generous, and the food in the kraals is shared
+with the strangers. No one needs to go through the country hungry unless
+there is famine, and even then they will often divide the last morsel.
+When the stranger comes among them, they always bid him welcome, and it
+is etiquette to let him remain for at least one day without asking him
+any questions as to his business among them.
+
+Even in respect to continually begging, which is so obnoxious to
+Europeans, the native is not so rude as it would appear. They are not
+slow to ask one another, and they have often surprised me by saying that
+they felt flattered to be asked for articles, as it showed that they had
+something which the other did not have and they had an opportunity to
+help. A native likes to have plenty, but he does not want to have his
+gardens surpass too much those of his neighbors, in productiveness;
+neither does he want his herds to surpass others too much, for fear he
+may be an object of envy to those around him and a victim of malice, or
+be accused of witchcraft.
+
+There always seems to be a great attachment between the mother and her
+children all through life. This does not hinder the big, stout boy,
+however, from lying around and living on the bounty of his hard-working
+mother, and on the other hand the heathen boy will often exert himself
+to aid his mother and pay her hut tax, and she often lives with her son
+when she becomes old.
+
+The native women generally shave their heads with a piece of sharp
+glass. It is a laborious and painful process and needs to be done by an
+expert, but in the end it is well done. The married woman always leaves
+a small tuft of hair on the crown of her head. This is her sign of
+wifehood. The raw native has no means of keeping record of his age, so
+we must always guess at it.
+
+[Illustration: Matabele Women Digging.]
+
+The government is patriarchal and the younger are generally respectful
+to the elders, and all are more or less polite to one another. Their
+very name implies this. The surname is handed down from father to child,
+even the wife retaining that of her father unless she is married by
+Christian marriage. The surname is also the _isibongo_, or thank word.
+By that I mean that it is what they say if they wish to thank for any
+favor. Among themselves they do not say "I thank you" for any favor
+received. Suppose Muza Sibanda would give another one something. The
+recipient on receiving it would say "Sibanda" instead of "I thank you."
+Again, in addressing another, if one wishes to be polite or respectful
+he will use the last, not the first name, or he may say "Father,"
+"Mother," or the like. I at first thought them somewhat rude in not
+thanking properly, but soon found that it was often the result of not
+knowing what to say. One day I gave a piece of bread to a little fellow
+about five years of age. He hesitated, then looking up into my face,
+said, "_Isibongo sako sipi?_" ("What is your thank name?") If a native
+is given anything, all the others present will join in thanking, for a
+favor to one is a favor to all. The mother will often use the thank
+name, or surname, as a term of endearment to her child. After she has a
+child she is no longer known by her name, but if the child is Luju she
+is known as the "mother of Luju."
+
+If one falls or meets with an accident, however slight, all the rest
+will say "_Pepa_" ("Beg pardon"). If one enters the kraal of another, he
+enters the hut and sits down near the door without saying anything.
+Presently he says "_Eh! kuhle_" ("Peace"), about equivalent to saying,
+"Peace be to this house." It is not a salutation, but a polite way of
+announcing his presence. The occupant of the hut then responds by
+saying, "_Eh! sa ku bona_" ("We see you"). In reality, however, it is
+equivalent to saying "How do you do?" to which the other responds.
+
+It is a real treat to hear two old natives conversing together,
+especially if they are unconscious of one's presence. Their gossip may
+not be very elevating, but it is always carried on in a polite and
+interesting manner. The Tebele language is most beautiful and
+expressive, as its liquid syllables roll off the native tongue, and it
+is always most correctly spoken--no errors in grammar among them.
+
+This would not be complete without mention being made of death and
+burial. In burial the various tribes differ somewhat among themselves.
+Among the Matabele, when one dies the friends come and prepare the body
+for burial by placing it in a sitting posture with the knees brought up
+near the face. They clothe it in the garments which it owned, and wrap
+the blanket about it, tying the body firmly in this position with the
+face exposed. It is then left sitting in the hut, together with some of
+the women mourners, while the men go and select a place for burial,
+generally at a little distance from the kraal, unless the deceased
+should be headman. They make the grave more or less circular in form,
+and near the bottom a slight excavation is made in the side for the
+reception of the body.
+
+The body is then placed on a blanket or large hide and carried out to
+the grave, the friends following and mourning. A gourd filled with fresh
+water is brought, and with this a near friend or relative washes the
+face of the dead, at the same time giving it a message to kindly
+remember them to the king and to speak a good word for them. The two men
+standing in the grave receive the body and place it in the excavation
+with the face toward the east. They fasten it in position with stones
+and then fill in the grave with earth. On top of the grave are placed
+stones and the property of the deceased, together with branches of
+trees, perhaps to protect it from the wild beasts, for the grave is
+somewhat shallow.
+
+As children do not have any garments which they can call their own, they
+are often buried without anything being wrapped about the body. Once,
+when a little son of Mapita died, Sister Doner and I went over to the
+burial. The little body was lowered into the grave quite bare and they
+were about to put in the earth. Sister Doner could not stand that, so
+she hastily removed a large apron which she had on and told them to
+wrap that around the little body before throwing in the earth. They did
+so, but no doubt would have preferred keeping it for themselves before
+it had been defiled by coming into contact with the dead body. When
+Kelenki, one of our Christian boys, died in his home, they wanted to
+know what to do with his books, and one of the other Christian boys said
+he thought they had better leave them for the living.
+
+After burial they all go to the river and wash, for death means
+defilement. The women are the chief mourners, and they assemble early in
+the morning, fill the air with their wailing and then return home until
+the following morning. This is often done for four consecutive mornings.
+In the interim the relatives sit about the kraal, quiet and with little
+talking, except to answer the condolences of their friends, who come
+from time to time to sympathize with them. There is no feast, as among
+some natives. In fact, for a time little food is cooked or eaten except
+that brought by neighbors.
+
+Some of the other tribes lay the body down in burial, and often place it
+in the crevices of the rocks. If the deceased is headman of the kraal,
+he is generally buried in the enclosure and often inside his own hut,
+and the people usually remain there for a year and then, after a period
+of worship, the kraal is abandoned. The wives go to be the wives of the
+brother of the deceased, unless they be old, when they usually live with
+a son or daughter.
+
+About fifteen miles from the mission, in the direction of Bulawayo, is
+the grave of the first king, Umzilikazi. It is in a large kopje, between
+some immense boulders. On the top of the grave, or in the immediate
+vicinity--since one cannot point out the exact spot of the body--are
+many wagon loads of rock thrown in to fill up the cavity between the
+boulders. There are also wheels and the remains of broken wagons and
+other property once owned by the king, and probably bought from the
+white men in his emigration from Zululand to this country. I cannot give
+the exact date of this king's death, but it was at least more than fifty
+years ago. As he was considered the god of the Matabele, this grave was
+often no doubt a place of worship by the tribe, but we have no knowledge
+that it has been worshiped in late years. Perhaps it somewhat fell into
+disuse after Umlimo, the god of the Makalanga, was considered so
+powerful.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTEEN
+
+Later Visits
+
+The missionary stands to the native for religion and education, for all
+the help he may get to make his life cleaner, more moral, and more in
+keeping with ideals of the white man at his best.--M. S. Evans.
+
+
+In the year 1910 it was my privilege, on returning from a furlough to
+Natal, to again visit Matopo, after an absence of nearly four years.
+Bishop and Mrs. Steigerwald were at that time in America on furlough,
+and Brother Doner and his wife, who was formerly Sister Sallie Kreider,
+and Sister Mary Heise were in charge of Matopo Mission. When I reached
+Bulawayo I found Brother Doner waiting to convey me to the mission. It
+was indeed a pleasure again to visit the place and to look into the
+faces of those natives who had grown very dear by reason of my long stay
+among them. Here it was my privilege to come into contact, for the first
+time, with raw heathendom, and to have the joy of seeing light enter
+darkened minds and souls born into the Kingdom. So it occupies a tender
+spot which later experiences cannot touch.
+
+There had been improvements made since I had left. Prominent among these
+were two substantial brick buildings, a house for the boys and one for
+the girls, and there were thirty-three boys occupying the one and three
+girls the other. There is a nice little band of believers at this
+place, some of whom I wish especially to mention. First is poor old
+blind Ngiga. Shortly after Elder Engle's death we found him at a kraal,
+destitute and afflicted, with no one seemingly to care for him and give
+him food. We carried or sent food to him for a time, and gave him a
+blanket, and he gradually gained strength. Thinking that exercise would
+do him good, Brother Lehman encouraged him to come to the mission for
+his food, as he was only a short distance away. He had lain for so long
+without exercising his body that at first it was with great difficulty
+that he reached the mission, but being supplied with food, he grew
+stronger and was enabled to walk the distance easily and to help himself
+a little. Some time after Elder Steigerwald came he treated him for his
+disease and built a hut and brought him to the mission to stay, as the
+loathsome disease with which he was afflicted had left him about blind.
+He, however, was converted and has been received into the Church. It is
+a pleasure to hear him now testify to Christ's saving power, and to
+praise the Lord for bringing the missionaries. Truly, the Lord is no
+Respecter of persons.
+
+Again, let us go to Buka's house. My readers will remember Buka, whom
+Sister Heise and I found upon the rocks eleven years before when we went
+in search of little Lomazwana. Yes, it is really he whose life and home
+looked so black to us that day. He moved to within about three miles of
+the mission, and his son Kolisa came to stay at the mission and go to
+school. The father became sick and Brother and Sister Doner visited him
+and ministered unto him. Then they built him a hut and made him more
+comfortable. He finally became a paralytic and unable to help himself,
+so Brother Steigerwald assisted them to get a home on the mission
+premises, and gave them gardens, so that they are now quite comfortable.
+The oldest daughter also accepted Christ, then the mother followed, and
+these two with the son are now members of the Church.
+
+My first Sunday at Matopo, in company with Brother and Sister Doner, I
+visited this home. A smile of recognition at once lighted up the face of
+the invalid father; and though he could not speak, the family
+interpreted the sounds he made. After he had expressed his welcome he
+said that though his body and speech were paralyzed, yet his heart was
+all right. During another visit he tried to explain how Jesus was
+dwelling within, and how glad he was that when he got "over there" he
+would not be sick. One could not help feeling that he had learned to
+know the Lord. Truly, affliction had proved a blessing to him.
+
+[Illustration: Building the Boys' House at Matopo, M. S.]
+
+[Illustration: Boys' Brick House at Matopo Mission.]
+
+There was a good school at Matopo, with Sister Heise and Matshuba as
+teachers. Brother Doners were very busy overseeing this work, as well as
+their own station at Mapani Mission, and they kindly took me to that
+place to see something of the work there. Nyamazana had had charge of
+the mission at Mapani for about six months and was doing good work,
+especially spiritually. He is Spirit-filled and alive to the
+responsibility resting upon him. He had charge of the Inquirers' Class
+and Sunday services, and the natives say that he preaches powerful
+sermons. He has a nice Christian wife, who is a help to him. There is a
+company of earnest believers at this place. Brother Doner erected a
+large brick church and a brick dwelling-house, which added greatly to
+the appearance and comfort of the work, and he deserves much credit for
+the work accomplished alone and single-handed in building.
+
+The first Friday in each month has been set apart by the missionaries in
+Africa as a day of prayer and fasting. On the Prayer Day in May of that
+year we were permitted to meet with the believers at Mapani Mission.
+Over seventy were assembled. They included the members of the Church
+here and those of the Inquirers' Class. We had a most precious waiting
+on the Lord and heard many soul-stirring prayers and testimonies. Many
+seemed to be reaching out for a greater fulness of the Spirit, while
+others were overflowing with the joy of the Lord. The work was most
+encouraging and the members steadfast, and the Lord had been pouring out
+His Spirit upon some of them in a marvelous manner, and our hearts were
+made to rejoice with them.
+
+We also spent a few days visiting some of the people and the schools
+taught by Brethren Nkwidini, Mlobeka, and Nyamazana. All three of these
+teachers were our former pupils and had been converted at Matopo.
+
+Brother and Sister Doner then took me to Mtyabezi Mission, after which
+they returned to Matopo. Mtyabezi is the mission station of Brother and
+Sister Frey, and a little over a year after it was opened Miss
+Elizabeth Engle also came to help in it. This was my first visit at the
+station, and I was made to rejoice at what the Lord was doing at this
+place. The buildings are pleasantly located at the foot of an immense
+kopje, which towers high above them in the background. A neat-looking
+brick church had been erected by Brother Frey, and well-built huts in
+which they were living at the time.
+
+[Illustration: A Native Christian's Home. Matshuba's.]
+
+Sister Frey had been doing the teaching, but at the time of my visit,
+Bunu, one of their pupils and converts, was teaching and doing excellent
+work. On Thursday Sisters Frey and Engle and myself went in the wagon to
+visit some members about eight miles distant, where we met with a warm
+reception among those who were Christians. At one place there was a
+Christian woman about sixty years of age, who seemed so happy in the
+Lord and so eager to make us welcome and comfortable during our stay.
+We were surprised to find in one of the kraals a native dressmaker who
+owned a sewing machine and had all the sewing she could do for her
+dark-skinned neighbors. The sisters have been teaching their girls and
+women to sew.
+
+In the evening about thirty natives, most of whom were believers,
+gathered around our campfire to hold service. We spoke for a time, and
+then a number gave a clear testimony to the saving power of Christ. We
+had to contrast this little company with some other gatherings which we
+have seen and heard in the hours of night in darkest Africa, where beer,
+the dance, licentiousness, and all forms of devil worship made night
+hideous. One can best understand what the Gospel message is doing for
+the people, if he first sees something of paganism.
+
+On Sunday at the mission there was a very impressive time, and when the
+altar call was given a number came forward. There were truly penitent
+hearts, among whom were a number of young men seeking to get right with
+God; also some girls and married people. Here was a woman whose husband
+had two wives, and she was much persecuted at home, but she wanted to
+follow the Lord, and piteously, in the midst of her sobs, she inquired
+what she should do. Then a Magdalene confessed that she had fallen into
+grievous sin, and like the one of old came with bitter tears to the feet
+of Jesus. Another's way was made hard on account of the unfaithfulness
+of her husband, and so on. But the one whose experience seemed the most
+touching was a woman of nearly sixty years. Her married daughter, who
+is a Christian, had been much in prayer for her mother, and so the woman
+came and with utter abandonment, seemingly, threw herself at the feet of
+Jesus, weeping and confessing her sins and saying, "I am a dog. Pick me
+up, Lord."
+
+At the opening of 1913 we were permitted to make another visit to the
+missions in this vicinity. This vacation was to be only a month, and as
+I had in the meantime been cut off from association with white people,
+except those at the mission, I concluded to spend the first few days in
+Bulawayo. The place had grown since we reached it, nearly fifteen years
+before, and although the growth had not been so rapid it was of an
+enduring, steady kind. The place is laid out on broad lines, with broad
+streets and roomy dwellings--no need for skyscrapers here. There are
+many fine, substantial-looking business blocks, and as one goes into the
+suburbs he sees many elegant, well-built dwelling-houses. There are fine
+churches, a good hospital, museum, and library, and two large government
+school buildings, each with a good dormitory attached. One of these is
+for boys and the other, which is on the opposite side of the town, is
+for girls. Here, as in all parts of South Africa, there is some
+industrial work in connection with the schools. Bulawayo has also many
+excellent stores and shops, so that one may purchase almost anything
+required, not only in the line of provisions, household goods, and
+clothing, but all lines of farming implements and many kinds of
+machinery. The heavy wagons, drawn by great rows of oxen, donkeys, and
+mules, are still to be seen, but there are also many dainty one-horse
+traps, as well as two-horse conveyances, and a large number of
+automobiles and motorcycles.
+
+There is attached to the town a large native location, for the heavy
+part of the work as well as the housework is about all done by native
+boys. They are all called "boys." In the eyes of their white employers
+the native seldom becomes a man. He may be an old boy or a young boy, a
+little boy or a big boy, but he is always a boy. On the other hand, in
+the eyes of many Europeans it is almost an insult to speak of their
+children as boys. In the early days one of the missionaries, in speaking
+to an old European lady, said something about her boy. She straightened
+herself proudly and with emphasis said, "My son." At the mission one day
+a native woman was begging very hard for a piece of cloth, and to
+strengthen her request she said, "I am your boy," evidently meaning that
+she belonged to me.
+
+[Illustration: Mtshabezi Church and School.]
+
+[Illustration: Mtshabezi Mission in 1910.]
+
+Although Bulawayo is the largest town in Southern Rhodesia, there are
+others, such as Salisbury, Gwelo, Victoria, and Gwanda, which deserve
+mention. Farmers are scattered throughout the country, especially along
+the high, rolling plain between Bulawayo and Salisbury. There are many
+valuable gold mines and many old gold workings to be found in various
+places. The most noted is Great Zimbabwe, near Victoria. It is said:
+"The ruins cover a large area, and on an eminence are the remains of a
+fortress, the walls of which are thirty feet high and ten feet thick,
+and built of cut stones put together without mortar, so closely-fitting
+that a knife can hardly be inserted between them. Smelting crucibles,
+with gold in them, ingot moulds, and spears have been found." Some think
+that the Sabeans from Arabia worked these about 3,000 years ago. This is
+thought by some to be the "gold of Ophir." Ruins on a smaller scale are
+to be found in various places. Not far from Mapani Mission we saw a
+circular wall made of wedge-shaped stones, nicely fitted together. The
+country is also rich in iron ore, and at Wankie is the great coal-mining
+district. All these places furnish abundant work for all the natives of
+Rhodesia, and are also centers for mission work.
+
+January 1, I was again taken to Motopo Mission, not with the slow,
+patient donkeys of fifteen years ago, but with the swifter mules. Many
+changes have taken place among the natives surrounding the mission since
+1898. On our first entering this valley the natives had just fled and
+hid themselves away in these rocks at the close of the Rebellion. They
+were then very poor, without flocks and herds, and had few gardens, and
+very little of the land had ever been brought under cultivation. Since
+then the natives have gradually come out of their hiding-places and
+settled down to their work. Under the influence of peace and better
+teaching their surroundings have greatly changed. There are more natives
+near the mission than at first, and they have sheep, goats, and cattle,
+and some of them have plows and oxen to draw them, so that they can plow
+their large gardens. Every available place near the mission has been
+brought under cultivation, but not in the old, laborious way with human
+oxen, so that the wives are not the slaves they once were. Of course,
+in the absence of the men at work the women often hold the plow, but
+they have more time to keep house. One of the officials affirms that the
+best way of doing away with polygamy is by introducing civilized ways of
+farming.
+
+The people began by bringing their oxen to Brother Steigerwald to be
+trained, and then he helped them to procure plows, and they still come
+to him for help in trouble. The 3,000-acre farm is far too small for all
+who desire to live near the mission. If he had twice the amount of land
+it would soon become filled with natives, who would thus be near the
+mission and under the influence of the Gospel.
+
+Let us visit some of the houses and see what changes have taken place.
+Here first is the home of Matshuba. As he was first in the fold, he is
+worthy of first notice. He lives in a small, neatly-built brick house,
+with a well-swept yard inclosed by a fence. Inside the house are
+homemade bedsteads, chairs and tables, and here is Matshuba the same as
+of yore. He is older and has fought many battles since that first day
+when, as a little boy, he came and watched the newcomers. He has found
+the conflict severe and almost overpowering at times. It has left some
+scars, but, praise God! he has come off victorious at last, and in a
+more humble spirit he is following the meek and lowly Savior. He is
+Elder Steigerwald's right-hand man and is capable of turning his hand to
+almost any kind of work. He can take the blacksmith tools and mend the
+large three-disc plow; he can make use of the small engine and grind the
+meal for the native food, or do any other kind of work about the place.
+Best of all, he can go out and tell the people about Jesus. He had hoped
+that the elder's many-sided ability might be his, and he seems to have
+had his wish. He could secure much larger pay as an engineer in the
+mines, but he feels that his place is in the Lord's work. May he have
+our prayers that he may always find God's grace sufficient.
+
+[Illustration: Mtshabezi--Baptismal Scene.]
+
+Here too is his wife, Makiwa. She was also educated at Matopo Mission,
+where she learned not only in school, but also in the kitchen and
+sewing-room, that she might know how to take care of her home and
+family. A faithful helpmate she has been to her husband and a blessing
+in the Church. Here are their little boy and girl, whom they are
+bringing up in the fear of the Lord. This old woman, also neatly
+dressed, is Matshuba's mother, long a slave to her old religion, her
+superstitious ideas, her beer and her tobacco. Now she has accepted
+Christ as her Savior and He has cleansed her and she is in the Church.
+And this bright-looking girl is her daughter, Sixpence. She was only
+about four or five years old when we came to Matopo. Now she is a tall,
+fine-looking Christian woman and well taught. She has on a neat-looking
+black dress which, Sister Steigerwald tells me, she cut and sewed
+without any help from the missionaries. Yes, this is a Christian home,
+from which we hope and pray that the evils of heathendom have flown
+forever.
+
+There are others. First is Anyana, long a faithful helper of the
+mission, and his wife, Citiwa, also one of our girls. Then comes Siyaya,
+who had some falls, but he has at last got his feet on the Rock and is
+helping to tell others of Christ. Mahlenhle is also here. He is the same
+faithful boy as of old, one of those who never give their missionary any
+uneasiness. He is always ready and willing to do what he can, which is
+not a little. He teaches, he preaches, and interprets for others, or he
+can go out and handle the oxen and see to the farming. There are also
+many new ones in church and school, several of whom are assisting in
+teaching. There are forty-two boys staying at the mission for school,
+and a number coming to day-school. Sister Heise has plenty to do, for
+she teaches both early morning and midday, and is doing excellent work.
+There are about 150 regular attendants at the Sunday services. The
+majority of them are young men and women and children. Almost all are
+respectably clothed and are seeking to know the Lord. The girls who
+desire to stay at the missionaries' and be trained are now sent to the
+Girls' School at Mtyabezi Mission. There is a large sewing class at this
+place for those who wish to learn. Two new missionaries, Brother Levi
+Steckly and Sister Cora Alvis, are also assisting in the work at Matopo.
+
+I went out among the people, eager to secure a snapshot of a kraal, as
+they formerly were, but I failed. They are all better built and more
+cleanly than formerly. In every village there are some who wear European
+clothing, for even if they have not accepted Christ as their Savior,
+some have put on the garments of civilization. There are, of course,
+many among the older ones who have not changed much, and who have always
+hardened their hearts and stiffened their necks against the truth. This
+has been the condition of the world ever since the Fall, and it will no
+doubt continue until all sin and wickedness shall be put under foot and
+He shall reign in righteousness. If the command had been "Go into all
+the world and make disciples of every creature," missionaries would have
+given up long ago in despair. Miss Carmichael, in her work, "Things as
+They Are in Missionary Work in Southern India," says, "It is required in
+a steward that a man be found faithful. Praise God! it does not say
+'successful.'" The same will apply to missionary work in Africa.
+
+During the year of our visit the rains were unusually late, and, as the
+harvest had been quite light the previous year, some of the people were
+in great need of grain. Brother Steigerwald was doing all in his power
+to get grain out from Bulawayo for them. The six mules were hauling out
+every week to the extent of their strength, for farmers are not allowed
+to take their oxen on the road, for fear disease may spread among the
+cattle. As the wagon returned from Bulawayo with fifteen 200-pound bags
+of grain on it, the people, who had been watching for its return,
+hastened to come to the mission to purchase. Grain was expensive, about
+seven or eight dollars a bag; but as soon as it was unloaded it was
+sold. Their people must have food, and many of the able-bodied natives
+had been away to work and thus procured money, and perhaps a month's
+wages would buy one bag of grain. Others were trying to sell some of the
+cattle and sheep for grain. Although many of these old people who were
+buying had not accepted Christ as their Savior, yet they have absolute
+confidence in His messenger, Elder Steigerwald, and they come to him in
+their difficulties, knowing that he has a kind heart. He is their
+father, as Sister Steigerwald is their mother.
+
+A love feast had been announced for Mtyabezi Mission the middle of
+January, and arrangements had been made for all the white workers and as
+many of the native converts as possible to attend. Mr. Steckly and Mr.
+Hemming went across the hills, twenty-five miles, on foot, and the rest
+of us went by wagon around on the road--a distance of about forty-five
+miles. This road was down through the hills in the direction of Mapani
+Mission. We started on Thursday morning, sleeping out on the veldt
+during the night, and reached Mtyabezi on Friday afternoon.
+
+Brother Freys were at that time in America on furlough, but the work was
+ably carried on by Brother Walter Winger and his wife, formerly Abbie
+Bert, and Sister Elizabeth Engle. This is now known as our Girls'
+School. Twenty-five girls were then staying at the mission, and they are
+being trained in housework and sewing, in addition to school and outside
+work. They are also supplying some of our Christian boys with Christian
+wives, and Christian marriage is taking the place of heathen rites. In
+addition to these there was a good-sized day-school, which was under the
+excellent management of Miss Sadie Book. There were also several large
+out-schools in connection with this mission. A large brick house was
+nearly completed and they were at the same time living in it. This part
+of the country south of the hills was especially suffering from drought
+at this time. Although this was in the middle of what should have been
+the rainy season, yet no rains had fallen, and the entire country was
+bare, not a blade of grass was to be seen, and the grain sown had not
+yet sprouted. Brother Winger was busy with his wagon, getting grain out
+from the station ten miles away to help the people.
+
+This was the first love feast in Southern Rhodesia that I had been
+permitted to attend for nearly seven years, and I had looked eagerly
+forward to this gathering. The joy of seeing the natives assemble for
+the occasion was too deep for words. First to come were some of the
+communicants from Matopo Mission on Friday evening. The sisters were
+walking in front, Indian file, with their blankets and Sunday clothing
+tied up in a bundle and carried on their heads, and Sixpence leading the
+way. Following these were the brethren, with Matshuba bringing up the
+rear. It was now sundown and they had walked twenty-five miles and were
+tired, so they were shown their places for the night, and after eating
+their supper, and prayer, they retired. The next morning early a similar
+crowd came from Mapani Station, fifteen miles distant. A number also
+gathered from the vicinity of Mtyabezi and out-schools on Saturday
+morning. The little church could not hold all and an overflow meeting
+was held on the outside. There were also a number of members who could
+not be present.
+
+Saturday morning was devoted to a short discourse and self-examination
+meeting, followed by testimonies. It was an inspiration to look over the
+crowded house and listen to the earnest testimonies following one after
+another in rapid succession. Often four or five would be on their feet
+at once, and yet there was no confusion or disorder, as each one quietly
+waited for his time to speak. We had to say to ourselves, again and
+again, "What hath God wrought!" We could not avoid contrasting the early
+days of nakedness and midnight heathendom with this enlightened,
+well-dressed company before us. In fact, the contrast was so marked that
+one could scarcely bridge the chasm even in imagination.
+
+[Illustration: Girls at Mtshabezi Mission.]
+
+In the afternoon seventeen from Mtyabezi Mission and its out-schools
+were received into the Church by the right hand of fellowship. On
+account of the drought and lack of water in the streams, the baptism was
+deferred until a later date. There were several others who made
+application, but after examination it was thought that some were not
+ready. On Saturday evening the natives had a meeting of their own and
+were addressed by Myamazana, while the missionaries had an English
+service and were addressed by Bishop Steigerwald.
+
+On Sunday morning we again gathered to observe the ordinance of
+feet-washing and to commemorate the sufferings and death of our Savior.
+There were over 300 natives gathered together, nearly all of whom were
+either members or inquirers. The native communicants were 129 and the
+white ones eleven, making 140 in all, and these assembled in the Church
+while the rest were addressed by Mahlenhle and others on the outside. We
+had now a better opportunity of looking into the faces of those who had
+been received into Church fellowship. As our missionaries are in close
+touch with their people and know pretty well their private lives, we
+knew something of the company before us.
+
+It was indeed an intelligent and respectable-looking company of men and
+women, one to be proud of, if I might use the term. Its respectability
+did not depend so much on the fact that they had thrown off the undress
+of paganism and had donned the garments of civilization. That is not
+necessarily an adjunct of Christianity, nor is it all due to Christian
+influence. While the missionaries have been laboring these years to win
+souls to Christ, many civilizing influences have been at work throughout
+the country, some of which have been previously mentioned. Stores with
+European clothing are to be found everywhere, and many natives discard
+their heathen garb for civilized clothing and yet know absolutely
+nothing of Christ and His power to save. Some of these well-dressed
+natives about the towns have learned far more of the evils of
+civilization than of its virtues, and hide under their new dress an even
+blacker heart than they did under their old pagan exterior. Then too we
+are sorry to say that intelligence in the sense of having been at a
+mission station and learning to read does not necessarily make them
+Christians. Some of these also, to the great sorrow of their teachers,
+have made poor use of their knowledge.
+
+It is because the missionary sees this, and knows only too well the many
+pitfalls before their unwary feet; it is because he realizes, as
+probably no one else does, what it means to these poor souls to be so
+suddenly brought from the dense darkness of heathendom into the glaring
+lights of modern civilization, and how unprepared they are for it all,
+how little they know to shun the evil and choose the good; it is because
+he knows how helpless these are who have suddenly broken loose from
+their old tribal laws and customs--some of which were beneficial--and
+have been cast on the untried sea of strange and bewildering
+surroundings, without any anchor to hold or compass and chart to guide
+them--I say it is because the missionary knows all this and much more
+that he can rejoice over such a crowd of fine-looking, stalwart men and
+women as were gathered there that day to commemorate the sufferings and
+death of our Lord.
+
+He sees in the company before him Christian homes, free from ignorance
+and superstition, free from witchcraft and pagan worship, free from the
+beer, the filth, and degradation of their neighbors. He sees in this
+company, homes free from the licentiousness and vice so common not only
+among their heathen neighbors, but, sad to say, also among some of their
+white ones. The missionary can rejoice that here are men and women who
+have the Anchor in their souls and are standing as beacon lights to
+their heathen neighbors and friends. It means much to them on the one
+hand to break off from their old heathen lives; it means much on the
+other not to be allured by the evils of the white man's civilization and
+the inducements so often thrown out to lead lives of sin. To come out
+from all these and accept Christ as Savior and be true to Him would seem
+to be an almost Herculean task, and much greater than those in Christian
+lands are called upon to perform. But we know that it has been and is
+being accomplished. While one feels to rejoice over these sheep, at the
+same time he bears a heavy heart for those other ones which have been
+devoured by the grievous wolves.
+
+The missionary is about the only force that makes for righteousness
+among the natives, and he would often feel that his task was an
+impossible one did he not continually realize that he is only under
+orders of Him Who is sure in the end to win. Lest some may think that I
+am overestimating some of these things, let me again quote Mr. Evans,
+who is an authority on native affairs from a governmental standpoint. He
+says:
+
+"What is effecting the most profound change in the native is his contact
+with the white man at all points, and this change is proceeding with
+ever-accelerating speed. The fundamental difference between these
+changes and those wrought by the missionaries is that, in the former
+there is little building up of any salutary influence to take the place
+of the old wholesome restraints, whilst in the latter religion and
+morality are inculcated and replace the checks weakened or destroyed."
+
+The work in Southern Rhodesia is by no means completed; it is only
+fairly begun. The natives are just beginning to see the advantages of
+Christian teaching, and are calling more and more loudly for schools,
+and they are eagerly availing themselves of the opportunities afforded.
+There is a large field to work and the time is opportune. Let every one
+of God's children ask himself what his duty and privileges are in taking
+possession of the country for God. Our people should have at least one
+more station of white missionaries here as well as others for native
+workers. Shall we leave to themselves these people, who are emerging
+from centuries of darkness, to the influence of a corrupt civilization?
+Our missionaries are laboring to the extent of their ability and the
+means at their disposal. The work can advance only as it is backed up by
+the people of the homeland, together with their prayers and money.
+Something depends upon you, my reader, whoever you may be. What part
+have you had in the winning of these souls? What part are you going to
+have in those yet unborn into the Kingdom?
+
+
+
+
+PART TWO
+
+
+
+
+MACHA MISSION
+
+"Lo, I am with you always, even unto the end of the world"
+
+                                     --Matt. 28: 20
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE
+
+Bound for the Zambezi
+
+
+Africa is a gigantic and dark continent. In fact, it is several
+continents in one. Although nearly every one seems to know something of
+its immensity, yet very few persons realize it unless they have resided
+for a time in some portion of its vast interior; even then their
+knowledge of it is likely to be quite vague. For centuries travelers of
+various nationalities sought to penetrate it, many of whom perished in
+the effort, while others brought back wonderful stories of peril and
+adventure.
+
+It remained for David Livingstone, however, to unearth the secrets of
+Central Africa and to expose to the gaze of Christendom something of its
+condition and needs. He inspired missionaries to press into the narrow
+opening thus made, and to carry the light of the Gospel to the millions
+bound in chains of darkness and blackest midnight. Messengers have been
+heeding the call and have been kindling fires, one here and another
+there, in the darkness.
+
+In dealing with missionary work in Africa we must continually keep in
+mind the fact that the natives are much scattered. The population cannot
+definitely be ascertained, but it is variously estimated at from 130 to
+150 millions of people. These are scattered over a territory equal in
+area to the United States of America, Europe, India, and China
+combined. In certain portions, such as the Sahara and Kalahari Deserts,
+there are very few natives, while the lower plains and river valleys
+support a large population. These alluvial plains, where nature affords
+an abundance of food with a minimum of labor, offer great inducements to
+the easy-going Africans. Here they settle in large numbers, not greatly
+inconvenienced by the unhealthfulness of the locality. Pampered by the
+amazing prodigality of nature on all sides, so that they need not exert
+themselves much for food, and requiring little clothing in this mild
+temperature, they settle themselves to the enjoyment of their animal
+natures.
+
+The missionary, as he enters these swamps, which are reeking with
+malaria and other death-breeding diseases, takes his life in his hand;
+for Africa has the unenviable reputation of being the "white man's
+graveyard." It is true the medical fraternity are fast solving some of
+the problems which confront everyone entering the country, yet many
+difficulties still lie in the path of the missionaries who desire to
+settle in the more densely populated regions.
+
+In the old days of Dr. Livingstone and his immediate successors, it
+required almost a small fortune to penetrate Central Africa. In addition
+to this the way by wagon or by native carriers was long and tiresome,
+and the traveler was subject to delays by swollen rivers, dying oxen,
+and many other things. He was often in danger of his life by wild
+animals or still wilder men, so that some never reached their desired
+goal. Even after missionaries had succeeded in establishing mission
+stations, they suffered much in health from exposure and lack of
+comfortable homes, and they were obliged to live on the coarse native
+food much of the time, on account of the difficulty in procuring
+supplies, even though they might have had sufficient money to procure
+better food.
+
+At the present day the railroads are eliminating much of this
+difficulty. Their advance is accomplishing more than any other agency in
+opening up the continent to the Gospel. They are extending right into
+the heart of the country, making use of the plateaus on which to build,
+and bringing the necessities of life and even many of its luxuries
+within reach of the white inhabitants.
+
+In the year 1904 the Cape to Cairo Railroad was completed as far as the
+Victoria Falls on the Zambezi River, a distance by rail of 1,642 miles
+from Cape Town. This part of Africa as far as the Zambezi is generally
+known as South Africa. If one examines a map, it is easy to be seen that
+in size it is a very inconspicuous part of the African Continent; but in
+point of modern civilization and twentieth-century methods of doing
+things it compares very favorably with any other country. Especially can
+this be said of the towns and vicinity, but there are yet many natives
+who are without the Gospel. On my return to Africa, in 1905, the
+railroad was being extended north of the Zambezi, the objective point at
+that time being Broken Hill, making a total distance of 2,016 miles from
+Cape Town.
+
+The facts just mentioned had nothing to do with our call to interior
+Africa, for that came before we knew what the actual conditions were and
+before the railroad north of Bulawayo was built. The opening made by
+the railroad, however, had much to do in making the advance practicable
+at this time.
+
+After our return from America we engaged in the work at Matopo and
+Mapani for nearly a year, and continued looking to the Lord to ascertain
+His will as to the time of opening the new work, for we were hoping that
+there would be other missionaries ready to move out. Money was on hand
+for the purpose. This meant something. While I was in America, as the
+needs of pagan Africa were set forth, one after another would slip a
+bill into my hand, saying, "I too want a share in pushing on that work
+into the interior of Africa." What did it all mean--the lack of workers,
+the ready money and the intense longing in my own soul to carry the
+Light to those people? We had now waited a year with no prospects of
+others being ready to go.
+
+[Illustration: Victoria Falls Bridge.]
+
+Brother Steigerwald was sending to America for a large Studebaker wagon,
+and he advised that one also be ordered for the forward move, that both
+might be sent out together. These arrived in May, 1906. Ndhlalambi had
+felt called some time before to carry the Gospel beyond the Zambezi.
+Although he was quite young, he was proving to be a very steadfast and
+useful helper, both at Matopo and at Mapani Mission. When they were
+opening the latter station, Sister Emma Doner wrote to me--as I was in
+America at the time--and said, "Ndhlalambi is such a good helper in
+erecting our buildings, as Levi has been quite sick. Perhaps the Lord is
+preparing him so that he can build for you in Interior Africa." At that
+time, however, I little thought that it would be necessary to rely
+upon him for that work.
+
+The time drew near when a decision must be made, either to move out or
+to postpone the opening of the work for another year, and much time was
+spent out among the rocks alone with Him. From a human standpoint it
+appeared to be a hazardous undertaking to enter such a new country, and
+many obstacles were in the way. I had been invited to spend the year at
+Mapani Mission, and was quite ready to do so, providing that was the
+Lord's will for me. On the other hand, if He desired that the work
+beyond the Zambezi be opened this year, all power is in His hands; it
+would be a small affair for Him to go before and prepare the way. The
+more we looked to Him to ascertain His will the stronger the conviction
+became that the time was at hand. Sister Adda Engle also expressed
+herself as being ready for the work. The rest of the missionaries were
+requested to make the matter a special subject of prayer. They did so,
+and a few felt that an onward move was to be made; but the majority said
+they did not have a clear understanding of the Lord's will in reference
+to it.
+
+It was hoped that Brother Steigerwald might be able to accompany us to
+open up the work; but there were so many lines of work engaging his
+attention at the time that it was impossible for him to leave. He,
+however, fitted out the new wagon with a strong body and a fine large
+tent, 6 x 13 feet over the whole, and as far as possible put everything
+in readiness for the journey.
+
+Our company included, besides Sister Engle and myself, the two native
+Christian boys, Ndhlalambi Moyo and Gomo Sibanda. The latter was going
+chiefly for the manual labor. They were both trustworthy and we knew
+they could be depended upon. It was again the 4th of July when we
+started on this northern journey, just eight years from the day on which
+we had left Bulawayo for Matopo. Brother and Sister Steigerwald and
+Sister Frey accompanied us as far as Bulawayo, expecting to aid us in
+purchasing supplies and to assist us in getting started north. Mr.
+Jackson, the English magistrate at Fort Usher, gave us letters of
+introduction to the Civil Commissioner and the Administrator of Northern
+Rhodesia, as the country north of the Zambezi is called.
+
+Unfortunately it was found, on reaching Bulawayo, that much of the
+business could not be attended to that week on account of holidays, so
+that our friends were obliged to return to their station. The Monday
+following was a busy and trying day on account of the many things to be
+attended to and the long distances to be traversed. We wished to
+purchase supplies for the greater part of the year, for we knew not what
+awaited us and where the next would come from; and it was also necessary
+that all the goods be sent on the same train on which we went.
+Everything was finally accomplished, and July 10, 1906, found all our
+supplies, about 2,800 pounds in weight, and the wagon, on the train
+bound for Victoria Falls.
+
+As Sister Engle and I entered our compartment on the train and began to
+move northward, many conflicting emotions stirred within us, and it was
+with much trembling and looking to the Lord that we went forward. We
+knew not what opposition confronted us; for we had been informed by
+those who knew something of the country that the officials might not
+allow us to proceed farther than the Zambezi River. Only the
+consciousness that we were under Divine orders gave courage to proceed.
+We had the promise, "Commit thy way unto the Lord; trust also in Him and
+He shall bring it to pass," and we were resting in it.
+
+The journey of 280 miles to Victoria Falls is through new territory.
+There were no towns--nothing but small station houses--and the country
+is wild and in some places quite jungly-looking and infested by numerous
+wild animals. At Wankie we passed through the region of the coal-mining
+district, where there is a large vein of coal which is a most valuable
+adjunct of the railroad. Victoria Falls was at that time the terminus of
+the government-owned railroads, and the limit to which regular trains
+ran; and we could not avoid wondering what was awaiting us beyond that.
+
+As we stepped off the train at Victoria Falls a gentleman approached us,
+and introducing himself as a forwarding agent, inquired if he could be
+of any assistance to us. He inquired if we were not from Matopo Mission,
+and at the same time stated that he had met Mr. Steigerwald in Bulawayo.
+What a surprise and relief it was to us, for he seemed to be God's
+especial messenger, sent to help us on the way. When he learned of the
+situation he at once set our minds at rest by the assurance that he
+would attend to everything and see that the goods and wagon, as well as
+ourselves, were safely taken across the Zambezi River to the town of
+Livingstone, seven miles on the other side. The railroad at this time
+was completed to Broken Hill, 374 miles farther north, but trains were
+run only occasionally. We were obliged to wait at this place two days
+before an engine could be procured to take us over to Livingstone.
+
+[Illustration: Main View of Victoria Falls, 1-1/4 Miles wide.]
+
+An opportunity was thus afforded of viewing that magnificent sight,
+Victoria Falls, which was discovered by David Livingstone in 1855, but
+of which little was known until comparatively late years. This
+surpassingly grand bit of scenery is considered by some people to
+outrival that pride of all Americans, Niagara Falls. In dimensions, at
+least, it certainly does surpass the American wonder. The Zambezi is
+1,936 yards wide where it takes its mighty plunge of 400 feet into a
+vast chasm below, only to be turned into clouds of spray again and rise
+perhaps a thousand feet into the air. Rainbows play about it, forming a
+scene of wonderful beauty and grandeur. The rock over which the river
+flows has a gigantic V-shaped crack about 300 feet wide, into which
+chasm the water plunges. The opposite wall is unbroken, save at one
+place where it forms a gorge 300 feet wide, through which narrow channel
+all the water of the falls, over a mile wide, escapes. Along this
+opposite wall of rock is "Rain Forest," so called because it is always
+dripping and, needless to say, the vegetation here is most luxuriant.
+Six hundred and sixty feet below the gorge is a railroad bridge, 650
+feet long and 420 feet above the water, the central span being 500 feet.
+The view of these falls greatly changes at different seasons of the
+year. To see them at the height of their magnificence, one should visit
+them at the close of the rainy season in April, as at that time the
+volume of water is much greater. At the close of the dry season, in
+October or November, when the water is shallow, the Falls are often much
+broken in some places. As this is one of the greatest of the sights of
+South Africa, thousands of tourists visit the scene, and a hotel had
+been erected near the railroad at this place.
+
+Our agent informed us that on July 13 an engine would come and transfer
+ourselves, together with the goods and wagon, to the Livingstone station
+on the north side. For this purpose the wagon and goods were loaded on
+an open truck, and as there was no passenger car, we too climbed up into
+the wagon, on the truck, and in this manner crossed the Zambezi on that
+railroad bridge, 420 feet high. At Livingstone the car was met by
+another agent who, with his boys, assisted by ours, unloaded the car and
+placed the wagon under the shade of a tree. Here it was fitted up as a
+dwelling-place for Sister Engle and myself for the remainder of the
+journey. It was a home on wheels. We praised the Lord that He had cared
+for us this far on our journey and permitted our feet to be planted on
+the north side of the river. Oxen could not be taken beyond the Zambezi
+for fear of carrying disease, so it was necessary that some be purchased
+before we proceeded farther.
+
+This part of the country, like Southern Rhodesia, is under control of
+the British Charter Company, but with a separate government. Unlike
+that, it does not belong to the English by right of conquest, but
+through concessions granted by Lewanika, the King of Barotseland, and
+paramount chief of the country, for the purpose of exploration and
+development. The country is occupied by three main tribes--the Barotse,
+living along the Upper Zambezi and west of Victoria Falls; the Baila, or
+Mashukulumbwe, as they are often called, living along the Kafue River
+and north, and the Batonga, on the plateau between the Kafue and Zambezi
+Rivers and east.
+
+Those familiar with his life will remember that this is part of the
+country explored by Dr. Livingstone during his first and second great
+missionary journeys through Central Africa, from 1853 to about 1860. The
+Barotse at that time were subject to the Makololo, who had emigrated
+from Basutoland and settled along the Upper Zambezi. The Makololo
+warriors were also responsible for the death of the first party of
+missionaries to this part of the country. I refer to the expedition
+under Price and Helmore, sent out in 1859 in response to Dr.
+Livingstone's urgent call. Nearly all of this party of missionaries died
+from poison administered by these natives, to the great sorrow of the
+African explorer. His memorable prophecy, "God will require the blood of
+His servants at the hands of you Makololo," was soon fulfilled. It is
+said that just four years afterwards the Barotse arose against their
+rulers, the Makololo, and slew them and asserted their independence.
+
+It was in this part of Africa too that Livingstone first saw some of the
+evils of the slave trade, and in 1873 he wrote to Mr. Gordon Bennett:
+"When I dropped among the Makololo and others in this central region, I
+saw a fair prospect for the regeneration of Africa. More could have been
+done in the Makololo country [which is today known as Barotseland] than
+was done by St. Patrick in Ireland, but I did not know that I was
+surrounded by the Portuguese slave trade; a barrier to all
+improvement.... All I can say in my loneliness is, may Heaven's richest
+blessing come down on every one, American, Englishman, Turk, who will
+help to heal this open sore of the world." A very remarkable
+circumstance connected with this utterance is that he evidently did not
+imagine at that time that the healing was to come first from yet another
+country, France. Just six years (in 1879) after those memorable words
+were uttered, Rev. F. Coillard settled in Barotseland. He and his heroic
+wife deserve of all people in this part of the country to be called
+Livingstone's successors.
+
+These natives could speak the Suto language, and as the Scriptures had
+been translated into that language for years, those books could be used
+here among the Barotse, just as Zulu could be used in Matabeleland. In
+the opening up of that work, Christian natives from Basutoland, a
+thousand miles farther south, volunteered to accompany Coillard. It is
+said, "Just on the border of Barotseland one of these native
+evangelists, Eleazer, died. 'God be blessed,' he exclaimed, when he knew
+that he must give up his heart's desire of preaching Christ to the
+Barotse, 'God be blessed! the door is open. My grave will be a finger
+post of the mission,'" as quoted by James Steward. So that it may be
+seen that consecrated Africans also did their part in helping to heal
+this sore. Coillard and his successors have ever since carried on a most
+far-reaching work in Barotseland. About twenty years after the work was
+opened, Brother Engle had the great pleasure of accidentally meeting
+this venerable messenger of the Cross, Mr. Coillard, in a store in
+Bulawayo. His hair then was white, but he was as intensely interested as
+ever in his work, and was in a hurry to be back to his field of labor.
+As, at that time, there was no railroad farther than Bulawayo, he had to
+travel about 300 miles by ox-wagon and then by boat on the river. The
+labors of the missionaries and the advantages of good government have
+accomplished marvelous results in bringing peace and safety to this
+valley, yet even at this late date there are not wanting those who, if
+they dared, would rejoice to resurrect the old slave trade.
+
+Among the Baila tribe the Primitive Methodists of England, after
+encountering many difficulties along the way, had begun a work in 1893
+at Nkala, and a few years later at Nanzela. In 1905 they also opened one
+at Nambala, about seventy-five miles north of the Kafue. Although they
+were doing excellent work, they had as yet been able to reach only a
+small portion of the Baila tribe when we appeared on the scene. There
+were no missionaries among the Batonga tribe living on the plateau
+between the Zambezi and Kafue Rivers, until 1915, when a mission was
+opened about 175 miles northeast of Livingstone by Mr. Anderson, of the
+Seventh Day Adventist Mission. This was just one year before we reached
+the country. Livingstone in his journey had passed through much of this
+country, including Kalomo, Monze Tete, and the Kafue River.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO
+
+From the Zambezi River to Macha
+
+
+The town, Livingstone, was, in 1906, quite small, and consisted chiefly
+of government buildings, postoffice, native stores, railway station, and
+shops. Some of these buildings, especially those owned by the
+government, were well made and ant-proof. The town was at a short
+distance from the railway station and seemed to have been built on a
+hill of yellow sand, which sand was so deep that walking seemed almost
+impossible, and riding was very little improvement over walking.
+
+Our first step was to call on the Commissioner, Mr. Sykes, and present
+the letter of introduction. He met us in a friendly and accommodating
+spirit, but gave no encouragement to proceed on into the interior, owing
+to the newness of the country and the unsettled condition of the natives
+in some places. His version of the work accomplished by missionaries was
+not very flattering, but that did not deter us in the least, as one
+generally becomes accustomed to hearing such things. He, however, did
+not offer to throw any obstacles in the way of our progress, but stated
+that it would be necessary for us to have an interview with the
+Administrator (governor) at Kalomo, the capital of North Rhodesia. He
+expressed his willingness to do whatever lay in his power to aid us in
+the undertaking, and advised that the purchasing of trained oxen for
+drawing the wagon be left in his hands, and he would see to it that good
+ones at a fair price were secured. This generous offer was most
+gratefully accepted. We were also invited to his home, and were most
+hospitably entertained by his estimable wife and his sister, and were
+made to feel that as yet we were not beyond the reach of civilization.
+They were living in a well-built mosquito-proof dwelling, which had been
+made in England and sent out ready to be put together.
+
+The next day a European brought to our tent ten trained oxen, with a
+note from Mr. Sykes, that he had proved these and found them
+satisfactory. The price too was below what had been expected. Thus
+equipped we were prepared to proceed to Kalomo, a distance by wagon road
+of nearly one hundred miles. A boy was employed to lead the oxen and a
+native government messenger was also sent along as guide. Gomo was to do
+the driving, but the man of whom the oxen had been purchased said he did
+not think the boy knew much about driving oxen, and so it proved later.
+There were occasional passenger trains running north through Kalomo, and
+some of the people at Livingstone had advised us to take the train that
+far and let the boys bring the wagon. Others, however, thought it best
+for us to stay by the wagon and supplies, as there was no suitable hotel
+at Kalomo, and it would be over a week before the wagon could reach that
+place, so we decided to remain with our supplies.
+
+The wagon was heavily laden, the roads were rough, and rivers
+bridgeless. About ten miles out from Livingstone, in going over a piece
+of rocky road, the reach of the wagon broke and further progress was
+impossible. Had the drivers been accustomed to this wild country, and
+the accidents incidental to it, they might soon have made another reach
+with timber from the forest surrounding us, as they often did in later
+years. At that time, however, we were helpless. What was to be done?
+There was only one course open, and that was to take the wagon back to
+Livingstone and have it mended. Some of the party remained with the
+wagon and supplies and the rest of us walked back to Livingstone to see
+what could be done. The question wanted to force itself upon us, Were we
+after all mistaken as to the Lord's leadings?
+
+Mr. Sykes was again the Good Samaritan, when he heard our story. The
+next morning he sent out conveyances to bring all back to Livingstone,
+and he and Mrs. Sykes insisted on our occupying the guest house until
+our wagon was repaired. There were no hotels in the place, and we were
+informed that prospectors and others often made use of the government
+house for an indefinite length of time. They said they were glad the
+accident had not occurred forty or fifty miles out, beyond the reach of
+help. We too felt deeply thankful that it had been no worse, and in a
+short time we were made to rejoice that there had been an accident; for
+it was soon evident that it was a blessing in disguise, and God had
+permitted it for a purpose. There were two roads to Kalomo, and neither
+was much traveled at the time. We learned that the one on which our
+guide was taking us was not well supplied with water, was infested with
+many savage beasts and the tsetse fly, which kills oxen, so that it was
+altogether unsafe for the journey.
+
+While we were waiting at Livingstone this second time, a great deal of
+information was gleaned in reference to the people and country north of
+Kalomo, called the Mapanza Sub-district. We learned that the people
+there were quiet and peaceable and that there were no missionaries in
+that section of the country. We also met a gentleman from Kalomo, who
+proved of assistance when we at last reached that place. Again
+information was received that a number of wagons under Mr. King were
+proceeding north to within a short distance of Kalomo, and if we could
+travel in their company, all difficulties in regard to the route, the
+finding of water for the oxen, and dangers along the way would be at an
+end. A driver accustomed to the country was also secured to take the
+wagon as far as Kalomo. Thus equipped we again started. As we left
+Livingstone, Mr. Sykes exclaimed, "I feel more in favor now of your
+going on than I did the first time."
+
+On the first day out our wagon came up with Mr. King's company, which
+consisted of five large wagons, all heavily laden with goods and each
+drawn by eighteen oxen. They were traveling north to within twenty-five
+miles of Kalomo, and thence west and north to Tanganyika. We might have
+delayed a year and not have found so good an opportunity of traveling by
+wagon to Kalomo. We followed this train of wagons and had no anxious
+thought in reference to the journey. Traveling by ox-wagons is done
+chiefly at night, or from very early morning until 9 A. M. Then the oxen
+are outspanned and allowed to graze and rest during the heat of the day,
+while the travelers cook, eat, and rest. Late in the afternoon the oxen
+are again inspanned and they travel until about 9 or 10 P. M., when they
+stop for the night. One or two large fires of logs are built at each
+wagon and kept burning through the night to ward off wild beasts from
+the oxen. Animals are afraid of the fire; especially do lions love
+darkness rather than light, their favorite nights for prowling being the
+dark, rainy ones. This king of beasts, although the strongest, is by no
+means the bravest. He does his loudest roaring in the midst of his
+native haunts, far away from harm, and when near his prey, human or
+otherwise, his tread is most stealthy and catlike.
+
+Before retiring for the night the natives, especially, cook and eat.
+They often do with a small portion of food during the day, but before
+retiring they like an abundance of good porridge and meat. They then
+retire to rest, their favorite place being around the huge campfires.
+Sister Engle and I were very comfortably situated in the tent of the
+wagon. Two other difficulties likely to meet travelers in this part of
+the country are scarcity of water and the tsetse fly. If the latter is
+met with it is necessary to make the journey through the infested
+district entirely by night. Since the uninitiated are not familiar with
+the location of these districts, the oxen are often bitten without their
+knowledge, and death is certain, for as yet no remedy for the bite has
+been discovered. As for water, that is one of the great difficulties on
+these African plateaus, and at one time we were obliged to travel
+seventeen miles without seeing any. Since oxen, with heavily-laden
+wagons, travel slowly, this required the oxen to be inspanned three
+times before water was reached. Mr. King rode a horse and went in
+advance to look for water and camping places, and also for game, which
+generally furnishes a large proportion of the food, both for white
+people and black ones on such trips. We ourselves would be favored with
+a piece of delicious venison after such excursions. Water in casks was
+carried along from one watering place to another for cooking and
+drinking purposes, but it is never drunk without being boiled or made
+into tea, and even then it is often very muddy-looking.
+
+Mr. King was familiar with the country, and had formerly traded with the
+people in the vicinity of Macha, north of Kalomo, so that he could
+furnish all necessary information about the Mapanza district, to which
+we desired to go. This was the first time we heard the name of the place
+which was destined to be the future mission station. The information
+received from him proved invaluable later on, when the question of
+location was being considered. As the way thus opened, step by step, we
+were continually made to feel that the Lord was guiding and causing all
+things to work together for good toward the opening of the work, and our
+hearts were filled with gratitude for His many favors.
+
+The last forty miles of the journey were made alone, as we did not care
+to travel on Sunday, and the other wagons were soon to leave and
+proceed westward. We reached Kalomo August 1, after a journey of nine
+days. This place, although the chief seat of government, could not be
+designated a town. It was rather a scattered camp, containing two small
+stores, a postoffice, and the dwellings and offices of the government
+officials. The railway station was about three miles distant. Here the
+fate of the undertaking was to be decided, as to whether we should be
+permitted to proceed or be turned back. That morning in worship the Lord
+gave us Isaiah 41: 10 for a promise, which greatly encouraged our
+trembling hearts. We had now been absent from Bulawayo four weeks and
+had received no mail, as it had been ordered sent to this place; so the
+first journey was to the postoffice. I went for the mail alone, and
+inquired first for myself. The clerk exclaimed, "And Miss Engle, too?"
+and handed out a bundle of letters, all carefully laid together in a
+place by themselves. Evidently we were expected, and visitors were not
+common, especially women.
+
+It was necessary first to meet the secretary of the Lands' Department,
+so in the afternoon Sister Engle and I proceeded to his office. He had
+heard of our coming and absolutely refused a place in Mapanza district
+on which we might locate. His reasons were more or less plausible, and
+we were not wholly unprepared for his answer. We learned afterwards that
+we were not the only persons who had failed to receive encouragement
+from this gentleman. He added, however, that they could not hinder our
+proceeding farther if we felt so inclined. He suggested our going to
+Broken Hill, the terminus of the railroad, 280 miles northeast, as
+there were some white inhabitants there. That no doubt would have been a
+good opening for a mission station, as there were no missionaries there
+at this time, and only one between Kalomo and that place. It did not,
+however, seem to be the Lord's will for us to proceed that far, and
+since there would be a new set of officials there to deal with, our
+reception might not be any better. After sending our letter of
+introduction to the Administrator, we turned toward the wagon to
+consider and pray over the affair, realizing that a more perplexing
+problem than a broken wagon was facing us.
+
+We had not proceeded far when a gentleman came to inform us that the
+Administrator, who is the highest official in the country, requested an
+interview. We were kindly received by the honorable gentleman and given
+an opportunity of explaining in what part of the country we desired to
+open a mission station, and the condition of the natives in that
+section. He said that he saw no serious difficulty in the way, and that
+he was in favor of allowing us to proceed and select a mission site. He
+affirmed, however, that the unhealthfulness of the climate was the most
+serious obstacle; and, since it was late in the season for us to put up
+a mosquito-proof dwelling before the rainy and unhealthy season came, he
+thought it best for us to select a place and then go south until the
+rains were over. Otherwise we might be stricken with fever, a deadly
+type of which, known as black water fever, is common in this section of
+the country. We promised to consider seriously his advice, if a proper
+dwelling could not be secured before the rains came. He then directed
+us to the civil commissioner of that district, who especially encouraged
+the undertaking, expressing his belief that we would encounter no
+difficulty among the natives, since he was familiar with and had
+jurisdiction of Mapanza district. He said, "The field is before you, and
+as there are no other missionaries there, it is yours to occupy." He
+also gave a letter to the magistrate at Mapanza and a native messenger
+to show us the way.
+
+It was with thankfulness too deep for words that we returned to the
+wagon. God was again verifying His wonderful promises. Praise His Holy
+Name! Part of our freight had been sent to Kalomo by train, so after
+procuring that from the station, we proceeded north about sixty miles
+through Macha and other places to the camp of the official at Mapanza.
+When about half the distance was traversed we unexpectedly came upon a
+Dutch family living there all alone in the wilds. They had not been
+there long and were not permanent settlers, but we managed to purchase
+from them some fine imported chickens and some banana sprouts, all of
+which have proved to be a most useful addition to our mission property.
+
+The natives were much scattered in a portion of the country through
+which we passed until we approached the vicinity of Macha. Here they
+were much more thickly settled, and also from this on to the camp at
+Mapanza. At the latter place the official was not at home. While waiting
+for him we concluded to visit some of the natives and went to the
+village of one of the most prominent chiefs of this district, Mapanza
+by name. There were thirty-five huts in the village. In the center of
+this was a large cattle pen, and around it and the outside of the
+palisade the huts were built in a circle, all opening toward the center.
+As we entered this enclosure we were greeted with clapping of hands on
+all sides. This is the native way of saluting their king and government
+officials and sometimes other white people. In this instance the
+uniformed government messenger accompanied us, and no doubt gave
+prestige to our visit. The people of the village received us in a
+friendly manner, but since their language was unintelligible to us we
+soon returned to the wagon.
+
+The time of the official's return was uncertain and we preferred not to
+locate in the immediate vicinity of the camp, so it was thought
+advisable to return a short distance and select a mission site. Some of
+the rivers through which we had safely come proved more difficult on the
+return journey. Gomo had been driving since we left Kalomo and did
+excellent work; but he found the Myeki River here at the camp very
+difficult to cross. There are long, steep hills on either side of the
+river, and in addition to this the bed of the bridgeless stream is quite
+deep. Our oxen had done splendid work on the long journey from
+Livingstone, but in recrossing this river they seemed unequal to the
+effort. After struggling awhile one finally lay down and refused to
+move. This was a new experience for us, but perhaps not for the boys.
+Gomo used every inducement to make it rise, but to no avail. To our
+amusement he finally, as a last resort, bit its tail. It was up in an
+instant and the wagon moved on. We have since learned that oxen are
+often more stubborn than that one, especially new ones. They sometimes
+lie down and nothing will induce them to move. They will endure fire and
+even death itself.
+
+We drove back and carefully looked over the various locations, and after
+asking the Lord for direction, we finally decided upon our present site
+on the bank of the Macha River, or rather on the hill above it. The tent
+was removed from the wagon and placed on poles and prepared for
+occupancy. This place is about fourteen miles from the camp at Mapanza,
+and was reached August 17, a little over six weeks from the time we left
+Matopo Mission. We had traveled in all about 485 miles, about 170 of
+which was by ox-wagon. Our journal of the time records:
+
+"In all the Lord has wonderfully given us health and strength, and no
+harm of wild beasts or wilder men has befallen us. The journey had been
+far more successful in every way than we had anticipated, and we praise
+the Lord that at last we are settled."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE
+
+The Opening of the Work at Macha
+
+
+In selecting a location for the mission, the desire was to secure a
+place sufficiently high so as to be at a distance from the low swamps,
+breeding malaria and other deadly diseases, and yet near enough to the
+river so as to have access to water. We desired also to have land in the
+vicinity suitable for agriculture and industrial purposes in general,
+and for the growing of fruit and vegetables. Then again, in addition to
+the above requirements, the object of our coming to the country was not
+to be lost sight of; _i. e._, the natives themselves. We desired to have
+easy access to them so that they might receive the Gospel. All of these
+requirements were prayerfully considered and we believe met in the
+location of Macha. As eight years have passed since then, our
+convictions have only been strengthened that it was the Lord's choice
+for the work.
+
+As near as can be estimated the location is about 16-1/2 deg. south latitude
+and 27 deg. east longitude, and is about 4,500 feet above sea level, so
+that, although it is within the tropics, the altitude causes the climate
+to be pleasant the greater portion of the year and as healthful a site
+as can be secured in that section of the country. Along one side of the
+3,000-acre mission farm is a small river, which gives name to the
+locality, and the tent was pitched over half a mile from this river.
+The place afforded excellent facilities for agriculture and fruit
+growing. Especially can bananas and citrus trees be grown without
+irrigation. The country is rolling and there are numerous rich valleys
+capable of supporting many natives. There are wagon roads which have
+been made by traders who go through the country and buy grain of the
+natives in exchange for cloth, ornaments, blankets, and clothing. There
+were no surveyed farms in this vicinity, and the only farmers near lived
+over twenty miles from Macha, but numerous villages of natives are
+within walking distance and wagon road.
+
+At the opening of Macha Mission there was a station of Primitive
+Methodists northwest at a distance of at least sixty miles, and the one
+of the Seventh Day Adventist Mission at about the same distance
+northeast. With the exception of these two places one might go a hundred
+miles in any other direction and not find a mission station, so that we
+could certainly feel that we were not intruding into the territory of
+any other missionaries. The natives in this part of the country had
+heard absolutely nothing of Christ, and they knew not what missionaries
+were or how they differed from other people.
+
+Our little tent, 6 x 13 feet, was sufficiently commodious for eating and
+sleeping, but all the work had to be performed on the outside in the
+shade of a large tree, near which the tent had been placed. Beneath this
+tree also our supplies were piled off the ground and away from the
+destructive white ants, of which the ground was everywhere full. We had
+no cookstove then, and all our cooking was done over an open fire,
+while bread was baked in a large, flat-bottomed iron pot with long legs.
+This was placed over a bed of live coals, while coals were also placed
+on the iron cover. Some very good yeast bread came from that iron pot,
+novel perhaps to Americans, but familiar to Africanders. Many people
+traveling through the country made use of the ant hills as bake-ovens.
+
+The Christian boys who accompanied us, as well as some younger ones who
+came for work, camped at a short distance from the tent, and at night
+slept around the fire until huts could be built for them. Before the
+mission site had been agreed upon two young boys came and asked for
+work. We took them, and one of these has been one of our most faithful
+helpers. As grain was plentiful in the neighborhood there was no
+difficulty in securing food for the natives. Many of the older people,
+men and women, came to see and welcome us. Every effort was put forth
+toward erecting buildings before the rains came on, but as fires had
+swept over the country and destroyed most of the grass, it was evident
+that our chief difficulty would be in procuring thatching grass. This
+difficulty was obviated by a man at Mapanza, who was erecting a house
+for the commissioner, offering us for a small sum a lot of grass that he
+had on hand. Some time later our journal is as follows:
+
+     These have been busy days; much work has been crowded into them.
+     Building and making furniture have occupied the attention of all of
+     us, and everything has had to be done with native material and few
+     tools, which have increased the amount of labor. The poles had to
+     be hauled
+     five or six miles and some of the grass for thatching was brought
+     fourteen miles. Ndhlalambi has been a faithful and excellent
+     workman. He is not as quick as some, but few natives would have
+     succeeded in making better buildings, as he is careful and
+     painstaking in all he does. Gomo is just the opposite; he is just
+     as willing, but is no builder. He has, however, been very useful in
+     hauling poles and grass, and mud for plastering, and he performed a
+     splendid service in venturing among the Baila (a warlike tribe
+     north of us) and purchasing for us two cows. Sister Engle and I
+     have been bending all our energies toward helping with the building
+     in the more technical parts, so that the work might be accomplished
+     as soon as possible, and we have been spending some of our time in
+     making furniture. There has been no difficulty in securing natives
+     to work for us, and they have all worked faithfully under
+     Ndhlalambi's supervision.
+
+     There seems to be nothing to mar the work and location thus far,
+     except the savage beasts, which prowl around at night, a terror to the
+     domestic animals and to ourselves. When we pray, "Keep us from harm
+     and danger," it is a more genuine prayer than formerly. Many nights
+     the howls of the wolves and hyenas are to be heard, and one night some
+     of the boys awoke to see in the firelight the eyes of a hyena glaring
+     at them. Some of the natives built a high, strong pen for our cattle,
+     and the first night they were enclosed in it a lion tried to force its
+     way in, as indicated by the spoors the next morning. Leopards have
+     also been seen. These evidences, as well as the stories told by
+     others, convince us that there are wild beasts in the neighborhood,
+     yet the Lord is able to keep and has thus far kept us from harm.
+
+The 91st Psalm was very precious in those days.
+
+These first buildings were constructed in a manner very similar to those
+at Matopo Mission, except that it was thought advisable to build the
+main part of the house all in one, so as to obviate the necessity of
+going outside in passing from one room to another--a very important
+consideration in such a wild country. The scarcity of grass limited the
+size of the house to a certain extent. It was 26 x 14 feet, with a
+veranda around three sides to protect from the sun and rain, and was
+divided into three small compartments opening into one another, the
+small doorways being closed by curtains. As there was no seasoned lumber
+to be had, there was only one outside door, and this was made from one
+of the boxes in which the goods had been packed. A table was
+manufactured from another box, and the bedsteads, as well as nearly all
+the rest of the furniture, were manufactured from native unseasoned
+timber and draped with calico. A muslin ceiling was a necessity to
+prevent the sawdust from falling from the rafters.
+
+On the inside of the house the walls were carefully plastered up against
+the thatched roof, and the openings for windows were closed by fine wire
+gauze netting to exclude mosquitoes. An important question was how to
+make a screen door for the only outside door of the building, as
+unseasoned timber would not answer the purpose. The pole of the wagon
+had been broken soon after our arrival at Macha, and one from the forest
+put in its place; and since this broken piece of timber was of hardwood
+and sufficiently long for a door frame, we decided to make use of it for
+that purpose. It was sawed and with considerable labor made into a frame
+and proved quite satisfactory. Sister Engle, who was always patient and
+painstaking in her work and full of resources, deserves much credit for
+this and many other things with which the house was equipped. That
+screen door is still doing excellent service after a lapse of eight
+years. After it was finished it was found that to fit it into the door
+frame so as to make it mosquito proof was no small task. The door frame
+had been manufactured from unseasoned native timber and was greatly
+warped. After much chiseling and shaping even this feat was
+accomplished, and the result was a mosquito-proof house, for that season
+at least. Mosquito nets for the beds had also been brought along.
+
+A small kitchen was also built and a hut for the native brethren before
+the rains came. The grass, stumps, and underbrush were cleared off all
+around the buildings and at some distance from them. This is customary
+in this part of the country, and it is done for the purpose of removing
+the hiding places of mosquitoes, snakes, and the like. Although more
+natives were employed the first few months at Macha than at Matopo, we
+experienced no difficulty in dealing with them; perhaps because we were
+more familiar with their character, and our native Christians too were
+quite capable of understanding them.
+
+During the progress of the work, the advice of the Administrator had not
+been forgotten, as it was our earnest desire to do that which was best,
+and we looked to the Lord for guidance. It seemed advisable to remain.
+Contrary to his expectations, a mosquito-proof dwelling-house had been
+constructed, and the work which was started would certainly have
+suffered if we had gone away. The boys who had accompanied us were in
+every respect proving themselves capable and reliant; the natives were
+quiet and respectful; and not the least difficulty in the way of our
+return was the long, dangerous trip to Kalomo to reach the railroad. We
+had safely come that way once, yet we dreaded the long trip back,
+perhaps because we did not believe that it was the Lord's will for us to
+make it. The post was brought to our door by the government messenger as
+he passed on his way to Mapanza, and a trader near offered to bring out
+from Kalomo any needed supplies.
+
+All our needs thus far were abundantly supplied by a loving Father. All
+praise to Him Who "is able to do exceeding abundantly above all that we
+ask or think." Even in our most sanguine expectations before coming to
+the country we had not thought to be so well provided for. He in His
+infinite wisdom and forethought had gone before and prepared every step
+of the way; He had opened every door and enabled the mission to be thus
+planted in raw heathendom where Christ had not been named. The location
+proven by years of trial could not have been improved, for He makes no
+mistakes. The call and the desire for the extension of His Kingdom,
+which He had put into our hearts before ever Africa was reached, was
+thus being fulfilled. He had done and was doing His part; what more
+could we ask? Yea, we were weighted down and humbled by the multitude of
+favors which He was showering upon us. The only thing to mar our peace
+at this time was the consciousness that our friends and some of the
+government officials were uneasy on our account. We saw no cause for
+fear, and were conscious that the continued prayers ascending in behalf
+of ourselves and the work were availing before God, and that we were at
+the place where He desired us to be.
+
+After the buildings were completed and the rains came the boys put forth
+every effort to dig some of the ground and plant grain and vegetables.
+This had to be done by hand, as the plow had not yet arrived.
+
+In the many duties incident to starting a new station, the spiritual
+part of the work was not neglected. A little visiting among the people
+was done both by Sister Engle and myself and by the native brethren. An
+attempt was also made each Sunday to instill into the minds of the
+people something of the sacredness of the day. Since a number of natives
+came daily to work at the mission, they were informed that we did not
+work on Sunday, but worshiped God instead. It was thus not difficult to
+assemble twenty-five or thirty on Sunday for services. These were always
+married people, with the exception of the few boys who were staying at
+the mission to work. The younger people, and especially the girls and
+children, were conspicuous only by their absence. It was the same at the
+village; none except men and women were to be seen, so that at first we
+all concluded that there were no children in the neighborhood. Later it
+was learned that these and all the unmarried girls ran and hid when we
+approached a village.
+
+We could invite the people on Sunday, or we could go to see them in
+their homes, but to speak to them was a more difficult affair. There was
+the same difficulty in the language as at Matopo, but with a
+difference. There we had a translation of the Bible, dictionaries and
+grammars, and could at least read the Word to them. Here we were among
+the Batonga, and their language, although belonging to the same great
+Bantu family of languages, was quite distinct from that of Southern
+Rhodesia. There were no translations, no dictionaries, at the time the
+mission opened, so that the task of acquiring it was no small one. We
+soon realized that we had not sufficiently appreciated our blessings in
+Southern Rhodesia. Here it was necessary to have notebook and pencil
+continually on hand and write down the words as they fell from the lips
+of the natives; nor was it an easy task to decide upon the spelling of
+the words; especially was there difficulty in distinguishing the letters
+_l_ and _r_. The same word as it fell from the lips of one native would
+seem to have an _l_, and as spoken by another it would be _r_. Of course
+there were many similar difficulties.
+
+One of our first aims was to secure the expression for "What is that?"
+"_Chi nzi echo?_" and with that as a basis the names at least of many
+things could be learned. Then too it is not so difficult to learn to use
+expressions common in everyday duties and the material things about one;
+but to secure a suitable vocabulary for instruction in the Gospel is
+generally a difficult task, and missionaries differ widely in reference
+to terms for spiritual things.
+
+The native vocabulary is by no means meager, and one is often surprised
+that people living such seemingly narrow lives as they do have in
+constant use such a copious vocabulary. Their thoughts as a rule can be
+expressed in fewer words than in English. For instance, they will say
+bona, to see; _bonwa_, to be seen; _bwene_, to have seen; _bonana_, to
+see each other; _boneka_, to be visible; _bonela_, to see for; and
+_bonesha_, to see clearly, and some verbs have additional forms. Again,
+in the use of verbs, such as _go_, they will have different words to
+express various phases of it: _Ya_, to go; _benda_, to go stooping, as
+after game; _fwamba_, to go quickly; _endenda_, to go for a walk;
+_ambuka_, to go aside, or astray; and so on for eighteen different
+words.
+
+The especial difficulty of the missionary is to secure the proper words
+to convey spiritual conceptions not generally met with in their
+comprehension; such as, _faith_, _holy_, _save_, _cross_, _heaven_, and
+even in the word for God there is often a difference of opinion among
+missionaries as to the word to be used. Among all tribes there seems to
+be a word for God, but the conception upon which it is based is so
+degrading that one often hesitates to make use of it in referring to the
+Holy and Omnipotent One Whom we have learned to revere. Two opinions are
+prevalent among missionaries in reference to some of the words. One is
+to make use of the words already found in a language and to seek to
+build up upon those words a new conception altogether foreign to the
+native line of thought. Others think that it is better to introduce a
+new word and attach the desired meaning to it. I think it is safe to say
+that the former is the method generally employed among translators, but
+whether it is in all instances the best method is open to question.
+
+Natives very quickly learn the language of other tribes, and so it was
+in this instance. Our native Christians soon acquired this language. A
+few of those working for us could after a manner speak that "Esperanto
+of South Africa," "Kitchen Kafir," and this enabled them from the first
+to understand one another, in a slight degree at least, and gave them a
+common basis from which to pass to the Tonga language proper, spoken by
+the people about us. As Ndhlalambi, who took the name of David, had felt
+the call definitely to give the Gospel to these people, and had had
+experience in evangelistic work, both at Mapani and at Matopo Mission,
+he was able in a comparatively short time to give the Gospel
+intelligently to the people, and also to assist us in acquiring the
+language. Of course this was by no means accomplished in a few months,
+or even in a year, for it was often difficult for even him to secure the
+proper words in spiritual language. These helpers too had their
+difficulties in the work, and had their misunderstandings with the
+natives. One day one of them was quite discouraged in an attempt to make
+some natives understand properly, and he exclaimed, "I have a great deal
+more sympathy with the white man now in his endeavors to make the people
+understand, and to teach them how to work. These people seem so dull to
+me, and I know why our masters became so out of patience with us."
+
+There was at first no attempt at opening school; but stencils and
+cardboard had been brought along, and with these charts were printed in
+the syllables and sentences of the language as nearly as we understood
+it. Sister Engle made use of these charts in teaching, by the light of
+the campfire in the evenings, the young boys who had come to work for
+us. Our two native helpers also continued their studies and were
+instructed whenever there was time for it after the buildings were
+completed.
+
+As the first Christmas drew near, a query arose as to how it should be
+observed, and whether services should be held, since no one could yet
+speak very well the language. David and Gomo were eager for services,
+saying that they would put forth every effort to speak to the people
+about Christ. We longed to give the people something on that day as an
+expression of our good will, but could not see the way open to do so. At
+Matopo Mission salt was always given, but in this part of the country
+salt was very expensive and there was only a little on hand, and we were
+not prepared to give them meat, as we had little opportunity of
+procuring game for ourselves. Services, however, were announced for the
+day, and early in the morning some natives began to arrive, curious to
+know what the day was like.
+
+In the morning Sister Engle and I were sitting at the table on the
+veranda, eating our breakfast, speaking of the plans for the day, and
+expressing a wish that there was some food to set before the people.
+While speaking, we heard a goat bleat, and presently two natives, one of
+whom was carrying a goat on his shoulders, came toward us. They put the
+goat down on the ground before us, saying as they did so, "The Chief,
+Macha, sent you this as a present." Here was the answer to our wish and
+unuttered prayer. Another native headman a short time previously had
+also presented a goat, and we had bought one, and these three would be
+sufficient for the dinner. Our praises ascended simultaneously, and we
+realized that the promise was again verified, "Before they call, I will
+answer; and while they are yet speaking I will hear."
+
+The native brethren entered heartily into the preparations, and with the
+assistance of the others, they soon had the animals killed and dressed,
+and in the cooking kettles. Fortunately there was cornmeal on hand which
+also furnished sufficient porridge. We rejoiced as we saw the people
+coming that there was food to set before them, even though the Gospel
+messenger could not be given satisfactorily; but there was still a
+greater and more blessed surprise in store.
+
+There were ninety-six grown people assembled, chiefly fathers and
+mothers, heads of families, and these were all seated along the veranda
+and in the shade of the tent. David took up the subject of Christmas and
+its origin by first reading it from the Zulu Testament, which, of
+course, they did not understand. Before he had read much the Lord sent a
+first-class interpreter, in the person of a Mutonga native who had
+worked for some time in Bulawayo, and there learned to read and speak
+the Zulu language and to understand the Gospel. He was not, however, a
+Christian, as we learned, but he proved a most ready and excellent
+interpreter for the day; and as the message was given in Zulu, he as
+readily interpreted it into the vernacular of the people.
+
+The Lord especially anointed our brother David for the message that day,
+and he most ably and feelingly presented the wonderful story of the
+birth and life of our Savior and His great mission in the redemption of
+the world. Perhaps the unique opportunity had some effect upon my
+feelings, but it seemed to me that I never at any other time heard the
+subject so well handled before a congregation of natives as it was on
+that day. The native men, especially, listened most attentively
+throughout that long discourse. Tears came into my eyes as I looked upon
+those seamed faces before me, those middle-aged and elderly men who, for
+the first time in their lives, had an opportunity of hearing of Him Who
+had come to earth nineteen hundred years before to redeem them. How much
+of the _makani mabotu_ (glad tidings) they grasped at the time it is
+difficult to ascertain.
+
+At the close of the discourse some of the rest of us spoke for a short
+time on the same theme, and also explained the cause of our being among
+them. Then after a hymn and prayer they were given their food. A
+bountiful dinner had also been prepared for ourselves, a portion of
+which we handed over to the two helpers who had so faithfully labored to
+make the day a success. It is needless to say that they too thoroughly
+enjoyed their dinner. In every way this first Christmas was one long to
+be remembered, with nothing to mar the perfect harmony of the occasion.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR
+
+School Work. Reinforcements
+
+
+Up to this time nothing had been said about school, except that a few
+boys had been taught in the evenings. There was no word for it in their
+language, and learning had no meaning or attraction for them. They only
+desired to work and earn money.
+
+The first herdboy came before the mission was located, and to him we
+gave the name "Jim," as we did not fancy his native name. He remained
+with us three months and then returned home and his cousin Tom came to
+herd. Both of these boys manifested a great interest in what they heard,
+and Tom was the first one to express a desire to be a Christian. Another
+little boy ran off from home one day and begged permission to remain at
+the mission. His mother immediately followed him and told him to go
+home. He refused, and sitting down by a tree he put his arms around it
+and clung to it; but the mother tore the poor little fellow from the
+tree and dragged him away. Aside from these, very few children made
+their appearance during the first five or six months of the mission, and
+no girls came for a much longer period of time. The older people were
+friendly from the first, but we often felt that some of them inspired
+their children with a certain amount of fear of the newcomers.
+
+January 1, 1907, the people were informed that we wished to open a
+school and that they should come to learn. By this we had in mind a
+day-school, where the pupils would come in the morning and return home
+at the close of the session. It had been impossible to build a
+schoolhouse, since nearly all the grass had been burnt off before our
+appearance on the scene. We, however, set up the little tent and built a
+straw shed at one end of it for a temporary schoolhouse.
+
+As school and its advantages had no meaning to the people, no one came.
+Then too it was the busiest season of the year. One, two, three weeks
+passed, and still no one desired to learn. January passed and half of
+February; still no scholars. This was a new experience. At Matopo the
+children could scarcely wait until school opened, and they were the
+pioneers there and gradually drew the older people to take an interest.
+Here it was quite the reverse; the children were afraid of us, and would
+run away, screaming, to hide in the tall grass when we approached their
+villages. What was to be done? As usual we began to look to the Source
+that never fails.
+
+The middle of February it was thought advisable to have a week of
+prayer. All work was laid aside and the time was spent by the Christians
+in interceding at a Throne of Grace, for we felt that perhaps we had
+been too much occupied in temporal affairs. In the midst of this week of
+prayer, on February 19, Macha, the chief, came, bringing his little boy,
+about twelve years of age, and said, "Here is my son. I should like to
+have him stay with the missionaries and learn to read and to work."
+Here then was a direct answer to prayer. The chief of the district had
+set an example to his people by thus bringing his child. This was a
+signal for others, Apuleni, another boy of about the same age, came the
+next week, and Mafulo and Kajiga followed; also others. Jim and Tom came
+to remain and attend school, and by the end of the year there were
+seventeen boys in all staying at the mission.
+
+These were nearly all boys from ten to sixteen years of age; a few were
+older. None who applied were refused if they were willing to abide by
+the regulations; and industrial work was at once inaugurated in
+connection with the school. They were to be taught in school three and
+one-half hours, and work early morning and afternoon, receiving, in
+addition to their food and instruction, some clothing, and blankets for
+the night. They were to remain at least a year before they could take
+the clothing home with them. This stipulation was made to teach them
+stability and prevent them from coming sufficiently long to secure
+clothing and then leaving before they had properly earned it. The
+arrangement proved very satisfactory. The few taxpayers who entered the
+industrial school were given a small sum of money, provided they
+completed the time agreed upon. They always had Saturday afternoon as a
+half holiday, when they were to wash and mend their clothing and have
+the remainder of the time for recreation.
+
+It was always our aim to make them understand that they were expected to
+earn what they received by giving labor in return. We had no sympathy
+with pupils who desired to learn and lie about and be idle the rest of
+the time. Several who desired to bring their food and remain at the
+mission without working were not allowed to do so, as we thought it
+would prove detrimental, both to themselves and to the rest. We
+preferred a dozen industrious and stable boys to many times that number
+who were lazy and indifferent. It is true some of the smallest could
+scarcely be said to earn their way at first, but they were at least
+taught habits of industry. In their homes many of them spent their time
+in an indolent fashion, their muscles being flabby and unused to
+exercise; and often, when they came to us, they were too lazy even to
+play at recess. Gradually they brightened up and took hold of the tasks
+assigned them. One day one of the mothers came and inquired about her
+son, a boy about thirteen years of age, and she was told that he was
+digging in the garden.
+
+"Kanyama digging?" she asked, in great surprise. "Why, he does not know
+how to work."
+
+The first rainy season was quite pleasant, and it passed with very
+little sickness among our workers. It gave us an opportunity also of
+learning something of the fertility of the soil on the mission farm.
+Much of the land, and especially that in the valleys, was unusually
+productive, and the grass grew to the height of ten feet. Our aim was to
+make use of the rainy season to instruct the boys in agriculture and
+horticulture and to raise sufficient grain and other food at least for
+their consumption; and more than that, if possible, so that the expense
+of keeping a number of boys would not rest so heavily on the mission.
+This first season very little food was grown, because there had been no
+land ready for sowing, but the plow came in January, and Gomo was
+enabled to break two large gardens ready for sowing the following year.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission Huts, 1907.]
+
+As soon as the rainy season was at an end, building was again undertaken
+by David and Gomo, together with the assistance of the native men and
+schoolboys. Thatch grass had to be cut and poles hauled and seasoned.
+The Matabele women were always eager to work for cloth, salt, or money,
+but the Batonga women were not. It was impossible to make satisfactory
+arrangements with them, either to cut grass or plaster, so that the men
+and boys were obliged to do this also in connection with the rest of the
+building, and they performed the work very satisfactorily.
+
+As there was only one small hut for the schoolboys, the first building
+this second year was a hut, 13 x 16 feet, for their occupancy. Then a
+building answering for church and school purposes was erected. This was
+16 x 30 feet, with a large veranda in front, and was an excellent
+building of the kind. The seats were made of bricks, built up in rows
+and plastered over, and the floor was made of earth, pounded hard and
+plastered. Another building, 14 x 20 feet, of poles and mud was also
+built, and was divided into two rooms. It had a veranda all around it.
+We were expecting missionaries out from America, and this last hut was
+for their accommodation. These three buildings were all
+respectable-looking ones and required a great deal of time and labor, so
+that David and Gomo were very busy and deserved much credit for their
+efficiency and perseverance. In addition to the outside work the
+schoolboys were instructed in sewing, and two of them in housework.
+
+The school at first was very poorly equipped, as we had nothing but the
+homemade charts and a few slates, and knew not where our books were to
+come from, since we did not know the language sufficiently to make any.
+Some of our needs in this respect were also supplied later. In the
+latter part of 1907 Rev. E. W. Smith, a missionary at Nanzela, published
+an excellent "Handbook of the Ila Language." This was a grammar and
+dictionary combined, and the language was closely allied to that of the
+Tonga. We secured this book about a year after we had reached Macha and
+found it very helpful in acquiring the language, since the grammar and
+many of the words of the two languages were similar. He also published
+in that language an excellent first reader and a book of over one
+hundred pages of Bible stories. This latter book is a very faithful
+account of Genesis and Exodus, and contains some of the more interesting
+parts of later Old Testament history. Not long after, there was also
+published a book of questions containing the essentials of Christian
+belief, and also many quotations from the Scriptures. With the exception
+of the mode of baptism this was so essentially like our own faith that
+it could be used to excellent advantage in Inquirers' Classes.
+
+All of these books proved of inestimable value to us in school and
+church work. The pupils in the school proved bright and studious, and
+before the end of this year some had started in the service of the Lord.
+
+It was almost impossible for us to spend much time out among the natives
+during the rainy season, since the rivers were often swollen and
+difficult to cross, and the grass was high, rendering walking difficult
+and even dangerous on account of savage beasts lurking about. It is true
+we seldom saw any of these animals, but that they were in the vicinity
+we had no reason to doubt. Once when David was on top of the church,
+putting on the rafters, a native from a neighboring kraal called to say
+that three leopards were after his sheep. Our boys all ran to hunt with
+spears and clubs, and some of them had a glimpse of the animals as they
+disappeared in the tall grass. Another morning some of the men on coming
+to work reported that they saw four lions crossing one of our plowed
+fields. Occasionally we would hear a lion roaring on the opposite side
+of the river, so that there was no reason to doubt the presence of
+danger.
+
+Northwestern Rhodesia, where we found ourselves, is essentially the home
+of wild and savage beasts and game of all kinds. In addition to smaller
+animals there are the duiker, reedbuck, hartebeest, sable antelope,
+eland, kudu, and many other varieties of game. The forests are full of
+apes and baboons, and the gnu, the zebra, and the buffalo are to be
+found. The mammoth elephant roams at will in herds or singly, the rivers
+are full of crocodiles, and the larger ones abound in the ungainly
+hippopotamuses. It is the paradise of hunters, and many avail themselves
+of the opportunity for sport thus afforded; others for the gain to be
+had from ivory and hides.
+
+The fact that there was not only game, but that there were also
+dangerous animals lurking about, may have been the chief reason why we
+never succeeded in starting a day-school at Macha. It was scarcely safe
+for children to go alone back and forth to school. Even men seldom
+traveled far alone, and they always went armed. A native would carry
+three or four assegais, and many were supplied with guns. It is
+surprising how much game they managed to kill with those old
+blunderbusses.
+
+As stated previously, the presence of animals had much to do with the
+amount of kraal visiting carried on. Sister Engle and I went, however,
+quite frequently after the grass was burnt off in June, accompanied by
+some of the schoolboys. As we neared a village, our approach was always
+heralded by the barking of dogs and the screaming of children as they
+ran away to be out of reach of the _mukua_ (white person). Every village
+is supplied with its quota of dogs. One day I counted twenty-four in one
+small village. Nor is their presence unnecessary in this animal-ridden
+country, as they often succeed in driving off ferocious animals from the
+herds, and they help supply their master with game. They are, however,
+generally so lean and starved looking that one would like to see a
+"Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals" among the natives.
+
+It was a long time before we could get a sight of the girls in the
+kraals around us. Once, in company with Apuleni, we went to his home,
+and here as everywhere we were warmly welcomed by the older people and
+given an opportunity of telling them of the Savior, as well as our
+limited vocabulary would allow. While we were sitting there talking to
+some of the older people, Sister Engle said she thought there were some
+girls in a hut near by. I arose to investigate. The older people saw the
+move and laughingly told the girls of my approach; but it was too late
+for them to escape. As I reached the door I saw five girls in the hut,
+some of whom were nearly grown. Some began to scream and hide their
+faces, and others sat trembling, not daring to look up. They appeared as
+if they were afraid of being torn from their home by violence. Two of
+these were sisters of the boy who accompanied us. It required much tact
+and patience to finally gain the confidence of these wild children
+surrounding us, and to help them realize that we would do them no harm,
+but we at last won the day.
+
+During this dry season of 1907 word was also received of a threatened
+native uprising. Our first information of this condition of affairs was
+received from some officers who had come from the Transvaal and were
+passing through on their way north on a hunting expedition. They said
+that they did not know how serious the difficulty was, except that some
+of the Europeans northeast had been ordered into the government camp.
+The natives around us were quiet and law-abiding and gave no indication
+that they were dissatisfied. They themselves were not of a warlike
+nature, and they had in the past been harrowed and many of them
+ruthlessly killed by the Matabele, the Barotse, and the Baila, each in
+their turn, and they were now enjoying peace and quiet under the
+beneficent rule of the English. They knew that they would gain nothing
+by rebelling against the English, and the only condition that would
+cause them to rise would be fear of their powerful neighbors. For this
+reason we could see no cause for fear. They were, however, not ignorant
+of the trouble in the country, and confided to David that Lewanika
+wanted to fight. The powerful tribe north of us, the Baila, were
+probably as dissatisfied as any. David at first did not tell us what he
+had heard, for fear of alarming us, and we too said nothing to him at
+once. Later, however, he told us and we gave him our information. The
+danger at that time seemed past, and we would have allowed the affair to
+rest; but it was learned that our fellow missionaries were uneasy on
+our account. So we wrote to an official at Kalomo to inquire if they
+anticipated a native uprising. He wrote, assuring us that whatever
+danger there might have been, there was no more serious cause for alarm.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Boys and Schoolhouse.]
+
+In September of this year a young man from Cape Town came to assist in
+the work. He was a nephew of our friend and benefactress, Mrs. Lewis,
+and had been impressed with the importance of pressing on the work into
+the interior; hence his presence at Macha. He suffered so much with
+fever, however, that he concluded it was best to return south after a
+stay of only a few weeks at the mission.
+
+On November 10 our long-looked-for colaborer, Mr. Myron Taylor, reached
+Macha. This was a welcome and much-needed addition to our number. The
+new building was ready for occupancy, and Brother Taylor entered
+enthusiastically into the work before him. He came just at the opening
+of the rainy season, and perhaps entered on the work with too much
+vigor; for in the latter part of December he was laid low with the dread
+African fever, and for a time his life was despaired of; but the Lord
+raised him up. During that, his first rainy season, he had frequent
+relapses of the fever and saw very few well days until the season was at
+an end. He was not, however, discouraged, but continued at the work
+whenever his health permitted.
+
+The boys who came to attend school remained, and others also applied for
+admission, so that by the end of this second year there were thirty-two
+staying with us, and they were becoming quite useful in the work, and
+best of all were going on to know the Lord, and were formed into an
+Inquirers' Class.
+
+This second rainy season was in some respects a repetition of the first,
+except that there was more land under cultivation, and we ourselves were
+better supplied with fresh vegetables and more nourishing food, and
+Brother Taylor with his rifle could furnish us with game. We were at
+this time becoming more familiar with the pests with which we had to
+contend in this tropical Africa. We thought we had learned something of
+the ravages of the white ants, or termites, while at Matopo, but the
+experience there was nothing compared to that at Macha. This is not in
+any sense intended as a scientific treatise; yet even from a missionary
+point of view one needs to know something of the difficulties in the
+way. One cannot be long in America without realizing that the ordinary
+reader is woefully ignorant of some of the most common experiences of
+the Africander, and in nothing is this more noticeable than in the
+ravages produced by the white ants. The species to be found in Africa is
+unlike that found elsewhere and is much more destructive. A knowledge of
+the presence of these pests also seems to help solve some of the
+characteristics of the natives in this section of the country.
+
+These white ants are of various kinds and sizes, but they are similar,
+in that they build great nests of clay which extend above the ground
+from one or two to twenty or more feet. These nests are known as ant
+hills, and in this part of the country some of them are not unlike
+hillocks. They are all honeycombed within and down deep into the earth,
+and are the homes of the various members of the community, consisting of
+the large, bulky, wormlike white queen, an inch or two in length, the
+savage, warlike soldiers, and the small, inoffensive-looking workers.
+There are also winged ones which leave the earth in great numbers at the
+opening of the season after the ground has been softened by the rain.
+These soon lose their wings and again enter the ground at various places
+to form new colonies.
+
+The white ants can work only under cover, and exposure to light and the
+sun is generally fatal to them, so they build small clay tunnels
+underneath the ground or on top where they desire to work, and through
+these they pass to and fro, carrying particles of food to store it away.
+They prefer dry food, such as wood, leather, paper, clothing, straw, and
+vegetation as it is becoming dry, although if these articles are not to
+be had they have no objections to attacking growing trees or plants.
+Many trees in our young orchard have been destroyed by their ravages.
+These ants are to be found all over South Africa, but as one approaches
+the equator they are more numerous and destructive and the hills are
+larger.
+
+At Macha, boxes, shoes, clothing, everything had to be kept off the
+ground floor. If this precaution was not observed, perhaps in a single
+night a clay coating would be formed around the sole of a shoe and it
+would be greatly damaged. Sometimes they would find their way up the leg
+of a box and begin destroying the clothing or articles within. As I came
+out of my room one morning, the noise of the sentinels of the ants gave
+signal to the workers of the approach of danger. This led to an
+examination of some bookshelves which were supposed to be safe out of
+the reach of the pests. Wet clay was found to be all along the end of
+the bookcase, and the end books on each shelf were partly eaten, all the
+work of one night. Our bedposts had to be put on zinc or into old tin
+cans to keep the ants from making their way to the top and soiling the
+bedclothes. Several times they started to build an ant hill on the floor
+of the hut, and one morning a small hill of wet clay nearly a foot in
+height was to be seen, the result of one night's labors.
+
+Nor did they confine their ravages to the floor and the articles placed
+on the floor; walls and grass roof were full of them. No article could
+be hung on the wall with safety. There was a ceiling of muslin in the
+house, yet one day Sister Engle, on going into her room, found an army
+of white ants marching around on the counterpane of her bed, having
+fallen from a broken clay tunnel in the roof. In addition to these
+pests, we were greatly annoyed by insects boring into the soft wood
+which formed the rafters. During this season the sound made in the quiet
+hours of the night by these insects sawing caused one to think the
+entire hut was alive. The ants would carry their clay tunnels into the
+opening made by the borers and complete the work of destruction. For a
+time the ceiling became so heavy with falling sawdust and clay, that it
+was necessary to open it about every two weeks and remove the dust,
+which almost filled a small tub each time. Many more incidents might be
+cited. We were forced to admit that, at least during the rainy season, a
+large portion of our time was occupied in protecting our huts and goods
+from the ravages of the ants.
+
+[Illustration: The Last Invitation.]
+
+Their work did not stop with the house. We would think that the grain
+and meal were placed high and secure out of their reach, only to find
+that they had formed a channel and destroyed a lot of grain. At first
+when some boys came for school there was no suitable place prepared for
+their accommodation, and they were obliged to lie on the floor. They
+would occasionally come and show where the cuticle had been removed from
+some portion of the body during the night. In the garden there was also
+difficulty in protecting the growing crops. The cornstalk would be eaten
+off and fall to the ground, where the ants would complete the work of
+destruction; so that from the time corn began to be filled until it was
+ripe, it was generally necessary to keep several boys most of the time
+gathering the fallen corn. Continual vigilance was needful, or in an
+unguarded moment something about the place would be destroyed.
+
+The varieties of ants in the country are many and diverse, but we will
+mention only one other kind, to which we were introduced during the
+early days of the mission. One night some of the boys said they could
+not sleep on account of ants coming into their hut. We supposed they
+referred to large black ants, which often came in armies and made a raid
+on white ants to carry them off for food. These black ones are very
+troublesome when disturbed, and the boys were told to occupy another hut
+for the remainder of the night. Again the boys spoke of being disturbed
+and showed some small, reddish ants with vicious-looking heads, which
+were marching in a straight line through the yard. But these looked
+innocent and little attention was paid to the matter. Then one morning a
+hen and two young guinea fowls, confined in a pen, were found to be
+dead and covered with these insects. We concluded that they had died and
+the ants were eating the carcass, but the boys assured us that the ants
+had killed them. The pen was immediately burnt, together with as many of
+the ants as possible. Another night the sheep began to bleat most
+piteously. The lantern was lighted and the boys called to see what was
+the difficulty, and while waiting for the boys I approached the pen.
+Almost instantly needles seemed to penetrate my body in various places.
+I gave the lantern to the boys to let out the sheep, while Sister Engle
+and I hastened to the house, where she helped to remove the vicious
+little insects. After that experience there was no further question in
+my mind as to whether those ants could kill fowls or other animals.
+
+These are called the army ants. Once it required two days for an army of
+them continually on the march to pass through our yard. Fortunately we
+have not been troubled much with this variety since that time, but in
+some parts of Africa they are very numerous. Human bodies are sometimes
+thrown to them, and even live ones, as a punishment in supposed
+witchcraft.
+
+We had been in correspondence with some of the Primitive Methodist
+missionaries at Nanzela, from whom we had purchased books for the school
+and ourselves; and we were eager to visit them and learn something of
+their work. About the 1st of May we arranged to make the journey of
+sixty miles and pay them a visit. Brother Taylor was here to take charge
+of the journey, so we took the wagon with the ten oxen and a number of
+schoolboys, as well as David, leaving Gomo in charge of the mission
+during our absence. This was a new and untried road in a northwesternly
+direction, and required four day of hard traveling to make it. On the
+way we occasionally had an opportunity of preaching Christ to the
+natives.
+
+The kindly welcome received from Rev. and Mrs. Price, who were then at
+Nanzela, more than repaid us for the tediousness of the journey. We
+spent a most delightful four days at their mission and learned to know
+something of our neighbors and of the work being accomplished at this
+oldest station in this part of the country. They were working among the
+Baila, and also some Barotse who were living in that section of the
+country. The trip, however, proved a most unfortunate one for us, as we
+were informed that we had passed through a small district of the tsetse
+fly on the way. The result of this will be given in another chapter.
+
+On account of the presence of these pests, as well as for other reasons,
+a very common method of travel and transportation in this part of the
+country is by native carriers. A native will carry fifty pounds of
+goods, so that it requires forty persons to transport a ton of goods.
+This means is employed by officials, and it is somewhat more expeditious
+than by wagon. It is often not very satisfactory, however, and it is
+difficult to secure natives who are willing to carry, unless they are
+almost forced into service. The wages too, eight cents a day, is small,
+but where the tsetse fly abounds this is the only safe method of
+transportation.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE
+
+Additional Reinforcements. Preparing to Build
+
+
+In June, 1908, we were pleased to receive additional reinforcements in
+the persons of Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger, who had lately arrived from
+America and felt called to the work at Macha. Accompanying them were
+Elder and Mrs. Steigerwald, who came to pay us a visit and to see about
+the work.
+
+There was now a strong force of missionaries at the place, and it was
+thought that better and more permanent buildings should be erected. The
+mission had been in progress nearly two years, and David and Gomo had
+been active both dry seasons in erecting buildings--and they were good
+buildings of their kind. From what has already been given, however, of
+the ravages of the white ants, it can easily be seen that such buildings
+were very unsatisfactory and of short duration. To make others of the
+same kind would require the missionaries to be continually building.
+
+My opinion in reference to missionaries' houses and surroundings had
+gradually and materially undergone a change since I first entered the
+mission field. My firm conviction on entering had been that missionaries
+should be as approachable as possible, and that they should endeavor to
+get on a level with their people; not in their dirt and filth, not in
+their ignorance and degradation, but, leaving out these essentially
+objectionable features, they should seek to imitate as much as possible
+Him Who had no certain dwelling-place and went about doing good. He
+became one with the people wherever He went, "Made Himself of no
+reputation, and took upon Him the form of a servant." He of course is
+the Great Exemplar, after Whom the missionaries, His messengers, are to
+pattern. The true missionary should and does esteem it a privilege to
+endure any necessary privation and hardship in the cause of the Master
+Whom he loves and seeks to imitate. Otherwise it would be impossible to
+carry the Gospel to the heathen. But our God is a wise God, and has
+promised wisdom to His children and to His messengers, which He expects
+them to use on the mission field as well as elsewhere; so that they may
+adapt themselves to their surroundings and do that which will best
+advance His Kingdom.
+
+The missionary goes to his field of labor. He builds himself huts of
+poles, mud, and grass. He does this carefully, that he may protect
+himself from the weather, the wild animals, and from the mosquitoes
+which bring fever. He provides his hut with furniture, manufactured by
+his own hand, so that it looks quite cozy and comfortable, and the poor
+natives as they look inside may conclude that if heaven is no better
+than this, it is at least worth striving for. The missionary himself for
+the time feels quite satisfied and happy in his surroundings and
+concludes that the place is good enough for anyone.
+
+He opens his door and invites his dear dark friends to enter and sit and
+talk with him--a privilege which they greatly appreciate and the
+missionary also enjoys. Are not these the people for whom Christ died?
+Are not these the poor people to whom he is bringing the privileges of
+the Gospel? He loves to embrace every opportunity of getting into their
+hearts, and he feels keenly everything which separates and tends to form
+a barrier between them.
+
+Time passes, and the rainy season comes. Perhaps the huts become damp
+and even mouldy in places, and gradually, as the ants continue their
+ravages, the walls crack and other difficulties arise. He is forced to
+be continually on his guard to protect himself. Mosquitoes enter, and he
+is incapacitated for work, by fever and other sickness. His health
+becomes undermined and his appetite gives way. The coarse food of the
+natives, if he has been using it, becomes distasteful and hurtful.
+Perhaps, if there is no way out of the difficulty, his life pays the
+penalty and his work on earth for God and the natives is stopped. This
+is no fancy picture. It has been repeated over and over again in this
+great "White Man's Graveyard."
+
+Suppose, however, that by taking plenty of quinine and having
+considerable vitality to start with, he survives and continues
+successfully to combat disease; he soon finds that he must build a
+separate hut in which to meet the natives, or his house will be overrun
+with vermin and he cannot live in it. His hut, too, soon becomes a
+hiding place for snakes, rats, and lizards. He may pick up a piece of
+furniture and find a cobra lying beneath it, or go into the little
+kitchen and find a deadly puff adder beneath the cooking kettle. Even if
+he has in building kept as near to the natives as possible, they are in
+no haste to get rid of their filth and improve their manner of living.
+They have not yet seen the advantages of exerting themselves to that
+extent, unless they are members of the mission family and compelled to
+wash. Even then they may have conscientious scruples in reference to the
+matter, as one of our best boys at Matopo did. He was frequently
+remonstrated with for not keeping his clothing clean. He said that clean
+clothing made him feel proud.
+
+Again, the missionary soon sees that his hut is going to pieces, and he
+must go over the laborious task every two or three years of building
+another, and at the same time constantly fight the ants, so that his
+life is one of long struggle with disease, pests, and building. When and
+how is he to give the Gospel? He concludes that he must make brick,
+build a house, and put on an iron roof, that it may be better protected
+from the mosquitoes and furnish good rain water. He makes a tank, so
+that he may have good drinking water instead of the muddy, disease-laden
+stuff which comes from the river. It will make more work for a time, but
+when completed he sees some result of his labor.
+
+These reasons, any or all of them, are sufficient in the eyes of the
+missionary for building a good, substantial house, but there are other
+reasons, quite as patent to him, but they may not be to one who has
+never been in his place. The natives like to see their missionary build
+good dwellings, for then they think he has come to stay, and because he
+has come to stay and is willing to work and to train the natives, he
+sometimes has a better house than some of his white neighbors. And we
+are loath to think, as some affirm, that it is a reproach to be better
+housed, if he himself builds it.
+
+There is another and more subtle reason for a good house, and one which
+the writer could not enter into until the last few years. If one has
+access to a town he has an opportunity to see other civilized places and
+has a change of scenery and companionship, which is both interesting and
+beneficial. Especially is this so to one who is continually surrounded
+with uncouth barbarism in its many forms. When, however, one is far
+removed from all civilized associations and sees nothing that is
+beautiful and uplifting, week after week, month after month, year after
+year; when all this time only dirt and squalor meet the eye as he steps
+off his own premises, his range of vision becomes so narrowed, his brain
+so benumbed by the monotony, that he feels he can endure it no longer.
+He is not tired of his services for the Master; he is not tired of the
+dark faces surrounding him; but his spiritual vision has become so
+befogged that, as he rises before the people to give them the message,
+he feels that he cannot give what he longs to. He cannot even take hold
+of God by faith in prayer as he did, and he must get away for a change.
+
+But what has this to do with a good house? Just this: If one has a good
+home and pleasant surroundings, good and helpful literature and a few of
+the things which minister to the aesthetic as well as to the spiritual
+part of his nature, he has a change, at least, in his own home, and when
+he can snatch time, from the many duties which continually confront him,
+for a little quiet, the surroundings are pleasing and restful. He is
+then just that much better fitted to cope with the opposite conditions,
+and he can cope with them for a longer time and do better work for the
+Master. On the other hand, missionaries are human and make many
+mistakes, and we in the mission field need also to guard against the
+other extreme of spending too much time in beautifying our surroundings
+and making ourselves comfortable, to the neglect of that God-given
+message.
+
+Even under the best of surroundings, physically, the missionary has
+enough to contend with. Circumstances over which he has no control,
+difficulties which far outweigh any already mentioned, meet him on every
+hand. As Rev. Stewart, of China, says, "'Agonia,' that word so often on
+St. Paul's lips--what did it mean? Did it not just mean the thousand
+wearinesses, and deeper, the stirrings, the travailings, the bitter
+disappointments, the deaths oft of a missionary's life?"
+
+The natives often are so indifferent, so disinclined to exert
+themselves, that, after months and years of weary, persistent labor
+among them, the missionary often feels that little is accomplished. He
+dare build hopes on none but God, and must accept seeming success or
+defeat as alike from Him. This continual drain on his system is quite
+sufficient, without having to combat with poor dwellings, poor food, and
+unhealthful surroundings.
+
+After the Brethren came, they concluded to start at once to make the
+preparations for building. Elder Steigerwald had had experience in this
+line of work, so he generously offered to start the rest in brickmaking.
+After a few weeks' visit he and Sister Steigerwald returned home and
+Sister Engle decided to accompany them for a change. David and Gomo also
+had been absent from their people for two years and wished to return,
+the former for a visit and the latter, perhaps permanently. We were very
+sorry to see all these leave at once, even for a few months, and
+especially David, whose assistance in the language and in interpretation
+was greatly needed.
+
+[Illustration: Making Brick at Macha.]
+
+[Illustration: Brick Kiln. Mr. Jesse Wenger and Helpers.]
+
+The Brethren Taylor and Wenger, with the assistance of the schoolboys
+and some other natives, moulded and burnt a large kiln of brick. Brother
+Taylor attended to the moulding and Brother Wenger to building the kiln.
+This gave the boys training in another line of industrial work, and at
+the end of about six weeks a lot of excellent brick were ready for
+building. Unfortunately there was no money on hand to build a house, for
+the Board had not been informed of our needs in this respect, since
+brickmaking had been undertaken rather suddenly. It was therefore
+necessary to postpone building a house until the next dry season.
+Brother Wenger, however, erected two small brick buildings, with
+thatched roofs. One was for grinding and storing grain, and the other a
+two-roomed cottage. In the latter a room was fitted up for the
+occupancy of himself and wife, so that we were prepared for another
+rainy season.
+
+One thing which was a serious handicap in the building and work that
+season was the condition of the oxen. After our return from Nanzela, in
+May, the oxen gave no indication of being bitten by the tsetse fly.
+Nearly a month later they were driven to Kalomo, a distance of about
+forty-five miles, and brought out a heavy load of goods on the arrival
+of our colaborers. They were also made use of in hauling sand for
+brickmaking; and in July, when Brother Steigerwalds returned home, they
+were again driven to the station. This time they made use of a new road
+and went east to Choma Station, a distance of only about thirty-six
+miles. By this time the oxen were showing signs of being bitten, and as
+there was no cure for them, they gradually became weaker and died, one
+by one, until we had lost nine, the last ones not dying until about six
+months after they were bitten. The fly injects a parasite into the
+blood, which gradually absorbs the red corpuscles, hence the lingering
+death.
+
+It was a serious loss to the mission at the time, as they had been in
+use almost constantly in farming, hauling, and bringing out supplies. In
+the Syracuse plow it was necessary to use all ten of the oxen in this
+heavy clay soil, and also in hauling the wagon.
+
+We still had a few, but there was not sufficient money on hand to
+purchase others at once. With eight ill-matched oxen, Brother Taylor
+undertook to go to Choma in November for the purpose of bringing out a
+six months' supply of goods and provisions, which had been sent up from
+Bulawayo. He took along five of the largest schoolboys to assist in
+carrying the goods across the bridgeless rivers. To add to the
+difficulty of the trip, grass was scarce at that season of the year, so
+that there was little food for the oxen. A little rain also fell while
+he was away and made the road muddy.
+
+On returning with the load he was able to get within twelve miles of
+home when the oxen could go no farther. He sent four of the boys each
+with a load of goods to the mission, and a call for help. Several native
+men and about twenty schoolboys were sent to his assistance, and after
+they reached the wagon, Brother Taylor concluded to endeavor to come a
+little nearer home before resting for the night. Each of the natives
+carried a load, and he himself carried one hundred pounds of flour and
+drove the oxen. They came about two and one-half miles farther and then
+camped for the night. A fire was kindled, but as the night was dark and
+misty the fire burned low. The boys lay around this and Brother Taylor
+on the open wagon. He was aroused several times during the night by a
+disturbance among the oxen. Thinking it was caused by one of the new
+oxen which had given him some trouble, he arose at three different times
+during the latter part of the night to quiet them, but the darkness was
+too great for him to see what was the trouble. The last time it was
+dawning a little in the east, and he thought he discerned the form of an
+animal moving toward an ant hill in the vicinity. The boys were aroused
+and soon had a fire; and as the morning came they discovered by the
+spoors that two lions had passed along within a few feet of where the
+boys lay and had gored one of the oxen during the night. These were what
+Brother Taylor had been trying to chase. The reader can imagine the
+thankfulness of all of them, as well as of ourselves, when it was
+discovered how wonderfully the Lord had preserved them all from harm. We
+rejoiced when the goods as well as Brother Taylor and the boys were all
+safely at home, but the heavy wagon had to remain for a time on the
+veldt before it could be brought to the mission.
+
+When the news of the misfortune to the oxen reached America the Lord
+inspired some of His children to send special donations for the purchase
+of others, and even before an account of the trouble had reached there
+some had heard of the need by way of the Throne and had sent money.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX
+
+Evangelistic and Other Labors
+
+
+During this dry season the spiritual part of the work, together with
+school and kraal-visiting, was not neglected, even though most of those
+who could speak the language were away.
+
+There were thirty-two boys in school, and they were doing good work. A
+translation of the Gospel of St. Mark had been printed by Rev. Smith,
+and an Ila hymn book by Rev. Chapman, of the same mission, and these
+were both very useful in our work. After our boys had finished the Ila
+books, we concluded to allow them to continue the Scriptures in the Zulu
+Testament, as it is always easier for the natives to pass from one
+native language into another than from English into their language. We
+found later that this use of the Zulu Testament proved very
+satisfactory, both to ourselves and the boys. Since we were familiar
+with that language, and they readily acquired it, their knowledge was of
+great assistance to us in translating portions of the Scripture into
+their tongue, and they were soon capable of interpreting for Elder
+Steigerwald and others who came to us from Southern Rhodesia. Here, as
+at Matopo, every day and all the day were the Scriptures studied and
+Christ held up, and morning, noon, and night we met in worship and
+explanation of the Bible. The great aim, both in school and out, was to
+produce sincere and ripe Christians, who should become teachers and
+evangelists of their people.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission Dwelling House.]
+
+Other studies were gradually introduced. Arithmetic seems to be always a
+difficult study for most of them, but some of them compared very
+favorably in that branch with others whom we had instructed. They had
+their own peculiar way at first of announcing whether their problems
+were correct or not. If they were correct the pupils would answer "_Wa
+pona_" (it is alive), and if incorrect they would say "_Wa fwa_" (it is
+dead). Although they sat side by side in the schoolroom and could easily
+look on the slates of their neighbors, they were generally very honest
+and independent in their work and did not attempt to copy.
+
+English also was introduced after they could read understandingly their
+own language. The opportunity of learning English is a privilege which
+all natives covet, as it seems to be more important in their eyes and
+more European. In some respects this _importance_ is one of the
+objectionable features about teaching it. Then too the native often is
+dull in learning it, but we need interpreters, and the value
+intellectually of this and arithmetic and kindred studies is not to be
+despised. English often aids the native in securing better positions
+with better pay when he goes to work among the Europeans; for go, at
+least for a while, he will. Some Europeans prefer natives who can speak
+and understand a little English. On the other hand, some white men, who
+have themselves a little knowledge of the native tongue, prefer, for
+their own purpose, that natives do not understand English. They want the
+native to understand only enough to go at their bidding and "keep his
+place," which is somewhat similar in their eyes with the lower order of
+animals. This class is forever a foe to the missionary and to the
+education and christianization of the natives. If one who has to some
+extent been educated, goes out into the centers of civilization and
+there, swallowed in the maelstrom of vice which surrounds him, imitates
+his new white teachers, they will point to him and say, "Yes, there is
+one of your mission boys. That is what missionary work does." Many a
+well-meaning native, who was making a fair progress toward Christian
+life, can trace his downfall to such teachers. If that class of
+Europeans would remain at the centers of civilization, it would still
+be more tolerable for the missionary, but often the towns are too moral
+for them, and they seek to go into the region of raw natives. As one
+glibly remarked, "When it becomes too civilized for me here, I'll go
+farther inland."
+
+Mr. Naylor, who has had an opportunity of studying at first hand the
+work all over Africa, says, "In Africa conscienceless trade, social
+vice, race hatred, and religious intolerance have freer scope because so
+far removed from the restraining influence of Christian public
+sentiment."
+
+This seeming digression from the subject can be excused only on the
+ground that it is one of the most difficult and perplexing problems the
+missionary has to face, and every one coming into the country in such a
+capacity is certain to meet it in one form or another. We are pleased to
+add, however, that the missionary also finds Europeans who are generous
+and helpful and favorable to the work; and the number of this class is
+increasing, as the aim of the missionary and the results of his efforts
+are more clearly understood.
+
+The attendance at church services was constantly increasing, and those
+present on Sunday sometimes reached 140 in number. Kraal-visiting also
+was carried on as opportunity afforded. Before Sister Engle left we had
+made a visit to Mianda, the home of Tom and Jim and of several other of
+our boys. This was about seven miles from Macha and too far for some of
+the older people to walk to services. As the boys were still with us,
+those in the kraal had not yet received any light. They appeared to be
+much pleased to see us, but when we attempted to point them to the
+Savior they seemed so dark and so unable to grasp spiritual things. This
+was especially true of Tom's mother, who sat in a little dark hut and
+was afflicted with a very sore eye. She had such a hopeless expression
+on her face, that the picture haunted us for many days afterwards.
+
+When Tom, who had accepted the Light as far as he knew, had been at the
+mission fifteen months, he desired to return home, and did so. A few
+months after he had returned to his home, one day, in company with two
+of the schoolboys, I went about four miles from the mission to visit
+some of the people. Quite unexpectedly we came upon Tom's mother in one
+of the huts. She was there visiting some of her friends. As usual, I
+began telling her of Jesus, and her face brightened immediately as she
+exclaimed:
+
+"Oh, yes! Siwesi [Tom] told me that. He said we should not worship the
+spirits any more; we should only worship God above [pointing upward]. He
+reads from his Book and sings and prays. I enjoy hearing of those
+things." This woman had never been at the mission, and this was the
+first indication, apart from the boys staying with us, that we had of
+Light entering the home. Her eagerness and evident sincerity showed
+plainly that she believed and was accepting the truth, and that the
+Light was coming through one of the schoolboys. The contrast between
+this picture and the first sight of this woman was so marked, and the
+joy of realizing that a ray of Light was entering one home at least,
+was so great, that as I retraced my steps homeward I kept saying to
+myself, "It pays, it pays."
+
+Brother Taylor felt especially called to spend his time in evangelistic
+work among the villages, and whenever he could snatch time from other
+duties pressing upon him he went out among the people, and in this
+manner a number of villages were visited.
+
+Many of the people at this time were destitute of food, as the previous
+season had not produced good crops. Many of them were living on fruits,
+roots, and plants, and much sickness was the result. With our large
+family, and only a moderate supply of grain, we were unable to give them
+much assistance, but we did what we could. Had they been willing to
+bring their small children to us we would have cared for them until
+other food was grown. One mother did bring her little boy, Halikumba,
+who was four or five years of age and nearly starved. He enjoyed his new
+home so much, and the abundance of food it supplied, that he would run
+and hide if he saw his mother come for fear she would take him away. He
+was such a little mite of humanity that we were afraid of placing him in
+the huts with the other boys, and for a time cared for him in the house.
+
+David returned to Macha in January, 1909, ready to enter again with
+enthusiasm into the work, and Brother Taylor concluded that the way was
+now opened for him to spend additional time in evangelistic labor, so he
+decided to take several boys and spend some time among the Baila north
+of us. This is a bold and warlike tribe, living in large villages, and
+much addicted to drink, dancing, and carousals. Rows, and even murders,
+are not infrequent among them, and it required some courage to venture
+into their territory. The Lord gave the Brother open doors, however, and
+some attentive listeners, and we believe seed was sown that will bear
+fruit in eternity.
+
+He had some difficulties to encounter, which were not so pleasant. It is
+a low, flat country; and as he was there in the midst of the rainy
+season, heavy rains flooded the country on all sides, so that he was
+frequently obliged to wade the water in going from one village to
+another. After two months of arduous labor, his health gave way and he
+was carried back sick to the mission. It required some time before he
+fully recovered from the exposure and hardships of the trip.
+
+These experiences are not pleasant, but they are incidental to the
+country, and every missionary feels that he should be ready at all times
+to endure for Christ's sake and the salvation of souls what men are
+going through every day for money or a home.
+
+Brother Wenger also had been suffering greatly in health while at the
+mission, both from nervous disorders and from fever. Notwithstanding
+this, he decided to begin building a house, since the rains were about
+over and funds had been received for this purpose. David also was ready
+to help in the work. With the assistance of the boys they brought
+together stones and began the foundation. Near the mission there were
+very few building stones, but this need had been supplied in a rather
+unexpected manner. The brethren had undertaken to dig a well the
+previous season, but on coming into contact with a great deal of stone,
+which necessitated blasting, they went down only forty-five feet and
+finally concluded the task was useless. The only beneficial result of
+their labors was the stones which had been taken out of the well, and
+which furnished a large part of the material for the foundation of the
+house.
+
+[Illustration: Eld. Steigerwald and Mr. Doner with Carriers on Their
+Trip North of Macha.]
+
+Brother Wenger laid the foundation of a house 41 x 16 feet, with a wing
+18 x 10 feet, and began work on the brick. Unfortunately, while this was
+in progress, his health gave way repeatedly, and he and Sister Wenger
+concluded that it was advisable for them to leave for Bulawayo and
+finally for America, and David continued to work at the house. Brother
+Taylor had sufficiently recovered from his illness by this time to be
+able to take the Wengers to the station. He then waited there a few
+days for the train from the south, and brought back with him Elder
+Steigerwald, Mr. Doner, Miss Engle, and Gomo, all of whom we were
+expecting.
+
+He was absent from the mission eight days, and during that time I had an
+attack of fever and was obliged to be in bed for a week. This was my
+first attack, and as it was quite severe, it enabled me to sympathize
+better with those who had been sick so much. We were very glad to
+welcome Sister Engle and the rest back to work. The two brethren from
+Bulawayo were on a tour of exploration north, but they generously
+decided to stay and assist Brother Taylor to finish the brick work of
+the new house. This timely assistance was greatly appreciated by us all,
+and that part of the building was completed in two weeks, after which
+they proceeded north.
+
+The special object of their trip was to look at a location north of the
+Kafue River, where a missionary had died not long before. This
+missionary had started a work in this unhealthy region, and his life had
+paid the penalty. Some friends of his, notably Mrs. Lewis, of Cape Town,
+had desired our people to examine the place, and, if thought advisable,
+to continue the work, and Brother Doner was willing to do this if they
+concluded that the opening was a good one.
+
+They made the journey on foot, accompanied by Matshuba and native
+carriers from the vicinity of Macha. They passed through the very heart
+of the territory occupied by the wild Baila, and visited the new station
+at Kasenga, which had just been opened by Rev. Smith. He and his heroic
+wife had started this station in the heart of the Baila country and in
+an unhealthful locality, not considering their lives dear unto
+themselves, only that they might take the Gospel to these people and
+continue the translation of the New Testament, which Mr. Smith had
+already begun.
+
+[Illustration: Crossing the Kafue River in a Native Dugout.]
+
+Near this place the brethren crossed the broad Kafue River and proceeded
+in a northwesternly direction toward the railroad. They found the
+mission station and the place where the missionary had died, and heard
+some of the children sing a hymn which the missionary had taught them.
+They were not very well satisfied, however, with the location, and
+returned to Macha by a different route. They traveled on foot a distance
+of perhaps 250 miles, and were absent from Macha a month. They could not
+understand the language and had some trying experiences from wild
+animals and wilder men, but the Lord graciously preserved them from all
+harm. They then returned to Bulawayo to continue their labors.
+
+In the meantime Brother Taylor, with the aid of the native brethren, was
+progressing very satisfactorily with the house. It contained four
+fair-sized rooms and a pantry, and had a broad veranda on three sides to
+protect the walls from deterioration by sun and rain. These walls were
+twelve feet high, with a drop-ceiling of muslin two feet below the
+eaves, to serve as a protection from the fierce rays of the sun and to
+furnish an air chamber. On top of the foundation and underneath the
+brick walls were placed strips of zinc, soldered together, to prevent
+the white ants from forcing their way through into the walls and thence
+onto the timbers of the roof. The floors were of earth, pounded hard and
+well tarred to keep out the ants. The large glass windows were quite a
+relief from the small holes in the old house. Later the windows and the
+greater part of the veranda were screened. The house was in every way
+most satisfactory, except that it was not quite proof against the white
+ants. Cement floors and steel ceilings would have been preferable, but
+the cost was prohibitive.
+
+[Illustration: Batonga Chiefs and Headmen.]
+
+Sister Engle's return gave us an opportunity of continuing the
+kraal-visiting, and we made use of it in gaining an entrance into other
+homes. At Kabanzi village, about nine miles away, services had been held
+more or less regularly ever since the establishment of the mission, and
+Sister Engle and I decided to take the tent and spend a week at this
+place and hold some Gospel services. Gomo and a number of the boys
+accompanied us and built a hut for the use of those coming here to
+conduct services. This week spent among the people was a most delightful
+one, and beneficial physically, especially to myself, since I was
+feeling the effects of my three years' stay in this climate. The people
+attended the services well, and seemed greatly interested as they sat
+around the campfire and listened to the Message.
+
+In other homes too there was beginning to be a change, for the girls
+were coming out of their seclusion and listening to the old, old Story,
+and some were even venturing to the mission on Sunday. Some of the older
+people also appeared interested, and made a show at least of desiring to
+be Christians.
+
+This does not imply that the kraals around us were fast accepting the
+Gospel as a result of the three years' labor among them. No, the devil
+was plying his trade at our very doors. Almost nightly one could hear
+the tomtoms beaten in connection with their worship, or as an
+accompaniment in their immoral dances; for none of their worship was
+omitted by the older ones, at least in their homes. The missionary work
+was just begun, and perhaps none of the present workers would live to
+see the day when these things would cease in the villages. The false
+religions and customs which have been so deeply imbedded for centuries
+would require patient, consecrated labor for years, and even
+generations, to uproot. One must be willing to go on, day by day,
+although he may see little or no fruit of his labors, knowing that the
+Great Husbandman will care for the seed sown.
+
+[Illustration: First Baptismal Scene at Macha. Native Congregation Not
+Visible.]
+
+The work thus far, however, had not been without its visible fruits, as
+the stability of some of our boys gave ample testimony. The number
+staying at the mission had now grown to forty. These were some of the
+called-out ones from the various kraals about us. Each had sent its
+quota, and although some had come and gone, the great majority stayed on
+from year to year. As the Light came to them they came and confessed
+their sins, forsook their old life and accepted Christ as their Savior,
+showing by their lives that they were His. Some of these were about
+grown; others were still quite young, but we hoped to see the day when
+some of them would become teachers and evangelists of their people.
+
+[Illustration: Wedding Dinner at Macha.]
+
+Word had been received that Elders J. N. Engle and J. Sheets were to be
+sent out by the Mission Board to visit the various stations and report
+on the progress of the work. In November, 1909, just after we had moved
+into the new house, they, together with Elder Steigerwald, came to pay
+us the long-looked-for visit. Their visit was greatly enjoyed and we
+believe was a blessing to the work of the Lord. To Brother Sheets the
+boys gave the name "Happy," no doubt because he frequently used the word
+and also showed it in his manner. Two important events occurred during
+their stay, which deserve special mention.
+
+The first was the marriage, on November 4, of Mr. Taylor and Miss Adda
+Engle. The natives were invited to this ceremony, and about 350 accepted
+the invitation. Several chiefs came with their people and arranged
+themselves in groups, eager to see what a Christian wedding was like.
+The marriage ceremony was performed by Bishop Engle, who was a son of
+the first bishop to Matopo Mission, and also a cousin of the bride.
+Bishop Steigerwald delivered an excellent and instructive discourse to
+the natives on the importance of the occasion and the tenets of
+Christian marriage. This was interpreted into the vernacular by David
+and was listened to most attentively by the natives present. It was
+their first opportunity of learning this phase of Christianity, and it
+was an important event from a missionary standpoint. Christian marriage
+and the principles it stands for generally require a long time for
+inculcation into the hearts and lives of at least the older natives, but
+many of the younger ones very readily accept it, as the many Christian
+marriages performed at our older stations testify.
+
+At the close of the ceremony, and after the missionaries and boys had
+offered their congratulations, the rest of the natives congratulated in
+their own way, which was by the clapping of hands. Some also began
+cheering with the mouth, but this demonstration was checked. Brother
+Taylor had arranged to give them a feast of beef and porridge, and this
+they greatly enjoyed, as it is to some the great aim of life; namely, to
+have plenty to eat.
+
+The second important event was the occasion of the first baptism at
+Macha, in which ten of our boys were baptized by Brother Steigerwald in
+the Macha River, and received into Church fellowship, thus showing to
+their heathen neighbors that they had forsaken their old lives. A
+beautiful feature of this was that some of the parents and older ones
+met them as they came out of the water and seemed to rejoice with them
+in their new life. There were others who were eager to take the step,
+but it was thought they had not yet sufficiently counted the cost.
+
+We then had the privilege of surrounding the table of the Lord together
+with these who had been so lately snatched from heathen darkness. These
+were the first fruits of Macha and reminded one of Professor Drummond's
+experience in Nyassaland. He says: "I cherish no more sacred memory of
+my life than that of a communion service in the little Bandawe Church,
+when the sacramental cup was handed to me by the bare black arm of a
+native communicant--a communicant whose life, tested afterwards in many
+an hour of trial with me on the Tanganyika Plateau, gave him perhaps a
+better right to be there than any of us."
+
+The missionary too is often made to feel, as he sees some of these
+humble, black followers of the Lord, and thinks how far they have come,
+and how steadfast the lives of many of them prove to be, that He Who
+sees and tests all hearts may, with Mr. Drummond, conclude that they
+have a better right to sit around the table of the Lord than any of us.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN
+
+Other Missionary Experiences
+
+
+The experiences of a missionary are so many and so diverse that nothing
+should surprise him. To give these experiences, with too distinct a line
+of demarcation, would not place the work in its proper setting, for they
+often come piling one upon the other and cannot be separated.
+
+I had now been north of the Zambezi nearly three and one-half years, and
+was in need of a change, so when the delegation from America left I also
+went along to the station. Brother and Sister Taylor accompanied us to
+Choma Station on a little wedding trip, and then returned to carry on
+the work at Macha, while David took charge of the school. Elders Engle
+and Steigerwald went north on an exploring trip as far as Broken Hill.
+Brother Sheets went to Bulawayo and I to Natal.
+
+On the way south an accident occurred which was quite unusual, even for
+this animal-ridden country. After the train had passed the Zambezi River
+and Wankie Coal Fields, in the evening about eight o'clock there was a
+lunge in the train and a lady in the same compartment with myself
+exclaimed, "There must be an accident of some kind." The train soon came
+to a sudden stop, and it was evident that something had happened. People
+began running about in the darkness, a large bonfire was soon built
+near the front of the train, a bulky form was visible, and word came
+back that we had struck an elephant. Great excitement prevailed. Gomo
+also was on the train, returning to his home, and he came back to our
+compartment and said, "Come and see the elephant. I'll take care of
+you."
+
+I went forward with him and found a huge elephant lying beside the
+train. Its two hind feet were crushed, as the engine, tender, and
+service car had passed over them; otherwise it was unhurt, and at times
+made violent efforts to stand upon its front feet. At such times the
+crowd of people would suddenly take flight, to be out of harm's way, and
+a box-car near by was in danger of being demolished. No one on the train
+was supplied with a large rifle, suitable for elephant hunting, but
+small ones kept up a lively fire, until perhaps three dozen were emptied
+into the huge bulk before it succumbed.
+
+The engine had been derailed by the violence of the shock, and it would
+require some time before we could proceed. Judging from the spoor it was
+evident that the elephant was one of those large ones that roam the
+forests alone, and it had run quite a distance on the track before the
+engine struck it. It was an immense animal, and the large ears resembled
+a cape lying back over the shoulders.
+
+There were a number of natives on the train, who were going down to work
+in the mines about Bulawayo, and they wished to begin at once on the
+feast of meat before them, but the authorities thought it best to put
+them at working the large jacks used in moving the engine back on the
+rails. All night long bright fires of logs were kept burning to light
+up the scene and work. The engine finally was in place, and the natives
+eagerly hastened to cut out large pieces of elephant meat and to roast
+it over the great beds of coal left from the campfires of the night.
+Soon, however, the train began to move, just twelve hours from the time
+of stopping, and the natives, with their raw or half-cooked meat,
+hastened to enter their car, and we moved on, having had a share in one
+of the most exciting railroad trips of the season. The tusks of this
+elephant finally found their way into the Bulawayo Museum.
+
+[Illustration: The Elephant That Derailed the Train.]
+
+The tusks of the African elephant often are quite large and heavy. I
+once saw in a European home three pairs of tusks from elephants lately
+killed by a young farmer. Of one pair of tusks each was five feet long,
+eighteen inches in diameter; one weighed one hundred pounds and the
+other five pounds less. We are informed, however, that some have tusks
+still much larger than these.
+
+It is unnecessary to give the details of this, our second trip south to
+Natal and Johannesburg, and my visit to our mission stations in the
+Matopos have already been mentioned. I was absent six months and felt
+thoroughly rested and ready for the work again. On my return to
+Bulawayo, however, I learned the sad news that the native who had come
+south on the train at the same time as myself had, since he was at home,
+fallen into sin. We were all deeply grieved over this, and he confessed
+and wept over his condition, but appeared discouraged and unable to take
+hold of the Lord by faith for pardon and cleansing. There were several
+others in his home who had once confessed Christ and had backslidden,
+and they no doubt had their influence over him. The Lord is still able
+to redeem him, and may he have our prayers. Such are some of the heavy
+burdens the missionaries have to bear.
+
+On my return in June, 1910, Misses Mary Heisey and Elizabeth Engle
+accompanied me to Macha to pay a visit to that place. Brother Taylor met
+us at the station and conveyed us to the mission, where we were greeted
+by a crowd of boys and five girls, who had joined the mission family,
+with the clapping of hands and the firing of a rifle. We rejoiced that
+we could again return to our field of labor.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission School, Boarders, 1910.]
+
+In the new house and improved surroundings every one had been well and
+the work had been moving forward in all its departments under the
+efficient management of Brother and Sister Taylor. Not only had these
+girls come to stay at the mission, but David had prevailed upon a number
+to attend day-school, at least part of the time. Sister Taylor, in
+addition to her many other duties, had formed all these girls into a
+sewing-class and was endeavoring to teach them to make garments for
+themselves. This was the first opportunity that had been given of
+instructing girls in sewing, and she had made remarkable progress also
+in instructing them in their work about the house.
+
+Naturally they do not know what cleanliness is, either about their
+person or in their homes. They seldom wash, they go half-clad, and smear
+their bodies with paint and grease, and often let the dogs lick clean
+the few dishes or pots which they possess. If their hands are wet or
+dirty, the posts of the veranda, blocks of wood, or floors are used as
+towels to wipe on. They see no reason for continually washing a lot of
+dishes, sweeping floors, and keeping the house in order; and they open
+their eyes in astonishment to see white sheets and tablecloths put into
+the water to be washed. The few articles of clothing to be seen in their
+homes are generally so thickly coated with grease and dirt as often to
+render it impossible to distinguish the color. Many times they do not
+have any soap, and even if they do have, they object to washing their
+clothing for fear it will wear out. And yet these young girls, reared in
+such homes had, in these few months, made rapid progress and were
+becoming quite proficient in assisting with some of the work of the
+kitchen. Sister Taylor's great patience in teaching them was bearing
+fruit.
+
+Brother Taylor had, in connection with his other duties, made a large
+galvanized iron tank to hold rain water. This was large enough for 1,700
+gallons of water, and was greatly needed, as the river water which we
+were obliged to use was very muddy part of the year. He had always
+maintained that he was no mechanic, but another missionary, Rev.
+Kerswell, who had had experience in mechanical work, said on seeing this
+tank, "Mr. Taylor, you say that you are no mechanic; but if you made
+this, you are one; for no one but a mechanic could perform such a piece
+of work."
+
+[Illustration: Macha Wagon and Oxen Near an Ant Hill.]
+
+While the sisters were with us Brother Taylor and wife arranged to take
+them on a trip north, so that they might have an opportunity of seeing
+something of the country and the natives. For this purpose the wagon was
+again fitted up with the tent and camping outfit and the ten oxen
+inspanned. A number of the schoolboys were permitted to accompany them
+for a holiday, but the regular driver for the wagon did not go along.
+They spent some time at the two large villages of Kabanzi and Simeoba,
+holding services and conversing with the natives, and then proceeded
+toward a village farther north. The grass was long, the road new, and
+darkness was coming on when they approached the village. As frequently
+happens near a village, there was a large opening in the ground from
+which clay had been taken to plaster the huts. This was partly hidden by
+the long grass, and had not been noticed in the gathering darkness.
+Brother Taylor had gone in advance to look out a place for camping,
+and some of the boys were driving. The wheels of one side of the wagon
+went down suddenly into the excavation and the wagon was overturned, the
+tent being under the heavy wagon. The accident might have been very
+serious for the women, but fortunately there were two large boxes in the
+wagon and these prevented the weight of the wagon from resting on them
+and they escaped without any serious injury, but the tent was of course
+ruined. Brother Taylor said that, as he hastened to the wagon, he heard
+a boy on the rear end of the wagon yelling lustily; so he felt satisfied
+that that one was not dead, and he turned his first attention to those
+who were making no noise.
+
+When the sisters returned to their fields of labor, David again returned
+home, this time to be married and bring back a wife from Mapani Station.
+
+The spiritual condition of the pupils continued excellent. There was a
+spirit of inquiry among them and a searching after God at times, as the
+Spirit was poured out upon them. Some prayed through to victory and a
+definite knowledge of sins forgiven. Those who had been with us longer
+were instrumental in bringing the newer ones to seek pardon. The spirit
+among them was such that any one who did not care to be a Christian
+generally did not remain long at the mission. At this time also we were
+favored with special donations and enabled to equip the school better
+and give more attention toward the training of teachers.
+
+It will be remembered that one of the special needs was a translation of
+the Scriptures into the language of the people. The books already in
+use, prepared by Rev. Smith, were in the Ila language. This was
+sufficiently allied to the Tonga for use at Macha; and it is always an
+advantage in the mission field to unify the languages as much as
+possible, so as to reduce rather than increase the number of languages.
+
+St. Mark was already in print, and Mr. Smith, together with some of his
+colleagues, was putting forth great efforts to translate the entire New
+Testament into Ila. At their urgent request I consented to be on the
+revision committee, for they desired to make the translation as
+intelligible as possible to the Batonga, so that it could be used all
+over Northwestern Rhodesia, with the exception of among the Barotse,
+where the Suto language was in use. Matthew was soon in print, and the
+entire New Testament is at present in the hands of the publishers. The
+translators deserve much praise for their laborious task and the
+creditable manner in which they have performed the much-needed
+translation. The Word cannot be properly disseminated among the people
+unless the pupils have it in their own language as they go out among the
+villages to teach.
+
+Placing native teachers in their homes seems to be the best method of
+reaching the majority of the people, and especially the girls; and some
+of the pupils were sufficiently advanced to begin teaching, yet they
+were somewhat young to go out into their dark, dark homes and stand
+alone for God. Notwithstanding this, before the end of 1910 several
+schools were opened in the nearest villages, and the teachers boarded
+at the mission and went back and forth to teach.
+
+On Christmas week of this year a sad and unfortunate affair occurred,
+which threw a gloom over the community. My readers will remember the
+Chief Macha, who sent a goat the first Christmas, and who was the first
+to bring his little boy as a pupil in school. To all appearances he was
+a friend of the work from the beginning, and he was nearly always to be
+found in his place at the services on Sunday. He had even expressed a
+desire several times to be a Christian. We knew his life had not
+changed, but he had evidently lost faith in some of the old pagan
+beliefs, and his influence was worth much. He was a man of importance in
+the neighborhood and the owner of a herd of cattle, which was quite
+large from a native standpoint.
+
+[Illustration: Simeboa's Village, Viewing the Strangers, Misses E. Engle
+and Mary Helsey.]
+
+On the day before Christmas word came that he had gone to the hills and
+could not be found; again that he was found dead, killed by a lion. His
+son at once went home, and I, together with some of the girls, soon
+followed. On the way to the village we met a native woman, who informed
+us that he was already buried, and on our arrival at the place we found
+that those who buried him had gone to the river to wash. While we were
+sitting there several of the people came to speak to us, and we noticed
+that some of the men spoke together in a low tone. Their answers to some
+of our questions were somewhat vague; but as there was no suspicion of
+foul play, we thought no more of the matter and asked no further
+questions.
+
+After the people returned from the river, the wailing began by about
+thirty or thirty-five men walking back and forth; brandishing their
+assegais and guns and crying "_Mawe!_" At the same time the women stood
+about the grave, wailing and calling upon the dead. The sight was
+somewhat fearful and might have alarmed a stranger, but since the
+majority of these were from the adjacent kraals and were acquainted with
+us we feared no violence. In the evening Brother Taylor and the boys
+went over to show their sympathy, and the next day services were held
+there. All this time nothing further was learned except that the chief
+was killed by a lion. The English official from Kalomo, who, with his
+messengers, happened to be in the neighborhood at the time, received the
+same version of the cause of the death as we did. According to native
+custom, the brother of the deceased assumed his title and appropriated
+his cattle, and the affair, as far as it concerned ourselves, was
+dropped.
+
+About three weeks later Lupata, another chief, who lived near, together
+with one of his men, and Kaiba, a nephew of the deceased, came to inform
+us that Macha had been murdered. They said that he had been murdered
+while out on the veldt, and an attempt made to hide the body. A number
+of natives went to search for him, Lupata among the number, and when
+they discovered the body they saw at once that a murder had been
+committed. The brother of the murdered man enjoined the rest to secrecy
+and promised to give Lupata some cattle if he would not tell the
+missionaries or officials of the crime. Lupata, although very fond of
+cattle, of which he had only a few, did not jump at the bribe. He said
+that he and Kaiba desired to inform me on the day of the funeral that
+the chief had been murdered, but the brother said, "Do not talk about it
+to the white people," and they had been silent for fear of offending
+him; as natives never like to gain the ill will of their fellows.
+
+We might have heard nothing further about it, at least for a time; but
+the brother was afraid the crime might leak out, and he still hoped to
+silence the affair by giving the other chief some cattle. To do this he
+was not willing to take of his own cattle, which he had taken from the
+murdered man, but tried to take those of Kaiba, who was a good,
+unassuming native. Kaiba greatly resented this disposition of his
+property, and wanted to take the matter to the magistrate at Kalomo. He
+and Lupata came to inform us of the murder and wished us to inform the
+magistrate by letter. Lupata said, "I do not want his cattle and I think
+you should write and tell the _Mwami_ [magistrate] of the murder." Both
+refused to state who they thought was the murderer.
+
+Brother Taylor wrote an explanation of the affair and Kaiba carried the
+letter to the magistrate, the brother and two other natives
+accompanying. This was the first intimation the magistrate had of foul
+play, and when he put the question to them they readily acknowledged
+that the man had been murdered. The brother, however, who had always
+been opposed to everything good, and had a very evil countenance, showed
+the cunning of his master; and he and one of the men accompanying put
+the blame on the third. This one acknowledged his guilt, saying that he
+and the other had killed the chief and the brother had sent them. We
+were informed later that the brother sent them three times before they
+became willing to perform the deed. Of course all three were put behind
+the bars.
+
+It was a case of alleged witchcraft. Several children had died in the
+kraal under peculiar circumstances, and the blame had been laid by the
+brother, who was a witch doctor, on the chief. We prefer to think, from
+what we know of the two, that the brother was the guilty one in each
+instance, and was desirous of the chief's property and position.
+
+[Illustration: Sisters Engle Crossing the Tuli River in the Matopo
+Hills.]
+
+During this rainy season it was thought advisable for Brother and Sister
+Taylor to go to Bulawayo and Matopo Mission for a much-needed rest. She
+went in November and he followed in January, 1911. At the same time
+David returned with his wife, Mankunku. Mankunku is one of the converts
+from Mapani Mission. She is a sincere Christian girl, and has proved a
+great help and blessing among the women and girls at Macha ever since
+she came. These two, with myself, prosecuted the work at Macha for the
+next five months alone.
+
+There were at this time forty-six boys and four girls staying at the
+mission, and it was necessary, not only to teach them in school, but to
+keep them profitably employed during work hours and out on the farm.
+Quite a fair amount of land was under cultivation, and Brother Taylor
+had planted grain, fruit, and vegetables before he left, the care of
+which gave the boys plenty of work to do during the rainy season. As
+soon as that was over David made use of them in getting grass and poles
+together for building, and as permanent buildings were to be erected
+they tried to secure hardwood rafters.
+
+Although there were so many boys together, yet all manifested a nice
+Christian spirit. They were not quarrelsome, and they were obedient and
+faithful in their work. The chief difficulty with natives is that they
+are inclined to keep their eyes fixed on the missionary too constantly
+and do not learn to depend on God for their own spiritual needs. The
+missionary, as he realizes the responsibility resting upon him, often
+feels like exclaiming, "Who is sufficient for these things?" to lead all
+in the right way. He may rejoice, however, that he can continually say,
+"My sufficiency is of God." He must also by every means in his power get
+their eyes off of himself and fix them on God. Otherwise they will do
+what is right at the mission and fall when those props are removed.
+
+June 16 I wrote somewhat as follows:
+
+     Last Monday the wagon went to the Myeki River (about five miles
+     distant) to get some thatching grass which the boys had cut there
+     the week before. I thought it an excellent opportunity to visit
+     Semani, who has been sick for some time and not likely to recover.
+     I took along three girls and the two six-year-old boys and
+     thoroughly dismissed from my mind home cares. We had a delightful
+     ride over and a nice walk back, but best of all was the visit with
+     Semani. He had accepted Christ while here at the mission and had
+     often accompanied David in his kraal-visiting. He became sick,
+     however, and we seemed unable to help him, so he desired to return
+     home until he was well. He was always hoping he would recover and
+     return to us.
+
+     He has pleurisy and is continually growing worse, and it is evident
+     that the end is not far off. He greeted me with a smile as I
+     entered, and while we were speaking, I inquired "Is Jesus here?"
+     The reply, with a bright smile was, "Yes, He is here." We continued
+     to speak of the things of the other world and what the Lord has in
+     store for His children, and through it all he seemed so ready both
+     to talk and to listen. His old heathen mother sat there in sort of
+     a dazed wonder to hear us speaking thus familiarly and without fear
+     of death and transition. For her sake I then asked him if he were
+     afraid to die. He quickly replied, "Oh, no, I am not at all afraid
+     to die; I am ready."
+
+     Later, when we bowed in prayer, he prayed, "I thank Thee, God, for
+     Thy help and blessing. I have come through some hard places, but
+     Thou hast given me victory. And, Jesus, if my time has come and You
+     want to take me, it is all right. I'll gladly go with You."
+
+     How we could rejoice that here was one who, only two or three years
+     ago, was a raw heathen boy, now so happy in the Lord, and so ready
+     to meet Him. If one soul is worth more than the whole world then
+     our coming to Macha has not been in vain. His people had been
+     wanting to "throw bones" and "smell out" the one who, according to
+     their ideas, had bewitched him, but he steadfastly refused, for he
+     has no faith in those things.
+
+[Illustration: The Bottle Palm.]
+
+Later it was my privilege to again visit him, together with Mankunku. We
+had made a trip to a village beyond, where we remained for the night,
+and stopped with Semani, both going and returning. He was much weaker at
+this time and it was evident the end was near, and his friends had
+gathered and were ready for the wailing. We found him, although in great
+pain and with great difficulty in breathing, yet rejoicing and happy in
+the thought that he was soon going home. He could not lie down, but was
+supported in the arms of his mother, who was doing all in her power to
+help him bear his suffering. He was, however, able to take a little of
+the nourishment which we brought him. On our return the day following,
+he was still weaker. In the night his friends thought he was dying, when
+he suddenly roused and sang "_Jesu udi tu fwine_" ("Jesus loves me").
+These heathen friends in speaking to one another the next day said, "His
+heart is white toward God, and that is the reason he can sing when
+dying."
+
+Before we departed he requested Christian burial, so we left word for
+them to inform us at once of his death. Word came that same evening.
+Brother Taylor was at home by this time, and he and David, together with
+a number of the schoolboys, went at once to the burial, although it was
+night. They found the body prepared for burial and the people digging
+the grave. Brother Taylor said everything was carried on most quietly
+until services were over and the body had been buried; then the heathen
+part of the wailing began in earnest. His brother, while wailing,
+continued to cry out, "Semani, where has he gone? He has gone to the
+light. Oh! where has he gone?" It was the wail of gross darkness seeing
+a faint glimmer of light, but knowing not how to reach it.
+
+The deathbed of our friends, surrounded with all the comforts this life
+can afford--soft beds, willing, low-voiced nurses, dainty food, helpful
+and spiritual ministrations--is often trying enough; here, however, was
+one deprived of all these comforts, with the exception of the occasional
+visits of his missionaries, lying or sitting on the hard floor, with
+only a mat for a bed, without even the ordinary decencies of life, much
+less its comforts, in a village and home wholly pagan; and yet he goes,
+rejoicing in his Savior's love, carried out of this dark hovel to behold
+things "Eye hath not seen, nor ear heard, neither have entered into the
+heart of man the things which God hath prepared," but He had already
+revealed them unto him by His Spirit.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT
+
+Further Improvements and Industrial Work
+
+
+Industrial work had from the first progressed very favorably at the
+mission. The majority of boys, as they came, stayed on from year to year
+and exhibited more tenacity of purpose than is generally to be found
+among the natives. Some of them had assisted in making brick for the
+house and in the building; others had learned to handle the oxen in the
+wagon and on the farm in plowing, harrowing, and cultivating, while a
+number were engaged in gardening, hoeing, and the general work of the
+farm. Even the youngest were not idle, although their labors did not
+equal the expense of their keeping. We were, however, growing sufficient
+grain and food to supply our large family so that they could be kept
+from year to year under Christian training without their proving a heavy
+burden on the mission financially.
+
+In June we were pleased to receive Brother and Sister Taylor back from
+Bulawayo, and with them a blessing to the mission in the person of a
+little baby, Ruth Taylor. I use the term _blessing_ advisedly, for this
+dainty little Ruth was indeed such to all connected with the work. These
+people had not seen a white child, and this one was an ever-increasing
+source of wonder and interest to the black faces around us. They would
+stand near her noting every move and commenting on everything they saw.
+Her soft white skin and spotless garments soon gave her a name. "U
+swezhiwa" ("she is clean or pure") the girls called her, and thus she
+undoubtedly looked by contrast. Her presence often attracted to the
+services people, especially the women, who otherwise would have remained
+at home; for in the eyes of some, all other interests paled besides this
+mite of humanity, and it warmed their hearts toward the entire work.
+When we went to the village she was again a center of attraction, and
+when we went alone the natives would always inquire about U swezhiwa and
+her mother. When prayer was offered by the boys for the missionaries,
+the child was never forgotten.
+
+After Brother Taylor's return the preparation for building went forward
+with accelerated speed. This dry season of 1911 was an unusually busy
+one at Macha. A church was greatly needed, for the one which David had
+erected four years previously, and which appeared to be so well-built,
+was rapidly showing signs of decay. It was still standing, but the ants
+had riddled the roof to such an extent that some of the timbers were
+falling, piece by piece, sometimes to the danger and great annoyance of
+those within. On this account we decided that it was best to vacate it
+even before the new one was finished. The boys' huts also were decaying,
+and we found it difficult to house the large number of boys staying at
+the mission. These thatched roofs are very heavy, and if some part of
+the wall becomes weak the huts may become dangerous to life.
+
+One evening the boys of one of the huts came to say that the roof of
+their hut was breaking. We told them to take their blankets and clothing
+and go into another hut. They did so, and in the morning their own
+building was found leveled to the ground. As we viewed the sudden ruin
+we breathed a prayer of thanksgiving that no one was hurt. There had
+been about fifteen boys sleeping in that hut, and had they been inside
+some would have been killed or seriously injured. This enabled us to
+realize how dangerous huts were when partly eaten, and the need of
+better buildings.
+
+On account of building it was fortunate that there was such a large
+number of boys staying at the mission, and that the majority were large
+enough to be of service, so that there was no need of employing outside
+labor. Brother Taylor was excellent in training boys along industrial
+lines, a quality which is especially useful and helpful on the mission
+field, both in the interests of the work and of the natives themselves.
+Some people are glad to use native helpers when they are trained ready
+to order, but they soon become discouraged when time and patience are
+required.
+
+The native learns by doing, and often learns by his many mistakes.
+Again, he may be careless and consider accuracy unnecessary. He is
+nature's child, and everything he does for himself is in curves. His hut
+is round, his baskets are round, his paths are meandering, like the
+stream, for he, like it, goes in the path of least resistance. Straight
+lines and right angles are unintelligible to him, and he does not
+readily grasp such things, nor does he easily learn to make them.
+Patience, which is always a virtue, is, in industrial work among the
+natives, an absolute necessity. One who will not take time and teach
+them will accomplish nothing praiseworthy in this respect.
+
+We said the native learns by doing; so he does, but it is generally by
+doing not once or twice but repeatedly. One of my first lessons along
+this line was when visiting in the home of an official. The lady had
+always lived in South Africa and had been accustomed to deal with the
+natives all her life. Noticing a basket of snowy-white clothes I
+inquired, "Who does your washing?"
+
+She replied, "The boys; I send them to the river to wash."
+
+"But how can you teach them to do their work so well?"
+
+"If they do not do it properly," she replied, "I send them back to
+repeat it until it suits me."
+
+This is the keynote of the situation. In addition to showing them how to
+perform a task, one must insist on their doing it just as they have been
+told. If they become careless or learn with difficulty, one should not
+become discouraged and go and finish the work--for this frequently is
+easier than to teach the natives--but should insist on their repeating
+the task until it is properly done. Some natives with very little
+instruction become experts at certain kinds of work. And sometimes even
+raw ones readily adapt themselves to housework with very little
+training. A lady in Bulawayo, who was a very careful housekeeper, had a
+native boy as servant, who was giving excellent satisfaction, yet she
+supposed that on her own exertions depended the work of keeping the
+rooms in order. Finally he concluded to leave her service, and she said
+she did not know until after he left how much work he had really done.
+He had been in the habit, early in the morning, before his master and
+mistress arose, of going over the house, cleaning and polishing mirrors
+and furniture.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission Church and Boys' House Built by Mr. Myron
+Taylor.]
+
+Another native, whose name has been frequently mentioned in these pages,
+was exceedingly cleanly and careful in his personal appearance. His
+clothes were always well washed and mended, and he went on the principle
+that a stitch in time saves nine. He learned to do things by seeing
+others perform them and was able to do them well. Although coming from a
+raw heathen home he was called an exceptional native, even by those who
+had had long experience with civilized natives.
+
+As a rule those who are careful and painstaking are generally slow, and
+many who are quick often do not perform their work properly. Some never
+seem to respond to careful teaching, and with others, many both trying
+and ludicrous blunders often occur. In the early days of Macha Mission
+we had a half-grown boy, by the name of Hamambile, helping in the
+kitchen. He was a good boy and seemed to be performing his work
+properly. One day several of the boys, who had been working on the farm
+and had soiled their hands, came into the kitchen. Hamambile was washing
+the dishes, so he generously stepped aside and invited the boys to wash
+their hands in the water where the dishes were being washed, and this
+they were vigorously doing when Sister Engle stepped in at the door. Nor
+did her presence in the least abash the boys, for they saw no
+impropriety in the act.
+
+Again, during the last year some new girls had joined the mission family
+and were being initiated into the mysteries of housekeeping. They seemed
+to learn well and were doing their work properly, but one day Sister
+Doner, on looking out of the window, was shocked to see a girl out in
+the yard with the dishpan, washing her feet. She too failed to see
+anything out of place in her act when she was first spoken to. She said
+she was just making use of some of the nice soapsuds on the water, for
+she thought it was too nice to throw away. It can easily be seen that
+one needs to be continually watchful while teaching some of them. On the
+other hand, there is no doubt that the raw native considers the white
+man or woman very cranky and extreme when he insists on cleanliness and
+order about the work.
+
+On account of the great need it was necessary to build both a church and
+boys' house in the one dry season. There was erected a substantial
+church, 42 x 21 feet, with a wide veranda in front, which was also
+partly walled up, and a boys' house, 55 x 16 feet, of five rooms, with a
+veranda all along the front. These were both of burnt brick with
+thatched roofs. All the hardwood timber for rafters and plates, and also
+the large amount of thatching grass, were procured by the boys the same
+season, beginning in March and April. The bricks too were made and both
+buildings were under cover by the 1st of December. This was all done
+with the aid of the school boys under the supervision of Brother Taylor,
+assisted by David. Part of the time the work was in progress during
+school hours, the boys who assisted at such times receiving full wages,
+as they are all eager to earn a little extra money. During the month of
+brickmaking, the boys donated their time as an offering to the Church.
+
+After they had made the bricks, Brother Taylor started on the foundation
+of the church, and then trained several of the Batonga boys in
+bricklaying. Together with himself and David they laid the walls of the
+church, all the larger boys having a share in some part of the work. The
+walls of the building are high, are fourteen inches in thickness and
+well laid. When this was completed Brother Taylor left David, assisted
+by some of the boys, to put on the thatched roof, which too is an
+excellent piece of work, while he turned his attention to the boys'
+house. Nearly all the brick work of this building was done by the boys
+under his supervision, and at the same time he was directing some in
+sawing by hand and making door and window frames out of the native
+hardwood timber. Later some of the boys were instructed in thatching it.
+
+When this boys' house, fifty-five feet long, was completed in January,
+the only thing in its construction that had been bought for the purpose
+was the zinc under the walls to exclude the ants. The doors were made of
+the boards of packing cases in which a wagon had been sent from America;
+the thatching was tied on with strips of animal hides procured from the
+natives. The bedsteads were made of poles procured in the forests and
+reeds from the river. These were tied with bark string, and over the top
+were placed animal hides also bought from the natives. Later the rooms
+were whitewashed and they, with the long veranda in front, made an
+excellent and clean-looking home for the boys. The church had imported
+doors and windows, as well as zinc and thatching twine. Otherwise the
+material was almost native.
+
+[Illustration: Ruth Taylor and Her Mother. A White Child in the Midst.]
+
+It was a creditable year's work and Brother Taylor deserved much praise
+for the ability with which it was all managed and the boys trained. No
+doubt some, on reading these lines, might say, "I could never be a
+missionary if I had to build like that!" "Where there is a will there is
+a way," is just as applicable on the mission field as elsewhere. It is
+surprising what one can accomplish if he is willing to be used. Every
+one of the men on the mission field has done excellent work along these
+lines, as the well-built brick houses and churches on the six mission
+stations at the present day testify. Some at first declared that they
+could not build, but, doubtless, today they look with surprise and
+satisfaction on the work of their own hands. In addition to this they
+have every reason to be thankful for the great amount of missionary work
+they were able to accomplish in the building by training and fitting the
+boys to a higher plane of living.
+
+After the buildings were under roof, Brother Taylor, who had always
+desired to devote more time to evangelistic work among the villages,
+felt that his way was opened to attend almost exclusively to that line
+of work. Previous to this he had held services at many of the villages,
+such as Mapanza, Simeoba, Kabanzi, Kabwe, and at almost all the
+important villages near as well as north among the Baila; but during the
+year following he went out with his tent and sometimes spent two, three,
+and even four weeks at one place, so that he might have an opportunity
+of giving the people a fair conception of the Gospel. He spent a month
+at Chungu, near a large village, over twenty miles from the mission.
+
+He had visited the place before, but the people were not eager to
+listen. At this time he pitched his tent a short distance from the
+village and informed the people that he had come to teach them, and that
+those desiring to hear should come to the tent at such a time as best
+suited them. About 8 A. M. every day a fair-sized congregation gathered
+at the tent and heard the Gospel expounded to them. He had some very
+good meetings at that place, and the people became interested
+sufficiently to request a school.
+
+During the year he found many open doors and gave the Gospel to a large
+number of people who had never heard of a Savior, and there were urgent
+calls to start new stations in the needy places. How one longs to see
+some one step in at the opportune time and plant lights in the midst of
+the darkness!
+
+While this work was progressing David devoted his time to finishing the
+new buildings and overseeing the boys at work. A dear Christian lady had
+sent out money for seats in the new church, and he began to make them,
+and accomplished this task well, and the building was furnished with
+good, comfortable seats. Some of the boys, in writing to their friends
+who were away at work, said, "We have nice seats in the church and we do
+not become tired when we sit on them a long time." A good solid floor
+was also put in, and this was tarred and sanded.
+
+In November, 1911, we again had the privilege of welcoming Elder
+Steigerwald to Macha. He had lately returned from a furlough to America,
+and his visit was like getting a glimpse of the outside world. The
+Mission Board had sent out with him for Macha a large two-seated spring
+wagon with canvas top, something just suited for this country and
+climate. It was a most welcome and useful addition to our outfit.
+Especially since there are roads all over the country to the principal
+villages, this was helpful in evangelistic work and in visiting the
+out-schools, which were on the increase. The old days of laborious
+tramp were more or less in the past, and a new era seemed ushered in.
+Brother Steigerwald put the wagon together and added a long, useful box
+in front. Four oxen were then inspanned and we tested it. It is indeed a
+most satisfactory and comfortable conveyance and adds much to the
+enjoyment of the work.
+
+While the bishop was with us eleven more boys were baptized and received
+into church fellowship. The first ten were all standing true, so that
+our number had now increased to twenty-one. There were as yet no girls
+or women ready for baptism, but some were beginning to accept Christ as
+their Savior.
+
+As the new church was nearly completed at the time of his visit, it was
+thought advisable to dedicate this also before his return. He gave a
+most excellent sermon on the occasion, and we were all strengthened by
+his visit among us.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE
+
+The Native
+
+The most interesting thing in Africa is the native himself; the more I
+see him and study him the more I respect him.--Bishop J. C. Hartzell.
+
+
+I most heartily voice the sentiment expressed above. The study of the
+native is a most interesting one and worthy of the best minds of the
+age. The latent power and ability lying back of some of those crude
+exteriors is often marvelous, and the transformation often wrought by a
+few years of careful, sympathetic training far more than repays for all
+the labor expended.
+
+From what has already been given in the preceding pages, some idea of
+the native character may be gleaned, and yet it is impossible to give in
+such a book an adequate conception of the nature of the natives. In
+fact, the only way to know them is to live among them, and then one can
+not be sure that he has the correct idea. The subject is so many-sided,
+so elusive, and above all so changing that it is doubtful if any one can
+tell all there might be given.
+
+This twentieth century has produced three large volumes on the African
+native, which, in the estimation of the general public, seem to occupy a
+preeminent position among the many books continually written. I refer to
+"Thinking Black," by Daniel Crawford; "White and Black in South Africa,"
+by M. S. Evans; and "The Essential Kaffir," by Dudley Kidd. The first
+is the work of a missionary who has spent twenty-two unbroken years in
+the heart of the African Continent. The second is the work of a
+politician who has studied the native problem deeply and sympathetically
+from a governmental standpoint and has given his opinions and
+conclusions in a clear and convincing manner. The third work might be
+said to have been written from an independent standpoint, and is by many
+Europeans in South Africa considered the best thing written on the
+native. One who has lived long in Africa might be inclined to differ
+with any one or all of these writers in some points, but they are all
+excellent and well worthy of careful study.
+
+I was once speaking with an official who had had long experience in
+dealing with native problems, and whose opinions along these lines were
+sought after by others. I asked him, "Wherein do you think lies the
+chief difficulty in dealing with the native?" He replied somewhat as
+follows:
+
+"I think it lies in this: that the native so readily responds to
+civilization and improvement, that he comes up to our highest
+expectation along some lines; and then we, forgetting the generations of
+barbarism back of him, think he should measure up to our expectations
+along all lines. When he fails us at some particular point we become
+disgusted and do not give him credit for the advancement he has made."
+
+There seems to be much truth in the above statement and it has often
+been a help to me in dealing with natives. There is something else also
+which must not be lost sight of, and that is that as much as possible
+they should be dealt with as individuals. Too often the white man thinks
+the natives are all made over the same mould, and that the
+characteristics of one are the characteristics of all. He will often not
+take the trouble to study their individuality, and perhaps he thinks
+they do not have any. This is not surprising. Europeans often visit New
+York, remain a short time and then return home, thinking they know
+Americans, and can be found prating of how Americans do. If people come
+to such superficial conclusions about such a heterogeneous mass of
+humanity as exists in the United States of America, it is not surprising
+that one or two natives in the eyes of many white people stand as a type
+of all Africans.
+
+The writer has had an opportunity of studying the natives of four or
+five tribes and has come into contact in various ways with several other
+tribes, yet she feels that her knowledge of the native character is in
+many respects superficial and unsatisfactory. It has this to recommend
+it, however, that it is gleaned at first hand from many years' residence
+among the raw and semi-civilized Africans.
+
+We have tried to show that the natives differ greatly in their ability
+to learn in school and out of it, in their habits of cleanliness, and in
+their readiness to receive the Gospel. As there was a large number of
+boys about us day by day, we found that they also greatly differed in
+disposition, as much so as white people, and it was necessary to study
+the characteristic of each in dealing with them. They soon understand if
+the missionary respects and trusts them; and they readily respond to
+such treatment and show by their conduct that such confidence is not
+misplaced. On the other hand, if they are censured for a fault,
+especially if they think the censure is unjust, they soon become
+careless and discouraged. On account of their secluded and simple life
+they, even the grown ones, are much like children when they first come
+into contact with white people, and they fail to understand why two
+persons should treat them differently--why two missionaries or two
+masters should not have the same way of doing things, the same
+generosity and the same dispositions.
+
+Child-life of these dark-skinned Africans is in some respects not so
+different from that of their white neighbors, unless it is in its
+greater freedom. Until it learns to walk, the child spends much of its
+time on its mother's or older sister's back, tied by a skin with its
+face toward the mother. In the early days at Matopo, Matshuba once
+inquired how our mother carried us when we were children. We said she
+carried us on her arms. He nodded his head sagely and exclaimed, "That
+explains it. That is why your noses are long and straight and ours are
+flat."
+
+[Illustration: Little Nurses. Mianda Village.]
+
+On the mother's back the child sleeps and coos and observes what goes on
+about it. Here it bobs up and down as the mother handles the hoe, stamps
+or grinds the meal, or goes about her cooking. Here it takes rides as
+the mother goes after wood or water, or on long journeys to visit her
+friends. Occasionally she removes it from her back, straightens out its
+cramped limbs, feeds it, and then places it on the ground to play. It
+has no garments to impede its progress, and so it soon learns to help
+itself, crawls about and picks up earth or whatever comes in its way and
+eats it, no one objecting.
+
+As it becomes older the freedom is still greater, especially if it is a
+boy. There is no school to confine him, no hard lessons, no table
+manners, no daily washings, oftentimes. He runs, he hunts, he fishes, he
+plays often the long day through, together with the other little ones of
+the village. He has no clock to tell him the time of the day, except the
+great orb above him, and this he learns to read with surprising
+accuracy. As it sinks in the west, he comes with his assegais and
+faithful dogs, and with a rabbit or some birds, carried on a stick
+across his shoulders, proudly displaying his prowess in hunting. He
+makes bows and arrows, popguns, plays hockey and other games, makes clay
+animals, wagons, and many other things. In fact, some native boys are
+genuine artists, and it is a pleasure to watch them deftly mould animals
+of various kinds.
+
+His sister will have her doll, made from a stick of wood, a corncob, or
+the like, and tie it on her back, like her mamma does. She plays at
+housekeeping, grinding, cooking, and imitating her elders, the same as
+her white sisters do. She is also expected to help take care of the baby
+and younger members of the family, as her brother is often expected to
+herd the cattle or sheep, for there are no fences to confine them. All
+of these children, however, often suffer from hunger, cold, and
+nakedness, and worst of all they generally indulge in many evils which
+cling to them and greatly retard their progress when light comes to
+them. They also become quite cruel and unfeeling about giving pain to
+animals and birds. Every accessible bird's nest is robbed and the young
+birds, partly plucked, are thrown, often while still alive, on the live
+coals to roast and furnish them a dainty morsel. When a bird is secured
+there is not the least compunction about plucking off all the feathers
+without killing the bird. Once, when I was lying sick in bed, the four
+girls staying at the mission came in laughing and carrying the fledgling
+of a secretary bird. It was about the size of a half-grown chicken, and
+had all the feathers plucked from it while it was alive, and in this
+condition it was still blinking with its big, solemn-looking eyes. The
+brother of one had brought it in this condition, and to them it was a
+good joke to see it thus.
+
+As one enters the raw African's village and sees the native in the midst
+of his filthy and uncouth surroundings, lacking seemingly the very
+necessities of life, he readily concludes that the African is lazy,
+shiftless, lacking in resources, and exceedingly dull or he would have
+advanced further in civilization even before the advent of the white
+man. To a certain extent this is true, for even the native, after he is
+somewhat civilized and looks back to where he came from, has been heard
+to exclaim, "We must be the dullest people on earth. Others could read
+and write and knew something of civilization, but we Africans knew
+nothing." We need, however, but to look back to our own Celtic and
+Teutonic ancestry to see barbarism and illiteracy.
+
+The African pagan cannot be said to be lacking in resources, however.
+He wishes fire and he goes and selects two suitable twigs of wood. Into
+one he cuts a notch and the other he points. Placing the first on the
+ground, he inserts the point of the other into the notch and twirls it
+rapidly between his hands until it strikes fire. At the same time he has
+on hand some inflammable substance upon which he places the fire and
+soon has a blaze. He can thus roast his fish or meat. He wishes cooking
+vessels; and the woman goes to the river and procures the proper kind of
+clay, which she mixes with water and works until it is the required
+consistency. She then takes a piece, and with deft fingers moulds it
+into a circle, and places it on a stone or piece of broken crockery. She
+adds more and more clay, carefully shaping it with her hands as she
+proceeds upward until the top is finished. Then she puts it aside for a
+while until the clay sets and becomes slightly dried, after which she
+carefully removes and turns it and moulds the bottom, and when dried she
+burns it. In this way she makes earthen pots of many kinds and sizes,
+from the dainty small ones, which are often nicely glazed and
+artistically marked, to the large, heavy beer pots, holding ten or
+twelve gallons.
+
+Weapons for war, hunting, and domestic purposes are needed. The man goes
+to the hills and digs until he finds the iron ore. He smelts it and with
+the iron thus obtained makes axes, assegais, hoes, and other useful
+implements. He burns wood and makes charcoal for his forge. His bellows
+are made from the skins of animals and the pipes are clay tile; and the
+anvil and hammers are also pieces of the iron he has obtained. He
+moulds, welds, shapes, and performs all the work of the ordinary
+blacksmith. If his hoe wears out he will take the iron that is left and
+shape it into an assegai bristling with points. With three or four of
+these and a shield made of hide, he will go out to fight his neighbor,
+or perhaps he will have bow and steel-tipped arrows, which he dips in a
+poisonous substance to ensure their deadly work.
+
+Or, if it is in time of peace, he makes use of his assegais and his
+faithful dog and supplies his household with meat. If he has been
+fortunate enough to secure an old blunderbuss of a gun, he tinkers at it
+till it works. He may not be able by law to buy any ammunition from the
+white man, or even lead to make bullets; but he will manage in some way
+to obtain some ammunition. Perhaps the chance possession of a nail, or
+solder melted from a tin can, will, by a laborious process, be turned
+into bullets, for time is no object to him when working for himself. In
+the same way he will secure some gunpowder or the ingredients for it,
+either by barter with his neighbors, who have been to town, or
+elsewhere.
+
+He wishes fish, and he will spear or catch them with hooks, or his wife
+will, with willowlike twigs and bark strings, make a long troughlike
+net, and as the water subsides she will supply her household with fish.
+Both fish and meat are dried and preserved for future consumption.
+
+[Illustration: Batonga Fisher Women.]
+
+The native wishes a hut to live in. He goes to the forest and with the
+axe cuts down poles and carries them home, and with his hoe digs a
+trench into which he places them. With some forked sticks he makes a
+neat doorframe. Thin, willowy poles are also brought and split through
+the center, and one piece is placed on the outside and one inside of the
+poles of the hut, and with bark strings he firmly ties these together
+and thus secures the poles in their places. They are also fastened at
+the top in a similar manner, so that the walls of the hut are firmly
+fastened together, for of course his hut is round. With his method of
+building he is wise in making it round, as it is more easily done and
+stronger when completed. The slender, straight poles for the roof are
+fastened together in the same way. These are often extended beyond the
+walls so as to form a veranda, which may or may not be enclosed. The
+wife takes her hoe or assegai and cuts grass to thatch the hut. She also
+takes some of the beautiful long grass, and with bark string makes a
+large mat to form a partition to separate the bed-room from the
+living-room. They need a bed and the man will procure forked sticks and
+fasten them firmly in the ground as bedposts, and on this with poles,
+reeds, bark string, and animal hides he makes a bed. Skins may also be
+used for blankets, and if they should be lacking in these they build a
+fire or place a pan of coals underneath or near the bed. Some Africans
+weave blankets and some make them out of the inner bark of the trees;
+others purchase from traders.
+
+The native needs a chair, so he goes to the forest and, selecting a
+certain kind of tree, he cuts a suitable block of wood. With his little
+axe he hews and cuts until from a solid block of wood he makes a very
+respectable-looking chair, or stool, varying in height from six to
+fourteen inches. In the same way he makes spoons, stamping blocks,
+dishes, and other household articles. These he carefully oils to prevent
+cracking, and often colors and ornaments them. The natives along the
+large rivers make their own dugout canoes. A large gourd or earthen jar
+answers for a water bucket, one with a long handle for a dipper, a very
+large one with woven top is used for a churn, a long one as a butter
+receptacle, and a very small one for a snuffbox. A small piece of iron,
+nicely shaped and beaten thin, is snuff spoon and handkerchief.
+
+A large flat stone, built in a clay receptacle with an earthen jar at
+the end, is the mill, and on this another stone is used to grind. The
+wife needs baskets. She procures palm leaves, bark string, reeds, and
+willows and makes baskets of various kinds: a flat one for a sieve,
+dainty little ones for plates for their stiff porridge, larger ones for
+grain, and still larger ones for reaping. She also makes mats of various
+kinds. Skins of animals do for clothing. They are so confident that this
+is the native invention, that one of the boys, in reading of the
+garments of our first parents, declared they must have been black
+because they wore skins. The girls' loincloth is made of bark string.
+Their clay pipes are often quite artistically made, and so hard that it
+is difficult to distinguish them from metal.
+
+In all of these things just mentioned the native is in no way dependent
+upon the European; they are of his own invention and manufacture, except
+the rifle. It is not to be supposed that any one native makes all the
+various articles. There are blacksmiths, potters, basketmakers, and
+workers in wood, and the rest barter for or buy the things they need.
+
+Given various colored beads, some fine and some heavy wire, a few
+buttons, shells, and ivory rings, and they are adept at adorning the
+body, at least according to the native's idea of beauty. In some
+respects the barbarous African's idea of ornamentation does not differ
+materially from that of her white sisters, the difference being one of
+degree rather than of kind. The American beauty thinks one or two
+strings of beads around her neck are quite the proper thing, and add to
+her charm. The African beauty will tell you that if one or two are nice,
+four or five are nicer. It is the same with the bracelets; the American
+belle is pleased with one or two on her wrists. The African is likewise,
+but she is better pleased with a dozen, only she adds utility to beauty
+and thinks that a lot of heavy rings around her wrists or ankles add to
+their strength and give her corresponding value in the eyes of the
+opposite sex. Then too she will tell you that her god told her to adorn
+herself thus, which is doubtless true.
+
+What has been said of inventive ability applies more or less to all
+pagan Africans, although in different sections of the country they
+differ somewhat in their work. The Batonga, by whom we are surrounded,
+do not at present remove the iron from the ore, but there are many
+blacksmiths among them, and according to some of the old natives they
+were accustomed to smelt the ore. There are certainly evidences of iron
+workings in this part of the country. Brother Taylor made inquiry of an
+old native in reference to these workings. He said that many years ago
+the Batonga used to work them and thus obtain their own iron. Then their
+Barotse conquerors came and killed all the iron workers and told them to
+come to the Barotse and purchase their iron. No doubt this was done to
+weaken them in battle. (See 1 Samuel 13: 19-22.) In this instance the
+smiths remained, but they go to the Barotse to purchase hoes and pig
+iron. Since the old ones were killed, the younger generation were afraid
+to smelt the ore.
+
+All the Africans brew their own beer. They also grow tobacco, which they
+both smoke and snuff, and they grow a kind of hemp which they smoke. Of
+course they raise their own food, and before the arrival of the white
+man some even procured their own salt.
+
+As to the general character of the raw natives--for it is of them we are
+writing--we hesitate sometimes to tell what we do know. But the
+missionary, however much he may think of the Africans and enjoy his work
+among them, cannot, dare not, be blind to their faults. It has been said
+of them that they are naturally liars, thieves, and harlots; a hard
+saying, truly, but there is a measure of truth in it. As a people there
+is little or no reliance to be placed on their word, especially when
+they desire to shield themselves, their relatives, or even their tribes.
+Possibly a native may tell an untruth for the mere pleasure of it. This
+habit is so inbred that it is difficult to overcome it; and yet by
+careful religious training, and the power of the Holy Spirit, one is
+frequently surprised at the progress they make in speaking the truth
+under very trying conditions--that is, when they are led to see the
+evil of the opposite course.
+
+Thieving is probably not so prominent, but it exists, not only, as some
+affirm, among the half-civilized, but also among the raw heathen. Every
+missionary, who has seen heathen accepting the Light and confessing
+their past, can testify to the truthfulness of this statement. Many
+instances of stealing among them can be cited. I was told by a farmer,
+who was living in the midst of pagan Africans, untouched by civilization
+or the Gospel, that one year he employed about 100 women to gather his
+corn. He suspected them of stealing, but said nothing until one evening,
+just as they were starting for home, he suddenly rode in among them and
+frightened them. The corn which they had carefully concealed about them
+was scattered in all directions.
+
+Stealing, however, is not as common as lying; for while there does not
+seem to be a strong public sentiment against the latter, there is
+against the former, for the protection of their property. Those who
+flagrantly disregard this are branded as thieves and are sometimes
+punished. I know one native who was required by his heathen neighbors to
+pay ten hoes for visiting their grain bins. Generally, however, grain,
+either in the gardens or in the granaries, is not disturbed by others,
+and one may allow property to remain exposed year after year and it not
+be disturbed. The white man's law against thieving greatly assists the
+native in the enforcement of his law. We have found some very
+trustworthy natives, and none who have been with us any length of time
+have proven dishonest, and they are frequently sent to carry sums of
+money without in any way tampering with it.
+
+As to other forms of vice what shall one say? One European has been
+heard to exclaim that "their morals are as black as their faces." That
+they are dark no one can deny, for from childhood up vice in many forms
+is common. It could scarcely be otherwise when one considers the filth
+and degradation of their surroundings, where a number are crowded like
+so many animals into a filthy hut, overrun with vermin and parasites of
+all kinds. Some will tell you that there are none pure. It is true that
+the lives they lead give little opportunity for anything elevating. Then
+too their lives are open to the general gaze; nothing is hid.
+
+But take the modern city; dig it up from the foundation; open all its
+cesspools of infamy, crime, and debauchery, and such a stench will
+ascend to heaven that everyone beholding will cry out, "Babylon, the
+mother of harlots and abominations of the earth!" And yet this is the
+boasted twentieth-century civilization. Shall we, then, say that there
+are no Christians in that city, or that there are none living good moral
+lives who do not profess Christ? God forbid! All honor to the noble band
+of men and women in our cities who, in the midst of fearful odds, are
+living upright lives and helping their fellow-men.
+
+I believe I can safely say, from what I have seen and learned of the
+inner life of the native, that in dark, heathen Africa, even before the
+light of the Gospel penetrates, there are those who are moral and pure,
+although the number is small. Then take the Christian natives; the life
+of many a one is a living rebuke to some who decry mission work, and it
+is too often because they are a living rebuke, that they are so fiercely
+hated by some Europeans. People usually find what they are looking for,
+and in Africa is no exception.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN
+
+The Native--Continued
+
+
+Beggars the Africans naturally are, and when the white man comes among
+them they are always eager to obtain all they can for nothing. They beg
+of one another; then why should they not beg of the white man, whose
+pockets are supposed to be full of money? Then too some of them think
+the white man does not need money to buy food, clothing, and other goods
+from the store. They will say, "You do not need money to buy things. You
+just write something on a piece of paper and send it to Bulawayo and the
+goods come." Experience has taught us that the greatest good one can do
+the native is to make him work or pay for everything he receives, unless
+it should be during a case of sickness or helplessness.
+
+It is a common expression that the African is lazy; and yet even this
+must be accepted with a reserve and an understanding of his
+surroundings. Aside from the effect of the climate, much of their
+indolence and indifference is due to their smoking of hemp, a narcotic
+drug, similar to the _hashish_ of eastern countries. This they grow, and
+it is a common practice for the older, and for even young boys, to smoke
+it. It seems to sap their very life and take away all the ambition to
+better their condition. Yet the native can and does work even in his
+home, when occasion demands. During the digging and growing season they
+are found out in their gardens, which are generally at a distance from
+the villages, from early morning until late at night, hoeing and
+watching their crops to protect them from the ravages of the animals and
+birds. During the hottest part of the day they generally stop for a time
+to rest and cook. It is useless to attempt much evangelistic work during
+this season of the year, except at night, for the villages are about
+deserted during the day.
+
+They may, during the dry season, work for Europeans, but with some a
+short time of such work suffices, as their wants are few. As one fellow
+expressed it: "I have now sufficient money to pay my taxes. I only want
+to work long enough to earn money to buy a blanket and then my needs are
+all supplied." If they have food on hand, that is the extent of the
+ambition of some natives. They feel that then, during the dry season, or
+winter, they are entitled to rest, hunt, smoke, drink beer and palaver.
+
+Frequently, however, they must build in the dry season, for one of their
+huts in this ant-ridden country lasts only a short time--perhaps two or
+three years--and then another must be built. This is no small task, but
+it is usually postponed until near the rainy season. In order to build,
+the native is obliged to make frequent trips to the forest to procure
+suitable poles and bark strings, all of which he must carry on his
+shoulders. His wife too is inclined to postpone cutting the thatch grass
+until it is nearly all burnt, and then it requires much more labor to
+find enough thatch than if she had done the work at the proper time.
+The rain usually is threatening, or even the first has fallen before the
+man begins the actual building, and then he and his neighbors hurry and
+put up the huts after a fashion. When asked why he does not build
+earlier in the season he naively exclaims, "Oh! I leave it until the
+rains come, so I must hurry and build it." In other words, he puts it
+off until he is forced to do it, willy-nilly.
+
+As a rule the native is never in a hurry; he always performs his work
+deliberately. That is characteristic of the country, or climate, rather
+than of the individual, because no one in Africa seems to be in a hurry.
+We had our first lesson in this on the threshold of the continent. Just
+after we had reached Cape Town and had rented rooms, some groceries were
+bought and ordered to be sent to the house. They were very slow in
+coming, and we mentioned the fact to an American lady who had resided at
+Cape Town five years. She replied, "We are all slow in Africa, and in a
+few years you will become slow too." I cannot say that this has become
+true of all our missionaries, but this is the general effect of the
+country. The atmosphere, the heat, and the diseases, all have much
+influence on a person. To hurry and violently exert the body in order to
+complete a piece of work often brings on an attack of fever. Horses,
+mules, oxen, and donkeys are not as hardy as in temperate climates, and
+it requires several times the number to do the same amount of work, so
+that it need not surprise one that the natives, who, as far back as they
+know, have lived amid such surroundings, should be slow and indolent.
+
+There are three natives in our nearest village, all able-bodied men of
+about 40 or 45 years of age. Two of them have four wives and one has
+three. Since the hut tax is ten shillings a hut, that means that one
+must pay thirty shillings (nearly $7.50) tax per year, and the other two
+forty shillings (nearly $10). They are all intelligent-looking natives.
+Two of them have been government messengers and know something of
+European life. Now they are at home year after year, for they seldom go
+away to work, because they are too lazy. How they secure their hut tax
+is often a query, and about the only solution that seems possible is
+that they beg some here and some there of natives who go away to work,
+and they may occasionally have a little grain to sell. Often they are
+short of food for themselves and their families. One of them at least
+has had his family out on the veldt, living on fruit and roots and what
+game he could procure, for two months at a time. These are extreme
+cases, and one must feel sorry for the women and children when crops
+fail, for they at least cannot go among the Europeans for work.
+
+The natives differ greatly among themselves in diligence and training as
+well as in character and morality. While there are always some
+improvident ones, who live on the charity of their neighbors, yet some
+are exceedingly industrious the entire year. After their grain has been
+cared for they go to the towns to work and earn money, buy cattle and
+sheep, and in general enrich themselves. Workers in wood are always busy
+making articles to sell to their neighbors, and other artizans do
+likewise. The women also show the same difference of character. Some
+are always busy and forehanded with their gardens, their grass cutting,
+and cutting and carrying firewood to stow it away before the rains come.
+The same difference is to be found in the training of families.
+
+In some of the homes the children are well trained along industrial
+lines, according to the native idea of training. The parents require
+them to work and bear a certain amount of responsibility in providing
+for the family and in caring for the herds. For instance, a number of
+our best boys came from a village called Mianda. They proved very
+helpful and skillful in work and became some of our best builders and
+teachers. Their parents were generally considerate when we had dealings
+with them. Sometimes we had as many as ten boys at once from that one
+small village, and the father of some would even help to see about his
+herds so that his children might attend school. If a boy was needed at
+home to help build or herd, the father would tell for just how long he
+was needed, and we might be sure that he would send the boy back at the
+expiration of that time. The children of this village were required to
+be obedient and work while at home, otherwise they were denied food.
+There were other similar homes. In the villages, even before
+Christianity enters, the natives look upon some of the customs of their
+tribes in various ways. Where there are large villages and many people,
+dances and carousals are frequent occurrences and much immorality
+results. Some of the parents forbid their children frequenting these
+places of amusement on account of the immorality.
+
+Again, from some villages boys would come to the mission, stay only a
+few days and then leave, because they were obliged to perform a certain
+amount of work daily. We did not try to coax them to remain, for we
+preferred to keep only those who were willing to work--the others seldom
+amount to anything. Go into the houses of some such boys, and one would
+see them lying about, not willing to herd, much less dig. Perhaps the
+father will say, "Go and see about those sheep." The boy pays no
+attention to the command. The mother comes and scolds him and seeks to
+make him work, but with no better result; yet when food is prepared he
+is the first one to be around the pot and no one forbids him. From these
+instances it can be readily seen that African family training does not
+differ materially from European or American.
+
+In many of the villages there are always some who desire to improve
+themselves and better their conditions. They have their gardens, but,
+work as they may with their primitive little hoes, they cannot make much
+headway; or there may be a drought and famine is the result. They go
+away and work for a time, and come home with a supply of clothing and
+some money. They come to their dirty homes and filthy surroundings, and
+their friends and relatives try to get as much of their clothing and
+money as possible. They gradually become more and more sordid in
+appearance, their clothing disappears, and we become disgusted with them
+for so soon leaving behind the outward marks of civilization. But how
+many months could we live their home life and be presentable in
+appearance?
+
+Let us take Charlie as an example. He, with a number of other boys, went
+to Southern Rhodesia to work on a farm. He remained a year and received
+fifteen shillings ($3.60) per month, and he had to pay his way down and
+back on the train. He came home at the end of the year with a nice
+supply of new clothing and some money, and he looked as clean and
+well-dressed as a European when he came to Church on Sunday. He is a
+Christian boy and is trying to do what is right. Soon after his return
+home, his father, who is one of the three lazy men I mentioned, and
+extremely filthy in appearance, began wearing Charlie's clothes. First
+it was a shirt and a piece of calico; then another garment; then his
+nice grey coat. Charlie gave his little naked brother one of his shirts.
+He wished to marry, and this took all of his money. In a few months he
+presented quite a different appearance from what he did on his return
+home from Bulawayo, and we began to blame him, at least in our minds,
+and say that he should not allow himself to degenerate in this way. But
+most of his clothing is gone and his money is gone; he does not even
+have sufficient with which to purchase soap, so that he may wash the
+remaining clothing.
+
+Says one, "He should keep at work and not come and sit down in his
+home." The work takes him away from home, and his wages are low, so that
+he must keep at it continually in order to maintain appearances. May he
+not have any home life at all? It is a perplexing problem, and were we
+forced to take his place we would no doubt conclude that the boy does
+remarkably well under the circumstances. While at home he works in his
+gardens and does what he can find to do for the white men near his home;
+then, as his needs increase, he again goes to Bulawayo to begin again.
+This is an actual occurrence and typical of many others. He may conclude
+to have no home life, but keep up the semblance of civilization, hang
+about the towns, and imitate many evils surrounding him, and in the end
+prove a greater menace to society and to the country than if he would,
+at least part of the time, live in his own home in a more primitive
+manner. Again, if he depends too much on the stores of the traders, he
+ceases to manufacture articles for himself, so that if he does finally
+settle down for himself, tired of the struggle, he is often more
+helpless than at first, because he cannot make the articles which his
+father made.
+
+Is the native provident? or does he live from hand to mouth? Yes and no.
+I heard a man who traded with the natives say that in one year he bought
+about 1,000 bags of grain from them, giving in exchange goods from his
+store. Before the next crop was harvested, he had sold about all the
+grain back to them, at of course quite an advance in price. I have seen,
+near our own doors, natives sell to European traders grain, either for
+money or goods, from $1.25 to $2.50 for a two-hundred-pound bag and buy
+it back later in the same season for from $6 to $7 per bag. But these
+are extreme cases. In the latter instance a year of plenty was followed
+by a year of drought, and the natives were far from markets and at the
+mercy of local traders. Many of the natives had put in their granaries
+what would have tided them over an ordinary season, but the prolonged
+drought led them to want. Others had a comparatively poor crop the
+previous year and this caused a scarcity. Some did not need to buy at
+all, as they always look in advance for such emergencies and do not sell
+their surplus until certain of a new crop. Such natives, when they do
+sell, often sell to their native neighbors or exchange their grain for
+cattle. Such are generally very thrifty, while there are always some who
+are in want. In this too it may be seen that they are not unlike other
+people.
+
+In fact, the Batonga taught their missionaries some lessons in caring
+for grain. We found that they store their corn in the grain bins without
+removing all the husks, and they shell it as they need it or near the
+end of the season. With the Kafir corn they do the same way, cutting off
+the heads and putting it away without threshing it. This was so
+different from the thrifty Matabele, who carefully shelled and threshed
+their grain, that the first time we visited one of the villages and saw
+their method we thought, "How lazy! We must teach them how to do their
+work properly." We soon discovered that in this hot climate the shelled
+corn was soon weevil-eaten, and that the shelled Kafir corn was almost
+ground to meal before the year ended. Now we are inclined to imitate the
+natives in this respect rather than they us. It shows too that the
+native adapts himself to the country and climatic conditions.
+
+The African is a genuine lover of nature. He enjoys being out in the
+open air; he loves the bright rays of the sun. Everything around him is
+pregnant with meaning. Nature is his school, and he knows the habits of
+every beast, bird, or insect. In a measure he appreciates and loves the
+beautiful, even though at first he may smile at the white man's love for
+flowers. One day I inquired of an old heathen woman, who never came to
+Church, why they moved their kraal from the rock-bound place in which it
+had been, to the open plain. Her withered face brightened up, as with a
+sweep of her arm she took in the magnificent scene before her and
+exclaimed, "Is not that beautiful?" The native too shows good taste in
+the selection of clothing after he has become accustomed to civilized
+ways. We are inclined to think of them as being especially partial to
+bright colors. A few are, but my experience is that the majority are
+not. Many of the boys especially soon discard the native stores, where
+cheap apparel is sold, and frequent the stores for Europeans.
+
+They love music and have several crude musical instruments. Their songs
+are generally of war, love, marriage, and the chase. They also have some
+songs suitable to their work. They of course have good voices for
+singing, and can be easily trained to sing well. They have their
+legends, their poetry, proverbs, and animal stories.
+
+Natives, although very generous among themselves, are not inclined to be
+so to white people; perhaps because white people have not as a rule
+treated them so generously. If the native wishes to sell anything and is
+greatly in need of the money or clothing, he will often consent to sell
+for almost any price. It is the same with work; he will work very
+cheaply if he is eager to work.
+
+On the other hand, if the need is on the part of the buyer, he will ask
+a very high price for grain or other articles and absolutely refuse to
+give for less, especially if the buyer is an European. With work it is
+the same. Even boys, after they have received a certain amount of
+education and religious training, are very slow to accept the idea that
+they should do anything for the white man from a sense of duty. There
+are doubtless some very good reasons for this. They, however, respect a
+master who is kind but firm, and it is best not to coax them. If they
+find that we are not dependent upon them, and can get along without
+them, they are more likely to conclude that they cannot get along
+without us.
+
+The native is said to be lacking in gratitude to his benefactor, and
+there is some truth in this. One often spends much time and labor to
+train him along certain lines, with the hope that he will be of genuine
+service in the future. Perhaps about the time he is able to take the
+place for which he is fitted, he will often turn and, rejecting his
+benefactor, give the benefit of his training to some one who can
+remunerate him better. Naturally the missionary, or master, whichever it
+may be, feels grieved at this lack of gratitude. Too often, perhaps, the
+fault is on both sides, and we do not give him credit for the help he
+has been to us. Then too it is difficult to put ourselves in his place
+and see matters from his point of view. He has no idea of the value of
+our time or training and we sometimes spoil him in the beginning. Would
+not the best and safest way for the good of the native be to require
+him to earn his way as he goes? Let him always work sufficiently, if
+possible, to pay for the trouble it takes to teach him, whether in
+school or in industrial work, or in work pay him small wages at first
+and increase as he becomes more and more proficient. It may require a
+little of his time, but it has not spoiled him, and if he should
+conclude to go at any time, he has altogether or nearly paid his way in
+kind and one is none the loser.
+
+The native, however, can, and many of them do, improve greatly along
+this line after they have become Christians. While naturally they are
+not inclined to be disinterested and generous to the white people, yet
+many of them become so and display a remarkable spirit of self-sacrifice
+in the Lord's service. Many teach year after year at a far lower salary
+than they could obtain elsewhere; and, not only in teaching but in other
+lines of labor requiring skill, they will work for the Lord for a much
+lower wage than they could procure elsewhere, as all of our missionaries
+can testify. Then too many of them often give largely of their penury
+for the advancement of the cause of Christ.
+
+I was one day touched by the spirit manifested by a big fellow. He had
+come to the missionaries destitute of clothing, but anxious for an
+education. He was a hard-headed chap, both in school and out, and ran up
+against many hard places before he became pliable. He received, like the
+rest, a little money at the end of each term, but since he was in school
+three and one-half hours each day, his time for work was limited and his
+pay necessarily small. He, however, stayed at the mission and gradually
+obtained some clothing and money to pay his taxes. He also began to
+accept Christ as his Savior and from being a proud, obstinate fellow, he
+became more and more docile. At one time the amount coming to him was
+ten shillings ($2.40). His wardrobe was still scanty, but he took out
+for himself one shilling of the money received and brought the remaining
+nine shillings and said, "Here, I want to give this to the Lord."
+
+Giving the Gospel to the natives in their villages, while it is
+generally a pleasure to the missionary, is not always an easy task. They
+soon learn to be very quiet and respectful in the church, enter quietly,
+take their places and go through all the outward forms of service, and
+also leave without being noisy or talking, perhaps because they are
+requested to do so. But when one goes out into their villages, even to
+the best of them, there are many side issues. The chief, if he is
+present and worthy the name, will aid in keeping order, and even if he
+is not present, the majority may sit quietly and seem to be listening;
+but perhaps the cattle get at the granaries and must be driven away, or
+the chickens go into the huts and eat the meal and must be watched;
+perhaps new ones are continually coming and must be noticed and greeted,
+if they are allowed to do so. Then the babies are so interesting to
+their mothers or those near them, or perhaps there is a mother with an
+older child at her side, and she does not wish to lose any time; so,
+during her enforced leisure, she is sedulously examining the child's
+head or ornaments for parasites. Perhaps over there, outside the hut
+door, is a man who has not had time to make his morning toilet, so he
+concludes to spend the time in dressing the long locks of hair around
+the top of his head.
+
+One does not like to stop and reprove them, because the rest seem
+attentive and perhaps those are also listening, for the work they are
+engaged in is such a common one! Again, all may seem attentive and the
+missionary rejoices that the seed is falling into well-prepared soil,
+and he continues eager to drive the truth home to their hearts. He
+pauses to let it sink in--when lo! some one will make a remark wholly
+irrelevant to the subject he seeks to impress upon their minds; it may
+be in reference to some article of clothing he is wearing, or some of
+their own needs. His enthusiasm cools, for he perceives that some, and
+perhaps many, have paid little attention to the message.
+
+Again, one may be speaking, and the chief or headman repeats what has
+been said, or he may ask a pertinent question, the answer to which
+brings out other questions, which serve to elucidate the subject. The
+other natives are led to listen; and while the discourse turns to be
+almost a conversation between the speaker and this one, yet the
+missionary goes away feeling that they have at least understood and
+perhaps have received some light. Sometimes, again, one may have only a
+few listeners and go away thinking nothing has been accomplished, but
+God has taken care of the seed sown.
+
+I remember being out once with one of the Christian boys. We came to a
+garden where a woman and her daughter were working, and we sat and
+talked with them about Christ our Savior. This was the first time they
+had had an opportunity to hear. Years passed and the incident was about
+forgotten by both the Christian native and myself. That girl later, out
+of much tribulation found her way into the Kingdom. Her father was a
+hardened old heathen, and had sold her to an old man. He was going to
+force her to marry the old man, but she escaped and fled to Matopo
+Mission where, with Elder Steigerwald's help, she was set free. She
+returned home, and later an European offered oxen and wagon to her
+father for her. She steadfastly refused and kept herself pure. Today she
+is the wife of a native evangelist and one of our most valued helpers.
+She says her first knowledge of Christ was at that little meeting in the
+garden, where she and her mother were working, and her present husband
+and I stopped to speak with them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN
+
+Some of Their Religious Ideas
+
+Nevertheless He left not Himself without witness, in that He did good,
+and gave us rain from heaven, and fruitful seasons, filling our hearts
+with food and gladness.--Acts 14: 17.
+
+
+The above quotation may apply to the African's idea of God in general,
+but it seems especially applicable to the Batonga and kindred tribes.
+Among these the word for God and rain are one and the same, _Leza_. This
+does not necessarily imply that they have no conception of God apart
+from the Rainmaker, but that conception is closely allied to rain and
+kindred elements in nature. They understand the name _Mubumbi_ (Moulder
+or Creator) and _Chilenga_ (Originator of Customs), but when speaking of
+the earth and vegetation, they will say, "Leza [God] made these things,
+because when leza [rain] comes, grass and vegetation spring up and grow,
+so Leza made them."
+
+Of course their conception of Him, like that of all Africans, is very
+remote. He is their Creator, but to approach unto Him is like reaching
+out in the dark, in a vague sort of way, after something more powerful
+than themselves, something or some one they know not what. In times of
+great trouble, as in famine, fear, or when there is an earthquake or an
+eclipse, they will worship God, not necessarily by word of mouth, but by
+clapping their hands in reverence. They generally, however, like the
+Matabele, feel that they cannot approach God. He is too great and
+terrible, so they approach Him through mediators, such as departed
+spirits, prophets, and prophetesses.
+
+Mr. Eddy, in "India Awakening," says: "Joined with these is the worship
+of dead parents, where spirits are dependent on their survivors for
+comforts, and who will avenge neglect or any deviation from custom. This
+belief is (1) a religion of fear, since most spirits are malicious; (2)
+a religion divorced from ethics, since spirits have no regard for moral
+ideas; (3) a religion of custom, since the worship rests on tradition
+and the spirits are apt to punish all departure from custom." This
+statement in reference to India can be as truthfully said of the pagan
+African.
+
+The Batonga, many of them, build roofs or small huts over the graves of
+their dead. In them they will place skulls of animals and some of the
+property of the deceased. Their descendants come to this place, bringing
+beer and even water, and pour it out upon the grave in worship. If one
+has been considered powerful while alive, has been a great rainmaker,
+many people will gather around his grave in time of drought and pray for
+rain.
+
+They have also their living prophetesses and prophets, to whom they turn
+in times of need. These claim that the soul of some powerful deceased
+one has entered them and bequeathed to them its power. In times of
+drought these prophetesses--for they are generally women--multiply
+rapidly. In a village of about thirty-five huts, near us, there were
+said to be ten prophetesses during the drought two years ago. The
+prophetic term of some of them is often very short, much depending on
+their seeming success as rainmakers. Sometimes the prophetess will make
+no claim for herself, but her friends will make it for her. The
+prophetesses are very often immoral characters.
+
+Day after day people will come to the prophetess, as the time for
+planting draws near, bringing their presents of grain or money and their
+seed, that she may bless it and insure good crops. They come, sit down,
+reverentially clapping their hands and beseeching her aid. The hunter
+brings his gun, to receive medicine which will insure him prowess in
+hunting; a man comes asking for medicine for his sick wife, who is
+bewitched, and this medicine is to ward off the witchery. There comes
+from afar an old woman, who claims to have the power of making their
+grain last a long time by putting a certain medicine into it when
+cooking. She is believed and the medicine is bought and put into the
+food, and she rejoices in her pay. These heathens are always very
+gullible and readily purchase anything which appears conducive to their
+own interests.
+
+One day I saw a number of natives going to a village to worship a
+rainmaker, so I concluded to go also and see what they did, for it was a
+village near the mission where the Gospel had often been proclaimed. As
+I reached the place the prophetess was in her hut, but a number of women
+and girls were outside, clapping their hands in worship. Their faces
+were familiar to me, and I could not avoid feeling sad to see how little
+influence the Gospel had thus far had on their lives. Finally the
+prophetess came out of her hut and was received with more clapping of
+the hands. She was a large, powerful-looking woman and gave orders like
+a queen, nor was she unqueenly in appearance. The worshipers were seated
+around a large hole or excavation in the earth, and had several dishes
+of grain which they had brought. They were told to sort the grain,
+selecting only the best and whitest; and I am informed that some of the
+grain, together with incantations, is dropped into the opening in the
+earth, but this I did not see. She came and greeted me and spoke a few
+words and then entered her hut. A man came to her for medicine for his
+sick wife, who was bewitched, and others went to consult with her.
+Finally I went to the door of her hut and spoke with her, inquiring why
+these people were worshiping. She said:
+
+"They want rain. The spirit of a rainmaker who died a long, long time
+ago entered into me and they come for me to make it rain."
+
+Knowing them so well, and being jealous for Him Whose ambassador I was,
+I asked, "Do you really mean to say that you can cause rain?"
+
+Regarding me quite earnestly for a time she finally said, "No, I cannot
+cause rain."
+
+"Why then are you deceiving the people and pretending that you can? God
+only can produce rain."
+
+"Yes," she replied, "He alone can make it rain."
+
+"Then come and tell the people that He only can cause it to rain and
+that they should worship Him."
+
+She willingly complied, and coming out of her hut, she spoke to them
+very earnestly, telling them to worship God, as He alone could cause
+rain. As she claimed to be only an intercessor, and no doubt did this to
+please me, it did not necessarily interfere with her role as rainmaker.
+Even the most pagan among them acknowledge Leza (God) as the Rainmaker,
+and these only as His messengers. Since the people so readily transfer
+their worship from one to another, they also freely come to the
+missionaries to have them pray for rain. They have done this at Macha,
+and the Lord has graciously answered the prayers of His servants. This,
+however, does not seem to bring the native any nearer to repentance and
+God, and one feels loath to heed their request, except in the case of
+Christian natives.
+
+With the Batonga, wailing for the dead seems to be essentially a
+religious requirement, and it is most religiously observed, so we
+venture to include it as a part of their religion. When the news of a
+death reaches a village, the people begin to wail at once, especially if
+they be relatives, and continue to do so while they are moving about,
+putting away their grain, baskets, and the few utensils they own, for a
+stay of several days. They may be heard wailing as they pass on their
+way out of their village to go to that of the dead. In a short time
+perhaps the entire village is deserted. We were once camping near a
+village of fifty huts, and news came that a relative had died at a mine
+near Bulawayo. In a few minutes nearly all the inhabitants were on their
+way to the house of mourning; for, although the body was buried about
+four hundred miles distant, they firmly believed that his spirit
+returned to his home and took cognizance of all they did. If a native is
+traveling along a path, and word comes to him of the death of a
+relative, he will begin wailing at once, and turning around proceed to
+the place of mourning.
+
+Perhaps the reader will more fully understand what an African funeral is
+if he in mind accompanies us to one. Apuleni's father had been working
+in a mine in Southern Rhodesia. He became quite sick there and was
+brought home to die. We visited his home, and found that they had taken
+him to a temporary hut at some distance from the village. It is a very
+common practice for them to do this, especially if one is near death's
+door. His wife and daughters are near him, doing all they can to relieve
+his sufferings. His lungs are diseased and it is likely to prove fatal.
+
+One evening word comes to the boy that his father has died. He
+immediately goes home, while Sister Engle and I conclude to go and see
+him buried. We have seen the wailings, but not the interment. It is
+already dark when the word comes, so we take the lantern and together
+with several schoolboys start for the village. We all go single file
+along the path for nearly three-fourths of a mile, down the hill, across
+the river, which is dry at this season. The night is quite dark and only
+lighted up by the flame of the lantern. Up the hill we go, on the
+opposite side, for over a fourth of a mile to the village. All along the
+path the sound of wailing comes to our ears. Sometimes it subsides and
+then becomes more violent than ever. Before death the deceased has been
+brought back to his hut, and as we enter the village the men are sitting
+around in groups outside and are quiet. We proceed to the hut of
+mourning, which is crowded with women and is dark, save for the light of
+the fire in the center, the flickering flames of which ever and anon
+light up the weird scene.
+
+We stoop down and enter the low door. It is so crowded and hot that
+farther progress seems impossible, and yet we manage to work our way
+among the crowd, seated or standing and keeping up their doleful wail.
+Our object is twofold: We wish to see, and also to show our sympathy for
+the boy who has been with us so long and is a Christian, and we desire
+to see the sorrowing wife and daughters, for we know them well and
+believe that they will appreciate our presence and words of condolence.
+We finally reach the partition which extends over halfway across the
+hut. Near this lies a bundle about four or five feet long. It is a
+somewhat shapeless mass, wrapped with a number of layers of blankets and
+carefully tied. In the fitful light one might easily mistake it for a
+bundle of clothes, but we know without asking that this is the body of
+the deceased; for around it are seated the wife and daughters weeping
+bitterly, and lovingly patting the wrapping of the body. The rest of the
+women are mingling their tears with those of the relatives. We stoop and
+speak a few words of comfort to the wife, but it is little we can give;
+he had frequently heard of Christ, but refused to accept Him. As the
+fire flames up we can see Apuleni standing in the shadow, and he too is
+weeping bitterly, but more quietly. The boys who came with us make their
+way through the throng and going to him mingle their tears with his, and
+our own eyes overflow at the sight.
+
+But this crowded hut, without windows or means of ventilation and with a
+hot fire, is unbearable, so we go outside, the boys following. Everyone
+on the outside is quiet or speaking in low tones. Sister Engle and I are
+given blocks of wood for chairs. From one of the groups of men the
+chief, Lupata, rises and takes his little hoe, and after he has made
+some measurements, he marks off the grave a few feet from the door of
+the hut of mourning. In the meantime wood and logs have been brought and
+several fires kindled, as night is nearly always cool. Around these
+fires the men sit in groups, but the fires do not make sufficient light,
+and some grass is brought from the roof of the hut and burnt near the
+grave for light, so the chief may see to do his work in digging out the
+first part of the grave. He then hands the hoe to another, who continues
+the work. The ground is very hard and the work proceeds slowly, and
+since they have difficulty in seeing, we place our lantern on a stamping
+block near them. This is gratefully acknowledged by the little group,
+and the digging continues.
+
+It is an uncanny scene: The steady, dull thud of the hoe as it digs into
+the hard earth; the various campfires lighting up the dusky, grave faces
+of the men in their heathen garb; the steady wail of mourning in the hut
+near by--all leave an impression not soon obliterated. Thus perhaps an
+hour passes and several men have taken part in digging, the loose earth
+being removed by means of a basket; but the picking of the hoe has taken
+on a metallic ring, for the earth is stony. The chief asks for kafir
+corn, and a daughter comes and shells some and places a pan of it near
+the open grave. Frequently some of this grain is dropped into the
+opening, "to soften and appease the earth," they say, and the digging
+continues, though but little progress is made. Then the chief calls to
+the mourners, "Be quiet and do not make so much noise. Don't you know
+that the ground is hard and stony?" The noise subsides and the digging
+goes on. Soon the friends again begin their loud wailing, and since the
+ground is still hard and stony, the chief finally goes to the door of
+the hut and berates them soundly. "Be quiet! Do you not know that you
+are making our work difficult by your lamentations? The earth refuses to
+receive the dead" (because you are loath to give it). They become quiet
+and the work continues. They think the very elements are arrayed against
+them, and the friends must propitiate the earth by a willing surrender
+of their loved one to its cold embrace.
+
+It is now midnight, and from the progress made we conclude that it will
+take all night to finish the stony grave. We speak to the chief and he
+says, "Yes, the interment will not likely be before early dawn." We
+conclude to return home and have some rest. At an early hour we are
+awakened and reach the village just at dawn. The grave has been dug so
+that those inside can stand to their armpits. Then near the bottom a
+further excavation is made in the side of the grave, sufficiently large
+to receive the body. Two men remain standing in the grave while the body
+is carried out amid the lamentations of the mourners. It is gently
+lowered into the open grave and placed in the excavation in the side.
+Earth is handed down in baskets, and this is carefully packed around the
+body. Then comes the filling of the main part of the opening. As the
+ground is lowered the two men stamp it down with their feet, for of
+course they are not standing on the body. When it is nearly full, the
+men emerge and several with sticks carefully pound the earth as it is
+put in until the grave is full.
+
+All this time the friends have been standing around weeping. When the
+grave is filled and all the rest of the earth removed, the head one
+calls loudly, "Water!" This is brought in a gourd and all the relatives
+and those taking part in the burial rush together; and as the water is
+poured out on the grave, they wash their hands in the falling water. The
+surface of the grave is by this time quite wet. The friends throw
+themselves on the muddy grave with their entire force, so that one would
+think bones might be broken. Some throw themselves repeatedly, and by
+the time they have finished, their bodies are quite muddy, but the top
+of the grave is pounded down as smooth as the surrounding earth, and by
+the time it is dry the uninitiated could not tell the place of burial.
+
+Those participating then go to the river to wash, and the chief mourners
+paint part of their bodies with an ash-colored soil. Word has been sent
+to the friends and neighbors and the wailing proper begins. Men with
+assegais, axes, or guns walk back and forth crying "Mawe"; the women
+surround the grave, wailing and uttering various lamentations, such as
+"My friend." "The father of Apuleni." A wife will have on her head the
+deceased's hat; another will be carrying his assegai with the point
+bent; another his stool. All this time the son remained quietly weeping,
+taking no part in the heathen demonstrations.
+
+An important part of the Batonga funeral is the sacrifice of animals,
+cattle, sheep, and goats. They think these have souls and accompany the
+deceased. The number killed depends upon the rank and the wealth of the
+one who died, although not all the animals sacrificed are his property.
+Relatives often bring of their own herds for the purpose. Some of the
+poorer class may have only one animal and small children none. At the
+grave of the murdered chief they sacrificed eight head of cattle; at
+that of another chief, a little farther away, there were twenty-two
+killed. The meat of these animals is eaten by the mourners. At the
+funeral which we have just described the man was poor. One of the
+relatives slew a goat, and an ox of the deceased also was killed. Later
+in the day, as the people began to assemble for the general mourning,
+several young men came leading an ox for sacrifice. They were decked out
+in a most fantastic manner, with pieces of bright-colored cloth and
+various colored paper cut in ribbons. As they arrived near the scene
+they made a rush for the grave, brandishing their weapons fiercely and
+seeming to fight the very powers of darkness.
+
+One day Sister Taylor and I were present at the funeral of the daughter
+of a chief. She was already buried when we reached the place and two
+oxen had been killed. We had no sooner spoken to her parents and sat
+down than a number of cattle were driven into the enclosure, between the
+huts. An old native raised his spear and aimed at one of the cattle. The
+rest were at once driven out while that one staggered and fell. A woman
+stepped to the grave and loudly called to the dead that the animal was
+slain and its spirit was coming. It was a sickening sight. The wailing
+continued, and some of the people would run around the huts in a wild,
+scared manner, as if they were fighting something. The air is to them
+peopled with malevolent spirits, seeking to do them harm, and they must
+ward them off. If one is dying they often beat their tomtoms in a
+furious manner to ward off danger. Heathen death and burial is a sad
+thing. It must be seen to know how terrible it really is. The warlike
+Baila were accustomed formerly to sacrifice any one of another tribe who
+happened to be in the neighborhood at the death of a chief, for all
+strangers were enemies, and Gomo said he saw four or five human skulls
+on a tree as he approached one of their huts. The wailing is kept up for
+several days, especially at night, for it would seem that darkness adds
+to their terror of the evil spirits.
+
+We have often endeavored to show them the folly of some of their
+beliefs, and of course the Christians take no part with them. Even many
+of the older people are losing faith in some of these things, but are
+continuing to keep up appearances for fear of the rest. The chief near
+us says he is not going to sacrifice any more cattle; he will keep them
+and train them for oxen.
+
+Some are very eager to have white cloth in connection with burial, and
+one old man at some distance north of us, who has a son in Bulawayo,
+desired us to write to the son, telling him to bring him a white shroud
+for burial. Whether this idea has come in through the white man I am
+unable to say, but it has probably come through some natives who have
+been to the towns to work and there learned something of Christian
+burial. Among some half-civilized natives in some parts of Africa, the
+idea prevails that if one is put in a coffin, and has a Christian
+burial, he will go to heaven.
+
+There is also a second and sometimes a third wailing, consisting of a
+beer drink and a dance. This too is generally held at night. The friends
+and relatives come together and the half-intoxicated mourners engage in
+singing and dancing. The actions are most lewd and disgusting, for these
+are often genuine carousals of the basest sort; but they are most
+religiously engaged in, and people who believe that the departed spirits
+have such power over the living, are loath to ignore any established
+worship of such spirits.
+
+_Shikazwa_ is the messenger of witches and is supposed to bring harm,
+sickness, or death to its enemies. This class of spirits they say never
+dwells in a human body. They are always disembodied spirits and mediums.
+The belief in witchcraft and transmigration of souls is similar to that
+of the Matabele and need not be repeated. The native, too, has firm
+belief in the efficacy of charms to ward off sickness or accidents and
+to bring good fortune, and the dispensers of these articles do a
+thriving business.
+
+There are various other beliefs in the possession of spirits, which are
+not very well understood, and some of them seem to be comparatively new,
+even among the natives themselves. While I was in Natal, in 1910, a
+missionary was telling me of a difficulty they were encountering among
+the native girls. They became possessed with an affliction not unlike
+hysterics, and when it was started in a neighborhood it spread rapidly
+even among half-civilized natives. I say hysterics, because this lady
+was enabled to check its advance by punishing the first one who was
+afflicted in that way in her school. I had never witnessed anything of
+the sort among natives until my return to Macha in that same year. One
+day, while out kraal-visiting, I was surprised to see something of the
+same nature. They tried to keep the actions of the young woman, who was
+afflicted, from my notice, and hurriedly attempted to quiet her by silly
+remedies. When I inquired what was the matter, they quickly replied,
+"Nothing." The boy accompanying me said it was demon possession. This
+has spread over the country among the girls and young women. The natives
+called it _Masabi_. The older people do not care to mention it or, if
+they do, it is in sort of an apologetic manner. They claim that the
+spirit of some bird or other animal enters the person and causes her to
+act so strangely. The usual remedy resorted to is to beat the tomtoms to
+drive away the spirit. They claim that the so-called possession is
+comparatively new in the country, and that it came from a tribe
+northeast of Macha.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE
+
+A Few of Their Customs
+
+
+The Batonga are very dark in color, although not always black. Their
+features are regular and well formed, and the people are intelligent
+looking. Some of them are large, but as a tribe they are not as
+powerfully built as the Matabele. Their tribal mark amounts to almost a
+deformity. When a boy (or girl) is about fourteen years of age, he is
+taken to the native dentist. The head is put on the ground and held in
+place while the dentist with a blunt instrument knocks out the front
+upper teeth, usually four, sometimes six in number. The gums and lips
+become much swollen and inflamed by this barbarous procedure; but in
+time they heal, and the child is a Mutonga or Mwila, and this deformity
+proclaims his tribe wherever he goes.
+
+The natives never care to have the process repeated. Other natives often
+go to their missionaries to have teeth extracted, but the Batonga seldom
+or never do. They prefer the suffering which comes from neuralgia or
+toothache. This barbarous custom, like many others, has nearly had its
+day, and many of the boys have already rebelled since they have come
+into contact with other natives or Europeans. It will require more time
+for the girls to break away from it, as they live more secluded lives,
+and have developed less independence of character than their brothers.
+A mother will tell her daughter that it is a shame for a woman to have
+upper front teeth. She should be like the cow.
+
+They are all very fond of grease for their bodies, either animal fat or
+butter; and in this hot, dry climate this is not so objectionable, if
+they use it in moderation, by simply oiling the body to prevent the skin
+from cracking. Many of the women, however, use the grease to excess.
+They grind red ochre and, mixing it with the grease, paint their bodies,
+including their hair, red, which is their idea of beauty. In this
+perhaps they are more excusable than some others. Clay often is used in
+dressing their hair, and buttons, beads, and shell are sewed to their
+hair, as ornaments.
+
+The men too take great pride in dressing their hair, and in this respect
+generally surpass the women. They shave part of the head and let the
+hair about the crown and back of the head grow long. This they
+straighten out, and it looks not unlike strings hanging from the back of
+the head. This is carried to extremes among the Baila. There the dude
+lets his hair grow and then goes to the hair-dresser who, with grease,
+hair, and other materials, builds it up into a chignon on the top of his
+head. With some, this chignon is only five or six inches long, but in
+the interior of the tribe it is said to be sometimes three feet in
+length. Brother Steigerwald on his trip north saw some of these long
+ones. Of course the head cannot help lying uneasy with such a weight.
+
+[Illustration: Batonga Village with the Cattle Pens in the Foreground.]
+
+Among these people the clan, or perhaps I should say the kinsfolk, forms
+the unit. They all are closely bound together and each one more or
+less responsible for the others of his relatives. In marriage, death,
+sickness, or trouble, all are concerned in the affair. When difficulty
+arises the heads of each clan listen to the affair and settle the
+dispute. Perhaps the persons most interested may have no opportunity of
+expressing an opinion, especially if they be younger and unimportant
+members of the families.
+
+An unfortunate accident occurred among some boys and one lost an eye.
+The one who caused the loss was not more to blame than the one who
+suffered the loss. It was purely accidental and without malice, and all
+who were spectators so regarded it. The one who suffered the loss
+desired that no attention be paid to the affair, but the father and
+elder relatives thought differently. They called a meeting of the heads
+of the two clans and discussed the affair with great deliberation, and
+in a most dignified and respectful manner. The boys were not consulted
+and there was nothing said in reference to its being an accident. An eye
+was lost and it must be paid for, and their custom is to require the one
+causing the loss to give all his property. In this instance the boy
+considered at fault was young and his father was dead, and all his
+property was three head of cattle and a sheep. His relatives said these
+animals would be given; but the other boy's father said, "No, that is
+not sufficient. I will accept them, but the affair will not be settled.
+When he acquires more property, I will take that also." This was what
+the deliberations hinged on. The faulty one would be unable to secure
+any more property; it would all be taken away from him, so his elders
+were willing to give what the boy had, only on condition that that would
+end the matter. It could not be settled that day, but later the other
+party agreed to take that and consider the affair settled.
+
+[Illustration: Cattle Pen of the Batonga.]
+
+A little fire often kindles a great conflagration among them. Once a
+murderer was taken through our premises on his way to the magistrate. He
+had come from a distance and the difficulty was something like this: A
+native had a needle, and his neighbor borrowed it and lost it. The owner
+of the needle demanded and received an ox in pay. Some time afterward
+the borrower found the needle, and bringing it back to the owner wanted
+his ox back, but the ox was dead. The trouble finally resulted in
+murder.
+
+In marriage the question of kinship also is prominent. Marriage is not
+merely the union of two people, or even two immediate families, but of
+two clans, and the prominent members of both must be consulted. If a man
+sees a girl whom he wishes to make his wife, he first consults his
+parents, and if there is any objection among his relatives the matter is
+dropped. If, however, they are satisfied, his mother goes to the mother
+of the girl and asks for her daughter. If the immediate relatives of the
+girl object a negative answer is given. If they look with favor on the
+proposed alliance, they consult the other prominent relatives, which may
+require considerable time. Some one may object because a relative of the
+proposed groom quarreled a great deal with his wife, or some one may
+affirm that he is lazy. Trouble that has arisen between the clans in the
+past, such as that relating to the boy's eye, may be a formidable
+obstacle, although the parties concerned may have had nothing to do with
+the accident or the settlement of it. If all are agreed, well and good.
+All this time the bride has had no voice in the affair and generally
+does not know what is transpiring.
+
+[Illustration: A Batonga Family Traveling.]
+
+Betrothal among these people may take place when the girl is quite
+young, but generally not until the girl is from 14 to 18 years of age,
+and then it is of short duration, as marriage follows soon after it is
+found that all the relatives agree. The old people, especially the
+mothers, take the affair in hand, the interested parties merely
+following their instructions. The groom is told to be ready. Perhaps he
+has been looking forward and gathering together the _kukwa_ (pay or
+dowry) for the occasion. He has been buying hoes, from ten to twenty of
+them, for these are always a necessary part of the pay, probably because
+they are all farmers and the native-made hoes always command a good
+price. In addition to these, he procures a lot of cloth, beads, money,
+and some assegais. He freely calls on his relatives and friends to
+assist him in procuring the needed pay, for they have had some choice in
+the affair. The day is appointed for the wedding, but before this
+arrives the girl is informed who is to be her husband. She may or may
+not be pleased; her choice in the matter is wholly ignored. She has
+been trained all her life to obey, to keep herself hid, and has very
+little freedom until after marriage. Should she even be pleased with the
+choice, she is expected for modesty's sake to protest and cry out and
+struggle and declare she will not submit.
+
+The mother of the bridegroom takes the pay and goes to the house of the
+bride, the groom and his best man following. They put up a booth near
+the kraal of the bride for the groom to occupy. We enter the village and
+find the relatives of the bride, from far and near, assembled for the
+wedding, for all these expect to receive some of the pay. The women and
+the girls gather and begin to sing the marriage song, the tune of which
+is always the same, but the words are improvised for the occasion. One
+of the older ones will lead off and say, "This girl is going to be
+married," and the rest will assent by singing in unison, again, "We
+shall receive some hoes, so that we may dig our gardens," and again the
+response. All this is done in a monotonous but not altogether unmusical
+manner. Another will take up the lead, and a day or two will be consumed
+in this way until everything that can be thought of in reference to
+marriage, good, bad, and indifferent, is repeated in song. The bride,
+however, is not among the singers. We pass through the village and a
+young woman beckons us to enter a hut. The other women greet us, but our
+guide with a smile mysteriously leads us into an inner chamber. Here is
+a young woman, greased from head to foot, so much so that the grease
+drips from her body. A blanket is thrown around her and over her head,
+and she keeps her eyes down in a miserable-looking fashion, as if she
+were crying or pouting, and never by the least sign acknowledges our
+presence. We are new to the situation, but it suddenly dawns upon us
+that this is the bride. We inquire, "What is the trouble? Does she not
+wish to be married?" "Oh, yes," is the answer, "but she must be sad
+because she is a bride."
+
+[Illustration: Native Women--Widows.]
+
+In the afternoon the relatives gather around the hut of the groom to
+receive their presents, and each makes a choice. Of course they are
+expected to be reasonable in their demands, because sometimes there are
+forty persons to receive presents. The father or men nearly related to
+the bride may take more liberty; one or two sometimes demand ten
+shillings. While the best man is trying to satisfy all these demands,
+the groom is often berated soundly by some, and even at times suffers
+bodily violence. If his supply of goods is reasonable in amount, so
+that nearly all are satisfied, the bride is given to him at once. If
+very few presents are on hand the proceedings may stop and he or his
+best man be obliged to go among his relatives and secure more money or
+goods. If he is slow in this, difficulties may arise between him and the
+girl's relatives until it come to blows. Not long ago a groom, about
+four miles from Macha, was so violently attacked that he died from the
+blows given. This is unusual at the present day, but it may have been
+more common formerly. Even if the wedding has passed off all right the
+girl does not at once go to cook for her husband; it may be several
+months or a year before they fit her out with earthen pots, baskets, and
+the like and she goes to housekeeping. In the meantime she is supposed
+to be so modest that she will not speak to her husband or lift her eyes
+in his presence. The modesty of the Batonga girls is in striking
+contrast with the behavior of many other African girls, and immorality
+does not seem as prevalent among the unmarried as in some other places.
+Even the Baila girls are much bolder, both in looks and actions. If a
+girl is bold, and goes about alone, she may generally be conceded to be
+of an immoral character. When the bride is finally taken to the house of
+her husband, the father may demand a cow or two as additional pay. If
+the girl refuses to go, she often is carried by force. Sometimes the
+mother may refuse to have the girl leave home, and then the husband is
+obliged to live at the kraal of his parents-in-law. If he has two wives
+he often thus has two homes.
+
+The groom must always show great respect for the wife's parents, and
+especially for her mother. When she appears on the scene, he must leave,
+if escape is possible; otherwise he must sit quietly, not lifting his
+eyes in the august presence of her who gave birth to his wife, so that
+the life of the native who lives in the same kraal with his
+mother-in-law is not a very pleasant one. When he meets his
+father-in-law he salutes him by clapping his hands, and the salutation
+is returned by the father-in-law tapping his chest with his right hand.
+The husband may never call his wife by her maiden name, but he gives her
+a new one of his own.
+
+[Illustration: Kabanzi Chief with His First Wife.]
+
+The fact that the marriage is the concern of so many, and is so rigidly
+controlled by the elders, places many obstacles in the way of the
+missionaries. It is difficult for Christian boys many times to gain the
+hand of Christian girls, and for Christian girls to be given to
+Christian boys, as many of the older people object to their daughters
+entering the Christian clan. At present the missionary is not allowed to
+interfere in these native customs, and the girl has no recourse. Custom
+says she must obey her parents and relatives, and the law upholds
+custom. Being under such close supervision all her life, she has no
+opportunity of developing independence of thought and action like her
+brother. The missionaries are looking for better times, however, and ask
+that all who read these lines pray that the day may speedily come when
+the girls and boys may have more right of choice. We have reason to
+think that the day is dawning when this form of slavery will also be in
+the past.
+
+[Illustration: Giving the Gospel in Macha Village.]
+
+Again, the fact that kinship has such a hold upon the people, and each
+one is in a measure responsible for or dependent upon the rest, renders
+freedom of thought and action difficult among all. It tends to retard
+development of character and makes evangelization difficult among them.
+It does not interfere to the extent that caste does in India, but it is
+by no means a negligible quantity. This and blind custom form pretty
+strong bands, for the native does not like to stand alone or be odd from
+his fellows. When the Gospel is given to the people they may appear to
+listen attentively and outwardly accept what is said, but try to press
+home the question to individual hearts and the leader will answer for
+all, "Yes, we are all Christians. We accept what you say. Our hearts are
+white toward God." One who understands the native character cannot
+avoid being skeptical when he hears of entire tribes turning to the
+Lord. They may in outward form, for what is popular with the leaders is
+popular with the crowd. It is easy for them to put on the form of
+Christianity and go through all the ceremonies of it, but with how many
+there is a change of heart remains to be seen by the lives they lead.
+
+The Batonga do not build as good huts as the Matabele, nor do they put
+in a polished floor; perhaps, because the ants are so numerous in this
+part of the country, the hut soon falls to pieces and must be rebuilt,
+even though they may have built it carefully at first. Their presence
+also may account for the Batonga making bedsteads and chairs, whereas
+the Matabele do not. Their huts too are not only the home of the people,
+but at night, goats, a calf or two, dogs, and sometimes chickens are
+housed in the same hut, so that it would not be easy to keep a
+respectable-looking place. As their flocks increase they build separate
+huts for them, as everything must be well housed on account of wild
+animals.
+
+In many other ways they differ from the Matabele. They do not have
+digging-bees like the Matabele; in fact, they do not call their
+neighbors together for any kind of work, except that the men assist one
+another in building. If they have a beer-drink it is a sociable
+gathering or a wailing. The beer is brought and always tasted first by
+the giver, to show that there is no poison in the cup. Each woman digs
+her own little garden alone, or with her children. When we entered the
+country the Matabele would not touch fish, the dislike being so great
+that it almost amounted to a taboo. Among these people fish is the
+staple article of diet. The only reason that seems plausible is that
+here there are many large rivers and fish are abundant, while in the
+other country there are none. These people do not kill twins, but they
+do the children that cut the upper teeth first. Eggs are tabooed to
+unmarried boys and girls, and a superstitious reason is given and
+strongly believed in by them; but back of it the object of the elders in
+enforcing the taboo seems to have been to prevent young Africans from
+robbing the nests and lessening the supply of chicks. There are many
+other taboos among the tribes which are strictly adhered to, the origin
+of which could easily be traced to expediency.
+
+The Batonga will tell you that the assegai is the weapon of the man and
+the hoe of the woman. As one sees the men always armed with assegais, so
+the women generally carry a hoe; nor is it always just an ordinary hoe
+for digging. Her husband sometimes procures for her a dainty little hoe,
+having the handle beautifully ornamented with fine woven wire. This has
+no other use than to be carried with her as she goes on a journey or to
+a wailing, and she is very proud of it and nothing will induce her to
+part with it.
+
+They have many forms of salutation, more than any other tribe of natives
+that I have met, some general and others special, for morning, noon, or
+night, and they are very punctilious about saluting, but never in a
+hurry. They greet not only the one they meet, but also inquire about his
+wife and children, especially the baby, and about what he eats, as well
+as other questions in general. If a number of persons are sitting down
+and another group approach, they too will be seated and perhaps a few
+general remarks may be made; then the salutation begins. Every one in
+the first group must individually greet everyone in the second group and
+ask about his health and receive an answer to the same. There is no
+confusion, no hurry. The native does not shake hands except as he has
+learned it from the white man; he greets only by word of mouth, or on
+special occasion by embracing.
+
+A very pleasing incident in reference to one of the salutations,
+_lumela_ (rejoice), is given by Rev. Chapman, one of the pioneers of the
+Primitive Methodist Mission, and I give it in detail:
+
+"One of these old men could still remember Dr. Livingstone's visit to
+Sekeletu, about 1855. The doctor was known among the Makololo as Monare.
+When I showed the old man a photo of Dr. Livingstone he was greatly
+excited.
+
+"'Yes,' said he, 'really and truly that is Monare's likeness. He wore a
+moustache just like that; it is indeed Monare.'
+
+"'Can you really remember Monare?' I asked.
+
+"'Of course I can,' said he. 'Why, it was Monare who brought us the
+salutation we generally use. Before Monare came we used to say, when we
+met a friend on the path, "_Utshohile_" ["You have got up"]. But when
+Monare came he said, "_Lumela_" ["Rejoice"], and we replied, "_E Lumela
+ntate_" ["Yes, rejoice, my father"]. Why, it was he who told the
+Makololo to live in peace, and rule their people well. See how white my
+beard is? Of course I can remember Monare.'"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN
+
+Later Years
+
+
+The work at Macha continued to develop slowly but steadily. There are
+many daily duties which always fall to the lot of the missionary and
+which might be classed under the head of drudgery, which do not seem to
+count, and yet they are as necessary for the advancement of the work as
+the more noticeable ones, and the year 1912 was no exception to this
+rule.
+
+During the rainy season there was also a very anxious time, as Baby Ruth
+became very sick with infantile remittent fever. For over a month she
+was very ill and we were afraid that we might lose her. Day after day
+she lay with her face almost as white as the pillow, except for a bright
+spot on either cheek. The nearest doctor was one hundred and fifty miles
+away, and the station through which two trains weekly ran was thirty-six
+miles distant, so that medical aid seemed impossible, save that given by
+her parents, who anxiously and tenderly ministered unto her; but many
+prayers ascended in her behalf and the Lord had compassion on us and
+restored her to health. This climate is treacherous for grown people,
+but especially so for children.
+
+[Illustration: Macha Mission, 1913.]
+
+We have as yet mentioned nothing in reference to the medical part of the
+work. This was not a prominent feature, yet from the first all who came
+for help received attention and many were cured or permanently helped.
+All kinds of diseases are to be met with in this climate, in addition to
+fever. Skin diseases seem especially prevalent in many forms, some of
+them the most loathsome imaginable; and nearly every village also has
+its quota of from two to four lepers. These lepers freely mingle with
+the rest of the people, no effort whatever being made to segregate them.
+The native will affirm that leprosy is not contagious, it is hereditary,
+and there is reason for this view of the case. It makes the heart ache
+to see women without toes and sometimes without fingers, and full of
+sores, nursing beautiful, innocent babies, when we think what a life is
+before these little ones.
+
+These people also have their own remedies. When one is suffering with
+pain in any part of the body, a very common remedy is to resort to
+cupping. For this purpose they use the horns of animals, usually of
+goats. I once watched one woman cupping another. With a knife or piece
+of sharp tin, she made two incisions in the flesh where the pain was.
+She then placed the large end of the horn on this, and with her mouth on
+the small end she removed all the air from the horn, which soon became
+filled, or nearly so, with blood. Leaving this horn on the place, she in
+a similar manner applied another horn, until three or four had been
+applied at various places. She then carefully removed them, one at a
+time. Since the object had been to extract the blood, it had certainly
+been successful, and in some respects the natives are only half a
+century behind--that is all.
+
+In some diseases they very readily come to us, and sometimes fifteen or
+twenty are present at once, awaiting their turn. At other times we are
+called to the villages to minister to them. Once some natives came from
+the nearest village to say that a woman was dying. Her husband at the
+time was one of the carriers for the brethren on their trip north. We
+hastened over and found her in a little dark hut, where we could see
+nothing, so they were told to carry her out into the light, that we
+might see her. The livid spots, spongy gums, and extreme debility all
+helped to indicate a bad case of scurvy. She was seemingly in the last
+stages, and we were fearful that the call for help had come too late. It
+was a year of great scarcity of food among the natives, and from the
+report she must have been living chiefly on a sort of greens, with no
+salt even to season it. It was now about dark, and they said that if
+something was not done at once she could scarcely live until morning. We
+looked to the Lord for direction and then hastened home to procure the
+needed food, which in this instance was quite simple, salt water, and
+boiled-down grape juice, with a little vinegar. These were used
+carefully during the night, and in the morning she had improved
+sufficiently to eat other food. In a few days she was able to be up, and
+her husband, on the way home, was informed that she had been raised from
+the dead.
+
+As the work advanced, we arranged to use one of the huts for a hospital,
+where those who desired might remain and be treated, and a number
+availed themselves of the opportunity. Both Mr. and Mrs. Taylor were
+quite successful in medical work, and some difficult cases came for
+treatment. In this year Brother Taylor treated some very severe wounds,
+ulcers, cancer, a boy with his hands blown to pieces by gunpowder, a
+native badly lacerated by a leopard, and an European who had
+accidentally shot himself, in addition to other cases. We have also had
+opportunity at other times of ministering to white people.
+
+Whether or not the missionaries have had training in such work in
+civilized countries, the exigencies of their surroundings, far from
+doctors and medical help, necessitate their devoting time and study to
+the cases continually brought before them. Many of them become quite
+proficient in treating diseases; and perhaps some, in time, become by
+practice more skilled in treating diseases of tropical climates than
+some physicians of temperate zones would be, who were unused to tropical
+diseases, even though they might display their sheep-skin to show a
+theoretical knowledge of the science. The safest and best course,
+however, would be to acquire some of the theoretical knowledge before
+coming to Africa, and then be ready for the practice.
+
+It is needless to state that the missionary's practice among the natives
+is not a lucrative one. Medicines are very expensive, and a physician
+must have a diploma from an English medical college before he may charge
+for his professional services in an English colony. Even then his
+heathen patients are not prepared to pay much should he feel to
+charge--which he generally does not. The missionary's labor is one of
+love, and he rejoices that he has the privilege, in a small degree, of
+being a follower of the Great Physician. Aid for the body of the natives
+is one of the best ways of reaching their hearts and souls.
+
+[Illustration: Ruth Taylor.]
+
+During the two weeks' vacation in July some of us concluded to spend the
+time in evangelistic work among the villages. We knew the change to
+outdoor life also would be beneficial to ourselves. There was one
+village, Kabwe, composed chiefly of Baila people, where an interest was
+being manifested, and several there had been attending school. This was
+distant about fourteen miles by wagon road, and we decided to go there,
+David and his wife and the dear little baby, who had come to bless their
+home, accompanying. Word was sent ahead that the people should erect a
+temporary straw hut for them, while I occupied the tent wagon. When we
+reached the place we found everything prepared and in readiness for us,
+and the people also. We received a royal welcome from all and were soon
+comfortably situated. There were fifty huts in this village, and every
+evening after the people had finished their day's work and had eaten
+their suppers, about fifty or sixty of them would come to us, sit around
+our bright log fire, and listen most attentively, while the Word was
+being expounded, and then quietly kneel in prayer, and mingle their
+voices with ours in song. In the morning again, before they went to
+their gardens to dig, they would assemble for services. On Sunday we
+gathered on the side of an ant hill, in the shade of some trees, and
+here a much larger number came for services. Generally during the day
+David would go to the surrounding villages and proclaim Christ.
+
+There were several in this village who occasionally came to Macha on
+Saturday and stayed for Sunday services. One Saturday evening at Macha,
+after the rest of the natives had passed out of the evening worship, two
+women from this place remained for inquiry and prayer. They very humbly
+confessed their past life and said they wished to be Christians. We
+knelt in prayer, and I think I never before heard raw natives pour out
+their hearts in such intelligent and heartfelt petitions as they did,
+and their prayers for pardon were heard. We were pleased to learn, while
+we were at Kabwe, that these women were standing true and being a light
+to the rest.
+
+[Illustration: First Christian Marriages at Macha.]
+
+One evening during the meetings at this place an unusual number of
+natives were gathered around the fire, and the Word was preached by our
+native evangelist with unusual power. A hymn had been sung and prayer
+offered, and the people were told that they could go home. Still they
+sat there without a word being spoken, and they were evidently in deep
+thought. Finally a girl arose, and coming forward weeping said, "I want
+to be a Christian. Will you pray for me?" Before we knelt, a general
+invitation was given to others who desired to accept Christ to come
+forward. This evidently was what they wanted, and at once men, women,
+and girls began to press forward and kneel, and we had a most blessed
+season with them as one after another began to open their hearts to the
+Lord in prayer. It was a melting and breaking-up time. Among the number
+who came was the chief of the village and several other elderly men and
+women. The next morning they again came together. David had gone to
+other villages for the day, but his wife and I held the service. This
+time, as soon as opportunity offered the people began to confess their
+sins and say that they wished to leave their past lives and follow
+Christ. Nor do we have any reason to doubt their sincerity. The world
+about them, peopled with malevolent spirits, seeking to do them harm,
+and their own accusing conscience would naturally drive them to a Savior
+Who can give them rest and peace. Praise God! He can give even these
+older ones freedom from the chains of darkness.
+
+Since we find the younger ones more easily persuaded, I believe we too
+soon become discouraged with the older ones and expect too much of them,
+or too sudden a transformation in their lives. I was pleased by a few
+sentences in Brother Frey's letter under date of April 4, 1914. He says:
+
+"Last Sunday there was a goodly number of the old men present. We have
+sent out word that Brother Steigerwald will have a special message for
+the old on next Sunday, and we are giving a special invitation to all
+the old men to come.... A number of these old men have been coming more
+or less regularly for some time. Will you not join with us that they
+might be saved?"
+
+That is the right spirit, and what Brother Frey is seeking to do at
+Mtyabezi we can all do. The old want to feel that we have a special
+interest in their salvation, and that we are not going to leave them to
+themselves in the struggle; but let us help them to know that there is
+One Who can and will set them free if they will only come. In this
+little meeting at Kabwe even some of the older ones who started are
+still striving to get on the Rock. One middle-aged man and his wife, who
+came forward that night, have finally moved near the mission and built
+them a hut there, so that they might learn more about Jesus. The chief
+very strongly urged our starting a school at that place, which we did
+not long afterwards.
+
+[Illustration: David Moyo and His Wife and Child.]
+
+We remained at this place nine days and then moved to Simeoba's village.
+Although some of the other missionaries had visited this village, I had
+never had the privilege previous to this. It is larger than the rest and
+is made up of three different tribes of people, Batonga, Barotse, and
+Baila, but the language of all is more or less similar. They were
+stranger and more shy than those at Kabwe, and as soon as we reached the
+place, Mankunku and I went through the village to meet and learn to know
+the people. Everywhere we were kindly received. They were greatly
+surprised to see a white woman who could speak their language; and as
+the word was passed along, one after another would come and join the
+number who were conversing. About all were in ordinary native garb, but
+there were two or three who evidently had been down to Bulawayo to work,
+and they prided themselves on their European clothes; especially did one
+of these step about as if lord of the place. Some of the sick asked for
+help and were ministered unto, and we were pleased to learn that some
+were helped. All were invited to assemble around our fire in the evening
+for services, and as soon as their suppers were over they began to
+gather, about one hundred in number, around the bright, blazing fire,
+the shy ones keeping in the background where they could not be seen.
+Many of them no doubt had never been at a service before, while a few
+who had been at school at Macha could help sing. One or two of those
+more pretentiously dressed than the rest evidently had attended meeting
+elsewhere, and were at this meeting self-appointed law-and-order men.
+With such a raw crowd as most of these were, we always try to sing easy
+hymns in which there is a great deal of repetition; we also line the
+hymns before singing and have them repeat after us, so that it was not
+long before nearly all joined in the singing. Kneeling in prayer is so
+new an experience that some of the uninitiated sometimes consider it
+amusing and begin to laugh. In this instance two or three girls caused
+some disturbance while we were in prayer; and we were scarcely on our
+feet when one of the self-constituted policemen jumped over some of the
+others and soundly berated the offenders. Order was then restored and
+the service proceeded without any further interruption, after which the
+meeting closed.
+
+The next morning I was awakened by a woman outside my tent clapping her
+hands and thanking me, saying, "You are my healer." She had been
+afflicted with neuralgia the day before; and on asking for medicine, she
+had been given a cup of very strong hot lemonade, which had cured her.
+
+This day was Sunday, and as the people were again invited to assemble,
+about one hundred and twenty came, and we had an interesting service, to
+an attentive congregation. We then turned our faces homeward, stopping
+on the way at Kabanzi, one of our regular preaching places, and holding
+a service. We reached home that night, ready for school, which was to
+open the next day, and feeling greatly benefited by our outing.
+
+[Illustration: Rev. and Mrs. Kerswell with Native Carriers on a Visit to
+Macha.]
+
+We were all at this time well housed, but there still was need of a good
+store building, as the old ones which had been used for this purpose
+were about all tumbling down. David had already made some brick, so
+after our return he began on the building, with the assistance of some
+of the boys. He erected a very good building 33 x 16 feet, containing
+two small rooms and one large one, with a veranda around it. It was a
+good piece of work and was finished in about two months. The large room
+was for his wife and child.
+
+David had never been satisfied with his education and was still anxious
+to attend school, especially an English school. He had some opportunity
+for private instruction at Macha, and also taught part of the time, but
+generally there were so many duties and responsibilities, both temporal
+and spiritual, resting upon him that he had very little time for study,
+and he felt that he must get away where school work would be his first
+work. We greatly preferred that he remain and continue his labors at
+Macha, but he no doubt realized that the pupils too were progressing,
+and he needed more knowledge if he was to continue as teacher. The
+latter part of September he started for Natal to attend school. We
+receive a good report of him from his teachers. He is said to exert a
+good influence over the other boys in the school, and he is also
+frequently called upon to do evangelistic work among them. Will you not
+join with us that he may be kept humble and not get away from his call
+to give the Gospel beyond the Zambezi?
+
+His wife remains with us to help in the capacity of Bible woman. Their
+little girl is a dear, bright, intelligent child as she grows up amid
+civilized surroundings, and is a good example of what a better
+environment will do for these people.
+
+Sister Taylor had now been away from America nearly eight years and had
+not been to the seashore for a change of climate since coming to
+Interior Africa. She had enjoyed good health nearly all that time and
+had been diligent in season and out of season in the Master's business.
+She was a most useful and resourceful missionary always, but the time
+had come when she was in sore need of a furlough to the homeland.
+Brother Taylor too had not been to the seashore, and it was necessary
+for both of them to leave. They were greatly needed in the work at
+Macha, and we could not see how we could get along without them, but too
+many missionaries on the field have, under the pressure of work and the
+needs about them, remained longer than was expedient, and paid the
+penalty with their lives. In February, 1913, they left Macha for their
+homeward journey.
+
+About two months previous to this Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Wenger had returned
+to Africa, and came to Macha to take the place of the Taylors.
+Unfortunately, however, both of them were stricken down with fever about
+two weeks after reaching the mission station. They remained seven
+months, and during that time there was almost one continual combat with
+fever, especially on the part of Brother Wenger. United with this was
+great nervous disorder and prostration, so that it seemed impossible for
+him to stand the climate. They greatly desired to remain and continue
+the work, but since it seemed impossible for him to endure the climate,
+he wrote to Elder Steigerwald, who finally arranged for them to try
+Johannesburg. We felt sorry, both on Brother Wenger's account and for
+the sake of the work, that they were unable to remain on the field.
+
+During the time of these seemingly necessary changes among the
+missionaries at Macha, the work continued to grow and develop. There was
+no increase in the number of boys, but some of those who had been with
+us were proving helpful as teachers and evangelists among the people.
+The work had been branching out and six schools were started; in some of
+which men, women, boys, and girls were attending. In the early years the
+converts were of those staying at the mission; but since the opening of
+the out-schools the work was spreading much more rapidly, and some of
+the married people, as well as the girls, had accepted Christ and were
+living exemplary lives in their homes. These also attended the
+Inquirers' Class and church services at Macha on Sunday.
+
+[Illustration: Batonga Chiefs, Near Macha Mission.]
+
+There are several services held each week at the mission. Besides the
+daily worship, there is on Sunday morning an Inquirers' Class and a
+Members' Class, both held at the same hour but in different rooms. These
+are held on this day because so many have far to come. Then comes the
+general church service, followed by Sunday-school, for which all remain.
+In the evening there is a song and Scripture service for those staying
+at the mission. Thursday morning early is a midweek service and
+testimony meeting; and on Friday night the Christian natives have their
+prayer meeting, presided over by one of their number, while the
+missionaries have a prayer meeting in English. In addition to these
+there is a monthly prayer day, the first Friday of each month, on
+which day all our out-schools are closed and teachers and many of the
+pupils meet with us.
+
+These were often times of great blessing to all of us, one of which
+especially might be mentioned, the first Friday in May, 1913. On this
+day there were nearly one hundred natives present, consisting of members
+and class members; and eight of our boys who had been south to work for
+a year had just returned home and were present. On such days many of the
+Christians were accustomed to spend the early morning hours out alone in
+secret prayer, before the opening of the meeting. On the above date, as
+we stepped into the church in the morning, we realized that there was
+unusual manifestation of the Spirit's presence among us. Several of the
+boys took part in the opening seasons of prayer in a very impressive
+manner. We read a Scripture lesson and for a short time spoke on
+cleansing and consecration and the infilling of the Spirit, and they
+were unusually attentive, which always helps the speaker. Expectation of
+some kind seemed in the air. The testimony meeting opened with heartfelt
+testimonies. Then one's testimony became a prayer for greater outpouring
+of the Spirit. Again we knelt and he continued in prayer. Suddenly the
+very house seemed shaken, and with one accord all were prostrate before
+the Lord. Some were smitten with a spirit of conviction; others began a
+service of praise, and still others lay low, letting the Lord talk to
+them and fill them with His own Holy Spirit. The united prayers
+continued for two or more hours, and while there was noise of prayer
+and praise there could not be said to be any disorder, as all but one or
+two remained at their places. Many received a deeper understanding and
+experience of Divine things that day. Once Brother and Sister Wenger and
+myself began to sing, but they continued in prayer and we stopped
+singing. There were some present who probably received no benefit. In
+Africa, as in America, there are some at such times who follow the rest
+outwardly at least, but do not seem to be benefited in heart.
+
+The latter part of June Elder Steigerwald came to see about the work at
+Macha. It had been one and one-half years since his last visit, and we
+were glad for the privilege of again welcoming him. With him was Miss
+Elizabeth Engle, who had for six years been a most valued worker at
+Mtyabezi Mission; also Mr. L. B. Steckley, who had two years ago come
+out from Canada as a missionary and was helping in the work at Matopo.
+These two were to take up the work at Macha, while Mr. and Mrs. Wenger
+proceeded to the Transvaal, to occupy the station at Boxburg, thus
+enabling Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Eyster to return home on furlough.
+
+While Elder Steigerwald was with us at this time, eighteen native
+Christians were baptized and received into the Church. Among them were
+several married men, three women, and four girls. Some of these were the
+first fruits of the out-schools. We rejoiced that at last we enjoyed the
+privilege of partaking of the Lord's supper with some dark-skinned
+sisters of the Batonga tribe. It was now nearly seven years since the
+mission had opened in this place, and these were the first native women
+to join with us. The women had also been slow to desire civilized
+clothing, for our desire had been to impress upon them more the inner
+than the outer adornment. They were, however, becoming anxious to be
+clothed, and as many of the boys who had now grown to manhood had
+adopted European clothing, our congregations were quite different in
+appearance from the old days. At this time also two couples were united
+in Christian marriage. These were the first native Christian marriages
+at Macha. Since natives are so often inclined to extremes on the dress
+question, in marriage, we made it a special point to say nothing about
+new clothing for the occasion.
+
+A number of others made application for baptism, but it was thought best
+for some to wait awhile, so six months later Elder Steigerwald came to
+Macha again. This time he was accompanied by his wife and Sister Doner.
+Ten more natives were baptized and there were several candidates who
+could not meet with us at this time. There were also three more couples
+united in Christian marriage. There have been fifty-nine baptized at
+this place, but three or four were not as true as we could have desired.
+One of those who had backslidden was the first boy brought to the
+mission, the son of Macha. He had never been very zealous in the
+Master's service, and yet his life had seemed consistent. The Lord may
+find a way into his heart again.
+
+It frequently happens on the mission field that young boys will come to
+the station, learn, and then leave without any special manifestation
+that the Gospel has entered their hearts, yet an impression has been
+made on their plastic minds, and it often follows and convicts them
+later in life. So the missionary need not be discouraged if the first or
+second invitation fails to bring the native to the foot of the Cross.
+
+We greatly enjoyed the visit of Brother and Sister Steigerwald, and were
+eager for them to see some of the out-schools. We started out for this
+purpose, but were all taken with fever, one after another, and the
+visits had to be abandoned. Sister Doner had come to assist in the work
+at Macha and take charge of the school. She and Brother Freys had just
+returned from a furlough to America, and as I had now been in the work
+nearly nine years and needed a change, she, together, with Sister Engle
+and Brother Steckley, was to take charge here during my furlough. The
+latter two had been at the place some months and were beginning to know
+and understand the people and surroundings. Sister Engle in her capacity
+as nurse was having ample opportunity to care for the sick, who were
+always glad for help. She is always a most capable and willing worker
+wherever needed. Brother Steckley too is a consecrated soldier of the
+Cross and ready for whatever comes to him.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOURTEEN
+
+The Out-Stations
+
+Every place that the sole of your foot shall tread upon, that I have
+given unto you.--Joshua 1: 3.
+
+
+Just as the Lord told Joshua to rise up and take possession of the land
+of Canaan for God and His people, so we believe He is saying to all
+missionaries whom He sends out into the midst of the enemy's country,
+that He has given the people unto them and they should rise and take
+possession in God's name. We often live beneath our privileges in this,
+and our faith so soon becomes weak and wavering. God also says to us,
+"Be strong and of good courage."
+
+There are two objects which seem paramount on the mission field, and
+about which everything else revolves. These are, (1) the salvation of
+souls, and (2) the preparation of natives to become teachers and
+evangelists of their people. Dispense with these fundamental objects and
+one might as well remain at home. Missionaries may differ in regard to
+the best methods of carrying out these purposes, and some may even
+object to the statement just made. With some missionaries, education and
+civilization hold a very prominent place, and with a few missionary work
+spells education and civilization, and we are sorry to say that the
+number who take this view is increasing. The great body of
+missionaries, however, of whatever name, are such from love of souls.
+The aim should be to get the native really saved and on the Rock, Christ
+Jesus, so that he may become a light in his home. At the same time we
+should seek to train him to become a soul-winner among his people, so
+that a knowledge of God may be spread over the country. In this way only
+can the Great Commission be successfully carried out.
+
+In Africa, especially, are teachers needed on the mission field, for
+before the missionary comes there is no written language, much less any
+who can read. To teach the people to read the Word is not only
+desirable, but it is an absolute necessity if it is to be a Light unto
+their feet in that dark land. We do not claim that a native cannot be a
+Christian unless he can read, for some of the older ones live exemplary
+Christian lives, although unable to read the Word; but among the younger
+generation they very seldom become established Christians if they are
+not willing to apply themselves sufficiently to study so that they are
+at least able to read the Word of God understandingly. Then too the
+spread of the Gospel cannot continue unless some are able to read.
+
+I call to mind two able and Spirit-filled missionaries who spent two
+years in self-sacrificing labors among the natives of Africa. They went
+about from place to place, giving the Gospel to the people, and they
+were liked by the people and frequently had many attentive listeners.
+Several years after they returned home one of them wrote, "We spent two
+years in giving the Gospel to the Africans, and yet we cannot point to
+one soul whom we definitely helped." We believe they underestimated the
+value of their work, for they always aimed to labor in harmony with
+other missionaries on the field and would advise natives to go to the
+nearest mission station. Yet the fact remains that unless the younger
+Christian natives attend school and learn to read the Word, and have it
+instilled into their minds from day to day, they are apt to forget and
+wander away.
+
+I have dwelt thus at length on the educational feature of the work,
+because there are many good Christians who fail to understand why so
+much of a missionary's time is occupied in teaching the natives. It is
+simply for the reason that that is the only means they have of learning
+to read the Word of God. Among the natives of Africa there are no
+schools but the mission schools, and the chief purpose of these is to
+teach the natives to read the Word understandingly, so that they may "be
+able to teach others also." On the other hand, since schools are such an
+essential part of the work, there are not wanting those who confuse the
+education thus obtained with religion itself, and think all who become
+able to read are Christians. That is a consummation devoutly to be
+wished by every missionary, but it is no more true in Africa than it is
+in England or America. The fact that it is not true in those civilized
+countries may have much to do with the fact that it is not true in
+Africa.
+
+Since the day-school at Macha never assumed large proportions, and there
+were many children all around us, especially girls, who were not in
+school, it had been the aim from the beginning to train teachers who
+might be placed in the various villages to teach and give the Gospel to
+the people in their homes, and thus multiply the work done by the
+missionaries manyfold. A number of schools had been started in this way.
+In this work it is always necessary to use great care in the selection
+of teachers, that they may be teachers of righteousness as well as
+teachers of books. A boy may be quite apt as a scholar, and so far as is
+known be a moral person, but if he has not yielded himself to Christ as
+his Savior and has not a love for souls in his heart, he often does more
+harm than good as a teacher. In other words, he must be a missionary as
+well as a teacher, and lift up Christ among them. We often send a boy,
+who is prepared, back to his own village as teacher, if we have such a
+one. Mr. Worthington, Secretary for Native Affairs, when informed of
+this said, "I greatly approve of your custom of sending natives back to
+their own home to teach their people. I think it will obviate many
+difficulties in the way of native teachers."
+
+The out-schools are superintended by the missionaries, who if possible
+visit them once a month and advise the teachers in reference to the
+work. If the schools are too far away for the pupils to attend church
+services at the mission, arrangements are made for services to be held
+more or less frequently at the schools. The native teachers also hold
+daily worship and Scripture reading with their schools, and all others
+who desire to attend.
+
+In order that my readers may gain some information in reference to the
+out-schools connected with Macha Mission, you are invited to accompany
+me on a visit to them, such as I made shortly before returning to
+America. Miss E. Engle will accompany me, as she has charge of them
+during my absence. Two of the boys are also going as leader and driver.
+While we are absent on this trip, Apuleni will have charge of the school
+at Macha. He was the second boy to come to the mission, nearly seven
+years before, and has been with us ever since, except for nearly
+eighteen months, when he, with other boys, went away to Salisbury to
+work. He has made good in school, and has accepted Christ as his Savior.
+He says his chief desire is to know the will of God and do it. He is
+well versed in the Scriptures, is a good teacher and helper in
+Sunday-school, and reads, not only his own Tonga language, but also Zulu
+quite readily, and English, and acts as an interpreter from these two
+languages into his own. He is also prepared in the other branches
+taught. As he is our assistant teacher all the time, we know the school
+will not suffer in his hands.
+
+We are going in the large two-seated spring wagon with a white canvas
+top, sent out by the Board two years ago. One of the seats is removed,
+and in the back part of the wagon is placed a box containing food,
+dishes, and the like equipments for our meals. There is also put in a
+large five-gallon can of good drinking water, two folding canvas
+bedsteads, a bundle containing bedding, and a mosquito net, and
+underneath the wagon in a framework is a tent which we have lately
+acquired. There is also a small bag of cornmeal, a tin of ground
+peanuts, some dried greens for the boys, and some whole peanuts for all
+of us. Where the dashboard was originally is now a long box in which are
+placed kettles and cooking utensils. And we do not forget to stow away
+in the box of the seat a quantity of bananas and lemons, of which the
+mission has an abundance; also some fresh vegetables. A small canvas
+bag, in which the drinking water is cooled, hangs on the side of the
+wagon. Four oxen are inspanned and one boy takes hold of the strap in
+front to lead the oxen, and another, with a long, slender pole, to which
+is tied a long, slender leathern lash, drives. He sometimes sits on the
+box in front and sometimes runs along the side.
+
+We remember the times, not so very long ago, when we were not so
+comfortably equipped for traveling as we are at present. We walked many
+weary miles to see the people, and thoroughly enjoyed it too, even
+though the hard earth at times was our bed and the open canopy of heaven
+our tent, and native food in part supplied our needs. Then it was not
+possible to visit as many places in a day as now, and frequently when we
+arrived we were too tired to do justice to the Word. Then also we failed
+to reach many villages, because of the distance. Now it seems almost too
+good to be true that we are so well supplied, for the Lord has again
+wonderfully verified His precious promise, "to do exceeding abundantly
+above all that we ask or think." Praise His Holy Name! Yet we would not,
+if we could, do away with those early days and the blessings attending
+them, and we are better able to appreciate present favors by contrast.
+
+[Illustration: School at Kabanzi Village.]
+
+Usually we endeavor to start not later than sunrise, so that we may
+travel in the cool of the morning; for the sun becomes quite hot in the
+middle of the day, and it is advisable then to be under shelter. At this
+time, November, however, the morning is cloudy, so that we may have
+rain; but the clouds make traveling pleasant and we start. We go north
+and a little east. Where the roads are good the oxen trot off briskly;
+but in many places there are deep ruts, caused by the heavy rains of
+previous years, which make progress slow. In some places the ruts are a
+foot or two in depth, and it is necessary to make a new road along the
+side, for there are no government-built roads in the country.
+
+The grass of the previous year's growth was burnt off in June or July;
+and ever since, as far as the eye could reach, nothing could be seen
+except the great stretch of undulating reddish-brown earth, destitute of
+everything, save here and there little patches of dried grass, which had
+escaped the scorching fires, and scattered trees, almost destitute of
+leaves. There has been no rain for six or seven months; yet spring is
+approaching, and already in the rich valleys may be seen tender blades
+of grass springing up. On the bare brown hills here and there are
+flowers of various kinds, which gladden the eye and relieve the monotony
+of the scene. Where the moisture comes from at this season of the year
+to produce such delicate blossoms is a cause of conjecture. Then too,
+already many of the trees and shrubs are putting forth their tender,
+beautiful green leaves, some of which look as delicate and shining as
+wax; and occasionally one sees a tree or shrub with white, yellow, or
+red blossoms preparatory to putting forth leaves. All these changes we
+note with pleasure as we ride along in the cool, bracing air of the
+early morning.
+
+At one place is to be seen Chikuni stump, which seems almost like a
+stone, and has been a landmark within the memory of the oldest
+inhabitant. The majority of trees which are to be seen on this road are
+hardwood, but very crooked and scrubby looking, no doubt owing to the
+yearly fierce onslaught of fire and also the nature of the soil. Along
+the road is one solitary mahogany; a large, spreading tree this is, but
+not a very good sample of its kind. There is also a large tree known as
+the sausage tree; its immense bean pods, one to two feet in length and a
+foot and over in circumference, reminding one of a great piece of
+sausage. Numerous acacia are to be seen, and as we approach the river,
+five miles from home, we see six large, fine-looking fig trees, their
+rich, dark-green foliage furnishing beautiful shade. Although this is
+the Myeki River, there is no water where we cross, yet the deep,
+bridgeless ravine makes crossing for heavily-laden wagons difficult at
+all seasons, and almost impassable during the rainy seasons. Here is a
+large village, but we proceed two miles further and come to Mianda
+School, where Charlie Sichamba teaches.
+
+This is not a large village, but it is the home of a number of some of
+our best boys; those who have been of greatest assistance in teaching
+and in industrial work. The village has been lately moved, and huts are
+not yet all completed, nor is the schoolhouse finished. We drive near
+and are met by a number of the pupils, for we are always certain of a
+welcome at this place. The rain, which has been threatening, begins to
+come down, and one of the new huts is given to us. Wood is brought and a
+fire is kindled in the center, that we may have breakfast. A mat is
+placed on the nicely-swept floor, and on this the tablecloth is spread
+and the breakfast placed after it is cooked. This consists of corn
+porridge, with milk, bread, butter, eggs, fruit, and coffee if we desire
+it. Muguwe sends us milk, for he always sees that we are furnished with
+fresh milk when we come here. The boys are given another hut in which to
+cook their food. The meal being over, we hand the dishes to one of the
+boys to be washed, while we turn our attention to the school and work
+for which we came.
+
+By this time the rain is beginning to abate, and the pupils, about
+twenty in number, assemble in another hut for school. Today there are
+not quite as many as usual, because there is a wedding in progress. Here
+is Muguwe, a tall, odd-looking native, over thirty years of age, and a
+Christian, and so far as we can learn he is consistent in his life.
+Learning is difficult for him, but he is making progress and is quite
+persevering. His wife for a long time was opposed to his serving the
+Lord, but she is changing, and we trust that she too may accept Christ
+as her Savior. The stepdaughter is also in school and is making progress
+in Divine life. There are several other women and some girls and boys.
+Some of them seem very slow in accepting Christ, but there has
+manifestly been a change in the lives of some, and a number of the old
+women are believers. During the last year of drought, when the people
+of nearly every village were so zealous in their heathen worship for
+rain, this was one of the two who stood true. After school is over, the
+older ones are summoned to join with us in worship, and we take the
+occasion once more to give them a Gospel message, to which they listen
+attentively. Here are Tom's mother, Jim's mother, and Chikaile's mother,
+all of whom seem to believe as far as they have grasped the Truth.
+
+We are especially grieved today, however, because of the wedding which
+is progressing, for we knew nothing about it until we were on the
+journey. The bride is a Christian girl and has had a good experience,
+although she is not yet baptized. She is only about fifteen years old,
+or perhaps a little older, and has been given to an unsaved boy, who,
+however, has no other wife. We inquired of one of the boys if she wished
+to marry him. He looked at us in sort of a pitying manner, as if to say,
+"You should know better than to ask such a question," and replied, "They
+did not ask her." After the service we go up to the hut of the bride,
+and find her not feigning to cry, as some of the brides do, but in
+reality weeping most bitterly. At the sight of us her sobs break forth
+afresh. We try to comfort her, but what can or what dare we say? We
+speak to the mother, who also has confessed Christ, but she is the first
+wife in a line of five. She frankly acknowledges that she preferred to
+give her daughter to a Christian, but was overruled. The brothers too,
+who are Christians, could do nothing, the older relatives having
+arranged the affair. Her father is chief of the village and an
+influential man. He has always been a friend of the mission, but he
+feels that he can manage his own affairs best, and his children are
+taught implicit obedience. We know that remonstrance is useless, and
+from his conversation it is evident that he thinks he has provided
+wisely for his child, because the groom is son of the chief at Kabanzi,
+where one of our schools is located, and the young fellow had even
+attended school for a few days. The affair might be more serious, and we
+hope and pray that in time both may be Christians.
+
+The next school is four miles farther on this road, at Impongo, and the
+teacher there is Singuzu, whose home is at Mianda. He is not so far
+advanced in learning, so he recites to Charlie. He is, however, a
+conscientious and Spirit-filled Christian. He accompanies us to his
+place of teaching. This is a new school, has been in session only about
+three months, and is held out in the open air in the shade of a tree;
+but they are gathering poles to build a hut. The people had asked
+several times for a school, and we finally concluded to give them one.
+The teacher is doing his work faithfully, and progress is being made by
+the pupils in learning to read; but there are some things in connection
+with this school which are making the work very unsatisfactory, and both
+the teacher and ourselves think best to discontinue it. After the
+recitations are finished a service is held with them and they seem
+interested. When the late dinner is over it is decided to go about six
+miles west, to Kabanzi, the next school.
+
+By this time it is somewhat late in the day, but it is hoped that our
+destination may be reached before dark. Singuzu, who is a better driver
+than the one accompanying us, is asked to go along and drive. This road
+is very little traveled and a white man might not be able to find it;
+but the natives accustomed to these trackless wilds do not soon become
+lost. Nearly the entire distance is through the brush, consisting of
+both large trees and short underbrush, so that the journey is more or
+less impeded. We travel along at a fair speed for oxen, as the driver is
+accustomed to dodging trees and shrubs; but darkness overtakes us before
+the village is reached. Progress is now slow, since the veldt from this
+to the village is full of the stumps of trees cut off, native fashion,
+two or three feet above ground, and we are fearful of running into these
+and breaking the wagon. Finally the wagon does become fast and the oxen
+must be unhitched until it is extricated. We again enter the wagon and
+move on. The welcome sight of the village fires shining out amid the
+darkness indicates that the end of the journey is near at hand. As we
+approach, a pack of dogs greet us with their loud barking, and light
+after light shines out through the open doors of the huts, or from the
+courtyard where the men, in the shelter of a semicircle of reeds, sit
+and palaver. There is no more pleasing sight to travelers through
+African wilds than the bright and cheerful blaze of the indispensable
+campfire, which answers for light and heat, for preparing the evening
+meal and warding off the wild animals.
+
+As we reach the village, a number of natives emerge from their huts in
+order to ascertain who these intruders are, coming along the back of
+the village. On seeing their missionaries they gladly offer their
+services to conduct the wagon through the trees and stumps to the
+schoolhouse and teacher's hut. Sister Engle and I conclude not to have
+the tent pitched for the night, but to have our beds placed in the
+large, roomy schoolhouse, which boasts of a good plank door. We have had
+a busy day, for we have visited two schools, held two services, prepared
+our food, and traveled seventeen miles, so we are soon resting on our
+comfortable stretchers.
+
+In the morning breakfast is prepared early, for the school is to begin
+earlier than usual so that we may continue our journey. We, however,
+take time to go over to the village and have a chat with some of the
+older people. This is Kabanzi village, and it has our oldest and best
+school. Before the opening of school services were held here frequently,
+and some were interested, but no one gave indications of wanting to
+follow the Lord until after school opened. Several boys from this place
+were converted while attending school at Macha. The teacher is Jamu, a
+careful, painstaking and faithful Christian. He is greatly interested in
+the spiritual as well as the intellectual advancement of his pupils. He
+carefully reads and explains the Word to them day by day, and he is a
+good evangelist. While in school at Macha he was always one of our best
+workmen in laying brick, sawing and thatching. There are generally about
+fifty pupils enrolled in this school and about thirty-five in daily
+attendance. Twelve have been baptized and nearly all the rest are in the
+Inquirers' Class.
+
+We enter the schoolroom and the pupils march around the building, then
+enter and take their places on the logs extending across the room. All
+kneel and repeat the Lord's prayer, and then teaching begins. A few are
+reading the charts, some are in the first book, a number in the "Bible
+Stories," while a few are reading the Gospels of St. Mark and St.
+Matthew. A number of pupils are married men and women. The women bring
+their babies, and yet with the interruption caused by these, they have
+learned to read well and are in the "Bible Stories." They exhibit
+remarkable perseverance, for they not only attend school, but dig in
+their gardens, carry wood and water, grind their meal, and prepare their
+food. On Sunday they walk nine miles to Macha to church, for they,
+together with their husbands, are Christians, or seeking to be such. The
+teacher says that they started to school first; then their husbands
+followed. The husbands also work in the gardens, build huts, hunt game
+for food, and part of the time work for the white man in order to obtain
+money for taxes and clothes. They have also lately been buying cloth to
+make dresses for their wives, and one day I came upon one of the men
+carefully washing his wife's dress. The Gospel is making them better
+husbands and more careful and considerate of their wives. The heathen
+worship, with its attendant evils, together with vice, beer, tobacco,
+and kindred habits, is being banished from these few homes at least.
+When other villages were worshiping their rainmakers, these too were
+daily worshiping, but it was the Lord of lords Whom they worshiped. When
+the older ones desired to resort to their heathen worship, the
+Christians said, "No; if you do we shall build a kraal of our own." This
+means that there are many in the village who are not Christians, and
+some of them stoutly oppose the school; but the chief is favorable, as
+some of his children are Christians. There are also several old women in
+addition to the pupils who are breaking away from their old worship and
+accepting Christ. There is one _old_ woman here who has come out very
+bright in her Christian experience. She meets with much opposition, but
+she does not waver.
+
+[Illustration: Sikaluwa.]
+
+After we have remained one session of school, some of the older people
+are called and we have a service for very interested listeners. The boys
+then inspan the oxen and we proceed west to Kabwe School, about five or
+six miles distant. These are the people with whom we held a week's
+service over a year before. At this place our tent is pitched and we
+prepare to spend the night. This is a Baila village, and at first
+Sikaluwa had charge of the school, as he was brought up among that tribe
+and is a good Christian boy. He did good work for nearly a year, but he
+did not wish to continue. We were in doubt as to whom we should send to
+teach them; and after praying over the matter we concluded to consult
+the Christians in Members' Meeting, and inquire if anyone felt led of
+the Lord to take up the work there. At the close of the meeting we were
+surprised to have Chikaile come and say that he was willing to undertake
+the work, the Lord helping. He had been at the mission for some years
+and was quite capable of teaching. He is also one of the most cheerful
+and willing workers, but he is so young, perhaps only seventeen years
+of age. Because he is such an earnest and conscientious Christian,
+however, he was given the privilege, and has succeeded beyond our
+highest expectations. The kraal had just been moved and divided, so that
+he was obliged to build a new hut for himself. This he speedily did, and
+then began a schoolhouse which, with a little assistance from the
+villagers, was soon under roof. There is nothing lazy about the boy, and
+the school, as well as the work of the Lord, is progressing in his
+hands. He soon learned to know the people and the kind of lives they are
+leading, and is fearless in exposing sin, although he is always mild and
+humble in his demeanor. With him, as well as with other teachers who do
+not teach in their homes, a boy is sent, so that he need not be alone.
+
+In this school we find twenty-four pupils in attendance, among them two
+elderly women. One of these, the mother of another Christian woman, has
+made a good confession. She entered school and we smiled somewhat
+incredulously, thinking that she was too old to learn; but our next
+visit to the school revealed the fact that she was making decided
+progress, and it seemed evident that she would soon be able to read the
+Gospel. After school was over, services were held and the people invited
+back for night meeting. We then prepared our food. During these visits
+to the villages the people sometimes bring a present of a chicken, a
+dish of peanuts, some milk, or whatever they think we might relish.
+Occasionally, on a hot day, it is a cup of ibwantu. This is a gruel made
+of the meal of native grain into which has been placed crushed root with
+an acid flavor. It is usually made in the evening and consumed the next
+day. It is not alcoholic, and has a very cooling and refreshing taste.
+It will be brought in a large cup, and as is their custom, the donor
+usually takes a sip first to show there is no poison in it.
+
+When this village was moved and divided into three parts, we about gave
+up the thought of opening school again, but the chief was not satisfied,
+and promised that if school was reopened he would see that the children
+came together to learn; so we agreed to send a teacher. Six very nice
+young girls came from Kabwe to stay at Macha and attend school; but
+others entered to fill up the ranks and the work continues.
+
+Early the next morning we start on our homeward way. The road takes us
+back past Kabanzi, and there we turn south toward Macha. On the way we
+come to a place which at first sight might be taken for an old deserted
+native village; but a closer inspection reveals the fact that the huts
+were never finished. Here is the framework of twelve large, nice-looking
+huts. Some have just been rightly started; of some the walls are
+finished, and on others the builders had begun to put on the roof. Poles
+are scattered all around, and some poles are at a distance from the
+huts, but near the road, and look as if those who were carrying them had
+dropped them hastily. The whole has the appearance as if a number of
+people were busily engaged in building a village and were surprised by
+an enemy in the midst of their labors and slain, their work unfinished.
+What does it mean? This question we asked ourselves on first seeing it.
+The answer was this: They were indeed surprised by an enemy, but that
+enemy was death. The headman sickened and died; his son followed.
+Concluding that the place was bewitched, the rest at once abandoned it
+and went elsewhere, leaving all those fine, straight poles to rot.
+
+On the journey homeward we again come to Myeki River, for this is a very
+winding stream, and this crossing is several miles farther west. At this
+place there is another school. We stop near the village, where Mafuta
+the teacher lives, and he, with some of the rest, comes out to meet us.
+We have driven about ten miles this morning and now hastily prepare
+breakfast and eat. Some tall, beautiful bottle palms grow in this
+vicinity, and while we are eating, the teacher brings us the fruit of
+one, a part of which is eaten with relish. We then start off on foot for
+the school, which is about two miles distant, near another village. We
+leave the lead boy to herd the oxen, while the little herdboys of this
+village drive their cattle ahead, so that they may learn in school and
+at the same time watch the cattle.
+
+As we walk along the path, through this somewhat dense forest, let me
+tell you something of this teacher, Mafuta. He is older than the most of
+our boys and was already grown when we reached Macha, seven years ago.
+He at that time worked for us a few months. For over three years,
+however, he showed no inclination to want to learn or be a Christian,
+and seldom came to Church. He was just like the other natives in the
+village and indulged in their sinful and lazy ways. Finally he informed
+one of the boys that he was coming to school until he had sufficient
+money to take a wife. We were quite skeptical when we heard it; for we
+did not expect that he would remain long, and then too school was not a
+money-making place. He came and applied himself to school work. He was
+slow and dull, but he was diligent and made progress.
+
+He entered the Inquirers' Class and the Lord found a way into his heart.
+One day in the class, when a number came forward for special prayer, he
+became in earnest and found what he sought--pardon for his dark past,
+and peace in his soul. As he took his seat his face wore a look of
+new-found joy, and he arose and testified as to what the Lord had done
+for him. In work also he was faithful, and he soon learned to handle the
+oxen in plowing and in the wagon, and thus he received higher wages. By
+close economy he gradually was able to get a little money ahead. In time
+he was baptized. He gained one of the nicest girls in the neighborhood
+as his wife, is married by Christian marriage, and is now teaching this
+school. He is not as quick at learning as some, but he is faithful and
+painstaking and is a living Christian among them. When we look at him
+and think how little faith we had in the early days, we are reminded of
+the words, "The Lord seeth not as man seeth; for man looketh on the
+outward appearance, but God looketh on the heart."
+
+We visit the school and find twenty-four scholars assembled, the
+teacher's wife among the number. It is a new school, but the pupils are
+making advancement. After services we retrace our steps to the waiting
+wagon, and then return to the mission, which is only about four and
+one-half miles distant. We have spent three days out, have visited five
+schools and have traveled thirty-six miles in somewhat of a circle. We
+have enjoyed the trip and the change from the routine of the mission
+station, but a person is glad to reach home, after a few days spent on
+the veldt.
+
+Again we desire to visit Chilumbwe School, which is about seven miles
+northeast. Here the natives were asking for some time for a school. We
+had come to the conclusion, however, that no more schools would be
+opened until the people of the village erect some sort of a schoolhouse.
+They are always ready to promise that they will build, but if a teacher
+is provided before the house is built they generally are slow in
+carrying out their promise. Then too it is not best to make the work too
+easy for them. They appreciate most that which has cost them something.
+The work among them is new, and as the schools are especially for
+children, and money is always scarce, we dare not expect too much at
+present. If they are eager for a teacher they can at least build a
+schoolhut, feed their teacher, buy their own books, and these they are
+expected to do. Even the poorest buy their books, and if they cannot
+bring money they often bring a chicken or grain in pay. The people at
+Chilumbwe finally managed to build their hut and school began a month
+ago.
+
+We again take the wagon and go north as before, but soon turn off toward
+the east. We pass through Chikuni, where formerly there was a large
+village, and over under that large, spreading fig tree Sikaluwa taught
+school. But sickness entered the village; the chiefs wife died, a child
+followed, and then a young man, all in the same village. All these died
+in a similar manner which, from the description given afterwards, must
+have been _spinal meningitis_. They thought it was witchcraft and became
+afraid of one another. So they separated, some going one way, some the
+other. We pass several kraals on the way and finally reach Chilumbwe.
+
+The chief of this village is rich in cattle and is an unusually
+intelligent and well-bred native. Jim is the teacher. Yes, he is that
+short, well-dressed native with the colored glasses on. He is the one
+who lost his eye and is very sensitive on account of the defect; but he
+is a splendid fellow, faithful, humble, and an excellent workman. He is
+moreover a sincere Christian, anxious to know and do the will of his
+Heavenly Father.
+
+As the wagon approaches the schoolhouse we are greeted by the chief and
+a number of the pupils, for they are expecting the visit. It is decided
+to have services first so that the older ones need not remain. The
+pupils, together with some men and women from the village, gather around
+a large shade tree, the chief taking a prominent position. All the
+pupils join lustily in the singing, seemingly anxious to impress upon
+their missionaries that they are progressing in that at least. A service
+is then held, after which the pupils gather in the little schoolhouse
+for school. There are about fifty pupils already enrolled in this
+school, some being from neighboring kraals, and there are over thirty in
+attendance today. They are starting out well, but how many will continue
+remains to be seen. The pupils are all young men and boys, and the
+teacher informs us that they will not allow the women and girls to
+attend school. We cannot force them to let the girls come, nor is it
+wise to attempt it, so we just look to the Lord and wait until He can
+find a way into their hearts. At all the other out-schools the girls
+generally outnumber the boys. This being a new school, nearly all read
+on the charts; only two or three have passed that stage, but we have two
+beginning books along and they are bought. There are no Christians at
+this place, and the one that seems most interested in the Gospel is the
+chief's son. He was badly mauled by a leopard a few months ago, and the
+chief brought him to the mission to be treated. Sister Engle very
+successfully treated his wounds; and while he was with us he came under
+the influence of the Gospel, and we believe he is reaching out for more
+knowledge of his Savior.
+
+All the schools have now been visited. There is a call for a school
+southwest about six miles, and there is a teacher for it; but the people
+have not yet erected a schoolhouse. The villages near have asked for
+schools and have had them; but many have opposed the Gospel and the work
+has not proved a success among them. There are a few in each village who
+are Christians, and some of them are with us and others coming to
+day-school. We are not yet discouraged with these at our doors who have
+been hardening their hearts against the truth. God has yet among them
+some who will come out strong for Him, for we know that His Spirit is
+striving with them and with some it will not strive in vain. It can be
+seen that a knowledge of God is slowly spreading over the country and
+real miracles are being performed in the hearts of some of these
+erstwhile heathen; miracles greater than the raising of Lazarus from the
+dead. Souls are being raised to walk in newness of life and are living
+witnesses to those around them of Christ's power to save to the
+uttermost. _God's love_ has bridged the immense chasm in the lives of
+some between the densest, darkest paganism and the glorious Light of the
+children of men. But we must be patient with the slow ones, for it is
+not always those who are the most ready to accept who are the most
+stable. Some delay long years and finally come out strong and vigorous
+for Christ. Where only rude, coarse heathen songs were heard, anthems of
+praise to God now arise, and daily prayer ascends.
+
+It may be seen that the natives are governed by a number of petty
+chiefs, and that they frequently change the location of their villages.
+This makes the work among the out-schools more difficult; but others are
+calling for schools, and already the past year over 200 children were
+enrolled in the out-schools, in addition to those at Macha; and this
+where only a few years ago the names _school_ and _God_ were not known.
+We are touching only a small spot thus far and see a great wall of
+darkness just beyond; a darkness which we occasionally seek to
+penetrate. Other bodies of missionaries also are laboring in some
+sections of the country, but there is much land ahead yet to be
+possessed, and many natives still in darkness who can say, "No man
+careth for my soul."
+
+The salvation of Africa rests largely upon the native converts, and we
+rejoice for the manner in which some are coming to the help of the
+Lord's cause, and we trust they may ever have the prayers of all who are
+interested in the evangelization of this vast continent. Natives,
+however, cannot do the work alone. There always is need of white workers
+to oversee and direct the work, or it will not advance satisfactorily.
+We believe the Lord desires us to ask largely these latter days, but in
+this instance we shall be modest in our request, and that is, that the
+way be open to start at least one more station of white workers in
+Northern Rhodesia. We believe the Lord is speaking to some hearts to
+open such a work. Is He not speaking to others to give of their prayers
+and money for the work? Many of God's children could pay $200 or $300 a
+year toward the support of a white worker, and others $40 to $50 for a
+native evangelist, and not need to deny themselves any of the comforts
+of life in the doing of it. May God help us to see and appreciate our
+privileges in Christ Jesus.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTEEN
+
+Conclusion
+
+I desire to protest against the unholy thirst for statistics; it is
+perfectly impossible to put into statistics the results of mission
+work.--Lord Selborne, Late High Commissioner for South Africa.
+
+
+In the preceding pages it has been the aim to present some of the work
+done, as it has been our privilege to see it. Much more might be written
+about the progress of the work at Matopo, Mapani, and Mtyabezi Stations,
+for they have a number of excellent out-stations, manned by experienced
+and Spirit-filled natives, and are doing encouraging work; but that
+would be beyond the scope of this little volume. We must leave that for
+the able and efficient missionaries at those places and content
+ourselves with a summary of the work.
+
+But first we desire to refer to the work at Johannesburg, for during the
+last few years some of our missionaries there have been laboring in
+connection with our Mission Board. Over four years ago Mr. and Mrs.
+Isaac Lehman severed their connection with the other missionary bodies
+and began building up a separate work, and a little later began laboring
+under the auspices of the Church. They began the new work under
+difficulties, but they are persevering and hard workers, both in
+temporal and spiritual lines, and the work shows excellent results from
+their consecrated labors. Brother Lehman has worked hard to put up
+suitable buildings, and their station is now equipped with a good house
+and church. As I have not had the privilege of visiting that place since
+the opening of their new work, they were asked to give a statement of
+what is being done. This they did under date of August, 1914, as
+follows:
+
+     Our main or central station is at the City Deep Mine, where we
+     reside. The Compound only a short distance from the mission at this
+     place has over 4,000 native laborers in it at one time. This is a
+     very promising mine, and has just lately been opened, and has an
+     apparently long life before it under normal conditions. It will in
+     time employ many more men as it keeps enlarging. We have open doors
+     to this vast multitude of men coming from all parts of South
+     Africa. There are many tribes represented and we can preach the
+     Gospel to them; and we praise the Lord that some have been saved
+     and are seeking to know more of the Lord Jesus Christ.
+
+     We have four other mission stations besides this central station.
+     One is Florida Mission, where there is a nice number of baptized
+     members and we believe a good work is being done. At the Goch
+     Station the Lord has given some blessings and some souls have been
+     added to the Church. At that place the mine has given us permission
+     to apply to the government for a mission site, and the native
+     brethren have already contributed a nice sum of money to put up a
+     suitable church building. Praise the Lord! At the consolidated
+     Langlaagte there is a good work going on; a number have been saved
+     and united with the Church. We have had some blessed seasons at
+     this place owned of God. The Bantjes has had its share of tests,
+     but we praise God that souls have also, at this place, been added
+     to the Church, and the work is progressing.
+
+     From all the stations, one main and four out-stations, fifty-seven
+     souls have been baptized. We praise God for
+     all these, and for a number who have heard God's call to them to
+     give themselves to Jesus to work for Him and labor for the
+     salvation of their own people through Jesus' precious blood. Thank
+     God there is power in the blood to save any and all who will come.
+     There are a goodly number who are soon ready for baptism, and we
+     are trying to do all we can to get them fully established in the
+     deep truth of the Bible, a full and complete salvation, pardon
+     cleansing, and the filling of the Holy Ghost. Some have taken a
+     very bold stand for God, and are now preparing themselves for the
+     Lord's work. Our desire and prayer is that we get a band of really
+     consecrated, sanctified, Spirit-filled ones, who are willing to
+     suffer the loss of all things for Jesus, and be made a living power
+     to go out among their own people and help win them for Jesus.
+
+     Dear reader, will you pray with us for all these who are yet without
+     the True Light, that they will soon have the privilege of hearing the
+     glad news which is to all and for all? We have very good meetings in
+     the large hospitals, where are many afflicted and dying. This is a
+     good opportunity to give them the Word of God.
+
+                                               Isaac and Alice Lehman.
+
+[Illustration: Brethren in Christ Cottage and Chapel at Johannesburg.]
+
+Mr. and Mrs. Jesse Eyster have also been laboring in Johannesburg and
+have been valiant and consecrated messengers of the Cross. For several
+years they had charge of the Training School for Native Evangelists near
+Johannesburg, in connection with the Compound's Mission under Mr. A. W.
+Baker. They have always been members of the Brethren's Church and
+several years ago concluded to sever their connection with the other
+mission and also labor in connection with our Mission Board. They
+secured a good opening at Boxburg, and with much self-sacrificing labor
+built house and church and opened an encouraging work. Souls were saved
+and some added to the Church. Then the labor troubles in Johannesburg
+caused the mines in the vicinity to close down and the work was checked.
+We trust, however, that it is only a temporary check and that the work
+may move on under the blessing of God.
+
+Nothing has yet been written about the last station opened, and this
+would be incomplete without reference being made to it. I refer to the
+one at Mandamabge, near Selukwe, Southern Rhodesia. Mr. and Mrs. Levi
+Doner had been stationed for several years at Mapani Mission and had
+done most excellent work there in the Master's cause. They, however,
+thought that that station was near enough to Matopo and Mtyabezi
+Missions and it could be left in charge of the native teacher,
+Nyamazana, so that they might be free to open another work in new
+territory. For this purpose Brother Doner, accompanied by Brother Frey,
+made an extensive tour among the natives, and he finally decided to
+locate at the above-named place, over 200 miles by wagon road from
+Matopo Mission.
+
+In the latter part of August, 1911, Brother and Sister Doner, together
+with Brother Steckley and Sister Book, started for this place, and
+opened a work with every prospect of success. There were many natives
+surrounding them, who at once showed an interest in the work. They were
+there only about two months, however, before Brother Doner became sick
+and was called to lay down his life in the undertaking. From the time he
+had set foot on African soil, over ten years before, he had entered
+heart and soul into the work of the Lord and had labored continually
+with the exception of over a year's furlough in America. No labor was
+too arduous, no distance too great, no hardship feared, if thereby he
+might carry the Gospel to the people. Many long journeys he made by
+foot, by bicycle, by wagon, in exploring the country and in preaching
+the Gospel. Perhaps he was overzealous in the work at times, and if he
+had spared his strength more he might be still with us. Who knows? He
+gave the Gospel to many natives and helped many into the light. He
+certainly laid down his life in behalf of the Africans. While his body
+rests out in the wilds, far from other white people, we believe he is
+already enjoying some of the fruit of his labors.
+
+Sister Sallie Doner, his wife, was obliged at that time to return to
+America on furlough. On account of some difficulty arising in reference
+to the location of the mission, it was finally decided to abandon the
+place. Sister Doner and Brother Steckley are now ably laboring in the
+interests of the work at Macha, and Sister Book at Mtyabezi.
+
+There are now in connection with the African work twenty-one white
+missionaries, including those who are home on furlough, and thirty
+native teachers and evangelists. There have been over 300 natives
+baptized, and there are more than that number in the Inquirers' Classes.
+As the various out-schools are just being properly launched, the work
+may be expected to bear fruitage in geometrical ratio. Take for instance
+last year, 1913; there were 109 additions to the Church at the various
+missions. These figures are not large, and they indicate only a small
+proportion of the work really accomplished by the missionaries. As
+Brother Steigerwald says: "Now that the leaven has been put into the
+meal no one can stop it from expanding." Praise God for that!
+
+We desire to express our appreciation of the English Government in
+aiding mission work and in making it possible for missionaries to labor
+unmolested in their colonies; also in suppressing many customs harmful
+to the natives, and which hinder the progress of the work. We rejoice
+also to know that the government, as well as the better class of the
+general public, as they become more familiar with the work and aims of
+the missionary are realizing the benefit to the country and are showing
+their appreciation of the same.
+
+The Church has come up nobly to the help of the Lord's work, both by
+their prayers and means, so that all have been generously supported and
+all the stations of white workers have good, substantial brick houses
+and churches, and the workers have been well cared for. May the Lord
+abundantly reward the donors and the Foreign Mission Board, who have
+given the work their undivided support.
+
+We rejoice that a beginning has been made, but it is only a beginning.
+Only a very small portion of the great continent of Africa is covered by
+these pages, and that only imperfectly covered. The Lord has
+condescended to bless the work ever since its inception. It has never
+gone by leaps and bounds, but what was done has been solid and we hope
+lasting. We rejoice that we have been permitted to see natives emerge
+from the dense darkness of heathendom--how dark that is none but those
+who have lived among them can realize--and become beacon lights in
+their neighborhood, living witnesses of the truth that the Gospel of
+Christ "is the power of God unto salvation to every one that believeth,"
+to the pagan African as well as to the enlightened European or American.
+
+Many a time people have said to me, "The people in Africa are more eager
+to become Christians than those in America, are they not?" It seems to
+me that there is little difference in the people; if there is any
+difference in the results it is because of the difference in the methods
+employed. The missionary, as he goes to his field of labor, is after
+souls. That is his business; it is not a side issue. It is his business
+and he makes a business of it and uses business methods. He must begin
+at the bottom and learn to know his people and enter as far as he is
+able into their surroundings and their lives. He makes a study of them.
+He knows from experience that the salvation of these precious ones has
+meant much travail of soul and deaths oft. He knows that some one has
+"filled up that which is behind of the afflictions of Christ," in behalf
+of this part of the body of Christ. He knows they have been followed
+with anxious, solicitous eyes from the very first when they were infants
+in Christ, puny perhaps, and his heart was made glad, but with exceeding
+trembling lest the many pitfalls should entrap them before their eyes
+were really open to see or understand the danger. He knows some one has
+shed many bitter tears over the stumbling of some of these babies. He
+may now rejoice to see some grown to manhood, as it were, in Christ and
+being divinely used of Him in saving others.
+
+[Illustration: Mr. and Mrs. Isaac O. Lehman and Family and Some of Our
+Workers, Members and Enquirers. Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 Are
+Satisfactorily Engaged in Work and in Preparation for the Work as
+Evangelists.]
+
+The true missionary keeps at it. It is his central thought day after day
+as he teaches these dirty, careless ones about him to become cleanly and
+do their work properly, how he can lead them on to desire a clean life
+and seek for it. His last thought and prayer at night, as he lays his
+head on the pillow, is for guidance as to how to win these precious
+souls, and sometimes he is led, like his Master, to spend much of the
+night in prayer.
+
+Some people, looking on from a distance, think there is a great deal of
+romance connected with mission work; that it is full of striking
+incidents and delightful adventures, and that it is a grand opportunity
+to see something of the world. On my first furlough home, ten years ago,
+a little niece gave a glowing account of a friend of her mother, and of
+the countries that friend had visited. In conclusion the child naively
+added, "She has traveled almost as much as a missionary." This child
+unwittingly voiced the opinion of many a grownup; for to some would-be
+missionaries the prospect of foreign travel occupies a large space in
+their field of vision, but to the genuine missionary foreign travel is
+but incidental to mission life; it is the bridge over which he passes to
+some obscure corner of the earth where he is hid away from the world's
+gaze and surrounded by an entirely different class of people, of strange
+language and uncouth ways, often repulsive to the natural eye and to
+refined tastes. For months he may never see a white face, save those of
+his colleagues. He does not go with the expectation of finding a house
+already made to order and everything else he needs, but he is ready to
+go into the wilds, if needs be, and make a home for himself. He does
+not go just because he is willing to do certain things in the mission
+field; but he is willing and ready to do whatever he finds to do, and to
+go wherever the Lord tells him to go, and to stay as long as the Lord
+bids him stay.
+
+There is, however, a fascination about mission work, as every one who is
+in the field will testify. Furloughs are taken because it is an absolute
+necessity for the missionary to go away for a time from the unhealthy
+climate and from the absorbing labors which sap the very vitality. But,
+when he is in his native land, the missionary feels that he is out of
+his element. He is out of touch with the business and interests which
+seem to engross the heart and soul of every one about him; and he is
+homesick to be back again to his field of labor and to see those dear
+dark faces. He feels that there is only one thing worth living for, and
+that is to lift up Christ among the heathen so that He may draw all men
+unto Himself. He feels that the time is short and that the "King's
+business requires haste," and that our Lord's return is imminent.
+
+Again, as long as a person thinks he is making a _great sacrifice_ in
+leaving home, friends, and his business, and going as the Lord's
+messenger among the benighted of earth, he would better remain at home.
+If he is really God-called, the day will come when he will realize
+something of the inestimable privilege of being His ambassador to
+nations in darkness without any knowledge of the Light of Life. All
+earthly things will be lost sight of and his heart will burn within him
+to lift up Christ among the heathen. He will gladly go through
+anything, that the blessed Gospel may be proclaimed to the ends of the
+earth.
+
+Some one may inquire, "What should I study to prepare me for the mission
+field?" A careful study of these pages will, we think, answer that
+question. But to sum it up we would say, anything, everything you can,
+both in school and out; one never knows until he reaches the field what
+he may meet with. The Bible of course, first, last, and always, and all
+the knowledge with it one can acquire; then too temporal work of various
+kinds, medicine, nursing, hygiene, farming, building, teaching,
+housekeeping, and mission methods. If one has acquired a fair knowledge
+of these and thinks he is well prepared, then let him be humble enough
+to acknowledge that he knows only the A B C's of mission work; and that
+when he has reached his field of labor, the Lord, and perhaps some of
+His messengers already in the field, will help him to put together into
+words the letters he has learned, and he may add to it day by day as the
+occasion may require. If one has this humility and willingness to adapt
+himself to the work, after reaching the field, it will supply much of
+his lack of knowledge along some lines.
+
+My object in writing thus plainly is not to frighten any one of God's
+children from the work of the Lord; but rather to help each one
+carefully to count the cost, and to disabuse anyone's mind of false
+notions of mission work. Judging from the stability and perseverance of
+those already connected with the work, we have reasons to believe that
+all did count the cost; but the work is only begun, and we trust many
+more will come to swell the ranks and push on the work into the darker
+regions.
+
+It has been a little over a century since the first missionaries began
+their work along the coast of South Africa; but it is only within the
+last half century that there has been much visible fruit of the work
+done. Even then the missionary labors have been chiefly along the coast
+of the continent and along the navigable rivers which are the natural
+highways into the interior. Much of Central Africa is still unpossessed.
+In the report of the last Great Missionary Conference it was estimated
+that there are ninety millions of the population of Africa as yet
+untouched by the Gospel. Stupendous figures, indeed, to say nothing of
+the many millions whose knowledge of the Gospel is as yet very
+superficial!
+
+We have already mentioned some of the difficulties in the way of
+reaching the people; the great expanse of country to be traversed, the
+deadliness of the climate, and the high cost of living, which in Africa
+exceeds that of any other country. Again, the many languages and
+dialects, 823 in number, together with the illiteracy of the people, are
+a serious handicap; but with God "all things are possible."
+
+The present generation is beholding wonderful strides in opening the
+vast continent to commerce and civilization, and above all to
+Christianity. Railroads are rapidly being built all over the country,
+uniting the interior with the coast. At the present rate it probably
+will be a matter of only a very few years until Cape Town will be
+connected to Cairo by steam through the center of the continent. This
+central railway is soon to be linked with Benguella, on the west coast,
+which will form a more direct route into the interior. Twenty years ago
+Rhodesia had no railroads; in fact, it can scarcely be said there was a
+Rhodesia; for it was only in its formative period. Now it has 1,466
+miles of railway owned and operated by the government, with an
+additional 204 miles extending to the seaport, Beira, on the east coast.
+These are only a portion of what has been built in the country. North,
+south, east, and west other lines have been built.
+
+[Illustration: Boxburg Mission Station. Built by Mr. Jesse Eyster.]
+
+When one considers the vast amount of labor required, and the all-but
+insurmountable difficulties to be overcome in railroad building in
+Africa, the work already accomplished is little less than miraculous.
+The Lord raised up men of large hearts as well as large means, to
+finance much of this. All the building material has to be carried long
+distances, and many of the ties and telegraph poles are of iron on
+account of the destructive white ants. The traveler can now take the
+train at Cape Town and travel to the border of Congo State, a distance
+by rail of 2,140 miles, for $75, second class. He can have a comfortable
+compartment, furnished with all modern conveniences, and obtain his
+meals on the train at a very moderate cost. Freight rates are still high
+on account of the immense distance to be traversed and the small amount
+of goods required to supply Central Africa.
+
+The railroads are fast changing conditions, helping to solve the
+question of gaining access to the people, and providing good homes and
+wholesome food for the missionaries. There are, however, many millions
+yet outside the railroad belt who are in need of the Gospel; but even
+these can be reached with much less difficulty than formerly.
+
+The language question too is rapidly being solved, and great praise is
+due the noble army of men and women who have labored long and hard to
+reduce to writing the seemingly meaningless jargon which first greets
+their ears in going among the natives. Many languages have been reduced
+to writing by the missionaries, and the Scriptures have been translated
+into them. Grammars, dictionaries, and textbooks of various kinds have
+been written. This work, together with the various schools and the
+united labors of the missionaries, is aiding in reducing the number of
+languages. There are, however, many tribes which are yet without
+missionaries and without the Gospel in their language, and they are
+waiting for some one to say, "Here am I, send me." This is a task worthy
+of the greatest minds of the age; to reduce to writing an African
+language and to translate into it the Gospel which tells of GOD'S LOVE
+THROUGH JESUS CHRIST, to those downtrodden, hag-ridden, demon-worshiping
+souls.
+
+The time is opportune for spreading the Gospel in Africa; and if every
+child of God were willing to do his part or her part in the work, the
+present generation could see it carried to all tribes.
+
+None of the difficulties in the way are insurmountable. When, the "Great
+Commission" was given it was backed up by the indisputable assertion,
+"ALL POWER IS GIVEN UNTO ME IN HEAVEN AND IN EARTH. GO YE THEREFORE, ...
+LO, I AM WITH YOU ALWAY, EVEN UNTO THE END OF THE WORLD. AMEN."
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+Transcriber's Notes: Punctuation has been normalized. Obvious printer
+errors have been corrected. Both spellings of gray/grey appear.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of South and South Central Africa, by
+H. Frances Davidson
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK SOUTH AND SOUTH CENTRAL AFRICA ***
+
+***** This file should be named 37728.txt or 37728.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/7/7/2/37728/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Julia Neufeld and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/37728.zip b/37728.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f21743f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/37728.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53a1cbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #37728 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/37728)